Protection of Environment

Title 40—Protection of
Environment
(This book contains part 60, appendices)
Part
CHAPTER I—Environmental Protection Agency (Continued) 60

cprice-sewell on DSK2BSOYB1PROD with CFR
VerDate Nov<24>2008 14:47 Aug 31, 2009 Jkt 217149 PO 00000 Frm 00011 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\217149.XXX 217149
CHAPTER I—ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
AGENCY (CONTINUED)
EDITORIAL NOTE: Nomenclature changes to chapter I appear at 65 FR 47324, 47325, Aug. 2,

2000.
SUBCHAPTER C—AIR PROGRAMS (CONTINUED)
Part Page
60 Appendix A to part 60—Test methods ..................... 5
SUBCHAPTER C—AIR PROGRAMS (CONTINUED)
PART 60—STANDARDS OF PER- Method 2D—Measurement of gas volume flow

rates in small pipes and ducts
FORMANCE FOR NEW STA- Method 2E—Determination of landfill gas
TIONARY SOURCES (CONTIN- production flow rate
UED) Method 2F—Determination of Stack Gas Ve-
locity and Volumetric Flow Rate With
Three-Dimensional Probes
APPENDIX A–1 TO PART 60—TEST METHODS 1 The test methods in this appendix are re-
THROUGH 2F ferred to in § 60.8 (Performance Tests) and
APPENDIX A–2 TO PART 60—TEST METHODS 2G § 60.11 (Compliance With Standards and
THROUGH 3C Maintenance Requirements) of 40 CFR part
APPENDIX A–3 TO PART 60—TEST METHODS 4 60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific
THROUGH 5I uses of these test methods are described in
APPENDIX A–4 TO PART 60—TEST METHODS 6 the standards of performance contained in
THROUGH 10B the subparts, beginning with Subpart D.
APPENDIX A–5 TO PART 60—TEST METHODS 11 Within each standard of performance, a
THROUGH 15A section title ‘‘Test Methods and Procedures’’
APPENDIX A–6 TO PART 60—TEST METHODS 16 is provided to: (1) Identify the test methods
THROUGH 18
to be used as reference methods to the facil-
APPENDIX A–7 TO PART 60—TEST METHODS 19 ity subject to the respective standard and (2)
THROUGH 25E
identify any special instructions or condi-
APPENDIX A–8 TO PART 60—TEST METHODS 26 tions to be followed when applying a method
THROUGH 29
to the respective facility. Such instructions
APPENDIX B TO PART 60—PERFORMANCE SPEC-
(for example, establish sampling rates, vol-
IFICATIONS
umes, or temperatures) are to be used either
APPENDIX C TO PART 60—DETERMINATION OF
in addition to, or as a substitute for proce-
EMMISSION RATE CHANGE
dures in a test method. Similarly, for
APPENDIX D TO PART 60—REQUIRED EMISSION
sources subject to emission monitoring re-
INVENTORY INFORMATION
quirements, specific instructions pertaining
APPENDIX E TO PART 60 [RESERVED]
APPENDIX F TO PART 60—QUALITY ASSURANCE to any use of a test method as a reference
PROCEDURES method are provided in the subpart or in Ap-
APPENDIX G TO PART 60—PROVISIONS FOR AN pendix B.
ALTERNATIVE METHOD OF DEMONSTRATING Inclusion of methods in this appendix is
COMPLIANCE WITH 40 CFR 60.43 FOR THE not intended as an endorsement or denial of
NEWTON POWER STATION OF CENTRAL ILLI- their applicability to sources that are not
NOIS PUBLIC SERVICE COMPANY
subject to standards of performance. The
APPENDIX H TO PART 60 [RESERVED] methods are potentially applicable to other
APPENDIX I TO PART 60—REMOVABLE LABEL sources; however, applicability should be
AND OWNER’S MANUAL confirmed by careful and appropriate evalua-
tion of the conditions prevalent at such
AUTHORITY: 42 U.S.C. 7401–7601. sources.
SOURCE: 36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971, unless The approach followed in the formulation
otherwise noted. of the test methods involves specifications
for equipment, procedures, and performance.
APPENDIX A–1 TO PART 60—TEST In concept, a performance specification ap-
METHODS 1 THROUGH 2F proach would be preferable in all methods
because this allows the greatest flexibility
Method 1—Sample and velocity traverses for to the user. In practice, however, this ap-
stationary sources proach is impractical in most cases because
Method 1A—Sample and velocity traverses performance specifications cannot be estab-
for stationary sources with small stacks or lished. Most of the methods described herein,
ducts therefore, involve specific equipment speci-
Method 2—Determination of stack gas veloc- fications and procedures, and only a few
ity and volumetric flow rate (Type S pitot methods in this appendix rely on perform-
tube) ance criteria.
Method 2A—Direct measurement of gas vol- Minor changes in the test methods should
ume through pipes and small ducts not necessarily affect the validity of the re-
Method 2B—Determination of exhaust gas sults and it is recognized that alternative
volume flow rate from gasoline vapor in- and equivalent methods exist. Section 60.8
cinerators provides authority for the Administrator to
Method 2C—Determination of gas velocity specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2)
and volumetric flow rate in small stacks or alternative methods, and (3) minor changes
ducts (standard pitot tube) in the methodology of the test methods. It
Pt. 60, App. A–1, Meth. 1 40 CFR Ch. I (7–1–09 Edition)
should be clearly understood that unless oth- duct is the only parameter quantitatively
erwise identified all such methods and measured in the simplified procedure.
changes must have prior approval of the Ad- 1.2 Applicability. This method is applica-
ministrator. An owner employing such meth- ble to gas streams flowing in ducts, stacks,
ods or deviations from the test methods and flues. This method cannot be used when:
without obtaining prior approval does so at (1) the flow is cyclonic or swirling; or (2) a
the risk of subsequent disapproval and re- stack is smaller than 0.30 meter (12 in.) in di-
testing with approved methods. ameter, or 0.071 m2 (113 in.2) in cross-sec-
Within the test methods, certain specific tional area. The simplified procedure cannot
equipment or procedures are recognized as be used when the measurement site is less
being acceptable or potentially acceptable than two stack or duct diameters down-
and are specifically identified in the meth- stream or less than a half diameter upstream
ods. The items identified as acceptable op- from a flow disturbance.
tions may be used without approval but 1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to
must be identified in the test report. The po- the requirements of this method will en-
tentially approvable options are cited as hance the quality of the data obtained from
‘‘subject to the approval of the Adminis- air pollutant sampling methods.
trator’’ or as ‘‘or equivalent.’’ Such poten- NOTE: The requirements of this method
tially approvable techniques or alternatives must be considered before construction of a
may be used at the discretion of the owner new facility from which emissions are to be
without prior approval. However, detailed measured; failure to do so may require subse-
descriptions for applying these potentially quent alterations to the stack or deviation
approvable techniques or alternatives are from the standard procedure. Cases involving
not provided in the test methods. Also, the variants are subject to approval by the Ad-
potentially approvable options are not nec- ministrator.
essarily acceptable in all applications.
Therefore, an owner electing to use such po- 2.0 Summary of Method
tentially approvable techniques or alter-
2.1 This method is designed to aid in the
natives is responsible for: (1) assuring that
representative measurement of pollutant
the techniques or alternatives are in fact ap-
emissions and/or total volumetric flow rate
plicable and are properly executed; (2) in-
from a stationary source. A measurement
cluding a written description of the alter-
site where the effluent stream is flowing in a
native method in the test report (the written
known direction is selected, and the cross-
method must be clear and must be capable of
section of the stack is divided into a number
being performed without additional instruc-
of equal areas. Traverse points are then lo-
tion, and the degree of detail should be simi-
cated within each of these equal areas.
lar to the detail contained in the test meth-
ods); and (3) providing any rationale or sup- 3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
porting data necessary to show the validity
of the alternative in the particular applica- 4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
tion. Failure to meet these requirements can
result in the Administrator’s disapproval of 5.0 Safety
the alternative. 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
METHOD 1—SAMPLE AND VELOCITY TRAVERSES ment. This test method may not address all
FOR STATIONARY SOURCES
of the safety problems associated with its
NOTE: This method does not include all of use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- test method to establish appropriate safety
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essen- and health practices and determine the ap-
tial to its performance. Some material is in- plicability of regulatory limitations prior to
corporated by reference from other methods performing this test method.
in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable re-
sults, persons using this method should have 6.0 Equipment and Supplies.
a thorough knowledge of at least the fol- 6.1 Apparatus. The apparatus described
lowing additional test method: Method 2. below is required only when utilizing the al-
ternative site selection procedure described
1.0 Scope and Application
in Section 11.5 of this method.
1.1 Measured Parameters. The purpose of 6.1.1 Directional Probe. Any directional
the method is to provide guidance for the se- probe, such as United Sensor Type DA Three-
lection of sampling ports and traverse points Dimensional Directional Probe, capable of
at which sampling for air pollutants will be measuring both the pitch and yaw angles of
performed pursuant to regulations set forth gas flows is acceptable. Before using the
in this part. Two procedures are presented: a probe, assign an identification number to the
simplified procedure, and an alternative pro- directional probe, and permanently mark or
cedure (see Section 11.5). The magnitude of engrave the number on the body of the
cyclonic flow of effluent gas in a stack or probe. The pressure holes of directional
Environmental Protection Agency Pt. 60, App. A–1, Meth. 1
probes are susceptible to plugging when used and downstream disturbances, and divide
in particulate-laden gas streams. Therefore, each distance by the stack diameter or
a procedure for cleaning the pressure holes equivalent diameter, to determine the dis-
by ‘‘back-purging’’ with pressurized air is re- tance in terms of the number of duct diame-
quired. ters. Then, determine from Figure 1–1 the
6.1.2 Differential Pressure Gauges. In- minimum number of traverse points that
clined manometers, U-tube manometers, or corresponds: (1) to the number of duct diame-
other differential pressure gauges (e.g., ters upstream; and (2) to the number of di-
magnehelic gauges) that meet the specifica- ameters downstream. Select the higher of
tions described in Method 2, Section 6.2. the two minimum numbers of traverse
NOTE: If the differential pressure gauge points, or a greater value, so that for cir-
produces both negative and positive read- cular stacks the number is a multiple of 4,
ings, then both negative and positive pres- and for rectangular stacks, the number is
sure readings shall be calibrated at a min- one of those shown in Table 1–1.
imum of three points as specified in Method 11.2.2 Velocity (Non-Particulate) Tra-
2, Section 6.2. verses. When velocity or volumetric flow
rate is to be determined (but not particulate
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved] matter), the same procedure as that used for
particulate traverses (Section 11.2.1) is fol-
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, lowed, except that Figure 1–2 may be used in-
and Transport [Reserved] stead of Figure 1–1.
11.3 Cross-Sectional Layout and Location
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
of Traverse Points.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization 11.3.1 Circular Stacks.
[Reserved] 11.3.1.1 Locate the traverse points on two
perpendicular diameters according to Table
11.0 Procedure 1–2 and the example shown in Figure 1–3. Any
equation (see examples in References 2 and 3
11.1 Selection of Measurement Site. in Section 16.0) that gives the same values as
11.1.1 Sampling and/or velocity measure-
those in Table 1–2 may be used in lieu of
ments are performed at a site located at
Table 1–2.
least eight stack or duct diameters down- 11.3.1.2 For particulate traverses, one of
stream and two diameters upstream from the diameters must coincide with the plane
any flow disturbance such as a bend, expan- containing the greatest expected concentra-
sion, or contraction in the stack, or from a tion variation (e.g., after bends); one diame-
visible flame. If necessary, an alternative lo- ter shall be congruent to the direction of the
cation may be selected, at a position at least bend. This requirement becomes less critical
two stack or duct diameters downstream and as the distance from the disturbance in-
a half diameter upstream from any flow dis- creases; therefore, other diameter locations
turbance. may be used, subject to the approval of the
11.1.2 An alternative procedure is avail- Administrator.
able for determining the acceptability of a 11.3.1.3 In addition, for elliptical stacks
measurement location not meeting the cri- having unequal perpendicular diameters,
teria above. This procedure described in Sec- separate traverse points shall be calculated
tion 11.5 allows for the determination of gas and located along each diameter. To deter-
flow angles at the sampling points and com- mine the cross-sectional area of the ellip-
parison of the measured results with accept- tical stack, use the following equation:
ability criteria.
11.2 Determining the Number of Traverse Square Area=D1 × D2 × 0.7854
Points. Where: D1=Stack diameter 1
11.2.1 Particulate Traverses. D2=Stack diameter 2
11.2.1.1 When the eight- and two-diameter 11.3.1.4 In addition, for stacks having di-
criterion can be met, the minimum number ameters greater than 0.61 m (24 in.), no tra-
of traverse points shall be: (1) twelve, for cir- verse points shall be within 2.5 centimeters
cular or rectangular stacks with diameters (1.00 in.) of the stack walls; and for stack di-
(or equivalent diameters) greater than 0.61 ameters equal to or less than 0.61 m (24 in.),
meter (24 in.); (2) eight, for circular stacks no traverse points shall be located within 1.3
with diameters between 0.30 and 0.61 meter cm (0.50 in.) of the stack walls. To meet
(12 and 24 in.); and (3) nine, for rectangular these criteria, observe the procedures given
stacks with equivalent diameters between below.
0.30 and 0.61 meter (12 and 24 in.). 11.3.2 Stacks With Diameters Greater
11.2.1.2 When the eight- and two-diameter Than 0.61 m (24 in.).
criterion cannot be met, the minimum num- 11.3.2.1 When any of the traverse points as
ber of traverse points is determined from located in Section 11.3.1 fall within 2.5 cm
Figure 1–1. Before referring to the figure, (1.0 in.) of the stack walls, relocate them
however, determine the istances from the away from the stack walls to: (1) a distance
measurement site to the nearest upstream of 2.5 cm (1.0 in.); or (2) a distance equal to
the nozzle inside diameter, whichever is larg- of the pitot tube are perpendicular to the
er. These relocated traverse points (on each stack cross-sectional plane; when the Type S
end of a diameter) shall be the ‘‘adjusted’’ pitot tube is in this position, it is at ‘‘0° ref-
traverse points. erence.’’ Note the differential pressure (Dp)
11.3.2.2 Whenever two successive traverse reading at each traverse point. If a null
points are combined to form a single ad- (zero) pitot reading is obtained at 0° ref-
justed traverse point, treat the adjusted erence at a given traverse point, an accept-
point as two separate traverse points, both able flow condition exists at that point. If
in the sampling and/or velocity measure- the pitot reading is not zero at 0° reference,
ment procedure, and in recording of the data. rotate the pitot tube (up to ±90° yaw angle),
11.3.3 Stacks With Diameters Equal To or until a null reading is obtained. Carefully de-
Less Than 0.61 m (24 in.). Follow the proce- termine and record the value of the rotation
dure in Section 11.3.1.1, noting only that any angle (a) to the nearest degree. After the
‘‘adjusted’’ points should be relocated away null technique has been applied at each tra-
from the stack walls to: (1) a distance of 1.3 verse point, calculate the average of the ab-
cm (0.50 in.); or (2) a distance equal to the solute values of a; assign a values of 0° to
nozzle inside diameter, whichever is larger. those points for which no rotation was re-
11.3.4 Rectangular Stacks. quired, and include these in the overall aver-
11.3.4.1 Determine the number of traverse age. If the average value of a is greater than
points as explained in Sections 11.1 and 11.2 20°, the overall flow condition in the stack is
of this method. From Table 1–1, determine unacceptable, and alternative methodology,
the grid configuration. Divide the stack subject to the approval of the Administrator,
cross-section into as many equal rectangular must be used to perform accurate sample and
elemental areas as traverse points, and then velocity traverses.
locate a traverse point at the centroid of 11.5 The alternative site selection proce-
each equal area according to the example in dure may be used to determine the rotation
Figure 1–4. angles in lieu of the procedure outlined in
11.3.4.2 To use more than the minimum Section 11.4.
number of traverse points, expand the ‘‘min- 11.5.1 Alternative Measurement Site Se-
imum number of traverse points’’ matrix lection Procedure. This alternative applies
(see Table 1–1) by adding the extra traverse to sources where measurement locations are
points along one or the other or both legs of less than 2 equivalent or duct diameters
the matrix; the final matrix need not be bal- downstream or less than one-half duct di-
anced. For example, if a 4 × 3 ‘‘minimum ameter upstream from a flow disturbance.
number of points’’ matrix were expanded to
The alternative should be limited to ducts
36 points, the final matrix could be 9 × 4 or
larger than 24 in. in diameter where blockage
12 × 3, and would not necessarily have to be
and wall effects are minimal. A directional
6 × 6. After constructing the final matrix, di-
flow-sensing probe is used to measure pitch
vide the stack cross-section into as many
and yaw angles of the gas flow at 40 or more
equal rectangular, elemental areas as tra-
traverse points; the resultant angle is cal-
verse points, and locate a traverse point at
culated and compared with acceptable cri-
the centroid of each equal area.
teria for mean and standard deviation.
11.3.4.3 The situation of traverse points
being too close to the stack walls is not ex- NOTE: Both the pitch and yaw angles are
pected to arise with rectangular stacks. If measured from a line passing through the
this problem should ever arise, the Adminis- traverse point and parallel to the stack axis.
trator must be contacted for resolution of The pitch angle is the angle of the gas flow
the matter. component in the plane that INCLUDES the
11.4 Verification of Absence of Cyclonic traverse line and is parallel to the stack
Flow. axis. The yaw angle is the angle of the gas
11.4.1 In most stationary sources, the di- flow component in the plane PERPEN-
rection of stack gas flow is essentially par- DICULAR to the traverse line at the tra-
allel to the stack walls. However, cyclonic verse point and is measured from the line
flow may exist (1) after such devices as cy- passing through the traverse point and par-
clones and inertial demisters following ven- allel to the stack axis.
turi scrubbers, or (2) in stacks having tan- 11.5.2 Traverse Points. Use a minimum of
gential inlets or other duct configurations 40 traverse points for circular ducts and 42
which tend to induce swirling; in these in- points for rectangular ducts for the gas flow
stances, the presence or absence of cyclonic angle determinations. Follow the procedure
flow at the sampling location must be deter- outlined in Section 11.3 and Table 1–1 or 1–2
mined. The following techniques are accept- for the location and layout of the traverse
able for this determination. points. If the measurement location is deter-
11.4.2 Level and zero the manometer. Con- mined to be acceptable according to the cri-
nect a Type S pitot tube to the manometer teria in this alternative procedure, use the
and leak-check system. Position the Type S same traverse point number and locations
pitot tube at each traverse point, in succes- for sampling and velocity measurements.
sion, so that the planes of the face openings 11.5.3 Measurement Procedure.
11.5.3.1 Prepare the directional probe and 11.5.4.3 Pitch Angle Calibration. Perform
differential pressure gauges as recommended a calibration traverse according to the man-
by the manufacturer. Capillary tubing or ufacturer’s recommended protocol in 5° in-
surge tanks may be used to dampen pressure crements for angles from ¥60° to +60° at one
fluctuations. It is recommended, but not re- velocity in each of the two ranges specified
quired, that a pretest leak check be con- above. Average the pressure ratio values ob-
ducted. To perform a leak check, pressurize tained for each angle in the two flow ranges,
or use suction on the impact opening until a and plot a calibration curve with the average
reading of at least 7.6 cm (3 in.) H2O registers values of the pressure ratio (or other suit-
on the differential pressure gauge, then plug able measurement factor as recommended by
the impact opening. The pressure of a leak- the manufacturer) versus the pitch angle.
free system will remain stable for at least 15 Draw a smooth line through the data points.
seconds. Plot also the data values for each traverse
11.5.3.2 Level and zero the manometers. point. Determine the differences between the
Since the manometer level and zero may measured data values and the angle from the
drift because of vibrations and temperature calibration curve at the same pressure ratio.
changes, periodically check the level and The difference at each comparison must be
zero during the traverse. within 2° for angles between 0° and 40° and
11.5.3.3 Position the probe at the appro- within 3° for angles between 40° and 60°.
priate locations in the gas stream, and ro- 11.5.4.4 Yaw Angle Calibration. Mark the
tate until zero deflection is indicated for the three-dimensional probe to allow the deter-
yaw angle pressure gauge. Determine and mination of the yaw position of the probe.
record the yaw angle. Record the pressure This is usually a line extending the length of
gauge readings for the pitch angle, and de- the probe and aligned with the impact open-
termine the pitch angle from the calibration ing. To determine the accuracy of measure-
curve. Repeat this procedure for each tra- ments of the yaw angle, only the zero or null
verse point. Complete a ‘‘back-purge’’ of the position need be calibrated as follows: Place
pressure lines and the impact openings prior the directional probe in the test section, and
to measurements of each traverse point. rotate the probe until the zero position is
11.5.3.4 A post-test check as described in found. With a protractor or other angle
Section 11.5.3.1 is required. If the criteria for measuring device, measure the angle indi-
a leak-free system are not met, repair the cated by the yaw angle indicator on the
equipment, and repeat the flow angle meas-
three-dimensional probe. This should be
urements.
within 2° of 0°. Repeat this measurement for
11.5.4 Calibration. Use a flow system as
any other points along the length of the
described in Sections 10.1.2.1 and 10.1.2.2 of
pitot where yaw angle measurements could
Method 2. In addition, the flow system shall
be read in order to account for variations in
have the capacity to generate two test-sec-
the pitot markings used to indicate pitot
tion velocities: one between 365 and 730 m/
head positions.
min (1,200 and 2,400 ft/min) and one between
730 and 1,100 m/min (2,400 and 3,600 ft/min). 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
11.5.4.1 Cut two entry ports in the test
section. The axes through the entry ports 12.1 Nomenclature.
shall be perpendicular to each other and L=length.
intersect in the centroid of the test section. n=total number of traverse points.
The ports should be elongated slots parallel Pi=pitch angle at traverse point i, degree.
to the axis of the test section and of suffi- Ravg=average resultant angle, degree.
cient length to allow measurement of pitch Ri=resultant angle at traverse point i, de-
angles while maintaining the pitot head po- gree.
sition at the test-section centroid. To facili- Sd=standard deviation, degree.
tate alignment of the directional probe dur- W=width.
ing calibration, the test section should be Yi=yaw angle at traverse point i, degree.
constructed of plexiglass or some other 12.2 For a rectangular cross section, an
transparent material. All calibration meas- equivalent diameter (De) shall be calculated
urements should be made at the same point using the following equation, to determine
in the test section, preferably at the centroid the upstream and downstream distances:
of the test section.
11.5.4.2 To ensure that the gas flow is par- 2( L )( W )
allel to the central axis of the test section, De = Eq. 1-1
follow the procedure outlined in Section 11.4 L+W
for cyclonic flow determination to measure 12.3 If use of the alternative site selection
the gas flow angles at the centroid of the procedure (Section 11.5 of this method) is re-
test section from two test ports located 90° quired, perform the following calculations
apart. The gas flow angle measured in each using the equations below: the resultant
port must be ±2° of 0°. Straightening vanes angle at each traverse point, the average re-
should be installed, if necessary, to meet this sultant angle, and the standard deviation.
criterion. Complete the calculations retaining at least
9
ER17OC00.037</GPH>
one extra significant figure beyond that of 12.3.1 Calculate the resultant angle at
the acquired data. Round the values after each traverse point:
the final calculations.
[
R i = arc cosine (cosine Yi )(cosine Pi ) ] Eq. 1-2
12.3.2 Calculate the average resultant for search Triangle Park, NC. EPA Contract No.
the measurements: 68–01–3172, Task 7.
7. Hanson, H.A., R.J. Davini, J.K. Morgan,
and A.A. Iversen. Particulate Sampling
R avg = ∑ R i /n Eq. 1-3 Strategies for Large Power Plants Including
Nonuniform Flow. USEPA, Research Tri-
angle Park, NC. Publication No. EPA–600/2–
12.3.3 Calculate the standard deviations: 76–170. June 1976. 350 pp.
8. Brooks, E.F., and R.L. Williams. Flow
n
∑ (R i − R avg )
2 and Gas Sampling Manual. U.S. Environ-
mental Protection Agency. Research Tri-
i =1 angle Park, NC. Publication No. EPA–600/2–
Sd = Eq. 1-4 76–203. July 1976. 93 pp.
( n − 1) 9. Entropy Environmentalists, Inc. Tra-
12.3.4 Acceptability Criteria. The meas- verse Point Study. EPA Contract No. 68–02–
urement location is acceptable if Ravg ≤ 20° 3172. June 1977. 19 pp.
and Sd ≤ 10°. 10. Brown, J. and K. Yu. Test Report: Par-
ticulate Sampling Strategy in Circular
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] Ducts. Emission Measurement Branch. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Research
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] Triangle Park, NC 27711. July 31, 1980. 12 pp.
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] 11. Hawksley, P.G.W., S. Badzioch, and J.H.
Blackett. Measurement of Solids in Flue
16.0 References Gases. Leatherhead, England, The British
Coal Utilisation Research Association. 1961.
1. Determining Dust Concentration in a
pp. 129–133.
Gas Stream, ASME Performance Test Code
No. 27. New York. 1957. 12. Knapp, K.T. The Number of Sampling
2. DeVorkin, Howard, et al. Air Pollution Points Needed for Representative Source
Source Testing Manual. Air Pollution Con- Sampling. In: Proceedings of the Fourth Na-
trol District. Los Angeles, CA. November tional Conference on Energy and Environ-
1963. ment. Theodore, L. et al. (ed). Dayton, Day-
3. Methods for Determining of Velocity, ton Section of the American Institute of
Volume, Dust and Mist Content of Gases. Chemical Engineers. October 3–7, 1976. pp.
Western Precipitation Division of Joy Manu- 563–568.
facturing Co. Los Angeles, CA. Bulletin WP– 13. Smith, W.S. and D.J. Grove. A Proposed
50. 1968. Extension of EPA Method 1 Criteria. Pollu-
4. Standard Method for Sampling Stacks tion Engineering. XV (8):36–37. August 1983.
for Particulate Matter. In: 1971 Book of 14. Gerhart, P.M. and M.J. Dorsey. Inves-
ASTM Standards, Part 23. ASTM Designa- tigation of Field Test Procedures for Large
tion D 2928–71. Philadelphia, PA. 1971. Fans. University of Akron. Akron, OH.
5. Hanson, H.A., et al. Particulate Sam- (EPRI Contract CS–1651). Final Report (RP–
pling Strategies for Large Power Plants In- 1649–5). December 1980.
cluding Nonuniform Flow. USEPA, ORD, 15. Smith, W.S. and D.J. Grove. A New
ESRL, Research Triangle Park, NC. EPA–600/ Look at Isokinetic Sampling—Theory and
2–76–170. June 1976. Applications. Source Evaluation Society
6. Entropy Environmentalists, Inc. Deter- Newsletter. VIII (3):19–24. August 1983.
mination of the Optimum Number of Sam-
ER17OC00.040</GPH>
pling Points: An Analysis of Method 1 Cri- 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
teria. Environmental Protection Agency. Re- Validation Data
ER17OC00.039</GPH>
10
ER17OC00.038</GPH>
TABLE 1–1 CROSS-SECTION LAYOUT FOR TABLE 1–1 CROSS-SECTION LAYOUT FOR
RECTANGULAR STACKS RECTANGULAR STACKS—Continued
Number of tranverse points layout Matrix Number of tranverse points layout Matrix
9 ......................................................... 3×3 30 ....................................................... 6×5

12 ....................................................... 4×3 36 ....................................................... 6×6
16 ....................................................... 4×4
42 ....................................................... 7×6
20 ....................................................... 5×4 49 ....................................................... 7×7
25 ....................................................... 5×5
11
ER17OC00.041</GPH>
TABLE 1–2—LOCATION OF TRAVERSE POINTS IN CIRCULAR STACKS

[Percent of stack diameter from inside wall to tranverse point]
Traverse Number of traverse points on a diameter

point
number on 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
a diameter
1 .................................... 14.6 6.7 4.4 3.2 2.6 2.1 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.3 1.1 1.1
2 .................................... 85.4 25.0 14.6 10.5 8.2 6.7 5.7 4.9 4.4 3.9 3.5 3.2
3 .................................... 75.0 29.6 19.4 14.6 11.8 9.9 8.5 7.5 6.7 6.0 5.5
4 .................................... 93.3 70.4 32.3 22.6 17.7 14.6 12.5 10.9 9.7 8.7 7.9
5 .................................... 85.4 67.7 34.2 25.0 20.1 16.9 14.6 12.9 11.6 10.5
12
ER17OC00.042</GPH>
Environmental Protection Agency Pt. 60, App. A–1, Meth. 1A
TABLE 1–2—LOCATION OF TRAVERSE POINTS IN CIRCULAR STACKS—Continued

[Percent of stack diameter from inside wall to tranverse point]
Traverse Number of traverse points on a diameter

point
number on 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
a diameter
6 .................................... 95.6 80.6 65.8 35.6 26.9 22.0 18.8 16.5 14.6 13.2
7 .................................... 89.5 77.4 64.4 36.6 28.3 23.6 20.4 18.0 16.1
8 .................................... 96.8 85.4 75.0 63.4 37.5 29.6 25.0 21.8 19.4
9 .................................... 91.8 82.3 73.1 62.5 38.2 30.6 26.2 23.0
10 .................................. 97.4 88.2 79.9 71.7 61.8 38.8 31.5 27.2
11 .................................. 93.3 85.4 78.0 70.4 61.2 39.3 32.3
12 .................................. 97.9 90.1 83.1 76.4 69.4 60.7 39.8
13 .................................. 94.3 87.5 81.2 75.0 68.5 60.2
14 .................................. 98.2 91.5 85.4 79.6 73.8 67.7
15 .................................. 95.1 89.1 83.5 78.2 72.8
16 .................................. 98.4 92.5 87.1 82.0 77.0
17 .................................. 95.6 90.3 85.4 80.6
18 .................................. 98.6 93.3 88.4 83.9
19 .................................. 96.1 91.3 86.8
20 .................................. 98.7 94.0 89.5
21 .................................. 96.5 92.1
22 .................................. 98.9 94.5
23 .................................. 96.8
24 .................................. 99.9
METHOD 1A—SAMPLE AND VELOCITY TRA- performed pursuant to regulations set forth
VERSES FOR STATIONARY SOURCES WITH in this part.
SMALL STACKS OR DUCTS 1.2 Applicability. The applicability and
principle of this method are identical to
NOTE: This method does not include all of
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- Method 1, except its applicability is limited
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essen- to stacks or ducts. This method is applicable
tial to its performance. Some material is in- to flowing gas streams in ducts, stacks, and
corporated by reference from other methods flues of less than about 0.30 meter (12 in.) in
in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable re- diameter, or 0.071 m2 (113 in.2) in cross-sec-
sults, persons using this method should have tional area, but equal to or greater than
a thorough knowledge of at least the fol- about 0.10 meter (4 in.) in diameter, or 0.0081
lowing additional test method: Method 1. m2 (12.57 in.2) in cross-sectional area. This
method cannot be used when the flow is cy-
1.0 Scope and Application clonic or swirling.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to

1.1 Measured Parameters. The purpose of
the requirements of this method will en-
the method is to provide guidance for the se-
hance the quality of the data obtained from
lection of sampling ports and traverse points
at which sampling for air pollutants will be air pollutant sampling methods.
13
ER17OC00.043</GPH>
Pt. 60, App. A–1, Meth. 1A 40 CFR Ch. I (7–1–09 Edition)
2.0 Summary of Method such locations are not available, select an al-
2.1 The method is designed to aid in the ternative particulate measurement location
representative measurement of pollutant at least two equivalent stack or duct diame-
emissions and/or total volumetric flow rate ters downstream and two and one-half diam-
from a stationary source. A measurement eters upstream from any flow disturbance.
site or a pair of measurement sites where the Then, locate the velocity measurement site
effluent stream is flowing in a known direc- two equivalent diameters downstream from
tion is (are) selected. The cross-section of the particulate measurement site. (See Sec-
the stack is divided into a number of equal tion 12.2 of Method 1 for calculating equiva-
areas. Traverse points are then located with- lent diameters for a rectangular cross-sec-
in each of these equal areas. tion.)
2.2 In these small diameter stacks or 11.1.2 PM Sampling (Steady Flow) or Ve-
ducts, the conventional Method 5 stack as- locity (Steady or Unsteady Flow) Measure-
sembly (consisting of a Type S pitot tube at- ments. For PM sampling when the volu-
tached to a sampling probe, equipped with a metric flow rate in a duct is constant with
nozzle and thermocouple) blocks a signifi- respect to time, Section 11.1.1 of Method 1
cant portion of the cross-section of the duct may be followed, with the PM sampling and
and causes inaccurate measurements. There-
velocity measurement performed at one lo-
fore, for particulate matter (PM) sampling in
cation. To demonstrate that the flow rate is
small stacks or ducts, the gas velocity is
constant (within 10 percent) when PM meas-
measured using a standard pitot tube down-
stream of the actual emission sampling site. urements are made, perform complete veloc-
The straight run of duct between the PM ity traverses before and after the PM sam-
sampling and velocity measurement sites al- pling run, and calculate the deviation of the
lows the flow profile, temporarily disturbed flow rate derived after the PM sampling run
by the presence of the sampling probe, to re- from the one derived before the PM sampling
develop and stabilize. run. The PM sampling run is acceptable if
the deviation does not exceed 10 percent.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] 11.2 Determining the Number of Traverse
4.0 Interferences [Reserved] Points.
11.2.1 Particulate Measurements (Steady
5.0 Safety or Unsteady Flow). Use Figure 1–1 of Method
1 to determine the number of traverse points
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- to use at both the velocity measurement and
ment. This test method may not address all PM sampling locations. Before referring to
of the safety problems associated with its the figure, however, determine the distances
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this between both the velocity measurement and
test method to establish appropriate safety PM sampling sites to the nearest upstream
and health practices and determine the ap- and downstream disturbances. Then divide
plicability of regulatory limitations prior to each distance by the stack diameter or
performing this test method. equivalent diameter to express the distances
in terms of the number of duct diameters.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies [Reserved] Then, determine the number of traverse
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved] points from Figure 1–1 of Method 1 cor-
responding to each of these four distances.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, Choose the highest of the four numbers of
and Transport [Reserved] traverse points (or a greater number) so
that, for circular ducts the number is a mul-
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved] tiple of four; and for rectangular ducts, the
10.0 Calibration and Standardization number is one of those shown in Table 1–1 of
[Reserved] Method 1. When the optimum duct diameter
location criteria can be satisfied, the min-
11.0 Procedure imum number of traverse points required is
eight for circular ducts and nine for rectan-
11.1 Selection of Measurement Site.
11.1.1 Particulate Measurements—Steady gular ducts.
or Unsteady Flow. Select a particulate meas- 11.2.2 PM Sampling (Steady Flow) or only
urement site located preferably at least Velocity (Non-Particulate) Measurements.
eight equivalent stack or duct diameters Use Figure 1–2 of Method 1 to determine
downstream and 10 equivalent diameters up- number of traverse points, following the
stream from any flow disturbances such as same procedure used for PM sampling as de-
bends, expansions, or contractions in the scribed in Section 11.2.1 of Method 1. When

stack, or from a visible flame. Next, locate the optimum duct diameter location criteria
the velocity measurement site eight equiva- can be satisfied, the minimum number of
lent diameters downstream of the particu- traverse points required is eight for circular
late measurement site (see Figure 1A–1). If ducts and nine for rectangular ducts.
14
11.3 Cross-sectional Layout, Location of 1. Vollaro, Robert F. Recommended Proce-
Traverse Points, and Verification of the Ab- dure for Sample Traverses in Ducts Smaller
sence of Cyclonic Flow. Same as Method 1, Than 12 Inches in Diameter. U.S. Environ-
Sections 11.3 and 11.4, respectively. mental Protection Agency, Emission Meas-
urement Branch, Research Triangle Park,
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
North Carolina. January 1977.
[Reserved]
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
Validation Data
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Method 1, Section 16.0, References
1 through 6, with the addition of the fol-
lowing:
METHOD 2—DETERMINATION OF STACK GAS VE- able conditions exist, alternative procedures,
LOCITY AND VOLUMETRIC FLOW RATE (TYPE subject to the approval of the Administrator,
S PITOT TUBE) must be employed to produce accurate flow
NOTE: This method does not include all of rate determinations. Examples of such alter-
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- native procedures are: (1) to install straight-
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essen- ening vanes; (2) to calculate the total volu-
tial to its performance. Some material is in- metric flow rate stoichiometrically, or (3) to
corporated by reference from other methods move to another measurement site at which
in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable re- the flow is acceptable.
sults, persons using this method should have 1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to
a thorough knowledge of at least the fol- the requirements of this method will en-
lowing additional test method: Method 1. hance the quality of the data obtained from
air pollutant sampling methods.
1.0 Scope and Application.
1.1 This method is applicable for the de- 2.0 Summary of Method.
termination of the average velocity and the 2.1 The average gas velocity in a stack is
volumetric flow rate of a gas stream. determined from the gas density and from
1.2 This method is not applicable at meas- measurement of the average velocity head
urement sites that fail to meet the criteria
with a Type S (Stausscheibe or reverse type)
of Method 1, Section 11.1. Also, the method

pitot tube.
cannot be used for direct measurement in cy-
clonic or swirling gas streams; Section 11.4
of Method 1 shows how to determine cyclonic
or swirling flow conditions. When unaccept-
15
ER17OC00.044</GPH>
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] ments shall be conducted as above for the
last two traverse points that exhibit suitable
4.0 Interferences [Reserved] Dp measurements.
6.2 Differential Pressure Gauge. An in-
5.0 Safety
clined manometer or equivalent device. Most
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve sampling trains are equipped with a 10 in.
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- (water column) inclined-vertical manometer,
ment. This test method may not address all having 0.01 in. H20 divisions on the 0 to 1 in.
of the safety problems associated with its inclined scale, and 0.1 in. H20 divisions on the
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this 1 to 10 in. vertical scale. This type of ma-
test method to establish appropriate safety nometer (or other gauge of equivalent sensi-
and health practices and determine the ap- tivity) is satisfactory for the measurement
plicability of regulatory limitations prior to of Dp values as low as 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H20.
performing this test method. However, a differential pressure gauge of
greater sensitivity shall be used (subject to
6.0 Equipment and Supplies the approval of the Administrator), if any of
Specifications for the apparatus are given the following is found to be true: (1) the
below. Any other apparatus that has been arithmetic average of all Dp readings at the
demonstrated (subject to approval of the Ad- traverse points in the stack is less than 1.27
ministrator) to be capable of meeting the mm (0.05 in.) H20; (2) for traverses of 12 or
specifications will be considered acceptable. more points, more than 10 percent of the in-
6.1 Type S Pitot Tube. dividual Dp readings are below 1.27 mm (0.05
6.1.1 Pitot tube made of metal tubing in.) H20; or (3) for traverses of fewer than 12
(e.g., stainless steel) as shown in Figure 2–1. points, more than one Dp reading is below
It is recommended that the external tubing 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H20. Reference 18 (see Sec-
diameter (dimension Dt, Figure 2–2b) be be- tion 17.0) describes commercially available
tween 0.48 and 0.95 cm (3⁄16 and 3⁄8 inch). There instrumentation for the measurement of
shall be an equal distance from the base of low-range gas velocities.
each leg of the pitot tube to its face-opening 6.2.1 As an alternative to criteria (1)
plane (dimensions PA and PB, Figure 2–2b); it through (3) above, Equation 2–1 (Section 12.2)
is recommended that this distance be be- may be used to determine the necessity of
tween 1.05 and 1.50 times the external tubing using a more sensitive differential pressure
diameter. The face openings of the pitot tube gauge. If T is greater than 1.05, the velocity
shall, preferably, be aligned as shown in Fig- head data are unacceptable and a more sen-
ure 2–2; however, slight misalignments of the sitive differential pressure gauge must be
openings are permissible (see Figure 2–3). used.
6.1.2 The Type S pitot tube shall have a NOTE: If differential pressure gauges other
known coefficient, determined as outlined in than inclined manometers are used (e.g.,
Section 10.0. An identification number shall magnehelic gauges), their calibration must
be assigned to the pitot tube; this number
be checked after each test series. To check
shall be permanently marked or engraved on
the calibration of a differential pressure
the body of the tube. A standard pitot tube
gauge, compare Dp readings of the gauge
may be used instead of a Type S, provided
with those of a gauge-oil manometer at a
that it meets the specifications of Sections
minimum of three points, approximately
6.7 and 10.2. Note, however, that the static
representing the range of Dp values in the
and impact pressure holes of standard pitot
stack. If, at each point, the values of Dp as
tubes are susceptible to plugging in particu-
read by the differential pressure gauge and
late-laden gas streams. Therefore, whenever
gauge-oil manometer agree to within 5 per-
a standard pitot tube is used to perform a
traverse, adequate proof must be furnished cent, the differential pressure gauge shall be
that the openings of the pitot tube have not considered to be in proper calibration. Other-
plugged up during the traverse period. This wise, the test series shall either be voided, or
can be accomplished by comparing the veloc- procedures to adjust the measured Dp values
ity head (Dp) measurement recorded at a se- and final results shall be used, subject to the
lected traverse point (readable Dp value) approval of the Administrator.
with a second Dp measurement recorded after 6.3 Temperature Sensor. A thermocouple,
‘‘back purging’’ with pressurized air to clean liquid-filled bulb thermometer, bimetallic
the impact and static holes of the standard thermometer, mercury-in-glass thermom-
pitot tube. If the before and after Dp meas- eter, or other gauge capable of measuring
urements are within 5 percent, then the tra- temperatures to within 1.5 percent of the
verse data are acceptable. Otherwise, the minimum absolute stack temperature. The
data should be rejected and the traverse temperature sensor shall be attached to the
measurements redone. Note that the selected pitot tube such that the sensor tip does not
traverse point should be one that dem- touch any metal; the gauge shall be in an in-
onstrates a readable Dp value. If ‘‘back purg- terference-free arrangement with respect to
ing’’ at regular intervals is part of a routine the pitot tube face openings (see Figure 2–1
procedure, then comparative Dp measure- and Figure 2–4). Alternative positions may
16
be used if the pitot tube-temperature gauge holes and the centerline of the external tube,
system is calibrated according to the proce- following the 90° bend.
dure of Section 10.0. Provided that a dif- 6.7.1.4 Static pressure holes of equal size
ference of not more than 1 percent in the av- (approximately 0.1 D), equally spaced in a pi-
erage velocity measurement is introduced, ezometer ring configuration.
the temperature gauge need not be attached 6.7.1.5 90° bend, with curved or mitered
to the pitot tube. This alternative is subject junction.
to the approval of the Administrator. 6.8 Differential Pressure Gauge for Type S
6.4 Pressure Probe and Gauge. A piezom- Pitot Tube Calibration. An inclined manom-
eter tube and mercury- or water-filled U- eter or equivalent. If the single-velocity cali-
tube manometer capable of measuring stack bration technique is employed (see Section
pressure to within 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) Hg. The 10.1.2.3), the calibration differential pressure
static tap of a standard type pitot tube or gauge shall be readable to the nearest 0.127
one leg of a Type S pitot tube with the face mm (0.005 in.) H20. For multivelocity calibra-
opening planes positioned parallel to the gas tions, the gauge shall be readable to the
flow may also be used as the pressure probe. nearest 0.127 mm (0.005 in.) H20 for Dp values
6.5 Barometer. A mercury, aneroid, or between 1.27 and 25.4 mm (0.05 and 1.00 in.)
other barometer capable of measuring at- H20, and to the nearest 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H20
mospheric pressure to within 2.54 mm (0.1 for Dp values above 25.4 mm (1.00 in.) H20. A
in.) Hg. special, more sensitive gauge will be re-
quired to read Dp values below 1.27 mm (0.05
NOTE: The barometric pressure reading
in.) H20 (see Reference 18 in Section 16.0).
may be obtained from a nearby National
Weather Service station. In this case, the 7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
station value (which is the absolute baro-
metric pressure) shall be requested and an 8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
adjustment for elevation differences between 8.1 Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig-
the weather station and sampling point shall ure 2–1. Capillary tubing or surge tanks in-
be made at a rate of minus 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) stalled between the manometer and pitot
Hg per 30 m (100 ft) elevation increase or plus tube may be used to dampen Dp fluctuations.
2.5 mm (0.1 in.) Hg per 30 m (100 ft.) for ele- It is recommended, but not required, that a
vation decrease. pretest leak-check be conducted as follows:
6.6 Gas Density Determination Equip- (1) blow through the pitot impact opening
ment. Method 3 equipment, if needed (see until at least 7.6 cm (3.0 in.) H20 velocity
Section 8.6), to determine the stack gas dry head registers on the manometer; then, close
molecular weight, and Method 4 (reference off the impact opening. The pressure shall
method) or Method 5 equipment for moisture remain stable for at least 15 seconds; (2) do
content determination. Other methods may the same for the static pressure side, except
be used subject to approval of the Adminis- using suction to obtain the minimum of 7.6
trator. cm (3.0 in.) H20. Other leak-check procedures,
6.7 Calibration Pitot Tube. When calibra- subject to the approval of the Administrator,
tion of the Type S pitot tube is necessary may be used.
(see Section 10.1), a standard pitot tube shall 8.2 Level and zero the manometer. Be-
be used for a reference. The standard pitot cause the manometer level and zero may
tube shall, preferably, have a known coeffi- drift due to vibrations and temperature
cient, obtained either (1) directly from the changes, make periodic checks during the
National Institute of Standards and Tech- traverse (at least once per hour). Record all
nology (NIST), Gaithersburg MD 20899, (301) necessary data on a form similar to that
975–2002, or (2) by calibration against another shown in Figure 2–6.
standard pitot tube with an NIST-traceable 8.3 Measure the velocity head and tem-
coefficient. Alternatively, a standard pitot perature at the traverse points specified by
tube designed according to the criteria given Method 1. Ensure that the proper differential
in Sections 6.7.1 through 6.7.5 below and il- pressure gauge is being used for the range of
lustrated in Figure 2–5 (see also References 7, Dp values encountered (see Section 6.2). If it
8, and 17 in Section 17.0) may be used. Pitot is necessary to change to a more sensitive
tubes designed according to these specifica- gauge, do so, and remeasure the Dp and tem-
tions will have baseline coefficients of 0.99 perature readings at each traverse point.
±0.01. Conduct a post-test leak-check (mandatory),
6.7.1 Standard Pitot Design. as described in Section 8.1 above, to validate
6.7.1.1 Hemispherical (shown in Figure 2– the traverse run.
5), ellipsoidal, or conical tip. 8.4 Measure the static pressure in the
6.7.1.2 A minimum of six diameters stack. One reading is usually adequate.
straight run (based upon D, the external di- 8.5 Determine the atmospheric pressure.
ameter of the tube) between the tip and the 8.6 Determine the stack gas dry molec-
static pressure holes. ular weight. For combustion processes or
6.7.1.3 A minimum of eight diameters processes that emit essentially CO2, O2, CO,
straight run between the static pressure and N2, use Method 3. For processes emitting
17
essentially air, an analysis need not be con- 8.8 Determine the cross-sectional area of
ducted; use a dry molecular weight of 29.0. the stack or duct at the sampling location.
For other processes, other methods, subject Whenever possible, physically measure the
to the approval of the Administrator, must stack dimensions rather than using blue-
be used. prints. Do not assume that stack diameters
8.7 Obtain the moisture content from are equal. Measure each diameter distance to
Method 4 (reference method, or equivalent) verify its dimensions.
or from Method 5. 9.0 Quality Control
Section Quality control measure Effect
10.1–10.4 ........................... Sampling equipment calibration ............... Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate,
sample volume.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization blies that fail to meet any or all of the speci-
fications of Figures 2–4, 2–7, and 2-8 shall be
10.1 Type S Pitot Tube. Before its initial calibrated according to the procedure out-
use, carefully examine the Type S pitot tube lined in Sections 10.1.2 through 10.1.5, and
top, side, and end views to verify that the prior to calibration, the values of the inter-
face openings of the tube are aligned within component spacings (pitot-nozzle, pitot-ther-
the specifications illustrated in Figures 2–2 mocouple, pitot-probe sheath) shall be meas-
and 2–3. The pitot tube shall not be used if it ured and recorded.
fails to meet these alignment specifications.
After verifying the face opening alignment, NOTE: Do not use a Type S pitot tube as-
sembly that is constructed such that the im-
measure and record the following dimensions
pact pressure opening plane of the pitot tube
of the pitot tube: (a) the external tubing di-
is below the entry plane of the nozzle (see
ameter (dimension Dt, Figure 2–2b); and (b)
Figure 2–6B).
the base-to-opening plane distances (dimen-
sions PA and PB, Figure 2–2b). If Dt is between 10.1.2 Calibration Setup. If the Type S
0.48 and 0.95 cm 3⁄16 and 3⁄8 in.), and if PA and pitot tube is to be calibrated, one leg of the
PB are equal and between 1.05 and 1.50 Dt, tube shall be permanently marked A, and the
there are two possible options: (1) the pitot other, B. Calibration shall be performed in a
tube may be calibrated according to the pro- flow system having the following essential
cedure outlined in Sections 10.1.2 through design features:
10.1.5, or (2) a baseline (isolated tube) coeffi- 10.1.2.1 The flowing gas stream must be
cient value of 0.84 may be assigned to the confined to a duct of definite cross-sectional
pitot tube. Note, however, that if the pitot area, either circular or rectangular. For cir-
tube is part of an assembly, calibration may cular cross sections, the minimum duct di-
still be required, despite knowledge of the ameter shall be 30.48 cm (12 in.); for rectan-
baseline coefficient value (see Section 10.1.1). gular cross sections, the width (shorter side)
If Dt, PA, and PB are outside the specified shall be at least 25.4 cm (10 in.).
limits, the pitot tube must be calibrated as 10.1.2.2 The cross-sectional area of the
outlined in Sections 10.1.2 through 10.1.5. calibration duct must be constant over a dis-
tance of 10 or more duct diameters. For a
10.1.1 Type S Pitot Tube Assemblies. Dur-
rectangular cross section, use an equivalent
ing sample and velocity traverses, the iso-
diameter, calculated according to Equation
lated Type S pitot tube is not always used;
2–2 (see Section 12.3), to determine the num-
in many instances, the pitot tube is used in
ber of duct diameters. To ensure the pres-
combination with other source-sampling
ence of stable, fully developed flow patterns
components (e.g., thermocouple, sampling
at the calibration site, or ‘‘test section,’’ the
probe, nozzle) as part of an ‘‘assembly.’’ The
site must be located at least eight diameters
presence of other sampling components can
downstream and two diameters upstream
sometimes affect the baseline value of the
from the nearest disturbances.
Type S pitot tube coefficient (Reference 9 in
Section 17.0); therefore, an assigned (or oth- NOTE: The eight- and two-diameter criteria
erwise known) baseline coefficient value may are not absolute; other test section locations
or may not be valid for a given assembly. may be used (subject to approval of the Ad-
The baseline and assembly coefficient values ministrator), provided that the flow at the
will be identical only when the relative test site has been demonstrated to be or
placement of the components in the assem- found stable and parallel to the duct axis.
bly is such that aerodynamic interference ef- 10.1.2.3 The flow system shall have the ca-
fects are eliminated. Figures 2–4, 2–7, and 2– pacity to generate a test-section velocity
8 illustrate interference-free component ar- around 910 m/min (3,000 ft/min). This velocity
rangements for Type S pitot tubes having ex- must be constant with time to guarantee
ternal tubing diameters between 0.48 and 0.95 steady flow during calibration. Note that
cm (3⁄16 and 3⁄8 in.). Type S pitot tube assem- Type S pitot tube coefficients obtained by
18
single-velocity calibration at 910 m/min 10.1.3.6 Read Dps, and enter its value in
(3,000 ft/min) will generally be valid to ±3 the data table. Remove the Type S pitot tube
percent for the measurement of velocities from the duct, and disconnect it from the
above 300 m/min (1,000 ft/min) and to ±6 per- manometer.
cent for the measurement of velocities be- 10.1.3.7 Repeat Steps 10.1.3.3 through
tween 180 and 300 m/min (600 and 1,000 ft/ 10.1.3.6 until three pairs of Dp readings have
min). If a more precise correlation between been obtained for the A side of the Type S
the pitot tube coefficient, (Cp), and velocity pitot tube.
is desired, the flow system should have the 10.1.3.8 Repeat Steps 10.1.3.3 through
capacity to generate at least four distinct, 10.1.3.7 for the B side of the Type S pitot
time-invariant test-section velocities cov- tube.
ering the velocity range from 180 to 1,500 m/ 10.1.3.9 Perform calculations as described
min (600 to 5,000 ft/min), and calibration data in Section 12.4. Use the Type S pitot tube
shall be taken at regular velocity intervals only if the values of sA and sB are less than
over this range (see References 9 and 14 in or equal to 0.01 and if the absolute value of
Section 17.0 for details). the difference between Cp(A) and Cp(B) is 0.01 or
10.1.2.4 Two entry ports, one for each of less.
the standard and Type S pitot tubes, shall be 10.1.4 Special Considerations.
cut in the test section. The standard pitot
10.1.4.1 Selection of Calibration Point.
entry port shall be located slightly down-
10.1.4.1.1 When an isolated Type S pitot
stream of the Type S port, so that the stand-
tube is calibrated, select a calibration point
ard and Type S impact openings will lie in
at or near the center of the duct, and follow
the same cross-sectional plane during cali-
the procedures outlined in Section 10.1.3. The
bration. To facilitate alignment of the pitot
tubes during calibration, it is advisable that Type S pitot coefficients measured or cal-
the test section be constructed of culated, (i.e., Cp(A) and Cp(B)) will be valid, so
Plexiglas TM or some other transparent ma- long as either: (1) the isolated pitot tube is
terial. used; or (2) the pitot tube is used with other
10.1.3 Calibration Procedure. Note that components (nozzle, thermocouple, sample
this procedure is a general one and must not probe) in an arrangement that is free from
be used without first referring to the special aerodynamic interference effects (see Fig-
considerations presented in Section 10.1.5. ures 2–4, 2–7, and 2–8).
Note also that this procedure applies only to 10.1.4.1.2 For Type S pitot tube-thermo-
single-velocity calibration. To obtain cali- couple combinations (without probe assem-
bration data for the A and B sides of the bly), select a calibration point at or near the
Type S pitot tube, proceed as follows: center of the duct, and follow the procedures
10.1.3.1 Make sure that the manometer is outlined in Section 10.1.3. The coefficients so
properly filled and that the oil is free from obtained will be valid so long as the pitot
contamination and is of the proper density. tube-thermocouple combination is used by
Inspect and leak-check all pitot lines; repair itself or with other components in an inter-
or replace if necessary. ference-free arrangement (Figures 2–4, 2–7,
10.1.3.2 Level and zero the manometer. and 2–8).
Switch on the fan, and allow the flow to sta- 10.1.4.1.3 For Type S pitot tube combina-
bilize. Seal the Type S pitot tube entry port. tions with complete probe assemblies, the
10.1.3.3 Ensure that the manometer is calibration point should be located at or
level and zeroed. Position the standard pitot near the center of the duct; however, inser-
tube at the calibration point (determined as tion of a probe sheath into a small duct may
outlined in Section 10.1.5.1), and align the cause significant cross-sectional area inter-
tube so that its tip is pointed directly into ference and blockage and yield incorrect co-
the flow. Particular care should be taken in efficient values (Reference 9 in Section 17.0).
aligning the tube to avoid yaw and pitch an- Therefore, to minimize the blockage effect,
gles. Make sure that the entry port sur- the calibration point may be a few inches
rounding the tube is properly sealed. off-center if necessary. The actual blockage
10.1.3.4 Read Dpstd, and record its value in effect will be negligible when the theoretical
a data table similar to the one shown in Fig- blockage, as determined by a projected-area
ure 2–9. Remove the standard pitot tube from model of the probe sheath, is 2 percent or
the duct, and disconnect it from the manom- less of the duct cross-sectional area for as-
eter. Seal the standard entry port. semblies without external sheaths (Figure 2–
10.1.3.5 Connect the Type S pitot tube to 10a), and 3 percent or less for assemblies with
the manometer and leak-check. Open the external sheaths (Figure 2–10b).
Type S tube entry port. Check the manom- 10.1.4.2 For those probe assemblies in
eter level and zero. Insert and align the Type which pitot tube-nozzle interference is a fac-
S pitot tube so that its A side impact open- tor (i.e., those in which the pitot-nozzle sepa-
ing is at the same point as was the standard ration distance fails to meet the specifica-
pitot tube and is pointed directly into the tions illustrated in Figure 2–7A), the value of
flow. Make sure that the entry port sur- Cp(s) depends upon the amount of free space
rounding the tube is properly sealed. between the tube and nozzle and, therefore,
19
is a function of nozzle size. In these in- the face opening alignment is acceptable, it
stances, separate calibrations shall be per- can be assumed that the coefficient of the as-
formed with each of the commonly used noz- sembly has not changed. If the face opening
zle sizes in place. Note that the single-veloc- alignment is no longer within the specifica-
ity calibration technique is acceptable for tions of Figure 2–2 and Figure 2–3, either re-
this purpose, even though the larger nozzle pair the damage or replace the pitot tube
sizes (>0.635 cm or 1⁄4 in.) are not ordinarily (calibrating the new assembly, if necessary).
used for isokinetic sampling at velocities If the intercomponent spacings have
around 910 m/min (3,000 ft/min), which is the changed, restore the original spacings, or re-
calibration velocity. Note also that it is not calibrate the assembly.
necessary to draw an isokinetic sample dur- 10.2 Standard Pitot Tube (if applicable). If
ing calibration (see Reference 19 in Section a standard pitot tube is used for the velocity
17.0). traverse, the tube shall be constructed ac-
10.1.4.3 For a probe assembly constructed cording to the criteria of Section 6.7 and
such that its pitot tube is always used in the shall be assigned a baseline coefficient value
same orientation, only one side of the pitot of 0.99. If the standard pitot tube is used as
tube need be calibrated (the side which will part of an assembly, the tube shall be in an
face the flow). The pitot tube must still meet interference-free arrangement (subject to
the alignment specifications of Figure 2–2 or the approval of the Administrator).
2–3, however, and must have an average devi- 10.3 Temperature Sensors.
ation (s) value of 0.01 or less (see Section 10.3.1 After each field use, calibrate dial
10.1.4.4). thermometers, liquid-filled bulb thermom-
10.1.5 Field Use and Recalibration. eters, thermocouple-potentiometer systems,
10.1.5.1 Field Use. and other sensors at a temperature within 10
10.1.5.1.1 When a Type S pitot tube (iso- percent of the average absolute stack tem-
lated or in an assembly) is used in the field, perature. For temperatures up to 405 °C (761
the appropriate coefficient value (whether °F), use an ASTM mercury-in-glass reference
assigned or obtained by calibration) shall be thermometer, or equivalent, as a reference.
used to perform velocity calculations. For Alternatively, either a reference thermo-
calibrated Type S pitot tubes, the A side co- couple and potentiometer (calibrated against
efficient shall be used when the A side of the NIST standards) or thermometric fixed
tube faces the flow, and the B side coefficient points (e.g., ice bath and boiling water, cor-
shall be used when the B side faces the flow. rected for barometric pressure) may be used.
Alternatively, the arithmetic average of the For temperatures above 405 °C (761 °F), use a
A and B side coefficient values may be used,
reference thermocouple-potentiometer sys-
irrespective of which side faces the flow.
tem calibrated against NIST standards or an
10.1.5.1.2 When a probe assembly is used to
alternative reference, subject to the ap-
sample a small duct, 30.5 to 91.4 cm (12 to 36
proval of the Administrator.
in.) in diameter, the probe sheath sometimes
10.3.2 The temperature data recorded in
blocks a significant part of the duct cross-
the field shall be considered valid. If, during
section, causing a reduction in the effective
calibration, the absolute temperature meas-
value of Cp(s). Consult Reference 9 (see Sec-
ured with the sensor being calibrated and the
tion 17.0) for details. Conventional pitot-
reference sensor agree within 1.5 percent, the
sampling probe assemblies are not rec-
temperature data taken in the field shall be
ommended for use in ducts having inside di-
considered valid. Otherwise, the pollutant
ameters smaller than 30.5 cm (12 in.) (see
emission test shall either be considered in-
Reference 16 in Section 17.0).
valid or adjustments (if appropriate) of the
10.1.5.2 Recalibration.
test results shall be made, subject to the ap-
10.1.5.2.1 Isolated Pitot Tubes. After each
field use, the pitot tube shall be carefully re-
10.4 Barometer. Calibrate the barometer
examined in top, side, and end views. If the
used against a mercury barometer.
pitot face openings are still aligned within
the specifications illustrated in Figure 2–2 11.0 Analytical Procedure
and Figure 2–3, it can be assumed that the
baseline coefficient of the pitot tube has not Sample collection and analysis are concur-
changed. If, however, the tube has been dam- rent for this method (see Section 8.0).
aged to the extent that it no longer meets
the specifications of Figure 2–2 and Figure 2–
3, the damage shall either be repaired to re- Carry out calculations, retaining at least
store proper alignment of the face openings, one extra significant figure beyond that of
or the tube shall be discarded. the acquired data. Round off figures after
10.1.5.2.2 Pitot Tube Assemblies. After final calculation.
each field use, check the face opening align- 12.1 Nomenclature.
ment of the pitot tube, as in Section A=Cross-sectional area of stack, m2 (ft2).
10.1.5.2.1. Also, remeasure the intercompo- Bws=Water vapor in the gas stream (from
nent spacings of the assembly. If the inter- Method 4 (reference method) or Method 5),
component spacings have not changed and proportion by volume.
20
Cp=Pitot tube coefficient, dimensionless. 3600=Conversion Factor, sec/hr.
Cp(s)=Type S pitot tube coefficient, 18.0=Molecular weight of water, g/g-mole (lb/
dimensionless. lb-mole).
Cp(std)=Standard pitot tube coefficient; use
0.99 if the coefficient is unknown and the 12.2 Calculate T as follows:
tube is designed according to the criteria n
∑
of Sections 6.7.1 to 6.7.5 of this method.
De=Equivalent diameter. Δp i + K
K=0.127 mm H2O (metric units). 0.005 in. H2O i =1
(English units). Τ= n Eq. 2-1
Kp=Velocity equation constant.
L=Length. ∑
Δp i
Md=Molecular weight of stack gas, dry basis i =1
(see Section 8.6), g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole). 12.3 Calculate De as follows:
Ms=Molecular weight of stack gas, wet basis,
g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole). 2 LW
n=Total number of traverse points. De = Eq. 2-2
Pbar=Barometric pressure at measurement L+W
site, mm Hg (in. Hg). 12.4 Calibration of Type S Pitot Tube.
Pg=Stack static pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Ps=Absolute stack pressure (Pbar + Pg), mm 12.4.1 For each of the six pairs of Dp read-
Hg (in. Hg), ings (i.e., three from side A and three from
Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg side B) obtained in Section 10.1.3, calculate
(29.92 in. Hg). the value of the Type S pitot tube coefficient
Qsd=Dry volumetric stack gas flow rate cor- according to Equation 2–3:
rected to standard conditions, dscm/hr
(dscf/hr). Δpstd
T=Sensitivity factor for differential pressure C p(s) = C p(std ) Eq. 2-3
gauges. Δp
Ts=Stack temperature, °C ( °F).
Ts(abs)=Absolute stack temperature, °K (°R). 12.4.2 Calculate Cp(A), the mean A-side co-
=273 + Ts for metric units, efficient, and Cp(B), the mean B-side coeffi-
=460 + Ts for English units. cient. Calculate the difference between these
ER17OC00.051</MATH>
Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K two average values.
(528 °R). 12.4.3 Calculate the deviation of each of
Vs=Average stack gas velocity, m/sec (ft/sec). the three A-side values of Cp(s) from Cp(A), and
W=Width. the deviation of each of the three B-side val-
Dp=Velocity head of stack gas, mm H2O (in. ues of Cp(s) from Cp(B), using Equation 2–4:
H20).
ER17OC00.050</MATH>
Dpi=Individual velocity head reading at tra-
Deviation = C p(s) − Cp Eq. 2-4
verse point ‘‘i’’, mm (in.) H2O. ( A or B)
Dpstd=Velocity head measured by the stand-
ard pitot tube, cm (in.) H2O. 12.4.4 Calculate s the average deviation
Dps=Velocity head measured by the Type S from the mean, for both the A and B sides of
pitot tube, cm (in.) H2O. the pitot tube. Use Equation 2–5:
ER17OC00.049</MATH>
3
∑ C p (s) − Cp( A or B)
i =1
σ A or B = Eq. 2-5
3 ER17OC00.048</MATH>
12.5 Molecular Weight of Stack Gas.

Ts(abs)
M s = M d (1 − Bws ) + 18.0 Bws Eq. 2-6 Vs = K p C p Δp avg
ER17OC00.047</MATH>
Eq. 2-7
Ps M s
12.6 Average Stack Gas Velocity.
ER17OC00.046</MATH>
21
ER17OC00.045</MATH>
1
m ⎡ (g/g ⋅ mole)( mmHg) ⎤ 2
34.97 ⎢ ⎥ Metric
sec ⎢⎣ (° K )( mmH 2 O) ⎥⎦
1
m ⎡ (1b/1b - mole)(in. Hg) ⎤ 2
85.49 ⎢ ⎥ English
sec ⎢⎣ (° R )(in. H 2 O) ⎥⎦
12.7 Average Stack Gas Dry Volumetric

Flow Rate.
⎢ T P ⎥
Q = 3600(1 − Bws )vs A ⎢ std s ⎥ Eq. 2-8
⎢⎣ Ts (abs) Pstd ⎥⎦
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] tion Agency, Emission Measurement Branch,

Research Triangle Park, N.C. July 1974.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] 11. Vollaro, R.F. The Effects of Impact
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] Opening Misalignment on the Value of the
Type S Pitot Tube Coefficient. U.S. Environ-
16.0 References mental Protection Agency, Emission Meas-
1. Mark, L.S. Mechanical Engineers’ Hand- urement Branch, Research Triangle Park,
book. New York. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc. NC. October 1976.
1951. 12. Vollaro, R.F. Establishment of a Base-
2. Perry, J.H., ed. Chemical Engineers’ line Coefficient Value for Properly Con-
Handbook. New York. McGraw-Hill Book structed Type S Pitot Tubes. U.S. Environ-
Co., Inc. 1960. mental Protection Agency, Emission Meas-
3. Shigehara, R.T., W.F. Todd, and W.S. urement Branch, Research Triangle Park,
Smith. Significance of Errors in Stack Sam- NC. November 1976.
pling Measurements. U.S. Environmental 13. Vollaro, R.F. An Evaluation of Single-
Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, Velocity Calibration Technique as a Means
N.C. (Presented at the Annual Meeting of the of Determining Type S Pitot Tube Coeffi-
Air Pollution Control Association, St. Louis,
cients. U.S. Environmental Protection Agen-
MO., June 14–19, 1970).
cy, Emission Measurement Branch, Research
4. Standard Method for Sampling Stacks
for Particulate Matter. In: 1971 Book of Triangle Park, NC. August 1975.
ASTM Standards, Part 23. Philadelphia, PA. 14. Vollaro, R.F. The Use of Type S Pitot
1971. ASTM Designation D 2928–71. Tubes for the Measurement of Low Veloci-
5. Vennard, J.K. Elementary Fluid Me- ties. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
chanics. New York. John Wiley and Sons, Emission Measurement Branch, Research
Inc. 1947. Triangle Park, NC. November 1976.
6. Fluid Meters—Their Theory and Applica- 15. Smith, Marvin L. Velocity Calibration
tion. American Society of Mechanical Engi- of EPA Type Source Sampling Probe. United
neers, New York, N.Y. 1959. Technologies Corporation, Pratt and Whit-
7. ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. ney Aircraft Division, East Hartford, CT.
1972. p. 208. 1975.
8. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part
ER17OC00.054</MATH>
16. Vollaro, R.F. Recommended Procedure

26. 1974. p. 648. for Sample Traverses in Ducts Smaller than
9. Vollaro, R.F. Guidelines for Type S Pitot
12 Inches in Diameter. U.S. Environmental
Tube Calibration. U.S. Environmental Pro-
Protection Agency, Emission Measurement
tection Agency, Research Triangle Park,
Branch, Research Triangle Park, NC. Novem-
N.C. (Presented at 1st Annual Meeting,

Source Evaluation Society, Dayton, OH, Sep- ber 1976.
ER17OC00.053</MATH>
tember 18, 1975.) 17. Ower, E. and R.C. Pankhurst. The Meas-
10. Vollaro, R.F. A Type S Pitot Tube Cali- urement of Air Flow, 4th Ed. London,
bration Study. U.S. Environmental Protec- Pergamon Press. 1966.
22
ER17OC00.052</MATH>
18. Vollaro, R.F. A Survey of Commercially pling Probe Configurations on the Magnitude
Available Instrumentation for the Measure- of the S Type Pitot Tube Coefficient for
ment of Low-Range Gas Velocities. U.S. En- Commercially Available Source Sampling
vironmental Protection Agency, Emission Probes. Prepared by the University of Wind-
Measurement Branch, Research Triangle sor for the Ministry of the Environment, To-
Park, NC. November 1976. (Unpublished ronto, Canada. February 1975.
Paper).
19. Gnyp, A.W., et al. An Experimental In- 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
vestigation of the Effect of Pitot Tube-Sam- Validation Data
23
ER17OC00.055</GPH>
24
ER17OC00.056</GPH>
25
ER17OC00.057</GPH>
ER17OC00.059</GPH>
PLANT lllllllllllllllllll DATE llllllllllllllllllll
26
ER17OC00.058</GPH>
RUN NO. llllllllllllllllll OPERATORS llllllllllllllll
STACK DIA. OR DIMENSIONS, m (in.) lll PITOT TUBE I.D. NO. llllllllllll
BAROMETRIC PRESS., mm Hg (in. Hg) ll AVG. COEFFICIENT, Cp = lllllllll
CROSS SECTIONAL AREA, m2 (ft2) llll LAST DATE CALIBRATED lllllllll
SCHEMATIC OF STACK CROSS SECTION
Stack
Vel. Hd., temperature Pg
Traverse Dp mm Hg (Dp)1⁄2
Pt. No. mm (in.) Ts, Ts, (in. Hg)
H2O °C ( °F) °K (°R)
Average(1)
Figure 2–6. Velocity Traverse Data

27
PITOT TUBE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER: CALIBRATED BY: lllllllllllll

DATE: llllllllllllllllllll
‘‘A’’ SIDE CALIBRATION
DPstd DP(s) Deviation
Run No. cm H2O cm H2O Cp(s) Cp(s)—Cp(A)
(in H2O) (in H2O)
1
2
ER17OC00.061</GPH>
28
ER17OC00.060</GPH>
‘‘A’’ SIDE CALIBRATION—Continued

Run No. cm H2O cm H2O Cp(s) Cp(s)—Cp(A)
(in H2O) (in H2O)
Cp, avg
(SIDE A)
‘‘B’’ SIDE CALIBRATION

Run No. cm H2O cm H2O Cp(s) Cp(s)—Cp(B)
(in H2O) (in H2O)
Cp, avg
(SIDE B)
[Cp, avg (side A)—Cp, avg (side B)]*

3
∑ C p(s) − Cp ( A or B)
*Must be less than or equal to 0.01
i =1 Figure 2–9. Pitot Tube Calibration Data

σ A or B = Eq. 2-5
3
29
ER17OC00.062</GPH>
METHOD 2A—DIRECT MEASUREMENT OF GAS hance the quality of the data obtained from
VOLUME THROUGH PIPES AND SMALL DUCTS air pollutant sampling methods.
NOTE: This method does not include all of 2.0 Summary of Method
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup-
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essen- 2.1 A gas volume meter is used to measure
tial to its performance. Some material is in- gas volume directly. Temperature and pres-
corporated by reference from other methods sure measurements are made to allow cor-
in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable re- rection of the volume to standard conditions.
sults, persons using this method should have
a thorough knowledge of at least the fol- 3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
lowing additional test methods: Method 1, 4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
Method 2.
5.0 Safety
1.1 This method is applicable for the de-
termination of gas flow rates in pipes and
ment. This test method may not address all
small ducts, either in-line or at exhaust posi-

tions, within the temperature range of 0 to 50
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
°C (32 to 122 °F).
test method to establish appropriate safety
30
ER17OC00.063</GPH>
and health practices and determine the ap- difficult to describe all possible installation
plicability of regulatory limitations prior to schemes. In general, flange fittings should be
performing this test method. used for all connections wherever possible.
Gaskets or other seal materials should be
6.0 Equipment and Supplies used to assure leak-tight connections. The
Specifications for the apparatus are given volume meter should be located so as to
below. Any other apparatus that has been avoid severe vibrations and other factors
demonstrated (subject to approval of the Ad- that may affect the meter calibration.
ministrator) to be capable of meeting the 8.2 Leak Test.
specifications will be considered acceptable. 8.2.1 A volume meter installed at a loca-
6.1 Gas Volume Meter. A positive dis- tion under positive pressure may be leak-
placement meter, turbine meter, or other di- checked at the meter connections by using a
rect measuring device capable of measuring liquid leak detector solution containing a
volume to within 2 percent. The meter shall surfactant. Apply a small amount of the so-
be equipped with a temperature sensor (accu- lution to the connections. If a leak exists,
rate to within ±2 percent of the minimum ab- bubbles will form, and the leak must be cor-
solute temperature) and a pressure gauge rected.
(accurate to within ±2.5 mm Hg). The manu- 8.2.2 A volume meter installed at a loca-
facturer’s recommended capacity of the tion under negative pressure is very difficult
meter shall be sufficient for the expected to test for leaks without blocking flow at the
maximum and minimum flow rates for the inlet of the line and watching for meter
sampling conditions. Temperature, pressure, movement. If this procedure is not possible,
corrosive characteristics, and pipe size are visually check all connections to assure
factors necessary to consider in selecting a leak-tight seals.
suitable gas meter. 8.3 Volume Measurement.
6.2 Barometer. A mercury, aneroid, or
8.3.1 For sources with continuous, steady
other barometer capable of measuring at-
emission flow rates, record the initial meter
mospheric pressure to within ±2.5 mm Hg.
volume reading, meter temperature(s), meter
NOTE: In many cases, the barometric read- pressure, and start the stopwatch. Through-
ing may be obtained from a nearby National out the test period, record the meter tem-
Weather Service station, in which case the peratures and pressures so that average val-
station value (which is the absolute baro- ues can be determined. At the end of the
metric pressure) shall be requested and an test, stop the timer, and record the elapsed
adjustment for elevation differences between time, the final volume reading, meter tem-
the weather station and sampling point shall perature, and pressure. Record the baro-
be applied at a rate of minus 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) metric pressure at the beginning and end of
Hg per 30 m (100 ft) elevation increase or vice the test run. Record the data on a table simi-
versa for elevation decrease. lar to that shown in Figure 2A–1.
6.3 Stopwatch. Capable of measurement 8.3.2 For sources with noncontinuous,
to within 1 second. non-steady emission flow rates, use the pro-
cedure in Section 8.3.1 with the addition of
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved] the following: Record all the meter param-
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis eters and the start and stop times cor-
responding to each process cyclical or non-
8.1 Installation. As there are numerous continuous event.
types of pipes and small ducts that may be
subject to volume measurement, it would be 9.0 Quality Control
10.1–10.4 ........................... Sampling equipment calibration ............... Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate,
sample volume.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization Attach the test meter to the wind tunnel so
that the total flow passes through the test
10.1 Volume Meter. meter. For each calibration run, conduct a 4-
10.1.1 The volume meter is calibrated point traverse along one stack diameter at a
against a standard reference meter prior to position at least eight diameters of straight
its initial use in the field. The reference tunnel downstream and two diameters up-
meter is a spirometer or liquid displacement stream of any bend, inlet, or air mover. De-
meter with a capacity consistent with that
termine the traverse point locations as spec-

of the test meter. ified in Method 1. Calculate the reference
10.1.2 Alternatively, a calibrated, stand- volume using the velocity values following
ard pitot may be used as the reference meter the procedure in Method 2, the wind tunnel
in conjunction with a wind tunnel assembly. cross-sectional area, and the run time.
31
10.1.3 Set up the test meter in a configu- NOTE: If the volume meter calibration coef-
ration similar to that used in the field in- ficient values obtained before and after a
stallation (i.e., in relation to the flow mov- test series differ by more than 5 percent, the
ing device). Connect the temperature sensor test series shall either be voided, or calcula-
and pressure gauge as they are to be used in tions for the test series shall be performed
the field. Connect the reference meter at the using whichever meter coefficient value (i.e.,
inlet of the flow line, if appropriate for the before or after) gives the greater value of
meter, and begin gas flow through the sys- pollutant emission rate.
tem to condition the meters. During this
10.2 Temperature Sensor. After each test
conditioning operation, check the system for
series, check the temperature sensor at am-
leaks.
bient temperature. Use an American Society
10.1.4 The calibration shall be performed
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) mercury-
during at least three different flow rates.
in-glass reference thermometer, or equiva-
The calibration flow rates shall be about 0.3,
lent, as a reference. If the sensor being
0.6, and 0.9 times the rated maximum flow
checked agrees within 2 percent (absolute
rate of the test meter.
10.1.5 For each calibration run, the data temperature) of the reference, the tempera-
to be collected include: reference meter ini- ture data collected in the field shall be con-
tial and final volume readings, the test sidered valid. Otherwise, the test data shall
meter initial and final volume reading, be considered invalid or adjustments of the
meter average temperature and pressure, results shall be made, subject to the ap-
barometric pressure, and run time. Repeat proval of the Administrator.
the runs at each flow rate at least three 10.3 Barometer. Calibrate the barometer
times. used against a mercury barometer prior to
10.1.6 Calculate the test meter calibration the field test.
coefficient as indicated in Section 12.2.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
10.1.7 Compare the three Ym values at
each of the flow rates tested and determine Sample collection and analysis are concur-
the maximum and minimum values. The dif- rent for this method (see Section 8.0).
ference between the maximum and minimum
values at each flow rate should be no greater 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
than 0.030. Extra runs may be required to
Carry out calculations, retaining at least
complete this requirement. If this specifica-
one extra decimal figure beyond that of the
tion cannot be met in six successive runs,
acquired data. Round off figures after final
the test meter is not suitable for use. In ad-
calculation.
dition, the meter coefficients should be be-
tween 0.95 and 1.05. If these specifications are 12.1 Nomenclature.
met at all the flow rates, average all the Ym f=Final reading.
values from runs meeting the specifications i=Initial reading.
to obtain an average meter calibration coef- Pbar=Barometric pressure, mm Hg.
ficient, Ym. Pg=Average static pressure in volume meter,
10.1.8 The procedure above shall be per- mm Hg.
formed at least once for each volume meter. Qs=Gas flow rate, m3/min, standard condi-
Thereafter, an abbreviated calibration check tions.
shall be completed following each field test.
s=Standard conditions, 20 °C and 760 mm Hg.
The calibration of the volume meter shall be
Tr=Reference meter average temperature, °K
checked with the meter pressure set at the
(°R).
average value encountered during the field
test. Three calibration checks (runs) shall be Tm=Test meter average temperature, °K (°R).
performed using this average flow rate value. Vr=Reference meter volume reading, m3.
Calculate the average value of the calibra- Vm=Test meter volume reading, m3.
tion factor. If the calibration has changed by Ym=Test meter calibration coefficient,
more than 5 percent, recalibrate the meter dimensionless.
over the full range of flow as described q=Elapsed test period time, min.
above. 12.2 Test Meter Calibration Coefficient.
Ym =
(V
rf )
− Vri Pb Tr (abs)
Eq. 2A-1
(Vmf )( )
− Vm i Pb + Pg Tm (abs)
12.3 Volume.
32
ER17OC00.064</MATH>
Environmental Protection Agency Pt. 60, App. A–1, Meth. 2B
Yms = Ym ⎢
( f )(
⎡ Pbar + Pg Vm − Vm (293 °K ) ⎤
i
⎥
) Eq. 2-2
⎢
⎣
( Tm )( 760 mmHg ) ⎥
⎦
12.4 Gas Flow Rate. 2.0 Summary of Method
Vms 2.1 Organic carbon concentration and vol-

Qs = Eq. 2A- 3 ume flow rate are measured at the inciner-
θ ator inlet using either Method 25A or Method
25B and Method 2A, respectively. Organic
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] carbon, carbon dioxide (CO2), and carbon
monoxide (CO) concentrations are measured
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] at the outlet using either Method 25A or
Method 25B and Method 10, respectively. The
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] ratio of total carbon at the incinerator inlet
16.0 References and outlet is multiplied by the inlet volume
to determine the exhaust volume flow rate.
1. Rom, Jerome J. Maintenance, Calibra-
tion, and Operation of Isokinetic Source 3.0 Definitions
Sampling Equipment. U.S. Environmental
Same as Section 3.0 of Method 10 and
Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park,
NC. Publication No. APTD–0576. March 1972. Method 25A.
2. Wortman, Martin, R. Vollaro, and P.R. 4.0 Interferences
Westlin. Dry Gas Volume Meter Calibra-
tions. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. Same as Section 4.0 of Method 10.
Vol. 2, No. 2. May 1977.
3. Westlin, P.R., and R.T. Shigehara. Pro- 5.0 Safety
cedure for Calibrating and Using Dry Gas 5.1 This method may involve hazardous
Volume Meters as Calibration Standards. materials, operations, and equipment. This
Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. Vol.
test method may not address all of the safe-
3, No. 1. February 1978.
ty problems associated with its use. It is the
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and responsibility of the user of this test method
Validation Data [Reserved] to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of
METHOD 2B—DETERMINATION OF EXHAUST GAS regulatory limitations prior to performing
VOLUME FLOW RATE FROM GASOLINE VAPOR this test method.
INCINERATORS
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- Same as Section 6.0 of Method 2A, Method
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana- 10, and Method 25A and/or Method 25B as ap-
lytical) essential to its performance. Some plicable, with the addition of the following:
material is incorporated by reference from 6.1 This analyzer must meet the specifica-
other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob- tions set forth in Section 6.1.2 of Method 10,
tain reliable results, persons using this except that the span shall be 15 percent CO2
method should also have a thorough knowl- by volume.
edge of at least the following additional test
methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 2A, 7.0 Reagents and Standards
Method 10, Method 25A, Method 25B.
Same as Section 7.0 of Method 10 and
1.0 Scope and Application Method 25A, with the following addition and
exceptions:
termination of exhaust volume flow rate 7.1 Carbon Dioxide Analyzer Calibration.
from incinerators that process gasoline va- CO2 gases meeting the specifications set
pors consisting primarily of alkanes, forth in Section 7 of Method 6C are required.
alkenes, and/or arenes (aromatic hydro- 7.2 Hydrocarbon Analyzer Calibration.
carbons). It is assumed that the amount of Methane shall not be used as a calibration
auxiliary fuel is negligible. gas when performing this method.

1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to 7.3 Fuel Gas. If Method 25B is used to
ER17OC00.066</MATH>
the requirements of this method will en- measure the organic carbon concentrations
hance the quality of the data obtained from at both the inlet and exhaust, no fuel gas is
air pollutant sampling methods. required.
33
ER17OC00.065</MATH>
Pt. 60, App. A–1, Meth. 2B 40 CFR Ch. I (7–1–09 Edition)
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis bration data and report both resulting vol-
umes. Then, for emissions calculations, use
8.1 Pre-test Procedures. Perform all pre-
the volume measurement resulting in the
test procedures (e.g., system performance
greatest emission rate or concentration.
checks, leak checks) necessary to determine
gas volume flow rate and organic carbon con- 11.0 Analytical Procedure
centration in the vapor line to the inciner-
ator inlet and to determine organic carbon, Sample collection and analysis are concur-
carbon monoxide, and carbon dioxide con- rent for this method (see Section 8.0).
centrations at the incinerator exhaust, as
outlined in Method 2A, Method 10, and Meth- 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
od 25A and/or Method 25B as applicable. Carry out the calculations, retaining at
8.2 Sampling. At the beginning of the test least one extra decimal figure beyond that of
period, record the initial parameters for the the acquired data. Round off figures after the
inlet volume meter according to the proce- final calculation.
dures in Method 2A and mark all of the re-
12.1 Nomenclature.
corder strip charts to indicate the start of
the test. Conduct sampling and analysis as Coe=Mean carbon monoxide concentration in
outlined in Method 2A, Method 10, and Meth- system exhaust, ppm.
od 25A and/or Method 25B as applicable. Con- (CO2)2=Ambient carbon dioxide concentra-
tinue recording inlet organic and exhaust tion, ppm (if not measured during the test
CO2, CO, and organic concentrations period, may be assumed to equal 300 ppm).
throughout the test. During periods of proc- (CO2)e=Mean carbon dioxide concentration in
ess interruption and halting of gas flow, stop system exhaust, ppm.
the timer and mark the recorder strip charts HCe=Mean organic concentration in system
so that data from this interruption are not exhaust as defined by the calibration gas,
included in the calculations. At the end of ppm.
the test period, record the final parameters Hci=Mean organic concentration in system
for the inlet volume meter and mark the end inlet as defined by the calibration gas,
on all of the recorder strip charts. ppm.
8.3 Post-test Procedures. Perform all Ke=Hydrocarbon calibration gas factor for
post-test procedures (e.g., drift tests, leak the exhaust hydrocarbon analyzer, unitless
checks), as outlined in Method 2A, Method [equal to the number of carbon atoms per
10, and Method 25A and/or Method 25B as ap- molecule of the gas used to calibrate the
plicable. analyzer (2 for ethane, 3 for propane, etc.)].
Ki=Hydrocarbon calibration gas factor for
9.0 Quality Control
the inlet hydrocarbon analyzer, unitless.
Same as Section 9.0 of Method 2A, Method Ves=Exhaust gas volume, m3.
10, and Method 25A. Vis=Inlet gas volume, m3.
Qes=Exhaust gas volume flow rate, m3/min.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Qis=Inlet gas volume flow rate, m3/min.
Same as Section 10.0 of Method 2A, Method q=Sample run time, min.
10, and Method 25A. s=Standard conditions: 20 °C, 760 mm Hg.
NOTE: If a manifold system is used for the 12.2 Concentrations. Determine mean con-
exhaust analyzers, all the analyzers and centrations of inlet organics, outlet CO2,
sample pumps must be operating when the outlet CO, and outlet organics according to
analyzer calibrations are performed. the procedures in the respective methods and
10.1 If an analyzer output does not meet the analyzers’ calibration curves, and for the
the specifications of the method, invalidate time intervals specified in the applicable
the test data for the period. Alternatively, regulations.
calculate the exhaust volume results using 12.3 Exhaust Gas Volume. Calculate the
initial calibration data and using final cali- exhaust gas volume as follows:
K i (HC i )
Ves = Vis Eq. 2B-1
[ ]
K e (HC e ) + (CO 2 )e − (CO 2 )a + CO e
12.4 Exhaust Gas Volume Flow Rate. Cal-

culate the exhaust gas volume flow rate as Ves
Q es =
ER17OC00.210</MATH>
follows: Eq. 2B-2

Θ
34
ER17OC00.067</MATH>
Environmental Protection Agency Pt. 60, App. A–1, Meth. 2C
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] test method may not address all of the safe-
ty problems associated with its use. It is the
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] responsibility of the user of this test method
to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of
16.0 References regulatory limitations prior to performing
this test method.
Same as Section 16.0 of Method 2A, Method
10, and Method 25A. 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Same as Method 2, Section 6.0, with the ex-
Validation Data [Reserved] ception of the following:
6.1 Standard Pitot Tube (instead of Type
METHOD 2C—DETERMINATION OF GAS VELOC- S). A standard pitot tube which meets the
ITY AND VOLUMETRIC FLOW RATE IN SMALL specifications of Section 6.7 of Method 2. Use
STACKS OR DUCTS (STANDARD PITOT TUBE) a coefficient of 0.99 unless it is calibrated
against another standard pitot tube with a
NIST-traceable coefficient (see Section 10.2
of Method 2).
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essen-
6.2 Alternative Pitot Tube. A modified
tial to its performance. Some material is in-
hemispherical-nosed pitot tube (see Figure
corporated by reference from other methods
2C–1), which features a shortened stem and
in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable re-
enlarged impact and static pressure holes.
sults, persons using this method should also
Use a coefficient of 0.99 unless it is cali-
have a thorough knowledge of at least the
brated as mentioned in Section 6.1 above.
following additional test methods: Method 1,
This pitot tube is useful in particulate liquid
Method 2.
droplet-laden gas streams when a ‘‘back
1.0 Scope and Application purge’’ is ineffective.
1.1 This method is applicable for the de- 7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
termination of average velocity and volu-
metric flow rate of gas streams in small 8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
stacks or ducts. Limits on the applicability 8.1 Follow the general procedures in Sec-
of this method are identical to those set tion 8.0 of Method 2, except conduct the
forth in Method 2, Section 1.0, except that measurements at the traverse points speci-
this method is limited to stationary source fied in Method 1A. The static and impact
stacks or ducts less than about 0.30 meter (12 pressure holes of standard pitot tubes are
in.) in diameter, or 0.071 m2 (113 in.2) in cross- susceptible to plugging in particulate-laden
sectional area, but equal to or greater than gas streams. Therefore, adequate proof that
about 0.10 meter (4 in.) in diameter, or 0.0081 the openings of the pitot tube have not
m2 (12.57 in.2) in cross-sectional area. plugged during the traverse period must be
1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to furnished; this can be done by taking the ve-
the requirements of this method will en- locity head (Dp) heading at the final traverse
hance the quality of the data obtained from point, cleaning out the impact and static
air pollutant sampling methods. holes of the standard pitot tube by ‘‘back-
purging’’ with pressurized air, and then tak-
2.0 Summary of Method
ing another Dp reading. If the Dp readings
2.1 The average gas velocity in a stack or made before and after the air purge are the
duct is determined from the gas density and same (within ±5 percent) the traverse is ac-
from measurement of velocity heads with a ceptable. Otherwise, reject the run. Note
standard pitot tube. that if the Dp at the final traverse point is
unsuitably low, another point may be se-
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] lected. If ‘‘back purging’’ at regular intervals
is part of the procedure, then take compara-
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
tive Dp readings, as above, for the last two
5.0 Safety back purges at which suitably high Dp read-
ings are observed.
5.1 This method may involve hazardous
materials, operations, and equipment. This 9.0 Quality Control
10.0 .................................... Sampling equipment calibration ............... Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas velocity
head.
35
Pt. 60, App. A–1, Meth. 2D 40 CFR Ch. I (7–1–09 Edition)
10.0 Calibration and Standardization 13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
Same as Method 2, Sections 10.2 through 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
10.4.
Sample collection and analysis are concur- 16.0 References
rent for this method (see Section 8.0). Same as Method 2, Section 16.0.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
Same as Method 2, Section 12.0. Validation Data
METHOD 2D—MEASUREMENT OF GAS VOLUME 2.0 Summary of Method

FLOW RATES IN SMALL PIPES AND DUCTS
2.1 All the gas flow in the pipe or duct is
NOTE: This method does not include all of directed through a rotameter, orifice plate
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- or similar device to measure flow rate or
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essen- pressure drop. The device has been pre-
tial to its performance. Some material is in- viously calibrated in a manner that insures
corporated by reference from other methods its proper calibration for the gas being meas-
in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable re- ured. Absolute temperature and pressure
sults, persons using this method should also measurements are made to allow correction
have a thorough knowledge of at least the of volumetric flow rates to standard condi-
following additional test methods: Method 1, tions.
Method 2, and Method 2A.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
termination of the volumetric flow rates of 5.0 Safety
gas streams in small pipes and ducts. It can 5.1 This method may involve hazardous
be applied to intermittent or variable gas materials, operations, and equipment. This
flows only with particular caution. test method may not address all of the safe-
1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to ty problems associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this test method

hance the quality of the data obtained from to establish appropriate safety and health
air pollutant sampling methods. practices and determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to performing
this test method.
36
ER17OC00.068</GPH>
Environmental Protection Agency Pt. 60, App. A–1, Meth. 2D
6.0 Equipment and Supplies 7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
Specifications for the apparatus are given 8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
below. Any other apparatus that has been
demonstrated (subject to approval of the Ad- 8.1 Installation and Leak Check. Same as
ministrator) to be capable of meeting the Method 2A, Sections 8.1 and 8.2, respectively.
specifications will be considered acceptable. 8.2 Volume Rate Measurement.
8.2.1 Continuous, Steady Flow. At least
6.1 Gas Metering Rate or Flow Element
once an hour, record the metering device
Device. A rotameter, orifice plate, or other
flow rate or pressure drop reading, and the
volume rate or pressure drop measuring de-
metering device temperature and pressure.
vice capable of measuring the stack flow
Make a minimum of 12 equally spaced read-
rate to within ±5 percent. The metering de-
ings of each parameter during the test pe-
vice shall be equipped with a temperature
riod. Record the barometric pressure at the
gauge accurate to within ±2 percent of the
beginning and end of the test period. Record
minimum absolute stack temperature and a
the data on a table similar to that shown in
pressure gauge (accurate to within ±5 mm
Figure 2D–1.
Hg). The capacity of the metering device
8.2.2 Noncontinuous and Nonsteady Flow.
shall be sufficient for the expected maximum
Use volume rate devices with particular cau-
and minimum flow rates at the stack gas
tion. Calibration will be affected by vari-
conditions. The magnitude and variability of
ation in stack gas temperature, pressure and
stack gas flow rate, molecular weight, tem-
molecular weight. Use the procedure in Sec-
perature, pressure, dewpoint, and corrosive
tion 8.2.1 with the addition of the following:
characteristics, and pipe or duct size are fac-
Record all the metering device parameters
tors to consider in choosing a suitable me-
on a time interval frequency sufficient to
tering device.
adequately profile each process cyclical or
6.2 Barometer. Same as Method 2, Section noncontinuous event. A multichannel con-
6.5. tinuous recorder may be used.
6.3 Stopwatch. Capable of measurement
to within 1 second. 9.0 Quality Control
10.0 .................................... Sampling equipment calibration ............... Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate
or sample volume.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization 11.0 Analytical Procedure.

Same as Method 2A, Section 10.0, with the Sample collection and analysis are concur-
following exception: rent for this method (see Section 8.0).
10.1 Gas Metering Device. Same as Meth-
od 2A, Section 10.1, except calibrate the me- 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
tering device with the principle stack gas to 12.1 Nomenclature.
be measured (examples: air, nitrogen) Pbar=Barometric pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
against a standard reference meter. A cali- Pm=Test meter average static pressure, mm
brated dry gas meter is an acceptable ref- Hg (in. Hg).
erence meter. Ideally, calibrate the metering Qr=Reference meter volume flow rate read-
device in the field with the actual gas to be ing, m3/min (ft3/min).
metered. For metering devices that have a
Qm=Test meter volume flow rate reading, m3/
volume rate readout, calculate the test me-
min (ft3/min).
tering device calibration coefficient, Ym, for
Tr=Absolute reference meter average tem-
each run shown in Equation 2D–2 Section
perature, °K (°R).
12.3.
Tm=Absolute test meter average tempera-
10.2 For metering devices that do not
ture, °K (°R).
have a volume rate readout, refer to the
Kl=0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units,=17.65
manufacturer’s instructions to calculate the
°R/in. Hg for English units.
Vm2 corresponding to each Vr.
12.2 Gas Flow Rate.
10.3 Temperature Gauge. Use the proce-
dure and specifications in Method 2A, Sec-
tion 10.2. Perform the calibration at a tem-
Q s = K1Ym Q m
(Pbar + Pm ) Eq. 2D-1
perature that approximates field test condi-
tions.
Tm
10.4 Barometer. Calibrate the barometer 12.3 Test Meter Device Calibration Coeffi-
to be used in the field test with a mercury cient. Calculation for testing metering de-
barometer prior to the field test. vice calibration coefficient, Ym.
37
ER17OC00.069</MATH>
Pt. 60, App. A–1, Meth. 2E 40 CFR Ch. I (7–1–09 Edition)
3. Orifice Metering of Natural Gas. Amer-
Q r Tr Pbar ican Gas Association. Arlington, VA. Report
Ym = Eq. 2D -2
Q m Tm ( Pbar + Pm )
No. 3. March 1978. 88 pp.

13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] Validation Data
Plant llllllllllllllllllll
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] Date lllllllllllllllllllll
Run No. lllllllllllllllllll
Sample location lllllllllllllll
16.0 References Barometric pressure (mm Hg):
Start llllllllllllllllllll
1. Spink, L.K. Principles and Practice of Finish llllllllllllllllllll
Flowmeter Engineering. The Foxboro Com- Operators llllllllllllllllll
pany. Foxboro, MA. 1967. Metering device No. lllllllllllll
2. Benedict, R.P. Fundamentals of Tem- Calibration coefficient lllllllllll
perature, Pressure, and Flow Measurements. Calibration gas lllllllllllllll
John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York, NY. 1969. Date to recalibrate lllllllllllll
Temperature
Flow rate Static Pressure
Time reading [mm Hg (in. Hg)] °C (°F) °K (°R)
Average
Figure 2D–1. Volume Flow Rate rate of nonmethane organic compounds

Measurement Data (NMOC) from landfills.
METHOD 2E—DETERMINATION OF LANDFILL the requirements of this method will en-
GAS PRODUCTION FLOW RATE hance the quality of the data obtained from
NOTE: This method does not include all of air pollutant sampling methods.
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana- 2.0 Summary of Method
lytical) essential to its performance. Some 2.1 Extraction wells are installed either in
material is incorporated by reference from a cluster of three or at five dispersed loca-
other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob- tions in the landfill. A blower is used to ex-
tain reliable results, persons using this tract LFG from the landfill. LFG composi-
method should also have a thorough knowl- tion, landfill pressures, and orifice pressure
edge of at least the following additional test differentials from the wells are measured
methods: Methods 2 and 3C. and the landfill gas production flow rate is
calculated.
1.1 Applicability. This method applies to

the measurement of landfill gas (LFG) pro-
duction flow rate from municipal solid waste
landfills and is used to calculate the flow
38
ER17OC00.070</MATH>
Environmental Protection Agency Pt. 60, App. A–1, Meth. 2E
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] 6.14 Barometer. Same as Method 4, Sec-
tion 6.1.5.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved] 6.15 Differential Pressure Gauge. Water-
filled U-tube manometer or equivalent, capa-
5.0 Safety
ble of measuring within 0.02 mm Hg (0.01 in.
5.1 Since this method is complex, only ex- H2O), for measuring the pressure of the pres-
perienced personnel should perform the test. sure probes.
Landfill gas contains methane, therefore ex-
plosive mixtures may exist at or near the 7.0 Reagents and Standards. Not Applicable
landfill. It is advisable to take appropriate
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
safety precautions when testing landfills,
and Transport
such as refraining from smoking and install-
ing explosion-proof equipment. 8.1 Placement of Extraction Wells. The
landfill owner or operator may install a sin-
6.0 Equipment and Supplies gle cluster of three extraction wells in a test
6.1 Well Drilling Rig. Capable of boring a area or space five equal-volume wells over
0.61 m (24 in.) diameter hole into the landfill the landfill. The cluster wells are rec-
to a minimum of 75 percent of the landfill ommended but may be used only if the com-
depth. The depth of the well shall not extend position, age of the refuse, and the landfill
to the bottom of the landfill or the liquid depth of the test area can be determined.
level. 8.1.1 Cluster Wells. Consult landfill site
6.2 Gravel. No fines. Gravel diameter records for the age of the refuse, depth, and
should be appreciably larger than perfora- composition of various sections of the land-
tions stated in Sections 6.10 and 8.2. fill. Select an area near the perimeter of the
6.3 Bentonite. landfill with a depth equal to or greater than
6.4 Backfill Material. Clay, soil, and the average depth of the landfill and with
sandy loam have been found to be accept- the average age of the refuse between 2 and
able. 10 years old. Avoid areas known to contain
6.5 Extraction Well Pipe. Minimum di- nondecomposable materials, such as con-
ameter of 3 in., constructed of polyvinyl crete and asbestos. Locate the cluster wells
chloride (PVC), high density polyethylene as shown in Figure 2E–2.
(HDPE), fiberglass, stainless steel, or other 8.1.1.1 The age of the refuse in a test area
suitable nonporous material capable of will not be uniform, so calculate a weighted
transporting landfill gas. average age of the refuse as shown in Section
6.6 Above Ground Well Assembly. Valve 12.2.
capable of adjusting gas flow, such as a gate, 8.1.2 Equal Volume Wells. Divide the sec-
ball, or butterfly valve; sampling ports at tions of the landfill that are at least 2 years
the well head and outlet; and a flow meas- old into five areas representing equal vol-
uring device, such as an in-line orifice meter umes. Locate an extraction well near the
or pitot tube. A schematic of the above- center of each area.
ground well head assembly is shown in Fig- 8.2 Installation of Extraction Wells. Use a
ure 2E–1. well drilling rig to dig a 0.6 m (24 in.) diame-
6.7 Cap. Constructed of PVC or HDPE. ter hole in the landfill to a minimum of 75
6.8 Header Piping. Constructed of PVC or percent of the landfill depth, not to extend
HDPE. to the bottom of the landfill or the liquid
6.9 Auger. Capable of boring a 0.15-to 0.23- level. Perforate the bottom two thirds of the
m (6-to 9-in.) diameter hole to a depth equal extraction well pipe. A minimum require-
to the top of the perforated section of the ex- ment for perforations is holes or slots with
traction well, for pressure probe installation. an open area equivalent to 0.01-m (0.5-in.) di-
6.10 Pressure Probe. Constructed of PVC ameter holes spaced 90° apart every 0.1 to 0.2
or stainless steel (316), 0.025-m (1-in.). Sched- m (4 to 8 in.). Place the extraction well in
ule 40 pipe. Perforate the bottom two-thirds. the center of the hole and backfill with grav-
A minimum requirement for perforations is el to a level 0.30 m (1 ft) above the perforated
slots or holes with an open area equivalent section. Add a layer of backfill material 1.2
to four 0.006-m (1⁄4-in.) diameter holes spaced m (4 ft) thick. Add a layer of bentonite 0.9 m
90° apart every 0.15 m (6 in.). (3 ft) thick, and backfill the remainder of the
6.11 Blower and Flare Assembly. Explo- hole with cover material or material equal
sion-proof blower, capable of extracting LFG in permeability to the existing cover mate-
at a flow rate of 8.5 m3/min (300 ft3/min), a rial. The specifications for extraction well
water knockout, and flare or incinerator. installation are shown in Figure 2E–3.
6.12 Standard Pitot Tube and Differential 8.3 Pressure Probes. Shallow pressure
Pressure Gauge for Flow Rate Calibration probes are used in the check for infiltration
with Standard Pitot. Same as Method 2, Sec- of air into the landfill, and deep pressure
tions 6.7 and 6.8. probes are use to determine the radius of in-
6.13 Orifice Meter. Orifice plate, pressure fluence. Locate pressure probes along three
tabs, and pressure measuring device to meas- radial arms approximately 120° apart at dis-
ure the LFG flow rate. tances of 3, 15, 30, and 45 m (10, 50, 100, and
39
150 ft) from the extraction well. The tester 8.7 Short-Term Testing. The purpose of
has the option of locating additional pres- short-term testing is to determine the max-
sure probes at distances every 15 m (50 feet) imum vacuum that can be applied to the
beyond 45 m (150 ft). Example placements of wells without infiltration of ambient air into
probes are shown in Figure 2E–4. The 15-, 30- the landfill. The short-term testing is per-
, and 45-m, (50-, 100-, and 150-ft) probes from formed on one well at a time. Burn all LFG
each well, and any additional probes located with a flare or incinerator.
along the three radial arms (deep probes), 8.7.1 Use the blower to extract LFG from
shall extend to a depth equal to the top of a single well at a rate at least twice the stat-
the perforated section of the extraction ic flow rate of the respective well measured
wells. All other probes (shallow probes) shall in Section 8.6.2. If using a single blower and
extend to a depth equal to half the depth of flare assembly and a common header system,
the deep probes. close the control valve on the wells not being
8.3.1 Use an auger to dig a hole, 0.15- to measured. Allow 24 hr for the system to sta-
0.23-m (6-to 9-in.) in diameter, for each pres- bilize at this flow rate.
sure probe. Perforate the bottom two thirds 8.7.2 Test for infiltration of air into the
of the pressure probe. A minimum require- landfill by measuring the gauge pressures of
ment for perforations is holes or slots with the shallow pressure probes and using Meth-
an open area equivalent to four 0.006-m (0.25- od 3C to determine the LFG N2 concentra-
in.) diameter holes spaced 90° apart every tion. If the LFG N2 concentration is less
0.15 m (6 in.). Place the pressure probe in the than 5 percent and all of the shallow probes
center of the hole and backfill with gravel to have a positive gauge pressure, increase the
a level 0.30 m (1 ft) above the perforated sec- blower vacuum by 3.7 mm Hg (2 in. H2O),
tion. Add a layer of backfill material at least wait 24 hr, and repeat the tests for infiltra-
1.2 m (4 ft) thick. Add a layer of bentonite at tion. Continue the above steps of increasing
least 0.3 m (1 ft) thick, and backfill the re- blower vacuum by 3.7 mm Hg (2 in. H2O),
mainder of the hole with cover material or waiting 24 hr, and testing for infiltration
material equal in permeability to the exist- until the concentration of N2 exceeds 5 per-
ing cover material. The specifications for cent or any of the shallow probes have a neg-
pressure probe installation are shown in Fig- ative gauge pressure. When this oc-
ure 2E–5. curs,reduce the blower vacuum to the max-
8.4 LFG Flow Rate Measurement. Place imum setting at which the N2 concentration
the flow measurement device, such as an ori- was less than 5 percent and the gauge pres-
fice meter, as shown in Figure 2E–1. Attach sures of the shallow probes are positive.
the wells to the blower and flare assembly. 8.7.3 At this blower vacuum, measure at-
The individual wells may be ducted to a mospheric pressure (Pbar) every 8 hr for 24 hr,
common header so that a single blower, flare and record the LFG flow rate (Qs) and the
assembly, and flow meter may be used. Use probe gauge pressures (Pf) for all of the
the procedures in Section 10.1 to calibrate probes. Convert the gauge pressures of the
the flow meter. deep probes to absolute pressures for each 8-
8.5 Leak-Check. A leak-check of the hr reading at Qs as shown in Section 12.4.
above ground system is required for accurate 8.7.4 For each probe, average the 8-hr deep
flow rate measurements and for safety. Sam- pressure probe absolute pressure readings
ple LFG at the well head sample port and at and record as Pfa (the final average absolute
the outlet sample port. Use Method 3C to de- pressure).
termine nitrogen (N2) concentrations. Deter- 8.7.5 For each probe, compare the initial
mine the difference between the well head average pressure (Pia) from Section 8.6.1 to
and outlet N2 concentrations using the for- the final average pressure (Pfa). Determine
mula in Section 12.3. The system passes the the furthermost point from the well head
leak-check if the difference is less than 10,000 along each radial arm where Pfa ≤ Pia. This
ppmv. distance is the maximum radius of influence
8.6 Static Testing. Close the control (Rm), which is the distance from the well af-
valves on the well heads during static test- fected by the vacuum. Average these values
ing. Measure the gauge pressure (Pg) at each to determine the average maximum radius of
deep pressure probe and the barometric pres- influence (Rma).
sure (Pbar) every 8 hours (hr) for 3 days. Con- 8.7.6 Calculate the depth (Dst) affected by
vert the gauge pressure of each deep pressure the extraction well during the short term
probe to absolute pressure using the equa- test as shown in Section 12.6. If the com-
tion in Section 12.4. Record as Pi (initial ab- puted value of Dst exceeds the depth of the
solute pressure). landfill, set Dst equal to the landfill depth.
8.6.1 For each probe, average all of the 8- 8.7.7 Calculate the void volume (V) for the
hr deep pressure probe readings (Pi) and extraction well as shown in Section 12.7.
record as Pia (average absolute pressure). Pia 8.7.8 Repeat the procedures in Section 8.7
is used in Section 8.7.5 to determine the max- for each well.
imum radius of influence. 8.8 Calculate the total void volume of the
8.6.2 Measure the static flow rate of each test wells (Vv) by summing the void volumes
well once during static testing. (V) of each well.
40
8.9 Long-Term Testing. The purpose of 8.9.1 Calculate Vt, the total volume of
long-term testing is to extract two void vol- LFG extracted from the wells, as shown in
umes of LFG from the extraction wells. Use Section 12.8.
the blower to extract LFG from the wells. If 8.9.2 Record the final stabilized flow rate
a single Blower and flare assembly and com- as Qf and the gauge pressure for each deep
mon header system are used, open all control probe. If, during the long term testing, the
valves and set the blower vacuum equal to flow rate does not stabilize, calculate Qf by
the highest stabilized blower vacuum dem- averaging the last 10 recorded flow rates.
onstrated by any individual well in Section 8.9.3 For each deep probe, convert each
gauge pressure to absolute pressure as in
8.7. Every 8 hr, sample the LFG from the
Section 12.4. Average these values and record
well head sample port, measure the gauge
as Psa. For each probe, compare Pia to Psa. De-
pressures of the shallow pressure probes, the
termine the furthermost point from the well
blower vacuum, the LFG flow rate, and use head along each radial arm where Psa ≤ Pia.
the criteria for infiltration in Section 8.7.2 This distance is the stabilized radius of influ-
and Method 3C to test for infiltration. If in- ence. Average these values to determine the
filtration is detected, do not reduce the average stabilized radius of influence (Rsa).
blower vacuum, instead reduce the LFG flow 8.10 Determine the NMOC mass emission
rate from the well by adjusting the control rate using the procedures in Section 12.9
valve on the well head. Adjust each affected through 12.15.
well individually. Continue until the equiva-
lent of two total void volumes (Vv) have been 9.0 Quality Control
extracted, or until Vt=2Vv. 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
ures.
10.1 .................................... LFG flow rate meter calibration ............... Ensures accurate measurement of LFG flow rate and
sample volume
10.0 Calibration and Standardization Dst=Depth affected by the test wells in the
short-term test, m.
10.1 LFG Flow Rate Meter (Orifice) Cali-
e=Base number for natural logarithms
bration Procedure. Locate a standard pitot
(2.718).
tube in line with an orifice meter. Use the
procedures in Section 8, 12.5, 12.6, and 12.7 of f=Fraction of decomposable refuse in the
Method 2 to determine the average dry gas landfill.
volumetric flow rate for at least five flow fi=Fraction of the refuse in the ith section.
rates that bracket the expected LFG flow k=Landfill gas generation constant, yr¥1.
rates, except in Section 8.1, use a standard Lo=Methane generation potential, m3/Mg.
pitot tube rather than a Type S pitot tube. Lo′=Revised methane generation potential to
Method 3C may be used to determine the dry account for the amount of
molecular weight. It may be necessary to nondecomposable material in the landfill,
3
m /Mg.
calibrate more than one orifice meter in
order to bracket the LFG flow rates. Con- Mi=Mass of refuse in the ith section, Mg.
struct a calibration curve by plotting the Mr=Mass of decomposable refuse affected by
pressure drops across the orifice meter for the test well, Mg.
each flow rate versus the average dry gas Pbar=Atmospheric pressure, mm Hg.
volumetric flow rate in m3/min of the gas. Pf=Final absolute pressure of the deep pres-
sure probes during short-term testing, mm
11.0 Procedures [Reserved] Hg.
Pfa=Average final absolute pressure of the
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations deep pressure probes during short-term
12.1 Nomenclature. testing, mm Hg.
A=Age of landfill, yr. Pgf=final gauge pressure of the deep pressure
Aavg=Average age of the refuse tested, yr. probes, mm Hg.
Ai=Age of refuse in the ith fraction, yr. Pgi=Initial gauge pressure of the deep pres-
Ar=Acceptance rate, Mg/yr. sure probes, mm Hg.
CNMOC=NMOC concentration, ppmv as hexane Pi=Initial absolute pressure of the deep pres-
(CNMOC=Ct/6). sure probes during static testing, mm Hg.
Co=Concentration of N2 at the outlet, ppmv. Pia=Average initial absolute pressure of the
Ct=NMOC concentration, ppmv (carbon deep pressure probes during static testing,
equivalent) from Method 25C. mm Hg.
Cw=Concentration of N2 at the wellhead, Ps=Final absolute pressure of the deep pres-
ppmv. sure probes during long-term testing, mm
D=Depth affected by the test wells, m. Hg.
41
ER17OC00.083</MATH>
Psa=Average final absolute pressure of the
Dst = WD + R ma Eq. 2E-5
ER17OC00.082</MATH>
deep pressure probes during long-term test-
ing, mm Hg. 12.7 Use the following equation to cal-
Qf=Final stabilized flow rate, m3/min. culate the void volume for the extraction
Qi=LFG flow rate measured at orifice meter well (V).
during the ith interval, m3/min.
Qs=Maximum LFG flow rate at each well de-
termined by short-term test, m3/min. V = 0.40 Π R ma 2 Dst Eq. 2E-6
ER17OC00.081</MATH>
Qt=NMOC mass emission rate, m3/min. 12.8 Use the following equation to cal-
Rm=Maximum radius of influence, m. culate Vt, the total volume of LFG extracted
Rma=Average maximum radius of influence, from the wells.
m.
Rs=Stabilized radius of influence for an indi- n
vidual well, m. Vt = ∑ 60 Q i t vi Eq. 2E-7
ER17OC00.080</MATH>
Rsa=Average stabilized radius of influence,
m. i =1
ti=Age of section i, yr. 12.9 Use the following equation to cal-
tt=Total time of long-term testing, yr. culate the depth affected by the test well. If
tvi=Time of the ith interval (usually 8), hr. using cluster wells, use the average depth of
V=Void volume of test well, m3. the wells for WD. If the value of D is greater
ER17OC00.079</MATH>
Vr=Volume of refuse affected by the test than the depth of the landfill, set D equal to
well, m3. the landfill depth.
Vt=Total volume of refuse affected by the
long-term testing, m3. D = WD + R sa Eq. 2E-8
Vv=Total void volume affected by test wells, 12.10 Use the following equation to cal-
m3. culate the volume of refuse affected by the
ER17OC00.078</MATH>
WD=Well depth, m. test well.
r=Refuse density, Mg/m3 (Assume 0.64 Mg/m3
if data are unavailable).
Vr = R sa 2 ∏ D Eq. 2E-9
12.2 Use the following equation to cal-
culate a weighted average age of landfill 12.11 Use the following equation to cal-
refuse. culate the mass affected by the test well.
ER17OC00.077</MATH>
n M r = Vr ρ Eq. 2E-10
A avg = ∑ fi A i Eq. 2E-1 12.12 Modify Lo to account for the
i =1 nondecomposable refuse in the landfill.
12.3 Use the following equation to deter-
mine the difference in N2 concentrations L o′ = f L o Eq. 2E-11
ER17OC00.076</MATH>
(ppmv) at the well head and outlet location. 12.13 In the following equation, solve for k
(landfill gas generation constant) by
Difference = C o − C w Eq. 2E-2 iteration. A suggested procedure is to select
12.4 Use the following equation to convert a value for k, calculate the left side of the
the gauge pressure (Pg) of each initial deep equation, and if not equal to zero, select an-
ER17OC00.075</MATH>
pressure probe to absolute pressure (Pi). other value for k. Continue this process until
the left hand side of the equation equals
Pi = Pbar + Pgi Eq. 2E-3 zero, ±0.001.
12.5 Use the following equation to convert Qf

the gauge pressures of the deep probes to ab- k e − k A avg − =0 Eq. 2E-12
solute pressures for each 8-hr reading at Qs. 2 L o′ M r
ER17OC00.074</MATH>
Pf = Pbar + Pgf Eq. 2E-4 12.14 Use the following equation to deter-
mine landfill NMOC mass emission rate if
12.6 Use the following equation to cal- the yearly acceptance rate of refuse has been
culate the depth (Dst) affected by the extrac- consistent (10 percent) over the life of the
tion well during the short-term test. landfill.
ER17OC00.073</MATH>
( ) (
Q t = 2 L o′ A r 1 − e − kA C NMOC 3.595 × 10 −9 ) Eq. 2E-13
ER17OC00.072</MATH>
12.15 Use the following equation to deter- the acceptance rate has not been consistent
mine landfill NMOC mass emission rate if over the life of the landfill.
42
ER17OC00.071</MATH>
n
(
Q t = 2 k L o′ C NMOC 3.595 × 10 −9 )∑ M e i
− kt i
Eq. 2E-14
i =1
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] 4. Mandeville and Associates, Procedure

Manual for Landfill Gases Emission Testing.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] 5. Letter and attachments from Briggum,
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] S., Waste Management of North America, to
Thorneloe, S., EPA. Response to July 28, 1988
16.0 References request for additional information. August
1. Same as Method 2, Appendix A, 40 CFR 18, 1988.
Part 60. 6. Letter and attachments from Briggum,
2. Emcon Associates, Methane Generation S., Waste Management of North America, to
and Recovery from Landfills. Ann Arbor Wyatt, S., EPA. Response to December 7,
Science, 1982. 1988 request for additional information. Jan-
3. The Johns Hopkins University, Brown uary 16, 1989.
Station Road Landfill Gas Resource Assess-
ment, Volume 1: Field Testing and Gas Re- 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
covery Projections. Laurel, Maryland: Octo- Validation Data
ber 1982.
43
ER17OC00.084</MATH>
44
ER17OC00.085</MATH>
45
ER17OC00.086</MATH>
46
ER17OC00.087</MATH>
47
ER17OC00.088</MATH>
Pt. 60, App. A–1, Meth. 2F 40 CFR Ch. I (7–1–09 Edition)
METHOD 2F—DETERMINATION OF STACK GAS sults, those using this method should have a
VELOCITY AND VOLUMETRIC FLOW RATE thorough knowledge of at least the following
WITH THREE-DIMENSIONAL PROBES additional test methods: Methods 1, 2, 3 or
3A, and 4.
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- 1.0 Scope and Application
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essen-

tial to its performance. Some material has 1.1 This method is applicable for the deter-
been incorporated from other methods in mination of yaw angle, pitch angle, axial ve-
this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable re- locity and the volumetric flow rate of a gas
48
ER17OC00.089</MATH>
Environmental Protection Agency Pt. 60, App. A–1, Meth. 2F
stream in a stack or duct using a three-di- 3.7.1 ‘‘May’’ is used to indicate that a pro-
mensional (3–D) probe. This method may be vision of this method is optional.
used only when the average stack or duct gas 3.7.2 ‘‘Must,’’ ‘‘Shall,’’ and the imperative
velocity is greater than or equal to 20 ft/sec. form of verbs (such as ‘‘record’’ or ‘‘enter’’)
When the above condition cannot be met, al- are used to indicate that a provision of this
ternative procedures, approved by the Ad- method is mandatory.
ministrator, U.S. Environmental Protection 3.7.3 ‘‘Should’’ is used to indicate that a
Agency, shall be used to make accurate flow provision of this method is not mandatory,
rate determinations. but is highly recommended as good practice.
3.8 Method 1. Refers to 40 CFR part 60, ap-
2.0 Summary of Method pendix A, ‘‘Method 1—Sample and velocity
2.1 A 3–D probe is used to determine the traverses for stationary sources.’’
velocity pressure and the yaw and pitch an- 3.9 Method 2. Refers to 40 CFR part 60, ap-
gles of the flow velocity vector in a stack or pendix A, ‘‘Method 2—Determination of
duct. The method determines the yaw angle stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate
directly by rotating the probe to null the (Type S pitot tube).’’
pressure across a pair of symmetrically 3.10 Method 2G. Refers to 40 CFR part 60,
placed ports on the probe head. The pitch appendix A, ‘‘Method 2G—Determination of
angle is calculated using probe-specific cali- stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate
bration curves. From these values and a de- with two-dimensional probes.’’
termination of the stack gas density, the av- 3.11 Nominal Velocity. Refers to a wind
erage axial velocity of the stack gas is cal- tunnel velocity setting that approximates
culated. The average gas volumetric flow the actual wind tunnel velocity to within
rate in the stack or duct is then determined ±1.5 m/sec (±5 ft/sec).
from the average axial velocity. 3.12 Pitch Angle. The angle between the
axis of the stack or duct and the pitch com-
3.0 Definitions ponent of flow, i.e., the component of the
3.1. Angle-measuring Device Rotational Off- total velocity vector in a plane defined by
set (RADO). The rotational position of an the traverse line and the axis of the stack or
angle-measuring device relative to the ref- duct. (Figure 2F–1 illustrates the ‘‘pitch
erence scribe line, as determined during the plane.’’) From the standpoint of a tester fac-
pre-test rotational position check described ing a test port in a vertical stack, the pitch
in section 8.3. component of flow is the vector of flow mov-
3.2 Axial Velocity. The velocity vector paring from the center of the stack toward or
allel to the axis of the stack or duct that ac- away from that test port. The pitch angle is
counts for the yaw and pitch angle compo- the angle described by this pitch component
nents of gas flow. The term ‘‘axial’’ is used of flow and the vertical axis of the stack.
herein to indicate that the velocity and volu- 3.13 Readability. For the purposes of this
metric flow rate results account for the method, readability for an analog measure-
measured yaw and pitch components of flow ment device is one half of the smallest scale
at each measurement point. division. For a digital measurement device,
3.3 Calibration Pitot Tube. The standard it is the number of decimals displayed by the
(Prandtl type) pitot tube used as a reference device.
when calibrating a 3–D probe under this 3.14 Reference Scribe Line. A line perma-
method. nently inscribed on the main probe sheath
3.4 Field Test. A set of measurements con- (in accordance with section 6.1.6.1) to serve
ducted at a specific unit or exhaust stack/ as a reference mark for determining yaw an-
duct to satisfy the applicable regulation gles.
(e.g., a three-run boiler performance test, a 3.15 Reference Scribe Line Rotational Offset
single-or multiple-load nine-run relative ac- (RSLO). The rotational position of a probe’s
curacy test). reference scribe line relative to the probe’s
3.5 Full Scale of Pressure-measuring Device. yaw-null position, as determined during the
Full scale refers to the upper limit of the yaw angle calibration described in section
measurement range displayed by the device. 10.5.
For bi-directional pressure gauges, full scale 3.16 Response Time. The time required for
includes the entire pressure range from the the measurement system to fully respond to
lowest negative value to the highest positive a change from zero differential pressure and
value on the pressure scale. ambient temperature to the stable stack or
3.6 Main probe. Refers to the probe head duct pressure and temperature readings at a
and that section of probe sheath directly at- traverse point.
tached to the probe head. The main probe 3.17 Tested Probe. A 3–D probe that is
sheath is distinguished from probe exten- being calibrated.

sions, which are sections of sheath added 3.18 Three-dimensional (3–D) Probe. A direc-
onto the main probe to extend its reach. tional probe used to determine the velocity
3.7 ‘‘May,’’ ‘‘Must,’’ ‘‘Shall,’’ ‘‘Should,’’ and pressure and yaw and pitch angles in a flow-
the imperative form of verbs. ing gas stream.
49
3.19 Traverse Line. A diameter or axis ex- 4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
tending across a stack or duct on which
measurements of differential pressure and 5.0 Safety
flow angles are made. 5.1 This test method may involve haz-
3.20 Wind Tunnel Calibration Location. A ardous operations and the use of hazardous
point, line, area, or volume within the wind materials or equipment. This method does
tunnel test section at, along, or within not purport to address all of the safety prob-
which probes are calibrated. At a particular lems associated with its use. It is the respon-
wind tunnel velocity setting, the average ve- sibility of the user to establish and imple-
locity pressures at specified points at, along, ment appropriate safety and health practices
or within the calibration location shall vary and to determine the applicability of regu-
by no more than 2 percent or 0.3 mm H2O latory limitations before using this test
method.
(0.01 in. H2O), whichever is less restrictive,
from the average velocity pressure at the 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
calibration pitot tube location. Air flow at
this location shall be axial, i.e., yaw and 6.1 Three-dimensional Probes. The 3–D
probes as specified in subsections 6.1.1
pitch angles within ±3°. Compliance with
through 6.1.3 below qualify for use based on
these flow criteria shall be demonstrated by
comprehensive wind tunnel and field studies
performing the procedures prescribed in sec-
involving both inter-and intra-probe com-
tions 10.1.1 and 10.1.2. For circular tunnels, parisons by multiple test teams. Other types
no part of the calibration location may be of probes shall not be used unless approved
closer to the tunnel wall than 10.2 cm (4 in.) by the Administrator. Each 3–D probe shall
or 25 percent of the tunnel diameter, which- have a unique identification number or code
ever is farther from the wall. For elliptical permanently marked on the main probe
or rectangular tunnels, no part of the cali- sheath. The minimum recommended diame-
bration location may be closer to the tunnel ter of the sensing head of any probe used
wall than 10.2 cm (4 in.) or 25 percent of the under this method is 2.5 cm (1 in.). Each
applicable cross-sectional axis, whichever is probe shall be calibrated prior to use accord-
farther from the wall. ing to the procedures in section 10. Manufac-
3.21 Wind Tunnel with Documented Axial turer-supplied calibration data shall be used
Flow. A wind tunnel facility documented as as example information only, except when
meeting the provisions of sections 10.1.1 (ve- the manufacturer calibrates the 3–D probe as
locity pressure cross-check) and 10.1.2 (axial specified in section 10 and provides complete
flow verification) using the procedures de- documentation.
scribed in these sections or alternative pro- 6.1.1 Five-hole prism-shaped probe. This
type of probe consists of five pressure taps in
cedures determined to be technically equiva-
the flat facets of a prism-shaped sensing
lent.
head. The pressure taps are numbered 1
3.22 Yaw Angle. The angle between the through 5, with the pressures measured at
axis of the stack or duct and the yaw compo- each hole referred to as P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5,
nent of flow, i.e., the component of the total respectively. Figure 2F–3 is an illustration of
velocity vector in a plane perpendicular to the placement of pressure taps on a com-
the traverse line at a particular traverse monly available five-hole prism-shaped
point. (Figure 2F–1 illustrates the ‘‘yaw probe, the 2.5-cm (1-in.) DAT probe. (Note:
plane.’’) From the standpoint of a tester fac- Mention of trade names or specific products
ing a test port in a vertical stack, the yaw does not constitute endorsement by the U.S.
component of flow is the vector of flow mov- Environmental Protection Agency.) The
ing to the left or right from the center of the numbering arrangement for the prism-
stack as viewed by the tester. (This is some- shaped sensing head presented in Figure 2F–
times referred to as ‘‘vortex flow,’’ i.e., flow 3 shall be followed for correct operation of
around the centerline of a stack or duct.) the probe. A brief description of the probe
The yaw angle is the angle described by this measurements involved is as follows: the dif-
yaw component of flow and the vertical axis ferential pressure P2–P3 is used to yaw null
of the stack. The algebraic sign convention the probe and determine the yaw angle; the
is illustrated in Figure 2F–2. differential pressure P4–P5 is a function of
pitch angle; and the differential pressure P1–
3.23 Yaw Nulling. A procedure in which a
P2 is a function of total velocity.
probe is rotated about its axis in a stack or 6.1.2 Five-hole spherical probe. This type of
duct until a zero differential pressure read- probe consists of five pressure taps in a
ing (‘‘yaw null’’) is obtained. When a 3–D spherical sensing head. As with the prism-
probe is yaw-nulled, its impact pressure port
shaped probe, the pressure taps are num-

(P1) faces directly into the direction of flow bered 1 through 5, with the pressures meas-
in the stack or duct and the differential pres- ured at each hole referred to as P1, P2, P3, P4,
sure between pressure ports P2 and P3 is zero. and P5, respectively. However, the P4 and P5
pressure taps are in the reverse location
50
from their respective positions on the prism- ed on the extension to be readily aligned
shaped probe head. The differential pressure with the reference scribe line on the main
P2–P3 is used to yaw null the probe and de- probe sheath.
termine the yaw angle; the differential pres- 6.1.6.3 Alignment specifications. This speci-
sure P4–P5 is a function of pitch angle; and fication shall be met separately, using the
the differential pressure P1–P2 is a function procedures in section 10.4.1, on the main
of total velocity. A diagram of a typical probe and on each probe extension. The rota-
spherical probe sensing head is presented in tional position of the scribe line or scribe
Figure 2F–4. Typical probe dimensions are line segments on the main probe or any
indicated in the illustration. probe extension must not vary by more than
6.1.3 A manual 3–D probe refers to a five- 2°. That is, the difference between the min-
hole prism-shaped or spherical probe that is imum and maximum of all of the rotational
positioned at individual traverse points and angles that are measured along the full
yaw nulled manually by an operator. An length of the main probe or the probe exten-
automated 3–D probe refers to a system that sion must not exceed 2°.
uses a computer-controlled motorized mech- 6.1.7 Probe and system characteristics to
anism to position the five-hole prism-shaped ensure horizontal stability.
or spherical head at individual traverse 6.1.7.1 For manual probes, it is rec-
points and perform yaw angle determina- ommended that the effective length of the
tions. probe (coupled with a probe extension, if nec-
6.1.4 Other three-dimensional probes. [Re- essary) be at least 0.9 m (3 ft.) longer than
served] the farthest traverse point mark on the
6.1.5 Probe sheath. The probe shaft shall probe shaft away from the probe head. The
include an outer sheath to: (1) provide a sur- operator should maintain the probe’s hori-
face for inscribing a permanent reference zontal stability when it is fully inserted into
scribe line, (2) accommodate attachment of the stack or duct. If a shorter probe is used,
an angle-measuring device to the probe the probe should be inserted through a bush-
shaft, and (3) facilitate precise rotational ing sleeve, similar to the one shown in Fig-
movement of the probe for determining yaw ure 2F–5, that is installed on the test port;
angles. The sheath shall be rigidly attached such a bushing shall fit snugly around the
to the probe assembly and shall enclose all probe and be secured to the stack or duct
pressure lines from the probe head to the far- entry port in such a manner as to maintain
thest position away from the probe head the probe’s horizontal stability when fully
where an angle-measuring device may be at- inserted into the stack or duct.
tached during use in the field. The sheath of 6.1.7.2 An automated system that includes
the fully assembled probe shall be suffi- an external probe casing with a transport
ciently rigid and straight at all rotational system shall have a mechanism for main-
positions such that, when one end of the taining horizontal stability comparable to
probe shaft is held in a horizontal position, that obtained by manual probes following
the fully extended probe meets the hori- the provisions of this method. The auto-
zontal straightness specifications indicated mated probe assembly shall also be con-
in section 8.2 below. structed to maintain the alignment and posi-
6.1.6 Scribe lines. tion of the pressure ports during sampling at
6.1.6.1 Reference scribe line. A permanent each traverse point. The design of the probe
line, no greater than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) in casing and transport system shall allow the
width, shall be inscribed on each manual probe to be removed from the stack or duct
probe that will be used to determine yaw an- and checked through direct physical meas-
gles of flow. This line shall be placed on the urement for angular position and insertion
main probe sheath in accordance with the depth.
procedures described in section 10.4 and is 6.1.8 The tubing that is used to connect
used as a reference position for installation the probe and the pressure-measuring device
of the yaw angle-measuring device on the should have an inside diameter of at least 3.2
probe. At the discretion of the tester, the mm (1/8 in.), to reduce the time required for
scribe line may be a single line segment pressure equilibration, and should be as
placed at a particular position on the probe short as practicable.
sheath (e.g., near the probe head), multiple 6.2 Yaw Angle-measuring Device. One of
line segments placed at various locations the following devices shall be used for meas-
along the length of the probe sheath (e.g., at urement of the yaw angle of flow.
every position where a yaw angle-measuring 6.2.1 Digital inclinometer. This refers to a
device may be mounted), or a single contin- digital device capable of measuring and dis-
uous line extending along the full length of playing the rotational position of the probe
the probe sheath. to within ±1°. The device shall be able to be
6.1.6.2 Scribe line on probe extensions. A per- locked into position on the probe sheath or
manent line may also be inscribed on any probe extension, so that it indicates the
probe extension that will be attached to the probe’s rotational position throughout the
main probe in performing field testing. This test. A rotational position collar block that
allows a yaw angle-measuring device mount- can be attached to the probe sheath (similar
51
to the collar shown in Figure 2F–6) may be manometers may be necessary to obtain ac-
required to lock the digital inclinometer ceptable measurements.
into position on the probe sheath. 6.4.1 Differential pressure-measuring de-
6.2.2 Protractor wheel and pointer assem- vice. This refers to a device capable of meas-
bly. This apparatus, similar to that shown in uring pressure differentials and having a
Figure 2F–7, consists of the following compo- readability of ±1 percent of full scale. The de-
nents. vice shall be capable of accurately meas-
6.2.2.1 A protractor wheel that can be at- uring the maximum expected pressure dif-
tached to a port opening and set in a fixed ferential. Such devices are used to determine
rotational position to indicate the yaw angle the following pressure measurements: veloc-
position of the probe’s scribe line relative to ity pressure, static pressure, yaw-null pres-
the longitudinal axis of the stack or duct. sure, and pitch-angle pressure. For an in-
The protractor wheel must have a measure- clined-vertical manometer, the readability
ment ring on its face that is no less than 17.8 specification of ±1 percent shall be met sepa-
cm (7 in.) in diameter, shall be able to be ro- rately using the respective full-scale upper
tated to any angle and then locked into posi- limits of the inclined and vertical portions of
tion on the stack or duct port, and shall in- the scales. To the extent practicable, the de-
dicate angles to a resolution of 1°. vice shall be selected such that most of the
6.2.2.2 A pointer assembly that includes pressure readings are between 10 and 90 per-
an indicator needle mounted on a collar that cent of the device’s full-scale measurement
can slide over the probe sheath and be locked range (as defined in section 3.5). Typical ve-
into a fixed rotational position on the probe locity pressure (P1–P2) ranges for both the
sheath. The pointer needle shall be of suffi- prism-shaped probe and the spherical probe
cient length, rigidity, and sharpness to allow are 0 to 1.3 cm H2O (0 to 0.5 in. H2O), 0 to 5.1
the tester to determine the probe’s angular cm H2O (0 to 2 in. H2O), and 0 to 12.7 cm H2O
position to within 1° from the markings on (0 to 5 in. H2O). The pitch angle (P4–P5) pres-
the protractor wheel. Corresponding to the sure range is typically ¥6.4 to +6.4 mm H2O
position of the pointer, the collar must have (¥0.25 to +0.25 in. H2O) or ¥12.7 to +12.7 mm
a scribe line to be used in aligning the point- H2O (¥0.5 to +0.5 in. H2O) for the prism-
er with the scribe line on the probe sheath. shaped probe, and ¥12.7 to +12.7 mm H2O
6.2.3 Other yaw angle-measuring devices. (¥0.5 to +0.5 in. H2O) or ¥5.1 to +5.1 cm H2O
Other angle-measuring devices with a manu- (¥2 to +2 in. H2O) for the spherical probe.
facturer’s specified precision of 1° or better The pressure range for the yaw null (P2–P3)
may be used, if approved by the Adminis- readings is typically ¥12.7 to +12.7 mm H2O
trator. (¥0.5 to +0.5 in. H2O) for both probe types. In
6.3 Probe Supports and Stabilization De- addition, pressure-measuring devices should
vices. When probes are used for determining be selected such that the zero does not drift
flow angles, the probe head should be kept in by more than 5 percent of the average ex-
a stable horizontal position. For probes pected pressure readings to be encountered
longer than 3.0 m (10 ft.), the section of the during the field test. This is particularly im-
probe that extends outside the test port shall portant under low pressure conditions.
be secured. Three alternative devices are 6.4.2 Gauge used for yaw nulling. The dif-
suggested for maintaining the horizontal po- ferential pressure-measuring device chosen
sition and stability of the probe shaft during for yaw nulling the probe during the wind
flow angle determinations and velocity pres- tunnel calibrations and field testing shall be
sure measurements: (1) Monorails installed bi-directional, i.e., capable of reading both
above each port, (2) probe stands on which positive and negative differential pressures.
the probe shaft may be rested, or (3) bushing If a mechanical, bi-directional pressure
sleeves of sufficient length secured to the gauge is chosen, it shall have a full-scale
test ports to maintain probes in a horizontal range no greater than 2.6 cm H2O (1 in. H2O)
position. Comparable provisions shall be [i.e., ¥1.3 to +1.3 cm H2O (¥0.5 in. to +0.5
made to ensure that automated systems in.)].
maintain the horizontal position of the probe 6.4.3 Devices for calibrating differential
in the stack or duct. The physical character- pressure-measuring devices. A precision ma-
istics of each test platform may dictate the nometer (e.g., a U-tube, inclined, or inclined-
most suitable type of stabilization device. vertical manometer, or micromanometer) or
Thus, the choice of a specific stabilization NIST (National Institute of Standards and
device is left to the judgment of the testers. Technology) traceable pressure source shall
6.4 Differential Pressure Gauges. The be used for calibrating differential pressure-
pressure (DP) measuring devices used during measuring devices. The device shall be main-
wind tunnel calibrations and field testing tained under laboratory conditions or in a
shall be either electronic manometers (e.g., similar protected environment (e.g., a cli-
pressure transducers), fluid manometers, or mate-controlled trailer). It shall not be used

mechanical pressure gauges (e.g., in field tests. The precision manometer shall
MagnehelicD gauges). Use of electronic have a scale gradation of 0.3 mm H2O (0.01 in.
manometers is recommended. Under low ve- H2O), or less, in the range of 0 to 5.1 cm H2O
locity conditions, use of electronic (0 to 2 in. H2O) and 2.5 mm H2O (0.1 in. H2O),
52
or less, in the range of 5.1 to 25.4 cm H2O (2 the Type S probe. However, the spherical
to 10 in. H2O). The manometer shall have probe, as specified in section 6.1.2, is unable
manufacturer’s documentation that it meets to provide this measurement and shall not be
an accuracy specification of at least 0.5 per- used to take static pressure measurements.
cent of full scale. The NIST-traceable pres- Static pressure measurement is further de-
sure source shall be recertified annually. scribed in section 8.11.
6.4.4 Devices used for post-test calibration 6.8 Barometer. Same as Method 2, section
check. A precision manometer meeting the 2.5.
specifications in section 6.4.3, a pressure- 6.9 Gas Density Determination Equip-
measuring device or pressure source with a ment. Method 3 or 3A shall be used to deter-
documented calibration traceable to NIST, mine the dry molecular weight of the stack
or an equivalent device approved by the Ad- gas. Method 4 shall be used for moisture con-
ministrator shall be used for the post-test tent determination and computation of
calibration check. The pressure-measuring stack gas wet molecular weight. Other meth-
device shall have a readability equivalent to ods may be used, if approved by the Adminis-
or greater than the tested device. The pres- trator.
sure source shall be capable of generating 6.10 Calibration Pitot Tube. Same as
pressures between 50 and 90 percent of the Method 2, section 2.7.
range of the tested device and known to
6.11 Wind Tunnel for Probe Calibration.
within ±1 percent of the full scale of the test-
Wind tunnels used to calibrate velocity
ed device. The pressure source shall be recer-
probes must meet the following design speci-
tified annually.
fications.
6.5 Data Display and Capture Devices.
Electronic manometers (if used) shall be cou- 6.11.1 Test section cross-sectional area.
pled with a data display device (such as a The flowing gas stream shall be confined
digital panel meter, personal computer dis- within a circular, rectangular, or elliptical
play, or strip chart) that allows the tester to duct. The cross-sectional area of the tunnel
observe and validate the pressure measure- must be large enough to ensure fully devel-
ments taken during testing. They shall also oped flow in the presence of both the calibra-
be connected to a data recorder (such as a tion pitot tube and the tested probe. The
data logger or a personal computer with data calibration site, or ‘‘test section,’’ of the
capture software) that has the ability to wind tunnel shall have a minimum diameter
compute and retain the appropriate average of 30.5 cm (12 in.) for circular or elliptical
value at each traverse point, identified by duct cross-sections or a minimum width of
collection time and traverse point. 30.5 cm (12 in.) on the shorter side for rectan-
6.6 Temperature Gauges. For field tests, a gular cross-sections. Wind tunnels shall meet
thermocouple or resistance temperature de- the probe blockage provisions of this section
tector (RTD) capable of measuring tempera- and the qualification requirements pre-
ture to within ±3°C (±5°F) of the stack or scribed in section 10.1. The projected area of
duct temperature shall be used. The thermo- the portion of the probe head, shaft, and at-
couple shall be attached to the probe such tached devices inside the wind tunnel during
that the sensor tip does not touch any metal calibration shall represent no more than 4
and is located on the opposite side of the percent of the cross-sectional area of the
probe head from the pressure ports so as not tunnel. The projected area shall include the
to interfere with the gas flow around the combined area of the calibration pitot tube
probe head. The position of the thermocouple and the tested probe if both probes are
relative to the pressure port face openings placed simultaneously in the same cross-sec-
shall be in the same configuration as used tional plane in the wind tunnel, or the larger
for the probe calibrations in the wind tunnel. projected area of the two probes if they are
Temperature gauges used for wind tunnel placed alternately in the wind tunnel.
calibrations shall be capable of measuring 6.11.2 Velocity range and stability. The
temperature to within ±0.6°C (±1°F) of the wind tunnel should be capable of maintain-
temperature of the flowing gas stream in the ing velocities between 6.1 m/sec and 30.5 m/
wind tunnel. sec (20 ft/sec and 100 ft/sec). The wind tunnel
6.7 Stack or Duct Static Pressure Meas- shall produce fully developed flow patterns
urement. The pressure-measuring device that are stable and parallel to the axis of the
used with the probe shall be as specified in duct in the test section.
section 6.4 of this method. The static tap of 6.11.3 Flow profile at the calibration loca-
a standard (Prandtl type) pitot tube or one tion. The wind tunnel shall provide axial
leg of a Type S pitot tube with the face open- flow within the test section calibration loca-
ing planes positioned parallel to the gas flow tion (as defined in section 3.20). Yaw and
may be used for this measurement. Also ac- pitch angles in the calibration location shall
be within ±3° of 0°. The procedure for deter-
ceptable is the pressure differential reading

of P1–Pbar from a five-hole prism-shaped mining that this requirement has been met
probe (e.g., Type DA or DAT probe) with the is described in section 10.1.2.
P1 pressure port face opening positioned par- 6.11.4 Entry ports in the wind tunnel test
allel to the gas flow in the same manner as section.
53
6.11.4.1 Port for tested probe. A port shall 8.1.2 Before each field use of a 3-D probe,
be constructed for the tested probe. The port perform a visual inspection to verify the
should have an elongated slot parallel to the physical condition of the probe head accord-
axis of the duct at the test section. The elon- ing to the procedures in section 10.2. Record
gated slot should be of sufficient length to the inspection results on a form similar to
allow attaining all the pitch angles at which Table 2F–1. If there is visible damage to the
the probe will be calibrated for use in the 3-D probe, the probe shall not be used until
field. To facilitate alignment of the probe it is recalibrated.
during calibration, the test section should 8.1.3 After verifying that the physical con-
include a window constructed of a trans- dition of the probe head is acceptable, set up
parent material to allow the tested probe to the apparatus using lengths of flexible tub-
be viewed. This port shall be located to allow ing that are as short as practicable. Surge
the head of the tested probe to be positioned tanks installed between the probe and pres-
within the calibration location (as defined in sure-measuring device may be used to
section 3.20) at all pitch angle settings. dampen pressure fluctuations provided that
6.11.4.2 Port for verification of axial flow. an adequate measurement response time (see
Depending on the equipment selected to con- section 8.8) is maintained.
duct the axial flow verification prescribed in 8.2 Horizontal Straightness Check. A hori-
section 10.1.2, a second port, located 90° from zontal straightness check shall be performed
the entry port for the tested probe, may be before the start of each field test, except as
needed to allow verification that the gas otherwise specified in this section. Secure
flow is parallel to the central axis of the test the fully assembled probe (including the
section. This port should be located and con- probe head and all probe shaft extensions) in
structed so as to allow one of the probes de- a horizontal position using a stationary sup-
scribed in section 10.1.2.2 to access the same port at a point along the probe shaft approxi-
test point(s) that are accessible from the mating the location of the stack or duct
port described in section 6.11.4.1. entry port when the probe is sampling at the
6.11.4.3 Port for calibration pitot tube. farthest traverse point from the stack or
The calibration pitot tube shall be used in duct wall. The probe shall be rotated to de-
the port for the tested probe or a separate tect bends. Use an angle-measuring device or
entry port. In either case, all measurements trigonometry to determine the bend or sag
with the calibration pitot tube shall be made between the probe head and the secured end.
at the same point within the wind tunnel (See Figure 2F–9.) Probes that are bent or
over the course of a probe calibration. The sag by more than 5° shall not be used. Al-
measurement point for the calibration pitot though this check does not apply when the
tube shall meet the same specifications for probe is used for a vertical traverse, care
distance from the wall and for axial flow as should be taken to avoid the use of bent
described in section 3.20 for the wind tunnel probes when conducting vertical traverses. If
calibration location. the probe is constructed of a rigid steel ma-
6.11.5 Pitch angle protractor plate. A pro- terial and consists of a main probe without
tractor plate shall be attached directly probe extensions, this check need only be
under the port used with the tested probe performed before the initial field use of the
and set in a fixed position to indicate the probe, when the probe is recalibrated, when a
pitch angle position of the probe relative to change is made to the design or material of
the longitudinal axis of the wind tunnel duct the probe assembly, and when the probe be-
(similar to Figure 2F–8). The protractor comes bent. With such probes, a visual in-
plate shall indicate angles in 5° increments spection shall be made of the fully assembled
with a minimum resolution of ±2°. The tested probe before each field test to determine if a
probe shall be able to be locked into position bend is visible. The probe shall be rotated to
at the desired pitch angle delineated on the detect bends. The inspection results shall be
protractor. The probe head position shall be documented in the field test report. If a bend
maintained within the calibration location in the probe is visible, the horizontal
(as defined in section 3.20) in the test section straightness check shall be performed before
of the wind tunnel during all tests across the the probe is used.
range of pitch angles. 8.3 Rotational Position Check. Before each
field test, and each time an extension is
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved] added to the probe during a field test, a rota-
tional position check shall be performed on
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
all manually operated probes (except as
8.1 Equipment Inspection and Set-Up noted in section 8.3.5, below) to ensure that,
8.1.1 All probes, differential pressure-meas- throughout testing, the angle-measuring de-
uring devices, yaw angle-measuring devices, vice is either: aligned to within ±1° of the ro-
thermocouples, and barometers shall have a tational position of the reference scribe line;
current, valid calibration before being used or is affixed to the probe such that the rota-
in a field test. (See sections 10.3.3, 10.3.4, and tional offset of the device from the reference
10.5 through10.10 for the applicable calibra- scribe line is known to within ±1°. This check
tion requirements.) shall consist of direct measurements of the
54
rotational positions of the reference scribe tension is re-attached, if the probe extension
line and angle-measuring device sufficient to is designed to be locked into a mechanically
verify that these specifications are met. fixed rotational position (e.g., through use of
Annex A in section 18 of this method gives interlocking grooves) that can re-establish
recommended procedures for performing the the initial rotational position to within ±1°.
rotational position check, and Table 2F–2 8.4 Leak Checks. A pre-test leak check
gives an example data form. Procedures shall be conducted before each field test. A
other than those recommended in Annex A post-test check shall be performed at the end
in section 18 may be used, provided they of the field test, but additional leak checks
demonstrate whether the alignment speci- may be conducted after any test run or
fication is met and are explained in detail in group of test runs. The post-test check may
the field test report. also serve as the pre-test check for the next
8.3.1 Angle-measuring device rotational group of test runs. If any leak check is
offset. The tester shall maintain a record of failed, all runs since the last passed leak
the angle-measuring device rotational offset, check are invalid. While performing the leak
RADO, as defined in section 3.1. Note that check procedures, also check each pressure
RADO is assigned a value of 0° when the angle- device’s responsiveness to the changes in
measuring device is aligned to within ±1° of pressure.
the rotational position of the reference 8.4.1 To perform the leak check, pres-
scribe line. The RADO shall be used to deter- surize the probe’s P1 pressure port until at
mine the yaw angle of flow in accordance least 7.6 cm H2O (3 in. H2O) pressure, or a
with section 8.9.4. pressure corresponding to approximately 75
8.3.2 Sign of angle-measuring device rota- percent of the pressure-measuring device’s
tional offset. The sign of RADO is positive measurement scale, whichever is less, reg-
when the angle-measuring device (as viewed isters on the device; then, close off the pres-
from the ‘‘tail’’ end of the probe) is posi- sure port. The pressure shall remain stable
tioned in a clockwise direction from the ref- [±2.5 mm H2O (±0.10 in. H2O)] for at least 15
erence scribe line and negative when the de- seconds. Check the P2, P3, P4, and P5 pressure
vice is positioned in a counterclockwise di- ports in the same fashion. Other leak-check
rection from the reference scribe line. procedures may be used, if approved by the
8.3.3 Angle-measuring devices that can be Administrator.
independently adjusted (e.g., by means of a 8.5 Zeroing the Differential Pressure-
set screw), after being locked into position measuring Device. Zero each differential
on the probe sheath, may be used. However, pressure-measuring device, including the de-
the RADO must also take into account this vice used for yaw nulling, before each field
adjustment. test. At a minimum, check the zero after
8.3.4 Post-test check. If probe extensions each field test. A zero check may also be per-
remain attached to the main probe through- formed after any test run or group of test
out the field test, the rotational position runs. For fluid manometers and mechanical
check shall be repeated, at a minimum, at pressure gauges (e.g., MagnehelicD gauges),
the completion of the field test to ensure the zero reading shall not deviate from zero
that the angle-measuring device has re- by more than ±0.8 mm H2O (±0.03 in. H2O) or
mained within ±2° of its rotational position one minor scale division, whichever is great-
established prior to testing. At the discre- er, between checks. For electronic
tion of the tester, additional checks may be manometers, the zero reading shall not devi-
conducted after completion of testing at any ate from zero between checks by more than:
sample port or after any test run. If the ±2° ±0.3 mm H2O (±0.01 in. H2O), for full scales
specification is not met, all measurements less than or equal to 5.1 cm H2O (2.0 in. H2O);
made since the last successful rotational po- or ±0.8 mm H2O (±0.03 in. H2O), for full scales
sition check must be repeated. Section greater than 5.1 cm H2O (2.0 in. H2O). (Note:
18.1.1.3 of Annex A provides an example pro- If negative zero drift is not directly readable,
cedure for performing the post-test check. estimate the reading based on the position of
8.3.5 Exceptions. the gauge oil in the manometer or of the
8.3.5.1 A rotational position check need not needle on the pressure gauge.) In addition,
be performed if, for measurements taken at for all pressure-measuring devices except
all velocity traverse points, the yaw angle- those used exclusively for yaw nulling, the
measuring device is mounted and aligned di- zero reading shall not deviate from zero by
rectly on the reference scribe line specified more than 5 percent of the average measured
in sections 6.1.6.1 and 6.1.6.3 and no inde- differential pressure at any distinct process
pendent adjustments, as described in section condition or load level. If any zero check is
8.3.3, are made to the device’s rotational po- failed at a specific process condition or load
sition. level, all runs conducted at that process con-
8.3.5.2 If extensions are detached and re-at- dition or load level since the last passed zero
tached to the probe during a field test, a ro- check are invalid.
tational position check need only be per- 8.6 Traverse Point Verification. The num-
formed the first time an extension is added ber and location of the traverse points shall
to the probe, rather than each time the ex- be selected based on Method 1 guidelines.
55
The stack or duct diameter and port nipple measuring from on top or into the bottom of
lengths, including any extension of the port a horizontal duct, only the protractor wheel
nipples into stack or duct, shall be verified and pointer assembly may be used. With
the first time the test is performed; retain automated probes, curve-fitting protocols
and use this information for subsequent field may be used to obtain yaw-angle measure-
tests, updating it as required. Physically ments.
measure the stack or duct dimensions or use 8.9.1.1 If a yaw angle-measuring device af-
a calibrated laser device; do not use engi- fixed to the probe is to be used, lock the de-
neering drawings of the stack or duct. The vice on the probe sheath, aligning it either
probe length necessary to reach each tra- on the reference scribe line or in the rota-
verse point shall be recorded to within ±6.4 tional offset position established under sec-
mm (±1/4 in.) and, for manual probes, marked tion 8.3.1.
on the probe sheath. In determining these
8.9.1.2 If a protractor wheel and pointer
lengths, the tester shall take into account
assembly is to be used, follow the procedures
both the distance that the port flange
in Annex B of this method.
projects outside of the stack and the depth
that any port nipple extends into the gas 8.9.1.3 Other yaw angle-determination
stream. The resulting point positions shall procedures. If approved by the Adminis-
reflect the true distances from the inside trator, other procedures for determining yaw
wall of the stack or duct, so that when the angle may be used, provided that they are
tester aligns any of the markings with the verified in a wind tunnel to be able to per-
outside face of the stack port, the probe’s form the yaw angle calibration procedure as
impact port shall be located at the appro- described in section 10.5.
priate distance from the inside wall for the 8.9.2 Sampling strategy. At each traverse
respective Method 1 traverse point. Before point, first yaw-null the probe, as described
beginning testing at a particular location, an in section 8.9.3, below. Then, with the probe
out-of-stack or duct verification shall be per- oriented into the direction of flow, measure
formed on each probe that will be used to en- and record the yaw angle, the differential
sure that these position markings are cor- pressures and the temperature at the tra-
rect. The distances measured during the verse point, after stable readings are
verification must agree with the previously achieved, in accordance with sections 8.9.4
calculated distances to within ±1/4 in. For and 8.9.5. At the start of testing in each port
manual probes, the traverse point positions (i.e., after a probe has been inserted into the
shall be verified by measuring the distance flue gas stream), allow at least the response
of each mark from the probe’s P1 pressure time to elapse before beginning to take
port. A comparable out-of-stack test shall be measurements at the first traverse point
performed on automated probe systems. The accessed from that port. Provided that the
probe shall be extended to each of the pre- probe is not removed from the flue gas
scribed traverse point positions. Then, the stream, measurements may be taken at sub-
accuracy of the positioning for each traverse sequent traverse points accessed from the
point shall be verified by measuring the dis- same test port without waiting again for the
tance between the port flange and the response time to elapse.
probe’s P1 pressure port.
8.9.3 Yaw-nulling procedure. In prepara-
8.7 Probe Installation. Insert the probe
tion for yaw angle determination, the probe
into the test port. A solid material shall be
must first be yaw nulled. After positioning
used to seal the port.
the probe at the appropriate traverse point,
8.8 System Response Time. Determine the
response time of the probe measurement sys- perform the following procedures.
tem. Insert and position the ‘‘cold’’ probe (at 8.9.3.1 Rotate the probe until a null dif-
ambient temperature and pressure) at any ferential pressure reading (the difference in
Method 1 traverse point. Read and record the pressures across the P2 and P3 pressure ports
probe’s P1–P2 differential pressure, tempera- is zero, i.e., P2=P3) is indicated by the yaw
ture, and elapsed time at 15-second intervals angle pressure gauge. Read and record the
until stable readings for both pressure and angle displayed by the angle-measuring de-
temperature are achieved. The response time vice.
is the longer of these two elapsed times. 8.9.3.2 Sign of the measured angle. The
Record the response time. angle displayed on the angle-measuring de-
8.9 Sampling. vice is considered positive when the probe’s
8.9.1 Yaw angle measurement protocol. impact pressure port (as viewed from the
With manual probes, yaw angle measure- ‘‘tail’’ end of the probe) is oriented in a
ments may be obtained in two alternative clockwise rotational position relative to the
ways during the field test, either by using a stack or duct axis and is considered negative
yaw angle-measuring device (e.g., digital in- when the probe’s impact pressure port is ori-
clinometer) affixed to the probe, or using a ented in a counterclockwise rotational posi-
protractor wheel and pointer assembly. For tion (see Figure 2F–10).
horizontal traversing, either approach may 8.9.4 Yaw angle determination. After per-
be used. For vertical traversing, i.e., when forming the yaw-nulling procedure in section
56
8.9.3, determine the yaw angle of flow accord- at each traverse point. Record all necessary
ing to one of the following procedures. Spe- data as shown in the example field data form
cial care must be observed to take into ac- (Table 2F–3).
count the signs of the recorded angle and all 8.9.6 Alignment check. For manually op-
offsets. erated probes, after the required yaw angle
8.9.4.1 Direct-reading. If all rotational off- and differential pressure and temperature
sets are zero or if the angle-measuring device measurements have been made at each tra-
rotational offset (RADO) determined in sec- verse point, verify (e.g., by visual inspection)
tion 8.3 exactly compensates for the scribe that the yaw angle-measuring device has re-
line rotational offset (RSLO) determined in mained in proper alignment with the ref-
section 10.5, then the magnitude of the yaw erence scribe line or with the rotational off-
angle is equal to the displayed angle-meas- set position established in section 8.3. If, for
uring device reading from section 8.9.3.1. The a particular traverse point, the angle-meas-
algebraic sign of the yaw angle is determined uring device is found to be in proper align-
in accordance with section 8.9.3.2. ment, proceed to the next traverse point;
NOTE: Under certain circumstances (e.g., otherwise, re-align the device and repeat the
testing of horizontal ducts), a 90° adjustment angle and differential pressure measure-
to the angle-measuring device readings may ments at the traverse point. In the course of
be necessary to obtain the correct yaw an- a traverse, if a mark used to properly align
gles. the angle-measuring device (e.g., as de-
8.9.4.2 Compensation for rotational offsets scribed in section 18.1.1.1) cannot be located,
during data reduction. When the angle-meas- re-establish the alignment mark before pro-
uring device rotational offset does not com- ceeding with the traverse.
pensate for reference scribe line rotational 8.10 Probe Plugging. Periodically check
offset, the following procedure shall be used for plugging of the pressure ports by observ-
to determine the yaw angle: ing the responses on pressure differential
(a) Enter the reading indicated by the readouts. Plugging causes erratic results or
angle-measuring device from section 8.9.3.1. sluggish responses. Rotate the probe to de-
(b) Associate the proper algebraic sign termine whether the readouts respond in the
from section 8.9.3.2 with the reading in step expected direction. If plugging is detected,
(a). correct the problem and repeat the affected
(c) Subtract the reference scribe line rota- measurements.
tional offset, RSLO, from the reading in step 8.11 Static Pressure. Measure the static
(b). pressure in the stack or duct using the
(d) Subtract the angle-measuring device equipment described in section 6.7.
rotational offset, RADO, if any, from the re- 8.11.1 If a Type DA or DAT probe is used
sult obtained in step (c). for this measurement, position the probe at
(e) The final result obtained in step (d) is or between any traverse point(s) and rotate
the yaw angle of flow. the probe until a null differential pressure
NOTE: It may be necessary to first apply a reading is obtained at P2–P3. Rotate the
90° adjustment to the reading in step (a), in probe 90°. Disconnect the P2 pressure side of
order to obtain the correct yaw angle. the probe and read the pressure P1-Pbar and
8.9.4.3 Record the yaw angle measure- record as the static pressure. (NOTE: The
ments on a form similar to Table 2F–3. spherical probe, specified in section 6.1.2, is
8.9.5 Velocity determination. Maintain unable to provide this measurement and
the probe rotational position established shall not be used to take static pressure
during the yaw angle determination. Then, measurements.)
begin recording the pressure-measuring de- 8.11.2 If a Type S probe is used for this
vice readings for the impact pressure (P1–P2) measurement, position the probe at or be-
and pitch angle pressure (P4–P5). These pres- tween any traverse point(s) and rotate the
sure measurements shall be taken over a probe until a null differential pressure read-
sampling period of sufficiently long duration ing is obtained. Disconnect the tubing from
to ensure representative readings at each one of the pressure ports; read and record the
traverse point. If the pressure measurements DP. For pressure devices with one-directional
are determined from visual readings of the scales, if a deflection in the positive direc-
pressure device or display, allow sufficient tion is noted with the negative side discon-
time to observe the pulsation in the readings nected, then the static pressure is positive.
to obtain a sight-weighted average, which is Likewise, if a deflection in the positive di-
then recorded manually. If an automated rection is noted with the positive side dis-
data acquisition system (e.g., data logger, connected, then the static pressure is nega-
computer-based data recorder, strip chart re- tive.
corder) is used to record the pressure meas- 8.12 Atmospheric Pressure. Determine the
urements, obtain an integrated average of all atmospheric pressure at the sampling ele-
pressure readings at the traverse point. vation during each test run following the
Stack or duct gas temperature measure- procedure described in section 2.5 of Method
ments shall be recorded, at a minimum, once 2.
57
8.13 Molecular Weight. Determine the ital inclinometer, or other angle-measuring
stack gas dry molecular weight. For combus- device on the portion of the probe sheath
tion processes or processes that emit essen- that extends outside of the test port. A com-
tially CO2, O2, CO, and N2, use Method 3 or parable check should be performed by auto-
3A. For processes emitting essentially air, an mated systems.
analysis need not be conducted; use a dry
molecular weight of 29.0. Other methods may 10.0 Calibration
be used, if approved by the Administrator. 10.1 Wind Tunnel Qualification Checks.
8.14 Moisture. Determine the moisture
To qualify for use in calibrating probes, a
content of the stack gas using Method 4 or
wind tunnel shall have the design features
equivalent.
specified in section 6.11 and satisfy the fol-
8.15 Data Recording and Calculations.
lowing qualification criteria. The velocity
Record all required data on a form similar to
pressure cross-check in section 10.1.1 and
Table 2F–3.
axial flow verification in section 10.1.2 shall
8.15.1 Selection of appropriate calibration
be performed before the initial use of the
curves. Choose the appropriate pair of F1 and
F2 versus pitch angle calibration curves, cre- wind tunnel and repeated immediately after
ated as described in section 10.6. any alteration occurs in the wind tunnel’s
8.15.2 Pitch angle derivation. Use the ap- configuration, fans, interior surfaces,
propriate calculation procedures in section straightening vanes, controls, or other prop-
12.2 to find the pitch angle ratios that are erties that could reasonably be expected to
applicable at each traverse point. Then, find alter the flow pattern or velocity stability in
the pitch angles corresponding to these pitch the tunnel. The owner or operator of a wind
angle ratios on the ‘‘F1 versus pitch angle’’ tunnel used to calibrate probes according to
curve for the probe. this method shall maintain records docu-
8.15.3 Velocity calibration coefficient der- menting that the wind tunnel meets the re-
ivation. Use the pitch angle obtained fol- quirements of sections 10.1.1 and 10.1.2 and
lowing the procedures described in section shall provide these records to the Adminis-
8.15.2 to find the corresponding velocity cali- trator upon request.
bration coefficients from the ‘‘F2 versus 10.1.1 Velocity pressure cross-check. To
pitch angle’’ calibration curve for the probe. verify that the wind tunnel produces the
8.15.4 Calculations. Calculate the axial ve- same velocity at the tested probe head as at
locity at each traverse point using the equa- the calibration pitot tube impact port, per-
tions presented in section 12.2 to account for form the following cross-check. Take three
the yaw and pitch angles of flow. Calculate differential pressure measurements at the
the test run average stack gas velocity by fixed calibration pitot tube location, using
finding the arithmetic average of the point the calibration pitot tube specified in sec-
velocity results in accordance with sections tion 6.10, and take three measurements with
12.3 and 12.4, and calculate the stack gas vol- the calibration pitot tube at the wind tunnel
umetric flow rate in accordance with section calibration location, as defined in section
12.5 or 12.6, as applicable. 3.20. Alternate the measurements between
the two positions. Perform this procedure at
9.0 Quality Control the lowest and highest velocity settings at
9.1 Quality Control Activities. In conjunc- which the probes will be calibrated. Record
tion with the yaw angle determination and the values on a form similar to Table 2F–4.
the pressure and temperature measurements At each velocity setting, the average veloc-
specified in section 8.9, the following quality ity pressure obtained at the wind tunnel
control checks should be performed. calibration location shall be within ±2 per-
9.1.1 Range of the differential pressure cent or 2.5 mm H2O (0.01 in. H2O), whichever
gauge. In accordance with the specifications is less restrictive, of the average velocity
in section 6.4, ensure that the proper dif- pressure obtained at the fixed calibration
ferential pressure gauge is being used for the pitot tube location. This comparative check
range of DP values encountered. If it is nec- shall be performed at 2.5-cm (1-in.), or small-
essary to change to a more sensitive gauge, er, intervals across the full length, width,
replace the gauge with a gauge calibrated ac- and depth (if applicable) of the wind tunnel
cording to section 10.3.3, perform the leak calibration location. If the criteria are not
check described in section 8.4 and the zero met at every tested point, the wind tunnel
check described in section 8.5, and repeat the calibration location must be redefined, so
differential pressure and temperature read- that acceptable results are obtained at every
ings at each traverse point. point. Include the results of the velocity
9.1.2 Horizontal stability check. For hori- pressure cross-check in the calibration data
zontal traverses of a stack or duct, visually section of the field test report. (See section
check that the probe shaft is maintained in 16.1.4.)

a horizontal position prior to taking a pres- 10.1.2 Axial flow verification. The fol-
sure reading. Periodically, during a test run, lowing procedures shall be performed to
the probe’s horizontal stability should be demonstrate that there is fully developed
verified by placing a carpenter’s level, a dig- axial flow within the calibration location
58
and at the calibration pitot tube location. position on the probe sheath, determine the
Two testing options are available to conduct yaw angle from the tested port. Repeat this
this check. measurement using the 90° offset port, which
10.1.2.1 Using a calibrated 3–D probe. A 3– provides the pitch angle of flow. Determine
D probe that has been previously calibrated the yaw and pitch angles at all the point(s)
in a wind tunnel with documented axial flow in the test section where the velocity pres-
(as defined in section 3.21) may be used to sure cross-check, as specified in section
conduct this check. Insert the calibrated 3–D 10.1.1, is performed. This includes all the
probe into the wind tunnel test section using points in the wind tunnel calibration loca-
the tested probe port. Following the proce- tion and the point where the calibration
dures in sections 8.9 and 12.2 of this method, pitot tube will be located. Perform this
determine the yaw and pitch angles at all check at the highest and lowest velocities at
the point(s) in the test section where the ve- which the probes will be calibrated. Record
locity pressure cross-check, as specified in the values on a form similar to Table 2F–5.
section 10.1.1, is performed. This includes all Each measured yaw and pitch angle shall be
the points in the calibration location and the within ±3° of 0°. Exceeding the limits indi-
point where the calibration pitot tube will be cates unacceptable flow in the test section.
located. Determine the yaw and pitch angles Until the problem is corrected and accept-
at each point. Repeat these measurements at able flow is verified by repetition of this pro-
the highest and lowest velocities at which cedure, the wind tunnel shall not be used for
the probes will be calibrated. Record the val- calibration of probes. Include the results in
ues on a form similar to Table 2F–5. Each the probe calibration report.
measured yaw and pitch angle shall be with- 10.1.3 Wind tunnel audits.
in ±3° of 0°. Exceeding the limits indicates 10.1.3.1 Procedure. Upon the request of the
unacceptable flow in the test section. Until Administrator, the owner or operator of a
the problem is corrected and acceptable flow wind tunnel shall calibrate a 3–D audit probe
is verified by repetition of this procedure, in accordance with the procedures described
the wind tunnel shall not be used for calibra- in sections 10.3 through 10.6. The calibration
tion of probes. Include the results of the shall be performed at two velocities and over
axial flow verification in the calibration a pitch angle range that encompasses the ve-
data section of the field test report. (See sec- locities and pitch angles typically used for
tion 16.1.4.) this method at the facility. The resulting
10.1.2.2 Using alternative probes. Axial calibration data and curves shall be sub-
flow verification may be performed using an mitted to the Agency in an audit test report.
uncalibrated prism-shaped 3–D probe (e.g., These results shall be compared by the Agen-
DA or DAT probe) or an uncalibrated wedge cy to reference calibrations of the audit
probe. (Figure 2F–11 illustrates a typical probe at the same velocity and pitch angle
wedge probe.) This approach requires use of settings obtained at two different wind tun-
two ports: the tested probe port and a second nels.
port located 90° from the tested probe port. 10.1.3.2 Acceptance criteria. The audited
Each port shall provide access to all the tunnel’s calibration is acceptable if all of the
points within the wind tunnel test section following conditions are satisfied at each ve-
where the velocity pressure cross-check, as locity and pitch setting for the reference
specified in section 10.1.1, is conducted. The calibration obtained from at least one of the
probe setup shall include establishing a ref- wind tunnels. For pitch angle settings be-
erence yaw-null position on the probe sheath tween ¥15° and +15°, no velocity calibration
to serve as the location for installing the coefficient (i.e., F2) may differ from the cor-
angle-measuring device. Physical design fea- responding reference value by more than 3
tures of the DA, DAT, and wedge probes are percent. For pitch angle settings outside of
relied on to determine the reference posi- this range (i.e., less than ¥15° and greater
tion. For the DA or DAT probe, this ref- than +15°), no velocity calibration coefficient
erence position can be determined by setting may differ by more than 5 percent from the
a digital inclinometer on the flat facet where corresponding reference value. If the accept-
the P1 pressure port is located and then iden- ance criteria are not met, the audited wind
tifying the rotational position on the probe tunnel shall not be used to calibrate probes
sheath where a second angle-measuring de- for use under this method until the problems
vice would give the same angle reading. The are resolved and acceptable results are ob-
reference position on a wedge probe shaft can tained upon completion of a subsequent
be determined either geometrically or by audit.
placing a digital inclinometer on each side of 10.2 Probe Inspection. Before each calibra-
the wedge and rotating the probe until tion of a 3–D probe, carefully examine the
equivalent readings are obtained. With the physical condition of the probe head. Par-
latter approach, the reference position is the ticular attention shall be paid to the edges of
rotational position on the probe sheath the pressure ports and the surfaces sur-
where an angle-measuring device would give rounding these ports. Any dents, scratches,
a reading of 0°. After installing the angle- or asymmetries on the edges of the pressure
measuring device in the reference yaw-null ports and any scratches or indentations on
59
the surfaces surrounding the pressure ports spective full-scale upper limits of the in-
shall be noted because of the potential effect clined and vertical portions of the scale. Dif-
on the probe’s pressure readings. If the probe ferential pressure-measuring devices not
has been previously calibrated, compare the meeting the #2 percent of full scale or 0.5
current condition of the probe’s pressure mm H2O (0.02 in. H2O) calibration require-
ports and surfaces to the results of the in- ment shall not be used.
spection performed during the probe’s most 10.3.3.3 Exceptions. Any precision manom-
recent wind tunnel calibration. Record the eter that meets the specifications for a ref-
results of this inspection on a form and in erence device in section 6.4.3 and that is not
diagrams similar to Table 2F–1. The informa- used for field testing does not require cali-
tion in Table 2F–1 will be used as the basis bration, but must be leveled and zeroed be-
for comparison during the probe head inspec- fore each wind tunnel use. Any pressure de-
tions performed before each subsequent field vice used exclusively for yaw nulling does
use. not require calibration, but shall be checked
10.3 Pre-Calibration Procedures. Prior to for responsiveness to rotation of the probe
calibration, a scribe line shall have been prior to each wind tunnel use.
placed on the probe in accordance with sec- 10.3.4 Calibrate digital inclinometers on
tion 10.4. The yaw angle and velocity calibra- each day of wind tunnel or field testing
tion procedures shall not begin until the pre- (prior to beginning testing) using the fol-
test requirements in sections 10.3.1 through lowing procedures. Calibrate the inclinom-
10.3.4 have been met. eter according to the manufacturer’s calibra-
10.3.1 Perform the horizontal straightness tion procedures. In addition, use a triangular
check described in section 8.2 on the probe block (illustrated in Figure 2F–12) with a
assembly that will be calibrated in the wind known angle, q independently determined
tunnel. using a protractor or equivalent device, be-
10.3.2 Perform a leak check in accordance tween two adjacent sides to verify the incli-
with section 8.4. nometer readings.
10.3.3 Except as noted in section 10.3.3.3,
calibrate all differential pressure-measuring NOTE: If other angle-measuring devices
devices to be used in the probe calibrations, meeting the provisions of section 6.2.3 are
using the following procedures. At a min- used in place of a digital inclinometer, com-
imum, calibrate these devices on each day parable calibration procedures shall be per-
that probe calibrations are performed. formed on such devices.)
10.3.3.1 Procedure. Before each wind tun- Secure the triangular block in a fixed posi-
nel use, all differential pressure-measuring tion. Place the inclinometer on one side of
devices shall be calibrated against the ref- the block (side A) to measure the angle of in-
erence device specified in section 6.4.3 using clination (R1). Repeat this measurement on
a common pressure source. Perform the cali- the adjacent side of the block (side B) using
bration at three reference pressures rep- the inclinometer to obtain a second angle
resenting 30, 60, and 90 percent of the full- reading (R2). The difference of the sum of the
scale range of the pressure-measuring device two readings from 180° (i.e., 180° ¥R1 ¥R2)
being calibrated. For an inclined-vertical shall be within ±2° of the known angle, Q
manometer, perform separate calibrations 10.4 Placement of Reference Scribe Line.
on the inclined and vertical portions of the Prior to the first calibration of a probe, a
measurement scale, considering each portion line shall be permanently inscribed on the
of the scale to be a separate full-scale range. main probe sheath to serve as a reference
[For example, for a manometer with a 0- to mark for determining yaw angles. Annex C
2.5-cm H2O (0- to 1-in. H2O) inclined scale and in section 18 of this method gives a guideline
a 2.5- to 12.7-cm H2O (1- to 5-in. H2O) vertical for placement of the reference scribe line.
scale, calibrate the inclined portion at 7.6, 10.4.1 This reference scribe line shall meet
15.2, and 22.9 mm H2O (0.3, 0.6, and 0.9 in. the specifications in sections 6.1.6.1 and
H2O), and calibrate the vertical portion at 6.1.6.3 of this method. To verify that the
3.8, 7.6, and 11.4 cm H2O (1.5, 3.0, and 4.5 in. alignment specification in section 6.1.6.3 is
H2O).] Alternatively, for the vertical portion met, secure the probe in a horizontal posi-
of the scale, use three evenly spaced ref- tion and measure the rotational angle of
erence pressures, one of which is equal to or each scribe line and scribe line segment
higher than the highest differential pressure using an angle-measuring device that meets
expected in field applications. the specifications in section 6.2.1 or 6.2.3. For
10.3.3.2 Acceptance criteria. At each pres- any scribe line that is longer than 30.5 cm (12
sure setting, the two pressure readings made in.), check the line’s rotational position at
using the reference device and the pressure- 30.5-cm (12-in.) intervals. For each line seg-
measuring device being calibrated shall ment that is 30.5 cm (12 in.) or less in length,
agree to within ±2 percent of full scale of the check the rotational position at the two
device being calibrated or 0.5 mm H2O (0.02 endpoints of the segment. To meet the align-
in. H2O), whichever is less restrictive. For an ment specification in section 6.1.6.3, the min-
inclined-vertical manometer, these require- imum and maximum of all of the rotational
ments shall be met separately using the re- angles that are measured along the full
60
length of the main probe must not differ by 10.5.3 Insert the probe assembly into the
more than 2°. wind tunnel through the entry port, posi-
NOTE: A short reference scribe line seg- tioning the probe’s impact port at the cali-
ment [e.g., 15.2 cm (6 in.) or less in length] bration location. Check the responsiveness of
meeting the alignment specifications in sec- the pressure-measurement device to probe
tion 6.1.6.3 is fully acceptable under this rotation, taking corrective action if the re-
method. See section 18.1.1.1 of Annex A for sponse is unacceptable.
an example of a probe marking procedure, 10.5.4 Ensure that the probe is in a hori-
suitable for use with a short reference scribe zontal position, using a carpenter’s level.
line. 10.5.5 Rotate the probe either clockwise
or counterclockwise until a yaw null (P2=P3)
10.4.2 The scribe line should be placed on is obtained.
the probe first and then its offset from the 10.5.6 Use the reading displayed by the
yaw-null position established (as specified in angle-measuring device at the yaw-null posi-
section 10.5). The rotational position of the tion to determine the magnitude of the ref-
reference scribe line relative to the yaw-null erence scribe line rotational offset, RSLO, as
position of the probe, as determined by the defined in section 3.15. Annex D in section 18
yaw angle calibration procedure in section of this method provides a recommended pro-
10.5, is defined as the reference scribe line ro- cedure for determining the magnitude of
tational offset, RSLO. The reference scribe RSLO with a digital inclinometer and a sec-
line rotational offset shall be recorded and ond procedure for determining the mag-
retained as part of the probe’s calibration nitude of RSLO with a protractor wheel and
record. pointer device. Table 2F–6 presents an exam-
10.4.3 Scribe line for automated probes. A ple data form and Table 2F–7 is a look-up
scribe line may not be necessary for an auto- table with the recommended procedure. Pro-
mated probe system if a reference rotational cedures other than those recommended in
position of the probe is built into the probe Annex D in section 18 may be used, if they
system design. For such systems, a ‘‘flat’’ (or can determine RSLO to within ±1° and are ex-
comparable, clearly identifiable physical plained in detail in the field test report. The
characteristic) should be provided on the algebraic sign of RSLO will either be positive,
probe casing or flange plate to ensure that if the rotational position of the reference
the reference position of the probe assembly scribe line (as viewed from the ‘‘tail’’ end of
remains in a vertical or horizontal position. the probe) is clockwise, or negative, if coun-
The rotational offset of the flat (or com- terclockwise with respect to the probe’s yaw-
parable, clearly identifiable physical char- null position. (This is illustrated in Figure
acteristic) needed to orient the reference po- 2F–13.)
sition of the probe assembly shall be re- 10.5.7 The steps in sections 10.5.3 through
corded and maintained as part of the auto- 10.5.6 shall be performed twice at each of the
mated probe system’s specifications. velocities at which the probe will be cali-
10.5 Yaw Angle Calibration Procedure. brated (in accordance with section 10.6).
For each probe used to measure yaw angles Record the values of RSLO.
with this method, a calibration procedure 10.5.8 The average of all of the RSLO values
shall be performed in a wind tunnel meeting shall be documented as the reference scribe
the specifications in section 10.1 to deter- line rotational offset for the probe.
mine the rotational position of the reference 10.5.9 Use of reference scribe line offset.
scribe line relative to the probe’s yaw-null The reference scribe line rotational offset
position. This procedure shall be performed shall be used to determine the yaw angle of
on the main probe with all devices that will flow in accordance with section 8.9.4.
be attached to the main probe in the field 10.6 Pitch Angle and Velocity Pressure
[such as thermocouples or resistance tem- Calibrations. Use the procedures in sections
perature detectors (RTDs)] that may affect 10.6.1 through 10.6.16 to generate an appro-
the flow around the probe head. Probe shaft priate set (or sets) of pitch angle and veloc-
extensions that do not affect flow around the ity pressure calibration curves for each
probe head need not be attached during cali- probe. The calibration procedure shall be
bration. At a minimum, this procedure shall performed on the main probe and all devices
include the following steps. that will be attached to the main probe in
10.5.1 Align and lock the angle-measuring the field (e.g., thermocouple or RTDs) that
device on the reference scribe line. If a may affect the flow around the probe head.
marking procedure (such as that described in Probe shaft extensions that do not affect
section 18.1.1.1) is used, align the angle-meas- flow around the probe head need not be at-
uring device on a mark within ±1° of the ro- tached during calibration. (Note: If a sam-
tational position of the reference scribe line. pling nozzle is part of the assembly, a wind
Lock the angle-measuring device onto the tunnel demonstration shall be performed
probe sheath at this position. that shows the probe’s ability to measure ve-
10.5.2 Zero the pressure-measuring device locity and yaw null is not impaired when the
used for yaw nulling. nozzle is drawing a sample.) The calibration
61
procedure involves generating two calibra- sure-measuring devices. Zero the pressure-
tion curves, F1 versus pitch angle and F2 measuring devices. Inspect and leak-check
versus pitch angle. To generate these two all pitot lines; repair or replace, if necessary.
curves, F1 and F2 shall be derived using Turn on the fan, and allow the wind tunnel
Equations 2F–1 and 2F–2, below. Table 2F–8 air flow to stabilize at the first of the two se-
provides an example wind tunnel calibration lected nominal velocity settings.
data sheet, used to log the measurements 10.6.5 Position the calibration pitot tube
needed to derive these two calibration at its measurement location (determined as
curves. outlined in section 6.11.4.3), and align the
10.6.1 Calibration velocities. The tester tube so that its tip is pointed directly into
may calibrate the probe at two nominal wind the flow. Ensure that the entry port sur-
tunnel velocity settings of 18.3 m/sec and 27.4 rounding the tube is properly sealed. The
m/sec (60 ft/sec and 90 ft/sec) and average the calibration pitot tube may either remain in
results of these calibrations, as described in the wind tunnel throughout the calibration,
section 10.6.16.1, in order to generate a set of or be removed from the wind tunnel while
calibration curves. If this option is selected, measurements are taken with the probe
this single set of calibration curves may be being calibrated.
used for all field applications over the entire 10.6.6 Set up the pitch protractor plate on
velocity range allowed by the method. Alter- the tested probe’s entry port to establish the
natively, the tester may customize the probe pitch angle positions of the probe to within
calibration for a particular field test applica- ±2°.
tion (or for a series of applications), based on
10.6.7 Check the zero setting of each pres-
the expected average velocity(ies) at the test
sure-measuring device.
site(s). If this option is selected, generate
10.6.8 Insert the tested probe into the
each set of calibration curves by calibrating
wind tunnel and align it so that its P1 pres-
the probe at two nominal wind tunnel veloc-
sure port is pointed directly into the flow
ity settings, at least one of which is greater
than or equal to the expected average veloc- and is positioned within the calibration loca-
ity(ies) for the field application(s), and aver- tion (as defined in section 3.20). Secure the
age the results as described in section probe at the 0° pitch angle position. Ensure
10.6.16.1. Whichever calibration option is se- that the entry port surrounding the probe is
lected, the probe calibration coefficients (F2 properly sealed.
values) obtained at the two nominal calibra- 10.6.9 Read the differential pressure from
tion velocities shall, for the same pitch the calibration pitot tube (DPstd), and record
angle setting, meet the conditions specified its value. Read the barometric pressure to
in section 10.6.16. within ±2.5 mm Hg (±0.1 in. Hg) and the tem-
10.6.2 Pitch angle calibration curve (F1 perature in the wind tunnel to within 0.6°C
versus pitch angle). The pitch angle calibra- (1°F). Record these values on a data form
tion involves generating a calibration curve similar to Table 2F–8.
of calculated F1 values versus tested pitch 10.6.10 After the tested probe’s differential
angles, where F1 is the ratio of the pitch pressure gauges have had sufficient time to
pressure to the velocity pressure, i.e., stabilize, yaw null the probe, then obtain dif-
ferential pressure readings for (P1–P2) and
F1 =
(P4 − P5 ) Eq. 2F-1
(P4–P5). Record the yaw angle and differen-
tial pressure readings. After taking these
(P1 − P2 ) readings, ensure that the tested probe has re-
mained at the yaw-null position.
See Figure 2F–14 for an example F1 versus 10.6.11 Either take paired differential
pitch angle calibration curve. pressure measurements with both the cali-
10.6.3 Velocity calibration curve (F2 bration pitot tube and tested probe (accord-
versus pitch angle). The velocity calibration ing to sections 10.6.9 and 10.6.10) or take
involves generating a calibration curve of readings only with the tested probe (accord-
the 3–D probe’s F2 coefficient against the ing to section 10.6.10) in 5° increments over
tested pitch angles, where the pitch-angle range for which the probe is
to be calibrated. The calibration pitch-angle
ΔPstd range shall be symmetric around 0° and shall
F2 = C p Eq. 2F- 2 exceed the largest pitch angle expected in
(P1 − P2 ) the field by 5°. At a minimum, probes shall
be calibrated over the range of ¥15° to +15°.
and If paired calibration pitot tube and tested
Cp=calibration pitot tube coefficient, and probe measurements are not taken at each
DPstd=velocity pressure from the calibration pitch angle setting, the differential pressure
pitot tube. from the calibration pitot tube shall be read,

See Figure 2F–15 for an example F2 versus at a minimum, before taking the tested
ER14MY99.050</GPH>
pitch angle calibration curve. probe’s differential pressure reading at the

10.6.4 Connect the tested probe and cali- first pitch angle setting and after taking the
bration pitot probe to their respective pres- tested probe’s differential pressure readings
62
ER14MY99.049</GPH>
at the last pitch angle setting in each rep- ting, average the results obtained at the two
licate. nominal calibration velocities to produce a
10.6.12 Perform a second replicate of the calibration record of F1 and F2 at each pitch
procedures in sections 10.6.5 through 10.6.11 angle tested. Record these values on a form
at the same nominal velocity setting. similar to Table 2F–9. From these values,
10.6.13 For each replicate, calculate the F1 generate one calibration curve representing
and F2 values at each pitch angle. At each F1 versus pitch angle and a second curve rep-
pitch angle, calculate the percent difference resenting F2 versus pitch angle. Computer
between the two F2 values using Equation spreadsheet programs may be used to graph
2F–3. the calibration data and to develop poly-
nomial equations that can be used to cal-
F2max − F2min culate pitch angles and axial velocities.
%Diff = × 100% Eq. 2F-3 10.6.16.2 If the applicable specification in
F2min section 10.6.16 is exceeded at any pitch angle
setting, the probe shall not be used unless:
If the percent difference is less than or (1) the calibration is repeated at that pitch
equal to 2 percent, calculate an average F1 angle and acceptable results are obtained or
value and an average F2 value at that pitch (2) values of F1 and F2 are obtained at two
angle. If the percent difference is greater nominal velocities for which the specifica-
than 2 percent and less than or equal to 5 tions in section 10.6.16 are met across the en-
percent, perform a third repetition at that tire pitch angle range.
angle and calculate an average F1 value and 10.7 Recalibration. Recalibrate the probe
an average F2 value using all three repeti- using the procedures in section 10 either
tions. If the percent difference is greater within 12 months of its first field use after
than 5 percent, perform four additional rep- its most recent calibration or after 10 field
etitions at that angle and calculate an aver- tests (as defined in section 3.4), whichever
age F1 value and an average F2 value using occurs later. In addition, whenever there is
all six repetitions. When additional repeti- visible damage to the 3-D head, the probe
tions are required at any pitch angle, move shall be recalibrated before it is used again.
the probe by at least 5° and then return to 10.8 Calibration of pressure-measuring de-
the specified pitch angle before taking the vices used in field tests. Before its initial use
next measurement. Record the average val- in a field test, calibrate each pressure-meas-
ues on a form similar to Table 2F–9. uring device (except those used exclusively
10.6.14 Repeat the calibration procedures for yaw nulling) using the three-point cali-
in sections 10.6.5 through 10.6.13 at the sec- bration procedure described in section 10.3.3.
ond selected nominal wind tunnel velocity The device shall be recalibrated according to
setting. the procedure in section 10.3.3 no later than
10.6.15 Velocity drift check. The following 90 days after its first field use following its
check shall be performed, except when paired most recent calibration. At the discretion of
calibration pitot tube and tested probe pres- the tester, more frequent calibrations (e.g.,
sure measurements are taken at each pitch after a field test) may be performed. No ad-
angle setting. At each velocity setting, cal- justments, other than adjustments to the
culate the percent difference between con- zero setting, shall be made to the device be-
secutive differential pressure measurements tween calibrations.
made with the calibration pitot tube. If a 10.8.1 Post-test calibration check. A sin-
measurement differs from the previous meas- gle-point calibration check shall be per-
urement by more than 2 percent or 0.25 mm formed on each pressure-measuring device
H2O (0.01 in. H2O), whichever is less restric- after completion of each field test. At the
tive, the calibration data collected between discretion of the tester, more frequent sin-
these calibration pitot tube measurements gle-point calibration checks (e.g., after one
may not be used, and the measurements or more field test runs) may be performed. It
shall be repeated. is recommended that the post-test check be
10.6.16 Compare the averaged F2 coeffi- performed before leaving the field test site.
cients obtained from the calibrations at the The check shall be performed at a pressure
two selected nominal velocities, as follows. between 50 and 90 percent of full scale by
At each pitch angle setting, use Equation taking a common pressure reading with the
2F–3 to calculate the difference between the tested device and a reference pressure-meas-
corresponding average F2 values at the two uring device (as described in section 6.4.4) or
calibration velocities. At each pitch angle in by challenging the tested device with a ref-
the ¥15° to +15° range, the percent difference erence pressure source (as described in sec-
between the average F2 values shall not ex- tion 6.4.4) or by performing an equivalent
ceed 3.0 percent. For pitch angles outside check using a reference device approved by
this range (i.e., less than ¥15°0 and greater the Administrator.
than +15°), the percent difference shall not 10.8.2 Acceptance criterion. At the se-
exceed 5.0 percent. lected pressure setting, the pressure readings
10.6.16.1 If the applicable specification in made using the reference device and the test-
section 10.6.16 is met at each pitch angle set- ed device shall agree to within 3 percent of
63
ER14MY99.051</GPH>
full scale of the tested device or 0.8 mm H2O Md=Molecular weight of stack or duct gas,
(0.03 in. H2O), whichever is less restrictive. If dry basis (see section 8.13), g/g-mole (lb/lb-
this specification is met, the test data col- mole).
lected during the field test are valid. If the Ms=Molecular weight of stack or duct gas,
specification is not met, all test data col- wet basis, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
lected since the last successful calibration or
calibration check are invalid and shall be re- M s = M d (1 − Bws ) + 18.0 Bws Eq. 2F- 4
peated using a pressure-measuring device Pbar=Barometric pressure at measurement
with a current, valid calibration. Any device site, mm Hg (in. Hg).
that fails the calibration check shall not be Pg=Stack or duct static pressure, mm H2O
used in a field test until a successful re- (in. H2O).
calibration is performed according to the Ps=Absolute stack or duct pressure, mm Hg
procedures in section 10.3.3. (in. Hg),
10.9 Temperature Gauges. Same as Meth-
od 2, section 4.3. The alternative thermo- Pg
couple calibration procedures outlined in Ps = Pbar + Eq. 2F- 5
Emission Measurement Center (EMC) Ap- 13.6
proved Alternative Method (ALT–011) ‘‘Al- Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg
ternative Method 2 Thermocouple Calibra- (29.92 in. Hg).
tion Procedure’’ may be performed. Tem- 13.6=Conversion from mm H2O (in. H2O) to
perature gauges shall be calibrated no more mm Hg (in. Hg).
than 30 days prior to the start of a field test Qsd=Average dry-basis volumetric stack or
or series of field tests and recalibrated no duct gas flow rate corrected to standard
more than 30 days after completion of a field conditions, dscm/hr (dscf/hr).
test or series of field tests. Qsw=Average wet-basis volumetric stack or
10.10 Barometer. Same as Method 2, sec- duct gas flow rate corrected to standard
tion 4.4. The barometer shall be calibrated conditions, wscm/hr (wscf/hr).
no more than 30 days prior to the start of a Ts(avg)=Average absolute stack or duct gas
field test or series of field tests. temperature across all traverse points.
ts(i)=Stack or duct gas temperature, C (F), at
11.0 Analytical Procedure traverse point i.
Sample collection and analysis are concur- Ts(i)=Absolute stack or duct gas temperature,
rent for this method (see section 8.0). K (R), at traverse point i,
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations Ts( i ) = 273 + t s( i ) Eq. 2F- 6

These calculations use the measured yaw for the metric system, and
angle, derived pitch angle, and the differen-
tial pressure and temperature measurements Ts( i ) = 460 + t s( i ) Eq. 2F- 7
at individual traverse points to derive the
axial flue gas velocity (va(i)) at each of those for the English system.
ER14MY99.057</GPH>
points. The axial velocity values at all tra- Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293°K
verse points that comprise a full stack or (528°R).
duct traverse are then averaged to obtain F1(i)=Pitch angle ratio, applicable at traverse
the average axial flue gas velocity (va (avg)). point i, dimensionless.
Round off figures only in the final calcula- F2(i)=3-D probe velocity calibration coeffi-
tion of reported values. cient, applicable at traverse point i,
ER14MY99.056</GPH>
12.1 Nomenclature dimensionless.
(P4-P5)i=Pitch differential pressure of stack
A=Cross-sectional area of stack or duct, m2 or duct gas flow, mm H2O (in. H2O), at tra-
(ft 2). verse point i.
Bws=Water vapor in the gas stream (from (P1-P2)i=Velocity head (differential pressure)
Method 4 or alternative), proportion by of stack or duct gas flow, mm H2O (in. ER14MY99.055</GPH>
volume. H2O), at traverse point i.
Kp Conversion factor (a constant), va(i)=Reported stack or duct gas axial veloc-
ity, m/sec (ft/sec), at traverse point i.
1/ 2
m ⎡ (g/g - mole)( mm Hg) ⎤ va(avg)=Average stack or duct gas axial veloc-
ity, m/sec (ft/sec), across all traverse
34.97 ⎢ ⎥
sec ⎣ (° K )( mm H 2 O) ⎦ points.
ER14MY99.054</GPH>
3,600=Conversion factor, sec/hr.

for the metric system, and 18.0=Molecular weight of water, g/g-mole (lb/
lb-mole).
1/ 2
qy(i)=Yaw angle, degrees, at traverse point i.

ft ⎡ (lb/lb - mole)(in. Hg) ⎤ qp(i)=Pitch angle, degrees, at traverse point i.
85.49 ⎢ ⎥
sec ⎣ (° R )(in. H 2 O) ⎦ n=Number of traverse points.
ER14MY99.053</GPH>
12.2 Traverse Point Velocity Calculations.

for the English system. Perform the following calculations from the
64
ER14MY99.052</GPH>
measurements obtained at each traverse locity calibration coefficient, F2(i), at tra-
point. verse point i from the ‘‘velocity pressure
12.2.1 Selection of calibration curves. Se- calibration curve,’’ i.e., the F2 versus pitch
lect calibration curves as described in sec- angle calibration curve generated under sec-
tion 10.6.1. tion 10.6.16.1.
12.2.2 Traverse point pitch angle ratio. 12.2.5 Axial velocity. Use the following
Use Equation 2F–1, as described in section
equation to calculate the axial velocity, va(i),
10.6.2, to calculate the pitch angle ratio, F1(i),
from the differential pressure (P1-P2)i and
at each traverse point.
12.2.3 Pitch angle. Use the pitch angle yaw angle, qy(i), measured at traverse point i
ratio, F1(i), to derive the pitch angle, qp(i), at and the previously calculated values for the
traverse point i from the F1 versus pitch velocity calibration coefficient, F2(i), abso-
angle calibration curve generated under sec- lute stack or duct standard temperature,
tion 10.6.16.1. Ts(i), absolute stack or duct pressure, Ps, mo-
12.2.4 Velocity calibration coefficient. Use lecular weight, Ms, and pitch angle, ‘‘qp(i).
the pitch angle, qp(i), to obtain the probe ve-
(P1 − P2 )i Ts( i )
v a ( i ) = K p F2( i )
Ps M s
(cos θ )(cos θ )
y( i ) p( i ) Eq. 2F-8
12.2.6 Handling multiple measurements at 12.4 Acceptability of Results. The test re-
a traverse point. For pressure or tempera- sults are acceptable and the calculated value
ture devices that take multiple measure- of va(avg) may be reported as the average axial
ments at a traverse point, the multiple velocity for the test run if the conditions in
measurements (or where applicable, their either section 12.4.1 or 12.4.2 are met.
square roots) may first be averaged and the 12.4.1 The calibration curves were gen-
resulting average values used in the equa- erated at nominal velocities of 18.3 m/sec and
tions above. Alternatively, the individual 27.4 m/sec (60 ft/sec and 90 ft/sec).
measurements may be used in the equations 12.4.2 The calibration curves were gen-
erated at nominal velocities other than 18.3
above and the resulting multiple calculated
m/sec and 27.4 m/sec (60 ft/sec and 90 ft/sec),
values may then be averaged to obtain a sin-
and the value of va(avg) obtained using Equa-
gle traverse point value. With either ap-
tion 2F–9 is less than or equal to at least one
proach, all of the individual measurements of the nominal velocities used to derive the
recorded at a traverse point must be used in F1 and F2 calibration curves.
calculating the applicable traverse point 12.4.3 If the conditions in neither section
value. 12.4.1 nor section 12.4.2 are met, the test re-
12.3 Average Axial Velocity in Stack or sults obtained in Equation 2F–9 are not ac-
Duct. Use the reported traverse point axial ceptable, and the steps in sections 12.2 and
velocity in the following equation. 12.3 must be repeated using a set of F1 and F2
calibration curves that satisfies the condi-
n tions specified in section 12.4.1 or 12.4.2.
∑ va(i) 12.5 Average Gas Wet Volumetric Flow
Rate in Stack or Duct. Use the following
i =1
v a ( avg ) = Eq. 2F- 9 equation to compute the average volumetric
n flow rate on a wet basis.
⎛ T ⎞⎛ P ⎞
( )
Q sw = 3,600 v a ( avg ) ( A )⎜ std ⎟ ⎜ s ⎟
⎝ Ts( avg ) ⎠ ⎝ Pstd ⎠
Eq. 2F-10
ER14MY99.060</GPH>
12.6 Average Gas Dry Volumetric Flow equation to compute the average volumetric
Rate in Stack or Duct. Use the following flow rate on a dry basis.
ER14MY99.059</GPH>
65
ER14MY99.058</GPH>
⎛ T ⎞⎛ P ⎞
( )
Q sd = 3,600(1 − Bws ) v a ( avg ) ( A )⎜ std ⎟ ⎜ s ⎟
Eq. 2F-11
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] (f) Stack or duct gas axial velocity at tra-
verse point i (va(i))
16.1.3.3 The following values should be re-
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] ported once per run:
(a) Water vapor in the gas stream (from
16.0 Reporting Method 4 or alternative), proportion by vol-
16.1 Field Test Reports. Field test reports ume (Bws), measured at the frequency speci-
shall be submitted to the Agency according fied in the applicable regulation
to applicable regulatory requirements. Field (b) Molecular weight of stack or duct gas,
test reports should, at a minimum, include dry basis (Md)
the following elements. (c) Molecular weight of stack or duct gas,
16.1.1 Description of the source. This wet basis (Ms)
should include the name and location of the (d) Stack or duct static pressure (Pg)
test site, descriptions of the process tested, a (e) Absolute stack or duct pressure (Ps)
description of the combustion source, an ac- (f) Carbon dioxide concentration in the flue
curate diagram of stack or duct cross-sec- gas, dry basis (0⁄0d CO2)
tional area at the test site showing the di- (g) Oxygen concentration in the flue gas,
mensions of the stack or duct, the location dry basis (0⁄0d O2)
of the test ports, and traverse point loca- (h) Average axial stack or duct gas veloc-
tions and identification numbers or codes. It ity (va(avg)) across all traverse points
should also include a description and dia- (i) Gas volumetric flow rate corrected to
gram of the stack or duct layout, showing standard conditions, dry or wet basis as re-
the distance of the test location from the quired by the applicable regulation (Qsd or
nearest upstream and downstream disturb- Qsw)
ances and all structural elements (including 16.1.3.4 The following should be reported
breachings, baffles, fans, straighteners, etc.) once per complete set of test runs:
affecting the flow pattern. If the source and
(a) Cross-sectional area of stack or duct at
test location descriptions have been pre-
the test location (A)
viously submitted to the Agency in a docu-
(b) Measurement system response time
ment (e.g., a monitoring plan or test plan),
(sec)
referencing the document in lieu of including
(c) Barometric pressure at measurement
this information in the field test report is
site (Pbar)
acceptable.
16.1.2 Field test procedures. These should 16.1.4 Calibration data. The field test re-
include a description of test equipment and port should include calibration data for all
test procedures. Testing conventions, such as probes and test equipment used in the field
traverse point numbering and measurement test. At a minimum, the probe calibration
sequence (e.g., sampling from center to wall, data reported to the Agency should include
or wall to center), should be clearly stated. the following:
Test port identification and directional ref- (a) Date of calibration
erence for each test port should be included (b) Probe type
on the appropriate field test data sheets. (c) Probe identification number(s) or
16.1.3 Field test data. code(s)
16.1.3.1 Summary of results. This sum- (d) Probe inspection sheets
mary should include the dates and times of (e) Pressure measurements and inter-
testing and the average axial gas velocity mediate calculations of F1 and F2 at each
and the average flue gas volumetric flow re- pitch angle used to obtain calibration curves
sults for each run and tested condition. in accordance with section 10.6 of this meth-
16.1.3.2 Test data. The following values for od
each traverse point should be recorded and (f) Calibration curves (in graphic or equa-
reported: tion format) obtained in accordance with
(a) P1-P2 and P4-P5 differential pressures sections 10.6.11 of this method
(b) Stack or duct gas temperature at tra- (g) Description and diagram of wind tunnel
verse point i (ts(i)) used for the calibration, including dimen-
(c) Absolute stack or duct gas temperature sions of cross-sectional area and position and
at traverse point i (Ts(i)) size of the test section
(d) Yaw angle at each traverse point i (qy(i)) (h) Documentation of wind tunnel quali-
(e) Pitch angle at each traverse point i fication tests performed in accordance with
(qp(i)) section 10.1 of this method
66
ER14MY99.061</GPH>
16.1.5 Quality Assurance. Specific quality (15) National Institute of Standards and
assurance and quality control procedures Technology, 1998, ‘‘Report of Special Test of
used during the test should be described. Air Speed Instrumentation, Five
Autoprobes,’’ Prepared for the U.S. Environ-
17.0 Bibliography mental Protection Agency under IAG
(1) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 1— #DW13938432–01–0.
Sample and velocity traverses for stationary (16) National Institute of Standards and
sources. Technology, 1998, ‘‘Report of Special Test of
(2) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method Air Speed Instrumentation, Eight Spherical
2H—Determination of stack gas velocity tak- Probes,’’ Prepared for the U.S. Environ-
ing into account velocity decay near the mental Protection Agency under IAG
stack wall. #DW13938432–01–0.
(3) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 2— (17) National Institute of Standards and
Determination of stack gas velocity and vol- Technology, 1998, ‘‘Report of Special Test of
umetric flow rate (Type S pitot tube). Air Speed Instrumentation, Four DAT
(4) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 3— Probes,’’ Prepared for the U.S. Environ-
Gas analysis for carbon dioxide, oxygen, ex- mental Protection Agency under IAG
cess air, and dry molecular weight. #DW13938432–01–0.
(5) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method (18) Norfleet, S.K., ‘‘An Evaluation of Wall
3A—Determination of oxygen and carbon di- Effects on Stack Flow Velocities and Re-
oxide concentrations in emissions from sta- lated Overestimation Bias in EPA’s Stack
tionary sources (instrumental analyzer pro- Flow Reference Methods,’’ EPRI CEMS
cedure). User’s Group Meeting, New Orleans, Lou-
(6) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 4— isiana, May 13–15, 1998.
Determination of moisture content in stack (19) Page, J.J., E.A. Potts, and R.T.
gases. Shigehara, ‘‘3–D Pitot Tube Calibration
(7) Emission Measurement Center (EMC) Study,’’ EPA Contract No. 68–D1–0009, Work
Approved Alternative Method (ALT–011) Assignment No. I–121, March 11, 1993.
‘‘Alternative Method 2 Thermocouple Cali- (20) Shigehara, R.T., W.F. Todd, and W.S.
bration Procedure.’’ Smith, ‘‘Significance of Errors in Stack
(8) Electric Power Research Institute, In- Sampling Measurements,’’ Presented at the
terim Report EPRI TR–106698, ‘‘Flue Gas Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control
Flow Rate Measurement Errors,’’ June 1996. Association, St. Louis, Missouri, June 14–19,
(9) Electric Power Research Institute, 1970.
Final Report EPRI TR–108110, ‘‘Evaluation of (21) The Cadmus Group, Inc., May 1999,
Heat Rate Discrepancy from Continuous ‘‘EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and
Emission Monitoring Systems,’’ August 1997. Analysis: Findings Report,’’ EPA/430–R–99–
(10) Fossil Energy Research Corporation, 009.
Final Report, ‘‘Velocity Probe Tests in Non- (22) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, ‘‘EPA
axial Flow Fields,’’ November 1998, Prepared Flow Reference Method Testing and Anal-
for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agen- ysis: Data Report, Texas Utilities,
cy. DeCordova Steam Electric Station, Volume
(11) Fossil Energy Research Corporation, I: Test Description and Appendix A (Data
‘‘Additional Swirl Tunnel Tests: E-DAT and Distribution Package),’’ EPA/430–R–98–015a.
T-DAT Probes,’’ February 24, 1999, Technical (23) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, ‘‘EPA
Memorandum Prepared for U.S. Environ- Flow Reference Method Testing and Anal-
mental Protection Agency, P.O. No. 7W–1193– ysis: Data Report, Texas Utilities, Lake Hub-
NALX. bard Steam Electric Station, Volume I: Test
(12) Massachusetts Institute of Tech- Description and Appendix A (Data Distribu-
nology, Report WBWT-TR–1317, ‘‘Calibration tion Package),’’ EPA/430–R–98–017a.
of Eight Wind Speed Probes Over a Reynolds (24) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, ‘‘EPA
Number Range of 46,000 to 725,000 Per Foot, Flow Reference Method Testing and Anal-
Text and Summary Plots,’’ Plus appendices, ysis: Data Report, Pennsylvania Electric Co.,
October 15, 1998, Prepared for The Cadmus G.P.U. Genco Homer City Station: Unit 1,
Group, Inc. Volume I: Test Description and Appendix A
(13) National Institute of Standards and (Data Distribution Package),’’ EPA/430–R–98–
Technology, Special Publication 250, ‘‘NIST 018a.
Calibration Services Users Guide 1991,’’ Re- (25) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1997, ‘‘EPA
vised October 1991, U.S. Department of Com- Flow Reference Method Testing and Anal-
merce, p. 2. ysis: Wind Tunnel Experimental Results,’’
(14) National Institute of Standards and EPA/430–R–97–013.
Technology, 1998, ‘‘Report of Special Test of
18.0 Annexes
Air Speed Instrumentation, Four Prandtl

Probes, Four S-Type Probes, Four French Annex A, C, and D describe recommended
Probes, Four Modified Kiel Probes,’’ Pre- procedures for meeting certain provisions in
pared for the U.S. Environmental Protection sections 8.3, 10.4, and 10.5 of this method.
Agency under IAG #DW13938432–01–0. Annex B describes procedures to be followed
67
when using the protractor wheel and pointer lowing procedure may be used to align the
assembly to measure yaw angles, as provided extension’s scribe line with the reference
under section 8.9.1. scribe line instead of marking the extension
18.1 Annex A—Rotational Position Check. as described in section 18.1.1.1. Attach the
The following are recommended procedures probe extension to the main probe. Align and
that may be used to satisfy the rotational lock the second angle-measuring device on
position check requirements of section 8.3 of the probe extension’s scribe line. Then, ro-
this method and to determine the angle- tate the extension until both measuring de-
measuring device rotational offset RADO. vices indicate the same angle (±1°). Lock the
18.1.1 Rotational position check with extension at this rotational position. Record
probe outside stack. Where physical con- the angles indicated by the two angle-meas-
straints at the sampling location allow full uring devices on a form similar to Table 2F–
assembly of the probe outside the stack and 2. An angle-measuring device may be aligned
insertion into the test port, the following at any position on this scribe line during the
procedures should be performed before the velocity traverse, if the scribe line meets the
start of testing. Two angle-measuring de- alignment specification in section 6.1.6.3.
vices that meet the specifications in section 18.1.1.3 Post-test rotational position
6.2.1 or 6.2.3 are required for the rotational check. If the fully assembled probe includes
position check. An angle measuring device one or more extensions, the following check
whose position can be independently ad- should be performed immediately after the
justed (e.g., by means of a set screw) after completion of a velocity traverse. At the dis-
being locked into position on the probe cretion of the tester, additional checks may
sheath shall not be used for this check unless be conducted after completion of testing at
the independent adjustment is set so that any sample port. Without altering the align-
the device performs exactly like a device ment of any of the components of the probe
without the capability for independent ad- assembly used in the velocity traverse, se-
justment. That is, when aligned on the probe cure the fully assembled probe in a hori-
such a device must give the same reading as zontal position. Affix an angle-measuring de-
a device that does not have the capability of vice at the reference scribe line specified in
being independently adjusted. With the fully section 6.1.6.1. Use the other angle-meas-
assembled probe (including probe shaft ex- uring device to check the angle at each loca-
tensions, if any) secured in a horizontal position where the device was checked prior to
tion, affix one yaw angle-measuring device testing. Record the readings from the two
to the probe sheath and lock it into position angle-measuring devices.
on the reference scribe line specified in sec- 18.1.2 Rotational position check with
tion 6.1.6.1. Position the second angle-meas- probe in stack. This section applies only to
uring device using the procedure in section probes that, due to physical constraints, can-
18.1.1.1 or 18.1.1.2. not be inserted into the test port as fully as-
18.1.1.1 Marking procedure. The proce- sembled with all necessary extensions need-
dures in this section should be performed at ed to reach the inner-most traverse point(s).
each location on the fully assembled probe 18.1.2.1 Perform the out-of-stack proce-
where the yaw angle-measuring device will dure in section 18.1.1 on the main probe and
be mounted during the velocity traverse. any attached extensions that will be ini-
Place the second yaw angle-measuring de- tially inserted into the test port.
vice on the main probe sheath (or extension) 18.1.2.2 Use the following procedures to
at the position where a yaw angle will be perform additional rotational position
measured during the velocity traverse. Ad- check(s) with the probe in the stack, each
just the position of the second angle-meas- time a probe extension is added. Two angle-
uring device until it indicates the same measuring devices are required. The first of
angle (±1°) as the reference device, and affix these is the device that was used to measure
the second device to the probe sheath (or ex- yaw angles at the preceding traverse point,
tension). Record the angles indicated by the left in its properly aligned measurement po-
two angle-measuring devices on a form simi- sition. The second angle-measuring device is
lar to Table 2F–2. In this position, the second positioned on the added probe extension. Use
angle-measuring device is considered to be the applicable procedures in section 18.1.1.1
properly positioned for yaw angle measure- or 18.1.1.2 to align, adjust, lock, and mark (if
ment. Make a mark, no wider than 1.6 mm (1/ necessary) the position of the second angle-
16 in.), on the probe sheath (or extension), measuring device to within ±1° of the first
such that the yaw angle-measuring device device. Record the readings of the two de-
can be re-affixed at this same properly vices on a form similar to Table 2F–2.
aligned position during the velocity tra- 18.1.2.3 The procedure in section 18.1.2.2
verse. should be performed at the first port where
18.1.1.2 Procedure for probe extensions measurements are taken. The procedure
with scribe lines. If, during a velocity tra- should be repeated each time a probe exten-
verse the angle-measuring device will be af- sion is re-attached at a subsequent port, un-
fixed to a probe extension having a scribe less the probe extensions are designed to be
line as specified in section 6.1.6.2, the fol- locked into a mechanically fixed rotational
68
position (e.g., through use of interlocking points accessed from the current stack or
grooves), which can be reproduced from port duct entry port.
to port as specified in section 8.3.5.2. 18.2.8 After completing the measurement
18.2 Annex B—Angle Measurement Pro- at the last traverse point accessed from a
tocol for Protractor Wheel and Pointer De- port, verify that the orientation of the pro-
vice. The following procedure shall be used tractor wheel on the test port has not
when a protractor wheel and pointer assem- changed over the course of the traverse at
bly, such as the one described in section 6.2.2 that port. For stacks, vertical ducts, or ports
and illustrated in Figure 2F–7 is used to on the side of horizontal ducts, use a digital
measure the yaw angle of flow. With each inclinometer meeting the specifications in
move to a new traverse point, unlock, re- section 6.2.1 to check the rotational position
align, and re-lock the probe, angle-pointer of the 0° mark on the protractor wheel. For
collar, and protractor wheel to each other. ports on the top or bottom of horizontal
At each such move, particular attention is ducts, observe the alignment of the angle
required to ensure that the scribe line on the wheel 0° mark relative to the permanent 0°
angle pointer collar is either aligned with mark on the duct at that test port. If these
the reference scribe line on the main probe observed comparisons exceed ±2° of 0°, all
sheath or is at the rotational offset position angle and pressure measurements taken at
established under section 8.3.1. The proce- that port since the protractor wheel was last
dure consists of the following steps: locked into position on the port shall be re-
18.2.1 Affix a protractor wheel to the peated.
entry port for the test probe in the stack or 18.2.9 Move to the next stack or duct
duct. entry port and repeat the steps in sections
18.2.1 through 18.2.8.
18.2.2 Orient the protractor wheel so that
18.3 Annex C—Guideline for Reference
the 0° mark corresponds to the longitudinal
Scribe Line Placement. Use of the following
axis of the stack or duct. For stacks, vertical
guideline is recommended to satisfy the re-
ducts, or ports on the side of horizontal
quirements of section 10.4 of this method.
ducts, use a digital inclinometer meeting the
The rotational position of the reference
specifications in section 6.2.1 to locate the 0°
scribe line should be either 90° or 180° from
orientation. For ports on the top or bottom
the probe’s impact pressure port.
of horizontal ducts, identify the longitudinal 18.4 Annex D—Determination of Ref-
axis at each test port and permanently mark erence Scribe Line Rotational Offset. The
the duct to indicate the 0° orientation. Once following procedures are recommended for
the protractor wheel is properly aligned, determining the magnitude and sign of a
lock it into position on the test port. probe’s reference scribe line rotational off-
18.2.3 Move the pointer assembly along set, RSLO. Separate procedures are provided
the probe sheath to the position needed to for two types of angle-measuring devices:
take measurements at the first traverse digital inclinometers and protractor wheel
point. Align the scribe line on the pointer and pointer assemblies.
collar with the reference scribe line or at the 18.4.1 Perform the following procedures on
rotational offset position established under the main probe with all devices that will be
section 8.3.1. Maintaining this rotational attached to the main probe in the field [such
alignment, lock the pointer device onto the as thermocouples or resistance temperature
probe sheath. Insert the probe into the entry detectors (RTDs)] that may affect the flow
port to the depth needed to take measure- around the probe head. Probe shaft exten-
ments at the first traverse point. sions that do not affect flow around the
18.2.4 Perform the yaw angle determina- probe head need not be attached during cali-
tion as specified in sections 8.9.3 and 8.9.4 bration.
and record the angle as shown by the pointer 18.4.2 The procedures below assume that
on the protractor wheel. Then, take velocity the wind tunnel duct used for probe calibra-
pressure and temperature measurements in tion is horizontal and that the flow in the
accordance with the procedure in section calibration wind tunnel is axial as deter-
8.9.5. Perform the alignment check described mined by the axial flow verification check
in section 8.9.6. described in section 10.1.2. Angle-measuring
18.2.5 After taking velocity pressure devices are assumed to display angles in al-
measurements at that traverse point, unlock ternating 0° to 90° and 90° to 0° intervals. If
the probe from the collar and slide the probe angle-measuring devices with other readout
through the collar to the depth needed to conventions are used or if other calibration
reach the next traverse point. wind tunnel duct configurations are used,
18.2.6 Align the scribe line on the pointer make the appropriate calculational correc-
collar with the reference scribe line on the tions.
main probe or at the rotational offset posi- 18.4.2.1 Position the angle-measuring de-
tion established under section 8.3.1. Lock the vice in accordance with one of the following
collar onto the probe. procedures.
18.2.7 Repeat the steps in sections 18.2.4 18.4.2.1.1 If using a digital inclinometer,
through 18.2.6 at the remaining traverse affix the calibrated digital inclinometer to
69
the probe. If the digital inclinometer can be the pressure-measuring device to probe rota-
independently adjusted after being locked tion, taking corrective action if the response
into position on the probe sheath (e.g., by is unacceptable.
means of a set screw), the independent ad- 18.4.2.4 Ensure that the probe is in a hori-
justment must be set so that the device per- zontal position using a carpenter’s level.
forms exactly like a device without the capa- 18.4.2.5 Rotate the probe either clockwise
bility for independent adjustment. That is, or counterclockwise until a yaw null (P2=P3)
when aligned on the probe the device must is obtained.
give the same readings as a device that does 18.4.2.6 Read and record the value of qnull,
not have the capability of being independ- the angle indicated by the angle-measuring
ently adjusted. Either align it directly on
device at the yaw-null position. Record the
the reference scribe line or on a mark
angle reading on a form similar to Table 2F–
aligned with the scribe line determined ac-
6. Do not associate an algebraic sign with
cording to the procedures in section 18.1.1.1.
this reading.
Maintaining this rotational alignment, lock
the digital inclinometer onto the probe 18.4.2.7 Determine the magnitude and al-
sheath. gebraic sign of the reference scribe line rota-
18.4.2.1.2 If using a protractor wheel and tional offset, RSLO. The magnitude of RSLO
pointer device, orient the protractor wheel will be equal to either qnull or (90°¥qnull), de-
on the test port so that the 0° mark is pending on the angle-measuring device used.
aligned with the longitudinal axis of the (See Table 2F–7 for a summary.) The alge-
wind tunnel duct. Maintaining this align- braic sign of RSLO will either be positive, if
ment, lock the wheel into place on the wind the rotational position of the reference
tunnel test port. Align the scribe line on the scribe line is clockwise, or negative, if coun-
pointer collar with the reference scribe line terclockwise with respect to the probe’s yaw-
or with a mark aligned with the reference null position. Figure 2F–13 illustrates how
scribe line, as determined under section the magnitude and sign of RSLO are deter-
18.1.1.1. Maintaining this rotational align- mined.
ment, lock the pointer device onto the probe 18.4.2.8 Perform the steps in sections
sheath. 18.4.2.3 through 18.4.2.7 twice at each of the
18.4.2.2 Zero the pressure-measuring de- two calibration velocities selected for the
vice used for yaw nulling. probe under section 10.6. Record the values of
18.4.2.3 Insert the probe assembly into the RSLO in a form similar to Table 2F–6.
wind tunnel through the entry port, posi- 18.4.2.9 The average of all RSLO values is
tioning the probe’s impact port at the cali- the reference scribe line rotational offset for
bration location. Check the responsiveness of the probe.
70
71
ER14MY99.000</GPH>
72
ER14MY99.001</GPH>
73
ER14MY99.002</GPH>
74
ER14MY99.003</GPH>
75
ER14MY99.004</GPH>
76
ER14MY99.005</GPH>
77
ER14MY99.006</GPH>
78
ER14MY99.007</GPH>
79
ER14MY99.008</GPH>
80
ER14MY99.009</GPH>
81
ER14MY99.010</GPH>
82
ER14MY99.011</GPH>
83
ER14MY99.012</GPH>
84
ER14MY99.013</GPH>
85
ER14MY99.014</GPH>
86
ER14MY99.015</GPH>
ER14MY99.017</GPH>
87
ER14MY99.016</GPH>
88
ER14MY99.018</GPH>
[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971]

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting part 60, appendix A–1, see the
List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed vol-
ume and on GPO Access.
89
ER14MY99.019</GPH>
Pt. 60, App. A–2 40 CFR Ch. I (7–1–09 Edition)
APPENDIX A–2 TO PART 60—TEST methods in this appendix rely on perform-

METHODS 2G THROUGH 3C ance criteria.
Minor changes in the test methods should
Method 2G—Determination of Stack Gas Ve- not necessarily affect the validity of the re-
locity and Volumetric Flow Rate With sults and it is recognized that alternative
Two-Dimensional Probes and equivalent methods exist. Section 60.8
Method 2H—Determination of Stack Gas Ve- provides authority for the Administrator to
locity Taking Into Account Velocity Decay specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2)
Near the Stack Wall alternative methods, and (3) minor changes
Method 3—Gas analysis for the determina- in the methodology of the test methods. It
tion of dry molecular weight should be clearly understood that unless oth-
Method 3A—Determination of Oxygen and erwise identified all such methods and
Carbon Dioxide Concentrations in Emis- changes must have prior approval of the Ad-
sions From Stationary Sources (Instru-
ministrator. An owner employing such meth-
mental Analyzer Procedure)
ods or deviations from the test methods
Method 3B—Gas analysis for the determina-
without obtaining prior approval does so at
tion of emission rate correction factor or
the risk of subsequent disapproval and re-
excess air
Method 3C—Determination of carbon diox- testing with approved methods.
ide, methane, nitrogen, and oxygen from Within the test methods, certain specific
stationary sources equipment or procedures are recognized as
The test methods in this appendix are re- being acceptable or potentially acceptable
ferred to in § 60.8 (Performance Tests) and and are specifically identified in the meth-
§ 60.11 (Compliance With Standards and ods. The items identified as acceptable op-
Maintenance Requirements) of 40 CFR part tions may be used without approval but
60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific must be identified in the test report. The po-
uses of these test methods are described in tentially approvable options are cited as
the standards of performance contained in ‘‘subject to the approval of the Adminis-
the subparts, beginning with Subpart D. trator’’ or as ‘‘or equivalent.’’ Such poten-
Within each standard of performance, a tially approvable techniques or alternatives
section title ‘‘Test Methods and Procedures’’ may be used at the discretion of the owner
is provided to: (1) Identify the test methods without prior approval. However, detailed
to be used as reference methods to the facil- descriptions for applying these potentially
ity subject to the respective standard and (2) approvable techniques or alternatives are
identify any special instructions or condi- not provided in the test methods. Also, the
tions to be followed when applying a method potentially approvable options are not nec-
to the respective facility. Such instructions essarily acceptable in all applications.
(for example, establish sampling rates, vol- Therefore, an owner electing to use such po-
umes, or temperatures) are to be used either tentially approvable techniques or alter-
in addition to, or as a substitute for proce- natives is responsible for: (1) assuring that
dures in a test method. Similarly, for the techniques or alternatives are in fact ap-
sources subject to emission monitoring replicable and are properly executed; (2) in-
quirements, specific instructions pertaining cluding a written description of the alter-
to any use of a test method as a reference native method in the test report (the written
method are provided in the subpart or in Ap- method must be clear and must be capable of
pendix B. being performed without additional instruc-
Inclusion of methods in this appendix is tion, and the degree of detail should be simi-
not intended as an endorsement or denial of lar to the detail contained in the test meth-
their applicability to sources that are not ods); and (3) providing any rationale or sup-
subject to standards of performance. The porting data necessary to show the validity
methods are potentially applicable to other of the alternative in the particular applica-
sources; however, applicability should be tion. Failure to meet these requirements can
confirmed by careful and appropriate evalua- result in the Administrator’s disapproval of
tion of the conditions prevalent at such the alternative.
sources.
The approach followed in the formulation METHOD 2G—DETERMINATION OF STACK GAS
of the test methods involves specifications VELOCITY AND VOLUMETRIC FLOW RATE
for equipment, procedures, and performance. WITH TWO-DIMENSIONAL PROBES
In concept, a performance specification ap-
proach would be preferable in all methods NOTE: This method does not include all of
because this allows the greatest flexibility the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup-
to the user. In practice, however, this applies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essen-
proach is impractical in most cases because tial to its performance. Some material has
performance specifications cannot be estab- been incorporated from other methods in
lished. Most of the methods described herein, this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable re-
therefore, involve specific equipment speci- sults, those using this method should have a
fications and procedures, and only a few thorough knowledge of at least the following
90
Environmental Protection Agency Pt. 60, App. A–2, Meth. 2G
additional test methods: Methods 1, 2, 3 or 3.6.3 ‘‘Should’’ is used to indicate that a
3A, and 4. provision of this method is not mandatory,
but is highly recommended as good practice.
1.0 Scope and Application 3.7 Method 1. Refers to 40 CFR part 60, ap-
1.1 This method is applicable for the de- pendix A, ‘‘Method 1—Sample and velocity
termination of yaw angle, near-axial veloc- traverses for stationary sources.’’
ity, and the volumetric flow rate of a gas 3.8 Method 2. Refers to 40 CFR part 60, ap-
stream in a stack or duct using a two-dimen- pendix A, ‘‘Method 2—Determination of
sional (2–D) probe. stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate
(Type S pitot tube).’’
2.0 Summary of Method 3.9 Method 2F. Refers to 40 CFR part 60, ap-
pendix A, ‘‘Method 2F—Determination of
2.1 A 2–D probe is used to measure the ve- stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate
locity pressure and the yaw angle of the flow with three-dimensional probes.’’
velocity vector in a stack or duct. Alter- 3.10 Near-axial Velocity. The velocity vector
natively, these measurements may be made parallel to the axis of the stack or duct that
by operating one of the three-dimensional (3– accounts for the yaw angle component of gas
D) probes described in Method 2F, in yaw de- flow. The term ‘‘near-axial’’ is used herein to
termination mode only. From these meas- indicate that the velocity and volumetric
urements and a determination of the stack flow rate results account for the measured
gas density, the average near-axial velocity yaw angle component of flow at each meas-
of the stack gas is calculated. The near-axial urement point.
velocity accounts for the yaw, but not the 3.11 Nominal Velocity. Refers to a wind tun-
pitch, component of flow. The average gas nel velocity setting that approximates the
volumetric flow rate in the stack or duct is actual wind tunnel velocity to within ±1.5 m/
then determined from the average near-axial sec (±5 ft/sec).
velocity. 3.12 Pitch Angle. The angle between the axis
of the stack or duct and the pitch component
3.0 Definitions of flow, i.e., the component of the total ve-
3.1. Angle-measuring Device Rotational Off- locity vector in a plane defined by the tra-
set (RADO). The rotational position of an verse line and the axis of the stack or duct.
angle-measuring device relative to the ref- (Figure 2G–1 illustrates the ‘‘pitch plane.’’)
erence scribe line, as determined during the From the standpoint of a tester facing a test
pre-test rotational position check described port in a vertical stack, the pitch component
in section 8.3. of flow is the vector of flow moving from the
center of the stack toward or away from that
3.2 Calibration Pitot Tube. The standard
test port. The pitch angle is the angle de-
(Prandtl type) pitot tube used as a reference
scribed by this pitch component of flow and
when calibrating a probe under this method.
the vertical axis of the stack.
3.3 Field Test. A set of measurements con- 3.13 Readability. For the purposes of this
ducted at a specific unit or exhaust stack/ method, readability for an analog measure-
duct to satisfy the applicable regulation ment device is one half of the smallest scale
(e.g., a three-run boiler performance test, a division. For a digital measurement device,
single-or multiple-load nine-run relative ac- it is the number of decimals displayed by the
curacy test). device.
3.4 Full Scale of Pressure-measuring Device. 3.14 Reference Scribe Line. A line perma-
Full scale refers to the upper limit of the nently inscribed on the main probe sheath
measurement range displayed by the device. (in accordance with section 6.1.5.1) to serve
For bi-directional pressure gauges, full scale as a reference mark for determining yaw an-
includes the entire pressure range from the gles.
lowest negative value to the highest positive 3.15 Reference Scribe Line Rotational Offset
value on the pressure scale. (RSLO). The rotational position of a probe’s
3.5 Main probe. Refers to the probe head reference scribe line relative to the probe’s
and that section of probe sheath directly at- yaw-null position, as determined during the
tached to the probe head. The main probe yaw angle calibration described in section
sheath is distinguished from probe exten- 10.5.
sions, which are sections of sheath added 3.16 Response Time. The time required for
onto the main probe to extend its reach. the measurement system to fully respond to
3.6 ‘‘May,’’ ‘‘Must,’’ ‘‘Shall,’’ ‘‘Should,’’ and a change from zero differential pressure and
the imperative form of verbs. ambient temperature to the stable stack or
3.6.1 ‘‘May’’ is used to indicate that a product pressure and temperature readings at a
vision of this method is optional. traverse point.

3.6.2 ‘‘Must,’’ ‘‘Shall,’’ and the imperative 3.17 Tested Probe. A probe that is being
form of verbs (such as ‘‘record’’ or ‘‘enter’’) calibrated.
are used to indicate that a provision of this 3.18 Three-dimensional (3–D) Probe. A direc-
method is mandatory. tional probe used to determine the velocity
91
Pt. 60, App. A–2, Meth. 2G 40 CFR Ch. I (7–1–09 Edition)
pressure and the yaw and pitch angles in a When a 3–D probe is yaw-nulled, its impact
flowing gas stream. pressure port (P1) faces directly into the di-
3.19 Two-dimensional (2–D) Probe. A direc- rection of flow in the stack or duct and the
tional probe used to measure velocity pres- differential pressure between pressure ports
sure and yaw angle in a flowing gas stream. P2 and P3 is zero.
3.20 Traverse Line. A diameter or axis ex-
tending across a stack or duct on which 4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
measurements of velocity pressure and flow
5.0 Safety
angles are made.
3.21 Wind Tunnel Calibration Location. A 5.1 This test method may involve haz-
point, line, area, or volume within the wind ardous operations and the use of hazardous
tunnel test section at, along, or within materials or equipment. This method does
which probes are calibrated. At a particular not purport to address all of the safety prob-
wind tunnel velocity setting, the average ve- lems associated with its use. It is the respon-
locity pressures at specified points at, along, sibility of the user to establish and imple-
or within the calibration location shall vary ment appropriate safety and health practices
by no more than 2 percent or 0.3 mm H20 (0.01 and to determine the applicability of regu-
in. H2O), whichever is less restrictive, from latory limitations before using this test
the average velocity pressure at the calibra- method.
tion pitot tube location. Air flow at this lo-
cation shall be axial, i.e., yaw and pitch an- 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
gles within ±3° of 0°. Compliance with these 6.1 Two-dimensional Probes. Probes that
flow criteria shall be demonstrated by per- provide both the velocity pressure and the
forming the procedures prescribed in sec- yaw angle of the flow vector in a stack or
tions 10.1.1 and 10.1.2. For circular tunnels, duct, as listed in sections 6.1.1 and 6.1.2, qual-
no part of the calibration location may be ify for use based on comprehensive wind tun-
closer to the tunnel wall than 10.2 cm (4 in.) nel and field studies involving both inter-and
or 25 percent of the tunnel diameter, which- intra-probe comparisons by multiple test
ever is farther from the wall. For elliptical teams. Each 2–D probe shall have a unique
or rectangular tunnels, no part of the cali- identification number or code permanently
bration location may be closer to the tunnel marked on the main probe sheath. Each
wall than 10.2 cm (4 in.) or 25 percent of the probe shall be calibrated prior to use accord-
applicable cross-sectional axis, whichever is ing to the procedures in section 10. Manufac-
farther from the wall. turer-supplied calibration data shall be used
3.22 Wind Tunnel with Documented Axial as example information only, except when
Flow. A wind tunnel facility documented as the manufacturer calibrates the probe as
meeting the provisions of sections 10.1.1 (ve- specified in section 10 and provides complete
locity pressure cross-check) and 10.1.2 (axial documentation.
flow verification) using the procedures de- 6.1.1 Type S (Stausscheibe or reverse
scribed in these sections or alternative pro- type) pitot tube. This is the same as speci-
cedures determined to be technically equiva- fied in Method 2, section 2.1, except for the
lent. following additional specifications that en-
3.23 Yaw Angle. The angle between the able the pitot tube to accurately determine
axis of the stack or duct and the yaw compo- the yaw component of flow. For the purposes
nent of flow, i.e., the component of the total of this method, the external diameter of the
velocity vector in a plane perpendicular to tubing used to construct the Type S pitot
the traverse line at a particular traverse tube (dimension Dt in Figure 2–2 of Method 2)
point. (Figure 2G–1 illustrates the ‘‘yaw shall be no less than 9.5 mm (3/8 in.). The
plane.’’) From the standpoint of a tester fac- pitot tube shall also meet the following
ing a test port in a vertical stack, the yaw alignment specifications. The angles a1, a2,
component of flow is the vector of flow mov- b1, and b2, as shown in Method 2, Figure 2–3,
ing to the left or right from the center of the shall not exceed ±2°. The dimensions w and z,
stack as viewed by the tester. (This is some- shown in Method 2, Figure 2–3 shall not ex-
times referred to as ‘‘vortex flow,’’ i.e., flow ceed 0.5 mm (0.02 in.).
around the centerline of a stack or duct.) 6.1.1.1 Manual Type S probe. This refers
The yaw angle is the angle described by this to a Type S probe that is positioned at indi-
yaw component of flow and the vertical axis vidual traverse points and yaw nulled manu-
of the stack. The algebraic sign convention ally by an operator.
is illustrated in Figure 2G–2. 6.1.1.2 Automated Type S probe. This re-
3.24 Yaw Nulling. A procedure in which a fers to a system that uses a computer-con-
Type-S pitot tube or a 3–D probe is rotated trolled motorized mechanism to position the
about its axis in a stack or duct until a zero Type S pitot head at individual traverse
differential pressure reading (‘‘yaw null’’) is points and perform yaw angle determina-
obtained. When a Type S probe is yaw- tions.
nulled, the rotational position of its impact 6.1.2 Three-dimensional probes used in 2–
port is 90° from the direction of flow in the D mode. A 3–D probe, as specified in sections
stack or duct and the DP reading is zero. 6.1.1 through 6.1.3 of Method 2F, may, for the
92
purposes of this method, be used in a two-ditional position of the scribe line or scribe
mensional mode (i.e., measuring yaw angle, line segments on the main probe or any
but not pitch angle). When the 3–D probe is probe extension must not vary by more than
used as a 2–D probe, only the velocity pres- 2°. That is, the difference between the min-
sure and yaw-null pressure are obtained imum and maximum of all of the rotational
using the pressure taps referred to as P1, P2, angles that are measured along the full
and P3. The differential pressure P1–P2 is a length of the main probe or the probe exten-
function of total velocity and corresponds to sion must not exceed 2°.
the DP obtained using the Type S probe. The 6.1.6 Probe and system characteristics to
differential pressure P2–P3 is used to yaw ensure horizontal stability.
null the probe and determine the yaw angle.
6.1.6.1 For manual probes, it is rec-
The differential pressure P4–P5, which is a
ommended that the effective length of the
function of pitch angle, is not measured
probe (coupled with a probe extension, if nec-
when the 3–D probe is used in 2–D mode.
6.1.3 Other probes. [Reserved] essary) be at least 0.9 m (3 ft.) longer than
6.1.4 Probe sheath. The probe shaft shall the farthest traverse point mark on the
include an outer sheath to: (1) provide a sur- probe shaft away from the probe head. The
face for inscribing a permanent reference operator should maintain the probe’s hori-
scribe line, (2) accommodate attachment of zontal stability when it is fully inserted into
an angle-measuring device to the probe the stack or duct. If a shorter probe is used,
shaft, and (3) facilitate precise rotational the probe should be inserted through a bush-
movement of the probe for determining yaw ing sleeve, similar to the one shown in Fig-
angles. The sheath shall be rigidly attached ure 2G–3, that is installed on the test port;
to the probe assembly and shall enclose all such a bushing shall fit snugly around the
pressure lines from the probe head to the far- probe and be secured to the stack or duct
thest position away from the probe head entry port in such a manner as to maintain
where an angle-measuring device may be at- the probe’s horizontal stability when fully
tached during use in the field. The sheath of inserted into the stack or duct.
the fully assembled probe shall be suffi- 6.1.6.2 An automated system that includes
ciently rigid and straight at all rotational an external probe casing with a transport
positions such that, when one end of the system shall have a mechanism for main-
probe shaft is held in a horizontal position, taining horizontal stability comparable to
the fully extended probe meets the hori- that obtained by manual probes following
zontal straightness specifications indicated the provisions of this method. The auto-
in section 8.2 below. mated probe assembly shall also be con-
6.1.5 Scribe lines. structed to maintain the alignment and posi-
6.1.5.1 Reference scribe line. A permanent tion of the pressure ports during sampling at
line, no greater than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) in each traverse point. The design of the probe
width, shall be inscribed on each manual casing and transport system shall allow the
probe that will be used to determine yaw an- probe to be removed from the stack or duct
gles of flow. This line shall be placed on the and checked through direct physical meas-
main probe sheath in accordance with the urement for angular position and insertion
procedures described in section 10.4 and is depth.
used as a reference position for installation
6.1.7 The tubing that is used to connect
of the yaw angle-measuring device on the
the probe and the pressure-measuring device
probe. At the discretion of the tester, the
should have an inside diameter of at least 3.2
scribe line may be a single line segment
mm (1⁄8 in.), to reduce the time required for
placed at a particular position on the probe
pressure equilibration, and should be as
sheath (e.g., near the probe head), multiple
short as practicable.
line segments placed at various locations
along the length of the probe sheath (e.g., at 6.1.8 If a detachable probe head without a
every position where a yaw angle-measuring sheath [e.g., a pitot tube, typically 15.2 to
device may be mounted), or a single contin- 30.5 cm (6 to 12 in.) in length] is coupled with
uous line extending along the full length of a probe sheath and calibrated in a wind tun-
the probe sheath. nel in accordance with the yaw angle cali-
6.1.5.2 Scribe line on probe extensions. A bration procedure in section 10.5, the probe
permanent line may also be inscribed on any head shall remain attached to the probe
probe extension that will be attached to the sheath during field testing in the same con-
main probe in performing field testing. This figuration and orientation as calibrated.
allows a yaw angle-measuring device mount- Once the detachable probe head is uncoupled
ed on the extension to be readily aligned or re-oriented, the yaw angle calibration of
with the reference scribe line on the main the probe is no longer valid and must be re-
probe sheath. peated before using the probe in subsequent

6.1.5.3 Alignment specifications. This field tests.
specification shall be met separately, using 6.2 Yaw Angle-measuring Device. One of
the procedures in section 10.4.1, on the main the following devices shall be used for meas-
probe and on each probe extension. The rota- urement of the yaw angle of flow.
93
6.2.1 Digital inclinometer. This refers to a 6.4 Differential Pressure Gauges. The ve-
digital device capable of measuring and dis- locity pressure (DP) measuring devices used
playing the rotational position of the probe during wind tunnel calibrations and field
to within ±1°. The device shall be able to be testing shall be either electronic
locked into position on the probe sheath or manometers (e.g., pressure transducers),
probe extension, so that it indicates the fluid manometers, or mechanical pressure
probe’s rotational position throughout the gauges (e.g., MagnehelicD gauges). Use of
test. A rotational position collar block that electronic manometers is recommended.
can be attached to the probe sheath (similar Under low velocity conditions, use of elec-
to the collar shown in Figure 2G–4) may be tronic manometers may be necessary to ob-
required to lock the digital inclinometer tain acceptable measurements.
into position on the probe sheath. 6.4.1 Differential pressure-measuring de-
6.2.2 Protractor wheel and pointer assem- vice. This refers to a device capable of meas-
bly. This apparatus, similar to that shown in uring pressure differentials and having a
Figure 2G–5, consists of the following compo- readability of ±1 percent of full scale. The de-
nents. vice shall be capable of accurately meas-
6.2.2.1 A protractor wheel that can be at- uring the maximum expected pressure dif-
tached to a port opening and set in a fixed ferential. Such devices are used to determine
rotational position to indicate the yaw angle the following pressure measurements: veloc-
position of the probe’s scribe line relative to ity pressure, static pressure, and yaw-null
the longitudinal axis of the stack or duct. pressure. For an inclined-vertical manom-
The protractor wheel must have a measure- eter, the readability specification of ±1 per-
ment ring on its face that is no less than 17.8 cent shall be met separately using the re-
cm (7 in.) in diameter, shall be able to be ro- spective full-scale upper limits of the in-
tated to any angle and then locked into posi- clined anvertical portions of the scales. To
tion on the stack or duct test port, and shall the extent practicable, the device shall be se-
indicate angles to a resolution of 1°. lected such that most of the pressure read-
6.2.2.2 A pointer assembly that includes ings are between 10 and 90 percent of the de-
an indicator needle mounted on a collar that vice’s full-scale measurement range (as de-
can slide over the probe sheath and be locked fined in section 3.4). In addition, pressure-
into a fixed rotational position on the probe measuring devices should be selected such
sheath. The pointer needle shall be of suffi- that the zero does not drift by more than 5
cient length, rigidity, and sharpness to allow percent of the average expected pressure
the tester to determine the probe’s angular readings to be encountered during the field
position to within 1° from the markings on test. This is particularly important under
the protractor wheel. Corresponding to the low pressure conditions.
position of the pointer, the collar must have 6.4.2 Gauge used for yaw nulling. The dif-
a scribe line to be used in aligning the point- ferential pressure-measuring device chosen
er with the scribe line on the probe sheath. for yaw nulling the probe during the wind
6.2.3 Other yaw angle-measuring devices. tunnel calibrations and field testing shall be
Other angle-measuring devices with a manu- bi-directional, i.e., capable of reading both
facturer’s specified precision of 1° or better positive and negative differential pressures.
may be used, if approved by the Adminis- If a mechanical, bi-directional pressure
trator. gauge is chosen, it shall have a full-scale
6.3 Probe Supports and Stabilization De- range no greater than 2.6 cm (i.e., ¥1.3 to
vices. When probes are used for determining +1.3 cm) [1 in. H2O (i.e., ¥0.5 in. to +0.5 in.)].
flow angles, the probe head should be kept in 6.4.3 Devices for calibrating differential
a stable horizontal position. For probes pressure-measuring devices. A precision ma-
longer than 3.0 m (10 ft.), the section of the nometer (e.g., a U-tube, inclined, or inclined-
probe that extends outside the test port shall vertical manometer, or micromanometer) or
be secured. Three alternative devices are NIST (National Institute of Standards and
suggested for maintaining the horizontal po- Technology) traceable pressure source shall
sition and stability of the probe shaft during be used for calibrating differential pressure-
flow angle determinations and velocity pres- measuring devices. The device shall be main-
sure measurements: (1) monorails installed tained under laboratory conditions or in a
above each port, (2) probe stands on which similar protected environment (e.g., a cli-
the probe shaft may be rested, or (3) bushing mate-controlled trailer). It shall not be used
sleeves of sufficient length secured to the in field tests. The precision manometer shall
test ports to maintain probes in a horizontal have a scale gradation of 0.3 mm H2O (0.01 in.
position. Comparable provisions shall be H2O), or less, in the range of 0 to 5.1 cm H2O
made to ensure that automated systems (0 to 2 in. H2O) and 2.5 mm H2O (0.1 in. H2O),
maintain the horizontal position of the probe or less, in the range of 5.1 to 25.4 cm H2O (2
in the stack or duct. The physical character- to 10 in. H2O). The manometer shall have
istics of each test platform may dictate the manufacturer’s documentation that it meets
most suitable type of stabilization device. an accuracy specification of at least 0.5 per-
Thus, the choice of a specific stabilization cent of full scale. The NIST-traceable pres-
device is left to the judgement of the testers. sure source shall be recertified annually.
94
6.4.4 Devices used for post-test calibration 6.9 Gas Density Determination Equip-
check. A precision manometer meeting the ment. Method 3 or 3A shall be used to deter-
specifications in section 6.4.3, a pressure- mine the dry molecular weight of the stack
measuring device or pressure source with a or duct gas. Method 4 shall be used for mois-
documented calibration traceable to NIST, ture content determination and computation
or an equivalent device approved by the Ad- of stack or duct gas wet molecular weight.
ministrator shall be used for the post-test Other methods may be used, if approved by
calibration check. The pressure-measuring the Administrator.
device shall have a readability equivalent to 6.10 Calibration Pitot Tube. Same as
or greater than the tested device. The pres- Method 2, section 2.7.
sure source shall be capable of generating 6.11 Wind Tunnel for Probe Calibration.
pressures between 50 and 90 percent of the Wind tunnels used to calibrate velocity
range of the tested device and known to probes must meet the following design speci-
within ±1 percent of the full scale of the test- fications.
ed device. The pressure source shall be recer- 6.11.1 Test section cross-sectional area.
tified annually. The flowing gas stream shall be confined
6.5 Data Display and Capture Devices. within a circular, rectangular, or elliptical
Electronic manometers (if used) shall be cou- duct. The cross-sectional area of the tunnel
pled with a data display device (such as a must be large enough to ensure fully devel-
digital panel meter, personal computer dis- oped flow in the presence of both the calibra-
play, or strip chart) that allows the tester to tion pitot tube and the tested probe. The
observe and validate the pressure measure- calibration site, or ‘‘test section,’’ of the
ments taken during testing. They shall also wind tunnel shall have a minimum diameter
be connected to a data recorder (such as a of 30.5 cm (12 in.) for circular or elliptical
data logger or a personal computer with data duct cross-sections or a minimum width of
capture software) that has the ability to 30.5 cm (12 in.) on the shorter side for rectan-
compute and retain the appropriate average gular cross-sections. Wind tunnels shall meet
value at each traverse point, identified by the probe blockage provisions of this section
collection time and traverse point. and the qualification requirements pre-
6.6 Temperature Gauges. For field tests, a scribed in section 10.1. The projected area of
thermocouple or resistance temperature de- the portion of the probe head, shaft, and at-
tector (RTD) capable of measuring tempera- tached devices inside the wind tunnel during
ture to within ±3°C (±5°F) of the stack or calibration shall represent no more than 4
duct temperature shall be used. The thermo- percent of the cross-sectional area of the
couple shall be attached to the probe such tunnel. The projected area shall include the
that the sensor tip does not touch any metal. combined area of the calibration pitot tube
The position of the thermocouple relative to and the tested probe if both probes are
the pressure port face openings shall be in placed simultaneously in the same cross-sec-
the same configuration as used for the probe tional plane in the wind tunnel, or the larger
calibrations in the wind tunnel. Temperature projected area of the two probes if they are
gauges used for wind tunnel calibrations placed alternately in the wind tunnel.
shall be capable of measuring temperature to 6.11.2 Velocity range and stability. The
within ±0.6°C (±1°F) of the temperature of the wind tunnel should be capable of maintain-
flowing gas stream in the wind tunnel. ing velocities between 6.1 m/sec and 30.5 m/
6.7 Stack or Duct Static Pressure Meas- sec (20 ft/sec and 100 ft/sec). The wind tunnel
urement. The pressure-measuring device shall produce fully developed flow patterns
used with the probe shall be as specified in that are stable and parallel to the axis of the
section 6.4 of this method. The static tap of duct in the test section.
a standard (Prandtl type) pitot tube or one 6.11.3 Flow profile at the calibration loca-
leg of a Type S pitot tube with the face open- tion. The wind tunnel shall provide axial
ing planes positioned parallel to the gas flow flow within the test section calibration loca-
may be used for this measurement. Also action (as defined in section 3.21). Yaw and
ceptable is the pressure differential reading pitch angles in the calibration location shall
of P1-Pbar from a five-hole prism-shaped 3–D be within ±3° of 0°. The procedure for deter-
probe, as specified in section 6.1.1 of Method mining that this requirement has been met
2F (such as the Type DA or DAT probe), with is described in section 10.1.2.
the P1 pressure port face opening positioned 6.11.4 Entry ports in the wind tunnel test
parallel to the gas flow in the same manner section.
as the Type S probe. However, the 3–D spher- 6.11.4.1 Port for tested probe. A port shall
ical probe, as specified in section 6.1.2 of be constructed for the tested probe. This
Method 2F, is unable to provide this meas- port shall be located to allow the head of the
urement and shall not be used to take static tested probe to be positioned within the wind
pressure measurements. Static pressure tunnel calibration location (as defined in

measurement is further described in section section 3.21). The tested probe shall be able
8.11. to be locked into the 0° pitch angle position.
6.8 Barometer. Same as Method 2, section To facilitate alignment of the probe during
2.5. calibration, the test section should include a
95
window constructed of a transparent mate- 8.2 Horizontal Straightness Check. A hor-
rial to allow the tested probe to be viewed. izontal straightness check shall be per-
6.11.4.2 Port for verification of axial flow. formed before the start of each field test, ex-
Depending on the equipment selected to concept as otherwise specified in this section.
duct the axial flow verification prescribed in Secure the fully assembled probe (including
section 10.1.2, a second port, located 90° from the probe head and all probe shaft exten-
the entry port for the tested probe, may be sions) in a horizontal position using a sta-
needed to allow verification that the gas tionary support at a point along the probe
flow is parallel to the central axis of the test shaft approximating the location of the
section. This port should be located and con- stack or duct entry port when the probe is
structed so as to allow one of the probes de- sampling at the farthest traverse point from
scribed in section 10.1.2.2 to access the same the stack or duct wall. The probe shall be ro-
test point(s) that are accessible from the tated to detect bends. Use an angle-meas-
port described in section 6.11.4.1. uring device or trigonometry to determine
6.11.4.3 Port for calibration pitot tube. the bend or sag between the probe head and
The calibration pitot tube shall be used in the secured end. (See Figure 2G–6.) Probes
the port for the tested probe or in a separate that are bent or sag by more than 5° shall
entry port. In either case, all measurements not be used. Although this check does not
with the calibration pitot tube shall be made apply when the probe is used for a vertical
at the same point within the wind tunnel traverse, care should be taken to avoid the
over the course of a probe calibration. The use of bent probes when conducting vertical
measurement point for the calibration pitot traverses. If the probe is constructed of a
tube shall meet the same specifications for rigid steel material and consists of a main
distance from the wall and for axial flow as probe without probe extensions, this check
described in section 3.21 for the wind tunnel need only be performed before the initial
calibration location. field use of the probe, when the probe is re-
calibrated, when a change is made to the de-
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved] sign or material of the probe assembly, and
when the probe becomes bent. With such
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis probes, a visual inspection shall be made of
the fully assembled probe before each field
8.1 Equipment Inspection and Set Up test to determine if a bend is visible. The
8.1.1 All 2–D and 3–D probes, differential probe shall be rotated to detect bends. The
pressure-measuring devices, yaw angle-meas- inspection results shall be documented in the
uring devices, thermocouples, and barom- field test report. If a bend in the probe is
eters shall have a current, valid calibration visible, the horizontal straightness check
before being used in a field test. (See sec- shall be performed before the probe is used.
tions 10.3.3, 10.3.4, and 10.5 through 10.10 for 8.3 Rotational Position Check. Before
the applicable calibration requirements.) each field test, and each time an extension is
8.1.2 Before each field use of a Type S added to the probe during a field test, a rota-
probe, perform a visual inspection to verify tional position check shall be performed on
the physical condition of the pitot tube. all manually operated probes (except as
Record the results of the inspection. If the noted in section 8.3.5 below) to ensure that,
face openings are noticeably misaligned or throughout testing, the angle-measuring de-
there is visible damage to the face openings, vice is either: aligned to within ±1° of the ro-
the probe shall not be used until repaired, tational position of the reference scribe line;
the dimensional specifications verified (ac- or is affixed to the probe such that the rota-
cording to the procedures in section 10.2.1), tional offset of the device from the reference
and the probe recalibrated. scribe line is known to within ±1°. This check
8.1.3 Before each field use of a 3–D probe, shall consist of direct measurements of the
perform a visual inspection to verify the rotational positions of the reference scribe
physical condition of the probe head accord- line and angle-measuring device sufficient to
ing to the procedures in section 10.2 of Meth- verify that these specifications are met.
od 2F. Record the inspection results on a Annex A in section 18 of this method gives
form similar to Table 2F–1 presented in recommended procedures for performing the
Method 2F. If there is visible damage to the rotational position check, and Table 2G–2
3–D probe, the probe shall not be used until gives an example data form. Procedures
it is recalibrated. other than those recommended in Annex A
8.1.4 After verifying that the physical in section 18 may be used, provided they
condition of the probe head is acceptable, set demonstrate whether the alignment speci-
up the apparatus using lengths of flexible fication is met and are explained in detail in
tubing that are as short as practicable. the field test report.
Surge tanks installed between the probe and 8.3.1 Angle-measuring device rotational
pressure-measuring device may be used to offset. The tester shall maintain a record of
dampen pressure fluctuations provided that the angle-measuring device rotational offset,
an adequate measurement system response RADO, as defined in section 3.1. Note that
time (see section 8.8) is maintained. RADO is assigned a value of 0° when the angle-
96
measuring device is aligned to within ±1° of device’s responsiveness to changes in pres-
the rotational position of the reference sure.
scribe line. The RADO shall be used to deter- 8.4.1 To perform the leak check on a Type
mine the yaw angle of flow in accordance S pitot tube, pressurize the pitot impact
with section 8.9.4. opening until at least 7.6 cm H2O (3 in. H2O)
8.3.2 Sign of angle-measuring device rota- velocity pressure, or a pressure cor-
tional offset. The sign of RADO is positive responding to approximately 75 percent of
when the angle-measuring device (as viewed the pressure device’s measurement scale,
from the ‘‘tail’’ end of the probe) is posi- whichever is less, registers on the pressure
tioned in a clockwise direction from the ref- device; then, close off the impact opening.
erence scribe line and negative when the de- The pressure shall remain stable (±2.5 mm
vice is positioned in a counterclockwise di- H2O, ±0.10 in. H2O) for at least 15 seconds. Re-
rection from the reference scribe line. peat this procedure for the static pressure
8.3.3 Angle-measuring devices that can be side, except use suction to obtain the re-
independently adjusted (e.g., by means of a quired pressure. Other leak-check procedures
set screw), after being locked into position may be used, if approved by the Adminis-
on the probe sheath, may be used. However, trator.
the RADO must also take into account this 8.4.2 To perform the leak check on a 3–D
adjustment. probe, pressurize the probe’s impact (P1)
8.3.4 Post-test check. If probe extensions opening until at least 7.6 cm H2O (3 in. H2O)
remain attached to the main probe through- velocity pressure, or a pressure cor-
out the field test, the rotational position responding to approximately 75 percent of
check shall be repeated, at a minimum, at the pressure device’s measurement scale,
the completion of the field test to ensure whichever is less, registers on the pressure
that the angle-measuring device has re- device; then, close off the impact opening.
mained within ±2° of its rotational position The pressure shall remain stable (±2.5 mm
established prior to testing. At the discre- H2O, ±0.10 in. H2O) for at least 15 seconds.
tion of the tester, additional checks may be Check the P2 and P3 pressure ports in the
conducted after completion of testing at any same fashion. Other leak-check procedures
sample port or after any test run. If the ±2° may be used, if approved by the Adminis-
specification is not met, all measurements trator.
made since the last successful rotational po- 8.5 Zeroing the Differential Pressure-
sition check must be repeated. Section measuring Device. Zero each differential
18.1.1.3 of Annex A provides an example pro- pressure-measuring device, including the de-
cedure for performing the post-test check. vice used for yaw nulling, before each field
8.3.5 Exceptions. test. At a minimum, check the zero after
8.3.5.1 A rotational position check need each field test. A zero check may also be per-
not be performed if, for measurements taken formed after any test run or group of test
at all velocity traverse points, the yaw runs. For fluid manometers and mechanical
angle-measuring device is mounted and pressure gauges (e.g., MagnehelicD gauges),
aligned directly on the reference scribe line the zero reading shall not deviate from zero
specified in sections 6.1.5.1 and 6.1.5.3 and no by more than ±0.8 mm H2O (±0.03 in. H2O) or
independent adjustments, as described in one minor scale division, whichever is great-
section 8.3.3, are made to device’s rotational er, between checks. For electronic
position. manometers, the zero reading shall not devi-
8.3.5.2 If extensions are detached and re- ate from zero between checks by more than:
attached to the probe during a field test, a ±0.3 mm H2O (±0.01 in. H2O), for full scales
rotational position check need only be per- less than or equal to 5.1 cm H2O (2.0 in. H2O);
formed the first time an extension is added or ±0.8 mm H2O (±0.03 in. H2O), for full scales
to the probe, rather than each time the ex- greater than 5.1 cm H2O (2.0 in. H2O). (NOTE:
tension is re-attached, if the probe extension If negative zero drift is not directly readable,
is designed to be locked into a mechanically estimate the reading based on the position of
fixed rotational position (e.g., through the the gauge oil in the manometer or of the
use of interlocking grooves), that can re-es- needle on the pressure gauge.) In addition,
tablish the initial rotational position to for all pressure-measuring devices except
within ±1°. those used exclusively for yaw nulling, the
8.4 Leak Checks. A pre-test leak check zero reading shall not deviate from zero by
shall be conducted before each field test. A more than 5 percent of the average measured
post-test check shall be performed at the end differential pressure at any distinct process
of the field test, but additional leak checks condition or load level. If any zero check is
may be conducted after any test run or failed at a specific process condition or load
group of test runs. The post-test check may level, all runs conducted at that process con-
also serve as the pre-test check for the next dition or load level since the last passed zero
group of test runs. If any leak check is check are invalid.
failed, all runs since the last passed leak 8.6 Traverse Point Verification. The num-
check are invalid. While performing the leak ber and location of the traverse points shall
check procedures, also check each pressure be selected based on Method 1 guidelines.
97
The stack or duct diameter and port nipple be used. For vertical traversing, i.e., when
lengths, including any extension of the port measuring from on top or into the bottom of
nipples into the stack or duct, shall be a horizontal duct, only the protractor wheel
verified the first time the test is performed; and pointer assembly may be used. With
retain and use this information for subse- automated probes, curve-fitting protocols
quent field tests, updating it as required. may be used to obtain yaw-angle measure-
Physically measure the stack or duct dimen- ments.
sions or use a calibrated laser device; do not 8.9.1.1 If a yaw angle-measuring device af-
use engineering drawings of the stack or fixed to the probe is to be used, lock the de-
duct. The probe length necessary to reach vice on the probe sheath, aligning it either
each traverse point shall be recorded to on the reference scribe line or in the rota-
within ±6.4 mm (±1⁄4 in.) and, for manual tional offset position established under sec-
probes, marked on the probe sheath. In de- tion 8.3.1.
termining these lengths, the tester shall 8.9.1.2 If a protractor wheel and pointer
take into account both the distance that the assembly is to be used, follow the procedures
port flange projects outside of the stack and in Annex B of this method.
the depth that any port nipple extends into 8.9.1.3 Curve-fitting procedures. Curve-fit-
the gas stream. The resulting point positions ting routines sweep through a range of yaw
shall reflect the true distances from the in- angles to create curves correlating pressure
side wall of the stack or duct, so that when to yaw position. To find the zero yaw posi-
the tester aligns any of the markings with tion and the yaw angle of flow, the curve
the outside face of the stack port, the found in the stack is computationally com-
probe’s impact port shall be located at the pared to a similar curve that was previously
appropriate distance from the inside wall for generated under controlled conditions in a
the respective Method 1 traverse point. Be- wind tunnel. A probe system that uses a
fore beginning testing at a particular loca- curve-fitting routine for determining the
tion, an out-of-stack or duct verification yaw-null position of the probe head may be
shall be performed on each probe that will be used, provided that it is verified in a wind
used to ensure that these position markings tunnel to be able to determine the yaw angle
are correct. The distances measured during of flow to within ±1°.
the verification must agree with the pre- 8.9.1.4 Other yaw angle determination
viously calculated distances to within ±1⁄4 in. procedures. If approved by the Adminis-
For manual probes, the traverse point posi- trator, other procedures for determining yaw
tions shall be verified by measuring the dis- angle may be used, provided that they are
tance of each mark from the probe’s impact verified in a wind tunnel to be able to per-
pressure port (the P1 port for a 3-D probe). A form the yaw angle calibration procedure as
comparable out-of-stack test shall be per- described in section 10.5.
formed on automated probe systems. The 8.9.2 Sampling strategy. At each traverse
probe shall be extended to each of the pre- point, first yaw-null the probe, as described
scribed traverse point positions. Then, the in section 8.9.3, below. Then, with the probe
accuracy of the positioning for each traverse oriented into the direction of flow, measure
point shall be verified by measuring the dis- and record the yaw angle, the differential
tance between the port flange and the pressure and the temperature at the traverse
probe’s impact pressure port. point, after stable readings are achieved, in
8.7 Probe Installation. Insert the probe accordance with sections 8.9.4 and 8.9.5. At
into the test port. A solid material shall be the start of testing in each port (i.e., after a
used to seal the port. probe has been inserted into the flue gas
8.8 System Response Time. Determine the stream), allow at least the response time to
response time of the probe measurement sys- elapse before beginning to take measure-
tem. Insert and position the ‘‘cold’’ probe (at ments at the first traverse point accessed
ambient temperature and pressure) at any from that port. Provided that the probe is
Method 1 traverse point. Read and record the not removed from the flue gas stream, meas-
probe differential pressure, temperature, and urements may be taken at subsequent tra-
elapsed time at 15-second intervals until sta- verse points accessed from the same test
ble readings for both pressure and tempera- port without waiting again for the response
ture are achieved. The response time is the time to elapse.
longer of these two elapsed times. Record the 8.9.3 Yaw-nulling procedure. In prepara-
response time. tion for yaw angle determination, the probe
8.9 Sampling. must first be yaw nulled. After positioning
8.9.1 Yaw angle measurement protocol. the probe at the appropriate traverse point,
With manual probes, yaw angle measure- perform the following procedures.
ments may be obtained in two alternative 8.9.3.1 For Type S probes, rotate the probe
ways during the field test, either by using a until a null differential pressure reading is
yaw angle-measuring device (e.g., digital in- obtained. The direction of the probe rotation
clinometer) affixed to the probe, or using a shall be such that the thermocouple is lo-
protractor wheel and pointer assembly. For cated downstream of the probe pressure
horizontal traversing, either approach may ports at the yaw-null position. Rotate the
98
probe 90° back from the yaw-null position to 8.9.4.3 Record the yaw angle measure-
orient the impact pressure port into the di- ments on a form similar to Table 2G–3.
rection of flow. Read and record the angle 8.9.5 Impact velocity determination.
displayed by the angle-measuring device. Maintain the probe rotational position es-
8.9.3.2 For 3-D probes, rotate the probe tablished during the yaw angle determina-
until a null differential pressure reading (the tion. Then, begin recording the pressure-
difference in pressures across the P2 and P3 measuring device readings. These pressure
pressure ports is zero, i.e., P2=P3) is indi- measurements shall be taken over a sam-
cated by the yaw angle pressure gauge. Read pling period of sufficiently long duration to
and record the angle displayed by the angle- ensure representative readings at each tra-
measuring device. verse point. If the pressure measurements
8.9.3.3 Sign of the measured angle. The are determined from visual readings of the
angle displayed on the angle-measuring de- pressure device or display, allow sufficient
vice is considered positive when the probe’s time to observe the pulsation in the readings
impact pressure port (as viewed from the to obtain a sight-weighted average, which is
‘‘tail’’ end of the probe) is oriented in a then recorded manually. If an automated
clockwise rotational position relative to the data acquisition system (e.g., data logger,
stack or duct axis and is considered negative computer-based data recorder, strip chart re-
when the probe’s impact pressure port is ori- corder) is used to record the pressure meas-
ented in a counterclockwise rotational posi- urements, obtain an integrated average of all
tion (see Figure 2G–7).
pressure readings at the traverse point.
8.9.4 Yaw angle determination. After per-
Stack or duct gas temperature measure-
forming the applicable yaw-nulling proce-
ments shall be recorded, at a minimum, once
dure in section 8.9.3, determine the yaw
at each traverse point. Record all necessary
angle of flow according to one of the fol-
data as shown in the example field data form
lowing procedures. Special care must be ob-
(Table 2G–3).
served to take into account the signs of the
recorded angle reading and all offsets. 8.9.6 Alignment check. For manually op-
8.9.4.1 Direct-reading. If all rotational off- erated probes, after the required yaw angle
sets are zero or if the angle-measuring device and differential pressure and temperature
rotational offset (RADO) determined in sec- measurements have been made at each tra-
tion 8.3 exactly compensates for the scribe verse point, verify (e.g., by visual inspection)
line rotational offset (RSLO) determined in that the yaw angle-measuring device has re-
section 10.5, then the magnitude of the yaw mained in proper alignment with the ref-
angle is equal to the displayed angle-meas- erence scribe line or with the rotational off-
uring device reading from section 8.9.3.1 or set position established in section 8.3. If, for
8.9.3.2. The algebraic sign of the yaw angle is a particular traverse point, the angle-meas-
determined in accordance with section uring device is found to be in proper align-
8.9.3.3. [NOTE: Under certain circumstances ment, proceed to the next traverse point;
(e.g., testing of horizontal ducts) a 90° ad- otherwise, re-align the device and repeat the
justment to the angle-measuring device angle and differential pressure measure-
readings may be necessary to obtain the cor- ments at the traverse point. In the course of
rect yaw angles.] a traverse, if a mark used to properly align
8.9.4.2 Compensation for rotational offsets the angle-measuring device (e.g., as de-
during data reduction. When the angle-meas- scribed in section 18.1.1.1) cannot be located,
uring device rotational offset does not com- re-establish the alignment mark before pro-
pensate for reference scribe line rotational ceeding with the traverse.
offset, the following procedure shall be used 8.10 Probe Plugging. Periodically check
to determine the yaw angle: for plugging of the pressure ports by observ-
(a) Enter the reading indicated by the ing the responses on the pressure differential
angle-measuring device from section 8.9.3.1 readouts. Plugging causes erratic results or
or 8.9.3.2. sluggish responses. Rotate the probe to de-
(b) Associate the proper algebraic sign termine whether the readouts respond in the
from section 8.9.3.3 with the reading in step expected direction. If plugging is detected,
(a). correct the problem and repeat the affected
(c) Subtract the reference scribe line rota- measurements.
tional offset, RSLO, from the reading in step 8.11 Static Pressure. Measure the static
(b). pressure in the stack or duct using the
(d) Subtract the angle-measuring device equipment described in section 6.7.
rotational offset, RADO, if any, from the re- 8.11.1 If a Type S probe is used for this
sult obtained in step (c). measurement, position the probe at or be-
(e) The final result obtained in step (d) is
tween any traverse point(s) and rotate the

the yaw angle of flow. probe until a null differential pressure read-
[NOTE: It may be necessary to first apply a ing is obtained. Disconnect the tubing from
90° adjustment to the reading in step (a), in one of the pressure ports; read and record the
order to obtain the correct yaw angle.] DP. For pressure devices with one-directional
99
scales, if a deflection in the positive direc- 9.0 Quality Control
tion is noted with the negative side discon- 9.1 Quality Control Activities. In conjunc-
nected, then the static pressure is positive. tion with the yaw angle determination and
Likewise, if a deflection in the positive di- the pressure and temperature measurements
rection is noted with the positive side dis- specified in section 8.9, the following quality
connected, then the static pressure is nega- control checks should be performed.
tive. 9.1.1 Range of the differential pressure
8.11.2 If a 3–D probe is used for this meas- gauge. In accordance with the specifications
urement, position the probe at or between in section 6.4, ensure that the proper dif-
any traverse point(s) and rotate the probe ferential pressure gauge is being used for the
until a null differential pressure reading is range of DP values encountered. If it is nec-
obtained at P2–P3. Rotate the probe 90°. Dis- essary to change to a more sensitive gauge,
connect the P2 pressure side of the probe and replace the gauge with a gauge calibrated ac-
read the pressure P1–Pbar and record as the cording to section 10.3.3, perform the leak
static pressure. (NOTE: The spherical probe, check described in section 8.4 and the zero
specified in section 6.1.2 of Method 2F, is un- check described in section 8.5, and repeat the
able to provide this measurement and shall differential pressure and temperature read-
not be used to take static pressure measure- ings at each traverse point.
9.1.2 Horizontal stability check. For hori-
ments.)
zontal traverses of a stack or duct, visually
8.12 Atmospheric Pressure. Determine the check that the probe shaft is maintained in
atmospheric pressure at the sampling ele- a horizontal position prior to taking a pres-
vation during each test run following the sure reading. Periodically, during a test run,
procedure described in section 2.5 of Method the probe’s horizontal stability should be
2. verified by placing a carpenter’s level, a dig-
8.13 Molecular Weight. Determine the ital inclinometer, or other angle-measuring
stack or duct gas dry molecular weight. For device on the portion of the probe sheath
combustion processes or processes that emit that extends outside of the test port. A com-
essentially CO2, O2, CO, and N2, use Method 3 parable check should be performed by auto-
or 3A. For processes emitting essentially air, mated systems.
an analysis need not be conducted; use a dry
molecular weight of 29.0. Other methods may 10.0 Calibration
be used, if approved by the Administrator. 10.1 Wind Tunnel Qualification Checks.
8.14 Moisture. Determine the moisture To qualify for use in calibrating probes, a
content of the stack gas using Method 4 or wind tunnel shall have the design features
equivalent. specified in section 6.11 and satisfy the fol-
8.15 Data Recording and Calculations. lowing qualification criteria. The velocity
Record all required data on a form similar to pressure cross-check in section 10.1.1 and
Table 2G–3. axial flow verification in section 10.1.2 shall
8.15.1 2–D probe calibration coefficient. be performed before the initial use of the
When a Type S pitot tube is used in the field, wind tunnel and repeated immediately after
the appropriate calibration coefficient as de- any alteration occurs in the wind tunnel’s
termined in section 10.6 shall be used to per- configuration, fans, interior surfaces,
form velocity calculations. For calibrated straightening vanes, controls, or other prop-
Type S pitot tubes, the A-side coefficient erties that could reasonably be expected to
shall be used when the A-side of the tube alter the flow pattern or velocity stability in
faces the flow, and the B-side coefficient the tunnel. The owner or operator of a wind
shall be used when the B-side faces the flow. tunnel used to calibrate probes according to
this method shall maintain records docu-
8.15.2 3–D calibration coefficient. When a
menting that the wind tunnel meets the re-
3–D probe is used to collect data with this
quirements of sections 10.1.1 and 10.1.2 and
method, follow the provisions for the calibra-
shall provide these records to the Adminis-
tion of 3–D probes in section 10.6 of Method trator upon request.
2F to obtain the appropriate velocity cali- 10.1.1 Velocity pressure cross-check. To
bration coefficient (F2 as derived using Equa- verify that the wind tunnel produces the
tion 2F–2 in Method 2F) corresponding to a same velocity at the tested probe head as at
pitch angle position of 0°. the calibration pitot tube impact port, per-
8.15.3 Calculations. Calculate the yaw-ad- form the following cross-check. Take three
justed velocity at each traverse point using differential pressure measurements at the
the equations presented in section 12.2. Cal- fixed calibration pitot tube location, using
culate the test run average stack gas veloc- the calibration pitot tube specified in sec-
ity by finding the arithmetic average of the tion 6.10, and take three measurements with
point velocity results in accordance with the calibration pitot tube at the wind tunnel
sections 12.3 and 12.4, and calculate the stack calibration location, as defined in section
gas volumetric flow rate in accordance with 3.21. Alternate the measurements between
section 12.5 or 12.6, as applicable. the two positions. Perform this procedure at
100
the lowest and highest velocity settings at where the velocity pressure cross-check, as
which the probes will be calibrated. Record specified in section 10.1.1, is conducted. The
the values on a form similar to Table 2G–4. probe setup shall include establishing a ref-
At each velocity setting, the average veloc- erence yaw-null position on the probe sheath
ity pressure obtained at the wind tunnel to serve as the location for installing the
calibration location shall be within ±2 per- angle-measuring device. Physical design fea-
cent or 2.5 mm H2O (0.01 in. H2O), whichever tures of the DA, DAT, and wedge probes are
is less restrictive, of the average velocity relied on to determine the reference posi-
pressure obtained at the fixed calibration tion. For the DA or DAT probe, this ref-
pitot tube location. This comparative check erence position can be determined by setting
shall be performed at 2.5-cm (1-in.), or small- a digital inclinometer on the flat facet where
er, intervals across the full length, width, the P1 pressure port is located and then iden-
and depth (if applicable) of the wind tunnel tifying the rotational position on the probe
calibration location. If the criteria are not sheath where a second angle-measuring de-
met at every tested point, the wind tunnel vice would give the same angle reading. The
calibration location must be redefined, so reference position on a wedge probe shaft can
that acceptable results are obtained at every be determined either geometrically or by
point. Include the results of the velocity placing a digital inclinometer on each side of
pressure cross-check in the calibration data the wedge and rotating the probe until
section of the field test report. (See section equivalent readings are obtained. With the
16.1.4.) latter approach, the reference position is the
10.1.2 Axial flow verification. The fol- rotational position on the probe sheath
lowing procedures shall be performed to where an angle-measuring device would give
demonstrate that there is fully developed a reading of 0°. After installation of the
axial flow within the wind tunnel calibration angle-measuring device in the reference yaw-
location and at the calibration pitot tube lo- null position on the probe sheath, determine
cation. Two options are available to conduct the yaw angle from the tested port. Repeat
this check. this measurement using the 90° offset port,
10.1.2.1 Using a calibrated 3–D probe. A
which provides the pitch angle of flow. De-
probe that has been previously calibrated in
termine the yaw and pitch angles at all the
a wind tunnel with documented axial flow
point(s) in the test section where the veloc-
(as defined in section 3.22) may be used to
ity pressure cross-check, as specified in sec-
conduct this check. Insert the calibrated 3–D
tion 10.1.1, is performed. This includes all the
probe into the wind tunnel test section using
points in the wind tunnel calibration loca-
the tested probe port. Following the proce-
tion and the point where the calibration
dures in sections 8.9 and 12.2 of Method 2F,
pitot tube will be located. Perform this
determine the yaw and pitch angles at all
the point(s) in the test section where the ve- check at the highest and lowest velocities at
locity pressure cross-check, as specified in which the probes will be calibrated. Record
section 10.1.1, is performed. This includes all the values on a form similar to Table 2G–5.
the points in the calibration location and the Each measured yaw and pitch angle shall be
point where the calibration pitot tube will be within ±3° of 0°. Exceeding the limits indi-
located. Determine the yaw and pitch angles cates unacceptable flow in the test section.
at each point. Repeat these measurements at Until the problem is corrected and accept-
the highest and lowest velocities at which able flow is verified by repetition of this pro-
the probes will be calibrated. Record the val- cedure, the wind tunnel shall not be used for
ues on a form similar to Table 2G–5. Each calibration of probes. Include the results in
measured yaw and pitch angle shall be with- the probe calibration report.
in ±3° of 0°. Exceeding the limits indicates 10.1.3 Wind tunnel audits.
unacceptable flow in the test section. Until 10.1.3.1 Procedure. Upon the request of the
the problem is corrected and acceptable flow Administrator, the owner or operator of a
is verified by repetition of this procedure, wind tunnel shall calibrate a 2-D audit probe
the wind tunnel shall not be used for calibra- in accordance with the procedures described
tion of probes. Include the results of the in sections 10.3 through 10.6. The calibration
axial flow verification in the calibration shall be performed at two velocities that en-
data section of the field test report. (See sec- compass the velocities typically used for this
tion 16.1.4.) method at the facility. The resulting calibra-
10.1.2.2 Using alternative probes. Axial tion data shall be submitted to the Agency
flow verification may be performed using an in an audit test report. These results shall be
uncalibrated prism-shaped 3–D probe (e.g., compared by the Agency to reference cali-
DA or DAT probe) or an uncalibrated wedge brations of the audit probe at the same ve-
probe. (Figure 2G–8 illustrates a typical locity settings obtained at two different
wedge probe.) This approach requires use of wind tunnels.

two ports: the tested probe port and a second 10.1.3.2 Acceptance criterion. The audited
port located 90° from the tested probe port. tunnel’s calibration coefficient is acceptable
Each port shall provide access to all the if it is within ±3 percent of the reference cali-
points within the wind tunnel test section brations obtained at each velocity setting by
101
one (or both) of the wind tunnels. If the ac- devices to be used in the probe calibrations,
ceptance criterion is not met at each cali- using the following procedures. At a min-
bration velocity setting, the audited wind imum, calibrate these devices on each day
tunnel shall not be used to calibrate probes that probe calibrations are performed.
for use under this method until the problems 10.3.3.1 Procedure. Before each wind tun-
are resolved and acceptable results are ob- nel use, all differential pressure-measuring
tained upon completion of a subsequent devices shall be calibrated against the ref-
audit. erence device specified in section 6.4.3 using
10.2 Probe Inspection. a common pressure source. Perform the cali-
10.2.1 Type S probe. Before each calibra- bration at three reference pressures rep-
tion of a Type S probe, verify that one leg of resenting 30, 60, and 90 percent of the full-
the tube is permanently marked A, and the scale range of the pressure-measuring device
other, B. Carefully examine the pitot tube being calibrated. For an inclined-vertical
from the top, side, and ends. Measure the an- manometer, perform separate calibrations
gles (a1, a2, b1, and b2) and the dimensions (w on the inclined and vertical portions of the
and z) illustrated in Figures 2–2 and 2–3 in measurement scale, considering each portion
Method 2. Also measure the dimension A, as of the scale to be a separate full-scale range.
shown in the diagram in Table 2G–1, and the [For example, for a manometer with a 0-to
external tubing diameter (dimension Dt, Fig- 2.5-cm H2O (0-to 1-in. H2O) inclined scale and
ure 2–2b in Method 2). For the purposes of a 2.5-to 12.7-cm H2O (1-to 5-in. H2O) vertical
this method, Dt shall be no less than 9.5 mm scale, calibrate the inclined portion at 7.6,
(3⁄8 in.). The base-to-opening plane distances 15.2, and 22.9 mm H2O (0.3, 0.6, and 0.9 in.
PA and PB in Figure 2–3 of Method 2 shall be H2O), and calibrate the vertical portion at
equal, and the dimension A in Table 2G–1 3.8, 7.6, and 11.4 cm H2O (1.5, 3.0, and 4.5 in.
should be between 2.10Dt and 3.00Dt. Record H2O).] Alternatively, for the vertical portion
the inspection findings and probe measure- of the scale, use three evenly spaced ref-
ments on a form similar to Table CD2–1 of
erence pressures, one of which is equal to or
the ‘‘Quality Assurance Handbook for Air
higher than the highest differential pressure
Pollution Measurement Systems: Volume
expected in field applications.
III, Stationary Source-Specific Methods’’
(EPA/600/R–94/038c, September 1994). For ref- 10.3.3.2 Acceptance criteria. At each pres-
erence, this form is reproduced herein as sure setting, the two pressure readings made
Table 2G–1. The pitot tube shall not be used using the reference device and the pressure-
under this method if it fails to meet the measuring device being calibrated shall
specifications in this section and the align- agree to within ±2 percent of full scale of the
ment specifications in section 6.1.1. All Type device being calibrated or 0.5 mm H2O (0.02
S probes used to collect data with this meth- in. H2O), whichever is less restrictive. For an
od shall be calibrated according to the proce- inclined-vertical manometer, these require-
dures outlined in sections 10.3 through 10.6 ments shall be met separately using the re-
below. During calibration, each Type S pitot spective full-scale upper limits of the in-
tube shall be configured in the same manner clined and vertical portions of the scale. Dif-
as used, or planned to be used, during the ferential pressure-measuring devices not
field test, including all components in the meeting the ±2 percent of full scale or 0.5 mm
probe assembly (e.g., thermocouple, probe H2O (0.02 in. H2O) calibration requirement
sheath, sampling nozzle). Probe shaft exten- shall not be used.
sions that do not affect flow around the 10.3.3.3 Exceptions. Any precision manom-
probe head need not be attached during cali- eter that meets the specifications for a ref-
bration. erence device in section 6.4.3 and that is not
10.2.2 3-D probe. If a 3-D probe is used to used for field testing does not require cali-
collect data with this method, perform the bration, but must be leveled and zeroed be-
pre-calibration inspection according to pro- fore each wind tunnel use. Any pressure de-
cedures in Method 2F, section 10.2. vice used exclusively for yaw nulling does
10.3 Pre-Calibration Procedures. Prior to not require calibration, but shall be checked
calibration, a scribe line shall have been for responsiveness to rotation of the probe
placed on the probe in accordance with sec- prior to each wind tunnel use.
tion 10.4. The yaw angle and velocity calibra- 10.3.4 Calibrate digital inclinometers on
tion procedures shall not begin until the pre- each day of wind tunnel or field testing
test requirements in sections 10.3.1 through (prior to beginning testing) using the fol-
10.3.4 have been met. lowing procedures. Calibrate the inclinom-
10.3.1 Perform the horizontal straightness eter according to the manufacturer’s calibra-
check described in section 8.2 on the probe tion procedures. In addition, use a triangular
assembly that will be calibrated in the wind block (illustrated in Figure 2G–9) with a
tunnel. known angle q, independently determined

10.3.2 Perform a leak check in accordance using a protractor or equivalent device, be-
with section 8.4. tween two adjacent sides to verify the incli-
10.3.3 Except as noted in section 10.3.3.3, nometer readings. (NOTE: If other angle-
calibrate all differential pressure-measuring measuring devices meeting the provisions of
102
section 6.2.3 are used in place of a digital in- parable, clearly identifiable physical char-
clinometer, comparable calibration proce- acteristic) needed to orient the reference po-
dures shall be performed on such devices.) sition of the probe assembly shall be re-
Secure the triangular block in a fixed posi- corded and maintained as part of the auto-
tion. Place the inclinometer on one side of mated probe system’s specifications.
the block (side A) to measure the angle of in- 10.5 Yaw Angle Calibration Procedure.
clination (R1). Repeat this measurement on For each probe used to measure yaw angles
the adjacent side of the block (side B) using with this method, a calibration procedure
the inclinometer to obtain a second angle shall be performed in a wind tunnel meeting
reading (R2). The difference of the sum of the the specifications in section 10.1 to deter-
two readings from 180° (i.e., 180°-R1-R2) shall mine the rotational position of the reference
be within ±2° of the known angle, q. scribe line relative to the probe’s yaw-null
10.4 Placement of Reference Scribe Line. position. This procedure shall be performed
Prior to the first calibration of a probe, a on the main probe with all devices that will
line shall be permanently inscribed on the be attached to the main probe in the field
main probe sheath to serve as a reference [such as thermocouples, resistance tempera-
mark for determining yaw angles. Annex C ture detectors (RTDs), or sampling nozzles]
in section 18 of this method gives a guideline that may affect the flow around the probe
for placement of the reference scribe line. head. Probe shaft extensions that do not af-
10.4.1 This reference scribe line shall meet fect flow around the probe head need not be
the specifications in sections 6.1.5.1 and attached during calibration. At a minimum,
6.1.5.3 of this method. To verify that the this procedure shall include the following
alignment specification in section 6.1.5.3 is steps.
met, secure the probe in a horizontal posi- 10.5.1 Align and lock the angle-measuring
tion and measure the rotational angle of device on the reference scribe line. If a
each scribe line and scribe line segment marking procedure (such as described in sec-
using an angle-measuring device that meets tion 18.1.1.1) is used, align the angle-meas-
the specifications in section 6.2.1 or 6.2.3. For uring device on a mark within ±1° of the ro-
any scribe line that is longer than 30.5 cm (12 tational position of the reference scribe line.
in.), check the line’s rotational position at Lock the angle-measuring device onto the
30.5-cm (12-in.) intervals. For each line seg- probe sheath at this position.
ment that is 12 in. or less in length, check 10.5.2 Zero the pressure-measuring device
the rotational position at the two endpoints used for yaw nulling.
of the segment. To meet the alignment spec- 10.5.3 Insert the probe assembly into the
ification in section 6.1.5.3, the minimum and wind tunnel through the entry port, posi-
maximum of all of the rotational angles that tioning the probe’s impact port at the cali-
are measured along the full length of main bration location. Check the responsiveness of
probe must not differ by more than 2°. (NOTE: the pressure-measurement device to probe
A short reference scribe line segment [e.g., rotation, taking corrective action if the re-
15.2 cm (6 in.) or less in length] meeting the sponse is unacceptable.
alignment specifications in section 6.1.5.3 is 10.5.4 Ensure that the probe is in a hori-
fully acceptable under this method. See sec- zontal position, using a carpenter’s level.
tion 18.1.1.1 of Annex A for an example of a 10.5.5 Rotate the probe either clockwise
probe marking procedure, suitable for use or counterclockwise until a yaw null [zero
with a short reference scribe line.) DP for a Type S probe or zero (P2-P3) for a 3–
10.4.2 The scribe line should be placed on D probe] is obtained. If using a Type S probe
the probe first and then its offset from the with an attached thermocouple, the direc-
yaw-null position established (as specified in tion of the probe rotation shall be such that
section 10.5). The rotational position of the the thermocouple is located downstream of
reference scribe line relative to the yaw-null the probe pressure ports at the yaw-null po-
position of the probe, as determined by the sition.
yaw angle calibration procedure in section 10.5.6 Use the reading displayed by the
10.5, is the reference scribe line rotational angle-measuring device at the yaw-null posi-
offset, RSLO. The reference scribe line rotation to determine the magnitude of the ref-
tional offset shall be recorded and retained erence scribe line rotational offset, RSLO, as
as part of the probe’s calibration record. defined in section 3.15. Annex D in section 18
10.4.3 Scribe line for automated probes. A of this method gives a recommended proce-
scribe line may not be necessary for an auto- dure for determining the magnitude of RSLO
mated probe system if a reference rotational with a digital inclinometer and a second pro-
position of the probe is built into the probe cedure for determining the magnitude of
system design. For such systems, a ‘‘flat’’ (or RSLO with a protractor wheel and pointer de-
comparable, clearly identifiable physical vice. Table 2G–6 gives an example data form
characteristic) should be provided on the and Table 2G–7 is a look-up table with the
probe casing or flange plate to ensure that recommended procedure. Procedures other
the reference position of the probe assembly than those recommended in Annex D in sec-
remains in a vertical or horizontal position. tion 18 may be used, if they can determine
The rotational offset of the flat (or com- RSLO to within 1° and are explained in detail
103
in the field test report. The algebraic sign of tion(s), and average the results as described
RSLO will either be positive if the rotational in sections 10.6.12 through 10.6.14. Whichever
position of the reference scribe line (as calibration option is selected, the probe cali-
viewed from the ‘‘tail’’ end of the probe) is bration coefficient(s) obtained at the two
clockwise, or negative, if counterclockwise nominal calibration velocities shall meet the
with respect to the probe’s yaw-null posi- conditions specified in sections 10.6.12
tion. (This is illustrated in Figure 2G–10.) through 10.6.14.
10.5.7 The steps in sections 10.5.3 through 10.6.2 Connect the tested probe and cali-
10.5.6 shall be performed twice at each of the bration pitot tube to their respective pres-
velocities at which the probe will be cali- sure-measuring devices. Zero the pressure-
brated (in accordance with section 10.6). measuring devices. Inspect and leak-check
Record the values of RSLO. all pitot lines; repair or replace them, if nec-
10.5.8 The average of all of the RSLO values essary. Turn on the fan, and allow the wind
shall be documented as the reference scribe tunnel air flow to stabilize at the first of the
line rotational offset for the probe. selected nominal velocity settings.
10.5.9 Use of reference scribe line offset. 10.6.3 Position the calibration pitot tube
The reference scribe line rotational offset at its measurement location (determined as
shall be used to determine the yaw angle of outlined in section 6.11.4.3), and align the
flow in accordance with section 8.9.4. tube so that its tip is pointed directly into
10.6 Velocity Calibration Procedure. When the flow. Ensure that the entry port sur-
a 3–D probe is used under this method, follow rounding the tube is properly sealed. The
the provisions for the calibration of 3–D calibration pitot tube may either remain in
probes in section 10.6 of Method 2F to obtain the wind tunnel throughout the calibration,
the necessary velocity calibration coeffi-
or be removed from the wind tunnel while
cients (F2 as derived using Equation 2F–2 in
measurements are taken with the probe
Method 2F) corresponding to a pitch angle
being calibrated.
position of 0°. The following procedure ap-
10.6.4 Check the zero setting of each pres-
plies to Type S probes. This procedure shall
sure-measuring device.
be performed on the main probe and all de-
vices that will be attached to the main probe 10.6.5 Insert the tested probe into the
in the field (e.g., thermocouples, RTDs, sam- wind tunnel and align it so that the des-
pling nozzles) that may affect the flow ignated pressure port (e.g., either the A-side
around the probe head. Probe shaft exten- or B-side of a Type S probe) is pointed di-
sions that do not affect flow around the rectly into the flow and is positioned within
probe head need not be attached during cali- the wind tunnel calibration location (as de-
bration. (Note: If a sampling nozzle is part of fined in section 3.21). Secure the probe at the
the assembly, two additional requirements 0° pitch angle position. Ensure that the
must be satisfied before proceeding. The dis- entry port surrounding the probe is properly
tance between the nozzle and the pitot tube sealed.
shall meet the minimum spacing require- 10.6.6 Read the differential pressure from
ment prescribed in Method 2, and a wind tun- the calibration pitot tube (DPstd), and record
nel demonstration shall be performed that its value. Read the barometric pressure to
shows the probe’s ability to yaw null is not within ±2.5 mm Hg (±0.1 in. Hg) and the tem-
impaired when the nozzle is drawing sample.) perature in the wind tunnel to within 0.6°C
To obtain velocity calibration coefficient(s) (1°F). Record these values on a data form
for the tested probe, proceed as follows. similar to Table 2G–8.
10.6.1 Calibration velocities. The tester 10.6.7 After the tested probe’s differential
may calibrate the probe at two nominal wind pressure gauges have had sufficient time to
tunnel velocity settings of 18.3 m/sec and 27.4 stabilize, yaw null the probe (and then rotate
m/sec (60 ft/sec and 90 ft/sec) and average the it back 90° for Type S probes), then obtain
results of these calibrations, as described in the differential pressure reading (DP). Record
sections 10.6.12 through 10.6.14, in order to the yaw angle and differential pressure read-
generate the calibration coefficient, Cp. If ings.
this option is selected, this calibration coef- 10.6.8 Take paired differential pressure
ficient may be used for all field applications measurements with the calibration pitot
where the velocities are 9.1 m/sec (30 ft/sec) tube and tested probe (according to sections
or greater. Alternatively, the tester may 10.6.6 and 10.6.7). The paired measurements in
customize the probe calibration for a par- each replicate can be made either simulta-
ticular field test application (or for a series neously (i.e., with both probes in the wind
of applications), based on the expected aver- tunnel) or by alternating the measurements
age velocity(ies) at the test site(s). If this of the two probes (i.e., with only one probe at
option is selected, generate the calibration a time in the wind tunnel).
coefficients by calibrating the probe at two 10.6.9 Repeat the steps in sections 10.6.6
nominal wind tunnel velocity settings, one through 10.6.8 at the same nominal velocity
of which is less than or equal to and the setting until three pairs of DP readings have
other greater than or equal to the expected been obtained from the calibration pitot
average velocity(ies) for the field applica- tube and the tested probe.
104
10.6.10 Repeat the steps in sections 10.6.6 10.6.12.3 Calculate the deviation of each of
through 10.6.9 above for the A-side and B-side the three individual values of Cp from the A-
of the Type S pitot tube. For a probe assem- side average Cp(avg-low) value using Equation 2–
bly constructed such that its pitot tube is al- 3 in Method 2.
ways used in the same orientation, only one 10.6.12.4 Calculate the average deviation
side of the pitot tube need be calibrated (the (s) of the three individual Cp values from
side that will face the flow). However, the Cp(avg-low) using Equation 2–4 in Method 2. Use
pitot tube must still meet the alignment and the Type S pitot tube only if the values of s
dimension specifications in section 6.1.1 and (side A) and s (side B) are less than or equal
must have an average deviation (s) value of to 0.01. If both A-side and B-side calibration
0.01 or less as provided in section 10.6.12.4. coefficients are calculated, the absolute
10.6.11 Repeat the calibration procedures value of the difference between Cp(avg-low) (side
in sections 10.6.6 through 10.6.10 at the sec- A) and Cp(avg-low) (side B) must not exceed 0.01.
ond selected nominal wind tunnel velocity 10.6.13 Repeat the calculations in section
setting. 10.6.12 using the data obtained at the higher
10.6.12 Perform the following calculations velocity setting to derive the arithmetic Cp
separately on the A-side and B-side values. values at the higher velocity setting,
10.6.12.1 Calculate a Cp value for each of Cp(avg-high), and to determine whether the con-
the three replicates performed at the lower ditions in 10.6.12.4 are met by both the A-side
velocity setting where the calibrations were and B-side calibrations at this velocity set-
performed using Equation 2–2 in section 4.1.4 ting.
of Method 2. 10.6.14 Use equation 2G–1 to calculate the
10.6.12.2 Calculate the arithmetic average, percent difference of the averaged Cp values
Cp(avg-low), of the three Cp values. at the two calibration velocities.
C p( avg-low) − C p( avg-high )
%Difference = × 100% Eq. 2G- 1
C p( avg-low)
The percent difference between the averaged in a field test, calibrate each pressure-meas-
Cp values shall not exceed ±3 percent. If the uring device (except those used exclusively
specification is met, average the A-side val- for yaw nulling) using the three-point cali-
ues of Cp(avg-low) and Cp(avg-high) to produce a sin- bration procedure described in section 10.3.3.
gle A-side calibration coefficient, Cp. Repeat The device shall be recalibrated according to
for the B-side values if calibrations were per- the procedure in section 10.3.3 no later than
formed on that side of the pitot. If the speci- 90 days after its first field use following its
fication is not met, make necessary adjust- most recent calibration. At the discretion of
ments in the selected velocity settings and the tester, more frequent calibrations (e.g.,
repeat the calibration procedure until ac- after a field test) may be performed. No ad-
ceptable results are obtained. justments, other than adjustments to the
10.6.15 If the two nominal velocities used zero setting, shall be made to the device be-
in the calibration were 18.3 and 27.4 m/sec (60 tween calibrations.
and 90 ft/sec), the average Cp from section
10.8.1 Post-test calibration check. A sin-
10.6.14 is applicable to all velocities 9.1 m/sec
gle-point calibration check shall be per-
(30 ft/sec) or greater. If two other nominal
velocities were used in the calibration, the formed on each pressure-measuring device
resulting average Cp value shall be applicable after completion of each field test. At the
only in situations where the velocity cal- discretion of the tester, more frequent sin-
culated using the calibration coefficient is gle-point calibration checks (e.g., after one
neither less than the lower nominal velocity or more field test runs) may be performed. It
nor greater than the higher nominal veloc- is recommended that the post-test check be
ity. performed before leaving the field test site.
10.7 Recalibration. Recalibrate the probe The check shall be performed at a pressure
using the procedures in section 10 either between 50 and 90 percent of full scale by
within 12 months of its first field use after taking a common pressure reading with the
its most recent calibration or after 10 field tested probe and a reference pressure-meas-
tests (as defined in section 3.3), whichever uring device (as described in section 6.4.4) or
occurs later. In addition, whenever there is by challenging the tested device with a ref-
visible damage to the probe head, the probe erence pressure source (as described in sec-
shall be recalibrated before it is used again. tion 6.4.4) or by performing an equivalent
10.8 Calibration of pressure-measuring de- check using a reference device approved by
vices used in the field. Before its initial use the Administrator.
105
ER14MY99.062</GPH>
10.8.2 Acceptance criterion. At the se- for the metric system, and
lected pressure setting, the pressure readings
made using the reference device and the test- 1/ 2
ed device shall agree to within ±3 percent of ft ⎡ (lb/lb - mole)(in. Hg) ⎤
85.49 ⎢ ⎥
full scale of the tested device or 0.8 mm H2O
(0.03 in. H2O), whichever is less restrictive. If
sec ⎣ (° R )(in. H 2 O) ⎦
this specification is met, the test data col- for the English system.
lected during the field test are valid. If the
Md=Molecular weight of stack or duct gas,
specification is not met, all test data col-
dry basis (see section 8.13), g/g-mole (lb/lb-
lected since the last successful calibration or
mole).
calibration check are invalid and shall be re-
peated using a pressure-measuring device Ms=Molecular weight of stack or duct gas,
with a current, valid calibration. Any device wet basis, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
M s = M d (1 − Bws ) + 18.0 Bws Eq. 2G- 2

that fails the calibration check shall not be
used in a field test until a successful re-
calibration is performed according to the
Pbar=Barometric pressure at velocity meas-
procedures in section 10.3.3.
10.9 Temperature Gauges. Same as Meth- urement site, mm Hg (in. Hg).
od 2, section 4.3. The alternative thermo- Pg=Stack or duct static pressure, mm H2O
couple calibration procedures outlined in (in. H2O).
Emission Measurement Center (EMC) Ap- Ps=Absolute stack or duct pressure, mm Hg
proved Alternative Method (ALT–011) ‘‘Al- (in. Hg),
ternative Method 2 Thermocouple Calibra-
tion Procedure’’ may be performed. Tem- Pg
perature gauges shall be calibrated no more Ps = Pbar + Eq. 2G-3
than 30 days prior to the start of a field test 13.6
or series of field tests and recalibrated no Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg
more than 30 days after completion of a field (29.92 in. Hg).
test or series of field tests. 13.6=Conversion from mm H2O (in. H2O) to
10.10 Barometer. Same as Method 2, sec- mm Hg (in. Hg).
tion 4.4. The barometer shall be calibrated Qsd=Average dry-basis volumetric stack or
no more than 30 days prior to the start of a duct gas flow rate corrected to standard
field test or series of field tests. conditions, dscm/hr (dscf/hr).
Qsw=Average wet-basis volumetric stack or
11.0 Analytical Procedure duct gas flow rate corrected to standard
Sample collection and analysis are concur- conditions, wscm/hr (wscf/hr).
rent for this method (see section 8.0). ts(i)=Stack or duct temperature, °C (°F), at
traverse point i.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations Ts(i)=Absolute stack or duct temperature, °K
(°R), at traverse point i.
These calculations use the measured yaw
ER14MY99.068</GPH>
angle and the differential pressure and tem-
perature measurements at individual tra-
Ts( i ) = 273 + t s( i ) Eq. 2G- 4
verse points to derive the near-axial flue gas for the metric system, and
velocity (va(i)) at each of those points. The
near-axial velocity values at all traverse Ts( i ) = 460 + t s( i ) Eq. 2G- 5
points that comprise a full stack or duct tra-
ER14MY99.067</GPH>
verse are then averaged to obtain the aver- for the English system.
age near-axial stack or duct gas velocity Ts(avg)=Average absolute stack or duct gas
(va(avg)). temperature across all traverse points.
Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293°K
12.1 Nomenclature (528°R).
A=Cross-sectional area of stack or duct at va(i)=Measured stack or duct gas impact ve- ER14MY99.066</GPH>
the test port location, m2 (ft 2). locity, m/sec (ft/sec), at traverse point i.
Bws=Water vapor in the gas stream (from va(avg)=Average near-axial stack or duct gas
Method 4 or alternative), proportion by velocity, m/sec (ft/sec) across all traverse
volume. points.
Cp=Pitot tube calibration coefficient, DPi=Velocity head (differential pressure) of
dimensionless. stack or duct gas, mm H2O (in. H2O), appli-
ER14MY99.065</GPH>
F2(i)=3-D probe velocity coefficient at 0 pitch, cable at traverse point i.

applicable at traverse point i. (P1-P2)=Velocity head (differential pressure)
Kp=Pitot tube constant, of stack or duct gas measured by a 3-D
probe, mm H2O (in. H2O), applicable at tra-

1/ 2
m ⎡ (g/g - mole)( mm Hg) ⎤ verse point i.
ER14MY99.064</GPH>
3,600=Conversion factor, sec/hr.

34.97 ⎢ ⎥
sec ⎣ (° K )( mm H 2 O) ⎦ 18.0=Molecular weight of water, g/g-mole (lb/
lb-mole).
106
ER14MY99.063</GPH>
qy(i)=Yaw angle of the flow velocity vector, at 12.2.2 Near-axial traverse point velocity.
traverse point i. When using a Type S probe, use the following
n=Number of traverse points. equation to calculate the traverse point
12.2 Traverse Point Velocity Calculations. near-axial velocity (va(i)) from the differen-
Perform the following calculations from the tial pressure (DPi), yaw angle (qy(i)), absolute
measurements obtained at each traverse stack or duct standard temperature (Ts(i))
point. measured at traverse point i, the absolute
12.2.1 Selection of calibration coefficient. stack or duct pressure (Ps), and molecular
Select the calibration coefficient as de- weight (Ms).
scribed in section 10.6.1.
( ΔP) i Ts( i )
va(i) = K p C p
Ps M s
(cos θ )
y( i ) Eq. 2G- 6
Use the following equation when using a 3–D

probe.
(P1 − P2 )i Ts( i )
v a ( i ) = K p F2
Ps M s
(cos θ ) y( i ) Eq. 2G- 7
12.2.3 Handling multiple measurements at are acceptable and the calculated value of
a traverse point. For pressure or tempera- va(avg) may be reported as the average near-
ture devices that take multiple measure- axial velocity for the test run if the condi-
ments at a traverse point, the multiple tions in either section 12.4.1 or 12.4.2 are met.
measurements (or where applicable, their 12.4.1 The average calibration coefficient
square roots) may first be averaged and the Cp used in Equation 2G–6 was generated at
resulting average values used in the equa- nominal velocities of 18.3 and 27.4 m/sec (60
tions above. Alternatively, the individual and 90 ft/sec) and the value of va(avg) cal-
measurements may be used in the equations culated using Equation 2G–8 is greater than
above and the resulting calculated values or equal to 9.1 m/sec (30 ft/sec).
may then be averaged to obtain a single tra-
12.4.2 The average calibration coefficient
verse point value. With either approach, all
of the individual measurements recorded at Cp used in Equation 2G–6 was generated at
a traverse point must be used in calculating nominal velocities other than 18.3 or 27.4 m/
the applicable traverse point value. sec (60 or 90 ft/sec) and the value of va(avg) cal-
12.3 Average Near-Axial Velocity in Stack culated using Equation 2G–8 is greater than
or Duct. Use the reported traverse point or equal to the lower nominal velocity and
near-axial velocity in the following equa- less than or equal to the higher nominal ve-
tion. locity used to derive the average Cp.
12.4.3 If the conditions in neither section
n 12.4.1 nor section 12.4.2 are met, the test re-
∑ va(i) sults obtained from Equation 2G–8 are not
acceptable, and the steps in sections 12.2 and
i =1
v a ( avg ) = Eq. 2G- 8 12.3 must be repeated using an average cali-
n bration coefficient Cp that satisfies the con-
12.4 Acceptability of Results. The accept- ditions in section 12.4.1 or 12.4.2.
ability provisions in section 12.4 of Method 12.5 Average Gas Volumetric Flow Rate in
ER14MY99.071</GPH>
2F apply to 3-D probes used under Method Stack or Duct (Wet Basis). Use the following
2G. The following provisions apply to Type S equation to compute the average volumetric
probes. For Type S probes, the test results flow rate on a wet basis.
ER14MY99.070</GPH>
107
ER14MY99.069</GPH>
⎛ T ⎞⎛ P ⎞
( )
Q sw = 3,600 v a ( avg ) ( A )⎜ std ⎟ ⎜ s ⎟
Eq. 2G- 9
12.6 Average Gas Volumetric Flow Rate in equation to compute the average volumetric
Stack or Duct (Dry Basis). Use the following flow rate on a dry basis.
⎛ T ⎞⎛ P ⎞
( )
Q sd = 3,600(1 − Bws ) v a ( avg ) ( A )⎜ std ⎟ ⎜ s ⎟
Eq. 2G-10
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] ity and the average flue gas volumetric flow
results for each run and tested condition.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] 16.1.3.2 Test data. The following values for
each traverse point should be recorded and
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] reported:
16.0 Reporting. (a) Differential pressure at traverse point i
(DPi)
16.1 Field Test Reports. Field test reports (b) Stack or duct temperature at traverse
shall be submitted to the Agency according point i (ts(i))
to applicable regulatory requirements. Field (c) Absolute stack or duct temperature at
test reports should, at a minimum, include traverse point i (Ts(i))
the following elements. (d) Yaw angle at traverse point i (qy(i))
16.1.1 Description of the source. This (e) Stack gas near-axial velocity at tra-
should include the name and location of the verse point i (va(i))
test site, descriptions of the process tested, a 16.1.3.3 The following values should be re-
description of the combustion source, an ac- ported once per run:
curate diagram of stack or duct cross-sec- (a) Water vapor in the gas stream (from
tional area at the test site showing the di- Method 4 or alternative), proportion by vol-
mensions of the stack or duct, the location ume (Bws), measured at the frequency speci-
of the test ports, and traverse point loca- fied in the applicable regulation
tions and identification numbers or codes. It (b) Molecular weight of stack or duct gas,
should also include a description and dia- dry basis (Md)
gram of the stack or duct layout, showing (c) Molecular weight of stack or duct gas,
the distance of the test location from the wet basis (Ms)
nearest upstream and downstream disturb- (d) Stack or duct static pressure (Pg)
ances and all structural elements (including (e) Absolute stack or duct pressure (Ps)
breachings, baffles, fans, straighteners, etc.) (f) Carbon dioxide concentration in the flue
affecting the flow pattern. If the source and gas, dry basis (%d CO2)
test location descriptions have been pre- (g) Oxygen concentration in the flue gas,
viously submitted to the Agency in a docu- dry basis (%d O2)
ment (e.g., a monitoring plan or test plan), (h) Average near-axial stack or duct gas
referencing the document in lieu of including velocity (va(avg)) across all traverse points
this information in the field test report is (i) Gas volumetric flow rate corrected to
acceptable. standard conditions, dry or wet basis as re-
16.1.2 Field test procedures. These should quired by the applicable regulation (Qsd or
include a description of test equipment and Qsw)
test procedures. Testing conventions, such as 16.1.3.4 The following should be reported
traverse point numbering and measurement once per complete set of test runs:
sequence (e.g., sampling from center to wall, (a) Cross-sectional area of stack or duct at
or wall to center), should be clearly stated. the test location (A)
Test port identification and directional ref- (b) Pitot tube calibration coefficient (Cp)
erence for each test port should be included (c) Measurement system response time
on the appropriate field test data sheets. (sec)
16.1.3 Field test data. (d) Barometric pressure at measurement

site (Pbar)
ER14MY99.073</GPH>
16.1.3.1 Summary of results. This sum-

mary should include the dates and times of 16.1.4 Calibration data. The field test re-
testing, and the average near-axial gas veloc- port should include calibration data for all
108
ER14MY99.072</GPH>
probes and test equipment used in the field (12) Fossil Energy Research Corporation,
test. At a minimum, the probe calibration ‘‘Additional Swirl Tunnel Tests: E-DAT and
data reported to the Agency should include T-DAT Probes,’’ February 24, 1999, Technical
the following: Memorandum Prepared for U.S. Environ-
(a) Date of calibration mental Protection Agency, P.O. No. 7W–1193–
(b) Probe type NALX.
(c) Probe identification number(s) or (13) Massachusetts Institute of Tech-
code(s) nology, Report WBWT-TR–1317, ‘‘Calibration
(d) Probe inspection sheets of Eight Wind Speed Probes Over a Reynolds
(e) Pressure measurements and calcula- Number Range of 46,000 to 725,000 Per Foot,
tions used to obtain calibration coefficients Text and Summary Plots,’’ Plus appendices,
in accordance with section 10.6 of this meth- October 15, 1998, Prepared for The Cadmus
od Group, Inc.
(f) Description and diagram of wind tunnel (14) National Institute of Standards and
used for the calibration, including dimen- Technology, Special Publication 250, ‘‘NIST
sions of cross-sectional area and position and Calibration Services Users Guide 1991,’’ Re-
size of the test section vised October 1991, U.S. Department of Com-
(g) Documentation of wind tunnel quali- merce, p. 2.
fication tests performed in accordance with (15) National Institute of Standards and
section 10.1 of this method Technology, 1998, ‘‘Report of Special Test of
Air Speed Instrumentation, Four Prandtl
16.1.5 Quality assurance. Specific quality Probes, Four S-Type Probes, Four French
assurance and quality control procedures Probes, Four Modified Kiel Probes,’’ Pre-
used during the test should be described. pared for the U.S. Environmental Protection
17.0 Bibliography. Agency under IAG #DW13938432–01–0.
(16) National Institute of Standards and
(1) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 1— Technology, 1998, ‘‘Report of Special Test of
Sample and velocity traverses for stationary Air Speed In-strumentation, Five
sources. Autoprobes,’’ Prepared for the U.S. Environ-
(2) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 2— mental Protection Agency under IAG
Determination of stack gas velocity and vol- #DW13938432–01–0.
umetric flow rate (Type S pitot tube) . (17) National Institute of Standards and
(3) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method Technology, 1998, ‘‘Report of Special Test of
2F—Determination of stack gas velocity and Air Speed Instrumentation, Eight Spherical
volumetric flow rate with three-dimensional Probes,’’ Prepared for the U.S. Environ-
probes. mental Protection Agency under IAG
(4) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method #DW13938432–01–0.
2H—Determination of stack gas velocity tak- (18) National Institute of Standards and
ing into account velocity decay near the Technology, 1998, ‘‘Report of Special Test of
stack wall. Air Speed Instrumentation, Four DAT
(5) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 3— Probes, ‘‘ Prepared for the U.S. Environ-
Gas analysis for carbon dioxide, oxygen, ex- mental Protection Agency under IAG
cess air, and dry molecular weight. #DW13938432–01–0.
(6) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method (19) Norfleet, S.K., ‘‘An Evaluation of Wall
3A—Determination of oxygen and carbon di- Effects on Stack Flow Velocities and Re-
oxide concentrations in emissions from sta- lated Overestimation Bias in EPA’s Stack
tionary sources (instrumental analyzer pro- Flow Reference Methods,’’ EPRI CEMS
cedure). User’s Group Meeting, New Orleans, Lou-
(7) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 4— isiana, May 13–15, 1998.
Determination of moisture content in stack (20) Page, J.J., E.A. Potts, and R.T.
gases. Shigehara, ‘‘3–D Pitot Tube Calibration
(8) Emission Measurement Center (EMC) Study,’’ EPA Contract No. 68D10009, Work
Approved Alternative Method (ALT–011) Assignment No. I–121, March 11, 1993.
‘‘Alternative Method 2 Thermocouple Cali- (21) Shigehara, R.T., W.F. Todd, and W.S.
bration Procedure.’’ Smith, ‘‘Significance of Errors in Stack
(9) Electric Power Research Institute, In- Sampling Measurements,’’ Presented at the
terim Report EPRI TR–106698, ‘‘Flue Gas Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control
Flow Rate Measurement Errors,’’ June 1996. Association, St. Louis, Missouri, June 1419,
(10) Electric Power Research Institute, 1970.
Final Report EPRI TR–108110, ‘‘Evaluation of (22) The Cadmus Group, Inc., May 1999,
Heat Rate Discrepancy from Continuous ‘‘EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and
Emission Monitoring Systems,’’ August 1997. Analysis: Findings Report,’’ EPA/430–R–99–
(11) Fossil Energy Research Corporation, 009.

Final Report, ‘‘Velocity Probe Tests in Non- (23) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, ‘‘EPA
axial Flow Fields,’’ November 1998, Prepared Flow Reference Method Testing and Anal-
for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agen- ysis: Data Report, Texas Utilities,
cy. DeCordova Steam Electric Station, Volume
109
I: Test Description and Appendix A (Data be mounted during the velocity traverse.
Distribution Package),’’ EPA/430–R–98–015a. Place the second yaw angle-measuring de-
(24) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, ‘‘EPA vice on the main probe sheath (or extension)
Flow Reference Method Testing and Anal- at the position where a yaw angle will be
ysis: Data Report, Texas Utilities, Lake Hub- measured during the velocity traverse. Ad-
bard Steam Electric Station, Volume I: Test just the position of the second angle-meas-
Description and Appendix A (Data Distribu- uring device until it indicates the same
tion Package),’’ EPA/430–R–98–017a. angle (±1°) as the reference device, and affix
(25) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, ‘‘EPA the second device to the probe sheath (or ex-
Flow Reference Method Testing and Anal- tension). Record the angles indicated by the
ysis: Data Report, Pennsylvania Electric Co., two angle-measuring devices on a form simi-
G.P.U. Genco Homer City Station: Unit 1, lar to table 2G–2. In this position, the second
Volume I: Test Description and Appendix A angle-measuring device is considered to be
(Data Distribution Package),’’ EPA/430–R–98– properly positioned for yaw angle measure-
018a. ment. Make a mark, no wider than 1.6 mm
(26) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1997, ‘‘EPA (1⁄16 in.), on the probe sheath (or extension),
Flow Reference Method Testing and Anal- such that the yaw angle-measuring device
ysis: Wind Tunnel Experimental Results,’’ can be re-affixed at this same properly
EPA/430–R–97–013. aligned position during the velocity tra-
verse.
18.0 Annexes 18.1.1.2 Procedure for probe extensions
Annex A, C, and D describe recommended with scribe lines. If, during a velocity tra-
procedures for meeting certain provisions in verse the angle-measuring device will be af-
sections 8.3, 10.4, and 10.5 of this method. fixed to a probe extension having a scribe
Annex B describes procedures to be followed line as specified in section 6.1.5.2, the fol-
when using the protractor wheel and pointer lowing procedure may be used to align the
assembly to measure yaw angles, as provided extension’s scribe line with the reference
under section 8.9.1. scribe line instead of marking the extension
18.1 Annex A—Rotational Position Check. as described in section 18.1.1.1. Attach the
The following are recommended procedures probe extension to the main probe. Align and
that may be used to satisfy the rotational lock the second angle-measuring device on
position check requirements of section 8.3 of the probe extension’s scribe line. Then, ro-
this method and to determine the angle- tate the extension until both measuring de-
measuring device rotational offset (RADO). vices indicate the same angle (±1°). Lock the
18.1.1 Rotational position check with extension at this rotational position. Record
probe outside stack. Where physical con- the angles indicated by the two angle-meas-
straints at the sampling location allow full uring devices on a form similar to table 2G–
assembly of the probe outside the stack and 2. An angle-measuring device may be aligned
insertion into the test port, the following at any position on this scribe line during the
procedures should be performed before the velocity traverse, if the scribe line meets the
start of testing. Two angle-measuring de- alignment specification in section 6.1.5.3.
vices that meet the specifications in section 18.1.1.3 Post-test rotational position
6.2.1 or 6.2.3 are required for the rotational check. If the fully assembled probe includes
position check. An angle measuring device one or more extensions, the following check
whose position can be independently ad- should be performed immediately after the
justed (e.g., by means of a set screw) after completion of a velocity traverse. At the dis-
being locked into position on the probe cretion of the tester, additional checks may
sheath shall not be used for this check unless be conducted after completion of testing at
the independent adjustment is set so that any sample port. Without altering the align-
the device performs exactly like a device ment of any of the components of the probe
without the capability for independent ad- assembly used in the velocity traverse, se-
justment. That is, when aligned on the probe cure the fully assembled probe in a hori-
such a device must give the same reading as zontal position. Affix an angle-measuring de-
a device that does not have the capability of vice at the reference scribe line specified in
being independently adjusted. With the fully section 6.1.5.1. Use the other angle-meas-
assembled probe (including probe shaft ex- uring device to check the angle at each loca-
tensions, if any) secured in a horizontal position where the device was checked prior to
tion, affix one yaw angle-measuring device testing. Record the readings from the two
to the probe sheath and lock it into position angle-measuring devices.
on the reference scribe line specified in sec- 18.1.2 Rotational position check with
tion 6.1.5.1. Position the second angle-meas- probe in stack. This section applies only to
uring device using the procedure in section probes that, due to physical constraints, can-
18.1.1.1 or 18.1.1.2. not be inserted into the test port as fully as-
18.1.1.1 Marking procedure. The proce- sembled with all necessary extensions need-
dures in this section should be performed at ed to reach the inner-most traverse point(s).
each location on the fully assembled probe 18.1.2.1 Perform the out-of-stack proce-
where the yaw angle-measuring device will dure in section 18.1.1 on the main probe and
110
any attached extensions that will be ini- alignment, lock the pointer device onto the
tially inserted into the test port. probe sheath. Insert the probe into the entry
18.1.2.2 Use the following procedures to port to the depth needed to take measure-
perform additional rotational position ments at the first traverse point.
check(s) with the probe in the stack, each 18.2.4 Perform the yaw angle determina-
time a probe extension is added. Two angle- tion as specified in sections 8.9.3 and 8.9.4
measuring devices are required. The first of and record the angle as shown by the pointer
these is the device that was used to measure on the protractor wheel. Then, take velocity
yaw angles at the preceding traverse point, pressure and temperature measurements in
left in its properly aligned measurement po- accordance with the procedure in section
sition. The second angle-measuring device is 8.9.5. Perform the alignment check described
positioned on the added probe extension. Use in section 8.9.6.
the applicable procedures in section 18.1.1.1 18.2.5 After taking velocity pressure
or 18.1.1.2 to align, adjust, lock, and mark (if measurements at that traverse point, unlock
necessary) the position of the second angle- the probe from the collar and slide the probe
measuring device to within ±1° of the first through the collar to the depth needed to
device. Record the readings of the two de- reach the next traverse point.
vices on a form similar to Table 2G–2. 18.2.6 Align the scribe line on the pointer
18.1.2.3 The procedure in section 18.1.2.2 collar with the reference scribe line on the
should be performed at the first port where main probe or at the rotational offset posi-
measurements are taken. The procedure tion established under section 8.3.1. Lock the
should be repeated each time a probe exten-
collar onto the probe.
sion is re-attached at a subsequent port, un-
18.2.7 Repeat the steps in sections 18.2.4
less the probe extensions are designed to be
through 18.2.6 at the remaining traverse
locked into a mechanically fixed rotational
points accessed from the current stack or
position (e.g., through use of interlocking
duct entry port.
grooves), which can be reproduced from port
to port as specified in section 8.3.5.2. 18.2.8 After completing the measurement
18.2 Annex B—Angle Measurement Pro- at the last traverse point accessed from a
tocol for Protractor Wheel and Pointer De- port, verify that the orientation of the pro-
vice. The following procedure shall be used tractor wheel on the test port has not
when a protractor wheel and pointer assem- changed over the course of the traverse at
bly, such as the one described in section 6.2.2 that port. For stacks, vertical ducts, or ports
and illustrated in Figure 2G–5 is used to on the side of horizontal ducts, use a digital
measure the yaw angle of flow. With each inclinometer meeting the specifications in
move to a new traverse point, unlock, re- section 6.2.1 to check the rotational position
align, and re-lock the probe, angle-pointer of the 0° mark on the protractor wheel. For
collar, and protractor wheel to each other. ports on the top or bottom of horizontal
At each such move, particular attention is ducts, observe the alignment of the angle
required to ensure that the scribe line on the wheel 0° mark relative to the permanent 0°
angle pointer collar is either aligned with mark on the duct at that test port. If these
the reference scribe line on the main probe observed comparisons exceed ±2° of 0°, all
sheath or is at the rotational offset position angle and pressure measurements taken at
established under section 8.3.1. The proce- that port since the protractor wheel was last
dure consists of the following steps: locked into position on the port shall be re-
18.2.1 Affix a protractor wheel to the peated.
entry port for the test probe in the stack or 18.2.9 Move to the next stack or duct
duct. entry port and repeat the steps in sections
18.2.2 Orient the protractor wheel so that 18.2.1 through 18.2.8.
the 0° mark corresponds to the longitudinal 18.3 Annex C—Guideline for Reference
axis of the stack or duct. For stacks, vertical Scribe Line Placement. Use of the following
ducts, or ports on the side of horizontal guideline is recommended to satisfy the re-
ducts, use a digital inclinometer meeting the quirements of section 10.4 of this method.
specifications in section 6.2.1 to locate the 0° The rotational position of the reference
orientation. For ports on the top or bottom scribe line should be either 90° or 180° from
of horizontal ducts, identify the longitudinal the probe’s impact pressure port. For Type-
axis at each test port and permanently mark S probes, place separate scribe lines, on op-
the duct to indicate the 0° orientation. Once posite sides of the probe sheath, if both the
the protractor wheel is properly aligned, A and B sides of the pitot tube are to be used
lock it into position on the test port. for yaw angle measurements.
18.2.3 Move the pointer assembly along 18.4 Annex D—Determination of Ref-
the probe sheath to the position needed to erence Scribe Line Rotational Offset. The
take measurements at the first traverse following procedures are recommended for
point. Align the scribe line on the pointer determining the magnitude and sign of a
collar with the reference scribe line or at the probe’s reference scribe line rotational off-
rotational offset position established under set, RSLO. Separate procedures are provided
section 8.3.1. Maintaining this rotational for two types of angle-measuring devices:
111
digital inclinometers and protractor wheel tunnel test port. Align the scribe line on the
and pointer assemblies. pointer collar with the reference scribe line
18.4.1 Perform the following procedures on or with a mark aligned with the reference
the main probe with all devices that will be scribe line, as determined under section
attached to the main probe in the field [such 18.1.1.1. Maintaining this rotational align-
as thermocouples, resistance temperature ment, lock the pointer device onto the probe
detectors (RTDs), or sampling nozzles] that sheath.
may affect the flow around the probe head. 18.4.2.2 Zero the pressure-measuring de-
Probe shaft extensions that do not affect vice used for yaw nulling.
flow around the probe head need not be at- 18.4.2.3 Insert the probe assembly into the
tached during calibration. wind tunnel through the entry port, posi-
18.4.2 The procedures below assume that tioning the probe’s impact port at the cali-
the wind tunnel duct used for probe calibra- bration location. Check the responsiveness of
tion is horizontal and that the flow in the the pressure-measuring device to probe rota-
calibration wind tunnel is axial as deter- tion, taking corrective action if the response
mined by the axial flow verification check is unacceptable.
described in section 10.1.2. Angle-measuring 18.4.2.4 Ensure that the probe is in a hori-
devices are assumed to display angles in al- zontal position using a carpenter’s level.
ternating 0° to 90° and 90° to 0° intervals. If
18.4.2.5 Rotate the probe either clockwise
angle-measuring devices with other readout
or counterclockwise until a yaw null [zero
conventions are used or if other calibration
DP for a Type S probe or zero (P2–P3) for a 3–
wind tunnel duct configurations are used,
D probe] is obtained. If using a Type S probe
make the appropriate calculational correc-
with an attached thermocouple, the direc-
tions. For Type-S probes, calibrate the A-
side and B-sides separately, using the appro- tion of the probe rotation shall be such that
priate scribe line (see section 18.3, above), if the thermocouple is located downstream of
both the A and B sides of the pitot tube are the probe pressure ports at the yaw-null po-
to be used for yaw angle determinations. sition.
18.4.2.1 Position the angle-measuring de- 18.4.2.6 Read and record the value of qnull,
vice in accordance with one of the following the angle indicated by the angle-measuring
procedures. device at the yaw-null position. Record the
18.4.2.1.1 If using a digital inclinometer, angle reading on a form similar to Table 2G–
affix the calibrated digital inclinometer to 6. Do not associate an algebraic sign with
the probe. If the digital inclinometer can be this reading.
independently adjusted after being locked 18.4.2.7 Determine the magnitude and al-
into position on the probe sheath (e.g., by gebraic sign of the reference scribe line rota-
means of a set screw), the independent ad- tional offset, RSLO. The magnitude of RSLO
justment must be set so that the device per- will be equal to either qnull or (90°¥qnull), de-
forms exactly like a device without the capa- pending on the type of probe being calibrated
bility for independent adjustment. That is, and the type of angle-measuring device used.
when aligned on the probe the device must (See Table 2G–7 for a summary.) The alge-
give the same readings as a device that does braic sign of RSLO will either be positive if
not have the capability of being independ- the rotational position of the reference
ently adjusted. Either align it directly on scribe line is clockwise or negative if coun-
the reference scribe line or on a mark terclockwise with respect to the probe’s yaw-
aligned with the scribe line determined ac- null position. Figure 2G–10 illustrates how
cording to the procedures in section 18.1.1.1. the magnitude and sign of RSLO are deter-
Maintaining this rotational alignment, lock mined.
the digital inclinometer onto the probe 18.4.2.8 Perform the steps in sections
sheath. 18.3.2.3 through 18.3.2.7 twice at each of the
18.4.2.1.2 If using a protractor wheel and two calibration velocities selected for the
pointer device, orient the protractor wheel probe under section 10.6. Record the values of
on the test port so that the 0° mark is RSLO in a form similar to Table 2G–6.
aligned with the longitudinal axis of the 18.4.2.9 The average of all RSLO values is
wind tunnel duct. Maintaining this align- the reference scribe line rotational offset for
ment, lock the wheel into place on the wind the probe.
112
113
ER14MY99.020</GPH>
114
ER14MY99.021</GPH>
115
ER14MY99.022</GPH>
116
ER14MY99.023</GPH>
117
ER14MY99.024</GPH>
118
ER14MY99.025</GPH>
119
ER14MY99.026</GPH>
120
ER14MY99.027</GPH>
121
ER14MY99.028</GPH>
122
ER14MY99.029</GPH>
123
ER14MY99.030</GPH>
124
ER14MY99.031</GPH>
125
ER14MY99.032</GPH>
ER14MY99.034</GPH>
126
ER14MY99.033</GPH>
127
ER14MY99.035</GPH>
Pt. 60, App. A–2, Meth. 2H 40 CFR Ch. I (7–1–09 Edition)
METHOD 2H—DETERMINATION OF STACK GAS ther than 4 in. (10.2 cm) from the wall and
VELOCITY TAKING INTO ACCOUNT VELOCITY extending either (1) across the entire width
DECAY NEAR THE STACK WALL of the Method 1 equal-area sector or (2) for
stacks or ducts where this width exceeds 12
1.0 Scope and Application in. (30.5 cm) (i.e., stacks or ducts greater
1.1 This method is applicable in conjunc- than or equal to 15.6 ft [4.8 m] in diameter),
tion with Methods 2, 2F, and 2G (40 CFR Part to a distance of not less than 12 in. (30.5 cm)
60, Appendix A) to account for velocity decay from the wall. Note: Because this method
near the wall in circular stacks and ducts. specifies that measurements must be taken
1.2 This method is not applicable for test- at whole number multiples of 1 in. from a
ing stacks and ducts less than 3.3 ft (1.0 m) stack or duct wall, for clarity numerical
in diameter. quantities in this method are expressed in
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to English units followed by metric units in pa-
the requirements of this method will en- rentheses. To enhance readability, hyphen-
hance the quality of the data obtained from ated terms such as ‘‘1-in. intervals’’ or ‘‘1-in.
air pollutant sampling methods. incremented,’’ are expressed in English units
only.
2.0 Summary of Method 3.2 dlast Depending on context, dlast means
either (1) the distance from the wall of the
2.1 A wall effects adjustment factor is de-
last 1-in. incremented wall effects traverse
termined. It is used to adjust the average
point or (2) the traverse point located at that
stack gas velocity obtained under Method 2,
distance (see Figure 2H–2).
2F, or 2G of this appendix to take into ac- 3.3 drem Depending on context, drem means
count velocity decay near the stack or duct either (1) the distance from the wall of the
wall. centroid of the area between dlast and the in-
2.2 The method contains two possible pro- terior edge of the Method 1 equal-area sector
cedures: a calculational approach which de- closest to the wall or (2) the traverse point
rives an adjustment factor from velocity located at that distance (see Figure 2H–2).
measurements and a default procedure which 3.4 ‘‘May,’’ ‘‘Must,’’ ‘‘Shall,’’ ‘‘Should,’’ and
assigns a generic adjustment factor based on the imperative form of verbs.
the construction of the stack or duct. 3.4.1 ‘‘May’’ is used to indicate that a pro-
2.2.1 The calculational procedure derives vision of this method is optional.
a wall effects adjustment factor from veloc- 3.4.2 ‘‘Must,’’ ‘‘Shall,’’ and the imperative
ity measurements taken using Method 2, 2F, form of verbs (such as ‘‘record’’ or ‘‘enter’’)
or 2G at 16 (or more) traverse points speci- are used to indicate that a provision of this
fied under Method 1 of this appendix and a method is mandatory.
total of eight (or more) wall effects traverse 3.4.3 ‘‘Should’’ is used to indicate that a
points specified under this method. The provision of this method is not mandatory
calculational procedure based on velocity but is highly recommended as good practice.
measurements is not applicable for hori- 3.5 Method 1 refers to 40 CFR part 60, ap-
zontal circular ducts where build-up of par- pendix A, ‘‘Method 1—Sample and velocity
ticulate matter or other material in the bot- traverses for stationary sources.’’
tom of the duct is present. 3.6 Method 1 exterior equal-area sector and
2.2.2 A default wall effects adjustment Method 1 equal-area sector closest to the wall
factor of 0.9900 for brick and mortar stacks mean any one of the four equal-area sectors
and 0.9950 for all other types of stacks and that are closest to the wall for a circular
ducts may be used without taking wall ef- stack or duct laid out in accordance with
fects measurements in a stack or duct. section 2.3.1 of Method 1 (see Figure 2H–1).
2.3 When the calculational procedure is 3.7 Method 1 interior equal-area sector
conducted as part of a relative accuracy test means any of the equal-area sectors other
audit (RATA) or other multiple-run test pro- than the Method 1 exterior equal-area sec-
cedure, the wall effects adjustment factor tors (as defined in section 3.6) for a circular
derived from a single traverse (i.e., single stack or duct laid out in accordance with
RATA run) may be applied to all runs of the section 2.3.1 of Method 1 (see Figure 2H–1).
same RATA without repeating the wall ef- 3.8 Method 1 traverse point and Method 1
fects measurements. Alternatively, wall ef- equal-area traverse point mean a traverse
fects adjustment factors may be derived for point located at the centroid of an equal-
several traverses and an average wall effects area sector of a circular stack laid out in ac-
adjustment factor applied to all runs of the cordance with section 2.3.1 of Method 1.
same RATA. 3.9 Method 2 refers to 40 CFR part 60, ap-
pendix A, ‘‘Method 2—Determination of
3.0 Definitions.
stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate
3.1 Complete wall effects traverse means a (Type S pitot tube).’’

traverse in which measurements are taken 3.10 Method 2F refers to 40 CFR part 60,
at drem (see section 3.3) and at 1-in. intervals appendix A, ‘‘Method 2F—Determination of
in each of the four Method 1 equal-area sec- stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate
tors closest to the wall, beginning not far- with three-dimensional probes.’’
128
Environmental Protection Agency Pt. 60, App. A–2, Meth. 2H
3.11 Method 2G refers to 40 CFR part 60, (i.e., Method 2, 2F, or 2G) are applicable
appendix A, ‘‘Method 2G—Determination of under this method.
stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate
with two-dimensional probes.’’ 7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
3.12 1-in. incremented wall effects traverse 8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
point means any of the wall effects traverse
points that are located at 1-in. intervals, i.e., 8.1 Default Wall Effects Adjustment Fac-
traverse points d1 through dlast (see Figure tors. A default wall effects adjustment factor
2H–2). of 0.9900 for brick and mortar stacks and
3.13 Partial wall effects traverse means a 0.9950 for all other types of stacks and ducts
traverse in which measurements are taken may be used without conducting the fol-
at fewer than the number of traverse points lowing procedures.
required for a ‘‘complete wall effects tra- 8.2 Traverse Point Locations. Determine
verse’’ (as defined in section 3.1), but are the location of the Method 1 traverse points
taken at a minimum of two traverse points in accordance with section 8.2.1 and the loca-
in each Method 1 equal-area sector closest to tion of the traverse points for either a par-
the wall, as specified in section 8.2.2. tial wall effects traverse in accordance with
3.14 Relative accuracy test audit (RATA) is section 8.2.2 or a complete wall effects tra-
a field test procedure performed in a stack or verse in accordance with section 8.2.3.
duct in which a series of concurrent meas- 8.2.1 Method 1 equal-area traverse point
urements of the same stack gas stream is locations. Determine the location of the
taken by a reference method and an installed Method 1 equal-area traverse points for a
monitoring system. A RATA usually consists traverse consisting of 16 or more points
of series of 9 to 12 sets of such concurrent using Table 1–2 (Location of Traverse Points
measurements, each of which is referred to in Circular Stacks) of Method 1.
as a RATA run. In a volumetric flow RATA, 8.2.2 Partial wall effects traverse. For a
each reference method run consists of a com- partial wall effects traverse, measurements
plete traverse of the stack or duct. must be taken at a minimum of the fol-
3.15 Wall effects-unadjusted average velocity lowing two wall effects traverse point loca-
means the average stack gas velocity, not tions in all four Method 1 equal-area sectors
accounting for velocity decay near the wall, closest to the wall: (1) 1 in. (2.5 cm) from the
as determined in accordance with Method 2, wall (except as provided in section 8.2.2.1)
2F, or 2G for a Method 1 traverse consisting and (2) drem, as determined using Equation
of 16 or more points. 2H–1 or 2H–2 (see section 8.2.2.2).
3.16 Wall effects-adjusted average velocity 8.2.2.1 If the probe cannot be positioned at
means the average stack gas velocity, taking 1 in. (2.5 cm) from the wall (e.g., because of
into account velocity decay near the wall, as insufficient room to withdraw the probe
calculated from measurements at 16 or more shaft) or if velocity pressure cannot be de-
Method 1 traverse points and at the addi- tected at 1 in. (2.5 cm) from the wall (for any
tional wall effects traverse points specified reason other than build-up of particulate
in this method. matter in the bottom of a duct), take meas-
urements at the 1-in. incremented wall ef-
3.17 Wall effects traverse point means a tra-
fects traverse point closest to the wall where
verse point located in accordance with sec-
the probe can be positioned and velocity
tions 8.2.2 or 8.2.3 of this method.
pressure can be detected.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved] 8.2.2.2 Calculate the distance of drem from
the wall to within ±1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) using
5.0 Safety Equation 2H–1 or Equation 2H–2 (for a 16-
point traverse).
5.1 This method may involve hazardous
materials, operations, and equipment. This d last ≤ d b Eq. 2H-3
method does not purport to address all of the
health and safety considerations associated Where:
with its use. It is the responsibility of the r=the stack or duct radius determined from
user of this method to establish appropriate direct measurement of the stack or duct
health and safety practices and to determine diameter in accordance with section 8.6 of
the applicability of occupational health and Method 2F or Method 2G, in. (cm);
safety regulatory requirements prior to per- p=the number of Method 1 equal-area tra-
forming this method. verse points on a diameter, p ≥ 8 (e.g., for
a 16-point traverse, p=8); dlast and drem are
6.0 Equipment and Supplies defined in sections 3.2 and 3.3 respectively,
6.1 The provisions pertaining to equip- in. (cm).
ment and supplies in the method that is used For a 16-point Method 1 traverse, Equation
to take the traverse point measurements 2H–1 becomes:
129
ER14MY99.074</GPH>
7 2 1
d rem = r − r − rd last + d 2last Eq. 2H- 2
8 2
8.2.2.3 Measurements may be taken at any dlast is less than or equal to 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm),
number of additional wall effects traverse the velocity measured at dlast may be used for
points, with the following provisions. drem. Thus, it is not necessary to calculate
(a) dlast must not be closer to the center of the distance of drem or to take measurements
the stack or duct than the distance of the in- at drem when conducting a complete traverse
terior edge (boundary), db, of the Method 1 of a stack or duct with a diameter less than
equal-area sector closest to the wall (see 16.5 ft (5.0 m).
Figure 2H–2 or 2H–3). That is, 8.2.4 Special considerations. The fol-
Where: lowing special considerations apply when the
distance between traverse points is less than
⎛ 2⎞ or equal to 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm).
d b = r ⎜1 − 1 − ⎟ Eq. 2H- 4 8.2.4.1 A wall effects traverse point and
⎝ p⎠ the Method 1 traverse point. If the distance
between a wall effects traverse point and the
Table 2H–1 shows db as a function of the Method 1 traverse point is less than or equal
stack or duct radius, r, for traverses ranging to 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm), taking measurements at
from 16 to 48 points (i.e., for values of p rang- both points is allowed but not required or
ing from 8 to 24). recommended; if measurements are taken at
(b) Each point must be located at a dis- only one point, take the measurements at
tance that is a whole number (e.g., 1, 2, 3) the point that is farther from the wall and
multiple of 1 in. (2.5 cm). use the velocity obtained at that point as
(c) Points do not have to be located at con- the value for both points (see sections 8.2.3
secutive 1-in. intervals. That is, one or more and 9.2 for related requirements).
1-in. incremented points may be skipped. For 8.2.4.2 drem and dlast. If the distance be-
example, it would be acceptable for points to tween drem and dlast is less than or equal to 1⁄2
be located at 1 in. (2.5 cm), 3 in. (7.6 cm), 5 in. in. (12.7 mm), taking measurements at drem is
(12.7 cm), dlast, and drem; or at 1 in. (2.5 cm), 2 allowed but not required or recommended; if
in. (5.1 cm), 4 in. (10.2 cm), 7 in. (17.8 cm), dlast, measurements are not taken at drem, the
and drem. Follow the instructions in section measured velocity value at dlast must be used
8.7.1.2 of this method for recording results as the value for both dlast and drem.
for wall effects traverse points that are
8.3 Traverse Point Sampling Order and
skipped. It should be noted that the full ex-
Probe Selection. Determine the sampling
tent of velocity decay may not be accounted
order of the Method 1 and wall effects tra-
for if measurements are not taken at all 1-in.
verse points and select the appropriate probe
incremented points close to the wall.
for the measurements, taking into account
8.2.3 Complete wall effects traverse. For a
the following considerations.
complete wall effects traverse, measure-
ments must be taken at the following points 8.3.1 Traverse points on any radius may
in all four Method 1 equal-area sectors clos- be sampled in either direction (i.e., from the
est to the wall. wall toward the center of the stack or duct,
(a) The 1-in. incremented wall effects tra- or vice versa).
verse point closest to the wall where the 8.3.2 To reduce the likelihood of velocity
probe can be positioned and velocity can be variations during the time of the traverse
detected, but no farther than 4 in. (10.2 cm) and the attendant potential impact on the
from the wall. wall effects-adjusted and unadjusted average
(b) Every subsequent 1-in. incremented velocities, the following provisions of this
wall effects traverse point out to the interior method shall be met.
edge of the Method 1 equal-area sector or to 8.3.2.1 Each complete set of Method 1 and
12 in. (30.5 cm) from the wall, whichever wall effects traverse points accessed from
comes first. Note: In stacks or ducts with di- the same port shall be sampled without
ameters greater than 15.6 ft (4.8 m) the inte- interruption. Unless traverses are performed
rior edge of the Method 1 equal-area sector is simultaneously in all ports using separate
farther from the wall than 12 in. (30.5 cm). probes at each port, this provision disallows
(c) drem, as determined using Equation 2H– first sampling all Method 1 points at all
1 or 2H–2 (as applicable). Note: For a com- ports and then sampling all the wall effects
plete traverse of a stack or duct with a di- points.

ameter less than 16.5 ft (5.0 m), the distance 8.3.2.2 The entire integrated Method 1 and
ER14MY99.076</GPH>
between drem and dlast is less than or equal to wall effects traverse across all test ports
1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm). As discussed in section shall be as short as practicable, consistent
8.2.4.2, when the distance between drem and with the measurement system response time
130
ER14MY99.075</GPH>
(see section 8.4.1.1) and sampling (see section least the response time to elapse before be-
8.4.1.2) provisions of this method. ginning to take measurements at the first
8.3.3 It is recommended but not required traverse point accessed from that port. Pro-
that in each Method 1 equal-area sector clos- vided that the probe is not removed from the
est to the wall, the Method 1 equal-area tra- stack gas stream, measurements may be
verse point should be sampled in sequence taken at subsequent traverse points accessed
between the adjacent wall effects traverse from the same test port without waiting
points. For example, for the traverse point again for the response time to elapse.
configuration shown in Figure 2H–2, it is rec- 8.4.2 Temperature measurement for wall
ommended that the Method 1 equal-area tra- effects traverse points. Either (1) take tem-
verse point be sampled between dlast and drem. perature measurements at each wall effects
In this example, if the traverse is conducted traverse point in accordance with the appli-
from the wall toward the center of the stack cable provisions of Method 2, 2F, or 2G; or (2)
or duct, it is recommended that measure- use the temperature measurement at the
ments be taken at points in the following Method 1 traverse point closest to the wall
order: d1, d2, dlast, the Method 1 traverse as the temperature measurement for all the
point, drem, and then at the traverse points in wall effects traverse points in the cor-
the three Method 1 interior equal-area sec- responding equal-area sector.
tors. 8.4.3 Non-detectable velocity pressure at
8.3.4 The same type of probe must be used wall effects traverse points. If the probe can-
to take measurements at all Method 1 and not be positioned at a wall effects traverse
wall effects traverse points. However, dif- point or if no velocity pressure can be de-
ferent copies of the same type of probe may tected at a wall effects point, measurements
be used at different ports (e.g., Type S probe shall be taken at the first subsequent wall
1 at port A, Type S probe 2 at port B) or at effects traverse point farther from the wall
different traverse points accessed from a par-
where velocity can be detected. Follow the
ticular port (e.g., Type S probe 1 for Method
instructions in section 8.7.1.2 of this method
1 interior traverse points accessed from port
for recording results for wall effects traverse
A, Type S probe 2 for wall effects traverse
points where velocity pressure cannot be de-
points and the Method 1 exterior traverse
tected. It should be noted that the full ex-
point accessed from port A). The identifica-
tent of velocity decay may not be accounted
tion number of the probe used to obtain
for if measurements are not taken at the 1-
measurements at each traverse point must
in. incremented wall effects traverse points
be recorded.
8.4 Measurements at Method 1 and Wall closest to the wall.
Effects Traverse Points. Conduct measure- 8.5 Data Recording. For each wall effects
ments at Method 1 and wall effects traverse and Method 1 traverse point where measure-
points in accordance with Method 2, 2F, or ments are taken, record all pressure, tem-
2G and in accordance with the provisions of perature, and attendant measurements pre-
the following subsections (some of which are scribed in section 3 of Method 2 or section 8.0
included in Methods 2F and 2G but not in of Method 2F or 2G, as applicable.
Method 2), which are particularly important 8.6 Point Velocity Calculation. For each
for wall effects testing. wall effects and Method 1 traverse point, cal-
8.4.1 Probe residence time at wall effects culate the point velocity value (vi) in accord-
traverse points. Due to the steep tempera- ance with sections 12.1 and 12.2 of Method 2F
ture and pressure gradients that can occur for tests using Method 2F and in accordance
close to the wall, it is very important for the with sections 12.1 and 12.2 of Method 2G for
probe residence time (i.e., the total time tests using Method 2 and Method 2G. (Note
spent at a traverse point) to be long enough that the term (vi) in this method corresponds
to ensure collection of representative tem- to the term (va(i)) in Methods 2F and 2G.)
perature and pressure measurements. The When the equations in the indicated sections
provisions of Methods 2F and 2G in the fol- of Method 2G are used in deriving point ve-
lowing subsections shall be observed. locity values for Method 2 tests, set the
8.4.1.1 System response time. Determine value of the yaw angles appearing in the
the response time of each probe measure- equations to 0°.
ment system by inserting and positioning 8.7 Tabulating Calculated Point Velocity
the ‘‘cold’’ probe (at ambient temperature Values for Wall Effects Traverse Points.
and pressure) at any Method 1 traverse Enter the following values in a hardcopy or
point. Read and record the probe differential electronic form similar to Form 2H–1 (for 16-
pressure, temperature, and elapsed time at point Method 1 traverses) or Form 2H–2 (for
15-second intervals until stable readings for Method 1 traverses consisting of more than
both pressure and temperature are achieved. 16 points). A separate form must be com-
The response time is the longer of these two pleted for each of the four Method 1 equal-
elapsed times. Record the response time. area sectors that are closest to the wall.
8.4.1.2 Sampling. At the start of testing in (a) Port ID (e.g., A, B, C, or D)
each port (i.e., after a probe has been in- (b) Probe type
serted into the stack gas stream), allow at (c) Probe ID
131
(d) Stack or duct diameter in ft (m) (deter- important to calculate and record the tra-
mined in accordance with section 8.6 of verse point positions that will be marked on
Method 2F or Method 2G) each probe for each port, taking into account
(e) Stack or duct radius in in. (cm) the distance that each port nipple (or probe
(f) Distance from the wall of wall effects mounting flange for automated probes) ex-
traverse points at 1-in. intervals, in ascend- tends out of the stack and any extension of
ing order starting with 1 in. (2.5 cm) (column the port nipple (or mounting flange) into the
A of Form 2H–1 or 2H–2) gas stream. To ensure that traverse point po-
(g) Point velocity values (vd) for 1-in. in- sitions are properly identified, the following
cremented traverse points (see section 8.7.1), procedures should be performed on each
including dlast (see section 8.7.2) probe used.
(h) Point velocity value (vdrem) at drem (see 9.2.1 Manual probes. Mark the probe in-
section 8.7.3). sertion distance of the wall effects and Meth-
8.7.1 Point velocity values at wall effects od 1 traverse points on the probe sheath so
traverse points other than dlast. For every 1- that when a mark is aligned with the outside
in. incremented wall effects traverse point face of the stack port, the probe impact port
other than dlast, enter in column B of Form is located at the calculated distance of the
2H–1 or 2H–2 either the velocity measured at traverse point from the stack inside wall.
the point (see section 8.7.1.1) or the velocity The use of different colored marks is rec-
measured at the first subsequent traverse ommended for designating the wall effects
point farther from the wall (see section and Method 1 traverse points. Before the
8.7.1.2). A velocity value must be entered in first use of each probe, check to ensure that
column B of Form 2H–1 or 2H–2 for every 1- the distance of each mark from the center of
in. incremented traverse point from d1 (rep- the probe impact pressure port agrees with
resenting the wall effects traverse point 1 in. the previously calculated traverse point po-
[2.5 cm] from the wall) to dlast. sitions to within ±1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm).
8.7.1.1 For wall effects traverse points
9.2.2 Automated probe systems. For auto-
where the probe can be positioned and veloc-
mated probe systems that mechanically po-
ity pressure can be detected, enter the value
sition the probe head at prescribed traverse
obtained in accordance with section 8.6.
point positions, activate the system with the
8.7.1.2 For wall effects traverse points
probe assemblies removed from the test
that were skipped [see section 8.2.2.3(c)] and
ports and sequentially extend the probes to
for points where the probe cannot be posi-
the programmed location of each wall effects
tioned or where no velocity pressure can be
detected, enter the value obtained at the traverse point and the Method 1 traverse
first subsequent traverse point farther from points. Measure the distance between the
the wall where velocity pressure was de- center of the probe impact pressure port and
tected and measured and follow the entered the inside of the probe assembly mounting
value with a ‘‘flag,’’ such as the notation flange for each traverse point. The measured
‘‘NM,’’ to indicate that ‘‘no measurements’’ distances must agree with the previously
were actually taken at this point. calculated traverse point positions to within
8.7.2 Point velocity value at dlast. For dlast, ±1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm).
enter in column B of Form 2H–1 or 2H–2 the 9.3 Probe Installation. Properly sealing
measured value obtained in accordance with the port area is particularly important in
section 8.6. taking measurements at wall effects tra-
8.7.3 Point velocity value (vdrem) at drem. verse points. For testing involving manual
Enter the point velocity value obtained at probes, the area between the probe sheath
drem in column G of row 4a in Form 2H–1 or and the port should be sealed with a tightly
2H–2. If the distance between drem and dlast is fitting flexible seal made of an appropriate
less than or equal to 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm), the material such as heavy cloth so that leakage
measured velocity value at dlast may be used is minimized. For automated probe systems,
as the value at drem (see section 8.2.4.2). the probe assembly mounting flange area
should be checked to verify that there is no
9.0 Quality Control. leakage.
9.1 Particulate Matter Build-up in Hori- 9.4 Velocity Stability. This method
zontal Ducts. Wall effects testing of hori- should be performed only when the average
zontal circular ducts should be conducted gas velocity in the stack or duct is relatively
only if build-up of particulate matter or constant over the duration of the test. If the
other material in the bottom of the duct is average gas velocity changes significantly
not present. during the course of a wall effects test, the
9.2 Verifying Traverse Point Distances. In test results should be discarded.
taking measurements at wall effects tra-
10.0 Calibration
verse points, it is very important for the

probe impact pressure port to be positioned 10.1 The calibration coefficient(s) or
as close as practicable to the traverse point curves obtained under Method 2, 2F, or 2G
locations in the gas stream. For this reason, and used to perform the Method 1 traverse
before beginning wall effects testing, it is are applicable under this method.
132
11.0 Analytical Procedure p=the number of Method 1 traverse points
per diameter, p≥8 (e.g., for a 16-point tra-
11.1 Sample collection and analysis are
verse, p=8);
concurrent for this method (see section 8).
drem=the distance from the wall of the cen-
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations troid of the area between dlast and the inte-
rior edge of the Method 1 equal-area sector
12.1 The following calculations shall be closest to the wall, in. (cm);
performed to obtain a wall effects adjust- Qdrem=the total stack gas volumetric flow
ment factor (WAF) from (1) the wall effects-
rate for the sub-sector located between dlast
unadjusted average velocity (T4avg), (2) the
and the interior edge of the Method 1
replacement velocity (v̂ej) for each of the
equal-area sector closest to the wall, ac-
four Method 1 sectors closest to the wall, and
tual ft-in.2/sec (m-cm2/sec);
(3) the average stack gas velocity that ac-
vdrem=the measured stack gas velocity at dis-
counts for velocity decay near the wall (v̂avg).
tance drem from the wall, actual ft/sec (m/
12.2 Nomenclature. The following terms
sec);
are listed in the order in which they appear
in Equations 2H–5 through 2H–21. QT=the total stack gas volumetric flow rate
for the Method 1 equal-area sector closest
vavg=the average stack gas velocity, to the wall, actual ft-in.2/sec (m-cm2/sec);
unadjusted for wall effects, actual ft/sec
v̂ej=the replacement stack gas velocity for
(m/sec);
the Method 1 equal-area sector closest to
vii=stack gas point velocity value at Method the wall, i.e., the stack gas point velocity
1 interior equal-area sectors, actual ft/sec value, adjusted for wall effects, for the jth
(m/sec); Method 1 equal-area sector closest to the
vej=stack gas point velocity value, wall, actual ft/sec (m/sec);
unadjusted for wall effects, at Method 1 ex-
v̂avg=the average stack gas velocity that ac-
terior equal-area sectors, actual ft/sec (m/
counts for velocity decay near the wall, ac-
sec);
tual ft/sec (m/sec);
i=index of Method 1 interior equal-area tra-
verse points; WAF=the wall effects adjustment factor de-
rived from vavg and v̂avg for a single tra-
j=index of Method 1 exterior equal-area tra-
verse, dimensionless;
verse points;
n=total number of traverse points in the v̂final=the final wall effects-adjusted average
Method 1 traverse; stack gas velocity that replaces the
vdecd=the wall effects decay velocity for a unadjusted average stack gas velocity ob-
sub-sector located between the traverse tained using Method 2, 2F, or 2G for a field
points at distances d¥1 (in metric units, test consisting of a single traverse, actual
d¥2.5) and d from the wall, actual ft/sec ft/sec (m/sec);
(m/sec); W̄ĀF̄=the wall effects adjustment factor that
vd=the measured stack gas velocity at dis- is applied to the average velocity,
tance d from the wall, actual ft/sec (m/sec); unadjusted for wall effects, in order to ob-
Note: v0=0; tain the final wall effects-adjusted stack
d=the distance of a 1-in. incremented wall ef- gas velocity, v̂final or, v̂final(k), dimensionless;
fects traverse point from the wall, for tra- v̂final(k)=the final wall effects-adjusted average
verse points d1 through dlast, in. (cm); stack gas velocity that replaces the
Ad=the cross-sectional area of a sub-sector unadjusted average stack gas velocity ob-
located between the traverse points at dis- tained using Method 2, 2F, or 2G on run k
tances d¥1 (in metric units, d¥2.5) and d of a RATA or other multiple-run field test
from the wall, in.2 (cm2) ( e.g., sub-sector procedure, actual ft/sec (m/sec);
A2 shown in Figures 2H–3 and 2H–4); vavg(k)=the average stack gas velocity, ob-
r=the stack or duct radius, in. (cm); tained on run k of a RATA or other mul-
Qd=the stack gas volumetric flow rate for a tiple-run procedure, unadjusted for veloc-
sub-sector located between the traverse ity decay near the wall, actual ft/sec (m/
points at distances d¥1 (in metric units, sec);
d¥2.5) and d from the wall, actual ft-in.2/ k=index of runs in a RATA or other multiple-
sec (m-cm2/sec); run procedure.
Qd1→dlast=the total stack gas volumetric flow 12.3 Calculate the average stack gas ve-
rate for all sub-sectors located between the locity that does not account for velocity
wall and dlast, actual ft-in.2/sec (m-cm2/sec); decay near the wall (vavg) using Equation 2H–
dlast=the distance from the wall of the last 1- 5.
in. incremented wall effects traverse point,
in. (cm);
⎛ n−4 4 ⎞
⎜ ∑ vi i + ∑ ve j ⎟
Adrem=the cross-sectional area of the sub-sec-
tor located between dlast and the interior
edge of the Method 1 equal-area sector ⎝ i =1 j=1 ⎠
closest to the wall, in.2 (cm2) (see Figure v avg = Eq. 2H- 5
2H–4); n
133
ER14MY99.077</GPH>
(Note that vavg in Equation 2H–5 is the same of Form 2H–1 filled in for partial and com-
as v(a)avg in Equations 2F–9 and 2G–8 in Meth- plete wall effects traverses.
ods 2F and 2G, respectively.) 12.4.1 Calculate the average velocity (des-
For a 16-point traverse, Equation 2H–5 may ignated the ‘‘decay velocity,’’ vdecd) for each
be written as follows: sub-sector located between the wall and dlast
(see Figure 2H–3) using Equation 2H–7.
⎛ 12 4 ⎞
⎜ ∑ i ∑ ve j ⎟
vi +
vdec d =
v d −1 + v d
Eq. 2H- 7
⎝ i =1 j =1 ⎠ 2
v avg = Eq. 2H- 6
16 For each line in column A of Form 2H–1 or
12.4 Calculate the replacement velocity, 2H–2 that contains a value of d, enter the
v̂ej, for each of the four Method 1 equal-area corresponding calculated value of vdecd in
sectors closest to the wall using the proce- column C.
dures described in sections 12.4.1 through 12.4.2 Calculate the cross-sectional area
12.4.8. Forms 2H–1 and 2H–2 provide sample between the wall and the first 1-in. incre-
tables that may be used in either hardcopy mented wall effects traverse point and be-
or spreadsheet format to perform the cal- tween successive 1-in. incremented wall ef-
culations described in sections 12.4.1 through fects traverse points, from the wall to dlast
12.4.8. Forms 2H–3 and 2H–4 provide examples (see Figure 2H–3), using Equation 2H–8.
1 1
Ad = π( r − d + 1) 2 − π( r − d ) 2 Eq. 2H-8
4 4
For each line in column A of Form 2H–1 or section 12.4.2 by multiplying the values of
2H–2 that contains a value of d, enter the vdecd, derived according to section 12.4.1, by
value of the expression 1⁄4 π(r¥d+1)2 in col- the cross-sectional areas derived in section
umn D, the value of the expression 1⁄4 π(r¥d)2 12.4.2 using Equation 2H–9.
in column E, and the value of Ad in column
F. Note that Equation 2H–8 is designed for Q d = vdec d × A d Eq. 2H- 9
use only with English units (in.). If metric For each line in column A of Form 2H–1 or
units (cm) are used, the first term, 1⁄4 2H–2 that contains a value of d, enter the
π(r¥d+1)2, must be changed to 1⁄4 π(r¥d+2.5)2. corresponding calculated value of Qd in col-
This change must also be made in column D umn G.
of Form 2H–1 or 2H–2. 12.4.4 Calculate the total volumetric flow
ER14MY99.083</GPH>
12.4.3 Calculate the volumetric flow through all sub-sectors located between the
through each cross-sectional area derived in wall and dlast, using Equation 2H–10.
d last
Q d1→d last = ∑ Qd
EN09JY99.003</GPH>
Eq. 2H-10
d =1
Enter the calculated value of Qd1→cdlast in line interior edge of the Method 1 equal-area sec- ER14MY99.081</GPH>
3 of column G of Form 2H–1 or 2H–2. tor (e.g., sub-sector Adrem shown in Figures
12.4.5 Calculate the cross-sectional area of 2H–3 and 2H–4) using Equation 2H–11.
the sub-sector located between dlast and the
ER14MY99.080</GPH>
1 p−2
π( r − d last ) − π( r )
2 2
A drem = Eq. 2H-11
4 4p
ER14MY99.079</GPH>
134
ER14MY99.078</GPH>
For a 16-point traverse (eight points per di-
ameter), Equation 2H–11 may be written as
follows:
1 3
π( r − d last ) − π( r )
2 2
A drem = Eq. 2H-12
4 16
Enter the calculated value of Adrem in line 4b

of column G of Form 2H–1 or 2H–2. ⎛ n−4 4 ⎞
12.4.6 Calculate the volumetric flow for
⎜ ∑ i ∑ ve
vi + ˆ j⎟
the sub-sector located between dlast and the ⎝ i =1 j=1 ⎠
interior edge of the Method 1 equal-area sec- vˆ avg = Eq. 2H- 17
tor, using Equation 2H–13. n
For a 16-point traverse, Equation 2H–17 may
Q drem = v drem × A drem Eq. 2H-13 be written as follows:
In Equation 2H–13, vdrem is either (1) the
measured velocity value at drem or (2) the ⎛ 12 4 ⎞
measured velocity at dlast, if the distance be- ⎜ ∑ vi i + ∑ ve ˆ j⎟
tween drem and dlast is less than or equal to 1⁄2 ⎝ i =1 j =1 ⎠
in. (12.7 mm) and no velocity measurement is vˆ avg = Eq. 2H- 18
taken at drem (see section 8.2.4.2). Enter the 16
calculated value of Qdrem in line 4c of column 12.6 Calculate the wall effects adjustment
G of Form 2H–1 or 2H–2. factor, WAF, using Equation 2H–19.
ER14MY99.091</GPH>
12.4.7 Calculate the total volumetric flow
for the Method 1 equal-area sector closest to vˆ avg
the wall, using Equation 2H–14. WAF = Eq. 2H-19
v avg
Q T = Q d1 → d last + Q drem Eq. 2H-14
12.6.1 Partial wall effects traverse. If a
ER14MY99.090</GPH>
Enter the calculated value of QT in line 5a of partial wall effects traverse (see section
column G of Form 2H–1 or 2H–2. 8.2.2) is conducted, the value obtained from
12.4.8 Calculate the wall effects-adjusted Equation 2H–19 is acceptable and may be re-
replacement velocity value for the Method 1 ported as the wall effects adjustment factor
equal-area sector closest to the wall, using provided that the value is greater than or
Equation 2H–15. equal to 0.9800. If the value is less than 0.9800,
ER14MY99.089</GPH>
it shall not be used and a wall effects adjust-
ment factor of 0.9800 may be used instead.
QT
ˆ j=
ve Eq. 2H-15 12.6.2 Complete wall effects traverse. If a
1 complete wall effects traverse (see section
π( r )
2
8.2.3) is conducted, the value obtained from
2p Equation 2H–19 is acceptable and may be re-
ER14MY99.088</GPH>
ported as the wall effects adjustment factor
For a 16-point traverse (eight points per di-
provided that the value is greater than or
ameter), Equation 2H–15 may be written as
equal to 0.9700. If the value is less than 0.9700,
follows: it shall not be used and a wall effects adjust-
ment factor of 0.9700 may be used instead. If
QT
ˆ j=
ve Eq. 2H-16 the wall effects adjustment factor for a par- ER14MY99.087</GPH>
1 ticular stack or duct is less than 0.9700, the

π( r )2 tester may (1) repeat the wall effects test,
16 taking measurements at more Method 1 tra-
Enter the calculated value of v̂ej in line 5B of verse points and (2) recalculate the wall ef-
column G of Form 2H–1 or 2H–2. fects adjustment factor from these measure-
ments, in an attempt to obtain a wall effects
ER14MY99.086</GPH>
12.5 Calculate the wall effects-adjusted

average velocity, v̂avg, by replacing the four adjustment factor that meets the 0.9700 spec-
values of vej shown in Equation 2H–5 with the ification and completely characterizes the
wall effects.
four wall effects-adjusted replacement veloc-
12.7 Applying a Wall Effects Adjustment

ity values,v̂ej, calculated according to sec-
Factor. A default wall effects adjustment
tion 12.4.8, using Equation 2H–17.
ER14MY99.085</GPH>
factor, as specified in section 8.1, or a cal-

culated wall effects adjustment factor meet-
ing the requirements of section 12.6.1 or 12.6.2
135
ER14MY99.084</GPH>
may be used to adjust the average stack gas tions 2F–10 and 2F–11 in Method 2F, or va(avg)
velocity obtained using Methods 2, 2F, or 2G in Equations 2G–9 and 2G–10 in Method 2G
to take into account velocity decay near the with one of the following.
wall of circular stacks or ducts. Default wall 12.8.1 For single-run test procedures, use
effects adjustment factors specified in sec- the final wall effects-adjusted average stack
tion 8.1 and calculated wall effects adjust- gas velocity, v̂final, calculated according to
ment factors that meet the requirements of Equation 2H–20.
section 12.6.1 and 12.6.2 are summarized in 12.8.2 For RATA and other multiple run
Table 2H–2. test procedures, use the final wall effects-ad-
12.7.1 Single-run tests. Calculate the final justed average stack gas velocity, v̂final(k), cal-
wall effects-adjusted average stack gas ve- culated according to Equation 2H–21.
locity for field tests consisting of a single
traverse using Equation 2H–20. 13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
vˆ final = WAF × v avg Eq. 2H- 20
The wall effects adjustment factor, WAF,
shown in Equation 2H–20, may be (1) a de- 16.0 Reporting
fault wall effects adjustment factor, as speci-
fied in section 8.1, or (2) a calculated adjust- 16.1 Field Test Reports. Field test reports
ment factor that meets the specifications in shall be submitted to the Agency according
sections 12.6.1 or 12.6.2. If a calculated ad- to the applicable regulatory requirements.
justment factor is used in Equation 2H–20, When Method 2H is performed in conjunction
the factor must have been obtained during with Method 2, 2F, or 2G to derive a wall ef-
the same traverse in which vavg was obtained. fects adjustment factor, a single consoli-
12.7.2 RATA or other multiple run test dated Method 2H/2F (or 2H/2G) field test re-
procedure. Calculate the final wall effects- port should be prepared. At a minimum, the
adjusted average stack gas velocity for any consolidated field test report should contain
run k of a RATA or other multiple-run proce- (1) all of the general information, and data
dure using Equation 2H–21. for Method 1 points, specified in section 16.0
of Method 2F (when Method 2H is used in
conjunction with Method 2F) or section 16.0
vˆ final( k ) = WAF × v avg( k ) Eq. 2H- 21 of Method 2G (when Method 2H is used in
The wall effects adjustment factor, W̄ĀF̄, conjunction with Method 2 or 2G) and (2) the
shown in Equation 2H–21 may be (1) a default additional general information, and data for
wall effects adjustment factor, as specified Method 1 points and wall effects points, spec-
in section 8.1; (2) a calculated adjustment ified in this section (some of which are in-
factor (meeting the specifications in sections cluded in section 16.0 of Methods 2F and 2G
12.6.1 or 12.6.2) obtained from any single run and are repeated in this section to ensure
of the RATA that includes run k; or (3) the complete reporting for wall effects testing).
arithmetic average of more than one WAF 16.1.1 Description of the source and site.
(each meeting the specifications in sections The field test report should include the de-
12.6.1 or 12.6.2) obtained through wall effects scriptive information specified in section
testing conducted during several runs of the 16.1.1 of Method 2F (when using Method 2F)
RATA that includes run k. If wall effects ad- or 2G (when using either Method 2 or 2G). It
justment factors (meeting the specifications should also include a description of the stack
in sections 12.6.1 or 12.6.2) are determined for or duct’s construction material along with
more than one RATA run, the arithmetic av- the diagram showing the dimensions of the
erage of all of the resulting calculated wall stack or duct at the test port elevation pre-
effects adjustment factors must be used as scribed in Methods 2F and 2G. The diagram
the value of W̄ĀF̄ and applied to all runs of should indicate the location of all wall ef-
that RATA. If a calculated, not a default, fects traverse points where measurements
wall effects adjustment factor is used in were taken as well as the Method 1 traverse
Equation 2H–21, the average velocity points. The diagram should provide a unique
unadjusted for wall effects, vavg(k) must be ob- identification number for each wall effects
tained from runs in which the number of and Method 1 traverse point, its distance
Method 1 traverse points sampled does not from the wall, and its location relative to
exceed the number of Method 1 traverse the probe entry ports.
points in the runs used to derive the wall ef- 16.1.2 Field test forms. The field test re-
fects adjustment factor, W̄ĀF̄, shown in port should include a copy of Form 2H–1, 2H–
Equation 2H–21. 2, or an equivalent for each Method 1 exte-
12.8 Calculating Volumetric Flow Using rior equal-area sector.
Final Wall Effects-Adjusted Average Veloc- 16.1.3 Field test data. The field test report
ity Value. To obtain a stack gas flow rate should include the following data for the
ER14MY99.093</GPH>
that accounts for velocity decay near the Method 1 and wall effects traverse.
wall of circular stacks or ducts, replace vs in 16.1.3.1 Data for each traverse point. The
Equation 2–10 in Method 2, or va(avg) in Equa- field test report should include the values
136
ER14MY99.092</GPH>
specified in section 16.1.3.2 of Method 2F (2) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 2—
(when using Method 2F) or 2G (when using Determination of stack gas velocity and vol-
either Method 2 or 2G) for each Method 1 and umetric flow rate (Type S pitot tube).
wall effects traverse point. The provisions of (3) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method
section 8.4.2 of Method 2H apply to the tem- 2F—Determination of stack gas velocity and
perature measurements reported for wall ef- volumetric flow rate with three-dimensional
fects traverse points. For each wall effects probes.
and Method 1 traverse point, the following (4) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method
values should also be included in the field 2G—Determination of stack gas velocity and
test report. volumetric flow rate with two-dimensional
(a) Traverse point identification number probes.
for each Method 1 and wall effects traverse (5) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 3—
point. Gas analysis for carbon dioxide, oxygen, ex-
(b) Probe type. cess air, and dry molecular weight.
(c) Probe identification number. (6) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method
(d) Probe velocity calibration coefficient 3A—Determination of oxygen and carbon di-
(i.e., Cp when Method 2 or 2G is used; F2 when oxide concentrations in emissions from sta-
Method 2F is used). tionary sources (instrumental analyzer pro-
cedure).
For each Method 1 traverse point in an ex- (7) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 4—
terior equal-area sector, the following addi- Determination of moisture content in stack
tional value should be included. gases.
(e) Calculated replacement velocity, v̂ej, (8) Emission Measurement Center (EMC)
accounting for wall effects. Approved Alternative Method (ALT–011)
16.1.3.2 Data for each run. The values ‘‘Alternative Method 2 Thermocouple Cali-
specified in section 16.1.3.3 of Method 2F bration Procedure.’’
(when using Method 2F) or 2G (when using (9) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, ‘‘EPA
either Method 2 or 2G) should be included in Flow Reference Method Testing and Anal-
the field test report once for each run. The ysis: Data Report, Texas Utilities,
provisions of section 12.8 of Method 2H apply DeCordova Steam Electric Station, Volume
for calculating the reported gas volumetric I: Test Description and Appendix A (Data
flow rate. In addition, the following Method Distribution Package),’’ EPA/430–R–98–015a.
2H run values should also be included in the (10) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, ‘‘EPA
field test report. Flow Reference Method Testing and Anal-
(a) Average velocity for run, accounting ysis: Data Report, Texas Utilities, Lake Hub-
for wall effects, v̂avg. bard Steam Electric Station, Volume I: Test
(b) Wall effects adjustment factor derived Description and Appendix A (Data Distribu-
from a test run, WAF. tion Package),’’ EPA/430–R–98–017a.
16.1.3.3 Data for a complete set of runs. (11) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, ‘‘EPA
The values specified in section 16.1.3.4 of Flow Reference Method Testing and Anal-
Method 2F (when using Method 2F) or 2G ysis: Data Report, Pennsylvania Electric Co.,
(when using either Method 2 or 2G) should be G.P.U. Genco Homer City Station: Unit 1,
included in the field test report once for each Volume I: Test Description and Appendix A
complete set of runs. In addition, the field (Data Distribution Package),’’ EPA/430–R–98–
test report should include the wall effects 018a.
adjustment factor, W̄ĀF̄, that is applied in (12) The Cadmus Group, Inc., May 1999,
accordance with section 12.7.1 or 12.7.2 to ob- ‘‘EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and
tain the final wall effects-adjusted average Analysis: Findings Report,’’ EPA/430–R–99–
stack gas velocity v̂final or v̂final(k). 009.
(13) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1997, ‘‘EPA
16.1.4 Quality assurance and control.
Flow Reference Method Testing and Anal-
Quality assurance and control procedures,
ysis: Wind Tunnel Experimental Results,’’
specifically tailored to wall effects testing,
EPA/430–R–97–013.
should be described.
16.2 Reporting a Default Wall Effects Ad- Technology, 1998, ‘‘Report of Special Test of
justment Factor. When a default wall effects Air Speed Instrumentation, Four Prandtl
adjustment factor is used in accordance with Probes, Four S-Type Probes, Four French
section 8.1 of this method, its value and a de- Probes, Four Modified Kiel Probes,’’ Pre-
scription of the stack or duct’s construction pared for the U.S. Environmental Protection
material should be reported in lieu of sub- Agency under IAG No. DW13938432–01–0.
mitting a test report.
17.0 References. Technology, 1998, ‘‘Report of Special Test of

Air Speed Instrumentation, Five
(1) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 1— Autoprobes,’’ Prepared for the U.S. Environ-
Sample and velocity traverses for stationary mental Protection Agency under IAG No.
sources. DW13938432–01–0.
137
(16) National Institute of Standards and Summary Plots,’’ Plus Appendices, WBWT-
Technology, 1998, ‘‘Report of Special Test of TR–1317, Prepared for The Cadmus Group,
Air Speed Instrumentation, Eight Spherical Inc., under EPA Contract 68–W6–0050, Work
Probes,’’ Prepared for the U.S. Environ- Assignment 0007AA–3.
mental Protection Agency under IAG No. (19) Fossil Energy Research Corporation,
DW13938432–01–0. Final Report, ‘‘Velocity Probe Tests in Non-
axial Flow Fields,’’ November 1998, Prepared
Technology, 1998, ‘‘Report of Special Test of
for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agen-
Air Speed Instrumentation, Four DAT
Probes,’’ Prepared for the U.S. Environ- cy.
mental Protection Agency under IAG No. (20) Fossil Energy Research Corporation,
DW13938432–01–0. ‘‘Additional Swirl Tunnel Tests: E-DAT and
(18) Massachusetts Institute of Technology T-DAT Probes,’’ February 24, 1999, Technical
(MIT), 1998, ‘‘Calibration of Eight Wind Memorandum Prepared for U.S. Environ-
Speed Probes Over a Reynolds Number mental Protection Agency, P.O. No. 7W–1193–
Range of 46,000 to 725,000 per Foot, Text and NALX.
138
ER14MY99.036</GPH>
139
ER14MY99.037</GPH>
140
ER14MY99.038</GPH>
141
ER14MY99.039</GPH>
142
ER14MY99.040</GPH>
143
ER14MY99.041</GPH>
144
ER14MY99.042</GPH>
145
ER14MY99.043</GPH>
METHOD 3—GAS ANALYSIS FOR THE corporated by reference from other methods
DETERMINATION OF DRY MOLECULAR WEIGHT in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable re-
sults, persons using this method should also
NOTE: This method does not include all of have a thorough knowledge of Method 1.
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essen- 1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
146
ER14MY99.044</GPH>
Analytes CAS No. Sensitivity
Oxygen (O2) ................................................................... 7782–44–7 2,000 ppmv.

Nitrogen (N2) .................................................................. 7727–37–9 N/A.
Carbon dioxide (CO2) .................................................... 124–38–9 2,000 ppmv.
Carbon monoxide (CO) ................................................. 630–08–0 N/A.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- lution, and when present in the effluent gas
ble for the determination of CO2 and O2 con- stream must be removed before analysis.
centrations and dry molecular weight of a
sample from an effluent gas stream of a fos- 5.0 Safety
sil-fuel combustion process or other process. 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
1.3 Other methods, as well as modifica- hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
tions to the procedure described herein, are ment. This test method may not address all
also applicable for all of the above deter- of the safety problems associated with its
minations. Examples of specific methods and use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
modifications include: (1) A multi-point grab test method to establish appropriate safety
sampling method using an Orsat analyzer to and health practices and determine the ap-
analyze the individual grab sample obtained plicability of regulatory limitations prior to
at each point; (2) a method for measuring ei- performing this test method.
ther CO2 or O2 and using stoichiometric cal- 5.2 Corrosive Reagents.
culations to determine dry molecular 5.2.1 A typical Orsat analyzer requires
weight; and (3) assigning a value of 30.0 for four reagents: a gas-confining solution, CO2
dry molecular weight, in lieu of actual meas- absorbent, O2 absorbent, and CO absorbent.
urements, for processes burning natural gas, These reagents may contain potassium hy-
coal, or oil. These methods and modifica- droxide, sodium hydroxide, cuprous chloride,
tions may be used, but are subject to the ap- cuprous sulfate, alkaline pyrogallic acid,
proval of the Administrator. The method and/or chromous chloride. Follow manufac-
may also be applicable to other processes turer’s operating instructions and observe
where it has been determined that com- all warning labels for reagent use.
pounds other than CO2, O2, carbon monoxide 5.2.2 A typical Fyrite analyzer contains
(CO), and nitrogen (N2) are not present in zinc chloride, hydrochloric acid, and either
concentrations sufficient to affect the re- potassium hydroxide or chromous chloride.
sults. Follow manufacturer’s operating instruc-
1.4 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to tions and observe all warning labels for rea-
the requirements of this method will en- gent use.
air pollutant sampling methods. 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
NOTE: As an alternative to the sampling
apparatus and systems described herein,
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from a stack other sampling systems (e.g., liquid displace-
by one of the following methods: (1) single- ment) may be used, provided such systems
point, grab sampling; (2) single-point, inte- are capable of obtaining a representative
grated sampling; or (3) multi-point, inte- sample and maintaining a constant sampling
grated sampling. The gas sample is analyzed rate, and are, otherwise, capable of yielding
for percent CO2 and percent O2. For dry mo- acceptable results. Use of such systems is
lecular weight determination, either an subject to the approval of the Administrator.
Orsat or a Fyrite analyzer may be used for 6.1 Grab Sampling (See Figure 3–1).
the analysis. 6.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel or borosilicate
glass tubing equipped with an in-stack or
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] out-of-stack filter to remove particulate
matter (a plug of glass wool is satisfactory
4.0 Interferences
for this purpose). Any other materials, re-
4.1 Several compounds can interfere, to sistant to temperature at sampling condi-
varying degrees, with the results of Orsat or tions and inert to all components of the gas
Fyrite analyses. Compounds that interfere stream, may be used for the probe. Examples
with CO2 concentration measurement in- of such materials may include aluminum,
clude acid gases (e.g., sulfur dioxide, hydro- copper, quartz glass, and Teflon.
gen chloride); compounds that interfere with 6.1.2 Pump. A one-way squeeze bulb, or
O2 concentration measurement include un- equivalent, to transport the gas sample to
saturated hydrocarbons (e.g., acetone, acety- the analyzer.
lene), nitrous oxide, and ammonia. Ammonia 6.2 Integrated Sampling (Figure 3–2).
reacts chemically with the O2 absorbing so- 6.2.1 Probe. Same as in Section 6.1.1.
147
6.2.2 Condenser. An air-cooled or water- 8.1.2 Set up the equipment as shown in
cooled condenser, or other condenser no Figure 3–1, making sure all connections
greater than 250 ml that will not remove O2, ahead of the analyzer are tight. If an Orsat
CO2, CO, and N2, to remove excess moisture analyzer is used, it is recommended that the
which would interfere with the operation of analyzer be leak-checked by following the
the pump and flowmeter. procedure in Section 11.5; however, the leak-
6.2.3 Valve. A needle valve, to adjust sam- check is optional.
ple gas flow rate. 8.1.3 Place the probe in the stack, with
6.2.4 Pump. A leak-free, diaphragm-type the tip of the probe positioned at the sam-
pump, or equivalent, to transport sample gas pling point. Purge the sampling line long
to the flexible bag. Install a small surge tank enough to allow at least five exchanges.
between the pump and rate meter to elimi- Draw a sample into the analyzer, and imme-
nate the pulsation effect of the diaphragm diately analyze it for percent CO2 and per-
pump on the rate meter. cent O2 according to Section 11.2.
6.2.5 Rate Meter. A rotameter, or equiva- 8.2 Single-Point, Integrated Sampling
lent, capable of measuring flow rate to ±2 Procedure.
percent of the selected flow rate. A flow rate 8.2.1 The sampling point in the duct shall
range of 500 to 1000 ml/min is suggested. be located as specified in Section 8.1.1.
6.2.6 Flexible Bag. Any leak-free plastic 8.2.2 Leak-check (optional) the flexible
(e.g., Tedlar, Mylar, Teflon) or plastic-coated bag as in Section 6.2.6. Set up the equipment
aluminum (e.g., aluminized Mylar) bag, or as shown in Figure 3–2. Just before sampling,
equivalent, having a capacity consistent leak-check (optional) the train by placing a
with the selected flow rate and duration of vacuum gauge at the condenser inlet, pulling
the test run. A capacity in the range of 55 to a vacuum of at least 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg),
90 liters (1.9 to 3.2 ft3) is suggested. To leak- plugging the outlet at the quick disconnect,
check the bag, connect it to a water manom- and then turning off the pump. The vacuum
eter, and pressurize the bag to 5 to 10 cm H2O should remain stable for at least 0.5 minute.
(2 to 4 in. H2O). Allow to stand for 10 min- Evacuate the flexible bag. Connect the
utes. Any displacement in the water manom- probe, and place it in the stack, with the tip
eter indicates a leak. An alternative leak- of the probe positioned at the sampling
check method is to pressurize the bag to 5 to point. Purge the sampling line. Next, con-
10 cm (2 to 4 in.) H2O and allow to stand over- nect the bag, and make sure that all connec-
night. A deflated bag indicates a leak. tions are tight.
6.2.7 Pressure Gauge. A water-filled U- 8.2.3 Sample Collection. Sample at a con-
tube manometer, or equivalent, of about 30 stant rate (±10 percent). The sampling run
cm (12 in.), for the flexible bag leak-check. should be simultaneous with, and for the
6.2.8 Vacuum Gauge. A mercury manom- same total length of time as, the pollutant
eter, or equivalent, of at least 760 mm (30 in.) emission rate determination. Collection of at
Hg, for the sampling train leak-check. least 28 liters (1.0 ft3) of sample gas is rec-
ommended; however, smaller volumes may
6.3 Analysis. An Orsat or Fyrite type
be collected, if desired.
combustion gas analyzer.
8.2.4 Obtain one integrated flue gas sam-
7.0 Reagents and Standards ple during each pollutant emission rate de-
termination. Within 8 hours after the sample
7.1 Reagents. As specified by the Orsat or is taken, analyze it for percent CO2 and per-
Fyrite-type combustion analyzer manufac- cent O2 using either an Orsat analyzer or a
turer. Fyrite type combustion gas analyzer accord-
7.2 Standards. Two standard gas mixtures, ing to Section 11.3.
traceable to National Institute of Standards NOTE: When using an Orsat analyzer, peri-
and Technology (NIST) standards, to be used odic Fyrite readings may be taken to verify/
in auditing the accuracy of the analyzer and confirm the results obtained from the Orsat.
the analyzer operator technique:
8.3 Multi-Point, Integrated Sampling Pro-
7.2.1. Gas cylinder containing 2 to 4 per-
cedure.
cent O2 and 14 to 18 percent CO2.
8.3.1 Unless otherwise specified in an ap-
7.2.2. Gas cylinder containing 2 to 4 per- plicable regulation, or by the Administrator,
cent CO2 and about 15 percent O2. a minimum of eight traverse points shall be
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, used for circular stacks having diameters
and Transport less than 0.61 m (24 in.), a minimum of nine
shall be used for rectangular stacks having
8.1 Single Point, Grab Sampling Proce- equivalent diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.),
dure. and a minimum of 12 traverse points shall be
8.1.1 The sampling point in the duct shall used for all other cases. The traverse points
either be at the centroid of the cross section shall be located according to Method 1.
or at a point no closer to the walls than 1.0 8.3.2 Follow the procedures outlined in
m (3.3 ft), unless otherwise specified by the Sections 8.2.2 through 8.2.4, except for the
Administrator. following: Traverse all sampling points, and
148
sample at each point for an equal length of
time. Record sampling data as shown in Fig-
ure 3–3.
9.0 Quality Control
8.2 ...................................... Use of Fyrite to confirm Orsat results ..... Ensures the accurate measurement of CO2 and O2.
10.1 .................................... Periodic audit of analyzer and operator Ensures that the analyzer is operating properly and
technique. that the operator performs the sampling procedure
correctly and accurately.
11.3 .................................... Replicable analyses of integrated sam- Minimizes experimental error.
ples.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization ever, the check is optional. Calculate the dry
molecular weight as indicated in Section
10.1 Analyzer. The analyzer and analyzer
12.0. Repeat the analysis and calculation pro-
operator’s technique should be audited peri-
cedures until the individual dry molecular
odically as follows: take a sample from a
weights for any three analyses differ from
manifold containing a known mixture of CO2
their mean by no more than 0.3 g/g-mole (0.3
and O2, and analyze according to the proce-
lb/lb-mole). Average these three molecular
dure in Section 11.3. Repeat this procedure
weights, and report the results to the nearest
until the measured concentration of three
0.1 g/g-mole (0.1 lb/lb-mole).
consecutive samples agrees with the stated
value ±0.5 percent. If necessary, take correc- 11.4 Standardization. A periodic check of
tive action, as specified in the analyzer users the reagents and of operator technique
manual. should be conducted at least once every
10.2 Rotameter. The rotameter need not three series of test runs as outlined in Sec-
be calibrated, but should be cleaned and tion 10.1.
maintained according to the manufacturer’s 11.5 Leak-Check Procedure for Orsat Ana-
instruction. lyzer. Moving an Orsat analyzer frequently
causes it to leak. Therefore, an Orsat ana-
11.0 Analytical Procedure lyzer should be thoroughly leak-checked on
site before the flue gas sample is introduced
11.1 Maintenance. The Orsat or Fyrite- into it. The procedure for leak-checking an
type analyzer should be maintained and op- Orsat analyzer is as follows:
erated according to the manufacturers speci-
11.5.1 Bring the liquid level in each pi-
fications.
pette up to the reference mark on the cap-
11.2 Grab Sample Analysis. Use either an
illary tubing, and then close the pipette
Orsat analyzer or a Fyrite-type combustion
stopcock.
gas analyzer to measure O2 and CO2 con-
11.5.2 Raise the leveling bulb sufficiently
centration for dry molecular weight deter-
to bring the confining liquid meniscus onto
mination, using procedures as specified in
the graduated portion of the burette, and
the analyzer user’s manual. If an Orsat ana-
then close the manifold stopcock.
lyzer is used, it is recommended that the
Orsat leak-check, described in Section 11.5, 11.5.3 Record the meniscus position.
be performed before this determination; how- 11.5.4 Observe the meniscus in the burette
ever, the check is optional. Calculate the dry and the liquid level in the pipette for move-
molecular weight as indicated in Section ment over the next 4 minutes.
12.0. Repeat the sampling, analysis, and cal- 11.5.5 For the Orsat analyzer to pass the
culation procedures until the dry molecular leak-check, two conditions must be met:
weights of any three grab samples differ 11.5.5.1 The liquid level in each pipette
from their mean by no more than 0.3 g/g- must not fall below the bottom of the cap-
mole (0.3 lb/lb-mole). Average these three illary tubing during this 4-minute interval.
molecular weights, and report the results to 11.5.5.2 The meniscus in the burette must
the nearest 0.1 g/g-mole (0.1 lb/lb-mole). not change by more than 0.2 ml during this
11.3 Integrated Sample Analysis. Use ei- 4-minute interval.
ther an Orsat analyzer or a Fyrite-type com- 11.5.6 If the analyzer fails the leak-check
bustion gas analyzer to measure O2 and CO2 procedure, check all rubber connections and
concentration for dry molecular weight de- stopcocks to determine whether they might
termination, using procedures as specified in be the cause of the leak. Disassemble, clean,
the analyzer user’s manual. If an Orsat ana- and regrease any leaking stopcocks. Replace
lyzer is used, it is recommended that the leaking rubber connections. After the ana-
Orsat leak-check, described in Section 11.5, lyzer is reassembled, repeat the leak-check
be performed before this determination; how- procedure.
149
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis 0.320 =Molecular weight of O2 divided by 100.
0.440 =Molecular weight of CO2 divided by
12.1 Nomenclature. 100.
Md=Dry molecular weight, g/g-mole (lb/lb- 12.2 Nitrogen, Carbon Monoxide Con-
mole). centration. Determine the percentage of the
%CO2=Percent CO2 by volume, dry basis. gas that is N2 and CO by subtracting the sum
%O2=Percent O2 by volume, dry basis. of the percent CO2 and percent O2 from 100
%CO=Percent CO by volume, dry basis. percent.
%N2=Percent N2 by volume, dry basis. 12.3 Dry Molecular Weight. Use Equation
0.280 =Molecular weight of N2 or CO, divided 3–1 to calculate the dry molecular weight of
by 100. the stack gas.
M d = 0.440 (%CO 2 ) + 0.320 (%O 2 ) + 0.280 (%N 2 + %CO) Eq. 3-1
NOTE: The above Equation 3–1 does not 2. Conner, William D. and J.S. Nader. Air
consider the effect on calculated dry molec- Sampling with Plastic Bags. Journal of the
ular weight of argon in the effluent gas. The American Industrial Hygiene Association.
concentration of argon, with a molecular 25:291–297. 1964.
weight of 39.9, in ambient air is about 0.9 per- 3. Burrell Manual for Gas Analysts, Sev-
cent. A negative error of approximately 0.4 enth edition. Burrell Corporation, 2223 Fifth
percent is introduced. The tester may choose Avenue, Pittsburgh, PA. 15219. 1951.
to include argon in the analysis using proce-
4. Mitchell, W.J. and M.R. Midgett. Field
dures subject to approval of the Adminis-
Reliability of the Orsat Analyzer. Journal of
trator.
Air Pollution Control Association. 26:491–495.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] May 1976.
5. Shigehara, R.T., R.M. Neulicht, and W.S.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] Smith. Validating Orsat Analysis Data from
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] Fossil Fuel-Fired Units. Stack Sampling
News. 4(2):21–26. August 1976.
16.0 References
1. Altshuller, A.P. Storage of Gases and Validation Data
Vapors in Plastic Bags. International Jour-
nal of Air and Water Pollution. 6:75–81. 1963.
ER17OC00.091</GPH>
150
ER17OC00.090</MATH>
Time Traverse point Q (liter/min) % Deviation a
Average
a% Dev.=[(Q¥Qavg)/Qavg]×100 (Must be ≤±10%)
Figure 3–3. Sampling Rate Data tionary source emissions using a continuous
instrumental analyzer. Quality assurance
METHOD 3A—DETERMINATION OF OXYGEN AND and quality control requirements are in-
CARBON DIOXIDE CONCENTRATIONS IN EMIS- cluded to assure that you, the tester, collect
SIONS FROM STATIONARY SOURCES (INSTRU- data of known quality. You must document
MENTAL ANALYZER PROCEDURE) your adherence to these specific require-
ments for equipment, supplies, sample col-
lection and analysis, calculations, and data

What is Method 3A? analysis.
This method does not completely describe
Method 3A is a procedure for measuring ox- all equipment, supplies, and sampling and
ygen (O2) and carbon dioxide (CO2) in sta-
151
ER17OC00.092</GPH>
analytical procedures you will need but re- (c) Method 4—Determination of Moisture
fers to other methods for some of the details. Content in Stack Gases.
Therefore, to obtain reliable results, you (d) Method 7E—Determination of Nitrogen
should also have a thorough knowledge of Oxides Emissions from Stationary Sources
these additional test methods which are (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure).
found in appendix A to this part: 1.1 Analytes. What does this method deter-
(a) Method 1—Sample and Velocity Tra- mine? This method measures the concentra-
verses for Stationary Sources.
tion of oxygen and carbon dioxide.
(b) Method 3—Gas Analysis for the Deter-
mination of Molecular Weight.
Analyte CAS No. Sensitivity
Oxygen (O2) ................................................................... 7782–44–7 Typically <2% of Calibration Span.

Carbon dioxide (CO2) .................................................... 124–38–9 Typically <2% of Calibration Span.
1.2 Applicability. When is this method re- is not required to transport dry gases or for
quired? The use of Method 3A may be re- systems that measure the O2 or CO2 con-
quired by specific New Source Performance centration on a dry basis, provided that the
Standards, Clean Air Marketing rules, State system is not also being used to concur-
Implementation Plans and permits, where rently measure SO2 and/or NOX.
measurements of O2 and CO2 concentrations 6.2 What analyzer must I use? You must use
in stationary source emissions must be an analyzer that continuously measures O2
made, either to determine compliance with or CO2 in the gas stream and meets the speci-
an applicable emission standard or to con- fications in Section 13.0.
duct performance testing of a continuous
emission monitoring system (CEMS). Other 7.0 Reagents and Standards
regulations may also require the use of 7.1 Calibration Gas. What calibration gas-
Method 3A. ses do I need? Refer to Section 7.1 of Method
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. How good must 7E for the calibration gas requirements. Ex-
my collected data be? Refer to Section 1.3 of ample calibration gas mixtures are listed
Method 7E. below. Precleaned or scrubbed air may be
used for the O2 high-calibration gas provided
it does not contain other gases that interfere
In this method, you continuously or inter- with the O2 measurement.
mittently sample the effluent gas and con- (a) CO2 in nitrogen (N2).
vey the sample to an analyzer that measures (b) CO2 in air.
the concentration of O2 or CO2. You must (c) CO2/SO2 gas mixture in N2.
meet the performance requirements of this (d) O2/SO2 gas mixture in N2.
method to validate your data. (e) O2/CO2/SO2 gas mixture in N2.
(f) CO2/NOX gas mixture in N2.
3.0 Definitions (g) CO2/SO2/NOX gas mixture in N2.
Refer to Section 3.0 of Method 7E for the The tests for analyzer calibration error
applicable definitions. and system bias require high-, mid-, and low-
level gases.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved] 7.2 Interference Check. What reagents do I
need for the interference check? Potential
5.0 Safety interferences may vary among available ana-
Refer to Section 5.0 of Method 7E. lyzers. Table 7E–3 of Method 7E lists a num-
ber of gases that should be considered in con-
6.0 Equipment and Supplies ducting the interference test.
Figure 7E–1 in Method 7E is a schematic
diagram of an acceptable measurement sys-
and Transport
tem.
6.1 What do I need for the measurement sys- 8.1 Sampling Site and Sampling Points. You
tem? The components of the measurement must follow the procedures of Section 8.1 of
system are described (as applicable) in Sec- Method 7E to determine the appropriate
tions 6.1 and 6.2 of Method 7E, except that sampling points, unless you are using Meth-
the analyzer described in Section 6.2 of this od 3A only to determine the stack gas molec-
method must be used instead of the analyzer ular weight and for no other purpose. In that
described in Method 7E. You must follow the case, you may use single-point integrated
noted specifications in Section 6.1 of Method sampling as described in Section 8.2.1 of
7E except that the requirements to use stain- Method 3. If the stratification test provisions
less steel, Teflon, or non-reactive glass fil- in Section 8.1.2 of Method 7E are used to re-
ters do not apply. Also, a heated sample line duce the number of required sampling points,
152
the alternative acceptance criterion for 3- 12.0 of Method 7E, substituting percent O2
point sampling will be ± 0.5 percent CO2 or and percent CO2 for ppmv of NOX as appro-
O2, and the alternative acceptance criterion priate.
for single-point sampling will be ± 0.3 percent
CO2 or O2. In that case, you may use single- 13.0 Method Performance
point integrated sampling as described in
The specifications for the applicable per-
Section 8.2.1 of Method 3.
formance checks are the same as in Section
8.2 Initial Measurement System Performance
13.0 of Method 7E except for the alternative
Tests. You must follow the procedures in Sec-
specifications for system bias, drift, and cali-
tion 8.2 of Method 7E. If a dilution-type
bration error. In these alternative specifica-
measurement system is used, the special
tions, replace the term ‘‘0.5 ppmv’’ with the
considerations in Section 8.3 of Method 7E
apply. term ‘‘0.5 percent O2’’ or ‘‘0.5 percent CO2’’
8.3 Interference Check. The O2 or CO2 ana- (as applicable).
lyzer must be documented to show that in- 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
terference effects to not exceed 2.5 percent of
the calibration span. The interference test in 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
Section 8.2.7 of Method 7E is a procedure
that may be used to show this. The effects of 16.0 Alternative Procedures [Reserved]
all potential interferences at the concentra-
tions encountered during testing must be ad- 17.0 References
dressed and documented. This testing and
1. ‘‘EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay
documentation may be done by the instru-
and Certification of Gaseous Calibration
ment manufacturer.
8.4 Sample Collection. You must follow the Standards’’ September 1997 as amended,
procedures in Section 8.4 of Method 7E. EPA–600/R–97/121.
8.5 Post-Run System Bias Check and Drift 18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
Assessment. You must follow the procedures
Validation Data
in Section 8.5 of Method 7E.
Refer to Section 18.0 of Method 7E.
9.0 Quality Control
Follow quality control procedures in Sec- METHOD 3B—GAS ANALYSIS FOR THE DETER-
tion 9.0 of Method 7E. MINATION OF EMISSION RATE CORRECTION
FACTOR OR EXCESS AIR
Follow the procedures for calibration and the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup-
standardization in Section 10.0 of Method 7E. plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essen-
11.0 Analytical Procedures corporated by reference from other methods
Because sample collection and analysis are in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable re-
performed together (see Section 8), addi- sults, persons using this method should have
tional discussion of the analytical procedure a thorough knowledge of at least the fol-
is not necessary. lowing additional test methods: Method 1
and 3.
You must follow the applicable procedures
for calculations and data analysis in Section 1.1 Analytes.
Oxygen (O2) .................................................................................... 7782–44–7 2,000 ppmv.

Carbon Dioxide (CO2) ..................................................................... 124–38–9 2,000 ppmv.
Carbon Monoxide (CO) ................................................................... 630–08–0 N/A.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- 1.3 Other methods, as well as modifica-
ble for the determination of O2, CO2, and CO tions to the procedure described herein, are
concentrations in the effluent from fossil- also applicable for all of the above deter-
fuel combustion processes for use in excess minations. Examples of specific methods and
air or emission rate correction factor cal- modifications include: (1) A multi-point sam-
culations. Where compounds other than CO2, pling method using an Orsat analyzer to ana-
O2, CO, and nitrogen (N2) are present in con- lyze individual grab samples obtained at
centrations sufficient to affect the results, each point, and (2) a method using CO2 or O2
the calculation procedures presented in this and stoichiometric calculations to determine
method must be modified, subject to the ap- excess air. These methods and modifications
153
may be used, but are subject to the approval 6.1 Grab Sampling and Integrated Sam-
of the Administrator. pling. Same as in Sections 6.1 and 6.2, respec-
1.4 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to tively for Method 3.
the requirements of this method will en- 6.2 Analysis. An Orsat analyzer only. For
hance the quality of the data obtained from low CO2 (less than 4.0 percent) or high O2
air pollutant sampling methods. (greater than 15.0 percent) concentrations,
the measuring burette of the Orsat must
2.0 Summary of Method have at least 0.1 percent subdivisions. For
Orsat maintenance and operation proce-
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from a stack dures, follow the instructions recommended
by one of the following methods: (1) Single- by the manufacturer, unless otherwise speci-
point, grab sampling; (2) single-point, inte- fied herein.
grated sampling; or (3) multi-point, inte-
grated sampling. The gas sample is analyzed 7.0 Reagents and Standards
for percent CO2, percent O2, and, if necessary,
7.1 Reagents. Same as in Method 3, Sec-
percent CO using an Orsat combustion gas
tion 7.1.
analyzer.
7.2 Standards. Same as in Method 3, Sec-
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] tion 7.2.
4.0 Interferences
and Transport
4.1 Several compounds can interfere, to
NOTE: Each of the three procedures below
varying degrees, with the results of Orsat shall be used only when specified in an appli-
analyses. Compounds that interfere with CO2 cable subpart of the standards. The use of
concentration measurement include acid these procedures for other purposes must
gases (e.g., sulfur dioxide, hydrogen chlo- have specific prior approval of the Adminis-
ride); compounds that interfere with O2 con- trator. A Fyrite-type combustion gas ana-
centration measurement include unsatu- lyzer is not acceptable for excess air or emis-
rated hydrocarbons (e.g., acetone, acetylene), sion rate correction factor determinations,
nitrous oxide, and ammonia. Ammonia re- unless approved by the Administrator. If
acts chemically with the O2 absorbing solu- both percent CO2 and percent O2 are meas-
tion, and when present in the effluent gas ured, the analytical results of any of the
stream must be removed before analysis. three procedures given below may also be
used for calculating the dry molecular
5.0 Safety
weight (see Method 3).
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve 8.1 Single-Point, Grab Sampling and Ana-
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- lytical Procedure.
ment. This test method may not address all 8.1.1 The sampling point in the duct shall
of the safety problems associated with its either be at the centroid of the cross section
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this or at a point no closer to the walls than 1.0
test method to establish appropriate safety m (3.3 ft), unless otherwise specified by the
and health practices and determine the ap- Administrator.
plicability of regulatory limitations prior to 8.1.2 Set up the equipment as shown in
performing this test method. Figure 3–1 of Method 3, making sure all con-
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. A typical Orsat nections ahead of the analyzer are tight.
analyzer requires four reagents: a gas-con- Leak-check the Orsat analyzer according to
fining solution, CO2 absorbent, O2 absorbent, the procedure described in Section 11.5 of
and CO absorbent. These reagents may con- Method 3. This leak-check is mandatory.
8.1.3 Place the probe in the stack, with
tain potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide,
the tip of the probe positioned at the sam-
cuprous chloride, cuprous sulfate, alkaline
pling point; purge the sampling line long
pyrogallic acid, and/or chromous chloride.
enough to allow at least five exchanges.
Follow manufacturer’s operating instruc-
Draw a sample into the analyzer. For emis-
tions and observe all warning labels for rea-
sion rate correction factor determinations,
gent use.
immediately analyze the sample for percent
6.0 Equipment and Supplies CO2 or percent O2, as outlined in Section 11.2.
For excess air determination, immediately
NOTE: As an alternative to the sampling analyze the sample for percent CO2, O2, and
apparatus and systems described herein, CO, as outlined in Section 11.2, and calculate
other sampling systems (e.g., liquid displace- excess air as outlined in Section 12.2.
ment) may be used, provided such systems 8.1.4 After the analysis is completed,
are capable of obtaining a representative leak-check (mandatory) the Orsat analyzer

sample and maintaining a constant sampling once again, as described in Section 11.5 of
rate, and are, otherwise, capable of yielding Method 3. For the results of the analysis to
acceptable results. Use of such systems is be valid, the Orsat analyzer must pass this
subject to the approval of the Administrator. leak-test before and after the analysis.
154
8.2 Single-Point, Integrated Sampling and apply to sources that (1) remove CO2 or O2
Analytical Procedure. through processes other than combustion, (2)
8.2.1 The sampling point in the duct shall add O2 (e.g., oxygen enrichment) and N2 in
be located as specified in Section 8.1.1. proportions different from that of air, (3) add
8.2.2 Leak-check (mandatory) the flexible CO2 (e.g., cement or lime kilns), or (4) have
bag as in Section 6.2.6 of Method 3. Set up no fuel factor, FO, values obtainable (e.g., ex-
the equipment as shown in Figure 3–2 of tremely variable waste mixtures). This
Method 3. Just before sampling, leak-check method validates the measured proportions
(mandatory) the train by placing a vacuum of CO2 and O2 for fuel type, but the method
gauge at the condenser inlet, pulling a vacu- does not detect sample dilution resulting
um of at least 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg), plug- from leaks during or after sample collection.
ging the outlet at the quick disconnect, and The method is applicable for samples col-
then turning off the pump. The vacuum lected downstream of most lime or limestone
should remain stable for at least 0.5 minute. flue-gas desulfurization units as the CO2
Evacuate the flexible bag. Connect the added or removed from the gas stream is not
probe, and place it in the stack, with the tip significant in relation to the total CO2 con-
of the probe positioned at the sampling centration. The CO2 concentrations from
point; purge the sampling line. Next, connect other types of scrubbers using only water or
the bag, and make sure that all connections basic slurry can be significantly affected and
are tight. would render the fuel factor check mini-
8.2.3 Sample at a constant rate, or as mally useful.
specified by the Administrator. The sam-
pling run must be simultaneous with, and for 10.0 Calibration and Standardization
the same total length of time as, the pollut-
10.1 Analyzer. The analyzer and analyzer
ant emission rate determination. Collect at
operator technique should be audited peri-
least 28 liters (1.0 ft3) of sample gas. Smaller
odically as follows: take a sample from a
volumes may be collected, subject to ap-
manifold containing a known mixture of CO2
and O2, and analyze according to the proce-
8.2.4 Obtain one integrated flue gas sam-
dure in Section 11.3. Repeat this procedure
ple during each pollutant emission rate de-
until the measured concentration of three
termination. For emission rate correction
consecutive samples agrees with the stated
factor determination, analyze the sample
value ±0.5 percent. If necessary, take correc-
within 4 hours after it is taken for percent
tive action, as specified in the analyzer users
CO2 or percent O2 (as outlined in Section
manual.
11.2).
8.3 Multi-Point, Integrated Sampling and 10.2 Rotameter. The rotameter need not
Analytical Procedure. be calibrated, but should be cleaned and
8.3.1 Unless otherwise specified in an ap- maintained according to the manufacturer’s
plicable regulation, or by the Administrator, instruction.
a minimum of eight traverse points shall be
used for circular stacks having diameters
less than 0.61 m (24 in.), a minimum of nine 11.1 Maintenance. The Orsat analyzer
shall be used for rectangular stacks having should be maintained according to the manu-
equivalent diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), facturers specifications.
and a minimum of 12 traverse points shall be 11.2 Grab Sample Analysis. To ensure
used for all other cases. The traverse points complete absorption of the CO2, O2, or if ap-
shall be located according to Method 1. plicable, CO, make repeated passes through
8.3.2 Follow the procedures outlined in each absorbing solution until two consecu-
Sections 8.2.2 through 8.2.4, except for the tive readings are the same. Several passes
following: Traverse all sampling points, and (three or four) should be made between read-
sample at each point for an equal length of ings. (If constant readings cannot be ob-
time. Record sampling data as shown in Fig- tained after three consecutive readings, re-
ure 3–3 of Method 3. place the absorbing solution.) Although in
most cases, only CO2 or O2 concentration is
9.0 Quality Control required, it is recommended that both CO2
9.1 Data Validation Using Fuel Factor. and O2 be measured, and that the procedure
Although in most instances, only CO2 or O2 in Section 12.3 be used to validate the ana-
measurement is required, it is recommended lytical data.
that both CO2 and O2 be measured to provide NOTE: Since this single-point, grab sam-
a check on the quality of the data. The data pling and analytical procedure is normally
validation procedure of Section 12.3 is sug- conducted in conjunction with a single-
gested.
point, grab sampling and analytical proce-

NOTE: Since this method for validating the dure for a pollutant, only one analysis is or-
CO2 and O2 analyses is based on combustion dinarily conducted. Therefore, great care
of organic and fossil fuels and dilution of the must be taken to obtain a valid sample and
gas stream with air, this method does not analysis.
155
11.3 Integrated Sample Analysis. The greater than or equal to 15.0 percent. Aver-
Orsat analyzer must be leak-checked (see age the three acceptable values of percent
Section 11.5 of Method 3) before the analysis. O2, and report the results to the nearest 0.1
If excess air is desired, proceed as follows: (1) percent.
within 4 hours after the sample is taken, 11.3.2.3 For percent CO, repeat the analyt-
analyze it (as in Sections 11.3.1 through ical procedure until the results of any three
11.3.3) for percent CO2, O2, and CO; (2) deter- analyses differ by no more than 0.3 percent.
mine the percentage of the gas that is N2 by Average the three acceptable values of per-
subtracting the sum of the percent CO2, percent CO, and report the results to the near-
cent O2, and percent CO from 100 percent; est 0.1 percent.
and (3) calculate percent excess air, as out- 11.3.3 After the analysis is completed,
lined in Section 12.2. leak-check (mandatory) the Orsat analyzer
11.3.1 To ensure complete absorption of once again, as described in Section 11.5 of
the CO2, O2, or if applicable, CO, follow the Method 3. For the results of the analysis to
procedure described in Section 11.2. be valid, the Orsat analyzer must pass this
NOTE: Although in most instances only CO2 leak-test before and after the analysis.
or O2 is required, it is recommended that 11.4 Standardization. A periodic check of
both CO2 and O2 be measured, and that the the reagents and of operator technique
procedures in Section 12.3 be used to validate should be conducted at least once every
the analytical data. three series of test runs as indicated in Sec-
11.3.2 Repeat the analysis until the fol- tion 10.1.
lowing criteria are met:
11.3.2.1 For percent CO2, repeat the ana- 12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
lytical procedure until the results of any 12.1 Nomenclature. Same as Section 12.1
three analyses differ by no more than (a) 0.3 of Method 3 with the addition of the fol-
percent by volume when CO2 is greater than lowing:
4.0 percent or (b) 0.2 percent by volume when
%EA=Percent excess air.
CO2 is less than or equal to 4.0 percent. Aver-
age three acceptable values of percent CO2, 0.264=Ratio of O2 to N2 in air, v/v.
and report the results to the nearest 0.2 per- 12.2 Percent Excess Air. Determine the
cent. percentage of the gas that is N2 by sub-
11.3.2.2 For percent O2, repeat the analyt- tracting the sum of the percent CO2, percent
ical procedure until the results of any three CO, and percent O2 from 100 percent. Cal-
analyses differ by no more than (a) 0.3 per- culate the percent excess air (if applicable)
cent by volume when O2 is less than 15.0 per- by substituting the appropriate values of
cent or (b) 0.2 percent by volume when O2 is percent O2, CO, and N2 into Equation 3B–1.
%O 2 − 0.5 %CO
%EA = × 100 Eq. 3B-1
0.264 %N 2 − (%O 2 − 0.5 %CO)
NOTE: The equation above assumes that 20.9=Percent O2 by volume in ambient air.
ambient air is used as the source of O2 and If CO is present in quantities measurable
that the fuel does not contain appreciable by this method, adjust the O2 and CO2 values
amounts of N2 (as do coke oven or blast fur- using Equations 3B–3 and 3B–4 before per-
nace gases). For those cases when appre- forming the calculation for Fo:
ciable amounts of N2 are present (coal, oil,
ER17OC00.096</MATH>
and natural gas do not contain appreciable
amounts of N2) or when oxygen enrichment
%CO2 (adj) = %CO2 + %CO Eq. 3B-3
is used, alternative methods, subject to ap-
proval of the Administrator, are required. %O 2 (adj) = %O 2 − 0.5 %CO Eq. 3B- 4
12.3 Data Validation When Both CO2 and Where:
O2 Are Measured. %CO=Percent CO by volume, dry basis.
ER17OC00.095</MATH>
12.3.1 Fuel Factor, Fo. Calculate the fuel

12.3.2 Compare the calculated Fo factor
factor (if applicable) using Equation 3B–2:
with the expected Fo values. Table 3B–1 in
20.9 − %O2 Section 17.0 may be used in establishing ac-
Fo = Eq. 3B-2 ceptable ranges for the expected Fo if the
%CO2 fuel being burned is known. When fuels are

burned in combinations, calculate the com-
ER17OC00.094</MATH>
Where: bined fuel Fd and Fc factors (as defined in

%O2=Percent O2 by volume, dry basis. Method 19, Section 12.2) according to the pro-
%CO2=Percent CO2 by volume, dry basis. cedure in Method 19, Sections 12.2 and 12.3.
156
ER17OC00.093</MATH>
Then calculate the Fo factor according to 1.2 Principle. A portion of the sample is
Equation 3B–5. injected into a gas chromatograph (GC) and
the CO2, CH4, N2, and O2 concentrations are
0.209 Fd determined by using a thermal conductivity
Fo = Eq. 3B-5 detector (TCD) and integrator.
Fc
2. Range and Sensitivity
12.3.3 Calculated Fo values, beyond the ac-
ceptable ranges shown in this table, should 2.1 Range. The range of this method de-
be investigated before accepting the test re- pends upon the concentration of samples.
sults. For example, the strength of the solu- The analytical range of TCD’s is generally
tions in the gas analyzer and the analyzing between approximately 10 ppmv and the
technique should be checked by sampling upper percent range.
and analyzing a known concentration, such 2.2 Sensitivity. The sensitivity limit for a
as air; the fuel factor should be reviewed and compound is defined as the minimum detect-
verified. An acceptability range of ±12 per- able concentration of that compound, or the
cent is appropriate for the Fo factor of mixed concentration that produces a signal-to-
fuels with variable fuel ratios. The level of noise ratio of three to one. For CO2, CH4, N2,
the emission rate relative to the compliance and O2, the sensitivity limit is in the low
level should be considered in determining if ppmv range.
a retest is appropriate; i.e., if the measured
emissions are much lower or much greater 3. Interferences
than the compliance limit, repetition of the
Since the TCD exhibits universal response
test would not significantly change the com-
and detects all gas components except the
pliance status of the source and would be un-
carrier, interferences may occur. Choosing
necessarily time consuming and costly.
the appropriate GC or shifting the retention
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] times by changing the column flow rate may
help to eliminate resolution interferences.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] To assure consistent detector response, he-
lium is used to prepare calibration gases.
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] Frequent exposure to samples or carrier gas
containing oxygen may gradually destroy
16.0 References filaments.
Same as Method 3, Section 16.0.
4. Apparatus
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and 4.1 Gas Chromatograph. GC having at
Validation Data least the following components:
4.1.1 Separation Column. Appropriate col-
TABLE 3B–1—Fo FACTORS FOR SELECTED umn(s) to resolve CO2, CH4, N2, O2, and other
FUELS gas components that may be present in the
sample.
Fuel type Fo range
4.1.2 Sample Loop. Teflon or stainless
Coal: steel tubing of the appropriate diameter.
Anthracite and lignite ...................... 1.016–1.130 NOTE: Mention of trade names or specific
Bituminous ....................................... 1.083–1.230 products does not constitute endorsement or
Oil: recommendation by the U. S. Environmental
Distillate ........................................... 1.260–1.413 Protection Agency.
Residual .......................................... 1.210–1.370
4.1.3 Conditioning System. To maintain
Gas:
Natural ............................................. 1.600–1.836
the column and sample loop at constant tem-
Propane ........................................... 1.434–1.586 perature.
Butane ............................................. 1.405–1.553 4.1.4 Thermal Conductivity Detector.
Wood ............................................................. 1.000–1.120 4.2 Recorder. Recorder with linear strip
Wood bark ..................................................... 1.003–1.130 chart. Electronic integrator (optional) is rec-
ommended.
METHOD 3C—DETERMINATION OF CARBON DI- 4.3 Teflon Tubing. Diameter and length
OXIDE, METHANE, NITROGEN, AND OXYGEN determined by connection requirements of
FROM STATIONARY SOURCES cylinder regulators and the GC.
4.4 Regulators. To control gas cylinder
1. Applicability and Principle pressures and flow rates.
1.1 Applicability. This method applies to 4.5 Adsorption Tubes. Applicable traps to
remove any O2 from the carrier gas.
the analysis of carbon dioxide (CO2), meth-

ane (CH4), nitrogen (N2), and oxygen (O2) in
5. Reagents
samples from municipal solid waste landfills
and other sources when specified in an appli- 5.1 Calibration and Linearity Gases.
cable subpart. Standard cylinder gas mixtures for each
157
ER17OC00.097</MATH>
Pt. 60, App. A–2, Meth. 3C 40 CFR Ch. I (7–1–09 Edition)
compound of interest with at least three con- 7.1 Nomenclature.
centration levels spanning the range of sus- A=average sample area
pected sample concentrations. The calibra-
Bw=moisture content in the sample, fraction
tion gases shall be prepared in helium.
5.2 Carrier Gas. Helium, high-purity. C=component concentration in the sample,
dry basis, ppmv
6. Analysis Ct=calculated NMOC concentration, ppmv C
equivalent
6.1 Sample Collection. Use the sample col-
lection procedures described in Methods 3 or Ctm=measured NMOC concentration, ppmv C
25C to collect a sample of landfill gas (LFG). equivalent
6.2 Preparation of GC. Before putting the Pbar=barometric pressure, mm Hg
GC analyzer into routine operation, optimize Pti=gas sample tank pressure after evacu-
the operational conditions according to the ation, mm Hg absolute
manufacturer’s specifications to provide Pt=gas sample tank pressure after sampling,
good resolution and minimum analysis time. but before pressurizing, mm Hg absolute
Establish the appropriate carrier gas flow Ptf=final gas sample tank pressure after pres-
and set the detector sample and reference surizing, mm Hg absolute
cell flow rates at exactly the same levels. Pw=vapor pressure of H2O (from table 3C–1),
Adjust the column and detector tempera- mm Hg
tures to the recommended levels. Allow suf-
Tti=sample tank temperature before sam-
ficient time for temperature stabilization.
This may typically require 1 hour for each pling, °K
change in temperature. Tt=sample tank temperature at completion
6.3 Analyzer Linearity Check and Calibra- of sampling, °K
tion. Perform this test before sample anal- Ttf=sample tank temperature after pressur-
ysis. Using the gas mixtures in section 5.1, izing, °K
verify the detector linearity over the range r=total number of analyzer injections of
of suspected sample concentrations with at sample tank during analysis (where
least three points per compound of interest. j=injection number, 1 . . . r)
This initial check may also serve as the ini- R=Mean calibration response factor for spe-
tial instrument calibration. All subsequent cific sample component, area/ppmv
calibrations may be performed using a sin-
gle-point standard gas provided the calibra- TABLE 3C–1—MOISTURE CORRECTION
tion point is within 20 percent of the sample
component concentration. For each instru- Vapor Pres-
ment calibration, record the carrier and de- Temperature °C sure of H2O,
tector flow rates, detector filament and mm Hg
block temperatures, attenuation factor, in-
4 ......................................................................... 6.1
jection time, chart speed, sample loop vol- 6 ......................................................................... 7.0
ume, and component concentrations. Plot a 8 ......................................................................... 8.0
linear regression of the standard concentra- 10 ....................................................................... 9.2
tions versus area values to obtain the re- 12 ....................................................................... 10.5
sponse factor of each compound. Alter- 14 ....................................................................... 12.0
natively, response factors of uncorrected 16 ....................................................................... 13.6
component concentrations (wet basis) may 18 ....................................................................... 15.5
be generated using instrumental integration. 20 ....................................................................... 17.5
NOTE: Peak height may be used instead of 22 ....................................................................... 19.8
peak area throughout this method. 24 ....................................................................... 22.4
6.4 Sample Analysis. Purge the sample 26 ....................................................................... 25.2
loop with sample, and allow to come to at- 28 ....................................................................... 28.3
mospheric pressure before each injection. 30 ....................................................................... 31.8
Analyze each sample in duplicate, and cal-
culate the average sample area (A). The re- 7.2 Concentration of Sample Components.
sults are acceptable when the peak areas for Calculate C for each compound using Equa-
two consecutive injections agree within 5 tions 3C–1 and 3C–2. Use the temperature and
percent of their average. If they do not barometric pressure at the sampling site to
agree, run additional samples until con-
calculate Bw. If the sample was diluted with
sistent area data are obtained. Determine
helium using the procedures in Method 25C,
the tank sample concentrations according to
section 7.2. use Equation 3C–3 to calculate the con-
centration.
7. Calculations
Carry out calculations retaining at least

acquired data. Round off results only after
the final calculation.
158
Environmental Protection Agency Pt. 60, App. A–3
60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific
Pw uses of these test methods are described in
Bw = 3C - 1 the standards of performance contained in
Pbar the subparts, beginning with Subpart D.
Within each standard of performance, a
A section title ‘‘Test Methods and Procedures’’
C= 3C - 2 is provided to: (1) Identify the test methods
R(1 − Bw ) to be used as reference methods to the facil-
ity subject to the respective standard and (2)
identify any special instructions or condi-
Ptf tions to be followed when applying a method
Ttf A (for example, establish sampling rates, vol-
C= 3C - 3 umes, or temperatures) are to be used either
Pt
−
Pti R(1 − Bw ) in addition to, or as a substitute for proce-
dures in a test method. Similarly, for
Tt Tti sources subject to emission monitoring re-
8. Bibliography to any use of a test method as a reference
1. McNair, H.M., and E.J. Bonnelli. Basic method are provided in the subpart or in Ap-
Gas Chromatography. Consolidated Printers, pendix B.
Berkeley, CA. 1969. Inclusion of methods in this appendix is
not intended as an endorsement or denial of
[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971] their applicability to sources that are not
EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- subject to standards of performance. The
tations affecting part 60, appendix A–2, see methods are potentially applicable to other
the List of CFR Sections Affected, which ap- sources; however, applicability should be
pears in the Finding Aids section of the confirmed by careful and appropriate evalua-
printed volume and on GPO Access. tion of the conditions prevalent at such
sources.
APPENDIX A–3 TO PART 60—TEST The approach followed in the formulation
METHODS 4 THROUGH 5I of the test methods involves specifications
Method 4—Determination of moisture con- In concept, a performance specification ap-
tent in stack gases proach would be preferable in all methods
Method 5—Determination of particulate because this allows the greatest flexibility
matter emissions from stationary sources to the user. In practice, however, this ap-
Method 5A—Determination of particulate proach is impractical in most cases because
matter emissions from the asphalt proc- performance specifications cannot be estab-
essing and asphalt roofing industry lished. Most of the methods described herein,
Method 5B—Determination of nonsulfuric therefore, involve specific equipment speci-
acid particulate matter emissions from fications and procedures, and only a few
stationary sources methods in this appendix rely on perform-
Method 5C [Reserved] ance criteria.
Method 5D—Determination of particulate Minor changes in the test methods should
matter emissions from positive pressure not necessarily affect the validity of the re-
fabric filters sults and it is recognized that alternative
Method 5E—Determination of particulate and equivalent methods exist. Section 60.8
matter emissions from the wool fiberglass provides authority for the Administrator to
insulation manufacturing industry specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2)
Method 5F—Determination of nonsulfate alternative methods, and (3) minor changes
particulate matter emissions from stain the methodology of the test methods. It
tionary sources should be clearly understood that unless oth-
Method 5G—Determination of particulate erwise identified all such methods and
matter emissions from wood heaters (dilu- changes must have prior approval of the Ad-
tion tunnel sampling location) ministrator. An owner employing such meth-
Method 5H—Determination of particulate ods or deviations from the test methods
emissions from wood heaters from a stack without obtaining prior approval does so at
location the risk of subsequent disapproval and re-
Method 5I—Determination of Low Level Par- testing with approved methods.
ticulate Matter Emissions From Sta- Within the test methods, certain specific
tionary Sources equipment or procedures are recognized as

159
ER12MR96.031</MATH>
must be identified in the test report. The po- 2.2.1 The reference method is used for ac-
tentially approvable options are cited as curate determinations of moisture content
‘‘subject to the approval of the Adminis- (such as are needed to calculate emission
trator’’ or as ‘‘or equivalent.’’ Such poten- data). The approximation method, provides
tially approvable techniques or alternatives estimates of percent moisture to aid in set-
may be used at the discretion of the owner ting isokinetic sampling rates prior to a pol-
without prior approval. However, detailed lutant emission measurement run. The ap-
descriptions for applying these potentially proximation method described herein is only
approvable techniques or alternatives are a suggested approach; alternative means for
not provided in the test methods. Also, the
approximating the moisture content (e.g.,
potentially approvable options are not nec-
drying tubes, wet bulb-dry bulb techniques,
condensation techniques, stoichiometric cal-
Therefore, an owner electing to use such po-
tentially approvable techniques or alter- culations, previous experience, etc.) are also
natives is responsible for: (1) assuring that acceptable.
the techniques or alternatives are in fact ap- 2.2.2 The reference method is often con-
plicable and are properly executed; (2) in- ducted simultaneously with a pollutant
cluding a written description of the alter- emission measurement run. When it is, cal-
native method in the test report (the written culation of percent isokinetic, pollutant
method must be clear and must be capable of emission rate, etc., for the run shall be based
being performed without additional instruc- upon the results of the reference method or
tion, and the degree of detail should be simi- its equivalent. These calculations shall not
lar to the detail contained in the test meth- be based upon the results of the approxima-
ods); and (3) providing any rationale or sup- tion method, unless the approximation
porting data necessary to show the validity method is shown, to the satisfaction of the
of the alternative in the particular applica- Administrator, to be capable of yielding re-
tion. Failure to meet these requirements can sults within one percent H2O of the reference
result in the Administrator’s disapproval of method.
the alternative.
METHOD 4—DETERMINATION OF MOISTURE
CONTENT IN STACK GASES 4.0 Interferences
NOTE: This method does not include all the 4.1 The moisture content of saturated gas
specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) streams or streams that contain water drop-
and procedures (e.g., sampling) essential to lets, as measured by the reference method,
its performance. Some material is incor-
may be positively biased. Therefore, when
porated by reference from other methods in
these conditions exist or are suspected, a
this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable re-
second determination of the moisture con-
sults, persons using this method should have
a thorough knowledge of at least the fol- tent shall be made simultaneously with the
lowing additional test methods: Method 1, reference method, as follows: Assume that
Method 5, and Method 6. the gas stream is saturated. Attach a tem-
perature sensor [capable of measuring to ±1
1.0 Scope and Application °C (2 °F)] to the reference method probe.
Measure the stack gas temperature at each
1.1 Analytes.
traverse point (see Section 8.1.1.1) during the
Analyte CAS No. Sensitivity reference method traverse, and calculate the
average stack gas temperature. Next, deter-
Water vapor (H2O) ... 7732–18–5 N/A mine the moisture percentage, either by: (1)
Using a psychrometric chart and making ap-
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- propriate corrections if the stack pressure is
ble for the determination of the moisture different from that of the chart, or (2) using
content of stack gas. saturation vapor pressure tables. In cases
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to where the psychrometric chart or the satura-
tion vapor pressure tables are not applicable
(based on evaluation of the process), alter-
native methods, subject to the approval of
2.0 Summary of Method the Administrator, shall be used.
2.1 A gas sample is extracted at a con- 5.0 Safety
stant rate from the source; moisture is re-
moved from the sample stream and deter- 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
mined either volumetrically or gravimetri- hazardous materials, operations, and equip-

cally. ment. This test method may not address all
2.2 The method contains two possible proof the safety problems associated with its
cedures: a reference method and an approxi- use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
mation method. test method to establish appropriate safety
160
and health practices and determine the ap- 6.2.11 Vacuum Gauge. At least 760-mm (30-
plicability of regulatory limitations prior to in.) Hg gauge, to be used for the sampling
performing this test method. leak check.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies 7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]

6.1 Reference Method. A schematic of the 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport,
sampling train used in this reference method and Storage
is shown in Figure 4–1.
8.1 Reference Method. The following pro-
6.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel or glass tub-
cedure is intended for a condenser system
ing, sufficiently heated to prevent water con- (such as the impinger system described in
densation, and equipped with a filter, either Section 6.1.1.8 of Method 5) incorporating
in-stack (e.g., a plug of glass wool inserted volumetric analysis to measure the con-
into the end of the probe) or heated out-of- densed moisture, and silica gel and
stack (e.g., as described in Method 5), to re- gravimetric analysis to measure the mois-
move particulate matter. When stack condi- ture leaving the condenser.
tions permit, other metals or plastic tubing 8.1.1 Preliminary Determinations.
may be used for the probe, subject to the ap- 8.1.1.1 Unless otherwise specified by the
proval of the Administrator. Administrator, a minimum of eight traverse
6.1.2 Condenser. Same as Method 5, Sec- points shall be used for circular stacks hav-
tion 6.1.1.8. ing diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), a min-
6.1.3 Cooling System. An ice bath con- imum of nine points shall be used for rectan-
tainer, crushed ice, and water (or equiva- gular stacks having equivalent diameters
lent), to aid in condensing moisture. less than 0.61 m (24 in.), and a minimum of
6.1.4 Metering System. Same as in Method twelve traverse points shall be used in all
5, Section 6.1.1.9, except do not use sampling other cases. The traverse points shall be lo-
systems designed for flow rates higher than cated according to Method 1. The use of
0.0283 m3/min (1.0 cfm). Other metering sys- fewer points is subject to the approval of the
tems, capable of maintaining a constant Administrator. Select a suitable probe and
sampling rate to within 10 percent and deter- probe length such that all traverse points
mining sample gas volume to within 2 per- can be sampled. Consider sampling from op-
cent, may be used, subject to the approval of posite sides of the stack (four total sampling
the Administrator. ports) for large stacks, to permit use of
6.1.5 Barometer and Graduated Cylinder shorter probe lengths. Mark the probe with
and/or Balance. Same as Method 5, Sections heat resistant tape or by some other method
6.1.2 and 6.2.5, respectively. to denote the proper distance into the stack
6.2. Approximation Method. A schematic or duct for each sampling point.
of the sampling train used in this approxima- 8.1.1.2 Select a total sampling time such
tion method is shown in Figure 4–2. that a minimum total gas volume of 0.60 scm
6.2.1 Probe. Same as Section 6.1.1. (21 scf) will be collected, at a rate no greater
6.2.2 Condenser. Two midget impingers, than 0.021 m3/min (0.75 cfm). When both mois-
each with 30-ml capacity, or equivalent. ture content and pollutant emission rate are
to be determined, the moisture determina-
6.2.3 Cooling System. Ice bath container,
tion shall be simultaneous with, and for the
crushed ice, and water, to aid in condensing
same total length of time as, the pollutant
moisture in impingers.
emission rate run, unless otherwise specified
6.2.4 Drying Tube. Tube packed with new
in an applicable subpart of the standards.
or regenerated 6- to 16-mesh indicating-type 8.1.2 Preparation of Sampling Train.
silica gel (or equivalent desiccant), to dry 8.1.2.1 Place known volumes of water in
the sample gas and to protect the meter and the first two impingers; alternatively, trans-
pump. fer water into the first two impingers and
6.2.5 Valve. Needle valve, to regulate the record the weight of each impinger (plus
sample gas flow rate. water) to the nearest 0.5 g. Weigh and record
6.2.6 Pump. Leak-free, diaphragm type, or the weight of the silica gel to the nearest 0.5
equivalent, to pull the gas sample through g, and transfer the silica gel to the fourth
the train. impinger; alternatively, the silica gel may
6.2.7 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter, suffi- first be transferred to the impinger, and the
ciently accurate to measure the sample vol- weight of the silica gel plus impinger re-
ume to within 2 percent, and calibrated over corded.
the range of flow rates and conditions actu- 8.1.2.2 Set up the sampling train as shown
ally encountered during sampling. in Figure 4–1. Turn on the probe heater and
6.2.8 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equiva- (if applicable) the filter heating system to
lent, to measure the flow range from 0 to 3 temperatures of approximately 120 °C (248
liters/min (0 to 0.11 cfm). °F), to prevent water condensation ahead of
6.2.9 Graduated Cylinder. 25-ml. the condenser. Allow time for the tempera-
6.2.10 Barometer. Same as Method 5, Sec- tures to stabilize. Place crushed ice and
tion 6.1.2. water in the ice bath container.
161
8.1.3 Leak Check Procedures. It is rec- 8.1.4.2 After collecting the sample, dis-
ommended, but not required, that the vol- connect the probe from the first impinger (or
ume metering system and sampling train be from the filter holder), and conduct a leak
leak-checked as follows: check (mandatory) of the sampling train as
8.1.3.1 Metering System. Same as Method described in Section 8.1.3.2. Record the leak
5, Section 8.4.1. rate. If the leakage rate exceeds the allow-
8.1.3.2 Sampling Train. Disconnect the able rate, either reject the test results or
probe from the first impinger or (if applica- correct the sample volume as in Section 12.3
ble) from the filter holder. Plug the inlet to of Method 5.
the first impinger (or filter holder), and pull
8.2 Approximation Method.
a 380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum. A lower vacu-
um may be used, provided that it is not ex- NOTE: The approximation method de-
ceeded during the test. A leakage rate in ex- scribed below is presented only as a sug-
cess of 4 percent of the average sampling gested method (see Section 2.0).
rate or 0.00057 m3/min (0.020 cfm), whichever 8.2.1 Place exactly 5 ml water in each im-
is less, is unacceptable. Following the leak pinger. Leak check the sampling train as fol-
check, reconnect the probe to the sampling
lows: Temporarily insert a vacuum gauge at
train.
or near the probe inlet. Then, plug the probe
8.1.4 Sampling Train Operation. During
the sampling run, maintain a sampling rate inlet and pull a vacuum of at least 250 mm
within 10 percent of constant rate, or as (10 in.) Hg. Note the time rate of change of
specified by the Administrator. For each the dry gas meter dial; alternatively, a ro-
run, record the data required on a data sheet tameter (0 to 40 ml/min) may be temporarily
similar to that shown in Figure 4–3. Be sure attached to the dry gas meter outlet to de-
to record the dry gas meter reading at the termine the leakage rate. A leak rate not in
beginning and end of each sampling time in- excess of 2 percent of the average sampling
crement and whenever sampling is halted. rate is acceptable.
Take other appropriate readings at each NOTE: Release the probe inlet plug slowly
sample point at least once during each time before turning off the pump.
increment.
8.2.2 Connect the probe, insert it into the
NOTE: When Method 4 is used concurrently
stack, and sample at a constant rate of 2 li-
with an isokinetic method (e.g., Method 5)
the sampling rate should be maintained at ters/min (0.071 cfm). Continue sampling until
isokinetic conditions rather than 10 percent the dry gas meter registers about 30 liters
of constant rate. (1.1 ft3) or until visible liquid droplets are
carried over from the first impinger to the
8.1.4.1 To begin sampling, position the
second. Record temperature, pressure, and
probe tip at the first traverse point. Imme-
dry gas meter readings as indicated by Fig-
diately start the pump, and adjust the flow
ure 4–4.
to the desired rate. Traverse the cross sec-
tion, sampling at each traverse point for an 9.0 Quality Control
equal length of time. Add more ice and, if
necessary, salt to maintain a temperature of 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
less than 20 °C (68 °F) at the silica gel outlet. ures.
Section 8.1.1.4 ................... Leak rate of the sampling system cannot Ensures the accuracy of the volume of gas sampled.
exceed four percent of the average (Reference Method)
sampling rate or 0.00057 m3/min (0.20
cfm).
Section 8.2.1 ...................... Leak rate of the sampling system cannot Ensures the accuracy of the volume of gas sampled.
exceed two percent of the average (Approximation Method)
sampling rate.
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. 10.2 Approximation Method. Calibrate the
Same as Method 5, Section 9.2. metering system and the barometer accord-
ing to Method 6, Section 10.1 and Method 5,
10.0 Calibration and Standardization Section 10.6, respectively.
NOTE: Maintain a laboratory log of all cali-
brations.
11.1 Reference Method. Measure the vol-
10.1 Reference Method. Calibrate the me-

tering system, temperature sensors, and ba- ume of the moisture condensed in each of the
rometer according to Method 5, Sections 10.3, impingers to the nearest ml. Alternatively,
10.5, and 10.6, respectively. if the impingers were weighed prior to sam-
pling, weigh the impingers after sampling
162
and record the difference in weight to the Y=Dry gas meter calibration factor.
nearest 0.5 g. Determine the increase in DVm=Incremental dry gas volume measured
weight of the silica gel (or silica gel plus im- by dry gas meter at each traverse point,
pinger) to the nearest 0.5 g. Record this in- dcm (dcf).
formation (see example data sheet, Figure 4– rw=Density of water, 0.9982 g/ml (0.002201 lb/
5), and calculate the moisture content, as de- ml).
scribed in Section 12.0. 12.1.2 Volume of Water Vapor Condensed.
11.2 Approximation Method. Combine the
contents of the two impingers, and measure
the volume to the nearest 0.5 ml.
Vwc(std ) =
(Vf − Vi ) ρw R Tstd Eq. 4-1
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations Pstd M W
Carry out the following calculations, re-
taining at least one extra significant figure = K1 (Vf − Vi )
beyond that of the acquired data. Round off Where:
figures after final calculation.
K1=0.001333 m3/ml for metric units,
12.1 Reference Method.
12.1.1 Nomenclature. =0.04706 ft3/ml for English units.
Bws=Proportion of water vapor, by volume, in 12.1.3 Volume of Water Collected in Silica
the gas stream. Gel.
Mw=Molecular weight of water, 18.0 g/g-mole
(18.0 lb/lb-mole).
Pm=Absolute pressure (for this method, same Vwsg(std ) =
(Wf − Wi ) R Tstd Eq. 4-2
as barometric pressure) at the dry gas Pstd M W K 2
meter, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg = K 3 ( Wf − Wi )
(29.92 in. Hg).
Where:
R=Ideal gas constant, 0.06236 (mm Hg)(m3)/(g-
mole)(°K) for metric units and 21.85 (in. K2=1.0 g/g for metric units,
Hg)(ft3)/(lb-mole)(°R) for English units. =453.6 g/lb for English units.
Tm=Absolute temperature at meter, °K (°R). K3=0.001335 m3/g for metric units,
Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K =0.04715 ft3/g for English units.
(528 °R). 12.1.4 Sample Gas Volume.
Vf=Final volume of condenser water, ml.
Vi=Initial volume, if any, of condenser water, Vm Y Pm Tstd
ml. Vm (std ) = Eq. 4-3
Vm=Dry gas volume measured by dry gas Pstd Tm
meter, dcm (dcf).
Vm(std)=Dry gas volume measured by the dry Vm Pm
gas meter, corrected to standard condi- = K 4Y
tions, dscm (dscf). Tm
Vwc(std)=Volume of water vapor condensed, Where:
corrected to standard conditions, scm (scf). K4=0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units,
Vwsg(std)=Volume of water vapor collected in =17.64 °R/in. Hg for English units.
silica gel, corrected to standard conditions,
scm (scf). NOTE: If the post-test leak rate (Section
Wf=Final weight of silica gel or silica gel 8.1.4.2) exceeds the allowable rate, correct
plus impinger, g. the value of Vm in Equation 4–3, as described
Wi=Initial weight of silica gel or silica gel in Section 12.3 of Method 5.
plus impinger, g. 12.1.5 Moisture Content.
ER17OC00.101</MATH>
Vwc(std) + Vwsg(std )
Bws = Eq. 4-4
Vwc(std) + Vwsg(std ) + Vm (std )
ER17OC00.100</MATH>
12.1.6 Verification of Constant Sampling moisture content of the stack gas shall be
Rate. For each time increment, determine made, one using a value based upon the satu-
the DVm. Calculate the average. If the value rated conditions (see Section 4.1), and an-
for any time increment differs from the aver- other based upon the results of the impinger
age by more than 10 percent, reject the reanalysis. The lower of these two values of Bws
ER17OC00.099</MATH>
sults, and repeat the run. shall be considered correct.

12.1.7 In saturated or moisture droplet-
laden gas streams, two calculations of the
163
ER17OC00.098</MATH>
12.2 Approximation Method. The approxi-
mation method presented is designed to esti- Vm Y Pm Tstd
mate the moisture in the stack gas; there- Vm (std ) = Eq. 4-6
fore, other data, which are only necessary Pstd Tm
for accurate moisture determinations, are
not collected. The following equations ade-
Vm Pm
= K6Y
quately estimate the moisture content for Tm
the purpose of determining isokinetic sam-
pling rate settings. Where:
12.2.1 Nomenclature. K6=0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units,
Bwm=Approximate proportion by volume of =17.64 °R/in. Hg for English units.
water vapor in the gas stream leaving the 12.2.4 Approximate Moisture Content.
second impinger, 0.025.
Bws=Water vapor in the gas stream, propor-
Vwc(std)
tion by volume. Bws = + Bwm Eq. 4- 7
Mw=Molecular weight of water, 18.0 g/g-mole Vwc(std) + Vm (std )
(18.0 lb/lb-mole).
Pm=Absolute pressure (for this method, same Vwc(std)
as barometric pressure) at the dry gas = + (0.025)
meter, mm Hg (in. Hg). Vwc(std) + Vm (std )
Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg
(29.92 in. Hg).
R=Ideal gas constant, 0.06236 [(mm Hg)(m3)]/ 13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
[(g-mole)(K)] for metric units and 21.85 [(in.
Hg)(ft3)]/[(lb-mole)(°R)] for English units.
Tm=Absolute temperature at meter, °K (°R). 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K
(528 °R). 16.0 Alternative Procedures
Vf=Final volume of impinger contents, ml.
Vi=Initial volume of impinger contents, ml. The procedure described in Method 5 for
Vm=Dry gas volume measured by dry gas determining moisture content is acceptable
meter, dcm (dcf). as a reference method.
Vm(std)=Dry gas volume measured by dry gas
meter, corrected to standard conditions, 17.0 References
dscm (dscf). 1. Air Pollution Engineering Manual (Sec-
Vwc(std)=Volume of water vapor condensed, ond Edition). Danielson, J.A. (ed.). U.S. En-
corrected to standard conditions, scm (scf). vironmental Protection Agency, Office of Air
Y=Dry gas meter calibration factor. Quality Planning and Standards. Research
rw=Density of water, 0.09982 g/ml (0.002201 lb/ Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. AP–40.
ml). 1973.
12.2.2 Volume of Water Vapor Collected. 2. Devorkin, Howard, et al. Air Pollution
Source Testing Manual. Air Pollution Con-
Vwc(std ) =
(Vf − Vi ) ρw R Tstd Eq. 4-5
trol District, Los Angeles, CA. November
1963.
Pstd M W 3. Methods for Determination of Velocity,
= K 5 (Vf − Vi )
Volume, Dust and Mist Content of Gases.
Western Precipitation Division of Joy Manu-
Where: facturing Co. Los Angeles, CA. Bulletin WP–
50. 1968.
K5=0.001333 m3/ml for metric units,
=0.04706 ft3/ml for English units. 18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
12.2.3 Sample Gas Volume. Validation Data
ER17OC00.104</MATH>
ER17OC00.103</MATH>
164
ER17OC00.102</MATH>
165
ER17OC00.105</GPH>
166
ER17OC00.106</GPH>
Plant llllllllllllllllllll Run No. lllllllllllllllllll
Location llllllllllllllllll Ambient temperature llllllllllll
Operator llllllllllllllllll Barometric pressure llllllllllll
Date lllllllllllllllllllll Probe Length llllllllllllllll
167
VerDate Nov<24>2008
Gas sample Tempera-
Pressure temperature at ture
differential Meter dry gas meter of gas
14:47 Aug 31, 2009

Sampling Stack across ori- reading gas leaving
Traverse Pt. No. time temperature fice sample DVm m3 (ft3) condenser
(D), min °C ( °F) meter DH volume Inlet Outlet
or last
mm (in.) m3 (ft3) Tmin Tmout
impinger
H2O °C ( °F) °C ( °F)
°C ( °F)
Jkt 217149
PO 00000
Pt. 60, App. A–3, Meth. 4
Frm 00178
Average
Fmt 8010
168
Sfmt 8002
Y:\SGML\217149.XXX
217149
40 CFR Ch. I (7–1–09 Edition)
Location llllllllllllllllll Comments: lllllllllllllllll
Test lllllllllllllllllllll llllllllllllllllllllllll
Date lllllllllllllllllllll
Operator llllllllllllllllll Figure 4–3. Moisture Determination—
Barometric pressure llllllllllll Reference Method
Gas Volume through meter, Rate meter setting m3/min (ft3/

Clock time Meter temperature °C ( °F)
(Vm), m3 (ft3) min)
Figure 4–4. Example Moisture Determination

Field Data Sheet—Approximation Method
Impinger volume, ml Silica gel weight, g
Final
Initial
Difference
Figure 4–5. Analytical Data—Reference perature of 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F) or such
Method other temperature as specified by an applica-
ble subpart of the standards or approved by
METHOD 5—DETERMINATION OF PARTICULATE the Administrator for a particular applica-
MATTER EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY tion. The PM mass, which includes any ma-
SOURCES terial that condenses at or above the filtra-
NOTE: This method does not include all of tion temperature, is determined gravimetri-
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- cally after the removal of uncombined water.
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana-
lytical) essential to its performance. Some 3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
material is incorporated by reference from
other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-
tain reliable results, persons using this 5.0 Safety
method should have a thorough knowledge of
at least the following additional test meth- 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
ods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3. hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
1.0 Scope and Application of the safety problems associated with its
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
CAS number assigned. test method to establish appropriate safety
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- and health practices and to determine the
ble for the determination of PM emissions applicability of regulatory limitations prior
from stationary sources. to performing this test method.
the requirements of this method will en- 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
hance the quality of the data obtained from 6.1 Sample Collection. The following
air pollutant sampling methods. items are required for sample collection:
6.1.1 Sampling Train. A schematic of the

sampling train used in this method is shown
Particulate matter is withdrawn in Figure 5–1 in Section 18.0. Complete con-
isokinetically from the source and collected struction details are given in APTD–0581
on a glass fiber filter maintained at a tem- (Reference 2 in Section 17.0); commercial
169
models of this train are also available. For shall be attached to the probe (as shown in
changes from APTD–0581 and for allowable Figure 5–1) to allow constant monitoring of
modifications of the train shown in Figure 5– the stack gas velocity. The impact (high
1, see the following subsections. pressure) opening plane of the pitot tube
NOTE: The operating and maintenance pro- shall be even with or above the nozzle entry
cedures for the sampling train are described plane (see Method 2, Figure 2–7) during sam-
in APTD–0576 (Reference 3 in Section 17.0). pling. The Type S pitot tube assembly shall
Since correct usage is important in obtain- have a known coefficient, determined as out-
ing valid results, all users should read lined in Section 10.0 of Method 2.
APTD–0576 and adopt the operating and 6.1.1.4 Differential Pressure Gauge. In-
maintenance procedures outlined in it, un- clined manometer or equivalent device (two),
less otherwise specified herein. as described in Section 6.2 of Method 2. One
manometer shall be used for velocity head
6.1.1.1 Probe Nozzle. Stainless steel (316) (Dp) readings, and the other, for orifice dif-
or glass with a sharp, tapered leading edge. ferential pressure readings.
The angle of taper shall be ≤30°, and the 6.1.1.5 Filter Holder. Borosilicate glass,
taper shall be on the outside to preserve a with a glass frit filter support and a silicone
constant internal diameter. The probe nozzle rubber gasket. Other materials of construc-
shall be of the button-hook or elbow design, tion (e.g., stainless steel, Teflon, or Viton)
unless otherwise specified by the Adminis- may be used, subject to the approval of the
trator. If made of stainless steel, the nozzle Administrator. The holder design shall pro-
shall be constructed from seamless tubing. vide a positive seal against leakage from the
Other materials of construction may be used, outside or around the filter. The holder shall
subject to the approval of the Administrator. be attached immediately at the outlet of the
A range of nozzle sizes suitable for isokinetic probe (or cyclone, if used).
sampling should be available. Typical nozzle 6.1.1.6 Filter Heating System. Any heat-
sizes range from 0.32 to 1.27 cm (1⁄8 to 1⁄2 in) ing system capable of maintaining a tem-
inside diameter (ID) in increments of 0.16 cm perature around the filter holder of 120 ±14 °C
(1⁄16 in). Larger nozzles sizes are also avail- (248 ±25 °F) during sampling, or such other
able if higher volume sampling trains are temperature as specified by an applicable
used. Each nozzle shall be calibrated, accord- subpart of the standards or approved by the
ing to the procedures outlined in Section Administrator for a particular application.
10.1. 6.1.1.7 Temperature Sensor. A tempera-
6.1.1.2 Probe Liner. Borosilicate or quartz ture sensor capable of measuring tempera-
glass tubing with a heating system capable ture to within ±3 °C (5.4 °F) shall be installed
of maintaining a probe gas temperature dur- so that the sensing tip of the temperature
ing sampling of 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F), or such sensor is in direct contact with the sample
other temperature as specified by an applica- gas, and the temperature around the filter
ble subpart of the standards or as approved holder can be regulated and monitored dur-
by the Administrator for a particular appli- ing sampling.
cation. Since the actual temperature at the 6.1.1.8 Condenser. The following system
outlet of the probe is not usually monitored shall be used to determine the stack gas
during sampling, probes constructed accord- moisture content: Four impingers connected
ing to APTD–0581 and utilizing the calibra- in series with leak-free ground glass fittings
tion curves of APTD–0576 (or calibrated ac- or any similar leak-free noncontaminating
cording to the procedure outlined in APTD– fittings. The first, third, and fourth
0576) will be considered acceptable. Either impingers shall be of the Greenburg-Smith
borosilicate or quartz glass probe liners may design, modified by replacing the tip with a
be used for stack temperatures up to about 1.3 cm (1⁄2 in.) ID glass tube extending to
480 °C (900 °F); quartz glass liners shall be about 1.3 cm (1⁄2 in.) from the bottom of the
used for temperatures between 480 and 900 °C flask. The second impinger shall be of the
(900 and 1,650 °F). Both types of liners may be Greenburg-Smith design with the standard
used at higher temperatures than specified tip. Modifications (e.g., using flexible con-
for short periods of time, subject to the ap- nections between the impingers, using mate-
proval of the Administrator. The softening rials other than glass, or using flexible vacu-
temperature for borosilicate glass is 820 °C um lines to connect the filter holder to the
(1500 °F), and for quartz glass it is 1500 °C condenser) may be used, subject to the ap-
(2700 °F). Whenever practical, every effort proval of the Administrator. The first and
should be made to use borosilicate or quartz second impingers shall contain known quan-
glass probe liners. Alternatively, metal lin- tities of water (Section 8.3.1), the third shall
ers (e.g., 316 stainless steel, Incoloy 825 or be empty, and the fourth shall contain a
other corrosion resistant metals) made of known weight of silica gel, or equivalent des-
seamless tubing may be used, subject to the iccant. A temperature sensor, capable of
approval of the Administrator. measuring temperature to within 1 °C (2 °F)
6.1.1.3 Pitot Tube. Type S, as described in shall be placed at the outlet of the fourth
Section 6.1 of Method 2, or other device ap- impinger for monitoring purposes. Alter-
proved by the Administrator. The pitot tube natively, any system that cools the sample
170
gas stream and allows measurement of the 6.1.3 Gas Density Determination Equip-
water condensed and moisture leaving the ment. Temperature sensor and pressure
condenser, each to within 1 ml or 1 g may be gauge, as described in Sections 6.3 and 6.4 of
used, subject to the approval of the Adminis- Method 2, and gas analyzer, if necessary, as
trator. An acceptable technique involves the described in Method 3. The temperature sen-
measurement of condensed water either sor shall, preferably, be permanently at-
gravimetrically or volumetrically and the tached to the pitot tube or sampling probe in
determination of the moisture leaving the a fixed configuration, such that the tip of
condenser by: (1) monitoring the tempera- the sensor extends beyond the leading edge
ture and pressure at the exit of the con- of the probe sheath and does not touch any
denser and using Dalton’s law of partial pres- metal. Alternatively, the sensor may be at-
sures; or (2) passing the sample gas stream tached just prior to use in the field. Note,
through a tared silica gel (or equivalent des- however, that if the temperature sensor is
iccant) trap with exit gases kept below 20 °C attached in the field, the sensor must be
(68 °F) and determining the weight gain. If placed in an interference-free arrangement
means other than silica gel are used to deter- with respect to the Type S pitot tube open-
mine the amount of moisture leaving the ings (see Method 2, Figure 2–4). As a second
condenser, it is recommended that silica gel alternative, if a difference of not more than
(or equivalent) still be used between the con- 1 percent in the average velocity measure-
denser system and pump to prevent moisture ment is to be introduced, the temperature
condensation in the pump and metering de- sensor need not be attached to the probe or
vices and to avoid the need to make correc- pitot tube. (This alternative is subject to the
tions for moisture in the metered volume. approval of the Administrator.)
NOTE: If a determination of the PM col- 6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items
lected in the impingers is desired in addition are required for sample recovery:
to moisture content, the impinger system 6.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brush-
described above shall be used, without modi- es. Nylon bristle brushes with stainless steel
fication. Individual States or control agen- wire handles. The probe brush shall have ex-
cies requiring this information shall be con- tensions (at least as long as the probe) con-
tacted as to the sample recovery and anal- structed of stainless steel, Nylon, Teflon, or
ysis of the impinger contents. similarly inert material. The brushes shall
be properly sized and shaped to brush out the
6.1.1.9 Metering System. Vacuum gauge, probe liner and nozzle.
leak-free pump, temperature sensors capable 6.2.2 Wash Bottles. Two Glass wash bot-
of measuring temperature to within 3 °C (5.4 tles are recommended. Alternatively, poly-
°F), dry gas meter (DGM) capable of meas- ethylene wash bottles may be used. It is rec-
uring volume to within 2 percent, and re- ommended that acetone not be stored in pol-
lated equipment, as shown in Figure 5–1. yethylene bottles for longer than a month.
Other metering systems capable of maintain- 6.2.3 Glass Sample Storage Containers.
ing sampling rates within 10 percent of Chemically resistant, borosilicate glass bot-
isokinetic and of determining sample vol- tles, for acetone washes, 500 ml or 1000 ml.
umes to within 2 percent may be used, sub- Screw cap liners shall either be rubber-
ject to the approval of the Administrator. backed Teflon or shall be constructed so as
When the metering system is used in con- to be leak-free and resistant to chemical at-
junction with a pitot tube, the system shall tack by acetone. (Narrow mouth glass bot-
allow periodic checks of isokinetic rates. tles have been found to be less prone to leak-
6.1.1.10 Sampling trains utilizing metering age.) Alternatively, polyethylene bottles
systems designed for higher flow rates than may be used.
that described in APTD–0581 or APTD–0576 6.2.4 Petri Dishes. For filter samples;
may be used provided that the specifications glass or polyethylene, unless otherwise spec-
of this method are met. ified by the Administrator.
6.1.2 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or 6.2.5 Graduated Cylinder and/or Balance.
other barometer capable of measuring at- To measure condensed water to within 1 ml
mospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 or 0.5 g. Graduated cylinders shall have sub-
in.). divisions no greater than 2 ml.
NOTE: The barometric pressure reading 6.2.6 Plastic Storage Containers. Air-tight
may be obtained from a nearby National containers to store silica gel.
Weather Service station. In this case, the 6.2.7 Funnel and Rubber Policeman. To
station value (which is the absolute baro- aid in transfer of silica gel to container; not
metric pressure) shall be requested and an necessary if silica gel is weighed in the field.
adjustment for elevation differences between 6.2.8 Funnel. Glass or polyethylene, to aid
the weather station and sampling point shall in sample recovery.

be made at a rate of minus 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 6.3 Sample Analysis. The following equip-
in.) per 30 m (100 ft) elevation increase or ment is required for sample analysis:
plus 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in) per 30 m (100 ft) ele- 6.3.1 Glass Weighing Dishes.
vation decrease. 6.3.2 Desiccator.
171
6.3.3 Analytical Balance. To measure to 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
within 0.1 mg. and Transport
6.3.4 Balance. To measure to within 0.5 g.
8.1 Pretest Preparation. It is suggested
6.3.5 Beakers. 250 ml.
that sampling equipment be maintained ac-
6.3.6 Hygrometer. To measure the relative
cording to the procedures described in
humidity of the laboratory environment.
APTD–0576.
6.3.7 Temperature Sensor. To measure the 8.1.1 Place 200 to 300 g of silica gel in each
temperature of the laboratory environment. of several air-tight containers. Weigh each
7.0 Reagents and Standards container, including silica gel, to the nearest
0.5 g, and record this weight. As an alter-
7.1 Sample Collection. The following re- native, the silica gel need not be preweighed,
agents are required for sample collection: but may be weighed directly in its impinger
7.1.1 Filters. Glass fiber filters, without or sampling holder just prior to train assem-
organic binder, exhibiting at least 99.95 per- bly.
cent efficiency (<0.05 percent penetration) on 8.1.2 Check filters visually against light
0.3 micron dioctyl phthalate smoke par- for irregularities, flaws, or pinhole leaks.
ticles. The filter efficiency test shall be con- Label filters of the proper diameter on the
ducted in accordance with ASTM Method D back side near the edge using numbering ma-
2986–71, 78, or 95a (incorporated by ref- chine ink. As an alternative, label the ship-
erence—see § 60.17). Test data from the sup- ping containers (glass or polyethylene petri
plier’s quality control program are sufficient dishes), and keep each filter in its identified
for this purpose. In sources containing SO2 container at all times except during sam-
or SO3, the filter material must be of a type pling.
that is unreactive to SO2 or SO3. Reference 8.1.3 Desiccate the filters at 20 ±5.6 °C (68
10 in Section 17.0 may be used to select the ±10 °F) and ambient pressure for at least 24
appropriate filter. hours. Weigh each filter (or filter and ship-
7.1.2 Silica Gel. Indicating type, 6 to 16 ping container) at intervals of at least 6
mesh. If previously used, dry at 175 °C (350 hours to a constant weight (i.e., ≤0.5 mg
°F) for 2 hours. New silica gel may be used as change from previous weighing). Record re-
received. Alternatively, other types of sults to the nearest 0.1 mg. During each
desiccants (equivalent or better) may be weighing, the period for which the filter is
used, subject to the approval of the Adminis- exposed to the laboratory atmosphere shall
trator. be less than 2 minutes. Alternatively (unless
7.1.3 Water. When analysis of the material otherwise specified by the Administrator),
caught in the impingers is required, deion- the filters may be oven dried at 105 °C (220
ized distilled water (to conform to ASTM D °F) for 2 to 3 hours, desiccated for 2 hours,
1193–77 or 91 Type 3 (incorporated by ref- and weighed. Procedures other than those
erence—see § 60.17)) shall be used. Run blanks described, which account for relative humid-
prior to field use to eliminate a high blank ity effects, may be used, subject to the ap-
on test samples. proval of the Administrator.
7.1.4 Crushed Ice. 8.2 Preliminary Determinations.
7.1.5 Stopcock Grease. Acetone-insoluble, 8.2.1 Select the sampling site and the
heat-stable silicone grease. This is not nec- minimum number of sampling points accord-
essary if screw-on connectors with Teflon ing to Method 1 or as specified by the Admin-
sleeves, or similar, are used. Alternatively, istrator. Determine the stack pressure, tem-
other types of stopcock grease may be used, perature, and the range of velocity heads
subject to the approval of the Administrator. using Method 2; it is recommended that a
7.2 Sample Recovery. Acetone, reagent leak check of the pitot lines (see Method 2,
grade, ≤0.001 percent residue, in glass bottles, Section 8.1) be performed. Determine the
is required. Acetone from metal containers moisture content using Approximation
generally has a high residue blank and Method 4 or its alternatives for the purpose
should not be used. Sometimes, suppliers of making isokinetic sampling rate settings.
transfer acetone to glass bottles from metal Determine the stack gas dry molecular
containers; thus, acetone blanks shall be run weight, as described in Method 2, Section 8.6;
prior to field use and only acetone with low if integrated Method 3 sampling is used for
blank values (≤0.001 percent) shall be used. In molecular weight determination, the inte-
no case shall a blank value of greater than grated bag sample shall be taken simulta-
0.001 percent of the weight of acetone used be neously with, and for the same total length
subtracted from the sample weight. of time as, the particulate sample run.
7.3 Sample Analysis. The following re- 8.2.2 Select a nozzle size based on the
agents are required for sample analysis: range of velocity heads, such that it is not
7.3.1 Acetone. Same as in Section 7.2. necessary to change the nozzle size in order
7.3.2 Desiccant. Anhydrous calcium sul- to maintain isokinetic sampling rates. Dur-
fate, indicating type. Alternatively, other ing the run, do not change the nozzle size.
types of desiccants may be used, subject to Ensure that the proper differential pressure
the approval of the Administrator. gauge is chosen for the range of velocity
172
heads encountered (see Section 8.3 of Method ant tape or by some other method to denote
2). the proper distance into the stack or duct for
8.2.3 Select a suitable probe liner and each sampling point.
probe length such that all traverse points 8.3.4 Set up the train as shown in Figure
can be sampled. For large stacks, consider 5–1, using (if necessary) a very light coat of
sampling from opposite sides of the stack to silicone grease on all ground glass joints,
reduce the required probe length. greasing only the outer portion (see APTD–
8.2.4 Select a total sampling time greater 0576) to avoid the possibility of contamina-
than or equal to the minimum total sam- tion by the silicone grease. Subject to the
pling time specified in the test procedures approval of the Administrator, a glass cy-
for the specific industry such that (l) the clone may be used between the probe and fil-
sampling time per point is not less than 2 ter holder when the total particulate catch
minutes (or some greater time interval as is expected to exceed 100 mg or when water
specified by the Administrator), and (2) the droplets are present in the stack gas.
sample volume taken (corrected to standard 8.3.5 Place crushed ice around the
conditions) will exceed the required min- impingers.
imum total gas sample volume. The latter is 8.4 Leak-Check Procedures.
based on an approximate average sampling 8.4.1 Leak Check of Metering System
rate. Shown in Figure 5–1. That portion of the
8.2.5 The sampling time at each point sampling train from the pump to the orifice
shall be the same. It is recommended that meter should be leak-checked prior to initial
the number of minutes sampled at each point use and after each shipment. Leakage after
be an integer or an integer plus one-half the pump will result in less volume being re-
minute, in order to avoid timekeeping er- corded than is actually sampled. The fol-
rors. lowing procedure is suggested (see Figure 5–
8.2.6 In some circumstances (e.g., batch 2): Close the main valve on the meter box.
cycles) it may be necessary to sample for Insert a one-hole rubber stopper with rubber
shorter times at the traverse points and to tubing attached into the orifice exhaust
obtain smaller gas sample volumes. In these pipe. Disconnect and vent the low side of the
cases, the Administrator’s approval must orifice manometer. Close off the low side ori-
first be obtained. fice tap. Pressurize the system to 13 to 18 cm
8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. (5 to 7 in.) water column by blowing into the
8.3.1 During preparation and assembly of rubber tubing. Pinch off the tubing, and ob-
the sampling train, keep all openings where serve the manometer for one minute. A loss
contamination can occur covered until just of pressure on the manometer indicates a
prior to assembly or until sampling is about
leak in the meter box; leaks, if present, must
to begin. Place 100 ml of water in each of the
be corrected.
first two impingers, leave the third impinger
8.4.2 Pretest Leak Check. A pretest leak
empty, and transfer approximately 200 to 300
check of the sampling train is recommended,
g of preweighed silica gel from its container
but not required. If the pretest leak check is
to the fourth impinger. More silica gel may
conducted, the following procedure should be
be used, but care should be taken to ensure
used.
that it is not entrained and carried out from
8.4.2.1 After the sampling train has been
the impinger during sampling. Place the con-
assembled, turn on and set the filter and
tainer in a clean place for later use in the
probe heating systems to the desired oper-
sample recovery. Alternatively, the weight
ating temperatures. Allow time for the tem-
of the silica gel plus impinger may be deter-
peratures to stabilize. If a Viton A O-ring or
mined to the nearest 0.5 g and recorded.
other leak-free connection is used in assem-
8.3.2 Using a tweezer or clean disposable
bling the probe nozzle to the probe liner,
surgical gloves, place a labeled (identified)
leak-check the train at the sampling site by
and weighed filter in the filter holder. Be
plugging the nozzle and pulling a 380 mm (15
sure that the filter is properly centered and
in.) Hg vacuum.
the gasket properly placed so as to prevent
the sample gas stream from circumventing NOTE: A lower vacuum may be used, pro-
the filter. Check the filter for tears after as- vided that it is not exceeded during the test.
sembly is completed. 8.4.2.2 If a heat-resistant string is used, do
8.3.3 When glass probe liners are used, in- not connect the probe to the train during the
stall the selected nozzle using a Viton A O- leak check. Instead, leak-check the train by
ring when stack temperatures are less than first plugging the inlet to the filter holder
260 °C (500 °F) or a heat-resistant string gas- (cyclone, if applicable) and pulling a 380 mm
ket when temperatures are higher. See (15 in.) Hg vacuum (see NOTE in Section
APTD–0576 for details. Other connecting sys- 8.4.2.1). Then connect the probe to the train,
tems using either 316 stainless steel or Tef- and leak-check at approximately 25 mm (1
lon ferrules may be used. When metal liners in.) Hg vacuum; alternatively, the probe may
are used, install the nozzle as discussed be leak-checked with the rest of the sam-
above or by a leak-free direct mechanical pling train, in one step, at 380 mm (15 in.) Hg
connection. Mark the probe with heat resist- vacuum. Leakage rates in excess of 4 percent
173
of the average sampling rate or 0.00057 m3/ 8.5 Sampling Train Operation. During the
min (0.020 cfm), whichever is less, are unac- sampling run, maintain an isokinetic sam-
ceptable. pling rate (within 10 percent of true
8.4.2.3 The following leak-check instruc- isokinetic unless otherwise specified by the
tions for the sampling train described in Administrator) and a temperature around
APTD–0576 and APTD–0581 may be helpful. the filter of 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F), or such
Start the pump with the bypass valve fully other temperature as specified by an applica-
open and the coarse adjust valve completely ble subpart of the standards or approved by
closed. Partially open the coarse adjust the Administrator.
valve, and slowly close the bypass valve 8.5.1 For each run, record the data re-
until the desired vacuum is reached. Do not quired on a data sheet such as the one shown
reverse the direction of the bypass valve, as in Figure 5–3. Be sure to record the initial
this will cause water to back up into the fil- DGM reading. Record the DGM readings at
ter holder. If the desired vacuum is exceeded, the beginning and end of each sampling time
either leak-check at this higher vacuum, or increment, when changes in flow rates are
end the leak check and start over. made, before and after each leak check, and
8.4.2.4 When the leak check is completed, when sampling is halted. Take other read-
first slowly remove the plug from the inlet ings indicated by Figure 5–3 at least once at
to the probe, filter holder, or cyclone (if ap- each sample point during each time incre-
plicable), and immediately turn off the vacu- ment and additional readings when signifi-
um pump. This prevents the water in the cant changes (20 percent variation in veloc-
impingers from being forced backward into ity head readings) necessitate additional ad-
the filter holder and the silica gel from being justments in flow rate. Level and zero the
entrained backward into the third impinger. manometer. Because the manometer level
8.4.3 Leak Checks During Sample Run. If, and zero may drift due to vibrations and
during the sampling run, a component (e.g., temperature changes, make periodic checks
filter assembly or impinger) change becomes during the traverse.
necessary, a leak check shall be conducted 8.5.2 Clean the portholes prior to the test
immediately before the change is made. The run to minimize the chance of collecting de-
leak check shall be done according to the posited material. To begin sampling, verify
procedure outlined in Section 8.4.2 above, ex- that the filter and probe heating systems are
cept that it shall be done at a vacuum equal up to temperature, remove the nozzle cap,
to or greater than the maximum value reverify that the pitot tube and probe are prop-
corded up to that point in the test. If the erly positioned. Position the nozzle at the
leakage rate is found to be no greater than first traverse point with the tip pointing di-
0.00057 m3/min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the rectly into the gas stream. Immediately
average sampling rate (whichever is less), start the pump, and adjust the flow to
the results are acceptable, and no correction isokinetic conditions. Nomographs are avail-
will need to be applied to the total volume of able which aid in the rapid adjustment of the
dry gas metered; if, however, a higher leak- isokinetic sampling rate without excessive
computations. These nomographs are de-
age rate is obtained, either record the leak-
signed for use when the Type S pitot tube co-
age rate and plan to correct the sample vol-
efficient (Cp) is 0.85 ±0.02, and the stack gas
ume as shown in Section 12.3 of this method,
equivalent density [dry molecular weight
or void the sample run.
(Md)] is equal to 29 ±4. APTD–0576 details the
NOTE: Immediately after component procedure for using the nomographs. If Cp
changes, leak checks are optional. If such and Md are outside the above stated ranges,
leak checks are done, the procedure outlined do not use the nomographs unless appro-
in Section 8.4.2 above should be used. priate steps (see Reference 7 in Section 17.0)
8.4.4 Post-Test Leak Check. A leak check are taken to compensate for the deviations.
of the sampling train is mandatory at the 8.5.3 When the stack is under significant
conclusion of each sampling run. The leak negative pressure (i.e., height of impinger
check shall be performed in accordance with stem), take care to close the coarse adjust
the procedures outlined in Section 8.4.2, ex- valve before inserting the probe into the
cept that it shall be conducted at a vacuum stack to prevent water from backing into the
equal to or greater than the maximum value filter holder. If necessary, the pump may be
reached during the sampling run. If the leak- turned on with the coarse adjust valve
age rate is found to be no greater than 0.00057 closed.
m3 min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the average 8.5.4 When the probe is in position, block
sampling rate (whichever is less), the results off the openings around the probe and port-
are acceptable, and no correction need be ap- hole to prevent unrepresentative dilution of
plied to the total volume of dry gas metered. the gas stream.
If, however, a higher leakage rate is ob- 8.5.5 Traverse the stack cross-section, as
tained, either record the leakage rate and required by Method 1 or as specified by the
correct the sample volume as shown in Sec- Administrator, being careful not to bump
tion 12.3 of this method, or void the sampling the probe nozzle into the stack walls when
run. sampling near the walls or when removing or
174
inserting the probe through the portholes; 8.7.2 When the probe can be safely han-
this minimizes the chance of extracting de- dled, wipe off all external PM near the tip of
posited material. the probe nozzle, and place a cap over it to
8.5.6 During the test run, make periodic prevent losing or gaining PM. Do not cap off
adjustments to keep the temperature around the probe tip tightly while the sampling
the filter holder at the proper level; add train is cooling down. This would create a
more ice and, if necessary, salt to maintain vacuum in the filter holder, thereby drawing
a temperature of less than 20 °C (68 °F) at the water from the impingers into the filter
condenser/silica gel outlet. Also, periodically holder.
check the level and zero of the manometer. 8.7.3 Before moving the sample train to
8.5.7 If the pressure drop across the filter the cleanup site, remove the probe from the
becomes too high, making isokinetic sam- sample train, wipe off the silicone grease,
pling difficult to maintain, the filter may be and cap the open outlet of the probe. Be
replaced in the midst of the sample run. It is careful not to lose any condensate that
recommended that another complete filter might be present. Wipe off the silicone
assembly be used rather than attempting to grease from the filter inlet where the probe
change the filter itself. Before a new filter was fastened, and cap it. Remove the umbil-
assembly is installed, conduct a leak check ical cord from the last impinger, and cap the
(see Section 8.4.3). The total PM weight shall impinger. If a flexible line is used between
include the summation of the filter assembly the first impinger or condenser and the filter
catches. holder, disconnect the line at the filter hold-
8.5.8 A single train shall be used for the er, and let any condensed water or liquid
entire sample run, except in cases where si- drain into the impingers or condenser. After
multaneous sampling is required in two or wiping off the silicone grease, cap off the fil-
more separate ducts or at two or more dif- ter holder outlet and impinger inlet. Either
ferent locations within the same duct, or in ground-glass stoppers, plastic caps, or serum
cases where equipment failure necessitates a caps may be used to close these openings.
change of trains. In all other situations, the 8.7.4 Transfer the probe and filter-im-
use of two or more trains will be subject to pinger assembly to the cleanup area. This
the approval of the Administrator. area should be clean and protected from the
wind so that the chances of contaminating
NOTE: When two or more trains are used, or losing the sample will be minimized.
separate analyses of the front-half and (if ap-
8.7.5 Save a portion of the acetone used
plicable) impinger catches from each train
for cleanup as a blank. Take 200 ml of this
shall be performed, unless identical nozzle
acetone directly from the wash bottle being
sizes were used on all trains, in which case,
used, and place it in a glass sample container
the front-half catches from the individual
labeled ‘‘acetone blank.’’
trains may be combined (as may the im-
8.7.6 Inspect the train prior to and during
pinger catches) and one analysis of front-half
disassembly, and note any abnormal condi-
catch and one analysis of impinger catch
tions. Treat the samples as follows:
may be performed. Consult with the Admin-
istrator for details concerning the calcula- 8.7.6.1 Container No. 1. Carefully remove
tion of results when two or more trains are the filter from the filter holder, and place it
used. in its identified petri dish container. Use a
pair of tweezers and/or clean disposable sur-
8.5.9 At the end of the sample run, close gical gloves to handle the filter. If it is nec-
the coarse adjust valve, remove the probe essary to fold the filter, do so such that the
and nozzle from the stack, turn off the pump, PM cake is inside the fold. Using a dry Nylon
record the final DGM meter reading, and bristle brush and/or a sharp-edged blade,
conduct a post-test leak check, as outlined carefully transfer to the petri dish any PM
in Section 8.4.4. Also, leak-check the pitot and/or filter fibers that adhere to the filter
lines as described in Method 2, Section 8.1. holder gasket. Seal the container.
The lines must pass this leak check, in order 8.7.6.2 Container No. 2. Taking care to see
to validate the velocity head data. that dust on the outside of the probe or other
8.6 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. Cal- exterior surfaces does not get into the sam-
culate percent isokinetic (see Calculations, ple, quantitatively recover PM or any con-
Section 12.11) to determine whether the run densate from the probe nozzle, probe fitting,
was valid or another test run should be probe liner, and front half of the filter holder
made. If there was difficulty in maintaining by washing these components with acetone
isokinetic rates because of source condi- and placing the wash in a glass container.
tions, consult with the Administrator for Deionized distilled water may be used in-
possible variance on the isokinetic rates. stead of acetone when approved by the Ad-
8.7 Sample Recovery. ministrator and shall be used when specified

8.7.1 Proper cleanup procedure begins as by the Administrator. In these cases, save a
soon as the probe is removed from the stack water blank, and follow the Administrator’s
at the end of the sampling period. Allow the directions on analysis. Perform the acetone
probe to cool. rinse as follows:
175
8.7.6.2.1 Carefully remove the probe noz- ble). After all acetone washings and particu-
zle. Clean the inside surface by rinsing with late matter have been collected in the sam-
acetone from a wash bottle and brushing ple container, tighten the lid on the sample
with a Nylon bristle brush. Brush until the container so that acetone will not leak out
acetone rinse shows no visible particles, when it is shipped to the laboratory. Mark
after which make a final rinse of the inside the height of the fluid level to allow deter-
surface with acetone. mination of whether leakage occurred during
8.7.6.2.2 Brush and rinse the inside parts transport. Label the container to identify
of the fitting with acetone in a similar way clearly its contents.
until no visible particles remain. 8.7.6.3 Container No. 3. Note the color of
8.7.6.2.3 Rinse the probe liner with ace- the indicating silica gel to determine wheth-
tone by tilting and rotating the probe while er it has been completely spent, and make a
squirting acetone into its upper end so that notation of its condition. Transfer the silica
all inside surfaces will be wetted with ace- gel from the fourth impinger to its original
tone. Let the acetone drain from the lower container, and seal. A funnel may make it
end into the sample container. A funnel easier to pour the silica gel without spilling.
(glass or polyethylene) may be used to aid in A rubber policeman may be used as an aid in
transferring liquid washes to the container. removing the silica gel from the impinger. It
Follow the acetone rinse with a probe brush. is not necessary to remove the small amount
Hold the probe in an inclined position, squirt of dust particles that may adhere to the im-
acetone into the upper end as the probe pinger wall and are difficult to remove.
brush is being pushed with a twisting action Since the gain in weight is to be used for
through the probe; hold a sample container moisture calculations, do not use any water
underneath the lower end of the probe, and or other liquids to transfer the silica gel. If
catch any acetone and particulate matter a balance is available in the field, follow the
that is brushed from the probe. Run the procedure for Container No. 3 in Section
brush through the probe three times or more 11.2.3.
until no visible PM is carried out with the
8.7.6.4 Impinger Water. Treat the
acetone or until none remains in the probe
impingers as follows: Make a notation of any
liner on visual inspection. With stainless
color or film in the liquid catch. Measure the
steel or other metal probes, run the brush
liquid that is in the first three impingers to
through in the above prescribed manner at
within 1 ml by using a graduated cylinder or
least six times since metal probes have small
by weighing it to within 0.5 g by using a bal-
crevices in which particulate matter can be
ance. Record the volume or weight of liquid
entrapped. Rinse the brush with acetone, and
present. This information is required to cal-
quantitatively collect these washings in the
culate the moisture content of the effluent
sample container. After the brushing, make
gas. Discard the liquid after measuring and
a final acetone rinse of the probe.
recording the volume or weight, unless anal-
8.7.6.2.4 It is recommended that two peo-
ysis of the impinger catch is required (see
ple clean the probe to minimize sample
NOTE, Section 6.1.1.8). If a different type of
losses. Between sampling runs, keep brushes
condenser is used, measure the amount of
clean and protected from contamination.
moisture condensed either volumetrically or
8.7.6.2.5 After ensuring that all joints
gravimetrically.
have been wiped clean of silicone grease,
clean the inside of the front half of the filter 8.8 Sample Transport. Whenever possible,
holder by rubbing the surfaces with a Nylon containers should be shipped in such a way
bristle brush and rinsing with acetone. Rinse that they remain upright at all times.
each surface three times or more if needed to 9.0 Quality Control
remove visible particulate. Make a final
rinse of the brush and filter holder. Carefully 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
rinse out the glass cyclone, also (if applica- ures.
8.4, 10.1–10.6 .................... Sampling equipment leak check and cali- Ensures accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate,
bration. sample volume.
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. The mine the DH@ for the metering system ori-
following procedures are suggested to check fice. The DH@ is the orifice pressure differen-
the volume metering system calibration val- tial in units of in. H2O that correlates to 0.75
ues at the field test site prior to sample col- cfm of air at 528 °R and 29.92 in. Hg. The DH@
lection. These procedures are optional. is calculated as follows:

9.2.1 Meter Orifice Check. Using the cali-
bration data obtained during the calibration
procedure described in Section 10.3, deter-
176
10.3 Metering System.
TM θ 2 10.3.1 Calibration Prior to Use. Before its
ΔH @ = 0.0319 ΔH initial use in the field, the metering system
Pbar Y 2 Vm2 shall be calibrated as follows: Connect the
metering system inlet to the outlet of a wet
Where:
test meter that is accurate to within 1 per-
DH=Average pressure differential across the cent. Refer to Figure 5–4. The wet test meter
orifice meter, in. H2O. should have a capacity of 30 liters/rev (1 ft3/
Tm=Absolute average DGM temperature, °R. rev). A spirometer of 400 liters (14 ft3) or
Pbar=Barometric pressure, in. Hg. more capacity, or equivalent, may be used
q=Total sampling time, min. for this calibration, although a wet test
Y=DGM calibration factor, dimensionless. meter is usually more practical. The wet test
Vm=Volume of gas sample as measured by meter should be periodically calibrated with
DGM, dcf. a spirometer or a liquid displacement meter
0.0319=(0.0567 in. Hg/°R) (0.75 cfm)2 to ensure the accuracy of the wet test meter.
9.2.1.1 Before beginning the field test (a Spirometers or wet test meters of other sizes
set of three runs usually constitutes a field may be used, provided that the specified ac-
test), operate the metering system (i.e., curacies of the procedure are maintained.
pump, volume meter, and orifice) at the DH@ Run the metering system pump for about 15
pressure differential for 10 minutes. Record minutes with the orifice manometer indi-
the volume collected, the DGM temperature, cating a median reading as expected in field
and the barometric pressure. Calculate a use to allow the pump to warm up and to
DGM calibration check value, Yc, as follows: permit the interior surface of the wet test
meter to be thoroughly wetted. Then, at
1 each of a minimum of three orifice manom-
10 ⎡ 0.0319 Tm ⎤ 2 eter settings, pass an exact quantity of gas
Yc = ⎢ ⎥ through the wet test meter and note the gas
Vm ⎣ Pbar ⎦ volume indicated by the DGM. Also note the
barometric pressure and the temperatures of
where: the wet test meter, the inlet of the DGM, and
Yc=DGM calibration check value, the outlet of the DGM. Select the highest
dimensionless. and lowest orifice settings to bracket the ex-
10=Run time, min. pected field operating range of the orifice.
9.2.1.2 Compare the Yc value with the dry Use a minimum volume of 0.14 m3 (5 ft3) at
gas meter calibration factor Y to determine all orifice settings. Record all the data on a
that: 0.97Y < Yc < 1.03Y. If the Yc value is not form similar to Figure 5–5 and calculate Y,
within this range, the volume metering sys- the DGM calibration factor, and DH@, the
tem should be investigated before beginning orifice calibration factor, at each orifice set-
the test. ting as shown on Figure 5–5. Allowable toler-
9.2.2 Calibrated Critical Orifice. A critical ances for individual Y and DH@ values are
given in Figure 5–5. Use the average of the Y
orifice, calibrated against a wet test meter
values in the calculations in Section 12.0.
or spirometer and designed to be inserted at
10.3.1.1 Before calibrating the metering
the inlet of the sampling meter box, may be
system, it is suggested that a leak check be
used as a check by following the procedure of
conducted. For metering systems having dia-
Section 16.2.
phragm pumps, the normal leak-check proce-
10.0 Calibration and Standardization dure will not detect leakages within the
pump. For these cases the following leak-
NOTE: Maintain a laboratory log of all cali- check procedure is suggested: make a 10-
brations. minute calibration run at 0.00057 m3/min
10.1 Probe Nozzle. Probe nozzles shall be (0.020 cfm). At the end of the run, take the
calibrated before their initial use in the difference of the measured wet test meter
field. Using a micrometer, measure the ID of and DGM volumes. Divide the difference by
the nozzle to the nearest 0.025 mm (0.001 in.). 10 to get the leak rate. The leak rate should
Make three separate measurements using not exceed 0.00057 m3/min (0.020 cfm).
different diameters each time, and obtain 10.3.2 Calibration After Use. After each
the average of the measurements. The dif- field use, the calibration of the metering sys-
ference between the high and low numbers tem shall be checked by performing three
shall not exceed 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). When noz- calibration runs at a single, intermediate
zles become nicked, dented, or corroded, orifice setting (based on the previous field
they shall be reshaped, sharpened, and retest), with the vacuum set at the maximum
calibrated before use. Each nozzle shall be value reached during the test series. To ad-
permanently and uniquely identified. just the vacuum, insert a valve between the
10.2 Pitot Tube Assembly. The Type S wet test meter and the inlet of the metering
ER17OC00.108</MATH>
pitot tube assembly shall be calibrated ac- system. Calculate the average value of the
cording to the procedure outlined in Section DGM calibration factor. If the value has
10.1 of Method 2. changed by more than 5 percent, recalibrate
177
ER17OC00.107</MATH>
the meter over the full range of orifice set- at 104 °C (220 °F) for 2 to 3 hours. Once the
tings, as detailed in Section 10.3.1. sample has cooled, weigh the sample, and use
NOTE: Alternative procedures (e.g., re- this weight as a final weight.
checking the orifice meter coefficient) may 11.2.2 Container No. 2. Note the level of
be used, subject to the approval of the Ad- liquid in the container, and confirm on the
ministrator. analysis sheet whether leakage occurred dur-
ing transport. If a noticeable amount of
10.3.3 Acceptable Variation in Calibra-
tion. If the DGM coefficient values obtained leakage has occurred, either void the sample
before and after a test series differ by more or use methods, subject to the approval of
than 5 percent, the test series shall either be the Administrator, to correct the final re-
voided, or calculations for the test series sults. Measure the liquid in this container ei-
shall be performed using whichever meter ther volumetrically to ±1 ml or gravimetri-
coefficient value (i.e., before or after) gives cally to ±0.5 g. Transfer the contents to a
the lower value of total sample volume. tared 250 ml beaker, and evaporate to dry-
10.4 Probe Heater Calibration. Use a heat ness at ambient temperature and pressure.
source to generate air heated to selected Desiccate for 24 hours, and weigh to a con-
temperatures that approximate those ex- stant weight. Report the results to the near-
pected to occur in the sources to be sampled. est 0.1 mg.
Pass this air through the probe at a typical 11.2.3 Container No. 3. Weigh the spent
sample flow rate while measuring the probe silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the
inlet and outlet temperatures at various nearest 0.5 g using a balance. This step may
probe heater settings. For each air tempera- be conducted in the field.
ture generated, construct a graph of probe 11.2.4 Acetone Blank Container. Measure
heating system setting versus probe outlet the acetone in this container either
temperature. The procedure outlined in volumetrically or gravimetrically. Transfer
APTD–0576 can also be used. Probes con- the acetone to a tared 250 ml beaker, and
structed according to APTD–0581 need not be evaporate to dryness at ambient tempera-
calibrated if the calibration curves in APTD– ture and pressure. Desiccate for 24 hours, and
0576 are used. Also, probes with outlet tem- weigh to a constant weight. Report the re-
perature monitoring capabilities do not results to the nearest 0.1 mg.
quire calibration. NOTE: The contents of Container No. 2 as
NOTE: The probe heating system shall be well as the acetone blank container may be
calibrated before its initial use in the field. evaporated at temperatures higher than am-
10.5 Temperature Sensors. Use the proce- bient. If evaporation is done at an elevated
dure in Section 10.3 of Method 2 to calibrate temperature, the temperature must be below
in-stack temperature sensors. Dial thermom- the boiling point of the solvent; also, to pre-
eters, such as are used for the DGM and con- vent ‘‘bumping,’’ the evaporation process
denser outlet, shall be calibrated against must be closely supervised, and the contents
mercury-in-glass thermometers. of the beaker must be swirled occasionally to
10.6 Barometer. Calibrate against a mer- maintain an even temperature. Use extreme
cury barometer. care, as acetone is highly flammable and has
a low flash point.
11.1 Record the data required on a sheet
such as the one shown in Figure 5–6. Carry out calculations, retaining at least
11.2 Handle each sample container as fol- one extra significant figure beyond that of
lows: the acquired data. Round off figures after the
11.2.1 Container No. 1. Leave the contents final calculation. Other forms of the equa-
in the shipping container or transfer the fil- tions may be used, provided that they give
ter and any loose PM from the sample con- equivalent results.
tainer to a tared glass weighing dish. Des- 12.1 Nomenclature.
iccate for 24 hours in a desiccator containing An=Cross-sectional area of nozzle, m2 (ft2).
anhydrous calcium sulfate. Weigh to a con- Bws=Water vapor in the gas stream, propor-
stant weight, and report the results to the tion by volume.
nearest 0.1 mg. For the purposes of this sec- Ca=Acetone blank residue concentration, mg/
tion, the term ‘‘constant weight’’ means a mg.
difference of no more than 0.5 mg or 1 per- cs=Concentration of particulate matter in
cent of total weight less tare weight, which- stack gas, dry basis, corrected to standard
ever is greater, between two consecutive conditions, g/dscm (gr/dscf).
weighings, with no less than 6 hours of des- I=Percent of isokinetic sampling.
iccation time between weighings. Alter- L1=Individual leakage rate observed during
natively, the sample may be oven dried at the leak-check conducted prior to the first
104 °C (220 °F) for 2 to 3 hours, cooled in the component change, m3/min (ft3/min)
desiccator, and weighed to a constant La=Maximum acceptable leakage rate for ei-
weight, unless otherwise specified by the Ad- ther a pretest leak-check or for a leak-
ministrator. The sample may be oven dried check following a component change; equal
178
to 0.00057 m3/min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of Vw(std)=Volume of water vapor in the gas sam-
the average sampling rate, whichever is ple, corrected to standard conditions, scm
less. (scf).
Li=Individual leakage rate observed during Vs=Stack gas velocity, calculated by Method
the leak-check conducted prior to the ‘‘ith’’ 2, Equation 2–7, using data obtained from
component change (i=1, 2, 3 . . . n), m3/min Method 5, m/sec (ft/sec).
(cfm).
Wa=Weight of residue in acetone wash, mg.
Lp=Leakage rate observed during the post-
test leak-check, m3/min (cfm). Y=Dry gas meter calibration factor.
ma=Mass of residue of acetone after evapo- DH=Average pressure differential across the
ration, mg. orifice meter (see Figure 5–4), mm H2O (in.
mn=Total amount of particulate matter col- H2O).
lected, mg. ra=Density of acetone, mg/ml (see label on
Mw=Molecular weight of water, 18.0 g/g-mole bottle).
(18.0 lb/lb-mole). rw=Density of water, 0.9982 g/ml. (0.002201 lb/
Pbar=Barometric pressure at the sampling ml).
site, mm Hg (in. Hg). q=Total sampling time, min.
Ps=Absolute stack gas pressure, mm Hg (in.
q1=Sampling time interval, from the begin-
Hg).
Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg ning of a run until the first component
(29.92 in. Hg). change, min.
R=Ideal gas constant, 0.06236 ((mm Hg)(m3))/ qi=Sampling time interval, between two suc-
((K)(g-mole)) {21.85 ((in. Hg) (ft 3))/((°R) (lb- cessive component changes, beginning with
mole))}. the interval between the first and second
Tm=Absolute average DGM temperature (see changes, min.
Figure 5–3), K (°R). qp=Sampling time interval, from the final
Ts=Absolute average stack gas temperature (n th) component change until the end of
(see Figure 5–3), K (°R). the sampling run, min.
Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293 K 13.6 =Specific gravity of mercury.
(528 °R).
60=Sec/min.
Va=Volume of acetone blank, ml.
Vaw=Volume of acetone used in wash, ml. 100=Conversion to percent.
V1c=Total volume of liquid collected in 12.2 Average Dry Gas Meter Temperature
impingers and silica gel (see Figure 5–6), and Average Orifice Pressure Drop. See data
ml. sheet (Figure 5–3).
Vm=Volume of gas sample as measured by 12.3 Dry Gas Volume. Correct the sample
dry gas meter, dcm (dcf). volume measured by the dry gas meter to
Vm(std)=Volume of gas sample measured by standard conditions (20 °C, 760 mm Hg or 68
the dry gas meter, corrected to standard °F, 29.92 in. Hg) by using Equation 5–1.
conditions, dscm (dscf).
ΔH ⎞
Tstd ⎛ Pbar +
⎝ 13.6 ⎠
Vm (std ) = Vm Y Eq. 5-1
Tm Pstd
ΔH ⎞
Pbar + ⎛
⎝ 13.6 ⎠
= K1Vm Y
Tm
Where: (a) Case I. No component changes made

K1=0.3858 °K/mm Hg for metric units,=17.64 during sampling run. In this case, replace Vm
°R/in. Hg for English units. in Equation 5–1 with the expression:
(V − ( L ))
NOTE: Equation 5–1 can be used as written
unless the leakage rate observed during any m p − La θ
of the mandatory leak checks (i.e., the post-
test leak check or leak checks conducted (b) Case II. One or more component
prior to component changes) exceeds La. If Lp changes made during the sampling run. In
ER17OC00.110</MATH>
or Li exceeds La, Equation 5–1 must be modi- this case, replace Vm in Equation 5–1 by the
fied as follows: expression:
179
ER17OC00.109</MATH>
⎢ n ⎥
(
⎢Vm − ( L1 − L a ) θ1 − ∑ ( L1 − L a ) θ i − L p − L a θ p ⎥ )
⎣ i=2 ⎦
and substitute only for those leakage rates 12.7 Acetone Wash Blank.
(Li or Lp) which exceed La.
12.4 Volume of Water Vapor Condensed. Wa = C a Vaw ρa Eq. 5-5
ρw R Tstd
Vw (std ) = V1c Eq. 5-2 12.8 Total Particulate Weight. Determine
M w Pstd
the total particulate matter catch from the
= K 2 V1c sum of the weights obtained from Containers
1 and 2 less the acetone blank (see Figure 5–
Where:
6).
K2=0.001333 m3/ml for metric units,=0.04706
ft 3/ml for English units. NOTE: In no case shall a blank value of
greater than 0.001 percent of the weight of
12.5 Moisture Content.
acetone used be subtracted from the sample
weight. Refer to Section 8.5.8 to assist in cal-
Vw (std ) culation of results involving two or more fil-
Bws = Eq. 5-3
Vm (std ) + Vw (std ) ter assemblies or two or more sampling
trains.
12.9 Particulate Concentration.
NOTE: In saturated or water droplet-laden K 3m n

gas streams, two calculations of the mois- Cs = Eq. 5-6
ture content of the stack gas shall be made, Vm (std )
one from the impinger analysis (Equation 5–
3), and a second from the assumption of satu-
ER17OC00.117</MATH>
rated conditions. The lower of the two values
of Bws shall be considered correct. The proce- Where:
dure for determining the moisture content K3=0.001 g/mg for metric units.
based upon the assumption of saturated con- =0.0154 gr/mg for English units.
ditions is given in Section 4.0 of Method 4. 12.10 Conversion Factors:
For the purposes of this method, the average
ER17oc00.116</MATH>
stack gas temperature from Figure 5–3 may From To Multiply by
be used to make this determination, pro-
vided that the accuracy of the in-stack tem- ft3 .......................... m3 0.02832
perature sensor is ±1 °C (2 °F). gr .......................... mg 64.80004
gr/ft3 ...................... mg/m3 2288.4
12.6 Acetone Blank Concentration.
mg ......................... g 0.001
1.429 × 10¥4
ER17OC00.115</MATH>
gr .......................... lb
ma
Ca = Eq. 5-4
Va ρa 12.11 Isokinetic Variation.
12.11.1 Calculation from Raw Data.
ER17OC00.114</MATH>
⎡ (V Y)
100 Ts ⎢K 4 V1c + m ⎛ Pbar +
ΔH ⎞ ⎤
⎥
⎣ Tm ⎝ 13.6 ⎠ ⎦
I= Eq. 5-7
60 θ vs Ps A n
ER17OC00.113</MATH>
Where: =0.002669 ((in. Hg)(ft3))/((ml)(°R)) for

ER17OC00.112</MATH>
K4=0.003454 ((mm Hg)(m3))/((ml)(°K)) for met- English units.

ric units,
180
ER17OC00.111</MATH>
12.11.2 Calculation from Intermediate be of high quality and have an appropriately
Values. sized capacity (e.g., 3 liters/rev (0.1 ft3/rev)).
A spirometer (400 liters (14 ft3) or more ca-
Ts Vm (std ) Pstd 100 pacity), or equivalent, may be used for this
I= Eq. 5-8
Tstd vs θ A n Ps 60 (1 − Bws )
calibration, although a wet test meter is
usually more practical. The wet test meter
should have a capacity of 30 liters/rev (1 ft3/
Ts Vm (std ) rev) and capable of measuring volume to
= K5
( )
within 1.0 percent. Wet test meters should be
Ps vs A n θ 1 − Bws checked against a spirometer or a liquid dis-
Where: placement meter to ensure the accuracy of
the wet test meter. Spirometers or wet test
K5=4.320 for metric units,
meters of other sizes may be used, provided
=0.09450 for English units.
that the specified accuracies of the proce-
12.11.3 Acceptable Results. If 90 percent ≤ dure are maintained.
I ≤ 110 percent, the results are acceptable. If
16.1.1.2 Set up the components as shown
the PM results are low in comparison to the
standard, and ‘‘I’’ is over 110 percent or less in Figure 5–7. A spirometer, or equivalent,
than 90 percent, the Administrator may opt may be used in place of the wet test meter in
to accept the results. Reference 4 in Section the system. Run the pump for at least 5 min-
17.0 may be used to make acceptability judg- utes at a flow rate of about 10 liters/min (0.35
ments. If ‘‘I’’ is judged to be unacceptable, cfm) to condition the interior surface of the
reject the results, and repeat the sampling wet test meter. The pressure drop indicated
run. by the manometer at the inlet side of the
12.12 Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric DGM should be minimized (no greater than
Flow Rate. Calculate the average stack gas 100 mm H2O (4 in. H2O) at a flow rate of 30 li-
velocity and volumetric flow rate, if needed, ters/min (1 cfm)). This can be accomplished
using data obtained in this method and the by using large diameter tubing connections
equations in Sections 12.3 and 12.4 of Method and straight pipe fittings.
2. 16.1.1.3 Collect the data as shown in the
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] example data sheet (see Figure 5–8). Make
triplicate runs at each of the flow rates and
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] at no less than five different flow rates. The
range of flow rates should be between 10 and
34 liters/min (0.35 and 1.2 cfm) or over the ex-
16.0 Alternative Procedures pected operating range.
16.1.1.4 Calculate flow rate, Q, for each
16.1 Dry Gas Meter as a Calibration
run using the wet test meter volume, VW,
Standard. A DGM may be used as a calibra-
and the run time, q. Calculate the DGM coef-
tion standard for volume measurements in
ficient, Yds, for each run. These calculations
place of the wet test meter specified in Sec-
tion 10.3, provided that it is calibrated ini- are as follows:
tially and recalibrated periodically as fol-
Pbar Vw
lows: Q = K1 Eq. 5-9
16.1.1 Standard Dry Gas Meter Calibra-
tion.
(Tw + Tstd ) θ
16.1.1.1. The DGM to be calibrated and
used as a secondary reference meter should
Vw (Tds + Tstd ) Pbar

Yds = Eq. 5-10
Δp ⎞
Vds (Tw + Tstd ) ⎛ Pbar +
⎝ 13.6 ⎠
ER17OC00.120</MATH>
Where: Tadj=273 °C for metric units=460 °F for English

K1=0.3858 °C/mm Hg for metric units=17.64 °F/ units.
TW=Average wet test meter temperature, °C
in. Hg for English units.

VW=Wet test meter volume, liter (ft3). ( °F)
ER17OC00.119</MATH>
Vds=Dry gas meter volume, liter (ft3). Pbar=Barometric pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Tds=Average dry gas meter temperature, °C ( Dp=Dry gas meter inlet differential pressure,
°F). mm H2O (in. H2O).
181
ER17OC00.118</MATH>
q=Run time, min. Two of the critical orifices should bracket
16.1.1.5 Compare the three Yds values at the expected operating range. A minimum of
each of the flow rates and determine the three critical orifices will be needed to cali-
maximum and minimum values. The dif- brate a Method 5 DGM; the other two critical
ference between the maximum and minimum orifices can serve as spares and provide bet-
values at each flow rate should be no greater ter selection for bracketing the range of op-
than 0.030. Extra sets of triplicate runs may erating flow rates. The needle sizes and tub-
be made in order to complete this require- ing lengths shown in Table 5–1 in Section 18.0
ment. In addition, the meter coefficients give the approximate flow rates.
should be between 0.95 and 1.05. If these spec- 16.2.1.2 These needles can be adapted to a
ifications cannot be met in three sets of suc- Method 5 type sampling train as follows: In-
cessive triplicate runs, the meter is not suit- sert a serum bottle stopper, 13 by 20 mm
able as a calibration standard and should not sleeve type, into a 1⁄2-inch Swagelok (or
be used as such. If these specifications are equivalent) quick connect. Insert the needle
met, average the three Yds values at each into the stopper as shown in Figure 5–9.
flow rate resulting in no less than five aver- 16.2.2 Critical Orifice Calibration. The
age meter coefficients, Yds. procedure described in this section uses the
16.1.1.6 Prepare a curve of meter coeffi- Method 5 meter box configuration with a
cient, Yds, versus flow rate, Q, for the DGM. DGM as described in Section 6.1.1.9 to cali-
This curve shall be used as a reference when brate the critical orifices. Other schemes
the meter is used to calibrate other DGMs may be used, subject to the approval of the
and to determine whether recalibration is re- Administrator.
quired. 16.2.2.1 Calibration of Meter Box. The
16.1.2 Standard Dry Gas Meter Recalibra- critical orifices must be calibrated in the
tion. same configuration as they will be used (i.e.,
16.1.2.1 Recalibrate the standard DGM there should be no connections to the inlet
against a wet test meter or spirometer annu- of the orifice).
ally or after every 200 hours of operation, 16.2.2.1.1 Before calibrating the meter box,
whichever comes first. This requirement is leak check the system as follows: Fully open
valid provided the standard DGM is kept in the coarse adjust valve, and completely close
a laboratory and, if transported, cared for as the by-pass valve. Plug the inlet. Then turn
any other laboratory instrument. Abuse to on the pump, and determine whether there is
the standard meter may cause a change in any leakage. The leakage rate shall be zero
the calibration and will require more fre- (i.e., no detectable movement of the DGM
quent recalibrations. dial shall be seen for 1 minute).
16.1.2.2 As an alternative to full recalibra- 16.2.2.1.2 Check also for leakages in that
tion, a two-point calibration check may be portion of the sampling train between the
made. Follow the same procedure and equip- pump and the orifice meter. See Section 8.4.1
ment arrangement as for a full recalibration, for the procedure; make any corrections, if
but run the meter at only two flow rates necessary. If leakage is detected, check for
[suggested rates are 14 and 30 liters/min (0.5 cracked gaskets, loose fittings, worn O-rings,
and 1.0 cfm)]. Calculate the meter coeffi- etc., and make the necessary repairs.
cients for these two points, and compare the 16.2.2.1.3 After determining that the
values with the meter calibration curve. If meter box is leakless, calibrate the meter
the two coefficients are within 1.5 percent of box according to the procedure given in Sec-
the calibration curve values at the same flow tion 10.3. Make sure that the wet test meter
rates, the meter need not be recalibrated meets the requirements stated in Section
until the next date for a recalibration check. 16.1.1.1. Check the water level in the wet test
16.2 Critical Orifices As Calibration meter. Record the DGM calibration factor,
Standards. Critical orifices may be used as Y.
calibration standards in place of the wet test 16.2.2.2 Calibration of Critical Orifices.
meter specified in Section 16.1, provided that Set up the apparatus as shown in Figure 5–10.
they are selected, calibrated, and used as fol- 16.2.2.2.1 Allow a warm-up time of 15 min-
lows: utes. This step is important to equilibrate
16.2.1 Selection of Critical Orifices. the temperature conditions through the
16.2.1.1 The procedure that follows de- DGM.
scribes the use of hypodermic needles or 16.2.2.2.2 Leak check the system as in Sec-
stainless steel needle tubings which have tion 16.2.2.1.1. The leakage rate shall be zero.
been found suitable for use as critical ori- 16.2.2.2.3 Before calibrating the critical
fices. Other materials and critical orifice de- orifice, determine its suitability and the ap-
signs may be used provided the orifices act propriate operating vacuum as follows: Turn
as true critical orifices (i.e., a critical vacu- on the pump, fully open the coarse adjust
um can be obtained, as described in Section valve, and adjust the by-pass valve to give a
16.2.2.2.3). Select five critical orifices that vacuum reading corresponding to about half
are appropriately sized to cover the range of of atmospheric pressure. Observe the meter
flow rates between 10 and 34 liters/min (0.35 box orifice manometer reading, DH. Slowly
and 1.2 cfm) or the expected operating range. increase the vacuum reading until a stable
182
reading is obtained on the meter box orifice the critical vacuum. The runs shall be at
manometer. Record the critical vacuum for least 5 minutes each. The DGM volume read-
each orifice. Orifices that do not reach a ings shall be in increments of complete revo-
critical value shall not be used. lutions of the DGM. As a guideline, the times
16.2.2.2.4 Obtain the barometric pressure should not differ by more than 3.0 seconds
using a barometer as described in Section (this includes allowance for changes in the
6.1.2. Record the barometric pressure, Pbar, in DGM temperatures) to achieve ±0.5 percent
mm Hg (in. Hg). in K′ (see Eq. 5–11). Record the information
16.2.2.2.5 Conduct duplicate runs at a vac- listed in Figure 5–11.
uum of 25 to 50 mm Hg (1 to 2 in. Hg) above 16.2.2.2.6 Calculate K′ using Equation 5–11.
ΔH ⎞
K1 Vm Y ⎛ Pbar + Tamb1 2
′ ⎝ 13.6 ⎠
K = Eq. 5-11
Pbar Tm θ
Where: 16.2.3 Using the Critical Orifices as Cali-

K′=Critical orifice coefficient, bration Standards.
16.2.3.1 Record the barometric pressure.
[m3)(°K)1⁄2]/
16.2.3.2 Calibrate the metering system ac-
[(mm Hg)(min)] {[(ft 3)(°R)1⁄2)] [(in. Hg)(min)].
cording to the procedure outlined in Section
Tamb=Absolute ambient temperature, °K (°R). 16.2.2. Record the information listed in Fig-
Calculate the arithmetic mean of the K′ ure 5–12.
values. The individual K’ values should not 16.2.3.3 Calculate the standard volumes of
differ by more than ±0.5 percent from the air passed through the DGM and the critical
mean value. orifices, and calculate the DGM calibration
factor, Y, using the equations below:
⎡ ΔH ⎞ ⎤
K1 Vm ⎢Pbar + ⎛
⎣ ⎝ 13.6 ⎠ ⎥⎦
Vm (std ) = Eq. 5-12
Tm
example, when checking orifice 13/2.5, use

P Θ orifices 12/10.2 and 13/5.1. If any critical ori-
Vcr (std ) = K1 bar Eq. 5-13 fice yields a DGM Y factor differing by more
Tamb than 2 percent from the others, recalibrate
the critical orifice according to Section
Vcr (std ) 16.2.2.
Y= Eq. 5-14
Vm (std ) 17.0 References.
1. Addendum to Specifications for Inciner-
ER17OC00.124</MATH>
Where:
ator Testing at Federal Facilities. PHS,
Vcr(std)=Volume of gas sample passed through NCAPC. December 6, 1967.
the critical orifice, corrected to standard 2. Martin, Robert M. Construction Details
of Isokinetic Source-Sampling Equipment.
K1=0.3858 K/mm Hg for metric units
Environmental Protection Agency. Research
=17.64 °R/in. Hg for English units.
ER17OC00.123</MATH>
Triangle Park, NC. APTD–0581. April 1971.

16.2.3.4 Average the DGM calibration val- 3. Rom, Jerome J. Maintenance, Calibra-
ues for each of the flow rates. The calibration, and Operation of Isokinetic Source
tion factor, Y, at each of the flow rates Sampling Equipment. Environmental Pro-
should not differ by more than ±2 percent
tection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC.
from the average.

APTD–0576. March 1972.
16.2.3.5 To determine the need for recali-
ER17OC00.122</MATH>
brating the critical orifices, compare the

DGM Y factors obtained from two adjacent
orifices each time a DGM is calibrated; for
183
ER17OC00.121</MATH>
4. Smith, W.S., R.T. Shigehara, and W.F. pheric Analysis. American Society for Test-
Todd. A Method of Interpreting Stack Sam- ing and Materials. Philadelphia, PA. 1974. pp.
pling Data. Paper Presented at the 63rd An- 617–622.
nual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control 10. Felix, L.G., G.I. Clinard, G.E. Lacy, and
Association, St. Louis, MO. June 14–19, 1970. J.D. McCain. Inertial Cascade Impactor Sub-
5. Smith, W.S., et al. Stack Gas Sampling strate Media for Flue Gas Sampling. U.S. En-
Improved and Simplified With New Equip- vironmental Protection Agency. Research
ment. APCA Paper No. 67–119. 1967. Triangle Park, NC 27711. Publication No.
6. Specifications for Incinerator Testing at
EPA–600/7–77–060. June 1977. 83 pp.
Federal Facilities. PHS, NCAPC. 1967.
7. Shigehara, R.T. Adjustment in the EPA 11. Westlin, P.R. and R.T. Shigehara. Pro-
Nomograph for Different Pitot Tube Coeffi- cedure for Calibrating and Using Dry Gas
cients and Dry Molecular Weights. Stack Volume Meters as Calibration Standards.
Sampling News 2:4–11. October 1974. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter.
8. Vollaro, R.F. A Survey of Commercially 3(1):17–30. February 1978.
Available Instrumentation for the Measure- 12. Lodge, J.P., Jr., J.B. Pate, B.E.
ment of Low-Range Gas Velocities. U.S. En- Ammons, and G.A. Swanson. The Use of
vironmental Protection Agency, Emission Hypodermic Needles as Critical Orifices in
Measurement Branch. Research Triangle Air Sampling. J. Air Pollution Control Asso-
Park, NC. November 1976 (unpublished ciation. 16:197–200. 1966.
paper).
9. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Part 18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
26. Gaseous Fuels; Coal and Coke; Atmos- Validation Data
TABLE 5–1 FLOR RATES FOR VARIOUS NEEDLE SIZES AND TUBE LENGTHS
Flow rate Flow rate
Gauge/cm Gauge/cm
liters/min. liters/min.
12/7.6 ................................................................................................................. 32.56 14/2.5 19.54

12/10.2 ............................................................................................................... 30.02 14/5.1 17.27
13/2.5 ................................................................................................................. 25.77 14/7.6 16.14
13/5.1 ................................................................................................................. 23.50 15/3.2 14.16
13/7.6 ................................................................................................................. 22.37 15/7.6 11.61
13/10.2 ............................................................................................................... 20.67 15/10.2 10.48
184
185
ER17OC00.125</GPH>
186
ER17OC00.126</GPH>
187
ER17OC00.127</GPH>
188
ER17OC00.128</GPH>
Plant llllllllllllllllllll Acetone blank volume, m1 lllllllll

Date lllllllllllllllllllll Acetone blank concentration, mg/mg (Equa-
Run No. lllllllllllllllllll tion 5–4) llllllllllllllllll
Filter No. llllllllllllllllll Acetone wash blank, mg (Equation 5–5) ll
Amount liquid lost during transport llll
189
ER17OC00.129</GPH>
Weight of particulate collected, mg

Container number
Final weight Tare weight Weight gain
1.
2.
Total:
Less acetone blank.
Weight of particulate
matter.
Volume of liquid water collected
Impinger volume, Silica gel weight,

ml g
Final
Initial
Liquid collected
Total volume collected ......................................... .................................................. g* ml
* Convert weight of water to volume by dividing total weight increase by density of water (1 g/ml).
Figure 5–6. Analytical Data Sheet
Increase, g
= Volume water, ml
(1g / ml)
190
ER17OC00.147</MATH>
191
ER17OC00.130</GPH>
192
ER17OC00.131</GPH>
193
ER17OC00.132</GPH>
Date lllllllllllllllllllll DGM cal. factor lllllllllllllll

Train ID lllllllllllllllllll Critical orifice ID llllllllllllll
Run No.
Dry gas meter
1 2
Final reading .................................................................................. m3 (ft3) ...................................... .................... ....................

Initial reading ................................................................................. m3 (ft3) ...................................... .................... ....................
Difference, Vm ................................................................................ m3 (ft3) ...................................... .................... ....................
Inlet/Outlet ...................................................................................... ................................................... .................... ....................
194
ER17OC00.133</GPH>
Run No.
Dry gas meter
1 2
Temperatures: ................................................................. °C ( °F) ...................................... / /

Initial ................................................................................ °C ( °F) ...................................... / /
Final ................................................................................. min/sec ...................................... / /
Av. Temeperature, t m ...................................................... min ............................................ .................... ....................
Time, q ........................................................................................... ................................................... .................... ....................
Orifice man. rdg., DH ..................................................................... mm (in.) H 2 ............................... .................... ....................
Bar. pressure, P bar ........................................................................ mm (in.) Hg ............................... .................... ....................
Ambient temperature, tamb ............................................................. mm (in.) Hg ............................... .................... ....................
Pump vacuum ................................................................................ ................................................... .................... ....................
K′ factor ......................................................................................... ................................................... .................... ....................
Average ........................................................................... ................................................... .................... ....................
Figure 5–11. Data sheet of determining K′ Train ID lllllllllllllllllll

factor. Critical orifice ID llllllllllllll
Date lllllllllllllllllllll Critical orifice K’ factor llllllllll
Run No.
Dry gas meter
1 2
Final reading .................................................................................. m3 (ft3)...................................... .................... ....................

Initial reading ................................................................................. m3 (ft3) ...................................... .................... ....................
Difference, Vm ................................................................................ m3 (ft3) ...................................... .................... ....................
Inlet/outlet temperatures ................................................................ °C ( °F) ...................................... / /
Initial ................................................................................ °C ( °F) ...................................... / /
Final ................................................................................. °C ( °F) ...................................... .................... ....................
Avg. Temperature, tm ...................................................... min/sec ...................................... / /
Time, q ........................................................................................... min ............................................ .................... ....................
Orifice man. rdg., DH ..................................................................... min ............................................ .................... ....................
Bar. pressure, Pbar ......................................................................... mm (in.) H2O ............................. .................... ....................
Ambient temperature, tamb ............................................................. mm (in.) Hg ............................... .................... ....................
Pump vacuum ................................................................................ °C ( °F) ...................................... .................... ....................
Vm(std) ............................................................................................. mm (in.) Hg ............................... .................... ....................
Vcr(std) ............................................................................................. m3 (ft3) ...................................... .................... ....................
DGM cal. factor, Y ......................................................................... m3 (ft3) ...................................... .................... ....................
Figure 5–12. Data Sheet for Determining 1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to
DGM Y Factor the requirements of this method will en-
METHOD 5A—DETERMINATION OF PARTICULATE air pollutant sampling methods.
MATTER EMISSIONS FROM THE ASPHALT
PROCESSING AND ASPHALT ROOFING INDUS- 2.0 Summary of Method
TRY
Particulate matter is withdrawn
NOTE: This method does not include all of isokinetically from the source and collected
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- on a glass fiber filter maintained at a tem-
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana- perature of 42 ±10 °C (108 ±18 °F). The PM
lytical) essential to its performance. Some mass, which includes any material that con-
material is incorporated by reference from denses at or above the filtration tempera-
other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob- ture, is determined gravimetrically after the
tain reliable results, persons using this removal of uncombined water.
at least the following additional test meth- 3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
ods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, and
Method 5. 4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
1.0 Scope and Applications 5.0 Safety

1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
CAS number assigned. hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- ment. This test method may not address all
ble for the determination of PM emissions of the safety problems associated with its
from asphalt roofing industry process satu- use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
rators, blowing stills, and other sources as test method to establish appropriate safety
specified in the regulations. and health practices and to determine the
195
applicability of regulatory limitations prior percent). In no case shall a blank value of
to performing this test method. greater than 0.001 percent of the weight of
TCE used be subtracted from the sample
6.0 Equipment and Supplies weight.
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5, 7.3 Analysis. Two reagents are required
Section 6.1, with the following exceptions for the analysis:
and additions: 7.3.1 TCE. Same as in Section 7.2.
6.1.1 Probe Liner. Same as Method 5, Sec- 7.3.2 Desiccant. Same as in Method 5, Sec-
tion 6.1.1.2, with the note that at high stack tion 7.3.2.
gas temperatures greater than 250 °C (480 °F),
8.0. Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
water-cooled probes may be required to con-
and Transport
trol the probe exit temperature to 42 ±10 °C
(108 ±18 °F). 8.1. Pretest Preparation. Unless otherwise
6.1.2 Precollector Cyclone. Borosilicate specified, maintain and calibrate all compo-
glass following the construction details nents according to the procedure described
shown in Air Pollution Technical Document in APTD–0576, ‘‘Maintenance, Calibration,
(APTD)–0581, ‘‘Construction Details of and Operation of Isokinetic Source-Sampling
Isokinetic Source-Sampling Equipment’’ Equipment’’ (Reference 3 in Method 5, Sec-
(Reference 2 in Method 5, Section 17.0). tion 17.0).
NOTE: The cyclone shall be used when the 8.1.1 Prepare probe liners and sampling
stack gas moisture is greater than 10 per- nozzles as needed for use. Thoroughly clean
cent, and shall not be used otherwise. each component with soap and water fol-
lowed by a minimum of three TCE rinses.
6.1.3 Filter Heating System. Any heating Use the probe and nozzle brushes during at
(or cooling) system capable of maintaining a least one of the TCE rinses (refer to Section
sample gas temperature at the exit end of 8.7 for rinsing techniques). Cap or seal the
the filter holder during sampling at 42 ±10 °C open ends of the probe liners and nozzles to
(108 ±18 °F). prevent contamination during shipping.
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items 8.1.2 Prepare silica gel portions and glass
are required for sample recovery: filters as specified in Method 5, Section 8.1.
6.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brush- 8.2 Preliminary Determinations. Select
es, Graduated Cylinder and/or Balance, Plas- the sampling site, probe nozzle, and probe
tic Storage Containers, and Funnel and Rub- length as specified in Method 5, Section 8.2.
ber Policeman. Same as in Method 5, Sec- Select a total sampling time greater than or
tions 6.2.1, 6.2.5, 6.2.6, and 6.2.7, respectively. equal to the minimum total sampling time
6.2.2 Wash Bottles. Glass. specified in the ‘‘Test Methods and Proce-
6.2.3 Sample Storage Containers. Chemi- dures’’ section of the applicable subpart of
cally resistant 500-ml or 1,000-ml borosilicate the regulations. Follow the guidelines out-
glass bottles, with rubber-backed Teflon lined in Method 5, Section 8.2 for sampling
screw cap liners or caps that are constructed time per point and total sample volume col-
so as to be leak-free, and resistant to chem- lected.
ical attack by 1,1,1-trichloroethane (TCE). 8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. Pre-
(Narrow-mouth glass bottles have been found pare the sampling train as specified in Meth-
to be less prone to leakage.) od 5, Section 8.3, with the addition of the
6.2.4 Petri Dishes. Glass, unless otherwise precollector cyclone, if used, between the
specified by the Administrator. probe and filter holder. The temperature of
6.2.5 Funnel. Glass. the precollector cyclone, if used, should be
6.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 5, maintained in the same range as that of the
Section 6.3, with the following additions: filter, i.e., 42 ±10 °C (108 ±18 °F). Use no stop-
6.3.1 Beakers. Glass, 250-ml and 500-ml. cock grease on ground glass joints unless
6.3.2 Separatory Funnel. 100-ml or great- grease is insoluble in TCE.
er. 8.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Same as
Method 5, Section 8.4.
7.0. Reagents and Standards
8.5 Sampling Train Operation. Operate
7.1 Sample Collection. The following re- the sampling train as described in Method 5,
agents are required for sample collection: Section 8.5, except maintain the temperature
7.1.1 Filters, Silica Gel, Water, and of the gas exiting the filter holder at 42 ±10
Crushed Ice. Same as in Method 5, Sections °C (108 ±18 °F).
7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, and 7.1.4, respectively. 8.6 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic.
7.1.2 Stopcock Grease. TCE-insoluble, Same as Method 5, Section 8.6.
heat-stable grease (if needed). This is not 8.7 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5,
necessary if screw-on connectors with Teflon Section 8.7.1 through 8.7.6.1, with the addi-
sleeves, or similar, are used. tion of the following:

7.2 Sample Recovery. Reagent grade TCE, 8.7.1 Container No. 2 (Probe to Filter
≤0.001 percent residue and stored in glass bot- Holder).
tles. Run TCE blanks before field use, and 8.7.1.1 Taking care to see that material on
use only TCE with low blank values (≤0.001 the outside of the probe or other exterior
196
surfaces does not get into the sample, quan- rinse each surface three times or more, if
titatively recover PM or any condensate necessary, to remove visible PM.
from the probe nozzle, probe fitting, probe 8.7.2 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). Same as
liner, precollector cyclone and collector in Method 5, Section 8.7.6.3.
flask (if used), and front half of the filter 8.7.3 Impinger Water. Same as Method 5,
holder by washing these components with Section 8.7.6.4.
TCE and placing the wash in a glass con- 8.8 Blank. Save a portion of the TCE used
tainer. Carefully measure the total amount for cleanup as a blank. Take 200 ml of this
of TCE used in the rinses. Perform the TCE TCE directly from the wash bottle being
used, and place it in a glass sample container
rinses as described in Method 5, Section
labeled ‘‘TCE Blank.’’
8.7.6.2, using TCE instead of acetone.
8.7.1.2 Brush and rinse the inside of the 9.0 Quality Control
cyclone, cyclone collection flask, and the
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
front half of the filter holder. Brush and
ures.
8.4, 10.0 ............................. Sampling equipment leak check and cali- Ensures accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate,
9.2 A quality control (QC) check of the (look for a boundary layer or phase separa-
volume metering system at the field site is tion). If the volume of condensed water ap-
suggested before collecting the sample. Use pears larger than 5 ml, separate the oil-TCE
the procedure outlined in Method 5, Section fraction from the water fraction using a
9.2. separatory funnel. Measure the volume of
10.0 Calibration and Standardization the water phase to the nearest ml; adjust the
stack gas moisture content, if necessary (see
Same as Method 5, Section 10.0. Sections 12.3 and 12.4). Next, extract the
water phase with several 25-ml portions of
11.0 Analytical Procedures
TCE until, by visual observation, the TCE
11.1 Analysis. Record the data required on does not remove any additional organic ma-
a sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5A– terial. Transfer the remaining water fraction
1. Handle each sample container as follows: to a tared beaker and evaporate to dryness
11.1.1 Container No. 1 (Filter). Transfer at 93 °C (200 °F), desiccate for 24 hours, and
the filter from the sample container to a weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg.
tared glass weighing dish, and desiccate for
11.1.2.3 Treat the total TCE fraction (in-
24 hours in a desiccator containing anhy-
drous calcium sulfate. Rinse Container No. 1 cluding TCE from the filter container rinse
with a measured amount of TCE, and analyze and water phase extractions) as follows:
this rinse with the contents of Container No. Transfer the TCE and oil to a tared beaker,
2. Weigh the filter to a constant weight. For and evaporate at ambient temperature and
the purpose of this analysis, the term ‘‘con- pressure. The evaporation of TCE from the
stant weight’’ means a difference of no more solution may take several days. Do not des-
than 10 percent of the net filter weight or 2 iccate the sample until the solution reaches
mg (whichever is greater) between two con- an apparent constant volume or until the
secutive weighings made 24 hours apart. Re- odor of TCE is not detected. When it appears
port the ‘‘final weight’’ to the nearest 0.1 mg that the TCE has evaporated, desiccate the
as the average of these two values. sample, and weigh it at 24-hour intervals to
11.1.2 Container No. 2 (Probe to Filter obtain a ‘‘constant weight’’ (as defined for
Holder). Container No. 1 above). The ‘‘total weight’’
11.1.2.1 Before adding the rinse from Con- for Container No. 2 is the sum of the evapo-
tainer No. 1 to Container No. 2, note the rated PM weight of the TCE-oil and water
level of liquid in Container No. 2, and con-
phase fractions. Report the results to the
firm on the analysis sheet whether leakage
nearest 0.1 mg.
occurred during transport. If noticeable
leakage occurred, either void the sample or 11.1.3 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). This
take steps, subject to the approval of the Ad- step may be conducted in the field. Weigh
ministrator, to correct the final results. the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus im-
11.1.2.2 Add the rinse from Container No. 1 pinger) to the nearest 0.5 g using a balance.
to Container No. 2 and measure the liquid in 11.1.4 ‘‘TCE Blank’’ Container. Measure
this container either volumetrically to ±1 ml TCE in this container either volumetrically
or gravimetrically to ±0.5 g. Check to see or gravimetrically. Transfer the TCE to a
whether there is any appreciable quantity of tared 250-ml beaker, and evaporate to dry-
condensed water present in the TCE rinse ness at ambient temperature and pressure.
197
Desiccate for 24 hours, and weigh to a con- the purpose of this method, the average
stant weight. Report the results to the near- stack gas temperature from Figure 5–3 of
est 0.1 mg. Method 5 may be used to make this deter-
NOTE: In order to facilitate the evapo- mination, provided that the accuracy of the
ration of TCE liquid samples, these samples in-stack temperature sensor is within 1 °C (2
may be dried in a controlled temperature °F).
oven at temperatures up to 38 °C (100 °F) 12.5 TCE Blank Concentration.
until the liquid is evaporated.
mt
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations Ct = Eq. 5A-3
Carry out calculations, retaining at least Vt ρt
one extra significant figure beyond that of NOTE: In no case shall a blank value of
the acquired data. Round off figures after the greater than 0.001 percent of the weight of
final calculation. Other forms of the equa- TCE used be subtracted from the sample
tions may be used as long as they give equiv- weight.
alent results.
12.1 Nomenclature. Same as Method 5, 12.6 TCE Wash Blank.
Section 12.1, with the following additions:
Ct=TCE blank residue concentration, mg/g.
Wt = C t Vtw ρt Eq. 5A-4
mt=Mass of residue of TCE blank after evapo- 12.7 Total PM Weight. Determine the
ration, mg. total PM catch from the sum of the weights
Vpc=Volume of water collected in obtained from Containers 1 and 2, less the
precollector, ml. TCE blank.
Vt=Volume of TCE blank, ml. 12.8 PM Concentration.
Vtw=Volume of TCE used in wash, ml.
Wt=Weight of residue in TCE wash, mg. mn
rt=Density of TCE (see label on bottle), g/ml. cs = K 3 Eq. 5A-5
12.2 Dry Gas Meter Temperature, Orifice Vm (std )
Pressure Drop, and Dry Gas Volume. Same
as Method 5, Sections 12.2 and 12.3, except Where:
use data obtained in performing this test. K3=0.001 g/mg for metric units
12.3 Volume of Water Vapor. =0.0154 gr/mg for English units
( )
12.9 Isokinetic Variation. Same as in
Vw (std ) = K 2 V1c + Vpc Eq. 5A-1 Method 5, Section 12.11.
Where: 13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
K2=0.001333 m3/ml for metric units.
=0.04706 ft3/ml for English units. 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
12.4 Moisture Content. 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
Vw (std ) 16.0 References

Bws = Eq. 5A-2
Vm (std ) + Vw std Same as Method 5, Section 17.0.
( )
ER17OC00.138</MATH>
NOTE: In saturated or water droplet-laden Validation Data
gas streams, two calculations of the mois-
ture content of the stack gas shall be made, Plant llllllllllllllllllll
one from the impinger and precollector anal- Date lllllllllllllllllllll
ysis (Equations 5A–1 and 5A–2) and a second Run No. lllllllllllllllllll
from the assumption of saturated conditions. Filter No. llllllllllllllllll
ER17OC00.137</MATH>
The lower of the two values of moisture con- Amount liquid lost during transport llll
tent shall be considered correct. The proce- Acetone blank volume, m1 lllllllll
dure for determining the moisture content Acetone blank concentration, mg/mg (Equa-
based upon assumption of saturated condition 5–4) llllllllllllllllll
tions is given in Section 4.0 of Method 4. For Acetone wash blank, mg (Equation 5–5) ll
ER17OC00.136</MATH>

Container number
1.
2.
ER17OC00.135</MATH>
Total:
Less acetone blank.
198
ER17OC00.134</MATH>

Container number
Weight of particulate
matter.
Volume of liquid water collected
Impinger volume, Silica gel weight,

ml g
Final
Initial
Liquid collected
Total volume collected ......................................... .................................................. g* ml
* Convert weight of water to volume by dividing total weight increase by density of water (1 g/ml).

Increase, g
= Volume water, ml 4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
(1g / ml) 5.0 Safety
METHOD 5B—DETERMINATION OF NONSULFURIC 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
ACID PARTICULATE MATTER EMISSIONS hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
FROM STATIONARY SOURCES ment. This test method may not address all
NOTE: This method does not include all of use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- test method to establish appropriate safety
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana- and health practices and to determine the
lytical) essential to its performance. Some applicability of regulatory limitations prior
material is incorporated by reference from to performing this test method.
tain reliable results, persons using this 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
method should have a thorough knowledge of Same as Method 5, Section 6.0, with the
at least the following additional test meth- following addition and exceptions:
ods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, Method 5. 6.1 Sample Collection. The probe liner
heating system and filter heating system
1.0 Scope and Application must be capable of maintaining a sample gas
temperature of 160 ±14 °C (320 ±25 °F).
1.1 Analyte. Nonsulfuric acid particulate
6.2 Sample Preparation. An oven is re-
matter. No CAS number assigned. quired for drying the sample.
1.2 Applicability. This method is deter-
mining applicable for the determination of 7.0 Reagents and Standards
nonsulfuric acid particulate matter from Same as Method 5, Section 7.0.
stationary sources, only where specified by
an applicable subpart of the regulations or 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
where approved by the Administrator for a and Transport.
particular application. Same as Method 5, with the exception of
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the following:
the requirements of this method will en- 8.1 Initial Filter Tare. Oven dry the filter
hance the quality of the data obtained from at 160 ±5 °C (320 ±10 °F) for 2 to 3 hours, cool
air pollutant sampling methods. in a desiccator for 2 hours, and weigh. Des-
iccate to constant weight to obtain the ini-
2.0 Summary of Method tial tare weight. Use the applicable specifica-
Particulate matter is withdrawn tions and techniques of Section 8.1.3 of Meth-
isokinetically from the source and collected od 5 for this determination.
8.2 Probe and Filter Temperatures. Main-
on a glass fiber filter maintained at a tem-
tain the probe outlet and filter temperatures
perature of 160 ±14 °C (320 ±25 °F). The col-
at 160 ±14 °C (320 ±25 °F).
lected sample is then heated in an oven at
160 °C (320 °F) for 6 hours to volatilize any 9.0 Quality Control
condensed sulfuric acid that may have been

collected, and the nonsulfuric acid particu-
late mass is determined gravimetrically. 10.0 Calibration and Standardization
199
ER17OC00.139</MATH>
11.0 Analytical Procedure ance testing facilities include sampling
ports, safe sampling platforms, safe access to
Same as Method 5, Section 11.0, except re-
sampling sites, and utilities for testing. It is
place Section
11.2.2 With the following: intended that affected facilities also provide
11.1 Container No. 2. Note the level of liq- sampling locations that meet the specifica-
uid in the container, and confirm on the tion for adequate stack length and minimal
analysis sheet whether leakage occurred dur- flow disturbances as described in Method 1.
ing transport. If a noticeable amount of Provisions for testing are often overlooked
leakage has occurred, either void the sample factors in designing fabric filters or are ex-
or use methods, subject to the approval of tremely costly. The purpose of this proce-
the Administrator, to correct the final re- dure is to identify appropriate alternative
sults. Measure the liquid in this container ei- locations and procedures for sampling the
ther volumetrically to ±1 ml or gravimetri- emissions from positive pressure fabric fil-
cally to ±0.5 g. Transfer the contents to a ters. The requirements that the affected fa-
tared 250 ml beaker, and evaporate to dry- cility owner or operator provide adequate ac-
ness at ambient temperature and pressure. cess to performance testing facilities remain
Then oven dry the probe and filter samples in effect.
at a temperature of 160 ±5 °C (320 ±10 °F) for 1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to
6 hours. Cool in a desiccator for 2 hours, and the requirements of this method will en-
weigh to constant weight. Report the results hance the quality of the data obtained from
to the nearest 0.1 mg. air pollutant sampling methods.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations 2.0 Summary of Method

Same as in Method 5, Section 12.0. 2.1 Particulate matter is withdrawn
isokinetically from the source and collected
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] on a glass fiber filter maintained at a tem-
perature at or above the exhaust gas tem-
perature up to a nominal 120 °C (248 ±25 °F).
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] The particulate mass, which includes any
material that condenses at or above the fil-
16.0 References tration temperature, is determined gravi-
Same as Method 5, Section 17.0. metrically after the removal of uncombined
water.
Validation Data [Reserved] 3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
METHOD 5C [RESERVED] 4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
METHOD 5D—DETERMINATION OF PARTICULATE 5.0 Safety

MATTER EMISSIONS FROM POSITIVE PRES- 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
SURE FABRIC FILTERS
NOTE: This method does not include all of ment. This test method may not address all
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- of the safety problems associated with its
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana- use. It is the responsibility of the user to es-
lytical) essential to its performance. Some tablish appropriate safety and health prac-
material is incorporated by reference from tices and to determine the applicability of
other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob- regulatory limitations prior to performing
tain reliable results, persons using this this test method.
at least the following additional test meth- 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
ods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, Method 5, Same as Section 6.0 of either Method 5 or
Method 17. Method 17.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No
Same as Section 7.0 of either Method 5 or
CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. Method 17.
1.2.1 This method is applicable for the de- 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
termination of PM emissions from positive and Transport
pressure fabric filters. Emissions are deter-
mined in terms of concentration (mg/m3 or Same Section 8.0 of either Method 5 or
gr/ft3) and emission rate (kg/hr or lb/hr). Method 17, except replace Section 8.2.1 of
1.2.2 The General Provisions of 40 CFR Method 5 with the following:
part 60, § 60.8(e), require that the owner or 8.1 Determination of Measurement Site.
operator of an affected facility shall provide The configuration of positive pressure fabric
performance testing facilities. Such perform- filter structures frequently are not amenable
200
to emission testing according to the require- uted among the available sites; if not, all
ments of Method 1. Following are several al- sites are to be sampled.
ternatives for determining measurement 8.2.3.2 The same number of measurement
sites for positive pressure fabric filters. sites must be sampled for each test run.
8.1.1 Stacks Meeting Method 1 Criteria. 8.2.3.3 The minimum number of traverse
Use a measurement site as specified in Meth- points per test run is 24. An exception to the
od 1, Section 11.1. 24-point minimum would be a test combining
8.1.2 Short Stacks Not Meeting Method 1 the sampling from two stacks meeting Meth-
Criteria. Use stack extensions and the proce- od 1 criteria for acceptable stack length, and
dures in Method 1. Alternatively, use flow Method 1 specifies fewer than 12 points per
straightening vanes of the ‘‘egg-crate’’ type site.
(see Figure 5D–1). Locate the measurement 8.2.3.4 As long as the 24 traverse points
site downstream of the straightening vanes per test run criterion is met, the number of
at a distance equal to or greater than two traverse points per measurement site may be
times the average equivalent diameter of the reduced to eight.
vane openings and at least one-half of the 8.2.3.5 Alternatively, conduct a test run
overall stack diameter upstream of the stack for each measurement site individually using
outlet. the criteria in Section 8.2.1 or 8.2.2 to deter-
8.1.3 Roof Monitor or Monovent. (See Fig- mine the number of traverse points. Each
ure 5D–2). For a positive pressure fabric fil- test run shall count toward the total of three
ter equipped with a peaked roof monitor, required for a performance test. If more than
ridge vent, or other type of monovent, use a three measurement sites are sampled, the
measurement site at the base of the number of traverse points per measurement
monovent. Examples of such locations are site may be reduced to eight as long as at
shown in Figure 5D–2. The measurement site least 72 traverse points are sampled for all
must be upstream of any exhaust point (e.g., the tests.
louvered vent). 8.2.3.6 The following examples dem-
8.1.4 Compartment Housing. Sample im- onstrate the procedures for sampling mul-
mediately downstream of the filter bags di- tiple measurement sites.
rectly above the tops of the bags as shown in 8.2.3.6.1 Example 1: A source with nine
the examples in Figure 5D–2. Depending on circular measurement sites of equal areas
the housing design, use sampling ports in the may be tested as follows: For each test run,
housing walls or locate the sampling equip- traverse three measurement sites using four
ment within the compartment housing. points per diameter (eight points per meas-
8.2 Determination of Number and Loca- urement site). In this manner, test run num-
tion of Traverse Points. Locate the traverse ber 1 will include sampling from sites 1,2,
points according to Method 1, Section 11.3. and 3; run 2 will include samples from sites
Because a performance test consists of at 4, 5, and 6; and run 3 will include sites 7, 8,
least three test runs and because of the var- and 9. Each test area may consist of a sepa-
ied configurations of positive pressure fabric rate test of each measurement site using
filters, there are several schemes by which eight points. Use the results from all nine
the number of traverse points can be deter- tests in determining the emission average.
mined and the three test runs can be con- 8.2.3.6.2 Example 2: A source with 30 rec-
ducted. tangular measurement sites of equal areas
8.2.1 Single Stacks Meeting Method 1 Cri- may be tested as follows: For each of the
teria. Select the number of traverse points three test runs, traverse five measurement
according to Method 1. Sample all traverse sites using a 3×3 matrix of traverse points for
points for each test run. each site. In order to distribute the sampling
8.2.2 Other Single Measurement Sites. For evenly over all the available measurement
a roof monitor or monovent, single compart- sites while sampling only 50 percent of the
ment housing, or other stack not meeting sites, number the sites consecutively from 1
Method 1 criteria, use at least 24 traverse to 30 and sample all the even numbered (or
points. For example, for a rectangular meas- odd numbered) sites. Alternatively, conduct
urement site, such as a monovent, use a bal- a separate test of each of 15 measurement
anced 5×5 traverse point matrix. Sample all sites using Section 8.2.1 or 8.2.2 to determine
traverse points for each test run. the number and location of traverse points,
8.2.3 Multiple Measurement Sites. Sam- as appropriate.
pling from two or more stacks or measure- 8.2.3.6.3 Example 3: A source with two
ment sites may be combined for a test run, measurement sites of equal areas may be
provided the following guidelines are met: tested as follows: For each test of three test
8.2.3.1 All measurement sites up to 12 runs, traverse both measurement sites, using
must be sampled. For more than 12 measure- Section 8.2.3 in determining the number of
ment sites, conduct sampling on at least 12 traverse points. Alternatively, conduct two
sites or 50 percent of the sites, whichever is full emission test runs for each measurement
greater. The measurement sites sampled site using the criteria in Section 8.2.1 or 8.2.2
should be evenly, or nearly evenly, distrib- to determine the number of traverse points.
201
8.2.3.7 Other test schemes, such as random 8.3.2 Velocity determinations to deter-
determination of traverse points for a large mine and maintain isokinetic rates at meas-
number of measurement sites, may be used urement sites with gas velocities within the
with prior approval from the Administrator. range measurable with the type S pitot tube
8.3 Velocity Determination. (i.e., velocity head greater than 1.3 mm H2O
8.3.1 The velocities of exhaust gases from (0.05 in. H2O)) shall be conducted according
positive pressure baghouses are often too low to the procedures outlined in Method 2.
8.4 Sampling. Follow the procedures spec-
to measure accurately with the type S pitot
ified in Sections 8.1 through 8.6 of Method 5
tube specified in Method 2 (i.e., velocity head
or Sections 8.1 through 8.25 in Method 17
<1.3 mm H2O (0.05 in. H2O)). For these condi-
with the exceptions as noted above.
tions, measure the gas flow rate at the fabric 8.5 Sample Recovery. Follow the proce-
filter inlet following the procedures outlined dures specified in Section 8.7 of Method 5 or
in Method 2. Calculate the average gas veloc- Section 8.2 of Method 17.
ity at the measurement site as shown in Sec-
tion 12.2 and use this average velocity in de- 9.0 Quality Control
termining and maintaining isokinetic sam- 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
pling rates. ures.
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks.

Same as Method 5, Section 9.2. Qo
v= Eq. 5D-1
10.0 Calibration and Standardization Ao
Same as Section 10.0 of either Method 5 or 12.3 Volumetric Flow Rate. Total volu-
Method 17. metric flow rate may be determined as fol-
lows:
Same as Section 11.0 of either Method 5 or Qo = Qi + Qd Eq. 5D-2
Method 17.
12.4 Dilution Air Flow Rate.
Q i (Ti − To )
Same as Section 12.0 of either Method 5 or
Qd = Eq. 5D-3
Method 17 with the following exceptions:
12.1 Nomenclature.
To − Tamb
Ao=Measurement site(s) total cross-sectional 12.5 Average PM Concentration. For mul-
area, m2 (ft2). tiple measurement sites, calculate the aver-
C or Cavg=Average concentration of PM for age PM concentration as follows:
all n runs, mg/scm (gr/scf).
Qi=Inlet gas volume flow rate, m3/sec (ft3/ n
sec).
mi=Mass collected for run i of n, mg (gr). ∑ mi
i =1
To=Average temperature of gas at measure- C avg or C = n Eq. 5D- 4
ment site, °K (°R).
Ti=Average temperature of gas at inlet, °K ∑ Vol i
ER17OC00.143</MATH>
(°R). i =1
Voli=Sample volume collected for run i of n,
scm (scf). 13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
v=Average gas velocity at the measurement
site(s), m/s (ft/s) 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
Qo=Total baghouse exhaust volumetric flow
ER17OC00.142</MATH>
rate, m3/sec (ft3/sec). 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]

Qd=Dilution air flow rate, m3/sec (ft3/sec).
Tamb=Ambient Temperature, (°K). 16.0 References
12.2 Average Gas Velocity. When fol- Same as Method 5, Section 17.0.
lowing Section 8.3.1, calculate the average
gas velocity at the measurement site as fol- 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
ER17OC00.141</MATH>
lows: Validation Data
202
ER17OC00.140</MATH>
203
ER17OC00.144</MATH>
METHOD 5E—DETERMINATION OF PARTICULATE other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-

MATTER EMISSIONS FROM THE WOOL FIBER- tain reliable results, persons using this
GLASS INSULATION MANUFACTURING INDUS- method should have a thorough knowledge of
TRY at least the following additional test meth-
NOTE: This method does not include all of Method 5.

plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana- 1.0 Scope and Applications
lytical) essential to its performance. Some 1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No
material is incorporated by reference from CAS number assigned.
204
ER17OC00.145</MATH>
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- 6.1.2 Filter Holder. Same as described in
ble for the determination of PM emissions Section 6.1.1.5 of Method 5 with the addition
from wool fiberglass insulation manufac- of a leak-tight connection in the rear half of
turing sources. the filter holder designed for insertion of a
temperature sensor used for measuring the
2.0 Summary of Method sample gas exit temperature.
Particulate matter is withdrawn 6.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5,
isokinetically from the source and is col- Section 6.2, except three wash bottles are
lected either on a glass fiber filter main- needed instead of two and only glass storage
tained at a temperature in the range of 120 bottles and funnels may be used.
±14 °C (248 ±25 °F) and in impingers in solu- 6.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 5,
tions of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide (NaOH). The Section 6.3, with the additional equipment
filtered particulate mass, which includes any for TOC analysis as described below:
material that condenses at or above the fil- 6.3.1 Sample Blender or Homogenizer.
tration temperature, is determined gravi- Waring type or ultrasonic.
metrically after the removal of uncombined 6.3.2 Magnetic Stirrer.
water. The condensed PM collected in the 6.3.3 Hypodermic Syringe. 0- to 100-μl ca-
impinger solutions is determined as total or- pacity.
ganic carbon (TOC) using a nondispersive in- 6.3.4 Total Organic Carbon Analyzer.
frared type of analyzer. The sum of the fil- Rosemount Model 2100A analyzer or equiva-
tered PM mass and the condensed PM is re- lent and a recorder.
ported as the total PM mass. 6.3.5 Beaker. 30-ml.
6.3.6 Water Bath. Temperature controlled.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] 6.3.7 Volumetric Flasks. 1000-ml and 500-
ml.
5.0 Safety
Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve that all reagents conform to the specifica-
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- tions established by the Committee on Ana-
ment. This test method may not address all lytical Reagents of the American Chemical
of the safety problems associated with its Society, where such specifications are avail-
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this able; otherwise, use the best available grade.
test method to establish appropriate safety 7.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5,
and health practices and to determine the Section 7.1, with the addition of 0.1 N NaOH
applicability of regulatory limitations prior (Dissolve 4 g of NaOH in water and dilute to
to performing this test method. 1 liter).
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following re- 7.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5,
agents are hazardous. Personal protective Section 7.2, with the addition of the fol-
equipment and safe procedures are useful in lowing:
preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc- 7.2.1 Water. Deionized distilled to conform
curs, immediately flush with copious to ASTM Specification D 1193–77 or 91 Type
amounts of water at least 15 minutes. Re- 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). The
move clothing under shower and decontami- potassium permanganate (KMnO4) test for
nate. Treat residual chemical burn as ther- oxidizable organic matter may be omitted
mal burn. when high concentrations of organic matter
5.2.1 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl). Highly are not expected to be present.
toxic. Vapors are highly irritating to eyes, 7.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide. Same as de-
skin, nose, and lungs, causing severe dam- scribed in Section 7.1.
age. May cause bronchitis, pneumonia, or 7.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 5,
edema of lungs. Exposure to concentrations Section 7.3, with the addition of the fol-
of 0.13 to 0.2 percent in air can be lethal in lowing:
minutes. Will react with metals, producing 7.3.1 Carbon Dioxide-Free Water. Distilled
hydrogen. or deionized water that has been freshly
5.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes boiled for 15 minutes and cooled to room
severe damage to eye tissues and to skin. In- temperature while preventing exposure to
halation causes irritation to nose, throat, ambient air by using a cover vented with an
and lungs. Reacts exothermically with lim- Ascarite tube.
ited amounts of water. 7.3.2 Hydrochloric Acid. HCl, con-
centrated, with a dropper.
7.3.3 Organic Carbon Stock Solution. Dis-
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5, solve 2.1254 g of dried potassium biphthalate
Section 6.1, with the exception of the fol- (HOOCC6H4COOK) in CO2-free water, and di-
lowing: lute to 1 liter in a volumetric flask. This so-
6.1.1 Probe Liner. Same as described in lution contains 1000 mg/L organic carbon.
Section 6.1.1.2 of Method 5 except use only 7.3.4 Inorganic Carbon Stock Solution.
borosilicate or quartz glass liners. Dissolve 4.404 g anhydrous sodium carbonate
205
(Na2CO3.) in about 500 ml of CO2-free water in 8.4.2.2 Container No. 2. Use water to rinse
a 1-liter volumetric flask. Add 3.497 g anhy- the sample nozzle, probe, and front half of
drous sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3) to the the filter holder three times in the manner
flask, and dilute to 1 liter with CO2 -free described in Section 8.7.6.2 of Method 5 ex-
water. This solution contains 1000 mg/L inor- cept that no brushing is done. Put all the
ganic carbon. water wash in one container, seal, and label.
7.3.5 Oxygen Gas. CO2 -free. 8.4.2.3 Container No. 3. Rinse and brush
the sample nozzle, probe, and front half of
the filter holder with acetone as described
and Transport
for Container No. 2 in Section 8.7.6.2 of Meth-
8.1 Pretest Preparation and Preliminary od 5.
Determinations. Same as Method 5, Sections 8.4.2.4 Container No. 4. Place the contents
8.1 and 8.2, respectively. of the silica gel impinger in its original con-
8.2 Preparation of Sampling Train. Same tainer as described for Container No. 3 in
as Method 5, Section 8.3, except that 0.1 N Section 8.7.6.3 of Method 5.
NaOH is used in place of water in the 8.4.2.5 Container No. 5. Measure the liquid
impingers. The volumes of the solutions are in the first three impingers and record the
the same as in Method 5. volume or weight as described for the Im-
8.3 Leak-Check Procedures, Sampling pinger Water in Section 8.7.6.4 of Method 5.
Train Operation, Calculation of Percent Do not discard this liquid, but place it in a
Isokinetic. Same as Method 5, Sections 8.4 sample container using a glass funnel to aid
through 8.6, respectively. in the transfer from the impingers or grad-
8.4 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, uated cylinder (if used) to the sample con-
Sections 8.7.1 through 8.7.4, with the addition tainer. Rinse each impinger thoroughly with
of the following: 0.1 N NaOH three times, as well as the grad-
8.4.1 Save portions of the water, acetone, uated cylinder (if used) and the funnel, and
and 0.1 N NaOH used for cleanup as blanks. put these rinsings in the same sample con-
Take 200 ml of each liquid directly from the tainer. Seal the container and label to clear-
wash bottles being used, and place in glass
ly identify its contents.
sample containers labeled ‘‘water blank,’’
8.5 Sample Transport. Whenever possible,
‘‘acetone blank,’’ and ‘‘NaOH blank,’’ respec-
containers should be shipped in such a way
tively.
8.4.2 Inspect the train prior to and during that they remain upright at all times.
disassembly, and note any abnormal condi- 9.0 Quality Control.
tions. Treat the samples as follows:
8.4.2.1 Container No. 1. Same as Method 5, 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
Section 8.7.6.1. ures.
8.3, 10.0 ............................. Sampling equipment leak-check and cali- Ensures accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate,
10.1.2, 11.2.5.3 .................. Repetitive analyses .................................. Ensures precise measurement of total carbon and in-
organic carbon concentration of samples, blank, and
standards.
10.1.4 ................................. TOC analyzer calibration ......................... Ensures linearity of analyzer response to standards.
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. the mark using CO2-free water. These flasks
Same as Method 5, Section 9.2. contain 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, and 100 mg/L
organic carbon, respectively.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization 10.1.2 Use a hypodermic syringe to with-
Same as Method 5, Section 10.0, with the draw a 20- to 50-μl aliquot from the 10 mg/L
addition of the following procedures for cali- standard solution and inject it into the total
brating the total organic carbon analyzer: carbon port of the analyzer. Measure the
10.1 Preparation of Organic Carbon Stand- peak height. Repeat the injections until
ard Curve. three consecutive peaks are obtained within
10.1.1 Add 10 ml, 20 ml, 30 ml, 40 ml, and 10 percent of their arithmetic mean. Repeat
50 ml of the organic carbon stock solution to this procedure for the remaining organic car-
a series of five 1000-ml volumetric flasks. bon standard solutions.
Add 30 ml, 40 ml, and 50 ml of the same solu- 10.1.3 Calculate the corrected peak height
tion to a series of three 500-ml volumetric for each standard by deducting the blank
flasks. Dilute the contents of each flask to correction (see Section 11.2.5.3) as follows:
206
Corrected Peak Height = A − B Eq. 5E-1
Where: °F)) furnace heats a Hastelloy combustion

A=Peak height of standard or sample, mm or tube packed with cobalt oxide-impregnated
other appropriate unit. asbestos fiber. The oxygen in the carrier gas,
B=Peak height of blank, mm or other appro- the elevated temperature, and the catalytic
priate unit. effect of the packing result in oxidation of
10.1.4 Prepare a linear regression plot of both organic and inorganic carbonaceous
the arithmetic mean of the three consecu- material to CO2, and steam. In the inorganic
tive peak heights obtained for each standard carbon channel, a low temperature (150 °C
solution against the concentration of that (300 °F)) furnace heats a glass tube con-
solution. Calculate the calibration factor as taining quartz chips wetted with 85 percent
the inverse of the slope of this curve. If the phosphoric acid. The acid liberates CO2 and
product of the arithmetic mean peak height steam from inorganic carbonates. The oper-
for any standard solution and the calibration ating temperature is below that required to
factor differs from the actual concentration oxidize organic matter. Follow the manufac-
by more than 5 percent, remake and reana- turer’s instructions for assembly, testing,
lyze that standard. calibration, and operation of the analyzer.
10.2 Preparation of Inorganic Carbon 11.2.5.2 As samples collected in 0.1 N
Standard Curve. Repeat the procedures out- NaOH often contain a high measure of inor-
lined in Sections 10.1.1 through 10.1.4, sub- ganic carbon that inhibits repeatable deter-
stituting the inorganic carbon stock solution minations of TOC, sample pretreatment is
for the organic carbon stock solution, and necessary. Measure and record the liquid vol-
the inorganic carbon port of the analyzer for ume of each sample (or impinger contents).
the total carbon port. If the sample contains solids or immiscible
liquid matter, homogenize the sample with a
11.0 Analytical Procedure blender or ultrasonics until satisfactory re-
11.1 Record the data required on a sheet peatability is obtained. Transfer a represent-
such as the one shown in Figure 5–6 of Meth- ative portion of 10 to 15 ml to a 30-ml beaker,
od 5. and acidify with about 2 drops of con-
11.2 Handle each sample container as fol- centrated HCl to a pH of 2 or less. Warm the
lows: acidified sample at 50 °C (120 °F) in a water
11.2.1 Container No. 1. Same as Method 5, bath for 15 minutes.
Section 11.2.1, except that the filters must be 11.2.5.3 While stirring the sample with a
dried at 20 ±6 °C (68 ±10 °F) and ambient pres- magnetic stirrer, use a hypodermic syringe
sure. to withdraw a 20-to 50-μ1 aliquot from the
11.2.2 Containers No. 2 and No. 3. Same as beaker. Analyze the sample for total carbon
Method 5, Section 11.2.2, except that evapo- and calculate its corrected mean peak height
ration of the samples must be at 20 ±6 °C (68 according to the procedures outlined in Sec-
±10 °F) and ambient pressure. tions 10.1.2 and 10.1.3. Similarly analyze an
11.2.3 Container No. 4. Same as Method 5, aliquot of the sample for inorganic carbon.
Section 11.2.3. Repeat the analyses for all the samples and
11.2.4 ‘‘Water Blank’’ and ‘‘Acetone for the 0.1 N NaOH blank.
Blank’’ Containers. Determine the water and 11.2.5.4 Ascertain the total carbon and in-
acetone blank values following the proce- organic carbon concentrations (CTC and CIC,
dures for the ‘‘Acetone Blank’’ container in respectively) of each sample and blank by
Section 11.2.4 of Method 5. Evaporate the
comparing the corrected mean peak heights
samples at ambient temperature (20 ±6 °C (68
for each sample and blank to the appropriate
±10 °F)) and pressure.
standard curve.
11.2.5 Container No. 5. For the determina-
tion of total organic carbon, perform two NOTE: If samples must be diluted for anal-
analyses on successive identical samples, i.e., ysis, apply an appropriate dilution factor.
total carbon and inorganic carbon. The de-
sired quantity is the difference between the 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
two values obtained. Both analyses are based Same as Method 5, Section 12.0, with the
on conversion of sample carbon into carbon addition of the following:
dioxide for measurement by a nondispersive
12.1 Nomenclature.
infrared analyzer. Results of analyses reg-
ister as peaks on a strip chart recorder. Cc=Concentration of condensed particulate
11.2.5.1 The principal differences between matter in stack gas, gas dry basis, cor-
the operating parameters for the two chan- rected to standard conditions, g/dscm (gr/
nels involve the combustion tube packing dscf).
material and temperature. In the total car- CIC=Concentration of condensed TOC in the
bon channel, a high temperature (950 °C (1740 liquid sample, from Section 11.2.5, mg/L.
207
ER17OC00.146</MATH>
Ct=Total particulate concentration, dry at least the following additional test meth-
basis, corrected to standard conditions, g/ ods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, and
dscm (gr/dscf). Method 5.
CTC=Concentration of condensed TOC in the
liquid sample, from Section 11.2.5, mg/L. 1.0 Scope and Applications
CTOC=Concentration of condensed TOC in the 1.1 Analyte. Nonsulfate particulate mat-
liquid sample, mg/L. ter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
mTOC=Mass of condensed TOC collected in 1.2 Applicability. This method is applica-
the impingers, mg. ble for the determination of nonsulfate PM
Vm(std)=Volume of gas sample measured by emissions from stationary sources. Use of
the dry gas meter, corrected to standard this method must be specified by an applica-
conditions, from Section 12.3 of Method 5, ble subpart of the standards, or approved by
dscm (dscf). the Administrator for a particular applica-
Vs=Total volume of liquid sample, ml.
tion.
12.2 Concentration of Condensed TOC in 1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to
Liquid Sample. the requirements of this method will en-
C TOC = C TC − C IC Eq. 5E-2 air pollutant sampling methods.
12.3 Mass of Condensed TOC Collected.
m TOC = 0.001 C TOC Vs Eq. 5E-3 Particulate matter is withdrawn
Where:
on a filter maintained at a temperature in
0.001 = Liters per milliliter. the range 160 ±14 °C (320 ±25 °F). The collected
12.4 Concentration of Condensed Particu- sample is extracted with water. A portion of
late Material. the extract is analyzed for sulfate content by
ion chromatography. The remainder is neu-
C c = K 4 m TOC / Vm (std ) Eq. 5E-4 tralized with ammonium hydroxide (NH4OH),
dried, and weighed. The weight of sulfate in
Where:
the sample is calculated as ammonium sul-
K4=0.001 g/mg for metric units. fate ((NH4)2SO4), and is subtracted from the
=0.0154 gr/mg for English units. total particulate weight; the result is re-
12.5 Total Particulate Concentration. ported as nonsulfate particulate matter.
C t = Cs + Cc Eq. 5E-4 3.0 Definitions [Reserved]

13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
16.0 References. of the safety problems associated with its
Same as Section 17.0 of Method 5, with the use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
addition of the following: test method to establish appropriate safety
1. American Public Health Association, and health practices and to determine the
American Water Works Association, Water applicability of regulatory limitations prior
Pollution Control Federation. Standard to performing this test method.
Methods for the Examination of Water and 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Wastewater. Fifteenth Edition. Washington,
ER17OC00.151</MATH>
D.C. 1980. 6.1 Sample Collection and Recovery.
Same as Method 5, Sections 6.1 and 6.2, re-
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and spectively.
Validation Data [Reserved] 6.2 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 5,
Section 6.3, with the addition of the fol-
METHOD 5F—DETERMINATION OF NONSULFATE
lowing:
PARTICULATE MATTER EMISSIONS FROM
6.2.1 Erlenmeyer Flasks. 125-ml, with
ER17OC00.150</MATH>
STATIONARY SOURCES
ground glass joints.
NOTE: This method does not include all of 6.2.2 Air Condenser. With ground glass
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- joint compatible with the Erlenmeyer flasks.
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana- 6.2.3 Beakers. 600-ml.
lytical) essential to its performance. Some 6.2.4 Volumetric Flasks. 1-liter, 500-ml
material is incorporated by reference from (one for each sample), 200-ml, and 50-ml (one
ER17OC00.149</MATH>
other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob- for each sample and standard).
tain reliable results, persons using this 6.2.5 Pipet. 5-ml (one for each sample and
method should have a thorough knowledge of standard).
208
ER17OC00.148</MATH>
6.2.6 Ion Chromatograph. The ion chro- primary standard grade ammonium sulfate
matograph should have at least the following ((NH4)2SO4) at 105 to 110 °C (220 to 230 °F) for
components. a minimum of 2 hours before preparing the
6.2.6.1 Columns. An anion separation col- standard solution. Then dissolve exactly
umn or other column capable of resolving 1.000 g of dried (NH4)2SO4 in water in a 1-liter
the sulfate ion from other species present volumetric flask, and dilute to 1 liter. Mix
and a standard anion suppressor column. well.
Suppressor columns are produced as propri- 7.3.3 Working Standard Solution, 25 μg
etary items; however, one can be produced in
(NH4)2SO4/ml. Pipet 5 ml of the stock stand-
the laboratory using the resin available from
ard solution into a 200-ml volumetric flask.
BioRad Company, 32nd and Griffin Streets,
Richmond, California. Other systems which Dilute to 200 ml with water.
do not use suppressor columns may also be 7.3.4 Eluent Solution. Weigh 1.018 g of so-
used. dium carbonate (Na2CO3) and 1.008 g of so-
6.2.6.2 Pump. Capable of maintaining a dium bicarbonate (NaHCO3), and dissolve in 4
steady flow as required by the system. liters of water. This solution is 0.0024 M
6.2.6.3 Flow Gauges. Capable of measuring Na2CO3/0.003 M NaHCO3. Other eluents appro-
the specified system flow rate. priate to the column type and capable of re-
6.2.6.4 Conductivity Detector. solving sulfate ion from other species
6.2.6.5 Recorder. Compatible with the out- present may be used.
put voltage range of the detector. 7.3.5 Ammonium Hydroxide. Con-
centrated, 14.8 M.
7.3.6 Phenolphthalein Indicator. 3,3-Bis(4-
Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended hydroxyphenyl)-1-(3H)-isobenzo-furanone.
that all reagents conform to the specifica- Dissolve 0.05 g in 50 ml of ethanol and 50 ml
tions established by the Committee on Ana- of water.
lytical Reagents of the American Chemical
Society, where such specifications are avail- 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
able; otherwise, use the best available grade. and Transport
7.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5,
Section 7.1. Same as Method 5, Section 8.0, with the ex-
7.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, ception of the following:
Section 7.2, with the addition of the fol- 8.1 Sampling Train Operation. Same as
lowing: Method 5, Section 8.5, except that the probe
7.2.1 Water. Deionized distilled, to con- outlet and filter temperatures shall be main-
form to ASTM D 1193–77 or 91 Type 3 (incor- tained at 160 ±14 °C (320 ±25 °F).
porated by reference—see § 60.17). The potas- 8.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5,
sium permanganate (KMnO4) test for oxidiz- Section 8.7, except that the recovery solvent
able organic matter may be omitted when shall be water instead of acetone, and a clean
high concentrations of organic matter are filter from the same lot as those used during
not expected to be present. testing shall be saved for analysis as a blank.
7.3 Analysis. Same as Method 5, Section
7.3, with the addition of the following: 9.0 Quality Control
7.3.1 Water. Same as in Section 7.2.1.
7.3.2 Stock Standard Solution, 1 mg 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
(NH4)2SO4/ml. Dry an adequate amount of ures
10.1.2, 11.2.5.3 .................. Repetitive analyses .................................. Ensures precise measurement of total carbon and in-
organic carbon concentration of samples, blank, and
standards.
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. standard masses will equal 25, 50, 100, 150,
Same as Method 5, Section 9.2. and 250 μg.) Dilute each flask to the mark
with water, and mix well. Analyze each
10.0 Calibration and Standardization standard according to the chromatograph
Same as Method 5, Section 10.0, with the manufacturer’s instructions. Take peak
addition of the following: height measurements with symmetrical
10.1 Determination of Ion Chromatograph peaks; in all other cases, calculate peak
Calibration Factor S. Prepare a series of five areas. Prepare or calculate a linear regres-
standards by adding 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, and 10.0 sion plot of the standard masses in μg (x-
ml of working standard solution (25 μg/ml) to axis) versus their responses (y-axis). From
a series of five 50-ml volumetric flasks. (The this line, or equation, determine the slope
209
and calculate its reciprocal which is the cali- ysis sequence on the same day. Dilute any
bration factor, S. If any point deviates from sample and the blank with equal volumes of
the line by more than 7 percent of the con- water if the concentration exceeds that of
centration at that point, remake and reana- the highest standard.
lyze that standard. This deviation can be de- 11.2.4 Document each sample chromato-
termined by multiplying S times the re- gram by listing the following analytical pa-
sponse for each standard. The resultant con- rameters: injection point, injection volume,
centrations must not differ by more than 7 sulfate retention time, flow rate, detector
percent from each known standard mass (i.e., sensitivity setting, and recorder chart speed.
25, 50, 100, 150, and 250 μg). 11.3 Sample Residue.
10.2 Conductivity Detector. Calibrate ac-
11.3.1 Transfer the remaining contents of
cording to manufacturer’s specifications
the volumetric flask to a tared 600-ml beaker
prior to initial use.
or similar container. Rinse the volumetric
11.0 Analytical Procedure flask with water, and add the rinsings to the
tared beaker. Make certain that all particu-
11.1 Sample Extraction. late matter is transferred to the beaker.
11.1.1 Note on the analytical data sheet, Evaporate the water in an oven at 105 °C (220
the level of the liquid in the container, and °F) until only about 100 ml of water remains.
whether any sample was lost during ship- Remove the beakers from the oven, and
ment. If a noticeable amount of leakage has allow them to cool.
occurred, either void the sample or use
11.3.2 After the beakers have cooled, add
methods, subject to the approval of the Ad-
five drops of phenolphthalein indicator, and
ministrator, to correct the final results.
then add concentrated ammonium hydroxide
11.1.2 Cut the filter into small pieces, and
until the solution turns pink. Return the
place it in a 125-ml Erlenmeyer flask with a
ground glass joint equipped with an air con- samples to the oven at 105 °C (220 °F), and
denser. Rinse the shipping container with evaporate the samples to dryness. Cool the
water, and pour the rinse into the flask. Add samples in a desiccator, and weigh the sam-
additional water to the flask until it con- ples to constant weight.
tains about 75 ml, and place the flask on a
hot plate. Gently reflux the contents for 6 to
8 hours. Cool the solution, and transfer it to Same as Method 5, Section 12.0, with the
a 500-ml volumetric flask. Rinse the Erlen- addition of the following:
meyer flask with water, and transfer the 12.1 Nomenclature.
rinsings to the volumetric flask including
the pieces of filter. CW=Water blank residue concentration, mg/
11.1.3 Transfer the probe rinse to the same ml.
500-ml volumetric flask with the filter sam- F=Dilution factor (required only if sample
ple. Rinse the sample bottle with water, and dilution was needed to reduce the con-
add the rinsings to the volumetric flask. Di- centration into the range of calibration).
lute the contents of the flask to the mark HS=Arithmetic mean response of duplicate
with water. sample analyses, mm for height or mm2 for
11.1.4 Allow the contents of the flask to area.
settle until all solid material is at the bot- Hb=Arithmetic mean response of duplicate
tom of the flask. If necessary, remove and filter blank analyses, mm for height or
centrifuge a portion of the sample. mm2 for area.
11.1.5 Repeat the procedures outlined in mb=Mass of beaker used to dry sample, mg.
Sections 11.1.1 through 11.1.4 for each sample mf=Mass of sample filter, mg.
and for the filter blank. mn=Mass of nonsulfate particulate matter in
11.2 Sulfate (SO4) Analysis. the sample as collected, mg.
11.2.1 Prepare a standard calibration
ms=Mass of ammonium sulfate in the sample
curve according to the procedures outlined
as collected, mg.
in Section 10.1.
11.2.2 Pipet 5 ml of the sample into a 50- mt=Mass of beaker, filter, and dried sample,
ml volumetric flask, and dilute to 50 ml with mg.
water. (Alternatively, eluent solution may mw=Mass of residue after evaporation of
be used instead of water in all sample, stand- water blank, mg.
ard, and blank dilutions.) Analyze the set of S=Calibration factor, μg/mm.
standards followed by the set of samples, in- Vb=Volume of water blank, ml.
cluding the filter blank, using the same in- VS=Volume of sample collected, 500 ml.
jection volume used for the standards.
12.2 Water Blank Concentration.
11.2.3 Repeat the analyses of the stand-
ards and the samples, with the standard set

mw
being done last. The two peak height or peak
area responses for each sample must agree
Cw = Eq. 5F-1
Vb
within 5 percent of their arithmetic mean for
the analysis to be valid. Perform this anal- 12.3 Mass of Ammonium Sulfate.
210
ER17OC00.152</MATH>
100=Aliquot factor, 495 ml/5 ml
(99) S (H s − H b ) 1000=Constant, μg/mg
ms = F Eq. 5F-2
(1000) 12.4
ter.
Mass of Nonsulfate Particulate Mat-
Where:
m n = m t − m b − m s − m f − Vs C w Eq. 5F-3
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] not allow air bubbles to become entrapped in
the resin or glass wool to avoid channeling,
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] which may produce erratic results. If nec-
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] essary, stir the resin with a glass rod to re-
move air bubbles, after the column has been
16.0 Alternative Procedures prepared, never let the liquid level fall below
the top of the upper glass wool plug. Place a
16.1 The following procedure may be used
2.5-cm (1-in.) plug of glass wool on top of the
as an alternative to the procedure in Section
resin. Rinse the column with water until the
11.0
eluate gives a pH of 5 or greater as measured
16.1.1 Apparatus. Same as for Method 6,
Sections 6.3.3 to 6.3.6 with the following addi- with pH paper.
tions. 16.1.3.2 Sample Extraction. Followup the
16.1.1.1 Beakers. 250-ml, one for each sam- procedure given in Section 11.1.3 except do
ple, and 600-ml. not dilute the sample to 500 ml.
16.1.1.2 Oven. Capable of maintaining tem- 16.1.3.3 Sample Residue.
peratures of 75 ±5 °C (167 ±9 °F) and 105 ±5 °C 16.1.3.3.1 Place at least one clean glass fil-
(221 ±9 °F). ter for each sample in a Buchner funnel, and
16.1.1.3 Buchner Funnel. rinse the filters with water. Remove the fil-
16.1.1.4 Glass Columns. 25-mm×305-mm (1- ters from the funnel, and dry them in an
in.×12-in.) with Teflon stopcock. oven at 105 ±5 °C (221 ±9 °F); then cool in a
16.1.1.5 Volumetric Flasks. 50-ml and 500- desiccator. Weigh each filter to constant
ml, one set for each sample, and 100-ml, 200- weight according to the procedure in Method
ml, and 1000-ml. 5, Section 11.0. Record the weight of each fil-
16.1.1.6 Pipettes. Two 20-ml and one 200- ter to the nearest 0.1 mg.
ml, one set for each sample, and 5-ml. 16.1.3.3.2 Assemble the vacuum filter ap-
16.1.1.7 Filter Flasks. 500-ml. paratus, and place one of the clean, tared
16.1.1.8 Polyethylene Bottle. 500-ml, one glass fiber filters in the Buchner funnel. De-
for each sample. cant the liquid portion of the extracted sam-
16.1.2 Reagents. Same as Method 6, Sec- ple (Section 16.1.3.2) through the tared glass
tions 7.3.2 to 7.3.5 with the following addi- fiber filter into a clean, dry, 500-ml filter
tions: flask. Rinse all the particulate matter re-
16.1.2.1 Water, Ammonium Hydroxide, and
maining in the volumetric flask onto the
Phenolphthalein. Same as Sections 7.2.1,
glass fiber filter with water. Rinse the par-
7.3.5, and 7.3.6 of this method, respectively.
ticulate matter with additional water.
16.1.2.2 Filter. Glass fiber to fit Buchner
Transfer the filtrate to a 500-ml volumetric
funnel.
16.1.2.3 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl), 1 m. Add flask, and dilute to 500 ml with water. Dry
8.3 ml of concentrated HCl (12 M) to 50 ml of the filter overnight at 105 ±5 °C (221 ±9 °F),
water in a 100-ml volumetric flask. Dilute to cool in a desiccator, and weigh to the nearest
100 ml with water. 0.1 mg.
16.1.2.4 Glass Wool. 16.1.3.3.3 Dry a 250-ml beaker at 75 ±5 °C
16.1.2.5 Ion Exchange Resin. Strong cation (167 ±9 °F), and cool in a desiccator; then
exchange resin, hydrogen form, analytical weigh to constant weight to the nearest 0.1
grade. mg. Pipette 200 ml of the filtrate that was
16.1.2.6 pH Paper. Range of 1 to 7. saved into a tared 250-ml beaker; add five
16.1.3 Analysis. drops of phenolphthalein indicator and suffi-
16.1.3.1 Ion Exchange Column Prepara- cient concentrated ammonium hydroxide to
tion. Slurry the resin with 1 M HCl in a 250- turn the solution pink. Carefully evaporate
ml beaker, and allow to stand overnight. the contents of the beaker to dryness at 75 ±5
°C (167 ±9 °F). Check for dryness every 30
Place 2.5 cm (1 in.) of glass wool in the bot-

tom of the glass column. Rinse the slurried minutes. Do not continue to bake the sample
ER17OC00.154</MATH>
resin twice with water. Resuspend the resin once it has dried. Cool the sample in a desic-
in water, and pour sufficient resin into the cator, and weigh to constant weight to the
column to make a bed 5.1 cm (2 in.) deep. Do nearest 0.1 mg.
211
ER17OC00.153</MATH>
16.1.3.4 Sulfate Analysis. Adjust the flow Vt=Volume of Ba(C104)2 titrant, ml.
rate through the ion exchange column to 3 W=Equivalent weight of ammonium sulfate,
ml/min. Pipette a 20-ml aliquot of the fil- 66.07 mg/meq.
trate onto the top of the ion exchange col- 16.1.5.2 Mass of Insoluble Particulate Mat-
umn, and collect the eluate in a 50-ml volu- ter.
metric flask. Rinse the column with two 15-
ml portions of water. Stop collection of the mp = mr − ma − mf Eq. 5F- 4
eluate when the volume in the flask reaches
50-ml. Pipette a 20-ml aliquot of the eluate 16.1.5.3 Mass of Dissolved Particulate
into a 250-ml Erlenmeyer flask, add 80 ml of Matter.
100 percent isopropanol and two to four drops
of thorin indicator, and titrate to a pink end
point using 0.0100 N barium perchlorate. Re- (
m d = m e − (Vf / Vd )m b ) Eq. 5F-5
peat and average the titration volumes. Run 16.1.5.4 Mass of Ammonium Sulfate.
a blank with each series of samples. Rep-
licate titrations must agree within 1 percent
(Vt − Vc ) N W Ve Vf
or 0.2 ml, whichever is larger. Perform the
ion exchange and titration procedures on du-
ms = Eq. 5F- 6
plicate portions of the filtrate. Results
Va Vi
should agree within 5 percent. Regenerate or 16.1.5.5 Mass of Nonsulfate Particulate
replace the ion exchange resin after 20 sam- Matter.
ple aliquots have been analyzed or if the end
point of the titration becomes unclear. m n = m p + m d − ms − m bk Eq. 5F-7
NOTE: Protect the 0.0100 N barium per-
chlorate solution from evaporation at all
17.0 References
times.
16.1.3.5 Blank Determination. Begin with Same as Method 5, Section 17.0, with the
a sample of water of the same volume as the addition of the following:
samples being processed and carry it through 1. Mulik, J.D. and E. Sawicki. Ion
the analysis steps described in Sections Chromatographic Analysis of Environmental
16.1.3.3 and 16.1.3.4. A blank value larger than Pollutants. Ann Arbor, Ann Arbor Science
5 mg should not be subtracted from the final Publishers, Inc. Vol. 2, 1979.
particulate matter mass. Causes for large
2. Sawicki, E., J.D. Mulik, and E.
blank values should be investigated and any
Wittgenstein. Ion Chromatographic Analysis
problems resolved before proceeding with
further analyses. of Environmental Pollutants. Ann Arbor,
16.1.4 Calibration. Calibrate the barium Ann Arbor Science Publishers, Inc. Vol. 1.
perchlorate solutions as in Method 6, Section 1978.
10.5. 3. Siemer, D.D. Separation of Chloride and
16.1.5 Calculations. Bromide from Complex Matrices Prior to Ion
16.1.5.1 Nomenclature. Same as Section Chromatographic Determination. Analytical
12.1 with the following additions: Chemistry 52(12): 1874–1877. October 1980.
ma=Mass of clean analytical filter, mg. 4. Small, H., T.S. Stevens, and W.C.
md=Mass of dissolved particulate matter, Bauman. Novel Ion Exchange
mg. Chromatographic Method Using
me=Mass of beaker and dissolved particulate Conductimetric Determination. Analytical
matter after evaporation of filtrate, mg. Chemistry. 47(11):1801. 1975.
mp=Mass of insoluble particulate matter,
mg. 18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
mr=Mass of analytical filter, sample filter, Validation Data [Reserved]
ER17OC00.158</MATH>
and insoluble particulate matter, mg.
mbk=Mass of nonsulfate particulate matter in METHOD 5G—DETERMINATION OF PARTICULATE
blank sample, mg. MATTER EMISSIONS FROM WOOD HEATERS
mn=Mass of nonsulfate particulate matter, (DILUTION TUNNEL SAMPLING LOCATION)
mg.
ms=Mass of Ammonium sulfate, mg.
N=Normality of Ba(ClO4) titrant, meq/ml. the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup-
ER17OC00.157</MATH>
Va=Volume of aliquot taken for titration, 20 plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana-
ml. lytical) essential to its performance. Some
Vc=Volume of titrant used for titration material is incorporated by reference from
blank, ml. other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-
Vd=Volume of filtrate evaporated, 200 ml. tain reliable results, persons using this
Ve=Volume of eluate collected, 50 ml. method should have a thorough knowledge of
ER17OC00.156</MATH>
Vf=Volume of extracted sample, 500 ml. at least the following additional test meth-
Vi=Volume of filtrate added to ion exchange ods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, Method 4,
column, 20 ml. Method 5, Method 5H, and Method 28.
212
ER17OC00.155</MATH>
1.0 Scope and Application may be used as described in Method 2, Sec-
tion 6.1.2.
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No
6.1.1.3 Differential Pressure Gauge. In-
CAS number assigned.
clined manometer or equivalent device, as
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica-
described in Method 2, Section 6.2. One ma-
ble for the determination of PM emissions
nometer shall be used for velocity head (Dp)
from wood heaters.
readings and another (optional) for orifice
differential pressure readings (DH).
6.1.1.4 Filter Holders. Two each made of
borosilicate glass, stainless steel, or Teflon,
air pollutant sampling methods. with a glass frit or stainless steel filter sup-
2.0 Summary of Method port and a silicone rubber, Teflon, or Viton
gasket. The holder design shall provide a
2.1 The exhaust from a wood heater is col- positive seal against leakage from the out-
lected with a total collection hood, and is side or around the filters. The filter holders
combined with ambient dilution air. Particu- shall be placed in series with the backup fil-
late matter is withdrawn proportionally ter holder located 25 to 100 mm (1 to 4 in.)
from a single point in a sampling tunnel, and downstream from the primary filter holder.
is collected on two glass fiber filters in se- The filter holder shall be capable of holding
ries. The filters are maintained at a tem- a filter with a 100 mm (4 in.) diameter, ex-
perature of no greater than 32 °C (90 °F). The cept as noted in Section 16.
particulate mass is determined gravimetri- 6.1.1.5 Filter Temperature Monitoring
cally after the removal of uncombined water. System. A temperature sensor capable of
2.2 There are three sampling train ap- measuring temperature to within ±3 °C (±5
proaches described in this method: (1) One °F). The sensor shall be installed at the exit
dual-filter dry sampling train operated at side of the front filter holder so that the
about 0.015 m3/min (0.5 cfm), (2) One dual-fil- sensing tip of the temperature sensor is in
ter plus impingers sampling train operated direct contact with the sample gas or in a
at about 0.015 m3/min (0.5 cfm), and (3) two thermowell as shown in Figure 5G–1. The
dual-filter dry sampling trains operated si- temperature sensor shall comply with the
multaneously at any flow rate. Options (2) calibration specifications in Method 2, Sec-
and (3) are referenced in Section 16.0 of this tion 10.3. Alternatively, the sensing tip of
method. The dual-filter dry sampling train the temperature sensor may be installed at
equipment and operation, option (1), are de- the inlet side of the front filter holder.
scribed in detail in this method. 6.1.1.6 Dryer. Any system capable of re-
moving water from the sample gas to less
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] than 1.5 percent moisture (volume percent)
prior to the metering system. The system
shall include a temperature sensor for dem-
5.0 Safety onstrating that sample gas temperature
exiting the dryer is less than 20 °C (68 °F).
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve 6.1.1.7 Metering System. Same as Method
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- 5, Section 6.1.1.9.
ment. This test method may not address all 6.1.2 Barometer. Same as Method 5, Sec-
of the safety problems associated with its tion 6.1.2.
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this 6.1.3 Dilution Tunnel Gas Temperature
test method to establish appropriate safety Measurement. A temperature sensor capable
and health practices and to determine the of measuring temperature to within ±3 °C (±5
applicability of regulatory limitations prior °F).
to performing this test method. 6.1.4 Dilution Tunnel. The dilution tunnel
apparatus is shown in Figure 5G–2 and con-
sists of the following components:
6.1 Sample Collection. The following 6.1.4.1 Hood. Constructed of steel with a
items are required for sample collection: minimum diameter of 0.3 m (1 ft) on the
6.1.1 Sampling Train. The sampling train large end and a standard 0.15 to 0.3 m (0.5 to
configuration is shown in Figure 5G–1 and 1 ft) coupling capable of connecting to stand-
consists of the following components: ard 0.15 to 0.3 m (0.5 to 1 ft) stove pipe on the
6.1.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel (e.g., 316 or small end.
grade more corrosion resistant) or glass 6.1.4.2 90° Elbows. Steel 90° elbows, 0.15 to
about 9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.) I.D., 0.6 m (24 in.) in 0.3 m (0.5 to 1 ft) in diameter for connecting
length. If made of stainless steel, the probe mixing duct, straight duct and optional
shall be constructed from seamless tubing. damper assembly. There shall be at least two
6.1.1.2 Pitot Tube. Type S, as described in 90° elbows upstream of the sampling section
Section 6.1 of Method 2. The Type S pitot (see Figure 5G–2).
tube assembly shall have a known coeffi- 6.1.4.3 Straight Duct. Steel, 0.15 to 0.3 m
cient, determined as outlined in Method 2, (0.5 to 1 ft) in diameter to provide the duct-
Section 10. Alternatively, a standard pitot ing for the dilution apparatus upstream of
213
the sampling section. Steel duct, 0.15 m (0.5 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport,
ft) in diameter shall be used for the sampling and Storage
section. In the sampling section, at least 1.2 8.1 Dilution Tunnel Assembly and Clean-
m (4 ft) downstream of the elbow, shall be ing. A schematic of a dilution tunnel is
two holes (velocity traverse ports) at 90° to shown in Figure 5G–2. The dilution tunnel di-
each other of sufficient size to allow entry of mensions and other features are described in
the pitot for traverse measurements. At Section 6.1.4. Assemble the dilution tunnel,
least 1.2 m (4 ft) downstream of the velocity sealing joints and seams to prevent air leak-
traverse ports, shall be one hole (sampling age. Clean the dilution tunnel with an appro-
port) of sufficient size to allow entry of the priately sized wire chimney brush before
sampling probe. Ducts of larger diameter each certification test.
may be used for the sampling section, pro- 8.2 Draft Determination. Prepare the
vided the specifications for minimum gas ve- wood heater as in Method 28, Section 6.2.1.
locity and the dilution rate range shown in Locate the dilution tunnel hood centrally
Section 8 are maintained. The length of duct over the wood heater stack exhaust. Operate
from the hood inlet to the sampling ports the dilution tunnel blower at the flow rate to
shall not exceed 9.1 m (30 ft). be used during the test run. Measure the
draft imposed on the wood heater by the di-
6.1.4.4 Mixing Baffles. Steel semicircles
lution tunnel (i.e., the difference in draft
(two) attached at 90° to the duct axis on op-
measured with and without the dilution tun-
posite sides of the duct midway between the
nel operating) as described in Method 28,
two elbows upstream of sampling section. Section 6.2.3. Adjust the distance between
The space between the baffles shall be about the top of the wood heater stack exhaust and
0.3 m (1 ft). the dilution tunnel hood so that the dilution
6.1.4.5 Blower. Squirrel cage or other fan tunnel induced draft is less than 1.25 Pa
capable of extracting gas from the dilution (0.005 in. H2O). Have no fire in the wood heat-
tunnel of sufficient flow to maintain the ve- er, close the wood heater doors, and open
locity and dilution rate specifications in fully the air supply controls during this
Section 8 and exhausting the gas to the at- check and adjustment.
mosphere. 8.3 Pretest Ignition. Same as Method 28,
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items Section 8.7.
are required for sample recovery: probe 8.4 Smoke Capture. During the pretest ig-
brushes, wash bottles, sample storage con- nition period, operate the dilution tunnel
tainers, petri dishes, and funnel. Same as and visually monitor the wood heater stack
Method 5, Sections 6.2.1 through 6.2.4, and exhaust. Operate the wood heater with the
doors closed and determine that 100 percent
6.2.8, respectively.
of the exhaust gas is collected by the dilu-
6.3 Sample Analysis. The following items
tion tunnel hood. If less than 100 percent of
are required for sample analysis: glass the wood heater exhaust gas is collected, ad-
weighing dishes, desiccator, analytical bal- just the distance between the wood heater
ance, beakers (250-ml or smaller), hygrom- stack and the dilution tunnel hood until no
eter, and temperature sensor. Same as Meth- visible exhaust gas is escaping. Stop the pre-
od 5, Sections 6.3.1 through 6.3.3 and 6.3.5 test ignition period, and repeat the draft de-
through 6.3.7, respectively. termination procedure described in Section
8.2.
7.0 Reagents and Standards 8.5 Velocity Measurements. During the
7.1 Sample Collection. The following re- pretest ignition period, conduct a velocity
agents are required for sample collection: traverse to identify the point of average ve-
locity. This single point shall be used for
7.1.1 Filters. Glass fiber filters with a
measuring velocity during the test run.
minimum diameter of 100 mm (4 in.), without
8.5.1 Velocity Traverse. Measure the di-
organic binder, exhibiting at least 99.95 per- ameter of the duct at the velocity traverse
cent efficiency (<0.05 percent penetration) on port location through both ports. Calculate
0.3-micron dioctyl phthalate smoke par- the duct area using the average of the two
ticles. Gelman A/E 61631 has been found ac- diameters. A pretest leak-check of pitot
ceptable for this purpose. lines as in Method 2, Section 8.1, is rec-
7.1.2 Stopcock Grease. Same as Method 5, ommended. Place the calibrated pitot tube
Section 7.1.5. 7.2 Sample Recovery. Acetone- at the centroid of the stack in either of the
reagent grade, same as Method 5, Section 7.2. velocity traverse ports. Adjust the damper or
7.3 Sample Analysis. Two reagents are re- similar device on the blower inlet until the
quired for the sample analysis: velocity indicated by the pitot is approxi-
7.3.1 Acetone. Same as in Section 7.2. mately 220 m/min (720 ft/min). Continue to
7.3.2 Desiccant. Anhydrous calcium sul- read the Dp and temperature until the veloc-
fate, calcium chloride, or silica gel, indi- ity has remained constant (less than 5 per-
cating type. cent change) for 1 minute. Once a constant
velocity is obtained at the centroid of the
214
duct, perform a velocity traverse as outlined 8.8 Leak-Check Procedures.
in Method 2, Section 8.3 using four points per 8.8.1 Leak-Check of Metering System
traverse as outlined in Method 1. Measure Shown in Figure 5G–1. That portion of the
the Dp and tunnel temperature at each tra- sampling train from the pump to the orifice
verse point and record the readings. Cal- meter shall be leak-checked prior to initial
culate the total gas flow rate using calcula- use and after each certification or audit test.
tions contained in Method 2, Section 12. Leakage after the pump will result in less
Verify that the flow rate is 4 ±0.40 dscm/min volume being recorded than is actually sam-
(140 ±14 dscf/min); if not, readjust the damp- pled. Use the procedure described in Method
er, and repeat the velocity traverse. The 5, Section 8.4.1. Similar leak-checks shall be
moisture may be assumed to be 4 percent (100 conducted for other types of metering sys-
percent relative humidity at 85 °F). Direct tems (i.e., without orifice meters).
moisture measurements (e.g., according to 8.8.2 Pretest Leak-Check. A pretest leak-
Method 4) are also permissible. check of the sampling train is recommended,
NOTE: If burn rates exceed 3 kg/hr (6.6 lb/ but not required. If the pretest leak check is
hr), dilution tunnel duct flow rates greater conducted, the procedures outlined in Meth-
od 5, Section 8.4.2 should be used. A vacuum
than 4 dscm/min (140 dscfm) and sampling
of 130 mm Hg (5 in. Hg) may be used instead
section duct diameters larger than 150 mm (6
of 380 mm Hg (15 in. Hg).
in.) are allowed. If larger ducts or flow rates
8.8.3 Post-Test Leak-Check. A leak-check
are used, the sampling section velocity shall
of the sampling train is mandatory at the
be at least 220 m/min (720 fpm). In order to
conclusion of each test run. The leak-check
ensure measurable particulate mass catch, it
shall be performed in accordance with the
is recommended that the ratio of the average
procedures outlined in Method 5, Section
mass flow rate in the dilution tunnel to the
8.4.2. A vacuum of 130 mm Hg (5 in. Hg) or
average fuel burn rate be less than 150:1 if the highest vacuum measured during the
larger duct sizes or flow rates are used. test run, whichever is greater, may be used
8.5.2 Testing Velocity Measurements. instead of 380 mm Hg (15 in. Hg).
After obtaining velocity traverse results 8.9 Preliminary Determinations. Deter-
that meet the flow rate requirements, choose mine the pressure, temperature and the aver-
a point of average velocity and place the age velocity of the tunnel gases as in Section
pitot and temperature sensor at that loca- 8.5. Moisture content of diluted tunnel gases
tion in the duct. Alternatively, locate the is assumed to be 4 percent for making flow
pitot and the temperature sensor at the duct rate calculations; the moisture content may
centroid and calculate a velocity correction be measured directly as in Method 4.
factor for the centroidal position. Mount the 8.10 Sampling Train Operation. Position
pitot to ensure no movement during the test the probe inlet at the stack centroid, and
run and seal the port holes to prevent any block off the openings around the probe and
air leakage. Align the pitot opening to be porthole to prevent unrepresentative dilu-
parallel with the duct axis at the measure- tion of the gas stream. Be careful not to
ment point. Check that this condition is bump the probe into the stack wall when re-
maintained during the test run (about 30- moving or inserting the probe through the
minute intervals). Monitor the temperature porthole; this minimizes the chance of ex-
and velocity during the pretest ignition pe- tracting deposited material.
riod to ensure that the proper flow rate is 8.10.1 Begin sampling at the start of the
maintained. Make adjustments to the dilu- test run as defined in Method 28, Section
tion tunnel flow rate as necessary. 8.8.1. During the test run, maintain a sample
8.6 Pretest Preparation. Same as Method flow rate proportional to the dilution tunnel
5, Section 8.1. flow rate (within 10 percent of the initial
8.7 Preparation of Sampling Train. Dur- proportionality ratio) and a filter holder
ing preparation and assembly of the sam- temperature of no greater than 32 °C (90 °F).
pling train, keep all openings where con- The initial sample flow rate shall be approxi-
tamination can occur covered until just mately 0.015 m3/min (0.5 cfm).
prior to assembly or until sampling is about 8.10.2 For each test run, record the data
to begin. required on a data sheet such as the one
Using a tweezer or clean disposable sur- shown in Figure 5G–3. Be sure to record the
gical gloves, place one labeled (identified) initial dry gas meter reading. Record the dry
and weighed filter in each of the filter hold- gas meter readings at the beginning and end
ers. Be sure that each filter is properly cen- of each sampling time increment and when
tered and that the gasket is properly placed sampling is halted. Take other readings as
so as to prevent the sample gas stream from indicated on Figure 5G–3 at least once each
circumventing the filter. Check each filter 10 minutes during the test run. Since the
for tears after assembly is completed. manometer level and zero may drift because
Mark the probe with heat resistant tape or of vibrations and temperature changes, make
by some other method to denote the proper periodic checks during the test run.
distance into the stack or duct. Set up the 8.10.3 For the purposes of proportional
train as shown in Figure 5G–1. sampling rate determinations, data from
215
calibrated flow rate devices, such as glass filter tare weights to determine the sample
rotameters, may be used in lieu of incre- mass collected.
mental dry gas meter readings. Proportional 8.12.2.3 Container No. 2.
rate calculation procedures must be revised, 8.12.2.3.1 Taking care to see that dust on
but acceptability limits remain the same. the outside of the probe or other exterior
8.10.4 During the test run, make periodic surfaces does not get into the sample, quan-
adjustments to keep the temperature be- titatively recover particulate matter or any
tween (or upstream of) the filters at the condensate from the probe and filter holders
proper level. Do not change sampling trains by washing and brushing these components
during the test run. with acetone and placing the wash in a la-
8.10.5 At the end of the test run (see Meth- beled glass container. At least three cycles
od 28, Section 6.4.6), turn off the coarse ad- of brushing and rinsing are required.
just valve, remove the probe from the stack, 8.12.2.3.2 Between sampling runs, keep
turn off the pump, record the final dry gas brushes clean and protected from contamina-
meter reading, and conduct a post-test leak- tion.
check, as outlined in Section 8.8.2. Also, 8.12.2.3.3 After all acetone washings and
leak-check the pitot lines as described in particulate matter have been collected in
Method 2, Section 8.1; the lines must pass the sample containers, tighten the lids on
this leak-check in order to validate the ve- the sample containers so that the acetone
locity head data. will not leak out when transferred to the
8.11 Calculation of Proportional Sampling laboratory weighing area. Mark the height of
Rate. Calculate percent proportionality (see the fluid levels to determine whether leak-
Section 12.7) to determine whether the run age occurs during transport. Label the con-
was valid or another test run should be tainers clearly to identify contents.
made. 8.13 Sample Transport. Whenever pos-
8.12 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, sible, containers should be shipped in such a
Section 8.7, with the exception of the fol- way that they remain upright at all times.
lowing:
8.12.1 An acetone blank volume of about NOTE: Requirements for capping and trans-
50-ml or more may be used. port of sample containers are not applicable
8.12.2 Treat the samples as follows: if sample recovery and analysis occur in the
8.12.2.1 Container Nos. 1 and 1A. Treat the same room.
two filters according to the procedures out-
9.0 Quality Control
lined in Method 5, Section 8.7.6.1. The filters
may be stored either in a single container or 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
in separate containers. Use the sum of the ures.
8.8, 10.1–10.4 .................... Sampling equipment leak check and cali- Ensures accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate,
10.5 .................................... Analytical balance calibration .................. Ensure accurate and precise measurement of col-
lected particulate.
16.2.5 ................................. Simultaneous, dual-train sample collec- Ensure precision of measured particulate concentra-
tion. tion.
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. capacity of 3.0 liters/rev (0.1 ft3/rev) may be
Same as Method 5, Section 9.2. used. Other liquid displacement systems ac-
curate to within ±1 percent, may be used as
10.0 Calibration and Standardization calibration standards.
NOTE: Maintain a laboratory record of all NOTE: Procedures and equipment specified
calibrations. in Method 5, Section 16.0, for alternative
10.1 Pitot Tube. The Type S pitot tube as- calibration standards, including calibrated
sembly shall be calibrated according to the dry gas meters and critical orifices, are al-
procedure outlined in Method 2, Section 10.1, lowed for calibrating the dry gas meter in
prior to the first certification test and the sampling train. A dry gas meter used as
checked semiannually, thereafter. A stand- a calibration standard shall be recalibrated
ard pitot need not be calibrated but shall be at least once annually.
inspected and cleaned, if necessary, prior to 10.2.2 Calibration After Use. After each
each certification test. certification or audit test (four or more test
10.2 Volume Metering System. runs conducted on a wood heater at the four
10.2.1 Initial and Periodic Calibration. Be- burn rates specified in Method 28), check
fore its initial use and at least semiannually calibration of the metering system by per-
thereafter, calibrate the volume metering forming three calibration runs at a single,
system as described in Method 5, Section intermediate flow rate as described in Meth-
10.3.1, except that the wet test meter with a od 5, Section 10.3.2.
216
NOTE: Procedures and equipment specified cs=Concentration of particulate matter in
in Method 5, Section 16.0, for alternative stack gas, dry basis, corrected to standard
calibration standards are allowed for the conditions, g/dscm (gr/dscf).
post-test dry gas meter calibration check. E=Particulate emission rate, g/hr (lb/hr).
10.2.3 Acceptable Variation in Calibra- Eadj=Adjusted particulate emission rate, g/hr
tion. If the dry gas meter coefficient values (lb/hr).
obtained before and after a certification test La=Maximum acceptable leakage rate for ei-
differ by more than 5 percent, the certifi- ther a pretest or post-test leak-check,
cation test shall either be voided and re- equal to 0.00057 m3/min (0.020 cfm) or 4 per-
peated, or calculations for the certification cent of the average sampling rate, which-
test shall be performed using whichever ever is less.
meter coefficient value (i.e., before or after) Lp=Leakage rate observed during the post-
gives the lower value of total sample vol- test leak-check, m3/min (cfm).
ume. ma=Mass of residue of acetone blank after
evaporation, mg.
10.3 Temperature Sensors. Use the proce-
maw=Mass of residue from acetone wash after
dure in Method 2, Section 10.3, to calibrate
evaporation, mg.
temperature sensors before the first certifi-
mn=Total amount of particulate matter col-
cation or audit test and at least semiannu-
lected, mg.
ally, thereafter.
Mw=Molecular weight of water, 18.0 g/g-mole
10.4 Barometer. Calibrate against a mer-
(18.0 lb/lb-mole).
cury barometer before the first certification Pbar=Barometric pressure at the sampling
test and at least semiannually, thereafter. If site, mm Hg (in. Hg).
a mercury barometer is used, no calibration PR=Percent of proportional sampling rate.
is necessary. Follow the manufacturer’s in- Ps=Absolute gas pressure in dilution tunnel,
structions for operation. mm Hg (in. Hg).
10.5 Analytical Balance. Perform a Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg
multipoint calibration (at least five points (29.92 in. Hg).
spanning the operational range) of the ana- Qsd=Average gas flow rate in dilution tunnel,
lytical balance before the first certification calculated as in Method 2, Equation 2–8,
test and semiannually, thereafter. Before dscm/hr (dscf/hr).
each certification test, audit the balance by Tm=Absolute average dry gas meter tempera-
weighing at least one calibration weight ture (see Figure 5G–3), °K (°R).
(class F) that corresponds to 50 to 150 percent Tmi=Absolute average dry gas meter tem-
of the weight of one filter. If the scale can- perature during each 10-minute interval, i,
not reproduce the value of the calibration of the test run, °K (°R).
weight to within 0.1 mg, conduct the Ts=Absolute average gas temperature in the
multipoint calibration before use. dilution tunnel (see Figure 5G–3), °K (°R).
Tsi=Absolute average gas temperature in the
11.0 Analytical Procedure dilution tunnel during each 10 minute in-
11.1 Record the data required on a sheet terval, i, of the test run, °K (°R).
such as the one shown in Figure 5G–4. Use Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K
the same analytical balance for determining (528 °R).
tare weights and final sample weights. Va=Volume of acetone blank, ml.
11.2 Handle each sample container as fol- Vaw=Volume of acetone used in wash, ml.
lows: Vm=Volume of gas sample as measured by
11.2.1 Container Nos. 1 and 1A. Treat the dry gas meter, dcm (dcf).
two filters according to the procedures out- Vmi=Volume of gas sample as measured by
lined in Method 5, Section 11.2.1. dry gas meter during each 10-minute inter-
11.2.2 Container No. 2. Same as Method 5, val, i, of the test run, dcm.
Section 11.2.2, except that the beaker may be Vm(std)=Volume of gas sample measured by
smaller than 250 ml. the dry gas meter, corrected to standard
11.2.3 Acetone Blank Container. Same as conditions, dscm (dscf).
Method 5, Section 11.2.4, except that the Vs=Average gas velocity in the dilution tun-
beaker may be smaller than 250 ml. nel, calculated by Method 2, Equation 2–7,
m/sec (ft/sec). The dilution tunnel dry gas
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations molecular weight may be assumed to be 29
g/g mole (lb/lb mole).
Carry out calculations, retaining at least Vsi=Average gas velocity in dilution tunnel
one extra significant figure beyond that of during each 10-minute interval, i, of the
the acquired data. Round off figures after the test run, calculated by Method 2, Equation
final calculation. Other forms of the equa- 2–7, m/sec (ft/sec).
tions may be used as long as they give equiv-
Y=Dry gas meter calibration factor.

alent results. DH=Average pressure differential across the
12.1 Nomenclature. orifice meter, if used (see Figure 5G–2), mm
Bws=Water vapor in the gas stream, propor- H2O (in. H2O).
tion by volume (assumed to be 0.04). U=Total sampling time, min.
217
10=10 minutes, length of first sampling pe- Where:
riod. K2=0.001 g/mg for metric units.
13.6=Specific gravity of mercury. =0.0154 gr/mg for English units.
100=Conversion to percent. 12.6 Particulate Emission Rate.
12.2 Dry Gas Volume. Same as Method 5,
Section 12.2, except that component changes
are not allowable.
E = Cs Q sd Eq. 5G-3
12.3 Solvent Wash Blank. NOTE: Particulate emission rate results
produced using the sampling train described
m a Vaw in Section 6 and shown in Figure 5G–1 shall
m aw = Eq. 5G-1 be adjusted for reporting purposes by the fol-
Va lowing method adjustment factor:
12.4 Total Particulate Weight. Determine
the total particulate catch, mn, from the E adj = K 3 E 0.83 Eq. 5G- 4
sum of the weights obtained from Container
Nos. 1, 1A, and 2, less the acetone blank (see Where:
Figure 5G–4). K3=constant, 1.82 for metric units.
12.5 Particulate Concentration.
=constant, 0.643 for English units.
mn 12.7 Proportional Rate Variation. Calculate
cs = K 2 Eq. 5G-2 PR for each 10-minute interval, i, of the test
Vm (std ) run.
⎛ θ (Vmi Vs Tm Tsi ) ⎞
PR = ⎜ ⎟ × 100 Eq. 5G-5
⎝ 10 (Vm Vsi Ts Tmi ) ⎠
Alternate calculation procedures for pro- 11.0, respectively, may be used in lieu of
portional rate variation may be used if other similar sections in Method 5G. Operation of
sample flow rate data (e.g., orifice flow me- the Method 5H sampling train in the dilution
ters or rotameters) are monitored to main- tunnel is as described in Section 8.10 of this
tain proportional sampling rates. The pro- method. Filter temperatures and condenser
portional rate variations shall be calculated conditions are as described in Method 5H. No
for each 10-minute interval by comparing the adjustment to the measured particulate mat-
stack to nozzle velocity ratio for each 10- ter emission rate (Equation 5G–4, Section
minute interval to the average stack to noz- 12.6) is to be applied to the particulate emis-
zle velocity ratio for the test run. Propor- sion rate measured by this alternative meth-
tional rate variation may be calculated for
od.
intervals shorter than 10 minutes with ap-
16.2 Dual Sampling Trains. Two sampling
propriate revisions to Equation 5G–5. If no
ER17OC00.163</MATH>
more than 10 percent of the PR values for all trains may be operated simultaneously at
the intervals exceed 90 percent ≤ PR ≤ 110 sample flow rates other than that specified
percent, and if no PR value for any interval in Section 8.10, provided that the following
exceeds 80 percent ≤ PR ≤ 120 percent, the re- specifications are met.
sults are acceptable. If the PR values for the 16.2.1 Sampling Train. The sampling train
test run are judged to be unacceptable, re- configuration shall be the same as specified
ER17OC00.162</MATH>
port the test run emission results, but do not in Section 6.1.1, except the probe, filter, and
include the results in calculating the weight- filter holder need not be the same sizes as
ed average emission rate, and repeat the test specified in the applicable sections. Filter
run. holders of plastic materials such as Nalgene
or polycarbonate materials may be used (the
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] Gelman 1119 filter holder has been found
ER17OC00.161</MATH>
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] suitable for this purpose). With such mate-
rials, it is recommended that solvents not be
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] used in sample recovery. The filter face ve-
locity shall not exceed 150 mm/sec (30 ft/min)
16.0 Alternative Procedures
during the test run. The dry gas meter shall

16.1 Method 5H Sampling Train. The sam- be calibrated for the same flow rate range as
ER17OC00.160</MATH>
pling train and sample collection, recovery, encountered during the test runs. Two sepa-
and analysis procedures described in Method rate, complete sampling trains are required
5H, Sections 6.1.1, 7.1, 7.2, 8.1, 8.10, 8.11, and for each test run.
218
ER17OC00.159</MATH>
16.2.2 Probe Location. Locate the two weight, rinse the probe with acetone to re-
probes in the dilution tunnel at the same move moisture before desiccating prior to
level (see Section 6.1.4.3). Two sample ports the test run. Following the test run, trans-
are necessary. Locate the probe inlets within port the probe and filter holder to the desic-
the 50 mm (2 in.) diameter centroidal area of cator, and uncap the openings of the probe
the dilution tunnel no closer than 25 mm (1 and the filter holder assembly. Desiccate for
in.) apart. 24 hours and weigh to a constant weight. Re-
16.2.3 Sampling Train Operation. Operate port the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.
the sampling trains as specified in Section 16.2.5 Calculations. Calculate an emission
8.10, maintaining proportional sampling rate (Section 12.6) for the sample from each
rates and starting and stopping the two sam- sampling train separately and determine the
pling trains simultaneously. The pitot values average emission rate for the two values.
as described in Section 8.5.2 shall be used to The two emission rates shall not differ by
adjust sampling rates in both sampling more than 7.5 percent from the average emis-
trains. sion rate, or 7.5 percent of the weighted aver-
16.2.4 Recovery and Analysis of Sample. age emission rate limit in the applicable sub-
Recover and analyze the samples from the part of the regulations, whichever is greater.
two sampling trains separately, as specified If this specification is not met, the results
in Sections 8.12 and 11.0, respectively. are unacceptable. Report the results, but do
16.2.4.1 For this alternative procedure, the not include the results in calculating the
probe and filter holder assembly may be weighted average emission rate. Repeat the
weighed without sample recovery (use no sol- test run until acceptable results are
vents) described above in order to determine achieved, report the average emission rate
the sample weight gains. For this approach, for the acceptable test run, and use the aver-
weigh the clean, dry probe and filter holder age in calculating the weighted average
assembly upstream of the front filter (with- emission rate.
out filters) to the nearest 0.1 mg to establish
the tare weights. The filter holder section 17.0 References
between the front and second filter need not
be weighed. At the end of the test run, care- Same as Method 5, Section 17.0, References
fully clean the outside of the probe, cap the 1 through 11, with the addition of the fol-
ends, and identify the sample (label). Re- lowing:
move the filters from the filter holder as- 1. Oregon Department of Environmental
semblies as described for container Nos. 1 Quality. Standard Method for Measuring the
and 1A in Section 8.12.2.1. Reassemble the fil- Emissions and Efficiencies of Woodstoves.
ter holder assembly, cap the ends, identify June 8, 1984. Pursuant to Oregon Administra-
the sample (label), and transfer all the sam- tive Rules Chapter 340, Division 21.
ples to the laboratory weighing area for final 2. American Society for Testing and Mate-
weighing. Requirements for capping and rials. Proposed Test Methods for Heating
transport of sample containers are not appli- Performance and Emissions of Residential
cable if sample recovery and analysis occur Wood-fired Closed Combustion-Chamber
in the same room. Heating Appliances. E–6 Proposal P 180. Au-
16.2.4.2 For this alternative procedure, fil- gust 1986.
ters may be weighed directly without a petri
dish. If the probe and filter holder assembly 18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
are to be weighed to determine the sample Validation Data
219
220
ER17OC00.164</GPH>
221
ER17OC00.165</GPH>
222
ER17OC00.166</GPH>
METHOD 5H—DETERMINATION OF PARTICULATE tain reliable results, persons using this

MATTER EMISSIONS FROM WOOD HEATERS method should have a thorough knowledge of
FROM A STACK LOCATION at least the following additional test meth-
ods: Method 2, Method 3, Method 5, Method
NOTE: This method does not include all of 5G, Method 6, Method 6C, Method 16A, and
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- Method 28.

lytical) essential to its performance. Some 1.0 Scope and Application
material is incorporated by reference from 1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No
other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob- CAS number assigned.
223
ER17OC00.167</GPH>
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- 6.1.2 Barometer. Same as Method 5, Sec-
ble for the determination of PM and condens- tion 6.2.
ible emissions from wood heaters. 6.1.3 Stack Gas Flow Rate Measurement
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to System. A schematic of an example test sys-
the requirements of this method will en- tem is shown in Figure 5H–2. The flow rate
hance the quality of the data obtained from measurement system consists of the fol-
air pollutant sampling methods. lowing components:
6.1.3.1 Sample Probe. A glass or stainless
2.0 Summary of Method steel sampling probe.
2.1 Particulate matter is withdrawn pro- 6.1.3.2 Gas Conditioning System. A high
portionally from the wood heater exhaust density filter to remove particulate matter
and is collected on two glass fiber filters sep- and a condenser capable of lowering the dew
arated by impingers immersed in an ice point of the gas to less than 5 °C (40 °F). Des-
water bath. The first filter is maintained at iccant, such as Drierite, may be used to dry
a temperature of no greater than 120 °C (248 the sample gas. Do not use silica gel.
6.1.3.3 Pump. An inert (e.g., Teflon or
°F). The second filter and the impinger sys-
stainless steel heads) sampling pump capable
tem are cooled such that the temperature of
of delivering more than the total amount of
the gas exiting the second filter is no greater
sample required in the manufacturer’s in-
than 20 °C (68 °F). The particulate mass col-
structions for the individual instruments. A
lected in the probe, on the filters, and in the
means of controlling the analyzer flow rate
impingers is determined gravimetrically
and a device for determining proper sample
after the removal of uncombined water.
flow rate (e.g., precision rotameter, pressure
3.0 Definitions gauge downstream of all flow controls) shall
be provided at the analyzer. The require-
Same as in Method 6C, Section 3.0. ments for measuring and controlling the an-
alyzer flow rate are not applicable if data are
4.0 Interferences [Reserved] presented that demonstrate that the ana-
5.0 Safety lyzer is insensitive to flow variations over
the range encountered during the test.
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve 6.1.3.4 Carbon Monoxide (CO) Analyzer.
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- Any analyzer capable of providing a measure
ment. This test method may not address all of CO in the range of 0 to 10 percent by vol-
of the safety problems associated with its ume at least once every 10 minutes.
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this 6.1.3.5 Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Analyzer.
test method to establish appropriate safety Any analyzer capable of providing a measure
and health practices and to determine the of CO2 in the range of 0 to 25 percent by vol-
applicability of regulatory limitations prior ume at least once every 10 minutes.
to performing this test method. NOTE: Analyzers with ranges less than
those specified above may be used provided
actual concentrations do not exceed the
6.1 Sample Collection. The following range of the analyzer.
items are required for sample collection: 6.1.3.6 Manifold. A sampling tube capable
6.1.1 Sampling Train. The sampling train of delivering the sample gas to two analyzers
configuration is shown in Figure 5H–1. Same and handling an excess of the total amount
as Method 5, Section 6.1.1, with the exception used by the analyzers. The excess gas is ex-
of the following: hausted through a separate port.
6.1.1.1 Probe Nozzle. The nozzle is op- 6.1.3.7 Recorders (optional). To provide a
tional; a straight sampling probe without a permanent record of the analyzer outputs.
nozzle is an acceptable alternative. 6.1.4 Proportional Gas Flow Rate System.
6.1.1.2 Probe Liner. Same as Method 5, To monitor stack flow rate changes and pro-
Section 6.1.1.2, except that the maximum vide a measurement that can be used to ad-
length of the sample probe shall be 0.6 m (2 just and maintain particulate sampling flow
ft) and probe heating is optional. rates proportional to the stack gas flow rate.
6.1.1.3 Filter Holders. Two each of A schematic of the proportional flow rate
borosilicate glass, with a glass frit or stain- system is shown in Figure 5H–2 and consists
less steel filter support and a silicone rubber, of the following components:
Teflon, or Viton gasket. The holder design 6.1.4.1 Tracer Gas Injection System. To
shall provide a positive seal against leakage inject a known concentration of sulfur diox-
from the outside or around the filter. The ide (SO2) into the flue. The tracer gas injec-
front filter holder shall be attached imme- tion system consists of a cylinder of SO2, a
diately at the outlet of the probe and prior gas cylinder regulator, a stainless steel nee-
to the first impinger. The second filter hold- dle valve or flow controller, a nonreactive
er shall be attached on the outlet of the (stainless steel and glass) rotameter, and an
third impinger and prior to the inlet of the injection loop to disperse the SO2 evenly in
fourth (silica gel) impinger. the flue.
224
6.1.4.2 Sample Probe. A glass or stainless 7.3.4.2 SO2 Injection Gas. A known con-
steel sampling probe. centration of SO2 in N2. The concentration
6.1.4.3 Gas Conditioning System. A com- must be at least 2 percent SO2 with a max-
bustor as described in Method 16A, Sections imum of 100 percent SO2.
6.1.5 and 6.1.6, followed by a high density fil-
ter to remove particulate matter, and a con- 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport,
denser capable of lowering the dew point of and Storage
the gas to less than 5 °C (40 °F). Desiccant, 8.1 Pretest Preparation. Same as Method
such as Drierite, may be used to dry the 5, Section 8.1.
sample gas. Do not use silica gel. 8.2 Calibration Gas and SO2 Injection Gas
6.1.4.4 Pump. Same as described in Sec- Concentration Verification, Sampling Sys-
tion 6.1.3.3. tem Bias Check, Response Time Test, and
6.1.4.5 SO2 Analyzer. Any analyzer capable Zero and Calibration Drift Tests. Same as
of providing a measure of the SO2 concentra- Method 6C, Sections 8.2.1, 8.2.3, 8.2.4, and 8.5,
tion in the range of 0 to 1,000 ppm by volume respectively, except that for verification of
(or other range necessary to measure the SO2 CO and CO2 gas concentrations, substitute
concentration) at least once every 10 min- Method 3 for Method 6.
utes. 8.3 Preliminary Determinations.
6.1.4.6 Recorder (optional). To provide a 8.3.1 Sampling Location. The sampling lo-
permanent record of the analyzer outputs. cation for the particulate sampling probe
NOTE: Other tracer gas systems, including shall be 2.45 ±0.15 m (8 ±0.5 ft) above the plat-
helium gas systems, are acceptable for deter- form upon which the wood heater is placed
mination of instantaneous proportional sam- (i.e., the top of the scale).
pling rates. 8.3.2 Sampling Probe and Nozzle. Select a
6.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, nozzle, if used, sized for the range of velocity
Section 6.2. heads, such that it is not necessary to
6.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 5, change the nozzle size in order to maintain
Section 6.3, with the addition of the fol- proportional sampling rates. During the run,
lowing: do not change the nozzle size. Select a suit-
6.3.1 Separatory Funnel. Glass or Teflon, able probe liner and probe length to effect
500-ml or greater. minimum blockage.
8.4 Preparation of Particulate Sampling
7.0 Reagents and Standards Train. Same as Method 5, Section 8.3, with
7.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5, the exception of the following:
Section 7.1, including deionized distilled 8.4.1 The train should be assembled as
water. shown in Figure 5H–1.
7.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, 8.4.2 A glass cyclone may not be used be-
Section 7.2. tween the probe and filter holder.
7.3 Sample Analysis. The following re- 8.5 Leak-Check Procedures.
agents and standards are required for sample 8.5.1 Leak-Check of Metering System
analysis: Shown in Figure 5H–1. That portion of the
7.3.1 Acetone. Same as Method 5 Section sampling train from the pump to the orifice
7.2. meter shall be leak-checked after each cer-
7.3.2 Dichloromethane (Methylene Chlo- tification or audit test. Use the procedure
ride). Reagent grade, <0.001 percent residue described in Method 5, Section 8.4.1.
in glass bottles. 8.5.2 Pretest Leak-Check. A pretest leak-
7.3.3 Desiccant. Anhydrous calcium sul- check of the sampling train is recommended,
fate, calcium chloride, or silica gel, indi- but not required. If the pretest leak-check is
cating type. conducted, the procedures outlined in Meth-
7.3.4 Cylinder Gases. For the purposes of od 5, Section 8.5.2 should be used. A vacuum
this procedure, span value is defined as the of 130 mm Hg (5 in. Hg) may be used instead
upper limit of the range specified for each of 380 mm Hg (15 in. Hg).
analyzer as described in Section 6.1.3.4 or 8.5.2 Leak-Checks During Sample Run. If,
6.1.3.5. If an analyzer with a range different during the sampling run, a component (e.g.,
from that specified in this method is used, filter assembly or impinger) change becomes
the span value shall be equal to the upper necessary, conduct a leak-check as described
limit of the range for the analyzer used (see in Method 5, Section 8.4.3.
NOTE in Section 6.1.3.5). 8.5.3 Post-Test Leak-Check. A leak-check
7.3.4.1 Calibration Gases. The calibration is mandatory at the conclusion of each sam-
gases for the CO2, CO, and SO2 analyzers pling run. The leak-check shall be performed
shall be CO2 in nitrogen (N2), CO in N2, and in accordance with the procedures outlined
SO2 in N2, respectively. CO2 and CO calibra- in Method 5, Section 8.4.4, except that a vac-
tion gases may be combined in a single cyl- uum of 130 mm Hg (5 in. Hg) or the greatest
inder. Use three calibration gases as speci- vacuum measured during the test run,
fied in Method 6C, Sections 7.2.1 through whichever is greater, may be used instead of
7.2.3. 380 mm Hg (15 in. Hg).
225
8.6 Tracer Gas Procedure. A schematic of halted. Take other readings as indicated on
the tracer gas injection and sampling sys- Figure 5H–3 at least once each 10 minutes
tems is shown in Figure 5H–2. during the test run.
8.6.1 SO2 Injection Probe. Install the SO2 8.10.2 Remove the nozzle cap, verify that
injection probe and dispersion loop in the the filter and probe heating systems are up
stack at a location 2.9 ±0.15 m (9.5 ±0.5 ft) to temperature, and that the probe is prop-
above the sampling platform. erly positioned. Position the nozzle, if used,
8.6.2 SO2 Sampling Probe. Install the SO2 facing into gas stream, or the probe tip in
sampling probe at the centroid of the stack the 50 mm (2 in.) centroidal area of the
at a location 4.1 ±0.15 m (13.5 ±0.5 ft) above stack.
the sampling platform.
8.10.3 Be careful not to bump the probe tip
8.7 Flow Rate Measurement System. A
into the stack wall when removing or insert-
schematic of the flow rate measurement sys-
ing the probe through the porthole; this
tem is shown in Figure 5H–2. Locate the flow
minimizes the chance of extracting deposited
rate measurement sampling probe at the
centroid of the stack at a location 2.3 ±0.3 m material.
(7.5 ±1 ft) above the sampling platform. 8.10.4 When the probe is in position, block
8.8 Tracer Gas Procedure. Within 1 off the openings around the probe and port-
minute after closing the wood heater door at hole to prevent unrepresentative dilution of
the start of the test run (as defined in Meth- the gas stream.
od 28, Section 8.8.1), meter a known con- 8.10.5 Begin sampling at the start of the
centration of SO2 tracer gas at a constant test run as defined in Method 28, Section
flow rate into the wood heater stack. Mon- 8.8.1, start the sample pump, and adjust the
itor the SO2 concentration in the stack, and sample flow rate to between 0.003 and 0.014
record the SO2 concentrations at 10-minute m3/min (0.1 and 0.5 cfm). Adjust the sample
intervals or more often. Adjust the particu- flow rate proportionally to the stack gas
late sampling flow rate proportionally to the flow during the test run according to the
SO2 concentration changes using Equation procedures outlined in Section 8. Maintain a
5H–6 (e.g., the SO2 concentration at the first proportional sampling rate (within 10 per-
10-minute reading is measured to be 100 ppm; cent of the desired value) and a filter holder
the next 10 minute SO2 concentration is temperature no greater than 120 °C (248 °F).
measured to be 75 ppm: the particulate sam- 8.10.6 During the test run, make periodic
ple flow rate is adjusted from the initial 0.15 adjustments to keep the temperature around
cfm to 0.20 cfm). A check for proportional the filter holder at the proper level. Add
rate variation shall be made at the comple- more ice to the impinger box and, if nec-
tion of the test run using Equation 5H–10. essary, salt to maintain a temperature of
8.9 Volumetric Flow Rate Procedure. less than 20 °C (68 °F) at the condenser/silica
Apply stoichiometric relationships to the gel outlet.
wood combustion process in determining the
8.10.7 If the pressure drop across the filter
exhaust gas flow rate as follows:
becomes too high, making proportional sam-
8.9.1 Test Fuel Charge Weight. Record the
pling difficult to maintain, either filter may
test fuel charge weight (wet) as specified in
be replaced during a sample run. It is rec-
Method 28, Section 8.8.2. The wood is as-
ommended that another complete filter as-
sumed to have the following weight percent
sembly be used rather than attempting to
composition: 51 percent carbon, 7.3 percent
change the filter itself. Before a new filter
hydrogen, 41 percent oxygen. Record the
assembly is installed, conduct a leak-check
wood moisture for each fuel charge as de-
(see Section 8.5.2). The total particulate
scribed in Method 28, Section 8.6.5. The ash is
weight shall include the summation of all
assumed to have negligible effect on associ-
filter assembly catches. The total time for
ated C, H, and O concentrations after the
changing sample train components shall not
test burn.
exceed 10 minutes. No more than one compo-
8.9.2 Measured Values. Record the CO and
nent change is allowed for any test run.
CO2 concentrations in the stack on a dry
basis every 10 minutes during the test run or 8.10.8 At the end of the test run, turn off
more often. Average these values for the test the coarse adjust valve, remove the probe
run. Use as a mole fraction (e.g., 10 percent and nozzle from the stack, turn off the pump,
CO2 is recorded as 0.10) in the calculations to record the final dry gas meter reading, and
express total flow (see Equation 5H–6). conduct a post-test leak-check, as outlined
8.10 Sampling Train Operation. in Section 8.5.3.
8.10.1 For each run, record the data re- 8.11 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5,
quired on a data sheet such as the one shown Section 8.7, with the exception of the fol-
in Figure 5H–3. Be sure to record the initial lowing:
dry gas meter reading. Record the dry gas 8.11.1 Blanks. The volume of the acetone
meter readings at the beginning and end of blank may be about 50-ml, rather than 200-
each sampling time increment, when ml; a 200-ml water blank shall also be saved
changes in flow rates are made, before and for analysis.
after each leak-check, and when sampling is 8.11.2 Samples.
226
8.11.2.1 Container Nos. 1 and 1A. Treat the 8.11.2.4 Rinse impingers and graduated
two filters according to the procedures out- cylinder, if used, with acetone three times or
lined in Method 5, Section 8.7.6.1. The filters more. Avoid direct contact between the ace-
may be stored either in a single container or tone and any stopcock grease or collection of
in separate containers. any stopcock grease in the rinse solutions.
8.11.2.2 Container No. 2. Same as Method Add these rinse solutions to sample Con-
5, Section 8.7.6.2, except that the container tainer No. 2.
should not be sealed until the impinger rinse 8.11.2.5 Container No. 4. Same as Method
solution is added (see Section 8.10.2.4). 5, Section 8.7.6.3
8.11.2.3 Container No. 3. Treat the 8.12 Sample Transport. Whenever pos-
impingers as follows: Measure the liquid sible, containers should be transferred in
which is in the first three impingers to with- such a way that they remain upright at all
in 1-ml by using a graduated cylinder or by times.
weighing it to within 0.5 g by using a balance NOTE: Requirements for capping and trans-
(if one is available). Record the volume or port of sample containers are not applicable
weight of liquid present. This information is if sample recovery and analysis occur in the
required to calculate the moisture content of same room.
the effluent gas. Transfer the water from the
9.0 Quality Control
first, second, and third impingers to a glass
container. Tighten the lid on the sample con- 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
tainer so that water will not leak out. ures.
8.2 ................... Sampling system bias check ........................... Ensures that bias introduced by measurement system, minus
analyzer, is no greater than 3 percent of span.
8.2 ................... Analyzer zero and calibration drift tests .......... Ensures that bias introduced by drift in the measurement sys-
tem output during the run is no greater than 3 percent of
span.
8.5, 10.1, 12.13 Sampling equipment leak-check and calibra- Ensures accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sam-
tion; proportional sampling rate verification. ple volume.
10.1 ................. Analytical balance calibration .......................... Ensure accurate and precise measurement of collected par-
ticulate.
10.3 ................. Analyzer calibration error check ...................... Ensures that bias introduced by analyzer calibration error is
no greater than 2 percent of span.
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. 11.0 Analytical Procedure

11.1 Record the data required on a sheet
10.0 Calibration and Standardization such as the one shown in Figure 5H–4.
11.2 Handle each sample container as fol-
NOTE: Maintain a laboratory record of all lows:
calibrations. 11.2.1 Container Nos. 1 and 1A. Treat the
10.1 Volume Metering System, Tempera- two filters according to the procedures out-
ture Sensors, Barometer, and Analytical Bal- lined in Method 5, Section 11.2.1.
ance. Same as Method 5G, Sections 10.2 11.2.2 Container No. 2. Same as Method 5,
through 10.5, respectively. Section 11.2.2, except that the beaker may be
10.2 SO2 Injection Rotameter. Calibrate smaller than 250-ml.
the SO2 injection rotameter system with a 11.2.3 Container No. 3. Note the level of
soap film flowmeter or similar direct volume liquid in the container and confirm on the
measuring device with an accuracy of 2 per- analysis sheet whether leakage occurred dur-
cent. Operate the rotameter at a single reading transport. If a noticeable amount of
ing for at least three calibration runs for 10 leakage has occurred, either void the sample
or use methods, subject to the approval of
minutes each. When three consecutive cali-
the Administrator, to correct the final re-
bration flow rates agree within 5 percent, av-
sults. Determination of sample leakage is
erage the three flow rates, mark the rotam-
not applicable if sample recovery and anal-
eter at the calibrated setting, and use the ysis occur in the same room. Measure the
calibration flow rate as the SO2 injection liquid in this container either
flow rate during the test run. Repeat the ro- volumetrically to within 1-ml or gravimetri-
tameter calibration before the first certifi- cally to within 0.5 g. Transfer the contents
cation test and semiannually thereafter. to a 500-ml or larger separatory funnel. Rinse
10.3. Gas Analyzers. Same as Method 6C, the container with water, and add to the
Section 10.0. separatory funnel. Add 25-ml of
dichloromethane to the separatory funnel,
stopper and vigorously shake 1 minute, let
227
separate and transfer the dichloromethane Pbar=Barometric pressure at the sampling
(lower layer) into a tared beaker or site, mm Hg (in.Hg).
evaporating dish. Repeat twice more. It is Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg
necessary to rinse Container No. 3 with (29.92 in.Hg).
dichloromethane. This rinse is added to the Qsd=Total gas flow rate, dscm/hr (dscf/hr).
impinger extract container. Transfer the re- S1=Concentration measured at the SO2 ana-
maining water from the separatory funnel to lyzer for the first 10-minute interval, ppm.
a tared beaker or evaporating dish and evap-
Si=Concentration measured at the SO2 ana-
orate to dryness at 104 °C (220 °F). Desiccate
lyzer for the ‘‘ith’’ 10 minute interval,
and weigh to a constant weight. Evaporate
ppm.
the combined impinger water extracts at am-
bient temperature and pressure. Desiccate Tm=Absolute average dry gas meter tempera-
and weigh to a constant weight. Report both ture (see Figure 5H–3), °K (°R).
results to the nearest 0.1 mg. Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K
11.2.4 Container No. 4. Weigh the spent (528 °R).
silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the Va=volume of solvent blank, ml.
nearest 0.5 g using a balance. Vaw=Volume of solvent used in wash, ml.
11.2.5 Acetone Blank Container. Same as Vlc=Total volume of liquid collected in
Method 5, Section 11.2.4, except that the impingers and silica gel (see Figure 5H–4),
beaker may be smaller than 250 ml. ml.
11.2.6 Dichloromethane Blank Container. Vm=Volume of gas sample as measured by
Treat the same as the acetone blank. dry gas meter, dcm (dcf).
11.2.7 Water Blank Container. Transfer Vm(std)=Volume of gas sample measured by
the water to a tared 250 ml beaker and evap- the dry gas meter, corrected to standard
orate to dryness at 104 °C (220 °F). Desiccate
and weigh to a constant weight.
Vmi(std)=Volume of gas sample measured by
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations the dry gas meter during the ‘‘ith’’ 10-
minute interval, dscm (dscf).
Vw(std)=Volume of water vapor in the gas sam-
one extra significant figure beyond that of
ple, corrected to standard conditions, scm
the acquired data. Round off figures after the
(scf).
final calculation. Other forms of the equa-
tions may be used as long as they give equiv- Wa=Weight of residue in solvent wash, mg.
alent results. Y=Dry gas meter calibration factor.
12.1 Nomenclature. YCO=Measured mole fraction of CO (dry), av-
a=Sample flow rate adjustment factor. erage from Section 8.2, g/g-mole (lb/lb-
BR=Dry wood burn rate, kg/hr (lb/hr), from mole).
Method 28, Section 8.3. YCO2=Measured mole fraction of CO2 (dry),
Bws=Water vapor in the gas stream, propor- average from Section 8.2, g/g-mole (lb/lb-
tion by volume. mole).
Cs=Concentration of particulate matter in YHC=Assumed mole fraction of HC (dry), g/g-
stack gas, dry basis, corrected to standard mole (lb/lb-mole);
conditions, g/dscm (g/dscf). =0.0088 for catalytic wood heaters;
E=Particulate emission rate, g/hr (lb/hr). =0.0132 for non-catalytic wood heaters;
DH=Average pressure differential across the
=0.0080 for pellet-fired wood heaters.
orifice meter (see Figure 5H–1), mm H2O
(in. H2O). 10=Length of first sampling period, min.
La=Maximum acceptable leakage rate for ei- 13.6=Specific gravity of mercury.
ther a post-test leak-check or for a leak- 100=Conversion to percent.
check following a component change; equal q=Total sampling time, min.
to 0.00057 cmm (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of q1=Sampling time interval, from the begin-
the average sampling rate, whichever is ning of a run until the first component
less. change, min.
L1=Individual leakage rate observed during 12.2 Average Dry Gas Meter Temperature
the leak-check conducted before a compo- and Average Orifice Pressure Drop. See data
nent change, cmm (cfm). sheet (Figure 5H–3).
Lp=Leakage rate observed during the post- 12.3 Dry Gas Volume. Same as Method 5,
test leak-check, cmm (cfm). Section 12.3.
mn=Total amount of particulate matter col- 12.4 Volume of Water Vapor.
lected, mg.
Ma=Mass of residue of solvent after evapo- Vw (std ) = K 2 V1c Eq. 5H-1
ration, mg.
NC=Grams of carbon/gram of dry fuel (lb/lb), Where:

equal to 0.0425.
K2=0.001333 m3/ml for metric units.
NT=Total dry moles of exhaust gas/kg of dry
wood burned, g-moles/kg (lb-moles/lb). K2=0.04707 ft3/ml for English units.
PR=Percent of proportional sampling rate. 12.5 Moisture Content.
228
ER17OC00.168</MATH>
12.11 Total Stack Gas Flow Rate.
Vw (std )
Bws = Eq. 5H-2 Q sd = K 4 N T BR Eq. 5H- 7
Vm (std ) + Vw (std ) Where:
12.6 Solvent Wash Blank. K4=0.02406 dscm/g-mole for metric units.
K4=384.8 dscf/lb-mole for English units.
M a Vaw 12.12 Particulate Emission Rate.
Wa = Eq. 5H-3
Va E = Cs Q sd Eq. 5H-8
12.7 Total Particulate Weight. Determine 12.13 Proportional Rate Variation. Cal-
the total particulate catch from the sum of culate PR for each 10-minute interval, i, of
the weights obtained from containers 1, 2, 3, the test run.
and 4 less the appropriate solvent blanks (see
Figure 5H–4).
θ Si Vmi (std )
NOTE: Refer to Method 5, Section 8.5 to as- PR = N × 100 Eq. 5H-9
[ ]
sist in calculation of results involving two
filter assemblies. 10 ∑ Si Vmi (std )
12.8 Particulate Concentration. i =1
12.14 Acceptable Results. If no more than
0.001g m n 15 percent of the PR values for all the inter-
Cs = Eq. 5H-4 vals fall outside the range 90 percent ≤ PR ≤
mg Vm(std) 110 percent, and if no PR value for any inter-
12.9 Sample Flow Rate Adjustment. val falls outside the range 75 ≤ PR ≤ 125 per-
cent, the results are acceptable. If the PR
ER17OC00.176</MATH>
S1 values for the test runs are judged to be un-
a= Eq. 5H-5 acceptable, report the test run emission re-
Si sults, but do not include the test run results
in calculating the weighted average emission
12.10 Carbon Balance for Total Moles of rate, and repeat the test.
Exhaust Gas (dry)/kg of Wood Burned in the
Exhaust Gas.
ER17OC00.175</MATH>
K 3N C 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]

NT = Eq. 5H-6
YCO2 + YCO + YHC 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
Where: 16.0 References
ER17OC00.174</MATH>
K3=1000 g/kg for metric units. Same as Method 5G, Section 17.0.
K3=1.0 lb/lb for English units.
NOTE: The NOX/SOX portion of the gas is as- 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
sumed to be negligible. Validation Data
ER17OC00.173</MATH>
ER17OC00.172</MATH>
ER17OC00.171</MATH>
ER17OC00.170</MATH>
229
ER17OC00.169</MATH>
230
ER17OC00.177</GPH>
231
ER17OC00.178</GPH>
232
ER17OC00.179</GPH>
Environmental Protection Agency Pt. 60, App. A–3, Meth. 5I
METHOD 5I—DETERMINATION OF LOW LEVEL reliable results, persons using this method
PARTICULATE MATTER EMISSIONS FROM should have experience with and a thorough
STATIONARY SOURCES knowledge of the following Methods: Meth-
ods 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- 1. Scope and Application.

lytical) essential to its performance. Certain 1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No
information is contained in other EPA proce- CAS number assigned.
dures found in this part. Therefore, to obtain
233
ER17OC00.180</GPH>
Pt. 60, App. A–3, Meth. 5I 40 CFR Ch. I (7–1–09 Edition)
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- the average particulate matter concentra-
ble for the determination of low level partic- tion on a mass per volume basis and the vol-
ulate matter (PM) emissions from stationary ume of gas collected by the sample train.
sources. The method is most effective for The tester can generally control the volume
total PM catches of 50 mg or less. This meth- of gas collected by increasing the sampling
od was initially developed for performing time or to a lesser extent by increasing the
correlation of manual PM measurements to rate at which sample is collected. If the test-
PM continuous emission monitoring systems er has a reasonable estimate of the PM con-
(CEMS), however it is also useful for other centration from the source, the tester can
low particulate concentration applications. ensure that the target catch is collected by
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to sampling the appropriate gas volume.
the requirements of this method will en- b. However, if the source has a very low
hance the quality of the data obtained from particulate matter concentration in the
air pollutant sampling methods. Method 5I stack, the volume of gas sampled may need
requires the use of paired trains. Acceptance to be very large which leads to unacceptably
criteria for the identification of data quality long sampling times. When determining
outliers from the paired trains are provided compliance with an emission limit, EPA
in Section 12.2 of this Method. guidance has been that the tester does not
always have to collect the target catch. In-
2. Summary of Method. stead, we have suggested that the tester
2.1. Description. The system setup and op- sample enough stack gas, that if the source
eration is essentially identical to Method 5. were exactly at the level of the emission
Particulate is withdrawn isokinetically from standard, the sample catch would equal the
the source and collected on a 47 mm glass target catch. Thus, if at the end of the test
fiber filter maintained at a temperature of the catch were smaller than the target, we
120 ±14°C (248 ±25°F). The PM mass is deter- could still conclude that the source is in
mined by gravimetric analysis after the re- compliance though we might not know the
moval of uncombined water. Specific meas- exact emission level. This volume of gas be-
ures in this procedure designed to improve comes a target volume that can be trans-
system performance at low particulate levels lated into a target sampling time by assum-
include: ing an average sampling rate. Because the
1. Improved sample handling procedures MDL forms the basis for our guidance on tar-
2 Light weight sample filter assembly get sampling times, EPA has conducted a
3. Use of low residue grade acetone systematic laboratory study to define what
Accuracy is improved through the minimiza- is the MDL for Method 5 and determined the
tion of systemic errors associated with sam- Method to have a calculated practical quan-
ple handling and weighing procedures. High titation limit (PQL) of 3 mg of PM and an
purity reagents, all glass, grease free, sample MDL of 1 mg.
train components, and light weight filter as- c. Based on these results, the EPA has con-
semblies and beakers, each contribute to the cluded that for PM testing, the target catch
overall objective of improved precision and must be no less than 3 mg. Those sample
accuracy at low particulate concentrations. catches between 1 mg and 3 mg are between
2.2 Paired Trains. This method must be the detection limit and the limit of quan-
performed using a paired train configuration. titation. If a tester uses the target catch to
These trains may be operated as co-located estimate a target sampling time that results
trains (to trains operating collecting from in sample catches that are less than 3 mg,
one port) or as simultaneous trains (separate you should not automatically reject the re-
trains operating from different ports at the sults. If the tester calculated the target sam-
same time). Procedures for calculating preci- pling time as described above by assuming
sion of the paired trains are provided in Sec- that the source was at the level of the emis-
tion 12. sion limit, the results would still be valid for
2.3 Detection Limit. a. Typical detection determining that the source was in compli-
limit for manual particulate testing is 0.5 ance. For purposes other than determining
mg. This mass is also cited as the accepted compliance, results should be divided into
weight variability limit in determination of two categories—those that fall between 3 mg
‘‘constant weight’’ as cited in Section 8.1.2 of and 1 mg and those that are below 1 mg. A
this Method. EPA has performed studies to sample catch between 1 and 3 mg may be
provide guidance on minimum PM catch. used for such purposes as calculating emis-
The minimum detection limit (MDL) is the sion rates with the understanding that the
minimum concentration or amount of an resulting emission rates can have a high de-
analyte that can be determined with a speci- gree of uncertainty. Results of less than 1
fied degree of confidence to be different from mg should not be used for calculating emis-
zero. We have defined the minimum or target sion rates or pollutant concentrations.
catch as a concentration or amount suffi- d. When collecting small catches such as 3
ciently larger than the MDL to ensure that mg, bias becomes an important issue. Source
the results are reliable and repeatable. The testers must use extreme caution to reach
particulate matter catch is the product of the PQL of 3 mg by assuring that sampling
234
probes are very clean (perhaps confirmed by safety concerns associated with its use. It is
low blank weights) before use in the field. the responsibility of the user to establish ap-
They should also use low tare weight sample propriate safety and health practices and to
containers, and establish a well-controlled determine the applicability and observe all
balance room to weigh the samples. regulatory limitations before using this
method.
3. Definitions.
6. Equipment and Supplies.
3.1 Light Weight Filter Housing. A smaller
housing that allows the entire filtering sys- 6.1 Sample Collection Equipment and
tem to be weighed before and after sample Supplies. The sample train is nearly iden-
collection. (See. 6.1.3) tical in configuration to the train depicted
3.2 Paired Train. Sample systems trains in Figure 5–1 of Method 5. The primary dif-
may be operated as co-located trains (two ference in the sample trains is the light-
sample probes attached to each other in the weight Method 5I filter assembly that at-
same port) or as simultaneous trains (two taches directly to the exit to the probe.
separate trains operating from different Other exceptions and additions specific to
ports at the same time). Method 5I include:
6.1.1 Probe Nozzle. Same as Method 5,
4. Interferences. with the exception that it must be con-
a. There are numerous potential structed of borosilicate or quartz glass tub-
interferents that may be encountered during ing.
performance of Method 5I sampling and anal- 6.1.2 Probe Liner. Same as Method 5, with
yses. This Method should be considered more the exception that it must be constructed of
sensitive to the normal interferents typi- borosilicate or quartz glass tubing.
cally encountered during particulate testing 6.1.3 Filter Holder. The filter holder is
because of the low level concentrations of constructed of borosilicate or quartz glass
the flue gas stream being sampled. front cover designed to hold a 47-mm glass
b. Care must be taken to minimize field fiber filter, with a wafer thin stainless steel
contamination, especially to the filter hous- (SS) filter support, a silicone rubber or Viton
ing since the entire unit is weighed (not just O-ring, and Teflon tape seal. This holder de-
the filter media). Care must also be taken to sign will provide a positive seal against leak-
ensure that no sample is lost during the sam- age from the outside or around the filter.
The filter holder assembly fits into a SS fil-
pling process (such as during port changes,
ter holder and attaches directly to the outlet
removal of the filter assemblies from the
of the probe. The tare weight of the filter,
probes, etc.).
borosilicate or quartz glass holder, SS filter
c. Balance room conditions are a source of
support, O-ring and Teflon tape seal gen-
concern for analysis of the low level samples.
erally will not exceed approximately 35
Relative humidity, ambient temperatures
grams. The filter holder is designed to use a
variations, air draft, vibrations and even
47-mm glass fiber filter meeting the quality
barometric pressure can affect consistent re-
criteria in of Method 5. These units are com-
producible measurements of the sample
mercially available from several source test-
media. Ideally, the same analyst who per-
ing equipment vendors. Once the filter hold-
forms the tare weights should perform the
er has been assembled, desiccated and tared,
final weights to minimize the effects of pro- protect it from external sources of contami-
cedural differences specific to the analysts. nation by covering the front socket with a
d. Attention must also be provided to ground glass plug. Secure the plug with an
weighing artifacts caused by electrostatic impinger clamp or other item that will en-
charges which may have to be discharged or sure a leak-free fitting.
neutralized prior to sample analysis. Static 6.2 Sample Recovery Equipment and Sup-
charge can affect consistent and reliable plies. Same as Method 5, with the following
gravimetric readings in low humidity envi- exceptions:
ronments. Method 5I recommends a relative 6.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brush-
humidity of less than 50 percent in the es. Teflon or nylon bristle brushes with
weighing room environment used for sample stainless steel wire handles, should be used
analyses. However, lower humidity may be to clean the probe. The probe brush must
encountered or required to address sample have extensions (at least as long as the
precision problems. Low humidity conditions probe) of Teflon, nylon or similarly inert
can increase the effects of static charge. material. The brushes must be properly sized
e. Other interferences associated with typ- and shaped for brushing out the probe liner
ical Method 5 testing (sulfates, acid gases, and nozzle.
etc.) are also applicable to Method 5I. 6.2.2 Wash Bottles. Two Teflon wash bot-
tles are recommended however, polyethylene

5. Safety.
wash bottles may be used at the option of
Disclaimer. This method may involve haz- the tester. Acetone should not be stored in
ardous materials, operations, and equipment. polyethylene bottles for longer than one
This test method may not address all of the month.
235
6.2.3 Filter Assembly Transport. A system 8. Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
should be employed to minimize contamina- and Transport.
tion of the filter assemblies during transport
8.1 Pretest Preparation. Same as Method
to and from the field test location. A car-
5 with several exceptions specific to filter as-
rying case or packet with clean compart- sembly and weighing.
ments of sufficient size to accommodate
8.1.1 Filter Assembly. Uniquely identify
each filter assembly can be used. This sys-
each filter support before loading filters into
tem should have an air tight seal to further the holder assembly. This can be done with
minimize contamination during transport to an engraving tool or a permanent marker.
and from the field. Use powder free latex surgical gloves when-
6.3 Analysis Equipment and Supplies. ever handling the filter holder assemblies.
Same as Method 5, with the following excep- Place the O-ring on the back of the filter
tion: housing in the O-ring groove. Place a 47 mm
6.3.1 Lightweight Beaker Liner. Teflon or glass fiber filter on the O-ring with the face
other lightweight beaker liners are used for down. Place a stainless steel filter holder
the analysis of the probe and nozzle rinses. against the back of the filter. Carefully wrap
These light weight liners are used in place of 5 mm (1⁄4 inch) wide Teflon’’ tape one
the borosilicate glass beakers typically used timearound the outside of the filter holder
for the Method 5 weighings in order to im- overlapping the stainless steel filter support
prove sample analytical precision. by approximately 2.5 mm (1⁄8 inch). Gently
6.3.2 Anti-static Treatment. Commer- brush the Teflon tape down on the back of
cially available gaseous anti-static rinses the stainless steel filter support. Store the
are recommended for low humidity situa- filter assemblies in their transport case until
tions that contribute to static charge prob- time for weighing or field use.
lems. 8.1.2 Filter Weighing Procedures. a. Des-
iccate the entire filter holder assemblies at
7. Reagents and Standards. 20 ±5.6°C (68 ±10°F) and ambient pressure for
at least 24 hours. Weigh at intervals of at
7.1 Sampling Reagents. The reagents used least 6 hours to a constant weight, i.e., 0.5
in sampling are the same as Method 5 with mg change from previous weighing. Record
the following exceptions: the results to the nearest 0.1 mg. During
7.1.1 Filters. The quality specifications each weighing, the filter holder assemblies
for the filters are identical to those cited for must not be exposed to the laboratory at-
Method 5. The only difference is the filter di- mosphere for a period greater than 2 minutes
ameter of 47 millimeters. and a relative humidity above 50 percent.
7.1.2 Stopcock Grease. Stopcock grease Lower relative humidity may be required in
cannot be used with this sampling train. We order to improve analytical precision. How-
recommend that the sampling train be as- ever, low humidity conditions increase static
sembled with glass joints containing O-ring charge to the sample media.
seals or screw-on connectors, or similar. b. Alternatively (unless otherwise specified
by the Administrator), the filters holder as-
7.1.3 Acetone. Low residue type acetone,
semblies may be oven dried at 105°C (220°F)
≤0.001 percent residue, purchased in glass
for a minimum of 2 hours, desiccated for 2
bottles is used for the recovery of particulate hours, and weighed. The procedure used for
matter from the probe and nozzle. Acetone the tare weigh must also be used for the final
from metal containers generally has a high weight determination.
residue blank and should not be used. Some- c. Experience has shown that weighing un-
times, suppliers transfer acetone to glass certainties are not only related to the bal-
bottles from metal containers; thus, acetone ance performance but to the entire weighing
blanks must be run prior to field use and procedure. Therefore, before performing any
only acetone with low blank values (≤0.001 measurement, establish and follow standard
percent residue, as specified by the manufac- operating procedures, taking into account
turer) must be used. Acetone blank correc- the sampling equipment and filters to be
tion is not allowed for this method; there- used.
fore, it is critical that high purity reagents 8.2 Preliminary Determinations. Select
be purchased and verified prior to use. the sampling site, traverse points, probe noz-
7.1.4 Gloves. Disposable, powder-free, zle, and probe length as specified in Method
latex surgical gloves, or their equivalent are 5.
used at all times when handling the filter 8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. Same
housings or performing sample recovery. as Method 5, Section 8.3, with the following
7.2 Standards. There are no applicable exception: During preparation and assembly
standards or audit samples commercially of the sampling train, keep all openings
available for Method 5I analyses. where contamination can occur covered until
justbefore assembly or until sampling is
about to begin. Using gloves, place a labeled
236
(identified) and weighed filter holder assem- move the umbilical cord from the last im-
bly into the stainless steel holder. Then pinger and cap the impinger. If a flexible line
place this whole unit in the Method 5 hot is used between the first impinger condenser
box, and attach it to the probe. Do not use and the filter holder, disconnect the line at
stopcock grease. the filter holder and let any condensed water
8.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Same as or liquid drain into the impingers or con-
Method 5. denser.
8.5 Sampling Train Operation. 8.6.2 Transfer the probe and filter-im-
8.5.1. Operation. Operate the sampling pinger assembly to the cleanup area. This
train in a manner consistent with those de- area must be clean and protected from the
scribed in Methods 1, 2, 4 and 5 in terms of wind so that the possibility of losing any of
the number of sample points and minimum the sample will be minimized.
time per point. The sample rate and total 8.6.3 Inspect the train prior to and during
gas volume should be adjusted based on esti- disassembly and note any abnormal condi-
mated grain loading of the source being tions such as particulate color, filter load-
characterized. The total sampling time must ing, impinger liquid color, etc.
be a function of the estimated mass of par- 8.6.4 Container No. 1, Filter Assembly.
ticulate to be collected for the run. Targeted Carefully remove the cooled filter holder as-
mass to be collected in a typical Method 5I sembly from the Method 5 hot box and place
sample train should be on the order of 10 to it in the transport case. Use a pair of clean
20 mg. Method 5I is most appropriate for gloves to handle the filter holder assembly.
total collected masses of less than 50 milli- 8.6.5 Container No. 2, Probe Nozzle and
grams, however, there is not an exact partic- Probe Liner Rinse. Rinse the probe and noz-
ulate loading cutoff, and it is likely that zle components with acetone. Be certain that
some runs may exceed 50 mg. Exceeding 50 the probe and nozzle brushes have been thor-
mg (or less than 10 mg) for the sample mass oughly rinsed prior to use as they can be a
does not necessarily justify invalidating a source of contamination.
sample run if all other Method criteria are 8.6.6 All Other Train Components.
met. (Impingers) Same as Method 5.
8.5.2 Paired Train. This Method requires 8.7 Sample Storage and Transport. When-
PM samples be collected with paired trains. ever possible, containers should be shipped in
8.5.2.1 It is important that the systems be such a way that they remain upright at all
operated truly simultaneously. This implies times. All appropriate dangerous goods ship-
that both sample systems start and stop at ping requirements must be observed since
the same times. This also means that if one acetone is a flammable liquid.
sample system is stopped during the run, the
other sample systems must also be stopped 9. Quality Control.
until the cause has been corrected. 9.1 Miscellaneous Field Quality Control
8.5.2.2 Care should be taken to maintain Measures.
the filter box temperature of the paired 9.1.1 A quality control (QC) check of the
trains as close as possible to the Method re- volume metering system at the field site is
quired temperature of 120 ±14°C (248 ±25°F). If suggested before collecting the sample using
separate ovens are being used for simulta- the procedures in Method 5, Section 4.4.1.
neously operated trains, it is recommended 9.1.2 All other quality control checks out-
that the oven temperature of each train be lined in Methods 1, 2, 4 and 5 also apply to
maintained within ±14°C (±25°F) of each Method 5I. This includes procedures such as
other. leak-checks, equipment calibration checks,
8.5.2.3 The nozzles for paired trains need and independent checks of field data sheets
not be identically sized. for reasonableness and completeness.
8.5.2.4 Co-located sample nozzles must be 9.2 Quality Control Samples.
within the same plane perpendicular to the 9.2.1 Required QC Sample. A laboratory
gas flow. Co-located nozzles and pitot assem- reagent blank must be collected and ana-
blies should be within a 6.0 cm × 6.0 cm lyzed for each lot of acetone used for a field
square (as cited for a quadruple train in Ref- program to confirm that it is of suitable pu-
erence Method 301). rity. The particulate samples cannot be
8.5.3 Duplicate gas samples for molecular blank corrected.
weight determination need not be collected. 9.2.2 Recommended QC Samples. These
8.6 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5 samples may be collected and archived for
with several exceptions specific to the filter future analyses.
housing. 9.2.2.1 A field reagent blank is a rec-
8.6.1 Before moving the sampling train to ommended QC sample collected from a por-
the cleanup site, remove the probe from the tion of the acetone used for cleanup of the
train and seal the nozzle inlet and outlet of probe and nozzle. Take 100 ml of this acetone
the probe. Be careful not to lose any conden- directly from the wash bottle being used and
sate that might be present. Cap the filter place it in a glass sample container labeled
inlet using a standard ground glass plug and ‘‘field acetone reagent blank.’’ At least one
secure the cap with an impinger clamp. Re- field reagent blank is recommended for every
237
five runs completed. The field reagent blank cision and any systemic bias of the paired
samples demonstrate the purity of the ace- trains. Data that do not meet this criteria
tone was maintained throughout the pro- should be flagged as a data quality problem.
gram. The primary reason for performing dual
9.2.2.2 A field bias blank train is a rec- train sampling is to generate information to
ommended QC sample. This sample is col- quantify the precision of the Reference
lected by recovering a probe and filter as- Method data. The relative standard devi-
sembly that has been assembled, taken to ation (RSD) of paired data is the parameter
the sample location, leak checked, heated, used to quantify data precision. RSD for two
allowed to sit at the sample location for a simultaneously gathered data points is de-
similar duration of time as a regular sample termined according to:
run, leak-checked again, and then recovered
in the same manner as a regular sample.
Field bias blanks are not a Method require-
RSD = 100%* (C a − C b ) / (C a + C b )
ment, however, they are recommended and where, Ca and Cb are concentration values
are very useful for identifying sources of determined from trains A and B respectively.
contamination in emission testing samples.
For RSD calculation, the concentration
Field bias blank train results greater than 5
units are unimportant so long as they are
times the method detection limit may be
consistent.
considered problematic.
b. A minimum precision criteria for Ref-
10. Calibration and Standardization Same as erence Method PM data is that RSD for any
Method 5, Section 5. data pair must be less than 10% as long as
the mean PM concentration is greater than
11. Analytical Procedures. 10 mg/dscm. If the mean PM concentration is
11.1 Analysis. Same as Method 5, Sections less than 10 mg/dscm higher RSD values are
11.1–11.2.4, with the following exceptions: acceptable. At mean PM concentration of 1
11.1.1 Container No. 1. Same as Method 5, mg/dscm acceptable RSD for paired trains is
Section 11.2.1, with the following exception: 25%. Between 1 and 10 mg/dscm acceptable
Use disposable gloves to remove each of the RSD criteria should be linearly scaled from
filter holder assemblies from the desiccator, 25% to 10%. Pairs of manual method data ex-
transport container, or sample oven (after ceeding these RSD criteria should be elimi-
appropriate cooling). nated from the data set used to develop a PM
11.1.2 Container No. 2. Same as Method 5, CEMS correlation or to assess RCA. If the
Section 11.2.2, with the following exception: mean PM concentration is less than 1 mg/
It is recommended that the contents of Con- dscm, RSD does not apply and the mean re-
tainer No. 2 be transferred to a 250 ml beaker sult is acceptable.
with a Teflon liner or similar container that
has a minimal tare weight before bringing to 13. Method Performance [Reserved]
dryness.
14. Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
12. Data Analysis and Calculations.
15. Waste Management [Reserved]
12.1 Particulate Emissions. The analyt-
ical results cannot be blank corrected for re- 16. Alternative Procedures. Same as
sidual acetone found in any of the blanks. Method 5.
All other sample calculations are identical 17. Bibliography. Same as Method 5.
to Method 5. 18. Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts and Val-
12.2 Paired Trains Outliers. a. Outliers are idation Data. Figure 5I–1 is a schematic of
identified through the determination of pre- the sample train.
238
ER30SE99.008</GPH>
[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971]

239
ER30SE99.009</GPH>
APPENDIX A–4 TO PART 60—TEST dures in a test method. Similarly, for

METHODS 6 THROUGH 10B sources subject to emission monitoring re-
Method 6—Determination of sulfur dioxide to any use of a test method as a reference
emissions from stationary sources method are provided in the subpart or in Ap-
Method 6A—Determination of sulfur dioxide, pendix B.
moisture, and carbon dioxide emissions Inclusion of methods in this appendix is
from fossil fuel combustion sources not intended as an endorsement or denial of
Method 6B—Determination of sulfur dioxide their applicability to sources that are not
and carbon dioxide daily average emissions subject to standards of performance. The
from fossil fuel combustion sources methods are potentially applicable to other
Method 6C—Determination of Sulfur Dioxide sources; however, applicability should be
Emissions From Stationary Sources (In- confirmed by careful and appropriate evalua-
strumental Analyzer Procedure) tion of the conditions prevalent at such
Method 7—Determination of nitrogen oxide sources.
emissions from stationary sources
The approach followed in the formulation
Method 7A—Determination of nitrogen oxide
of the test methods involves specifications
emissions from stationary sources—Ion
chromatographic method
Method 7B—Determination of nitrogen oxide
proach would be preferable in all methods
emissions from stationary sources (Ultra-
violet spectrophotometry)
Method 7C—Determination of nitrogen oxide to the user. In practice, however, this ap-
emissions from stationary sources—Alka- proach is impractical in most cases because
line-permanganate/colorimetric method performance specifications cannot be estab-
Method 7D—Determination of nitrogen oxide lished. Most of the methods described herein,
emissions from stationary sources—Alka- therefore, involve specific equipment speci-
line-permanganate/ion chromatographic fications and procedures, and only a few
method methods in this appendix rely on perform-
Method 7E—Determination of Nitrogen Ox- ance criteria.
ides Emissions From Stationary Sources Minor changes in the test methods should
(Instrumental Analyzer Procedure) not necessarily affect the validity of the re-
Method 8—Determination of sulfuric acid sults and it is recognized that alternative
mist and sulfur dioxide emissions from sta- and equivalent methods exist. Section 60.8
tionary sources provides authority for the Administrator to
Method 9—Visual determination of the opac- specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2)
ity of emissions from stationary sources alternative methods, and (3) minor changes
Alternate method 1—Determination of the in the methodology of the test methods. It
opacity of emissions from stationary should be clearly understood that unless oth-
sources remotely by lidar erwise identified all such methods and
Method 10—Determination of carbon mon- changes must have prior approval of the Ad-
oxide emissions from stationary sources ministrator. An owner employing such meth-
Method 10A—Determination of carbon mon- ods or deviations from the test methods
oxide emissions in certifying continuous without obtaining prior approval does so at
emission monitoring systems at petroleum the risk of subsequent disapproval and re-
refineries testing with approved methods.
Method 10B—Determination of carbon mon- Within the test methods, certain specific
oxide emissions from stationary sources equipment or procedures are recognized as
60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific must be identified in the test report. The po-
uses of these test methods are described in tentially approvable options are cited as
the standards of performance contained in ‘‘subject to the approval of the Adminis-
the subparts, beginning with Subpart D. trator’’ or as ‘‘or equivalent.’’ Such poten-
240
the techniques or alternatives are in fact ap- 4.2 Water-Soluble Cations and Fluorides.
plicable and are properly executed; (2) in- The cations and fluorides are removed by a
cluding a written description of the alter- glass wool filter and an isopropanol bubbler;
native method in the test report (the written therefore, they do not affect the SO2 anal-
method must be clear and must be capable of ysis. When samples are collected from a gas
being performed without additional instruc- stream with high concentrations of metallic
tion, and the degree of detail should be simi- fumes (i.e., very fine cation aerosols) a high-
lar to the detail contained in the test meth- efficiency glass fiber filter must be used in
ods); and (3) providing any rationale or sup- place of the glass wool plug (i.e., the one in
porting data necessary to show the validity the probe) to remove the cation interferent.
of the alternative in the particular applica-
tion. Failure to meet these requirements can 5.0 Safety
result in the Administrator’s disapproval of 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
the alternative. hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
METHOD 6—DETERMINATION OF SULFUR DIOX- ment. This test method may not address all
IDE EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY SOURCES of the safety problems associated with its
use. It is the responsibility of the user to es-
NOTE: This method does not include all of tablish appropriate safety and health prac-
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- tices and determine the applicability of reg-
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana- ulatory limitations before performing this
lytical) essential to its performance. Some test method.
material is incorporated by reference from 5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following re-
other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob- agents are hazardous. Personal protective
tain reliable results, persons using this equipment and safe procedures are useful in
method should have a thorough knowledge of preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc-
at least the following additional test meth- curs, immediately flush with copious
ods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, Method 5, amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Re-
and Method 8. move clothing under shower and decontami-
1.0 Scope and Application nate. Treat residual chemical burns as ther-
mal burns.
1.1 Analytes. 5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating
to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs. 30% H2O2 is a
Analyte CAS No. Sensitivity strong oxidizing agent. Avoid contact with
SO2 ........................... 7449–09–5 3.4 mg SO2/m3 skin, eyes, and combustible material. Wear
(2.12 × 10)¥7 lb/ft3 gloves when handling.
5.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes
1.2 Applicability. This method applies to severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation
the measurement of sulfur dioxide (SO2) causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs.
emissions from stationary sources. Reacts exothermically with limited amounts
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to of water.
the requirements of this method will en- 5.2.3 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly de-
hance the quality of the data obtained from structive to body tissue. Will cause third de-
air pollutant sampling methods. gree burns. Eye damage may result in blind-
ness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of
2.0 Summary of Method the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from the cause lung tissue damage with edema. 1 mg/
sampling point in the stack. The SO2 and the m3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in
sulfur trioxide, including those fractions in higher concentrations, death. Provide ven-
any sulfur acid mist, are separated. The SO2 tilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently
fraction is measured by the barium-thorin ti- with metals and organics.
tration method.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] 6.1 Sample Collection. The following
items are required for sample collection:
4.0 Interferences
6.1.1 Sampling Train. A schematic of the
4.1 Free Ammonia. Free ammonia inter- sampling train is shown in Figure 6–1. The
feres with this method by reacting with SO2 sampling equipment described in Method 8
to form particulate sulfite and by reacting may be substituted in place of the midget
with the indicator. If free ammonia is impinger equipment of Method 6. However,
present (this can be determined by knowl- the Method 8 train must be modified to in-
edge of the process and/or noticing white clude a heated filter between the probe and
particulate matter in the probe and isopropanol impinger, and the operation of
isopropanol bubbler), alternative methods, the sampling train and sample analysis must
subject to the approval of the Administrator be at the flow rates and solution volumes de-
are required. One approved alternative is fined in Method 8. Alternatively, SO2 may be
listed in Reference 13 of Section 17.0. determined simultaneously with particulate
241
matter and moisture determinations by ei- and rate meter to negate the pulsation effect
ther (1) replacing the water in a Method 5 of the diaphragm pump on the rate meter.
impinger system with a 3 percent H2O2 solu- 6.1.1.9 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equiva-
tion, or (2) replacing the Method 5 water im- lent, capable of measuring flow rate to with-
pinger system with a Method 8 isopropanol- in 2 percent of the selected flow rate of about
filter-H2O2 system. The analysis for SO2 1 liter/min (0.035 cfm).
must be consistent with the procedure of 6.1.1.10 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter
Method 8. The Method 6 sampling train con- (DGM), sufficiently accurate to measure the
sists of the following components: sample volume to within 2 percent, cali-
6.1.1.1 Probe. Borosilicate glass or stain- brated at the selected flow rate and condi-
less steel (other materials of construction tions actually encountered during sampling,
may be used, subject to the approval of the and equipped with a temperature sensor (dial
Administrator), approximately 6 mm (0.25 thermometer, or equivalent) capable of
in.) inside diameter, with a heating system measuring temperature accurately to within
to prevent water condensation and a filter 3 °C (5.4 °F). A critical orifice may be used in
(either in-stack or heated out-of-stack) to place of the DGM specified in this section
remove particulate matter, including sul- provided that it is selected, calibrated, and
furic acid mist. A plug of glass wool is a sat- used as specified in Section 16.0.
isfactory filter. 6.1.2 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or
6.1.1.2 Bubbler and Impingers. One midget other barometer capable of measuring at-
bubbler with medium-coarse glass frit and mospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm Hg (0.1
borosilicate or quartz glass wool packed in in. Hg). See the NOTE in Method 5, Section
top (see Figure 6–1) to prevent sulfuric acid 6.1.2.
mist carryover, and three 30-ml midget 6.1.3 Vacuum Gauge and Rotameter. At
impingers. The midget bubbler and midget least 760-mm Hg (30-in. Hg) gauge and 0- to
impingers must be connected in series with 40-ml/min rotameter, to be used for leak-
leak-free glass connectors. Silicone grease check of the sampling train.
may be used, if necessary, to prevent leak- 6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items
age. A midget impinger may be used in place are needed for sample recovery:
of the midget bubbler. 6.2.1 Wash Bottles. Two polyethylene or
NOTE: Other collection absorbers and flow glass bottles, 500-ml.
rates may be used, subject to the approval of 6.2.2 Storage Bottles. Polyethylene bot-
the Administrator, but the collection effi- tles, 100-ml, to store impinger samples (one
ciency must be shown to be at least 99 per- per sample).
cent for each test run and must be docu- 6.3 Sample Analysis. The following equip-
mented in the report. If the efficiency is ment is needed for sample analysis:
found to be acceptable after a series of three 6.3.1 Pipettes. Volumetric type, 5-ml, 20-
tests, further documentation is not required. ml (one needed per sample), and 25-ml sizes.
To conduct the efficiency test, an extra ab- 6.3.2 Volumetric Flasks. 100-ml size (one
sorber must be added and analyzed sepa- per sample) and 1000-ml size.
rately. This extra absorber must not contain 6.3.3 Burettes. 5- and 50-ml sizes.
more than 1 percent of the total SO2. 6.3.4 Erlenmeyer Flasks. 250-ml size (one
6.1.1.3 Glass Wool. Borosilicate or quartz. for each sample, blank, and standard).
6.1.1.4 Stopcock Grease. Acetone-insol- 6.3.5 Dropping Bottle. 125-ml size, to add
uble, heat-stable silicone grease may be indicator.
used, if necessary. 6.3.6 Graduated Cylinder. 100-ml size.
6.1.1.5 Temperature Sensor. Dial ther- 6.3.7 Spectrophotometer. To measure ab-
mometer, or equivalent, to measure tem- sorbance at 352 nm.
perature of gas leaving impinger train to 7.0 Reagents and Standards
within 1 °C (2 °F).
6.1.1.6 Drying Tube. Tube packed with 6- NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, all re-
to 16- mesh indicating-type silica gel, or agents must conform to the specifications
equivalent, to dry the gas sample and to pro- established by the Committee on Analytical
tect the meter and pump. If silica gel is pre- Reagents of the American Chemical Society.
viously used, dry at 177 °C (350 °F) for 2 Where such specifications are not available,
hours. New silica gel may be used as re- use the best available grade.
ceived. Alternatively, other types of 7.1 Sample Collection. The following re-
desiccants (equivalent or better) may be agents are required for sample collection:
used, subject to the approval of the Adminis- 7.1.1 Water. Deionized distilled to conform
trator. to ASTM Specification D 1193–77 or 91 Type
6.1.1.7 Valve. Needle valve, to regulate 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). The

sample gas flow rate. KMnO4 test for oxidizable organic matter
6.1.1.8 Pump. Leak-free diaphragm pump, may be omitted when high concentrations of
or equivalent, to pull gas through the train. organic matter are not expected to be
Install a small surge tank between the pump present.
242
7.1.2 Isopropanol, 80 Percent by Volume. 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage
Mix 80 ml of isopropanol with 20 ml of water. and Transport
7.1.2.1 Check each lot of isopropanol for 8.1 Preparation of Sampling Train. Meas-
peroxide impurities as follows: Shake 10 ml ure 15 ml of 80 percent isopropanol into the
of isopropanol with 10 ml of freshly prepared midget bubbler and 15 ml of 3 percent H2O2
10 percent potassium iodide solution. Pre- into each of the first two midget impingers.
pare a blank by similarly treating 10 ml of Leave the final midget impinger dry. Assem-
water. After 1 minute, read the absorbance ble the train as shown in Figure 6–1. Adjust
at 352 nm on a spectrophotometer using a 1- the probe heater to a temperature sufficient
cm path length. If absorbance exceeds 0.1, re- to prevent water condensation. Place
ject alcohol for use. crushed ice and water around the impingers.
7.1.2.2 Peroxides may be removed from 8.2 Sampling Train Leak-Check Proce-
isopropanol by redistilling or by passage dure. A leak-check prior to the sampling run
through a column of activated alumina; how- is recommended, but not required. A leak-
ever, reagent grade isopropanol with suit- check after the sampling run is mandatory.
ably low peroxide levels may be obtained The leak-check procedure is as follows:
from commercial sources. Rejection of con- 8.2.1 Temporarily attach a suitable (e.g.,
taminated lots may, therefore, be a more ef- 0- to 40- ml/min) rotameter to the outlet of
ficient procedure. the DGM, and place a vacuum gauge at or
7.1.3 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2), 3 Percent near the probe inlet. Plug the probe inlet,
by Volume. Add 10 ml of 30 percent H2O2 to pull a vacuum of at least 250 mm Hg (10 in.
90 ml of water. Prepare fresh daily. Hg), and note the flow rate as indicated by
the rotameter. A leakage rate in excess of 2
7.1.4 Potassium Iodide Solution, 10 Per-
percent of the average sampling rate is not
cent Weight by Volume (w/v). Dissolve 10.0 g
acceptable.
of KI in water, and dilute to 100 ml. Prepare
when needed. NOTE: Carefully (i.e., slowly) release the
7.2 Sample Recovery. The following re- probe inlet plug before turning off the pump.
agents are required for sample recovery: 8.2.2 It is suggested (not mandatory) that
7.2.1 Water. Same as in Section 7.1.1. the pump be leak-checked separately, either
7.2.2 Isopropanol, 80 Percent by Volume. prior to or after the sampling run. To leak-
check the pump, proceed as follows: Dis-
Same as in Section 7.1.2.
connect the drying tube from the probe-im-
7.3 Sample Analysis. The following re- pinger assembly. Place a vacuum gauge at
agents and standards are required for sample the inlet to either the drying tube or the
analysis: pump, pull a vacuum of 250 mm Hg (10 in.
7.3.1 Water. Same as in Section 7.1.1. Hg), plug or pinch off the outlet of the flow
7.3.2 Isopropanol, 100 Percent. meter, and then turn off the pump. The vacu-
7.3.3 Thorin Indicator. 1-(o- um should remain stable for at least 30 sec-
arsonophenylazo)-2-naphthol-3,6-disulfonic onds.
acid, disodium salt, or equivalent. Dissolve If performed prior to the sampling run, the
0.20 g in 100 ml of water. pump leak-check shall precede the leak-
7.3.4 Barium Standard Solution, 0.0100 N. check of the sampling train described imme-
Dissolve 1.95 g of barium perchlorate tri- diately above; if performed after the sam-
hydrate [Ba(ClO4)2 3H2O] in 200 ml water, and pling run, the pump leak-check shall follow
dilute to 1 liter with isopropanol. Alter- the sampling train leak-check.
natively, 1.22 g of barium chloride dihydrate 8.2.3 Other leak-check procedures may be
[BaCl2 2H2O] may be used instead of the bar- used, subject to the approval of the Adminis-
ium perchlorate trihydrate. Standardize as trator.
in Section 10.5. 8.3 Sample Collection.
7.3.5 Sulfuric Acid Standard, 0.0100 N. 8.3.1 Record the initial DGM reading and
Purchase or standardize to ±0.0002 N against barometric pressure. To begin sampling, po-
0.0100 N NaOH which has previously been sition the tip of the probe at the sampling
standardized against potassium acid phthal- point, connect the probe to the bubbler, and
ate (primary standard grade). start the pump. Adjust the sample flow to a
constant rate of approximately 1.0 liter/min
7.3.6 Quality Assurance Audit Samples.
as indicated by the rate meter. Maintain this
When making compliance determinations,
constant rate (±10 percent) during the entire
audit samples, if available must be obtained
sampling run.
from the appropriate EPA Regional Office or
8.3.2 Take readings (DGM volume, tem-
from the responsible enforcement authority
peratures at DGM and at impinger outlet,
and analyzed in conjunction with the field and rate meter flow rate) at least every 5
samples.
minutes. Add more ice during the run to

NOTE: The responsible enforcement author- keep the temperature of the gases leaving
ity should be notified at least 30 days prior the last impinger at 20 °C (68 °F) or less.
to the test date to allow sufficient time for 8.3.3 At the conclusion of each run, turn
sample delivery. off the pump, remove the probe from the
243
stack, and record the final readings. Conduct Alternatively, ambient air without purifi-
a leak-check as described in Section 8.2. cation may be used.
(This leak-check is mandatory.) If a leak is 8.4 Sample Recovery. Disconnect the
detected, void the test run or use procedures impingers after purging. Discard the con-
acceptable to the Administrator to adjust tents of the midget bubbler. Pour the con-
the sample volume for the leakage. tents of the midget impingers into a leak-
8.3.4 Drain the ice bath, and purge the re- free polyethylene bottle for shipment. Rinse
maining part of the train by drawing clean the three midget impingers and the con-
necting tubes with water, and add the rinse
ambient air through the system for 15 min-
to the same storage container. Mark the
utes at the sampling rate. Clean ambient air
fluid level. Seal and identify the sample con-
can be provided by passing air through a
tainer.
charcoal filter or through an extra midget
impinger containing 15 ml of 3 percent H2O2. 9.0 Quality Control
7.1.2 ........................... Isopropanol check ....................................... Ensure acceptable level of peroxide impurities in
isopropanol.
8.2, 10.1–10.4 ............ Sampling equipment leak-check and cali- Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate,
10.5 ............................ Barium standard solution standardization ... Ensure precision of normality determination.
11.2.3 ......................... Replicate titrations ....................................... Ensure precision of titration determinations
11.3 ............................ Audit sample analysis .................................. Evaluate analyst’s technique and standards preparation.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization bration factor (Y), which is used in Equation
6–1 to calculate collected sample volume (see
10.1 Volume Metering System.
Section 12.2). If the deviation is more than 5
10.1.1 Initial Calibration.
10.1.1.1 Before its initial use in the field, percent, recalibrate the metering system as
leak-check the metering system (drying in Section 10.1.1, and determine a post-test
tube, needle valve, pump, rate meter, and calibration factor (Yf). Compare Yi and Yf;
DGM) as follows: Place a vacuum gauge at the smaller of the two factors is accepted as
the inlet to the drying tube and pull a vacu- the DGM calibration factor. If recalibration
um of 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg). Plug or pinch indicates that the metering system is unac-
off the outlet of the flow meter, and then ceptable for use, either void the test run or
turn off the pump. The vacuum must remain use methods, subject to the approval of the
stable for at least 30 seconds. Carefully re- Administrator, to determine an acceptable
lease the vacuum gauge before releasing the value for the collected sample volume.
flow meter end. 10.1.3 DGM as a Calibration Standard. A
10.1.1.2 Remove the drying tube, and cali- DGM may be used as a calibration standard
brate the metering system (at the sampling for volume measurements in place of the
flow rate specified by the method) as follows: wet-test meter specified in Section 10.1.1.2,
Connect an appropriately sized wet-test provided that it is calibrated initially and
meter (e.g., 1 liter per revolution) to the recalibrated periodically according to the
inlet of the needle valve. Make three inde- same procedures outlined in Method 5, Sec-
pendent calibration runs, using at least five tion 10.3 with the following exceptions: (a)
revolutions of the DGM per run. Calculate the DGM is calibrated against a wet-test
the calibration factor Y (wet-test meter cali- meter having a capacity of 1 liter/rev (0.035
bration volume divided by the DGM volume, ft3/rev) or 3 liters/rev (0.1 ft3/rev) and having
both volumes adjusted to the same reference the capability of measuring volume to with-
temperature and pressure) for each run, and in 1 percent; (b) the DGM is calibrated at 1
average the results (Yi). If any Y-value devi- liter/min (0.035 cfm); and (c) the meter box of
ates by more than 2 percent from (Yi), the the Method 6 sampling train is calibrated at
metering system is unacceptable for use. If the same flow rate.
the metering system is acceptable, use (Yi) 10.2 Temperature Sensors. Calibrate
as the calibration factor for subsequent test against mercury-in-glass thermometers.
runs. 10.3 Rate Meter. The rate meter need not
10.1.2 Post-Test Calibration Check. After be calibrated, but should be cleaned and
each field test series, conduct a calibration maintained according to the manufacturer’s
check using the procedures outlined in Sec- instructions.
tion 10.1.1.2, except that three or more revo- 10.4 Barometer. Calibrate against a mer-
lutions of the DGM may be used, and only cury barometer.

two independent runs need be made. If the 10.5 Barium Standard Solution. Stand-
average of the two post-test calibration fac- ardize the barium perchlorate or chloride so-
tors does not deviate by more than 5 percent lution against 25 ml of standard sulfuric acid
from Yi, then Yi is accepted as the DGM cali- to which 100 ml of 100 percent isopropanol
244
has been added. Run duplicate analyses. Cal- ance analyses for the same enforcement au-
culate the normality using the average of thority during the 30-day period.
duplicate analyses where the titrations agree 11.4.3 The concentrations of the audit
within 1 percent or 0.2 ml, whichever is larg- samples obtained by the analyst must agree
er. within 5 percent of the actual concentration.
If the 5 percent specification is not met, re-
11.0 Analytical Procedure analyze the compliance and audit samples,
11.1 Sample Loss Check. Note level of liq- and include initial and reanalysis values in
uid in container and confirm whether any the test report.
sample was lost during shipment; note this 11.4.4 Failure to meet the 5-percent speci-
finding on the analytical data sheet. If a no- fication may require retests until the audit
ticeable amount of leakage has occurred, ei- problems are resolved. However, if the audit
ther void the sample or use methods, subject results do not affect the compliance or non-
to the approval of the Administrator, to cor- compliance status of the affected facility,
rect the final results. the Administrator may waive the reanalysis
11.2 Sample Analysis. requirement, further audits, or retests and
11.2.1 Transfer the contents of the storage accept the results of the compliance test.
container to a 100-ml volumetric flask, di- While steps are being taken to resolve audit
lute to exactly 100 ml with water, and mix analysis problems, the Administrator may
the diluted sample. also choose to use the data to determine the
11.2.2 Pipette a 20-ml aliquot of the di- compliance or noncompliance status of the
luted sample into a 250-ml Erlenmeyer flask affected facility.
and add 80 ml of 100 percent isopropanol plus
two to four drops of thorin indicator. While 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
stirring the solution, titrate to a pink end- Carry out calculations, retaining at least
point using 0.0100 N barium standard solu- one extra significant figure beyond that of
tion. the acquired data. Round off figures after
11.2.3 Repeat the procedures in Section final calculation.
11.2.2, and average the titration volumes.
12.1 Nomenclature.
Run a blank with each series of samples.
Replicate titrations must agree within 1 per- Ca=Actual concentration of SO2 in audit sam-
cent or 0.2 ml, whichever is larger. ple, mg/dscm.
NOTE: Protect the 0.0100 N barium standard Cd=Determined concentration of SO2 in audit
solution from evaporation at all times. sample, mg/dscm.
CSO2=Concentration of SO2, dry basis, cor-
11.3 Audit Sample Analysis.
rected to standard conditions, mg/dscm (lb/
11.3.1 When the method is used to analyze dscf).
samples to demonstrate compliance with a
N=Normality of barium standard titrant,
source emission regulation, an audit sample,
meq/ml.
if available, must be analyzed.
11.3.2 Concurrently analyze the audit Pbar=Barometric pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
sample and the compliance samples in the Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg
same manner to evaluate the technique of (29.92 in. Hg).
the analyst and the standards preparation. RE=Relative error of QA audit sample anal-
11.3.3 The same analyst, analytical re- ysis, percent
agents, and analytical system must be used Tm=Average DGM absolute temperature, °K
for the compliance samples and the audit (°R).
sample. If this condition is met, duplicate Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K
auditing of subsequent compliance analyses (528 °R).
for the same enforcement agency within a 30- Va=Volume of sample aliquot titrated, ml.
day period is waived. An audit sample set Vm=Dry gas volume as measured by the
may not be used to validate different sets of DGM, dcm (dcf).
compliance samples under the jurisdiction of Vm(std)=Dry gas volume measured by the
separate enforcement agencies, unless prior DGM, corrected to standard conditions,
arrangements have been made with both en- dscm (dscf).
forcement agencies.
Vsoln=Total volume of solution in which the
11.4 Audit Sample Results. SO2 sample is contained, 100 ml.
11.4.1 Calculate the audit sample con-
Vt=Volume of barium standard titrant used
centrations and submit results using the in-
for the sample (average of replicate titra-
structions provided with the audit samples.
tion), ml.
11.4.2 Report the results of the audit sam-
Vtb=Volume of barium standard titrant used
ples and the compliance determination sam-

for the blank, ml.
ples along with their identification numbers,
and the analyst’s name to the responsible en- Y=DGM calibration factor.
forcement authority. Include this informa- 12.2 Dry Sample Gas Volume, Corrected
tion with reports of any subsequent compli- to Standard Conditions.
245
Where:
(V Y Tstd Pbar )
Vm (std ) = m Eq. 6-1
K1=0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units,
(Tm Pstd ) K1=17.65 °R/in. Hg for English units.

12.3 SO2 Concentration.
K Y Vm Pbar
= 1
Tm
K 2 N (Vt − Vtb )(Vsoln / Va )

Cso2 = Eq. 6-2
Vm (std )
Where: Tamb=Ambient absolute temperature of air,

K2=32.03 mg SO2/meq for metric units, °K (°R).
K2=7.061 × 10¥5 lb SO2/meq for English units. Vsb=Volume of gas as measured by the soap
bubble meter, m3 (ft3).
12.4 Relative Error for QA Audit Samples. Vsb(std)=Volume of gas as measured by the
100 (C d − C a )
soap bubble meter, corrected to standard
conditions, scm (scf).
RE = Eq. 6-3 q=Soap bubble travel time, min.
Ca qs=Time, min.
16.2 Critical Orifices for Volume and Rate
13.0 Method Performance Measurements. A critical orifice may be used
13.1 Range. The minimum detectable in place of the DGM specified in Section
limit of the method has been determined to 6.1.1.10, provided that it is selected, cali-
be 3.4 mg SO2/m3 (2.12 × 10¥7 lb/ft3). Although brated, and used as follows:
no upper limit has been established, tests 16.2.1 Preparation of Sampling Train. As-
have shown that concentrations as high as semble the sampling train as shown in Fig-
80,000 mg/m3 (0.005 lb/ft3) of SO2 can be col- ure 6–2. The rate meter and surge tank are
lected efficiently at a rate of 1.0 liter/min optional but are recommended in order to de-
(0.035 cfm) for 20 minutes in two midget tect changes in the flow rate.
impingers, each containing 15 ml of 3 percent NOTE: The critical orifices can be adapted
H2O2. Based on theoretical calculations, the to a Method 6 type sampling train as follows:
upper concentration limit in a 20 liter (0.7 Insert sleeve type, serum bottle stoppers
ft3) sample is about 93,300 mg/m3 (0.00583 lb/ into two reducing unions. Insert the needle
ft3). into the stoppers as shown in Figure 6–3.
16.2.2 Selection of Critical Orifices.
16.2.2.1 The procedure that follows de-
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] scribes the use of hypodermic needles and
stainless steel needle tubings, which have
16.0 Alternative Procedures been found suitable for use as critical ori-
fices. Other materials and critical orifice de-
16.1 Nomenclature. Same as Section 12.1, signs may be used provided the orifices act
with the following additions: as true critical orifices, (i.e., a critical vacu-
Bwa=Water vapor in ambient air, proportion um can be obtained) as described in this sec-
by volume. tion. Select a critical orifice that is sized to
Ma=Molecular weight of the ambient air operate at the desired flow rate. The needle
saturated at impinger temperature, g/g- sizes and tubing lengths shown in Table 6–1
mole (lb/lb-mole). give the following approximate flow rates.
Ms=Molecular weight of the sample gas satu- 16.2.2.2 Determine the suitability and the
rated at impinger temperature, g/g-mole appropriate operating vacuum of the critical
ER17OC00.183</MATH>
(lb/lb-mole). orifice as follows: If applicable, temporarily

Pc=Inlet vacuum reading obtained during the attach a rate meter and surge tank to the
calibration run, mm Hg (in. Hg). outlet of the sampling train, if said equip-
Psr=Inlet vacuum reading obtained during ment is not present (see Section 16.2.1). Turn
the sampling run, mm Hg (in. Hg). on the pump and adjust the valve to give an
Qstd=Volumetric flow rate through critical outlet vacuum reading corresponding to
ER17OC00.182</MATH>
orifice, scm/min (scf/min). about half of the atmospheric pressure. Ob-

Qstd=Average flow rate of pre-test and post- serve the rate meter reading. Slowly in-
test calibration runs, scm/min (scf/min). crease the vacuum until a stable reading is
246
ER17OC00.181</MATH>
obtained on the rate meter. Record the crit- 16.2.3.2 Moisture Determination. At the
ical vacuum, which is the outlet vacuum sampling location, prior to testing, deter-
when the rate meter first reaches a stable mine the percent moisture of the ambient air
value. Orifices that do not reach a critical using the wet and dry bulb temperatures or,
value must not be used. if appropriate, a relative humidity meter.
16.2.3 Field Procedures. 16.2.3.3 Critical Orifice Calibration. At the
16.2.3.1 Leak-Check Procedure. A leak-
sampling location, prior to testing, calibrate
check before the sampling run is rec-
the entire sampling train (i.e., determine the
ommended, but not required. The leak-check
procedure is as follows: Temporarily attach a flow rate of the sampling train when oper-
suitable (e.g., 0–40 ml/min) rotameter and ated at critical conditions). Attach a 500-ml
surge tank, or a soap bubble meter and surge soap bubble meter to the inlet of the probe,
tank to the outlet of the pump. Plug the and operate the sampling train at an outlet
probe inlet, pull an outlet vacuum of at least vacuum of 25 to 50 mm Hg (1 to 2 in. Hg)
250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg), and note the flow rate above the critical vacuum. Record the infor-
as indicated by the rotameter or bubble mation listed in Figure 6–4. Calculate the
meter. A leakage rate in excess of 2 percent standard volume of air measured by the soap
of the average sampling rate (Qstd) is not ac- bubble meter and the volumetric flow rate
ceptable. Carefully release the probe inlet using the equations below:
plug before turning off the pump.
Vsb(std ) = Vsb (Tstd / Tamb )( Pbar / Pstd ) Eq. 6-4

Vsb(std )
Q std = Eq. 6-5
θ
16.2.3.4 Sampling. 16.2.3.4.2 Conduct a post-test calibration

16.2.3.4.1 Operate the sampling train for run using the calibration procedure outlined
sample collection at the same vacuum used in Section 16.2.3.3. If the Qstd obtained before
during the calibration run. Start the watch and after the test differ by more than 5 per-
and pump simultaneously. Take readings cent, void the test run; if not, calculate the
(temperature, rate meter, inlet vacuum, and volume of the gas measured with the critical
outlet vacuum) at least every 5 minutes. At orifice using Equation 6–6 as follows:
the end of the sampling run, stop the watch
and pump simultaneously.
Qstd θs (1 − Bwa ) ( Pbar + Psr )

Vm (std ) = Eq. 6-6
(Pbar + Pc )
16.2.3.4.3 If the percent difference between weight of the gas sample must be considered
the molecular weight of the ambient air at in the calculations using the following equa-
ER17OC00.187</MATH>
saturated conditions and the sample gas is tion:
more that ±3 percent, then the molecular
Qstd θs (1 − Bwa ) ( Pbar + Psr )(M a / M s )

1
ER17OC00.186</MATH>
( std ) = Eq. 6- 7
(Pbar + Pc )
NOTE: A post-test leak-check is not nec- 16.2.3.4.4 Drain the ice bath, and purge the
ER17OC00.185</MATH>
essary because the post-test calibration run sampling train using the procedure described
results will indicate whether there is any in Section 8.3.4.
leakage.
247
ER17OC00.184</MATH>
16.3 Elimination of Ammonia Inter- isopropanol sample, determine the fraction
ference. The following alternative proce- of SO2 collected in the bubbler by pipetting
dures must be used in addition to those spec- 20-ml aliquots into 250-ml Erlenmeyer flasks.
ified in the method when sampling at sources Add 5 ml of 3 percent H2O2, 100 ml of 100 per-
having ammonia emissions. cent isopropanol, and two to four drips of
16.3.1 Sampling. The probe shall be main- thorin indicator, and titrate as before. From
tained at 275 °C (527 °F) and equipped with a this titration volume, subtract the titrant
high-efficiency in-stack filter (glass fiber) to volume determined for sulfur trioxide, and
remove particulate matter. The filter mate- add the titrant volume determined for the
rial shall be unreactive to SO2. Whatman peroxide portion. This final volume con-
934AH (formerly Reeve Angel 934AH) filters stitutes Vt, the volume of barium perchlorate
treated as described in Reference 10 in Sec- used for the SO2 sample.
tion 17.0 of Method 5 is an example of a filter
that has been shown to work. Where alkaline 17.0 References
particulate matter and condensed moisture 1. Atmospheric Emissions from Sulfuric
are present in the gas stream, the filter shall Acid Manufacturing Processes. U.S. DHEW,
be heated above the moisture dew point but PHS, Division of Air Pollution. Public
below 225 °C (437 °F). Health Service Publication No. 999–AP–13.
16.3.2 Sample Recovery. Recover the sam- Cincinnati, OH. 1965.
ple according to Section 8.4 except for dis- 2. Corbett, P.F. The Determination of SO2
carding the contents of the midget bubbler. and SO3 in Flue Gases. Journal of the Insti-
Add the bubbler contents, including the tute of Fuel. 24:237–243. 1961.
rinsings of the bubbler with water, to a sepa- 3. Matty, R.E., and E.K. Diehl. Measuring
rate polyethylene bottle from the rest of the Flue-Gas SO2 and SO3. Power. 101:94–97. No-
sample. Under normal testing conditions vember 1957.
where sulfur trioxide will not be present sig- 4. Patton, W.F., and J.A. Brink, Jr. New
nificantly, the tester may opt to delete the Equipment and Techniques for Sampling
midget bubbler from the sampling train. If Chemical Process Gases. J. Air Pollution
an approximation of the sulfur trioxide con- Control Association. 13:162. 1963.
centration is desired, transfer the contents 5. Rom, J.J. Maintenance, Calibration, and
of the midget bubbler to a separate poly- Operation of Isokinetic Source Sampling
ethylene bottle. Equipment. Office of Air Programs, U.S. En-
16.3.3 Sample Analysis. Follow the proce- vironmental Protection Agency. Research
dures in Sections 11.1 and 11.2, except add 0.5 Triangle Park, NC. APTD–0576. March 1972.
ml of 0.1 N HCl to the Erlenmeyer flask and 6. Hamil, H.F., and D.E. Camann. Collabo-
mix before adding the indicator. The fol- rative Study of Method for the Determina-
lowing analysis procedure may be used for an tion of Sulfur Dioxide Emissions from Sta-
approximation of the sulfur trioxide con- tionary Sources (Fossil-Fuel Fired Steam
centration. The accuracy of the calculated Generators). U.S. Environmental Protection
concentration will depend upon the ammonia Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. EPA–
to SO2 ratio and the level of oxygen present 650/4–74–024. December 1973.
in the gas stream. A fraction of the SO2 will 7. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Part
be counted as sulfur trioxide as the ammonia 31; Water, Atmospheric Analysis. American
to SO2 ratio and the sample oxygen content Society for Testing and Materials. Philadel-
increases. Generally, when this ratio is 1 or phia, PA. 1974. pp. 40–42.
less and the oxygen content is in the range 8. Knoll, J.E., and M.R. Midgett. The Ap-
of 5 percent, less than 10 percent of the SO2 plication of EPA Method 6 to High Sulfur Di-
will be counted as sulfur trioxide. Analyze oxide Concentrations. U.S. Environmental
the peroxide and isopropanol sample portions Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park,
separately. Analyze the peroxide portion as NC. EPA–600/4–76–038. July 1976.
described above. Sulfur trioxide is deter- 9. Westlin, P.R., and R.T. Shigehara. Pro-
mined by difference using sequential titra- cedure for Calibrating and Using Dry Gas
tion of the isopropanol portion of the sam- Volume Meters as Calibration Standards.
ple. Transfer the contents of the isopropanol Source Evaluation Society Newsletter.
storage container to a 100-ml volumetric 3(1):17–30. February 1978.
flask, and dilute to exactly 100 ml with 10. Yu, K.K. Evaluation of Moisture Effect
water. Pipette a 20-ml aliquot of this solu- on Dry Gas Meter Calibration. Source Eval-
tion into a 250-ml Erlenmeyer flask, add 0.5 uation Society Newsletter. 5(1):24–28. Feb-
ml of 0.1 N HCl, 80 ml of 100 percent ruary 1980.
isopropanol, and two to four drops of thorin 11. Lodge, J.P., Jr., et al. The Use of Hypo-
indicator. Titrate to a pink endpoint using dermic Needles as Critical Orifices in Air
0.0100 N barium perchlorate. Repeat and av- Sampling. J. Air Pollution Control Associa-
erage the titration volumes that agree with- tion. 16:197–200. 1966.
in 1 percent or 0.2 ml, whichever is larger. 12. Shigehara, R.T., and C.B. Sorrell. Using
Use this volume in Equation 6–2 to deter- Critical Orifices as Method 5
mine the sulfur trioxide concentration. From CalibrationStandards. Source Evaluation So-
the flask containing the remainder of the ciety Newsletter. 10:4–15. August 1985.
248
13. Curtis, F., Analysis of Method 6 Sam-
ples in the Presence of Ammonia. Source
Evaluation Society Newsletter. 13(1):9–15
February 1988.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts and

Validation Data
TABLE 6–1—APPROXIMATE FLOW RATES FOR

VARIOUS NEEDLE SIZES
Needle
Needle size Flow rate
length
(gauge) (ml/min)
(cm)
21 ............................................... 7.6 1,100

22 ............................................... 2.9 1,000
22 ............................................... 3.8 900
23 ............................................... 3.8 500
23 ............................................... 5.1 450
24 ............................................... 3.2 400
249
250
ER17OC00.188</MATH>
251
ER17OC00.189</MATH>
252
ER17OC00.190</MATH>
METHOD 6A—DETERMINATION OF SULFUR DI- other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-
OXIDE, MOISTURE, AND CARBON DIOXIDE tain reliable results, persons using this
FROM FOSSIL FUEL COMBUSTION SOURCES method should have a thorough knowledge of
at least the following additional test meth-
NOTE: This method does not include all of ods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, Method 5,
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- Method 6, and Method 19.

material is incorporated by reference from 1.1 Analytes.
253
ER17OC00.191</MATH>
SO2 .................................................................................................. 7449–09–05 3.4 mg SO2/m3

(2.12 × 10¥7 lb/ft3)
CO2 .................................................................................................. 124–38–9 N/A
H2O .................................................................................................. 7732–18–5 N/A
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- 6.1.1.2 CO2 Absorber. A sealable rigid cyl-
ble for the determination of sulfur dioxide inder or bottle with an inside diameter be-
(SO2) emissions from fossil fuel combustion tween 30 and 90 mm , a length between 125
sources in terms of concentration (mg/dscm and 250 mm, and appropriate connections at
or lb/dscf) and in terms of emission rate (ng/ both ends. The filter may be a separate heat-
J or lb/106 Btu) and for the determination of ed unit or may be within the heated portion
carbon dioxide (CO2) concentration (percent). of the probe. If the filter is within the sam-
Moisture content (percent), if desired, may pling probe, the filter should not be within 15
also be determined by this method. cm of the probe inlet or any unheated sec-
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to tion of the probe, such as the connection to
the requirements of this method will en- the first bubbler. The probe and filter should
hance the quality of the data obtained from be heated to at least 20 °C (68 °F) above the
air pollutant sampling methods. source temperature, but not greater than 120
°C (248 °F). The filter temperature (i.e., the
2.0 Summary of Method sample gas temperature) should be mon-
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from a sam- itored to assure the desired temperature is
pling point in the stack. The SO2 and the sul- maintained. A heated Teflon connector may
fur trioxide, including those fractions in any be used to connect the filter holder or probe
sulfur acid mist, are separated. The SO2 frac- to the first impinger.
tion is measured by the barium-thorin titra- NOTE: For applications downstream of wet
tion method. Moisture and CO2 fractions are scrubbers, a heated out-of-stack filter (either
collected in the same sampling train, and are borosilicate glass wool or glass fiber mat) is
determined gravimetrically. necessary.
6.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 6,
Section 6.2.
4.0 Interferences 6.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 6,
Section 6.3, with the addition of a balance to
Same as Method 6, Section 4.0. measure within 0.05 g.
5.0 Safety 7.0 Reagents and Standards
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, all re-
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- agents must conform to the specifications
ment. This test method may not address all established by the Committee on Analytical
of the safety problems associated with its Reagents of the American Chemical Society.
use. It is the responsibility of the user to es- Where such specifications are not available,
tablish appropriate safety and health prac- use the best available grade.
tices and determine the applicability of reg-
ulatory limitations prior to performing this
Section 7.1, with the addition of the fol-
test method.
5.2 Corrosive reagents. Same as Method 6, lowing:
7.1.1 Drierite. Anhydrous calcium sulfate
Section 5.2.
(CaSO4) desiccant, 8 mesh, indicating type is
6.0 Equipment and Supplies recommended.
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 6, NOTE: Do not use silica gel or similar des-
Section 6.1, with the exception of the fol- iccant in this application.
lowing: 7.1.2 CO2 Absorbing Material. Ascarite II.
6.1.1 Sampling Train. A schematic of the Sodium hydroxide-coated silica, 8- to 20-
sampling train used in this method is shown mesh.
in Figure 6A–1. 7.2 Sample Recovery and Analysis. Same
6.1.1.1 Impingers and Bubblers. Two 30=ml as Method 6, Sections 7.2 and 7.3, respec-
midget impingers with a 1=mm restricted tip tively.
and two 30=ml midget bubblers with unre-
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport,
stricted tips. Other types of impingers and
and Storage
bubblers (e.g., Mae West for SO2 collection

and rigid cylinders containing Drierite for 8.1 Preparation of Sampling Train.
moisture absorbers), may be used with prop- 8.1.1 Measure 15 ml of 80 percent
er attention to reagent volumes and levels, isopropanol into the first midget bubbler and
subject to the approval of the Administrator. 15 ml of 3 percent hydrogen peroxide into
254
each of the two midget impingers (the second 8.3.3 CO2 Absorber. Allow the CO2 absorber
and third vessels in the train) as described in to warm to room temperature (about 10 min-
Method 6, Section 8.1. Insert the glass wool utes), clean the outside of loose dirt and
into the top of the isopropanol bubbler as moisture, and weigh to the nearest 0.1 g in
shown in Figure 6A–1. Place about 25 g of the same manner as in Section 8.1. Record
Drierite into the second midget bubbler (the this final weight (maf). Discard used Ascarite
fourth vessel in the train). Clean the outside II material.
of the bubblers and impingers and allow the
vessels to reach room temperature. Weigh 9.0 Quality Control
the four vessels simultaneously to the near- Same as Method 6, Section 9.0.
est 0.1 g, and record this initial weight (mwi).
8.1.2 With one end of the CO2 absorber 10.0 Calibration and Standardization
sealed, place glass wool into the cylinder to
a depth of about 1 cm (0.5 in.). Place about
150 g of CO2 absorbing material in the cyl- 11.0 Analytical Procedure
inder on top of the glass wool, and fill the re-
maining space in the cylinder with glass 11.1 Sample Analysis. The sample analysis
wool. Assemble the cylinder as shown in Fig- procedure for SO2 is the same as that speci-
ure 6A–2. With the cylinder in a horizontal fied in Method 6, Section 11.0.
position, rotate it around the horizontal 11.2 Quality Assurance (QA) Audit Sam-
axis. The CO2 absorbing material should re- ples. Analysis of QA audit samples is re-
main in position during the rotation, and no quired only when this method is used for
open spaces or channels should be formed. If compliance determinations. Obtain an audit
necessary, pack more glass wool into the cyl- sample set as directed in Section 7.3.6 of
inder to make the CO2 absorbing material Method 6. Analyze the audit samples, and re-
stable. Clean the outside of the cylinder of port the results as directed in Section 11.3 of
loose dirt and moisture and allow the cyl- Method 6. Acceptance criteria for the audit
inder to reach room temperature. Weigh the results are the same as those in Method 6.
cylinder to the nearest 0.1 g, and record this
initial weight (mai). 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
8.1.3 Assemble the train as shown in Fig- Same as Method 6, Section 12.0, with the
ure 6A–1. Adjust the probe heater to a tem- addition of the following:
perature sufficient to prevent condensation 12.1 Nomenclature.
(see NOTE in Section 6.1). Place crushed ice Cw=Concentration of moisture, percent.
and water around the impingers and bub- CCO2=Concentration of CO2, dry basis, per-
blers. Mount the CO2 absorber outside the cent.
water bath in a vertical flow position with ESO2=Emission rate of SO2, ng/J (lb/106 Btu).
the sample gas inlet at the bottom. Flexible FC=Carbon F-factor from Method 19 for the
tubing (e.g., Tygon) may be used to connect fuel burned, dscm/J (dscf/106 Btu).
the last SO2 absorbing impinger to the mois- mwi=Initial weight of impingers, bubblers,
ture absorber and to connect the moisture and moisture absorber, g.
absorber to the CO2 absorber. A second, mwf=Final weight of impingers, bubblers, and
smaller CO2 absorber containing Ascarite II moisture absorber, g.
may be added in-line downstream of the pri- mai=Initial weight of CO2 absorber, g.
mary CO2 absorber as a breakthrough indi- maf=Final weight of CO2 absorber, g.
cator. Ascarite II turns white when CO2 is mSO2=Mass of SO2 collected, mg.
absorbed. VCO2(std)=Equivalent volume of CO2 collected
8.2 Sampling Train Leak-Check Proce- at standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
dure and Sample Collection. Same as Method Vw(std)=Equivalent volume of moisture col-
6, Sections 8.2 and 8.3, respectively. lected at standard conditions, scm (scf).
8.3 Sample Recovery.
12.2 CO2 Volume Collected, Corrected to
8.3.1 Moisture Measurement. Disconnect
Standard Conditions.
the isopropanol bubbler, the SO2 impingers,
= K 3 ( m af − m ai )
and the moisture absorber from the sample
train. Allow about 10 minutes for them to VCO ( std ) Eq. 6 A-1
2
reach room temperature, clean the outside of
loose dirt and moisture, and weigh them si- Where:
multaneously in the same manner as in Sec- K3=Equivalent volume of gaseous CO2 at
tion 8.1. Record this final weight (mwf). standard conditions, 5.467 × 10¥4 dscm/g
8.3.2 Peroxide Solution. Discard the con- (1.930 × 10¥2 dscf/g).
tents of the isopropanol bubbler and pour the 12.3 Moisture Volume Collected, Cor-
contents of the midget impingers into a rected to Standard Conditions.

leak-free polyethylene bottle for shipping.
ER17OC00.193</MATH>
Rinse the two midget impingers and con- Vw(std ) = K 4 ( m wf − m wi ) Eq. 6 A-2
necting tubes with water, and add the wash-
ing to the same storage container. Where:
255
ER17OC00.192</MATH>
K4=Equivalent volume of water vapor at 12.4 SO2 Concentration.
standard conditions, 1.336 × 10¥3 scm/g
(4.717 × 10¥2 scf/g).
K 2 N (Vt − Vtb )(Vso ln / Va )

Cso2 = Eq. 6A-3
Vm (std ) + Vco2 (std )
Where:
K2=32.03 mg SO2/meq. SO2 (7.061 × 10¥5 lb SO2/
meq. SO2)
12.5 CO2 Concentration.
Vco2 (std )
C co2 = Eq. 6A- 4
Vm (std ) + Vco2 (std )
12.6 Moisture Concentration.
Vw (std )
Cw = Eq. 6A-5
Vm (std ) + Vw (std ) + Vco2 (std )
13.0 Method Performance as described in Section 6.1, except that the

dry gas meter is not needed.
13.1 Range and Precision. The minimum 16.2 Preparation of the Sampling Train.
detectable limit and the upper limit for the Follow the same procedure as in Section 8.1,
measurement of SO2 are the same as for except do not weigh the isopropanol bubbler,
Method 6. For a 20-liter sample, this method the SO2 absorbing impingers, or the moisture
has a precision of ±0.5 percent CO2 for con- absorber.
centrations between 2.5 and 25 percent CO2 16.3 Sampling Train Leak-Check Proce-
and ±1.0 percent moisture for moisture con- dure and Sample Collection. Leak-check and
centrations greater than 5 percent. operate the sampling train as described in
Section 8.2, except that dry gas meter read-
ings, barometric pressure, and dry gas meter
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] temperatures need not be recorded during
sampling.
16.0 Alternative Methods 16.4 Sample Recovery. Follow the proce-
ER17OC00.197</MATH>
dure in Section 8.3, except do not weigh the
If the only emission measurement desired isopropanol bubbler, the SO2 absorbing
is in terms of emission rate of SO2 (ng/J or impingers, or the moisture absorber.
lb/106 Btu), an abbreviated procedure may be 16.5 Sample Analysis. Analysis of the per-
used. The differences between the above pro- oxide solution and QA audit samples is the
cedure and the abbreviated procedure are de- same as that described in Sections 11.1 and
ER17OC00.196</MATH>
scribed below. 11.2, respectively.

16.1 Sampling Train. The sampling train 16.6 Calculations.
is the same as that shown in Figure 6A–1 and 16.6.1 SO2 Collected.
m SO2 = K 2 N (Vt − Vtb )(Vsoln / Va ) Eq. 6A-6

ER17OC00.195</MATH>
256
ER17OC00.194</MATH>
Where: K2=7.061 × 10¥5 lb SO2/meq. SO2
K2=32.03 mg SO2/meq. SO2 16.6.2 Sulfur Dioxide Emission Rate.
E SO2 = K 5 Fc m so2 / ( m af − m ai ) Eq. 6A-7
Where: 2. Whittle, Richard N. and P.R. Westlin.

K5=1.829 × 109 mg/dscm Air Pollution Test Report: Development and
K2=0.1142 lb/dscf Evaluation of an Intermittent Integrated
SO2/CO2 Emission Sampling Procedure. Envi-
17.0 References ronmental Protection Agency, Emission
Same as Method 6, Section 17.0, References Standard and Engineering Division, Emis-
1 through 8, with the addition of the fol- sion Measurement Branch. Research Tri-
lowing: angle Park, NC. December 1979. 14 pp.
1. Stanley, Jon and P.R. Westlin. An Alter-
nate Method for Stack Gas Moisture Deter- 18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
mination. Source Evaluation Society News- Validation Data
letter. 3(4). November 1978.
257
ER17OC00.198</MATH>
258
ER17OC00.199</GPH>
METHOD 6B—DETERMINATION OF SULFUR DI- other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-
OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE DAILY AVERAGE tain reliable results, persons using this
EMISSIONS FROM FOSSIL FUEL COMBUSTION method should have a thorough knowledge of
SOURCES at least the following additional test meth-
ods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, Method 5,
Method 6, and Method 6A.

plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana- 1.0 Scope and Application
lytical) essential to its performance. Some
259
ER17OC00.410</GPH>
Analyte CAS No. Sensitivity nation due to corrosion. Glass probes or

other types of stainless steel, e.g., Hasteloy
Sulfur dioxide (SO2) 7449–09–05 3.4 mg SO2/m3 or Carpenter 20, are recommended for long-
(2.12 × 10¥7 lb/ft3) term use.
Carbon dioxide (CO2) 124–38–9 N/A
NOTE: For applications downstream of wet
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- scrubbers, a heated out-of-stack filter (either
ble for the determination of SO2 emissions borosilicate glass wool or glass fiber mat) is
from combustion sources in terms of con- necessary. Probe and filter heating systems
centration (ng/dscm or lb/dscf) and emission capable of maintaining a sample gas tem-
rate (ng/J or lb/106 Btu), and for the deter- perature of between 20 and 120 °C (68 and 248
mination of CO2 concentration (percent) on a °F) at the filter are also required in these
daily (24 hours) basis. cases. The electric supply for these heating
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to systems should be continuous and separate
the requirements of this method will en- from the timed operation of the sample
hance the quality of the data obtained from pump.
2.0 Summary of Method Same as Method 6A, Section 7.0, with the
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from the following exceptions:
sampling point in the stack intermittently 7.1 Isopropanol is not used for sampling.
over a 24-hour or other specified time period. 7.2 The hydrogen peroxide absorbing solu-
The SO2 fraction is measured by the barium- tion shall be diluted to no less than 6 percent
thorin titration method. Moisture and CO2 by volume, instead of 3 percent as specified
fractions are collected in the same sampling in Methods 6 and 6A.
train, and are determined gravimetrically. 7.3 If the Method 6B sampling train is to
be operated in a low sample flow condition
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] (less than 100 ml/min or 0.21 ft3/hr), molec-
ular sieve material may be substituted for
4.0 Interferences Ascarite II as the CO2 absorbing material.
Same as Method 6, Section 4.0. The recommended molecular sieve material
is Union Carbide 1⁄16 inch pellets, 5 A°, or
5.0 Safety equivalent. Molecular sieve material need
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve not be discarded following the sampling run,
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- provided that it is regenerated as per the
ment. This test method may not address all manufacturer’s instruction. Use of molecular
of the safety problems associated with its sieve material at flow rates higher than 100
use. It is the responsibility of the user to es- ml/min (0.21 ft3/hr) may cause erroneous CO2
tablish appropriate safety and health prac- results.
tices and determine the applicability of reg- 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport,
ulatory limitations prior to performing this and Storage
test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. Same as Method 8.1 Preparation of Sampling Train. Same
6, Section 5.2. as Method 6A, Section 8.1, with the addition
of the following:
6.0 Equipment and Supplies 8.1.1 The sampling train is assembled as
Same as Method 6A, Section 6.0, with the shown in Figure 6A–1 of Method 6A, except
following exceptions and additions: that the isopropanol bubbler is not included.
6.1 The isopropanol bubbler is not used. 8.1.2 Adjust the timer-switch to operate
An empty bubbler for the collection of liquid in the ‘‘on’’ position from 2 to 4 minutes on
droplets, that does not allow direct contact a 2-hour repeating cycle or other cycle speci-
between the collected liquid and the gas fied in the applicable regulation. Other timer
sample, may be included in the sampling sequences may be used with the restriction
train. that the total sample volume collected is be-
6.2 For intermittent operation, include an tween 25 and 60 liters (0.9 and 2.1 ft3) for the
industrial timer-switch designed to operate amounts of sampling reagents prescribed in
in the ‘‘on’’ position at least 2 minutes con- this method.
tinuously and ‘‘off’’ the remaining period 8.1.3 Add cold water to the tank until the
over a repeating cycle. The cycle of oper- impingers and bubblers are covered at least
ation is designated in the applicable regula- two-thirds of their length. The impingers
tion. At a minimum, the sampling operation and bubbler tank must be covered and pro-
tected from intense heat and direct sunlight.
should include at least 12, equal, evenly-

spaced periods per 24 hours. If freezing conditions exist, the impinger so-
6.3 Stainless steel sampling probes, type lution and the water bath must be protected.
316, are not recommended for use with Meth- NOTE: Sampling may be conducted con-
od 6B because of potential sample contami- tinuously if a low flow-rate sample pump [20
260
to 40 ml/min (0.04 to 0.08 ft3/hr) for the rea- 11.0 Analytical Procedures
gent volumes described in this method] is
11.1 Sample Loss Check and Analysis.
used. If sampling is continuous, the timer-
Same as Method 6, Sections 11.1 and 11.2, re-
switch is not necessary. In addition, if the
spectively.
sample pump is designed for constant rate 11.2 Quality Assurance (QA) Audit Sam-
sampling, the rate meter may be deleted. ples. Analysis of QA audit samples is re-
The total gas volume collected should be be- quired only when this method is used for
tween 25 and 60 liters (0.9 and 2.1 ft3) for the compliance determinations. Obtain an audit
amounts of sampling reagents prescribed in sample set as directed in Section 7.3.6 of
this method. Method 6. Analyze the audit samples at least
8.2 Sampling Train Leak-Check Proce- once for every 30 days of sample collection,
dure. Same as Method 6, Section 8.2. and report the results as directed in Section
8.3 Sample Collection. 11.3 of Method 6. The analyst performing the
8.3.1 The probe and filter (either in-stack, sample analyses shall perform the audit
out-of-stack, or both) must be heated to a analyses. If more than one analyst performs
temperature sufficient to prevent water con- the sample analyses during the 30-day sam-
densation. pling period, each analyst shall perform the
8.3.2 Record the initial dry gas meter audit analyses and all audit results shall be
reading. To begin sampling, position the tip reported. Acceptance criteria for the audit
of the probe at the sampling point, connect results are the same as those in Method 6.
the probe to the first impinger (or filter), 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
and start the timer and the sample pump.
Adjust the sample flow to a constant rate of Same as Method 6A, Section 12.0, except
approximately 1.0 liter/min (0.035 cfm) as in- that Pbar and Tm correspond to the values re-
dicated by the rotameter. Observe the oper- corded in Section 8.3.3 of this method. The
ation of the timer, and determine that it is values are as follows:
operating as intended (i.e., the timer is in Pbar=Initial barometric pressure for the test
the ‘‘on’’ position for the desired period, and period, mm Hg.
the cycle repeats as required). Tm=Absolute meter temperature for the test
8.3.3 One time between 9 a.m. and 11 a.m. period, °K.
during the 24-hour sampling period, record
the dry gas meter temperature (Tm) and the 13.0 Method Performance
barometric pressure (P(bar)). 13.1 Range.
8.3.4 At the conclusion of the run, turn off 13.1.1 Sulfur Dioxide. Same as Method 6.
the timer and the sample pump, remove the 13.1.2 Carbon Dioxide. Not determined.
probe from the stack, and record the final 13.2 Repeatability and Reproducibility.
gas meter volume reading. Conduct a leak- EPA-sponsored collaborative studies were
check as described in Section 8.2. If a leak is undertaken to determine the magnitude of
found, void the test run or use procedures ac- repeatability and reproducibility achievable
ceptable to the Administrator to adjust the by qualified testers following the procedures
sample volume for leakage. Repeat the steps in this method. The results of the studies
in Sections 8.3.1 to 8.3.4 for successive runs. evolve from 145 field tests including compari-
8.4 Sample Recovery. The procedures for sons with Methods 3 and 6. For measure-
sample recovery (moisture measurement, ments of emission rates from wet, flue gas
peroxide solution, and CO2 absorber) are the desulfurization units in (ng/J), the repeat-
same as those in Method 6A, Section 8.3. ability (intra-laboratory precision) is 8.0 per-
cent and the reproducibility (inter-labora-
9.0 Quality Control tory precision) is 11.1 percent.
Same as Method 6, Section 9.0., with the 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
exception of the isopropanol-check.
16.0 Alternative Methods
Same as Method 6, Section 10.0, with the
addition of the following: Same as Method 6A, Section 16.0, except
that the timer is needed and is operated as
10.1 Periodic Calibration Check. After 30
outlined in this method.
days of operation of the test train, conduct a
calibration check according to the same pro- 17.0 References
cedures as the post-test calibration check
(Method 6, Section 10.1.2). If the deviation Same as Method 6A, Section 17.0, with the
addition of the following:
between initial and periodic calibration fac-

tors exceeds 5 percent, use the smaller of the 1. Butler, Frank E., et. al. The Collabo-
two factors in calculations for the preceding rative Test of Method 6B: Twenty-Four-Hour
30 days of data, but use the most recent cali- Analysis of SO2 and CO2. JAPCA. Vol. 33, No.
bration factor for succeeding test runs. 10. October 1983.
261
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and This method does not completely describe
Validation Data [Reserved] all equipment, supplies, and sampling and
analytical procedures you will need but re-
METHOD 6C—DETERMINATION OF SULFUR DIOX- fers to other methods for some of the details.
IDE EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY SOURCES Therefore, to obtain reliable results, you
(INSTRUMENTAL ANALYZER PROCEDURE) should also have a thorough knowledge of
these additional test methods which are
1.0 Scope and Application found in appendix A to this part:
What is Method 6C? (a) Method 1—Sample and Velocity Tra-
Method 6C is a procedure for measuring (b) Method 4—Determination of Moisture
sulfur dioxide (SO2) in stationary source Content in Stack Gases.
emissions using a continuous instrumental (c) Method 6—Determination of Sulfur Di-
analyzer. Quality assurance and quality con- oxide Emissions from Stationary Sources.
trol requirements are included to assure that (d) Method 7E—Determination of Nitrogen
you, the tester, collect data of known qual- Oxides Emissions from Stationary Sources
ity. You must document your adherence to (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure).
these specific requirements for equipment, 1.1 Analytes. What does this method deter-
supplies, sample collection and analysis, cal- mine? This method measures the concentra-
culations, and data analysis. tion of sulfur dioxide.
SO2 ................................................................................ 7446–09–5 Typically <2% of Calibration Span.
1.2 Applicability. When is this method re- 6.1 What do I need for the measurement sys-
quired? The use of Method 6C may be re- tem? The essential components of the meas-
quired by specific New Source Performance urement system are the same as those in
Standards, Clean Air Marketing rules, State Sections 6.1 and 6.2 of Method 7E, except that
Implementation Plans, and permits where the SO2 analyzer described in Section 6.2 of
SO2 concentrations in stationary source this method must be used instead of the ana-
emissions must be measured, either to deter- lyzer described in Section 6.2 of Method 7E.
mine compliance with an applicable emission You must follow the noted specifications in
standard or to conduct performance testing Section 6.1 of Method 7E.
of a continuous emission monitoring system
6.2 What analyzer must I use? You may use
(CEMS). Other regulations may also require
an instrument that uses an ultraviolet, non-
the use of Method 6C.
dispersive infrared, fluorescence, or other de-
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. How good must
tection principle to continuously measure
my collected data be? Refer to Section 1.3 of
Method 7E. SO2 in the gas stream and meets the per-
formance specifications in Section 13.0. The
2.0 Summary of Method low-range and dual-range analyzer provisions
in Sections 6.2.8.1 and 6.2.8.2 of Method 7E
In this method, you continuously sample apply.
the effluent gas and convey the sample to an
analyzer that measures the concentration of 7.0 Reagents and Standards
SO2. You must meet the performance re-
quirements of this method to validate your 7.1 Calibration Gas. What calibration gases do
data. I need? Refer to Section 7.1 of Method 7E for
the calibration gas requirements. Example
3.0 Definitions calibration gas mixtures are listed below.
Refer to Section 3.0 of Method 7E for the (a) SO2 in nitrogen (N2).
applicable definitions. (b) SO2 in air.
(c) SO2 and CO2 in N2.
4.0 Interferences (d) SO2 andO2 in N2.
Refer to Section 4.1 of Method 6. (e) SO2/CO2/O2 gas mixture in N2.
(f) CO2/NOX gas mixture in N2.
5.0 Safety (g) CO2/SO2/NOX gas mixture in N2.
7.2 Interference Check. What additional re-
Refer to Section 5.0 of Method 7E.
agents do I need for the interference check? The
6.0 Equipment and Supplies test gases for the interference check are list-
ed in Table 7E–3 of Method 7E. For the alter-
Figure 7E–1 of Method 7E is a schematic native interference check, you must use the
diagram of an acceptable measurement sys- reagents described in Section 7.0 of Method 6.
tem.
262
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
and Transport
8.1 Sampling Site and Sampling Points. You
must follow the procedures of Section 8.1 of 16.0 Alternative Procedures
Method 7E. 16.1 Alternative Interference Check. You
8.2 Initial Measurement System Performance may perform an alternative interference
Tests. You must follow the procedures in Sec- check consisting of at least three compari-
tion 8.2 of Method 7E. If a dilution-type son runs between Method 6C and Method 6.
measurement system is used, the special This check validates the Method 6C results
considerations in Section 8.3 of Method 7E at each particular facility of known poten-
also apply. tial interferences. When testing under condi-
8.3 Interference Check. You must follow tions of low concentrations (< 15 ppm), this
the procedures of Section 8.2.7 of Method 7E alternative interference check is not al-
to conduct an interference check, sub- lowed.
stituting SO2 for NOX as the method pollut- NOTE: The procedure described below ap-
ant. For dilution-type measurement sys- plies to non-dilution sampling systems only.
tems, you must use the alternative inter- If this alternative interference check is used
ference check procedure in Section 16 and a for a dilution sampling system, use a stand-
co-located, unmodified Method 6 sampling ard Method 6 sampling train and extract the
train. sample directly from the exhaust stream at
8.4 Sample Collection. You must follow the points collocated with the Method 6C sample
procedures of Section 8.4 of Method 7E. probe.
8.5 Post-Run System Bias Check and Drift (1) Build the modified Method 6 sampling
Assessment. You must follow the procedures train (flow control valve, two midget
of Section 8.5 of Method 7E. impingers containing 3 percent hydrogen
peroxide, and dry gas meter) shown in Figure
9.0 Quality Control 6C–1. Connect the sampling train to the sam-
ple bypass discharge vent. Record the dry
Follow quality control procedures in Sec- gas meter reading before you begin sam-
tion 9.0 of Method 7E. pling. Simultaneously collect modified
Method 6 and Method 6C samples. Open the
10.0 Calibration and Standardization flow control valve in the modified Method 6
Follow the procedures for calibration and train as you begin to sample with Method 6C.
standardization in Section 10.0 of Method 7E. Adjust the Method 6 sampling rate to 1 liter
per minute (.10 percent). The sampling time
11.0 Analytical Procedures per run must be the same as for Method 6
plus twice the average measurement system
Because sample collection and analysis are response time. If your modified Method 6
performed together (see Section 8), addi- train does not include a pump, you risk bias-
tional discussion of the analytical procedure ing the results high if you over-pressurize
is not necessary. the midget impingers and cause a leak. You
can reduce this risk by cautiously increasing
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis the flow rate as sampling begins.
You must follow the applicable procedures (2) After completing a run, record the final
for calculations and data analysis in Section dry gas meter reading, meter temperature,
12.0 of Method 7E as applicable, substituting and barometric pressure. Recover and ana-
SO2 for NOX as appropriate. lyze the contents of the midget impingers
using the procedures in Method 6. You must
13.0 Method Performance analyze performance audit samples as de-
scribed in Method 6 with this interference
13.1 The specifications for the applicable check. Determine the average gas concentra-
performance checks are the same as in Sec- tion reported by Method 6C for the run.
tion 13.0 of Method 7E.
13.2 Alternative Interference Check. The re- 17.0 References
sults are acceptable if the difference between 1. ‘‘EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay
the Method 6C result and the modified Meth- and Certification of Gaseous Calibration
od 6 result is less than 7.0 percent of the Standards’’ September 1997 as amended,
Method 6 result for each of the three test EPA–600/R–97/121
runs. For the purposes of comparison, the
Method 6 and 6C results must be expressed in 18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
the same units of measure. Validation Data
263
METHOD 7—DETERMINATION OF NITROGEN other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-

OXIDE EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY SOURCES tain reliable results, persons using this
NOTE: This method does not include all of at least the following additional test meth-
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- ods: Method 1 and Method 5.
Nitrogen oxides (NOX), as NO2, including:

Nitric oxide (NO) ............................................................... 10102–43–9
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) ..................................................... 10102–44–0 2–400 mg/dscm
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- 3.0 Definitions [Reserved]

ble for the measurement of nitrogen oxides
(NOX) emitted from stationary sources. 4.0 Interferences
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to Biased results have been observed when
the requirements of this method will en- sampling under conditions of high sulfur di-
hance the quality of the data obtained from oxide concentrations (above 2000 ppm).
air pollutant sample methods.
5.0 Safety
A grab sample is collected in an evacuated hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
flask containing a dilute sulfuric acid-hydro- ment. This test method may not address all
gen peroxide absorbing solution, and the ni- of the safety problems associated with its
trogen oxides, except nitrous oxide, are use. It is the responsibility of the user to es-
measured colorimetrically using the tablish appropriate safety and health prac-
phenoldisulfonic acid (PDS) procedure. tices and to determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to performing

this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following re-
agents are hazardous. Personal protective
equipment and safe procedures are useful in
264
ER15MY06.000</GPH>
preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc- or other gauge capable of measuring pressure
curs, immediately flush with copious to within 2.5 mm (0.10 in.) Hg.
amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Re- 6.1.7 Pump. Capable of evacuating the col-
move clothing under shower and decontami- lection flask to a pressure equal to or less
nate. Treat residual chemical burns as ther- than 75 mm (3 in.) Hg absolute.
mal burns. 6.1.8 Squeeze Bulb. One-way.
5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating 6.1.9 Volumetric Pipette. 25-ml.
to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs. 6.1.10 Stopcock and Ground Joint Grease.
5.2.2 Phenoldisulfonic Acid. Irritating to A high-vacuum, high-temperature
eyes and skin. chlorofluorocarbon grease is required.
5.2.3 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes Halocarbon 25–5S has been found to be effec-
severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation tive.
causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. 6.1.11 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or
Reacts exothermically with limited amounts other barometer capable of measuring at-
of water. mospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm (0.1 in.)
5.2.4 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly de- Hg. See NOTE in Method 5, Section 6.1.2.
structive to body tissue. Will cause third de- 6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items
gree burns. Eye damage may result in blind- are required for sample recovery:
ness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of 6.2.1 Graduated Cylinder. 50-ml with 1 ml
the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May divisions.
cause lung tissue damage with edema. 1 mg/
6.2.2 Storage Containers. Leak-free poly-
m3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in
ethylene bottles.
higher concentrations, death. Provide ven-
6.2.3 Wash Bottle. Polyethylene or glass.
tilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently
with metals and organics. 6.2.4 Glass Stirring Rod.
5.2.5 Phenol. Poisonous and caustic. Do 6.2.5 Test Paper for Indicating pH. To
not handle with bare hands as it is absorbed cover the pH range of 7 to 14.
through the skin. 6.3 Analysis. The following items are re-
quired for analysis:
6.0 Equipment and Supplies 6.3.1 Volumetric Pipettes. Two 1-ml, two
2-ml, one 3-ml, one 4-ml, two 10-ml, and one
6.1 Sample Collection. A schematic of the
25-ml for each sample and standard.
sampling train used in performing this meth-
6.3.2 Porcelain Evaporating Dishes. 175- to
od is shown in Figure 7–1. Other grab sam-
250-ml capacity with lip for pouring, one for
pling systems or equipment, capable of
each sample and each standard. The Coors
measuring sample volume to within 2.0 per-
No. 45006 (shallowform, 195-ml) has been
cent and collecting a sufficient sample vol-
found to be satisfactory. Alternatively,
ume to allow analytical reproducibility to
polymethyl pentene beakers (Nalge No. 1203,
within 5 percent, will be considered accept-
150-ml), or glass beakers (150-ml) may be
able alternatives, subject to the approval of
used. When glass beakers are used, etching of
the Administrator. The following items are
the beakers may cause solid matter to be
required for sample collection:
present in the analytical step; the solids
6.1.1 Probe. Borosilicate glass tubing, suf-
should be removed by filtration.
ficiently heated to prevent water condensa-
tion and equipped with an in-stack or heated 6.3.3 Steam Bath. Low-temperature ovens
out-of-stack filter to remove particulate or thermostatically controlled hot plates
matter (a plug of glass wool is satisfactory kept below 70 °C (160 °F) are acceptable alter-
for this purpose). Stainless steel or Teflon natives.
tubing may also be used for the probe. Heat- 6.3.4 Dropping Pipette or Dropper. Three
ing is not necessary if the probe remains dry required.
during the purging period. 6.3.5 Polyethylene Policeman. One for
6.1.2 Collection Flask. Two-liter each sample and each standard.
borosilicate, round bottom flask, with short 6.3.6 Graduated Cylinder. 100-ml with 1-ml
neck and 24/40 standard taper opening, pro- divisions.
tected against implosion or breakage. 6.3.7 Volumetric Flasks. 50-ml (one for
6.1.3 Flask Valve. T-bore stopcock con- each sample and each standard), 100-ml (one
nected to a 24/40 standard taper joint. for each sample and each standard, and one
6.1.4 Temperature Gauge. Dial-type ther- for the working standard KNO3 solution), and
mometer, or other temperature gauge, capa- 1000-ml (one).
ble of measuring 1 °C (2 °F) intervals from ¥5 6.3.8 Spectrophotometer. To measure at
to 50 °C (23 to 122 °F). 410 nm.
6.1.5 Vacuum Line. Tubing capable of 6.3.9 Graduated Pipette. 10-ml with 0.1-ml
withstanding a vacuum of 75 mm (3 in.) Hg divisions.

absolute pressure, with ‘‘T’’ connection and 6.3.10 Test Paper for Indicating pH. To
T-bore stopcock. cover the pH range of 7 to 14.
6.1.6 Vacuum Gauge. U-tube manometer, 1 6.3.11 Analytical Balance. To measure to
meter (39 in.), with 1 mm (0.04 in.) divisions, within 0.1 mg.
265
7.0 Reagents and Standards NOTE: The responsible enforcement author-
ity should be notified at least 30 days prior
Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended
to the test date to allow sufficient time for
that all reagents conform to the specifica-
sample delivery.
tions established by the Committee on Ana-
lytical Reagents of the American Chemical 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage
Society, where such specifications are avail- and Transport
able; otherwise, use the best available grade.
7.1 Sample Collection. The following re- 8.1 Sample Collection.
agents are required for sampling: 8.1.1 Flask Volume. The volume of the
7.1.1 Water. Deionized distilled to conform collection flask and flask valve combination
to ASTM D 1193–77 or 91 Type 3 (incorporated must be known prior to sampling. Assemble
by reference—see § 60.17). The KMnO4 test for the flask and flask valve, and fill with water
oxidizable organic matter may be omitted to the stopcock. Measure the volume of
when high concentrations of organic matter water to ±10 ml. Record this volume on the
are not expected to be present. flask.
7.1.2 Absorbing Solution. Cautiously add 8.1.2 Pipette 25 ml of absorbing solution
2.8 ml concentrated H2SO4 to a 1-liter flask into a sample flask, retaining a sufficient
partially filled with water. Mix well, and add quantity for use in preparing the calibration
6 ml of 3 percent hydrogen peroxide, freshly standards. Insert the flask valve stopper into
prepared from 30 percent hydrogen peroxide the flask with the valve in the ‘‘purge’’ posi-
solution. Dilute to 1 liter of water and mix tion. Assemble the sampling train as shown
well. The absorbing solution should be used in Figure 7–1, and place the probe at the
within 1 week of its preparation. Do not ex- sampling point. Make sure that all fittings
pose to extreme heat or direct sunlight. are tight and leak-free, and that all ground
7.2 Sample Recovery. The following re- glass joints have been greased properly with
agents are required for sample recovery: a high-vacuum, high temperature
7.2.1 Water. Same as in 7.1.1. chlorofluorocarbon-based stopcock grease.
7.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide, 1 N. Dissolve 40 g Turn the flask valve and the pump valve to
NaOH in water, and dilute to 1 liter. their ‘‘evacuate’’ positions. Evacuate the
7.3 Analysis. The following reagents and flask to 75 mm (3 in.) Hg absolute pressure,
standards are required for analysis: or less. Evacuation to a pressure approach-
7.3.1 Water. Same as in 7.1.1. ing the vapor pressure of water at the exist-
7.3.2 Fuming Sulfuric Acid. 15 to 18 per- ing temperature is desirable. Turn the pump
cent by weight free sulfur trioxide. HANDLE valve to its ‘‘vent’’ position, and turn off the
WITH CAUTION. pump. Check for leakage by observing the
7.3.3 Phenol. White solid. manometer for any pressure fluctuation.
7.3.4 Sulfuric Acid. Concentrated, 95 per- (Any variation greater than 10 mm (0.4 in.)
cent minimum assay. Hg over a period of 1 minute is not accept-
7.3.5 Potassium Nitrate (KNO3). Dried at able, and the flask is not to be used until the
105 to 110 °C (221 to 230 °F) for a minimum of leakage problem is corrected. Pressure in the
2 hours just prior to preparation of standard flask is not to exceed 75 mm (3 in.) Hg abso-
solution. lute at the time sampling is commenced.)
7.3.6 Standard KNO3 Solution. Dissolve Record the volume of the flask and valve
exactly 2.198 g of dried KNO3 in water, and (Vf), the flask temperature (Ti), and the baro-
dilute to 1 liter with water in a 1000-ml volumetric pressure. Turn the flask valve coun-
metric flask. terclockwise to its ‘‘purge’’ position, and do
7.3.7 Working Standard KNO3 Solution. the same with the pump valve. Purge the
Dilute 10 ml of the standard solution to 100 probe and the vacuum tube using the squeeze
ml with water. One ml of the working stand- bulb. If condensation occurs in the probe and
ard solution is equivalent to 100 μg nitrogen the flask valve area, heat the probe, and
dioxide (NO2). purge until the condensation disappears.
7.3.8 Phenoldisulfonic Acid Solution. Dis- Next, turn the pump valve to its ‘‘vent’’ posi-
solve 25 g of pure white phenol solid in 150 ml tion. Turn the flask valve clockwise to its
concentrated sulfuric acid on a steam bath. ‘‘evacuate’’ position, and record the dif-
Cool, add 75 ml fuming sulfuric acid (15 to 18 ference in the mercury levels in the manom-
percent by weight free sulfur trioxide—HAN- eter. The absolute internal pressure in the
DLE WITH CAUTION), and heat at 100 °C (212 flask (Pi) is equal to the barometric pressure
°F) for 2 hours. Store in a dark, stoppered less the manometer reading. Immediately
bottle. turn the flask valve to the ‘‘sample’’ posi-
7.3.9 Concentrated Ammonium Hydroxide. tion, and permit the gas to enter the flask
7.3.10 Quality Assurance Audit Samples. until pressures in the flask and sample line
When making compliance determinations, (i.e., duct, stack) are equal. This will usually
and upon availability, audit samples may be require about 15 seconds; a longer period in-
obtained from the appropriate EPA Regional dicates a plug in the probe, which must be
Office or from the responsible enforcement corrected before sampling is continued. After
authority. collecting the sample, turn the flask valve to
266
its ‘‘purge’’ position, and disconnect the 8.2.1 Connect the flask to a mercury filled
flask from the sampling train. U-tube manometer. Open the valve from the
8.1.3 Shake the flask for at least 5 min- flask to the manometer, and record the flask
utes. temperature (Tf), the barometric pressure,
8.1.4 If the gas being sampled contains in- and the difference between the mercury lev-
sufficient oxygen for the conversion of NO to els in the manometer. The absolute internal
NO2 (e.g., an applicable subpart of the stand- pressure in the flask (Pf) is the barometric
ards may require taking a sample of a cali- pressure less the manometer reading. Trans-
bration gas mixture of NO in N2), then intro-
fer the contents of the flask to a leak-free
duce oxygen into the flask to permit this
polyethylene bottle. Rinse the flask twice
conversion. Oxygen may be introduced into
the flask by one of three methods: (1) Before with 5 ml portions of water, and add the
evacuating the sampling flask, flush with rinse water to the bottle. Adjust the pH to
pure cylinder oxygen, then evacuate flask to between 9 and 12 by adding 1 N NaOH,
75 mm (3 in.) Hg absolute pressure or less; or dropwise (about 25 to 35 drops). Check the pH
(2) inject oxygen into the flask after sam- by dipping a stirring rod into the solution
pling; or (3) terminate sampling with a min- and then touching the rod to the pH test
imum of 50 mm (2 in.) Hg vacuum remaining paper. Remove as little material as possible
in the flask, record this final pressure, and during this step. Mark the height of the liq-
then vent the flask to the atmosphere until uid level so that the container can be
the flask pressure is almost equal to atmos- checked for leakage after transport. Label
pheric pressure. the container to identify clearly its con-
8.2 Sample Recovery. Let the flask sit for tents. Seal the container for shipping.
a minimum of 16 hours, and then shake the
contents for 2 minutes. 9.0 Quality Control
10.1 ................. Spectrophotometer calibration ......................... Ensure linearity of spectrophotometer response to standards.
11.4 ................. Audit sample analysis ...................................... Evaluate analytical technique, preparation of standards.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization spectrophotometer is probably malfunc-

tioning and should be repaired. When a peak
10.1 Spectrophotometer.
is obtained within the 400 to 415 nm range,
10.1.1 Optimum Wavelength Determina-
the wavelength at which this peak occurs
tion.
shall be the optimum wavelength for the
10.1.1.1 Calibrate the wavelength scale of
the spectrophotometer every 6 months. The measurement of absorbance of both the
calibration may be accomplished by using an standards and the samples. For a single-
energy source with an intense line emission beam spectrophotometer, follow the scan-
such as a mercury lamp, or by using a series ning procedure described above, except scan
of glass filters spanning the measuring range separately the blank and standard solutions.
of the spectrophotometer. Calibration mate- The optimum wavelength shall be the wave-
rials are available commercially and from length at which the maximum difference in
the National Institute of Standards and absorbance between the standard and the
Technology. Specific details on the use of blank occurs.
such materials should be supplied by the 10.1.2 Determination of Spectrophotom-
vendor; general information about calibra- eter Calibration Factor Kc. Add 0 ml, 2.0 ml,
tion techniques can be obtained from general 4.0 ml, 6.0 ml, and 8.0 ml of the KNO3 working
reference books on analytical chemistry. standard solution (1 ml=100 μg NO2) to a se-
The wavelength scale of the spectrophotom- ries of five 50-ml volumetric flasks. To each
eter must read correctly within 5 nm at all flask, add 25 ml of absorbing solution and 10
calibration points; otherwise, repair and re- ml water. Add 1 N NaOH to each flask until
calibrate the spectrophotometer. Once the
the pH is between 9 and 12 (about 25 to 35
wavelength scale of the spectrophotometer is
drops). Dilute to the mark with water. Mix
in proper calibration, use 410 nm as the opti-
thoroughly, and pipette a 25-ml aliquot of
mum wavelength for the measurement of the
absorbance of the standards and samples. each solution into a separate porcelain
10.1.1.2 Alternatively, a scanning proce- evaporating dish. Beginning with the evapo-
dure may be employed to determine the ration step, follow the analysis procedure of
proper measuring wavelength. If the instru- Section 11.2 until the solution has been
transferred to the 100-ml volumetric flask
ment is a double-beam spectrophotometer,

scan the spectrum between 400 and 415 nm and diluted to the mark. Measure the absorb-
using a 200 μg NO2 standard solution in the ance of each solution at the optimum wave-
sample cell and a blank solution in the ref- length as determined in Section 10.2.1. This
erence cell. If a peak does not occur, the calibration procedure must be repeated on
267
each day that samples are analyzed. Cal- dilute to the mark with water. If solids are
culate the spectrophotometer calibration absent, the solution can be transferred di-
factor as shown in Section 12.2. rectly to the 100-ml volumetric flask and di-
10.1.3 Spectrophotometer Calibration luted to the mark with water.
Quality Control. Multiply the absorbance 11.3 Sample Analysis. Mix the contents of
value obtained for each standard by the Kc the flask thoroughly, and measure the ab-
factor (reciprocal of the least squares slope) sorbance at the optimum wavelength used
to determine the distance each calibration for the standards (Section 10.2.1), using the
point lies from the theoretical calibration blank solution as a zero reference. Dilute the
line. The difference between the calculated sample and the blank with equal volumes of
concentration values and the actual con- water if the absorbance exceeds A4, the ab-
centrations (i.e., 100, 200, 300, and 400 μg NO2) sorbance of the 400-μg NO2 standard (see Sec-
should be less than 7 percent for all stand- tion 10.2.2).
ards. 11.4 Audit Sample Analysis.
10.2 Barometer. Calibrate against a mer- 11.4.1 When the method is used to analyze
cury barometer. samples to demonstrate compliance with a
10.3 Temperature Gauge. Calibrate dial source emission regulation, an audit sample
thermometers against mercury-in-glass ther- must be analyzed, subject to availability.
mometers. 11.4.2 Concurrently analyze the audit
10.4 Vacuum Gauge. Calibrate mechanical sample and the compliance samples in the
gauges, if used, against a mercury manom-
same manner to evaluate the technique of
eter such as that specified in Section 6.1.6.
the analyst and the standards preparation.
10.5 Analytical Balance. Calibrate against
11.4.3 The same analyst, analytical re-
standard weights.
agents, and analytical system must be used
11.0 Analytical Procedures for the compliance samples and the audit
sample. If this condition is met, duplicate
11.1 Sample Loss Check. Note the level of auditing of subsequent compliance analyses
the liquid in the container, and confirm for the same enforcement agency within a 30-
whether any sample was lost during ship- day period is waived. An audit sample set
ment. Note this on the analytical data sheet. may not be used to validate different sets of
If a noticeable amount of leakage has oc- compliance samples under the jurisdiction of
curred, either void the sample or use meth- separate enforcement agencies, unless prior
ods, subject to the approval of the Adminis- arrangements have been made with both en-
trator, to correct the final results. forcement agencies.
11.2 Sample Preparation. Immediately
11.5 Audit Sample Results.
prior to analysis, transfer the contents of
11.5.1 Calculate the audit sample con-
the shipping container to a 50 ml volumetric
flask, and rinse the container twice with 5 centrations and submit results using the in-
ml portions of water. Add the rinse water to structions provided with the audit samples.
the flask, and dilute to mark with water; 11.5.2 Report the results of the audit sam-
mix thoroughly. Pipette a 25-ml aliquot into ples and the compliance determination sam-
the porcelain evaporating dish. Return any ples along with their identification numbers,
unused portion of the sample to the poly- and the analyst’s name to the responsible en-
ethylene storage bottle. Evaporate the 25-ml forcement authority. Include this informa-
aliquot to dryness on a steam bath, and tion with reports of any subsequent compli-
allow to cool. Add 2 ml phenoldisulfonic acid ance analyses for the same enforcement au-
solution to the dried residue, and triturate thority during the 30-day period.
thoroughly with a polyethylene policeman. 11.5.3 The concentrations of the audit
Make sure the solution contacts all the res- samples obtained by the analyst must agree
idue. Add 1 ml water and 4 drops of con- within 5 percent of the actual concentration.
centrated sulfuric acid. Heat the solution on If the 5 percent specification is not met, re-
a steam bath for 3 minutes with occasional analyze the compliance and audit samples,
stirring. Allow the solution to cool, add 20 and include initial and reanalysis values in
ml water, mix well by stirring, and add con- the test report.
centrated ammonium hydroxide, dropwise, 11.5.4 Failure to meet the 5-percent speci-
with constant stirring, until the pH is 10 (as fication may require retests until the audit
determined by pH paper). If the sample con- problems are resolved. However, if the audit
tains solids, these must be removed by filtra- results do not affect the compliance or non-
tion (centrifugation is an acceptable alter- compliance status of the affected facility,
native, subject to the approval of the Admin- the Administrator may waive the reanalysis
istrator) as follows: Filter through Whatman requirement, further audits, or retests and
No. 41 filter paper into a 100-ml volumetric accept the results of the compliance test.
flask. Rinse the evaporating dish with three While steps are being taken to resolve audit
5-ml portions of water. Filter these three analysis problems, the Administrator may
rinses. Wash the filter with at least three 15- also choose to use the data to determine the
ml portions of water. Add the filter washings compliance or noncompliance status of the
to the contents of the volumetric flask, and affected facility.
268
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations Kc=Spectrophotometer calibration factor.
m=Mass of NOX as NO2 in gas sample, μg.
Carry out the calculations, retaining at
least one extra significant figure beyond Pf=Final absolute pressure of flask, mm Hg
that of the acquired data. Round off figures (in. Hg).
after final calculations. Pi=Initial absolute pressure of flask, mm Hg
12.1 Nomenclature. (in. Hg).
Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg
A=Absorbance of sample.
(29.92 in. Hg).
A1=Absorbance of the 100-μg NO2 standard.
A2=Absorbance of the 200-μg NO2 standard. RE=Relative error for QA audit samples, per-
A3=Absorbance of the 300-μg NO2 standard. cent.
A4=Absorbance of the 400-μg NO2 standard. Tf=Final absolute temperature of flask, °K
C=Concentration of NOX as NO2, dry basis, (°R).
corrected to standard conditions, mg/dsm3 Ti=Initial absolute temperature of flask, °K
(lb/dscf). (°R).
Cd=Determined audit sample concentration, Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K
mg/dscm. (528 °R).
Ca=Actual audit sample concentration, mg/ Vsc=Sample volume at standard conditions
dscm. (dry basis), ml.
F=Dilution factor (i.e., 25/5, 25/10, etc., re- Vf=Volume of flask and valve, ml.
quired only if sample dilution was needed Va=Volume of absorbing solution, 25 ml.
to reduce the absorbance into the range of 12.2 Spectrophotometer Calibration Fac-
the calibration). tor.
A1 + 2 A 2 + 3A 3 + 4 A 4
K c = 100 Eq. 7-1
A12 + A 2 2 + A 32 + A 4 2
12.3 Sample Volume, Dry Basis, Corrected

to Standard Conditions.
Tstd ⎢ Pf Pi ⎥
Vsc = (Vf − Va ) ⎢ − ⎥ Eq. 7-2
Pstd ⎣ Tf Ti ⎦
⎢P P ⎥
= K1 (Vf − 25) ⎢ f − i ⎥
⎣ Tf Ti ⎦
ER17OC00.204</MATH>
Where:
K1=0.3858 °K/mm Hg for metric units, C = K 2 ( m / Vsc ) Eq. 7- 4
K1=17.65 °R/in. Hg for English units.
12.4 Total μg NO2 per sample.
ER17OC00.203</MATH>
Where:
m = 2 K c AF Eq. 7-3 K2=103 (mg/m3)/(μg/ml) for metric units,
K2=6.242 × 10¥5 (lb/scf)/(μg/ml) for English
units.
Where: 12.6 Relative Error for QA Audit Samples.
ER17OC00.202</MATH>
2=50/25, the aliquot factor.

NOTE: If other than a 25-ml aliquot is used RE = 100 (C d − C a ) / C a Eq. 7-5
for analysis, the factor 2 must be replaced by
a corresponding factor.
12.5 Sample Concentration, Dry Basis,

13.0 Method Performance
Corrected to Standard Conditions.
ER17OC00.201</MATH>
13.1 Range. The analytical range of the

method has been determined to be 2 to 400
milligrams NOX (as NO2) per dry standard
269
ER17OC00.200</MATH>
cubic meter, without having to dilute the Bureau of Mines, U.S. Dept. of Interior. R.I.
sample. 3687. February 1943.
5. Hamil, H.F. and D.E. Camann. Collabo-
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] rative Study of Method for the Determina-
tion of Nitrogen Oxide Emissions from Sta-
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] tionary Sources (Fossil Fuel-Fired Steam
Generators). Southwest Research Institute
16.0 References Report for Environmental Protection Agen-
1. Standard Methods of Chemical Analysis. cy. Research Triangle Park, NC. October 5,
6th ed. New York, D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc. 1973.
1962. Vol. 1, pp. 329–330. 6. Hamil, H.F. and R.E. Thomas. Collabo-
2. Standard Method of Test for Oxides of rative Study of Method for the Determina-
Nitrogen in Gaseous Combustion Products tion of Nitrogen Oxide Emissions from Sta-
(Phenoldisulfonic Acid Procedure). In: 1968 tionary Sources (Nitric Acid Plants). South-
Book of ASTM Standards, Part 26. Philadel- west Research Institute Report for Environ-
phia, PA. 1968. ASTM Designation D 1608–60, mental Protection Agency. Research Tri-
angle Park, NC. May 8, 1974.
pp. 725–729.
7. Stack Sampling Safety Manual (Draft).
3. Jacob, M.B. The Chemical Analysis of
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Of-
Air Pollutants. New York. Interscience Pub- fice of Air Quality Planning and Standards,
lishers, Inc. 1960. Vol. 10, pp. 351–356. Research Triangle Park, NC. September 1978.
4. Beatty, R.L., L.B. Berger, and H.H.
Schrenk. Determination of Oxides of Nitro- 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
gen by the Phenoldisulfonic Acid Method. Validation Data
270
METHOD 7A—DETERMINATION OF NITROGEN other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-

OXIDE EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY tain reliable results, persons using this
SOURCES (ION CHROMATOGRAPHIC METHOD) method should have a thorough knowledge of
NOTE: This method does not include all of ods: Method 1, Method 3, Method 5, and
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- Method 7.

271
ER17OC00.205</GPH>

Nitric oxide (NO) ............................................................... 10102–43–9
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) ..................................................... 10102–44–0 65–655 ppmv
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- 6.2 Sample Recovery. Same as in Method
ble for the determination of NOX emissions 7, Section 6.2, except the stirring rod and pH
from stationary sources. paper are not needed.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to 6.3 Analysis. For the analysis, the fol-
the requirements of this method will en- lowing equipment and supplies are required.
hance the quality of the data obtained from Alternative instrumentation and procedures
air pollutant sampling methods. will be allowed provided the calibration pre-
cision requirement in Section 10.1.2 and
2.0 Summary of Method audit accuracy requirement in Section 11.3
A grab sample is collected in an evacuated can be met.
flask containing a dilute sulfuric acid-hydro- 6.3.1 Volumetric Pipets. Class A;1-, 2-, 4-,
gen peroxide absorbing solution. The nitro- 5-ml (two for the set of standards and one per
gen oxides, excluding nitrous oxide (N2O), are sample), 6-, 10-, and graduated 5-ml sizes.
oxidized to nitrate and measured by ion 6.3.2 Volumetric Flasks. 50-ml (two per
chromatography. sample and one per standard), 200-ml, and 1-
liter sizes.
6.3.3 Analytical Balance. To measure to
4.0 Interferences within 0.1 mg.
6.3.4 Ion Chromatograph. The ion chro-
Biased results have been observed when matograph should have at least the following
sampling under conditions of high sulfur di- components:
oxide concentrations (above 2000 ppm). 6.3.4.1 Columns. An anion separation or
5.0 Safety other column capable of resolving the ni-
trate ion from sulfate and other species
5.1 This method may involve hazardous present and a standard anion suppressor col-
materials, operations, and equipment. This umn (optional). Suppressor columns are pro-
test method may not address all of the safe- duced as proprietary items; however, one can
ty problems associated with its use. It is the be produced in the laboratory using the resin
responsibility of the user of this test method available from BioRad Company, 32nd and
to establish appropriate safety and health Griffin Streets, Richmond, California. Peak
practices and to determine the applicability resolution can be optimized by varying the
of regulatory limitations prior to performing eluent strength or column flow rate, or by
this test method. experimenting with alternative columns
5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following re- that may offer more efficient separation.
agents are hazardous. Personal protective When using guard columns with the stronger
equipment and safe procedures are useful in reagent to protect the separation column,
preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc- the analyst should allow rest periods be-
curs, immediately flush with copious tween injection intervals to purge possible
amounts of water at least 15 minutes. Re- sulfate buildup in the guard column.
move clothing under shower and decontami-
6.3.4.2 Pump. Capable of maintaining a
nate. Treat residual chemical burns as ther-
steady flow as required by the system.
mal burns.
6.3.4.3 Flow Gauges. Capable of measuring
5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating
the specified system flow rate.
to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs.
5.2.2 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly de- 6.3.4.4 Conductivity Detector.
structive to body tissue. Will cause third de- 6.3.4.5 Recorder. Compatible with the out-
gree burns. Eye damage may result in blind- put voltage range of the detector.
the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May
cause lung tissue damage with edema. 3 mg/ Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended
m3 will cause lung damage in uninitiated. 1 that all reagents conform to the specifica-
mg/m3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, tions established by the Committee on Ana-
in higher concentrations, death. Provide ven- lytical Reagents of the American Chemical
tilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently Society, where such specifications are avail-
with metals and organics. able; otherwise, use the best available grade.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies Section 7.1.
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as in Method 7.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 7,
7, Section 6.1. Section 7.1.1.
272
7.3 Analysis. The following reagents and liters of water. This solution is 0.0024 M
standards are required for analysis: Na2CO3/0.003 M NaHCO3. Other eluents appro-
7.3.1 Water. Same as Method 7, Section priate to the column type and capable of re-
7.1.1. solving nitrate ion from sulfate and other
7.3.2 Stock Standard Solution, 1 mg NO2/ species present may be used.
ml. Dry an adequate amount of sodium ni- 7.3.5 Quality Assurance Audit Samples.
trate (NaNO3) at 105 to 110 °C (221 to 230 °F) Same as Method 7, Section 7.3.8.
for a minimum of 2 hours just before pre-
paring the standard solution. Then dissolve 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
exactly 1.847 g of dried NaNO3 in water, and and Transport
dilute to l liter in a volumetric flask. Mix
well. This solution is stable for 1 month and 8.1 Sampling. Same as in Method 7, Sec-
should not be used beyond this time. tion 8.1.
7.3.3 Working Standard Solution, 25 μg/ml. 8.2 Sample Recovery. Same as in Method
Dilute 5 ml of the standard solution to 200 ml 7, Section 8.2, except delete the steps on ad-
with water in a volumetric flask, and mix justing and checking the pH of the sample.
well. Do not store the samples more than 4 days
7.3.4 Eluent Solution. Weigh 1.018 g of so- between collection and analysis.
dium carbonate (Na2CO3) and 1.008 g of so-
dium bicarbonate (NaHCO3), and dissolve in 4 9.0 Quality Control
10.1 .................................... Ion chromatograph calibration ................. Ensure linearity of ion chromatograph response to
standards.
11.3 .................................... Audit sample analysis .............................. Evaluate analytical technique, preparation of stand-
ards.
10.0 Calibration and Standardizations 10.4 Temperature Gauge. Calibrate dial

thermometers against mercury-in-glass ther-
10.1 Ion Chromatograph. mometers.
10.1.1 Determination of Ion Chro- 10.5 Vacuum Gauge. Calibrate mechanical
matograph Calibration Factor S. Prepare a gauges, if used, against a mercury manom-
series of five standards by adding 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, eter such as that specified in Section 6.1.6 of
6.0, and 10.0 ml of working standard solution Method 7.
(25 μg/ml) to a series of five 50-ml volumetric 10.6 Analytical Balance. Calibrate against
flasks. (The standard masses will equal 25, standard weights.
50, 100, 150, and 250 μg.) Dilute each flask to
the mark with water, and mix well. Analyze 11.0 Analytical Procedures
with the samples as described in Section 11.2,
11.1 Sample Preparation.
and subtract the blank from each value. Pre- 11.1.1 Note on the analytical data sheet,
pare or calculate a linear regression plot of the level of the liquid in the container, and
the standard masses in μg (x-axis) versus whether any sample was lost during ship-
their peak height responses in millimeters ment. If a noticeable amount of leakage has
(y-axis). (Take peak height measurements occurred, either void the sample or use
with symmetrical peaks; in all other cases, methods, subject to the approval of the Ad-
calculate peak areas.) From this curve, or ministrator, to correct the final results. Im-
equation, determine the slope, and calculate mediately before analysis, transfer the con-
its reciprocal to denote as the calibration tents of the shipping container to a 50-ml
factor, S. volumetric flask, and rinse the container
10.1.2 Ion Chromatograph Calibration twice with 5 ml portions of water. Add the
Quality Control. If any point on the calibra- rinse water to the flask, and dilute to the
tion curve deviates from the line by more mark with water. Mix thoroughly.
than 7 percent of the concentration at that 11.1.2 Pipet a 5-ml aliquot of the sample
point, remake and reanalyze that standard. into a 50-ml volumetric flask, and dilute to
This deviation can be determined by multi- the mark with water. Mix thoroughly. For
plying S times the peak height response for each set of determinations, prepare a reagent
each standard. The resultant concentrations blank by diluting 5 ml of absorbing solution
must not differ by more than 7 percent from to 50 ml with water. (Alternatively, eluent
each known standard mass (i.e., 25, 50, 100, solution may be used instead of water in all
150, and 250 μg). sample, standard, and blank dilutions.)
10.2 Conductivity Detector. Calibrate ac- 11.2 Analysis.

cording to manufacturer’s specifications 11.2.1 Prepare a standard calibration
prior to initial use. curve according to Section 10.1.1. Analyze
10.3 Barometer. Calibrate against a mer- the set of standards followed by the set of
cury barometer. samples using the same injection volume for
273
both standards and samples. Repeat this (65 to 655 ppmv), and higher concentrations
analysis sequence followed by a final anal- may be analyzed by diluting the sample. The
ysis of the standard set. Average the results. lower detection limit is approximately 19
The two sample values must agree within 5 mg/m3 (10 ppmv), but may vary among in-
percent of their mean for the analysis to be struments.
valid. Perform this duplicate analysis se-
quence on the same day. Dilute any sample 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
and the blank with equal volumes of water if
the concentration exceeds that of the high- 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
est standard.
11.2.2 Document each sample chromato- 16.0 References
gram by listing the following analytical pa- 1. Mulik, J.D., and E. Sawicki. Ion
rameters: injection point, injection volume, Chromatographic Analysis of Environmental
nitrate and sulfate retention times, flow Pollutants. Ann Arbor, Ann Arbor Science
rate, detector sensitivity setting, and re- Publishers, Inc. Vol. 2, 1979.
corder chart speed. 2. Sawicki, E., J.D. Mulik, and E.
11.3 Audit Sample Analysis. Same as Wittgenstein. Ion Chromatographic Analysis
Method 7, Section 11.4. of Environmental Pollutants. Ann Arbor,
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations Ann Arbor Science Publishers, Inc. Vol. 1.
1978.
Carry out the calculations, retaining at 3. Siemer, D.D. Separation of Chloride and
least one extra significant figure beyond Bromide from Complex Matrices Prior to Ion
that of the acquired data. Round off figures Chromatographic Determination. Anal.
after final calculations. Chem. 52(12):1874–1877. October 1980.
12.1 Sample Volume. Calculate the sample 4. Small, H., T.S. Stevens, and W.C.
volume Vsc (in ml), on a dry basis, corrected Bauman. Novel Ion Exchange
to standard conditions, using Equation 7–2 of Chromatographic Method Using
Method 7. Conductimetric Determination. Anal. Chem.
12.2 Sample Concentration of NOX as NO2.
47(11):1801. 1975.
12.2.1 Calculate the sample concentration
5. Yu, K.K., and P.R. Westlin. Evaluation
C (in mg/dscm) as follows:
of Reference Method 7 Flask Reaction Time.
C = (H)(S)(F) 10 4 / Vsc ( ) Eq. 7A-1

Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. 4(4).
November 1979. 10 pp.
6. Stack Sampling Safety Manual (Draft).
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Of-
fice of Air Quality Planning and Standard,
Where:
Research Triangle Park, NC. September 1978.
H=Sample peak height, mm.
S=Calibration factor, μg/mm. 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
F=Dilution factor (required only if sample Validation Data [Reserved]
dilution was needed to reduce the con-
centration into the range of calibration), METHOD 7B—DETERMINATION OF NITROGEN
dimensionless. OXIDE EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY
104=1:10 dilution times conversion factor of: SOURCES (ULTRAVIOLET
(mg/103 μg)(106 ml/m3). SPECTROPHOTOMETRIC METHOD)
12.2.2 If desired, the concentration of NO2 NOTE: This method does not include all of
may be calculated as ppm NO2 at standard the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup-
conditions as follows: plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana-
ppm NO 2 = 0.5228C Eq. 7A-2 material is incorporated by reference from
tain reliable results, persons using this
Where: method should have a thorough knowledge of
0.5228=ml/mg NO2. at least the following additional test meth-
ods: Method 1, Method 5, and Method 7.
13.1 Range. The analytical range of the
method is from 125 to 1250 mg NOX/m3 as NO2 1.1 Analytes.


Nitric oxide (NO) ........................................................................... 10102–43–9
ER17oc00.207</MATH>
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) ................................................................. 10102–44–0 30–786 ppmv
274
ER17oc00.206</MATH>
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- 6.3 Analysis. The following items are re-
ble for the determination of NOX emissions quired for analysis:
from nitric acid plants. 6.3.1 Volumetric Pipettes. 5-, 10-, 15-, and
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to 20-ml to make standards and sample dilu-
the requirements of this method will en- tions.
hance the quality of the data obtained from 6.3.2 Volumetric Flasks. 1000- and 100-ml
air pollutant sampling methods. for preparing standards and dilution of sam-
2.0 Summary of Method ples.
6.3.3 Spectrophotometer. To measure ul-
2.1 A grab sample is collected in an evacu- traviolet absorbance at 210 nm.
ated flask containing a dilute sulfuric acid- 6.3.4 Analytical Balance. To measure to
hydrogen peroxide absorbing solution; the within 0.1 mg.
NOX, excluding nitrous oxide (N2O), are
measured by ultraviolet spectrophotometry. 7.0 Reagents and Standards
3.0 Definition [Reserved] NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, all re-
agents are to conform to the specifications
established by the Committee on Analytical
5.0 Safety Reagents of the American Chemical Society,
where such specifications are available. Oth-
5.1 This method may involve hazardous erwise, use the best available grade.
materials, operations, and equipment. This
test method may not address all of the safe- 7.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 7,
ty problems associated with its use. It is the Section 7.1. It is important that the amount
responsibility of the user of this test method of hydrogen peroxide in the absorbing solu-
to establish appropriate safety and health tion not be increased. Higher concentrations
practices and to determine the applicability of peroxide may interfere with sample anal-
of regulatory limitations prior to performing ysis.
this test method. 7.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 7,
5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following re- Section 7.2.
agents are hazardous. Personal protective 7.3 Analysis. Same as Method 7, Sections
equipment and safe procedures are useful in 7.3.1, 7.3.3, and 7.3.4, with the addition of the
preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc- following:
curs, immediately flush with copious 7.3.1 Working Standard KNO3 Solution.
amounts of water at least 15 minutes. Re- Dilute 10 ml of the standard solution to 1000
move clothing under shower and decontami- ml with water. One milliliter of the working
nate. Treat residual chemical burn as ther- standard is equivalent to 10 μg NO2.
mal burn.
5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs. and Transport
severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation 8.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 7,
causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. Section 8.1.
Reacts exothermically with limited amounts 8.2 Sample Recovery.
of water. 8.2.1 Let the flask sit for a minimum of 16
5.2.3 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly de- hours, and then shake the contents for 2
structive to body tissue. Will cause third de- minutes.
gree burns. Eye damage may result in blind- 8.2.2 Connect the flask to a mercury filled
ness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of U-tube manometer. Open the valve from the
the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May flask to the manometer, and record the flask
cause lung tissue damage with edema. 3 mg/ temperature (Tf), the barometric pressure,
m3 will cause lung damage in uninitiated. 1 and the difference between the mercury lev-
mg/m3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, els in the manometer. The absolute internal
in higher concentrations, death. Provide ven- pressure in the flask (Pf) is the barometric
tilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently pressure less the manometer reading.
with metals and organics. 8.2.3 Transfer the contents of the flask to
a leak-free wash bottle. Rinse the flask three
times with 10-ml portions of water, and add
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 7, to the bottle. Mark the height of the liquid
Section 6.1. level so that the container can be checked
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items for leakage after transport. Label the con-
are required for sample recovery: tainer to identify clearly its contents. Seal
6.2.1 Wash Bottle. Polyethylene or glass. the container for shipping.

6.2.2 Volumetric Flasks. 100-ml (one for
each sample). 9.0 Quality Control
275
10.1 .................................... Spectrophometer calibration .................... Ensures linearity of spectrophotometer response to

standards.
11.4 .................................... Audit sample analysis .............................. Evaluates analytical technique and preparation of
standards.
10.0 Calibration and Standardizations and standards as is in the aliquot of sample

used.
Same as Method 7, Sections 10.2 through
10.5, with the addition of the following: 10.1.1 Calculate the spectrophotometer
10.1 Determination of Spectrophotometer calibration factor as follows:
Standard Curve. Add 0 ml, 5 ml, 10 ml, 15 ml,
and 20 ml of the KNO3 working standard so- n
lution (1 ml=10 μg NO2) to a series of five 100-
ml volumetric flasks. To each flask, add 5 ml
∑ MiAi
i =1
of absorbing solution. Dilute to the mark Kc = n Eq. 7B-1
∑ Ai
with water. The resulting solutions contain 2
0.0, 50, 100, 150, and 200 μg NO2, respectively.
Measure the absorbance by ultraviolet i =1
spectrophotometry at 210 nm, using the Where:
blank as a zero reference. Prepare a standard
curve plotting absorbance vs. μg NO2. Mi=Mass of NO2 in standard i, μg.
NOTE: If other than a 20-ml aliquot of sam- Ai=Absorbance of NO2 standard i.
ple is used for analysis, then the amount of n=Total number of calibration standards.
absorbing solution in the blank and stand- 10.1.2 For the set of calibration standards
ards must be adjusted such that the same specified here, Equation 7B–1 simplifies to
amount of absorbing solution is in the blank the following:
A1 + 2 A 2 + 3A 3 + 4 A 4
K c = 50 Eq. 7B-2
A12 + A 2 2 + A 32 + A 4 2
10.2 Spectrophotometer Calibration Qual- quot of sample into a 100-ml volumetric

ity Control. Multiply the absorbance value flask. Dilute to the mark with water. Using
obtained for each standard by the Kc factor the blank as zero reference, read the absorb-
(reciprocal of the least squares slope) to de- ance of the sample at 210 nm.
termine the distance each calibration point 11.4 Audit Sample Analysis. Same as
lies from the theoretical calibration line. Method 7, Section 11.4, except that a set of
The difference between the calculated con- audit samples must be analyzed with each
centration values and the actual concentra- set of compliance samples or once per anal-
tions (i.e., 50, 100, 150, and 200 μg NO2) should ysis day, or once per week when averaging
be less than 7 percent for all standards. continuous samples.
11.0 Analytical Procedures 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
11.1 Sample Loss Check. Note the level of Same as Method 7, Section 12.0, except re-
the liquid in the container, and confirm place Section 12.3 with the following:
whether any sample was lost during ship- 12.1 Total μg NO2 Per Sample.
ment. Note this on the analytical data sheet.
If a noticeable amount of leakage has oc- m = 5 Kc A F Eq. 7B-3
curred, either void the sample or use meth-
ods, subject to the approval of the Adminis- Where:
trator, to correct the final results. 5=100/20, the aliquot factor.
ER17oc00.211</MATH>
11.2 Sample Preparation. Immediately

prior to analysis, transfer the contents of NOTE: If other than a 20-ml aliquot is used
the shipping container to a 100-ml volu- for analysis, the factor 5 must be replaced by
metric flask, and rinse the container twice a corresponding factor.
with 5-ml portions of water. Add the rinse 13.0 Method Performance
water to the flask, and dilute to mark with
ER17oc00.209</MATH>
water. 13.1 Range. The analytical range of the

11.3 Sample Analysis. Mix the contents of method as outlined has been determined to
the flask thoroughly and pipette a 20 ml-ali- be 57 to 1500 milligrams NOX (as NO2) per dry
276
ER17oc00.208</MATH>
standard cubic meter, or 30 to 786 parts per 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
million by volume (ppmv) NOX. Validation Data [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] METHOD 7C—DETERMINATION OF NITROGEN

OXIDE EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] SOURCES (ALKALINE PERMANGANATE/COL-
ORIMETRIC METHOD)
16.0 References
1. National Institute for Occupational the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup-
Safety and Health. Recommendations for Oc- plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana-
cupational Exposure to Nitric Acid. In: Occu- lytical) essential to its performance. Some
pational Safety and Health Reporter. Wash- material is incorporated by reference from
ington, D.C. Bureau of National Affairs, Inc. other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-
1976. p. 149. tain reliable results, persons using this
2. Rennie, P.J., A.M. Sumner, and F.B. method should have a thorough knowledge of
Basketter. Determination of Nitrate in Raw, at least the following additional test meth-
Potable, and Waste Waters by Ultraviolet ods: Method 1, Method 3, Method 6 and Meth-
od 7.
Spectrophotometry. Analyst. 104:837. Sep-
tember 1979. 1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
Analyte CAS no. Sensitivity

Nitric oxide (NO) ........................................................................... 10102–43–9
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) ................................................................. 10102–44–07 ppmv
1.2 Applicability. This method applies to 4.2 Ammonia (NH3) is slowly oxidized to
the measurement of NOX emissions from fos- NO3¥ by the absorbing solution. At 100 ppm
sil-fuel fired steam generators, electric util- NH3 in the gas stream, an interference of 6
ity plants, nitric acid plants, or other ppm NOX (11 mg NO2/m3) was observed when
sources as specified in the regulations. the sample was analyzed 10 days after collec-
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to tion. Therefore, the method may not be ap-
the requirements of this method will en- plicable to plants using NH3 injection to con-
hance the quality of the data obtained from trol NOX emissions unless means are taken
air pollutant sampling methods. to correct the results. An equation has been
developed to allow quantification of the in-
2.0 Summary of Method terference and is discussed in Reference 5 of
Section 16.0.
An integrated gas sample is extracted from
the stack and passed through impingers con- 5.0 Safety
taining an alkaline potassium permanganate
solution; NOX (NO + NO2) emissions are
oxidized to NO2 and NO3. Then NO3¥is re-
duced to NO2¥with cadmium, and the NO2¥is
analyzed colorimetrically.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] test method to establish appropriate safety
and health practices and to determine the
4.0 Interferences applicability of regulatory limitations prior
to performing this test method.
Possible interferents are sulfur dioxides 5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following re-
(SO2) and ammonia (NH3). agents are hazardous. Personal protective
4.1 High concentrations of SO2 could equipment and safe procedures are useful in
interfere because SO2 consumes MnO4 (as preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc-
does NOX) and, therefore, could reduce the curs, immediately flush with copious
NOX collection efficiency. However, when amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Re-
sampling emissions from a coal-fired electric move clothing under shower and decontami-
utility plant burning 2.1 percent sulfur coal nate. Treat residual chemical burns as ther-
with no control of SO2 emissions, collection mal burns.
efficiency was not reduced. In fact, calcula- 5.2.1 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl). Highly
tions show that sampling 3000 ppm SO2 will toxic and corrosive. Causes severe damage to
reduce the MnO4 concentration by only 5 per- skin. Vapors are highly irritating to eyes,
cent if all the SO2 is consumed in the first skin, nose, and lungs, causing severe dam-
impinger. age. May cause bronchitis, pneumonia, or
277
edema of lungs. Exposure to vapor con- 6.2.2 Beakers. 400-, 600-, and 1000-ml capac-
centrations of 0.13 to 0.2 percent can be le- ities.
thal in minutes. Will react with metals, pro- 6.2.3 Filtering Flask. 500-ml capacity with
ducing hydrogen. side arm.
5.2.2 Oxalic Acid (COOH)2. Poisonous. Irri- 6.2.4 Buchner Funnel. 75-mm ID, with
tating to eyes, skin, nose, and throat. spout equipped with a 13-mm ID by 90-mm
5.2.3 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes long piece of Teflon tubing to minimize pos-
severe damage to eye tissues and to skin. In- sibility of aspirating sample solution during
halation causes irritation to nose, throat, filtration.
and lungs. Reacts exothermically with small 6.2.5 Filter Paper. Whatman GF/C, 7.0-cm
amounts of water. diameter.
5.2.4 Potassium Permanganate (KMnO4). 6.2.6 Stirring Rods.
Caustic, strong oxidizer. Avoid bodily con- 6.2.7 Volumetric Flasks. 100-, 200- or 250-,
tact with. 500-, and 1000-ml capacity.
6.2.8 Watch Glasses. To cover 600- and
6.0 Equipment and Supplies 1000-ml beakers.
6.1 Sample Collection and Sample Recov- 6.2.9 Graduated Cylinders. 50- and 250-ml
ery. A schematic of the Method 7C sampling capacities.
train is shown in Figure 7C–1, and compo- 6.2.10 Pipettes. Class A.
nent parts are discussed below. Alternative 6.2.11 pH Meter. To measure pH from 0.5
apparatus and procedures are allowed pro- to 12.0.
vided acceptable accuracy and precision can 6.2.12 Burette. 50-ml with a micrometer
be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the type stopcock. (The stopcock is Catalog No.
Administrator. 8225–t–05, Ace Glass, Inc., Post Office Box 996,
6.1.1 Probe. Borosilicate glass tubing, suf- Louisville, Kentucky 50201.) Place a glass
ficiently heated to prevent water condensa- wool plug in bottom of burette. Cut off bu-
tion and equipped with an in-stack or heated rette at a height of 43 cm (17 in.) from the
out-of-stack filter to remove particulate top of plug, and have a blower attach a glass
matter (a plug of glass wool is satisfactory funnel to top of burette such that the diame-
for this purpose). Stainless steel or Teflon ter of the burette remains essentially un-
tubing may also be used for the probe. changed. Other means of attaching the fun-
6.1.2 Impingers. Three restricted-orifice nel are acceptable.
glass impingers, having the specifications 6.2.13 Glass Funnel. 75-mm ID at the top.
given in Figure 7C–2, are required for each 6.2.14 Spectrophotometer. Capable of
sampling train. The impingers must be con- measuring absorbance at 540 nm; 1-cm cells
nected in series with leak-free glass connec- are adequate.
tors. Stopcock grease may be used, if nec- 6.2.15 Metal Thermometers. Bimetallic
essary, to prevent leakage. (The impingers thermometers, range 0 to 150 °C (32 to 300 °F).
can be fabricated by a glass blower if not 6.2.16 Culture Tubes. 20-by 150-mm, Kimax
available commercially.) No. 45048.
6.1.3 Glass Wool, Stopcock Grease, Drying 6.2.17 Parafilm ‘‘M.’’ Obtained from Amer-
Tube, Valve, Pump, Barometer, and Vacuum ican Can Company, Greenwich, Connecticut
Gauge and Rotameter. Same as in Method 6, 06830.
Sections 6.1.1.3, 6.1.1.4, 6.1.1.6, 6.1.1.7, 6.1.1.8, 6.2.18 CO2 Measurement Equipment. Same
6.1.2, and 6.1.3, respectively. as in Method 3, Section 6.0.
6.1.4 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equiva-
lent, accurate to within 2 percent at the se-
lected flow rate of between 400 and 500 ml/ Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended
min (0.014 to 0.018 cfm). For rotameters, a that all reagents conform to the specifica-
range of 0 to 1 liter/min (0 to 0.035 cfm) is tions established by the Committee on Ana-
recommended. lytical Reagents of the American Chemical
6.1.5 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter (DGM) Society, where such specifications are avail-
capable of measuring the sample volume able; otherwise, use the best available grade.
under the sampling conditions of 400 to 500 7.1 Sample Collection.
ml/min (0.014 to 0.018 cfm) for 60 minutes 7.1.1 Water. Deionized distilled to conform
within an accuracy of 2 percent. to ASTM Specification D 1193–77 or 91 Type
6.1.6 Filter. To remove NOX from ambient 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17).
air, prepared by adding 20 g of 5-angstrom 7.1.2 Potassium Permanganate, 4.0 Per-
molecular sieve to a cylindrical tube (e.g., a cent (w/w), Sodium Hydroxide, 2.0 Percent
polyethylene drying tube). (w/w) solution (KMnO4/NaOH solution). Dis-
6.1.7 Polyethylene Bottles. 1-liter, for solve 40.0 g of KMnO4 and 20.0 g of NaOH in
sample recovery. 940 ml of water.
6.1.8 Funnel and Stirring Rods. For sam- 7.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
ple recovery. 7.2.1 Water. Same as in Section 7.1.1.
6.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis. 7.2.2 Oxalic Acid Solution. Dissolve 48 g of
6.2.1 Hot Plate. Stirring type with 50- by oxalic acid [(COOH)2·2H2O] in water, and di-
10-mm Teflon-coated stirring bars. lute to 500 ml. Do not heat the solution.
278
7.2.3 Sodium Hydroxide, 0.5 N. Dissolve 20 7.2.14 Blank Solution. Dissolve 2.4 g of
g of NaOH in water, and dilute to 1 liter. KMnO4 and 1.2 g of NaOH in 96 ml of water.
7.2.4 Sodium Hydroxide, 10 N. Dissolve 40 Alternatively, dilute 60 ml of KMnO4/NaOH
g of NaOH in water, and dilute to 100 ml. solution to 100 ml.
7.2.5 Ethylenediamine Tetraacetic Acid 7.2.15 Quality Assurance Audit Samples.
(EDTA) Solution, 6.5 percent (w/v). Dissolve Same as in Method 7, Section 7.3.10. When re-
6.5 g of EDTA (disodium salt) in water, and questing audit samples, specify that they be
dilute to 100 ml. Dissolution is best accom- in the appropriate concentration range for
plished by using a magnetic stirrer. Method 7C.
7.2.6 Column Rinse Solution. Add 20 ml of
6.5 percent EDTA solution to 960 ml of water, 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
and adjust the pH to between 11.7 and 12.0 and Transport
with 0.5 N NaOH. 8.1 Preparation of Sampling Train. Add
7.2.7 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl), 2 N. Add 86 200 ml of KMnO4/NaOH solution (Section
ml of concentrated HCl to a 500 ml-volu- 7.1.2) to each of three impingers, and assem-
metric flask containing water, dilute to vol- ble the train as shown in Figure 7C–1. Adjust
ume, and mix well. Store in a glass-stoppered the probe heater to a temperature sufficient
bottle. to prevent water condensation.
7.2.8 Sulfanilamide Solution. Add 20 g of 8.2 Leak-Checks. Same as in Method 6,
sulfanilamide (melting point 165 to 167 °C (329 Section 8.2.
to 333 °F)) to 700 ml of water. Add, with mix- 8.3 Sample Collection.
ing, 50 ml concentrated phosphoric acid (85
8.3.1 Record the initial DGM reading and
percent), and dilute to 1000 ml. This solution
barometric pressure. Determine the sam-
is stable for at least 1 month, if refrigerated.
pling point or points according to the appro-
7.2.9 N-(1-Naphthyl)-Ethylenediamine
priate regulations (e.g., § 60.46(b)(5) of 40 CFR
Dihydrochloride (NEDA) Solution. Dissolve
Part 60). Position the tip of the probe at the
0.5 g of NEDA in 500 ml of water. An aqueous
sampling point, connect the probe to the
solution should have one absorption peak at
first impinger, and start the pump. Adjust
320 nm over the range of 260 to 400 nm. NEDA
the sample flow to a value between 400 and
that shows more than one absorption peak
500 ml/min (0.014 and 0.018 cfm). CAUTION:
over this range is impure and should not be
DO NOT EXCEED THESE FLOW RATES.
used. This solution is stable for at least 1
Once adjusted, maintain a constant flow rate
month if protected from light and refrig-
during the entire sampling run. Sample for
erated.
60 minutes. For relative accuracy (RA) test-
7.2.10 Cadmium. Obtained from Matheson ing of continuous emission monitors, the
Coleman and Bell, 2909 Highland Avenue, minimum sampling time is 1 hour, sampling
Norwood, Ohio 45212, as EM Laboratories 20 minutes at each traverse point.
Catalog No. 2001. Prepare by rinsing in 2 N
HCl for 5 minutes until the color is silver- NOTE: When the SO2 concentration is
grey. Then rinse the cadmium with water greater than 1200 ppm, the sampling time
until the rinsings are neutral when tested may have to be reduced to 30 minutes to
with pH paper. CAUTION: H2 is liberated eliminate plugging of the impinger orifice
during preparation. Prepare in an exhaust with MnO2. For RA tests with SO2 greater
hood away from any flame or combustion than 1200 ppm, sample for 30 minutes (10
source. minutes at each point).
7.2.11 Sodium Sulfite (NaNO2) Standard 8.3.2 Record the DGM temperature, and
Solution, Nominal Concentration, 1000 μg check the flow rate at least every 5 minutes.
NO2¥/ml. Desiccate NaNO2 overnight. Accu- At the conclusion of each run, turn off the
rately weigh 1.4 to 1.6 g of NaNO2 (assay of 97 pump, remove the probe from the stack, and
percent NaNO2 or greater), dissolve in water, record the final readings. Divide the sample
and dilute to 1 liter. Calculate the exact NO2- volume by the sampling time to determine
concentration using Equation 7C–1 in Sec- the average flow rate. Conduct the manda-
tion 12.2. This solution is stable for at least tory post-test leak-check. If a leak is found,
6 months under laboratory conditions. void the test run, or use procedures accept-
7.2.12 Potassium Nitrate (KNO3) Standard able to the Administrator to adjust the sam-
Solution. Dry KNO3 at 110 °C (230 °F) for 2 ple volume for the leakage.
hours, and cool in a desiccator. Accurately 8.4 CO2 Measurement. During sampling,
weigh 9 to 10 g of KNO3 to within 0.1 mg, dis- measure the CO2 content of the stack gas
solve in water, and dilute to 1 liter. Cal- near the sampling point using Method 3. The
culate the exact NO3¥ concentration using single-point grab sampling procedure is ade-
Equation 7C–2 in Section 12.3. This solution quate, provided the measurements are made
is stable for 2 months without preservative at least three times (near the start, midway,
under laboratory conditions. and before the end of a run), and the average
7.2.13 Spiking Solution. Pipette 7 ml of CO2 concentration is computed. The Orsat or
the KNO3 standard into a 100-ml volumetric Fyrite analyzer may be used for this anal-
flask, and dilute to volume. ysis.
279
8.5 Sample Recovery. Disconnect the impingers and connecting tubes with water
impingers. Pour the contents of the until the rinsings are clear to light pink, and
impingers into a 1-liter polyethylene bottle add the rinsings to the bottle. Mix the sam-
using a funnel and a stirring rod (or other ple, and mark the solution level. Seal and
means) to prevent spillage. Complete the identify the sample container.
quantitative transfer by rinsing the
9.0 Quality Control
8.2, 10.1–10.3 .................... Sampling equipment leak-check and cali- Ensure accurate measurement of sample volume.
bration.
10.4 .................................... Spectrophotometer calibration ................. Ensure linearity of spectrophotometer response to
standards.
11.3 .................................... Spiked sample analysis ........................... Ensure reduction efficiency of column.
ards.
10.0 Calibration and Standardizations 11.0 Analytical Procedures

10.1 Volume Metering System. Same as 11.1 Sample Stability. Collected samples
Method 6, Section 10.1. For detailed instruc- are stable for at least four weeks; thus, anal-
tions on carrying out these calibrations, it is ysis must occur within 4 weeks of collection.
suggested that Section 3.5.2 of Reference 4 of 11.2 Sample Preparation.
Section 16.0 be consulted. 11.2.1 Prepare a cadmium reduction col-
10.2 Temperature Sensors and Barometer. umn as follows: Fill the burette with water.
Same as in Method 6, Sections 10.2 and 10.4, Add freshly prepared cadmium slowly, with
respectively. tapping, until no further settling occurs. The
height of the cadmium column should be 39
10.3 Check of Rate Meter Calibration Ac-
cm (15 in). When not in use, store the column
curacy (Optional). Disconnect the probe from
under rinse solution.
the first impinger, and connect the filter.
Start the pump, and adjust the rate meter to NOTE: The column should not contain any
read between 400 and 500 ml/min (0.014 and bands of cadmium fines. This may occur if
0.018 cfm). After the flow rate has stabilized, regenerated cadmium is used and will great-
ly reduce the column lifetime.
start measuring the volume sampled, as re-
corded by the dry gas meter and the sam- 11.2.2 Note the level of liquid in the sam-
pling time. Collect enough volume to meas- ple container, and determine whether any
ure accurately the flow rate. Then calculate sample was lost during shipment. If a notice-
the flow rate. This average flow rate must be able amount of leakage has occurred, the
less than 500 ml/min (0.018 cfm) for the sam- volume lost can be determined from the dif-
ference between initial and final solution
ple to be valid; therefore, it is recommended
levels, and this value can then be used to
that the flow rate be checked as above prior
correct the analytical result. Quantitatively
to each test. transfer the contents to a 1-liter volumetric
10.4 Spectrophotometer. flask, and dilute to volume.
10.4.1 Dilute 5.0 ml of the NaNO2 standard 11.2.3 Take a 100-ml aliquot of the sample
solution to 200 ml with water. This solution and blank (unexposed KMnO4/NaOH) solu-
nominally contains 25 μg NO2¥/ml. Use this tions, and transfer to 400-ml beakers con-
solution to prepare calibration standards to taining magnetic stirring bars. Using a pH
cover the range of 0.25 to 3.00 μg NO2¥/ml. meter, add concentrated H2SO4 with stirring
Prepare a minimum of three standards each until a pH of 0.7 is obtained. Allow the solu-
for the linear and slightly nonlinear (de- tions to stand for 15 minutes. Cover the
scribed below) range of the curve. Use pi- beakers with watch glasses, and bring the
pettes for all additions. temperature of the solutions to 50 °C (122 °F).
10.4.2 Measure the absorbance of the Keep the temperature below 60 °C (140 °F).
standards and a water blank as instructed in Dissolve 4.8 g of oxalic acid in a minimum
Section 11.5. Plot the net absorbance vs. μg volume of water, approximately 50 ml, at
NO2¥/ml. Draw a smooth curve through the room temperature. Do not heat the solution.
Add this solution slowly, in increments,
points. The curve should be linear up to an
until the KMnO4 solution becomes colorless.
absorbance of approximately 1.2 with a slope
If the color is not completely removed, pre-
of approximately 0.53 absorbance units/μg
pare some more of the above oxalic acid so-

NO2¥/ml. The curve should pass through the lution, and add until a colorless solution is
origin. The curve is slightly nonlinear from obtained. Add an excess of oxalic acid by dis-
an absorbance of 1.2 to 1.6. solving 1.6 g of oxalic acid in 50 ml of water,
and add 6 ml of this solution to the colorless
280
solution. If suspended matter is present, add parafilm, and mix the solution. Prepare a
concentrated H2SO4 until a clear solution is blank in the same manner using the sample
obtained. from treatment of the unexposed KMnO4/
11.2.4 Allow the samples to cool to near NaOH solution. Also, prepare a calibration
room temperature, being sure that the sam- standard to check the slope of the calibra-
ples are still clear. Adjust the pH to between tion curve. After a 10-minute color develop-
11.7 and 12.0 with 10 N NaOH. Quantitatively ment interval, measure the absorbance at 540
transfer the mixture to a Buchner funnel nm against water. Read μg NO2¥/ml from the
containing GF/C filter paper, and filter the calibration curve. If the absorbance is great-
precipitate. Filter the mixture into a 500-ml er than that of the highest calibration stand-
filtering flask. Wash the solid material four ard, use less than 10 ml of sample, and repeat
times with water. When filtration is com- the analysis. Determine the
plete, wash the Teflon tubing, quantitatively NO2¥concentration using the calibration
transfer the filtrate to a 500-ml volumetric curve obtained in Section 10.4.
flask, and dilute to volume. The samples are NOTE: Some test tubes give a high blank
now ready for cadmium reduction. Pipette a NO2¥ value but culture tubes do not.
50-ml aliquot of the sample into a 150-ml
beaker, and add a magnetic stirring bar. Pi- 11.6 Audit Sample Analysis. Same as in
pette in 1.0 ml of 6.5 percent EDTA solution, Method 7, Section 11.4.
and mix. 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
11.3 Determine the correct stopcock set-
ting to establish a flow rate of 7 to 9 ml/min Carry out calculations, retaining at least
of column rinse solution through the cad- one extra significant figure beyond that of
mium reduction column. Use a 50-ml grad- the acquired data. Round off figures after
uated cylinder to collect and measure the so- final calculation.
lution volume. After the last of the rinse so- 12.1 Nomenclature.
lution has passed from the funnel into the B=Analysis of blank, μg NO2¥/ml.
burette, but before air entrapment can C=Concentration of NOX as NO2, dry basis,
occur, start adding the sample, and collect it mg/dsm3.
in a 250-ml graduated cylinder. Complete the E=Column efficiency, dimensionless
quantitative transfer of the sample to the K2=10¥3 mg/μg.
column as the sample passes through the col- m=Mass of NOX, as NO2, in sample, μg.
umn. After the last of the sample has passed Pbar=Barometric pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
from the funnel into the burette, start add- Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg
ing 60 ml of column rinse solution, and col- (29.92 in. Hg).
lect the rinse solution until the solution just s=Concentration of spiking solution, μg NO3/
disappears from the funnel. Quantitatively ml.
transfer the sample to a 200-ml volumetric S=Analysis of sample, μg NO2¥/ml.
flask (a 250-ml flask may be required), and Tm=Average dry gas meter absolute tempera-
dilute to volume. The samples are now ready ture, °K.
for NO2-analysis. Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K
NOTE: Two spiked samples should be run (528 °R).
with every group of samples passed through Vm(std)=Dry gas volume measured by the dry
the column. To do this, prepare two addi- gas meter, corrected to standard condi-
tional 50-ml aliquots of the sample suspected tions, dscm (dscf).
to have the highest NO2-concentration, and Vm=Dry gas volume as measured by the dry
add 1 ml of the spiking solution to these gas meter, scm (scf).
aliquots. If the spike recovery or column ef- x=Analysis of spiked sample, μg NO2¥/ml.
ficiency (see Section 12.2) is below 95 per- X=Correction factor for CO2 collection=100/
cent, prepare a new column, and repeat the (100 ¥ %CO2(V/V)).
cadmium reduction. y=Analysis of unspiked sample, μg NO2¥/ml.
11.4 Repeat the procedures outlined in Y=Dry gas meter calibration factor.
Sections 11.2 and 11.3 for each sample and 1.0 ppm NO=1.247 mg NO/m3 at STP.
each blank. 1.0 ppm NO2=1.912 mg NO2/m3 at STP.
11.5 Sample Analysis. Pipette 10 ml of 1 ft3=2.832 × 10¥2 m3.
sample into a culture tube. Pipette in 10 ml 12.2 NO2 Concentration. Calculate the NO2
of sulfanilamide solution and 1.4 ml of NEDA concentration of the solution (see Section
solution. Cover the culture tube with 7.2.11) using the following equation:
μg NO 2−
purity, % 46.01
= g NaNO 2 × × 10 3 × Eq. 7C-1
ml 100 69.01
281
ER17Oc00.212</MATH>
12.3 NO3 Concentration. Calculate the NO3
concentration of the KNO3 solution (see Sec-
tion 7.2.12) using the following equation:
μg NO3−
ml
= g KNO3 × 10 3 × ( )
62.01
.
10110
Eq. 7C-2
12.4 Sample Volume, Dry Basis, Corrected Where:

to Standard Conditions. K1=0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units.
K1=17.65 °R/in. Hg for English units.
Tstd Pbar
Vm (std ) = Vm X Y Eq. 7C-3 12.5 Efficiency of Cadmium Reduction
Tm Pstd Column. Calculate this value as follows:
Pbar
= K1 X Y Vm
Tm
200 (x − y) 269.6 (x − y)
E= = Eq. 7C- 4
46.01 s
1.0 s
62.01
Where: 46.01=μg NO2¥/μmole.

200=Final volume of sample and blank after 62.01=μg NO3¥/μmole.
passing through the column, ml. 12.6 Total μg NO2.
1.0=Volume of spiking solution added, ml.
⎛ 500 ⎞ ⎛ 1000 ⎞ ⎛ (S − B) ⎞ (2 × 10 )(S − B)

4
m = 200 = Eq. 7C-5
⎝ 50 ⎠ ⎝ 100 ⎠ ⎝ E ⎠ E
Where: 13.3 Range. The lower detectable limit is

13 mg NOX/m3, as NO2 (7 ppm NOX) when sam-
ER17Oc00.217</MATH>
500=Total volume of prepared sample, ml.
50=Aliquot of prepared sample processed pling at 500 ml/min for 1 hour. No upper limit
through cadmium column, ml. has been established; however, when using
100=Aliquot of KMnO4/NaOH solution, ml. the recommended sampling conditions, the
method has been found to collect NOX emis-
1000=Total volume of KMnO4/NaOH solution,
sions quantitatively up to 1782 mg NOX/m3,
ml.
ER17Oc00.216</MATH>
as NO2 (932 ppm NOX).
12.7 Sample Concentration.
m
C = K2 Eq. 7C-6 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
Vm (std )
16.0 References
ER17Oc00.215</MATH>
13.0 Method Performance 1. Margeson, J.H., W.J. Mitchell, J.C.

Suggs, and M.R. Midgett. Integrated Sam-
13.1 Precision. The intra-laboratory rel-
pling and Analysis Methods for Determining
ative standard deviation for a single meas-
NOX Emissions at Electric Utility Plants.

urement is 2.8 and 2.9 percent at 201 and 268
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Re-
ppm NOX, respectively.
ER17Oc00.214</MATH>
search Triangle Park, NC. Journal of the Air

13.2 Bias. The method does not exhibit
Pollution Control Association. 32:1210–1215.
any bias relative to Method 7.
1982.
282
ER17Oc00.213</MATH>
2. Memorandum and attachment from J.H. Stationary Source Specific Methods. U.S.
Margeson, Source Branch, Quality Assurance Environmental Protection Agency. Research
Division, Environmental Monitoring Sys- Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. EPA–600/
tems Laboratory, to The Record, EPA. 4–77–027b. August 1977.
March 30, 1983. NH3 Interference in Methods 5. Margeson, J.H., et al. An Integrated
7C and 7D. Method for Determining NOX Emissions at
3. Margeson, J.H., J.C. Suggs, and M.R. Nitric Acid Plants. Analytical Chemistry. 47
Midgett. Reduction of Nitrate to Nitrite (11):1801. 1975.
with Cadmium. Anal. Chem. 52:1955–57. 1980.
4. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pol- 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
lution Measurement Systems. Volume III— Validation Data
283
284
ER17OC00.218</GPH>
METHOD 7D—DETERMINATION OF NITROGEN from other methods in this part. Therefore,

OXIDE EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY to obtain reliable results, persons using this
SOURCES (ALKALINE-PERMANGANATE/ION method should have a thorough knowledge of
CHROMATOGRAPHIC METHOD) at least the following additional test meth-
NOTE: This method is not inclusive with re-
and Method 7C.

spect to specifications (e.g., equipment and
supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and 1.0 Scope and Application
analytical) essential to its performance.
Some material is incorporated by reference 1.1 Analytes.
285
ER17OC00.219</GPH>

Nitric oxide (NO) ........................................................................... 10102–43–9
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) ................................................................. 10102–44–0 7 ppmv
1.2 Applicability. This method applies to matic of the sampling train used in per-
the measurement of NOX emissions from fos- forming this method is shown in Figure 7C–
sil-fuel fired steam generators, electric util- 1 of Method 7C.
ity plants, nitric acid plants, or other 6.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
sources as specified in the regulations. 6.2.1 Magnetic Stirrer. With 25- by 10-mm
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to Teflon-coated stirring bars.
the requirements of this method will en- 6.2.2 Filtering Flask. 500-ml capacity with
hance the quality of the data obtained from sidearm.
air pollutant sampling methods. 6.2.3 Buchner Funnel. 75-mm ID, with
spout equipped with a 13-mm ID by 90-mm
long piece of Teflon tubing to minimize pos-
An integrated gas sample is extracted from sibility of aspirating sample solution during
the stack and passed through impingers con- filtration.
taining an alkaline-potassium permanganate 6.2.4 Filter Paper. Whatman GF/C, 7.0-cm
solution; NOX (NO + NO2) emissions are diameter.
oxidized to NO3¥. Then NO3¥ is analyzed by 6.2.5 Stirring Rods.
ion chromatography. 6.2.6 Volumetric Flask. 250-ml.
6.2.7 Pipettes. Class A.
6.2.8 Erlenmeyer Flasks. 250-ml.
4.0 Interferences 6.2.9 Ion Chromatograph. Equipped with
an anion separator column to separate NO3¥,
Same as in Method 7C, Section 4.0. H3∂ suppressor, and necessary auxiliary
5.0 Safety equipment. Nonsuppressed and other forms
of ion chromatography may also be used pro-
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve vided that adequate resolution of NO3¥ is ob-
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- tained. The system must also be able to re-
ment. This test method may not address all solve and detect NO2¥.
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this 7.0 Reagents and Standards
and health practices and to determine the NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, it is in-
applicability of regulatory limitations prior tended that all reagents conform to the spec-
to performing this test method. ifications established by the Committee on
5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following re- Analytical Reagents of the American Chem-
agents are hazardous. Personal protective ical Society, where such specifications are
equipment and safe procedures are useful in available; otherwise, use the best available
preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc- grade.
curs, immediately flush with copious 7.1 Sample Collection.
amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Re- 7.1.1 Water. Deionized distilled to conform
move clothing under shower and decontami- to ASTM specification D 1193–77 or 91 Type 3
nate. Treat residual chemical burns as ther- (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17).
mal burns. 7.1.2 Potassium Permanganate, 4.0 Per-
5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating cent (w/w), Sodium Hydroxide, 2.0 Percent
to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs. 30% H2O2 is a (w/w). Dissolve 40.0 g of KMnO4 and 20.0 g of
strong oxidizing agent; avoid contact with NaOH in 940 ml of water.
skin, eyes, and combustible material. Wear 7.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
gloves when handling. 7.2.1 Water. Same as in Section 7.1.1.
5.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes 7.2.2 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2), 5 Percent.
severe damage to eye tissues and to skin. In- Dilute 30 percent H2O2 1:5 (v/v) with water.
halation causes irritation to nose, throat, 7.2.3 Blank Solution. Dissolve 2.4 g of
and lungs. Reacts exothermically with lim- KMnO4 and 1.2 g of NaOH in 96 ml of water.
ited amounts of water. Alternatively, dilute 60 ml of KMnO4/NaOH
5.2.3 Potassium Permanganate (KMnO4). solution to 100 ml.
Caustic, strong oxidizer. Avoid bodily con- 7.2.4 KNO3 Standard Solution. Dry KNO3
tact with. at 110 °C for 2 hours, and cool in a desiccator.

Accurately weigh 9 to 10 g of KNO3 to within
0.1 mg, dissolve in water, and dilute to 1
6.1 Sample Collection and Sample Recov- liter. Calculate the exact NO3¥ concentra-
ery. Same as Method 7C, Section 6.1. A sche- tion using Equation 7D–1 in Section 12.2.
286
This solution is stable for 2 months without to ensure that all NO2¥ is converted to NO3¥
preservative under laboratory conditions. in the collection solution. Take a 50-ml ali-
7.2.5 Eluent, 0.003 M NaHCO3/0.0024 M quot of the sample and blank, and transfer to
Na2CO3. Dissolve 1.008 g NaHCO3 and 1.018 g 250-ml Erlenmeyer flasks. Add a magnetic
Na2CO3 in water, and dilute to 4 liters. Other stirring bar. Adjust the stirring rate to as
eluents capable of resolving nitrate ion from fast a rate as possible without loss of solu-
sulfate and other species present may be tion. Add 5 percent H2O2 in increments of ap-
used. proximately 5 ml using a 5-ml pipette. When
7.2.6 Quality Assurance Audit Samples. the KMnO4 color appears to have been re-
Same as Method 7, Section 7.3.10. When re-
moved, allow the precipitate to settle, and
questing audit samples, specify that they be
examine the supernatant liquid. If the liquid
in the appropriate concentration range for
Method 7D. is clear, the H2O2 addition is complete. If the
KMnO4 color persists, add more H2O2, with
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport, stirring, until the supernatant liquid is
and Storage. clear.
8.1 Sampling. Same as in Method 7C, Sec- NOTE: The faster the stirring rate, the less
tion 8.1. volume of H2O2 that will be required to re-
8.2 Sample Recovery. Same as in Method move the KMnO4.) Quantitatively transfer
7C, Section 8.2. the mixture to a Buchner funnel containing
8.3 Sample Preparation for Analysis. GF/C filter paper, and filter the precipitate.
NOTE: Samples must be analyzed within 28 The spout of the Buchner funnel should be
days of collection. equipped with a 13-mm ID by 90-mm long
8.3.1 Note the level of liquid in the sample piece of Teflon tubing. This modification
container, and determine whether any sam- minimizes the possibility of aspirating sam-
ple was lost during shipment. If a noticeable ple solution during filtration. Filter the mix-
amount of leakage has occurred, the volume ture into a 500-ml filtering flask. Wash the
lost can be determined from the difference solid material four times with water. When
between initial and final solution levels, and filtration is complete, wash the Teflon tub-
this value can then be used to correct the an- ing, quantitatively transfer the filtrate to a
alytical result. Quantitatively transfer the 250-ml volumetric flask, and dilute to vol-
contents to a 1-liter volumetric flask, and di- ume. The sample and blank are now ready
lute to volume. for NO3¥analysis.
8.3.2 Sample preparation can be started 36
hours after collection. This time is necessary 9.0 Quality Control
8.2, 10.1–10.3 .................... Sampling equipment leak-check and cali- Ensure accurate measurement of sample volume.
bration.
standards.
11.3 .................................... Spiked sample analysis ........................... Ensure reduction efficiency of column.
ards.
10.0 Calibration and Standardizations pettes for all additions. Run standards as in-
structed in Section 11.2. Determine peak
10.1 Dry Gas Meter (DGM) System.
height or area, and plot the individual values
10.1.1 Initial Calibration. Same as in
versus concentration in μg NO3¥/ml.
Method 6, Section 10.1.1. For detailed in-
structions on carrying out this calibration, 10.3.2 Do not force the curve through zero.
it is suggested that Section 3.5.2 of Citation Draw a smooth curve through the points.
4 in Section 16.0 of Method 7C be consulted. The curve should be linear. With the linear
10.1.2 Post-Test Calibration Check. Same curve, use linear regression to determine the
as in Method 6, Section 10.1.2. calibration equation.
10.2 Thermometers for DGM and Barom-
eter. Same as in Method 6, Sections 10.2 and 11.0 Analytical Procedures
10.4, respectively. 11.1 The following chromatographic con-
10.3 Ion Chromatograph. ditions are recommended: 0.003 M NaHCO3/
10.3.1 Dilute a given volume (1.0 ml or 0.0024 Na2CO3 eluent solution (Section 7.2.5),
greater) of the KNO3 standard solution to a full scale range, 3 μMHO; sample loop, 0.5 ml;
convenient volume with water, and use this flow rate, 2.5 ml/min. These conditions
solution to prepare calibration standards. should give a NO3¥ retention time of ap-
Prepare at least four standards to cover the
proximately 15 minutes (Figure 7D–1).
range of the samples being analyzed. Use pi-
287
11.2 Establish a stable baseline. Inject a 11.3 Audit Analysis. Same as in Method 7,
sample of water, and determine whether any Section 11.4
NO3¥ appears in the chromatogram. If NO3¥
is present, repeat the water load/injection 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
procedure approximately five times; then re-
inject a water sample and observe the chro-
matogram. When no NO3¥ is present, the in- one extra significant figure beyond that of
strument is ready for use. Inject calibration the acquired data. Round off figures after
standards. Then inject samples and a blank. final calculation.
Repeat the injection of the calibration 12.1 Nomenclature. Same as in Method 7C,
standards (to compensate for any drift in re- Section 12.1.
sponse of the instrument). Measure the NO3¥ 12.2 NO3¥ concentration. Calculate the
peak height or peak area, and determine the NO3¥ concentration in the KNO3 standard so-
sample concentration from the calibration lution (see Section 7.2.4) using the following
curve. equation:
μg NO3− 62.01
= g of KNO3 × 10 3 × Eq. 7D-1
ml .
10110
12.3 Sample Volume, Dry Basis, Corrected 12.4 Total μg NO2 Per Sample.
to Standard Conditions. Same as in Method
7C, Section 12.4.
m = 250 ⎛
1000 ⎞ ⎛ 46.01⎞
(S − B) Eq. 7D-2
⎝ 50 ⎠ ⎝ 62.01⎠
= 3710 (S − B)
Where: 13.3 Range. The lower detectable limit is

250=Volume of prepared sample, ml. similar to that of Method 7C. No upper limit
1000=Total volume of KMnO4 solution, ml. has been established; however, when using
the recommended sampling conditions, the
50=Aliquot of KMnO4/NaOH solution, ml.
method has been found to collect NOX emis-
46.01=Molecular weight of NO3¥. sions quantitatively up to 1782 mg NOX/m3,
62.01=Molecular weight of NO3¥. as NO2 (932 ppm NOX).
12.5 Sample Concentration. Same as in
Method 7C, Section 12.7. 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
13.0 Method Performance 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
13.1 Precision. The intra-laboratory rel- 16.0 References

ative standard deviation for a single meas- Same as Method 7C, Section 16.0, Ref-
urement is approximately 6 percent at 200 to erences 1, 2, 4, and 5.
270 ppm NOX.
13.2 Bias. The method does not exhibit 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
any bias relative to Method 7. Validation Data
ER17OC00.221</MATH>
288
ER17OC00.220</MATH>
METHOD 7E—DETERMINATION OF NITROGEN culations, and data analysis. This method

OXIDES EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY does not completely describe all equipment,
SOURCES (INSTRUMENTAL ANALYZER PROCE- supplies, and sampling and analytical proce-
DURE) dures you will need but refers to other meth-
ods for some of the details. Therefore, to ob-
tain reliable results, you should also have a
What is Method 7E? thorough knowledge of these additional test
methods which are found in appendix A to
Method 7E is a procedure for measuring ni-
this part:
trogen oxides (NOX) in stationary source
emissions using a continuous instrumental (a) Method 1—Sample and Velocity Tra-
analyzer. Quality assurance and quality con- verses for Stationary Sources.
trol requirements are included to assure that (b) Method 4—Determination of Moisture
you, the tester, collect data of known qual- Content in Stack Gases.
ity. You must document your adherence to 1.1 Analytes. What does this method deter-
these specific requirements for equipment, mine? This method measures the concentra-
supplies, sample collection and analysis, cal- tion of nitrogen oxides as NO2.
Nitric oxide (NO) ............................................................ 10102–43–9 Typically <2% of

Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) .................................................. 10102–44–0 Calibration Span.
1.2 Applicability. When is this method re- measurement of NOX concentrations in sta-
quired? The use of Method 7E may be re- tionary source emissions is required, either
quired by specific New Source Performance to determine compliance with an applicable
Standards, Clean Air Marketing rules, State
Implementation Plans, and permits where
289
ER17OC00.222</GPH>
emissions standard or to conduct perform- percent of the calibration span and may be a
ance testing of a continuous monitoring sys- zero gas.
tem (CEMS). Other regulations may also re- 3.3.2 Mid-Level Gas means a calibration
quire the use of Method 7E. gas with a concentration that is 40 to 60 per-
1.3 Data Quality Objectives (DQO). How cent of the calibration span.
good must my collected data be? Method 7E is 3.3.3 High-Level Gas means a calibration
designed to provide high-quality data for de- gas with a concentration that is equal to the
termining compliance with Federal and calibration span.
State emission standards and for relative ac- 3.4 Calibration Span means the upper limit
curacy testing of CEMS. In these and other of the analyzer’s calibration that is set by
applications, the principal objective is to en- the choice of high-level calibration gas. No
sure the accuracy of the data at the actual valid run average concentration may exceed
emission levels encountered. To meet this the calibration span. To the extent prac-
objective, the use of EPA traceability pro- ticable, the measured emissions should be
tocol calibration gases and measurement between 20 to 100 percent of the selected cali-
system performance tests are required. bration span. This may not be practicable in
1.4 Data Quality Assessment for Low some cases of low-concentration measure-
Emitters. Is performance relief granted when ments or testing for compliance with an
testing low-emission units? Yes. For low-emit- emission limit when emissions are substan-
ting sources, there are alternative perform- tially less than the limit. In such cases, cali-
ance specifications for analyzer calibration bration spans that are practicable to achiev-
error, system bias, drift, and response time. ing the data quality objectives without being
Also, the alternative dynamic spiking proce- excessively high should be chosen.
dure in Section 16 may provide performance 3.5 Centroidal Area means the central area
relief for certain low-emitting units. of the stack or duct that is no greater than
1 percent of the stack or duct cross section.
This area has the same geometric shape as
In this method, a sample of the effluent the stack or duct.
gas is continuously sampled and conveyed to 3.6 Converter Efficiency Gas means a cali-
the analyzer for measuring the concentra- bration gas with a known NO or NO2 con-
tion of NOX. You may measure NO and NO2 centration and of Traceability Protocol
separately or simultaneously together but, quality.
for the purposes of this method, NOX is the 3.7 Data Recorder means the equipment
sum of NO and NO2. You must meet the per- that permanently records the concentrations
formance requirements of this method to reported by the analyzer.
validate your data. 3.8 Direct Calibration Mode means intro-
ducing the calibration gases directly into the
3.0 Definitions analyzer (or into the assembled measure-
3.1 Analyzer Calibration Error, for non-dilu- ment system at a point downstream of all
tion systems, means the difference between sample conditioning equipment) according to
the manufacturer certified concentration of manufacturer’s recommended calibration
a calibration gas and the measured con- procedure. This mode of calibration applies
centration of the same gas when it is intro- to non-dilution-type measurement systems.
duced into the analyzer in direct calibration 3.9 Drift means the difference between the
mode. pre- and post-run system bias (or system
3.2 Calibration Curve means the relation- calibration error) checks at a specific cali-
ship between an analyzer’s response to the bration gas concentration level (i.e. low-,
injection of a series of calibration gases and mid- or high-).
the actual concentrations of those gases. 3.10 Gas Analyzer means the equipment
3.3 Calibration Gas means the gas mixture that senses the gas being measured and gen-
containing NOX at a known concentration erates an output proportional to its con-
and produced and certified in accordance centration.
with ‘‘EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay 3.11 Interference Check means the test to
and Certification of Gaseous Calibration detect analyzer responses to compounds
Standards,’’ September 1997, as amended Au- other than the compound of interest, usually
gust 25, 1999, EPA–600/R–97/121 or more recent a gas present in the measured gas stream,
updates. The tests for analyzer calibration that is not adequately accounted for in the
error, drift, and system bias require the use calibration procedure and may cause meas-
of calibration gas prepared according to this urement bias.
protocol. If a zero gas is used for the low- 3.12 Low-Concentration Analyzer means
level gas, it must meet the requirements any analyzer that operates with a calibra-
under the definition for ‘‘zero air material’’ tion span of 20 ppm NOX or lower. Each ana-
in 40 CFR 72.2 in place of being prepared by lyzer model used routinely to measure low
the traceability protocol. NOX concentrations must pass a manufactur-
3.3.1 Low-Level Gas means a calibration er’s stability test (MST). An MST subjects
gas with a concentration that is less than 20 the analyzer to a range of line voltages and
290
temperatures that reflect potential field con- ommendations in the gas analyzer user’s
ditions to demonstrate its stability following manual. Occupational Safety and Health Ad-
procedures similar to those provided in 40 ministration (OSHA) regulations concerning
CFR 53.23. Ambient-level analyzers are ex- cylinder and noxious gases may apply. Nitric
empt from the MST requirements of Section oxide and NO2 are toxic and dangerous gases.
16.3. A copy of this information must be in- Nitric oxide is immediately converted to NO2
cluded in each test report. Table 7E–5 lists upon reaction with air. Nitrogen dioxide is a
the criteria to be met. highly poisonous and insidious gas. Inflam-
3.13 Measurement System means all of the mation of the lungs from exposure may
equipment used to determine the NOX con- cause only slight pain or pass unnoticed, but
centration. The measurement system com- the resulting edema several days later may
prises six major subsystems: Sample acquisi- cause death. A concentration of 100 ppm is
tion, sample transport, sample conditioning, dangerous for even a short exposure, and 200
calibration gas manifold, gas analyzer, and ppm may be fatal. Calibration gases must be
data recorder. handled with utmost care and with adequate
3.14 Response Time means the time it ventilation. Emission-level exposure to these
takes the measurement system to respond to gases should be avoided.
a change in gas concentration occurring at
the sampling point when the system is oper- 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
ating normally at its target sample flow rate The performance criteria in this method
or dilution ratio. will be met or exceeded if you are properly
3.15 Run means a series of gas samples using equipment designed for this applica-
taken successively from the stack or duct. A tion.
test normally consists of a specific number 6.1 What do I need for the measurement sys-
of runs. tem? You may use any equipment and sup-
3.16 System Bias means the difference be- plies meeting the following specifications.
tween a calibration gas measured in direct (1) Sampling system components that are
calibration mode and in system calibration not evaluated in the system bias or system
mode. System bias is determined before and calibration error test must be glass, Teflon,
after each run at the low- and mid- or high- or stainless steel. Other materials are poten-
concentration levels. For dilution-type sys- tially acceptable, subject to approval by the
tems, pre- and post-run system calibration Administrator.
error is measured rather than system bias. (2) The interference, calibration error, and
3.17 System Calibration Error applies to di- system bias criteria must be met.
lution-type systems and means the dif- (3) Sample flow rate must be maintained
ference between the measured concentration within 10 percent of the flow rate at which
of low-, mid-, or high-level calibration gas the system response time was measured.
and the certified concentration for each gas (4) All system components (excluding sam-
when introduced in system calibration mode. ple conditioning components, if used) must
For dilution-type systems, a 3-point system maintain the sample temperature above the
calibration error test is conducted in lieu of moisture dew point.
the analyzer calibration error test, and 2- Section 6.2 provides example equipment
point system calibration error tests are con- specifications for a NOX measurement sys-
ducted in lieu of system bias tests. tem. Figure 7E–1 is a diagram of an example
3.18 System Calibration Mode means intro- dry basis measurement system that is likely
ducing the calibration gases into the meas- to meet the method requirements and is pro-
urement system at the probe, upstream of vided as guidance. For wet-basis systems,
the filter and all sample conditioning compo- you may use alternative equipment and sup-
nents. plies as needed (some of which are described
3.19 Test refers to the series of runs re- in Section 6.2), provided that the measure-
quired by the applicable regulation. ment system meets the applicable perform-
4.0 Interferences ance specifications of this method.
6.2 Measurement System Components
Note that interferences may vary among 6.2.1 Sample Probe. Glass, stainless steel,
instruments and that instrument-specific or other approved material, of sufficient
interferences must be evaluated through the length to traverse the sample points.
interference test. 6.2.2 Particulate Filter. An in-stack or out-
of-stack filter. The filter must be made of
5.0 Safety
material that is non-reactive to the gas
What safety measures should I consider when being sampled. The filter media for out-of-
using this method? This method may require stack filters must be included in the system
you to work with hazardous materials and in bias test. The particulate filter requirement
hazardous conditions. We encourage you to may be waived in applications where no sig-
establish safety procedures before using the nificant particulate matter is expected (e.g.,
method. Among other precautions, you for emission testing of a combustion turbine
should become familiar with the safety rec- firing natural gas).
291
6.2.3 Sample Line. The sample line from directly to the analyzer (except for dilution-
the probe to the conditioning system/sample type systems). The manifold must be made of
pump should be made of Teflon or other ma- material that is non-reactive to the gas sam-
terial that does not absorb or otherwise alter pled or the calibration gas and be configured
the sample gas. For a dry-basis measurement to safely discharge the bypass gas.
system (as shown in Figure 7E–1), the tem- 6.2.8 NOX Analyzer. An instrument that
perature of the sample line must be main- continuously measures NOX in the gas
tained at a sufficiently high level to prevent stream and meets the applicable specifica-
condensation before the sample conditioning tions in Section 13.0. An analyzer that oper-
components. For wet-basis measurement sys- ates on the principle of chemiluminescence
tems, the temperature of the sample line with an NO2 to NO converter is one example
must be maintained at a sufficiently high of an analyzer that has been used success-
level to prevent condensation before the ana- fully in the past. Analyzers operating on
lyzer. other principles may also be used provided
6.2.4 Conditioning Equipment. For dry basis the performance criteria in Section 13.0 are
measurements, a condenser, dryer or other met.
suitable device is required to remove mois- 6.2.8.1 Dual Range Analyzers. For certain
ture continuously from the sample gas. Any applications, a wide range of gas concentra-
equipment needed to heat the probe or sam- tions may be encountered, necessitating the
ple line to avoid condensation prior to the use of two measurement ranges. Dual-range
sample conditioning component is also re- analyzers are readily available for these ap-
quired. plications. These analyzers are often
For wet basis systems, you must keep the equipped with automated range-switching
sample above its dew point either by: (1) capability, so that when readings exceed the
Heating the sample line and all sample full-scale of the low measurement range,
transport components up to the inlet of the they are recorded on the high range. As an
analyzer (and, for hot-wet extractive sys- alternative to using a dual-range analyzer,
tems, also heating the analyzer) or (2) by di- you may use two segments of a single, large
luting the sample prior to analysis using a measurement scale to serve as the low and
dilution probe system. The components re- high ranges. In all cases, when two ranges
quired to do either of the above are consid- are used, you must quality-assure both
ered to be conditioning equipment. ranges using the proper sets of calibration
6.2.5 Sampling Pump. For systems similar gases. You must also meet the interference,
to the one shown in Figure 7E–1, a leak-free calibration error, system bias, and drift
pump is needed to pull the sample gas checks. However, we caution that when you
through the system at a flow rate sufficient use two segments of a large measurement
to minimize the response time of the meas- scale for dual range purposes, it may be dif-
urement system. The pump may be con- ficult to meet the performance specifications
structed of any material that is non-reactive on the low range due to signal-to-noise ratio
to the gas being sampled. For dilution-type considerations.
measurement systems, an ejector pump 6.2.8.2 Low Concentration Analyzer. When
(eductor) is used to create a vacuum that an analyzer is routinely calibrated with a
draws the sample through a critical orifice calibration span of 20 ppmv or less, the man-
at a constant rate. ufacturer’s stability test (MST) is required.
6.2.6 Calibration Gas Manifold. Prepare a See Table 7E–5 for test parameters.
system to allow the introduction of calibra- 6.2.9 Data Recording. A strip chart re-
tion gases either directly to the gas analyzer corder, computerized data acquisition sys-
in direct calibration mode or into the meas- tem, digital recorder, or data logger for re-
urement system, at the probe, in system cording measurement data may be used.
calibration mode, or both, depending upon
the type of system used. In system calibra- 7.0 Reagents and Standards
tion mode, the system should be able to flood 7.1 Calibration Gas. What calibration
the sampling probe and vent excess gas. Al- gases do I need? Your calibration gas must
ternatively, calibration gases may be intro- be NO in N2 and certified (or recertified)
duced at the calibration valve following the within an uncertainty of 2.0 percent in ac-
probe. Maintain a constant pressure in the cordance with ‘‘EPA Traceability Protocol
gas manifold. For in-stack dilution-type sys- for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Cali-
tems, a gas dilution subsystem is required to bration Standards’’ September 1997, as
transport large volumes of purified air to the amended August 25, 1999, EPA–600/R–97/121.
sample probe and a probe controller is need- Blended gases meeting the Traceability Pro-
ed to maintain the proper dilution ratio. tocol are allowed if the additional gas com-
6.2.7 Sample Gas Manifold. For the type of ponents are shown not to interfere with the
system shown in Figure 7E–1, the sample gas analysis. If a zero gas is used for the low-
manifold diverts a portion of the sample to level gas, it must meet the requirements
the analyzer, delivering the remainder to the under the definition for ‘‘zero air material’’
by-pass discharge vent. The manifold should in 40 CFR 72.2. The calibration gas must not
also be able to introduce calibration gases be used after its expiration date. Except for
292
applications under part 75 of this chapter, it 8.1.2 Determination of Stratification. Per-
is acceptable to prepare calibration gas mix- form a stratification test at each test site to
tures from EPA Traceability Protocol gases determine the appropriate number of sample
in accordance with Method 205 in appendix M traverse points. If testing for multiple pol-
to part 51 of this chapter. For part 75 appli- lutants or diluents at the same site, a strati-
cations, the use of Method 205 is subject to fication test using only one pollutant or dil-
the approval of the Administrator. The goal uent satisfies this requirement. A stratifica-
and recommendation for selecting calibration test is not required for small stacks
tion gases is to bracket the sample con- that are less than 4 inches in diameter. To
centrations. The following calibration gas test for stratification, use a probe of appro-
concentrations are required: priate length to measure the NOX (or pollut-
7.1.1 High-Level Gas. This concentration ant of interest) concentration at twelve tra-
sets the calibration span and results in verse points located according to Table 1–1
measurements being 20 to 100 percent of the or Table 1–2 of Method 1. Alternatively, you
calibration span. may measure at three points on a line pass-
7.1.2 Mid-Level Gas. 40 to 60 percent of the ing through the centroidal area. Space the
calibration span. three points at 16.7, 50.0, and 83.3 percent of
7.1.3 Low-Level Gas. Less than 20 percent the measurement line. Sample for a min-
of the calibration span. imum of twice the system response time (see
7.1.4 Converter Efficiency Gas. What re- Section 8.2.6) at each traverse point. Cal-
agents do I need for the converter efficiency culate the individual point and mean NOX
test? The converter efficiency gas is a manu- concentrations. If the concentration at each
facturer-certified gas with a concentration traverse point differs from the mean con-
sufficient to show NO2 conversion at the concentration for all traverse points by no more
centrations encountered in the source. A test than: (a) ± 5.0 percent of the mean concentra-
gas concentration in the 40 to 60 ppm range tion; or (b) ± 0.5 ppm (whichever is less re-
is suggested, but other concentrations may strictive), the gas stream is considered
be more appropriate to specific sources. For unstratified and you may collect samples
the test described in Section 8.2.4.1, NO2 is from a single point that most closely
required. For the alternative converter effi- matches the mean. If the 5.0 percent or 0.5
ciency tests in Section 16.2, NO is required. ppm criterion is not met, but the concentra-
7.2 Interference Check. What reagents do I tion at each traverse point differs from the
need for the interference check? Use the appro- mean concentration for all traverse points
priate test gases listed in Table 7E–3 or oth- by no more than: (a) ± 10.0 percent of the
ers not listed that can potentially interfere mean; or (b) ± 1.0 ppm (whichever is less re-
(as indicated by the test facility type, in- strictive), the gas stream is considered to be
strument manufacturer, etc.) to conduct the minimally stratified, and you may take sam-
interference check. These gases should be ples from three points. Space the three
manufacturer certified but do not have to be points at 16.7, 50.0, and 83.3 percent of the
prepared by the EPA traceability protocol. measurement line. Alternatively, if a twelve-
point stratification test was performed and
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, the emissions were shown to be minimally
and Transport stratified (all points within ± 10.0 percent of
their mean or within ± 1.0 ppm), and if the
Emission Test Procedure
stack diameter (or equivalent diameter, for a
Since you are allowed to choose different rectangular stack or duct) is greater than 2.4
options to comply with some of the perform- meters (7.8 ft), then you may use 3-point
ance criteria, it is your responsibility to sampling and locate the three points along
identify the specific options you have cho- the measurement line exhibiting the highest
sen, to document that the performance cri- average concentration during the stratifica-
teria for that option have been met, and to tion test, at 0.4, 1.0 and 2.0 meters from the
identify any deviations from the method. stack or duct wall. If the gas stream is found
8.1 What sampling site and sampling points to be stratified because the 10.0 percent or 1.0
do I select? ppm criterion for a 3-point test is not met,
8.1.1 Unless otherwise specified in an ap- locate twelve traverse points for the test in
plicable regulation or by the Administrator, accordance with Table 1–1 or Table 1–2 of
when this method is used to determine com- Method 1.
pliance with an emission standard, conduct a 8.2 Initial Measurement System Performance
stratification test as described in Section Tests. What initial performance criteria must my
8.1.2 to determine the sampling traverse system meet before I begin collecting samples?
points to be used. For performance testing of Before measuring emissions, perform the fol-
continuous emission monitoring systems, lowing procedures:
follow the sampling site selection and tra- (a) Calibration gas verification,
verse point layout procedures described in (b) Measurement system preparation,
the appropriate performance specification or (c) Calibration error test,
applicable regulation (e.g., Performance (d) NO2 to NO conversion efficiency test, if
Specification 2 in appendix B to this part). applicable,
293
(e) System bias check, test provided you pass this test at the con-
(f) System response time test, and clusion of the final facility test. A failed
(g) Interference check final conversion efficiency test in this case
8.2.1 Calibration Gas Verification. How will invalidate all tests performed subse-
must I verify the concentrations of my cali- quent to the test in which the converter effi-
bration gases? Obtain a certificate from the ciency test was passed. Follow the proce-
gas manufacturer documenting the quality dures in Section 8.2.4.1, or 8.2.4.2. If desired,
of the gas. Confirm that the manufacturer the converter efficiency factor derived from
certification is complete and current. Ensure this test may be used to correct the test re-
that your calibration gas certifications have sults for converter efficiency if the NO2 frac-
not expired. This documentation should be tion in the measured test gas is known. Use
available on-site for inspection. To the ex- Equation 7E–8 in Section 12.8 for this correc-
tent practicable, select a high-level gas con- tion.
centration that will result in the measured 8.2.4.1. Introduce NO2 converter efficiency
emissions being between 20 and 100 percent of gas to the analyzer in direct calibration
the calibration span. mode and record the NOX concentration dis-
8.2.2 Measurement System Preparation. How played by the analyzer. Calculate the con-
do I prepare my measurement system? Assem- verter efficiency using Equation 7E–7 in Sec-
ble, prepare, and precondition the measure- tion 12.7. The specification for converter effi-
ment system according to your standard op- ciency in Section 13.5 must be met. The user
erating procedure. Adjust the system to is cautioned that state-of-the-art NO2 cali-
achieve the correct sampling rate or dilution bration gases may have limited shelf lives,
ratio (as applicable). and this could affect the ability to pass the
8.2.3 Calibration Error Test. How do I con- 90-percent conversion efficiency require-
firm my analyzer calibration is correct? After ment.
you have assembled, prepared and calibrated
8.2.4.2 Alternatively, either of the proce-
your sampling system and analyzer, you
dures for determining conversion efficiency
must conduct a 3-point analyzer calibration
using NO in Section 16.2 may be used.
error test (or a 3-point system calibration
error test for dilution systems) before the 8.2.5 Initial System Bias and System Calibra-
first run and again after any failed system tion Error Checks. Before sampling begins, de-
bias test (or 2-point system calibration error termine whether the high-level or mid-level
test for dilution systems) or failed drift test. calibration gas best approximates the emis-
Introduce the low-, mid-, and high-level cali- sions and use it as the upscale gas. Introduce
bration gases sequentially. For non-dilution- the upscale gas at the probe upstream of all
type measurement systems, introduce the sample conditioning components in system
gases in direct calibration mode. For dilu- calibration mode. Record the time it takes
tion-type measurement systems, introduce for the measured concentration to increase
the gases in system calibration mode. to a value that is within 95 percent or 0.5
(1) For non-dilution systems, you may ad- ppm (whichever is less restrictive) of the cer-
just the system to maintain the correct flow tified gas concentration. Continue to observe
rate at the analyzer during the test, but you the gas concentration reading until it has
may not make adjustments for any other reached a final, stable value. Record this
purpose. For dilution systems, you must op- value on a form similar to Table 7E–2.
erate the measurement system at the appro- (1) Next, introduce the low-level gas in sys-
priate dilution ratio during all system cali- tem calibration mode and record the time re-
bration error checks, and may make only the quired for the concentration response to de-
adjustments necessary to maintain the prop- crease to a value that is within 5.0 percent or
er ratio. 0.5 ppm (whichever is less restrictive) of the
(2) Record the analyzer’s response to each certified low-range gas concentration. If the
calibration gas on a form similar to Table low-level gas is a zero gas, use the proce-
7E–1. For each calibration gas, calculate the dures described above and observe the
analyzer calibration error using Equation change in concentration until the response is
7E–1 in Section 12.2 or the system calibration 0.5 ppm or 5.0 percent of the upscale gas con-
error using Equation 7E–3 in Section 12.4 (as centration (whichever is less restrictive).
applicable). The calibration error specifica- (2) Continue to observe the low-level gas
tion in Section 13.1 must be met for the low- reading until it has reached a final, stable
, mid-, and high-level gases. If the calibra- value and record the result on a form similar
tion error specification is not met, take cor- to Table 7E–2. Operate the measurement sys-
rective action and repeat the test until an tem at the normal sampling rate during all
acceptable 3-point calibration is achieved. system bias checks. Make only the adjust-
8.2.4 NO2 to NO Conversion Efficiency Test. ments necessary to achieve proper calibra-
Before or after each field test, you must con- tion gas flow rates at the analyzer.
duct an NO2 to NO conversion efficiency test (3) From these data, calculate the meas-
if your system converts NO2 to NO before urement system response time (see Section
analyzing for NOX. You may risk testing 8.2.6) and then calculate the initial system
multiple facilities before performing this bias using Equation 7E–2 in Section 12.3. For
294
dilution systems, calculate the system cali- available for inspection at the test site and
bration error in lieu of system bias using included with each test report. This inter-
equation 7E–3 in Section 12.4. See Section ference test is valid for the life of the instru-
13.2 for acceptable performance criteria for ment unless major analytical components
system bias and system calibration error. If (e.g., the detector) are replaced with dif-
the initial system bias (or system calibra- ferent model parts. If major components are
tion error) specification is not met, take cor- replaced with different model parts, the in-
rective action. Then, you must repeat the terference gas check must be repeated before
applicable calibration error test from Sec- returning the analyzer to service. If major
tion 8.2.3 and the initial system bias (or 2- components are replaced, the interference
point system calibration error) check until gas check must be repeated before returning
acceptable results are achieved, after which the analyzer to service. The tester must en-
you may begin sampling. sure that any specific technology, equip-
(NOTE: For dilution-type systems, data ment, or procedures that are intended to re-
from the 3-point system calibration error move interference effects are operating prop-
test described in Section 8.2.3 may be used to erly during testing.
meet the initial 2-point system calibration 8.3 Dilution-Type Systems—Special Consid-
erations. When a dilution-type measurement
error test requirement of this section, if the
system is used, there are three important
calibration gases were injected as described
considerations that must be taken into ac-
in this section, and if response time data
count to ensure the quality of the emissions
were recorded).
data. First, the critical orifice size and dilu-
8.2.6 Measurement System Response Time. tion ratio must be selected properly so that
As described in section 8.2.5, you must deter- the sample dew point will be below the sam-
mine the measurement system response time ple line and analyzer temperatures. Second,
during the initial system bias (or 2-point sys- a high-quality, accurate probe controller
tem calibration error) check. Observe the must be used to maintain the dilution ratio
times required to achieve 95 percent of a sta- during the test. The probe controller should
ble response for both the low-level and be capable of monitoring the dilution air
upscale gases. The longer interval is the re- pressure, eductor vacuum, and sample flow
sponse time. rates. Third, differences between the molec-
8.2.7 Interference Check. Conduct an inter- ular weight of calibration gas mixtures and
ference response test of the gas analyzer the stack gas molecular weight must be ad-
prior to its initial use in the field. If you dressed because these can affect the dilution
have multiple analyzers of the same make ratio and introduce measurement bias.
and model, you need only perform this alter- 8.4 Sample Collection.
native interference check on one analyzer. (1) Position the probe at the first sampling
You may also meet the interference check point. Purge the system for at least two
requirement if the instrument manufacturer times the response time before recording any
performs this or similar check on the same data. Then, traverse all required sampling
make and model of analyzer that you use points, sampling at each point for an equal
and provides you with documented results. length of time and maintaining the appro-
(1) You may introduce the appropriate in- priate sample flow rate or dilution ratio (as
terference test gases (that are potentially applicable). You must record at least one
encountered during a test, see examples in valid data point per minute during the test
Table 7E–3) into the analyzer separately or run.
as mixtures. Test the analyzer with the in- (2) Each time the probe is removed from
terference gas alone at the highest con- the stack and replaced, you must recondition
centration expected at a test source and the sampling system for at least two times
again with the interference gas and NOX at a the system response time prior to your next
representative NOX test concentration. For recording. If the average of any run exceeds
analyzers measuring NOX greater than 20 the calibration span value, that run is in-
ppm, use a calibration gas with an NOX con- valid.
centration of 80 to 100 ppm and set this con- (3) You may satisfy the multipoint tra-
centration equal to the calibration span. For verse requirement by sampling sequentially
analyzers measuring less than 20 ppm NOX, using a single-hole probe or a multi-hole
select an NO concentration for the calibra- probe designed to sample at the prescribed
tion span that reflects the emission levels at points with a flow within 10 percent of mean
the sources to be tested, and perform the in- flow rate. Notwithstanding, for applications
terference check at that level. Measure the under part 75 of this chapter, the use of
total interference response of the analyzer to multi-hole probes is subject to the approval
these gases in ppmv. Record the responses of the Administrator.
and determine the interference using Table 8.5 Post-Run System Bias Check and Drift
7E–4. The specification in Section 13.4 must Assessment.
be met. How do I confirm that each sample I col-
(2) A copy of this data, including the date lect is valid? After each run, repeat the sys-
completed and signed certification, must be tem bias check or 2-point system calibration
295
error check (for dilution systems) to validate used as the pre-run data for the next run in
the run. Do not make adjustments to the the test sequence at the discretion of the
measurement system (other than to main- tester.
tain the target sampling rate or dilution 8.6 Alternative Interference and System Bias
ratio) between the end of the run and the Checks (Dynamic Spike Procedure). If I want to
completion of the post-run system bias or use the dynamic spike procedure to validate my
system calibration error check. Note that for data, what procedure should I follow? Except
all post-run system bias or 2-point system for applications under part 75 of this chapter,
calibration error checks, you may inject the you may use the dynamic spiking procedure
low-level gas first and the upscale gas last, and requirements provided in Section 16.1
or vice-versa. You may risk sampling for during each test as an alternative to the in-
multiple runs before performing the post-run terference check and the pre- and post-run
bias or system calibration error check pro- system bias checks. The calibration error
vided you pass this test at the conclusion of test is still required under this option. Use of
the group of runs. A failed final test in this the dynamic spiking procedure for Part 75
case will invalidate all runs subsequent to applications is subject to the approval of the
the last passed test. Administrator.
(1) If you do not pass the post-run system 8.7 Moisture correction. You must deter-
bias (or system calibration error) check, mine the moisture content of the flue gas
then the run is invalid. You must diagnose and correct the measured gas concentrations
and fix the problem and pass another calibra- to a dry basis using Method 4 or other appro-
tion error test (Section 8.2.3) and system bias priate methods, subject to the approval of
(or 2-point system calibration error) check the Administrator, when the moisture basis
(Section 8.2.5) before repeating the run. (wet or dry) of the measurements made with
Record the system bias (or system calibra- this method is different from the moisture
tion error) results on a form similar to Table basis of either: (1) The applicable emissions
7E–2. limit; or (2) the CEMS being evaluated for
(2) After each run, calculate the low-level relative accuracy. Moisture correction is
and upscale drift, using Equation 7E–4 in also required if the applicable limit is in lb/
Section 12.5. If the post-run low- and upscale mmBtu and the moisture basis of the Method
bias (or 2-point system calibration error) 7E NOX analyzer is different from the mois-
checks are passed, but the low-or upscale ture basis of the Method 3A diluent gas (CO2
drift exceeds the specification in Section or O2) analyzer.
13.3, the run data are valid, but a 3-point
calibration error test and a system bias (or 9.0 Quality Control
2-point system calibration error) check must
What quality control measures must I take?
be performed and passed before any more
test runs are done. The following table is a summary of the
(3) For dilution systems, data from a 3- mandatory, suggested, and alternative qual-
point system calibration error test may be ity assurance and quality control measures
used to met the pre-run 2-point system cali- and the associated frequency and acceptance
bration error requirement for the first run in criteria. All of the QC data, along with the
a test sequence. Also, the post-run bias (or 2- sample run data, must be documented and
point calibration error) check data may be included in the test report.
SUMMARY TABLE OF AQ/QC
Status Process or element QA/QC specification Acceptance criteria Checking frequency
S ................. Identify Data User .... Regulatory Agency or other primary end Before designing
user of data. test.
S ................. Analyzer Design ...... Analyzer resolution < 2.0% of full-scale range ......................... Manufacturer design.
or sensitivity.
M ................. Interference gas Sum of responses ≤ 2.5% of calibration
check. span Alternatively, sum of responses:
≤ 0.5 ppmv for calibration spans of 5 to
10 ppmv.
≤ 0.2 ppmv for calibration spans < 5 ppmv.
See Table 7E-3.
M ................. Calibration Gases .... Traceability protocol Valid certificate required Uncertainty ≤
(G1, G2). 2.0% of tag value.
M ................. High-level gas .......... Equal to the calibration span ..................... Each test.
M ................. Mid-level gas ........... 40 to 60% of calibration span .................... Each test.
M ................. Low-level gas ........... < 20% of calibration span .......................... Each test.
S ................. Data Recorder De- Data resolution ........ ≤ 0.5% of full-scale range .......................... Manufacturer design.
sign.
S ................. Sample Extraction ... Probe material ......... SS or quartz if stack > 500 °F ................... East test.
M ................. Sample Extraction ... Probe, filter and For dry-basis analyzers, keep sample Each run.
sample line tem- above the dew point by heating, prior to
perature. sample conditioning.
296
SUMMARY TABLE OF AQ/QC—Continued

Status Process or element QA/QC specification Acceptance criteria Checking frequency
For wet-basis analyzers, keep sample

above dew point at all times, by heating
or dilution.
S ................. Sample Extraction ... Calibration valve ma- SS .............................................................. Each test.
terial.
S ................. Sample Extraction ... Sample pump mate- Inert to sample constituents ...................... Each test.
rial.
S ................. Sample Extraction ... Manifolding material Inert to sample constituents ...................... Each test.
S ................. Moisture Removal .... Equipment efficiency < 5% target compound removal ................ Verified through sys-
tem bias check.
S ................. Particulate Removal Filter inertness ......... Pass system bias check ............................ Each bias check.
M ................. Analyzer & Calibra- Analyzer calibration Within ± 2.0 percent of the calibration Before initial run and
tion Gas Perform- error (of 3-point span of the analyzer for the low-, mid-, after a failed sys-
ance. system calibration and high-level calibration gases. tem bias test or
error for dilution drift test.
systems).
Alternative specification: ≤ 0.5 ppmv abso-
lute difference.
M ................. System Performance System bias (or pre- Within ± 5.0% of the analyzer calibration Before and after
and post-run 2- span for low-sacle and upscale calibra- each run.
point system cali- tion gases.
bration error for di-
lution (Systems).
lute difference.
M ................. System Performance System response Determines minimum sampling time per During initial sam-
time. point. pling system bias
test.
M ................. System Performance Drift .......................... ≤ 3.0% of calibration span for low-level After each test run.
and mid- or high-level gases.
lute difference.
M ................. System Performance NO2-NO conversion ≥ 90% of certified test gas concentration .. Before or after each
efficiency. test.
M ................. System Performance Purge time ............... ≥ 2 times system response time ............... Before starting the
first run and when
probe is removed
from and re-in-
serted into the
stack.
M ................. System Performance Minimum sample Two times the system response time ........ Each sample point.
time at each point.
M ................. System Performance Stable sample flow Within 10% of flow rate established during Each run.
rate (surrogate for system response time check.
maintaining sys-
tem response
time).
M ................. Sample Point Selec- Stratification test ...... All points within: Prior to first run.
tion.
± 5% of mean for 1-point sampling.
± 10% of mean for 3-point.
Alternatively, all points within:
± 0.5 ppm of mean for 1-point sampling.
± 1.0 ppm of mean for 3-point sampling.
A ................. Multiple sample No. of openings in Multi-hole probe with verifiable constant Each run.
points simulta- probe. flow through all holes within 10% of
neously. mean flow rate (requires Administrative
approval for Part 75).
M ................. Data Recording ........ Frequency ................ ≤ 1 minute average .................................... During run.
S ................. Data Parameters ..... Sample concentra- All 1-minute averages within calibration Each run.
tion range. span.
M ................. Date Parameters ..... Average concentra- Run average ≤ calibration span ................ Each run.
tion for the run.
S = Suggest.
M = Mandatory.
A = Alternative.
Agency.
297
10.0 Calibration and Standardization error) check responses for the upscale cali-
bration gas, ppmv.
What measurement system calibrations are CMA = Actual concentration of the upscale
required? calibration gas, ppmv.
(1) The initial 3-point calibration error test CNative = NOX concentration in the stack gas
as described in Section 8.2.3 and the system as calculated in Section 12.6, ppmv.
bias (or system calibration error) checks de- CO = Average of the initial and final system
scribed in Section 8.2.5 are required and must calibration bias (or 2-point system calibra-
meet the specifications in Section 13 before tion error) check responses from the low-
you start the test. Make all necessary ad- level (or zero) calibration gas, ppmv.
justments to calibrate the gas analyzer and COA = Actual concentration of the low-level
data recorder. Then, after the test com- calibration gas, ppmv.
mences, the system bias or system calibra- CS = Measured concentration of a calibration
tion error checks described in Section 8.5 are gas (low, mid, or high) when introduced in
required before and after each run. Your ana- system calibration mode, ppmv.
lyzer must be calibrated for all species of CSS = Concentration of NOX measured in the
NOX that it detects. Analyzers that measure spiked sample, ppmv.
NO and NO2 separately without using a con- CSpike = Concentration of NOX in the undi-
verter must be calibrated with both NO and luted spike gas, ppmv.
NO2. CCalc = Calculated concentration of NOX in
(2) You must include a copy of the manu- the spike gas diluted in the sample, ppmv.
facturer’s certification of the calibration CV = Manufacturer certified concentration of
gases used in the testing as part of the test a calibration gas (low, mid, or high), ppmv.
report. This certification must include the 13 CW = Pollutant concentration measured
documentation requirements in the EPA under moist sample conditions, wet basis,
Traceability Protocol For Assay and Certifi- ppmv.
cation of Gaseous Calibration Standards, CS = Calibration span, ppmv.
September 1997, as amended August 25, 1999. D = Drift assessment, percent of calibration
When Method 205 is used to produce diluted span.
calibration gases, you must document that DF = Dilution system dilution factor or
the specifications for the gas dilution system spike gas dilution factor, dimensionless.
are met for the test. You must also include EffNO2 = NO2 to NO converter efficiency, per-
the date of the most recent dilution system cent.
calibration against flow standards and the NOXCorr = The NOX concentration corrected
name of the person or manufacturer who car- for the converter efficiency, ppmv.
ried out the calibration in the test report. NOXFinal = The final NOX concentration ob-
served during the converter efficiency test
11.0 Analytical Procedures in Section 16.2.2, ppmv.
Because sample collection and analysis are NOXPeak = The highest NOX concentration ob-
performed together (see Section 8), addi- served during the converter efficiency test
tional discussion of the analytical procedure in Section 16.2.2, ppmv.
is not necessary. QSpike = Flow rate of spike gas introduced in
system calibration mode, L/min.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis QTotal = Total sample flow rate during the
spike test, L/min.
You must follow the procedures for cal-
R = Spike recovery, percent.
culations and data analysis listed in this sec-
SB = System bias, percent of calibration
tion.
12.1 Nomenclature. The terms used in the span.
equations are defined as follows: SBi = Pre-run system bias, percent of cali-
bration span.
ACE = Analyzer calibration error, percent of SBfinal = Post-run system bias, percent of
calibration span. calibration span.
BWS = Moisture content of sample gas as SCE = System calibration error, percent of
measured by Method 4 or other approved calibration span.
method, percent/100. SCEi = Pre-run system calibration error, per-
CAvg = Average unadjusted gas concentration cent of calibration span.
indicated by data recorder for the test run, SCEFinal = Post-run system calibration error,
ppmv. percent of calibration span.
CD = Pollutant concentration adjusted to dry 12.2 Analyzer Calibration Error. For non-di-
conditions, ppmv. lution systems, use Equation 7E–1 to cal-
CDir = Measured concentration of a calibra-
culate the analyzer calibration error for the
tion gas (low, mid, or high) when intro-
low-, mid-, and high-level calibration gases.
duced in direct calibration mode, ppmv.

CGas = Average effluent gas concentration ad-
justed for bias, ppmv. CDir − C v
CM = Average of initial and final system cali- ACE = × 100 Eq. 7E-1
bration bias (or 2-point system calibration CS
298
ER15MY06.001</GPH>
12.3 System Bias. For non-dilution sys- 12.4 System Calibration Error. Use Equation
tems, use Equation 7E–2 to calculate the sys- 7E–3 to calculate the system calibration
tem bias separately for the low-level and error for dilution systems. Equation 7E–3 ap-
upscale calibration gases. plies to both the initial 3-point system cali-
bration error test and the subsequent 2-point
CS − CDir calibration error checks between test runs.
SB = × 100 Eq. 7E- 2 In this equation, the term ‘‘Cs’’ refers to the
CS diluted calibration gas concentration meas-
ured by the analyzer.
( CS DF ) − CV
SCE = × 100 Eq. 7E -3
CS
12.5 Drift Assessment. Use Equation 7E–4 to 12.6 Effluent Gas Concentration. For each
separately calculate the low-level and test run, calculate Cavg, the arithmetic aver-
upscale drift over each test run. For dilution age of all valid NOX concentration values
systems, replace ‘‘SBfinal’’ and ‘‘SBi’’ with (e.g., 1-minute averages). Then adjust the
‘‘SCEfinal’’ and ‘‘SCEi’’, respectively, to cal- value of Cavg for bias using Equation 7E–5a if
culate and evaluate drift. you use a non-zero gas as your low-level cali-
bration gas, or Equation 7E–5b if you use a
D = SBfinal − SBi Eq. 7E-4 zero gas as your low-level calibration gas.
ER22MY08.003</MATH>
CMA − COA
CGas = ( C Avg − CM ) + CMA Eq. 7E -5a
CM − CO
ER15MY06.007</GPH>
CMA
CGas = ( C Avg − CO ) Eq. 7E -5b
CM − CO
ER15MY06.006</GPH>
12.7 NO2—NO Conversion Efficiency. If the
NOX converter efficiency test described in NO X − NO
Section 8.2.4.1 is performed, calculate the ef- NO XCorr = NO + × 100 Eq. 7E-8
Eff NO 2
ficiency using Equation 7E–7.
12.9 Alternative NO2 Converter Efficiency. If
ER22MY08.002</MATH>
C the alternative procedure of Section 16.2.2 is
Eff NO 2 = Dir × 100 Eq. 7E-7 used, determine the NOX concentration de-
CV crease from NOXPeak after the minimum 30-
minute test interval using Equation 7E–9.
12.8 NO2—NO Conversion Efficiency Correc-
tion. If desired, calculate the total NOX con- This decrease from NOXPeak must meet the re-
quirement in Section 13.5 for the converter
ER22MY08.001</MATH>
centration with a correction for converter ef-
ficiency using Equations 7E–8. to be acceptable.
NOXPeak − NOXFinal
% Decrease = × 100 Eq. 7E -9
ER15MY06.004</GPH>
NOXPeak
ER22MY08.000</MATH>
299
ER15MY06.002</GPH>
12.10 Moisture Correction. Use Equation Dynamic Spiking Procedure in Section 16.1.3.
7E–10 if your measurements need to be cor- Use Equation 7E–11 to determine the cal-
rected to a dry basis. culated spike gas concentration. Use Equa-
tion 7E–12 to calculate the spike recovery.
CW
CD =
1 − BWS
Eq. 7E-10
CCalc =
(C ) (Q )
Spike Spike
Eq. 7E-11
12.11 Calculated Spike Gas Concentration QTotal
and Spike Recovery for the Example Alternative
DF ( Css − Cnative ) + Cnative

R= × 100 Eq. 7E-12
CSpike
13.0 Method Performance culated according to Equation 7E–9, must

not result in a decrease from NOXPeak by more
13.1 Calibration Error. This specification is
than 2.0 percent.
applicable to both the analyzer calibration
13.6 Alternative Dynamic Spike Procedure.
error and the 3-point system calibration
Recoveries of both pre-test spikes and post-
error tests described in Section 8.2.3. At each test spikes must be within 100 ± 10 percent. If
calibration gas level (low, mid, and high) the the absolute difference between the cal-
calibration error must either be within ± 2.0 culated spike value and measured spike
percent of the calibration span. Alter- value is equal to or less than 0.20 ppmv, then
natively, the results are acceptable if |Cdir ¥ the requirements of the ADSC are met.
Cv| or |Cs¥Cv| (as applicable) is ≤0.5 ppmv.
13.2 System Bias. This specification is ap- 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
plicable to both the system bias and 2-point
system calibration error tests described in 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
Section 8.2.5 and 8.5. The pre- and post-run
system bias (or system calibration error) 16.0 Alternative Procedures
must be within ± 5.0 percent of the calibra- 16.1 Dynamic Spike Procedure. Except for
tion span for the low-level and upscale cali- applications under part 75 of this chapter,
bration gases. Alternatively, the results are you may use a dynamic spiking procedure to
acceptable if | Cs ¥Cdir | is ≤ 0.5 ppmv or if | validate your test data for a specific test ma-
Cs¥ Cv | is ≤ 0.5 ppmv (as applicable). trix in place of the interference check and
13.3 Drift. For each run, the low-level and pre- and post-run system bias checks. For
upscale drift must be less than or equal to 3.0 part 75 applications, use of this procedure is
percent of the calibration span. The drift is subject to the approval of the Administrator.
also acceptable if the pre- and post-run bias Best results are obtained for this procedure
(or the pre- and post-run system calibration when source emissions are steady and not
error) responses do not differ by more than varying. Fluctuating emissions may render
0.5 ppmv at each gas concentration (i.e. | Cs this alternative procedure difficult to pass.
post-run¥ Cs pre-run | ≤ 0.5 ppmv). To use this alternative, you must meet the
13.4 Interference Check. The total inter- following requirements.
ference response (i.e., the sum of the inter- 16.1.1 Procedure Documentation. You must
ference responses of all tested gaseous com- detail the procedure you followed in the test
ponents) must not be greater than 2.50 per- report, including how the spike was meas-
cent of the calibration span for the analyzer ured, added, verified during the run, and cal-
tested. In summing the interferences, use the culated after the test.
larger of the absolute values obtained for the 16.1.2 Spiking Procedure Requirements. The
interferent tested with and without the pol- spikes must be prepared from EPA
lutant present. The results are also accept- Traceability Protocol gases. Your procedure
able if the sum of the responses does not ex- must be designed to spike field samples at
ER29MY09.009</MATH>
ceed 0.5 ppmv for a calibration span of 5 to 10 two target levels both before and after the
ppmv, or 0.2 ppmv for a calibration span < 5 test. Your target spike levels should bracket
ppmv. the average sample NOX concentrations. The
13.5 NO2 to NO Conversion Efficiency Test higher target concentration must be less
(as applicable). The NO2 to NO conversion ef- than the calibration span. You must collect
ficiency, calculated according to Equation at least 5 data points for each target con-
ER29MY09.008</MATH>
7E–7, must be greater than or equal to 90 per- centration. The spiking procedure must be
cent. The alternative conversion efficiency performed before the first run and repeated
check, described in Section 16.2.2 and cal- after the last run of the test program.
300
ER15MY06.009</GPH>
16.1.3 Example Spiking Procedure. Deter- half full with either ambient air, pure oxy-
mine the NO concentration needed to gen- gen, or an oxygen standard gas with at least
erate concentrations that are 50 and 150 per- 19.5 percent by volume oxygen content. Fill
cent of the anticipated NOX concentration in the remainder of the bag with mid- to high-
the stack at the total sampling flow rate level NO in N2 (or other appropriate con-
while keeping the spike flow rate at or below centration) calibration gas. (Note that the
10 percent of this total. Use a mass flow concentration of the NO standard should be
meter (accurate within 2.0 percent) to gen- sufficiently high enough for the diluted con-
erate these NO spike gas concentrations at a centration to be easily and accurately meas-
constant flow rate. Use Equation 7E–11 in ured on the scale used. The size of the bag
Section 12.11 to determine the calculated should be large enough to accommodate the
spike concentration in the collected sample. procedure and time required.)
(1) Prepare the measurement system and (1) Immediately attach the bag to the inlet
conduct the analyzer calibration error test of the NOX analyzer (or external converter if
as described in Sections 8.2.2 and 8.2.3. Fol- used). In the case of a dilution-system, intro-
lowing the sampling procedures in Section duce the gas at a point upstream of the dilu-
8.1, determine the stack NOX concentration tion assembly. Measure the NOX concentra-
and use this concentration as the average tion for a period of 30 minutes. If the NOX
stack concentration (Cavg) for the first spike concentration drops more than 2 percent ab-
level, or if desired, for both pre-test spike solute from the peak value observed, then
levels. Introduce the first level spike gas the NO2 converter has failed to meet the cri-
into the system in system calibration mode teria of this test. Take corrective action.
and begin sample collection. Wait for at The highest NOX value observed is considered
least two times the system response time be- to be NOXPeak. The final NOX value observed is
fore measuring the spiked sample concentra- considered to be NOXfinal.
tion. Then record at least five successive 1-
(2) [Reserved]
minute averages of the spiked sample gas.
Monitor the spike gas flow rate and main- 16.3 Manufacturer’s Stability Test. A manu-
tain at the determined addition rate. Aver- facturer’s stability test is required for all
age the five 1-minute averages and deter- analyzers that routinely measure emissions
mine the spike recovery using Equation 7E– below 20 ppmv and is optional but rec-
12. Repeat this procedure for the other pre- ommended for other analyzers. This test
test spike level. The recovery at each level evaluates each analyzer model by subjecting
must be within the limits in Section 13.6 be- it to the tests listed in Table 7E–5 following
fore proceeding with the test. procedures similar to those in 40 CFR 53.23
(2) Conduct the number of runs required for for thermal stability and insensitivity to
the test. Then repeat the above procedure for supply voltage variations. If the analyzer
the post-test spike evaluation. The last run will be used under temperature conditions
of the test may serve as the average stack that are outside the test conditions in Table
concentration for the post-test spike test B–4 of Part 53.23, alternative test tempera-
calculations. The results of the post-test tures that better reflect the analyzer field
spikes must meet the limits in Section 13.6. environment should be used. Alternative pro-
16.2 Alternative NO2 to NO Conversion Effi- cedures or documentation that establish the
ciency Procedures. You may use either of the analyzer’s stability over the appropriate line
following procedures to determine converter voltages and temperatures are acceptable.
efficiency in place of the procedure in Sec-
17.0 References
tion 8.2.4.1.
16.2.1 The procedure for determining con- 1. ‘‘ERA Traceability Protocol for Assay
version efficiency using NO in 40 CFR 86.123– and Certification of Gaseous Calibration
78. Standards’’ September 1997 as amended,
16.2.2 Tedlar Bag Procedure. Perform the ERA–600/R–97/121.
analyzer calibration error test to document
the calibration (both NO and NOX modes, as 18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
applicable). Fill a Tedlar bag approximately Validation Data
301
302
ER15MY06.012</GPH>
303
ER15MY06.013</GPH>
ER15MY06.015</GPH>
304
ER15MY06.014</GPH>
TABLE 7E–3—EXAMPLE INTERFERENCE CHECK Analyzer Type: lllllllllllllll

GAS CONCENTRATIONS Model No.: llllllllllllllllll
Serial No: llllllllllllllllll
Calibration Span: llllllllllllll
Concentrations2 sample conditioning type
Potential
interferent gas1 Concentration Analyzer
Hot wet Dried Test gas type (ppm) response
CO2 ................... 5 and 15% ............. 5 and 15%
H2O ................... 25% ........................ 1%
NO ..................... 15 ppmv ................. 15 ppmv
NO2 ................... 15 ppmv ................. 15 ppmv
N2O ................... 10 ppmv ................. 10 ppmv
CO ..................... 50 ppmv ................. 50 ppmv
NH3 ................... 10 ppmv ................. 10 ppmv
CH4 ................... 50 ppmv ................. 50 ppmv
SO2 ................... 20 ppmv ................. 20 ppmv
H2 ...................... 50 ppmv ................. 50 ppmv
HCl .................... 10 ppmv ................. 10 ppmv
(1) Any applicable gas may be eliminated or tested at a re-
duced level if the manufacturer has provided reliable means
for limiting or scrubbing that gas to a specified level.
(2) As practicable, gas concentrations should be the highest
expected at test sites.
Sum of Responses
TABLE 7E–4—INTERFERENCE RESPONSE % of Calibration Span
Date of Test: llllllllllllllll
TABLE 7E–5.—MANUFACTURER STABILITY TEST

Acceptance criteria
Test description (note 1)
Thermal Stability ............. Temperature range when drift does not exceed 3.0% of analyzer range over a 12-hour run when
measured with NOX present @ 80% of calibration span.
Fault Conditions ............. Identify conditions which, when they occur, result in performance which is not in compliance with the
Manufacturer’s Stability Test criteria. These are to be indicated visually or electrically to alert the
operator of the problem.
Insensitivity to Supply ± 10.0% (or manufacturers alternative) variation from nominal voltage must produce a drift of ≤ 2.0%
Voltage Variations. of calibration span for either zero or concentration ≥ 80% NOX present.
Analyzer Calibration For a low-, medium-, and high-calibration gas, the difference between the manufacturer certified
Error. value and the analyzer response in direct calibration mode, no more than 2.0% of calibration span.
Note 1: If the instrument is to be used as a Low Range analyzer, all tests must be performed at a calibration span of 20 ppm
or less.
METHOD 8—DETERMINATION OF SULFURIC ACID other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-
AND SULFUR DIOXIDE EMISSIONS FROM STA- tain reliable results, persons using this
TIONARY SOURCES method should have a thorough knowledge of
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- and Method 6.
Sulfuric acid, including: Sul- 7664–93–9, 7449–11–9 ........................... 0.05 mg/m3 (0.03 × 10¥7 lb/ft3).
furic acid (H2SO4) mist,
Sulfur trioxide (SO3).
Sulfur dioxide (SO2) ........... 7449–09–5 ............................................... 1.2 mg/m3 (3 × 10¥9 lb/ft3).
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- (subject to the approval of the Adminis-
ble for the determination of H2SO4 (including trator) by inserting a heated glass fiber filter
H2SO4 mist and SO3) and gaseous SO2 emis- between the probe and isopropanol impinger
sions from stationary sources. (see Section 6.1.1 of Method 6). If this option
is chosen, particulate analysis is gravimetric
NOTE: Filterable particulate matter may
only; sulfuric acid is not determined sepa-
be determined along with H2SO4 and SO2
rately.
305
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to be modified by replacing the insert with an
the requirements of this method will en- approximately 13-mm (1⁄2-in.) ID glass tube,
hance the quality of the data obtained from having an unconstricted tip located 13 mm
air pollutant sampling methods. (1⁄2 in.) from the bottom of the impinger.
Similar collection systems, subject to the
2.0 Summary of Method approval of the Administrator, may be used.
A gas sample is extracted isokinetically 6.1.1.4 Temperature Sensor. Thermom-
from the stack. The H2SO4 and the SO2 are eter, or equivalent, to measure the tempera-
separated, and both fractions are measured ture of the gas leaving the impinger train to
separately by the barium-thorin titration within 1 °C (2 °F).
method. 6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items
are required for sample recovery:
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] 6.2.1 Wash Bottles. Two polyethylene or
glass bottles, 500-ml.
4.0 Interferences 6.2.2 Graduated Cylinders. Two graduated
4.1 Possible interfering agents of this cylinders (volumetric flasks may be used),
method are fluorides, free ammonia, and di- 250-ml, 1-liter.
methyl aniline. If any of these interfering 6.2.3 Storage Bottles. Leak-free poly-
agents is present (this can be determined by ethylene bottles, 1-liter size (two for each
knowledge of the process), alternative meth- sampling run).
ods, subject to the approval of the Adminis- 6.2.4 Trip Balance. 500-g capacity, to
trator, are required. measure to ±0.5 g (necessary only if a mois-
ture content analysis is to be done).
5.0 Safety 6.3 Analysis. The following items are re-
quired for sample analysis:
6.3.1 Pipettes. Volumetric 10-ml, 100-ml.
6.3.2 Burette. 50-ml.
6.3.3 Erlenmeyer Flask. 250-ml (one for
each sample, blank, and standard).
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this 6.3.4 Graduated Cylinder. 100-ml.
test method to establish appropriate safety 6.3.5 Dropping Bottle. To add indicator so-
and health practices and determine the ap- lution, 125-ml size.
plicability of regulatory limitations prior to
performing this test method. 7.0 Reagents and Standards
5.2 Corrosive reagents. Same as Method 6,
Section 5.2. NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, all re-
agents are to conform to the specifications
6.0 Equipment and Supplies established by the Committee on Analytical
Reagents of the American Chemical Society,
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5, where such specifications are available. Oth-
Section 6.1, with the following additions and erwise, use the best available grade.
exceptions:
6.1.1 Sampling Train. A schematic of the 7.1 Sample Collection. The following re-
sampling train used in this method is shown agents are required for sample collection:
in Figure 8–1; it is similar to the Method 5 7.1.1 Filters and Silica Gel. Same as in
sampling train, except that the filter posi- Method 5, Sections 7.1.1 and 7.1.2, respec-
tion is different, and the filter holder does tively.
not have to be heated. See Method 5, Section 7.1.2 Water. Same as in Method 6, Section
6.1.1, for details and guidelines on operation 7.1.1.
and maintenance. 7.1.3 Isopropanol, 80 Percent by Volume.
6.1.1.1 Probe Liner. Borosilicate or quartz Mix 800 ml of isopropanol with 200 ml of
glass, with a heating system to prevent visi- water.
ble condensation during sampling. Do not NOTE: Check for peroxide impurities using
use metal probe liners. the procedure outlined in Method 6, Section
6.1.1.2 Filter Holder. Borosilicate glass, 7.1.2.1.
with a glass frit filter support and a silicone 7.1.4 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2), 3 Percent
rubber gasket. Other gasket materials (e.g., by Volume. Dilute 100 ml of 30 percent H2O2)
Teflon or Viton) may be used, subject to the to 1 liter with water. Prepare fresh daily.
approval of the Administrator. The holder 7.1.5 Crushed Ice.
design shall provide a positive seal against 7.2 Sample Recovery. The reagents and
leakage from the outside or around the fil- standards required for sample recovery are:
ter. The filter holder shall be placed between 7.2.1 Water. Same as in Section 7.1.2.
the first and second impingers. Do not heat 7.2.2 Isopropanol, 80 Percent. Same as in
the filter holder. Section 7.1.3.

6.1.1.3 Impingers. Four, of the Greenburg- 7.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 6,
Smith design, as shown in Figure 8–1. The Section 7.3.
first and third impingers must have standard 7.3.1 Quality Assurance Audit Samples.
tips. The second and fourth impingers must When making compliance determinations,
306
and upon availability, audit samples may be imum temperature required to prevent con-
obtained from the appropriate EPA Regional densation. If component changes become
Office or from the responsible enforcement necessary during a run, a leak-check shall be
authority. performed immediately before each change,
NOTE: The responsible enforcement author- according to the procedure outlined in Sec-
ity should be notified at least 30 days prior tion 8.4.3 of Method 5 (with appropriate
to the test date to allow sufficient time for modifications, as mentioned in Section 8.5 of
sample delivery. this method); record all leak rates. If the
leakage rate(s) exceeds the specified rate,
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, the tester shall either void the run or plan to
and Transport correct the sample volume as outlined in
8.1 Pretest Preparation. Same as Method Section 12.3 of Method 5. Leak-checks imme-
5, Section 8.1, except that filters should be diately after component changes are rec-
inspected but need not be desiccated, ommended, but not required. If these leak-
weighed, or identified. If the effluent gas can checks are performed, the procedure in Sec-
be considered dry (i.e., moisture-free), the tion 8.4.2 of Method 5 (with appropriate
silica gel need not be weighed. modifications) shall be used.
8.2 Preliminary Determinations. Same as 8.6.2 After turning off the pump and re-
Method 5, Section 8.2. cording the final readings at the conclusion
8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. Same of each run, remove the probe from the
as Method 5, Section 8.3, with the following stack. Conduct a post-test (mandatory) leak-
exceptions: check as outlined in Section 8.4.4 of Method
8.3.1 Use Figure 8–1 instead of Figure 5–1. 5 (with appropriate modifications), and
8.3.2 Replace the second sentence of Meth- record the leak rate. If the post-test leakage
od 5, Section 8.3.1 with: Place 100 ml of 80 rate exceeds the specified acceptable rate, ei-
percent isopropanol in the first impinger, 100 ther correct the sample volume, as outlined
ml of 3 percent H2O2 in both the second and in Section 12.3 of Method 5, or void the run.
third impingers; retain a portion of each rea- 8.6.3 Drain the ice bath and, with the
gent for use as a blank solution. Place about probe disconnected, purge the remaining
200 g of silica gel in the fourth impinger. part of the train by drawing clean ambient
8.3.3 Ignore any other statements in Sec- air through the system for 15 minutes at the
tion 8.3 of Method 5 that are obviously not average flow rate used for sampling.
applicable to the performance of Method 8. NOTE: Clean ambient air can be provided
NOTE: If moisture content is to be deter- by passing air through a charcoal filter. Al-
mined by impinger analysis, weigh each of ternatively, ambient air (without cleaning)
the first three impingers (plus absorbing so- may be used.
lution) to the nearest 0.5 g, and record these 8.7 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic.
weights. Weigh also the silica gel (or silica Same as Method 5, Section 8.6.
gel plus container) to the nearest 0.5 g, and 8.8 Sample Recovery. Proper cleanup pro-
record.) cedure begins as soon as the probe is re-
8.4 Metering System Leak-Check Proce- moved from the stack at the end of the sam-
dure. Same as Method 5, Section 8.4.1. pling period. Allow the probe to cool. Treat
8.5 Pretest Leak-Check Procedure. Follow the samples as follows:
the basic procedure in Method 5, Section 8.8.1 Container No. 1.
8.4.2, noting that the probe heater shall be 8.8.1.1 If a moisture content analysis is to
adjusted to the minimum temperature re- be performed, clean and weigh the first im-
quired to prevent condensation, and also pinger (plus contents) to the nearest 0.5 g,
that verbage such as ‘‘* * * plugging the inlet and record this weight.
to the filter holder * * * ’’ found in Section 8.8.1.2 Transfer the contents of the first
8.4.2.2 of Method 5 shall be replaced by ‘‘ * * impinger to a 250-ml graduated cylinder.
* plugging the inlet to the first impinger * * Rinse the probe, first impinger, all con-
* ’’. The pretest leak-check is recommended, necting glassware before the filter, and the
but is not required. front half of the filter holder with 80 percent
8.6 Sampling Train Operation. Follow the isopropanol. Add the isopropanol rinse solu-
basic procedures in Method 5, Section 8.5, in tion to the cylinder. Dilute the contents of
conjunction with the following special in- the cylinder to 225 ml with 80 percent
structions: isopropanol, and transfer the cylinder con-
8.6.1 Record the data on a sheet similar to tents to the storage container. Rinse the cyl-
that shown in Figure 8–2 (alternatively, Fig- inder with 25 ml of 80 percent isopropanol,
ure 5–2 in Method 5 may be used). The sam- and transfer the rinse to the storage con-
pling rate shall not exceed 0.030 m3/min (1.0 tainer. Add the filter to the solution in the
cfm) during the run. Periodically during the storage container and mix. Seal the con-
test, observe the connecting line between the tainer to protect the solution against evapo-
probe and first impinger for signs of con- ration. Mark the level of liquid on the con-
densation. If condensation does occur, adjust tainer, and identify the sample container.
the probe heater setting upward to the min- 8.8.2 Container No. 2.
307
8.8.2.1 If a moisture content analysis is to water, and add this rinse water to the cyl-
be performed, clean and weigh the second inder. Dilute the contents of the cylinder to
and third impingers (plus contents) to the 950 ml with water. Transfer the solution to a
nearest 0.5 g, and record the weights. Also, storage container. Rinse the cylinder with 50
weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus ml of water, and transfer the rinse to the
impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g, and record the storage container. Mark the level of liquid
weight. on the container. Seal and identify the sam-
8.8.2.2 Transfer the solutions from the ple container.
second and third impingers to a 1-liter grad-
9.0 Quality Control
uated cylinder. Rinse all connecting glass-
ware (including back half of filter holder) be- 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
tween the filter and silica gel impinger with ures.
7.1.3 ................................... Isopropanol check .................................... Ensure acceptable level of peroxide impurities in
isopropanol.
8.4, 8.5, 10.1 ...................... Sampling equipment leak-check and cali- Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate,
10.2 .................................... Barium standard solution standardization Ensure normality determination.
11.2 .................................... Replicate titrations ................................... Ensure precision of titration determinations.
11.3 .................................... Audit sample analysis .............................. Evaluate analyst’s technique and standards prepara-
tion.
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. percent isopropanol. Titrate the blanks in
Same as Method 5, Section 9.2. the same manner as the samples.
11.3 Audit Sample Analysis.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization 11.3.1 When the method is used to analyze
10.1 Sampling Equipment. Same as Meth- samples to demonstrate compliance with a
od 5, Section 10.0. source emission regulation, EPA audit sam-
10.2 Barium Standard Solution. Same as ples must be analyzed, subject to avail-
Method 6, Section 10.5. ability.
11.3.2 Concurrently analyze audit samples
11.0 Analytical Procedure and the compliance samples in the same
manner to evaluate the technique of the ana-
11.1. Sample Loss. Same as Method 6, Sec- lyst and the standards preparation.
tion 11.1.
11.2. Sample Analysis. NOTE: It is recommended that known qual-
11.2.1 Container No. 1. Shake the con- ity control samples be analyzed prior to the
tainer holding the isopropanol solution and compliance and audit sample analyses to op-
the filter. If the filter breaks up, allow the timize the system accuracy and precision.
fragments to settle for a few minutes before These quality control samples may be ob-
removing a sample aliquot. Pipette a 100-ml tained by contacting the appropriate EPA
aliquot of this solution into a 250-ml Erlen- regional Office or the responsible enforce-
meyer flask, add 2 to 4 drops of thorin indi- ment authority.
cator, and titrate to a pink endpoint using 11.3.3 The same analyst, analytical re-
0.0100 N barium standard solution. Repeat agents, and analytical system shall be used
the titration with a second aliquot of sam- for the compliance samples and the EPA
ple, and average the titration values. Rep- audit samples. If this condition is met, dupli-
licate titrations must agree within 1 percent cate auditing of subsequent compliance anal-
or 0.2 ml, whichever is greater. yses for the same enforcement agency within
11.2.2 Container No. 2. Thoroughly mix a 30-day period is waived. Audit samples may
the solution in the container holding the not be used to validate different compliance
contents of the second and third impingers. samples under the jurisdiction of separate
Pipette a 10-ml aliquot of sample into a 250- enforcement agencies, unless prior arrange-
ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 40 ml of ments have been made with both enforce-
isopropanol, 2 to 4 drops of thorin indicator, ment agencies.
and titrate to a pink endpoint using 0.0100 N 11.4 Audit Sample Results.
barium standard solution. Repeat the titra- 11.4.1 Calculate the audit sample con-
tion with a second aliquot of sample, and av- centrations in mg/dscm and submit results
erage the titration values. Replicate titra- using the instructions provided with the
tions must agree within 1 percent or 0.2 ml, audit samples.
whichever is greater. 11.4.2 Report the results of the audit sam-
11.2.3 Blanks. Prepare blanks by adding 2 ples and the compliance determination sam-
to 4 drops of thorin indicator to 100 ml of 80 ples along with their identification numbers,
308
and the analyst’s name to the responsible en- CH2SO4=Sulfuric acid (including SO3) con-
forcement authority. Include this informa- centration, g/dscm (lb/dscf).
tion with reports of any subsequent compli- CSO2=Sulfur dioxide concentration, g/dscm
ance analyses for the same enforcement au- (lb/dscf).
thority during the 30-day period. N=Normality of barium perchlorate titrant,
11.4.3 The concentrations of the audit meq/ml.
samples obtained by the analyst shall agree RE=Relative error of QA audit sample anal-
within 5 percent of the actual concentra- ysis, percent
tions. If the 5 percent specification is not Va=Volume of sample aliquot titrated, 100 ml
met, reanalyze the compliance and audit for H2SO4 and 10 ml for SO2.
samples, and include initial and reanalysis
values in the test report.
sample is contained, 250 ml for the SO2
11.4.4 Failure to meet the 5 percent speci-
sample and 1000 ml for the H2SO4 sample.
fication may require retests until the audit
problems are resolved. However, if the audit Vt=Volume of barium standard solution
results do not affect the compliance or non- titrant used for the sample, ml.
compliance status of the affected facility, Vtb=Volume of barium standard solution
the Administrator may waive the reanalysis titrant used for the blank, ml.
requirement, further audits, or retests and 12.2 Average Dry Gas Meter Temperature
accept the results of the compliance test. and Average Orifice Pressure Drop. See data
While steps are being taken to resolve audit sheet (Figure 8–2).
analysis problems, the Administrator may 12.3 Dry Gas Volume. Same as Method 5,
also choose to use the data to determine the Section 12.3.
compliance or noncompliance status of the 12.4 Volume of Water Vapor Condensed
affected facility. and Moisture Content. Calculate the volume
of water vapor using Equation 5–2 of Method
5; the weight of water collected in the
Carry out calculations retaining at least impingers and silica gel can be converted di-
one extra significant figure beyond that of rectly to milliliters (the specific gravity of
the acquired data. Round off figures after water is 1 g/ml). Calculate the moisture con-
final calculation. tent of the stack gas (Bws) using Equation 5–
12.1 Nomenclature. Same as Method 5, 3 of Method 5. The NOTE in Section 12.5 of
Section 12.1, with the following additions Method 5 also applies to this method. Note
and exceptions: that if the effluent gas stream can be consid-
Ca=Actual concentration of SO2 in audit sam- ered dry, the volume of water vapor and
ple, mg/dscm. moisture content need not be calculated.
Cd=Determined concentration of SO2 in audit 12.5 Sulfuric Acid Mist (Including SO3)
sample, mg/dscm. Concentration.
[ ]
C H 2SO 4 = K 3 N (Vt − Vtb )(Vsoln / Va ) / Vm (std ) Eq. 8-1
Where: K3=1.081 × 10¥4 lb/meq for English units.

K3=0.04904 g/meq for metric units, 12.6 Sulfur Dioxide Concentration.
[ ]
C SO2 = K 4 N (Vt − Vtb )(Vsoln / Va ) / Vm (std ) Eq. 8-2
Where: 12.9 Relative Error (RE) for QA Audit

K4=0.03203 g/meq for metric units, Samples. Same as Method 6, Section 12.4.
K4=7.061 × 10¥5 lb/meq for English units.
12.7 Isokinetic Variation. Same as Method
5, Section 12.11. 13.1 Analytical Range. Collaborative tests
12.8 Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric have shown that the minimum detectable
limits of the method are 0.06 mg/m3 (4 × 10¥9
Flow Rate. Calculate the average stack gas

velocity and volumetric flow rate, if needed, lb/ft3) for H2SO4 and 1.2 mg/m3 (74 × 10¥9 lb/
ER17OC00.224</MATH>
using data obtained in this method and the ft3) for SO2. No upper limits have been estab-
equations in Sections 12.6 and 12.7 of Method lished. Based on theoretical calculations for
2. 200 ml of 3 percent H2O2 solution, the upper
309
ER17OC00.223</MATH>
concentration limit for SO2 in a 1.0 m3 (35.3 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
ft3) gas sample is about 12,000 mg/m3 (7.7 ×
10¥4 lb/ft3). The upper limit can be extended 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
by increasing the quantity of peroxide solu- 16.0 References
tion in the impingers.
Same as Section 17.0 of Methods 5 and 6.

Validation Data
310
ER17OC00.225</GPH>
METHOD 9—VISUAL DETERMINATION OF THE and certification of observers, and proce-

OPACITY OF EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY dures to be used in the field for determina-
SOURCES tion of plume opacity. The appearance of a
plume as viewed by an observer depends upon
Many stationary sources discharge visible
a number of variables, some of which may be
emissions into the atmosphere; these emis-
controllable and some of which may not be

sions are usually in the shape of a plume.
controllable in the field. Variables which can
This method involves the determination of
be controlled to an extent to which they no
plume opacity by qualified observers. The
longer exert a significant influence upon
method includes procedures for the training
311
ER17OC00.226</GPH>
plume appearance include: Angle of the ob- The positive observational error associated
server with respect to the plume; angle of with an average of twenty-five readings is
the observer with respect to the sun; point of therefore established. The accuracy of the
observation of attached and detached steam method must be taken into account when de-
plume; and angle of the observer with re- termining possible violations of applicable
spect to a plume emitted from a rectangular opacity standards.
stack with a large length to width ratio. The
method includes specific criteria applicable 1. Principle and Applicability
to these variables.
1.1 Principle. The opacity of emissions
Other variables which may not be control-
from stationary sources is determined vis-
lable in the field are luminescence and color
ually by a qualified observer.
contrast between the plume and the back-
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable
ground against which the plume is viewed.
for the determination of the opacity of emis-
These variables exert an influence upon the
sions from stationary sources pursuant to
appearance of a plume as viewed by an ob-
§ 60.11(b) and for qualifying observers for vis-
server, and can affect the ability of the ob-
ually determining opacity of emissions.
server to accurately assign opacity values to
the observed plume. Studies of the theory of 2. Procedures
plume opacity and field studies have dem-
onstrated that a plume is most visible and The observer qualified in accordance with
presents the greatest apparent opacity when section 3 of this method shall use the fol-
viewed against a contrasting background. It lowing procedures for visually determining
follows from this, and is confirmed by field the opacity of emissions:
trials, that the opacity of a plume, viewed 2.1 Position. The qualified observer shall
under conditions where a contrasting back- stand at a distance sufficient to provide a
ground is present can be assigned with the clear view of the emissions with the sun ori-
greatest degree of accuracy. However, the ented in the 140° sector to his back. Con-
potential for a positive error is also the sistent with maintaining the above require-
greatest when a plume is viewed under such ment, the observer shall, as much as pos-
contrasting conditions. Under conditions sible, make his observations from a position
presenting a less contrasting background, such that his line of vision is approximately
the apparent opacity of a plume is less and perpendicular to the plume direction, and
approaches zero as the color and lumines- when observing opacity of emissions from
cence contrast decrease toward zero. As a re- rectangular outlets (e.g., roof monitors, open
sult, significant negative bias and negative baghouses, noncircular stacks), approxi-
errors can be made when a plume is viewed mately perpendicular to the longer axis of
under less contrasting conditions. A negative the outlet. The observer’s line of sight
bias decreases rather than increases the pos- should not include more than one plume at a
sibility that a plant operator will be cited time when multiple stacks are involved, and
for a violation of opacity standards due to in any case the observer should make his ob-
observer error. servations with his line of sight perpen-
Studies have been undertaken to deter- dicular to the longer axis of such a set of
mine the magnitude of positive errors which multiple stacks (e.g., stub stacks on
can be made by qualified observers while baghouses).
reading plumes under contrasting conditions 2.2 Field Records. The observer shall record
and using the procedures set forth in this the name of the plant, emission location,
method. The results of these studies (field type facility, observer’s name and affili-
trials) which involve a total of 769 sets of 25 ation, a sketch of the observer’s position rel-
readings each are as follows: ative to the source, and the date on a field
(1) For black plumes (133 sets at a smoke data sheet (Figure 9–1). The time, estimated
generator), 100 percent of the sets were read distance to the emission location, approxi-
with a positive error 1 of less than 7.5 percent mate wind direction, estimated wind speed,
opacity; 99 percent were read with a positive description of the sky condition (presence
error of less than 5 percent opacity. and color of clouds), and plume background
(2) For white plumes (170 sets at a smoke are recorded on a field data sheet at the time
generator, 168 sets at a coal-fired power opacity readings are initiated and com-
plant, 298 sets at a sulfuric acid plant), 99 pleted.
percent of the sets were read with a positive 2.3 Observations. Opacity observations
error of less than 7.5 percent opacity; 95 per- shall be made at the point of greatest opac-
cent were read with a positive error of less ity in that portion of the plume where con-
than 5 percent opacity. densed water vapor is not present. The ob-
server shall not look continuously at the

1 For a set, positive error=average opacity plume, but instead shall observe the plume
determined by observers’ 25 observations— momentarily at 15-second intervals.
average opacity determined from 2.3.1 Attached Steam Plumes. When con-
transmissometer’s 25 recordings. densed water vapor is present within the
312
plume as it emerges from the emission out- random order. The candidate assigns an
let, opacity observations shall be made be- opacity value to each plume and records his
yond the point in the plume at which con- observation on a suitable form. At the com-
densed water vapor is no longer visible. The pletion of each run of 50 readings, the score
observer shall record the approximate dis- of the candidate is determined. If a can-
tance from the emission outlet to the point didate fails to qualify, the complete run of 50
in the plume at which the observations are readings must be repeated in any retest. The
made. smoke test may be administered as part of a
2.3.2 Detached Steam Plume. When water smoke school or training program, and may
vapor in the plume condenses and becomes be preceded by training or familiarization
visible at a distinct distance from the emis- runs of the smoke generator during which
sion outlet, the opacity of emissions should candidates are shown black and white
be evaluated at the emission outlet prior to
plumes of known opacity.
the condensation of water vapor and the for-
mation of the steam plume. 3.3 Smoke Generator Specifications. Any
2.4 Recording Observations. Opacity obser- smoke generator used for the purposes of
vations shall be recorded to the nearest 5 section 3.2 shall be equipped with a smoke
percent at 15-second intervals on an observa- meter installed to measure opacity across
tional record sheet. (See Figure 9–2 for an ex- the diameter of the smoke generator stack.
ample.) A minimum of 24 observations shall The smoke meter output shall display
be recorded. Each momentary observation instack opacity based upon a pathlength
recorded shall be deemed to represent the av- equal to the stack exit diameter, on a full 0
erage opacity of emissions for a 15-second pe- to 100 percent chart recorder scale. The
riod. smoke meter optical design and performance
2.5 Data Reduction. Opacity shall be deter- shall meet the specifications shown in Table
mined as an average of 24 consecutive obser- 9–1. The smoke meter shall be calibrated as
vations recorded at 15-second intervals. Di- prescribed in section 3.3.1 prior to the con-
vide the observations recorded on the record duct of each smoke reading test. At the com-
sheet into sets of 24 consecutive observa- pletion of each test, the zero and span drift
tions. A set is composed of any 24 consecu- shall be checked and if the drift exceeds ±1
tive observations. Sets need not be consecu- percent opacity, the condition shall be cor-
tive in time and in no case shall two sets rected prior to conducting any subsequent
overlap. For each set of 24 observations, cal- test runs. The smoke meter shall be dem-
culate the average by summing the opacity onstrated, at the time of installation, to
of the 24 observations and dividing this sum meet the specifications listed in Table 9–1.
by 24. If an applicable standard specifies an This demonstration shall be repeated fol-
averaging time requiring more than 24 obser- lowing any subsequent repair or replacement
vations, calculate the average for all obser- of the photocell or associated electronic cir-
vations made during the specified time pe- cuitry including the chart recorder or output
riod. Record the average opacity on a record meter, or every 6 months, whichever occurs
sheet. (See Figure 9–1 for an example.) first.
3. Qualifications and Testing
TABLE 9–1—SMOKE METER DESIGN AND
3.1 Certification Requirements. To receive PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
certification as a qualified observer, a can-
didate must be tested and demonstrate the Parameter Specification
ability to assign opacity readings in 5 per-
cent increments to 25 different black plumes a. Light source ................ Incandescent lamp operated at
and 25 different white plumes, with an error nominal rated voltage.
not to exceed 15 percent opacity on any one b. Spectral response of Photopic (daylight spectral re-
reading and an average error not to exceed photocell. sponse of the human eye—Ci-
7.5 percent opacity in each category. Can- tation 3).
didates shall be tested according to the pro- c. Angle of view .............. 15° maximum total angle.
cedures described in section 3.2. Smoke gen- d. Angle of projection ...... 15° maximum total angle.
e. Calibration error .......... ±3% opacity, maximum.
erators used pursuant to section 3.2 shall be
f. Zero and span drift ...... ±1% opacity, 30 minutes.
equipped with a smoke meter which meets
g. Response time ............ 5 seconds.
the requirements of section 3.3.
The certification shall be valid for a period
of 6 months, at which time the qualification 3.3.1 Calibration. The smoke meter is cali-
procedure must be repeated by any observer brated after allowing a minimum of 30 min-
in order to retain certification. utes warmup by alternately producing simu-
3.2 Certification Procedure. The certifi- lated opacity of 0 percent and 100 percent.
cation test consists of showing the candidate When stable response at 0 percent or 100 per-
a complete run of 50 plumes—25 black plumes cent is noted, the smoke meter is adjusted to
and 25 white plumes—generated by a smoke produce an output of 0 percent or 100 per-
generator. Plumes within each set of 25 cent, as appropriate. This calibration shall
black and 25 white runs shall be presented in be repeated until stable 0 percent and 100
313
percent readings are produced without ad- made at the lamp, as installed, that the lamp
justment. Simulated 0 percent and 100 per- is operated within ±5 percent of the nominal
cent opacity values may be produced by al- rated voltage.
ternately switching the power to the light 3.3.2.2 Spectral Response of Photocell.
source on and off while the smoke generator Verify from manufacturer’s data that the
is not producing smoke. photocell has a photopic response; i.e., the
3.3.2 Smoke Meter Evaluation. The smoke spectral sensitivity of the cell shall closely
meter design and performance are to be eval-
approximate the standard spectral-lumi-
uated as follows:
nosity curve for photopic vision which is ref-
3.3.2.1 Light Source. Verify from manufac-
erenced in (b) of Table 9–1.
turer’s data and from voltage measurements
314
FIGURE 9–2—OBSERVATION RECORD

Page ll of ll
Company .................................................................................. Observer ..........................................................................
Location ................................................................................... Type facility .....................................................................
Test Number ............................................................................ Point of emissions ...........................................................
Date.
315
EC01JN92.154</GPH>
Seconds Steam plume (check if applicable)

Hr. Min. Comments
0 15 30 45 Attached Detached
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
FIGURE 9–2—OBSERVATION RECORD (CONTINUED)

Page ll of ll
Company .................................................................................. Observer ..........................................................................
Location ................................................................................... Type facility .....................................................................
Test Number ............................................................................ Point of emissions ...........................................................
Date.

Hr. Min. Comments

30
316

Hr. Min. Comments
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
3.3.2.3 Angle of View. Check construction where the angle of view is most restricted. In
geometry to ensure that the total angle of smoke generator smoke meters this is nor-
view of the smoke plume, as seen by the pho- mally an orifice plate.
tocell, does not exceed 15°. The total angle of 3.3.2.4 Angle of Projection. Check construc-
view may be calculated from: q= 2 tan¥1d/2L, tion geometry to ensure that the total angle
where q=total angle of view; d=the sum of of projection of the lamp on the smoke
the photocell diameter+the diameter of the plume does not exceed 15°. The total angle of
limiting aperture; and L=the distance from projection may be calculated from: q=2
the photocell to the limiting aperture. The tan¥1d/2L, where q=total angle of projection;
limiting aperture is the point in the path be- d=the sum of the length of the lamp filament
tween the photocell and the smoke plume + the diameter of the limiting aperture; and
317
Pt. 60, App. A–4, Alt. Meth. 1 40 CFR Ch. I (7–1–09 Edition)
L=the distance from the lamp to the limiting The lidar mechanism or technique is appli-
aperture. cable to measuring plume opacity at numer-
3.3.2.5 Calibration Error. Using neutral- ous wavelengths of laser radiation. However,
density filters of known opacity, check the the performance evaluation and calibration
error between the actual response and the test results given in support of this method
theoretical linear response of the smoke apply only to a lidar that employs a ruby
meter. This check is accomplished by first (red light) laser [Reference 5.1].
calibrating the smoke meter according to
1. Principle and Applicability
3.3.1 and then inserting a series of three neu-
tral-density filters of nominal opacity of 20, 1.1 Principle. The opacity of visible emis-
50, and 75 percent in the smoke meter sions from stationary sources (stacks, roof
pathlength. Filters calibrated within ±2 per- vents, etc.) is measured remotely by a mo-
cent shall be used. Care should be taken bile lidar (laser radar).
when inserting the filters to prevent stray 1.2 Applicability. This method is applica-
light from affecting the meter. Make a total ble for the remote measurement of the opac-
of five nonconsecutive readings for each fil- ity of visible emissions from stationary
ter. The maximum error on any one reading sources during both nighttime and daylight
shall be 3 percent opacity. conditions, pursuant to 40 CFR § 60.11(b). It is
3.3.2.6 Zero and Span Drift. Determine the also applicable for the calibration and per-
zero and span drift by calibrating and oper- formance verification of the mobile lidar for
ating the smoke generator in a normal man- the measurement of the opacity of emis-
ner over a 1-hour period. The drift is meas- sions. A performance/design specification for
ured by checking the zero and span at the a basic lidar system is also incorporated into
end of this period. this method.
3.3.2.7 Response Time. Determine the re- 1.3 Definitions.
sponse time by producing the series of five Azimuth angle: The angle in the horizontal
simulated 0 percent and 100 percent opacity plane that designates where the laser beam
values and observing the time required to is pointed. It is measured from an arbitrary
fixed reference line in that plane.
reach stable response. Opacity values of 0
Backscatter: The scattering of laser light
percent and 100 percent may be simulated by
in a direction opposite to that of the inci-
alternately switching the power to the light
dent laser beam due to reflection from par-
source off and on while the smoke generator
ticulates along the beam’s atmospheric path
is not operating.
which may include a smoke plume.
4. Bibliography Backscatter signal: The general term for
the lidar return signal which results from
1. Air Pollution Control District Rules and laser light being backscattered by atmos-
Regulations, Los Angeles County Air Pollu- pheric and smoke plume particulates.
tion Control District, Regulation IV, Prohi- Convergence distance: The distance from
bitions, Rule 50. the lidar to the point of overlap of the lidar
2. Weisburd, Melvin I., Field Operations receiver’s field-of-view and the laser beam.
and Enforcement Manual for Air, U.S. Envi- Elevation angle: The angle of inclination
ronmental Protection Agency, Research Tri- of the laser beam referenced to the hori-
angle Park, NC. APTD–1100, August 1972, pp. zontal plane.
4.1–4.36. Far region: The region of the atmosphere’s
3. Condon, E.U., and Odishaw, H., Hand- path along the lidar line-of-sight beyond or
book of Physics, McGraw-Hill Co., New York, behind the plume being measured.
NY, 1958, Table 3.1, p. 6–52. Lidar: Acronym for Light Detection and
Ranging.
ALTERNATE METHOD 1—DETERMINATION OF Lidar range: The range or distance from
THE OPACITY OF EMISSIONS FROM STA- the lidar to a point of interest along the
TIONARY SOURCES REMOTELY BY LIDAR lidar line-of-sight.
Near region: The region of the atmospheric
This alternate method provides the quan- path along the lidar line-of-sight between
titative determination of the opacity of an the lidar’s convergence distance and the
emissions plume remotely by a mobile lidar plume being measured.
system (laser radar; Light Detection and Opacity: One minus the optical transmit-
Ranging). The method includes procedures tance of a smoke plume, screen target, etc.
for the calibration of the lidar and proce- Pick interval: The time or range intervals
dures to be used in the field for the lidar de- in the lidar backscatter signal whose min-
termination of plume opacity. The lidar is imum average amplitude is used to calculate
used to measure plume opacity during either opacity. Two pick intervals are required, one
day or nighttime hours because it contains in the near region and one in the far region.
its own pulsed light source or transmitter. Plume: The plume being measured by lidar.
The operation of the lidar is not dependent Plume signal: The backscatter signal re-
upon ambient lighting conditions (light, sulting from the laser light pulse passing
dark, sunny or cloudy). through a plume.
318
Environmental Protection Agency Pt. 60, App. A–4, Alt. Meth. 1
1/R2Correction: The correction made for is greater) in each region before and beyond
the systematic decrease in lidar backscatter the plume along the line-of-sight (deter-
signal amplitude with range. mined from the backscatter signals). The
Reference signal: The backscatter signal lidar shall initially be positioned so that its
resulting from the laser light pulse passing line-of-sight is approximately perpendicular
through ambient air. to the plume.
Sample interval: The time period between When measuring the opacity of emissions
successive samples for a digital signal or be- from rectangular outlets (e.g., roof monitors,
tween successive measurements for an ana- open baghouses, noncircular stacks, etc.),
log signal. the lidar shall be placed in a position so that
Signal spike: An abrupt, momentary in- its line-of-sight is approximately perpen-
crease and decrease in signal amplitude. dicular to the longer (major) axis of the out-
Source: The source being tested by lidar. let.
Time reference: The time (to) when the 2.2 Lidar Operational Restrictions. The
laser pulse emerges from the laser, used as lidar receiver shall not be aimed within an
the reference in all lidar time or range meas- angle of ±15° (cone angle) of the sun.
urements. This method shall not be used to make
opacity measurements if thunderstorms,
2. Procedures snowstorms, hail storms, high wind, high-
The mobile lidar calibrated in accordance ambient dust levels, fog or other atmos-
with Paragraph 3 of this method shall use pheric conditions cause the reference signals
the following procedures for remotely meas- to consistently exceed the limits specified in
uring the opacity of stationary source emis- Section 2.3.
sions: 2.3 Reference Signal Requirements. Once
2.1 Lidar Position. The lidar shall be posi- placed in its proper position for opacity
tioned at a distance from the plume suffi- measurement, the laser is aimed and fired
cient to provide an unobstructed view of the with the line-of-sight near the outlet height
source emissions. The plume must be at a and rotated horizontally to a position clear
range of at least 50 meters or three consecu- of the source structure and the associated
tive pick intervals (whichever is greater) plume. The backscatter signal obtained from
from the lidar’s transmitter/receiver conver- this position is called the ambient-air or ref-
gence distance along the line-of-sight. The erence signal. The lidar operator shall in-
maximum effective opacity measurement spect this signal [Section V of Reference 5.1]
distance of the lidar is a function of local at- to: (1) determine if the lidar line-of-sight is
mospheric conditions, laser beam diameter, free from interference from other plumes and
and plume diameter. The test position of the from physical obstructions such as cables,
lidar shall be selected so that the diameter power lines, etc., for a minimum of 50 meters
of the laser beam at the measurement point or three consecutive pick intervals (which-
within the plume shall be no larger than ever is greater) in each region before and be-
three-fourths the plume diameter. The beam yond the plume, and (2) obtain a qualitative
diameter is calculated by Equation (AM1–1): measure of the homogeneity of the ambient
air by noting any signal spikes.
D(lidar)=A+Rj≤0.75 D(Plume) (AM1–1)
Should there be any signal spikes on the
Where: reference signal within a minimum of 50 me-
D(Plume)=diameter of the plume (cm), ters or three consecutive pick intervals
j=laser beam divergence measured in radians (whichever is greater) in each region before
R=range from the lidar to the source (cm) and beyond the plume, the laser shall be
D(Lidar)=diameter of the laser beam at fired three more times and the operator shall
range R (cm), inspect the reference signals on the display.
A=diameter of the laser beam or pulse where If the spike(s) remains, the azimuth angle
it leaves the laser. shall be changed and the above procedures
The lidar range, R, is obtained by aiming and conducted again. If the spike(s) disappears in
firing the laser at the emissions source all three reference signals, the lidar line-of-
structure immediately below the outlet. The sight is acceptable if there is shot-to-shot
range value is then determined from the consistency and there is no interference from
backscatter signal which consists of a signal other plumes.
spike (return from source structure) and the Shot-to-shot consistency of a series of ref-
atmospheric backscatter signal [Reference erence signals over a period of twenty sec-
5.1]. This backscatter signal should be re- onds is verified in either of two ways. (1) The
corded. lidar operator shall observe the reference
When there is more than one source of signal amplitudes. For shot-to-shot consist-
emissions in the immediate vicinity of the ency the ratio of Rf to Rn [amplitudes of the
plume, the lidar shall be positioned so that near and far region pick intervals (Section
the laser beam passes through only a single 2.6.1)] shall vary by not more than ±6% be-
plume, free from any interference of the tween shots; or (2) the lidar operator shall
other plumes for a minimum of 50 meters or accept any one of the reference signals and
three consecutive pick intervals (whichever treat the other two as plume signals; then
319
the opacity for each of the subsequent reference method, there are two types, i.e., at-
erence signals is calculated (Equation AM1– tached and detached steam plumes.
2). For shot-to-shot consistency, the opacity 2.4.2.1 Attached Steam Plumes. When con-
values shall be within ±3% of 0% opacity and densed water vapor is present within a
the associated So values less than or equal to plume, lidar opacity measurements shall be
8% (full scale) [Section 2.6]. made at a point within the residual plume
If a set of reference signals fails to meet where the condensed water vapor is no
the requirements of this section, then all longer visible. The laser shall be aimed into
plume signals [Section 2.4] from the last set the most dense region (region of highest
of acceptable reference signals to the failed opacity) of the residual plume.
set shall be discarded. During daylight hours the lidar operator
2.3.1 Initial and Final Reference Signals. locates the most dense portion of the resid-
Three reference signals shall be obtained ual plume visually. During nighttime hours
within a 90-second time period prior to any a high-intensity spotlight, night vision
data run. A final set of three reference sig- scope, or low light level TV, etc., can be used
nals shall be obtained within three (3) min- as an aid to locate the residual plume. If vis-
utes after the completion of the same data ual determination is ineffective, the lidar
run. may be used to locate the most dense region
2.3.2 Temporal Criterion for Additional of the residual plume by repeatedly meas-
uring opacity, along the longitudinal axis or
Reference Signals. An additional set of ref-
center of the plume from the emissions out-
erence signals shall be obtained during a
let to a point just beyond the steam plume.
data run if there is a change in wind direc-
The lidar operator should also observe color
tion or plume drift of 30° or more from the
differences and plume reflectivity to ensure
direction that was prevalent when the last
that the lidar is aimed completely within the
set of reference signals was obtained. An ad-
residual plume. If the operator does not ob-
ditional set of reference signals shall also be
tain a clear indication of the location of the
obtained if there is an increase in value of SIn
residual plume, this method shall not be
(near region standard deviation, Equation
used.
AM1–5) or SIf (far region standard deviation, Once the region of highest opacity of the
Equation AM1–6) that is greater than 6% residual plume has been located, aiming ad-
(full scale) over the respective values cal- justments shall be made to the laser line-of-
culated from the immediately previous sight to correct for the following: movement
plume signal, and this increase in value re- to the region of highest opacity out of the
mains for 30 seconds or longer. An additional lidar line-of-sight (away from the laser
set of reference signals shall also be obtained beam) for more than 15 seconds, expansion of
if there is a change in amplitude in either the steam plume (air temperature lowers
the near or the far region of the plume sig- and/or relative humidity increases) so that it
nal, that is greater than 6% of the near sig- just begins to encroach on the field-of-view
nal amplitude and this change in amplitude of the lidar’s optical telescope receiver, or a
remains for 30 seconds or more. decrease in the size of the steam plume (air
2.4 Plume Signal Requirements. Once temperature higher and/or relative humidity
properly aimed, the lidar is placed in oper- decreases) so that regions within the resid-
ation with the nominal pulse or firing rate of ual plume whose opacity is higher than the
six pulses/minute (1 pulse/10 seconds). The one being monitored, are present.
lidar operator shall observe the plume 2.4.2.2 Detached Steam Plumes. When the
backscatter signals to determine the need water vapor in a hydrated plume condenses
for additional reference signals as required and becomes visible at a finite distance from
by Section 2.3.2. The plume signals are re- the stack or source emissions outlet, the
corded from lidar start to stop and are called opacity of the emissions shall be measured in
a data run. The length of a data run is deter- the region of the plume clearly above the
mined by operator discretion. Short-term emissions outlet and below condensation of
stops of the lidar to record additional ref- the water vapor.
erence signals do not constitute the end of a During daylight hours the lidar operators
data run if plume signals are resumed within can visually determine if the steam plume is
90 seconds after the reference signals have detached from the stack outlet. During
been recorded, and the total stop or inter- nighttime hours a high-intensity spotlight,
rupt time does not exceed 3 minutes. night vision scope, low light level TV, etc.,
2.4.1 Non-hydrated Plumes. The laser can be used as an aid in determining if the
shall be aimed at the region of the plume steam plume is detached. If visual deter-
which displays the greatest opacity. The mination is ineffective, the lidar may be
lidar operator must visually verify that the used to determine if the steam plume is de-
laser is aimed clearly above the source exit tached by repeatedly measuring plume opac-
structure. ity from the outlet to the steam plume along
2.4.2 Hydrated Plumes. The lidar will be the plume’s longitudinal axis or center line.
used to measure the opacity of hydrated or The lidar operator should also observe color
so-called steam plumes. As listed in the ref- differences and plume reflectivity to detect a
320
detached plume. If the operator does not ob- should be maintained. Each plume measured
tain a clear indication of the location of the should be uniquely identified. The name of
detached plume, this method shall not be the facility, type of facility, emission source
used to make opacity measurements between type, geographic location of the lidar with
the outlet and the detached plume. respect to the plume, and plume characteris-
Once the determination of a detached tics should be recorded. The date of the test,
steam plume has been confirmed, the laser the time period that a source was monitored,
shall be aimed into the region of highest the time (to the nearest second) of each
opacity in the plume between the outlet and opacity measurement, and the sample inter-
the formation of the steam plume. Aiming val should also be recorded. The wind speed,
adjustments shall be made to the lidar’s line- wind direction, air temperature, relative hu-
of-sight within the plume to correct for
midity, visibility (measured at the lidar’s
changes in the location of the most dense re-
position), and cloud cover should be recorded
gion of the plume due to changes in wind di-
at the beginning and end of each time period
rection and speed or if the detached steam
plume moves closer to the source outlet en- for a given source. A small sketch depicting
croaching on the most dense region of the the location of the laser beam within the
plume. If the detached steam plume should plume should be recorded.
move too close to the source outlet for the If a detached or attached steam plume is
lidar to make interference-free opacity present at the emissions source, this fact
measurements, this method shall not be should be recorded. Figures AM1–I and AM1–
used. II are examples of logbook forms that may
2.5 Field Records. In addition to the re- be used to record this type of data. Magnetic
cording recommendations listed in other sec- tape or paper tape may also be used to record
tions of this method the following records data.
321
322
EC01JN92.155</GPH>
323
EC01JN92.156</GPH>
2.6 Opacity Calculation and Data Anal- measurement is calculated using Equation
ysis. Referring to the reference signal and AM1–2. (Op=1¥Tp; Tp is the plume transmit-
plume signal in Figure AM1–III, the meas- tance.)
ured opacity (Op) in percent for each lidar
324
EC01JN92.157</GPH>
Where: val of minimal average amplitude. If So is

In=near-region pick interval signal ampli- still greater than 8%, then this procedure is
tude, plume signal, 1/R2 corrected, repeated for the far pick interval. This pro-
If=far-region pick interval signal amplitude, cedure may be repeated once again for the
plume signal, 1/R2 corrected, near pick interval, but if So remains greater
Rn=near-region pick interval signal ampli- than 8%, the plume signal shall be discarded.
tude, reference signal, 1/R2 corrected, and The reference signal pick intervals, Rn and
Rf=far-region pick interval signal amplitude, Rf, must be chosen over the same time inter-
reference signal, 1/R2 corrected. val as the plume signal pick intervals, In and
The 1/R2 correction to the plume and ref- If, respectively [Figure AM1–III]. Other
erence signal amplitudes is made by multi- methods of selecting pick intervals may be
plying the amplitude for each successive used if they give equivalent results. Field-
sample interval from the time reference, by oriented examples of pick interval selection
the square of the lidar time (or range) associ- are available in Reference 5.1.
ated with that sample interval [Reference The average amplitudes for each of the
5.1]. pick intervals, In, If, Rn, Rf, shall be cal-
The first step in selecting the pick inter- culated by averaging the respective indi-
vals for Equation AM1–2 is to divide the vidual amplitudes of the sample intervals
plume signal amplitude by the reference sig- from the plume signal and the associated ref-
nal amplitude at the same respective ranges erence signal each corrected for 1/R2. The
to obtain a ‘‘normalized’’ signal. The pick in- amplitude of In shall be calculated according
tervals selected using this normalized signal, to Equation (AM–3).
are a minimum of 15 m (100 nanoseconds) in
length and consist of at least 5 contiguous
sample intervals. In addition, the following
criteria, listed in order of importance, gov-
ern pick interval selection. (1) The intervals
shall be in a region of the normalized signal Where:
where the reference signal meets the require- Ini=the amplitude of the ith sample interval
ments of Section 2.3 and is everywhere great- (near-region),
er than zero. (2) The intervals (near and far) S=sum of the individual amplitudes for the
with the minimum average amplitude are
sample intervals,
chosen. (3) If more than one interval with
m=number of sample intervals in the pick
the same minimum average amplitude is
interval, and
found, the interval closest to the plume is
chosen. (4) The standard deviation, So, for In=average amplitude of the near-region pick
the calculated opacity shall be 8% or less. (So interval.
is calculated by Equation AM1–7). Similarly, the amplitudes for If, Rn, and Rf
If So is greater than 8%, then the far pick are calculated with the three expressions in
interval shall be changed to the next inter- Equation (AM1–4).
EC01JN92.160</MATH>
The standard deviation, SIn, of the set of Similarly, the standard deviations SIf, SRn,
amplitudes for the near-region pick interval, and SRf are calculated with the three expres-
In, shall be calculated using Equation (AM1– sions in Equation (AM1–6).
5).
EC01JN92.159</MATH>
325
EC01JN92.158</MATH>
The standard deviation, So, for each associ-

ated opacity value, Op, shall be calculated
using Equation (AM1–7).
The calculated values of In, If, Rn, Rf, SIn, lent results, shall be used to determine the
SIf, SRn, SRf, Op, and So should be recorded. need for a correction, to calculate the cor-
Any plume signal with an So greater than 8% rection, and to document the point within
shall be discarded. the plume at which the opacity was meas-
2.6.1 Azimuth Angle Correction. If the azi- ured.
muth angle correction to opacity specified in Figure AM1–IV(b) shows the geometry of
this section is performed, then the elevation
the opacity correction. L′ is the path
angle correction specified in Section 2.6.2
through the plume along which the opacity
shall not be performed. When opacity is
measured in the residual region of an at- measurement is made. P′ is the path perpen-
tached steam plume, and the lidar line-of- dicular to the plume at the same point. The
sight is not perpendicular to the plume, it angle e is the angle between L′ and the plume
may be necessary to correct the opacity center line. The angle (π/2-e), is the angle be-
measured by the lidar to obtain the opacity tween the L′ and P′. The measured opacity,
Op, measured along the path L′ shall be cor- EC01JN92.164</MATH>
that would be measured on a path perpen-
dicular to the plume. The following method, rected to obtain the corrected opacity, Opc,
or any other method which produces equiva- for the path P′, using Equation (AM1–8).
EC01JN92.163</MATH>
EC01JN92.162</MATH>
326
EC01JN92.161</MATH>
The correction in Equation (AM1–8) shall be
performed if the inequality in Equation
(AM1–9) is true.
Figure AM1–IV(a) shows the geometry used the plume, the elevation angle of the lidar
to calculate e and the position in the plume from the horizontal plane, and the azimuth
at which the lidar measurement is made. angle of the lidar from an arbitrary fixed ref-
This analysis assumes that for a given lidar erence in the horizontal plane can all be ob-
measurement, the range from the lidar to tained directly.
327
EC01JN92.165</MATH>
Rs=range from lidar to source* bp=elevation angle of Rp*

bs=elevation angle of Rs* Ra=range from lidar to plume at some arbi-
Rp=range from lidar to plume at the opacity trary point, Pa, so the drift angle of the
measurement point* plume can be determined*
328
EC01JN92.166</GPH>
ba=elevation angle of Ra* a′=angle between R′p and R′a*
a=angle between Rp and Ra R≤=distance from the source to the opacity
R′s=projection of Rs in the horizontal plane measurement point projected in the hori-
R′p=projection of Rp in the horizontal plane zontal plane
R′a=projection of Ra in the horizontal plane Rq=distance from opacity measurement
y′=angle between R′s and R′p* point Pp to the point in the plume Pa.
The correction angle e shall be determined Rq=(Rp2+Ra2¥2 Rp Ra Cosa)1/2

using Equation AM1–10. R≤, the distance from the source to the
Where: opacity measurement point projected in the
a=Cos¥1 (Cosbp Cosba Cosa′+Sinbp Sinba), horizontal plane, shall be determined using
and Equation AM1–11.
Where: In the special case where the plume center-

R′s=Rs Cos bs, and line at the opacity measurement point is
horizontal, parallel to the ground, Equation
R′p=Rp Cos bp.
AM1–12 may be used to determine e instead
of Equation AM1–10.
Where: 2.6.2 Elevation Angle Correction. An indi-

R″s=(R′2s+Rp2Sin2bp)1/2. vidual lidar-measured opacity, Op, shall be
If the angle e is such that e≤ 30° or e ≥ 150°, corrected for elevation angle if the laser ele-
the azimuth angle correction shall not be vation or inclination angle, bp [Figure AM1–
performed and the associated opacity value V], is greater than or equal to the value cal-
shall be discarded. culated in Equation AM1–13.
EC01JN92.170</MATH>
EC01JN92.169</MATH>
The measured opacity, Op, along the lidar zontal) path, P, by using Equation (AM1–
path L, is adjusted to obtain the corrected 14).
opacity, Opc, for the actual plume (hori-
EC01JN92.168</MATH>
*Obtained directly from lidar. These values

should be recorded.
329
EC01JN92.167</MATH>
( )
Cosβ
O pc = (100%) ⎡⎢1 − 1 − 0.01 O p p ⎤⎥, ( AM1 - 14 )
⎣ ⎦
Where: Opc=corrected opacity for the actual plume

bp=lidar elevation or inclination angle, thickness P.
The values for bp, Op and Opc should be re-
Op=measured opacity along path L, and
corded.
330
EC01JN92.171</MATH>
2.6.3 Determination of Actual Plume 2.6.4 Calculation of Average Actual Plume

Opacity. Actual opacity of the plume shall Opacity. The average of the actual plume
be determined by Equation AM1–15. opacity, Opa, shall be calculated as the aver-

age of the consecutive individual actual
EC01JN92.173</MATH>
opacity values, Opa, by Equation AM1–16.
331
EC01JN92.172</GPH>
The lidar shall be aimed through the cen-
ter of the plume within 1 stack diameter of
the exit, or through the geometric center of
the screen target selected. The lidar shall be
set in operation for a 6-minute data run at a
Where: nominal pulse rate of 1 pulse every 10 sec-
onds. Each backscatter return signal and
(Opa)k=the kth actual opacity value in an
each respective opacity value obtained from
averaging interval containing n opacity
the smoke generator transmissometer, shall
values; k is a summing index.
S=the sum of the individual actual opacity be obtained in temporal coincidence. The
values. data shall be analyzed and reduced in accord-
n=the number of individual actual opacity ance with Section 2.6 of this method. This
values contained in the averaging interval. calibration shall be performed for 0% (clean
Opa=average actual opacity calculated over air), and at least five other opacities (nomi-
the averaging interval. nally 10, 20, 40, 60, and 80%).
The average of the lidar opacity values ob-
3. Lidar Performance Verification tained during a 6-minute calibration run
The lidar shall be subjected to two types of shall be calculated and should be recorded.
performance verifications that shall be per- Also the average of the opacity values ob-
formed in the field. The annual calibration, tained from the smoke generator transmis-
conducted at least once a year, shall be used someter for the same 6-minute run shall be
to directly verify operation and performance calculated and should be recorded.
of the entire lidar system. The routine Alternate calibration procedures that do
verification, conducted for each emission not meet the above requirements but
source measured, shall be used to insure produce equivalent results may be used.
proper performance of the optical receiver 3.2 Routine Verification Procedures. Ei-
and associated electronics. ther one of two techniques shall be used to
3.1 Annual Calibration Procedures. Either conduct this verification. It shall be per-
a plume from a smoke generator or screen formed at least once every 4 hours for each
targets shall be used to conduct this calibra- emission source measured. The following pa-
tion. rameters shall be directly verified.
If the screen target method is selected, five 1) The opacity value of 0% plus a minimum
screens shall be fabricated by placing an of 5 (nominally 10, 20, 40, 60, and 80%) opacity
opaque mesh material over a narrow frame values shall be verified through the PMT de-
(wood, metal extrusion, etc.). The screen
tector and data processing electronics.
shall have a surface area of at least one
square meter. The screen material should be 2) The zero-signal level (receiver signal
chosen for precise optical opacities of about with no optical signal from the source
10, 20, 40, 60, and 80%. Opacity of each target present) shall be inspected to insure that no
shall be optically determined and should be spurious noise is present in the signal. With
recorded. If a smoke generator plume is se- the entire lidar receiver and analog/digital
lected, it shall meet the requirements of Sec- electronics turned on and adjusted for nor-
tion 3.3 of Reference Method 9. This calibra- mal operating performance, the following
tion shall be performed in the field during procedures shall be used for Techniques 1 and
calm (as practical) atmospheric conditions. 2, respectively.
The lidar shall be positioned in accordance 3.2.1 Procedure for Technique 1. This test
with Section 2.1. shall be performed with no ambient or stray
The screen targets must be placed perpen- light reaching the PMT detector. The narrow
dicular to and coincident with the lidar line- band filter (694.3 nanometers peak) shall be
of-sight at sufficient height above the removed from its position in front of the
ground (suggest about 30 ft) to avoid ground- PMT detector. Neutral density filters of
level dust contamination. Reference signals nominal opacities of 10, 20, 40, 60, and 80%
shall be obtained just prior to conducting shall be used. The recommended test con-
the calibration test. figuration is depicted in Figure AM1–VI.
332
EC01JN92.174</MATH>
The zero-signal level shall be measured and The light source either shall be a contin-
should be recorded, as indicated in Figure uous wave (CW) laser with the beam me-
AM1–VI(a). This simulated clear-air or 0% chanically chopped or a light emitting diode
opacity value shall be tested in using the se- controlled with a pulse generator (rectan-
lected light source depicted in Figure AM1– gular pulse). (A laser beam may have to be
VI(b). attenuated so as not to saturate the PMT de-
tector). This signal level shall be measured
333
EC01JN92.175</GPH>
and should be recorded. The opacity value is shall be performed at least three times for
calculated by taking two pick intervals [Sec- each selected opacity value. While the order
tion 2.6] about 1 microsecond apart in time is not important, each of the opacity values
and using Equation (AM1–2) setting the ratio from the optical generator shall be verified.
Rn/Rf=1. This calculated value should be re- The calibrated optical generator opacity
corded. value for each selection should be recorded.
The simulated clear-air signal level is also The optical generator used for Technique 2
employed in the optical test using the neu- shall be calibrated for actual opacity with an
tral density filters. Using the test configura- accuracy of ±1% or better. This calibration
tion in Figure AM1–VI(c), each neutral den- shall be done monthly while the generator is
sity filter shall be separately placed into the in use and calibrated value should be re-
light path from the light source to the PMT corded.
detector. The signal level shall be measured Alternate verification procedures that do
and should be recorded. The opacity value not meet the above requirements but
for each filter is calculated by taking the produce equivalent results may be used.
signal level for that respective filter (If), di- 3.3 Deviation. The permissible error for
viding it by the 0% opacity signal level (In) the annual calibration and routine
and performing the remainder of the calcula- verification are:
tion by Equation (AM1–2) with Rn/Rf=1. The 3.3.1 Annual Calibration Deviation.
calculated opacity value for each filter
3.3.1.1 Smoke Generator. If the lidar-
should be recorded.
measured average opacity for each data run
The neutral density filters used for Tech-
is not within ±5% (full scale) of the respec-
nique 1 shall be calibrated for actual opacity
tive smoke generator’s average opacity over
with accuracy of ±2% or better. This calibra-
the range of 0% through 80%, then the lidar
tion shall be done monthly while the filters
shall be considered out of calibration.
are in use and the calibrated values should
be recorded. 3.3.1.2 Screens. If the lidar-measured aver-
3.2.2 Procedure for Technique 2. An opti- age opacity for each data run is not within
cal generator (built-in calibration mecha- ±3% (full scale) of the laboratory-determined
nism) that contains a light-emitting diode opacity for each respective simulation
(red light for a lidar containing a ruby laser) screen target over the range of 0% through
is used. By injecting an optical signal into 80%, then the lidar shall be considered out of
the lidar receiver immediately ahead of the calibration.
PMT detector, a backscatter signal is simu- 3.3.2 Routine Verification Error. If the
lated. With the entire lidar receiver elec- lidar-measured average opacity for each neu-
tronics turned on and adjusted for normal tral density filter (Technique 1) or optical
operating performance, the optical generator generator selection (Technique 2) is not
is turned on and the simulation signal (cor- within ±3% (full scale) of the respective lab-
rected for 1/R2) is selected with no plume oratory calibration value then the lidar shall
spike signal and with the opacity value equal be considered non-operational.
to 0%. This simulated clear-air atmospheric
4. Performance/Design Specification for Basic
return signal is displayed on the system’s
Lidar System
video display. The lidar operator then makes
any fine adjustments that may be necessary 4.1 Lidar Design Specification. The essen-
to maintain the system’s normal operating tial components of the basic lidar system are
range. a pulsed laser (transmitter), optical receiver,
The opacity values of 0% and the other five detector, signal processor, recorder, and an
values are selected one at a time in any aiming device that is used in aiming the
order. The simulated return signal data lidar transmitter and receiver. Figure AM1–
should be recorded. The opacity value shall VII shows a functional block diagram of a
be calculated. This measurement/calculation basic lidar system.
334
4.2 Performance Evaluation Tests. The of this method. The annual calibration shall
owner of a lidar system shall subject such a be performed for three separate, complete
lidar system to the performance verification
tests described in Section 3, prior to first use
335
EC01JN92.176</GPH>
runs and the results of each should be re- tion and Enforcement of the Radiation Con-
corded. The requirements of Section 3.3.1 trol for Health and Safety Act of 1968, Janu-
must be fulfilled for each of the three runs. ary 1976.
Once the conditions of the annual calibra- 5.9 Laser Safety Handbook, Alex Mallow,
tion are fulfilled the lidar shall be subjected Leon Chabot, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co.,
to the routine verification for three separate 1978.
complete runs. The requirements of Section
3.3.2 must be fulfilled for each of the three METHOD 10—DETERMINATION OF CARBON MON-
runs and the results should be recorded. The OXIDE EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY
Administrator may request that the results SOURCES (INSTRUMENTAL ANALYZER PROCE-
of the performance evaluation be submitted DURE)
for review.
5. References
What is Method 10?
5.1 The Use of Lidar for Emissions Source
Opacity Determination, U.S. Environmental Method 10 is a procedure for measuring
Protection Agency, National Enforcement carbon monoxide (CO) in stationary source
Investigations Center, Denver, CO. EPA–330/ emissions using a continuous instrumental
1–79–003–R, Arthur W. Dybdahl, current edi- analyzer. Quality assurance and quality con-
tion [NTIS No. PB81–246662]. trol requirements are included to assure that
5.2 Field Evaluation of Mobile Lidar for you, the tester, collect data of known qual-
the Measurement of Smoke Plume Opacity, ity. You must document your adherence to
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Na- these specific requirements for equipment,
tional Enforcement Investigations Center, supplies, sample collection and analysis, cal-
Denver, CO. EPA/NEIC-TS-128, February culations, and data analysis. This method
1976. does not completely describe all equipment,
5.3 Remote Measurement of Smoke Plume supplies, and sampling and analytical proce-
Transmittance Using Lidar, C. S. Cook, G. dures you will need but refers to other meth-
W. Bethke, W. D. Conner (EPA/RTP). Applied ods for some of the details. Therefore, to ob-
Optics 11, pg 1742. August 1972. tain reliable results, you should also have a
5.4 Lidar Studies of Stack Plumes in thorough knowledge of these additional test
Rural and Urban Environments, EPA–650/4– methods which are found in appendix A to
73–002, October 1973. this part:
5.5 American National Standard for the (a) Method 1—Sample and Velocity Tra-
Safe Use of Lasers ANSI Z 136.1–176, March 8, verses for Stationary Sources.
1976. (b) Method 4—Determination of Moisture
5.6 U.S. Army Technical Manual TB MED Content in Stack Gases.
279, Control of Hazards to Health from Laser (c) Method 7E—Determination of Nitrogen
Radiation, February 1969. Oxides Emissions from Stationary Sources
5.7 Laser Institute of America Laser Safe- (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure).
ty Manual, 4th Edition. 1.1 Analytes. What does this method deter-
5.8 U.S. Department of Health, Education mine? This method measures the concentra-
and Welfare, Regulations for the Administra- tion of carbon monoxide.
CO .................................................................................. 630–08–0 Typically <2% of Calibration Span.
1.2 Applicability. When is this method re- vey the sample to an analyzer that measures
quired? The use of Method 10 may be required the concentration of CO. You must meet the
by specific New Source Performance Stand- performance requirements of this method to
ards, State Implementation Plans, and per- validate your data.
mits where CO concentrations in stationary
source emissions must be measured, either 3.0 Definitions
to determine compliance with an applicable
emission standard or to conduct performance Refer to Section 3.0 of Method 7E for the
testing of a continuous emission monitoring applicable definitions.
system (CEMS). Other regulations may also
4.0 Interferences
require the use of Method 10.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Refer to Sec- Substances having a strong absorption of
tion 1.3 of Method 7E.
infrared energy may interfere to some extent

in some analyzers. Instrumental correction
2.0 Summary of Method may be used to compensate for the inter-
In this method, you continuously or interference. You may also use silica gel and
mittently sample the effluent gas and con- ascarite traps to eliminate the interferences.
336
If this option is used, correct the measured 8.2 Initial Measurement System Performance
gas volume for the carbon dioxide (CO2) re- Tests. You must follow the procedures in Sec-
moved in the trap. tion 8.2 of Method 7E. If a dilution-type
measurement system is used, the special
5.0 Safety considerations in Section 8.3 of Method 7E
Refer to Section 5.0 of Method 7E. also apply.
8.3 Interference Check. You must follow
6.0 Equipment and Supplies the procedures of Section 8.2.7 of Method 7E.
What do I need for the measurement system? 8.4 Sample Collection.
8.4.1 Continuous Sampling. You must fol-
6.1 Continuous Sampling. Figure 7E–1 of low the procedures of Section 8.4 of Method
Method 7E is a schematic diagram of an ac- 7E.
ceptable measurement system. The compo- 8.4.2 Integrated Sampling. Evacuate the
nents are the same as those in Sections 6.1 flexible bag. Set up the equipment as shown
and 6.2 of Method 7E, except that the CO ana- in Figure 10–1 with the bag disconnected.
lyzer described in Section 6.2 of this method Place the probe in the stack and purge the
must be used instead of the analyzer de- sampling line. Connect the bag, making sure
scribed in Section 6.2 of Method 7E. You that all connections are leak-free. Sample at
must follow the noted specifications in Sec- a rate proportional to the stack velocity. If
tion 6.1 of Method 7E except that the re- needed, the CO2 content of the gas may be
quirements to use stainless steel, Teflon, or determined by using the Method 3 integrated
non-reactive glass filters do not apply. Also, sample procedures, or by weighing an
a heated sample line is not required to trans- ascarite CO2 removal tube used and com-
port dry gases or for systems that measure
puting CO2 concentration from the gas vol-
the CO concentration on a dry basis.
ume sampled and the weight gain of the
6.2 Integrated Sampling.
tube. Data may be recorded on a form simi-
6.2.1 Air-Cooled Condenser or Equivalent. To
lar to Table 10–1.
remove any excess moisture.
6.2.2 Valve. Needle valve, or equivalent, to 8.5 Post-Run System Bias Check, Drift As-
adjust flow rate. sessment, and Alternative Dynamic Spike Proce-
6.2.3 Pump. Leak-free diaphragm type, or dure. You must follow the procedures in Sec-
equivalent, to transport gas. tions 8.5 and 8.6 of Method 7E.
6.2.4 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equiva-
9.0 Quality Control
lent, to measure a flow range from 0 to 1.0
liter per minute (0.035 cfm). Follow the quality control procedures in
6.2.5 Flexible Bag. Tedlar, or equivalent, Section 9.0 of Method 7E.
with a capacity of 60 to 90 liters (2 to 3 ft3).
Leak-test the bag in the laboratory before 10.0 Calibration and Standardization
using by evacuating with a pump followed by
a dry gas meter. When the evacuation is Follow the procedures for calibration and
complete, there should be no flow through standardization in Section 10.0 of Method 7E.
the meter. 11.0 Analytical Procedures
6.3 What analyzer must I use? You must use
an instrument that continuously measures Because sample collection and analysis are
CO in the gas stream and meets the speci- performed together (see Section 8), addi-
fications in Section 13.0. The dual-range ana- tional discussion of the analytical procedure
lyzer provisions in Section 6.2.8.1 of Method is not necessary.
7E apply.
You must follow the procedures for cal-
7.1 Calibration Gas. What calibration gases culations and data analysis in Section 12.0 of
do I need? Refer to Section 7.1 of Method 7E Method 7E, as applicable, substituting CO for
for the calibration gas requirements. NOX as applicable.
7.2 Interference Check. What additional re- 12.1 Concentration Correction for CO2 Re-
agents do I need for the interference check? Use moval. Correct the CO concentration for CO2
the appropriate test gases listed in Table 7E– removal (if applicable) using Eq. 10–1.
3 of Method 7E (i.e., potential interferents,
CAvg = CCO stack (1 − FCO 2 )
as identified by the instrument manufac-
turer) to conduct the interference check.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, Where:

and Transport
CAvg = Average gas concentration for the test

run, ppm.
Emission Test Procedure
CCO stack = Average unadjusted stack gas CO
8.1 Sampling Site and Sampling Points. You concentration indicated by the data re-
must follow Section 8.1 of Method 7E. corder for the test run, ppmv.
337
ER15MY06.011</MATH>
FCO2 = Volume fraction of CO2 in the sample, 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
i.e., percent CO2 from Orsat analysis di-
vided by 100. 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]

The dynamic spike procedure and the man-
The specifications for analyzer calibration
ufacturer stability test are the same as in
error, system bias, drift, interference check, Sections 16.1 and 16.3 of Method 7E
and alternative dynamic spike procedure are
the same as in Section 13.0 of Method 7E. 17.0 References
1. ‘‘EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay
and Certification of Gaseous Calibration
Standards— September 1997 as amended,
EPA–600/R–97/121

Validation Data
TABLE 10–1—FIELD DATA TABLE 10–1—FIELD DATA—Continued

[Integrated sampling] [Integrated sampling]
Clock Time Rotameter Comments

Location: Date:
Reading
liters/min
Test: Operator:
(cfm)
338
ER15MY06.016</GPH>
TABLE 10–1—FIELD DATA—Continued METHOD 10A—DETERMINATION OF CARBON

MONOXIDE EMISSIONS IN CERTIFYING CONTIN-
[Integrated sampling] UOUS EMISSION MONITORING SYSTEMS AT PE-
TROLEUM REFINERIES


1.1 Analytes.
Carbon monoxide (CO) ................................................................... 630–08–0 3 ppmv
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- ment. This test method may not address all
ble for the determination of CO emissions at of the safety problems associated with its
petroleum refineries. This method serves as use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
the reference method in the relative accu- test method to establish appropriate safety
racy test for nondispersive infrared (NDIR) and health practices and determine the ap-
CO continuous emission monitoring systems plicability of regulatory limitations prior to
(CEMS) that are required to be installed in performing this test method. The analyzer
petroleum refineries on fluid catalytic users manual should be consulted for specific
cracking unit catalyst regenerators precautions to be taken with regard to the
(§ 60.105(a)(2) of this part). analytical procedure.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to 5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following re-
the requirements of this method will en- agents are hazardous. Personal protective
hance the quality of the data obtained from equipment and safe procedures are useful in
air pollutant sampling methods. preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc-
2.0 Summary of Method curs, immediately flush with copious
amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Re-
An integrated gas sample is extracted from move clothing under shower and decontami-
the stack, passed through an alkaline per- nate. Treat residual chemical burns as ther-
manganate solution to remove sulfur oxides mal burns.
and nitrogen oxides, and collected in a 5.2.1 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes
Tedlar bag. The CO concentration in the severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation
sample is measured spectrophotometrically causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs.
using the reaction of CO with p- Reacts exothermically with limited amounts
sulfaminobenzoic acid. of water.
4.0 Interferences 6.1 Sample Collection. The sampling train
Sulfur oxides, nitric oxide, and other acid shown in Figure 10A–1 is required for sample
gases interfere with the colorimetric reac- collection. Component parts are described
tion. They are removed by passing the sam- below:
pled gas through an alkaline potassium per- 6.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel, sheathed
manganate scrubbing solution. Carbon diox- Pyrex glass, or equivalent, equipped with a
ide (CO2) does not interfere, but, because it is glass wool plug to remove particulate mat-
removed by the scrubbing solution, its con- ter.
centration must be measured independently 6.1.2 Sample Conditioning System. Three
and an appropriate volume correction made Greenburg-Smith impingers connected in se-
to the sampled gas.
ries with leak-free connections.

6.1.3 Pump. Leak-free pump with stainless
5.0 Safety
steel and Teflon parts to transport sample at
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve a flow rate of 300 ml/min (0.01 ft3/min) to the
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- flexible bag.
339
6.1.4 Surge Tank. Installed between the 6.2.11 Analytical Balance. Capable of
pump and the rate meter to eliminate the weighing to 0.1 mg.
pulsation effect of the pump on the rate
meter. 7.0 Reagents and Standards
6.1.5 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equiva- Unless otherwise indicated, all reagents
lent, to measure flow rate at 300 ml/min (0.01 shall conform to the specifications estab-
ft3/min). Calibrate according to Section 10.2. lished by the Committee on Analytical Re-
6.1.6 Flexible Bag. Tedlar, or equivalent, agents of the American Chemical Society,
with a capacity of 10 liters (0.35 ft3) and where such specifications are available; oth-
equipped with a sealing quick-connect plug. erwise, the best available grade shall be
The bag must be leak-free according to Sec- used.
tion 8.1. For protection, it is recommended 7.1 Sample Collection.
that the bag be enclosed within a rigid con- 7.1.1 Water. Deionized distilled, to con-
tainer. form to ASTM D 1193–77 or 91, Type 3 (incor-
6.1.7 Valves. Stainless-steel needle valve porated by reference—see § 60.17). If high con-
to adjust flow rate, and stainless-steel three- centrations of organic matter are not ex-
way valve, or equivalent.
pected to be present, the potassium per-
6.1.8 CO2 Analyzer. Fyrite, or equivalent,
manganate test for oxidizable organic mat-
to measure CO2 concentration to within O.5
ter may be omitted.
percent.
7.1.2 Alkaline Permanganate Solution,
6.1.9 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter, capa-
0.25 M KMnO4/1.5 M Sodium Hydroxide
ble of measuring the sample volume under
(NaOH). Dissolve 40 g KMnO4 and 60 g NaOH
calibration conditions of 300 ml/min (0.01 ft3/
in approximately 900 ml water, cool, and di-
min) for 10 minutes.
lute to 1 liter.
6.1.10 Pressure Gauge. A water filled U-
7.2 Sample Analysis.
tube manometer, or equivalent, of about 30
cm (12 in.) to leak-check the flexible bag.
7.2.2 1 M Sodium Hydroxide Solution. Dis-
6.2 Sample Analysis.
solve 40 g NaOH in approximately 900 ml of
6.2.1 Spectrophotometer. Single- or dou-
water, cool, and dilute to 1 liter.
ble-beam to measure absorbance at 425 and
7.2.3 0.1 M NaOH Solution. Dilute 50 ml of
600 nm. Slit width should not exceed 20 nm.
6.2.2 Spectrophotometer Cells. 1-cm the 1 M NaOH solution prepared in Section
pathlength. 7.2.2 to 500 ml.
6.2.3 Vacuum Gauge. U-tube mercury ma- 7.2.4 0.1 M Silver Nitrate (AgNO3) Solu-
nometer, 1 meter (39 in.), with 1-mm divi- tion. Dissolve 8.5 g AgNO3 in water, and di-
sions, or other gauge capable of measuring lute to 500 ml.
pressure to within 1 mm Hg. 7.2.5 0.1 M Para-Sulfaminobenzoic Acid (p-
6.2.4 Pump. Capable of evacuating the gas SABA) Solution. Dissolve 10.0 g p-SABA in
reaction bulb to a pressure equal to or less 0.1 M NaOH, and dilute to 500 ml with 0.1 M
than 40 mm Hg absolute, equipped with NaOH.
coarse and fine flow control valves. 7.2.6 Colorimetric Solution. To a flask,
6.2.5 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or add 100 ml of 0.1 M p-SABA solution and 100
other barometer capable of measuring at- ml of 0.1 M AgNO3 solution. Mix, and add 50
mospheric pressure to within 1 mm Hg. ml of 1 M NaOH with shaking. The resultant
6.2.6 Reaction Bulbs. Pyrex glass, 100-ml solution should be clear and colorless. This
with Teflon stopcock (Figure 10A–2), leak- solution is acceptable for use for a period of
free at 40 mm Hg, designed so that 10 ml of 2 days.
the colorimetric reagent can be added and 7.2.7 Standard Gas Mixtures. Traceable to
removed easily and accurately. Commer- National Institute of Standards and Tech-
cially available gas sample bulbs such as nology (NIST) standards and containing be-
Supelco Catalog No. 2–2161 may also be used. tween 50 and 1000 ppm CO in nitrogen. At
6.2.7 Manifold. Stainless steel, with con- least two concentrations are needed to span
nections for three reaction bulbs and the ap- each calibration range used (Section 10.3).
propriate connections for the manometer The calibration gases must be certified by
and sampling bag as shown in Figure 10A–3. the manufacturer to be within 2 percent of
6.2.8 Pipets. Class A, 10–ml size. the specified concentrations.
6.2.9 Shaker Table. Reciprocating-stroke
type such as Eberbach Corporation, Model
and Transport
6015. A rocking arm or rotary-motion type
shaker may also be used. The shaker must be 8.1 Sample Bag Leak-Checks. While a bag
large enough to accommodate at least six leak-check is required after bag use, it
gas sample bulbs simultaneously. It may be should also be done before the bag is used for
necessary to construct a table top extension sample collection. The bag should be leak-
for most commercial shakers to provide suf- checked in the inflated and deflated condi-
ficient space for the needed bulbs (Figure tion according to the following procedure:
10A–4). 8.1.1 Connect the bag to a water manom-
6.2.10 Valve. Stainless steel shut-off valve. eter, and pressurize the bag to 5 to 10 cm H2O
340
(2 to 4 in H2O). Allow the bag to stand for 60 8.2.3 Purge the system with sample gas by
minutes. Any displacement in the water ma- inserting the probe into the stack and draw-
nometer indicates a leak. ing the sample gas through the system at 300
8.1.2 Evacuate the bag with a leakless ml/min ±10 percent for 5 minutes. Connect
pump that is connected to the downstream the evacuated Tedlar bag to the system,
side of a flow indicating device such as a 0- record the starting time, and sample at a
to 100-ml/min rotameter or an impinger con- rate of 300 ml/min for 30 minutes, or until
taining water. When the bag is completely the Tedlar bag is nearly full. Record the
evacuated, no flow should be evident if the sampling time, the barometric pressure, and
bag is leak-free. the ambient temperature. Purge the system
8.2 Sample Collection. as described above immediately before each
8.2.1 Evacuate the Tedlar bag completely sample.
using a vacuum pump. Assemble the appa- 8.2.4 The scrubbing solution is adequate
ratus as shown in Figure 10A–1. Loosely pack for removing sulfur oxides and nitrogen ox-
glass wool in the tip of the probe. Place 400 ides from 50 liters (1.8 ft3) of stack gas when
ml of alkaline permanganate solution in the the concentration of each is less than 1,000
first two impingers and 250 ml in the third. ppm and the CO2 concentration is less than
Connect the pump to the third impinger, and 15 percent. Replace the scrubber solution
follow this with the surge tank, rate meter, after every fifth sample.
and 3-way valve. Do not connect the Tedlar 8.3 Carbon Dioxide Measurement. Measure
bag to the system at this time. the CO2 content in the stack to the nearest
8.2.2 Leak-check the sampling system by 0.5 percent each time a CO sample is col-
plugging the probe inlet, opening the 3-way lected. A simultaneous grab sample analyzed
valve, and pulling a vacuum of approxi- by the Fyrite analyzer is acceptable.
mately 250 mm Hg on the system while ob-
9.0 Quality Control
serving the rate meter for flow. If flow is in-
dicated on the rate meter, do not proceed 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
further until the leak is found and corrected. ures.
8.1 ...................................... Sampling equipment leak-checks and Ensure accuracy and precision of sampling measure-
calibration. ments.
standards.
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. 10.3 Spectrophotometer Calibration

Same as Method 5, Section 9.2. Curve.
10.3.1 Collect the standards as described
10.0 Calibration and Standardization in Section 8.2. Prepare at least two sets of
three bulbs as standards to span the 0 to 400
NOTE: Maintain a laboratory log of all cali-
or 400 to 1000 ppm range. If any samples span
brations.
both concentration ranges, prepare a calibra-
10.1 Gas Bulb Calibration. Weigh the tion curve for each range using separate rea-
empty bulb to the nearest 0.1 g. Fill the bulb gent blanks. Prepare a set of three bulbs con-
to the stopcock with water, and again weigh taining colorimetric reagent but no CO to
to the nearest 0.1 g. Subtract the tare serve as a reagent blank. Analyze each
weight, and calculate the volume in liters to standard and blank according to the sample
three significant figures using the density of analysis procedure of Section 11.0 Reject the
water at the measurement temperature. standard set where any of the individual bulb
Record the volume on the bulb. Alter- absorbances differs from the set mean by
natively, mark an identification number on more than 10 percent.
the bulb, and record the volume in a note- 10.3.2 Calculate the average absorbance
book. for each set (3 bulbs) of standards using
10.2 Rate Meter Calibration. Assemble the Equation 10A–1 and Table 10A–1. Construct a
system as shown in Figure 10A–1 (the graph of average absorbance for each stand-
impingers may be removed), and attach a ard against its corresponding concentration.
volume meter to the probe inlet. Set the ro- Draw a smooth curve through the points.
tameter at 300 ml/min, record the volume The curve should be linear over the two con-
meter reading, start the pump, and pull am- centration ranges discussed in Section 13.3.
bient air through the system for 10 minutes.

Record the final volume meter reading. Re-
peat the procedure and average the results to 11.1 Assemble the system shown in Figure
determine the volume of gas that passed 10A–3, and record the information required in
through the system. Table 10A–1 as it is obtained. Pipet 10.0 ml of
341
the colorimetric reagent into each gas reac- 12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
tion bulb, and attach the bulbs to the sys-
Carry out calculations retaining at least
tem. Open the stopcocks to the reaction
bulbs, but leave the valve to the Tedlar bag
acquired data. Round off figures after final
closed. Turn on the pump, fully open the
calculation.
coarse-adjust flow valve, and slowly open the
12.1 Nomenclature.
fine-adjust valve until the pressure is re-
duced to at least 40 mm Hg. Now close the A=Sample absorbance, uncorrected for the
coarse adjust valve, and observe the manom- reagent blank.
eter to be certain that the system is leak- Ar=Absorbance of the reagent blank.
free. Wait a minimum of 2 minutes. If the As=Average sample absorbance per liter,
pressure has increased less than 1 mm Hg, units/liter.
proceed as described below. If a leak is Bw=Moisture content in the bag sample.
present, find and correct it before proceeding C=CO concentration in the stack gas, dry
further. basis, ppm.
11.2 Record the vacuum pressure (Pv) to Cb=CO concentration of the bag sample, dry
the nearest 1 mm Hg, and close the reaction basis, ppm.
bulb stopcocks. Open the Tedlar bag valve, Cg=CO concentration from the calibration
and allow the system to come to atmos- curve, ppm.
pheric pressure. Close the bag valve, open F=Volume fraction of CO2 in the stack.
the pump coarse adjust valve, and evacuate n=Number of reaction bulbs used per bag
the system again. Repeat this fill/evacuation sample.
procedure at least twice to flush the mani- Pb=Barometric pressure, mm Hg.
fold completely. Close the pump coarse ad- Pv=Residual pressure in the sample bulb
just valve, open the Tedlar bag valve, and let after evacuation, mm Hg.
the system fill to atmospheric pressure. Pw=Vapor pressure of H2O in the bag (from
Open the stopcocks to the reaction bulbs, Table 10A–2), mm Hg.
and let the entire system come to atmos- Vb=Volume of the sample bulb, liters.
pheric pressure. Close the bulb stopcocks, re- Vr=Volume of reagent added to the sample
move the bulbs, record the room tempera- bulb, 0.0100 liter.
ture and barometric pressure (Pbar, to nearest 12.2 Average Sample Absorbance per
mm Hg), and place the bulbs on the shaker Liter. Calculate As for each gas bulb using
table with their main axis either parallel to Equation 10A–1, and record the value in
or perpendicular to the plane of the table Table 10A–1. Calculate the average As for
top. Purge the bulb-filling system with am- each bag sample, and compare the three val-
bient air for several minutes between sam- ues to the average. If any single value differs
ples. Shake the samples for exactly 2 hours. by more than 10 percent from the average,
11.3 Immediately after shaking, measure reject this value, and calculate a new aver-
the absorbance (A) of each bulb sample at 425 age using the two remaining values.
nm if the concentration is less than or equal
to 400 ppm CO or at 600 nm if the concentra-
tion is above 400 ppm. As =
(A − A r ) (Pb ) Eq. 10A-1
NOTE: This may be accomplished with mul- (Vb − Vr ) (Pb − Pv )
tiple bulb sets by sequentially collecting sets
and adding to the shaker at staggered inter- NOTE: A and Ar must be at the same wave-
vals, followed by sequentially removing sets length.
from the shaker for absorbance measurement 12.3 CO Concentration in the Bag. Cal-
after the two-hour designated intervals have culate Cb using Equations 10A–2 and 10A–3. If
elapsed. condensate is visible in the Tedlar bag, cal-
11.4 Use a small portion of the sample to culate Bw using Table 10A–2 and the tempera-
ture and barometric pressure in the analysis
ER17OC00.230</MATH>
rinse a spectrophotometer cell several times
before taking an aliquot for analysis. If one room. If condensate is not visible, calculate
cell is used to analyze multiple samples, Bw using the temperature and barometric
rinse the cell with deionized distilled water pressure at the sampling site.
several times between samples. Prepare and
Pw
analyze standards and a reagent blank as de-
scribed in Section 10.3. Use water as the ref-
Bw = Eq. 10A-2
ER17OC00.229</MATH>
erence. Reject the analysis if the blank ab-

Pb
sorbance is greater than 0.1. All conditions
should be the same for analysis of samples Cg
Cb = Eq. 10A-3
(1 − Bw )
and standards. Measure the absorbances as
soon as possible after shaking is completed.

11.5 Determine the CO concentration of
ER17OC00.228</MATH>
12.4 CO Concentration in the Stack.

each bag sample using the calibration curve
for the appropriate concentration range as
discussed in Section 10.3.
C = C b (1 − F) Eq. 10A-4
342
ER17OC00.227</MATH>
13.0 Method Performance Emissions. U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Research Triangle Park, N.C. June
13.1 Precision. The estimated
1985. 33 pp.
intralaboratory standard deviation of the
method is 3 percent of the mean for gas sam- 2. Ferguson, B.B., R.E. Lester, and W.J.
ples analyzed in duplicate in the concentra- Mitchell. Field Evaluation of Carbon Mon-
tion range of 39 to 412 ppm. The interlabora- oxide and Hydrogen Sulfide Continuous
tory precision has not been established. Emission Monitors at an Oil Refinery. U.S.
13.2 Accuracy. The method contains no Environmental Protection Agency, Research
significant biases when compared to an Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA–
NDIR analyzer calibrated with NIST stand- 600/4–82–054. August 1982. 100 pp.
ards. 3. Lambert, J.L., and R.E. Weins. Induced
13.3 Range. Approximately 3 to 1800 ppm Colorimetric Method for Carbon Monoxide.
CO. Samples having concentrations below 400 Analytical Chemistry. 46(7):929–930. June
ppm are analyzed at 425 nm, and samples 1974.
having concentrations above 400 ppm are 4. Levaggi, D.A., and M. Feldstein. The
analyzed at 600 nm. Colorimetric Determination of Low Con-
13.4 Sensitivity. The detection limit is 3 centrations of Carbon Monoxide. Industrial
ppmv based on a change in concentration Hygiene Journal. 25:64–66. January-February
equal to three times the standard deviation 1964.
of the reagent blank solution. 5. Repp, M. Evaluation of Continuous Mon-
13.5 Stability. The individual components itors For Carbon Monoxide in Stationary
of the colorimetric reagent are stable for at Sources. U.S. Environmental Protection
least 1 month. The colorimetric reagent Agency. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publi-
must be used within 2 days after preparation cation No. EPA–600/2–77–063. March 1977. 155
to avoid excessive blank correction. The pp.
samples in the Tedlar bag should be stable 6. Smith, F., D.E. Wagoner, and R.P. Dono-
for at least 1 week if the bags are leak-free. van. Guidelines for Development of a Quality
Assurance Program: Volume VIII—Deter-
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] mination of CO Emissions from Stationary
Sources by NDIR Spectrometry. U.S. Envi-
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] ronmental Protection Agency. Research Tri-
16.0 References angle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA–650/4–
74–005–h. February 1975. 96 pp.
1. Butler, F.E., J.E. Knoll, and M.R.
Midgett. Development and Evaluation of 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
Methods for Determining Carbon Monoxide Validation Data
343
VerDate Nov<24>2008
TABLE 10A–1—DATA RECORDING SHEET FOR SAMPLES ANALYZED IN TRIPLICATE
14:47 Aug 31, 2009

Partial
Reagent pressure
Room Bulb Shaking Abs
Sample Stack Bulb vol. in of Pb,
temp vol. time, versus A-Ar As Avg As
No./type %CO2 No. liters bulb, gas in mm Hg min water
°C liter bulb,
mm Hg
Jkt 217149
blank
PO 00000
Std. 1
Pt. 60, App. A–4, Meth. 10A
Frm 00354
Std. 2
Fmt 8010
344
Sample 1
Sfmt 8002
Sample 2
Y:\SGML\217149.XXX
Sample 3
217149
40 CFR Ch. I (7–1–09 Edition)
TABLE 10A–2—MOISTURE CORRECTION

Vapor Vapor
Temperature
Temperature °C pressure of pressure of
°C
H2O, mm Hg H2, mm Hg
4 ......................................................................................................................... 6.1 18 15.5

6 ......................................................................................................................... 7.0 20 17.5
8 ......................................................................................................................... 8.0 22 19.8
10 ....................................................................................................................... 9.2 24 22.4
12 ....................................................................................................................... 10.5 26 25.2
14 ....................................................................................................................... 12.0 28 28.3
16 ....................................................................................................................... 13.6 30 31.8
345
ER17oc00.231</GPH>
346
ER17oc00.232</GPH>
347
ER17oc00.233</GPH>
METHOD 10B—DETERMINATION OF CARBON from other methods in this part. Therefore,

MONOXIDE EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY to obtain reliable results, persons using this
SOURCES method should have a thorough knowledge of
NOTE: This method is not inclusive with re- ods: Method 1, Method 4, Method 10A, and
spect to specifications (e.g., equipment and Method 25.
supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and
analytical) essential to its performance. 1.0 Scope and Application
Some material is incorporated by reference 1.1 Analytes.
Carbon monoxide (CO) ................................................................... 630–08–0 Not determined.
1.2 Applicability. This method applies to conditioning system to remove inter-

the measurement of CO emissions at petro- ferences, and collected in a Tedlar bag. The
leum refineries and from other sources when CO is separated from the sample by gas chro-
specified in an applicable subpart of the reg- matography (GC) and catalytically reduced
ulations. to methane (CH4) which is determined by
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to flame ionization detection (FID). The ana-
the requirements of this method will en- lytical portion of this method is identical to
hance the quality of the data obtained from applicable sections in Method 25 detailing CO
measurement.
2.1 An integrated gas sample is extracted
from the sampling point, passed through a
348
ER17oc00.234</GPH>
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] (1⁄8-in.) OD stainless steel column packed
with 1.7 m (5.5 ft.) of 60/80 mesh Carbosieve S-
4.0 Interferences II (available from Supelco) has been used
4.1 Carbon dioxide (CO2) and organics po- successfully for this purpose.
tentially can interfere with the analysis. 6.2.2 Reduction Catalyst. Same as in
Most of the CO2 is removed from the sample Method 25, Section 6.3.1.2.
by the alkaline permanganate conditioning 6.2.3 Sample Injection System. Same as in
system; any residual CO2 and organics are Method 25, Section 6.3.1.4, equipped to accept
separated from the CO by GC. a sample line from the Tedlar bag.
6.2.4 Flame Ionization Detector. Meeting
5.0 Safety the linearity specifications of Section 10.3
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve and having a minimal instrument range of 10
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- to 1,000 ppm CO.
ment. This test method may not address all 6.2.5 Data Recording System. Analog strip
of the safety problems associated with its chart recorder or digital integration system,
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this compatible with the FID, for permanently
test method to establish appropriate safety recording the analytical results.
and health practices and determine the ap-
performing this test method. The analyzer 7.1 Sample Collection. Same as in Method
users manual should be consulted for specific 10A, Section 7.1.
precautions concerning the analytical proce- 7.2 Sample Analysis.
dure. 7.2.1 Carrier, Fuel, and Combustion Gases.
Same as in Method 25, Sections 7.2.1, 7.2.2,
6.0 Equipment and Supplies and 7.2.3, respectively.
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as in Method 7.2.2 Calibration Gases. Three standard
10A, Section 6.1. gases with nominal CO concentrations of 20,
6.2 Sample Analysis. A GC/FID analyzer, 200, and 1,000 ppm CO in nitrogen. The cali-
capable of quantifying CO in the sample and bration gases shall be certified by the manu-
consisting of at least the following major facturer to be ±2 percent of the specified con-
components, is required for sample analysis. centrations.
[Alternatively, complete Method 25 analyt- 7.2.3 Reduction Catalyst Efficiency Check
ical systems (Method 25, Section 6.3) are ac- Calibration Gas. Standard CH4 gas with a
ceptable alternatives when calibrated for CO nominal concentration of 1,000 ppm in air.
and operated in accordance with the Method
25 analytical procedures (Method 25, Section 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
11.0).] and Transport
6.2.1 Separation Column. A column capa- Same as in Method 10A, Section 8.0.
ble of separating CO from CO2 and organic
compounds that may be present. A 3.2-mm 9.0 Quality Control
8.0 ................... Sample bag/sampling system leak-checks ...... Ensures that negative bias introduced through leakage is
minimized.
10.1 ................. Carrier gas blank check ................................... Ensures that positive bias introduced by contamination of car-
rier gas is less than 5 ppmv.
10.2 ................. Reduction catalyst efficiency check ................. Ensures that negative bias introduced by inefficient reduction
catalyst is less than 5 percent.
10.3 ................. Analyzer calibration .......................................... Ensures linearity of analyzer response to standards.
11.2 ................. Triplicate sample analyses .............................. Ensures precision of analytical results.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization lyzer. Repeat the procedure using 1,000 ppm
CO gas (Section 7.2.2) with the catalyst in
10.1 Carrier Gas Blank Check. Analyze
operation. The reduction catalyst operation
each new tank of carrier gas with the GC an-
alyzer according to Section 11.2 to check for is acceptable if the CO response is within 5
contamination. The corresponding con- percent of the certified gas value.
centration must be less than 5 ppm for the 10.3 Analyzer Calibration. Perform this
tank to be acceptable for use. test before the system is first placed into op-
10.2 Reduction Catalyst Efficiency Check. eration. With the reduction catalyst in oper-
Prior to initial use, the reduction catalyst ation, conduct a linearity check of the ana-
shall be tested for reduction efficiency. With lyzer using the standards specified in Section
the heated reduction catalyst bypassed, 7.2.2. Make triplicate injections of each cali-
make triplicate injections of the 1,000 ppm bration gas, and then calculate the average
CH4 gas (Section 7.2.3) to calibrate the ana- response factor (area/ppm) for each gas, as
349
well as the overall mean of the response fac- 13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
tor values. The instrument linearity is ac-
ceptable if the average response factor of 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
each calibration gas is within 2.5 percent of
the overall mean value and if the relative
standard deviation (calculated in Section 16.0 References
12.8 of Method 25) for each set of triplicate
injections is less than 2 percent. Record the Same as in Method 25, Section 16.0, with
overall mean of the response factor values as the addition of the following:
the calibration response factor (R). 1. Butler, F.E, J.E. Knoll, and M.R.
Midgett. Development and Evaluation of
11.0 Analytical Procedure Methods for Determining Carbon Monoxide
11.1 Preparation for Analysis. Before put- Emissions. Quality Assurance Division, En-
ting the GC analyzer into routine operation, vironmental Monitoring Systems Labora-
conduct the calibration procedures listed in tory, U.S. Environmental Protection Agen-
Section 10.0. Establish an appropriate carrier cy, Research Triangle Park, NC. June 1985. 33
flow rate and detector temperature for the pp.
specific instrument used.
11.2 Sample Analysis. Purge the sample
Validation Data [Reserved]
loop with sample, and then inject the sam-
ple. Analyze each sample in triplicate, and
[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971]
calculate the average sample area (A). Deter-
mine the bag CO concentration according to EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci-
Section 12.2. tations affecting part 60, appendix A–4, see
the List of CFR Sections Affected, which ap-
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis pears in the Finding Aids section of the
Carry out calculations retaining at least printed volume and on GPO Access.
the acquired data. Round off results only APPENDIX A–5 TO PART 60—TEST
after the final calculation. METHODS 11 THROUGH 15A
12.1 Nomenclature.
A=Average sample area. Method 11—Determination of hydrogen sul-
Bw=Moisture content in the bag sample, frac- fide content of fuel gas streams in petro-
tion. leum refineries
C=CO concentration in the stack gas, dry Method 12—Determination of inorganic lead
basis, ppm. emissions from stationary sources
Cb=CO concentration in the bag sample, dry Method 13A—Determination of total fluoride
basis, ppm. emissions from stationary sources—
F=Volume fraction of CO2 in the stack, frac- SPADNS zirconium lake method
tion. Method 13B—Determination of total fluoride
Pbar=Barometric pressure, mm Hg. emissions from stationary sources—Spe-
Pw=Vapor pressure of the H2O in the bag cific ion electrode method
(from Table 10A–2, Method 10A), mm Hg. Method 14—Determination of fluoride emis-
R=Mean calibration response factor, area/ sions from potroom roof monitors for pri-
ppm. mary aluminum plants
Method 14A—Determination of Total Fluo-
12.2 CO Concentration in the Bag. Cal- ride Emissions from Selected Sources at
culate Cb using Equations 10B–1 and 10B–2. If Primary Aluminum Production Facilities
condensate is visible in the Tedlar bag, cal- Method 15—Determination of hydrogen sul-
culate Bw using Table 10A–2 of Method 10A fide, carbonyl sulfide, and carbon disulfide
and the temperature and barometric pres- emissions from stationary sources
sure in the analysis room. If condensate is Method 15A—Determination of total reduced
not visible, calculate Bw using the tempera- sulfur emissions from sulfur recovery
ture and barometric pressure at the sam- plants in petroleum refineries
pling site. The test methods in this appendix are re-
ferred to in § 60.8 (Performance Tests) and
Pw § 60.11 (Compliance With Standards and
Bw = Eq. 10B-1 Maintenance Requirements) of 40 CFR part
ER17OC00.237</MATH>
Pbar 60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific

uses of these test methods are described in
A the standards of performance contained in
Cb = Eq. 10B-2
R (1 − Bw )
the subparts, beginning with Subpart D.
Within each standard of performance, a

section title ‘‘Test Methods and Procedures’’
ER17OC00.236</MATH>
12.3 CO Concentration in the Stack

is provided to: (1) Identify the test methods
C = C b (1 − F) Eq. 10B- 3 to be used as reference methods to the facil-
ity subject to the respective standard and (2)
350
ER17OC00.235</MATH>
identify any special instructions or condi- ods or deviations from the test methods
tions to be followed when applying a method without obtaining prior approval does so at
to the respective facility. Such instructions the risk of subsequent disapproval and re-
(for example, establish sampling rates, vol- testing with approved methods.
umes, or temperatures) are to be used either Within the test methods, certain specific
in addition to, or as a substitute for proce- equipment or procedures are recognized as
dures in a test method. Similarly, for being acceptable or potentially acceptable
sources subject to emission monitoring re- and are specifically identified in the meth-
quirements, specific instructions pertaining ods. The items identified as acceptable op-
to any use of a test method as a reference tions may be used without approval but
method are provided in the subpart or in Ap- must be identified in the test report. The po-
pendix B. tentially approvable options are cited as
Inclusion of methods in this appendix is ‘‘subject to the approval of the Adminis-
not intended as an endorsement or denial of trator’’ or as ‘‘or equivalent.’’ Such poten-
their applicability to sources that are not tially approvable techniques or alternatives
subject to standards of performance. The may be used at the discretion of the owner
methods are potentially applicable to other without prior approval. However, detailed
sources; however, applicability should be descriptions for applying these potentially
confirmed by careful and appropriate evalua-
approvable techniques or alternatives are
tion of the conditions prevalent at such
not provided in the test methods. Also, the
sources.
potentially approvable options are not nec-
The approach followed in the formulation
of the test methods involves specifications
Therefore, an owner electing to use such po-
tentially approvable techniques or alter-
natives is responsible for: (1) assuring that
proach would be preferable in all methods
the techniques or alternatives are in fact ap-
to the user. In practice, however, this applicable and are properly executed; (2) in-
proach is impractical in most cases because cluding a written description of the alter-
performance specifications cannot be estab- native method in the test report (the written
lished. Most of the methods described herein, method must be clear and must be capable of
therefore, involve specific equipment speci- being performed without additional instruc-
fications and procedures, and only a few tion, and the degree of detail should be simi-
methods in this appendix rely on perform- lar to the detail contained in the test meth-
ance criteria. ods); and (3) providing any rationale or sup-
Minor changes in the test methods should porting data necessary to show the validity
not necessarily affect the validity of the re- of the alternative in the particular applica-
sults and it is recognized that alternative tion. Failure to meet these requirements can
and equivalent methods exist. Section 60.8 result in the Administrator’s disapproval of
provides authority for the Administrator to the alternative.
specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2)
METHOD 11—DETERMINATION OF HYDROGEN
alternative methods, and (3) minor changes
SULFIDE CONTENT OF FUEL GAS STREAMS IN
in the methodology of the test methods. It
PETROLEUM REFINERIES
should be clearly understood that unless oth-
erwise identified all such methods and 1.0 Scope and Application
changes must have prior approval of the Ad-
ministrator. An owner employing such meth- 1.1 Analytes.
Hydrogen sulfide (H2S) .................................................................. 7783–06–4 8 mg/m3—740 mg/m3, (6 ppm—520 ppm).
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- cadmium sulfide (CdS). The latter compound
ble for the determination of the H2S content is then measured iodometrically.
of fuel gas streams at petroleum refineries.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to 3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
air pollutant sampling methods. 4.1 Any compound that reduces iodine (I2)
or oxidizes the iodide ion will interfere in
2.0 Summary of Method this procedure, provided it is collected in the
2.1 A sample is extracted from a source CdSO4 impingers. Sulfur dioxide in con-
and passed through a series of midget centrations of up to 2,600 mg/m3 is removed
impingers containing a cadmium sulfate with an impinger containing a hydrogen per-
(CdSO4) solution; H2S is absorbed, forming oxide (H2O2) solution. Thiols precipitate with
351
H2S. In the absence of H2S, only traces of 6.1.5 Drying Tube. Tube packed with 6- to
thiols are collected. When methane-and eth- 16- mesh indicating-type silica gel, or equiv-
ane-thiols at a total level of 300 mg/m3 are alent, to dry the gas sample and protect the
present in addition to H2S, the results vary meter and pump. If the silica gel has been
from 2 percent low at an H2S concentration used previously, dry at 175 °C (350 °F) for 2
of 400 mg/m3 to 14 percent high at an H2S hours. New silica gel may be used as re-
concentration of 100 mg/m3. Carbonyl sulfide ceived. Alternatively, other types of
at a concentration of 20 percent does not desiccants (equivalent or better) may be
interfere. Certain carbonyl-containing com- used, subject to approval of the Adminis-
pounds react with iodine and produce recur- trator.
ring end points. However, acetaldehyde and NOTE: Do not use more than 30 g of silica
acetone at concentrations of 1 and 3 percent, gel. Silica gel adsorbs gases such as propane
respectively, do not interfere. from the fuel gas stream, and use of exces-
4.2 Entrained H2O2 produces a negative in- sive amounts of silica gel could result in er-
terference equivalent to 100 percent of that rors in the determination of sample volume.
of an equimolar quantity of H2S. Avoid the
ejection of H2O2 into the CdSO4 impingers. 6.1.6 Sampling Valve. Needle valve, or
equivalent, to adjust gas flow rate. Stainless
5.0 Safety steel or other corrosion-resistant material.
6.1.7 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter
(DGM), sufficiently accurate to measure the
sample volume within 2 percent, calibrated
at the selected flow rate (about 1.0 liter/min)
and conditions actually encountered during
sampling. The meter shall be equipped with
a temperature sensor (dial thermometer or
equivalent) capable of measuring tempera-
ture to within 3 °C (5.4 °F). The gas meter
performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following re- should have a petcock, or equivalent, on the
agents are hazardous. Personal protective outlet connector which can be closed during
equipment and safe procedures are useful in the leak-check. Gas volume for one revolu-
preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc- tion of the meter must not be more than 10
curs, immediately flush with copious liters.
amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Re- 6.1.8 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equiva-
move clothing under shower and decontami- lent, to measure flow rates in the range from
nate. Treat residual chemical burns as ther- 0.5 to 2 liters/min (1 to 4 ft3/hr).
mal burns. 6.1.9 Graduated Cylinder. 25-ml size.
5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide. Irritating to 6.1.10 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or
eyes, skin, nose, and lungs. 30% H2O2 is a other barometer capable of measuring at-
strong oxidizing agent. Avoid contact with mospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm Hg (0.1
skin, eyes, and combustible material. Wear in. Hg). In many cases, the barometric read-
gloves when handling. ing may be obtained from a nearby National
5.2.2 Hydrochloric Acid. Highly toxic. Va- Weather Service station, in which case, the
pors are highly irritating to eyes, skin, nose, station value (which is the absolute baro-
and lungs, causing severe damage. May cause metric pressure) shall be requested and an
bronchitis, pneumonia, or edema of lungs. adjustment for elevation differences between
Exposure to concentrations of 0.13 to 0.2 per- the weather station and the sampling point
cent can be lethal in minutes. Will react shall be applied at a rate of minus 2.5 mm Hg
with metals, producing hydrogen. (0.1 in Hg) per 30 m (100 ft) elevation increase
or vice-versa for elevation decrease.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies 6.1.11 U-tube Manometer. 0-; to 30-cm
6.1 Sample Collection. The following water column, for leak-check procedure.
items are needed for sample collection: 6.1.12 Rubber Squeeze Bulb. To pressurize
6.1.1 Sampling Line. Teflon tubing, 6- to train for leak-check.
7- mm (1⁄4-in.) ID, to connect the sampling 6.1.13 Tee, Pinchclamp, and Connecting
train to the sampling valve. Tubing. For leak-check.
6.1.2 Impingers. Five midget impingers, 6.1.14 Pump. Diaphragm pump, or equiva-
each with 30-ml capacity. The internal di- lent. Insert a small surge tank between the
ameter of the impinger tip must be 1 mm pump and rate meter to minimize the pulsa-
±0.05 mm. The impinger tip must be position effect of the diaphragm pump on the
tioned 4 to 6 mm from the bottom of the im- rate meter. The pump is used for the air
pinger. purge at the end of the sample run; the pump

6.1.3 Tubing. Glass or Teflon connecting is not ordinarily used during sampling, be-
tubing for the impingers. cause fuel gas streams are usually suffi-
6.1.4 Ice Water Bath. To maintain absorb- ciently pressurized to force sample gas
ing solution at a low temperature. through the train at the required flow rate.
352
The pump need not be leak-free unless it is 7.1.3 Water. Deionized distilled to conform
used for sampling. to ASTM D 1193–77 or 91, Type 3 (incor-
6.1.15 Needle Valve or Critical Orifice. To porated by reference—see § 60.17). The KMnO4
set air purge flow to 1 liter/min. test for oxidizable organic matter may be
6.1.16 Tube Packed with Active Carbon. omitted when high concentrations of organic
To filter air during purge. matter are not expected to be present.
6.1.17 Volumetric Flask. One 1000-ml. 7.2 Sample Recovery. The following re-
6.1.18 Volumetric Pipette. One 15-ml. agents are needed for sample recovery:
6.1.19 Pressure-Reduction Regulator. De- 7.2.1 Water. Same as Section 7.1.3.
pending on the sampling stream pressure, a 7.2.2 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl) Solution, 3
pressure-reduction regulator may be needed M. Add 240 ml of concentrated HCl (specific
to reduce the pressure of the gas stream en- gravity 1.19) to 500 ml of water in a 1-liter
tering the Teflon sample line to a safe level. volumetric flask. Dilute to 1 liter with
6.1.20 Cold Trap. If condensed water or water. Mix thoroughly.
amine is present in the sample stream, a cor- 7.2.3 Iodine (I2) Solution, 0.1 N. Dissolve 24
rosion-resistant cold trap shall be used im- g of potassium iodide (KI) in 30 ml of water.
mediately after the sample tap. The trap Add 12.7 g of resublimed iodine (I2) to the KI
shall not be operated below 0 °C (32 °F) to solution. Shake the mixture until the I2 is
avoid condensation of C3 or C4 hydrocarbons. completely dissolved. If possible, let the so-
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items lution stand overnight in the dark. Slowly
are needed for sample recovery: dilute the solution to 1 liter with water, with
6.2.1 Sample Container. Iodine flask, swirling. Filter the solution if it is cloudy.
glass-stoppered, 500-ml size. Store solution in a brown-glass reagent bot-
6.2.2 Volumetric Pipette. One 50-ml. tle.
6.2.3 Graduated Cylinders. One each 25- 7.2.4 Standard I2 Solution, 0.01 N. Pipette
and 250-ml. 100.0 ml of the 0.1 N iodine solution into a 1-
6.2.4 Erlenmeyer Flasks. 125-ml. liter volumetric flask, and dilute to volume
6.2.5 Wash Bottle. with water. Standardize daily as in Section
6.2.6 Volumetric Flasks. Three 1000-ml. 10.2.1. This solution must be protected from
6.3 Sample Analysis. The following items light. Reagent bottles and flasks must be
are needed for sample analysis: kept tightly stoppered.
6.3.1 Flask. Glass-stoppered iodine flask, 7.3 Sample Analysis. The following re-
500-ml. agents and standards are needed for sample
6.3.2 Burette. 50-ml. analysis:
6.3.3 Erlenmeyer Flask. 125-ml. 7.3.1 Water. Same as in Section 7.1.3.
6.3.4 Volumetric Pipettes. One 25-ml; two 7.3.2 Standard Sodium Thiosulfate Solu-
each 50- and 100-ml. tion, 0.1 N. Dissolve 24.8 g of sodium
6.3.5 Volumetric Flasks. One 1000-ml; two thiosulfate pentahydrate (Na2S2O3·5H2O) or
500-ml. 15.8 g of anhydrous sodium thiosulfate
6.3.6 Graduated Cylinders. One each 10- (Na2S2O3) in 1 liter of water, and add 0.01 g of
and 100-ml. anhydrous sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) and 0.4
ml of chloroform (CHCl3) to stabilize. Mix
7.0 Reagents and Standards thoroughly by shaking or by aerating with
NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, it is in- nitrogen for approximately 15 minutes, and
tended that all reagents conform to the spec- store in a glass-stoppered, reagent bottle.
ifications established by the Committee on Standardize as in Section 10.2.2.
Analytical Reagents of the American Chem- 7.3.3 Standard Sodium Thiosulfate Solu-
ical Society, where such specifications are tion, 0.01 N. Pipette 50.0 ml of the standard
available. Otherwise, use the best available 0.1 N Na2S2O3 solution into a volumetric
grade. flask, and dilute to 500 ml with water.
7.1 Sample Collection. The following re- NOTE: A 0.01 N phenylarsine oxide
agents are required for sample collection: (C6H5AsO) solution may be prepared instead
7.1.1 CdSO4 Absorbing Solution. Dissolve of 0.01 N Na2S2O3 (see Section 7.3.4).
41 g of 3CdSO48H2O and 15 ml of 0.1 M sulfuric 7.3.4 Standard Phenylarsine Oxide Solu-
acid in a 1-liter volumetric flask that con- tion, 0.01 N. Dissolve 1.80 g of (C6H5AsO) in
tains approximately 3⁄4 liter of water. Dilute 150 ml of 0.3 N sodium hydroxide. After set-
to volume with deionized, distilled water. tling, decant 140 ml of this solution into 800
Mix thoroughly. The pH should be 3 ±0.1. Add ml of water. Bring the solution to pH 6–7
10 drops of Dow-Corning Antifoam B. Shake with 6 N HCl, and dilute to 1 liter with
well before use. This solution is stable for at water. Standardize as in Section 10.2.3.
least one month. If Antifoam B is not used, 7.3.5 Starch Indicator Solution. Suspend
a more labor-intensive sample recovery pro- 10 g of soluble starch in 100 ml of water, and
cedure is required (see Section 11.2). add 15 g of potassium hydroxide (KOH) pel-
7.1.2 Hydrogen Peroxide, 3 Percent. Dilute lets. Stir until dissolved, dilute with 900 ml
30 percent H2O2 to 3 percent as needed. Pre- of water, and let stand for 1 hour. Neutralize
pare fresh daily. the alkali with concentrated HCl, using an
353
indicator paper similar to Alkacid test rib- the sampling train described immediately
bon, then add 2 ml of glacial acetic acid as a above; if performed after the sampling run,
preservative. the pump leak-check should follow the sam-
NOTE: Test starch indicator solution for de- pling train leak-check.
composition by titrating with 0.01 N I2 solu- 8.3 Purge the connecting line between the
tion, 4 ml of starch solution in 200 ml of sampling valve and the first impinger by dis-
water that contains 1 g of KI. If more than 4 connecting the line from the first impinger,
drops of the 0.01 N I2 solution are required to opening the sampling valve, and allowing
obtain the blue color, a fresh solution must process gas to flow through the line for one
be prepared. to two minutes. Then, close the sampling
valve, and reconnect the line to the impinger
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, train. Open the petcock on the dry gas meter
and Transport outlet. Record the initial DGM reading.
8.1 Sampling Train Preparation. Assemble 8.4 Open the sampling valve, and then ad-
the sampling train as shown in Figure 11–1, just the valve to obtain a rate of approxi-
connecting the five midget impingers in se- mately 1 liter/min (0.035 cfm). Maintain a
ries. Place 15 ml of 3 percent H2O2 solution in constant (±10 percent) flow rate during the
the first impinger. Leave the second im- test. Record the DGM temperature.
pinger empty. Place 15 ml of the CdSO4 solu- 8.5 Sample for at least 10 minutes. At the
tion in the third, fourth, and fifth impingers. end of the sampling time, close the sampling
Place the impinger assembly in an ice water valve, and record the final volume and tem-
bath container, and place water and crushed perature readings. Conduct a leak-check as
ice around the impingers. Add more ice dur- described in Section 8.2 above.
ing the run, if needed. 8.6 Disconnect the impinger train from
8.2 Leak-Check Procedure. the sampling line. Connect the charcoal tube
8.2.1 Connect the rubber bulb and manom- and the pump as shown in Figure 11–1. Purge
eter to the first impinger, as shown in Figure the train [at a rate of 1 liter/min (0.035 ft3/
11–1. Close the petcock on the DGM outlet. min)] with clean ambient air for 15 minutes
Pressurize the train to 25 cm water with the to ensure that all H2S is removed from the
bulb, and close off the tubing connected to H2O2. For sample recovery, cap the open
the rubber bulb. The train must hold 25 cm ends, and remove the impinger train to a
water pressure with not more than a 1 cm clean area that is away from sources of heat.
drop in pressure in a 1-minute interval. Stop- The area should be well lighted, but not ex-
cock grease is acceptable for sealing ground posed to direct sunlight.
glass joints. 8.7 Sample Recovery.
8.2.2 If the pump is used for sampling, it is 8.7.1 Discard the contents of the H2O2 im-
recommended, but not required, that the pinger. Carefully rinse with water the con-
pump be leak-checked separately, either tents of the third, fourth, and fifth impingers
prior to or after the sampling run. To leak- into a 500-ml iodine flask.
check the pump, proceed as follows: Dis- NOTE: The impingers normally have only a
connect the drying tube from the impinger thin film of CdS remaining after a water
assembly. Place a vacuum gauge at the inlet rinse. If Antifoam B was not used or if sig-
to either the drying tube or the pump, pull a nificant quantities of yellow CdS remain in
vacuum of 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg), plug or the impingers, the alternative recovery pro-
pinch off the outlet of the flow meter, and cedure in Section 11.2 must be used.
then turn off the pump. The vacuum should 8.7.2 Proceed to Section 11 for the anal-
remain stable for at least 30 seconds. If per- ysis.
formed prior to the sampling run, the pump
leak-check should precede the leak-check of 9.0 Quality Control
8.2, 10.1 .......... Sampling equipment leak-check and calibra- Ensure accurate measurement of sample volume.
tion.
11.2 ................. Replicate titrations of blanks ............................ Ensure precision of titration determinations.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization following components in series: Drying tube,

needle valve, pump, rotameter, and DGM.
NOTE: Maintain a log of all calibrations.
Then, leak-check the metering system as fol-
10.1 Calibration. Calibrate the sample col- lows: Place a vacuum gauge (at least 760 mm
lection equipment as follows. Hg) at the inlet to the drying tube, and pull
10.1.1 Dry Gas Meter. a vacuum of 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg); plug or
10.1.1.1 Initial Calibration. The DGM shall pinch off the outlet of the flow meter, and
be calibrated before its initial use in the then turn off the pump. The vacuum shall re-
field. Proceed as follows: First, assemble the main stable for at least 30 seconds. Carefully
354
release the vacuum gauge before releasing to a 500–ml volumetric flask, dissolve in
the flow meter end. Next, calibrate the DGM water, and dilute to exactly 500 ml. In a 500–
(at the sampling flow rate specified by the ml iodine flask, dissolve approximately 3 g of
method) as follows: Connect an appropriately KI in 45 ml of water, then add 10 ml of 3 M
sized wet-test meter (e.g., 1 liter per revolu- HCl solution. Pipette 50 ml of the dichro-
tion) to the inlet of the drying tube. Make mate solution into this mixture. Gently
three independent calibration runs, using at swirl the contents of the flask once, and
least five revolutions of the DGM per run. allow it to stand in the dark for 5 minutes.
Calculate the calibration factor, Y (wet-test Dilute the solution with 100 to 200 ml of
meter calibration volume divided by the water, washing down the sides of the flask
DGM volume, both volumes adjusted to the with part of the water. Titrate with 0.1 N
same reference temperature and pressure), Na2S2O3 until the solution is light yellow.
for each run, and average the results. If any Add 4 ml of starch indicator and continue
Y value deviates by more than 2 percent titrating slowly to a green end point. Record
from the average, the DGM is unacceptable the volume of Na2S2O3 solution used, VS, in
for use. Otherwise, use the average as the ml. Repeat until replicate values agree with-
calibration factor for subsequent test runs. in 0.05 ml. Calculate the normality using
10.1.1.2 Post-Test Calibration Check. Equation 11–1. Repeat the standardization
After each field test series, conduct a cali- each week or after each test series, which-
bration check as in Section 10.1.1.1, above, ever time is shorter.
except for the following two variations: (a) 10.2.3 Phenylarsine Oxide Solution Stand-
three or more revolutions of the DGM may ardization. Standardize the 0.01 N C6H5AsO
be used and (b) only two independent runs (if applicable) as follows: Oven-dry K2Cr2O7
need be made. If the calibration factor does at 180 to 200 °C (360 to 390 °F). To the nearest
not deviate by more than 5 percent from the milligram, weigh 2 g of the dichromate (W).
initial calibration factor (determined in Sec- Transfer the dichromate to a 500–ml volu-
tion 10.1.1.1), then the DGM volumes ob- metric flask, dissolve in water, and dilute to
tained during the test series are acceptable. exactly 500 ml. In a 500–ml iodine flask, dis-
If the calibration factor deviates by more solve approximately 0.3 g of KI in 45 ml of
than 5 percent, recalibrate the DGM as in water, then add 10 ml of 3 M HCl. Pipette 5
Section 10.1.1.1, and for the calculations, use ml of the dichromate solution into the iodine
the calibration factor (initial or recalibra- flask. Gently swirl the contents of the flask
tion) that yields the lower gas volume for once, and allow it to stand in the dark for 5
each test run. minutes. Dilute the solution with 100 to 200
10.1.2 Temperature Sensors. Calibrate ml of water, washing down the sides of the
against mercury-in-glass thermometers. flask with part of the water. Titrate with
10.1.3 Rate Meter. The rate meter need 0.01 N C6H5AsO until the solution is light yel-
not be calibrated, but should be cleaned and low. Add 4 ml of starch indicator, and con-
maintained according to the manufacturer’s tinue titrating slowly to a green end point.
instructions. Record the volume of C6H5AsO used, VA, in
10.1.4 Barometer. Calibrate against a mer- ml. Repeat until replicate analyses agree
cury barometer. within 0.05 ml. Calculate the normality using
10.2 Standardization. Equation 11–2. Repeat the standardization
10.2.1 Iodine Solution Standardization. each week or after each test series, which-
Standardize the 0.01 N I2 solution daily as ever time is shorter.
follows: Pipette 25 ml of the I2 solution into
a 125-ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 2 ml of 3 M 11.0 Analytical Procedure
HCl. Titrate rapidly with standard 0.01 N Conduct the titration analyses in a clean
Na2S2O3 solution or with 0.01 N C6H5AsO area away from direct sunlight.
until the solution is light yellow, using 11.1 Pipette exactly 50 ml of 0.01 N I2 solu-
gentle mixing. Add four drops of starch indi- tion into a 125-ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 10
cator solution, and continue titrating slowly ml of 3 M HCl to the solution. Quantitatively
until the blue color just disappears. Record rinse the acidified I2 into the iodine flask.
the volume of Na2S2O3 solution used, VSI, or Stopper the flask immediately, and shake
the volume of C6H5AsO solution used, VAI, in briefly.
ml. Repeat until replicate values agree with- 11.2 Use these alternative procedures if
in 0.05 ml. Average the replicate titration Antifoam B was not used or if significant
values which agree within 0.05 ml, and cal- quantities of yellow CdS remain in the
culate the exact normality of the I2 solution impingers. Extract the remaining CdS from
using Equation 11–3. Repeat the standardiza- the third, fourth, and fifth impingers using
tion daily. the acidified I2 solution. Immediately after
10.2.2 Sodium Thiosulfate Solution Stand- pouring the acidified I2 into an impinger,
ardization. Standardize the 0.1 N Na2S2O3 so- stopper it and shake for a few moments, then
lution as follows: Oven-dry potassium di- transfer the liquid to the iodine flask. Do not
chromate (K2Cr2O7) at 180 to 200 °C (360 to 390 transfer any rinse portion from one impinger
°F). To the nearest milligram, weigh 2 g of to another; transfer it directly to the iodine
the dichromate (W). Transfer the dichromate flask. Once the acidified I2 solution has been
355
poured into any glassware containing CdS, Pbar=Barometric pressure at the sampling
the container must be tightly stoppered at site, mm Hg.
all times except when adding more solution, Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg.
and this must be done as quickly and care- Tm=Average DGM temperature, °K.
fully as possible. After adding any acidified Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K.
I2 solution to the iodine flask, allow a few
VA=Volume of C6H5AsO solution used for
minutes for absorption of the H2S before add-
standardization, ml.
ing any further rinses. Repeat the I2 extrac-
tion until all CdS is removed from the VAI=Volume of standard C6H5AsO solution
impingers. Extract that part of the con- used for titration analysis, ml.
necting glassware that contains visible CdS. VI=Volume of standard I2 solution used for
Quantitatively rinse all the I2 from the standardization, ml.
impingers, connectors, and the beaker into VIT=Volume of standard I2 solution used for
the iodine flask using water. Stopper the titration analysis, normally 50 ml.
flask and shake briefly. Vm=Volume of gas sample at meter condi-
11.3 Allow the iodine flask to stand about tions, liters.
30 minutes in the dark for absorption of the Vm(std)=Volume of gas sample at standard con-
H2S into the I2, then complete the titration ditions, liters.
analysis as outlined in Sections 11.5 and 11.6. VSI=Volume of ‘‘0.1 N Na2S2O3 solution used
NOTE: Iodine evaporates from acidified I2 for standardization, ml.
solutions. Samples to which acidified I2 has VT=Volume of standard (ù0.01 N) Na2S2O3 so-
been added may not be stored, but must be lution used in standardizing iodine solu-
analyzed in the time schedule stated above. tion (see Section 10.2.1), ml.
11.4 Prepare a blank by adding 45 ml of VTT=Volume of standard (∼0.01 N) Na2S2O3 so-
CdSO4 absorbing solution to an iodine flask. lution used for titration analysis, ml.
Pipette exactly 50 ml of 0.01 N I2 solution W=Weight of K2Cr2O7 used to standardize
into a 125-ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 10 ml of Na2s2O3 or C6H5AsO solutions, as applicable
3 M HCl. Stopper the flask, shake briefly, let (see Sections 10.2.2 and 10.2.3), g.
stand 30 minutes in the dark, and titrate Y=DGM calibration factor.
with the samples. 12.2 Normality of the Standard (ù0.1 N) So-
NOTE: The blank must be handled by ex- dium Thiosulfate Solution.
actly the same procedure as that used for the
samples. 2.039 W
11.5 Using 0.01 N Na2S2O3 solution (or 0.01 NS = Eq. 11-1
N C6H5AsO, if applicable), rapidly titrate VS
each sample in an iodine flask using gentle Where:
mixing, until solution is light yellow. Add 4
2.039=Conversion factor
ml of starch indicator solution, and continue
titrating slowly until the blue color just dis- =(6 g-eq I2/mole K2Cr2O7) (1,000 ml/liter)/
appears. Record the volume of Na2S2O3 solu- (294.2 g K2Cr2O7/mole) (10 aliquot factor)
tion used, VTT, or the volume of C6H5AsO so- 12.3 Normality of Standard Phenylarsine
lution used, VAT, in ml. Oxide Solution (if applicable).
11.6 Titrate the blanks in the same man-
ner as the samples. Run blanks each day 0.2039 W
until replicate values agree within 0.05 ml. NA = Eq. 11-2
Average the replicate titration values which VA
agree within 0.05 ml.
Where:
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations 0.2039=Conversion factor.
=(6 g-eq I2/mole K2Cr2O7) (1,000 ml/liter)/
one extra significant figure beyond that of (294.2 g K2Cr2O7/mole) (100 aliquot factor)
the acquired data. Round off figures only 12.4 Normality of Standard Iodine Solu-
after the final calculation. tion.
12.1 Nomenclature.
N T VT
CH2S=Concentration of H2S at standard condi- NI = Eq. 11-3
tions, mg/dscm. VI
ER17oc00.240</MATH>
NA=Normality of standard C6H5AsO solution,

g-eq/liter. NOTE: If C6H5AsO is used instead of
NI=Normality of standard I2 solution, g-eq/ Na2S2O3, replace NT and VT in Equation 11–3
with NA and VAS, respectively (see Sections
liter.
NS=Normality of standard (ù0.1 N) Na2S2O3 10.2.1 and 10.2.3).
ER17oc00.239</MATH>
solution, g-eq/liter. 12.5 Dry Gas Volume. Correct the sample

NT=Normality of standard (ù0.01 N) Na2S2O3 volume measured by the DGM to standard
solution, assumed to be 0.1 NS, g-eq/liter. conditions (20 °C and 760 mm Hg).
356
ER17oc00.238</MATH>
12.6 Concentration of H2S. Calculate the
T P concentration of H2S in the gas stream at
Vm (std ) = Vm Y std bar Eq. 11-4 standard conditions using Equation 11–5:
Tm Pstd
(VIT N I − VTT N T )sample − (VIT N I − VTT N T )blank

C H 2S = 17.04 × 10 3 Eq. 11-5
Vm (std )
Where: Method 772–54. In: Manual on Disposal of Re-

17.04 × 103=Conversion factor finery Wastes, Vol. V: Sampling and Anal-
=(34.07 g/mole H2S) (1,000 liters/m3) ysis of Waste Gases and Particulate Matter.
(1,000mg/g)/(1,000 ml/liter) (2H2S eq/mole) American Petroleum Institute, Washington,
NOTE: If C6H5AsO is used instead of D.C. 1954.
NaS22O3, replace NA and VAT in Equation 11– 2. Tentative Method of Determination of
5 with NA and VAT, respectively (see Sections Hydrogen Sulfide and Mercaptan Sulfur in
11.5 and 10.2.3). Natural Gas. Natural Gas Processors Asso-
ciation, Tulsa, OK. NGPA Publication No.
13.0 Method Performance 2265–65. 1965.
13.1 Precision. Collaborative testing has 3. Knoll, J.D., and M.R. Midgett. Deter-
shown the intra-laboratory precision to be mination of Hydrogen Sulfide in Refinery
2.2 percent and the inter-laboratory preci- Fuel Gases. Environmental Monitoring Se-
sion to be 5 percent. ries, Office of Research and Development,
13.2 Bias. The method bias was shown to USEPA. Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.
be ¥4.8 percent when only H2S was present. EPA 600/4–77–007.
In the presence of the interferences cited in
4. Scheil, G.W., and M.C. Sharp. Standard-
Section 4.0, the bias was positive at low H2S
ization of Method 11 at a Petroleum Refin-
concentration and negative at higher con-
centrations. At 230 mg H2S/m3, the level of ery. Midwest Research Institute Draft Re-
the compliance standard, the bias was +2.7 port for USEPA. Office of Research and De-
percent. Thiols had no effect on the preci- velopment. Research Triangle Park, NC
sion. 27711. EPA Contract No. 68–02–1098. August
1976. EPA 600/4–77–088a (Volume 1) and EPA
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] 600/4–77–088b (Volume 2).
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
Validation Data
16.0 References
1. Determination of Hydrogen Sulfide, Am-
moniacal Cadmium Chloride Method. API
ER17oc00.242</MATH>
357
ER17oc00.241</MATH>
METHOD 12—DETERMINATION OF INORGANIC tain reliable results, persons using this

LEAD EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY SOURCES method should have a thorough knowledge of
Method 5.

other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob- 1.1 Analytes.
358
ER17oc00.243</GPH>
Inorganic Lead Compounds as lead (Pb) ....................................... 7439–92–1 see Section 13.3.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- Reaction to inhalation may be delayed as

ble for the determination of inorganic lead long as 30 hours and still be fatal. Provide
emissions from stationary sources, only as ventilation to limit exposure. Strong oxi-
specified in an applicable subpart of the reg- dizer. Hazardous reaction may occur with or-
ulations. ganic materials such as solvents.
the requirements of this method will en- 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. A schematic of the
2.0 Summary of Method od is shown in Figure 12–1 in Section 18.0; it
is similar to the Method 5 train. The fol-
2.1 Particulate and gaseous Pb emissions lowing items are needed for sample collec-
are withdrawn isokinetically from the source tion:
and are collected on a filter and in dilute ni- 6.1.1 Probe Nozzle, Probe Liner, Pitot
tric acid. The collected samples are digested Tube, Differential Pressure Gauge, Filter
in acid solution and are analyzed by atomic Holder, Filter Heating System, Temperature
absorption spectrophotometry using an air/ Sensor, Metering System, Barometer, and
acetylene flame. Gas Density Determination Equipment.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] Same as Method 5, Sections 6.1.1.1 through
6.1.1.7, 6.1.1.9, 6.1.2, and 6.1.3, respectively.
4.0 Interferences 6.1.2 Impingers. Four impingers connected
in series with leak-free ground glass fittings
4.1 Copper. High concentrations of copper
or any similar leak-free noncontaminating
may interfere with the analysis of Pb at 217.0
fittings are needed. For the first, third, and
nm. This interference can be avoided by ana-
fourth impingers, use the Greenburg-Smith
lyzing the samples at 283.3 nm.
4.2 Matrix Effects. Analysis for Pb by design, modified by replacing the tip with a
flame atomic absorption spectrophotometry 1.3 cm (1⁄2 in.) ID glass tube extending to
is sensitive to the chemical composition and about 1.3 cm (1⁄2 in.) from the bottom of the
to the physical properties (e.g., viscosity, pH) flask. For the second impinger, use the
of the sample. The analytical procedure re- Greenburg-Smith design with the standard
quires the use of the Method of Standard Ad- tip.
ditions to check for these matrix effects, and 6.1.3 Temperature Sensor. Place a tem-
requires sample analysis using the Method of perature sensor, capable of measuring tem-
Standard Additions if significant matrix ef- perature to within 1 °C (2 °F) at the outlet of
fects are found to be present. the fourth impinger for monitoring purposes.
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items
5.0 Safety are needed for sample recovery:
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve 6.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brush-
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- es, Petri Dishes, Graduated Cylinder and/or
ment. This test method may not address all Balance, Plastic Storage Containers, and
of the safety problems associated with its Funnel and Rubber Policeman. Same as
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this Method 5, Sections 6.2.1 and 6.2.4 through
test method to establish appropriate safety 6.2.7, respectively.
and health practices and to determine the 6.2.2 Wash Bottles. Glass (2).
applicability of regulatory limitations prior 6.2.3 Sample Storage Containers. Chemi-
to performing this test method. cally resistant, borosilicate glass bottles, for
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following re- 0.1 N nitric acid (HNO3) impinger and probe
agents are hazardous. Personal protective solutions and washes, 1000-ml. Use screw-cap
equipment and safe procedures are useful in liners that are either rubber-backed Teflon
preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc- or leak-free and resistant to chemical attack
curs, immediately flush with copious by 0.1 N HNO3. (Narrow mouth glass bottles
amounts of water at least 15 minutes. Re- have been found to be less prone to leakage.)
move clothing under shower and decontami- 6.2.4 Funnel. Glass, to aid in sample re-
nate. Treat residual chemical burn as ther- covery.
mal burn. 6.3 Sample Analysis. The following items
5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating are needed for sample analysis:
to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs. 6.3.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrophotom-
5.2.2 Nitric Acid (HNO3). Highly corrosive eter. With lead hollow cathode lamp and
to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs. Vapors cause burner for air/acetylene flame.
bronchitis, pneumonia, or edema of lungs. 6.3.2 Hot Plate.
359
6.3.3 Erlenmeyer Flasks. 125-ml, 24/40 with water. These working standards contain
standard taper. 0.0, 4.0, 8.0, 12.0, 16.0, and 20.0 μg Pb/ml, re-
6.3.4 Membrane Filters. Millipore SCWPO spectively. Prepare, as needed, additional
4700, or equivalent. standards at other concentrations in a simi-
6.3.5 Filtration Apparatus. Millipore vac- lar manner.
uum filtration unit, or equivalent, for use 7.3.6 Air. Suitable quality for atomic ab-
with the above membrane filter. sorption spectrophotometry.
6.3.6 Volumetric Flasks. 100-ml, 250-ml, 7.3.7 Acetylene. Suitable quality for
and 1000-ml. atomic absorption spectrophotometry.
7.3.8 Hydrogen Peroxide, 3 Percent (v/v).
7.0 Reagents and Standards Dilute 10 ml of 30 percent H2O2 to 100 ml with
NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, it is in- water.
tended that all reagents conform to the spec- 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
ifications established by the Committee on and Transport
Analytical Reagents of the American Chem-
ical Society, where such specifications are 8.1 Pretest Preparation. Follow the same
available; otherwise, use the best available general procedure given in Method 5, Section
grade. 8.1, except that the filter need not be
weighed.
7.1 Sample Collection. The following re-
8.2 Preliminary Determinations. Follow
agents are needed for sample collection:
the same general procedure given in Method
7.1.1 Filter. Gelman Spectro Grade, Reeve
5, Section 8.2.
Angel 934 AH, MSA 1106 BH, all with lot
8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. Follow
assay for Pb, or other high-purity glass fiber
the same general procedure given in Method
filters, without organic binder, exhibiting at
5, Section 8.3, except place 100 ml of 0.1 N
least 99.95 percent efficiency (<0.05 percent
HNO3 (instead of water) in each of the first
penetration) on 0.3 micron dioctyl phthalate two impingers. As in Method 5, leave the
smoke particles. Conduct the filter effi- third impinger empty and transfer approxi-
ciency test using ASTM D 2986–71, 78, or 95a mately 200 to 300 g of preweighed silica gel
(incorporated by reference—see § 60.17) or use from its container to the fourth impinger.
test data from the supplier’s quality control Set up the train as shown in Figure 12–1.
program. 8.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Same as
7.1.2 Silica Gel, Crushed Ice, and Stopcock Method 5, Section 8.4.
Grease. Same as Method 5, Sections 7.1.2, 8.5 Sampling Train Operation. Same as
7.1.4, and 7.1.5, respectively. Method 5, Section 8.5.
7.1.3 Water. Deionized distilled, to con- 8.6 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic.
form to ASTM D 1193–77 or 91, Type 3 (incor- Same as Method 5, Section 8.6.
porated by reference—see § 60.17). If high con- 8.7 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5,
centrations of organic matter are not ex- Sections 8.7.1 through 8.7.6.1, with the addi-
pected to be present, the potassium per- tion of the following:
manganate test for oxidizable organic mat- 8.7.1 Container No. 2 (Probe).
ter may be omitted. 8.7.1.1 Taking care that dust on the out-
7.1.4 Nitric Acid, 0.1 N. Dilute 6.5 ml of side of the probe or other exterior surfaces
concentrated HNO3 to 1 liter with water. (It does not get into the sample, quantitatively
may be desirable to run blanks before field recover sample matter and any condensate
use to eliminate a high blank on test sam- from the probe nozzle, probe fitting, probe
ples.) liner, and front half of the filter holder by
7.2 Sample Recovery. 0.1 N HNO3 (Same as washing these components with 0.1 N HNO3
in Section 7.1.4 above). and placing the wash into a glass sample
7.3 Sample Analysis. The following re- storage container. Measure and record (to
agents and standards are needed for sample the nearest 2 ml) the total amount of 0.1 N
analysis: HNO3 used for these rinses. Perform the 0.1 N
7.3.1 Water. Same as in Section 7.1.3. HNO3 rinses as follows:
7.3.2 Nitric Acid, Concentrated. 8.7.1.2 Carefully remove the probe nozzle,
7.3.3 Nitric Acid, 50 Percent (v/v). Dilute and rinse the inside surfaces with 0.1 N HNO3
500 ml of concentrated HNO3 to 1 liter with from a wash bottle while brushing with a
water. stainless steel, Nylon-bristle brush. Brush
7.3.4 Stock Lead Standard Solution, 1000 until the 0.1 N HNO3 rinse shows no visible
μg Pb/ml. Dissolve 0.1598 g of lead nitrate particles, then make a final rinse of the in-
[Pb(NO3)2] in about 60 ml water, add 2 ml side surface with 0.1 N HNO3.
concentrated HNO3, and dilute to 100 ml with 8.7.1.3 Brush and rinse with 0.1 N HNO3
water. the inside parts of the Swagelok fitting in a
7.3.5 Working Lead Standards. Pipet 0.0, similar way until no visible particles re-
1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, and 5.0 ml of the stock lead main.
standard solution (Section 7.3.4) into 250-ml 8.7.1.4 Rinse the probe liner with 0.1 N
volumetric flasks. Add 5 ml of concentrated HNO3. While rotating the probe so that all
HNO3 to each flask, and dilute to volume inside surfaces will be rinsed with 0.1 N
360
HNO3, tilt the probe, and squirt 0.1 N HNO3 8.7.3 Container No. 4 (Impingers). Due to
into its upper end. Let the 0.1 N HNO3 drain the large quantity of liquid involved, the im-
from the lower end into the sample con- pinger solutions may be placed in several
tainer. A glass funnel may be used to aid in containers. Clean each of the first three
transferring liquid washes to the container. impingers and connecting glassware in the
Follow the rinse with a probe brush. Hold the following manner:
probe in an inclined position, squirt 0.1 N 8.7.3.1. Wipe the impinger ball joints free
HNO3 into the upper end of the probe as the of silicone grease, and cap the joints.
probe brush is being pushed with a twisting 8.7.3.2. Rotate and agitate each impinger,
action through the probe; hold the sample so that the impinger contents might serve as
container underneath the lower end of the a rinse solution.
probe, and catch any 0.1 N HNO3 and sample 8.7.3.3. Transfer the contents of the
matter that is brushed from the probe. Run impingers to a 500-ml graduated cylinder.
the brush through the probe three times or Remove the outlet ball joint cap, and drain
more until no visible sample matter is car- the contents through this opening. Do not
ried out with the 0.1 N HNO3 and none re- separate the impinger parts (inner and outer
mains on the probe liner on visual inspec- tubes) while transferring their contents to
tion. With stainless steel or other metal the cylinder. Measure the liquid volume to
probes, run the brush through in the above within 2 ml. Alternatively, determine the
prescribed manner at least six times, since weight of the liquid to within 0.5 g. Record in
metal probes have small crevices in which the log the volume or weight of the liquid
sample matter can be entrapped. Rinse the present, along with a notation of any color
brush with 0.1 N HNO3, and quantitatively or film observed in the impinger catch. The
collect these washings in the sample con- liquid volume or weight is needed, along
tainer. After the brushing, make a final rinse with the silica gel data, to calculate the
of the probe as described above. stack gas moisture content (see Method 5,
8.7.1.5 It is recommended that two people Figure 5–6).
clean the probe to minimize loss of sample. 8.7.3.4. Transfer the contents to Container
Between sampling runs, keep brushes clean No. 4.
and protected from contamination. NOTE: In Sections 8.7.3.5 and 8.7.3.6, meas-
8.7.1.6 After ensuring that all joints are ure and record the total amount of 0.1 N
wiped clean of silicone grease, brush and HNO3 used for rinsing.
rinse with 0.1 N HNO3 the inside of the from 8.7.3.5. Pour approximately 30 ml of 0.1 N
half of the filter holder. Brush and rinse each HNO3 into each of the first three impingers
surface three times or more, if needed, to re- and agitate the impingers. Drain the 0.1 N
move visible sample matter. Make a final HNO3 through the outlet arm of each im-
rinse of the brush and filter holder. After all pinger into Container No. 4. Repeat this op-
0.1 N HNO3 washings and sample matter are eration a second time; inspect the impingers
collected in the sample container, tighten for any abnormal conditions.
the lid on the sample container so that the 8.7.3.6. Wipe the ball joints of the glass-
fluid will not leak out when it is shipped to ware connecting the impingers free of sili-
the laboratory. Mark the height of the fluid cone grease and rinse each piece of glassware
level to determine whether leakage occurs twice with 0.1 N HNO3; transfer this rinse
during transport. Label the container to into Container No. 4. Do not rinse or brush
identify its contents clearly. the glass-fritted filter support. Mark the
8.7.2 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). Note the height of the fluid level to determine wheth-
color of the indicating silica gel to deter- er leakage occurs during transport. Label
mine if it has been completely spent, and the container to identify its contents clear-
make a notation of its condition. Transfer ly.
the silica gel from the fourth impinger to the 8.8 Blanks.
original container, and seal. A funnel may be 8.8.1 Nitric Acid. Save 200 ml of the 0.1 N
used to pour the silica gel from the impinger HNO3 used for sampling and cleanup as a
and a rubber policeman may be used to re- blank. Take the solution directly from the
move the silica gel from the impinger. It is bottle being used and place into a glass sam-
not necessary to remove the small amount of ple container labeled ‘‘0.1 N HNO3 blank.’’
particles that may adhere to the walls and 8.8.2 Filter. Save two filters from each lot
are difficult to remove. Since the gain in of filters used in sampling. Place these fil-
weight is to be used for moisture calcula- ters in a container labeled ‘‘filter blank.’’
tions, do not use any water or other liquids
9.0 Quality Control
to transfer the silica gel. If a balance is
available in the field, follow the procedure 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
for Container No. 3 in Section 11.4.2. ures.
361
8.4, 10.1 ............................. Sampling equipment leak-checks and Ensure accuracy and precision of sampling measure-
calibration. ments.
standards.
11.5 .................................... Check for matrix effects ........................... Eliminate matrix effects.
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. total weight of particulate sample collected.
Same as Method 5, Section 9.2. Next, transfer the residue from Containers
No. 2 and No. 4 to the 125-ml Erlenmeyer
10.0 Calibration and Standardizations flask that contains the sampling filter using
NOTE: Maintain a laboratory log of all cali- a rubber policeman and 10 ml of 50 percent
brations. HNO3 for every 100 mg of sample collected in
the train or a minimum of 30 ml of 50 percent
10.1 Sampling Equipment. Same as Meth- HNO3, whichever is larger.
od 5, Section 10.0. 11.2.3.2 Place the Erlenmeyer flask on a
10.2 Spectrophotometer. hot plate, and heat with periodic stirring for
10.2.1 Measure the absorbance of the 30 minutes at a temperature just below boil-
standard solutions using the instrument set- ing. If the sample volume falls below 15 ml,
tings recommended by the spectrophotom- add more 50 percent HNO3. Add 10 ml of 3 per-
eter manufacturer. Repeat until good agree- cent H2O2, and continue heating for 10 min-
ment (±3 percent) is obtained between two utes. Add 50 ml of hot (80 °C, 176 °F) water,
consecutive readings. Plot the absorbance (y- and heat for 20 minutes. Remove the flask
axis) versus concentration in μg Pb/ml (x- from the hot plate, and allow to cool. Filter
axis). Draw or compute a straight line the sample through a Millipore membrane
through the linear portion of the curve. Do filter, or equivalent, and transfer the filtrate
not force the calibration curve through zero, to a 250-ml volumetric flask. Dilute to vol-
but if the curve does not pass through the or- ume with water.
igin or at least lie closer to the origin than 11.2.4 Filter Blank. Cut each filter into
±0.003 absorbance units, check for incorrectly strips, and place each filter in a separate 125-
prepared standards and for curvature in the ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 15 ml of 50 percent
calibration curve. HNO3, and treat as described in Section 11.2.3
10.2.2 To determine stability of the cali- using 10 ml of 3 percent H2O2 and 50 ml of hot
bration curve, run a blank and a standard water. Filter and dilute to a total volume of
after every five samples, and recalibrate as 100 ml using water.
necessary. 11.2.5 Nitric Acid Blank, 0.1 N. Take the
entire 200 ml of 0.1 N HNO3 to dryness on a
11.0 Analytical Procedures steam bath, add 15 ml of 50 percent HNO3,
11.1 Sample Loss Check. Prior to analysis, and treat as described in Section 11.2.3 using
check the liquid level in Containers Number 10 ml of 3 percent H202 and 50 ml of hot
2 and Number 4. Note on the analytical data water. Dilute to a total volume of 100 ml
sheet whether leakage occurred during using water.
transport. If a noticeable amount of leakage 11.3 Spectrophotometer Preparation.
occurred, either void the sample or take Turn on the power; set the wavelength, slit
steps, subject to the approval of the Admin- width, and lamp current; and adjust the
istrator, to adjust the final results. background corrector as instructed by the
11.2 Sample Preparation. manufacturer’s manual for the particular
11.2.1 Container No. 1 (Filter). Cut the fil- atomic absorption spectrophotometer. Ad-
just the burner and flame characteristics as
ter into strips and transfer the strips and all
necessary.
loose particulate matter into a 125-ml Erlen-
11.4 Analysis.
meyer flask. Rinse the petri dish with 10 ml
11.4.1 Lead Determination. Calibrate the
of 50 percent HNO3 to ensure a quantitative
spectrophotometer as outlined in Section
transfer, and add to the flask.
10.2, and determine the absorbance for each
NOTE: If the total volume required in Sec- source sample, the filter blank, and 0.1 N
tion 11.2.3 is expected to exceed 80 ml, use a HNO3 blank. Analyze each sample three
250-ml flask in place of the 125-ml flask. times in this manner. Make appropriate dilu-
11.2.2 Containers No. 2 and No. 4 (Probe tions, as needed, to bring all sample Pb con-
and Impingers). Combine the contents of centrations into the linear absorbance range
Containers No. 2 and No. 4, and evaporate to of the spectrophotometer. Because instru-
dryness on a hot plate. ments vary between manufacturers, no de-

11.2.3 Sample Extraction for Lead. tailed operating instructions will be given
11.2.3.1 Based on the approximate stack here. Instead, the instructions provided with
gas particulate concentration and the total the particular instrument should be fol-
volume of stack gas sampled, estimate the lowed. If the Pb concentration of a sample is
362
at the low end of the calibration curve and the average sampling rate, whichever is
high accuracy is required, the sample can be less.
taken to dryness on a hot plate and the res- Li=Individual leakage rate observed during
idue dissolved in the appropriate volume of the leak-check conducted prior to the
water to bring it into the optimum range of ‘‘ith’’ component change (i=1, 2, 3 * * * n),
the calibration curve. m3/min (cfm).
11.4.2 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). This Lp=Leakage rate observed during the post-
step may be conducted in the field. Weigh test leak-check, m3/min (cfm).
the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus im- mt=Total weight of lead collected in the sam-
pinger) to the nearest 0.5 g; record this ple, μg.
weight. Mw=Molecular weight of water, 18.0 g/g-mole
11.5 Check for Matrix Effects. Use the (18.0 lb/lb-mole).
Method of Standard Additions as follows to Pbar=Barometric pressure at the sampling
check at least one sample from each source site, mm Hg (in. Hg).
for matrix effects on the Pb results: Ps=Absolute stack gas pressure, mm Hg (in.
11.5.1 Add or spike an equal volume of Hg).
standard solution to an aliquot of the sample Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg
solution. (29.92 in. Hg).
11.5.2 Measure the absorbance of the re- R=Ideal gas constant, 0.06236 [(mm Hg) (m3)]/
sulting solution and the absorbance of an ali- [(°K) (g-mole)] {21.85 [(in. Hg) (ft3)]/[(°R) (lb-
quot of unspiked sample. mole)]}.
11.5.3 Calculate the Pb concentration Cm Tm=Absolute average dry gas meter tempera-
in μg/ml of the sample solution using Equa- ture (see Figure 5–3 of Method 5), °K (°R).
tion 12–1 in Section 12.5. Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K
Volume corrections will not be required if (528 °R).
the solutions as analyzed have been made to vs=Stack gas velocity, m/sec (ft/sec).
the same final volume. Therefore, Cm and Ca Vm=Volume of gas sample as measured by
represent Pb concentration before dilutions. the dry gas meter, dry basis, m3 (ft3).
Method of Standard Additions procedures Vm(std)=Volume of gas sample as measured by
the dry gas meter, corrected to standard
described on pages 9–4 and 9–5 of the section
conditions, m3 (ft3).
entitled ‘‘General Information’’ of the
Vw(std)=Volume of water vapor collected in
Perkin Elmer Corporation Atomic Absorp-
the sampling train, corrected to standard
tion Spectrophotometry Manual, Number
conditions, m3 (ft3).
303–0152 (Reference 1 in Section 17.0) may
Y=Dry gas meter calibration factor.
also be used. In any event, if the results of
DH=Average pressure differential across the
the Method of Standard Additions procedure orifice meter (see Figure 5–3 of Method 5),
used on the single source sample do not mm H2O (in. H2O).
agree to within ±5 percent of the value ob- q=Total sampling time, min.
tained by the routine atomic absorption ql=Sampling time interval, from the begin-
analysis, then reanalyze all samples from the ning of a run until the first component
source using the Method of Standard Addi- change, min.
tions procedure. qi=Sampling time interval, between two suc-
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations cessive component changes, beginning with
the interval between the first and second
12.1 Nomenclature. changes, min.
Am=Absorbance of the sample solution. qp=Sampling time interval, from the final
An=Cross-sectional area of nozzle, m2 (ft2). (nth) component change until the end of
At=Absorbance of the spiked sample solution. the sampling run, min.
Bws=Water in the gas stream, proportion by rw=Density of water, 0.9982 g/ml (0.002201 lb/
volume. ml).
Ca=Lead concentration in standard solution, 12.2 Average Dry Gas Meter Temperatures
μg/ml. (Tm) and Average Orifice Pressure Drop (DH).
Cm=Lead concentration in sample solution See data sheet (Figure 5–3 of Method 5).
analyzed during check for matrix effects, 12.3 Dry Gas Volume, Volume of Water
μg/ml. Vapor, and Moisture Content. Using data ob-
Cs=Lead concentration in stack gas, dry tained in this test, calculate Vm(std), Vw(std),
basis, converted to standard conditions, and Bws according to the procedures outlined
mg/dscm (gr/dscf). in Method 5, Sections 12.3 through 12.5.
I=Percent of isokinetic sampling. 12.4 Total Lead in Source Sample. For
L1=Individual leakage rate observed during each source sample, correct the average ab-
the leak-check conducted prior to the first sorbance for the contribution of the filter
component change, m3/min (ft3/min) blank and the 0.1 N HNO3 blank. Use the cali-
La=Maximum acceptable leakage rate for ei- bration curve and this corrected absorbance
ther a pretest leak-check or for a leak- to determine the Pb concentration in the
check following a component change; equal sample aspirated into the spectrophotom-
to 0.00057 m3/min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of eter. Calculate the total Pb content mt (in
363
μg) in the original source sample; correct for 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
all the dilutions that were made to bring the
Pb concentration of the sample into the lin- 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
ear range of the spectrophotometer. 16.0 Alternative Procedures
12.5 Sample Lead Concentration. Cal-
culate the Pb concentration of the sample 16.1 Simultaneous Determination of Par-
using the following equation: ticulate and Lead Emissions. Method 5 may
be used to simultaneously determine Pb pro-
vided: (1) acetone is used to remove particu-
Am
C m = Ca Eq. 12-1 late from the probe and inside of the filter
At − Am holder as specified by Method 5, (2) 0.1 N
HNO3 is used in the impingers, (3) a glass
12.6 Lead Concentration. Calculate the fiber filter with a low Pb background is used,
stack gas Pb concentration Cs using Equa- and (4) the entire train contents, including
tion 12–2: the impingers, are treated and analyzed for
Pb as described in Sections 8.0 and 11.0 of
mt this method.
Cs = K 3 Eq. 12-2 16.2 Filter Location. A filter may be used
Vm (std ) between the third and fourth impingers pro-
vided the filter is included in the analysis for
Where: Pb.
K3=0.001 mg/μg for metric units. 16.3 In-Stack Filter. An in-stack filter
=1.54 × 10¥5 gr/μg for English units may be used provided: (1) A glass-lined probe
and at least two impingers, each containing
12.7 Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric
100 ml of 0.1 N HNO3 after the in-stack filter,
Flow Rate. Calculate the average stack gas
are used and (2) the probe and impinger con-
velocity and volumetric flow rate using data
tents are recovered and analyzed for Pb. Re-
obtained in this method and the equations in cover sample from the nozzle with acetone if
Sections 12.2 and 12.3 of Method 2. a particulate analysis is to be made.
12.8 Isokinetic Variation. Same as Method
5, Section 12.11. 17.0 References
13.0 Method Performance Same as Method 5, Section 17.0, References

2, 3, 4, 5, and 7, with the addition of the fol-
13.1 Precision. The within-laboratory pre- lowing:
cision, as measured by the coefficient of var- 1. Perkin Elmer Corporation. Analytical
iation, ranges from 0.2 to 9.5 percent relative Methods for Atomic Absorption
to a run-mean concentration. These values Spectrophotometry. Norwalk, Connecticut.
were based on tests conducted at a gray iron September 1976.
foundry, a lead storage battery manufac- 2. American Society for Testing and Mate-
turing plant, a secondary lead smelter, and a rials. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part
lead recovery furnace of an alkyl lead manu- 31: Water, Atmospheric Analysis. Philadel-
facturing plant. The concentrations encoun- phia, PA 1974. p. 40–42.
tered during these tests ranged from 0.61 to 3. Kelin, R., and C. Hach. Standard Addi-
123.3 mg Pb/m3. tions—Uses and Limitations in
13.2 Analytical Range. For a minimum Spectrophotometric Analysis. Amer. Lab.
analytical accuracy of ±10 percent, the lower 9:21–27. 1977.
4. Mitchell, W.J., and M.R. Midgett. Deter-
limit of the range is 100 μg. The upper limit
mining Inorganic and Alkyl Lead Emissions
can be extended considerably by dilution.
from Stationary Sources. U.S. Environ-
13.3 Analytical Sensitivity. Typical sen- mental Protection Agency. Emission Moni-
sitivities for a 1-percent change in absorp- toring and Support Laboratory. Research
tion (0.0044 absorbance units) are 0.2 and 0.5 Triangle Park, NC. (Presented at National
μg Pb/ml for the 217.0 and 283.3 nm lines, re- APCA Meeting, Houston. June 26, 1978).
spectively.
Validation Data
ER17oc00.245</MATH>
364
ER17oc00.244</MATH>
METHOD 13A—DETERMINATION OF TOTAL FLU- other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-
ORIDE EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY tain reliable results, persons using this
SOURCES (SPADNS ZIRCONIUM LAKE METH- method should have a thorough knowledge of
OD) at least the following additional test meth-
Method 5.
365
ER17oc00.246</GPH>
Total fluorides as Fluorine ................................................................................................. 7782–41–4 Not determined.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- and lungs. Reacts exothermically with lim-
ble for the determination of fluoride (F¥) ited amounts of water.
emissions from sources as specified in the 5.2.3 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly de-
regulations. It does not measure fluoro- structive to body tissue. Will cause third de-
carbons, such as Freons. gree burns. Eye damage may result in blind-
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to ness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of
the requirements of this method will en- the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May
hance the quality of the data obtained from cause lung tissue damage with edema. 1 mg/
air pollutant sampling methods. m3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in
2.0 Summary higher concentrations, death. Provide ven-
Gaseous and particulate F¥ are withdrawn with metals and organics.
in water and on a filter. The total F¥ is then 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
determined by the SPADNS Zirconium Lake
Colorimetric method. 6.1 Sample Collection. A schematic of the
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] od is shown in Figure 13A–1; it is similar to
the Method 5 sampling train except that the
4.0 Interferences filter position is interchangeable. The sam-
4.1 Chloride. Large quantities of chloride pling train consists of the following compo-
will interfere with the analysis, but this in- nents:
terference can be prevented by adding silver 6.1.1 Probe Nozzle, Pitot Tube, Differen-
sulfate into the distillation flask (see Sec- tial Pressure Gauge, Filter Heating System,
tion 11.3). If chloride ion is present, it may Temperature Sensor, Metering System, Ba-
be easier to use the specific ion electrode rometer, and Gas Density Determination
method of analysis (Method 13B). Equipment. Same as Method 5, Sections
4.2 Grease. Grease on sample-exposed sur- 6.1.1.1, 6.1.1.3 through 6.1.1.7, 6.1.1.9, 6.1.2, and
faces may cause low F¥ results due to ad- 6.1.3, respectively. The filter heating system
sorption. and temperature sensor are needed only
5.0 Safety when moisture condensation is a problem.
6.1.2 Probe Liner. Borosilicate glass or 316
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve stainless steel. When the filter is located im-
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- mediately after the probe, a probe heating
ment. This test method may not address all system may be used to prevent filter plug-
of the safety problems associated with its ging resulting from moisture condensation,
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this but the temperature in the probe shall not be
allowed to exceed 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F).
applicability of regulatory limitations prior 6.1.3 Filter Holder. With positive seal
to performing this test method. against leakage from the outside or around
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following re- the filter. If the filter is located between the
agents are hazardous. Personal protective probe and first impinger, use borosilicate
equipment and safe procedures are useful in glass or stainless steel with a 20-mesh stain-
preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc- less steel screen filter support and a silicone
curs, immediately flush with copious rubber gasket; do not use a glass frit or a
amounts of water at least 15 minutes. Re- sintered metal filter support. If the filter is
move clothing under shower and decontami- located between the third and fourth
nate. Treat residual chemical burn as ther- impingers, borosilicate glass with a glass frit
mal burn. filter support and a silicone rubber gasket
5.2.1 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl). Highly may be used. Other materials of construction
toxic. Vapors are highly irritating to eyes, may be used, subject to the approval of the
skin, nose, and lungs, causing severe dam- Administrator.
age. May cause bronchitis, pneumonia, or 6.1.4 Impingers. Four impingers connected
edema of lungs. Exposure to concentrations as shown in Figure 13A–1 with ground-glass
of 0.13 to 0.2 percent can be lethal in min- (or equivalent), vacuum-tight fittings. For
utes. Will react with metals, producing hy- the first, third, and fourth impingers, use the
drogen. Greenburg-Smith design, modified by replac-
5.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes ing the tip with a 1.3–cm (1⁄2 in.) ID glass tube
severe damage to eye tissues and to skin. In- extending to 1.3 cm (1⁄2 in.) from the bottom
halation causes irritation to nose, throat, of the flask. For the second impinger, use a
366
Greenburg-Smith impinger with the stand- ciency test before the test series, using
ard tip. Modifications (e.g., flexible connec- ASTM D 2986–71, 78, or 95a (incorporated by
tions between the impingers or materials reference—see § 60.17), or use test data from
other than glass) may be used, subject to the the supplier’s quality control program. The
approval of the Administrator. Place a tem- filter must also have a low F¥ blank value
perature sensor, capable of measuring tem- (<0.015 mg F¥/cm2 of filter area). Before the
perature to within 1 °C (2 °F), at the outlet test series, determine the average F¥ blank
of the fourth impinger for monitoring pur- value of at least three filters (from the lot to
poses. be used for sampling) using the applicable
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items procedures described in Sections 8.3 and 8.4
are needed for sample recovery: of this method. In general, glass fiber filters
6.2.1 Probe-liner and Probe-Nozzle Brush- have high and/or variable F¥ blank values,
es, Wash Bottles, Graduated Cylinder and/or and will not be acceptable for use.
Balance, Plastic Storage Containers, Funnel 7.1.2 Water. Deionized distilled, to con-
and Rubber Policeman, and Funnel. Same as form to ASTM D 1193–77 or 91, Type 3 (incor-
Method 5, Sections 6.2.1, 6.2.2 and 6.2.5 to porated by reference—see § 60.17). If high con-
6.2.8, respectively. centrations of organic matter are not ex-
6.2.2 Sample Storage Container. Wide- pected to be present, the potassium per-
mouth, high-density polyethylene bottles for manganate test for oxidizable organic mat-
impinger water samples, 1 liter. ter may be deleted.
6.3 Sample Preparation and Analysis. The 7.1.3 Silica Gel, Crushed Ice, and Stopcock
following items are needed for sample prepa- Grease. Same as Method 5, Sections 7.1.2,
ration and analysis: 7.1.4, and 7.1.5, respectively.
6.3.1 Distillation Apparatus. Glass dis- 7.2 Sample Recovery. Water, as described
tillation apparatus assembled as shown in in Section 7.1.2, is needed for sample recov-
Figure 13A–2. ery.
6.3.2 Bunsen Burner. 7.3 Sample Preparation and Analysis. The
6.3.3 Electric Muffle Furnace. Capable of following reagents and standards are needed
heating to 600 °C (1100 °F). for sample preparation and analysis:
6.3.4 Crucibles. Nickel, 75- to 100-ml. 7.3.1 Calcium Oxide (CaO). Certified grade
6.3.5 Beakers. 500-ml and 1500-ml. containing 0.005 percent F¥ or less.
6.3.6 Volumetric Flasks. 50-ml. 7.3.2 Phenolphthalein Indicator. Dissolve
6.3.7 Erlenmeyer Flasks or Plastic Bot- 0.1 g of phenolphthalein in a mixture of 50 ml
tles. 500-ml. of 90 percent ethanol and 50 ml of water.
6.3.8 Constant Temperature Bath. Capable 7.3.3 Silver Sulfate (Ag2SO4).
of maintaining a constant temperature of 7.3.4 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH), Pellets.
±1.0 °C at room temperature conditions. 7.3.5 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4), Concentrated.
6.3.9 Balance. 300-g capacity, to measure 7.3.6 Sulfuric Acid, 25 Percent (v/v). Mix 1
to ±0.5 g. part of concentrated H2SO4 with 3 parts of
6.3.10 Spectrophotometer. Instrument water.
that measures absorbance at 570 nm and pro- 7.3.7 Filters. Whatman No. 541, or equiva-
vides at least a 1-cm light path. lent.
6.3.11 Spectrophotometer Cells. 1-cm path 7.3.8 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl), Con-
length. centrated.
7.3.10 Fluoride Standard Solution, 0.01 mg
Unless otherwise indicated, all reagents F¥/ml. Dry approximately 0.5 g of sodium
are to conform to the specifications estab- fluoride (NaF) in an oven at 110 °C (230 °F) for
lished by the Committee on Analytical Re- at least 2 hours. Dissolve 0.2210 g of NaF in
agents of the American Chemical Society, 1 liter of water. Dilute 100 ml of this solution
where such specifications are available. Oth- to 1 liter with water.
erwise, use the best available grade. 7.3.11 SPADNS Solution [4,5 Dihydroxyl-3-
7.1 Sample Collection. The following re- (p-Sulfophenylazo)-2,7-Naphthalene-
agents are needed for sample collection: Disulfonic Acid Trisodium Salt]. Dissolve
7.1.1 Filters. 0.960 ±0.010 g of SPADNS reagent in 500 ml
7.1.1.1 If the filter is located between the water. If stored in a well-sealed bottle pro-
third and fourth impingers, use a Whatman tected from the sunlight, this solution is sta-
No. 1 filter, or equivalent, sized to fit the fil- ble for at least 1 month.
ter holder. 7.3.12 Spectrophotometer Zero Reference
7.1.1.2 If the filter is located between the Solution. Add 10 ml of SPADNS solution to
probe and first impinger, use any suitable 100 ml water, and acidify with a solution pre-
medium (e.g., paper, organic membrane) that pared by diluting 7 ml of concentrated HCl to
can withstand prolonged exposure to tem- 10 ml with deionized, distilled water. Prepare
peratures up to 135 °C (275 °F), and has at daily.
least 95 percent collection efficiency (<5 per- 7.3.13 SPADNS Mixed Reagent. Dissolve
cent penetration) for 0.3 μm dioctyl phthal- 0.135 ±0.005 g of zirconyl chloride octahydrate
ate smoke particles. Conduct the filter effi- (ZrOCl2 8H2O) in 25 ml of water. Add 350 ml
367
of concentrated HCl, and dilute to 500 ml Ground-glass stoppers, plastic caps, or serum
with deionized, distilled water. Mix equal caps may be used to close these openings.
volumes of this solution and SPADNS solu- 8.6.3 Transfer the probe and filter-im-
tion to form a single reagent. This reagent is pinger assembly to the cleanup area. This
stable for at least 2 months. area should be clean and protected from the
wind so that the chances of contaminating
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, or losing the sample will be minimized.
and Transport
8.6.4 Inspect the train prior to and during
8.1 Pretest Preparation. Follow the gen- disassembly, and note any abnormal condi-
eral procedure given in Method 5, Section 8.1, tions. Treat the samples as follows:
except that the filter need not be weighed. 8.6.4.1 Container No. 1 (Probe, Filter, and
8.2 Preliminary Determinations. Follow Impinger Catches).
the general procedure given in Method 5, 8.6.4.1.1 Using a graduated cylinder, meas-
Section 8.2, except that the nozzle size must ure to the nearest ml, and record the volume
be selected such that isokinetic sampling of the water in the first three impingers; in-
rates below 28 liters/min (1.0 cfm) can be clude any condensate in the probe in this de-
maintained. termination. Transfer the impinger water
8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. Follow from the graduated cylinder into a poly-
the general procedure given in Method 5, ethylene container. Add the filter to this
Section 8.3, except for the following vari- container. (The filter may be handled sepa-
ation: Assemble the train as shown in Figure rately using procedures subject to the Ad-
13A–1 with the filter between the third and ministrator’s approval.) Taking care that
fourth impingers. Alternatively, if a 20-mesh dust on the outside of the probe or other ex-
stainless steel screen is used for the filter terior surfaces does not get into the sample,
support, the filter may be placed between the clean all sample-exposed surfaces (including
probe and first impinger. A filter heating the probe nozzle, probe fitting, probe liner,
system to prevent moisture condensation first three impingers, impinger connectors,
may be used, but shall not allow the tem- and filter holder) with water. Use less than
perature to exceed 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F). 500 ml for the entire wash. Add the washings
Record the filter location on the data sheet to the sample container. Perform the water
(see Section 8.5). rinses as follows:
8.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Follow the
8.6.4.1.2 Carefully remove the probe nozzle
leak-check procedures given in Method 5,
and rinse the inside surface with water from
Section 8.4.
a wash bottle. Brush with a Nylon bristle
8.5 Sampling Train Operation. Follow the
brush, and rinse until the rinse shows no
general procedure given in Method 5, Section
visible particles, after which make a final
8.5, keeping the filter and probe tempera-
rinse of the inside surface. Brush and rinse
tures (if applicable) at 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F)
and isokinetic sampling rates below 28 liters/ the inside parts of the Swagelok fitting with
min (1.0 cfm). For each run, record the data water in a similar way.
required on a data sheet such as the one 8.6.4.1.3 Rinse the probe liner with water.
shown in Method 5, Figure 5–3. While squirting the water into the upper end
8.6 Sample Recovery. Proper cleanup proof the probe, tilt and rotate the probe so that
cedure begins as soon as the probe is re- all inside surfaces will be wetted with water.
moved from the stack at the end of the sam- Let the water drain from the lower end into
pling period. Allow the probe to cool. the sample container. A funnel (glass or pol-
8.6.1 When the probe can be safely han- yethylene) may be used to aid in transferring
dled, wipe off all external particulate matter the liquid washes to the container. Follow
near the tip of the probe nozzle, and place a the rinse with a probe brush. Hold the probe
cap over it to keep from losing part of the in an inclined position, and squirt water into
sample. Do not cap off the probe tip tightly the upper end as the probe brush is being
while the sampling train is cooling down as pushed with a twisting action through the
this would create a vacuum in the filter probe. Hold the sample container underneath
holder, thus drawing water from the the lower end of the probe, and catch any
impingers into the filter holder. water and particulate matter that is brushed
8.6.2 Before moving the sample train to from the probe. Run the brush through the
the cleanup site, remove the probe from the probe three times or more. With stainless
sample train, wipe off any silicone grease, steel or other metal probes, run the brush
and cap the open outlet of the probe. Be through in the above prescribed manner at
careful not to lose any condensate that least six times since metal probes have small
might be present. Remove the filter assem- crevices in which particulate matter can be
bly, wipe off any silicone grease from the fil- entrapped. Rinse the brush with water, and
ter holder inlet, and cap this inlet. Remove quantitatively collect these washings in the
the umbilical cord from the last impinger, sample container. After the brushing, make
and cap the impinger. After wiping off any a final rinse of the probe as described above.
silicone grease, cap off the filter holder out- 8.6.4.1.4 It is recommended that two peo-
let and any open impinger inlets and outlets. ple clean the probe to minimize sample
368
losses. Between sampling runs, keep brushes in a polyethylene container and adding a vol-
clean and protected from contamination. ume of water equal to the total volume in
8.6.4.1.5 Rinse the inside surface of each of Container No. 1. Process the blank in the
the first three impingers (and connecting same manner as for Container No. 1.
glassware) three separate times. Use a small 8.6.4.3 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). Note
portion of water for each rinse, and brush the color of the indicating silica gel to deter-
each sample-exposed surface with a Nylon
mine whether it has been completely spent,
bristle brush, to ensure recovery of fine par-
and make a notation of its condition. Trans-
ticulate matter. Make a final rinse of each
surface and of the brush. fer the silica gel from the fourth impinger to
8.6.4.1.6 After ensuring that all joints its original container, and seal. A funnel
have been wiped clean of the silicone grease, may be used to pour the silica gel and a rub-
brush and rinse with water the inside of the ber policeman to remove the silica gel from
filter holder (front-half only, if filter is posi- the impinger. It is not necessary to remove
tioned between the third and fourth the small amount of dust particles that may
impingers). Brush and rinse each surface adhere to the impinger wall and are difficult
three times or more if needed. Make a final to remove. Since the gain in weight is to be
rinse of the brush and filter holder. used for moisture calculations, do not use
8.6.4.1.7 After all water washings and par- any water or other liquids to transfer the
ticulate matter have been collected in the silica gel. If a balance is available in the
sample container, tighten the lid so that field, follow the analytical procedure for
water will not leak out when it is shipped to Container No. 3 in Section 11.4.2.
the laboratory. Mark the height of the fluid
level to transport. Label the container clear- 9.0 Quality Control
ly to identify its contents.
8.6.4.2 Container No. 2 (Sample Blank). 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
Prepare a blank by placing an unused filter ures.
8.4, 10.1 .......... Sampling equipment leak-check and calibra- Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate and
tion. sample volume.
10.2 ................. Spectrophotometer calibration ......................... Evaluate analytical technique, preparation of standards.
11.3.3 .............. Interference/recovery efficiency check during Minimize negative effects of used acid.
distillation.
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. 10.2.3 After mixing, place the blank and
Same as Method 5, Section 9.2. calibration standards in a constant tempera-
ture bath for 30 minutes before reading the
10.0 Calibration and Standardization absorbance with the spectrophotometer. Ad-
NOTE: Maintain a laboratory log of all cali- just all samples to this same temperature be-
brations. fore analyzing.
10.2.4 With the spectrophotometer at 570
10.1 Sampling Equipment. Calibrate the
nm, use the blank standard to set the absorb-
probe nozzle, pitot tube, metering system,
ance to zero. Determine the absorbance of
probe heater, temperature sensors, and ba-
the standards.
rometer according to the procedures outlined
in Method 5, Sections 10.1 through 10.6. Con- 10.2.5 Prepare a calibration curve by plot-
duct the leak-check of the metering system ting μg F¥/50 ml versus absorbance on linear
according to the procedures outlined in graph paper. Prepare the standard curve ini-
Method 5, Section 8.4.1. tially and thereafter whenever the SPADNS
10.2 Spectrophotometer. mixed reagent is newly made. Also, run a
calibration standard with each set of sam-
10.2.1 Prepare the blank standard by add-
ples and, if it differs from the calibration
ing 10 ml of SPADNS mixed reagent to 50 ml
curve by more than ±2 percent, prepare a new
of water.
standard curve.
10.2.2 Accurately prepare a series of
standards from the 0.01 mg F¥/ml standard 11.0 Analytical Procedures
fluoride solution (Section 7.3.10) by diluting
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14 ml to 100 ml with de- 11.1 Sample Loss Check. Note the liquid
ionized, distilled water. Pipet 50 ml from levels in Containers No. 1 and No. 2, deter-
each solution, and transfer each to a sepa- mine whether leakage occurred during trans-
rate 100-ml beaker. Then add 10 ml of port, and note this finding on the analytical
SPADNS mixed reagent (Section 7.3.13) to data sheet. If noticeable leakage has oc-
each. These standards will contain 0, 10, 20, curred, either void the sample or use meth-
30, 40, 50, 60, and 70 μg F¥(0 to 1.4 μg/ml), re- ods, subject to the approval of the Adminis-
spectively. trator, to correct the final results.
369
11.2 Sample Preparation. Treat the con- CAUTION: Use a protective shield when car-
tents of each sample container as described rying out this procedure. Observe standard
below: precautions when mixing H2SO4 with water.
11.2.1 Container No. 1 (Probe, Filter, and Slowly add the acid to the flask with con-
Impinger Catches). Filter this container’s stant swirling.
contents, including the sampling filter, 11.3 Distillation.
through Whatman No. 541 filter paper, or 11.3.1 Cool the contents of the distillation
equivalent, into a 1500-ml beaker. flask to below 80 °C (180 °F). Pipet an aliquot
11.2.1.1 If the filtrate volume exceeds 900 of sample containing less than 10.0 mg F¥ di-
ml, make the filtrate basic (red to phenol- rectly into the distillation flask, and add
phthalein) with NaOH, and evaporate to less water to make a total volume of 220 ml
than 900 ml. added to the distillation flask. (To estimate
11.2.1.2 Place the filtered material (in- the appropriate aliquot size, select an ali-
cluding sampling filter) in a nickel crucible, quot of the solution, and treat as described
add a few ml of water, and macerate the fil- in Section 11.4.1. This will be an approxima-
ters with a glass rod. tion of the F¥ content because of possible
11.2.1.2.1 Add 100 mg CaO to the crucible, interfering ions.)
and mix the contents thoroughly to form a
NOTE: If the sample contains chloride, add
slurry. Add two drops of phenolphthalein in-
5 mg of Ag2SO4 to the flask for every mg of
dicator. Place the crucible in a hood under
chloride.
infrared lamps or on a hot plate at low heat.
Evaporate the water completely. During the 11.3.2 Place a 250-ml volumetric flask at
evaporation of the water, keep the slurry the condenser exit. Heat the flask as rapidly
basic (red to phenolphthalein) to avoid loss as possible with a Bunsen burner, and collect
of F¥. If the indicator turns colorless (acid- all the distillate up to 175 °C (347 °F). During
ic) during the evaporation, add CaO until the heatup, play the burner flame up and down
color turns red again. the side of the flask to prevent bumping.
11.2.1.2.2 After evaporation of the water, Conduct the distillation as rapidly as pos-
place the crucible on a hot plate under a sible (15 minutes or less). Slow distillations
hood, and slowly increase the temperature have been found to produce low F¥ recov-
until the Whatman No. 541 and sampling fil- eries. Be careful not to exceed 175 °C (347 °F)
ters char. It may take several hours to char to avoid causing H2SO4 to distill over. If F¥
the filters completely. distillation in the mg range is to be followed
11.2.1.2.3 Place the crucible in a cold muf- by a distillation in the fractional mg range,
fle furnace. Gradually (to prevent smoking) add 220 ml of water and distill it over as in
increase the temperature to 600 °C (1100 °F), the acid adjustment step to remove residual
and maintain this temperature until the con- F¥ from the distillation system.
tents are reduced to an ash. Remove the cru- 11.3.3 The acid in the distillation flask
cible from the furnace, and allow to cool. may be used until there is carry-over of
11.2.1.2.4 Add approximately 4 g of crushed interferences or poor F¥ recovery. Check for
NaOH to the crucible, and mix. Return the interference and for recovery efficiency
crucible to the muffle furnace, and fuse the every tenth distillation using a water blank
sample for 10 minutes at 600 °C. and a standard solution. Change the acid
11.2.1.2.5 Remove the sample from the fur- whenever the F¥ recovery is less than 90 per-
nace, and cool to ambient temperature. cent or the blank value exceeds 0.1 μg/ml.
Using several rinsings of warm water, trans- 11.4 Sample Analysis.
fer the contents of the crucible to the beaker 11.4.1 Containers No. 1 and No. 2.
containing the filtrate. To ensure complete 11.4.1.1 After distilling suitable aliquots
sample removal, rinse finally with two 20-ml from Containers No. 1 and No. 2 according to
portions of 25 percent H2SO4, and carefully Section 11.3, dilute the distillate in the volu-
add to the beaker. Mix well, and transfer to metric flasks to exactly 250 ml with water,
a 1-liter volumetric flask. Dilute to volume and mix thoroughly. Pipet a suitable aliquot
with water, and mix thoroughly. Allow any of each sample distillate (containing 10 to 40
undissolved solids to settle. μg F¥/ml) into a beaker, and dilute to 50 ml
11.2.2 Container No. 2 (Sample Blank). with water. Use the same aliquot size for the
Treat in the same manner as described in blank. Add 10 ml of SPADNS mixed reagent
Section 11.2.1 above. (Section 7.3.13), and mix thoroughly.
11.2.3 Adjustment of Acid/Water Ratio in 11.4.1.2 After mixing, place the sample in
Distillation Flask. Place 400 ml of water in a constant-temperature bath containing the
the distillation flask, and add 200 ml of con- standard solutions for 30 minutes before
centrated H2SO4. Add some soft glass beads reading the absorbance on the spectro-
and several small pieces of broken glass tub- photometer.
ing, and assemble the apparatus as shown in NOTE: After the sample and colorimetric
Figure 13A–2. Heat the flask until it reaches reagent are mixed, the color formed is stable
a temperature of 175 °C (347 °F) to adjust the for approximately 2 hours. Also, a 3 °C (5.4
acid/water ratio for subsequent distillations. °F) temperature difference between the sam-
Discard the distillate. ple and standard solutions produces an error
370
of approximately 0.005 mg F¥/liter. To avoid
this error, the absorbencies of the sample K Vt Vd Fc
and standard solutions must be measured at Ft = Eq. 13A-1
the same temperature. At Ad
11.4.1.3 Set the spectrophotometer to zero Where:
absorbance at 570 nm with the zero reference K=10¥3 mg/μg (metric units)
solution (Section 7.3.12), and check the spec- =1.54 × 10¥5 gr/μg (English units)
trophotometer calibration with the standard 12.6 Fluoride Concentration in Stack Gas.
solution (Section 7.3.10). Determine the ab- Determine the F¥ concentration in the stack
sorbance of the samples, and determine the gas using the following equation:
concentration from the calibration curve. If
the concentration does not fall within the Ft
range of the calibration curve, repeat the Cf = Eq. 13A-2
procedure using a different size aliquot. Vm (std )
11.4.2 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). Weigh
the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus im- 12.7 Isokinetic Variation. Same as Method
pinger) to the nearest 0.5 g using a balance. 5, Section 12.11.
This step may be conducted in the field.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations The following estimates are based on a col-
Carry out calculations, retaining at least laborative test done at a primary aluminum
smelter. In the test, six laboratories each
sampled the stack simultaneously using two
the acquired data. Round off figures after
sampling trains for a total of 12 samples per
final calculation. Other forms of the equa-
sampling run. Fluoride concentrations en-
tions may be used, provided that they yield
countered during the test ranged from 0.1 to
equivalent results.
1.4 mg F¥/m3.
12.1 Nomenclature. 13.1 Precision. The intra- and inter-lab-
Ad=Aliquot of distillate taken for color de- oratory standard deviations, which include
velopment, ml. sampling and analysis errors, were 0.044 mg
At=Aliquot of total sample added to still, ml. F¥/m3 with 60 degrees of freedom and 0.064
Bws=Water vapor in the gas stream, portion mg F¥/m3 with five degrees of freedom, re-
by volume. spectively.
Cs=Concentration of F¥ in stack gas, mg/ 13.2 Bias. The collaborative test did not
dscm (gr/dscf). find any bias in the analytical method.
Fc=F¥ concentration from the calibration 13.3 Range. The range of this method is 0
curve, μg. to 1.4 μg F¥/ml.
Ft=Total F¥ in sample, mg.
Tm=Absolute average dry gas meter (DGM)
temperature (see Figure 5–3 of Method 5), 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
°K (°R).
Ts=Absolute average stack gas temperature 16.0 Alternative Procedures
(see Figure 5–3 of Method 5), °K (°R). 16.1 Compliance with ASTM D 3270–73T,
Vd=Volume of distillate as diluted, ml. 80, 91, or 95 (incorporated by reference—see
Vm(std)=Volume of gas sample as measured by § 60.17) ‘‘Analysis of Fluoride Content of the
DGM at standard conditions, dscm (dscf). Atmosphere and Plant Tissues (Semiauto-
Vt=Total volume of F¥ sample, after final di- mated Method) is an acceptable alternative
lution, ml. for the requirements specified in Sections
Vw(std)=Volume of water vapor in the gas sam- 11.2, 11.3, and 11.4.1 when applied to suitable
ple at standard conditions, scm (scf) aliquots of Containers 1 and 2 samples.
12.2 Average DGM Temperature and Aver-
age Orifice Pressure Drop (see Figure 5–3 of 17.0 References
Method 5). 1. Bellack, Ervin. Simplified Fluoride Dis-
12.3 Dry Gas Volume. Calculate Vm(std), and tillation Method. J. of the American Water
adjust for leakage, if necessary, using Equa- Works Association. 50:5306. 1958.
tion 5–1 of Method 5. 2. Mitchell, W.J., J.C. Suggs, and F.J.
12.4 Volume of Water Vapor and Moisture Bergman. Collaborative Study of EPA Meth-
Content. Calculate Vw(std) and Bws from the od 13A and Method 13B. Publication No.
data obtained in this method. Use Equations EPA–300/4–77–050. U.S. Environmental Pro-
5–2 and 5–3 of Method 5. tection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC.
12.5 Total Fluoride in Sample. Calculate December 1977.
the amount of F¥ in the sample using the 3. Mitchell, W.J., and M.R. Midgett. Ade-
following equation: quacy of Sampling Trains and Analytical
ER17oc00.248</MATH>
371
ER17OC00.247</MATH>
Procedures Used for Fluoride. Atm. Environ. 18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
10:865–872. 1976. Validation Data
372
ER17oc00.249</GPH>
METHOD 13B—DETERMINATION OF TOTAL FLU- other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-
ORIDE EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY tain reliable results, persons using this
SOURCES (SPECIFIC ION ELECTRODE METH- method should have a thorough knowledge of
OD) at least the following additional test meth-
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- and Method 13A.
Total fluorides as Fluorine ................................................................................................. 7782–41–4 Not determined.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- determined by the specific ion electrode
ble for the determination of fluoride (F¥) method.
emissions from sources as specified in the
regulations. It does not measure fluoro- 3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
carbons, such as Freons.
4.0 Interferences
the requirements of this method will en- Grease on sample-exposed surfaces may
hance the quality of the data obtained from cause low F¥ results because of adsorption.
5.0 Safety
2.0 Summary

Gaseous and particulate F¥ are withdrawn hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
isokinetically from the source and collected ment. This test method does not purport to
in water and on a filter. The total F¥ is then address all of the safety problems associated
with its use. It is the responsibility of the
373
ER17oc00.250</GPH>
user of this test method to establish appro- lished by the Committee on Analytical Re-
priate safety and health practices and to de- agents of the American Chemical Society,
termine the applicability of regulatory limi- where such specifications are available. Oth-
tations prior to performing this test method. erwise, use the best available grade.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following re- 7.1 Sample Collection and Sample Recov-
agents are hazardous. Personal protective ery. Same as Method 13A, Sections 7.1 and
equipment and safe procedures are useful in 7.2, respectively.
preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc- 7.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis. The
curs, immediately flush with copious
following reagents and standards are re-
amounts of water at least 15 minutes. Re-
quired for sample analysis:
nate. Treat residual chemical burn as ther- 7.2.1 Calcium Oxide (CaO). Certified grade
mal burn. containing 0.005 percent F¥ or less.
5.2.1 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes 7.2.2 Phenolphthalein Indicator. Dissolve
severe damage to eye tissues and to skin. In- 0.1 g phenolphthalein in a mixture of 50 ml of
halation causes irritation to nose, throat, 90 percent ethanol and 50 ml water.
and lungs. Reacts exothermically with lim- 7.2.3 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH), Pellets.
ited amounts of water. 7.2.4 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4), Concentrated.
5.2.2 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly de- 7.2.5 Filters. Whatman No. 541, or equiva-
structive to body tissue. Will cause third de- lent.
gree burns. Eye damage may result in blind- 7.2.6 Water. Same as Section 7.1.2 of
ness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of Method 13A.
7.2.7 Sodium Hydroxide, 5 M. Dissolve 20 g
of NaOH in 100 ml of water.
m3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in
higher concentrations, death. Provide ven- 7.2.8 Sulfuric Acid, 25 Percent (v/v). Mix 1
tilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently part of concentrated H2SO4 with 3 parts of
with metals and organics. water.
7.2.9 Total Ionic Strength Adjustment
6.0 Equipment and Supplies Buffer (TISAB). Place approximately 500 ml
6.1 Sample Collection and Sample Recov- of water in a 1-liter beaker. Add 57 ml of gla-
ery. Same as Method 13A, Sections 6.1 and cial acetic acid, 58 g of sodium chloride, and
6.2, respectively. 4 g of cyclohexylene dinitrilo tetraacetic
6.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis. The acid. Stir to dissolve. Place the beaker in a
following items are required for sample prep- water bath and cool to 20 °C (68 °F). Slowly
aration and analysis: add 5 M NaOH to the solution, measuring the
6.2.1 Distillation Apparatus, Bunsen Burn- pH continuously with a calibrated pH/ref-
er, Electric Muffle Furnace, Crucibles, Beak- erence electrode pair, until the pH is 5.3.
ers, Volumetric Flasks, Erlenmeyer Flasks Pour into a 1-liter volumetric flask, and di-
or Plastic Bottles, Constant Temperature lute to volume with deionized, distilled
Bath, and Balance. Same as Method 13A, water. Commercially prepared TISAB may
Sections 6.3.1 to 6.3.9, respectively. be substituted for the above.
6.2.2 Fluoride Ion Activity Sensing Elec- 7.2.10 Fluoride Standard Solution, 0.1 M.
trode. Oven dry approximately 10 g of sodium fluo-
6.2.3 Reference Electrode. Single junction, ride (NaF) for a minimum of 2 hours at 110 °C
sleeve type. (230 °F), and store in a desiccator. Then add
6.2.4 Electrometer. A pH meter with milli- 4.2 g of NaF to a 1-liter volumetric flask, and
volt-scale capable of ±0.1-mv resolution, or a add enough water to dissolve. Dilute to vol-
specific ion meter made specifically for spe- ume with water.
cific ion electrode use.
6.2.5 Magnetic Stirrer and Tetrafluoro- 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
ethylene (TFE) Fluorocarbon-Coated Stir- and Transport
ring Bars.
6.2.6 Beakers. Polyethylene, 100-ml. Same as Method 13A, Section 8.0.
7.0 Reagents and Standards 9.0 Quality Control

Unless otherwise indicated, all reagents 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
are to conform to the specifications estab- ures.
8.0, 10.1 .......... Sampling equipment leak-check and calibra- Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate and

10.2 ................. Fluoride electrode ............................................ Evaluate analytical technique, preparation of standards.
11.1 ................. Interference/recovery efficiency-check during Minimize negative effects of used acid.
distillation.
374
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. No. 2. Dilute the distillate in the volumetric
Same as Method 5, Section 9.2. flasks to exactly 250 ml with water, and mix
thoroughly. Pipet a 25-ml aliquot from each
10.0 Calibration and Standardizations of the distillate into separate beakers. Add
NOTE: Maintain a laboratory log of all cali- an equal volume of TISAB, and mix. The
brations. sample should be at the same temperature as
10.1 Sampling Equipment. Same as Meth- the calibration standards when measure-
od 13A, Section 10.1. ments are made. If ambient laboratory tem-
10.2 Fluoride Electrode. Prepare fluoride perature fluctuates more than ±2 °C from the
standardizing solutions by serial dilution of temperature at which the calibration stand-
the 0.1 M fluoride standard solution. Pipet 10 ards were measured, condition samples and
ml of 0.1 M fluoride standard solution into a standards in a constant-temperature bath
100-ml volumetric flask, and make up to the before measurement. Stir the sample with a
mark with water for a 10¥2 M standard solu- magnetic stirrer during measurement to
tion. Use 10 ml of 10¥2 M solution to make a minimize electrode response time. If the stir-
10¥3 M solution in the same manner. Repeat rer generates enough heat to change solution
the dilution procedure, and make 10¥4 and temperature, place a piece of temperature
10¥5 M solutions. insulating material, such as cork, between
10.2.1 Pipet 50 ml of each standard into a the stirrer and the beaker. Hold dilute sam-
separate beaker. Add 50 ml of TISAB to each ples (below 10¥4 M fluoride ion content) in
beaker. Place the electrode in the most di- polyethylene beakers during measurement.
lute standard solution. When a steady milli- 11.2.2 Insert the fluoride and reference
volt reading is obtained, plot the value on electrodes into the solution. When a steady
the linear axis of semilog graph paper versus millivolt reading is obtained, record it. This
concentration on the log axis. Plot the nomi- may take several minutes. Determine con-
nal value for concentration of the standard centration from the calibration curve. Be-
on the log axis, (e.g., when 50 ml of 10¥2 M tween electrode measurements, rinse the
standard is diluted with 50 ml of TISAB, the electrode with water.
concentration is still designated ‘‘10¥2 M’’). 11.2.3 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). Same
10.2.2 Between measurements, soak the as in Method 13A, Section 11.4.2.
fluoride sensing electrode in water for 30 sec-
onds, and then remove and blot dry. Analyze 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
the standards going from dilute to con- Carry out calculations, retaining at least
centrated standards. A straight-line calibra- one extra significant figure beyond that of
tion curve will be obtained, with nominal the acquired data. Round off figures after
concentrations of 10¥4, 10¥3, 10¥2, 10¥1 fluo- final calculation.
ride molarity on the log axis plotted versus 12.1 Nomenclature. Same as Method 13A,
electrode potential (in mv) on the linear Section 12.1, with the addition of the fol-
scale. Some electrodes may be slightly non- lowing:
linear between 10¥5 and 10¥4 M. If this oc- M=F¥ concentration from calibration curve,
curs, use additional standards between these molarity.
two concentrations.
10.2.3 Calibrate the fluoride electrode 12.2 Average DGM Temperature and Aver-
daily, and check it hourly. Prepare fresh flu- age Orifice Pressure Drop, Dry Gas Volume,
oride standardizing solutions daily (10¥2 M Volume of Water Vapor and Moisture Con-
or less). Store fluoride standardizing solu- tent, Fluoride Concentration in Stack Gas,
tions in polyethylene or polypropylene con- and Isokinetic Variation. Same as Method
tainers. 13A, Sections 12.2 to 12.4, 12.6, and 12.7, re-
spectively.
NOTE: Certain specific ion meters have 12.3 Total Fluoride in Sample. Calculate
been designed specifically for fluoride elec- the amount of F¥ in the sample using Equa-
trode use and give a direct readout of fluo- tion 13B–1:
ride ion concentration. These meters may be
used in lieu of calibration curves for fluoride KVt Vd M
measurements over a narrow concentration Ft = Eq. 13B-1
ranges. Calibrate the meter according to the At
manufacturer’s instructions.
Where:
11.0 Analytical Procedures K=19 [(mg·l)/(mole·ml)] (metric units)
11.1 Sample Loss Check, Sample Prepara- =0.292 [(gr·l)/(mole·ml)] (English units)
tion, and Distillation. Same as Method 13A,
Sections 11.1 through 11.3, except that the
NOTE following Section 11.3.1 is not applica- The following estimates are based on a col-
ble. laborative test done at a primary aluminum
11.2 Analysis. smelter. In the test, six laboratories each
11.2.1 Containers No. 1 and No. 2. Distill sampled the stack simultaneously using two
suitable aliquots from Containers No. 1 and sampling trains for a total of 12 samples per
375
ER17oc00.251</MATH>
sampling run. Fluoride concentrations en- 17.0 References
countered during the test ranged from 0.1 to
Same as Method 13A, Section 16.0, Ref-
1.4 mg F¥/m3. erences 1 and 2, with the following addition:
13.1 Precision. The intra-laboratory and
1. MacLeod, Kathryn E., and Howard L.
inter-laboratory standard deviations, which
Crist. Comparison of the SPADNS-Zirconium
include sampling and analysis errors, are
Lake and Specific Ion Electrode Methods of
0.037 mg F¥/m3 with 60 degrees of freedom Fluoride Determination in Stack Emission
and 0.056 mg F¥/m3 with five degrees of free- Samples. Analytical Chemistry. 45:1272–1273.
dom, respectively. 1973.
13.2 Bias. The collaborative test did not
find any bias in the analytical method. 18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
13.3 Range. The range of this method is Validation Data [Reserved]
0.02 to 2,000 μg F¥/ml; however, measure-
METHOD 14—DETERMINATION OF FLUORIDE
ments of less than 0.1 μg F¥/ml require extra
EMISSIONS FROM POTROOM ROOF MONITORS
care. FOR PRIMARY ALUMINUM PLANTS
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] NOTE: This method does not include all of
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana-
16.0 Alternative Procedures material is incorporated by reference from
16.1 Compliance with ASTM D 3270–73T, other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-
91, 95 ‘‘Analysis for Fluoride Content of the tain reliable results, persons using this
Atmosphere and Plant Tissues (Semiauto- method should have a thorough knowledge of
mated Method)’’ is an acceptable alternative at least the following additional test meth-
for the distillation and analysis require-
Method 13A, and Method 13B.
ments specified in Sections 11.1 and 11.2
when applied to suitable aliquots of Con- 1.0 Scope and Application
tainers 1 and 2 samples.
1.1 Analytes.
Total fluorides as Fluorine ............................................. 7782–41–4 Not determined.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- segments ducted to a common control sys-
ble for the determination of fluoride emis- tem.
sions from roof monitors at primary alu- Roof monitor means that portion of the roof
minum reduction plant potroom groups. of a potroom where gases not captured at the
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to cell exit from the potroom.
hance the quality of the data obtained from 4.0 Interferences
air pollutant sampling methods. Same as Section 4.0 of either Method 13A
or Method 13B, with the addition of the fol-
lowing:
2.1 Gaseous and particulate fluoride roof 4.1 Magnetic Field Effects. Anemometer
monitor emissions are drawn into a perma- readings can be affected by potroom mag-
nent sampling manifold through several netic field effects. Section 6.1 provides for
large nozzles. The sample is transported minimization of this interference through
from the sampling manifold to ground level proper shielding or encasement of anemom-
through a duct. The fluoride content of the eter components.
gas in the duct is determined using either
Method 13A or Method 13B. Effluent velocity 5.0 Safety
and volumetric flow rate are determined 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
using anemometers located in the roof mon- hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
itor. ment. This test method may not address all
3.0 Definitions
Potroom means a building unit which test method to establish appropriate safety
houses a group of electrolytic cells in which and health practices and to determine the
aluminum is produced. applicability of regulatory limitations prior
Potroom group means an uncontrolled to performing this test method.
potroom, a potroom which is controlled indi- 5.2 Corrosive Reagents. Same as Section
vidually, or a group of potrooms or potroom 5.2 of either Method 13A or Method 13B.
376
6.0 Equipment and Supplies common control device, install anemometers
in each potroom (or segment) that contains
Same as Section 6.0 of either Method 13A
or Method 13B, as applicable, with the addi- a sampling manifold. Install at least one an-
tion of the following: emometer for every 85 m (280 ft) of roof mon-
6.1 Velocity Measurement Apparatus. itor length of the potroom (or segment). If
6.1.1 Anemometer Specifications. Pro- the potroom (or segment) length divided by
peller anemometers, or equivalent. Each an- 85 m (280 ft) is not a whole number, round the
emometer shall meet the following specifica- fraction to the nearest whole number to de-
tions: termine the number of anemometers needed.
6.1.1.1 Its propeller shall be made of poly- If the potroom (or segment) length is less
styrene, or similar material of uniform den- than 130 m (430 ft), use at least two
sity. To ensure uniformity of performance anemometers. Divide the potroom (or seg-
among propellers, it is desirable that all pro- ment) monitor cross-section into as many
pellers be made from the same mold. equal areas as anemometers, and locate an
6.1.1.2 The propeller shall be properly bal- anemometer at the centroid of each equal
anced, to optimize performance. area. See exception in Section 6.1.2.3.
6.1.1.3 When the anemometer is mounted 6.1.2.3 Placement of Anemometer at the
horizontally, its threshold velocity shall not Center of Manifold. At least one anemometer
exceed 15 m/min (50 ft/min). shall be installed in the immediate vicinity
6.1.1.4 The measurement range of the ane- (i.e., within 10 m (33 ft)) of the center of the
mometer shall extend to at least 600 m/min manifold (see Section 6.2.1). For its place-
(2,000 ft/min). ment in relation to the width of the monitor,
6.1.1.5 The anemometer shall be able to there are two alternatives. The first is to
withstand prolonged exposure to dusty and make a velocity traverse of the width of the
corrosive environments; one way of achiev- roof monitor where an anemometer is to be
ing this is to purge the bearings of the ane- placed and install the anemometer at a point
mometer continuously with filtered air dur- of average velocity along this traverse. The
ing operation. traverse may be made with any suitable low
6.1.1.6 All anemometer components shall velocity measuring device, and shall be made
be properly shielded or encased, such that during normal process operating conditions.
the performance of the anemometer is The second alternative is to install the ane-
uninfluenced by potroom magnetic field ef- mometer half-way across the width of the
fects. roof monitor. In this latter case, the velocity
6.1.1.7 A known relationship shall exist traverse need not be conducted.
between the electrical output signal from 6.1.3 Recorders. Recorders that are
the anemometer generator and the propeller equipped with suitable auxiliary equipment
shaft rpm (see Section 10.2.1). Anemometers (e.g., transducers) for converting the output
having other types of output signals (e.g., op- signal from each anemometer to a contin-
tical) may be used, subject to the approval of uous recording of air flow velocity or to an
the Administrator. If other types of integrated measure of volumetric flowrate
anemometers are used, there must be a shall be used. A suitable recorder is one that
known relationship between output signal allows the output signal from the propeller
and shaft rpm (see Section 10.2.2). anemometer to be read to within 1 percent
6.1.1.8 Each anemometer shall be equipped when the velocity is between 100 and 120 m/
with a suitable readout system (see Section min (330 and 390 ft/min). For the purpose of
6.1.3). recording velocity, ‘‘continuous’’ shall mean
6.1.2 Anemometer Installation Require- one readout per 15-minute or shorter time in-
ments. terval. A constant amount of time shall
6.1.2.1 Single, Isolated Potroom. If the af-
elapse between readings. Volumetric flow
fected facility consists of a single, isolated
rate may be determined by an electrical
potroom (or potroom segment), install at
count of anemometer revolutions. The re-
least one anemometer for every 85 m (280 ft)
corders or counters shall permit identifica-
of roof monitor length. If the length of the
tion of the velocities or flowrates measured
roof monitor divided by 85 m (280 ft) is not a
by each individual anemometer.
whole number, round the fraction to the
nearest whole number to determine the num- 6.1.4 Pitot Tube. Standard-type pitot
ber of anemometers needed. For monitors tube, as described in Section 6.7 of Method 2,
that are less than 130 m (430 ft) in length, use and having a coefficient of 0.99 ±0.01.
at least two anemometers. Divide the mon- 6.1.5 Pitot Tube (Optional). Isolated, Type
itor cross-section into as many equal areas S pitot, as described in Section 6.1 of Method
as anemometers, and locate an anemometer 2, and having a known coefficient, deter-
mined as outlined in Section 4.1 of Method 2.
at the centroid of each equal area. See excep-

tion in Section 6.1.2.3. 6.1.6 Differential Pressure Gauge. Inclined
6.1.2.2 Two or More Potrooms. If the af- manometer, or equivalent, as described in
fected facility consists of two or more Section 6.1.2 of Method 2.
potrooms (or potroom segments) ducted to a 6.2 Roof Monitor Air Sampling System.
377
6.2.1 Manifold System and Ductwork. A such as a bend or contraction. The two sam-
minimum of one manifold system shall be in- ple ports shall be situated 90° apart. One of
stalled for each potroom group. The manifold the sample ports shall be situated so that
system and ductwork shall meet the fol- the duct can be traversed in the plane of the
lowing specifications: nearest upstream duct bend.
6.2.1.1 The manifold system and con- 6.2.2 Exhaust Fan. An industrial fan or
necting duct shall be permanently installed blower shall be attached to the sample duct
to draw an air sample from the roof monitor at ground level (see Figure 14–1). This ex-
to ground level. A typical installation of a haust fan shall have a capacity such that a
duct for drawing a sample from a roof mon- large enough volume of air can be pulled
itor to ground level is shown in Figure 14–1
through the ductwork to maintain an
in Section 17.0. A plan of a manifold system
isokinetic sampling rate in all the sample
that is located in a roof monitor is shown in
nozzles for all flow rates normally encoun-
Figure 14–2. These drawings represent a typ-
ical installation for a generalized roof mon- tered in the roof monitor. The exhaust fan
itor. The dimensions on these figures may be volumetric flow rate shall be adjustable so
altered slightly to make the manifold sys- that the roof monitor gases can be drawn
tem fit into a particular roof monitor, but isokinetically into the sample nozzles. This
the general configuration shall be followed. control of flow may be achieved by a damper
6.2.1.2 There shall be eight nozzles, each on the inlet to the exhauster or by any other
having a diameter of 0.40 to 0.50 m. workable method.
6.2.1.3 The length of the manifold system 6.3 Temperature Measurement Apparatus.
from the first nozzle to the eighth shall be 35 To monitor and record the temperature of
m (115 ft) or eight percent of the length of the roof monitor effluent gas, and consisting
the potroom (or potroom segment) roof mon- of the following:
itor, whichever is greater. Deviation from 6.3.1 Temperature Sensor. A temperature
this requirement is subject to the approval sensor shall be installed in the roof monitor
of the Administrator. near the sample duct. The temperature sen-
6.2.1.4 The duct leading from the roof sor shall conform to the specifications out-
monitor manifold system shall be round with lined in Method 2, Section 6.3.
a diameter of 0.30 to 0.40 m (1.0 to 1.3 ft). All 6.3.2 Signal Transducer. Transducer, to
connections in the ductwork shall be leak- change the temperature sensor voltage out-
free. put to a temperature readout.
6.2.1.5 As shown in Figure 14–2, each of the
6.3.3 Thermocouple Wire. To reach from
sample legs of the manifold shall have a de-
roof monitor to signal transducer and re-
vice, such as a blast gate or valve, to enable
corder.
adjustment of the flow into each sample noz-
zle. 6.3.4 Recorder. Suitable recorder to mon-
6.2.1.6 The manifold system shall be lo- itor the output from the thermocouple signal
cated in the immediate vicinity of one of the transducer.
propeller anemometers (see Section 8.1.1.4)
and as close as possible to the midsection of
the potroom (or potroom segment). Avoid lo- Same as Section 7.0 of either Method 13A
cating the manifold system near the end of a or Method 13B, as applicable.
potroom or in a section where the aluminum
reduction pot arrangement is not typical of 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
the rest of the potroom (or potroom seg- and Transport
ment). The sample nozzles shall be centered
in the throat of the roof monitor (see Figure 8.1 Roof Monitor Velocity Determination.
14–1). 8.1.1 Velocity Estimate(s) for Setting
6.2.1.7 All sample-exposed surfaces within Isokinetic Flow. To assist in setting
the nozzles, manifold, and sample duct shall isokinetic flow in the manifold sample noz-
be constructed with 316 stainless steel. Alter- zles, the anticipated average velocity in the
natively, aluminum may be used if a new section of the roof monitor containing the
ductwork is conditioned with fluoride-laden sampling manifold shall be estimated before
roof monitor air for a period of six weeks be- each test run. Any convenient means to
fore initial testing. Other materials of con- make this estimate may be used (e.g., the ve-
struction may be used if it is demonstrated locity indicated by the anemometer in the
through comparative testing, to the satisfac- section of the roof monitor containing the
tion of the Administrator, that there is no sampling manifold may be continuously
loss of fluorides in the system. monitored during the 24-hour period before
6.2.1.8 Two sample ports shall be located the test run). If there is question as to
in a vertical section of the duct between the whether a single estimate of average veloc-
roof monitor and the exhaust fan (see Sec- ity is adequate for an entire test run (e.g., if
tion 6.2.2). The sample ports shall be at least velocities are anticipated to be significantly
10 duct diameters downstream and three di- different during different potroom oper-
ameters upstream from any flow disturbance ations), the test run may be divided into two
378
or more ‘‘sub-runs,’’ and a different esti- (see Section 8.1.1), additional isokinetic rate
mated average velocity may be used for each adjustment(s) may become necessary during
sub-run (see Section 8.4.2). the run. Any such adjustment shall be made
8.1.2 Velocity Determination During a just before the start of a sub-run, using the
Test Run. During the actual test run, record procedure outlined in Section 8.4.1 above.
the velocity or volumetric flowrate readings NOTE: Isokinetic rate adjustments are not
of each propeller anemometer in the roof permissible during a sub-run.
monitor. Readings shall be taken from each
anemometer at equal time intervals of 15 8.5 Pretest Preparation, Preliminary De-
minutes or less (or continuously). terminations, Preparation of Sampling
8.2 Temperature Recording. Record the Train, Leak-Check Procedures, Sampling
temperature of the roof monitor effluent Train Operation, and Sample Recovery.
gases at least once every 2 hours during the Same as Method 13A, Sections 8.1 through
test run. 8.6, with the exception of the following:
8.3 Pretest Ductwork Conditioning. Dur- 8.5.1 A single train shall be used for the
ing the 24-hour period immediately pre- entire sampling run. Alternatively, if two or
ceding the test run, turn on the exhaust fan, more sub-runs are performed, a separate
and draw roof monitor air through the mani- train may be used for each sub-run; note,
fold system and ductwork. Adjust the fan to however, that if this option is chosen, the
draw a volumetric flow through the duct area of the sampling nozzle shall be the same
such that the velocity of gas entering the (±2 percent) for each train. If the test run is
manifold nozzles approximates the average divided into sub-runs, a complete traverse of
velocity of the air exiting the roof monitor the duct shall be performed during each sub-
in the vicinity of the sampling manifold. run.
8.4 Manifold Isokinetic Sample Rate Ad- 8.5.2 Time Per Run. Each test run shall last
justment(s). 8 hours or more; if more than one run is to
8.4.1 Initial Adjustment. Before the test be performed, all runs shall be of approxi-
run (or first sub-run, if applicable; see Sec- mately the same (±10 percent) length. If
tions 8.1.1 and 8.4.2), adjust the fan such that questions exist as to the representativeness
air enters the manifold sample nozzles at a of an 8-hour test, a longer period should be
velocity equal to the appropriate estimated selected. Conduct each run during a period
average velocity determined under Section when all normal operations are performed
8.1.1. Use Equation 14–1 (Section 12.2.2) to de- underneath the sampling manifold. For most
termine the correct stream velocity needed recently-constructed plants, 24 hours are re-
in the duct at the sampling location, in order quired for all potroom operations and events
for sample gas to be drawn isokinetically to occur in the area beneath the sampling
into the manifold nozzles. Next, verify that manifold. During the test period, all pots in
the correct stream velocity has been the potroom group shall be operated such
achieved, by performing a pitot tube traverse that emissions are representative of normal
of the sample duct (using either a standard operating conditions in the potroom group.
or Type S pitot tube); use the procedure out-
9.0 Quality Control
lined in Method 2.
8.4.2 Adjustments During Run. If the test 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
run is divided into two or more ‘‘sub-runs’’ ures.
Section Quality Control Measure Effect
8.0, 10.0 .......... Sampling equipment leak-check and calibra- Ensure accurate measurement of gas flow rate in duct and of
10.3, 10.4 ........ Initial and periodic performance checks of roof Ensure accurate and precise measurement of roof monitor ef-
monitor effluent gas characterization appa- fluent gas temperature and flow rate.
ratus.
11.0 ................. Interference/recovery efficiency check during Minimize negative effects of used acid.
distillation.
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. and the nozzles calibrated on the ground
Same as Method 5, Section 9.2. prior to installation. The following proce-
dures shall be observed:
10.0 Calibration and Standardization 10.1.1 Adjust the exhaust fan to draw a
Same as Section 10.0 of either Method 13A volumetric flow rate (refer to Equation 14–1)
or Method 13B, as applicable, with the addi- such that the entrance velocity into each
tion of the following: manifold nozzle approximates the average ef-

10.1 Manifold Intake Nozzles. The mani- fluent velocity in the roof monitor.
fold intake nozzles shall be calibrated when 10.1.2 Measure the velocity of the air en-
the manifold system is installed or, alter- tering each nozzle by inserting a standard
natively, the manifold may be preassembled pitot tube into a 2.5 cm or less diameter hole
379
(see Figure 14–2) located in the manifold be- 10.3.1.1 Check the signal output of the an-
tween each blast gate (or valve) and nozzle. emometer by using an accurate rpm gener-
Note that a standard pitot tube is used, rath- ator (see Figure 14–3) or synchronous motors
er than a type S, to eliminate possible veloc- to spin the propeller shaft at each of the
ity measurement errors due to cross-section three rpm settings described in Section
blockage in the small (0.13 m diameter) 10.2.3, and measuring the output signal at
manifold leg ducts. The pitot tube tip shall each setting. If, at each setting, the output
be positioned at the center of each manifold signal is within 5 percent of the manufactur-
leg duct. Take care to ensure that there is no er’s value, the anemometer can be used. If
leakage around the pitot tube, which could the anemometer performance is unsatisfac-
affect the indicated velocity in the manifold tory, the anemometer shall either be re-
leg. placed or repaired.
10.1.3 If the velocity of air being drawn 10.3.1.2 Check the propeller condition, by
into each nozzle is not the same, open or visually inspecting the propeller, making
close each blast gate (or valve) until the ve- note of any significant damage or warpage;
locity in each nozzle is the same. Fasten damaged or deformed propellers shall be re-
each blast gate (or valve) so that it will replaced.
main in position, and close the pitot port 10.3.1.3 Check the anemometer threshold
holes. velocity as follows: With the anemometer
10.2 Initial Calibration of Propeller mounted as shown in Figure 14–4(A), fasten a
Anemometers. known weight (a straight-pin will suffice) to
10.2.1 Anemometers that meet the speci- the anemometer propeller at a fixed distance
fications outlined in Section 6.1.1 need not be from the center of the propeller shaft. This
calibrated, provided that a reference per- will generate a known torque; for example, a
formance curve relating anemometer signal 0.1-g weight, placed 10 cm from the center of
output to air velocity (covering the velocity the shaft, will generate a torque of 1.0 g-cm.
range of interest) is available from the man- If the known torque causes the propeller to
ufacturer. If a reference performance curve rotate downward, approximately 90° [see Fig-
is not available from the manufacturer, such ure 14–4(B)], then the known torque is great-
a curve shall be generated. er than or equal to the starting torque; if the
For the purpose of this method, a ‘‘ref- propeller fails to rotate approximately 90°,
erence’’ performance curve is defined as one the known torque is less than the starting
that has been derived from primary standard torque. By trying different combinations of
calibration data, with the anemometer weight and distance, the starting torque of a
mounted vertically. ‘‘Primary standard’’ particular anemometer can be satisfactorily
data are obtainable by: (a) direct calibration estimated. Once an estimate of the starting
of one or more of the anemometers by the torque has been obtained, the threshold ve-
National Institute of Standards and Tech- locity of the anemometer (for horizontal
nology (NIST); (b) NIST-traceable calibra- mounting) can be estimated from a graph
tion; or (c) Calibration by direct measure- such as Figure 14–5 (obtained from the manu-
ment of fundamental parameters such as facturer). If the horizontal threshold veloc-
length and time (e.g., by moving the ity is acceptable [<15 m/min (50 ft/min), when
anemometers through still air at measured this technique is used], the anemometer can
rates of speed, and recording the output sig- be used. If the threshold velocity of an ane-
nals). mometer is found to be unacceptably high,
10.2.2 Anemometers having output signals the anemometer shall either be replaced or
other than electrical (e.g., optical) may be repaired.
used, subject to the approval of the Adminis- 10.3.2 Recorders and Counters. Check the
trator. If other types of anemometers are calibration of each recorder and counter (see
used, a reference performance curve shall be Section 6.1.2) at a minimum of three points,
generated, using procedures subject to the approximately spanning the expected range
approval of the Administrator. of velocities. Use the calibration procedures
10.2.3 The reference performance curve recommended by the manufacturer, or other
shall be derived from at least the following suitable procedures (subject to the approval
three points: 60 ±15, 900 ±100, and 1800 ±100 of the Administrator). If a recorder or
rpm. counter is found to be out of calibration by
10.3 Initial Performance Checks. Conduct an average amount greater than 5 percent
these checks within 60 days before the first for the three calibration points, replace or
performance test. repair the system; otherwise, the system can
10.3.1 Anemometers. A performance-check be used.
shall be conducted as outlined in Sections 10.3.3 Temperature Measurement Appa-
10.3.1.1 through 10.3.1.3. Alternatively, any ratus. Check the calibration of the Tempera-
other suitable method that takes into ac- ture Measurement Apparatus, using the pro-
count the signal output, propeller condition, cedures outlined in Section 10.3 of Method 2,
and threshold velocity of the anemometer at temperatures of 0, 100, and 150 °C (32, 212,
may be used, subject to the approval of the and 302 °F). If the calibration is off by more
Administrator. than 5 °C (9 °F) at any of the temperatures,
380
repair or replace the apparatus; otherwise, 12.2.1 Calculate the arithmetic mean of
the apparatus can be used. the roof monitor effluent gas velocity read-
10.4 Periodic Performance Checks. Repeat ings (vm) as measured by the anemometer in
the procedures outlined in Section 10.3 no the section of the roof monitor containing
more than 12 months after the initial per- the sampling manifold. If two or more sub-
formance checks. If the above systems pass runs have been performed, the average veloc-
the performance checks (i.e., if no repair or ity for each sub-run may be calculated sepa-
replacement of any component is necessary), rately.
continue with the performance checks on a
12.2.2 Calculate the expected average ve-
12-month interval basis. However, if any of
locity (vd) in the duct, corresponding to each
the above systems fail the performance
checks, repair or replace the system(s) that value of vm obtained under Section 12.2.1,
failed, and conduct the periodic performance using Equation 14–1.
checks on a 3-month interval basis, until suf-
ficient information (to the satisfaction of 8D n2 Vm
the Administrator) is obtained to establish a Vd = Eq. 14-1
modified performance check schedule and 60 D d2
calculation procedure. Where:
NOTE: If any of the above systems fails the
12-month periodic performance checks, the 8=number of required manifold nozzles.
data for the past year need not be recal- 60=sec/min.
culated. 12.2.3 Calculate the actual average veloc-
ity (vs) in the sampling duct for each run or
11.0 Analytical Procedures sub-run according to Equation 2–9 of Method
Same as Section 11.0 of either Method 13A 2, using data obtained during sampling (Sec-
or Method 13B. tion 8.0 of Method 13A).
12.2.4 Express each vs value from Section
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations 12.2.3 as a percentage of the corresponding vd
Same as Section 12.0 of either Method 13A value from Section 12.2.2.
or Method 13B, as applicable, with the fol- 12.2.4.1 If vs is less than or equal to 120
lowing additions and exceptions: percent of vd, the results are acceptable (note
12.1 Nomenclature. that in cases where the above calculations
A=Roof monitor open area, m2 (ft2). have been performed for each sub-run, the re-
Bws=Water vapor in the gas stream, portion sults are acceptable if the average percent-
by volume. age for all sub-runs is less than or equal to
Cs=Average fluoride concentration in roof 120 percent).
monitor air, mg F/dscm (gr/dscf). 12.2.4.2 If vs is more than 120 percent of vd,
Dd=Diameter of duct at sampling location, m multiply the reported emission rate by the
(ft). following factor:
Dn=Diameter of a roof monitor manifold noz-
zle, m (ft).
100 Vs
F=Emission Rate multiplication factor, − 120
dimensionless. Vd
Ft=Total fluoride mass collected during a F = 1+ Eq. 14-2
particular sub-run (from Equation 13A–1 of 200
Method 13A or Equation 13B–1 of Method 12.3 Average Velocity of Roof Monitor Ef-
13B), mg F¥ (gr F¥). fluent Gas. Calculate the arithmetic mean
Md=Mole fraction of dry gas, dimensionless. roof monitor effluent gas velocity (vmt) using
Prm=Pressure in the roof monitor; equal to all the velocity or volumetric flow readings
barometric pressure for this application. from Section 8.1.2.
Qsd=Average volumetric flow from roof mon-
12.4 Average Temperature of Roof Mon-
itor at standard conditions on a dry basis,
itor Effluent Gas. Calculate the arithmetic
m3/min.
Trm=Average roof monitor temperature (from mean roof monitor effluent gas temperature
Section 8.2), °C ( °F). (Tm) using all the temperature readings re-
Vd=Desired velocity in duct at sampling lo- corded in Section 8.2.
cation, m/sec. 12.5 Concentration of Fluorides in Roof
Vm=Anticipated average velocity (from Sec- Monitor Effluent Gas.
tion 8.1.1) in sampling duct, m/sec. 12.5.1 If a single sampling train was used
Vmt=Arithmetic mean roof monitor effluent throughout the run, calculate the average
gas velocity, m/sec. fluoride concentration for the roof monitor
Vs=Actual average velocity in the sampling
using Equation 13A–2 of Method 13A.

duct (from Equation 2–9 of Method 2 and 12.5.2 If two or more sampling trains were
ER17oc00.253</MATH>
data obtained from Method 13A or 13B), m/ used (i.e., one per sub-run), calculate the av-
sec. erage fluoride concentration for the run
12.2 Isokinetic Sampling Check. using Equation 14–3:
381
ER17oc00.252</MATH>
Where:
n
∑ (Ft )i K1=0.3858 K/mm Hg for metric units,
i =1
Cs = Eq. 14-3
∑ (Vm (std ) )i
n
i =1 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]

Where:
n=Total number of sub-runs.
12.6 Mole Fraction of Dry Gas. 16.0 References
Same as Section 16.0 of either Method 13A
M d = 1 − Bws Eq. 14- 4 or Method 13B, as applicable, with the addi-
12.7 Average Volumetric Flow Rate of tion of the following:
Roof Monitor Effluent Gas. Calculate the 1. Shigehara, R.T. A Guideline for Evalu-
arithmetic mean volumetric flow rate of the ating Compliance Test Results (Isokinetic
roof monitor effluent gases using Equation Sampling Rate Criterion). U.S. Environ-
14–5. mental Protection Agency, Emission Meas-
urement Branch, Research Triangle Park,
K1 Vmt M d Pm A NC. August 1977.
Q sd = Eq. 14-5
Trm 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
Validation Data
ER17oc00.256</MATH>
ER17oc00.255</MATH>
382
ER17oc00.254</MATH>
383
ER17oc00.257</GPH>
384
ER17oc00.258</GPH>
385
ER17oc00.259</GPH>
386
ER17oc00.260</GPH>
METHOD 14A—DETERMINATION OF TOTAL FLU- this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable re-
ORIDE EMISSIONS FROM SELECTED SOURCES sults, persons using this method should have
AT PRIMARY ALUMINUM PRODUCTION FACILI- a thorough knowledge of at least the fol-
TIES lowing additional test methods: Method 5,
Methods 13A and 13B, and Method 14 of this
NOTE: This method does not include all the
appendix.
specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies)
and procedures (e.g., sampling) essential to 1.0 Scope and Application
its performance. Some material is incor- 1.1 Analytes.
porated by reference from other methods in
387
ER17oc00.261</GPH>
Analyte CAS No. Sensitivity vidually, or a group of potrooms or potroom

segments ducted to a common primary con-
Total fluorides ....... None assigned ..... Not determined. trol system.
Includes hydrogen 007664–39–3 ....... Not determined. 3.7 Primary control system. The equip-
fluoride.
ment used to capture the gases and particu-
late matter generated during the reduction
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- process and the emission control device(s)
ble for the determination of total fluorides used to remove pollutants prior to discharge
(TF) emissions from sources specified in the of the cleaned gas to the atmosphere.
applicable regulation. This method was de- 3.8 Roof monitor. That portion of the roof
veloped by consensus with the Aluminum As- of a potroom building where gases, not cap-
sociation and the U.S. Environmental Pro- tured at the cell, exit from the potroom.
tection Agency (EPA). 3.9 Total fluorides (TF). Elemental fluo-
2.0 Summary of Method rine and all fluoride compounds as measured
2.1 Total fluorides, in the form of solid by Methods 13A or 13B of this appendix or by
and gaseous fluorides, are withdrawn from an approved alternative method.
the ascending air stream inside of an alu- 4.0 Interferences and Known Limitations
minum reduction potroom and, prior to 4.1 There are two principal categories of
exiting the potroom roof monitor, into a spe- limitations that must be addressed when
cific cassette arrangement. The cassettes are using this method. The first category is sam-
connected by tubing to flowmeters and a pling bias and the second is analytical bias.
manifold system that allows for the equal Biases in sampling can occur when there is
distribution of volume pulled through each an insufficient number of cassettes located
cassette, and finally to a dry gas meter. The along the roof monitor of a potroom or if the
cassettes have a specific internal arrange- distribution of those cassettes is spatially
ment of one unaltered cellulose filter and unequal. Known sampling biases also can
support pad in the first section of the cas- occur when there are leaks within the cas-
sette for solid fluoride retention and two cel- sette arrangement and if anemometers and
lulose filters with support pads that are im- temperature devices are not providing accu-
pregnated with sodium formate for the rate data. Applicable instruments must be
chemical absorption of gaseous fluorides in properly calibrated to avoid sampling bias.
the following two sections of the cassette. A Analytical biases can occur when instrumen-
minimum of eight cassettes shall be used for tation is not calibrated or fails calibration
a potline and shall be strategically located and the instrument is used out of proper
at equal intervals across the potroom roof so calibration. Additionally, biases can occur in
as to encompass a minimum of 8 percent of the laboratory if fusion crucibles retain re-
the total length of the potroom. A greater sidual fluorides over lengthy periods of use.
number of cassettes may be used should the This condition could result in falsely ele-
regulated facility choose to do so. The mass vated fluoride values. Maintaining a clean
flow rate of pollutants is determined with work environment in the laboratory is cru-
anemometers and temperature sensing de- cial to producing accurate values.
vices located immediately below the opening 4.2 Biases during sampling can be avoided
of the roof monitor and spaced evenly within by properly spacing the appropriate number
the cassette group. of cassettes along the roof monitor, con-
3.0 Definitions ducting leak checks of the cassette arrange-
3.1 Cassette. A segmented, styrene acrylo- ment, calibrating the dry gas meter every 30
nitrile cassette configuration with three sep- days, verifying the accuracy of individual
arate segments and a base, for the purpose of flowmeters (so that there is no more than 5
this method, to capture and retain fluoride percent difference in the volume pulled be-
from potroom gases. tween any two flowmeters), and calibrating
3.2 Cassette arrangement. The cassettes, or replacing anemometers and temperature
tubing, manifold system, flowmeters, dry gas sensing devices as necessary to maintain
meter, and any other related equipment as- true data generation.
sociated with the actual extraction of the 4.3 Analytical biases can be avoided by
sample gas stream. calibrating instruments according to the
3.3 Cassette group. That section of the manufacturer’s specifications prior to con-
potroom roof monitor where a distinct group ducting any analyses, by performing internal
of cassettes is located. and external audits of up to 10 percent of all
3.4 Potline. A single, discrete group of samples analyzed, and by rotating individual
electrolytic reduction cells electrically con- crucibles as the ‘‘blank’’ crucible to detect
nected in series, in which alumina is reduced any potential residual fluoride carry-over to
to form aluminum. samples. Should any contamination be dis-
3.5 Potroom. A building unit that houses covered in the blank crucible, the crucible
a group of electrolytic reduction cells in shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove any
which aluminum is produced. detected residual fluorides and a ‘‘blank’’
3.6 Potroom group. An uncontrolled analysis conducted again to evaluate the ef-
potroom, a potroom that is controlled indi- fectiveness of the cleaning. The crucible
388
shall remain in service as long as no detect- nection, and an aluminum nozzle shall be in-
able residual fluorides are present. serted into the intake hole of the cassette.
5.0 Safety The aluminum nozzle shall have a short sec-
5.1 This method may involve the handling tion of tubing placed over the opening of the
of hazardous materials in the analytical nozzle, with the tubing plugged to prevent
phase. This method does not purport to ad- dust from entering the nozzle and to prepare
dress all of the potential safety hazards asso- the nozzle for the cassette arrangement leak
ciated with its use. It is the responsibility of check. An alternate nozzle type can be used
the user to establish appropriate safety and if historical results or scientific demonstra-
health practices and determine the application of applicability can be shown.
bility of regulatory limitations prior to per- 6.1.2 Anemometers and temperature sens-
forming this test method. ing devices. To calculate the mass flow rate
5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following re- of TF from the roof monitor under standard
agents are hazardous. Personal protective conditions, anemometers that meet the spec-
equipment and safe procedures are useful in ifications in section 2.1.1 in Method 14 of this
preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc- appendix or an equivalent device yielding
curs, immediately flush with copious equivalent information shall be used. A re-
amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Re- cording mechanism capable of accurately re-
move clothing under shower and decontami- cording the exit gas temperature at least
nate. Treat residual chemical burn as ther- every 2 hours shall be used.
mal burn. 6.1.3 Barometer. To correct the volu-
5.3 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes se-
metric flow from the potline roof monitor to
vere damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation
standard conditions, a mercury (Hg), aner-
causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs.
oid, or other barometer capable of measuring
Reacts exothermically with limited amounts
atmospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm [0.1
of water.
inch (in)] Hg shall be used.
5.4 Perchloric Acid (HClO4). Corrosive to
eyes, skin, nose, and throat. Provide ventila- NOTE: The barometric reading may be ob-
tion to limit exposure. Very strong oxidizer. tained from a nearby National Weather Serv-
Keep separate from water and oxidizable ma- ice Station. In this case, the station value
terials to prevent vigorous evolution of heat, (which is absolute barometric pressure) shall
spontaneous combustion, or explosion. Heat be requested and an adjustment for elevation
solutions containing HClO4 only in hoods differences between the weather station and
specifically designed for HClO4. the sampling point shall be made at a rate of
6.0 Equipment and Supplies minus 2.5 mm (0.1 in) Hg per 30 meters (m)
6.1 Sampling. [100 feet (ft)] elevation increase or plus 2.5
6.1.1 Cassette arrangement. The cassette mm (0.1 in) Hg per 30 m (100 ft) elevation de-
itself is a three-piece, styrene acrylonitrile crease.
cassette unit (a Gelman Sciences product), 37 6.2 Sample recovery.
millimeter (mm), with plastic connectors. In 6.2.1 Hot plate.
the first section (the intake section), an un- 6.2.2 Muffle furnace.
treated Gelman Sciences 37 mm, 0.8 microm-
6.2.3 Nickel crucible.
eter (μm) DM–800 metricel membrane filter
6.2.4 Stirring rod. Teflon.
and cellulose support pad, or equivalent, is
situated. In the second and third segments of 6.2.5 Volumetric flask. 50-milliliter (ml).
the cassette there is placed one each of 6.2.6 Plastic vial. 50-ml.
Gelman Sciences 37 mm, 5 μm GLA–5000 low- 6.3 Analysis.
ash PVC filter with a cellulose support pad 6.3.1 Primary analytical method. An auto-
or equivalent product. Each of these two fil- mated analyzer having the following compo-
ters and support pads shall have been im- nents or equivalent: a multichannel propor-
mersed in a solution of 10 percent sodium tioning pump, multiposition sampler, volt-
formate (volume/volume in an ethyl alcohol age stabilizer, colorimeter, instrument re-
solution). The impregnated pads shall be cording device, microdistillation apparatus,
placed in the cassette segments while still flexible Teflon ® heating bath, vacuum pump,
wet and heated at 50 °C (122 °F) until the pad pulse suppressers and an air flow system.
is completely dry. It is important to check 6.3.2 Secondary analytical method. Spe-
for a proper fit of the filter and support pad cific Ion Electrode (SIE).
to the cassette segment to ensure that there 7.0 Reagents and Standards
are no areas where gases could bypass the fil- 7.1 Water. Deionized distilled to conform
ter. Once all of the cassette segments have to ASTM Specification D 1193–77, Type 3 (in-
been prepared, the cassette shall be assem- corporated by reference in § 60.17(a)(22) of
bled and a plastic plug shall be inserted into this part). The KMnO4 test for oxidizable or-
the exhaust hole of the cassette. Prior to ganic matter may be omitted when high con-
placing the cassette into service, the space centrations of organic matter are not ex-
between each segment shall be taped with an pected to be present.
appropriately durable tape to prevent the in- 7.2 Calcium oxide.
filtration of gases through the points of con- 7.3 Sodium hydroxide (NaOH). Pellets.
389
7.4 Perchloric acid (HClO4). Mix 1:1 with average sampling rate, the results are ac-
water. Sulfuric acid (H2SO4) may be used in ceptable. If the leakage rate is greater than
place of HClO4. 4 percent of the average sampling rate, ei-
7.5 Audit samples. The audit samples dis- ther record the leakage rate and correct the
cussed in section 9.1 shall be prepared from sampling volume as discussed in section 12.4
reagent grade, water soluble stock reagents, of this method or void the test run if the
or purchased as an aqueous solution from a minimum number of cassettes were used. If
commercial supplier. If the audit stock solu- the number of cassettes used was greater
tion is purchased from a commercial sup- than the minimum required, discard the
plier, the standard solution must be accom- leaking cassette and use the remaining cas-
panied by a certificate of analysis or an settes for the emission determination.
equivalent proof of fluoride concentration. 8.3.3 Anemometers and temperature sens-
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis ing device placement. Install the recording
8.1 Preparing cassette arrangement for mechanism to record the exit gas tempera-
sampling. The cassettes are initially con- ture. Anemometers shall be installed as re-
nected to flexible tubing. The tubing is con- quired in section 6.1.2 of Method 14 of this
nected to flowmeters and a manifold system. appendix, except replace the word ‘‘mani-
The manifold system is connected to a dry fold’’ with ‘‘cassette group’’ in section 6.1.2.3.
gas meter (Research Appliance Company These two different instruments shall be lo-
model 201009 or equivalent). The length of cated near each other along the roof mon-
tubing is managed by pneumatically or elec- itor. See conceptual configurations in Fig-
trically operated hoists located in the roof ures 14A–1, 14A–2, and 14A–3 of this method.
monitor, and the travel of the tubing is con- Fewer temperature devices than
trolled by encasing the tubing in aluminum anemometers may be used if at least one
conduit. The tubing is lowered for cassette
temperature device is located within the
insertion by operating a control box at floor
span of the cassette group. Other anemom-
level. Once the cassette has been securely in-
eter location siting scenarios may be accept-
serted into the tubing and the leak check
able as long as the exit velocity of the roof
performed, the tubing and cassette are raised
monitor gases is representative of the entire
to the roof monitor level using the floor
section of the potline being sampled.
level control box. Arrangements similar to
the one described are acceptable if the sci- 8.4 Sampling. The actual sample run shall
entific sample collection principles are fol- begin with the removal of the tubing and
lowed. plug from the cassette nozzle. Each cassette
8.2 Test run sampling period. A test run is then raised to the roof monitor area, the
shall comprise a minimum of a 24-hour sam- dry gas meter is turned on, and the flow-
pling event encompassing at least eight cas- meters are set to the calibration point,
settes per potline (or four cassettes per which allows an equal volume of sampled gas
potroom group). Monthly compliance shall to enter each cassette. The dry gas meter
be based on three test runs during the shall be set to a range suitable for the spe-
month. Test runs of greater than 24 hours cific potroom type being sampled that will
are allowed; however, three such runs shall yield valid data known from previous experi-
be conducted during the month. ence or a range determined by the use of the
8.3 Leak-check procedures. calculation in section 12 of this method. Pa-
8.3.1 Pretest leak check. A pretest leak- rameters related to the test run that shall be
check is recommended; however, it is not re- recorded, either during the test run or after
quired. To perform a pretest leak-check after the test run if recording devices are used, in-
the cassettes have been inserted into the clude: anemometer data, roof monitor exit
tubing, isolate the cassette to be leak- gas temperature, dry gas meter temperature,
checked by turning the valves on the mani- dry gas meter volume, and barometric pres-
fold to stop all flows to the other sampling sure. At the conclusion of the test run, the
points connected to the manifold and meter. cassettes shall be lowered, the dry gas meter
The cassette, with the plugged tubing sec- turned off, and the volume registered on the
tion securing the intake of the nozzle, is sub- dry gas meter recorded. The post-test leak
jected to the highest vacuum expected dur- check procedures described in section 8.3.2 of
ing the run. If no leaks are detected, the tub- this method shall be performed. All data rel-
ing plug can be briefly removed as the dry evant to the test shall be recorded on a field
gas meter is rapidly turned off. data sheet and maintained on file.
8.3.2 Post-test leak check. A leak check is 8.5 Sample recovery.
required at the conclusion of each test run 8.5.1 The cassettes shall be brought to the
for each cassette. The leak check shall be laboratory with the intake nozzle contents
performed in accordance with the procedure protected with the section of plugged tubing
outlined in section 8.3.1 of this method ex- previously described. The exterior of cas-
cept that it shall be performed at a vacuum settes shall carefully be wiped free of any
greater than the maximum vacuum reached dust or debris, making sure that any falling
during the test run. If the leakage rate is dust or debris does not present a potential
found to be no greater than 4 percent of the laboratory contamination problem.
390
8.5.2 Carefully remove all tape from the equal volumes (±10 percent) are sampled
cassettes and remove the initial filter, sup- through each cassette.
port pad, and all loose solids from the first 10.0 Calibrations
(intake) section of the cassette. Fold the fil- 10.1 Equipment evaluations. To ensure
ter and support pad several times and, along the integrity of this method, periodic cali-
with all loose solids removed from the inte- brations and equipment replacements are
rior of the first section of the cassette, place necessary.
them into a nickel crucible. Using water, 10.1.1 Metering system. At 30-day inter-
wash the interior of the nozzle into the same vals the metering system shall be calibrated.
nickel crucible. Add 0.1 gram (g) [±0.1 milli- Connect the metering system inlet to the
gram (mg)] of calcium oxide and a sufficient
outlet of a wet test meter that is accurate to
amount of water to make a loose slurry. Mix
1 percent. Refer to Figure 5–4 of Method 5 of
the contents of the crucible thoroughly with
this appendix. The wet-test meter shall have
a Teflon’’ stirring rod. After rinsing any ad-
a capacity of 30 liters/revolution [1 cubic foot
hering residue from the stirring rod back
(ft3)/revolution]. A spirometer of 400 liters (14
into the crucible, place the crucible on a hot
ft3) or more capacity, or equivalent, may be
plate or in a muffle furnace until all liquid is
used for calibration; however, a wet-test
evaporated and allow the mixture to gradu-
meter is usually more practical. The wet-
ally char for 1 hour.
8.5.3 Transfer the crucible to a cold muffle test meter shall be periodically tested with a
furnace and ash at 600 °C (1,112 °F). Remove spirometer or a liquid displacement meter to
the crucible after the ashing phase and, after ensure the accuracy. Spirometers or wet-test
the crucible cools, add 3.0 g (±0.1 g) of NaOH meters of other sizes may be used, provided
pellets. Place this mixture in a muffle fur- that the specified accuracies of the proce-
nace at 600 °C (1,112 °F) for 3 minutes. Re- dure are maintained. Run the metering sys-
move the crucible and roll the melt so as to tem pump for about 15 min. with the orifice
reach all of the ash with the molten NaOH. manometer indicating a median reading as
Let the melt cool to room temperature. Add expected in field use to allow the pump to
10 to 15 ml of water to the crucible and place warm up and to thoroughly wet the interior
it on a hot plate at a low temperature set- of the wet-test meter. Then, at each of a
ting until the melt is soft or suspended. minimum of three orifice manometer set-
Transfer the contents of the crucible to a 50- tings, pass an exact quantity of gas through
ml volumetric flask. Rinse the crucible with the wet-test meter and record the volume in-
20 ml of 1:1 perchloric acid or 20 ml of 1:1 sul- dicated by the dry gas meter. Also record the
furic acid in two (2) 10 ml portions. Pour the barometric pressure, the temperatures of the
acid rinse slowly into the volumetric flask wet test meter, the inlet temperatures of the
and swirl the flask after each addition. Cool dry gas meter, and the temperatures of the
to room temperature. The product of this outlet of the dry gas meter. Record all cali-
procedure is particulate fluorides. bration data on a form similar to the one
8.5.4 Gaseous fluorides can be isolated for shown in Figure 5–5 of Method 5 of this ap-
analysis by folding the gaseous fluoride fil- pendix and calculate Y, the dry gas meter
ters and support pads to approximately 1⁄4 of calibration factor, and DH@, the orifice cali-
their original size and placing them in a 50- bration factor at each orifice setting. Allow-
ml plastic vial. To the vial add exactly 10 ml able tolerances for Y and DH@ are given in
of water and leach the sample for a min- Figure 5–6 of Method 5 of this appendix.
imum of 1 hour. The leachate from this proc- 10.1.2 Estimating volumes for initial test
ess yields the gaseous fluorides for analysis. runs. For a facility’s initial test runs, the
9.0 Quality Control regulated facility must have a target or de-
9.1 Laboratory auditing. Laboratory au- sired volume of gases to be sampled and a
dits of specific and known concentrations of target range of volumes to use during the
fluoride shall be submitted to the laboratory calibration of the dry gas meter. Use Equa-
with each group of samples submitted for tions 14A–1 and 14A–2 in section 12 of this
analysis. An auditor shall prepare and method to derive the target dry gas meter
present the audit samples as a ‘‘blind’’ eval- volume (Fv) for these purposes.
uation of laboratory performance with each 10.1.3 Calibration of anemometers and
group of samples submitted to the labora- temperature sensing devices. If the standard
tory. The audits shall be prepared to rep- anemometers in Method 14 of this appendix
resent concentrations of fluoride that could are used, the calibration and integrity eval-
be expected to be in the low, medium and uations in sections 10.3.1.1 through 10.3.1.3 of
high range of actual results. Average recov- Method 14 of this appendix shall be used as
eries of all three audits must equal 90 to 110 well as the recording device described in sec-
percent for acceptable results; otherwise, the tion 2.1.3 of Method 14. The calibrations or
laboratory must investigate procedures and complete change-outs of anemometers shall

instruments for potential problems. take place at a minimum of once per year.
NOTE: The analytical procedure allows for The temperature sensing and recording de-
the analysis of individual or combined filters vices shall be calibrated according to the
and pads from the cassettes provided that manufacturer’s specifications.
391
10.1.4 Calibration of flowmeters. The cali- 10.1.4.4 This flowmeter calibration shall
bration of flowmeters is necessary to ensure be conducted at least once per year.
that an equal volume of sampled gas is en- 10.1.5 Miscellaneous equipment calibra-
tering each of the individual cassettes and tions. Miscellaneous equipment used such as
that no large differences, which could pos- an automatic recorder/ printer used to meas-
sibly bias the sample, exist between the cas- ure dry gas meter temperatures shall be cali-
settes. brated according to the manufacturer’s spec-
10.1.4.1 Variable area, 65 mm flowmeters ifications in order to maintain the accuracy
or equivalent shall be used. These flow- of the equipment.
meters can be mounted on a common base 11.0 Analytical Procedure
for convenience. These flowmeters shall be 11.1 The preferred primary analytical de-
calibrated by attaching a prepared cassette, termination of the individual isolated sam-
complete with filters and pads, to the flow- ples or the combined particulate and gaseous
meter and then to the system manifold. This samples shall be performed by an automated
manifold is an aluminum cylinder with methodology. The analytical method for this
valved inlets for connections to the flow- technology shall be based on the manufac-
meters/cassettes and one outlet to a dry gas turer’s instructions for equipment operation
meter. The connection is then made to the and shall also include the analysis of five
standards with concentrations in the ex-
wet-test meter and finally to a dry gas
pected range of the actual samples. The re-
meter. All connections are made with tub-
sults of the analysis of the five standards
ing.
shall have a coefficient of correlation of at
10.1.4.2 Turn the dry gas meter on for 15 least 0.99. A check standard shall be analyzed
min. in preparation for the calibration. Turn as the last sample of the group to determine
the dry gas meter off and plug the intake if instrument drift has occurred. The accept-
hole of the cassette. Turn the dry gas meter able result for the check standard is 95 to 105
back on to evaluate the entire system for percent of the standard’s true value.
leaks. If the dry gas meter shows a leakage 11.2 The secondary analytical method
rate of less than 0.02 ft3/min at 10 in. of Hg shall be by specific ion electrode if the sam-
vacuum as noted on the dry gas meter, the ples are distilled or if a TISAB IV buffer is
system is acceptable to further calibration. used to eliminate aluminum interferences.
10.1.4.3 With the dry gas meter turned on Five standards with concentrations in the
and the flow indicator ball at a selected flow expected range of the actual samples shall be
rate, record the exact amount of gas pulled analyzed, and a coefficient of correlation of
through the flowmeter by taking measure- at least 0.99 is the minimum acceptable limit
ments from the wet test meter after exactly for linearity. An exception for this limit for
10 min. Record the room temperature and linearity is a condition when low-level
barometric pressure. Conduct this test for all standards in the range of 0.01 to 0.48 μg fluo-
flowmeters in the system with all flow- ride/ml are analyzed. In this situation, a
meters set at the same indicator ball read- minimum coefficient of correlation of 0.97 is
ing. When all flowmeters have gone through required. TISAB II shall be used for low-level
the procedure above, correct the volume analyses.
pulled through each flowmeter to standard 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
conditions. The acceptable difference be- 12.1 Carry out calculations, retaining at
tween the highest and lowest flowmeter rate least one extra decimal point beyond that of
is 5 percent. Should one or more flowmeters the acquired data. Round off values after the
be outside of the acceptable limit of 5 per- final calculation. Other forms of calculations
cent, repeat the calibration procedure at a may be used as long as they give equivalent
lower or higher indicator ball reading until results.
all flowmeters show no more than 5 percent 12.2 Estimating volumes for initial test
difference among them. runs.
Fv =
(Fd )(X) Eq. 14A-1
Fe
Where X=Number of cassettes used.

Fv=Desired volume of dry gas to be sampled, Fe=Typical concentration of TF in emissions
ft3. to be sampled, μg/ft 3, calculated from

Fd=Desired or analytically optimum mass of Equation 14A–2.
TF per cassette, micrograms of TF per cas-
sette (μg/cassette).
392
ER07OC97.000</GPH>
(R e )(R p )(4.536 × 10 8 μg/lb)

Fe = Eq. 14A-2
(A r )(Vr )
Where of aluminum, the typical roof vent gas exit

Re=Typical emission rate from the facility, velocity (Vr) is 250 ft/min, the typical produc-
pounds of TF per ton (lb/ton) of aluminum. tion rate (Rp) is 0.10 ton/min, the known open
Rp=Typical production rate of the facility, area for the roof monitor (Ar) is 8,700 ft2, and
tons of aluminum per minute (ton/min). the desired (analytically optimum) mass of
Vr=Typical exit velocity of the roof monitor TF per cassette is 1,500 μg. First calculate
gases, feet per minute (ft/min). the concentration of TF per cassette (Fe) in
Ar=Open area of the roof monitor, square feet μg/ft3 using Equation 14A–2. Then calculate
(ft2). the desired volume of gas to be sampled (Fv)
12.2.1 Example calculation. Assume that using Equation 14A–1.
the typical emission rate (Re) is 1.0 lb TF/ton
(1.0 lb/ton)(0.1 tons/min)(4.536 × 10 8 μg/lb)

Fe = 20.855 = Eq. 14 A-3
(8,700 ft 2 )(250 ft/min)
Fv = 575.40 ft 3 =
(1,500 μg)(8 cassettes) Eq. 14 A-4
(20.855 μg/ft ) 3
This is a total of 575.40 ft3 for eight cas- 12.3.2 Derive the average quantity of TF
settes or 71.925 ft3/cassette. per cassette (in μg TF/cassette) by adding all
12.3 Calculations of TF emissions from laboratory data for all cassettes and dividing
field and laboratory data that would yield a this value by the total number of cassettes
production related emission rate can be cal- used. Divide this average TF value by the
culated as follows: corrected dry gas meter volume for each cas-
12.3.1 Obtain a standard cubic feet (scf) sette; this value then becomes TFstd (μg/ft3).
value for the volume pulled through the dry
12.3.3 Calculate the production-based
gas meter for all cassettes by using the field
emission rate (Re) in lb/ton using Equation
and calibration data and Equation 5–1 of
14A–5.
Method 5 of this appendix.
(TFstd )(Vr )(A r )(2.2 × 10 −9 lb/μg)

Re = Eq. 14 A-5
(R )
p
ER07oc97.004</GPH>
12.3.4 As an example calculation, assume monitor for the potline (Ar) is 17,400 ft2. The
eight cassettes located in a potline were used exit velocity of the roof monitor gases (Vr) is
to sample for 72 hours during the run. The 250 ft/min. The production rate of aluminum
analysis of all eight cassettes yielded a total over the previous 720 hours was 5,000 tons,
of 3,000 μg of TF. The dry gas meter volume
ER07OC97.003</GPH>
which is 6.94 tons/hr or 0.116 ton/min (Rp).

was corrected to yield a total of 75 scf per Substituting these values into Equation 14A–
cassette, which yields a value for TFstd of 5 yields:
3,000/75=5 μg/ft3. The open area of the roof
ER07oc97.002</GPH>
393
ER07OC97.001</GPH>
Re =
(5 μg/ft )(250 ft/min)(17,400 ft )(2.2 × 10
3 2 −9
lb/μg ) Eq. 14 A-6
(0.116 ton/min)
R e = 0.41 lb/ton of aluminum produced. Eq. 14A-7
12.4 Corrections to volumes due to leak- 8.3.2 of this method, correct the volume as
age. Should the post-test leak check leakage detailed in Case I in section 6.3 of Method 5
rate exceed 4 percent as described in section of this appendix.
ER07oc97.020</GPH>
394
ER07oc97.005</GPH>
395
ER07oc97.021</GPH>
396
ER07oc97.022</GPH>
METHOD 15—DETERMINATION OF HYDROGEN Some material is incorporated by reference
SULFIDE, CARBONYL SULFIDE, AND CARBON from other methods in this part. Therefore,
DISULFIDE EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY to obtain reliable results, persons using this
SOURCES method should have a thorough knowledge of
NOTE: This method is not inclusive with re- gas chromatography techniques.
spect to specifications (e.g., equipment and 1.0 Scope and Application
analytical) essential to its performance. 1.1 Analytes.
Sensitivity
Analyte CAS No. (See Sec 13.2)
Carbon disulfide [CS2] .................................................................................................... 75–15–0 0.5 ppmv

Carbonyl sulfide [COS] ................................................................................................... 463–58–1 0.5 ppmv
Hydrogen sulfide [H2S] ................................................................................................... 7783–06–4 0.5 ppmv
1.2 Applicability. 4.2 Carbon Monoxide (CO) and Carbon Di-

1.2.1 This method applies to the deter- oxide (CO2). CO and CO2 have substantial de-
mination of emissions of reduced sulfur com- sensitizing effects on the FPD even after 9:1
pounds from tail gas control units of sulfur dilution. (Acceptable systems must dem-
recovery plants, H2S in fuel gas for fuel gas onstrate that they have eliminated this in-
combustion devices, and where specified in terference by some procedure such as eluting
other applicable subparts of the regulations. CO and CO2 before any of the sulfur com-
1.2.2 The method described below uses the pounds to be measured.) Compliance with
principle of gas chromatographic (GC) sepa- this requirement can be demonstrated by
ration and flame photometric detection submitting chromatograms of calibration
(FPD). Since there are many systems or sets
gases with and without CO2 in the diluent
of operating conditions that represent use-
gas. The CO2 level should be approximately
able methods for determining sulfur emis-
sions, all systems which employ this prin- 10 percent for the case with CO2 present. The
ciple, but differ only in details of equipment two chromatograms should show agreement
and operation, may be used as alternative within the precision limits of Section 13.3.
methods, provided that the calibration preci- 4.3 Elemental Sulfur. The condensation of
sion and sample-line loss criteria are met. sulfur vapor in the sampling system can lead
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to to blockage of the particulate filter. This
the requirements of this method will en- problem can be minimized by observing the
hance the quality of the data obtained from filter for buildup and changing as needed.
air pollutant sampling methods. 4.4 Sulfur Dioxide (SO2). SO2 is not a spe-
cific interferent but may be present in such
2.0 Summary of Method large amounts that it cannot be effectively
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from the separated from the other compounds of in-
emission source and diluted with clean dry terest. The SO2 scrubber described in Section
air (if necessary). An aliquot of the diluted 6.1.3 will effectively remove SO2 from the
sample is then analyzed for CS2, COS, and sample.
H2S by GC/FPD. 4.5 Alkali Mist. Alkali mist in the emis-
sions of some control devices may cause a
rapid increase in the SO2 scrubber pH, result-
4.0 Interferences ing in low sample recoveries. Replacing the
SO2 scrubber contents after each run will
4.1 Moisture Condensation. Moisture con- minimize the chances of interference in
densation in the sample delivery system, the
these cases.
analytical column, or the FPD burner block
can cause losses or interferences. This poten- 5.0 Safety
tial is eliminated by heating the probe, filter
box, and connections, and by maintaining 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
the SO2 scrubber in an ice water bath. Mois- hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
ture is removed in the SO2 scrubber and ment. This test method may not address all
heating the sample beyond this point is not of the safety problems associated with its
necessary provided the ambient temperature use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
is above 0 °C (32 °F). Alternatively, moisture test to establish appropriate safety and
may be eliminated by heating the sample health practices and determine the applica-
line, and by conditioning the sample with bility of regulatory limitations to per-
dry dilution air to lower its dew point below forming this test.
the operating temperature of the GC/FPD
analytical system prior to analysis.
397
6.0 Equipment and Supplies 6.2.2 Gas Chromatograph (see Figure 15–2).
The gas chromatograph must have at least
6.1 Sample Collection. See Figure 15–1. the following components:
The sampling train component parts are dis-
6.2.2.1 Oven. Capable of maintaining the
cussed in the following sections:
separation column at the proper operating
6.1.1 Probe. The probe shall be made of temperature ±1 °C.
Teflon or Teflon-lined stainless steel and
6.2.2.2 Temperature Gauge. To monitor
heated to prevent moisture condensation. It
column oven, detector, and exhaust tempera-
shall be designed to allow calibration gas to
ture ±1 °C.
enter the probe at or near the sample point
6.2.2.3 Flow System. Gas metering system
entry. Any portion of the probe that con-
to measure sample, fuel, combustion gas, and
tacts the stack gas must be heated to pre-
carrier gas flows.
vent moisture condensation. The probe de-
6.2.2.4 Flame Photometric Detector.
scribed in Section 6.1.1 of Method 16A having
a nozzle directed away from the gas stream 6.2.2.4.1 Electrometer. Capable of full
is recommended for sources having particu- scale amplification of linear ranges of 10¥9
late or mist emissions. Where very high to 10¥4 amperes full scale.
stack temperatures prohibit the use of Tef- 6.2.2.4.2 Power Supply. Capable of deliv-
lon probe components, glass or quartz-lined ering up to 750 volts.
probes may serve as substitutes. 6.2.2.5 Recorder. Compatible with the out-
6.1.2 Particulate Filter. 50-mm Teflon fil- put voltage range of the electrometer.
ter holder and a 1- to 2-micron porosity Tef- 6.2.2.6 Rotary Gas Valves. Multiport Tef-
lon filter (available through Savillex Cor- lon-lined valves equipped with sample loop.
poration, 5325 Highway 101, Minnetonka, Sample loop volumes shall be chosen to pro-
Minnesota 55343). The filter holder must be vide the needed analytical range. Teflon tub-
maintained in a hot box at a temperature of ing and fittings shall be used throughout to
at least 120 °C (248 °F). present an inert surface for sample gas. The
GC shall be calibrated with the sample loop
6.1.3 SO2 Scrubber. Three 300-ml Teflon
used for sample analysis.
segment impingers connected in series with
flexible, thick-walled, Teflon tubing. (Im- 6.2.2.7 GC Columns. The column system
must be demonstrated to be capable of re-
pinger parts and tubing available through
solving three major reduced sulfur com-
Savillex.) The first two impingers contain
pounds: H2S, COS, and CS2. To demonstrate
100 ml of citrate buffer, and the third im-
that adequate resolution has been achieved,
pinger is initially dry. The tip of the tube in-
a chromatogram of a calibration gas con-
serted into the solution should be con-
taining all three reduced sulfur compounds
stricted to less than 3-mm (1⁄8-in.) ID and in the concentration range of the applicable
should be immersed to a depth of at least 50 standard must be submitted. Adequate reso-
cm (2 in.). Immerse the impingers in an ice lution will be defined as base line separation
water bath and maintain near 0 °C. The of adjacent peaks when the amplifier attenu-
scrubber solution will normally last for a 3- ation is set so that the smaller peak is at
hour run before needing replacement. This least 50 percent of full scale. Base line sepa-
will depend upon the effects of moisture and ration is defined as a return to zero (±5 per-
particulate matter on the solution strength cent) in the interval between peaks. Systems
and pH. Connections between the probe, par- not meeting this criteria may be considered
ticulate filter, and SO2 scrubber shall be alternate methods subject to the approval of
made of Teflon and as short in length as pos- the Administrator.
sible. All portions of the probe, particulate 6.3 Calibration System (See Figure 15–3).
filter, and connections prior to the SO2 The calibration system must contain the fol-
scrubber (or alternative point of moisture re- lowing components:
moval) shall be maintained at a temperature
6.3.1 Flow System. To measure air flow
of at least 120 °C (248 °F). over permeation tubes within 2 percent.
6.1.4 Sample Line. Teflon, no greater than Each flowmeter shall be calibrated after
13–mm (1⁄2-in.) ID. Alternative materials, each complete test series with a wet-test
such as virgin Nylon, may be used provided meter. If the flow measuring device differs
the line-loss test is acceptable. from the wet-test meter by more than 5 per-
6.1.5 Sample Pump. The sample pump cent, the completed test shall be discarded.
shall be a leakless Teflon-coated diaphragm Alternatively, use the flow data that will
type or equivalent. yield the lowest flow measurement. Calibra-
6.2 Analysis. The following items are tion with a wet-test meter before a test is
needed for sample analysis: optional. Flow over the permeation device
6.2.1 Dilution System. The dilution sys- may also be determined using a soap bubble
tem must be constructed such that all sam- flowmeter.
ple contacts are made of Teflon, glass, or 6.3.2 Constant Temperature Bath. Device
stainless steel. It must be capable of approxi- capable of maintaining the permeation tubes
mately a 9:1 dilution of the sample. at the calibration temperature within 0.1 °C.
398
6.3.3 Temperature Sensor. Thermometer by applying a liquid (detergent in water, for
or equivalent to monitor bath temperature example) at each joint. Bubbling indicates
within 0.1 °C. the presence of a leak. As an alternative to
the initial leak-test, the sample line loss
7.0 Reagents and Standards test described in Section 8.3.1 may be per-
7.1 Fuel. Hydrogen gas (H2). Prepurified formed to verify the integrity of compo-
grade or better. nents.
7.2 Combustion Gas. Oxygen (O2) or air, 8.1.2 System Performance. Since the com-
research purity or better. plete system is calibrated at the beginning
7.3 Carrier Gas. Prepurified grade or bet- and end of each day of testing, the precise
ter. calibration of each component is not crit-
7.4 Diluent. Air containing less than 0.5 ical. However, these components should be
ppmv total sulfur compounds and less than verified to operate properly. This
10 ppmv each of moisture and total hydro- verification can be performed by observing
carbons. the response of flowmeters or of the GC out-
7.5 Calibration Gases. put to changes in flow rates or calibration
7.5.1 Permeation Devices. One each of gas concentrations, respectively, and
H2S, COS, and CS2, gravimetrically cali- ascertaining the response to be within pre-
brated and certified at some convenient op- dicted limits. If any component or the com-
erating temperature. These tubes consist of plete system fails to respond in a normal and
hermetically sealed FEP Teflon tubing in predictable manner, the source of the dis-
which a liquified gaseous substance is en- crepancy should be identified and corrected
closed. The enclosed gas permeates through before proceeding.
the tubing wall at a constant rate. When the 8.2 Sample Collection and Analysis
temperature is constant, calibration gases 8.2.1 After performing the calibration pro-
covering a wide range of known concentra- cedures outlined in Section 10.0, insert the
tions can be generated by varying and accu- sampling probe into the test port ensuring
rately measuring the flow rate of diluent gas that no dilution air enters the stack through
passing over the tubes. These calibration the port. Begin sampling and dilute the sam-
gases are used to calibrate the GC/FPD sys- ple approximately 9:1 using the dilution sys-
tem and the dilution system. tem. Note that the precise dilution factor is
7.5.2 Cylinder Gases. Cylinder gases may the one determined in Section 10.4. Condition
be used as alternatives to permeation de- the entire system with sample for a min-
vices. The gases must be traceable to a pri- imum of 15 minutes before beginning the
mary standard (such as permeation tubes) analysis. Inject aliquots of the sample into
and not used beyond the certification expira- the GC/FPD analyzer for analysis. Determine
tion date. the concentration of each reduced sulfur
7.6 Citrate Buffer. Dissolve 300 g of potas- compound directly from the calibration
sium citrate and 41 g of anhydrous citric acid curves or from the equation for the least-
in 1 liter of water. Alternatively, 284 g of so- squares line.
dium citrate may be substituted for the po- 8.2.2 If reductions in sample concentra-
tassium citrate. Adjust the pH to between 5.4 tions are observed during a sample run that
and 5.6 with potassium citrate or citric acid, cannot be explained by process conditions,
as required. the sampling must be interrupted to deter-
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, mine if the probe or filter is clogged with
Transport, and Storage particulate matter. If either is found to be
8.1 Pretest Procedures. After the com- clogged, the test must be stopped and the re-
plete measurement system has been set up at sults up to that point discarded. Testing may
the site and deemed to be operational, the resume after cleaning or replacing the probe
following procedures should be completed be- and filter. After each run, the probe and fil-
fore sampling is initiated. These procedures ter shall be inspected and, if necessary, re-
are not required, but would be helpful in pre- placed.
venting any problem which might occur 8.2.3 A sample run is composed of 16 indi-
later to invalidate the entire test. vidual analyses (injects) performed over a
8.1.1 Leak-Check. Appropriate leak-check period of not less than 3 hours or more than
procedures should be employed to verify the 6 hours.
integrity of all components, sample lines, 8.3 Post-Test Procedures.
and connections. The following procedure is 8.3.1 Sample Line Loss. A known con-
suggested: For components upstream of the centration of H2S at the level of the applica-
sample pump, attach the probe end of the ble standard, ±20 percent, must be introduced
sample line to a manometer or vacuum into the sampling system at the opening of
gauge, start the pump and pull a vacuum the probe in sufficient quantities to ensure
greater than 50 mm (2 in.) Hg, close off the that there is an excess of sample which must
pump outlet, and then stop the pump and as- be vented to the atmosphere. The sample
certain that there is no leak for 1 minute. must be transported through the entire sam-
For components after the pump, apply a pling system to the measurement system in
slight positive pressure and check for leaks the same manner as the emission samples.
399
The resulting measured concentration is within a 24-hour period, perform a partial re-
compared to the known value to determine calibration using the procedures in Section
the sampling system loss. For sampling 10.0. Only H2S (or other permeant) need be
losses greater than 20 percent, the previous used to recalibrate the GC/FPD analysis sys-
sample run is not valid. Sampling losses of 0– tem and the dilution system. Compare the
20 percent must be corrected by dividing the calibration curves obtained after the runs to
resulting sample concentration by the frac- the calibration curves obtained under Sec-
tion of recovery. The known gas sample may tion 10.3. The calibration drift should not ex-
be calibration gas as described in Section 7.5.
ceed the limits set forth in Section 13.4. If
Alternatively, cylinder gas containing H2S
mixed in nitrogen and verified according to the drift exceeds this limit, the intervening
Section 7.1.4 of Method 16A may be used. The run or runs should be considered invalid. As
optional pretest procedures provide a good an option, the calibration data set which
guideline for determining if there are leaks gives the highest sample values may be cho-
in the sampling system. sen by the tester.
8.3.2 Determination of Calibration Drift.
After each run, or after a series of runs made 9.0 Quality Control
8.3.1 ................................... Sample line loss check ............................ Ensures that uncorrected negative bias introduced by
sample loss is no greater than 20 percent, and pro-
vides for correction of bias of 20 percent or less.
8.3.2 ................................... Calibration drift test .................................. Ensures that bias introduced by drift in the measure-
ment system output during the run is no greater than
5 percent.
10.0 .................................... Analytical calibration ................................ Ensures precision of analytical results within 5 percent.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization consecutive hourly samples agree within 5

percent of their mean.
Prior to any sampling run, calibrate the
10.1.2 Vary the amount of air flowing over
system using the following procedures. (If
the tubes to produce the desired concentra-
more than one run is performed during any
tions for calibrating the analytical and dilu-
24-hour period, a calibration need not be per-
tion systems. The air flow across the tubes
formed prior to the second and any subse-
must at all times exceed the flow require-
quent runs. However, the calibration drift
ment of the analytical systems. The con-
must be determined as prescribed in Section
centration in ppmv generated by a tube con-
8.3.2 after the last run is made within the 24-
taining a specific permeant can be calculated
hour period.)
using Equation 15–1 in Section 12.2.
NOTE: This section outlines steps to be fol- 10.2 Calibration of Analytical System.
lowed for use of the GC/FPD and the dilution Generate a series of three or more known
system. The calibration procedure does not concentrations spanning the linear range of
include detailed instructions because the op- the FPD (approximately 0.5 to 10 ppmv for a
eration of these systems is complex, and it 1-ml sample) for each of the three major sul-
requires an understanding of the individual fur compounds. Bypassing the dilution sys-
system being used. Each system should in- tem, inject these standards into the GC/FPD
clude a written operating manual describing and monitor the responses until three con-
in detail the operating procedures associated secutive injections for each concentration
with each component in the measurement agree within 5 percent of their mean. Failure
system. In addition, the operator should be to attain this precision indicates a problem
familiar with the operating principles of the in the calibration or analytical system. Any
components, particularly the GC/FPD. The such problem must be identified and cor-
references in Section 16.0 are recommended rected before proceeding.
for review for this purpose. 10.3 Calibration Curves. Plot the GC/FPD
10.1 Calibration Gas Permeation Tube response in current (amperes) versus their
Preparation. causative concentrations in ppmv on log-log
10.1.1 Insert the permeation tubes into coordinate graph paper for each sulfur com-
the tube chamber. Check the bath tempera- pound. Alternatively, a least-squares equa-
ture to assure agreement with the calibration may be generated from the calibration
tion temperature of the tubes within 0.1 °C. data using concentrations versus the appro-
Allow 24 hours for the tubes to equilibrate. priate instrument response units.
Alternatively, equilibration may be verified 10.4 Calibration of Dilution System. Gen-
by injecting samples of calibration gas at 1- erate a known concentration of H2S using
hour intervals. The permeation tubes can be the permeation tube system. Adjust the flow
assumed to have reached equilibrium when rate of diluent air for the first dilution stage
400
so that the desired level of dilution is ap- 11.0 Analytical Procedure
proximated. Inject the diluted calibration
gas into the GC/FPD system until the results Sample collection and analysis are concur-
of three consecutive injections for each dilu- rent for this method (see Section 8.0).
tion agree within 5 percent of their mean.
Failure to attain this precision in this step
is an indication of a problem in the dilution 12.1 Nomenclature.
system. Any such problem must be identified
C=Concentration of permeant produced,
and corrected before proceeding. Using the
ppmv.
calibration data for H2S (developed under
Section 10.3), determine the diluted calibra- COS=Carbonyl sulfide concentration, ppmv.
tion gas concentration in ppmv. Then cal- CS2=Carbon disulfide concentration, ppmv.
culate the dilution factor as the ratio of the d=Dilution factor, dimensionless.
calibration gas concentration before dilution H2S=Hydrogen sulfide concentration, ppmv.
to the diluted calibration gas concentration K=24.04 L/g mole. (Gas constant at 20 °C and
determined under this section. Repeat this 760 mm Hg)
procedure for each stage of dilution required. L=Flow rate, L/min, of air over permeant 20
Alternatively, the GC/FPD system may be °C, 760 mm Hg.
calibrated by generating a series of three or M=Molecular weight of the permeant, g/g-
more concentrations of each sulfur com- mole.
pound and diluting these samples before in-
N=Number of analyses performed.
jecting them into the GC/FPD system. These
data will then serve as the calibration data Pr=Permeation rate of the tube, μg/min.
for the unknown samples and a separate de- 12.2 Permeant Concentration. Calculate
termination of the dilution factor will not be the concentration generated by a tube con-
necessary. However, the precision require- taining a specific permeant (see Section 10.1)
ments are still applicable. using the following equation:
12.3 Calculation of SO2 Equivalent. SO2 each reduced sulfur compound resolved dur-
equivalent will be determined for each anal- ing the given analysis. The SO2 equivalent is
ysis made by summing the concentrations of expressed as SO2 in ppmv.
SO 2 equivalent i = ∑ (H 2 S, COS, 2CS2 )d Eq. 15-2
12.4 Average SO2 Equivalent. This is de- equivalent for the fraction of water vapor
termined using the following equation. Sys- present. This is not done under applications
tems that do not remove moisture from the where the emission standard is not specified
sample but condition the gas to prevent con- on a dry basis.
densation must correct the average SO2
n
∑ SO2 equivalent i
i =1
Avg SO 2 equivalent = Eq. 15-3
ER17OC00.264</MATH>
Where: 13.0 Method Performance

Avg SO2 equivalent=Average SO2 equivalent 13.1 Range. Coupled with a GC system
ER17OC00.263</MATH>
in ppmv, dry basis. using a 1-ml sample size, the maximum limit
Average SO2 equivalent i=SO2 in ppmv as de- of the FPD for each sulfur compound is ap-
termined by Equation 15–2. proximately 10 ppmv. It may be necessary to
401
ER17OC00.262</MATH>
dilute samples from sulfur recovery plants a Compounds at Sub-Part-Per-Million Levels.’’
hundredfold (99:1), resulting in an upper Environmental Science and Technology 3:7.
limit of about 1000 ppmv for each compound. July 1969.
13.2 Sensitivity. The minimum detectable 3. Mulik, J.D., R.K. Stevens, and R.
concentration of the FPD is also dependent Baumgardner. ‘‘An Analytical System De-
on sample size and would be about 0.5 ppmv signed to Measure Multiple Malodorous Com-
for a 1-ml sample. pounds Related to Kraft Mill Activities.’’
13.3 Calibration Precision. A series of Presented at the 12th Conference on Methods
three consecutive injections of the same in Air Pollution and Industrial Hygiene
calibration gas, at any dilution, shall Studies, University of Southern California,
produce results which do not vary by more Los Angeles, CA, April 6–8, 1971.
than 5 percent from the mean of the three in- 4. Devonald, R.H., R.S. Serenius, and A.D.
jections. McIntyre. ‘‘Evaluation of the Flame Photo-
13.4 Calibration Drift. The calibration metric Detector for Analysis of Sulfur Com-
drift determined from the mean of three in- pounds.’’ Pulp and Paper Magazine of Can-
jections made at the beginning and end of ada, 73,3. March 1972.
any run or series of runs within a 24-hour pe- 5. Grimley, K.W., W.S. Smith, and R.M.
riod shall not exceed 5 percent. Martin. ‘‘The Use of a Dynamic Dilution
System in the Conditioning of Stack Gases
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] for Automated Analysis by a Mobile Sam-
pling Van.’’ Presented at the 63rd Annual
APCA Meeting in St. Louis, MO. June 14–19,
16.0 References. 1970.
6. General Reference. Standard Methods of
1. O’Keeffe, A.E., and G.C. Ortman. ‘‘Pri- Chemical Analysis Volume III-A and III-B:
mary Standards for Trace Gas Analysis.’’ Instrumental Analysis. Sixth Edition. Van
Anal. Chem. 38,760. 1966. Nostrand Reinhold Co.
2. Stevens, R.K., A.E. O’Keeffe, and G.C.
Ortman. ‘‘Absolute Calibration of a Flame 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
Photometric Detector to Volatile Sulfur Validation Data
402
403
ER17OC00.265</GPH>
404
ER17OC00.266</GPH>
METHOD 15A—DETERMINATION OF TOTAL RE- other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-
DUCED SULFUR EMISSIONS FROM SULFUR RE- tain reliable results, persons using this
COVERY PLANTS IN PETROLEUM REFINERIES method should have a thorough knowledge of
NOTE: This method does not include all of ods: Method 1, Method 6, Method 15, and
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- Method 16A.

405
ER17OC00.267</GPH>
Reduced sulfur compounds .................................................... None assigned ....................................... Not determined.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
ble for the determination of emissions of retest method to establish appropriate safety
duced sulfur compounds from sulfur recovery and health practices and determine the ap-
plants where the emissions are in a reducing plicability of regulatory limitations prior to
atmosphere, such as in Stretford units. performing this test method.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to 5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following re-
the requirements of this method will en- agents are hazardous. Personal protective
hance the quality of the data obtained from equipment and safe procedures are useful in
air pollutant sampling methods. preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc-
curs, immediately flush with copious
amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Re-
2.1 An integrated gas sample is extracted move clothing under shower and decontami-
from the stack, and combustion air is added nate. Treat residual chemical burns as ther-
to the oxygen (O2)-deficient gas at a known mal burns.
rate. The reduced sulfur compounds [includ- 5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating
ing carbon disulfide (CS2), carbonyl sulfide to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs.
(COS), and hydrogen sulfide (H2S)] are ther- 5.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes
mally oxidized to sulfur dioxide (SO2), which severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation
is then collected in hydrogen peroxide as sul- causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs.
fate ion and analyzed according to the Meth- Reacts exothermically with limited amounts
od 6 barium-thorin titration procedure. of water.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] 5.2.3 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly de-
structive to body tissue. Will cause third de-
4.0 Interferences gree burns. Eye damage may result in blind-
4.1 Reduced sulfur compounds, other than the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May
CS2, COS, and H2S, that are present in the
emissions will also be oxidized to SO2, caus-
m3 will cause lung damage in uninitiated. 1
ing a positive bias relative to emission
mg/m3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or,
standards that limit only the three com-
in higher concentrations, death. Provide ven-
pounds listed above. For example, thiophene
has been identified in emissions from a
with metals and organics.
Stretford unit and produced a positive bias
of 30 percent in the Method 15A result. How- 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
ever, these biases may not affect the out-
come of the test at units where emissions are 6.1 Sample Collection. The sampling train
low relative to the standard. used in performing this method is shown in
4.2 Calcium and aluminum have been Figure 15A–1, and component parts are dis-
shown to interfere in the Method 6 titration cussed below. Modifications to this sampling
procedure. Since these metals have been train are acceptable provided that the sys-
identified in particulate matter emissions tem performance check is met.
from Stretford units, a Teflon filter is re- 6.1.1 Probe. 6.4-mm (1⁄4-in.) OD Teflon tub-
quired to minimize this interference. ing sequentially wrapped with heat-resistant
4.3 Dilution of the hydrogen peroxide fiber strips, a rubberized heating tape (with
(H2O2) absorbing solution can potentially re- a plug at one end), and heat-resistant adhe-
duce collection efficiency, causing a negative sive tape. A flexible thermocouple or some
bias. When used to sample emissions con- other suitable temperature-measuring device
taining 7 percent moisture or less, the midg- shall be placed between the Teflon tubing
et impingers have sufficient volume to con- and the fiber strips so that the temperature
tain the condensate collected during sam- can be monitored. The probe should be
pling. Dilution of the H2O2 does not affect sheathed in stainless steel to provide in-
the collection of SO2. At higher moisture stack rigidity. A series of bored-out stainless
contents, the potassium citrate-citric acid steel fittings placed at the front of the
buffer system used with Method 16A should sheath will prevent flue gas from entering
be used to collect the condensate. between the probe and sheath. The sampling
probe is depicted in Figure 15A–2.
5.0 Safety
6.1.2 Particulate Filter. A 50-mm Teflon

5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve filter holder and a 1- to 2-mm porosity Teflon
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- filter (available through Savillex Corpora-
ment. This test method may not address all tion, 5325 Highway 101, Minnetonka, Min-
of the safety problems associated with its nesota 55345). The filter holder must be
406
maintained in a hot box at a temperature 7.1.2 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2), 3 Percent
high enough to prevent condensation. by Volume. Same as Method 6, Section 7.1.3
6.1.3 Combustion Air Delivery System. As (40 ml is needed per sample).
shown in the schematic diagram in Figure 7.1.3 Recovery Check Gas. Carbonyl sul-
15A–3. The rate meter should be selected to fide in nitrogen [100 parts per million by vol-
measure an air flow rate of 0.5 liter/min (0.02 ume (ppmv) or greater, if necessary] in an
ft3/min). aluminum cylinder. Concentration certified
6.1.4 Combustion Tube. Quartz glass tub- by the manufacturer with an accuracy of ±2
ing with an expanded combustion chamber percent or better, or verified by gas chroma-
tography where the instrument is calibrated
2.54 cm (1 in.) in diameter and at least 30.5
with a COS permeation tube.
cm (12 in.) long. The tube ends should have
7.1.4 Combustion Gas. Air, contained in a
an outside diameter of 0.6 cm (1⁄4 in.) and be
gas cylinder equipped with a two-stage regu-
at least 15.3 cm (6 in.) long. This length is
lator. The gas shall contain less than 50 ppb
necessary to maintain the quartz-glass con- of reduced sulfur compounds and less than 10
nector near ambient temperature and there- ppm total hydrocarbons.
by avoid leaks. Alternatively, the outlet 7.2 Sample Recovery and Analysis. Same
may be constructed with a 90 degree glass as Method 6, Sections 7.2 and 7.3.
elbow and socket that would fit directly onto
the inlet of the first peroxide impinger. 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
6.1.5 Furnace. Of sufficient size to enclose and Transport
the combustion tube. The furnace must have 8.1 Preparation of Sampling Train. For
a temperature regulator capable of main- the Method 6 part of the train, measure 20 ml
taining the temperature at 1100 ±50 °C (2,012 of 3 percent H2O2 into the first and second
±90 °F). The furnace operating temperature midget impingers. Leave the third midget
must be checked with a thermocouple to en- impinger empty and add silica gel to the
sure accuracy. Lindberg furnaces have been fourth impinger. Alternatively, a silica gel
found to be satisfactory. drying tube may be used in place of the
6.1.6 Peroxide Impingers, Stopcock fourth impinger. Place crushed ice and water
Grease, Temperature Sensor, Drying Tube, around all impingers. Maintain the oxidation
Valve, Pump, and Barometer. Same as in furnace at 1100 ±50 °C (2,012 ±90 °F) to ensure
Method 6, Sections 6.1.1.2, 6.1.1.4, 6.1.1.5, 100 percent oxidation of COS. Maintain the
6.1.1.6, 6.1.1.7, 6.1.1.8, and 6.1.2, respectively, probe and filter temperatures at a high
except that the midget bubbler of Method 6, enough level (no visible condensation) to
Section 6.1.1.2 is not required. prevent moisture condensation and monitor
6.1.7 Vacuum Gauge and Rate Meter. At the temperatures with a thermocouple.
least 760 mm Hg (30 in. Hg) gauge and rotam- 8.2 Leak-Check Procedure. Assemble the
eter, or equivalent, capable of measuring sampling train and leak-check as described
flow rate to ±5 percent of the selected flow in Method 6, Section 8.2. Include the combus-
rate and calibrated as in Section 10.2. tion air delivery system from the needle
6.1.8 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter capa- valve forward in the leak-check.
ble of measuring the sample volume under 8.3 Sample Collection. Adjust the pressure
the particular sampling conditions with an on the second stage of the regulator on the
combustion air cylinder to 10 psig. Adjust
accuracy of 2 percent.
the combustion air flow rate to 0.5 ±0.05 L/
6.1.9 U-tube manometer. To measure the min (1.1 ±0.1 ft3/hr) before injecting combus-
pressure at the exit of the combustion gas tion air into the sampling train. Then inject
dry gas meter. combustion air into the sampling train, start
6.2 Sample Recovery and Analysis. Same the sample pump, and open the stack sample
as Method 6, Sections 6.2 and 6.3, except a 10- gas valve. Carry out these three operations
ml buret with 0.05-ml graduations is required within 15 to 30 seconds to avoid pressurizing
for titrant volumes of less than 10.0 ml, and the sampling train. Adjust the total sample
the spectrophotometer is not needed. flow rate to 2.0 ±0.2 L/min (4.2 ±0.4 ft3/hr).
These flow rates produce an O2 concentration
7.0 Reagents and Standards of 5.0 percent in the stack gas, which must
NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, all re- be maintained constantly to allow oxidation
agents must conform to the specifications of reduced sulfur compounds to SO2. Adjust
established by the Committee on Analytical these flow rates during sampling as nec-
Reagents of the American Chemical Society. essary. Monitor and record the combustion
When such specifications are not available, air manometer reading at regular intervals
during the sampling period. Sample for 1 or
the best available grade shall be used.
3 hours. At the end of sampling, turn off the
7.1 Sample Collection. The following re- sample pump and combustion air simulta-
agents and standards are required for sample neously (within 30 seconds of each other). All
analysis: other procedures are the same as in Method
7.1.1 Water. Same as Method 6, Section 6, Section 8.3, except that the sampling train
7.1.1. should not be purged. After collecting the
407
sample, remove the probe from the stack and concentration. Mix the recovery gas with N2
conduct a leak-check according to the proce- as shown in Figure 15A–4 if dilution is re-
dures outlined in Section 8.2 of Method 6 quired. Adjust the flow rates to generate a
(mandatory). After each 3-hour test run (or COS concentration in the range of the stack
after three 1-hour samples), conduct one sys- gas or within 20 percent of the applicable
tem performance check (see Section 8.5). standard at a total flow rate of at least 2.5 L/
After this system performance check and be- min (5.3 ft3/hr). Use Equation 15A–4 (see Sec-
fore the next test run, it is recommended tion 12.5) to calculate the concentration of
that the probe be rinsed and brushed and the recovery gas generated. Calibrate the flow
filter replaced. rate from both sources with a soap bubble
NOTE: In Method 15, a test run is composed flow tube so that the diluted concentration
of 16 individual analyses (injects) performed of COS can be accurately calculated. Collect
over a period of not less than 3 hours or more 30–minute samples, and analyze in the same
than 6 hours. For Method 15A to be con- manner as the emission samples. Collect the
sistent with Method 15, the following may be samples through the probe of the sampling
used to obtain a test run: (1) Collect three 60- train using a manifold or some other suit-
minute samples or (2) collect one 3-hour able device that will ensure extraction of a
sample. (Three test runs constitute a test.) representative sample.
8.4 Sample Recovery. Recover the hydro- 8.5.3 The recovery check must be per-
gen peroxide-containing impingers as deformed in the field before replacing the par-
tailed in Method 6, Section 8.4. ticulate filter and before cleaning the probe.
8.5 System Performance Check. A sample recovery of 100 ±20 percent must be
8.5.1 A system performance check is done obtained for the data to be valid and should
(1) to validate the sampling train compo- be reported with the emission data, but
nents and procedure (before testing, op- should not be used to correct the data. How-
tional) and (2) to validate a test run (after a ever, if the performance check results do not
run, mandatory). Perform a check in the affect the compliance or noncompliance sta-
field before testing consisting of at least two tus of the affected facility, the Adminis-
samples (optional), and perform an addi- trator may decide to accept the results of
tional check after each 3–hour run or after the compliance test. Use Equation 15A–5 (see
three 1–hour samples (mandatory). Section 12.6) to calculate the recovery effi-
8.5.2 The checks involve sampling a ciency.
known concentration of COS and comparing
the analyzed concentration with the known 9.0 Quality Control
8.5 ................... System performance check ............................. Ensures validity of sampling train components and analytical
procedure.
8.2, 10.0 .......... Sampling equipment leak-check and calibra- Ensures accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sam-
tion. ple volume
10.0 ................. Barium standard solution standardization ....... Ensures precision of normality determination.
11.1 ................. Replicate titrations ........................................... Ensures precision of titration determinations.
11.2 ................. Audit sample analysis ...................................... Evaluates analyst’s technique and standards preparation.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization 12.1 Nomenclature.

10.1 Metering System, Temperature Sen- CCOS=Concentration of COS recovery gas,
sors, Barometer, and Barium Perchlorate So- ppm.
lution. Same as Method 6, Sections 10.1, 10.2, CRG(act)=Actual concentration of recovery
10.4, and 10.5, respectively. check gas (after dilution), ppm.
10.2 Rate Meter. Calibrate with a bubble CRG(m)=Measured concentration of recovery
flow tube. check gas generated, ppm.
CRS=Concentration of reduced sulfur com-
11.0 Analytical Procedure pounds as SO2, dry basis, corrected to
11.1 Sample Loss Check and Sample Anal- standard conditions, ppm.
ysis. Same as Method 6, Sections 11.1 and N=Normality of barium perchlorate titrant,
11.2. milliequivalents/ml.
11.2 Audit Sample Analysis. Same as Pbar=Barometric pressure at exit orifice of
Method 6, Section 11.3. the dry gas meter, mm Hg.
Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg.
QCOS=Flow rate of COS recovery gas, liters/

In the calculations, retain at least one min.
extra decimal figure beyond that of the ac- QN=Flow rate of diluent N2, liters/min.
quired data. Round off figures after final cal- R=Recovery efficiency for the system per-
culations. formance check, percent.
408
Tm=Average dry gas meter absolute tempera- Vsoln=Total volume of solution in which the
ture, °K. sulfur dioxide sample is contained, 100 ml.
Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K. Vt=Volume of barium perchlorate titrant
Va=Volume of sample aliquot titrated, ml. used for the sample (average of replicate
Vms=Dry gas volume as measured by the sam- titrations), ml.
ple train dry gas meter, liters.
Vtb=Volume of barium perchlorate titrant
Vmc=Dry gas volume as measured by the
used for the blank, ml.
combustion air dry gas meter, liters.
Vms(std)=Dry gas volume measured by the sam- Y=Calibration factor for sampling train dry
ple train dry gas meter, corrected to stand- gas meter.
ard conditions, liters. Yc=Calibration factor for combustion air dry
Vmc(std)=Dry gas volume measured by the gas meter.
combustion air dry gas meter, corrected to 32.03=Equivalent weight of sulfur dioxide,
standard conditions, liters. mg/meq.
12025
μl
=
(32.03 mg) (24.051) (mole)(lg) 10 ml 10 μl
3 3
( )( )
meq meq (
mole (64.06g) 10 3 mg (l)( ml) )
12.2 Dry Sample Gas Volume, Corrected
to Standard Conditions.
Tstd Pbar
Vm (std ) = Vms Y Eq. 15A-1
Tm Pstd
Vm Pbar
= K1Y
Tm
Where: 12.3 Combustion Air Gas Volume, cor-

K1=0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units, rected to Standard Conditions.
Vmc (std ) = k1Yc

(Vmc )(Pbar ) Eq. 15A-2
Tm
NOTE: Correct Pbar for the average pressure 12.4 Concentration of reduced sulfur com-
of the manometer during the sampling pe- pounds as ppm SO2.
ER17oc00.270</MATH>
riod.
C RS = K 2 N
(Vt − Vtb )(Vso ln / Va ) Eq. 15A-3
ER17oc00.269</MATH>
Vms (std ) − Vmc (std )

Where:
ER17oc00.268</MATH>
409
ER17oc00.411</MATH>
mg 24.05 l l mole l g 10 3 ml 10 3 μl
K 2 = 32.03
meq mole 64.06 g 10 3 mg l lml
12025 ml
=
meq
12.5 Concentration of Generated Recovery 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]

Gas.
C RG =
(C cos )(Q cos ) Eq. 15A-4
16.0 References
Q cos + Q N 2 1. American Society for Testing and Mate-

rials Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Part
12.6 Recovery Efficiency for the System 31: Water, Atmospheric Analysis. Philadel-
Performance Check. phia, Pennsylvania. 1974. pp. 40–42.
2. Blosser, R.O., H.S. Oglesby, and A.K.
C RG( m ) Jain. A Study of Alternate SO2 Scrubber De-
R= × 100 Eq. 15A-5 signs Used for TRS Monitoring. National
C RG(act ) Council of the Paper Industry for Air and
Stream Improvement, Inc., New York, New
York. Special Report 77–05. July 1977.
13.0 Method Performance 3. Curtis, F., and G.D. McAlister. Develop-
13.1 Analytical Range. The lower detect- ment and Evaluation of an Oxidation/Method
able limit is 0.1 ppmv when sampling at 2 6 TRS Emission Sampling Procedure. Emis-
lpm for 3 hours or 0.3 ppmv when sampling at sion Measurement Branch, Emission Stand-
2 lpm for 1 hour. The upper concentration ards and Engineering Division, U.S. Environ-
limit of the method exceeds concentrations mental Protection Agency, Research Tri-
of reduced sulfur compounds generally en- angle Park, North Carolina. February 1980.
countered in sulfur recovery plants. 4. Gellman, I. A Laboratory and Field
13.2 Precision. Relative standard devi- Study of Reduced Sulfur Sampling and Moni-
ations of 2.8 and 6.9 percent have been ob- toring Systems. National Council of the
tained when sampling a stream with a re- Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improve-
duced sulfur compound concentration of 41 ment, Inc., New York, New York. Atmos-
ppmv as SO2 for 1 and 3 hours, respectively. pheric Quality Improvement Technical Bul-
13.3 Bias. No analytical bias has been letin No. 81. October 1975.
identified. However, results obtained with 5. Margeson, J.H., et al. A Manual Method
this method are likely to contain a positive for TRS Determination. Journal of Air Pol-
bias relative to emission regulations due to lution Control Association. 35:1280–1286. De-
the presence of nonregulated sulfur com- cember 1985.
pounds (that are present in petroleum) in the
emissions. The magnitude of this bias varies 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
accordingly, and has not been quantified. Validation Data
ER17oc00.273</MATH>
ER17oc00.272</MATH>
410
ER17oc00.271</MATH>
411
ER17oc00.274</GPH>
412
ER17oc00.275</GPH>
413
ER17oc00.276</GPH>
[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971]

APPENDIX A–6 TO PART 60—TEST Method 16A—Determination of total reduced

METHODS 16 THROUGH 18 sulfur emissions from stationary sources

(impinger technique)
Method 16—Semicontinuous determination Method 16B—Determination of total reduced
of sulfur emissions from stationary sources sulfur emissions from stationary sources
414
ER17oc00.277</GPH>
Method 17—Determination of particulate should be clearly understood that unless oth-
emissions from stationary sources (in- erwise identified all such methods and
stack filtration method) changes must have prior approval of the Ad-
Method 18—Measurement of gaseous organic ministrator. An owner employing such meth-
compound emissions by gas chroma- ods or deviations from the test methods
tography without obtaining prior approval does so at
The test methods in this appendix are re- the risk of subsequent disapproval and re-
ferred to in § 60.8 (Performance Tests) and testing with approved methods.
§ 60.11 (Compliance With Standards and Within the test methods, certain specific
Maintenance Requirements) of 40 CFR part equipment or procedures are recognized as
60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific being acceptable or potentially acceptable
uses of these test methods are described in and are specifically identified in the meth-
the standards of performance contained in ods. The items identified as acceptable op-
the subparts, beginning with Subpart D. tions may be used without approval but
Within each standard of performance, a must be identified in the test report. The po-
section title ‘‘Test Methods and Procedures’’ tentially approvable options are cited as
is provided to: (1) Identify the test methods ‘‘subject to the approval of the Adminis-
to be used as reference methods to the facil- trator’’ or as ‘‘or equivalent.’’ Such poten-
ity subject to the respective standard and (2) tially approvable techniques or alternatives
identify any special instructions or condi- may be used at the discretion of the owner
tions to be followed when applying a method without prior approval. However, detailed
to the respective facility. Such instructions descriptions for applying these potentially
(for example, establish sampling rates, vol- approvable techniques or alternatives are
umes, or temperatures) are to be used either not provided in the test methods. Also, the
in addition to, or as a substitute for proce- potentially approvable options are not nec-
dures in a test method. Similarly, for essarily acceptable in all applications.
sources subject to emission monitoring re- Therefore, an owner electing to use such po-
quirements, specific instructions pertaining tentially approvable techniques or alter-
to any use of a test method as a reference natives is responsible for: (1) assuring that
method are provided in the subpart or in Ap- the techniques or alternatives are in fact ap-
pendix B. plicable and are properly executed; (2) in-
Inclusion of methods in this appendix is cluding a written description of the alter-
not intended as an endorsement or denial of native method in the test report (the written
their applicability to sources that are not method must be clear and must be capable of
subject to standards of performance. The being performed without additional instruc-
methods are potentially applicable to other tion, and the degree of detail should be simi-
sources; however, applicability should be lar to the detail contained in the test meth-
confirmed by careful and appropriate evalua- ods); and (3) providing any rationale or sup-
tion of the conditions prevalent at such porting data necessary to show the validity
sources. of the alternative in the particular applica-
The approach followed in the formulation tion. Failure to meet these requirements can
of the test methods involves specifications result in the Administrator’s disapproval of
for equipment, procedures, and performance. the alternative.
proach would be preferable in all methods METHOD 16—SEMICONTINUOUS DETERMINATION
because this allows the greatest flexibility OF SULFUR EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY
to the user. In practice, however, this ap- SOURCES
proach is impractical in most cases because
performance specifications cannot be estab- NOTE: This method does not include all of
lished. Most of the methods described herein, the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup-
therefore, involve specific equipment speci- plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana-
fications and procedures, and only a few lytical) essential to its performance. Some
methods in this appendix rely on perform- material is incorporated by reference from
ance criteria. other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-
Minor changes in the test methods should tain reliable results, persons using this
not necessarily affect the validity of the re- method should have a thorough knowledge of
sults and it is recognized that alternative at least the following additional test meth-
and equivalent methods exist. Section 60.8 ods: Method 1, Method 4, Method 15, and
provides authority for the Administrator to Method 16A.
specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2)
alternative methods, and (3) minor changes
in the methodology of the test methods. It 1.1 Analytes.
Dimethyl disulfide [(CH3)2S2] ............................................................................................. 62–49–20 50 ppb.

Dimethyl sulfide [(CH3)2S] ................................................................................................. 75–18–3 50 ppb.
415
Hydrogen sulfide [H2S] ...................................................................................................... 7783–06–4 50 ppb.

Methyl mercaptan [CH4S] .................................................................................................. 74–93–1 50 ppb.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- of calibration gases with and without CO2 in
ble for the determination of total reduced the diluent gas. The CO2 level should be ap-
sulfur (TRS) compounds from recovery fur- proximately 10 percent for the case with CO2
naces, lime kilns, and smelt dissolving tanks present. The two chromatograms should
at kraft pulp mills and fuel gas combustion show agreement within the precision limits
devices at petroleum refineries. of Section 10.2.
NOTE: The method described below uses the 4.3 Particulate Matter. Particulate mat-
principle of gas chromatographic (GC) sepa- ter in gas samples can cause interference by
ration and flame photometric detection eventual clogging of the analytical system.
(FPD). Since there are many systems or sets This interference is eliminated by using the
of operating conditions that represent use- Teflon filter after the probe.
able methods of determining sulfur emis- 4.4 Sulfur Dioxide (SO2). Sulfur dioxide is
sions, all systems which employ this prin- not a specific interferant but may be present
ciple, but differ only in details of equipment in such large amounts that it cannot effec-
and operation, may be used as alternative tively be separated from the other com-
methods, provided that the calibration preci- pounds of interest. The SO2 scrubber de-
sion and sample line loss criteria are met. scribed in Section 6.1.3 will effectively re-
move SO2 from the sample.
the requirements of this method will en- 5.0 Safety
air pollutant sampling methods. 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
2.0 Summary of Method ment. This test method may not address all
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from the
emission source and an aliquot is analyzed
for hydrogen sulfide (H2S), methyl
mercaptan (MeSH), dimethyl sulfide (DMS),
and dimethyl disulfide (DMDS) by GC/FPD.
performing this test method.
These four compounds are known collec-
5.2 Hydrogen Sulfide. A flammable, poi-
tively as TRS.
sonous gas with the odor of rotten eggs. H2S
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] is extremely hazardous and can cause col-
lapse, coma, and death within a few seconds
4.0 Interferences of one or two inhalations at sufficient con-
centrations. Low concentrations irritate the
4.1 Moisture. Moisture condensation in
the sample delivery system, the analytical mucous membranes and may cause nausea,
column, or the FPD burner block can cause dizziness, and headache after exposure.
losses or interferences. This is prevented by 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
maintaining the probe, filter box, and con-
nections at a temperature of at least 120 °C 6.1. Sample Collection. The following
(248 °F). Moisture is removed in the SO2 items are needed for sample collection.
scrubber and heating the sample beyond this 6.1.1 Probe. Teflon or Teflon-lined stain-
point is not necessary when the ambient less steel. The probe must be heated to pre-
temperature is above 0 °C (32 °F). Alter- vent moisture condensation. It must be de-
natively, moisture may be eliminated by signed to allow calibration gas to enter the
heating the sample line, and by conditioning probe at or near the sample point entry. Any
the sample with dry dilution air to lower its portion of the probe that contacts the stack
dew point below the operating temperature gas must be heated to prevent moisture con-
of the GC/FPD analytical system prior to densation. Figure 16–1 illustrates the probe
analysis. used in lime kilns and other sources where
4.2 Carbon Monoxide (CO) and Carbon Di- significant amounts of particulate matter
oxide (CO2). CO and CO2 have a substantial are present. The probe is designed with the
desensitizing effect on the flame photo- deflector shield placed between the sample
metric detector even after dilution. Accept- and the gas inlet holes to reduce clogging of
able systems must demonstrate that they the filter and possible adsorption of sample
have eliminated this interference by some gas. As an alternative, the probe described in
procedure such as eluting these compounds Section 6.1.1 of Method 16A having a nozzle
before any of the compounds to be measured. directed away from the gas stream may be
Compliance with this requirement can be used at sources having significant amounts
demonstrated by submitting chromatograms of particulate matter.
416
6.1.2 Particulate Filter. 50–mm Teflon fil- loop. Sample loop volumes must be chosen to
ter holder and a 1- to 2-micron porosity Tef- provide the needed analytical range. Teflon
lon filter (available through Savillex Cor- tubing and fittings must be used throughout
poration, 5325 Highway 101, Minnetonka, to present an inert surface for sample gas.
Minnesota 55343). The filter holder must be The gas chromatograph must be calibrated
maintained in a hot box at a temperature of with the sample loop used for sample anal-
at least 120 °C (248 °F). ysis.
6.1.3 SO2 Scrubber. Three 300-ml Teflon 6.2.3 Gas Chromatogram Columns. The
segmented impingers connected in series column system must be demonstrated to be
with flexible, thick-walled, Teflon tubing. capable of resolving the four major reduced
(Impinger parts and tubing available through sulfur compounds: H2S, MeSH, DMS, and
Savillex.) The first two impingers contain DMDS. It must also demonstrate freedom
100 ml of citrate buffer and the third im- from known interferences. To demonstrate
pinger is initially dry. The tip of the tube in- that adequate resolution has been achieved,
serted into the solution should be con- submit a chromatogram of a calibration gas
stricted to less than 3 mm (1⁄8 in.) ID and containing all four of the TRS compounds in
should be immersed to a depth of at least 5 the concentration range of the applicable
cm (2 in.). Immerse the impingers in an ice standard. Adequate resolution will be defined
water bath and maintain near 0 °C (32 °F). as base line separation of adjacent peaks
The scrubber solution will normally last for when the amplifier attenuation is set so that
a 3-hour run before needing replacement. the smaller peak is at least 50 percent of full
This will depend upon the effects of moisture scale. Baseline separation is defined as a re-
and particulate matter on the solution turn to zero ±5 percent in the interval be-
strength and pH. Connections between the tween peaks. Systems not meeting this cri-
probe, particulate filter, and SO2 scrubber teria may be considered alternate methods
must be made of Teflon and as short in subject to the approval of the Administrator.
length as possible. All portions of the probe,
6.3 Calibration. A calibration system,
particulate filter, and connections prior to
containing the following components, is re-
the SO2 scrubber (or alternative point of
quired (see Figure 16–2).
moisture removal) must be maintained at a
temperature of at least 120 °C (248 °F). 6.3.1 Tube Chamber. Chamber of glass or
6.1.4 Sample Line. Teflon, no greater than Teflon of sufficient dimensions to house per-
1.3 cm (1⁄2 in.) ID. Alternative materials, such meation tubes.
as virgin Nylon, may be used provided the 6.3.2 Flow System. To measure air flow
line loss test is acceptable. over permeation tubes at ±2 percent. Flow
6.1.5 Sample Pump. The sample pump over the permeation device may also be de-
must be a leakless Teflon-coated diaphragm termined using a soap bubble flowmeter.
type or equivalent. 6.3.3 Constant Temperature Bath. Device
6.2 Analysis. The following items are capable of maintaining the permeation tubes
needed for sample analysis: at the calibration temperature within 0.1 °C
6.2.1 Dilution System. Needed only for (0.2 °F).
high sample concentrations. The dilution 6.3.4 Temperature Gauge. Thermometer
system must be constructed such that all or equivalent to monitor bath temperature
sample contacts are made of Teflon, glass, or within 1 °C (2 °F).
stainless steel.
6.2.2 Gas Chromatograph. The gas chro- 7.0 Reagents and Standards
matograph must have at least the following 7.1 Fuel. Hydrogen (H2), prepurified grade
components: or better.
7.2 Combustion Gas. Oxygen (O2) or air,
research purity or better.
temperature ±1 °C (2 °F).
6.2.2.2 Temperature Gauge. To monitor 7.3 Carrier Gas. Prepurified grade or bet-
column oven, detector, and exhaust tempera- ter.
ture ±1 °C (2 °F). 7.4 Diluent (if required). Air containing
6.2.2.3 Flow System. Gas metering system less than 50 ppb total sulfur compounds and
to measure sample, fuel, combustion gas, and less than 10 ppmv each of moisture and total
carrier gas flows. hydrocarbons.
6.2.2.4 Flame Photometric Detector. 7.5 Calibration Gases
6.2.2.4.1 Electrometer. Capable of full 7.5.1 Permeation tubes, one each of H2S,
scale amplification of linear ranges of 10¥9 MeSH, DMS, and DMDS, gravimetrically
to 10¥4 amperes full scale. calibrated and certified at some convenient
6.2.2.4.2 Power Supply. Capable of deliv- operating temperature. These tubes consist
ering up to 750 volts. of hermetically sealed FEP Teflon tubing in

6.2.2.4.3 Recorder. Compatible with the which a liquified gaseous substance is en-
output voltage range of the electrometer. closed. The enclosed gas permeates through
6.2.2.4.4 Rotary Gas Valves. Multiport the tubing wall at a constant rate. When the
Teflon-lined valves equipped with sample temperature is constant, calibration gases
417
covering a wide range of known concentra- 7.6 Citrate Buffer and Sample Line Loss
tions can be generated by varying and accu- Gas. Same as Method 15, Sections 7.6 and 7.7.
rately measuring the flow rate of diluent gas
passing over the tubes. These calibration 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
gases are used to calibrate the GC/FPD sys- and Transport
tem and the dilution system.
7.5.2 Cylinder Gases. Cylinder gases may Same as Method 15, Section 8.0, except
be used as alternatives to permeation de- that the references to the dilution system
vices. The gases must be traceable to a pri- may not be applicable.
mary standard (such as permeation tubes)
and not used beyond the certification expira- 9.0 Quality Control
tion date.
8.0 ...................................... Sample line loss check ............................ Ensures that uncorrected negative bias introduced by
sample loss is no greater than 20 percent, and pro-
vides for correction of bias of 20 percent or less.
8.0 ...................................... Calibration drift test .................................. Ensures that bias introduced by drift in the measure-
5 percent.
10.0 .................................... Analytical calibration ................................ Ensures precision of analytical results within 5 percent.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations

Same as Method 15, Section 10.0, with the 12.1 Concentration of Reduced Sulfur
following addition and exceptions: Compounds. Calculate the average con-
10.1 Use the four compounds that com- centration of each of the four analytes (i.e.,
prise TRS instead of the three reduced sulfur DMDS, DMS, H2S, and MeSH) over the sam-
compounds measured by Method 15. ple run (specified in Section 8.2 of Method 15
as 16 injections).
10.2 Flow Meter. Calibration before each
test run is recommended, but not required; N
calibration following each test series is man-
datory. Calibrate each flow meter after each ∑ Si
i =1
complete test series with a wet-test meter. If C= Eq. 16-1
the flow measuring device differs from the N
wet-test meter by 5 percent or more, the Where:
completed test runs must be voided. Alter-
Si=Concentration of any reduced sulfur com-
natively, the flow data that yield the lower
pound from the ith sample injection, ppm.
flow measurement may be used. Flow over
C=Average concentration of any one of the
the permeation device may also be deter- reduced sulfur compounds for the entire
mined using a soap bubble flowmeter. run, ppm.
N=Number of injections in any run period.
12.2 TRS Concentration. Using Equation
Sample collection and analysis are concur- 16–2, calculate the TRS concentration for
rent for this method (see Section 8.0). each sample run.
(
C TRS = d ∑ C H 2S + C MeSH + C DMS + 2C DMDS ) Eq. 16-2
Where: 12.3 Average TRS Concentration. Cal-

CTRS=TRS concentration, ppmv. culate the average TRS concentration for all
sample runs performed.
ER17oc00.280</MATH>
CH2S=Hydrogen sulfide concentration, ppmv.

CMeSH=Methyl mercaptan concentration,
ppmv.
CDMS=Dimethyl sulfide concentration, ppmv.
CDMDS=Dimethyl disulfide concentration,

ppmv.
ER17oc00.279</MATH>
d=Dilution factor, dimensionless. Where:
418
ER17oc00.278</MATH>
Average TRS=Average total reduced sulfur Compounds at Sub-Part-Per-Million Levels.’’
in ppm. Environmental Science and Technology, 3:7.
TRSi=Total reduced sulfur in ppm as deter- July 1969.
mined by Equation 16–2. 3. Mulik, J.D., R.K. Stevens, and R.
N=Number of samples. Baumgardner. ‘‘An Analytical System De-
Bwo=Fraction of volume of water vapor in the signed to Measure Multiple Malodorous Com-
gas stream as determined by Method 4— pounds Related to Kraft Mill Activities.’’
Determination of Moisture in Stack Gases. Presented at the 12th Conference on Methods
13.0 Method Performance in Air Pollution and Industrial Hygiene
Studies, University of Southern California,
13.1 Analytical Range. The analytical Los Angeles, CA. April 6–8, 1971.
range will vary with the sample loop size. 4. Devonald, R.H., R.S. Serenius, and A.D.
Typically, the analytical range may extend McIntyre. ‘‘Evaluation of the Flame Photo-
from 0.1 to 100 ppmv using 10- to 0.1-ml sam- metric Detector for Analysis of Sulfur Com-
ple loop sizes. This eliminates the need for pounds.’’ Pulp and Paper Magazine of Can-
sample dilution in most cases. ada, 73,3. March 1972.
13.2 Sensitivity. Using the 10-ml sample
5. Grimley, K.W., W.S. Smith, and R.M.
size, the minimum detectable concentration
Martin. ‘‘The Use of a Dynamic Dilution
is approximately 50 ppb.
System in the Conditioning of Stack Gases
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] for Automated Analysis by a Mobile Sam-
pling Van.’’ Presented at the 63rd Annual
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] APCA Meeting, St. Louis, MO. June 14–19,
1970.
16.0 References
6. General Reference. Standard Methods of
1. O’Keeffe, A.E., and G.C. Ortman. ‘‘Pri- Chemical Analysis, Volumes III-A and III-B
mary Standards for Trace Gas Analysis.’’ Instrumental Methods. Sixth Edition. Van
Analytical Chemical Journal, 38,76. 1966. Nostrand Reinhold Co.
2. Stevens, R.K., A.E. O’Keeffe, and G.C.
Ortman. ‘‘Absolute Calibration of a Flame 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
Photometric Detector to Volatile Sulfur Validation Data
419
420
ER17oc00.281</GPH>
METHOD 16A—DETERMINATION OF TOTAL RE- other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-
DUCED SULFUR EMISSIONS FROM STA- tain reliable results, persons using this
TIONARY SOURCES (IMPINGER TECHNIQUE) method should have a thorough knowledge of
421
ER17oc00.282</GPH>
Total reduced sulfur (TRS) including: N/A See Section 13.1.

Dimethyl disulfide [(CH3)2S2] ........................................ 62–49–20
Dimethyl sulfide [(CH3)2S] ............................................ 75–18–3
Hydrogen sulfide [H2S] ................................................. 7783–06–4
Methyl mercaptan [CH4S] ............................................. 74–93–1
Reduced sulfur (RS) including: N/A
H2S ............................................................................... 7783–06–4
Carbonyl sulfide [COS] ................................................. 463–58–1
Carbon disulfide [CS2] .................................................. 75–15–0
Reported as: Sulfur dioxide (SO2) .............................................. 7449–09–5
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- test method to establish appropriate safety
ble for the determination of TRS emissions and health practices and determine the ap-
from recovery boilers, lime kilns, and smelt plicability of regulatory limitations prior to
dissolving tanks at kraft pulp mills, reduced performing this test method.
sulfur compounds (H2S, carbonyl sulfide, and 5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following re-
carbon disulfide from sulfur recovery units agents are hazardous. Personal protective
at onshore natural gas processing facilities, equipment and safe procedures are useful in
and from other sources when specified in an preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc-
applicable subpart of the regulations. The curs, immediately flush with copious
flue gas must contain at least 1 percent oxy- amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Re-
gen for complete oxidation of all TRS to SO2. move clothing under shower and decontami-
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to nate. Treat residual chemical burns as ther-
the requirements of this method will en- mal burns.
hance the quality of the data obtained from 5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating
air pollutant sampling methods. to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs.
2.0 Summary of Method severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation
2.1 An integrated gas sample is extracted causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs.
from the stack. SO2 is removed selectively Reacts exothermically with limited amounts
from the sample using a citrate buffer solu- of water.
tion. TRS compounds are then thermally 5.2.3 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly de-
oxidized to SO2, collected in hydrogen per- structive to body tissue. Will cause third de-
oxide as sulfate, and analyzed by the Method gree burns. Eye damage may result in blind-
6 barium-thorin titration procedure. ness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] cause lung tissue damage with edema. 3 mg/
m3 will cause lung damage in uninitiated. 1
4.0 Interferences
mg/m3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or,
4.1 Reduced sulfur compounds other than in higher concentrations, death. Provide ven-
those regulated by the emission standards, if tilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently
present, may be measured by this method. with metals and organics.
Therefore, carbonyl sulfide, which is par- 5.3 Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S). A flammable,
tially oxidized to SO2 and may be present in poisonous gas with the odor of rotten eggs.
a lime kiln exit stack, would be a positive H2S is extremely hazardous and can cause
interferant. collapse, coma, and death within a few sec-
4.2 Particulate matter from the lime kiln onds of one or two inhalations at sufficient
stack gas (primarily calcium carbonate) can concentrations. Low concentrations irritate
cause a negative bias if it is allowed to enter the mucous membranes and may cause nau-
the citrate scrubber; the particulate matter sea, dizziness, and headache after exposure.
will cause the pH to rise and H2S to be ab-
sorbed prior to oxidation. Furthermore, if 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
the calcium carbonate enters the hydrogen 6.1 Sample Collection. The sampling train
peroxide impingers, the calcium will precipi- is shown in Figure 16A–1 and component
tate sulfate ion. Proper use of the particu- parts are discussed below. Modifications to
late filter described in Section 6.1.3 will this sampling train are acceptable provided
eliminate this interference. the system performance check is met (see
Section 8.5).
5.0 Safety
6.1.1 Probe. Teflon tubing, 6.4-mm (1⁄4-in.)
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve diameter, sequentially wrapped with heat-re-
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- sistant fiber strips, a rubberized heat tape
ment. This test method may not address all (plug at one end), and heat-resistant adhe-
of the safety problems associated with its sive tape. A flexible thermocouple or other
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this suitable temperature measuring device
422
should be placed between the Teflon tubing 6.1.1.7, 6.1.1.8, and 6.1.2, respectively, except
and the fiber strips so that the temperature that the midget bubbler of Method 6, Section
can be monitored to prevent softening of the 6.1.1.2 is not required.
probe. The probe should be sheathed in stain- 6.1.8 Vacuum Gauge. At least 760 mm Hg
less steel to provide in-stack rigidity. A se- (30 in. Hg) gauge.
ries of bored-out stainless steel fittings 6.1.9 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equiva-
placed at the front of the sheath will prevent lent, accurate to within 5 percent at the se-
moisture and particulate from entering be- lected flow rate of approximately 2 liters/
tween the probe and sheath. A 6.4-mm (1⁄4-in.) min (4.2 ft3/hr).
Teflon elbow (bored out) should be attached 6.1.10 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter capa-
to the inlet of the probe, and a 2.54 cm (1 in.) ble of measuring the sample volume under
piece of Teflon tubing should be attached at the sampling conditions of 2 liters/min (4.2
the open end of the elbow to permit the ft3/hr) with an accuracy of 2 percent.
opening of the probe to be turned away from 6.2 Sample Recovery. Polyethylene Bot-
the particulate stream; this will reduce the tles, 250-ml (one per sample).
amount of particulate drawn into the sam- 6.3 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
pling train. The probe is depicted in Figure Same as Method 6, Section 6.3, except a 10-ml
16A–2. buret with 0.05-ml graduations is required,
6.1.2 Probe Brush. Nylon bristle brush and the spectrophotometer is not needed.
with handle inserted into a 3.2-mm (1⁄8-in.)
Teflon tubing. The Teflon tubing should be 7.0 Reagents and Standards
long enough to pass the brush through the NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, all re-
length of the probe. agents must conform to the specifications
6.1.3 Particulate Filter. 50-mm Teflon fil- established by the Committee on Analytical
ter holder and a 1- to 2-μm porosity, Teflon Reagents of the American Chemical Society.
filter (available through Savillex Corpora- When such specifications are not available,
tion, 5325 Highway 101, Minnetonka, Min- the best available grade must be used.
nesota 55343). The filter holder must be 7.1 Sample Collection. The following re-
maintained in a hot box at a temperature agents are required for sample analysis:
sufficient to prevent moisture condensation. 7.1.1 Water. Same as in Method 6, Section
A temperature of 121 °C (250 °F) was found to 7.1.1.
be sufficient when testing a lime kiln under 7.1.2 Citrate Buffer. Dissolve 300 g of po-
sub-freezing ambient conditions. tassium citrate (or 284 g of sodium citrate)
6.1.4 SO2 Scrubber. Three 300-ml Teflon and 41 g of anhydrous citric acid in 1 liter of
segmented impingers connected in series
water (200 ml is needed per test). Adjust the
with flexible, thick-walled, Teflon tubing.
pH to between 5.4 and 5.6 with potassium cit-
(Impinger parts and tubing available through
rate or citric acid, as required.
Savillex.) The first two impingers contain
7.1.3 Hydrogen Peroxide, 3 percent. Same
100 ml of citrate buffer and the third im-
as in Method 6, Section 7.1.3 (40 ml is needed
pinger is initially dry. The tip of the tube in-
per sample).
serted into the solution should be con-
7.1.4 Recovery Check Gas. Hydrogen sul-
stricted to less than 3 mm (1⁄8-in.) ID and
fide (100 ppmv or less) in nitrogen, stored in
should be immersed to a depth of at least 5
aluminum cylinders. Verify the concentra-
cm (2 in.).
tion by Method 11 or by gas chromatography
6.1.5 Combustion Tube. Quartz glass tub-
where the instrument is calibrated with an
ing with an expanded combustion chamber
H2S permeation tube as described below. For
2.54 cm (1 in.) in diameter and at least 30.5
Method 11, the relative standard deviation
cm (12 in.) long. The tube ends should have
should not exceed 5 percent on at least three
an outside diameter of 0.6 cm (1⁄4 in.) and be
20-minute runs.
at least 15.3 cm (6 in.) long. This length is
necessary to maintain the quartz-glass con- NOTE: Alternatively, hydrogen sulfide re-
nector near ambient temperature and there- covery gas generated from a permeation de-
by avoid leaks. Alternatively, the outlet vice gravimetrically calibrated and certified
may be constructed with a 90-degree glass at some convenient operating temperature
elbow and socket that would fit directly onto may be used. The permeation rate of the de-
the inlet of the first peroxide impinger. vice must be such that at a dilution gas flow
6.1.6 Furnace. A furnace of sufficient size rate of 3 liters/min (6.4 ft3/hr), an H2S con-
to enclose the combustion chamber of the centration in the range of the stack gas or
combustion tube with a temperature regu- within 20 percent of the standard can be gen-
lator capable of maintaining the tempera- erated.
ture at 800 ±100 °C (1472 ±180 °F). The furnace 7.1.5 Combustion Gas. Gas containing less
operating temperature should be checked than 50 ppb reduced sulfur compounds and
with a thermocouple to ensure accuracy. less than 10 ppmv total hydrocarbons. The
6.1.7 Peroxide Impingers, Stopcock gas may be generated from a clean-air sys-
Grease, Temperature Sensor, Drying Tube, tem that purifies ambient air and consists of
Valve, Pump, and Barometer. Same as Meth- the following components: Diaphragm pump,
od 6, Sections 6.1.1.2, 6.1.1.4, 6.1.1.5, 6.1.1.6, silica gel drying tube, activated charcoal
423
tube, and flow rate measuring device. Flow used to obtain a test run: (1) collect three 60-
from a compressed air cylinder is also ac- minute samples or (2) collect one 3-hour
ceptable. sample. (Three test runs constitute a test.)
7.2 Sample Recovery and Analysis. Same 8.4 Sample Recovery. Disconnect the
as Method 6, Sections 7.2.1 and 7.3, respec- impingers. Quantitatively transfer the con-
tively. tents of the midget impingers of the Method
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, 6 part of the train into a leak-free poly-
and Transport ethylene bottle for shipment. Rinse the three
midget impingers and the connecting tubes
8.1 Preparation of Sampling Train. with water and add the washings to the same
8.1.1 For the SO2 scrubber, measure 100 ml storage container. Mark the fluid level. Seal
of citrate buffer into the first and second and identify the sample container.
impingers; leave the third impinger empty. 8.5 System Performance Check.
Immerse the impingers in an ice bath, and 8.5.1 A system performance check is done
locate them as close as possible to the filter (1) to validate the sampling train compo-
heat box. The connecting tubing should be nents and procedure (prior to testing; op-
free of loops. Maintain the probe and filter tional) and (2) to validate a test run (after a
temperatures sufficiently high to prevent run). Perform a check in the field prior to
moisture condensation, and monitor with a testing consisting of at least two samples
suitable temperature sensor. (optional), and perform an additional check
8.1.2 For the Method 6 part of the train, after each 3 hour run or after three 1-hour
measure 20 ml of 3 percent hydrogen peroxide samples (mandatory).
into the first and second midget impingers. 8.5.2 The checks involve sampling a
Leave the third midget impinger empty, and known concentration of H2S and comparing
place silica gel in the fourth midget im- the analyzed concentration with the known
pinger. Alternatively, a silica gel drying concentration. Mix the H2S recovery check
tube may be used in place of the fourth im- gas (Section 7.1.4) and combustion gas in a
pinger. Maintain the oxidation furnace at 800 dilution system such as that shown in Figure
±100 °C (1472 ±180 °F). Place crushed ice and 16A–3. Adjust the flow rates to generate an
water around all impingers. H2S concentration in the range of the stack
8.2 Citrate Scrubber Conditioning Proce- gas or within 20 percent of the applicable
dure. Condition the citrate buffer scrubbing standard and an oxygen concentration great-
solution by pulling stack gas through the er than 1 percent at a total flow rate of at
Teflon impingers and bypassing all other least 2.5 liters/min (5.3 ft3/hr). Use Equation
sampling train components. A purge rate of 16A–3 to calculate the concentration of re-
2 liters/min for 10 minutes has been found to covery gas generated. Calibrate the flow rate
be sufficient to obtain equilibrium. After the from both sources with a soap bubble flow
citrate scrubber has been conditioned, as- meter so that the diluted concentration of
semble the sampling train, and conduct (op- H2S can be accurately calculated.
tional) a leak-check as described in Method 8.5.3 Collect 30-minute samples, and ana-
6, Section 8.2. lyze in the same manner as the emission
8.3 Sample Collection. Same as in Method
samples. Collect the sample through the
6, Section 8.3, except the sampling rate is 2
probe of the sampling train using a manifold
liters/min (±10 percent) for 1 or 3 hours. After
or some other suitable device that will en-
the sample is collected, remove the probe
sure extraction of a representative sample.
from the stack, and conduct (mandatory) a
8.5.4 The recovery check must be per-
post-test leak-check as described in Method
formed in the field prior to replacing the SO2
6, Section 8.2. The 15-minute purge of the
scrubber and particulate filter and before the
train following collection should not be per-
probe is cleaned. Use Equation 16A–4 (see
formed. After each 3-hour test run (or after
Section 12.5) to calculate the recovery effi-
three 1-hour samples), conduct one system
ciency. Report the recovery efficiency with
performance check (see Section 8.5) to deter-
the emission data; do not correct the emis-
mine the reduced sulfur recovery efficiency
sion data for the recovery efficiency. A sam-
through the sampling train. After this sys-
ple recovery of 100 ±20 percent must be ob-
tem performance check and before the next
tained for the emission data to be valid.
test run, rinse and brush the probe with
However, if the recovery efficiency is not in
water, replace the filter, and change the cit-
the 100 ±20 percent range but the results do
rate scrubber (optional but recommended).
not affect the compliance or noncompliance
NOTE: In Method 16, a test run is composed status of the affected facility, the Adminis-
of 16 individual analyses (injects) performed trator may decide to accept the results of
over a period of not less than 3 hours or more the compliance test.
than 6 hours. For Method 16A to be con-
sistent with Method 16, the following may be 9.0 Quality Control
424
8.5 ................... System performance check ............................. Ensure validity of sampling train components and analytical
procedure.
8.2, 10.0 .......... Sampling equipment leak-check and calibra- Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample
tion. volume.
10.0 ................. Barium standard solution standardization ....... Ensure precision of normality determination.
11.1 ................. Replicate titrations ........................................... Ensure precision of titration determinations.
11.2 ................. Audit sample analysis ...................................... Evaluate analyst’s technique and standards preparation.
10.0 Calibration R=Recovery efficiency for the system per-

formance check, percent.
Tm=Average dry gas meter absolute tempera-
11.0 Analytical Procedure ture, °K (°R).
Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K
11.1 Sample Loss Check and Sample Anal-
(528 °R).
ysis. Same as Method 6, Sections 11.1 and
Va=Volume of sample aliquot titrated, ml.
11.2, respectively, with the following excep-
tion: for 1-hour sampling, take a 40-ml ali- Vm=Dry gas volume as measured by the dry
quot, add 160 ml of 100 percent isopropanol gas meter, liters (dcf).
and four drops of thorin. Vm(std)=Dry gas volume measured by the dry
11.2 Audit Sample Analysis. Same as gas meter, corrected to standard condi-
Method 6, Section 11.3. tions, liters (dscf).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations sulfur dioxide sample is contained, 100 ml.
In the calculations, at least one extra dec- Vt=Volume of barium perchlorate titrant
imal figure should be retained beyond that of used for the sample, ml (average of rep-
the acquired data. Figures should be rounded licate titrations).
off after final calculations. Vtb=Volume of barium perchlorate titrant
12.1 Nomenclature. used for the blank, ml.
CTRS=Concentration of TRS as SO2, dry basis Y=Dry gas meter calibration factor.
corrected to standard conditions, ppmv. 32.03=Equivalent weight of sulfur dioxide,
CRG(act)=Actual concentration of recovery mg/meq.
check gas (after dilution), ppm. 12.2 Dry Sample Gas Volume, Corrected
CRG(m)=Measured concentration of recovery to Standard Conditions.
check gas generated, ppm.
CH2S=Verified concentration of H2S recovery Tstd Pbar
gas. Vm (std ) = Vm Y Eq. 16A-1
N=Normality of barium perchlorate titrant, Tm Pstd
milliequivalents/ml.
Pbar=Barometric pressure at exit orifice of Vm Pbar
the dry gas meter, mm Hg (in. Hg). = K1 Y
Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg Tm
(29.92 in. Hg). Where:
QH2S=Calibrated flow rate of H2S recovery
gas, liters/min. K1=0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units,
QCG=Calibrated flow rate of combustion gas, =17.65 °R/in. Hg for English units.
liters/min. 12.3 Concentration of TRS as ppm SO2.
C TRS = K 2 N
(Vt − Vtb )(Vso ln / Va ) Eq. 16A-2
Vm (std )
Where:
ER17OC00.284</MATH>
425
ER17OC00.283</MATH>
mg 24.05L 1 mole 1g 10 3 mL 10 3 μL
K 2 = 32.03
meq mole 64.06g 10 3 mg L lmL
12025 μL
=
meq
12.4 Concentration of Recovery Gas Gen- 16.2 Range. The procedure has been exam-
erated in the System Performance Check. ined in the range of 5 to 1500 ppmv.
16.3 Interferences. There are no known
Q H 2S C H 2S interferences to this procedure when used to
C RG = Eq. 16A-3 analyze cylinder gases containing H2S in ni-
Q H 2S + Q CG trogen.
16.4 Precision and Bias. Laboratory tests
12.5 Recovery Efficiency for the System have shown a relative standard deviation of
Performance Check. less than 3 percent. The procedure showed no
bias when compared to a gas
C RG ( m ) chromatographic method that used gravi-
R= × 100 Eq. 16A-4 metrically certified permeation tubes for
C RG (act ) calibration.
16.5 Equipment and Supplies.
13.0 Method Performance 16.5.1 Sampling Apparatus. The sampling
train is shown in Figure 16A–4. Its compo-
13.1 Analytical Range. The lower detect- nent parts are discussed in Sections 16.5.1.1
able limit is 0.1 ppmv SO2 when sampling at through 16.5.2.
2 liters/min (4.2 ft3/hr) for 3 hours or 0.3 ppmv 16.5.1.1 Sampling Line. Teflon tubing (1⁄4-
when sampling at 2 liters/min (4.2 ft3/hr) for in.) to connect the cylinder regulator to the
1 hour. The upper concentration limit of the sampling valve.
method exceeds the TRS levels generally en- 16.5.1.2 Needle Valve. Stainless steel or
countered at kraft pulp mills. Teflon needle valve to control the flow rate
13.2 Precision. Relative standard devi- of gases to the impingers.
ations of 2.0 and 2.6 percent were obtained 16.5.1.3 Impingers. Three impingers of ap-
when sampling a recovery boiler for 1 and 3 proximately 100-ml capacity, constructed to
hours, respectively. permit the addition of reagents through the
13.3 Bias. gas inlet stem. The impingers shall be con-
13.3.1 No bias was found in Method 16A nected in series with leak-free glass or Tef-
relative to Method 16 in a separate study at lon connectors. The impinger bottoms have a
a recovery boiler. standard 24/25 ground-glass fitting. The
13.3.2 Comparison of Method 16A with stems are from standard 6.4-mm (1⁄4-in.) ball
Method 16 at a lime kiln indicated that there joint midget impingers, custom lengthened
was no bias in Method 16A. However, insta- by about 1 in. When fitted together, the stem
bility of the source emissions adversely af- end should be approximately 1.27 cm (1⁄2 in.)
fected the comparison. The precision of from the bottom (Southern Scientific, Inc.,
Method 16A at the lime kiln was similar to Micanopy, Florida: Set Number S6962–048).
that obtained at the recovery boiler (Section The third in-line impinger acts as a drop-out
13.2.1). bottle.
13.3.3 Relative standard deviations of 2.7 16.5.1.4 Drying Tube, Rate Meter, and Ba-
and 7.7 percent have been obtained for sys- rometer. Same as Method 11, Sections 6.1.5,
tem performance checks. 6.1.8, and 6.1.10, respectively.
16.5.1.5 Cylinder Gas Regulator. Stainless
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] steel, to reduce the pressure of the gas
stream entering the Teflon sampling line to
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] a safe level.
16.0 Alternative Procedures 16.5.1.6 Soap Bubble Meter. Calibrated for
100 and 500 ml, or two separate bubble me-
ER17oc00.287</MATH>
As an alternative to the procedures speci- ters.

fied in Section 7.1.4, the following procedure 16.5.1.7 Critical Orifice. For volume and
may be used to verify the H2S concentration rate measurements. The critical orifice may
of the recovery check gas. be fabricated according to Section 16.7.3 and
16.1 Summary. The H2S is collected from must be calibrated as specified in Section
the calibration gas cylinder and is absorbed 16.12.4.
ER17oc00.286</MATH>
in zinc acetate solution to form zinc sulfide. 16.5.1.8 Graduated Cylinder. 50-ml size.
The latter compound is then measured 16.5.1.9 Volumetric Flask. 1-liter size.
iodometrically. 16.5.1.10 Volumetric Pipette. 15-ml size.
426
ER17OC00.285</MATH>
16.5.1.11 Vacuum Gauge. Minimum 20 in. 16.7 Pre-test Procedures.
Hg capacity. 16.7.1 Selection of Gas Sample Volumes.
16.5.1.12 Stopwatch. This procedure has been validated for esti-
16.5.2 Sample Recovery and Analysis. mating the volume of cylinder gas sample
16.5.2.1 Erlenmeyer Flasks. 125- and 250-ml needed when the H2S concentration is in the
sizes. range of 5 to 1500 ppmv. The sample volume
16.5.2.2 Pipettes. 2-, 10-, 20-, and 100-ml ranges were selected in order to ensure a 35
volumetric. to 60 percent consumption of the 20 ml of 0.01
16.5.2.3 Burette. 50-ml size. N iodine (thus ensuring a 0.01 N Na2S2O3 titer
16.5.2.4 Volumetric Flask. 1-liter size. of approximately 7 to 12 ml). The sample vol-
16.5.2.5 Graduated Cylinder. 50-ml size. umes for various H2S concentrations can be
16.5.2.6 Wash Bottle. estimated by dividing the approximate ppm-
16.5.2.7 Stirring Plate and Bars. liters desired for a given concentration range
16.6 Reagents and Standards. Unless oth- by the H2S concentration stated by the man-
erwise indicated, all reagents must conform ufacturer. For example, for analyzing a cyl-
to the specifications established by the Com- inder gas containing approximately 10 ppmv
mittee on Analytical Reagents of the Amer- H2S, the optimum sample volume is 65 liters
ican Chemical Society, where such specifica- (650 ppm-liters/10 ppmv). For analyzing a cyl-
tions are available. Otherwise, use the best inder gas containing approximately 1000
available grade.
ppmv H2S, the optimum sample volume is 1
16.6.1 Water. Same as Method 11, Section
liter (1000 ppm-liters/1000 ppmv).
7.1.3.
16.6.2 Zinc Acetate Absorbing Solution. Approximate
Dissolve 20 g zinc acetate in water, and di- Approximate cylinder gas H2S concentration ppm-liters
(ppmv)
lute to 1 liter. desired
16.6.3 Potassium Bi-iodate [KH(IO3)2] So-
lution, Standard 0.100 N. Dissolve 3.249 g an- 5 to <30 ......................................................... 650
hydrous KH(IO3)2 in water, and dilute to 1 30 to <500 ..................................................... 800
500 to <1500 ................................................. 1000
liter.
16.6.4 Sodium Thiosulfate (Na2S2O3) Solu-
tion, Standard 0.1 N. Same as Method 11, 16.7.2 Critical Orifice Flow Rate Selec-
Section 7.3.2. Standardize according to Sec- tion. The following table shows the ranges of
tion 16.12.2. sample flow rates that are desirable in order
16.6.5 Na2S2O3 Solution, Standard 0.01 N. to ensure capture of H2S in the impinger so-
Pipette 100.0 ml of 0.1 N Na2S2O3 solution lution. Slight deviations from these ranges
into a 1-liter volumetric flask, and dilute to will not have an impact on measured con-
the mark with water. centrations.
16.6.6 Iodine Solution, 0.1 N. Same as
Method 11, Section 7.2.3. Critical
orifice
16.6.7 Standard Iodine Solution, 0.01 N. Cylinder gas H2S concentration (ppmv) flow rate
Same as in Method 11, Section 7.2.4. Stand- (ml/min)
ardize according to Section 16.12.3.
16.6.8 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl) Solution, 10 5 to 50 ppmv ............................................. 1500 ±500
Percent by Weight. Add 230 ml concentrated 50 to 250 ppmv ......................................... 500 ±250
HCl (specific gravity 1.19) to 770 ml water. 250 to <1000 ppmv .................................. 200 ±50
16.6.9 Starch Indicator Solution. To 5 g >1000 ppmv .............................................. 75 ±25
starch (potato, arrowroot, or soluble), add a
little cold water, and grind in a mortar to a 16.7.3 Critical Orifice Fabrication. Crit-
thin paste. Pour into 1 liter of boiling water, ical orifice of desired flow rates may be fab-
stir, and let settle overnight. Use the clear ricated by selecting an orifice tube of desired
supernatant. Preserve with 1.25 g salicylic length and connecting 1⁄16-in.×1⁄4-in. (0.16
acid, 4 g zinc chloride, or a combination of 4 cm×0.64 cm) reducing fittings to both ends.
g sodium propionate and 2 g sodium azide per The inside diameters and lengths of orifice
liter of starch solution. Some commercial tubes needed to obtain specific flow rates are
starch substitutes are satisfactory. shown below.
Tube Tube Length Flowrate Altech

(in. OD) (in. ID) (in.) (ml/min) Catalog No.
⁄
1 16 ....................................................................................... 0.007 1.2 85 301430
⁄
1 16 ....................................................................................... 0.01 3.2 215 300530
⁄
1 16 ....................................................................................... 0.01 1.2 350 300530
1⁄16 ....................................................................................... 0.02 1.2 1400 300230
16.7.4 Determination of Critical Orifice orifice to the sampling system as shown in

Approximate Flow Rate. Connect the critical Figure 16A–4 but without the H2S cylinder.
427
Connect a rotameter in the line to the first shown in Section 16.7.2, proceed with the
impinger. Turn on the pump, and adjust the critical orifice calibration according to Sec-
valve to give a reading of about half atmos- tion 16.12.4.
pheric pressure. Observe the rotameter read- 16.7.5 Determination of Approximate
ing. Slowly increase the vacuum until a sta- Sampling Time. Determine the approximate
ble flow rate is reached, and record this as sampling time for a cylinder of known con-
the critical vacuum. The measured flow rate centration. Use the optimum sample volume
indicates the expected critical flow rate of
obtained in Section 16.7.1.
the orifice. If this flow rate is in the range
Optimum volume
Approximate sampling time =
Critical orifice flow rate
16.8 Sample Collection. tion is light yellow. Add starch, and con-
16.8.1 Connect the Teflon tubing, Teflon tinue titrating until the blue color dis-
tee, and rotameter to the flow control needle appears. Analyze a blank with each sample,
valve as shown in Figure 16A–4. Vent the ro- as the blank titer has been observed to
tameter to an exhaust hood. Plug the open change over the course of a day.
end of the tee. Five to 10 minutes prior to NOTE: Iodine titration of zinc acetate solu-
sampling, open the cylinder valve while tions is difficult to perform because the solu-
keeping the flow control needle valve closed. tion turns slightly white in color near the
Adjust the delivery pressure to 20 psi. Open end point, and the disappearance of the blue
the needle valve slowly until the rotameter color is hard to recognize. In addition, a blue
shows a flow rate approximately 50 to 100 ml color may reappear in the solution about 30
above the flow rate of the critical orifice to 45 seconds after the titration endpoint is
being used in the system. reached. This should not be taken to mean
16.8.2 Place 50 ml of zinc acetate solution the original endpoint was in error. It is rec-
in two of the impingers, connect them and ommended that persons conducting this test
the empty third impinger (dropout bottle) perform several titrations to be able to cor-
and the rest of the equipment as shown in rectly identify the endpoint. The importance
Figure 16A–4. Make sure the ground-glass fit- of this should be recognized because the re-
tings are tight. The impingers can be easily sults of this analytical procedure are ex-
stabilized by using a small cardboard box in tremely sensitive to errors in titration.
which three holes have been cut, to act as a 16.10 Sample Analysis. Sample treatment
holder. Connect the Teflon sample line to the is similar to the blank treatment. Before de-
first impinger. Cover the impingers with a taching the stems from the bottoms of the
dark cloth or piece of plastic to protect the impingers, add 20.0 ml of 0.01 N iodine solu-
absorbing solution from light during sam- tion through the stems of the impingers
pling. holding the zinc acetate solution, dividing it
16.8.3 Record the temperature and baro- between the two (add about 15 ml to the first
metric pressure. Note the gas flow rate impinger and the rest to the second). Add 2
through the rotameter. Open the closed end ml HCl solution through the stems, dividing
of the tee. Connect the sampling tube to the it as with the iodine. Disconnect the sam-
tee, ensuring a tight connection. Start the pling line, and store the impingers for 30
sampling pump and stopwatch simulta- minutes. At the end of 30 minutes, rinse the
neously. Note the decrease in flow rate impinger stems into the impinger bottoms.
through the excess flow rotameter. This de- Titrate the impinger contents with 0.01 N
crease should equal the known flow rate of Na2S2O3. Do not transfer the contents of the
the critical orifice being used. Continue sam- impinger to a flask because this may result
pling for the period determined in Section in a loss of iodine and cause a positive bias.
16.7.5. 16.11 Post-test Orifice Calibration. Con-
16.8.4 When sampling is complete, turn off duct a post-test critical orifice calibration
the pump and stopwatch. Disconnect the run using the calibration procedures out-
sampling line from the tee and plug it. Close lined in Section 16.12.4. If the Qstd obtained
the needle valve followed by the cylinder before and after the test differs by more than
valve. Record the sampling time. 5 percent, void the sample; if not, proceed to
16.9 Blank Analysis. While the sample is perform the calculations.
being collected, run a blank as follows: To a 16.12 Calibrations and Standardizations.

250-ml Erlenmeyer flask, add 100 ml of zinc 16.12.1 Rotameter and Barometer. Same
acetate solution, 20.0 ml of 0.01 N iodine solu- as Method 11, Sections 10.1.3 and 10.1.4.
tion, and 2 ml HCl solution. Titrate, while 16.12.2 Na2S2O3 Solution, 0.1 N. Stand-
stirring, with 0.01 N Na2S2O3 until the solu- ardize the 0.1 N Na2S2O3 solution as follows:
428
ER17oc00.288</MATH>
To 80 ml water, stirring constantly, add 1 ml calculate the normality to three decimal fig-
concentrated H2SO4, 10.0 ml of 0.100 N ures using Equation 16A–6.
KH(IO3)2 and 1 g potassium iodide. Titrate 16.12.4 Critical Orifice. Calibrate the crit-
immediately with 0.1 N Na2S2O3 until the so- ical orifice using the sampling train shown
lution is light yellow. Add 3 ml starch solu- in Figure 16A–4 but without the H2S cylinder
tion, and titrate until the blue color just dis- and vent rotameter. Connect the soap bubble
appears. Repeat the titration until replicate meter to the Teflon line that is connected to
analyses agree within 0.05 ml. Take the aver- the first impinger. Turn on the pump, and
age volume of Na2S2O3 consumed to calculate adjust the needle valve until the vacuum is
the normality to three decimal figures using higher than the critical vacuum determined
Equation 16A–5. in Section 16.7.4. Record the time required
16.12.3 Iodine Solution, 0.01 N. Stand- for gas flow to equal the soap bubble meter
ardize the 0.01 N iodine solution as follows: volume (use the 100-ml soap bubble meter for
Pipet 20.0 ml of 0.01 N iodine solution into a gas flow rates below 100 ml/min, otherwise
125-ml Erlenmeyer flask. Titrate with stand- use the 500-ml soap bubble meter). Make
ard 0.01 N Na2S2O3 solution until the solution three runs, and record the data listed in
is light yellow. Add 3 ml starch solution, and Table 16A–1. Use these data to calculate the
continue titrating until the blue color just volumetric flow rate of the orifice.
disappears. If the normality of the iodine 16.13 Calculations.
tested is not 0.010, add a few ml of 0.1 N io- 16.13.1 Nomenclature.
dine solution if it is low, or a few ml of water Bwa=Fraction of water vapor in ambient air
if it is high, and standardize again. Repeat during orifice calibration.
the titration until replicate values agree CH2S=H2S concentration in cylinder gas,
within 0.05 ml. Take the average volume to ppmv.
mg 24.05L 1 mole 1g 10 3 mL 10 3 μL
K 2 = 32.03
meq mole 64.06g 10 3 mg L l mL
12025 μL
=
meq
Ma=Molecular weight of ambient air satu- qsb=Time for soap bubble meter flow rate
rated at impinger temperature, g/g-mole. measurement, min.
Ms=Molecular weight of sample gas (nitro- Vm(std)=Sample gas volume measured by the
gen) saturated at impinger temperature, g/ critical orifice, corrected to standard con-
g-mole. ditions, liters.
NOTE: (For tests carried out in a labora- Vsb=Volume of gas as measured by the soap
tory where the impinger temperature is 25 bubble meter, ml.
°C, Ma=28.5 g/g-mole and Ms=27.7 g/g-mole.) Vsb(std)=Volume of gas as measured by the
NI=Normality of standard iodine solution soap bubble meter, corrected to standard
(0.01 N), g-eq/liter. conditions, liters.
NT=Normality of standard Na2S2O3 solution VI=Volume of standard iodine solution (0.01
(0.01 N), g-eq/liter. N) used, ml.
Pbar=Barometric pressure, mm Hg. VT=Volume of standard Na2S2O3 solution
Pstd=Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg. (0.01 N) used, ml.
Qstd=Average volumetric flow rate through
VTB=Volume of standard Na2S2O3 solution
critical orifice, liters/min.
Tamb=Absolute ambient temperature, °K. (0.01 N) used for the blank, ml.
Tstd=Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K. 16.13.2 Normality of Standard Na2S2O3 So-
qs=Sampling time, min. lution (0.1 N).
1
NT = Eq. 16A-5
mL Na 2 S2 O 3 consumed
ER17oc00.290</MATH>
16.13.3 Normality of Standard Iodine Solu-

tion (0.01 N).
429
ER17oc00.289</MATH>
N T VT
NI = Eq. 16A-6
VI
16.13.4 Sample Gas Volume.
Ma
Vm (std ) = Qstd Θ s (1 − Bwa ) Eq. 16A-7
Mb
16.13.5 Concentration of H2S in the Gas mental Protection Agency, Research Tri-
Cylinder. angle Park, NC 27711. February 1980.
6. Gellman, I. A Laboratory and Field
17.0 References Study of Reduced Sulfur Sampling and Moni-
toring Systems. National Council of the
K N T (VTB − VT ) Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improve-
C H 2S = Eq. 16A-8 ment, Inc., New York, NY. Atmospheric
Vm (std )
Quality Improvement Technical Bulletin No.
81. October 1975.
1. American Public Health Association, 7. Margeson, J.H., J.E. Knoll, and M.R.
American Water Works Association, and Midgett. A Manual Method for TRS Deter-
Water Pollution Control Federation. Stand- mination. Source Branch, Quality Assurance
ard Methods for the Examination of Water Division, U.S. Environmental Protection
and Wastewater. Washington, DC. American Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.
Public Health Association. 1975. pp. 316–317. 8. National Council of the Paper Industry
2. American Society for Testing and Mate- for Air and Stream Improvement. An Inves-
rials. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Part tigation of H2S and SO2. Calibration Cylinder
31: Water, Atmospheric Analysis. Philadel- Gas Stability and Their Standardization
phia, PA. 1974. pp. 40–42. Using Wet Chemical Techniques. Special Re-
3. Blosser, R.O. A Study of TRS Measure- port 76–06. New York, NY. August 1976.
ment Methods. National Council of the Paper 9. National Council of the Paper Industry
Industry for Air and Stream Improvement, for Air and Stream Improvement. Wet Chem-
Inc., New York, NY. Technical Bulletin No. ical Method for Determining the H2S Con-
434. May 1984. 14 pp. centration of Calibration Cylinder Gases.
4. Blosser, R.O., H.S. Oglesby, and A.K. Technical Bulletin Number 450. New York,
Jain. A Study of Alternate SO2 Scrubber De- NY. January 1985. 23 pp.
signs Used for TRS Monitoring. A Special 10. National Council of the Paper Industry
Report by the National Council of the Paper for Air and Stream Improvement. Modified
Industry for Air and Stream Improvement, Wet Chemical Method for Determining the
Inc., New York, NY. July 1977. H2S Concentration of Calibration Cylinder
5. Curtis, F., and G.D. McAlister. Develop- Gases. Draft Report. New York, NY. March
ment and Evaluation of an Oxidation/Method 1987. 29 pp.
6 TRS Emission Sampling Procedure. Emis-
sion Measurement Branch, Emission Stand- 18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
ards and Engineering Division, U.S. Environ- Validation Data
ER17oc00.293</MATH>
ER17oc00.292</MATH>
430
ER17oc00.291</MATH>
431
ER17OC00.294</GPH>
432
ER17OC00.295</GPH>
433
ER17OC00.296</GPH>
Date lllllllllllllllllllll Barometric pressure, Pbar=ll mm Hg

Critical orifice ID llllllllllllll Ambient temperature, t amb=273 + ll °C=ll
Soap bubble meter volume, Vsbll liters °K=ll mm Hg. (This should be approxi-
Time, qsb mately 0.4 times barometric pressure.)
Run no. 1 ll min ll sec Pump vacuum,
Run no. 2 ll min ll sec
Run no. 3 ll min ll sec

Average ll min ll sec
Covert the seconds to fraction of minute:
Time=ll min + ll Sec/60=ll min
434
ER17OC00.297</GPH>
Table 16A–1. Critical Orifice Calibration
Vsb (std ) =
Vsb Tstd Pbar 10 −3 ( ) Data
METHOD 16B—DETERMINATION OF TOTAL RE-

Tamb Pstd DUCED SULFUR EMISSIONS FROM STA-
TIONARY SOURCES
= - - - - - - - - - - liters
Vsb (std ) the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup-
Q std = plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana-
Θ sb lytical) essential to its performance. Some
= - - - - - - - - - - liters/ min other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-
method should have a knowledge of at least
the following additional test methods: Meth-
od 6C, Method 16, and Method 16A.

1.1 Analytes.
Analyte CAS No.
Total reduced sulfur (TRS) including: N/A

Dimethyl disulfide (DMDS), [(CH3)2S2] ....................................................................................................... 62–49–20
Dimethyl sulfide (DMS), [(CH3)2S] .............................................................................................................. 75–18–3
Hydrogen sulfide (H2S) ............................................................................................................................... 7783–06–4
Methyl mercaptan (MeSH), [CH4S] ............................................................................................................. 74–93–1
Reported as: Sulfur dioxide (SO2) ............................................................................................................................ 7449–09–5
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- will cause the pH to rise and H2S to be ab-
ble for determining TRS emissions from re- sorbed before oxidation. Proper use of the
covery furnaces (boilers), lime kilns, and particulate filter, described in Section 6.1.3
smelt dissolving tanks at kraft pulp mills, of Method 16A, will eliminate this inter-
and from other sources when specified in an ference.
applicable subpart of the regulations. The 4.3 Carbon monoxide (CO) and carbon di-
flue gas must contain at least 1 percent oxy- oxide (CO2) have substantial desensitizing ef-
gen for complete oxidation of all TRS to SO2. fects on the FPD even after dilution. Accept-
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to able systems must demonstrate that they
the requirements of this method will en- have eliminated this interference by some
hance the quality of the data obtained from procedure such as eluting these compounds
air pollutant sampling methods. before the SO2. Compliance with this re-
quirement can be demonstrated by submit-
2.0 Summary of Method ting chromatograms of calibration gases
2.1 An integrated gas sample is extracted with and without CO2 in diluent gas. The CO2
from the stack. The SO2 is removed selec- level should be approximately 10 percent for
tively from the sample using a citrate buffer the case with CO2 present. The two
solution. The TRS compounds are then ther- chromatograms should show agreement
mally oxidized to SO2 and analyzed as SO2 by within the precision limits of Section 13.0.
gas chromatography (GC) using flame photo-
5.0 Safety
metric detection (FPD).
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Reduced sulfur compounds other than use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
those regulated by the emission standards, if test method to establish appropriate safety
present, may be measured by this method. and health practices and determine the ap-
Therefore, carbonyl sulfide, which is par- plicability of regulatory limitations prior to
tially oxidized to SO2 and may be present in performing this test method.
a lime kiln exit stack, would be a positive 5.2 Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S). A flammable,
interferant. poisonous gas with the odor of rotten eggs.

4.2 Particulate matter from the lime kiln H2S is extremely hazardous and can cause
stack gas (primarily calcium carbonate) can collapse, coma, and death within a few sec-
cause a negative bias if it is allowed to enter onds of one or two inhalations at sufficient
the citrate scrubber; the particulate matter concentrations. Low concentrations irritate
435
ER17OC00.298</MATH>
the mucous membranes and may cause nau- described below. For the wet-chemical meth-
sea, dizziness, and headache after exposure. ods, the standard deviation should not ex-
ceed 5 percent on at least three 20-minute
6.0 Equipment and Supplies runs.
6.1 Sample Collection. The sampling train 7.2.2 Hydrogen sulfide recovery gas gen-
is shown in Figure 16B–1. Modifications to erated from a permeation device gravimetri-
the apparatus are accepted provided the sys- cally calibrated and certified at some con-
tem performance check in Section 8.4.1 is venient operation temperature may be used.
met. The permeation rate of the device must be
6.1.1 Probe, Probe Brush, Particulate Fil- such that at a dilution gas flow rate of 3 li-
ter, SO2 Scrubber, Combustion Tube, and ters/min (64 ft3/hr), an H2S concentration in
Furnace. Same as in Method 16A, Sections the range of the stack gas or within 20 per-
6.1.1 to 6.1.6. cent of the emission standard can be gen-
6.1.2 Sampling Pump. Leakless Teflon- erated.
coated diaphragm type or equivalent. 7.3 Combustion Gas. Gas containing less
6.2 Analysis. than 50 ppbv reduced sulfur compounds and
6.2.1 Dilution System (optional), Gas less than 10 ppmv total hydrocarbons. The
Chromatograph, Oven, Temperature Gauges, gas may be generated from a clean-air sys-
Flow System, Flame Photometric Detector, tem that purifies ambient air and consists of
Electrometer, Power Supply, Recorder, Cali- the following components: diaphragm pump,
bration System, Tube Chamber, Flow Sys- silica gel drying tube, activated charcoal
tem, and Constant Temperature Bath. Same tube, and flow rate measuring device. Gas
as in Method 16, Sections 6.2.1, 6.2.2, and 6.3. from a compressed air cylinder is also ac-
6.2.2 Gas Chromatograph Columns. Same ceptable.
as in Method 16, Section 6.2.3. Other columns
with demonstrated ability to resolve SO2 and 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
be free from known interferences are accept- and Transport
able alternatives. Single column systems
such as a 7-ft Carbsorb B HT 100 column have 8.1 Pretest Procedures. Same as in Meth-
been found satisfactory in resolving SO2 od 15, Section 8.1.
from CO2. 8.2 Sample Collection. Before any source
sampling is performed, conduct a system per-
7.0 Reagents and Standards formance check as detailed in Section 8.4.1
Same as in Method 16, Section 7.0, except to validate the sampling train components
for the following: and procedures. Although this test is op-
7.1 Calibration Gas. SO2 permeation tube tional, it would significantly reduce the pos-
gravimetrically calibrated and certified at sibility of rejecting tests as a result of fail-
some convenient operating temperature. ing the post-test performance check. At the
These tubes consist of hermetically sealed completion of the pretest system perform-
FEP Teflon tubing in which a liquefied gas- ance check, insert the sampling probe into
eous substance is enclosed. The enclosed gas the test port making certain that no dilution
permeates through the tubing wall at a con- air enters the stack though the port. Condi-
stant rate. When the temperature is con- tion the entire system with sample for a
stant, calibration gases covering a wide minimum of 15 minutes before beginning
range of known concentrations can be gen- analysis. If the sample is diluted, determine
erated by varying and accurately measuring the dilution factor as in Section 10.4 of Meth-
the flow rate of diluent gas passing over the od 15.
tubes. In place of SO2 permeation tubes, cyl- 8.3 Analysis. Inject aliquots of the sample
inder gases containing SO2 in nitrogen may into the GC/FPD analyzer for analysis. De-
be used for calibration. The cylinder gas con- termine the concentration of SO2 directly
centration must be verified according to Sec- from the calibration curves or from the
tion 8.2.1 of Method 6C. The calibration gas equation for the least-squares line.
is used to calibrate the GC/FPD system and 8.4. Post-Test Procedures
the dilution system. 8.4.1 System Performance Check. Same as
7.2 Recovery Check Gas. in Method 16A, Section 8.5. A sufficient num-
7.2.1 Hydrogen sulfide [100 parts per mil- ber of sample injections should be made so
lion by volume (ppmv) or less] in nitrogen, that the precision requirements of Section
stored in aluminum cylinders. Verify the 13.2 are satisfied.
concentration by Method 11, the procedure 8.4.2 Determination of Calibration Drift.
discussed in Section 16.0 of Method 16A, or Same as in Method 15, Section 8.3.2.
gas chromatography where the instrument is
calibrated with an H2S permeation tube as 9.0 Quality Control
8.2, 8.3 ............ System performance check ............................. Ensure validity of sampling train components and analytical
procedure.
436
8.1 ................... Sampling equipment leak-check and calibra- Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample
tion. volume.
10.0 ................. Analytical calibration ........................................ Ensure precision of analytical results within 5 percent.
10.0 Calibration 13.2 GC/FPD Calibration and Precision. A

series of three consecutive injections of the
Same as in Method 16, Section 10, except
SO2 is used instead of H2S. sample calibration gas, at any dilution, must
produce results which do not vary by more
11.0 Analytical Procedure than 5 percent from the mean of the three in-
jections.
11.1 Sample collection and analysis are
concurrent for this method (see section 8.3). 13.3 Calibration Drift. The calibration
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations drift determined from the mean of the three
12.1 Nomenclature. injections made at the beginning and end of
any run or series of runs within a 24-hour pe-
CSO2=Sulfur dioxide concentration, ppmv.
riod must not exceed 5 percent.
CTRS=Total reduced sulfur concentration as
determined by Equation 16B–1, ppmv. 13.4 System Calibration Accuracy. Losses
d=Dilution factor, dimensionless. through the sample transport system must
N=Number of samples. be measured and a correction factor devel-
oped to adjust the calibration accuracy to
12.2 SO2 Concentration. Determine the
100 percent.
concentration of SO2, CSO2, directly from the
calibration curves. Alternatively, the con- 13.5 Field tests between this method and
centration may be calculated using the equa- Method 16A showed an average difference of
tion for the least-squares line. less than 4.0 percent. This difference was not
12.3 TRS Concentration. determined to be significant.
C TRS = C SO2 d Eq. 16B-1 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
12.4 Average TRS Concentration 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
n 16.0 References
∑ C TRS 1. Same as in Method 16, Section 16.0.

2. National Council of the Paper Industry
i =1
Avg. C TRS = Eq. 16B-2 for Air and Stream Improvement, Inc, A
N Study of TRS Measurement Methods. Tech-
nical Bulletin No. 434. New York, NY. May
13.0 Method Performance.
1984. 12p.
13.1 Range and Sensitivity. Coupled with 3. Margeson, J.H., J.E. Knoll, and M.R.
a GC using a 1-ml sample size, the maximum Midgett. A Manual Method for TRS Deter-
limit of the FPD for SO2 is approximately 10 mination. Draft available from the authors.
ppmv. This limit is extended by diluting the Source Branch, Quality Assurance Division,
sample gas before analysis or by reducing U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Re-
the sample aliquot size. For sources with search Triangle Park, NC 27711.
emission levels between 10 and 100 ppm, the
measuring range can be best extended by re- 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
ducing the sample size. Validation Data
ER17OC00.300</MATH>
437
ER17OC00.299</MATH>
METHOD 17—DETERMINATION OF PARTICULATE tain reliable results, persons using this

MATTER EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY method should have a thorough knowledge of
SOURCES at least the following additional test meth-
ods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, Method 5.
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- 1.0 Scope and Application

lytical) essential to its performance. Some 1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No
material is incorporated by reference from CAS number assigned.
438
ER17OC00.301</GPH>
NOTE: Particulate matter is not an abso- 4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
lute quantity. It is a function of temperature
and pressure. Therefore, to prevent varia- 5.0 Safety
bility in PM emission regulations and/or as- 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
sociated test methods, the temperature and hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
pressure at which PM is to be measured must ment. This test method may not address all
be carefully defined. Of the two variables of the safety problems associated with its
(i.e., temperature and pressure), temperature use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
has the greater effect upon the amount of test method to establish appropriate safety
PM in an effluent gas stream; in most sta- and health practices and determine the ap-
tionary source categories, the effect of pres- plicability of regulatory limitations prior to
sure appears to be negligible. In Method 5, performing this test method.
120 °C (248 °F) is established as a nominal ref-
erence temperature. Thus, where Method 5 is 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
specified in an applicable subpart of the 6.1 Sampling Train. A schematic of the
standard, PM is defined with respect to tem- sampling train used in this method is shown
perature. In order to maintain a collection in Figure 17–1. The sampling train compo-
temperature of 120 °C (248 °F), Method 5 em- nents and operation and maintenance are
ploys a heated glass sample probe and a very similar to Method 5, which should be
heated filter holder. This equipment is some- consulted for details.
what cumbersome and requires care in its 6.1.1 Probe Nozzle, Differential Pressure
operation. Therefore, where PM concentra- Gauge, Metering System, Barometer, Gas
tions (over the normal range of temperature Density Determination Equipment. Same as
associated with a specified source category) in Method 5, Sections 6.1.1, 6.1.4, 6.1.8, 6.1.9,
are known to be independent of temperature, and 6.1.10, respectively.
it is desirable to eliminate the glass probe 6.1.2 Filter Holder. The in-stack filter
and the heating systems, and to sample at holder shall be constructed of borosilicate or
stack temperature. quartz glass, or stainless steel. If a gasket is
used, it shall be made of silicone rubber, Tef-
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- lon, or stainless steel. Other holder and gas-
ble for the determination of PM emissions, ket materials may be used, subject to the ap-
where PM concentrations are known to be proval of the Administrator. The filter hold-
independent of temperature over the normal er shall be designed to provide a positive seal
range of temperatures characteristic of against leakage from the outside or around
emissions from a specified source category. the filter.
It is intended to be used only when specified 6.1.3 Probe Extension. Any suitable rigid
by an applicable subpart of the standards, probe extension may be used after the filter
and only within the applicable temperature holder.
limits (if specified), or when otherwise ap- 6.1.4 Pitot Tube. Same as in Method 5,
proved by the Administrator. This method is Section 6.1.3.
not applicable to stacks that contain liquid 6.1.4.1 It is recommended (1) that the
droplets or are saturated with water vapor. pitot tube have a known baseline coefficient,
In addition, this method shall not be used as determined as outlined in Section 10 of
written if the projected cross-sectional area Method 2; and (2) that this known coefficient
of the probe extension-filter holder assembly be preserved by placing the pitot tube in an
covers more than 5 percent of the stack interference-free arrangement with respect
cross-sectional area (see Section 8.1.2). to the sampling nozzle, filter holder, and
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to temperature sensor (see Figure 17–1). Note
the requirements of this method will en- that the 1.9 cm (3⁄4-in.) free-space between
the nozzle and pitot tube shown in Figure 17–
1, is based on a 1.3 cm (1⁄2-in.) ID nozzle. If the
sampling train is designed for sampling at
2.0 Summary of Method higher flow rates than that described in
APTD-0581, thus necessitating the use of
2.1 Particulate matter is withdrawn larger sized nozzles, the free-space shall be
isokinetically from the source and collected 1.9 cm (3⁄4-in.) with the largest sized nozzle in
on a glass fiber filter maintained at stack place.
temperature. The PM mass is determined 6.1.4.2 Source-sampling assemblies that do
gravimetrically after the removal of not meet the minimum spacing requirements
uncombined water. of Figure 17–1 (or the equivalent of these re-
quirements, e.g., Figure 2–4 of Method 2) may

3.0 Definitions be used; however, the pitot tube coefficients
of such assemblies shall be determined by
Same as Method 5, Section 3.0. calibration, using methods subject to the ap-
439
6.1.5 Condenser. It is recommended that allow the sample gas stream to circumvent
the impinger system or alternatives de- the filter. Check filter for tears after assem-
scribed in Method 5 be used to determine the bly is completed. Mark the probe extension
moisture content of the stack gas. Flexible with heat resistant tape or by some other
tubing may be used between the probe exten- method to denote the proper distance into
sion and condenser. Long tubing lengths may the stack or duct for each sampling point.
affect the moisture determination. Assemble the train as in Figure 17–1, using a
6.2 Sample Recovery. Probe-liner and very light coat of silicone grease on all
probe-nozzle brushes, wash bottles, glass ground glass joints and greasing only the
sample storage containers, petri dishes, outer portion (see APTD–0576) to avoid possi-
graduated cylinder and/or balance, plastic bility of contamination by the silicone
storage containers, funnel and rubber police- grease. Place crushed ice around the
man, funnel. Same as in Method 5, Sections impingers.
6.2.1 through 6.2.8, respectively. 8.1.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Same as in
6.3 Sample Analysis. Glass weighing Method 5, Section 8.1.4, except that the filter
dishes, desiccator, analytical balance, bal- holder is inserted into the stack during the
ance, beakers, hygrometer, temperature sen- sampling train leak-check. To do this, plug
sor. Same as in Method 5, Sections 6.3.1 the inlet to the probe nozzle with a material
through 6.3.7, respectively. that will be able to withstand the stack tem-
perature. Insert the filter holder into the
7.0 Reagents and Standards stack and wait approximately 5 minutes (or
longer, if necessary) to allow the system to
7.1 Sampling. Filters, silica gel, water,
come to equilibrium with the temperature of
crushed ice, stopcock grease. Same as in
the stack gas stream.
Method 5, Sections 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.1.4, and
8.1.5 Sampling Train Operation. The oper-
7.1.5, respectively. Thimble glass fiber filters
ation is the same as in Method 5. Use a data
may also be used.
sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5–3 of
7.2 Sample Recovery. Acetone (reagent
Method 5, except that the filter holder tem-
grade). Same as in Method 5, Section 7.2.
perature is not recorded.
7.3 Sample Analysis. Acetone and Des- 8.1.6 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic.
iccant. Same as in Method 5, Sections 7.3.1 Same as in Method 5, Section 12.11.
and 7.3.2, respectively. 8.2 Sample Recovery.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, 8.2.1 Proper cleanup procedure begins as
and Transport soon as the probe extension assembly is re-
moved from the stack at the end of the sam-
8.1 Sampling. pling period. Allow the assembly to cool.
8.1.1 Pretest Preparation. Same as in 8.2.2 When the assembly can be safely
Method 5, Section 8.1.1. handled, wipe off all external particulate
8.1.2 Preliminary Determinations. Same matter near the tip of the probe nozzle and
as in Method 5, Section 8.1.2, except as fol- place a cap over it to prevent losing or gain-
lows: Make a projected-area model of the ing particulate matter. Do not cap off the
probe extension-filter holder assembly, with probe tip tightly while the sampling train is
the pitot tube face openings positioned along cooling down as this would create a vacuum
the centerline of the stack, as shown in Fig- in the filter holder, forcing condenser water
ure 17–2. Calculate the estimated cross-sec- backward.
tion blockage, as shown in Figure 17–2. If the 8.2.3 Before moving the sample train to
blockage exceeds 5 percent of the duct cross the cleanup site, disconnect the filter holder-
sectional area, the tester has the following probe nozzle assembly from the probe exten-
options exist: (1) a suitable out-of-stack fil- sion; cap the open inlet of the probe exten-
tration method may be used instead of in- sion. Be careful not to lose any condensate,
stack filtration; or (2) a special in-stack ar- if present. Remove the umbilical cord from
rangement, in which the sampling and veloc- the condenser outlet and cap the outlet. If a
ity measurement sites are separate, may be flexible line is used between the first im-
used; for details concerning this approach, pinger (or condenser) and the probe exten-
consult with the Administrator (see also Ref- sion, disconnect the line at the probe exten-
erence 1 in Section 17.0). Select a probe ex- sion and let any condensed water or liquid
tension length such that all traverse points drain into the impingers or condenser. Dis-
can be sampled. For large stacks, consider connect the probe extension from the con-
sampling from opposite sides of the stack to denser; cap the probe extension outlet. After
reduce the length of probes. wiping off the silicone grease, cap off the
8.1.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. condenser inlet. Ground glass stoppers, plas-
Same as in Method 5, Section 8.1.3, except tic caps, or serum caps (whichever are appro-
the following: Using a tweezer or clean dis- priate) may be used to close these openings.
posable surgical gloves, place a labeled (iden- 8.2.4 Transfer both the filter holder-probe
tified) and weighed filter in the filter holder. nozzle assembly and the condenser to the
Be sure that the filter is properly centered cleanup area. This area should be clean and
and the gasket properly placed so as not to protected from the wind so that the chances
440
of contaminating or losing the sample will 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations.
be minimized.
Same as in Method 5, Section 12.0.
8.2.5 Save a portion of the acetone used
for cleanup as a blank. Take 200 ml of this 13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
acetone from the wash bottle being used and
place it in a glass sample container labeled 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
‘‘acetone blank.’’ Inspect the train prior to
and during disassembly and not any abnor- 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
mal conditions. Treat the sample as dis-
cussed in Method 5, Section 8.2.
Same as in Method 5, Section 16.0.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
17.0 References
Same as in Method 5, Section 17.0, with the
The calibrations of the probe nozzle, pitot addition of the following:
tube, metering system, temperature sensors,
1. Vollaro, R.F. Recommended Procedure
and barometer are the same as in Method 5,
for Sample Traverses in Ducts Smaller than
Sections 10.1 through 10.3, 10.5, and 10.6, re-
12 Inches in Diameter. U.S. Environmental
spectively.
Protection Agency, Emission Measurement
11.0 Analytical Procedure Branch. Research Triangle Park, NC. Novem-
ber 1976.
Same as in Method 5, Section 11.0. Analyt-
ical data should be recorded on a form simi- 18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
lar to that shown in Figure 5–6 of Method 5. Validation Data
441
442
ER17oc00.302</GPH>
METHOD 18—MEASUREMENT OF GASEOUS OR- to obtain reliable results, persons using this
GANIC COMPOUND EMISSIONS BY GAS CHRO- method should have a thorough knowledge of
MATOGRAPHY at least the following additional test meth-
ods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3.
NOTE: This method is not inclusive with re-
NOTE: This method should not be at-
spect to specifications (e.g., equipment and
tempted by persons unfamiliar with the per-

formance characteristics of gas chroma-
analytical) essential to its performance.
tography, nor by those persons who are unfa-
Some material is incorporated by reference
miliar with source sampling. Particular care
from other methods in this part. Therefore,
443
ER17oc00.303</GPH>
should be exercised in the area of safety con- 3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
cerning choice of equipment and operation in
potentially explosive atmospheres. 4.0 Interferences
1.0 Scope and Application 4.1 Resolution interferences that may

occur can be eliminated by appropriate GC
1.1 Analyte. Total gaseous organic com- column and detector choice or by shifting
pounds. the retention times through changes in the
1.2 Applicability. column flow rate and the use of temperature
1.2.1 This method is designed to measure programming.
gaseous organics emitted from an industrial 4.2 The analytical system is demonstrated
source. While designed for ppm level sources, to be essentially free from contaminants by
some detectors are quite capable of detecting periodically analyzing blanks that consist of
compounds at ambient levels, e.g., ECD, hydrocarbon-free air or nitrogen.
ELCD, and helium ionization detectors. 4.3 Sample cross-contamination that oc-
Some other types of detectors are evolving curs when high-level and low-level samples
such that the sensitivity and applicability or standards are analyzed alternately is best
may well be in the ppb range in only a few dealt with by thorough purging of the GC
years. sample loop between samples.
1.2.2 This method will not determine com- 4.4 To assure consistent detector re-
pounds that (1) are polymeric (high molec- sponse, calibration gases are contained in
ular weight), (2) can polymerize before anal- dry air. To adjust gaseous organic concentra-
ysis, or (3) have very low vapor pressures at tions when water vapor is present in the
stack or instrument conditions. sample, water vapor concentrations are de-
1.3 Range. The lower range of this method termined for those samples, and a correction
is determined by the sampling system; ad- factor is applied.
sorbents may be used to concentrate the 4.5 The gas chromatograph run time must
sample, thus lowering the limit of detection be sufficient to clear all eluting peaks from
below the 1 part per million (ppm) typically the column before proceeding to the next run
achievable with direct interface or bag sam- (in order to prevent sample carryover).
pling. The upper limit is governed by GC de-
tector saturation or column overloading; the 5.0 Safety
upper range can be extended by dilution of
sample with an inert gas or by using smaller
volume gas sampling loops. The upper limit
can also be governed by condensation of
higher boiling compounds.
1.4 Sensitivity. The sensitivity limit for a
compound is defined as the minimum detect-
able concentration of that compound, or the
concentration that produces a signal-to-
performing this test method. The analyzer
noise ratio of three to one. The minimum de-
users manual should be consulted for specific
tectable concentration is determined during
precautions to be taken with regard to the
the presurvey calibration for each com-
analytical procedure.
pound.
2.0 Summary of Method 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
The major organic components of a gas 6.1 Equipment needed for the presurvey
mixture are separated by gas chroma- sampling procedure can be found in Section
tography (GC) and individually quantified by 16.1.1.
flame ionization, photoionization, electron 6.2 Equipment needed for the integrated
capture, or other appropriate detection prin- bag sampling and analysis procedure can be
ciples. The retention times of each separated found in Section 8.2.1.1.1.
component are compared with those of 6.3 Equipment needed for direct interface
known compounds under identical condi- sampling and analysis can be found in Sec-
tions. Therefore, the analyst confirms the tion 8.2.2.1.
identity and approximate concentrations of 6.4 Equipment needed for the dilution
the organic emission components before- interface sampling and analysis can be found
hand. With this information, the analyst in Section 8.2.3.1.
then prepares or purchases commercially 6.5 Equipment needed for adsorbent tube
available standard mixtures to calibrate the sampling and analysis can be found in Sec-
GC under conditions identical to those of the tion 8.2.4.1.
samples. The analyst also determines the

need for sample dilution to avoid detector
saturation, gas stream filtration to elimi- 7.1 Reagents needed for the presurvey
nate particulate matter, and prevention of sampling procedure can be found in Section
moisture condensation. 16.1.2.
444
7.2 Quality Assurance Audit Samples. flow. Then position the sample and vacuum
When making compliance determinations, lines for sampling, and begin the actual sam-
and upon availability, an audit sample may pling, keeping the rate proportional to the
be obtained from the appropriate EPA Re- stack velocity. As a precaution, direct the
gional Office or from the responsible enforce- gas exiting the rotameter away from sam-
ment authority. pling personnel. At the end of the sample pe-
NOTE: The responsible enforcement riod, shut off the pump, disconnect the sam-
autority should be notified at least 30 days ple line from the bag, and disconnect the
prior to the test date to allow sufficient time vacuum line from the bag container. Record
for sample delivery. the source temperature, barometric pressure,
ambient temperature, sampling flow rate,
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and initial and final sampling time on the
and Transport data sheet shown in Figure 18–10. Protect the
Tedlar bag and its container from sunlight.
8.2 Final Sampling and Analysis Proce- Record the time lapsed between sample col-
dure. Considering safety (flame hazards) and lection and analysis, and then conduct the
the source conditions, select an appropriate recovery procedure in Section 8.4.2.
sampling and analysis procedure (Section 8.2.1.2 Direct Pump Sampling Procedure.
8.2.1, 8.2.2, 8.2.3 or 8.2.4). In situations where Follow 8.2.1.1, except place the pump and
a hydrogen flame is a hazard and no intrinsi- needle valve between the probe and the bag.
cally safe GC is suitable, use the flexible bag Use a pump and needle valve constructed of
collection technique or an adsorption tech- inert material not affected by the stack gas.
nique. Leak-check the system, and then purge with
8.2.1 Integrated Bag Sampling and Anal- stack gas before connecting to the pre-
ysis. viously evacuated bag.
8.2.1.1 Evacuated Container Sampling 8.2.1.3 Explosion Risk Area Bag Sampling
Procedure. In this procedure, the bags are Procedure. Follow 8.2.1.1 except replace the
filled by evacuating the rigid air-tight con- pump with another evacuated can (see Fig-
tainer holding the bags. Use a field sample ure 18–9a). Use this method whenever there is
data sheet as shown in Figure 18–10. Collect a possibility of an explosion due to pumps,
triplicate samples from each sample loca- heated probes, or other flame producing
tion. equipment.
8.2.1.1.1 Apparatus. 8.2.1.4 Other Modified Bag Sampling Pro-
8.2.1.1.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel, Pyrex cedures. In the event that condensation is
glass, or Teflon tubing probe, according to observed in the bag while collecting the sam-
the duct temperature, with Teflon tubing of ple and a direct interface system cannot be
sufficient length to connect to the sample used, heat the bag during collection, and
bag. Use stainless steel or Teflon unions to maintain it at a suitably elevated tempera-
connect probe and sample line. ture during all subsequent operations. (NOTE:
8.2.1.1.1.2 Quick Connects. Male (2) and fe- Take care to leak-check the system prior to
male (2) of stainless steel construction. the dilutions so as not to create a poten-
8.2.1.1.1.3 Needle Valve. To control gas tially explosive atmosphere.) As an alter-
flow. native, collect the sample gas, and simulta-
8.2.1.1.1.4 Pump. Leakless Teflon-coated neously dilute it in the Tedlar bag.
diaphragm-type pump or equivalent. To de- 8.2.1.4.1 First Alternative Procedure. Heat
liver at least 1 liter/min. the box containing the sample bag to 120 °C
8.2.1.1.1.5 Charcoal Adsorption Tube. Tube (±5 °C). Then transport the bag as rapidly as
filled with activated charcoal, with glass possible to the analytical area while main-
wool plugs at each end, to adsorb organic va- taining the heating, or cover the box with an
pors. insulating blanket. In the analytical area,
8.2.1.1.1.6 Flowmeter. 0 to 500-ml flow keep the box heated to 120 °C (±5 °C) until
range; with manufacturer’s calibration analysis. Be sure that the method of heating
curve. the box and the control for the heating cir-
8.2.1.1.2 Sampling Procedure. To obtain a cuit are compatible with the safety restric-
sample, assemble the sample train as shown tions required in each area.
in Figure 18–9. Leak-check both the bag and 8.2.1.4.2 Second Alternative Procedure.
the container. Connect the vacuum line from Prefill the Tedlar bag with a known quantity
the needle valve to the Teflon sample line of inert gas. Meter the inert gas into the bag
from the probe. Place the end of the probe at according to the procedure for the prepara-
the centroid of the stack or at a point no tion of gas concentration standards of vola-
closer to the walls than 1 m, and start the tile liquid materials (Section 10.1.2.2), but
pump. Set the flow rate so that the final vol- eliminate the midget impinger section. Take
ume of the sample is approximately 80 per- the partly filled bag to the source, and meter
cent of the bag capacity. After allowing suf- the source gas into the bag through heated
ficient time to purge the line several times, sampling lines and a heated flowmeter, or
connect the vacuum line to the bag, and Teflon positive displacement pump. Verify
evacuate until the rotameter indicates no the dilution factors before sampling each bag
445
through dilution and analysis of gases of 8.2.1.7 Audit Gas Analysis. Immediately
known concentration. prior to the analysis of the stack gas sam-
8.2.1.5 Analysis of Bag Samples. ples, perform audit analyses as described in
8.2.1.5.1 Apparatus. Same as Section 8.1. A Section 9.2.
minimum of three gas standards are re- 8.2.1.8 Emission Calculations. From the
quired. calibration curve described in Section 8.2.1.5,
8.2.1.5.2 Procedure. select the value of Cs that corresponds to the
8.2.1.5.2.1 Establish proper GC operating peak area. Calculate the concentration Cc in
conditions as described in Section 10.2, and ppm, dry basis, of each organic in the sample
record all data listed in Figure 18–7. Prepare using Equation 18–5 in Section 12.6.
the GC so that gas can be drawn through the 8.2.2 Direct Interface Sampling and Anal-
sample valve. Flush the sample loop with ysis Procedure. The direct interface proce-
calibration gas mixture, and activate the dure can be used provided that the moisture
valve (sample pressure at the inlet to the GC content of the gas does not interfere with
introduction valve should be similar during the analysis procedure, the physical require-
calibration as during actual sample anal- ments of the equipment can be met at the
ysis). Obtain at least three chromatograms
site, and the source gas concentration falls
for the mixture. The results are acceptable
within the linear range of the detector. Ad-
when the peak areas for the three injections
here to all safety requirements with this
agree to within 5 percent of their average. If
method.
they do not agree, run additional samples or
correct the analytical techniques until this 8.2.2.1 Apparatus.
requirement is met. Then analyze the other 8.2.2.1.1 Probe. Constructed of stainless
two calibration mixtures in the same man- steel, Pyrex glass, or Teflon tubing as dic-
ner. Prepare a calibration curve as described tated by duct temperature and reactivity of
in Section 10.2. target compounds. A filter or glass wool plug
8.2.1.5.2.2 Analyze the two field audit sam- may be needed if particulate is present in the
ples as described in Section 9.2 by connecting stack gas. If necessary, heat the probe with
each Tedlar bag containing an audit gas mix- heating tape or a special heating unit capa-
ture to the sampling valve. Calculate the re- ble of maintaining a temperature greater
sults; record and report the data to the audit than 110 °C.
supervisor. 8.2.2.1.2 Sample Lines. 6.4-mm OD (or
8.2.1.5.2.3 Analyze the three source gas other diameter as needed) Teflon lines, heat-
samples by connecting each bag to the sam- traced to prevent condensation of material
pling valve with a piece of Teflon tubing (greater than 110 °C).
identified with that bag. Analyze each bag 8.2.2.1.3 Quick Connects. To connect sam-
sample three times. Record the data in Fig- ple line to gas sampling valve on GC instru-
ure 18–11. If certain items do not apply, use ment and to pump unit used to withdraw
the notation ‘‘N.A.’’ If the bag has been source gas. Use a quick connect or equiva-
maintained at an elevated temperature as lent on the cylinder or bag containing cali-
described in Section 8.2.1.4, determine the bration gas to allow connection of the cali-
stack gas water content by Method 4. After bration gas to the gas sampling valve.
all samples have been analyzed, repeat the 8.2.2.1.4 Thermocouple Readout Device.
analysis of the mid-level calibration gas for Potentiometer or digital thermometer, to
each compound. Compare the average remeasure source temperature and probe tem-
sponse factor of the pre- and post-test anal- perature.
ysis for each compound. If they differ by 8.2.2.1.5 Heated Gas Sampling Valve. Of
>5percent, analyze the other calibration gas two-position, six-port design, to allow sam-
levels for that compound, and prepare a cali- ple loop to be purged with source gas or to
bration curve using all the pre- and post-test direct source gas into the GC instrument.
calibration gas mixture values. If the two re-
8.2.2.1.6 Needle Valve. To control gas sam-
sponse factor averages (pre-and post-test)
pling rate from the source.
differ by less than 5 percent from their mean
value, the tester has the option of using only 8.2.2.1.7 Pump. Leakless Teflon-coated di-
the pre-test calibration curve to generate aphragm-type pump or equivalent, capable of
the concentration values. at least 1 liter/minute sampling rate.
8.2.1.6 Determination of Bag Water Vapor 8.2.2.1.8 Flowmeter. Of suitable range to
Content. Measure the ambient temperature measure sampling rate.
and barometric pressure near the bag. From 8.2.2.1.9 Charcoal Adsorber. To adsorb or-
a water saturation vapor pressure table, de- ganic vapor vented from the source to pre-
termine and record the water vapor content vent exposure of personnel to source gas.
of the bag as a decimal figure. (Assume the 8.2.2.1.10 Gas Cylinders. Carrier gas, oxy-
relative humidity to be 100 percent unless a gen and fuel as needed to run GC and detec-
lesser value is known.) If the bag has been tor.
maintained at an elevated temperature as 8.2.2.1.11 Gas Chromatograph. Capable of
described in Section 8.2.1.4, determine the being moved into the field, with detector,
stack gas water content by Method 4. heated gas sampling valve, column required
446
to complete separation of desired compo- apparatus required for this direct interface
nents, and option for temperature program- procedure is basically the same as that de-
ming. scribed in the Section 8.2.2, except a dilution
8.2.2.1.12 Recorder/Integrator. To record system is added between the heated sample
results. line and the gas sampling valve. The appa-
8.2.2.2 Procedure. Calibrate the GC using ratus is arranged so that either a 10:1 or 100:1
the procedures in Section 8.2.1.5.2.1. To ob- dilution of the source gas can be directed to
tain a stack gas sample, assemble the sam- the chromatograph. A pump of larger capac-
pling system as shown in Figure 18–12. Make ity is also required, and this pump must be
sure all connections are tight. Turn on the heated and placed in the system between the
probe and sample line heaters. As the tem- sample line and the dilution apparatus.
perature of the probe and heated line ap- 8.2.3.1 Apparatus. The equipment required
proaches the target temperature as indicated in addition to that specified for the direct
on the thermocouple readout device, control interface system is as follows:
the heating to maintain a temperature 8.2.3.1.1 Sample Pump. Leakless Teflon-
greater than 110 °C. Conduct a 3-point cali- coated diaphragm-type that can withstand
bration of the GC by analyzing each gas mix- being heated to 120 °C and deliver 1.5 liters/
ture in triplicate. Generate a calibration minute.
curve. Place the inlet of the probe at the 8.2.3.1.2 Dilution Pumps. Two Model A–150
centroid of the duct, or at a point no closer Komhyr Teflon positive displacement type
to the walls than 1 m, and draw source gas delivering 150 cc/minute, or equivalent. As an
into the probe, heated line, and sample loop. option, calibrated flowmeters can be used in
After thorough flushing, analyze the stack conjunction with Teflon-coated diaphragm
gas sample using the same conditions as for pumps.
the calibration gas mixture. For each run, 8.2.3.1.3 Valves. Two Teflon three-way
sample, analyze, and record five consecutive valves, suitable for connecting to Teflon tub-
samples. A test consists of three runs (five ing.
samples per run times three runs, for a total 8.2.3.1.4 Flowmeters. Two, for measure-
of fifteen samples). After all samples have ment of diluent gas.
been analyzed, repeat the analysis of the 8.2.3.1.5 Diluent Gas with Cylinders and
mid-level calibration gas for each compound. Regulators. Gas can be nitrogen or clean dry
For each calibration standard, compare the air, depending on the nature of the source
pre- and post-test average response factors gases.
(RF) for each compound. If the two calibra- 8.2.3.1.6 Heated Box. Suitable for being
tion RF values (pre- and post-analysis) differ heated to 120 °C, to contain the three pumps,
by more than 5 percent from their mean three-way valves, and associated connec-
value, then analyze the other calibration gas tions. The box should be equipped with quick
levels for that compound and determine the connect fittings to facilitate connection of:
stack gas sample concentrations by compari- (1) the heated sample line from the probe, (2)
son to both calibration curves (this is done the gas sampling valve, (3) the calibration
by preparing a calibration curve using all gas mixtures, and (4) diluent gas lines. A
the pre and post-test calibration gas mixture schematic diagram of the components and
values). If the two calibration RF values dif- connections is shown in Figure 18–13. The
fer by less than 5 percent from their mean heated box shown in Figure 18–13 is designed
value, the tester has the option of using only to receive a heated line from the probe. An
the pre-test calibration curve to generate optional design is to build a probe unit that
the concentration values. Record this cali- attaches directly to the heated box. In this
bration data and the other required data on way, the heated box contains the controls for
the data sheet shown in Figure 18–11, delet- the probe heaters, or, if the box is placed
ing the dilution gas information. against the duct being sampled, it may be
NOTE: Take care to draw all samples, cali- possible to eliminate the probe heaters. In
bration mixtures, and audits through the either case, a heated Teflon line is used to
sample loop at the same pressure. connect the heated box to the gas sampling
valve on the chromatograph.
8.2.2.3 Determination of Stack Gas Mois-
ture Content. Use Method 4 to measure the NOTE: Care must be taken to leak-check
stack gas moisture content. the system prior to the dilutions so as not to
8.2.2.4 Quality Assurance. Same as Sec- create a potentially explosive atmosphere.
tion 8.2.1.7. Introduce the audit gases in the 8.2.3.2 Procedure.
sample line immediately following the probe. 8.2.3.2.1 Assemble the apparatus by con-
8.2.2.5 Emission Calculations. Same as necting the heated box, shown in Figure 18–
Section 8.2.1.8. 13, between the heated sample line from the
8.2.3 Dilution Interface Sampling and probe and the gas sampling valve on the
Analysis Procedure. Source samples that chromatograph. Vent the source gas from
contain a high concentration of organic ma- the gas sampling valve directly to the char-
terials may require dilution prior to analysis coal filter, eliminating the pump and rotam-
to prevent saturating the GC detector. The eter. Heat the sample probe, sample line, and
447
heated box. Insert the probe and source ther- of-stack, heated to stack temperature) to re-
mocouple at the centroid of the duct, or to a move particulate matter. In most instances,
point no closer to the walls than 1 m. Meas- a plug of glass wool is a satisfactory filter.
ure the source temperature, and adjust all 8.2.4.1.2 Flexible Tubing. To connect probe
heating units to a temperature 0 to 3 °C to adsorption tubes. Use a material that ex-
above this temperature. If this temperature hibits minimal sample adsorption.
is above the safe operating temperature of 8.2.4.1.3 Leakless Sample Pump. Flow con-
the Teflon components, adjust the heating to trolled, constant rate pump, with a set of
maintain a temperature high enough to pre- limiting (sonic) orifices.
vent condensation of water and organic com- 8.2.4.1.4 Bubble-Tube Flowmeter. Volume
pounds (greater than 110 °C). Calibrate the accuracy within 1 percent, to calibrate
GC through the dilution system by following pump.
the procedures in Section 8.2.1.5.2.1. Deter- 8.2.4.1.5 Stopwatch. To time sampling and
mine the concentration of the diluted cali- pump rate calibration.
bration gas using the dilution factor and the 8.2.4.1.6 Adsorption Tubes. Precleaned ad-
certified concentration of the calibration sorbent, with mass of adsorbent to be deter-
gas. Record the pertinent data on the data mined by calculating breakthrough volume
sheet shown in Figure 18–11. and expected concentration in the stack.
8.2.3.2.2 Once the dilution system and GC 8.2.4.1.7 Barometer. Accurate to 5 mm Hg,
operations are satisfactory, proceed with the to measure atmospheric pressure during
analysis of source gas, maintaining the same sampling and pump calibration.
dilution settings as used for the standards. 8.2.4.1.8 Rotameter. O to 100 cc/min, to de-
8.2.3.2.3 Analyze the audit samples using tect changes in flow rate during sampling.
either the dilution system, or directly con- 8.2.4.2 Sampling and Analysis.
nect to the gas sampling valve as required. 8.2.4.2.1 Calibrate the pump and limiting
Record all data and report the results to the orifice flow rate through adsorption tubes
audit supervisor. with the bubble tube flowmeter before sam-
8.2.3.3 Determination of Stack Gas Mois- pling. The sample system can be operated as
ture Content. Same as Section 8.2.2.3. a ‘‘recirculating loop’’ for this operation.
8.2.3.4 Quality Assurance. Same as Sec- Record the ambient temperature and baro-
tion 8.2.2.4. metric pressure. Then, during sampling, use
8.2.3.5 Emission Calculations. Same as the rotameter to verify that the pump and
orifice sampling rate remains constant.
section 8.2.2.5, with the dilution factor ap-
8.2.4.2.2 Use a sample probe, if required, to
plied.
obtain the sample at the centroid of the
8.2.4 Adsorption Tube Procedure. Any
duct, or at a point no closer to the walls
commercially available adsorbent is allowed
than 1 m. Minimize the length of flexible
for the purposes of this method, as long as
tubing between the probe and adsorption
the recovery study criteria in Section 8.4.3
tubes. Several adsorption tubes can be con-
are met. Help in choosing the adsorbent may
nected in series, if the extra adsorptive ca-
be found by calling the distributor, or the
pacity is needed. Adsorption tubes should be
tester may refer to National Institute for Oc-
maintained vertically during the test in
cupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) meth-
order to prevent channeling. Provide the gas
ods for the particular organics to be sam-
sample to the sample system at a pressure
pled. For some adsorbents, the principal
sufficient for the limiting orifice to function
interferent will be water vapor. If water
as a sonic orifice. Record the total time and
vapor is thought to be a problem, the tester
sample flow rate (or the number of pump
may place a midget impinger in an ice bath
strokes), the barometric pressure, and ambi-
before the adsorbent tubes. If this option is
ent temperature. Obtain a total sample vol-
chosen, the water catch in the midget im-
ume commensurate with the expected con-
pinger shall be analyzed for the target com-
centration(s) of the volatile organic(s)
pounds. Also, the spike for the recovery
present, and recommended sample loading
study (in Section 8.4.3) shall be conducted in
factors (weight sample per weight adsorption
both the midget impinger and the adsorbent
media). Laboratory tests prior to actual
tubes. The combined recovery (add the re-
sampling may be necessary to predetermine
covered amount in the impinger and the ad-
this volume. If water vapor is present in the
sorbent tubes to calculate R) shall then meet
sample at concentrations above 2 to 3 per-
the criteria in Section 8.4.3.
cent, the adsorptive capacity may be se-
NOTE: Post-test leak-checks are not al- verely reduced. Operate the gas chro-
lowed for this technique since this can result matograph according to the manufacturer’s
in sample contamination. instructions. After establishing optimum
8.2.4.1 Additional Apparatus. The fol- conditions, verify and document these condi-
lowing items (or equivalent) are suggested. tions during all operations. Calibrate the in-
8.2.4.1.1 Probe. Borosilicate glass or stain- strument. Analyze the audit samples (see
less steel, approximately 6-mm ID, with a Section 16.1.4.3), then the emission samples.
heating system if water condensation is a 8.2.4.3 Standards and Calibration. If using
problem, and a filter (either in-stack or out- thermal desorption, obtain calibration gases
448
using the procedures in Section 10.1. If using Repeat the calibration procedure by sam-
solvent extraction, prepare liquid standards pling and analyzing the mid-level calibration
in the desorption solvent. Use a minimum of gas through the entire sampling and analyt-
three different standards; select the conical system in triplicate. The mean of the
centrations to bracket the expected average calibration gas response sampled through
sample concentration. Perform the calibra- the probe shall be within 10 percent of the
tion before and after each day’s sample anal- analyzer response. If the difference in the
yses using the procedures in Section two means is greater than 10 percent, check
8.2.1.5.2.1. for leaks throughout the sampling system
8.2.4.4 Quality Assurance. and repeat the analysis of the standard
8.2.4.4.1 Determine the recovery efficiency through the sampling system until this cri-
of the pollutants of interest according to
terion is met.
Section 8.4.3.
8.2.4.4.2 Determination of Sample Collec- 8.4.2 Recovery Study for Bag Sampling.
tion Efficiency (Optional). If sample break- 8.4.2.1 Follow the procedures for the bag
through is thought to be a problem, a rou- sampling and analysis in Section 8.2.1. After
tine procedure for determining breakthrough analyzing all three bag samples, choose one
is to analyze the primary and backup por- of the bag samples and tag this bag as the
tions of the adsorption tubes separately. If spiked bag. Spike the chosen bag sample
the backup portion exceeds 10 percent of the with a known mixture (gaseous or liquid) of
total amount (primary and back-up), it is all of the target pollutants. The theoretical
usually a sign of sample breakthrough. For concentration, in ppm, of each spiked com-
the purposes of this method, only the recov- pound in the bag shall be 40 to 60 percent of
ery efficiency value (Section 8.4.3) is used to the average concentration measured in the
determine the appropriateness of the sam- three bag samples. If a target compound was
pling and analytical procedure. not detected in the bag samples, the con-
8.2.4.4.3 Volume Flow Rate Checks. Per- centration of that compound to be spiked
form this check immediately after sampling shall be 5 times the limit of detection for
with all sampling train components in place. that compound. Store the spiked bag for the
Use the bubble-tube flowmeter to measure same period of time as the bag samples col-
the pump volume flow rate with the orifice lected in the field. After the appropriate
used in the test sampling, and record the re- storage time has passed, analyze the spiked
sult. If it has changed by more than 5 but bag three times. Calculate the average frac-
less than 20 percent, calculate an average tion recovered (R) of each spiked target com-
flow rate for the test. If the flow rate has pound with the equation in Section 12.7.
changed by more than 20 percent, recalibrate 8.4.2.2 For the bag sampling technique to
the pump and repeat the sampling. be considered valid for a compound, 0.70 ≤ R
8.2.4.4.4 Calculations. Correct all sample
≤ 1.30. If the R value does not meet this cri-
volumes to standard conditions. If a sample
terion for a target compound, the sampling
dilution system has been used, multiply the
technique is not acceptable for that com-
results by the appropriate dilution ratio.
pound, and therefore another sampling tech-
Correct all results according to the applica-
nique shall be evaluated for acceptance (by
ble procedure in Section 8.4.3. Report results
repeating the recovery study with another
as ppm by volume, dry basis.
8.3 Reporting of Results. At the comple- sampling technique). Report the R value in
tion of the field analysis portion of the the test report and correct all field measure-
study, ensure that the data sheets shown in ments with the calculated R value for that
Figure 18–11 have been completed. Summa- compound by using the equation in Section
rize this data on the data sheets shown in 12.8.
Figure 18–15. 8.4.3 Recovery Study for Adsorption Tube
8.4 Recovery Study. After conducting the Sampling. If following the adsorption tube
presurvey and identifying all of the pollut- procedure in Section 8.2.4, conduct a recov-
ants of interest, conduct the appropriate re- ery study of the compounds of interest dur-
covery study during the test based on the ing the actual field test. Set up two identical
sampling system chosen for the compounds sampling trains. Collocate the two sampling
of interest. probes in the stack. The probes shall be
8.4.1 Recovery Study for Direct Interface placed in the same horizontal plane, where
or Dilution Interface Sampling. If the proce- the first probe tip is 2.5 cm from the outside
dures in Section 8.2.2 or 8.2.3 are to be used edge of the other. One of the sampling trains
to analyze the stack gas, conduct the cali- shall be designated the spiked train and the
bration procedure as stated in Section 8.2.2.2 other the unspiked train. Spike all of the
or 8.2.3.2, as appropriate. Upon successful compounds of interest (in gaseous or liquid
completion of the appropriate calibration form) onto the adsorbent tube(s) in the
procedure, attach the mid-level calibration spiked train before sampling. The mass of
gas for at least one target compound to the each spiked compound shall be 40 to 60 per-
inlet of the probe or as close as possible to cent of the mass expected to be collected
the inlet of the probe, but before the filter. with the unspiked train. Sample the stack
449
gas into the two trains simultaneously. Ana- compound, the sampling technique is not ac-
lyze the adsorbents from the two trains uti- ceptable for that compound, and therefore
lizing identical analytical procedures and in- another sampling technique shall be evalu-
strumentation. Determine the fraction of ated for acceptance (by repeating the recov-
spiked compound recovered (R) using the ery study with another sampling technique).
equations in Section 12.9. Report the R value in the test report and
8.4.3.1 Repeat the procedure in Section correct all field measurements with the cal-
8.4.3 twice more, for a total of three runs. In culated R value for that compound by using
order for the adsorbent tube sampling and the equation in Section 12.8.
analytical procedure to be acceptable for a
9.0 Quality Control
compound, 0.70≤R≤1.30 (R in this case is the
average of three runs). If the average R value 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
does not meet this criterion for a target ures
8.4.1 ................................... Recovery study for direct interface or di- Ensure that there are no significant leaks in the sam-
lution interface sampling. pling system.
8.4.2 ................................... Recovery study for bag sampling ............ Demonstrate that proper sampling/analysis procedures
were selected.
8.4.3 ................................... Recovery study for adsorption tube sam- Demonstrate that proper sampling/analysis procedures
pling. were selected.
9.2 Quality Assurance for Laboratory Pro- for the sample extraction procedure. Verify
cedures. Immediately after the preparation the stability of all standards for the time pe-
of the calibration curves, the analysis audit riods they are used.
described in 40 CFR Part 61, Appendix C, Pro- 10.2 Preparation of Calibration Curves.
cedure 2: ‘‘Procedure for Field Auditing GC 10.2.1 Establish proper GC conditions,
Analysis,’’ should be performed if audit ma- then flush the sampling loop for 30 seconds.
terials are available. The information re- Allow the sample loop pressure to equili-
quired to document the analysis of the audit brate to atmospheric pressure, and activate
samples has been included on the example the injection valve. Record the standard con-
data sheets shown in Figures 18–3 and 18–7. centration, attenuator factor, injection
The audit analyses should agree with the time, chart speed, retention time, peak area,
certified audit concentrations within 10 per- sample loop temperature, column tempera-
cent. Audit sample results shall be sub- ture, and carrier gas flow rate. Analyze each
mitted according to directions provided with standard in triplicate.
the audit samples. 10.2.2 Repeat this procedure for each
standard. Prepare a graphical plot of con-
10.0 Calibration and Standardization.
centration (Cs) versus the calibration area
10.1 Calibration Standards. Obtain cali- values. Perform a regression analysis, and
bration gas standards for each target com- draw the least square line.
pound to be analyzed. Commercial cylinder
gases certified by the manufacturer to be ac- 11.0 Analytical Procedures
curate to within 1 percent of the certified 11.1 Analysis Development
label value are preferable, although cylinder 11.1.1 Selection of GC Parameters
gases certified by the manufacturer to 2 per-
11.1.1.1 Column Choice. Based on the ini-
cent accuracy are allowed. Another option
tial contact with plant personnel concerning
allowed by this method is for the tester to
the plant process and the anticipated emis-
obtain high concentration certified cylinder
sions, choose a column that provides good
gases and then use a dilution system meet-
resolution and rapid analysis time. The
ing the requirements of Test Method 205, 40
CFR Part 51, Appendix M to make multi- choice of an appropriate column can be aided
level calibration gas standards. Prepare or by a literature search, contact with manu-
obtain enough calibration standards so that facturers of GC columns, and discussion with
there are three different concentrations of personnel at the emission source.
each organic compound expected to be meas- NOTE: Most column manufacturers keep
ured in the source sample. For each organic excellent records on their products. Their
compound, select those concentrations that technical service departments may be able
bracket the concentrations expected in the to recommend appropriate columns and de-
source samples. A calibration standard may tector type for separating the anticipated
contain more than one organic compound. If compounds, and they may be able to provide
samples are collected in adsorbent tubes and information on interferences, optimum oper-
extracted using solvent extraction, prepare ating conditions, and column limitations.
or obtain standards in the same solvent used Plants with analytical laboratories may be
450
able to provide information on their analyt- 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
ical procedures.
12.1 Nomenclature.
11.1.1.2 Preliminary GC Adjustment. Bws=Water vapor content of the bag sample
Using the standards and column obtained in or stack gas, proportion by volume.
Section 11.1.1.1, perform initial tests to de- Cs=Concentration of the organic from the
termine appropriate GC conditions that pro- calibration curve, ppm.
vide good resolution and minimum analysis Gv=Gas volume or organic compound in-
time for the compounds of interest. jected, ml.
11.1.1.3 Preparation of Presurvey Samples. Lv=Liquid volume of organic injected, μl.
If the samples were collected on an adsorb- M=Molecular weight of organic, g/g-mole.
ent, extract the sample as recommended by ms=Total mass of compound measured on ad-
the manufacturer for removal of the com- sorbent with spiked train (μg).
pounds with a solvent suitable to the type of mu=Total mass of compound measured on ad-
GC analysis. Prepare other samples in an ap- sorbent with unspiked train (μg).
propriate manner. mv=Mass per volume of spiked compound
11.1.1.4 Presurvey Sample Analysis. measured (μg/L).
11.1.1.4.1 Before analysis, heat the Pi=Barometric or absolute sample loop pres-
presurvey sample to the duct temperature to sure at time of sample analysis, mm Hg.
vaporize any condensed material. Analyze Pm=Absolute pressure of dry gas meter, mm
the samples by the GC procedure, and com- Hg.
pare the retention times against those of the Pr=Reference pressure, the barometric pres-
calibration samples that contain the compo- sure or absolute sample loop pressure re-
nents expected to be in the stream. If any corded during calibration, mm Hg.
compounds cannot be identified with cer- Ps=Absolute pressure of syringe before injec-
tainty by this procedure, identify them by tion, mm Hg.
other means such as GC/mass spectroscopy qc=Flow rate of the calibration gas to be di-
(GC/MS) or GC/infrared techniques. A GC/MS luted.
system is recommended. qc1=Flow rate of the calibration gas to be di-
11.1.1.4.2 Use the GC conditions deter- luted in stage 1.
mined by the procedure of Section 11.1.1.2 for qc2=Flow rate of the calibration gas to be di-
the first injection. Vary the GC parameters luted in stage 2.
during subsequent injections to determine qd=Diluent gas flow rate.
the optimum settings. Once the optimum qd1=Flow rate of diluent gas in stage 1.
settings have been determined, perform re- qd2=Flow rate of diluent gas in stage 2.
peat injections of the sample to determine s=Theoretical concentration (ppm) of spiked
the retention time of each compound. To in- target compound in the bag.
ject a sample, draw sample through the loop S=Theoretical mass of compound spiked
at a constant rate (100 ml/min for 30 sec- onto adsorbent in spiked train (μg).
onds). Be careful not to pressurize the gas in t=Measured average concentration (ppm) of
the loop. Turn off the pump and allow the target compound and source sample (anal-
gas in the sample loop to come to ambient ysis results subsequent to bag spiking)
pressure. Activate the sample valve, and Ti=Sample loop temperature at the time of
record injection time, loop temperature, col- sample analysis, °K.
umn temperature, carrier flow rate, chart Tm=Absolute temperature of dry gas meter,
speed, and attenuator setting. Calculate the °K.
retention time of each peak using the dis- Ts=Absolute temperature of syringe before
tance from injection to the peak maximum injection, °K.
divided by the chart speed. Retention times u=Source sample average concentration
should be repeatable within 0.5 seconds. (ppm) of target compound in the bag (anal-
11.1.1.4.3 If the concentrations are too ysis results before bag spiking).
high for appropriate detector response, a Vm=Gas volume indicated by dry gas meter,
smaller sample loop or dilutions may be used liters.
for gas samples, and, for liquid samples, dilu- vs=volume of stack gas sampled with spiked
tion with solvent is appropriate. Use the train (L).
standard curves (Section 10.2) to obtain an vu=volume of stack gas sampled with
estimate of the concentrations. unspiked train (L).
11.1.1.4.4 Identify all peaks by comparing X=Mole or volume fraction of the organic in
the known retention times of compounds ex- the calibration gas to be diluted.
pected to be in the retention times of peaks Y=Dry gas meter calibration factor,
in the sample. Identify any remaining un- dimensionless.
identified peaks which have areas larger μl=Liquid organic density as determined, g/
ml.
than 5 percent of the total using a GC/MS, or

estimation of possible compounds by their 24.055=Ideal gas molar volume at 293 °K and
retention times compared to known com- 760 mm Hg, liters/g-mole.
pounds, with confirmation by further GC 1000=Conversion factor, ml/liter.
analysis. 106=Conversion to ppm.
451
12.2 Calculate the concentration, Cs, in 12.3 Calculate the concentration, Cs, in
ppm using the following equation: ppm of the organic in the final gas mixture
using the following equation:
Cs =
(
10 6 Xq c ) Eq. 18-1
qc + qd
⎛ q c1 ⎞ ⎛ q c 2 ⎞
Cs = 10 6 X ⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟ Eq. 18-2
⎝ q c1 + q d1 ⎠ ⎝ q c 2 + q d 2 ⎠
12.4 Calculate each organic standard con-

centration, Cs, in ppm using the following
equation:
293 Ps
G v × 10 6
Ts 760
Cs = Eq. 18-3
293 Pm
Vm Y 1000
Tm 760
Ps Tm
G v × 10 3
Ts Pm
=
Vm Y
12.5 Calculate each organic standard con-

centration, Cs, in ppm using the following
equation:
Lv
M
(
ρ 24.055 × 10 6 ) L vρTm
Cs = = 6.24 × 10 4 Eq. 18-4
ER17OC00.308</MATH>
293 Pm MVm YPm
Vm Y 1000
Tm 760
12.6 Calculate the concentration, Cc, in

ppm, dry basis, of each organic is the sample ER17OC00.307</MATH>
ER17OC00.306</MATH>
12.7 Calculate the average fraction recov-

ER17OC00.305</MATH>
ered (R) of each spiked target compound

452
ER17OC00.304</MATH>
t−u
R= Eq. 18-6
s
12.8 Correct all field measurements with

the calculated R value for that compound
Measured Concentration (ppm)

Reported Result = Eq. 18-7
R
12.9 Determine the mass per volume of 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
spiked compound measured using the fol-
lowing equation: 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
ms m u
mv = − Eq. 18-8 16.1 Optional Presurvey and Presurvey
Vs Vu Sampling.
12.10 Calculate the fraction of spiked NOTE: Presurvey screening is optional.
Presurvey sampling should be conducted for
compound recovered, R, using the following
sources where the target pollutants are not
equation:
known from previous tests and/or process
knowledge.
m v × vs
R= Eq. 18-9 Perform a presurvey for each source to be
S tested. Refer to Figure 18–1. Some of the in-
formation can be collected from literature
13.0 Method Performance surveys and source personnel. Collect gas
samples that can be analyzed to confirm the
13.1 Since a potential sample may contain identities and approximate concentrations of
a variety of compounds from various sources, the organic emissions.
a specific precision limit for the analysis of 16.1.1 Apparatus. This apparatus list also
field samples is impractical. Precision in the applies to Sections 8.2 and 11.
range of 5 to 10 percent relative standard de- 16.1.1.1 Teflon Tubing. (Mention of trade
viation (RSD) is typical for gas names or specific products does not con-
chromatographic techniques, but an experi- stitute endorsement by the U.S. Environ-
enced GC operator with a reliable instrumental Protection Agency.) Diameter and
ment can readily achieve 5 percent RSD. For length determined by connection require-
this method, the following combined GC/op- ments of cylinder regulators and the GC. Ad-
erator values are required. ditional tubing is necessary to connect the
(a) Precision. Triplicate analyses of cali- GC sample loop to the sample.
16.1.1.2 Gas Chromatograph. GC with suit-
bration standards fall within 5 percent of
able detector, columns, temperature-con-
their mean value.
trolled sample loop and valve assembly, and
(b) Accuracy. Analysis results of prepared temperature programmable oven, if nec-
audit samples are within 10 percent of prepa-
ER17OC00.312</MATH>
essary. The GC shall achieve sensitivity re-
ration values. quirements for the compounds under study.
(c) Recovery. After developing an appro- 16.1.1.3 Pump. Capable of pumping 100 ml/
priate sampling and analytical system for min. For flushing sample loop.
the pollutants of interest, conduct the proce- 16.1.1.4 Flow Meter. To measure flow
dure in Section 8.4. Conduct the appropriate rates.
recovery study in Section 8.4 at each sam- 16.1.1.5 Regulators. Used on gas cylinders
ER17OC00.311</MATH>
pling point where the method is being ap- for GC and for cylinder standards.
plied. Submit the data and results of the re- 16.1.1.6 Recorder. Recorder with linear
covery procedure with the reporting of re- strip chart is minimum acceptable. Inte-
sults under Section 8.3. grator (optional) is recommended.
16.1.1.7 Syringes. 0.5-ml, 1.0- and 10-

microliter size, calibrated, maximum accu-
ER17OC00.310</MATH>
racy (gas tight) for preparing calibration

standards. Other appropriate sizes can be
used.
453
ER17OC00.309</MATH>
16.1.1.8 Tubing Fittings. To plumb GC and cocks, barrels, and receivers with methylene
gas cylinders. chloride (or other non-target pollutant sol-
16.1.1.9 Septa. For syringe injections. vent, or heat and humidified air). Clean all
16.1.1.10 Glass Jars. If necessary, clean, glass ports with a soap solution, then rinse
colored glass jars with Teflon-lined lids for with tap and deionized distilled water. Place
condensate sample collection. Size depends the flask in a cool glass annealing furnace,
on volume of condensate. and apply heat up to 500 °C. Maintain at this
16.1.1.11 Soap Film Flowmeter. To deter- temperature for 1 hour. After this time pe-
mine flow rates. riod, shut off and open the furnace to allow
16.1.1.12 Tedlar Bags. 10- and 50-liter ca- the flask to cool. Return the stopcocks to
pacity, for preparation of standards. the flask receivers. Purge the assembly with
16.1.1.13 Dry Gas Meter with Temperature high-purity nitrogen for 2 to 5 minutes. Close
and Pressure Gauges. Accurate to ±2 percent, off the stopcocks after purging to maintain a
for preparation of gas standards. slight positive nitrogen pressure. Secure the
16.1.1.14 Midget Impinger/Hot Plate As- stopcocks with tape. Presurvey samples can
sembly. For preparation of gas standards. be obtained either by drawing the gases into
16.1.1.15 Sample Flasks. For presurvey the previously evacuated flask or by drawing
samples, must have gas-tight seals. the gases into and purging the flask with a
16.1.1.16 Adsorption Tubes. If necessary, rubber suction bulb.
blank tubes filled with necessary adsorbent 16.1.3.1.1 Evacuated Flask Procedure. Use
(charcoal, Tenax, XAD–2, etc.) for presurvey a high-vacuum pump to evacuate the flask to
samples. the capacity of the pump; then close off the
16.1.1.17 Personnel Sampling Pump. Cali- stopcock leading to the pump. Attach a 6-
brated, for collecting adsorbent tube mm outside diameter (OD) glass tee to the
presurvey samples. flask inlet with a short piece of Teflon tub-
16.1.1.18 Dilution System. Calibrated, the ing. Select a 6-mm OD borosilicate sampling
dilution system is to be constructed fol- probe, enlarged at one end to a 12-mm OD
lowing the specifications of an acceptable and of sufficient length to reach the centroid
method. of the duct to be sampled. Insert a glass wool
16.1.1.19 Sample Probes. Pyrex or stain- plug in the enlarged end of the probe to re-
less steel, of sufficient length to reach cen- move particulate matter. Attach the other
troid of stack, or a point no closer to the end of the probe to the tee with a short piece
walls than 1 m. of Teflon tubing. Connect a rubber suction
16.1.1.20 Barometer. To measure baro- bulb to the third leg of the tee. Place the fil-
metric pressure. ter end of the probe at the centroid of the
16.1.2 Reagents. duct, and purge the probe with the rubber
16.1.2.1 Water. Deionized distilled. suction bulb. After the probe is completely
16.1.2.2 Methylene chloride. purged and filled with duct gases, open the
16.1.2.3 Calibration Gases. A series of stopcock to the grab flask until the pressure
standards prepared for every compound of in- in the flask reaches duct pressure. Close off
terest. the stopcock, and remove the probe from the
16.1.2.4 Organic Compound Solutions. duct. Remove the tee from the flask and tape
Pure (99.9 percent), or as pure as can reason- the stopcocks to prevent leaks during ship-
ably be obtained, liquid samples of all the or- ment. Measure and record the duct tempera-
ganic compounds needed to prepare calibra- ture and pressure.
tion standards. 16.1.3.1.2 Purged Flask Procedure. Attach
16.1.2.5 Extraction Solvents. For extrac- one end of the sampling flask to a rubber
tion of adsorbent tube samples in prepara- suction bulb. Attach the other end to a 6-mm
tion for analysis. OD glass probe as described in Section
16.1.2.6 Fuel. As recommended by the 8.3.3.1.1. Place the filter end of the probe at
manufacturer for operation of the GC. the centroid of the duct, or at a point no
16.1.2.7 Carrier Gas. Hydrocarbon free, as closer to the walls than 1 m, and apply suc-
recommended by the manufacturer for oper- tion with the bulb to completely purge the
ation of the detector and compatibility with probe and flask. After the flask has been
the column. purged, close off the stopcock near the suc-
16.1.2.8 Zero Gas. Hydrocarbon free air or tion bulb, and then close off the stopcock
nitrogen, to be used for dilutions, blank near the probe. Remove the probe from the
preparation, and standard preparation. duct, and disconnect both the probe and suc-
16.1.3 Sampling. tion bulb. Tape the stopcocks to prevent
16.1.3.1 Collection of Samples with Glass leakage during shipment. Measure and
Sampling Flasks. Presurvey samples may be record the duct temperature and pressure.
collected in precleaned 250-ml double-ended 16.1.3.2 Flexible Bag Procedure. Tedlar or
glass sampling flasks. Teflon stopcocks, aluminized Mylar bags can also be used to
without grease, are preferred. Flasks should obtain the presurvey sample. Use new bags,
be cleaned as follows: Remove the stopcocks and leak-check them before field use. In ad-
from both ends of the flasks, and wipe the dition, check the bag before use for contami-
parts to remove any grease. Clean the stop- nation by filling it with nitrogen or air, and
454
analyzing the gas by GC at high sensitivity. 12. Hamersma, J.W., S.L. Reynolds, and
Experience indicates that it is desirable to R.F. Maddalone. EPA/IERL-RTP Procedures
allow the inert gas to remain in the bag Manual: Level 1 Environmental Assessment.
about 24 hours or longer to check for U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Re-
desorption of organics from the bag. Follow search Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No.
the leak-check and sample collection proce- EPA 600/276–160a. June 1976. 130 p.
dures given in Section 8.2.1. 13. Harris, J.C., M.J. Hayes, P.L. Levins,
16.1.3.3 Determination of Moisture Con- and D.B. Lindsay. EPA/IERL-RTP Proce-
tent. For combustion or water-controlled dures for Level 2 Sampling and Analysis of
processes, obtain the moisture content from Organic Materials. U.S. Environmental Pro-
plant personnel or by measurement during tection Agency. Research Triangle Park,
the presurvey. If the source is below 59 °C, N.C. Publication No. EPA 600/7–79–033. Feb-
measure the wet bulb and dry bulb tempera- ruary 1979. 154 p.
tures, and calculate the moisture content 14. Harris, W.E., H.W. Habgood. Pro-
using a psychrometric chart. At higher tem- grammed Temperature Gas Chromatography.
peratures, use Method 4 to determine the John Wiley and Sons, Inc. New York. 1966.
moisture content. 15. Intersociety Committee. Methods of Air
16.1.4 Determination of Static Pressure. Sampling and Analysis. American Health As-
Obtain the static pressure from the plant sociation. Washington, D.C. 1972.
personnel or measurement. If a type S pitot 16. Jones, P.W., R.D. Grammer, P.E. Strup,
tube and an inclined manometer are used, and T.B. Stanford. Environmental Science
take care to align the pitot tube 90° from the and Technology. 10:806–810. 1976.
direction of the flow. Disconnect one of the 17. McNair Han Bunelli, E.J. Basic Gas
tubes to the manometer, and read the static Chromatography. Consolidated Printers.
pressure; note whether the reading is posi- Berkeley. 1969.
tive or negative. 18. Nelson, G.O. Controlled Test
16.1.5 Collection of Presurvey Samples Atmospheres, Principles and Techniques.
with Adsorption Tube. Follow Section 8.2.4 Ann Arbor. Ann Arbor Science Publishers.
for presurvey sampling. 1971. 247 p.
19. NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods,
17.0 References
Volumes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. U.S. Department of
1. American Society for Testing and Mate- Health and Human Services, National Insti-
rials. C1 Through C5 Hydrocarbons in the At- tute for Occupational Safety and Health.
mosphere by Gas Chromatography. ASTM D Center for Disease Control. 4676 Columbia
2820–72, Part 23. Philadelphia, Pa. 23:950–958. Parkway, Cincinnati, Ohio 45226. April 1977—
1973. August 1981. May be available from the Su-
2. Corazon, V.V. Methodology for Col- perintendent of Documents, Government
lecting and Analyzing Organic Air Pollut- Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402.
ants. U.S. Environmental Protection Agen- Stock Number/Price:
cy. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publication Volume 1—O17–033–00267–3/$13
No. EPA–600/2–79–042. February 1979. Volume 2—O17–033–00260–6/$11
3. Dravnieks, A., B.K. Krotoszynski, J. Volume 3—O17–033–00261–4/$14
Whitfield, A. O’Donnell, and T. Burgwald.
Volume 4—O17–033–00317–3/$7.25
Environmental Science and Technology.
Volume 5—O17–033–00349–1/$10
5(12):1200–1222. 1971.
Volume 6—O17–033–00369–6/$9
4. Eggertsen, F.T., and F.M. Nelsen. Gas
Chromatographic Analysis of Engine Ex- Volume 7—O17–033–00396–5/$7
haust and Atmosphere. Analytical Chem- Prices subject to change. Foreign orders add
istry. 30(6): 1040–1043. 1958. 25 percent.
5. Feairheller, W.R., P.J. Marn, D.H. Har- 20. Schuetzle, D., T.J. Prater, and S.R.
ris, and D.L. Harris. Technical Manual for Ruddell. Sampling and Analysis of Emissions
Process Sampling Strategies for Organic Ma- from Stationary Sources; I. Odor and Total
terials. U.S. Environmental Protection Hydrocarbons. Journal of the Air Pollution
Agency. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publi- Control Association. 25(9): 925–932. 1975.
cation No. EPA 600/2–76–122. April 1976. 172 p. 21. Snyder, A.D., F.N. Hodgson, M.A.
6. FEDERAL REGISTER, 39 FR 9319–9323. 1974. Kemmer and J.R. McKendree. Utility of
7. FEDERAL REGISTER, 39 FR 32857–32860. Solid Sorbents for Sampling Organic Emis-
1974. sions from Stationary Sources. U.S. Environ-
8. FEDERAL REGISTER, 23069–23072 and 23076– mental Protection Agency. Research Tri-
23090. 1976. angle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA 600/2–
9. FEDERAL REGISTER, 46569–46571. 1976. 76–201. July 1976. 71 p.
10. FEDERAL REGISTER, 41771–41776. 1977. 22. Tentative Method for Continuous Anal-
11. Fishbein, L. Chromatography of Envi- ysis of Total Hydrocarbons in the Atmos-
ronmental Hazards, Volume II. Elesevier Sci- phere. Intersociety Committee, American
entific Publishing Company. New York, N.Y. Public Health Association. Washington, D.C.
1973. 1972. p. 184–186.
455
23. Zwerg, G. CRC Handbook of Chroma- Hydrocarbon components
tography, Volumes I and II. Sherma, Joseph llll llll ppm
(ed.). CRC Press. Cleveland. 1972. llll llll ppm
llll llll ppm
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and llll llll ppm
Validation Data llll llll ppm
I. Name of company lllllllllllll llll llll ppm
Date lllllllllllllllllllll C. Sampling considerations
Address lllllllllllllllllll Location to set up GC llllllllllll
llllllllllllllllllllllll llllllllllllllllllllllll
Contracts llllllllllllllllll Special hazards to be considered llllll
Phone llllllllllllllllllll llllllllllllllllllllllll
Process to be sampled llllllllllll Power available at duct lllllllllll
llllllllllllllllllllllll Power available for GC lllllllllll
llllllllllllllllllllllll Plant safety requirements lllllllll
Duct or vent to be sampled lllllllll llllllllllllllllllllllll
llllllllllllllllllllllll Vehicle traffic rules lllllllllllll
II. Process description lllllllllll llllllllllllllllllllllll
llllllllllllllllllllllll Plant entry requirements llllllllll
llllllllllllllllllllllll Security agreements llllllllllll
Raw material llllllllllllllll Potential problems lllllllllllll
llllllllllllllllllllllll
Products llllllllllllllllll D. Site diagrams. (Attach additional sheets
llllllllllllllllllllllll if required).
llllllllllllllllllllllll Figure 18–1. Preliminary Survey Data Sheet
Operating cycle
Check: Batch llll Continuous llll Components to be analyzed and Expected con-
Cyclic llll centration
Timing of batch or cycle llllllllll llllllllllllllllllllllll
Best time to test llllllllllllll llllllllllllllllllllllll
III. Sampling site llllllllllllll
A. Description llllllllllllllll
Site decription lllllllllllllll
Duct shape and size lllllllllllll
Suggested chromatographic column llll
Material lllllllllllllllllll
Wall thickness llll inches
Column flow rate l ml/min
Upstream distance llll inches llll di-
Head pressure llll mm Hg
ameter
Downstream distance llll inches llll Column temperature: Isothermal llll °C,
diameter Programmed from llll °C to llll °C
Size of port lllllllllllllllll at llll °C/min
Size of access area lllllllllllll Injection port/sample loop temperature
Hazards llll Ambient temp. llll °F llll °C
Detector temperature llll °C
B. Properties of gas stream
Detector flow rates: Hydrogen llll ml/
Temperature llll °C llll °F, Data
min., head pressure llll mm Hg, Air/Oxy-
source llll
gen llll ml/min., head pressure llll
Velocity llll, Data source llll
mm Hg.
Static pressure llll inches H2O, Data
Chart speed llll inches/minute
source llll
Compound data:
Moisture content llll%, Data source
Compound and Retention time and Attenu-
llll
ation
Particulate content llll, Data
sourcellll
Gaseous components llllllllllllllllllllllll
N2 llll % Hydrocarbons llll ppm llllllllllllllllllllllll
O2 llll% llll llllllllllllllllllllllll
CO llll % llll llll
CO2 llll % llll llll Figure 18–2. Chromatographic Conditions
SO2 llll % llll llll Data Sheet
456
FIGURE 18–3. PREPARATION OF STANDARDS IN TEDLAR BAGS AND CALIBRATION CURVE

Standards
Mixture #1 Mixture #2 Mixture #3
Standards Preparation Data:

Organic:
Bag number or identification.
Dry gas meter calibration factor.
Final meter reading (liters).
Initial meter reading (liters).
Metered volume (liters).
Average meter temperature (°K).
Average meter pressure, gauge (mm Hg).
Average atmospheric perssure (mm Hg).
Average meter pressure, absolute (mm Hg).
Syringe temperature (°K) (see Section 10.1.2.1).
Syringe pressure, absolute (mm Hg) (see Section
10.1.2.1).
Volume of gas in syringe (ml) (Section 10.1.2.1).
Density of liquid organic (g/ml) (Section 10.1.2.1).
Volume of liquid in syringe (ml) (Section 10.1.2.1).
GC Operating Conditions:
Sample loop volume (ml).
Sample loop temperature ( °C).
Carrier gas flow rate (ml/min).
Column temperature:
Initial ( °C).
Rate change ( °C/min).
Final ( °C).
Organic Peak Identification and Calculated Concentrations:
Injection time (24 hour clock).
Distance to peak (cm).
Chart speed (cm/min).
Organic retention time (min).
Attenuation factor.
Peak height (mm).
Peak area (mm2).
Peak area * attenuation factor (mm2).
Calculated concentration (ppm) (Equation 18–3 or 18–4).
Plot peak area * attenuation factor against calculated concentration to obtain calibration curve.
Flowmeter number or identification llll Laboratory temperature (Tlab) ll °K

Flowmeter Type llllllllllllll Laboratory barometric pressure (Plab)ll
Method: Bubble meterll Spirometerll mm Hg
Wet test meter ll Flow data:
Readings at laboratory conditions:
FLOWMETER
Reading (as marked) Temp. (°K) Pressure (absolute)
CALIBRATION DEVICE
Time (min) Gas volume a Flow rate b
457
CALIBRATION DEVICE—Continued
Time (min) Gas volume a Flow rate b
a Vol.
of gas may be measured in milliliters, liters or cubic feet.
b Convert to standard conditions (20 °C and 760 mm Hg). Plot flowmeter reading against flow rate (standard conditions), and
draw a smooth curve. If the flowmeter being calibrated is a rotameter or other flow device that is viscosity dependent, it may be
necessary to generate a ‘‘family’’ of calibration curves that cover the operating pressure and temperature ranges of the flow-
meter. While the following technique should be verified before application, it may be possible to calculate flow rate reading for
rotameters at standard conditions Qstd as follows:
12
⎛ 760 × Tlab ⎞
Q std = Q lab ⎜ ⎟
⎝ Plab × 293 ⎠
Flow rate (laboratory conditions) Flow rate (STD conditions)
Figure 18–4. Flowmeter Calibration

458
ER17OC00.313</MATH>
459
ER17OC00.314</GPH>
PREPARATION OF STANDARDS BY DILUTION OF CYLINDER STANDARD

[Cylinder Standard: Organic llll Certified Concentration llll ppm]
Date:
Standards preparation data:
Mixture 1 Mixture 2 Mixture 3
Stage 1:
Standard gas flowmeter reading.
Diluent gas flowmeter reading
Laboratory temperature (°K)
Barometric pressure (mm Hg)
Flowmeter gage pressure (mm Hg)
Flow rate cylinder gas at standard conditions (ml/
min)
Flow rate diluent gas at standard conditions (ml/min)
Calculated concentration (ppm)
Stage 2 (if used):
Standard gas flowmeter reading
Diluent gas flowmeter reading
Flow rate Stage 1 gas at standard conditions (ml/
min)
Flow rate diluent gas at standard conditions
Calculated concentration (ppm)
GC Operating Conditions:
Sample loop volume (ml)
Sample loop temperature ( °C)

Carrier gas flow rate (ml/min)
Column temperature:
Initial ( °C)
460
ER17OC00.315</GPH>
PREPARATION OF STANDARDS BY DILUTION OF CYLINDER STANDARD—Continued

[Cylinder Standard: Organic llll Certified Concentration llll ppm]
Date:
Standards preparation data:
Mixture 1 Mixture 2 Mixture 3
Program rate ( °C/min)

Final ( °C)
Organic Peak Identification and Calculated Concentrations:
Injection time (24-hour clock)
Distance to peak (cm)
Chart speed (cm/min)
Retention time (min)
Attenuation factor
Peak area (mm2)
Peak area *attenuation factor
Plot peak area *attenuation factor against calculated concentration to obtain calibration curve.
Figure 18–7. Standards Prepared by Dilution

of Cylinder Standard
461
ER17OC00.316</GPH>
462
ER17OC00.317</GPH>
PLANTllll DATEllll SITEllll

Sample 1 Sample 2 Sample 3
Source temperature ( °C) .................................................................................. ........................ ........................ ........................

Barometric pressure (mm Hg) ........................................................................... ........................ ........................ ........................
Ambient temperature ( °C) ................................................................................ ........................ ........................ ........................
Sample flow rate (appr.) .................................................................................... ........................ ........................ ........................
Bag number ....................................................................................................... ........................ ........................ ........................
Start time ........................................................................................................... ........................ ........................ ........................
Finish time ......................................................................................................... ........................ ........................ ........................
Figure 18–10. Field Sample Data Sheet—

Tedlar Bag Collection Method
PLANT lllllllll DATE llllllll LOCATION llllllllllll
1. General information:
Source temperature ( °C) ...........................................................................................................................................................
Probe temperature ( °C) .............................................................................................................................................................
Ambient temperature ( °C) .........................................................................................................................................................
Atmospheric pressure (mm) .......................................................................................................................................................
Source pressure (′Hg) ................................................................................................................................................................
Absolute source pressure (mm) .................................................................................................................................................
Sampling rate (liter/min) .............................................................................................................................................................

Sample loop volume (ml) ...........................................................................................................................................................
Sample loop temperature ( °C) ..................................................................................................................................................
Columnar temperature:
Initial ( °C) time (min) ..........................................................................................................................................................
463
ER17OC00.318</GPH>
PLANT lllllllll DATE llllllll LOCATION llllllllllll—

Continued
Program rate ( °C/min) ........................................................................................................................................................
Final ( °C)/time (min) ...........................................................................................................................................................
Carrier gas flow rate (ml/min) ....................................................................................................................................................
Detector temperature ( °C) .........................................................................................................................................................
Injection time (24-hour basis) .....................................................................................................................................................
Chart Speed (mm/min) ...............................................................................................................................................................
Dilution gas flow rate (ml/min) ...................................................................................................................................................
Dilution gas used (symbol) .........................................................................................................................................................
Dilution ratio ...............................................................................................................................................................................
2. FIELD ANALYSIS DATA—CALIBRATION GAS

2. [Run No. llll Time llllll]
Components Area Attenuation A × A Factor Conc.l (ppm)
Figure 18–11. Field Analysis Data Sheets

464
465
ER17OC00.319</GPH>
GASEOUS ORGANIC SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS CHECK LIST

[Respond with initials or number as appropriate]
1. Presurvey data:
A. Grab sample collected ..................................................... b lll
B. Grab sample analyzed for composition ..................... b lll
Method GC ..................................................................... b lll
GC/MS ...................................................................... b lll
Other ....................................................................... b lll
C. GC-FID analysis performed ............................................. b lll
2. Laboratory calibration data:
A. Calibration curves prepared ............................................ b lll
Number of components .................................................. b lll
Number of concentrations/component (3 required) ....... b lll
B. Audit samples (optional):
Analysis completed ............................................................. b lll
Verified for concentration ................................................... b lll
OK obtained for field work .................................................. b lll
3. Sampling procedures:
A. Method:
Bag sample .................................................................... b lll
Direct interface ............................................................. b lll
Dilution interface .......................................................... b lll
B. Number of samples collected .......................................... b lll
4. Field Analysis:
A. Total hydrocarbon analysis performed ........................... b lll
B. Calibration curve prepared ............................................. b lll
Number of components .................................................. b lll

Number of concentrations per component (3 required) b lll
466
ER17OC00.320</GPH>
Environmental Protection Agency Pt. 60, App. A–7
Gaseous Organic Sampling and Analysis Date lllllllllllllllllllll
Data Location llllllllllllllllll
Plant llllllllllllllllllll
Source sample 1 Source sample 2 Source sample 3
1. General information:
Source temperature ( °C) ...............................
Probe temperature ( °C) .................................
Ambient temperature ( °C) ..............................
Atmospheric pressure (mm Hg) ......................
Source pressure (mm Hg) ..............................
Sampling rate (ml/min) ....................................
Sample loop volume (ml) ................................
Sample loop temperature ( °C) .......................
Sample collection time (24-hr basis) ..............
Column temperature:
Initial ( °C) .........................................
Program rate ( °C/min) .....................
Final ( °C) .........................................
Carrier gas flow rate (ml/min) .........................
Detector temperature ( °C) .............................
Chart speed (cm/min) .....................................
Dilution gas flow rate (ml/min) ........................
Diluent gas used (symbol) ..............................
Dilution ratio ....................................................
Performed by: (signature):llllllllllll Date:llllllllllll
Figure 18–14. Sampling and Analysis Sheet
[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971]

APPENDIX A–7 TO PART 60—TEST Method 25B—Determination of total gaseous

METHODS 19 THROUGH 25E organic concentration using a nondisper-
sive infrared analyzer
Method 19—Determination of sulfur dioxide Method 25C—Determination of nonmethane
removal efficiency and particulate, sulfur organic compounds (NMOC) in MSW land-
dioxide and nitrogen oxides emission rates fill gases
Method 20—Determination of nitrogen ox- Method 25D—Determination of the Volatile
ides, sulfur dioxide, and diluent emissions Organic Concentration of Waste Samples
Method 25E—Determination of Vapor Phase
from stationary gas turbines
Organic Concentration in Waste Samples
Method 21—Determination of volatile or-
The test methods in this appendix are re-
ganic compound leaks ferred to in § 60.8 (Performance Tests) and
Method 22—Visual determination of fugitive § 60.11 (Compliance With Standards and
emissions from material sources and Maintenance Requirements) of 40 CFR part
smoke emissions from flares 60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific
Method 23—Determination of Poly- uses of these test methods are described in
chlorinated Dibenzo-p-Dioxins and Poly- the standards of performance contained in
chlorinated Dibenzofurans From Sta- the subparts, beginning with Subpart D.
tionary Sources Within each standard of performance, a
Method 24—Determination of volatile matter section title ‘‘Test Methods and Procedures’’
content, water content, density, volume is provided to: (1) Identify the test methods
solids, and weight solids of surface coat- to be used as reference methods to the facil-
ings ity subject to the respective standard and (2)
Method 24A—Determination of volatile mat- identify any special instructions or condi-
tions to be followed when applying a method
ter content and density of printing inks
and related coatings
(for example, establish sampling rates, vol-
Method 25—Determination of total gaseous
umes, or temperatures) are to be used either

nonmethane organic emissions as carbon in addition to, or as a substitute for proce-
Method 25A—Determination of total gaseous dures in a test method. Similarly, for
organic concentration using a flame ion- sources subject to emission monitoring re-
ization analyzer quirements, specific instructions pertaining
467
to any use of a test method as a reference being acceptable or potentially acceptable
method are provided in the subpart or in Ap- and are specifically identified in the meth-
pendix B. ods. The items identified as acceptable op-
Inclusion of methods in this appendix is tions may be used without approval but
not intended as an endorsement or denial of must be identified in the test report. The po-
their applicability to sources that are not tentially approvable options are cited as
subject to standards of performance. The ‘‘subject to the approval of the Adminis-
methods are potentially applicable to other trator’’ or as ‘‘or equivalent.’’ Such poten-
sources; however, applicability should be tially approvable techniques or alternatives
confirmed by careful and appropriate evalua- may be used at the discretion of the owner
tion of the conditions prevalent at such without prior approval. However, detailed
sources. descriptions for applying these potentially
The approach followed in the formulation approvable techniques or alternatives are
of the test methods involves specifications not provided in the test methods. Also, the
for equipment, procedures, and performance. potentially approvable options are not nec-
In concept, a performance specification ap- essarily acceptable in all applications.
proach would be preferable in all methods Therefore, an owner electing to use such po-
because this allows the greatest flexibility tentially approvable techniques or alter-
to the user. In practice, however, this ap- natives is responsible for: (1) assuring that
proach is impractical in most cases because the techniques or alternatives are in fact ap-
performance specifications cannot be estab- plicable and are properly executed; (2) in-
lished. Most of the methods described herein, cluding a written description of the alter-
therefore, involve specific equipment speci- native method in the test report (the written
fications and procedures, and only a few method must be clear and must be capable of
methods in this appendix rely on perform- being performed without additional instruc-
ance criteria. tion, and the degree of detail should be simi-
Minor changes in the test methods should lar to the detail contained in the test meth-
not necessarily affect the validity of the re- ods); and (3) providing any rationale or sup-
sults and it is recognized that alternative porting data necessary to show the validity
and equivalent methods exist. Section 60.8 of the alternative in the particular applica-
provides authority for the Administrator to tion. Failure to meet these requirements can
specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2) result in the Administrator’s disapproval of
alternative methods, and (3) minor changes the alternative.
in the methodology of the test methods. It
should be clearly understood that unless oth- METHOD 19—DETERMINATION OF SULFUR DIOX-
erwise identified all such methods and IDE REMOVAL EFFICIENCY AND PARTICULATE
changes must have prior approval of the Ad- MATTER, SULFUR DIOXIDE, AND NITROGEN
ministrator. An owner employing such meth- OXIDE EMISSION RATES
ods or deviations from the test methods
without obtaining prior approval does so at
the risk of subsequent disapproval and re- 1.1 Analytes. This method provides data
testing with approved methods. reduction procedures relating to the fol-
Within the test methods, certain specific lowing pollutants, but does not include any
equipment or procedures are recognized as sample collection or analysis procedures.
Nitrogen oxides (NOX), in-

cluding:
Nitric oxide (NO) ......... 10102–43–9 ............................................. N/A
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) 10102–44–0.
Particulate matter (PM) ...... None assigned ......................................... N/A
Sulfur dioxide (SO2) ........... 7499–09–05 ............................................. N/A
1.2 Applicability. Where specified by an 2.0 Summary of Method

applicable subpart of the regulations, this
2.1 Emission Rates. Oxygen (O2) or carbon
method is applicable for the determination
dioxide (CO2) concentrations and appropriate
of (a) PM, SO2, and NOX emission rates; (b)
F factors (ratios of combustion gas volumes
sulfur removal efficiencies of fuel
to heat inputs) are used to calculate pollut-
pretreatment and SO2 control devices; and
ant emission rates from pollutant concentra-
(c) overall reduction of potential SO2 emis-
tions.
sions.
2.2 Sulfur Reduction Efficiency and SO2
Removal Efficiency. An overall SO2 emission
reduction efficiency is computed from the ef-
ficiency of fuel pretreatment systems, where
468
applicable, and the efficiency of SO2 control Eco=Pollutant emission rate in combined ef-
devices. fluent, ng/J (lb/million Btu).
2.2.1 The sulfur removal efficiency of a Ed=Average pollutant rate for each sampling
fuel pretreatment system is determined by period (e.g., 24-hr Method 6B sample or 24-
fuel sampling and analysis of the sulfur and hr fuel sample) or for each fuel lot (e.g.,
heat contents of the fuel before and after the amount of fuel bunkered), ng/J (lb/million
pretreatment system. Btu).
2.2.2 The SO2 removal efficiency of a con- Edi=Average inlet SO2 rate for each sampling
trol device is determined by measuring the period d, ng/J (lb/million Btu)
SO2 rates before and after the control device. Eg=Pollutant rate from gas turbine, ng/J (lb/
2.2.2.1 The inlet rates to SO2 control sys- million Btu).
tems (or, when SO2 control systems are not Ega=Daily geometric average pollutant rate,
used, SO2 emission rates to the atmosphere) ng/J (lbs/million Btu) or ppm corrected to
are determined by fuel sampling and anal- 7 percent O2.
ysis. Ejo,Eji=Matched pair hourly arithmetic aver-
age pollutant rate, outlet and inlet, respec-
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] tively, ng/J (lb/million Btu) or ppm cor-
rected to 7 percent O2.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved] Eh=Hourly average pollutant, ng/J (lb/million
Btu).
5.0 Safety [Reserved]
Ehj=Hourly arithmetic average pollutant rate
6.0 Equipment and Supplies [Reserved] for hour ‘‘j,’’ ng/J (lb/million Btu) or ppm
corrected to 7 percent O2.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved] EXP=Natural logarithmic base (2.718) raised
to the value enclosed by brackets.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, Fd, Fw, Fc=Volumes of combustion compo-
and Transport [Reserved] nents per unit of heat content, scm/J (scf/
million Btu).
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved] GCV=Gross calorific value of the fuel con-
10.0 Calibration and Standardization sistent with the ultimate analysis, kJ/kg
[Reserved] (Btu/lb).
GCVp, GCVr=Gross calorific value for the
11.0 Analytical Procedures [Reserved] product and raw fuel lots, respectively, dry
basis, kJ/kg (Btu/lb).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations %H=Concentration of hydrogen from an ulti-
12.1 Nomenclature mate analysis of fuel, weight percent.
H=Total number of operating hours for
Bwa=Moisture fraction of ambient air, per- which pollutant rates are determined in
cent. the performance test period.
Bws=Moisture fraction of effluent gas, per- Hb=Heat input rate to the steam generating
cent. unit from fuels fired in the steam gener-
%C=Concentration of carbon from an ulti- ating unit, J/hr (million Btu/hr).
mate analysis of fuel, weight percent. Hg=Heat input rate to gas turbine from all
Cd=Pollutant concentration, dry basis, ng/ fuels fired in the gas turbine, J/hr (million
scm (lb/scf) Btu/hr).
%CO2d,%CO2w=Concentration of carbon diox- %H2O=Concentration of water from an ulti-
ide on a dry and wet basis, respectively, mate analysis of fuel, weight percent.
percent. Hr=Total numbers of hours in the perform-
Cw=Pollutant concentration, wet basis, ng/ ance test period (e.g., 720 hours for 30-day
scm (lb/scf). performance test period).
D=Number of sampling periods during the K=Conversion factor, 10¥5 (kJ/J)/(%) [106 Btu/
performance test period. million Btu].
E=Pollutant emission rate, ng/J (lb/million Kc=(9.57 scm/kg)/% [(1.53 scf/lb)/%].
Btu). Kcc=(2.0 scm/kg)/% [(0.321 scf/lb)/%].
Ea=Average pollutant rate for the specified Khd=(22.7 scm/kg)/% [(3.64 scf/lb)/%].
performance test period, ng/J (lb/million Khw=(34.74 scm/kg)/% [(5.57 scf/lb)/%].
Btu). Kn=(0.86 scm/kg)/% [(0.14 scf/lb)/%].
Eao, Eai=Average pollutant rate of the control Ko=(2.85 scm/kg)/% [(0.46 scf/lb)/%].
device, outlet and inlet, respectively, for Ks=(3.54 scm/kg)/% [(0.57 scf/lb)/%].
the performance test period, ng/J (lb/mil- Kw=(1.30 scm/kg)/% [(0.21 scf/lb)/%].
lion Btu). ln=Natural log of indicated value.
Ebi=Pollutant rate from the steam gener- Lp,Lr=Weight of the product and raw fuel
ating unit, ng/J (lb/million Btu) lots, respectively, metric ton (ton).
Ebo=Pollutant emission rate from the steam %N=Concentration of nitrogen from an ulti-
generating unit, ng/J (lb/million Btu). mate analysis of fuel, weight percent.
Eci=Pollutant rate in combined effluent, ng/J N=Number of fuel lots during the averaging
(lb/million Btu). period.
469
n=Number of fuels being burned in combina- 12.2 Emission Rates of PM, SO2, and NOX.
tion. Select from the following sections the appli-
nd=Number of operating hours of the affected cable procedure to compute the PM, SO2, or
facility within the performance test period NOX emission rate (E) in ng/J (lb/million
for each Ed determined. Btu). The pollutant concentration must be in
nt=Total number of hourly averages for ng/scm (lb/scf) and the F factor must be in
which paired inlet and outlet pollutant scm/J (scf/million Btu). If the pollutant con-
rates are available within the 24-hr mid- centration (C) is not in the appropriate
night to midnight daily period. units, use Table 19–1 in Section 17.0 to make
%O=Concentration of oxygen from an ulti-
the proper conversion. An F factor is the
mate analysis of fuel, weight percent.
ratio of the gas volume of the products of
%O2d, %O2w=Concentration of oxygen on a
dry and wet basis, respectively, percent. combustion to the heat content of the fuel.
Ps=Potential SO2 emissions, percent. The dry F factor (Fd) includes all compo-
%Rf=SO2 removal efficiency from fuel nents of combustion less water, the wet F
pretreatment, percent. factor (Fw) includes all components of com-
%Rg=SO2 removal efficiency of the control bustion, and the carbon F factor (Fc) in-
device, percent. cludes only carbon dioxide.
%Rga=Daily geometric average percent re- NOTE: Since Fw factors include water re-
duction. sulting only from the combustion of hydro-
%Ro=Overall SO2 reduction, percent. gen in the fuel, the procedures using Fw fac-
%S=Sulfur content of as-fired fuel lot, dry
tors are not applicable for computing E from
basis, weight percent.
steam generating units with wet scrubbers
Se=Standard deviation of the hourly average
or with other processes that add water (e.g.,
pollutant rates for each performance test
period, ng/J (lb/million Btu). steam injection).
%Sf=Concentration of sulfur from an ulti- 12.2.1 Oxygen-Based F Factor, Dry Basis.
mate analysis of fuel, weight percent. When measurements are on a dry basis for
Si=Standard deviation of the hourly average both O (%O2d) and pollutant (Cd) concentra-
inlet pollutant rates for each performance tions, use the following equation:
test period, ng/J (lb/million Btu).
So=Standard deviation of the hourly average 20.9
E = C d Fd Eq. 19-1
(20.9 − %O2 d )
emission rates for each performance test
period, ng/J (lb/million Btu).
%Sp, %Sr=Sulfur content of the product and
raw fuel lots respectively, dry basis, 12.2.2 Oxygen-Based F Factor, Wet Basis.
weight percent. When measurements are on a wet basis for
t0.95=Values shown in Table 19–3 for the indi- both O2 (%O2w) and pollutant (Cw) concentra-
cated number of data points n. tions, use either of the following:
Xk=Fraction of total heat input from each 12.2.2.1 If the moisture fraction of ambi-
type of fuel k. ent air (Bwa) is measured:
20.9
E = C w Fw Eq. 19-2
[ 20.9 (1 − Bwa ) − %O 2 w ]
Instead of actual measurement, Bwa may be endar year at the nearest Weather Service
estimated according to the procedure below. Station. This value shall be determined an-
NOTE: The estimates are selected to ensure nually and may be used as an estimate for
that negative errors will not be larger than the entire current calendar year.
¥1.5 percent. However, positive errors, or 12.2.2.1.3 Bwa=Highest daily average of
over-estimation of emissions by as much as 5 Bwa that occurred within a calendar month
percent may be introduced depending upon at the nearest Weather Service Station, cal-
the geographic location of the facility and culated from the data from the past 3 years.
the associated range of ambient moisture. This value shall be computed for each month
12.2.2.1.1 Bwa=0.027. This value may be and may be used as an estimate for the cur-
used at any location at all times. rent respective calendar month.
12.2.2.1.2 Bwa=Highest monthly average of 12.2.2.2 If the moisture fraction (Bws) of
Bwa that occurred within the previous cal- the effluent gas is measured:
ER17OC00.322</MATH>
470
ER17OC00.321</MATH>
20.9
E = C w Fd Eq. 19-3
[ 20.9 (1 − Bws ) − %O 2 w ]
12.2.3 Oxygen-Based F Factor, Dry/Wet of the exhaust effluent from wet scrubbers to
Basis. above the moisture dew-point) on emission
12.2.3.1 When the pollutant concentration rates will be less than 1.0 percent and, there-
is measured on a wet basis (Cw) and O2 con- fore, may be ignored.
centration is measured on a dry basis (%O2d), 12.2.8 Combined Cycle-Gas Turbine Sys-
use the following equation: tems. For gas turbine-steam generator com-
bined cycle systems, determine the emis-
(C w Fd )(20.9)
ER17OC00.332</MATH>
sions from the steam generating unit or the
E= Eq. 19-4
(1 − Bws )(20.9 − %O2 d )
percent reduction in potential SO2 emissions
as follows:
12.2.8.1 Compute the emission rate from
12.2.3.2 When the pollutant concentration
the steam generating unit using the fol-
is measured on a dry basis (Cd) and the O2
lowing equation:
ER17OC00.331</MATH>
concentration is measured on a wet basis
(%O2w), use the following equation:
(E )
Hg
C d Fd 20.9 E bo = E co + co − Eg Eq. 19-10
E= Eq. 19-5 Hb
(20.9 − %O2 w ) 12.2.8.1.1 Use the test methods and proce-
(1 − Bws )
ER17OC00.330</MATH>
dures section of 40 CFR Part 60, Subpart GG
to obtain Eco and Eg. Do not use Fw factors
12.2.4 Carbon Dioxide-Based F Factor, Dry for determining Eg or Eco. If an SO2 control
Basis. When measurements are on a dry basis device is used, measure Eco after the control
for both CO2 (%CO2d) and pollutant (Cd) con- device.
centrations, use the following equation: 12.2.8.1.2 Suitable methods shall be used
ER17OC00.329</MATH>
to determine the heat input rates to the
100 steam generating units (Hb) and the gas tur-
E = C d Fc Eq. 19-6 bine (Hg).
%CO 2 d 12.2.8.2 If a control device is used, com-
12.2.5 Carbon Dioxide-Based F Factor, Wet pute the percent of potential SO2 emissions
Basis. When measurements are on a wet (Ps) using the following equations:
ER17OC00.328</MATH>
basis for both CO2 (%CO2w) and pollutant (Cw)
(E )
concentrations, use the following equation: Hg
E bi = E ci − ci − Eg Eq. 19-11
100 Hb
E = C w Fc Eq. 19-7
%CO 2 w
⎛ E ⎞
ER17OC00.327</MATH>
12.2.6 Carbon Dioxide-Based F Factor, Ps = 100 ⎜1 − bo ⎟ Eq. 19-12
Dry/Wet Basis. ⎝ E bi ⎠
12.2.6.1 When the pollutant concentration
is measured on a wet basis (Cw) and CO2 con- NOTE: Use the test methods and procedures
centration is measured on a dry basis section of Subpart GG to obtain Eci and Eg.
(%CO2d), use the following equation: Do not use Fw factors for determining Eg or
ER17OC00.326</MATH>
Eci.
C w Fc 100
E= Eq. 19-8 12.3 F Factors. Use an average F factor
(1 − Bws ) %CO2 d according to Section 12.3.1 or determine an
applicable F factor according to Section
12.2.6.2 When the pollutant concentration 12.3.2. If combined fuels are fired, prorate the
is measured on a dry basis (Cd) and CO2 con- applicable F factors using the procedure in
ER17OC00.325</MATH>
centration is measured on a wet basis Section 12.3.3.

(%CO2w), use the following equation: 12.3.1 Average F Factors. Average F fac-
tors (Fd, Fw, or Fc) from Table 19–2 in Section
100
E = C d Fc (1 − Bws )
17.0 may be used.
Eq. 19-9
12.3.2 Determined F Factors. If the fuel

%CO 2 w burned is not listed in Table 19–2 or if the
ER17OC00.324</MATH>
12.2.7 Direct-Fired Reheat Fuel Burning. owner or operator chooses to determine an F

The effect of direct-fired reheat fuel burning factor rather than use the values in Table 19–
(for the purpose of raising the temperature 2, use the procedure below:
471
ER17OC00.323</MATH>
12.3.2.1 Equations. Use the equations
below, as appropriate, to compute the F fac-
tors:
K (K hd %H + K c %C + K s %S + K n %N − K o %O)
Fd = Eq. 19-13
GCV
K[K hw %H + K c %C + K s %S + K n %N − K o %O + K w %H 2 O]
Fw = Eq. 19-14
GCVw
CEMS values), compute the average pollut-

K (K cc %C) ant rate (Ea) for the performance test period
Fc = Eq. 19-15 (e.g., 30 days) specified in the applicable reg-
GCV ulation using the following equation:
ER17OC00.341</MATH>
NOTE: Omit the %H2O term in the equa-
tions for Fw if %H and %O include the un- 1 n
available hydrogen and oxygen in the form of
H2O.)
Ea = ∑ E hj
H j=1
Eq. 19-19
12.3.2.2 Use applicable sampling proce-
12.4.2 Average Pollutant Rates from Other
dures in Section 12.5.2.1 or 12.5.2.2 to obtain
ER17OC00.340</MATH>
than Hourly Averages. When pollutant rates
samples for analyses.
are determined from measured values rep-
12.3.2.3 Use ASTM D 3176–74 or 89 (all cited
resenting longer than 1-hour periods (e.g.,
ASTM standards are incorporated by ref-
daily fuel sampling and analyses or Method
erence—see § 60.17) for ultimate analysis of
6B values), or when pollutant rates are deter-
the fuel.
mined from combinations of 1-hour and
12.3.2.4 Use applicable methods in Section
ER17OC00.339</MATH>
longer than 1-hour periods (e.g., CEMS and
12.5.2.1 or 12.5.2.2 to determine the heat con-
Method 6B values), compute the average pol-
tent of solid or liquid fuels. For gaseous
lutant rate (Ea) for the performance test pe-
fuels, use ASTM D 1826–77 or 94 (incorporated
riod (e.g., 30 days) specified in the applicable
by reference—see § 60.17) to determine the
regulation using the following equation:
heat content.
12.3.3 F Factors for Combination of Fuels. D
ER17OC00.338</MATH>
If combinations of fuels are burned, use the
following equations, as applicable unless ∑ (n d E d ) j
otherwise specified in an applicable subpart: j=1
Ea = D Eq. 19-20
n
Fd = ∑ ( X k Fdk ) Eq. 19-16 ∑ n dj
j=1
ER17OC00.337</MATH>
k =1
12.4.3 Daily Geometric Average Pollutant
n Rates from Hourly Values. The geometric
Fw = ∑ ( X k Fwk ) Eq. 19-17 average pollutant rate (Ega) is computed
k =1
⎢1 ⎥ ER17OC00.336</MATH>
∑ [1n(E hj )]⎥
nt
n
Fc = ∑ ( X k Fck ) Eq. 19-18 E ga = exp ⎢ Eq. 19-21
k =1
⎢⎣ n t j=1 ⎥⎦
12.4 Determination of Average Pollutant 12.5 Determination of Overall Reduction
Rates. in Potential Sulfur Dioxide Emission.
ER17OC00.335</MATH>
12.4.1 Average Pollutant Rates from Hour- 12.5.1 Overall Percent Reduction. Com-
ly Values. When hourly average pollutant pute the overall percent SO2 reduction (%Ro)
rates (Eh), inlet or outlet, are obtained (e.g., using the following equation:
ER17OC00.334</MATH>
472
ER17OC00.333</MATH>
⎢ %R f ⎞ ⎛ %R g ⎞ ⎥
%R o = 100 ⎢1.0 − ⎛1.0 − ⎜1.0 − ⎟⎥ Eq. 19-22
⎣ ⎝ 100 ⎠ ⎝ 100 ⎠ ⎦
12.5.2 Pretreatment Removal Efficiency averaging period (e.g., 90 days) as specified in

(Optional). Compute the SO2 removal effi- the applicable regulation using the following
ciency from fuel pretreatment (%Rf) for the equation:
⎢ N ⎛ %S
pj ⎞
⎥
⎢
⎢
∑ ⎜ GCV ⎟ L pj ⎥
⎥
j=1 ⎝ pj ⎠
%R f = 100 ⎢1.0 − ⎥ Eq. 19-23
N ⎛ %S ⎞
⎢
⎢ ∑ ⎜⎝ GCV ⎟⎠ rj ⎥⎥
rj
L
⎣ j=1 rj ⎦
NOTE: In calculating %Rf, include %S and NOTE: Alternative definitions of lot sizes
GCV values for all fuel lots that are not may be used, subject to prior approval of the
pretreated and are used during the averaging Administrator.
period.
12.5.2.1.3 Gross Sample Analysis. Use
12.5.2.1 Solid Fossil (Including Waste) ASTM D 2013–72 or 86 to prepare the sample,
Fuel/Sampling and Analysis. ASTM D 3177–75 or 89 or ASTM D 4239–85, 94,
NOTE: For the purposes of this method, raw or 97 to determine sulfur content (%S),
fuel (coal or oil) is the fuel delivered to the ASTM D 3173–73 or 87 to determine moisture
desulfurization (pretreatment) facility. For content, and ASTM D 2015–77 (Reapproved
oil, the input oil to the oil desulfurization 1978) or 96, D 3286–85 or 96, or D 5865–98 to de-
process (e.g., hydrotreatment) is considered termine gross calorific value (GCV) (all
to be the raw fuel. standards cited are incorporated by ref-
12.5.2.1.1 Sample Increment Collection. erence—see § 60.17 for acceptable versions of
Use ASTM D 2234–76, 96, 97a, or 98 (incor- the standards) on a dry basis for each gross
porated by reference—see § 60.17), Type I, sample.
Conditions A, B, or C, and systematic spac- 12.5.2.2 Liquid Fossil Fuel-Sampling and
ing. As used in this method, systematic spac- Analysis. See Note under Section 12.5.2.1.
ing is intended to include evenly spaced in- 12.5.2.2.1 Sample Collection. Follow the
crements in time or increments based on
procedures for continuous sampling in ASTM
equal weights of coal passing the collection
D 270 or D 4177–95 (incorporated by ref-
area. As a minimum, determine the number
erence—see § 60.17) for each gross sample
and weight of increments required per gross
sample representing each coal lot according from each fuel lot.
to Table 2 or Paragraph 7.1.5.2 of ASTM D 12.5.2.2.2 Lot Size. For the purpose of Sec-
2234. Collect one gross sample for each lot of tion 12.5.2 (fuel pretreatment), the lot size of
raw coal and one gross sample for each lot of a product oil is the weight of product oil
product coal. from one pretreatment facility and intended
12.5.2.1.2 ASTM Lot Size. For the purpose as one shipment (ship load, barge load, etc.).
of Section 12.5.2 (fuel pretreatment), the lot The lot size of raw oil is the weight of each
size of product coal is the weight of product crude liquid fuel type used to produce a lot
coal from one type of raw coal. The lot size of product oil.
of raw coal is the weight of raw coal used to NOTE: Alternative definitions of lot sizes
produce one lot of product coal. Typically, may be used, subject to prior approval of the
the lot size is the weight of coal processed in
Administrator.
a 1-day (24-hour) period. If more than one
type of coal is treated and produced in 1 day, 12.5.2.2.3 Sample Analysis. Use ASTM D
then gross samples must be collected and 129–64, 78, or 95, ASTM D 1552–83 or 95, or
analyzed for each type of coal. A coal lot size ASTM D 4057–81 or 95 to determine the sulfur
equaling the 90-day quarterly fuel quantity content (%S) and ASTM D 240–76 or 92 (all
ER17OC00.343</MATH>
for a steam generating unit may be used if standards cited are incorporated by ref-
representative sampling can be conducted erence—see § 60.17) to determine the GCV of
for each raw coal and product coal.
473
ER17OC00.342</MATH>
each gross sample. These values may be as- 12.5.3.1 Use continuous emission moni-
sumed to be on a dry basis. The owner or op- toring systems or test methods, as appro-
erator of an affected facility may elect to de- priate, to determine the outlet SO2 rates
termine the GCV by sampling the oil com- and, if appropriate, the inlet SO2 rates. The
busted on the first steam generating unit op- rates may be determined as hourly (Eh) or
erating day of each calendar month and then other sampling period averages (Ed). Then,
using the lowest GCV value of the three GCV compute the average pollutant rates for the
values per quarter for the GCV of all oil com- performance test period (Eao and Eai) using
busted in that calendar quarter.
the procedures in Section 12.4.
12.5.2.3 Use appropriate procedures, sub-
ject to the approval of the Administrator, to 12.5.3.2 As an alternative, as-fired fuel
determine the fraction of total mass input sampling and analysis may be used to deter-
derived from each type of fuel. mine inlet SO2 rates as follows:
12.5.3 Control Device Removal Efficiency. 12.5.3.2.1 Compute the average inlet SO2
Compute the percent removal efficiency rate (Edi) for each sampling period using the
(%Rg) of the control device using the fol- following equation:
lowing equation:
%S
⎛ E di = K Eq. 19-25
E ⎞ GCV
%R g = 100 ⎜1.0 − ao ⎟ Eq. 19-24
⎝ E ai ⎠ Where:
ng SO 2 ⎞ ⎛ ( kJ ) ⎞ ⎛ 1 ⎞ ⎡ ⎞⎛ 1 ⎞⎤
K = 2 × 10 7 ⎛ 4 ⎛ lb SO 2 ⎞ ⎛ Btu
⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟ 2 × 10 ⎝
⎝ %S ⎠ ⎝ J ⎠ ⎝ kg coal ⎠ ⎢⎣ %S ⎠ ⎝ million Btu ⎠ ⎝ lb coal ⎠ ⎥⎦
After calculating Edi, use the procedures in coal-fired steam generating unit is operated
Section 12.4 to determine the average inlet without coal being added to the bunkers, the
SO2 rate for the performance test period coal analysis from the previous ‘‘as
(Eai). bunkered’’ coal sample shall be used until
12.5.3.2.2 Collect the fuel samples from a coal is bunkered again. For steam generating
location in the fuel handling system that unit operating days when an oil-fired steam
provides a sample representative of the fuel generating unit is operated without oil being
bunkered or consumed during a steam gener- added to the oil ‘‘day’’ tank, the oil analysis
ating unit operating day. For the purpose of from the previous day shall be used until the
as-fired fuel sampling under Section 12.5.3.2
‘‘day’’ tank is filled again. Alternative defi-
or Section 12.6, the lot size for coal is the
nitions of fuel lot size may be used, subject
weight of coal bunkered or consumed during
each steam generating unit operating day. to prior approval of the Administrator.
The lot size for oil is the weight of oil sup- 12.5.3.2.3 Use ASTM procedures specified
plied to the ‘‘day’’ tank or consumed during in Section 12.5.2.1 or 12.5.2.2 to determine %S
each steam generating unit operating day. and GCV.
For reporting and calculation purposes, the 12.5.4 Daily Geometric Average Percent
gross sample shall be identified with the cal- Reduction from Hourly Values. The geo-
endar day on which sampling began. For metric average percent reduction (%Rga) is
steam generating unit operating days when a computed using the following equation:
ER17OC00.347</MATH>
⎢ ⎛ 1 nt
E jo ⎞ ⎥
%R ga = 100 ⎢1 − EXP⎜
⎢⎣
∑ 1n E ⎟⎥ Eq. 19-26
⎝ nt j=1 ji ⎠ ⎥
⎦
ER17OC00.346</MATH>
NOTE: The calculation includes only paired determine average SO2 emission rates (Eas) to
data sets (hourly average) for the inlet and the atmosphere from a coal-fired steam gen-
outlet pollutant measurements. erating unit when there is no SO2 control de-
ER17OC00.345</MATH>
12.6 Sulfur Retention Credit for Compli- vice, the following equation may be used to
ance Fuel. If fuel sampling and analysis pro- adjust the emission rate for sulfur retention
cedures in Section 12.5.2.1 are being used to credits (no credits are allowed for oil-fired
474
ER17OC00.344</MATH>
systems) (Edi) for each sampling period using Where:
the following equation:
%S
E di = 0.97K Eq. 19-27
GDV
ng SO 2 ⎞ ⎛ kJ ⎞ ⎛ 1 ⎞ ⎡ ⎞ ⎛ l ⎞⎤
K = 2 × 10 7 ⎛ 4 ⎛ lb SO 2 ⎞ ⎛ Btu
⎜ ⎟ ⎢2 × 10 ⎝
⎝ %S ⎠ ⎝ ⎠
J ⎝ kg coal ⎠ ⎣ %S ⎠ ⎝ million Btu ⎠ ⎝ lb coal ⎠ ⎥⎦
After calculating Edi, use the procedures in 12.7.1.2 Control Device Removal Effi-
Section 12.4.2 to determine the average SO2 ciency. Compliance with the overall emis-
emission rate to the atmosphere for the per- sion reduction (%Ro) may be determined by
formance test period (Eao). using the lower confidence limit of the emis-
12.7 Determination of Compliance When sion rate (Eao*) and the upper confidence
Minimum Data Requirement Is Not Met. limit of the inlet pollutant rate (Eai*) in cal-
12.7.1 Adjusted Emission Rates and Con- culating the control device removal effi-
trol Device Removal Efficiency. When the ciency (%Rg) as follows:
minimum data requirement is not met, the
Administrator may use the following ad- ⎛ E* ⎞
justed emission rates or control device re- %R g = 100 ⎜1.0 − ao ⎟ Eq. 19-29
moval efficiencies to determine compliance
⎝ E a*i ⎠
with the applicable standards.
12.7.1.1 Emission Rate. Compliance with
the emission rate standard may be deter- E a*i = E a i + t 0.95 S i Eq. 19-30
mined by using the lower confidence limit of
the emission rate (Eao*) as follows: 12.7.2 Standard Deviation of Hourly Aver-
age Pollutant Rates. Compute the standard
*
E ao = E ao − t 0.95 S o Eq. 19-28 deviation (Se) of the hourly average pollut-
ant rates using the following equation:
ER17OC00.353</MATH>
H
∑ (E hj − E a )
2
1 1 j=1
Se = − Eq. 19-31
H Hr H −1
ER17OC00.352</MATH>
Equation 19–19 through 19–31 may be used 13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
to compute the standard deviation for both
the outlet (So) and, if applicable, inlet (Si) 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
pollutant rates. 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References [Reserved] ER17OC00.351</MATH>

Validation Data
TABLE 19–1—CONVERSION FACTORS FOR CONCENTRATION
ER17OC00.350</MATH>
From To Multiply by
g/scm ......................................................................................................... ng/scm ....................... 109

mg/scm ...................................................................................................... ng/scm ....................... 106
lb/scf .......................................................................................................... ng/scm ....................... 1.602 × 1013

ppm SO2 .................................................................................................... ng/scm ....................... 2.66 × 106
ER17OC00.349</MATH>
ppm NOX ................................................................................................... ng/scm ....................... 1.912 × 106

ppm SO2 .................................................................................................... lb/scf .......................... 1.660 × 10¥7
ppm NOX ................................................................................................... lb/scf .......................... 1.194 × 10¥7
475
ER17OC00.348</MATH>
TABLE 19–2—F FACTORS FOR VARIOUS FUELS1

Fd Fw Fc
Fuel Type
dscm/J dscf/106 Btu wscm/J wscf/106 Btu scm/J scf/106 Btu
Coal:
Anthracite 2 ............. 2.71×10¥7 10,100 2.83×10¥7 10,540 0.530×10¥7 1,970
Bituminus 2 ............. 2.63×10¥7 9,780 2.86×10¥7 10,640 0.484×10¥7 1,800
Lignite ..................... 2.65×10¥7 9,860 3.21×10¥7 11,950 0.513×10¥7 1,910
Oil 3 ......................... 2.47×10¥7 9,190 2.77×10¥7 10,320 0.383×10¥7 1,420
Gas:.
Natural .................... 2.34×10¥7 8,710 2.85×10¥7 10,610 0.287×10¥7 1,040
Propane .................. 2.34×10¥7 8,710 2.74×10¥7 10,200 0.321×10¥7 1,190
Butane .................... 2.34×10¥7 8,710 2.79×10¥7 10,390 0.337×10¥7 1,250
Wood ............................. 2.48×10¥7 9,240 ........................ ........................ 0.492×10¥7 1,830
Wood Bark .................... 2.58×10¥7 9,600 ........................ ........................ 0.516×10¥7 1,920
Municipal ....................... 2.57×10¥7 9,570 ........................ ........................ 0.488×10¥7 1,820
Solid Waste ................... ........................ ........................ ........................ ........................ ........................ ........................
1 Determined at standard conditions: 20 °C (68 °F) and 760 mm Hg (29.92 in Hg)
2 As classified according to ASTM D 388.
3 Crude, residual, or distillate.
TABLE 19–3—VALUES FOR T0.95*

n1 t0.95 n1 t0.95 n1 t0.95
2 .......................................................................................... 6.31 8 1.89 22–26 1.71

3 .......................................................................................... 2.42 9 1.86 27–31 1.70
4 .......................................................................................... 2.35 10 1.83 32–51 1.68
5 .......................................................................................... 2.13 11 1.81 52–91 1.67
6 .......................................................................................... 2.02 12–16 1.77 92–151 1.66
7 .......................................................................................... 1.94 17–21 1.73 152 or more 1.65
1The values of this table are corrected for n-1 degrees of freedom. Use n equal to the number (H) of hourly average data
points.
METHOD 20—DETERMINATION OF NITROGEN OX- ides, oxygen, carbon dioxide, and sulfur diox-
IDES, SULFUR DIOXIDE, AND DILUENT EMIS- ide in the emissions from stationary gas tur-
SIONS FROM STATIONARY GAS TURBINES bines. This method follows the specific in-
structions for equipment and performance
requirements, supplies, sample collection
What is Method 20? and analysis, calculations, and data analysis
in the methods listed in Section 2.0.
Method 20 contains the details you must
1.1 Analytes. What does this method de-
follow when using an instrumental analyzer
termine?
to determine concentrations of nitrogen ox-
Nitrogen oxides (NOX) as nitrogen dioxide: 10102–43–9 Typically <2% of Calibration Span.
Nitric oxide (NO) .............................................. 10102–44–0
Nitrogen dioxide NO2.
Diluent oxygen (O2) or carbon dioxide (CO2) ................ ........................ Typically <2% of Calibration Span.
Sulfur dioxide (SOX) ...................................................... 7446–09–5 Typically <2% of Calibration Span.
1.2 Applicability. When is this method re- 2.0 Summary of Method

quired? The use of Method 20 may be required
In this method, NOX, O2 (or CO2), and SOX
by specific New Source Performance Stand-
are measured using the following methods
ards, Clean Air Marketing rules, and State
found in appendix A to this part:
Implementation Plans and permits where
(a) Method 1—Sample and Velocity Tra-
measuring SO2, NOX, CO2, and/or O2 con-
centrations in stationary gas turbines emis-
sions are required. Other regulations may (b) Method 3A—Determination of Oxygen
and Carbon Dioxide Emissions From Sta-
also require its use.

tionary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Pro-
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. How good must
cedure).
my collected data be? Refer to Section 1.3 of
Method 7E.
476
(c) Method 6C—Determination of Sulfur Di- 10.0 Calibration and Standardization
oxide Emissions From Stationary Sources
Follow the procedures for calibration and
(Instrumental Analyzer Procedure).
standardization in Section 10.0 of Method 7E.
(d) Method 7E—Determination of Nitrogen
Oxides Emissions From Stationary Sources 11.0 Analytical Procedures
(Instrumental Analyzer Procedure).
(e) Method 19—Determination of Sulfur Di- Because sample collection and analysis are
oxide Removal Efficiency and Particulate performed together (see Section 8), addi-
Matter, Sulfur Dioxide, and Nitrogen Oxide tional discussion of the analytical procedure
Emission Rates. is not necessary.
3.0 Definitions 12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
Refer to Section 3.0 of Method 7E for the You must follow the procedures for cal-
applicable definitions. culations and data analysis in Section 12.0 of
the appropriate method listed in Section 2.0.
4.0 Interferences Follow the procedures in Section 12.0 of
Method 19 for calculating fuel-specific F fac-
Refer to Section 4.0 of Methods 3A, 6C, and tors, diluent-corrected pollutant concentra-
7E as applicable. tions, and emission rates.
5.0 Safety 13.0 Method Performance
Refer to Section 5.0 of Method 7E. The specifications for the applicable per-
formance checks are the same as in Section
13.0 of Method 7E.
The measurement system design is shown
in Figure 7E–1 of Method 7E. Refer to the ap- 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
propriate methods listed in Section 2.0 for
equipment and supplies.
Refer to Section 16.0 of the appropriate
Refer to the appropriate methods listed in
method listed in Section 2.0 for alternative
Section 2.0 for reagents and standards.
procedures.
17.0 References
and Transport
Refer to Section 17.0 of the appropriate
8.1 Sampling Site and Sampling Points. Fol-
method listed in Section 2.0 for references.
low the procedures of Section 8.1 of Method
7E. For the stratification test in Section 18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
8.1.2, determine the diluent-corrected pollut- Validation Data
ant concentration at each traverse point.
8.2 Initial Measurement System Performance Refer to Section 18.0 of the appropriate
Tests. You must refer to the appropriate method listed in Section 2.0 for tables, dia-
methods listed in Section 2.0 for the meas- grams, flowcharts, and validation data.
urement system performance tests as appli-
cable. METHOD 21—DETERMINATION OF VOLATILE
8.3 Interference Check. You must follow ORGANIC COMPOUND LEAKS
the procedures in Section 8.3 of Method 3A or 1.0 Scope and Application
6C, or Section 8.2.7 of Method 7E (as appro-
priate). 1.1 Analytes.
8.4 Sample Collection. You must follow the
procedures of Section 8.4 of the appropriate Analyte CAS No.
methods listed in Section 2.0. A test run
Volatile Organic Compounds No CAS number assigned.
must have a duration of at least 21 minutes. (VOC).
8.5 Post-Run System Bias Check, Drift As-
sessment, and Alternative Dynamic Spike Proce- 1.2 Scope. This method is applicable for
dure. You must follow the procedures of Sec- the determination of VOC leaks from process
tions 8.5 and 8.6 of the appropriate methods equipment. These sources include, but are
listed in Section 2.0. A test run must have a not limited to, valves, flanges and other con-
duration of at least 21 minutes.
nections, pumps and compressors, pressure

relief devices, process drains, open-ended
9.0 Quality Control
valves, pump and compressor seal system
Follow quality control procedures in Sec- degassing vents, accumulator vessel vents,
tion 9.0 of Method 7E. agitator seals, and access door seals.
477
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to final value is reached as displayed on the in-
the requirements of this method will en- strument readout meter.
air pollutant sampling methods. 4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
2.0 Summary of Method 5.0 Safety

2.1 A portable instrument is used to de- 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
tect VOC leaks from individual sources. The hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
instrument detector type is not specified, ment. This test method may not address all
but it must meet the specifications and per- of the safety problems associated with its
formance criteria contained in Section 6.0. A use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
leak definition concentration based on a ref- test method to establish appropriate safety
erence compound is specified in each applica- and health practices and determine the ap-
ble regulation. This method is intended to plicability of regulatory limitations prior to
locate and classify leaks only, and is not to performing this test method.
be used as a direct measure of mass emission 5.2 Hazardous Pollutants. Several of the
rate from individual sources. compounds, leaks of which may be deter-
mined by this method, may be irritating or
3.0 Definitions corrosive to tissues (e.g., heptane) or may be
3.1 Calibration gas means the VOC com- toxic (e.g., benzene, methyl alcohol). Nearly
pound used to adjust the instrument meter all are fire hazards. Compounds in emissions
reading to a known value. The calibration should be determined through familiarity
gas is usually the reference compound at a with the source. Appropriate precautions can
known concentration approximately equal to be found in reference documents, such as ref-
the leak definition concentration. erence No. 4 in Section 16.0.
3.2 Calibration precision means the degree 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
of agreement between measurements of the
same known value, expressed as the relative A VOC monitoring instrument meeting the
percentage of the average difference between following specifications is required:
the meter readings and the known con- 6.1 The VOC instrument detector shall re-
centration to the known concentration. spond to the compounds being processed. De-
3.3 Leak definition concentration means the tector types that may meet this requirement
local VOC concentration at the surface of a include, but are not limited to, catalytic oxi-
leak source that indicates that a VOC emis- dation, flame ionization, infrared absorption,
sion (leak) is present. The leak definition is and photoionization.
an instrument meter reading based on a ref- 6.2 The instrument shall be capable of
erence compound. measuring the leak definition concentration
3.4 No detectable emission means a local specified in the regulation.
VOC concentration at the surface of a leak 6.3 The scale of the instrument meter
source, adjusted for local VOC ambient con- shall be readable to ±2.5 percent of the speci-
centration, that is less than 2.5 percent of fied leak definition concentration.
the specified leak definition concentration. 6.4 The instrument shall be equipped with
that indicates that a VOC emission (leak) is an electrically driven pump to ensure that a
not present. sample is provided to the detector at a con-
3.5 Reference compound means the VOC stant flow rate. The nominal sample flow
species selected as the instrument calibra- rate, as measured at the sample probe tip,
tion basis for specification of the leak defini- shall be 0.10 to 3.0 l/min (0.004 to 0.1 ft3/min)
tion concentration. (For example, if a leak when the probe is fitted with a glass wool
definition concentration is 10,000 ppm as plug or filter that may be used to prevent
methane, then any source emission that re- plugging of the instrument.
sults in a local concentration that yields a 6.5 The instrument shall be equipped with
meter reading of 10,000 on an instrument a probe or probe extension or sampling not
meter calibrated with methane would be to exceed 6.4 mm (1⁄4 in) in outside diameter,
classified as a leak. In this example, the leak with a single end opening for admission of
definition concentration is 10,000 ppm and sample.
the reference compound is methane.) 6.6 The instrument shall be intrinsically
3.6 Response factor means the ratio of the safe for operation in explosive atmospheres
known concentration of a VOC compound to as defined by the National Electrical Code by
the observed meter reading when measured the National Fire Prevention Association or
using an instrument calibrated with the ref- other applicable regulatory code for oper-
erence compound specified in the applicable ation in any explosive atmospheres that may
regulation. be encountered in its use. The instrument

3.7 Response time means the time interval shall, at a minimum, be intrinsically safe for
from a step change in VOC concentration at Class 1, Division 1 conditions, and/or Class 2,
the input of the sampling system to the time Division 1 conditions, as appropriate, as de-
at which 90 percent of the corresponding fined by the example code. The instrument
478
shall not be operated with any safety device, specified in the applicable regulation. When
such as an exhaust flame arrestor, removed. no instrument is available that meets this
specification when calibrated with the ref-
7.0 Reagents and Standards erence VOC specified in the applicable regu-
7.1 Two gas mixtures are required for in- lation, the available instrument may be cali-
strument calibration and performance eval- brated with one of the VOC to be measured,
uation: or any other VOC, so long as the instrument
7.1.1 Zero Gas. Air, less than 10 parts per then has a response factor of less than 10 for
million by volume (ppmv) VOC. each of the individual VOC to be measured.
7.1.2 Calibration Gas. For each organic 8.1.1.3 Alternatively, if response factors
species that is to be measured during indi- have been published for the compounds of in-
vidual source surveys, obtain or prepare a terest for the instrument or detector type,
known standard in air at a concentration ap- the response factor determination is not re-
proximately equal to the applicable leak def- quired, and existing results may be ref-
inition specified in the regulation. erenced. Examples of published response fac-
7.2 Cylinder Gases. If cylinder calibration tors for flame ionization and catalytic oxida-
gas mixtures are used, they must be ana- tion detectors are included in References 1–3
lyzed and certified by the manufacturer to be of Section 17.0.
within 2 percent accuracy, and a shelf life 8.1.2 Calibration Precision. The calibra-
must be specified. Cylinder standards must tion precision test must be completed prior
be either reanalyzed or replaced at the end of to placing the analyzer into service and at
the specified shelf life. subsequent 3-month intervals or at the next
7.3 Prepared Gases. Calibration gases may use, whichever is later.
be prepared by the user according to any ac- 8.1.2.1 Make a total of three measure-
cepted gaseous preparation procedure that ments by alternately using zero gas and the
will yield a mixture accurate to within 2 per- specified calibration gas. Record the meter
cent. Prepared standards must be replaced readings. Calculate the average algebraic dif-
each day of use unless it is demonstrated ference between the meter readings and the
that degradation does not occur during stor- known value. Divide this average difference
age. by the known calibration value and multiply
7.4 Mixtures with non-Reference Com- by 100 to express the resulting calibration
pound Gases. Calibrations may be performed precision as a percentage.
using a compound other than the reference 8.1.2.2 The calibration precision shall be
compound. In this case, a conversion factor equal to or less than 10 percent of the cali-
must be determined for the alternative com- bration gas value.
pound such that the resulting meter readings 8.1.3 Response Time. The response time
during source surveys can be converted to test is required before placing the instru-
reference compound results. ment into service. If a modification to the
sample pumping system or flow configura-
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, tion is made that would change the response
and Transport time, a new test is required before further
8.1 Instrument Performance Evaluation. use.
Assemble and start up the instrument ac- 8.1.3.1 Introduce zero gas into the instru-
cording to the manufacturer’s instructions ment sample probe. When the meter reading
for recommended warmup period and pre- has stabilized, switch quickly to the speci-
liminary adjustments. fied calibration gas. After switching, meas-
8.1.1 Response Factor. A response factor ure the time required to attain 90 percent of
must be determined for each compound that the final stable reading. Perform this test se-
is to be measured, either by testing or from quence three times and record the results.
reference sources. The response factor tests Calculate the average response time.
are required before placing the analyzer into 8.1.3.2 The instrument response time shall
service, but do not have to be repeated at be equal to or less than 30 seconds. The in-
subsequent intervals. strument pump, dilution probe (if any), sam-
8.1.1.1 Calibrate the instrument with the ple probe, and probe filter that will be used
reference compound as specified in the appli- during testing shall all be in place during the
cable regulation. Introduce the calibration response time determination.
gas mixture to the analyzer and record the 8.2 Instrument Calibration. Calibrate the
observed meter reading. Introduce zero gas VOC monitoring instrument according to
until a stable reading is obtained. Make a Section 10.0.
total of three measurements by alternating 8.3 Individual Source Surveys.
between the calibration gas and zero gas. 8.3.1 Type I—Leak Definition Based on
Calculate the response factor for each repeti- Concentration. Place the probe inlet at the
tion and the average response factor. surface of the component interface where
8.1.1.2 The instrument response factors leakage could occur. Move the probe along
for each of the individual VOC to be meas- the interface periphery while observing the
ured shall be less than 10 unless otherwise instrument readout. If an increased meter
479
reading is observed, slowly sample the inter- randomly upwind and downwind at a dis-
face where leakage is indicated until the tance of one to two meters from the source.
maximum meter reading is obtained. Leave If an interference exists with this determina-
the probe inlet at this maximum reading lo- tion due to a nearby emission or leak, the
cation for approximately two times the in- local ambient concentration may be deter-
strument response time. If the maximum ob- mined at distances closer to the source, but
served meter reading is greater than the leak in no case shall the distance be less than 25
definition in the applicable regulation, centimeters. Then move the probe inlet to
record and report the results as specified in the surface of the source and determine the
the regulation reporting requirements. Ex- concentration as outlined in Section 8.3.1.
amples of the application of this general The difference between these concentrations
technique to specific equipment types are: determines whether there are no detectable
8.3.1.1 Valves. The most common source emissions. Record and report the results as
of leaks from valves is the seal between the specified by the regulation. For those cases
stem and housing. Place the probe at the where the regulation requires a specific de-
interface where the stem exits the packing vice installation, or that specified vents be
gland and sample the stem circumference. ducted or piped to a control device, the exist-
Also, place the probe at the interface of the ence of these conditions shall be visually
packing gland take-up flange seat and sam- confirmed. When the regulation also requires
ple the periphery. In addition, survey valve that no detectable emissions exist, visual ob-
housings of multipart assembly at the sur- servations and sampling surveys are re-
face of all interfaces where a leak could quired. Examples of this technique are:
occur. 8.3.2.1 Pump or Compressor Seals. If appli-
8.3.1.2 Flanges and Other Connections. cable, determine the type of shaft seal. Per-
For welded flanges, place the probe at the form a survey of the local area ambient VOC
outer edge of the flange-gasket interface and concentration and determine if detectable
sample the circumference of the flange. Sam- emissions exist as described in Section 8.3.2.
ple other types of nonpermanent joints (such 8.3.2.2 Seal System Degassing Vents, Ac-
as threaded connections) with a similar tra- cumulator Vessel Vents, Pressure Relief De-
verse. vices. If applicable, observe whether or not
8.3.1.3 Pumps and Compressors. Conduct a the applicable ducting or piping exists. Also,
circumferential traverse at the outer surface determine if any sources exist in the ducting
of the pump or compressor shaft and seal or piping where emissions could occur up-
interface. If the source is a rotating shaft, stream of the control device. If the required
position the probe inlet within 1 cm of the ducting or piping exists and there are no
shaft-seal interface for the survey. If the sources where the emissions could be vented
housing configuration prevents a complete to the atmosphere upstream of the control
traverse of the shaft periphery, sample all device, then it is presumed that no detect-
accessible portions. Sample all other joints able emissions are present. If there are
on the pump or compressor housing where sources in the ducting or piping where emis-
leakage could occur. sions could be vented or sources where leaks
8.3.1.4 Pressure Relief Devices. The con- could occur, the sampling surveys described
figuration of most pressure relief devices in Section 8.3.2 shall be used to determine if
prevents sampling at the sealing seat inter- detectable emissions exist.
face. For those devices equipped with an en- 8.3.3 Alternative Screening Procedure.
closed extension, or horn, place the probe 8.3.3.1 A screening procedure based on the
inlet at approximately the center of the ex- formation of bubbles in a soap solution that
haust area to the atmosphere. is sprayed on a potential leak source may be
8.3.1.5 Process Drains. For open drains, used for those sources that do not have con-
place the probe inlet at approximately the tinuously moving parts, that do not have
center of the area open to the atmosphere. surface temperatures greater than the boil-
For covered drains, place the probe at the ing point or less than the freezing point of
surface of the cover interface and conduct a the soap solution, that do not have open
peripheral traverse. areas to the atmosphere that the soap solu-
8.3.1.6 Open-ended Lines or Valves. Place tion cannot bridge, or that do not exhibit
the probe inlet at approximately the center evidence of liquid leakage. Sources that have
of the opening to the atmosphere. these conditions present must be surveyed
8.3.1.7 Seal System Degassing Vents and using the instrument technique of Section
Accumulator Vents. Place the probe inlet at 8.3.1 or 8.3.2.
approximately the center of the opening to 8.3.3.2 Spray a soap solution over all po-
the atmosphere. tential leak sources. The soap solution may
8.3.1.8 Access door seals. Place the probe be a commercially available leak detection
inlet at the surface of the door seal interface solution or may be prepared using con-
and conduct a peripheral traverse. centrated detergent and water. A pressure
8.3.2 Type II—‘‘No Detectable Emission’’. sprayer or squeeze bottle may be used to dis-
Determine the local ambient VOC concentra- pense the solution. Observe the potential
tion around the source by moving the probe leak sites to determine if any bubbles are
480
formed. If no bubbles are observed, the of Section 8.3.1 or 8.3.2 shall be used to deter-
source is presumed to have no detectable mine if a leak exists, or if the source has de-
emissions or leaks as applicable. If any bub- tectable emissions, as applicable.
bles are observed, the instrument techniques
9.0 Quality Control
8.1.2 ................................... Instrument calibration precision check .... Ensure precision and accuracy, respectively, of instru-
ment response to standard.
10.0 .................................... Instrument calibration.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization rial is incorporated by reference from Meth-

od 9.
10.1 Calibrate the VOC monitoring instru-
ment as follows. After the appropriate 1.0 Scope and Application
warmup period and zero internal calibration
procedure, introduce the calibration gas into This method is applicable for the deter-
the instrument sample probe. Adjust the in- mination of the frequency of fugitive emis-
strument meter readout to correspond to the sions from stationary sources, only as speci-
calibration gas value. fied in an applicable subpart of the regula-
tions. This method also is applicable for the
NOTE: If the meter readout cannot be ad-
determination of the frequency of visible
justed to the proper value, a malfunction of
smoke emissions from flares.
the analyzer is indicated and corrective ac-
tions are necessary before use. 2.0 Summary of Method
11.0 Analytical Procedures [Reserved] 2.1 Fugitive emissions produced during
material processing, handling, and transfer
12.0 Data Analyses and Calculations operations or smoke emissions from flares
[Reserved] are visually determined by an observer with-
out the aid of instruments.
2.2 This method is used also to determine
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] visible smoke emissions from flares used for
combustion of waste process materials.
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] 2.3 This method determines the amount of
time that visible emissions occur during the
16.0 References observation period (i.e., the accumulated
1. Dubose, D.A., and G.E. Harris. Response emission time). This method does not require
Factors of VOC Analyzers at a Meter Read- that the opacity of emissions be determined.
ing of 10,000 ppmv for Selected Organic Com- Since this procedure requires only the deter-
pounds. U.S. Environmental Protection mination of whether visible emissions occur
Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. Publi- and does not require the determination of
cation No. EPA 600/2–81051. September 1981. opacity levels, observer certification accord-
2. Brown, G.E., et al. Response Factors of ing to the procedures of Method 9 is not re-
VOC Analyzers Calibrated with Methane for quired. However, it is necessary that the ob-
Selected Organic Compounds. U.S. Environ- server is knowledgeable with respect to the
mental Protection Agency, Research Tri- general procedures for determining the pres-
angle Park, NC. Publication No. EPA 600/2– ence of visible emissions. At a minimum, the
81–022. May 1981. observer must be trained and knowledgeable
3. DuBose, D.A. et al. Response of Portable regarding the effects of background contrast,
VOC Analyzers to Chemical Mixtures. U.S. ambient lighting, observer position relative
Environmental Protection Agency, Research to lighting, wind, and the presence of
Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. EPA 600/ uncombined water (condensing water vapor)
2–81–110. September 1981. on the visibility of emissions. This training
4. Handbook of Hazardous Materials: Fire, is to be obtained from written materials
Safety, Health. Alliance of American Insur- found in References 1 and 2 or from the lec-
ers. Schaumberg, IL. 1983. ture portion of the Method 9 certification
course.
Validation Data [Reserved] 3.0 Definitions
3.1 Emission frequency means the percent-
METHOD 22—VISUAL DETERMINATION OF FUGI-
age of time that emissions are visible during

TIVE EMISSIONS FROM MATERIAL SOURCES
the observation period.
AND SMOKE EMISSIONS FROM FLARES
3.2 Emission time means the accumulated
NOTE: This method is not inclusive with re- amount of time that emissions are visible
spect to observer certification. Some mate- during the observation period.
481
3.3 Fugitive emissions means emissions tial emissions. If the affected facility is lo-
generated by an affected facility which is not cated inside a building, determine an obser-
collected by a capture system and is released vation location that is consistent with the
to the atmosphere. This includes emissions requirements of the applicable regulation
that (1) escape capture by process equipment (i.e., outside observation of emissions escap-
exhaust hoods; (2) are emitted during mate- ing the building/structure or inside observa-
rial transfer; (3) are emitted from buildings tion of emissions directly emitted from the
housing material processing or handling affected facility process unit). Then select a
equipment; or (4) are emitted directly from position that enables a clear view of the po-
process equipment. tential emission point(s) of the affected fa-
3.4 Observation period means the accumu- cility or of the building or structure housing
lated time period during which observations the affected facility, as appropriate for the
are conducted, not to be less than the period applicable subpart. A position at least 4.6 m
specified in the applicable regulation. (15 feet), but not more than 400 m (0.25
3.5 Smoke emissions means a pollutant gen- miles), from the emission source is rec-
erated by combustion in a flare and occur- ommended. For outdoor locations, select a
ring immediately downstream of the flame. position where the sunlight is not shining di-
Smoke occurring within the flame, but not rectly in the observer’s eyes.
downstream of the flame, is not considered a 11.2 Field Records.
smoke emission. 11.2.1 Outdoor Location. Record the fol-
lowing information on the field data sheet
4.0 Interferences (Figure 22–1): Company name, industry, proc-
4.1 Occasionally, fugitive emissions from ess unit, observer’s name, observer’s affili-
sources other than the affected facility (e.g., ation, and date. Record also the estimated
road dust) may prevent a clear view of the wind speed, wind direction, and sky condi-
affected facility. This may particularly be a tion. Sketch the process unit being observed,
problem during periods of high wind. If the and note the observer location relative to
view of the potential emission points is ob- the source and the sun. Indicate the poten-
scured to such a degree that the observer tial and actual emission points on the
questions the validity of continuing observa- sketch.
tions, then the observations shall be termi- 11.2.2 Indoor Location. Record the fol-
nated, and the observer shall clearly note lowing information on the field data sheet
this fact on the data form. (Figure 22–2): Company name, industry, proc-
ess unit, observer’s name, observer’s affili-
5.0 Safety ation, and date. Record as appropriate the
type, location, and intensity of lighting on
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve the data sheet. Sketch the process unit being
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- observed, and note the observer location rel-
ment. This test method may not address all ative to the source. Indicate the potential
of the safety problems associated with its and actual fugitive emission points on the
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this sketch.
test method to establish appropriate safety 11.3 Indoor Lighting Requirements. For
and health practices and determine the ap- indoor locations, use a light meter to meas-
plicability of regulatory limitations prior to ure the level of illumination at a location as
performing this test method. close to the emission source(s) as is feasible.
6.0 Equipment An illumination of greater than 100 lux (10
foot candles) is considered necessary for
6.1 Stopwatches (two). Accumulative type proper application of this method.
with unit divisions of at least 0.5 seconds. 11.4 Observations.
6.2 Light Meter. Light meter capable of 11.4.1 Procedure. Record the clock time
measuring illuminance in the 50 to 200 lux when observations begin. Use one stopwatch
range, required for indoor observations only. to monitor the duration of the observation
period. Start this stopwatch when the obser-
7.0 Reagents and Supplies [Reserved] vation period begins. If the observation pe-
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, riod is divided into two or more segments by
and Transfer [Reserved] process shutdowns or observer rest breaks
(see Section 11.4.3), stop the stopwatch when
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved] a break begins and restart the stopwatch
without resetting it when the break ends.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization Stop the stopwatch at the end of the obser-
[Reserved] vation period. The accumulated time indi-
cated by this stopwatch is the duration of
observation period. When the observation pe-

11.1 Selection of Observation Location. riod is completed, record the clock time.
Survey the affected facility, or the building During the observation period, continuously
or structure housing the process to be ob- watch the emission source. Upon observing
served, and determine the locations of poten- an emission (condensed water vapor is not
482
considered an emission), start the second ac- time periods, two observers can alternate be-
cumulative stopwatch; stop the watch when tween making observations and taking
the emission stops. Continue this procedure breaks.
for the entire observation period. The accu- 11.5 Recording Observations. Record the
mulated elapsed time on this stopwatch is accumulated time of the observation period
the total time emissions were visible during on the data sheet as the observation period
the observation period (i.e., the emission duration. Record the accumulated time
time.) emissions were observed on the data sheet as
11.4.2 Observation Period. Choose an ob- the emission time. Record the clock time the
servation period of sufficient length to meet observation period began and ended, as well
the requirements for determining compli- as the clock time any observer breaks began
ance with the emission standard in the appli- and ended.
cable subpart of the regulations. When the
length of the observation period is specifi- 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
cally stated in the applicable subpart, it may
If the applicable subpart requires that the
not be necessary to observe the source for
emission rate be expressed as an emission
this entire period if the emission time re-
frequency (in percent), determine this value
quired to indicate noncompliance (based on
as follows: Divide the accumulated emission
the specified observation period) is observed
time (in seconds) by the duration of the ob-
in a shorter time period. In other words, if
servation period (in seconds) or by any min-
the regulation prohibits emissions for more
imum observation period required in the ap-
than 6 minutes in any hour, then observa-
plicable subpart, if the actual observation
tions may (optional) be stopped after an
period is less than the required period, and
emission time of 6 minutes is exceeded.
multiply this quotient by 100.
Similarly, when the regulation is expressed
as an emission frequency and the regulation 13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
prohibits emissions for greater than 10 per-
cent of the time in any hour, then observa- 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
tions may (optional) be terminated after 6
minutes of emission are observed since 6 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
minutes is 10 percent of an hour. In any case,
the observation period shall not be less than 16.0 References
6 minutes in duration. In some cases, the 1. Missan, R., and A. Stein. Guidelines for
process operation may be intermittent or cy- Evaluation of Visible Emissions Certifi-
clic. In such cases, it may be convenient for cation, Field Procedures, Legal Aspects, and
the observation period to coincide with the Background Material. EPA Publication No.
length of the process cycle. EPA–340/1–75–007. April 1975.
11.4.3 Observer Rest Breaks. Do not ob- 2. Wohlschlegel, P., and D.E. Wagoner.
serve emissions continuously for a period of Guideline for Development of a Quality As-
more than 15 to 20 minutes without taking a surance Program: Volume IX—Visual Deter-
rest break. For sources requiring observation mination of Opacity Emissions from Sta-
periods of greater than 20 minutes, the ob- tionary Sources. EPA Publication No. EPA–
server shall take a break of not less than 5 650/4–74–005i. November 1975.
minutes and not more than 10 minutes after
every 15 to 20 minutes of observation. If con- 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
tinuous observations are desired for extended Validation Data
483
484
ER17OC00.354</GPH>
METHOD 23—DETERMINATION OF POLY- chlorinated dibenzofurans (PCDF’s) from sta-

CHLORINATED DIBENZO-P-DIOXINS AND POLY- tionary sources.
CHLORINATED DIBENZOFURANS FROM STA- 1.2 Principle. A sample is withdrawn from
TIONARY SOURCES the gas stream isokinetically and collected
in the sample probe, on a glass fiber filter,
1. Applicability and Principle
and on a packed column of adsorbent mate-

1.1 Applicability. This method is applica- rial. The sample cannot be separated into a
ble to the determination of polychlorinated particle vapor fraction. The PCDD’s and
dibenzo-p-dioxins (PCDD’s) and poly-
485
ER17OC00.355</GPH>
PCDF’s are extracted from the sample, sepa- Figure 23–1. Sealing greases may not be used
rated by high resolution gas chroma- in assembling the train. The train is iden-
tography, and measured by high resolution tical to that described in section 2.1 of Meth-
mass spectrometry. od 5 of this appendix with the following addi-
tions:
2. Apparatus
2.1 Sampling. A schematic of the sam-
pling train used in this method is shown in
486
EC01JN92.249</GPH>
2.1.1 Nozzle. The nozzle shall be made of gram is shown in Figure 23–2. Other physical
nickel, nickel-plated stainless steel, quartz, configurations of the resin trap/condenser as-
or borosilicate glass. sembly are acceptable. The connecting fit-
2.1.2 Sample Transfer Lines. The sample tings shall form leak-free, vacuum tight
transfer lines, if needed, shall be heat traced, seals. No sealant greases shall be used in the
heavy walled TFE (1⁄2 in. OD with 1⁄8 in. wall) sampling train. A coarse glass frit is in-
with connecting fittings that are capable of cluded to retain the adsorbent.
forming leak-free, vacuum-tight connections 2.2 Sample Recovery.
without using sealing greases. The line shall
2.2.1 Fitting Caps. Ground glass, Teflon
be as short as possible and must be main-
tape, or aluminum foil (Section 2.2.6) to cap
tained at 120 °C.
off the sample exposed sections of the train.
2.1.1 Filter Support. Teflon or Teflon-
coated wire. 2.2.2 Wash Bottles. Teflon, 500-ml.
2.1.2 Condenser. Glass, coil type with 2.2.3 Probe-Liner Probe-Nozzle, and Fil-
compatible fittings. A schematic diagram is ter-Holder Brushes. Inert bristle brushes
shown in Figure 23–2. with precleaned stainless steel or Teflon
2.1.3 Water Bath. Thermostatically con- handles. The probe brush shall have exten-
trolled to maintain the gas temperature sions of stainless steel or Teflon, at least as
exiting the condenser at <20 °C (68 °F). long as the probe. The brushes shall be prop-
2.1.4 Adsorbent Module. Glass container erly sized and shaped to brush out the nozzle,
to hold the solid adsorbent. A shematic dia- probe liner, and transfer line, if used.
487
2.2.4 Filter Storage Container. Sealed fil- 2.2.6 Aluminum Foil. Heavy duty, hexane-
ter holder, wide-mouth amber glass jar with rinsed.
Teflon-lined cap, or glass petri dish. 2.2.7 Metal Storage Container. Air tight
2.2.5 Balance. Triple beam. container to store silica gel.
488
EC01JN92.250</GPH>
2.2.8 Graduated Cylinder. Glass, 250-ml 3.1.1.1 Precleaning. All filters shall be
with 2-ml graduation. cleaned before their initial use. Place a glass
2.2.9 Glass Sample Storage Container. extraction thimble and 1 g of silica gel and a
Amber glass bottle for sample glassware plug of glass wool into a Soxhlet apparatus,
washes, 500- or 1000-ml, with leak free Teflon- charge the apparatus with toluene, and
lined caps. reflux for a minimum of 3 hours. Remove the
2.3 Analysis. toluene and discard it, but retain the silica
2.3.1 Sample Container. 125- and 250-ml gel. Place no more than 50 filters in the
flint glass bottles with Teflon-lined caps. thimble onto the silica gel bed and top with
2.3.2 Test Tube. Glass. the cleaned glass wool. Charge the Soxhlet
2.3.3 Soxhlet Extraction Apparatus. Capa- with toluene and reflux for 16 hours. After
ble of holding 43×123 mm extraction thim- extraction, allow the Soxhlet to cool, re-
bles. move the filters, and dry them under a clean
2.3.4 Extraction Thimble. Glass, N2 stream. Store the filters in a glass petri
precleaned cellulosic, or glass fiber. dish sealed with Teflon tape.
2.3.5 Pasteur Pipettes. For preparing liq- 3.1.2 Adsorbent Resin. Amberlite XAD–2
uid chromatographic columns. resin. Thoroughly cleaned before initial use.
2.3.6 Reacti-vials. Amber glass, 2-ml, 3.1.2.1 Cleaning Procedure. This procedure
silanized prior to use. may be carried out in a giant Soxhlet extrac-
2.3.7 Rotary Evaporator. Buchi/Brinkman tor. An all-glass filter thimble containing an
RF–121 or equivalent. extra-course frit is used for extraction of
2.3.8 Nitrogen Evaporative Concentrator. XAD–2. The frit is recessed 10–15 mm above a
N-Evap Analytical Evaporator Model III or crenelated ring at the bottom of the thimble
equivalent. to facilitate drainage. The resin must be
carefully retained in the extractor cup with
2.3.9 Separatory Funnels. Glass, 2-liter.
a glass wool plug and a stainless steel ring
2.3.10 Gas Chromatograph. Consisting of
because it floats on methylene chloride. This
the following components:
process involves sequential extraction in the
following order.
temperature ±°C and performing pro- Solvent Procedure
grammed increases in temperature at rates
of at least 40 °C/min. Water ..................................... Initial rinse: Place resin in a
2.3.10.2 Temperature Gauge. To monitor beaker, rinse once with
water, and discard. Fill with
column oven, detector, and exhaust tempera-
water a second time, let
tures ±1 °C. stand overnight, and dis-
2.3.10.3 Flow System. Gas metering sys- card.
tem to measure sample, fuel, combustion Water ..................................... Extract with water for 8
gas, and carrier gas flows. hours.
2.3.10.4 Capillary Columns. A fused silica Methanol ................................ Extract for 22 hours.
column, 60 × 0.25 mm inside diameter (ID), Methylene Chloride ................ Extract for 22 hours.
Toluene .................................. Extract for 22 hours.
coated with DB–5 and a fused silica column,
30 m × 0.25 mm ID coated with DB–225. Other
3.1.2.2 Drying.
column systems may be used provided that
3.1.2.2.1 Drying Column. Pyrex pipe, 10.2
the user is able to demonstrate using cali-
cm ID by 0.6 m long, with suitable retainers.
bration and performance checks that the col-
3.1.2.2.2 Procedure. The adsorbent must be
umn system is able to meet the specifica-
dried with clean inert gas. Liquid nitrogen
tions of section 6.1.2.2.
from a standard commercial liquid nitrogen
2.3.11 Mass Spectrometer. Capable of rou- cylinder has proven to be a reliable source of
tine operation at a resolution of 1:10000 with large volumes of gas free from organic con-
a stability of ±5 ppm. taminants. Connect the liquid nitrogen cyl-
2.3.12 Data System. Compatible with the inder to the column by a length of cleaned
mass spectrometer and capable of moni- copper tubing, 0.95 cm ID, coiled to pass
toring at least five groups of 25 ions. through a heat source. A convenient heat
2.3.13 Analytical Balance. To measure source is a water-bath heated from a steam
within 0.1 mg. line. The final nitrogen temperature should
3. Reagents only be warm to the touch and not over 40
°C. Continue flowing nitrogen through the
3.1 Sampling. adsorbent until all the residual solvent is re-
3.1.1 Filters. Glass fiber filters, without moved. The flow rate should be sufficient to
organic binder, exhibiting at least 99.95 per- gently agitate the particles but not so exces-
cent efficiency (<0.05 percent penetration) on sive as the cause the particles to fracture.
0.3-micron dioctyl phthalate smoke par- 3.1.2.3 Quality Control Check. The adsorb-
ticles. The filter efficiency test shall be con- ent must be checked for residual toluene.
ducted in accordance with ASTM Standard 3.1.2.3.1 Extraction. Weigh 1.0 g sample of
Method D 2986–71 (Reapproved 1978) (incor- dried resin into a small vial, add 3 ml of tol-
porated by reference—see § 60.17). uene, cap the vial, and shake it well.
489
3.1.2.3.2 Analysis. Inject a 2 μl sample of 3.3.3 Sulfuric Acid. Reagent grade.
the extract into a gas chromatograph oper- 3.3.4 Sodium Hydroxide. 1.0 N. Weigh 40 g
ated under the following conditions: of sodium hydroxide into a 1-liter volumetric
Column: 6 ft × 1⁄8 in stainless steel con- flask. Dilute to 1 liter with water.
taining 10 percent OV–101 on 100/120 3.3.5 Hexane. Pesticide grade.
Supelcoport. 3.3.6 Methylene Chloride. Pesticide grade.
Carrier Gas: Helium at a rate of 30 ml/min. 3.3.7 Benzene. Pesticide Grade.
Detector: Flame ionization detector oper- 3.3.8 Ethyl Acetate.
ated at a sensitivity of 4 × 10¥11 A/mV. 3.3.9 Methanol. Pesticide Grade.
Injection Port Temperature: 250 °C. 3.3.10 Toluene. Pesticide Grade.
Detector Temperature: 305 °C. 3.3.11 Nonane. Pesticide Grade.
Oven Temperature: 30 °C for 4 min; pro- 3.3.12 Cyclohexane. Pesticide Grade.
3.3.13 Basic Alumina. Activity grade 1,
grammed to rise at 40 °C/min until it
100–200 mesh. Prior to use, activate the alu-
reaches 250 °C; return to 30 °C after 17
mina by heating for 16 hours at 130 °C before
minutes.
use. Store in a desiccator. Pre-activated alu-
Compare the results of the analysis to the mina may be purchased from a supplier and
results from the reference solution. Prepare may be used as received.
the reference solution by injection 2.5 μl of 3.3.14 Silica Gel. Bio-Sil A, 100–200 mesh.
methylene chloride into 100 ml of toluene. Prior to use, activate the silica gel by heat-
This corresponds to 100 μg of methylene chlo- ing for at least 30 minutes at 180 °C. After
ride per g of adsorbent. The maximum ac- cooling, rinse the silica gel sequentially with
ceptable concentration is 1000 μg/g of adsorb- methanol and methylene chloride. Heat the
ent. If the adsorbent exceeds this level, dry- rinsed silica gel at 50 °C for 10 minutes, then
ing must be continued until the excess meth- increase the temperature gradually to 180 °C
ylene chloride is removed. over 25 minutes and maintain it at this tem-
3.1.2.4 Storage. The adsorbent must be perature for 90 minutes. Cool at room tem-
used within 4 weeks of cleaning. After clean- perature and store in a glass container with
ing, it may be stored in a wide mouth amber a Teflon-lined screw cap.
glass container with a Teflon-lined cap or 3.3.15 Silica Gel Impregnated with Sul-
placed in one of the glass adsorbent modules furic Acid. Combine 100 g of silica gel with 44
tightly sealed with glass stoppers. If g of concentrated sulfuric acid in a screw
precleaned adsorbent is purchased in sealed capped glass bottle and agitate thoroughly.
containers, it must be used within 4 weeks Disperse the solids with a stirring rod until
after the seal is broken. a uniform mixture is obtained. Store the
3.1.3 Glass Wool. Cleaned by sequential mixture in a glass container with a Teflon-
immersion in three aliquots of methylene lined screw cap.
chloride, dried in a 110 °C oven, and stored in 3.3.16 Silica Gel Impregnated with Sodium
a methylene chloride-washed glass jar with a Hydroxide. Combine 39 g of 1 N sodium hy-
Teflon-lined screw cap. droxide with 100 g of silica gel in a screw
3.1.4 Water. Deionized distilled and stored capped glass bottle and agitate thoroughly.
in a methylene chloride-rinsed glass con- Disperse solids with a stirring rod until a
tainer with a Teflon-lined screw cap. uniform mixture is obtained. Store the mix-
3.1.5 Silica Gel. Indicating type, 6 to 16 ture in glass container with a Teflon-lined
mesh. If previously used, dry at 175 °C (350 screw cap.
°F) for two hours. New silica gel may be used 3.3.17 Carbon/Celite. Combine 10.7 g of
as received. Alternately other types of AX–21 carbon with 124 g of Celite 545 in a 250-
desiccants (equivalent or better) may be ml glass bottle with a Teflon-lined screw
used, subject to the approval of the Adminis- cap. Agitate the mixture thoroughly until a
trator. uniform mixture is obtained. Store in the
3.1.6 Chromic Acid Cleaning Solution. glass container.
Dissolve 20 g of sodium dichromate in 15 ml 3.3.18 Nitrogen. Ultra high purity.
of water, and then carefully add 400 ml of 3.3.19 Hydrogen. Ultra high purity.
concentrated sulfuric acid. 3.3.20 Internal Standard Solution. Prepare
3.2 Sample Recovery. a stock standard solution containing the
3.2.2 Acetone. Pesticide quality. isotopically labelled PCDD’s and PCDF’s at
3.2.2 Methylene Chloride. Pesticide the concentrations shown in Table 1 under
qualtity. the heading ‘‘Internal Standards’’ in 10 ml of
3.2.3 Toluene. Pesticide quality. nonane.
3.3 Analysis. 3.3.21 Surrogate Standard Solution. Pre-
3.3.1 Potassium Hydroxide. ACS grade, 2- pare a stock standard solution containing
percent (weight/volume) in water. the isotopically labelled PCDD’s and PCDF’s
3.3.2 Sodium Sulfate. Granulated, reagent at the concentrations shown in Table 1 under
grade. Purify prior to use by rinsing with the heading ‘‘Surrogate Standards’’ in 10 ml
methylene chloride and oven drying. Store of nonane.
the cleaned material in a glass container 3.3.22 Recovery Standard Solution. Pre-
with a Teflon-lined screw cap. pare a stock standard solution containing
490
the isotopically labelled PCDD’s and PCDF’s gel plus impinger may be determined to the
at the concentrations shown in Table 1 under nearest 0.5 g and recorded.
the heading ‘‘Recovery Standards’’ in 10 ml 4.1.3.4 Assemble the train as shown in Fig-
of nonane. ure 23–1.
4.1.3.5 Turn on the adsorbent module and
4. Procedure condenser coil recirculating pump and begin
4.1 Sampling. The complexity of this monitoring the adsorbent module gas entry
method is such that, in order to obtain reli- temperature. Ensure proper sorbent tem-
able results, testers should be trained and perature gas entry temperature before pro-
experienced with the test procedures. ceeding and before sampling is initiated. It is
4.1.1 Pretest Preparation. extremely important that the XAD–2 adsorb-
4.1.1.1 Cleaning Glassware. All glass com- ent resin temperature never exceed 50 °C be-
ponents of the train upstream of and includ- cause thermal decomposition will occur.
ing the adsorbent module, shall be cleaned as During testing, the XAD–2 temperature must
described in section 3A of the ‘‘Manual of not exceed 20 °C for efficient capture of the
Analytical Methods for the Analysis of Pes- PCDD’s and PCDF’s.
ticides in Human and Environmental Sam- 4.1.4 Leak-Check Procedure. Same as
ples.’’ Special care shall be devoted to the re- Method 5, section 4.1.4.
moval of residual silicone grease sealants on 4.1.5 Sample Train Operation. Same as
ground glass connections of used glassware. Method 5, section 4.1.5.
Any residue shall be removed by soaking the 4.2 Sample Recovery. Proper cleanup pro-
glassware for several hours in a chromic acid cedure begins as soon as the probe is re-
cleaning solution prior to cleaning as de- moved from the stack at the end of the sam-
scribed above. pling period. Seal the nozzle end of the sam-
4.1.1.2 Adsorbent Trap. The traps must be pling probe with Teflon tape or aluminum
loaded in a clean area to avoid contamina- foil.
tion. They may not be loaded in the field. When the probe can be safely handled, wipe
Fill a trap with 20 to 40 g of XAD–2. Follow off all external particulate matter near the
the XAD–2 with glass wool and tightly cap tip of the probe. Remove the probe from the
both ends of the trap. Add 100 μl of the surro- train and close off both ends with aluminum
gate standard solution (section 3.3.21) to foil. Seal off the inlet to the train with Tef-
each trap. lon tape, a ground glass cap, or aluminum
4.1.1.3 Sample Train. It is suggested that foil.
all components be maintained according to Transfer the probe and impinger assembly
the procedure described in APTD–0576. to the cleanup area. This area shall be clean
4.1.1.4 Silica Gel. Weigh several 200 to 300 and enclosed so that the chances of losing or
g portions of silica gel in an air tight con- contaminating the sample are minimized.
tainer to the nearest 0.5 g. Record the total Smoking, which could contaminate the sam-
weight of the silica gel plus container, on ple, shall not be allowed in the cleanup area.
each container. As an alternative, the silica Inspect the train prior to and during dis-
gel may be weighed directly in its impinger assembly and note any abnormal conditions,
or sampling holder just prior to sampling. e.g., broken filters, colored impinger liquid,
4.1.1.5 Filter. Check each filter against etc. Treat the samples as follows:
light for irregularities and flaws or pinhole 4.2.1 Container No. 1. Either seal the filter
leaks. Pack the filters flat in a clean glass holder or carefully remove the filter from
container. the filter holder and place it in its identified
4.1.2 Preliminary Determinations. Same container. Use a pair of cleaned tweezers to
as section 4.1.2 of Method 5. handle the filter. If it is necessary to fold the
4.1.3 Preparation of Collection Train. filter, do so such that the particulate cake is
4.1.3.1 During preparation and assembly of inside the fold. Carefully transfer to the con-
the sampling train, keep all train openings tainer any particulate matter and filter fi-
where contamination can enter, sealed until bers which adhere to the filter holder gasket,
just prior to assembly or until sampling is by using a dry inert bristle brush and a
about to begin. sharp-edged blade. Seal the container.
4.2.2 Adsorbent Module. Remove the mod-
NOTE: Do not use sealant grease in assem- ule from the train, tightly cap both ends,
bling the train. label it, cover with aluminum foil, and store
4.1.3.2 Place approximately 100 ml of it on ice for transport to the laboratory.
water in the second and third impingers, 4.2.3 Container No. 2. Quantitatively re-
leave the first and fourth impingers empty, cover material deposited in the nozzle, probe
and transfer approximately 200 to 300 g of transfer lines, the front half of the filter
preweighed silica gel from its container to holder, and the cyclone, if used, first, by
the fifth impinger. brushing while rinsing three times each with
4.1.3.3 Place the silica gel container in a acetone and then, by rinsing the probe three
clean place for later use in the sample recov- times with methylene chloride. Collect all
ery. Alternatively, the weight of the silica the rinses in Container No. 2.
491
Rinse the back half of the filter holder 5.1.4 Container No. 2 (Acetone and Meth-
three times with acetone. Rinse the con- ylene Chloride). Concentrate the sample to a
necting line between the filter and the con- volume of about 1–5 ml using the rotary
denser three times with acetone. Soak the evaporator apparatus, at a temperature of
connecting line with three separate portions less than 37 °C. Rinse the sample container
of methylene chloride for 5 minutes each. If three times with small portions of meth-
using a separate condenser and adsorbent ylene chloride and add these to the con-
trap, rinse the condenser in the same manner centrated solution and concentrate further
as the connecting line. Collect all the rinses to near dryness. This residue contains par-
in Container No. 2 and mark the level of the ticulate matter removed in the rinse of the
liquid on the container. train probe and nozzle. Add the concentrate
4.2.4 Container No. 3. Repeat the meth- to the filter and the XAD–2 resin in the
ylene chloride-rinsing described in Section
Soxhlet apparatus described in section 5.1.1.
4.2.3 using toluene as the rinse solvent. Col-
lect the rinses in Container No. 3 and mark 5.1.5 Extraction. Add 100 μl of the internal
the level of the liquid on the container. standard solution (Section 3.3.20) to the ex-
4.2.5 Impinger Water. Measure the liquid traction thimble containing the contents of
in the first three impingers to within ±1 ml the adsorbent cartridge, the contents of Con-
by using a graduated cylinder or by weighing tainer No. 1, and the concentrate from sec-
it to within ±0.5 g by using a balance. Record tion 5.1.4. Cover the contents of the extrac-
the volume or weight of liquid present. This tion thimble with the cleaned glass wool
information is required to calculate the plug to prevent the XAD–2 resin from float-
moisture content of the effluent gas. ing into the solvent reservoir of the extrac-
Discard the liquid after measuring and re- tor. Place the thimble in the extractor, and
cording the volume or weight. add the toluene contained in the beaker to
4.2.7 Silica Gel. Note the color of the indi- the solvent reservoir. Pour additional tol-
cating silica gel to determine if it has been uene to fill the reservoir approximately 2/3
completely spent and make a mention of its full. Add Teflon boiling chips and assemble
condition. Transfer the silica gel from the the apparatus. Adjust the heat source to
fifth impinger to its original container and cause the extractor to cycle three times per
seal. hour. Extract the sample for 16 hours. After
extraction, allow the Soxhlet to cool. Trans-
5. Analysis fer the toluene extract and three 10-ml rinses
All glassware shall be cleaned as described to the rotary evaporator. Concentrate the
in section 3A of the ‘‘Manual of Analytical extract to approximately 10 ml. At this point
Methods for the Analysis of Pesticides in the analyst may choose to split the sample
Human and Environmental Samples.’’ All in half. If so, split the sample, store one half
samples must be extracted within 30 days of for future use, and analyze the other accord-
collection and analyzed within 45 days of ex- ing to the procedures in sections 5.2 and 5.3.
traction. In either case, use a nitrogen evaporative
5.1 Sample Extraction. concentrator to reduce the volume of the
5.1.1 Extraction System. Place an extrac- sample being analyzed to near dryness. Dis-
tion thimble (section 2.3.4), 1 g of silica gel, solve the residue in 5 ml of hexane.
and a plug of glass wool into the Soxhlet ap- 5.1.6 Container No. 3 (Toluene Rinse). Add
paratus, charge the apparatus with toluene, 100 μl of the Internal Standard solution (sec-
and reflux for a minimum of 3 hours. Remove tion 3.3.2) to the contents of the container.
the toluene and discard it, but retain the Concentrate the sample to a volume of about
silica gel. Remove the extraction thimble 1–5 ml using the rotary evaporator apparatus
from the extraction system and place it in a at a temperature of less than 37 °C. Rinse the
glass beaker to catch the solvent rinses.
sample container apparatus at a temperature
5.1.2 Container No. 1 (Filter). Transfer the
of less than 37 °C. Rinse the sample container
contents directly to the glass thimble of the
three times with small portions of toluene
extraction system and extract them simulta-
and add these to the concentrated solution
neously with the XAD–2 resin.
5.1.3 Adsorbent Cartridge. Suspend the ad- and concentrate further to near dryness.
sorbent module directly over the extraction Analyze the extract separately according to
thimble in the beaker (See section 5.1.1). The the procedures in sections 5.2 and 5.3, but
glass frit of the module should be in the up concentrate the solution in a rotary evapo-
position. Using a Teflon squeeze bottle con- rator apparatus rather than a nitrogen evap-
taining toluene, flush the XAD–2 into the orative concentrator.
thimble onto the bed of cleaned silica gel. 5.2 Sample Cleanup and Fractionation.
Thoroughly rinse the glass module catching 5.2.1 Silica Gel Column. Pack one end of a
the rinsings in the beaker containing the glass column, 20 mm×230 mm, with glass
thimble. If the resin is wet, effective extrac- wool. Add in sequence, 1 g silica gel, 2 g of
tion can be accomplished by loosely packing sodium hydroxide impregnated silica gel, 1 g
the resin in the thimble. Add the XAD–2 silica gel, 4 g of acid-modified silica gel, and
glass wool plug into the thimble. 1 g of silica gel. Wash the column with 30 ml
492
of hexane and discard it. Add the sample ex- dibenzofuran isomer. Other column systems
tract, dissolved in 5 ml of hexane to the col- may be used, provided that the user is able
umn with two additional 5-ml rinses. Elute to demonstrate using calibration and per-
the column with an additional 90 ml of formance checks that the column system is
hexane and retain the entire eluate. Con- able to meet the specifications of section
centrate this solution to a volume of about 1 6.1.2.2.
ml using the nitrogen evaporative concen- 5.3.1 Gas Chromatograph Operating Con-
trator (section 2.3.7). ditions.
5.2.2 Basic Alumina Column. Shorten a 25- 5.3.1.1 Injector. Configured for capillary
ml disposable Pasteur pipette to about 16 ml. column, splitless, 250 °C.
Pack the lower section with glass wool and 5.3.1.2 Carrier Gas. Helium, 1–2 ml/min.
12 g of basic alumina. Transfer the con- 5.3.1.3 Oven. Initially at 150 °C. Raise by
centrated extract from the silica gel column at least 40 °C/min to 190 °C and then at 3 °C/
to the top of the basic alumina column and min up to 300 °C.
elute the column sequentially with 120 ml of 5.3.2 High Resolution Mass Spectrometer.
0.5 percent methylene chloride in hexane fol- 5.3.2.1 Resolution. 10000 m/e.
lowed by 120 ml of 35 percent methylene 5.3.2.2 Ionization Mode. Electron impact.
chloride in hexane. Discard the first 120 ml of 5.3.2.3 Source Temperature 250 °C.
eluate. Collect the second 120 ml of eluate 5.3.2.4 Monitoring Mode. Selected ion
and concentrate it to about 0.5 ml using the monitoring. A list of the various ions to be
nitrogen evaporative concentrator. monitored is summarized in Table 3.
5.2.3 AX–21 Carbon/Celite 545 Column. Re- 5.3.2.5 Identification Criteria. The fol-
move the botton 0.5 in. from the tip of a 9-ml lowing identification criteria shall be used
disposable Pasteur pipette. Insert a glass for the characterization of polychlorinated
fiber filter disk in the top of the pipette 2.5 dibenzodioxins and dibenzofurans.
cm from the constriction. Add sufficient car- 1. The integrated ion-abundance ratio (M/
bon/celite mixture to form a 2 cm column. M+2 or M+2/M+4) shall be within 15 percent
Top with a glass wool plug. In some cases of the theoretical value. The acceptable ion-
AX–21 carbon fines may wash through the abundance ratio ranges for the identification
glass wool plug and enter the sample. This of chlorine-containing compounds are given
may be prevented by adding a celite plug to in Table 4.
the exit end of the column. Rinse the column 2. The retention time for the analytes
in sequence with 2 ml of 50 percent benzene must be within 3 seconds of the cor-
in ethyl acetate, 1 ml of 50 percent meth- responding 13 C-labeled internal standard,
ylene chloride in cyclohexane, and 2 ml of surrogate or alternate standard.
hexane. Discard these rinses. Transfer the 3. The monitored ions, shown in Table 3 for
concentrate in 1 ml of hexane from the basic a given analyte, shall reach their maximum
alumina column to the carbon/celite column within 2 seconds of each other.
along with 1 ml of hexane rinse. Elute the 4. The identification of specific isomers
column sequentially with 2 ml of 50 percent that do not have corresponding 13 C-labeled
methylene chloride in hexane and 2 ml of 50 standards is done by comparison of the rel-
percent benzene in ethyl acetate and discard ative retention time (RRT) of the analyte to
these eluates. Invert the column and elute in the nearest internal standard retention time
the reverse direction with 13 ml of toluene. with reference (i.e., within 0.005 RRT units)
Collect this eluate. Concentrate the eluate to the comparable RRT’s found in the con-
in a rotary evaporator at 50 °C to about 1 ml. tinuing calibration.
Transfer the concentrate to a Reacti-vial 5. The signal to noise ratio for all mon-
using a toluene rinse and concentrate to a itored ions must be greater than 2.5.
volume of 200 μl using a stream of N2. Store 6. The confirmation of 2, 3, 7, 8–TCDD and
extracts at room temperature, shielded from 2, 3, 7, 8–TCDF shall satisfy all of the above
light, until the analysis is performed. identification criteria.
5.3 Analysis. Analyze the sample with a 7. For the identification of PCDF’s, no sig-
gas chromatograph coupled to a mass spec- nal may be found in the corresponding
trometer (GC/MS) using the instrumental pa- PCDPE channels.
rameters in sections 5.3.1 and 5.3.2. Imme- 5.3.2.6 Quantification. The peak areas for
diately prior to analysis, add a 20 μl aliquot the two ions monitored for each analyte are
of the Recovery Standard solution from summed to yield the total response for each
Table 1 to each sample. A 2 μl aliquot of the analyte. Each internal standard is used to
extract is injected into the GC. Sample ex- quantify the indigenous PCDD’s or PCDF’s
tracts are first analyzed using the DB–5 cap- in its homologous series. For example, the
illary column to determine the concentra- 13 C –2,3,7,8-tetra chlorinated dibenzodioxin
12
tion of each isomer of PCDD’s and PCDF’s is used to calculate the concentrations of all
(tetra-through octa-). If tetra-chlorinated other tetra chlorinated isomers. Recoveries

dibenzofurans are detected in this analysis, of the tetra- and penta- internal standards
then analyze another aliquot of the sample are calculated using the 13 C 12–1,2,3,4–TCDD.
in a separate run, using the DB–225 column Recoveries of the hexa- through octa- inter-
to measure the 2,3,7,8 tetra-chloro nal standards are calculated using 13 C 12–
493
1,2,3,7,8,9–HxCDD. Recoveries of the surro- standards must be between 40 to 130 percent
gate standards are calculated using the cor- for the tetra-through hexachlorinated com-
responding homolog from the internal stand- pounds while the range is 25 to 130 percent
ard. for the higher hepta- and octachlorinated
homologues.
6. Calibration 7.3 Surrogate Recoveries. The five surro-
Same as Method 5 with the following addi- gate compounds in Table 2 are added to the
tions. resin in the adsorbent sampling cartridge be-
6.1 GC/MS System. fore the sample is collected. The surrogate
6.1.1 Initial Calibration. Calibrate the GC/ recoveries are measured relative to the in-
MS system using the set of five standards ternal standards and are a measure of collec-
shown in Table 2. The relative standard devi- tion efficiency. They are not used to measure
ation for the mean response factor from each native PCDD’s and PCDF’s. All recoveries
of the unlabeled analytes (Table 2) and of the shall be between 70 and 130 percent. Poor re-
internal, surrogate, and alternate standards coveries for all the surrogates may be an in-
shall be less than or equal to the values in dication of breakthrough in the sampling
Table 5. The signal to noise ratio for the GC train. If the recovery of all standards is
signal present in every selected ion current below 70 percent, the sampling runs must be
profile shall be greater than or equal to 2.5. repeated. As an alternative, the sampling
runs do not have to be repeated if the final
The ion abundance ratios shall be within the
results are divided by the fraction of surro-
control limits in Table 4.
gate recovery. Poor recoveries of isolated
6.1.2 Daily Performance Check.
surrogate compounds should not be grounds
6.1.2.1 Calibration Check. Inject on μl of
for rejecting an entire set of the samples.
solution Number 3 from Table 2. Calculate
7.4 Toluene QA Rinse. Report the results
the relative response factor (RRF) for each
of the toluene QA rinse separately from the
compound and compare each RRF to the cor-
total sample catch. Do not add it to the total
responding mean RRF obtained during the
sample.
initial calibration. The analyzer perform-
ance is acceptable if the measured RRF’s for 8. Quality Assurance
the labeled and unlabeled compounds for the
daily run are within the limits of the mean 8.1 Applicability. When the method is
values shown in Table 5. In addition, the ion- used to analyze samples to demonstrate com-
abundance ratios shall be within the allow- pliance with a source emission regulation, an
able control limits shown in Table 4. audit sample must be analyzed, subject to
6.1.2.2 Column Separation Check. Inject a availability.
solution of a mixture of PCDD’s and PCDF’s 8.2 Audit Procedure. Analyze an audit
that documents resolution between 2,3,7,8– sample with each set of compliance samples.
TCDD and other TCDD isomers. Resolution The audit sample contains tetra through
is defined as a valley between peaks that is octa isomers of PCDD and PCDF. Concur-
rently, analyze the audit sample and a set of
less than 25 percent of the lower of the two
compliance samples in the same manner to
peaks. Identify and record the retention time
evaluate the technique of the analyst and
windows for each homologous series.
the standards preparation. The same ana-
Perform a similar resolution check on the
lyst, analytical reagents, and analytical sys-
confirmation column to document the reso-
tem shall be used both for the compliance
lution between 2,3,7,8 TCDF and other TCDF
samples and the EPA audit sample.
isomers.
8.3 Audit Sample Availability. Audit sam-
6.2 Lock Channels. Set mass spectrometer
ples will be supplied only to enforcement
lock channels as specified in Table 3. Mon-
agencies for compliance tests. The avail-
itor the quality control check channels spec-
ability of audit samples may be obtained by
ified in Table 3 to verify instrument stability writing: Source Test Audit Coordinator (MD–
during the analysis. 77B), Quality Assurance Division, Atmos-
7. Quality Control pheric Research and Exposure Assessment
Laboratory, U.S. Environmental Protection
7.1 Sampling Train Collection Efficiency Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711,
Check. Add 100 μl of the surrogate standards or by calling the Source Test Audit Coordi-
in Table 1 to the absorbent cartridge of each nator (STAC) at (919) 541–7834. The request
train before collecting the field samples. for the audit sample must be made at least
7.2 Internal Standard Percent Recoveries. 30 days prior to the scheduled compliance
A group of nine carbon labeled PCDD’s and sample analysis.
PCDF’s representing, the tetra-through 8.4 Audit Results. Calculate the audit
octachlorinated homologues, is added to sample concentration according to the cal-
every sample prior to extraction. The role of culation procedure described in the audit in-
the internal standards is to quantify the na- structions included with the audit sample.
tive PCDD’s and PCDF’s present in the sam- Fill in the audit sample concentration and
ple as well as to determine the overall meth- the analyst’s name on the audit response
od efficiency. Recoveries of the internal form included with the audit instructions.
494
Send one copy to the EPA Regional Office or 9.4 Recovery Standard Response Factor.
the appropriate enforcement agency and a
second copy to the STAC. The EPA Regional A ci * m rs
office or the appropriate enforcement agency RRFrs = Eq. 23-3
will report the results of the audit to the A rs m ci *
laboratory being audited. Include this re- 9.5 Recovery of Internal Standards (R*).
sponse with the results of the compliance
samples in relevant reports to the EPA Re- A i * m rs
gional Office or the appropriate enforcement R* = ×100% Eq. 23- 4
agency. A rs RFrs m i *
9. Calculations 9.6 Surrogate Compound Response Factor.
Same as Method 5, section 6 with the fol-
A ci * m s
lowing additions. RRFs = Eq. 23-5
9.1 Nomenclature. A cis m ci *
Aai=Integrated ion current of the noise at the
retention time of the analyte. 9.7 Recovery of Surrogate Compounds
A*ci=Integrated ion current of the two ions (Rs).
characteristic of the internal standard i in
Asmi *
the calibration standard.
Acij=Integrated ion current of the two ions
Rs = × 100% Eq. 23-6
characteristic of compound i in the jth
A i * RRFs m s
calibration standard. 9.8 Minimum Detectable Limit (MDL).
A*cij=Integrated ion current of the two ions
characteristic of the internal standard i in 2.5 A ai m i *
the jth calibration standard. MDL = Eq. 23-7
Acsi=Integrated ion current of the two ions A ci * RRFi
characteristic of surrogate compound i in
EC16NO91.226</GPH>
9.9 Total Concentration of PCDD’s and
the calibration standard. PCDF’s in the Sample.
Ai=Integrated ion current of the two ions
characteristic of compound i in the sam- n
ple.
A*i=Integrated ion current of the two ions
C Tr = ∑ C i Eq. 23-8
characteristic of internal standard i in the i =1
EC16NO91.225</GPH>
sample. Any PCDD’s or PCDF’s that are reported
Ars=Integrated ion current of the two ions as nondetected (below the MDL) shall be
characteristic of the recovery standard. counted as zero for the purpose of calcu-
Asi=Integrated ion current of the two ions lating the total concentration of PCDD’s and
characteristic of surrogate compound i in PCDF’s in the sample.
the sample.
EC16NO91.224</GPH>
Ci=Concentration of PCDD or PCDF i in the 10. Bibliography
sample, pg/M 3. 1. American Society of Mechanical Engi-
CT=Total concentration of PCDD’s or PCDF’s neers. Sampling for the Determination of
in the sample, pg/M 3. Chlorinated Organic Compounds in Stack
mci=Mass of compound i in the calibration Emissions. Prepared for U.S. Department of
standard injected into the analyzer, pg.
EC16NO91.223</GPH>
Energy and U.S. Environmental Protection
mrs=Mass of recovery standard in the calibra- Agency. Washington DC. December 1984. 25 p.
tion standard injected into the analyzer, 2. American Society of Mechanical Engi-
pg. neers. Analytical Procedures to Assay Stack
msi=Mass of surrogate compound in the cali- Effluent Samples and Residual Combustion
bration standard, pg. Products for Polychlorinated Dibenzo-p-
RRFi=Relative response factor. Dioxins (PCDD) and Polychlorinated EC16NO91.222</GPH>
RRFrs=Recovery standard response factor. Dibenzofurans (PCDF). Prepared for the U.S.
RRFs=Surrogate compound response factor. Department of Energy and U.S. Environ-
9.2 Average Relative Response Factor. mental Protection Agency. Washington, DC.
December 1984. 23 p.
1 n A cij m * ci 3. Thompson, J. R. (ed.). Analysis of Pes-
RRFi = ∑ Eq. 23-1
EC16NO91.221</GPH>
ticide Residues in Human and Environ-

n j=1 A * cij m ci mental Samples. U.S. Environmental Protec-
tion Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC.
9.3 Concentration of the PCDD’s and 1974.
PCDF’s. 4. Triangle Laboratories. Case Study: Anal-

ysis of Samples for the Presence of Tetra
mi * Ai
EC16NO91.220</GPH>
Through Octachloro-p-Dibenzodioxins and

Ci = Eq. 23-2 Dibenzofurans. Research Triangle Park, NC.
A i * RRFi Vmstd 1988. 26 p.
495
EC16NO91.219</GPH>
5. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. TABLE 1—COMPOSITION OF THE SAMPLE FOR-
Method 8290—The Analysis of Poly- TIFICATION AND RECOVERY STANDARDS SOLU-
chlorinated Dibenzo-p-dioxin and Poly- TIONS—Continued
chlorinated Dibenzofurans by High-Resolu-
tion Gas Chromotography/High-Resolution Concentra-
Analyte
Mass Spectrometry. In: Test Methods for tion (pg/μl)
Evaluating Solid Waste. Washington, DC. 13
C12-1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDF ........................... 100
SW–846. 13
C12-1,2,3,4,7,8,9-HpCDF ....................... 100
Recovery Standards:
TABLE 1—COMPOSITION OF THE SAMPLE FOR- 13 C -1,2,3,4-TCDD ..................................
12 500
TIFICATION AND RECOVERY STANDARDS SOLU- 13 C -1,2,3,7,8,9-HxCDD ..........................
12 500
TIONS
Concentra- TABLE 2—COMPOSITION OF THE INITIAL

Analyte tion (pg/μl) CALIBRATION SOLUTIONS
Internal Standards:
13 C -2,3,7,8-TCDD ..................................
Concentrations (pg/μL)
12 100
13 C -1,2,3,7,8-PeCDD ............................. 100
12 Compound Solution No.
13 C -1,2,3,6,7,8-HxCDD .......................... 100
12
13 C -1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDD ....................... 100 1 2 3 4 5
12
13 C -OCDD .............................................. 100
12
13 C -2,3,7,8-TCDF ................................... 100 Alternate Standard:
12
13 C -1,2,3,7,8-PeCDF .............................. 100 13 C -1,2,3,7,8,9-
12 12
13 C -1,2,3,6,7,8-HxCDF ........................... 100
12 HxCDF ................... 2.5 5 25 250 500
13 C -1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDF ....................... 100
12 Recovery Standards:
Surrogate Standards: 13 C -1,2,3,4-TCDD ..
12 100 100 100 100 100
37 Cl -2,3,7,8-TCDD ................................... 100
4 13 C -1,2,3,7,8,9-
12
13 C -1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDD .......................... 100
12 HxCDD ................... 100 100 100 100 100
13 C -2,3,4,7,8-PeCDF .............................. 100
12
TABLE 3—ELEMENTAL COMPOSITIONS AND EXACT MASSES OF THE IONS MONITORED BY HIGH
RESOLUTION MASS SPECTROMETRY FOR PCDD’S AND PCDF’S
Descriptor Accurate mass Ion type Elemental composition Analyte
No.
2 292.9825 LOCK C7F11 PFK

303.9016 M C12H435Cl4O TCDF
305.8987 M+2 C12H435Cl37O TCDF
315.9419 M 13C H 35Cl O TCDF (S)
12 4 4
317.9389 M+2 13C H 35Cl 37ClO TCDF (S)
12 4 3
319.8965 M 35
C12H4 ClO2 TCDD
321.8936 M+2 C12H435Cl337ClO2 TCDD
327.8847 M C12H437Cl4O2 TCDD (S)
330.9792 QC C7F13 PFK
331.9368 M 13C H 35Cl O TCDD (S)
12 4 4 2
333.9339 M+2 13C H 35Cl37ClO TCDD (S)
12 4 2
339.8597 M+2 C12H335Cl437ClO PECDF
341.8567 M+4 C12H335Cl337Cl2O PeCDF
351.9000 M+2 13C H 35Cl 37ClO PeCDF (S)
12 3 4
353.8970 M+4 13C H 35Cl3537Cl O PeCDF (S)
12 3 2
355.8546 M+2 C12H335Cl337ClO2 PeCDD
357.8516 M+4 35 37
C12H3 Cl3 Cl2O2 PeCDD
367.8949 M+2 13C H 35Cl 37ClO PeCDD (S)
12 3 4 2
369.8919 M+4 13C H 35Cl 37 Cl O PeCDD (S)
12 3 3 2 2
375.8364 M+2 C12H435Cl537ClO HxCDPE
409.7974 M+2 C12H335Cl637ClO HpCPDE
3 373.8208 M+2 C12H235Cl537ClO HxCDF
375.8178 M+4 C12H235Cl437Cl2O HxCDF
383.8639 M 13C H 35Cl O HxCDF (S)
12 2 6
385.8610 M+2 13C H 35Cl 37ClO HxCDF (S)
12 2 5
389.8157 M+2 C12H235Cl537ClO2 HxCDD
391.8127 M+4 C12H235Cl437Cl2O2 HxCDD
392.9760 LOCK C9F15 PFK
401.8559 M+2 13C H 35Cl 37ClO HxCDD (S)
12 2 5 2
403.8529 M+4 13C H 35Cl 37Cl O HxCDD (S)
12 2 4 2
445.7555 M+4 C12H235Cl637Cl2O OCDPE
430.9729 QC C9F17 PFK
4 407.7818 M+2 C12H35Cl637ClO HpCDF
409.7789 M+4 C12H35Cl537Cl2O HpCDF

417.8253 M 13C H35Cl O HpCDF (S)
12 7
419.8220 M+2 13C H35Cl 37ClO HpCDF (S)
12 6
423.7766 M+2 C12H35Cl637ClO2 HpCDD
425.7737 M+4 C12H35Cl537Cl2O2 HpCDD
496
TABLE 3—ELEMENTAL COMPOSITIONS AND EXACT MASSES OF THE IONS MONITORED BY HIGH
RESOLUTION MASS SPECTROMETRY FOR PCDD’S AND PCDF’S—Continued
Descriptor Accurate mass Ion type Elemental composition Analyte
No.
435.8169 M+2 13C 35Cl 37ClO

12H 6 2 HpCDD (S)
437.8140 M+4 13C 35 37
12H Cl5 Cl2O2 HpCDD (S)
479.7165 M+4 35 37
C12H Cl7 Cl2O NCPDE
430.9729 LOCK C9F17 PFK
441.7428 M+2 C1235Cl737ClO OCDF
443.7399 M+4 C1235Cl637Cl2O OCDF
457.7377 M+2 C1235Cl737ClO2 OCDD
459.7348 M+4 C1235Cl637Cl2O2 OCDD
469.7779 M+2 13C 35Cl 37ClO OCDD (S)
12 7 2
471.7750 M+4 13C 35Cl 37Cl O OCDD (S)
12 6 2 2
513.6775 M+4 35 37
C12 Cl8 Cl2O2 DCDPE
442.9728 QC C10F17 PFK
(a) The following nuclidic masses were used:
H=1.007825
C=12.000000
13C=13.003355
F=18.9984
O=15.994915
35Cl=34.968853
37Cl=36.965903
S=Labeled Standard
QC=Ion selected for monitoring instrument stability during the GC/MS analysis.
TABLE 4—ACCEPTABLE RANGES FOR ION- TABLE 5—MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR INITIAL
ABUNDANCE RATIOS OF PCDD’S AND PCDF’S AND DAILY CALIBRATION RESPONSE FAC-
TORS—Continued
No. of Theo- Control limits
chlorine Ion type retical
atoms ratio Lower Upper Relative response factors
Compound Daily calibra-

4 M/M+2 0.77 0.65 0.89 Initial calibration % dif-
5 M+2/M+4 1.55 1.32 1.78 tion RSD ference
6 M+2/M+4 1.24 1.05 1.43
6a M/M+2 0.51 0.43 0.59 13C
12-1,2,3,7,8-PeCDD .. 30 30
7b M/M+2 0.44 0.37 0.51 13C
12-1,2,3,6,7,8-HxCDD 25 25
7 M+2/M+4 1.04 0.88 1.20 13C
12-1,2,3,4,6,7,8-
8 M+2/M+4 0.89 0.76 1.02 HpCDD ....................... 30 30
13C
a Used only for 13C-HxCDF. 12-OCDD ................... 30 30
13C
b Used only for 13C-HpCDF. 12-2,3,7,8-TCDF ........ 30 30
13C -1,2,3,7,8-PeCDF .. 30 30
12
13C -1,2,3,6,7,8-HxCDF 30 30
TABLE 5—MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR INITIAL 12
13C -1,2,3,4,6,7,8-
AND DAILY CALIBRATION RESPONSE FACTORS 12
HpCDF ........................ 30 30
Surrogate
Relative response factors
Standards:
37Cl -2,3,7,8-TCDD ........ 25 25
Compound Daily calibra- 4
Initial calibration % dif- 13C -2,3,4,7,8-PeCDF ..
12 25 25
tion RSD ference 13C -1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDD
12 25 25
13C -1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDF 25 25
12
Unlabeled 13C -1,2,3,4,7,8,9-
12
Analytes: HpCDF ........................ 25 25
2,3,7,8-TCDD ................. 25 25
Alternate
2,3,7,8-TCDF ................. 25 25
Standard:
1,2,3,7,8-PeCDD ............ 25 25 13C -1,2,3,7,8,9-HxCDF
12 25 25
1,2,3,7,8-PeCDF ............ 25 25
2,3,4,7,8-PeCDF ............ 25 25
1,2,4,5,7,8-HxCDD ......... 25 25 METHOD 24—DETERMINATION OF VOLATILE
1,2,3,6,7,8-HxCDD ......... 25 25 MATTER CONTENT, WATER CONTENT, DEN-
1,2,3,7,8,9-HxCDD ......... 25 25
SITY, VOLUME SOLIDS, AND WEIGHT SOLIDS
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDF ......... 25 25
1,2,3,6,7,8-HxCDF ......... 25 25 OF SURFACE COATINGS
1,2,3,7,8,9-HxCDF ......... 25 25
2,3,4,6,7,8-HxCDF ......... 25 25 1.0 Scope and Application
1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDD ...... 25 25 1.1 Analytes.
1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDF ...... 25 25
OCDD ............................ 25 25
Analyte CAS No.
OCDF ............................. 30 30
Internal Volatile organic compounds No CAS Number assigned
Standards: Water. 7732–18–5
13C -2,3,7,8-TCDD ....... 25 25
12
497
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- 6.2 ASTM D 2369–81, 87, 90, 92, 93, or 95,
ble for the determination of volatile matter Standard Test Method for Volatile Content
content, water content, density, volume sol- of Coatings.
ids, and weight solids of paint, varnish, lac- 6.3 ASTM D 3792–79 or 91, Standard Test
quer, or other related surface coatings. Method for Water Content of Water Reduc-
1.3 Precision and Bias. Intra-and inter- ible Paints by Direct Injection into a Gas
laboratory analytical precision statements Chromatograph.
are presented in Section 13.1. No bias has 6.4 ASTM D 4017–81, 90, or 96a, Standard
been identified. Test Method for Water in Paints and Paint
Materials by the Karl Fischer Titration
Method.
2.1 Standard methods are used to deter- 6.5 ASTM 4457–85 91, Standard Test Meth-
mine the volatile matter content, water con- od for Determination of Dichloromethane
tent, density, volume solids, and weight sol- and 1,1,1-Trichloroethane in Paints and Coat-
ids of paint, varnish, lacquer, or other re- ings by Direct Injection into a Gas Chro-
lated surface coatings. matograph.
6.6 ASTM D 5403–93, Standard Test Meth-
3.0 Definitions ods for Volatile Content of Radiation Cur-
3.1 Waterborne coating means any coating able Materials.
which contains more than 5 percent water by 6.7 ASTM D 6419–00, Test Method for Vola-
weight in its volatile fraction. tile Content of Sheet-Fed and Coldset Web
3.2 Multicomponent coatings are coatings Offset Printing Inks.
that are packaged in two or more parts,
which are combined before application. Upon 7.0 Reagents and Standards
combination a coreactant from one part of 7.1 The reagents and standards specified
the coating chemically reacts, at ambient in the ASTM methods listed in Sections 6.1
conditions, with a coreactant from another through 6.6 are required.
part of the coating.
3.3 Ultraviolet (UV) radiation-cured coatings 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
are coatings which contain unreacted mono- and Transport
mers that are polymerized by exposure to ul-
traviolet light. 8.1 Follow the sample collection, preser-
vation, storage, and transport procedures de-
4.0 Interferences [Reserved] scribed in Reference 1 of Section 16.0.
5.0 Safety 9.0 Quality Control

5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve 9.1 Reproducibility
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- NOTE: Not applicable to UV radiation-
ment. This test method may not address all cured coatings). The variety of coatings that
of the safety problems associated with its may be subject to analysis makes it nec-
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this essary to verify the ability of the analyst
test method to establish appropriate safety and the analytical procedures to obtain re-
producible results for the coatings tested.
applicability of regulatory limitations prior
Verification is accomplished by running du-
to performing this test method.
plicate analyses on each sample tested (Sec-
5.2 Hazardous Components. Several of the tions 11.2 through 11.4) and comparing the re-
compounds that may be contained in the
sults with the intra-laboratory precision
coatings analyzed by this method may be ir-
statements (Section 13.1) for each parameter.
ritating or corrosive to tissues (e.g.,
heptane) or may be toxic (e.g., benzene, 9.2 Confidence Limits for Waterborne
methyl alcohol). Nearly all are fire hazards. Coatings. Because of the inherent increased
Appropriate precautions can be found in ref- imprecision in the determination of the VOC
erence documents, such as Reference 3 of content of waterborne coatings as the weight
Section 16.0. percent of water increases, measured param-
eters for waterborne coatings are replaced
6.0 Equipment and Supplies with appropriate confidence limits (Section
12.6). These confidence limits are based on
The equipment and supplies specified in
the ASTM methods listed in Sections 6.1 measured parameters and inter-laboratory
through 6.6 (incorporated by reference—see precision statements.
§ 60.17 for acceptable versions of the methods)

are required:
6.1 ASTM D 1475–60, 80, or 90, Standard 10.1 Perform the calibration and stand-
Test Method for Density of Paint, Varnish, ardization procedures specified in the ASTM
Lacquer, and Related Products. methods listed in Sections 6.1 through 6.6.
498
11.0 Analytical Procedure weighing dish. For coatings believed to have
a volatile content less than 40 weight per-
Additional guidance can be found in Ref-
cent, a suitable size is 0.3 + 0.10 g, but for
erence 2 of Section 16.0.
11.1 Non Thin-film Ultraviolet Radiation- coatings believed to have a volatile content
cured (UV radiation-cured) Coatings. greater than 40 weight percent, a suitable
11.1.1 Volatile Content. Use the procedure size is 0.5 ±0.1 g.
in ASTM D 5403 to determine the volatile NOTE: If the volatile content determined
matter content of the coating except the pursuant to Section 12.4 is not in the range
curing test described in NOTE 2 of ASTM D corresponding to the sample size chosen re-
5403 is required. peat the test with the appropriate sample
11.1.2 Water Content. To determine water size. Add the specimen dropwise, shaking
content, follow Section 11.3.2. (swirling) the dish to disperse the specimen
11.1.3 Coating Density. To determine completely in the solvent. If the material
coating density, follow Section 11.3.3. forms a lump that cannot be dispersed, dis-
11.1.4 Solids Content. To determine solids card the specimen and prepare a new one.
content, follow Section 11.3.4. Similarly, prepare a duplicate. The sample
11.1.5 To determine if a coating or ink can shall stand for a minimum of 1 hour, but no
be classified as a thin-film UV cured coating more than 24 hours prior to being oven cured
or ink, use the equation in Section 12.2. If C at 110 ±5 °C (230 ±9 °F) for 1 hour.
is less than 0.2 g and A is greater than or
11.2.2.2 Heat the aluminum foil dishes
equal to 225 cm2 (35 in2) then the coating or
containing the dispersed specimens in the
ink is considered a thin-film UV radiation-
forced draft oven for 60 min at 110 ±5 °C (230
cured coating and ASTM D 5403 is not appli-
±9 °F). Caution—provide adequate ventila-
cable.
tion, consistent with accepted laboratory
NOTE: As noted in Section 1.4 of ASTM D practice, to prevent solvent vapors from ac-
5403, this method may not be applicable to cumulating to a dangerous level.
radiation curable materials wherein the 11.2.2.3 Remove the dishes from the oven,
volatile material is water. place immediately in a desiccator, cool to
11.2 Multi-component Coatings. ambient temperature, and weigh to within 1
11.2.1 Sample Preparation. mg.
11.2.1.1 Prepare about 100 ml of sample by 11.2.2.4 Run analyses in pairs (duplicate
mixing the components in a storage con- sets) for each coating mixture until the cri-
tainer, such as a glass jar with a screw top or terion in Section 11.4 is met. Calculate WV
a metal can with a cap. The storage con- following Equation 24–2 and record the arith-
tainer should be just large enough to hold metic average.
the mixture. Combine the components (by 11.2.3 Water Content. To determine water
weight or volume) in the ratio recommended content, follow Section 11.3.2.
by the manufacturer. Tightly close the con- 11.2.4 Coating Density. To determine
tainer between additions and during mixing coating density, follow Section 11.3.3.
to prevent loss of volatile materials. How- 11.2.5 Solids Content. To determine solids
ever, most manufacturers mixing instruc- content, follow Section 11.3.4.
tions are by volume. Because of possible
11.2.6 Exempt Solvent Content. To deter-
error caused by expansion of the liquid when
mine the exempt solvent content, follow Sec-
measuring the volume, it is recommended
tion 11.3.5.
that the components be combined by weight.
When weight is used to combine the compo- NOTE: For all other coatings (i.e., water-or
nents and the manufacturer’s recommended solvent-borne coatings) not covered by
ratio is by volume, the density must be de- multicomponent or UV radiation-cured coat-
termined by Section 11.3.3. ings, analyze as shown below:
11.2.1.2 Immediately after mixing, take 11.3 Water-or Solvent-borne coatings.
aliquots from this 100 ml sample for deter- 11.3.1 Volatile Content. Use the procedure
mination of the total volatile content, water in ASTM D 2369 to determine the volatile
content, and density. matter content (may include water) of the
11.2.2 Volatile Content. To determine coating.
total volatile content, use the apparatus and 11.3.1.1 Record the following information:
reagents described in ASTM D2369 Sections 3
W1=weight of dish and sample before heating,
and 4 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17
g
for the approved versions of the standard),
respectively, and use the following proce- W2=weight of dish and sample after heating,
dures: g
11.2.2.1 Weigh and record the weight of an W3=sample weight, g.
aluminum foil weighing dish. Add 3 ±1 ml of 11.3.1.2 Calculate the weight fraction of
suitable solvent as specified in ASTM D2369 the volatile matter (Wv) for each analysis as
to the weighing dish. Using a syringe as shown in Section 12.3.
specified in ASTM D2369, weigh to 1 mg, by 11.3.1.3 Run duplicate analyses until the
difference, a sample of coating into the difference between the two values in a set is
499
less than or equal to the intra-laboratory Wv=Weight fraction of the volatile matter, g/
precision statement in Section 13.1. g.
11.3.1.4 Record the arithmetic average Ww=Weight fraction of the water, g/g.
(Wv). 12.2 To determine if a coating or ink can
11.3.2 Water Content. For waterborne be classified as a thin-film UV cured coating
coatings only, determine the weight fraction or ink, use the following equation:
of water (Ww) using either ASTM D 3792 or
ASTM D 4017.
11.3.2.1 Run duplicate analyses until the
C = F A Dc Eq. 24-1
difference between the two values in a set is 12.3 Calculate Wv for each analysis as
less than or equal to the intra-laboratory shown below:
precision statement in Section 13.1.
11.3.2.2 Record the arithmetic average W1 − W2
(ww). Wv = Eq. 24-2
11.3.3 Coating Density. Determine the W3
density (Dc, kg/l) of the surface coating
12.4 Nonaqueous Volatile Matter.
using the procedure in ASTM D 1475.
11.3.3.1 Run duplicate analyses until each 12.4.1 Solvent-borne Coatings.
value in a set deviates from the mean of the
set by no more than the intra-laboratory Wo = Wv Eq. 24-3
precision statement in Section 13.1. 12.4.2 Waterborne Coatings.
11.3.3.2 Record the arithmetic average
(Dc). Wo = Wv − Ww Eq. 24-4
11.3.4 Solids Content. Determine the vol-
ume fraction (Vs) solids of the coating by 12.4.3 Coatings Containing Exempt Sol-
calculation using the manufacturer’s formu- vents.
lation.
11.3.5 Exempt Solvent Content. Determine Wo = Wv − WE − Ww Eq. 24-5
the weight fraction of exempt solvents (WE) 12.5 Weight Fraction Solids.
by using ASTM Method D4457. Run a dupli-
cate set of determinations and record the Ws = 1 − Wv Eq. 24-6
arithmetic average (WE).
11.4 Sample Analysis Criteria. For Wv and 12.6 Confidence Limit Calculations for
Ww, run duplicate analyses until the dif- Waterborne Coatings. To calculate the lower
ference between the two values in a set is confidence limit, subtract the appropriate
less than or equal to the intra-laboratory inter-laboratory precision value from the
precision statement for that parameter. For measured mean value for that parameter. To
Dc, run duplicate analyses until each value calculate the upper confidence limit, add the
in a set deviates from the mean of the set by appropriate inter-laboratory precision value
ER17OC00.361</MATH>
no more than the intra-laboratory precision to the measured mean value for that param-
statement. If, after several attempts, it is eter. For Wv and Dc, use the lower confidence
concluded that the ASTM procedures cannot limits; for Ww, use the upper confidence
be used for the specific coating with the es- limit. Because Ws is calculated, there is no
tablished intra-laboratory precision (exclud- adjustment for this parameter.
ing UV radiation-cured coatings), the U.S.
ER17OC00.360</MATH>
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 13.0 Method Performance
will assume responsibility for providing the 13.1 Analytical Precision Statements. The
necessary procedures for revising the method intra-and inter-laboratory precision state-
or precision statements upon written request ments are given in Table 24–1 in Section 17.0.
to: Director, Emissions, Monitoring, and
Analysis Division, MD–14, Office of Air Qual- 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
ER17OC00.359</MATH>
ity Planning and Standards, U.S. Environ-
mental Protection Agency, Research Tri- 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
angle Park, NC 27711.
16.0 References
Same as specified in Section 6.0, with the
12.1 Nomenclature. addition of the following:
ER17OC00.358</MATH>
A=Area of substrate, cm2, (in2). 1. Standard Procedure for Collection of

C=Amount of coating or ink added to the Coating and Ink Samples for Analysis by
substrate, g. Reference Methods 24 and 24A. EPA–340/1–91–
Dc=Density of coating or ink, g/cm3 (g/in3). 010. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
F=Manufacturer’s recommended film thick- Stationary Source Compliance Division,

ness, cm (in). Washington, D.C. September 1991.
ER17OC00.357</MATH>
Wo=Weight fraction of nonaqueous volatile 2. Standard Operating Procedure for Anal-

matter, g/g. ysis of Coating and Ink Samples by Ref-
Ws=Weight fraction of solids, g/g. erence Methods 24 and 24A.
500
ER17OC00.356</MATH>
EPA–340/1–91–011. U.S. Environmental Pro- 3. Handbook of Hazardous Materials: Fire,
tection Agency, Stationary Source Compli- Safety, Health. Alliance of American Insur-
ance Division, Washington, D.C. September ers. Schaumberg, IL. 1983.
1991.
Validation Data
TABLE 24–1—ANALYTICAL PRECISION STATEMENTS
Intra-laboratory Inter-laboratory
Volatile matter content, Wv ........................................................... ±0.015 Wv .............................. ±0.047 W̄v

Water content, Ww ........................................................................ ±0.029 W̄w ............................. ±0.075 Ww
Density, Dc ..................................................................................... ±0.001 kg/l ............................. ±0.002 kg/l
METHOD 24A—DETERMINATION OF VOLATILE ards. Appropriate precautions can be found

MATTER CONTENT AND DENSITY OF PUBLICA- in reference documents, such as Reference 6
TION ROTOGRAVURE INKS AND RELATED PUB- of Section 16.0.
LICATION ROTOGRAVURE COATINGS
The following equipment and supplies are
1.1 Analytes. required for sample analysis:
6.1 Weighing Dishes. Aluminum foil, 58
Analyte CAS No. mm (2.3 in.) in diameter by 18 mm (0.7 in.)
Volatile organic compounds No CAS number assigned.
high, with a flat bottom. There must be at
(VOC). least three weighing dishes per sample.
6.2 Disposable Syringe. 5 ml.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- 6.3 Analytical Balance. To measure to
ble for the determination of the VOC content within 0.1 mg.
and density of solvent-borne (solvent-reduc- 6.4 Oven. Vacuum oven capable of main-
ible) publication rotogravure inks and retaining a temperature of 120 ±2 °C (248 ±4 °F)
lated publication rotogravure coatings. and an absolute pressure of 510 ±51 mm Hg (20
±2 in. Hg) for 4 hours. Alternatively, a forced
2.0 Summary of Method draft oven capable of maintaining a tempera-
ture of 120 ±2 °C (248 ±4 °F) for 24 hours.
2.1 Separate procedures are used to deter- 6.5 The equipment and supplies specified
mine the VOC weight fraction and density of in ASTM D 1475–60, 80, or 90 (incorporated by
the ink or related coating and the density of reference—see § 60.17).
the solvent in the ink or related coating. The
VOC weight fraction is determined by meas- 7.0 Reagents and Standards
uring the weight loss of a known sample
quantity which has been heated for a speci- 7.1 The reagents and standards specified
fied length of time at a specified tempera- in ASTM D 1475–60, 80, or 90 are required.
ture. The density of both the ink or related 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
coating and solvent are measured by a stand-
and Transport
ard procedure. From this information, the
VOC volume fraction is calculated. 8.1 Follow the sample collection, preser-
vation, storage, and transport procedures de-
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] scribed in Reference 4 of Section 16.0.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved] 9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
5.0 Safety 10.0 Calibration and Standardization
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve [Reserved]
ment. This test method does not purport to
address all of the safety problems associated Additional guidance can be found in Ref-
with its use. It is the responsibility of the erence 5 of Section 16.0.
user of this test method to establish appro- 11.1 VOC Weight Fraction. Shake or mix
priate safety and health practices and to de- the ink or related coating sample thoroughly
termine the applicability of regulatory limi- to assure that all the solids are completely
tations prior to performing this test method. suspended. Label and weigh to the nearest 0.1
5.2 Hazardous Components. Some of the mg a weighing dish and record this weight
compounds that may be contained in the (Mx1). Using a 5 ml syringe, without a needle,
inks or related coatings analyzed by this extract an aliquot from the ink or related
method may be irritating or corrosive to tis- coating sample. Weigh the syringe and ali-
sues or may be toxic. Nearly all are fire haz- quot to the nearest 0.1 mg and record this
501
weight (Mcy1). Transfer 1 to 3 g of the aliquot lined in ASTM D 1475. Make a total of three
to the tared weighing dish. Reweigh the sy- determinations for each ink or related coat-
ringe and remaining aliquot to the nearest ing sample. Report the ink or related coating
0.1 mg and record this weight (Mcy2). Heat the density as the arithmetic average (Dc) of the
weighing dish with the transferred aliquot in three determinations.
a vacuum oven at an absolute pressure of 510 11.3 Solvent Density. Determine the den-
±51 mm Hg (20 ±2 in. Hg) and a temperature sity of the solvent (Do) according to the pro-
of 120 ±2 °C (248 ±4 °F) for 4 hours. Alter- cedure outlined in ASTM D 1475. Make a
natively, heat the weighing dish with the total of three determinations for each ink or
transferred aliquot in a forced draft oven at related coating sample. Report the solvent
a temperature of 120 ±2 °C for 24 hours. After density as the arithmetic average (Do) of the
the weighing dish has cooled, reweigh it to
three determinations.
the nearest 0.1 mg and record the weight
(Mx2). Repeat this procedure two times for 12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
each ink or related coating sample, for a
total of three samples. 12.1 VOC Weight Fraction. For each deter-
11.2 Ink or Related Coating Density. De- mination, calculate the volatile organic con-
termine the density of the ink or related tent weight fraction (Wo) using the following
coating (Dc) according to the procedure out- equation:
M x1 + M cy1 − M cy 2 − M x 2
Wo = Eq. 24A-1
M cy1 − M cy 2
Make a total of three determinations. Report 12.2 VOC Volume Fraction. Calculate the
the VOC weight fraction as the arithmetic volume fraction volatile organic content (Vo)
average (Wo) of the three determinations. using the following equation:
Wo Dc
Vo = Eq. 24A-2
Do
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] Stationary Source Compliance Division,

Washington, D.C. September 1991.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] 5. Standard Operating Procedure for Anal-
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] ysis of Coating and Ink Samples by Ref-
erence Methods 24 and 24A. EPA–340/1–91–011.
16.0 References U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Sta-
tionary Source Compliance Division, Wash-
1. Standard Test Method for Density of
ington, D.C. September 1991.
Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Prod-
ucts. ASTM Designation D 1475. 6. Handbook of Hazardous Materials: Fire,
2. Teleconversation. Wright, Chuck, Safety, Health. Alliance of American Insur-
Inmont Corporation with Reich, R., A., Ra- ers. Schaumberg, IL. 1983.
dian Corporation. September 25, 1979, Gra-
vure Ink Analysis. 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
3. Teleconversation. Oppenheimer, Robert, Validation Data [Reserved]
Gravure Research Institute with Burt, Rick,
METHOD 25—DETERMINATION OF TOTAL GAS-
Radian Corporation, November 5, 1979, Gra-
EOUS NONMETHANE ORGANIC EMISSIONS AS
vure Ink Analysis.
CARBON
4. Standard Procedure for Collection of
Coating and Ink Samples for Analysis by 1.0 Scope and Application
Reference Methods 24 and 24A. EPA–340/1–91–
010. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1.1 Analytes.

ER17OC00.363</MATH>
Total gaseous nonmethane organic compounds (TGNMO) ........... N/A Dependent upon analytical equipment.
502
ER17OC00.362</MATH>
1.2 Applicability. sampling is completed, the TGNMO are de-
1.2.1 This method is applicable for the determined by independently analyzing the
termination of volatile organic compounds condensate trap and sample tank fractions
(VOC) (measured as total gaseous non- and combining the analytical results. The
methane organics (TGNMO) and reported as organic content of the condensate trap frac-
carbon) in stationary source emissions. This tion is determined by oxidizing the NMO to
method is not applicable for the determina- carbon dioxide (CO2) and quantitatively col-
tion of organic particulate matter. lecting in the effluent in an evacuated ves-
1.2.2 This method is not the only method sel; then a portion of the CO2 is reduced to
that applies to the measurement of VOC. CH4 and measured by an FID. The organic
Costs, logistics, and other practicalities of content of the sample tank fraction is meas-
source testing may make other test methods ured by injecting a portion of the sample
more desirable for measuring VOC contents into a gas chromatographic column to sepa-
of certain effluent streams. Proper judgment rate the NMO from carbon monoxide (CO),
is required in determining the most applica- CO2, and CH4; the NMO are oxidized to CO2,
ble VOC test method. For example, depend- reduced to CH4, and measured by an FID. In
ing upon the molecular composition of the this manner, the variable response of the
organics in the effluent stream, a totally FID associated with different types of
automated semicontinuous nonmethane organics is eliminated.
organics (NMO) analyzer interfaced directly
to the source may yield accurate results. 3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
This approach has the advantage of pro-
viding emission data semicontinuously over 4.0 Interferences
an extended time period. 4.1 Carbon Dioxide and Water Vapor.
1.2.3 Direct measurement of an effluent When carbon dioxide (CO2) and water vapor
with a flame ionization detector (FID) ana- are present together in the stack, they can
lyzer may be appropriate with prior charac- produce a positive bias in the sample. The
terization of the gas stream and knowledge magnitude of the bias depends on the con-
that the detector responds predictably to the centrations of CO2 and water vapor. As a
organic compounds in the stream. If present, guideline, multiply the CO2 concentration,
methane (CH4) will, of course, also be meas- expressed as volume percent, times the water
ured. The FID can be used under any of the vapor concentration. If this product does not
following limited conditions: (1) Where only exceed 100, the bias can be considered insig-
one compound is known to exist; (2) when nificant. For example, the bias is not signifi-
the organic compounds consist of only hy- cant for a source having 10 percent CO2 and
drogen and carbon; (3) where the relative 10 percent water vapor, but it might be sig-
percentages of the compounds are known or nificant for a source having 10 percent CO2
can be determined, and the FID responses to
and 20 percent water vapor.
the compounds are known; (4) where a con-
4.2. Particulate Matter. Collection of or-
sistent mixture of the compounds exists be-
ganic particulate matter in the condensate
fore and after emission control and only the
trap would produce a positive bias. A filter is
relative concentrations are to be assessed; or
included in the sampling equipment to mini-
(5) where the FID can be calibrated against
mize this bias.
mass standards of the compounds emitted
(solvent emissions, for example). 5.0 Safety
1.2.4 Another example of the use of a di-
rect FID is as a screening method. If there is 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
enough information available to provide a hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
rough estimate of the analyzer accuracy, the ment. This test method may not address all
FID analyzer can be used to determine the of the safety problems associated with its
VOC content of an uncharacterized gas use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
stream. With a sufficient buffer to account test method to establish appropriate safety
for possible inaccuracies, the direct FID can and health practices and determine the ap-
be a useful tool to obtain the desired results plicability of regulatory limitations prior to
without costly exact determination. performing this test method.
1.2.5 In situations where a qualitative/
quantitative analysis of an effluent stream is 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
desired or required, a gas chromatographic 6.1 Sample Collection. The sampling sys-
FID system may apply. However, for sources tem consists of a heated probe, heated filter,
emitting numerous organics, the time and condensate trap, flow control system, and
expense of this approach will be formidable. sample tank (see Figure 25–1). The TGNMO
sampling equipment can be constructed from
commercially available components and

2.1 An emission sample is withdrawn from components fabricated in a machine shop.
the stack at a constant rate through a heat- The following equipment is required:
ed filter and a chilled condensate trap by 6.1.1 Heated Probe. 6.4-mm (1⁄4-in.) OD
means of an evacuated sample tank. After stainless steel tubing with a heating system
503
capable of maintaining a gas temperature at arms of the condensate trap making it dif-
the exit end of at least 129 °C (265 °F). The ficult to remove the condensate trap. This
probe shall be equipped with a temperature problem can be prevented by attaching a
sensor at the exit end to monitor the gas steel plate between the arms of the conden-
temperature. A suitable probe is shown in sate trap in the same plane as the arms to
Figure 25–1. The nozzle is an elbow fitting at- completely fill the intervening space.
tached to the front end of the probe while 6.1.5 Valve. Stainless steel control valve
the temperature sensor is inserted in the for starting and stopping sample flow.
side arm of a tee fitting attached to the rear 6.1.6 Metering Valve. Stainless steel valve
of the probe. The probe is wrapped with a for regulating the sample flow rate through
suitable length of high temperature heating the sample train.
tape, and then covered with two layers of 6.1.7 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equiva-
glass cloth insulation and one layer of alu- lent, capable of measuring sample flow in
minum foil or an equivalent wrapping. the range of 60 to 100 cm3/min (0.13 to 0.21 ft3/
NOTE: If it is not possible to use a heating hr).
system for safety reasons, an unheated sys- 6.1.8 Sample Tank. Stainless steel or alu-
tem with an in-stack filter is a suitable al- minum tank with a minimum volume of 4 li-
ternative. ters (0.14 ft3).
6.1.2 Filter Holder. 25-mm (15⁄16-in.) ID NOTE: Sample volumes greater than 4 liters
Gelman filter holder with 303 stainless steel may be required for sources with low organic
body and 316 stainless steel support screen concentrations.
with the Viton O-ring replaced by a Teflon
O-ring. 6.1.9 Mercury Manometer. U-tube manom-
6.1.3 Filter Heating System. eter or absolute pressure gauge capable of
6.1.3.1 A metal box consisting of an inner measuring pressure to within 1 mm Hg in the
and an outer shell separated by insulating range of 0 to 900 mm.
material with a heating element in the inner 6.1.10 Vacuum Pump. Capable of evacu-
shell capable of maintaining a gas tempera- ating to an absolute pressure of 10 mm Hg.
ture at the filter of 121 ±3 °C (250 ±5 °F). The 6.2 Condensate Recovery. The system for
heating box shall include temperature sen- the recovery of the organics captured in the
sors to monitor the gas temperature imme- condensate trap consists of a heat source, an
diately upstream and immediately down- oxidation catalyst, a nondispersive infrared
stream of the filter. (NDIR) analyzer, and an intermediate collec-
6.1.3.2 A suitable heating box is shown in tion vessel (ICV). Figure 25–4 is a schematic
Figure 25–2. The outer shell is a metal box of a typical system. The system shall be ca-
that measures 102 mm×280 mm×292 mm (4 pable of proper oxidation and recovery, as
in.×11 in.×111⁄2 in.), while the inner shell is a specified in Section 10.1.1. The following
metal box measuring 76 mm×229 mm×241 mm major components are required:
(3 in.×9 in.×91⁄2 in.). The inner box is sup- 6.2.1 Heat Source. Sufficient to heat the
ported by 13-mm (1⁄2-in.) phenolic rods. The condensate trap (including probe) to a tem-
void space between the boxes is filled with perature of 200 °C (390 °F). A system using
ceramic fiber insulation which is sealed in both a heat gun and an electric tube furnace
place by means of a silicon rubber bead is recommended.
around the upper sides of the box. A remov- 6.2.2 Heat Tape. Sufficient to heat the
able lid made in a similar manner, with a 25- connecting tubing between the water trap
mm (1-in.) gap between the parts is used to and the oxidation catalyst to 100 °C (212 °F).
cover the heating chamber. The inner box is 6.2.3 Oxidation Catalyst. A suitable
heated with a 250-watt cartridge heater, length of 9.5 mm (3⁄8-in.) OD Inconel 600 tub-
shielded by a stainless steel shroud. The ing packed with 15 cm (6 in.) of 3.2 mm (3⁄8-
heater is regulated by a thermostatic tem- in.) diameter 19 percent chromia on alumina
perature controller which is set to maintain pellets. The catalyst material is packed in
a gas temperature of 121 °C (250 °F) as meas- the center of the catalyst tube with quartz
ured by the temperature sensor upstream of wool packed on either end to hold it in place.
the filter. 6.2.4 Water Trap. Leak-proof, capable of
NOTE: If it is not possible to use a heating removing moisture from the gas stream.
system for safety reasons, an unheated sys- 6.2.5 Syringe Port. A 6.4-mm (1⁄4-in.) OD
tem with an in-stack filter is a suitable al- stainless steel tee fitting with a rubber sep-
ternative. tum placed in the side arm.
6.1.4 Condensate Trap. 9.5-mm (3⁄8-in.) OD 6.2.6 NDIR Detector. Capable of indicating
316 stainless steel tubing bent into a U- CO2 concentration in the range of zero to 5
shape. Exact dimensions are shown in Figure percent, to monitor the progress of combus-
25–3. The tubing shall be packed with coarse tion of the organic compounds from the con-
quartz wool, to a density of approximately densate trap.
0.11 g/cm3 before bending. While the conden- 6.2.7 Flow-Control Valve. Stainless steel,
sate trap is packed with dry ice in the to maintain the trap conditioning system
Dewar, an ice bridge may form between the near atmospheric pressure.
504
6.2.8 Intermediate Collection Vessel. available to produce a minimum signal re-
Stainless steel or aluminum, equipped with a sponse of 10 percent of full scale.
female quick connect. Tanks with nominal 6.3.1.6 Data Recording System. Analog
volumes of at least 6 liters (0.2 ft3) are rec- strip chart recorder or digital integration
ommended. system compatible with the FID for perma-
6.2.9 Mercury Manometer. Same as de- nently recording the analytical results.
scribed in Section 6.1.9. 6.3.2 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or
6.2.10 Syringe. 10-ml gas-tight glass sy- other barometer capable of measuring at-
ringe equipped with an appropriate needle. mospheric pressure to within 1 mm Hg.
6.2.11 Syringes. 10-μl and 50-μl liquid injec- 6.3.3 Temperature Sensor. Capable of
tion syringes. measuring the laboratory temperature with-
6.2.12 Liquid Sample Injection Unit. 316 in 1 °C (2 °F).
Stainless steel U-tube fitted with an injec- 6.3.4 Vacuum Pump. Capable of evacu-
tion septum (see Figure 25–7). ating to an absolute pressure of 10 mm Hg.
6.3 Analysis.
6.3.1 NMO Analyzer. The NMO analyzer is 7.0 Reagents and Standards
a gas chromatograph (GC) with backflush ca-
pability for NMO analysis and is equipped 7.1 Sample Collection. The following re-
with an oxidation catalyst, reduction cata- agents are required for sample collection:
lyst, and FID. Figures 25–5 and 25–6 are sche- 7.1.1 Dry Ice. Solid CO2, crushed.
matics of a typical NMO analyzer. This 7.1.2 Coarse Quartz Wool. 8 to 15 um.
semicontinuous GC/FID analyzer shall be ca- 7.1.3 Filters. Glass fiber filters, without
pable of: (1) Separating CO, CO2, and CH4 organic binder.
from NMO, (2) reducing the CO2 to CH4 and 7.2 NMO Analysis. The following gases are
quantifying as CH4, and (3) oxidizing the required for NMO analysis:
NMO to CO2, reducing the CO2 to CH4 and 7.2.1 Carrier Gases. Helium (He) and oxy-
quantifying as CH4, according to Section gen (O2) containing less than 1 ppm CO2 and
10.1.2. The analyzer consists of the following less than 0.1 ppm hydrocarbon.
major components: 7.2.2 Fuel Gas. Hydrogen (H2), at least
6.3.1.1 Oxidation Catalyst. A suitable 99.999 percent pure.
length of 9.5-mm (3⁄8-in.) OD Inconel 600 tub- 7.2.3 Combustion Gas. Either air (less
ing packed with 5.1 cm (2 in.) of 19 percent than 0.1 ppm total hydrocarbon content) or
chromia on 3.2-mm (1⁄8-in.) alumina pellets. O2 (purity 99.99 percent or greater), as re-
The catalyst material is packed in the center quired by the detector.
of the tube supported on either side by 7.3 Condensate Analysis. The following
quartz wool. The catalyst tube must be are required for condensate analysis:
mounted vertically in a 650 °C (1200 °F) fur-
7.3.1 Gases. Containing less than 1 ppm
nace. Longer catalysts mounted horizontally
carbon.
may be used, provided they can meet the
7.3.1.1 Air.
specifications of Section 10.1.2.1.
6.3.1.2 Reduction Catalyst. A 7.6-cm (3-in.) 7.3.1.2 Oxygen.
length of 6.4-mm (1⁄4-in.) OD Inconel tubing 7.3.2 Liquids. To conform to the specifica-
fully packed with 100-mesh pure nickel pow- tions established by the Committee on Ana-
der. The catalyst tube must be mounted lytical Reagents of the American Chemical
vertically in a 400 °C (750 °F) furnace. Society.
6.3.1.3 Separation Column(s). A 30-cm (1- 7.3.2.1 Hexane.
ft) length of 3.2-mm (1⁄8-in.) OD stainless 7.3.2.2 Decane.
steel tubing packed with 60/80 mesh Unibeads 7.4 Calibration. For all calibration gases,
1S followed by a 61-cm (2-ft) length of 3.2-mm the manufacturer must recommend a max-
(1⁄8-in.) OD stainless steel tubing packed with imum shelf life for each cylinder (i.e., the
60/80 mesh Carbosieve G. The Carbosieve and length of time the gas concentration is not
Unibeads columns must be baked separately expected to change more than ±5 percent
at 200 °C (390 °F) with carrier gas flowing from its certified value). The date of gas cyl-
through them for 24 hours before initial use. inder preparation, certified organic con-
6.3.1.4 Sample Injection System. A single centration, and recommended maximum
10-port GC sample injection valve or a group shelf life must be affixed to each cylinder be-
of valves with sufficient ports fitted with a fore shipment from the gas manufacturer to
sample loop properly sized to interface with the buyer. The following calibration gases
the NMO analyzer (1-cc loop recommended). are required:
6.3.1.5 FID. An FID meeting the following 7.4.1 Oxidation Catalyst Efficiency Check
specifications is required: Calibration Gas. Gas mixture standard with
6.3.1.5.1 Linearity. A linear response (±5 nominal concentration of 1 percent methane
percent) over the operating range as dem- in air.

onstrated by the procedures established in 7.4.2 FID Linearity and NMO Calibration
Section 10.1.2.3. Gases. Three gas mixture standards with
6.3.1.5.2 Range. A full scale range of 10 to nominal propane concentrations of 20 ppm,
50,000 ppm CH4. Signal attenuators shall be 200 ppm, and 3000 ppm, in air.
505
7.4.3 CO2 Calibration Gases. Three gas 8.1.3 Sampling Train Assembly. Just be-
mixture standards with nominal CO2 con- fore assembly, measure the tank vacuum
centrations of 50 ppm, 500 ppm, and 1 per- using a mercury manometer. Record this
cent, in air. vacuum, the ambient temperature, and the
NOTE: Total NMO less than 1 ppm required barometric pressure at this time. Close the
for 1 percent mixture. sample tank valve and assemble the sam-
pling system as shown in Figure 25–1. Im-
7.4.4 NMO Analyzer System Check Cali- merse the condensate trap body in dry ice at
bration Gases. Four calibration gases are least 30 minutes before commencing sam-
needed as follows: pling to improve collection efficiency. The
7.4.4.1 Propane Mixture. Gas mixture point where the inlet tube joins the trap
standard containing (nominal) 50 ppm CO, 50 body should be 2.5 to 5 cm (1 to 2 in.) above
ppm CH4, 1 percent CO2, and 20 ppm C3H8, the top of the dry ice.
prepared in air. 8.1.4 Pretest Leak-Check. A pretest leak-
7.4.4.2 Hexane. Gas mixture standard con- check is required. Calculate or measure the
taining (nominal) 50 ppm hexane in air. approximate volume of the sampling train
7.4.4.3 Toluene. Gas mixture standard con- from the probe tip to the sample tank valve.
taining (nominal) 20 ppm toluene in air. After assembling the sampling train, plug
7.4.4.4 Methanol. Gas mixture standard the probe tip, and make certain that the
containing (nominal) 100 ppm methanol in sample tank valve is closed. Turn on the vac-
air. uum pump, and evacuate the sampling sys-
7.5 Quality Assurance Audit Samples. tem from the probe tip to the sample tank
7.5.1 It is recommended, but not required, valve to an absolute pressure of 10 mm Hg or
that a performance audit sample be analyzed less. Close the purge valve, turn off the
in conjunction with the field samples. The pump, wait a minimum period of 10 minutes,
audit sample should be in a suitable sample and recheck the indicated vacuum. Calculate
matrix at a concentration similar to the ac- the maximum allowable pressure change
tual field samples. based on a leak rate of 1 percent of the sam-
7.5.2 When making compliance determina- pling rate using Equation 25–1, Section 12.2.
tions, and upon availability, audit samples If the measured pressure change exceeds the
may be obtained from the appropriate EPA allowable, correct the problem and repeat
Regional Office or from the responsible en- the leak-check before beginning sampling.
forcement authority and analyzed in con- 8.2 Sample Collection.
junction with the field samples. 8.2.1 Unplug the probe tip, and place the
probe into the stack such that the probe is
NOTE: The responsible enforcement author-
perpendicular to the duct or stack axis; lo-
ity should be notified at least 30 days prior
cate the probe tip at a single preselected
to the test date to allow sufficient time for
point of average velocity facing away from
sample delivery.
the direction of gas flow. For stacks having
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport, a negative static pressure, seal the sample
and Storage port sufficiently to prevent air in-leakage
around the probe. Set the probe temperature
8.1 Sampling Equipment Preparation. controller to 129 °C (265 °F) and the filter
8.1.1 Condensate Trap Cleaning. Before its temperature controller to 121 °C (250 °F).
initial use and after each use, a condensate Allow the probe and filter to heat for about
trap should be thoroughly cleaned and 30 minutes before purging the sample train.
checked to ensure that it is not contami- 8.2.2 Close the sample valve, open the
nated. Both cleaning and checking can be ac- purge valve, and start the vacuum pump. Set
complished by installing the trap in the con- the flow rate between 60 and 100 cm3/min
densate recovery system and treating it as if (0.13 and 0.21 ft3/hr), and purge the train with
it were a sample. The trap should be heated stack gas for at least 10 minutes.
as described in Section 11.1.3. A trap may be 8.2.3 When the temperatures at the exit
considered clean when the CO2 concentration ends of the probe and filter are within the
in its effluent gas drops below 10 ppm. This corresponding specified ranges, check the
check is optional for traps that most re- dry ice level around the condensate trap, and
cently have been used to collect samples add dry ice if necessary. Record the clock
which were then recovered according to the time. To begin sampling, close the purge
procedure in Section 11.1.3. valve and stop the pump. Open the sample
8.1.2 Sample Tank Evacuation and Leak- valve and the sample tank valve. Using the
Check. Evacuate the sample tank to 10 mm flow control valve, set the flow through the
Hg absolute pressure or less. Then close the sample train to the proper rate. Adjust the
sample tank valve, and allow the tank to sit flow rate as necessary to maintain a con-
for 60 minutes. The tank is acceptable if a stant rate (±10 percent) throughout the dura-
change in tank vacuum of less than 1 mm Hg tion of the sampling period. Record the sam-
is noted. The evacuation and leak-check may ple tank vacuum and flowmeter setting at 5-
be conducted either in the laboratory or the minute intervals. (See Figure 25–8.) Select a
field. total sample time greater than or equal to
506
the minimum sampling time specified in the the sampling until the required minimum
applicable subpart of the regulations; end sampling time has been exceeded.
the sampling when this time period is 8.3 Sample Recovery. After sampling is
reached or when a constant flow rate can no completed, close the flow control valve, and
longer be maintained because of reduced record the final tank vacuum; then record
sample tank vacuum. the tank temperature and barometric pres-
NOTE: If sampling had to be stopped before sure. Close the sample tank valve, and dis-
obtaining the minimum sampling time (spec- connect the sample tank from the sample
ified in the applicable subpart) because a system. Disconnect the condensate trap at
constant flow rate could not be maintained, the inlet to the rate meter, and tightly seal
both ends of the condensate trap. Do not in-
proceed as follows: After closing the sample
clude the probe from the stack to the filter
tank valve, remove the used sample tank
as part of the condensate sample.
from the sampling train (without dis-
8.4 Sample Storage and Transport. Keep
connecting other portions of the sampling
the trap packed in dry ice until the samples
train). Take another evacuated and leak- are returned to the laboratory for analysis.
checked sample tank, measure and record Ensure that run numbers are identified on
the tank vacuum, and attach the new tank the condensate trap and the sample tank(s).
to the sampling train. After the new tank is
attached to the sample train, proceed with 9.0 Quality Control
10.1.1 ................................. Initial performance check of condensate Ensure acceptable condensate recovery efficiency.
recovery apparatus.
10.1.2, 10.2 ........................ NMO analyzer initial and daily perform- Ensure precision of analytical results.
ance checks.
11.3 .................................... Audit Sample Analyses ............................ Evaluate analytical technique and instrument calibra-
tion.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization 10.1.1.2.2 After the NDIR response has sta-
bilized, switch the sample recovery valve
NOTE: Maintain a record of performance of from vent to collect. When the manometer or
each item. pressure gauge begins to register a slight
10.1 Initial Performance Checks. positive pressure, open the flow-control
10.1.1 Condensate Recovery Apparatus. valve. Keep the flow adjusted such that the
Perform these tests before the system is first pressure in the system is maintained within
placed in operation, after any shutdown of 6 10 percent of atmospheric pressure. Continue
months or more, and after any major modi- collecting the sample in a normal manner
fication of the system, or at the frequency until the ICV is filled to a nominal gauge
recommended by the manufacturer. pressure of 300 mm Hg. Close the ICV valve,
10.1.1.1 Carrier Gas and Auxiliary O2 and remove the ICV from the system. Place
Blank Check. Analyze each new tank of car- the sample recovery valve in the vent posi-
tion, and return the recovery system to its
rier gas or auxiliary O2 with the NMO ana-
normal carrier gas and normal operating
lyzer to check for contamination. Treat the
conditions. Analyze the ICV for CO2 using
gas cylinders as noncondensible gas samples,
the NMO analyzer; the catalyst efficiency is
and analyze according to the procedure in
acceptable if the CO2 concentration is within
Section 11.2.3. Add together any measured
2 percent of the methane standard con-
CH4, CO, CO2, or NMO. The total concentra- centration.
tion must be less than 5 ppm. 10.1.1.3 System Performance Check. Con-
10.1.1.2 Oxidation Catalyst Efficiency struct a liquid sample injection unit similar
Check. in design to the unit shown in Figure 25–7.
10.1.1.2.1 With a clean condensate trap in- Insert this unit into the condensate recovery
stalled in the recovery system or a 1⁄8″ stain- and conditioning system in place of a con-
less steel connector tube, replace the carrier densate trap, and set the carrier gas and aux-
gas cylinder with the high level methane iliary O2 flow rates to normal operating lev-
standard gas cylinder (Section 7.4.1). Set the els. Attach an evacuated ICV to the system,
four-port valve to the recovery position, and and switch from system vent to collect. With
attach an ICV to the recovery system. With the carrier gas routed through the injection
the sample recovery valve in vent position unit and the oxidation catalyst, inject a liq-
and the flow-control and ICV valves fully uid sample (see Sections 10.1.1.3.1 to
open, evacuate the manometer or gauge, the 10.1.1.3.4) into the injection port. Operate the
connecting tubing, and the ICV to 10 mm Hg trap recovery system as described in Section
absolute pressure. Close the flow-control and 11.1.3. Measure the final ICV pressure, and
vacuum pump valves. then analyze the vessel to determine the CO2
507
concentration. For each injection, calculate 10.1.2.4 System Performance Check.
the percent recovery according to Section Check the column separation and overall
12.7. Calculate the relative standard devi- performance of the analyzer by making trip-
ation for each set of triplicate injections ac- licate injections of the calibration gases list-
cording to Section 12.8. The performance test ed in Section 7.4.4. The analyzer performance
is acceptable if the average percent recovery is acceptable if the measured NMO value for
is 100 ±5 percent and the relative standard each gas (average of triplicate injections) is
deviation is less than 2 percent for each set within 5 percent of the expected value.
of triplicate injections. 10.2 NMO Analyzer Daily Calibration. The
10.1.1.3.1 50 μl hexane. following calibration procedures shall be per-
10.1.1.3.2 10 μl hexane. formed before and immediately after the
10.1.1.3.3 50 μl decane. analysis of each set of samples, or on a daily
10.1.1.3.4 10 μl decane. basis, whichever is more stringent:
10.1.2 NMO Analyzer. Perform these tests 10.2.1 CO2 Response Factor. Inject trip-
licate samples of the high level CO2 calibra-
before the system is first placed in oper-
tion gas (Section 7.4.3), and calculate the av-
ation, after any shutdown longer than 6
erage response factor. The system operation
months, and after any major modification of
is adequate if the calculated response factor
the system.
is within 5 percent of the RFCO2 calculated
10.1.2.1 Oxidation Catalyst Efficiency during the initial performance test (Section
Check. Turn off or bypass the NMO analyzer 10.1.2.3). Use the daily response factor
reduction catalyst. Make triplicate injec- (DRFCO2) for analyzer calibration and the
tions of the high level methane standard calculation of measured CO2 concentrations
(Section 7.4.1). The oxidation catalyst oper- in the ICV samples.
ation is acceptable if the FID response is less 10.2.2 NMO Response Factors. Inject trip-
than 1 percent of the injected methane con- licate samples of the mixed propane calibra-
centration. tion cylinder gas (Section 7.4.4.1), and cal-
10.1.2.2 Reduction Catalyst Efficiency culate the average NMO response factor. The
Check. With the oxidation catalyst unheated system operation is adequate if the cal-
or bypassed and the heated reduction cata- culated response factor is within 10 percent
lyst bypassed, make triplicate injections of of the RFNMO calculated during the initial
the high level methane standard (Section performance test (Section 10.1.2.4). Use the
7.4.1). Repeat this procedure with both cata- daily response factor (DRFNMO) for analyzer
lysts operative. The reduction catalyst oper- calibration and calculation of NMO con-
ation is acceptable if the responses under centrations in the sample tanks.
both conditions agree within 5 percent of 10.3 Sample Tank and ICV Volume. The
their average. volume of the gas sampling tanks used must
10.1.2.3 NMO Analyzer Linearity Check be determined. Determine the tank and ICV
Calibration. While operating both the oxida- volumes by weighing them empty and then
tion and reduction catalysts, conduct a lin- filled with deionized distilled water; weigh to
earity check of the analyzer using the pro- the nearest 5 g, and record the results. Alter-
pane standards specified in Section 7.4.2. natively, measure the volume of water used
Make triplicate injections of each calibra- to fill them to the nearest 5 ml.
tion gas. For each gas (i.e., each set of trip-
licate injections), calculate the average re- 11.0 Analytical Procedure
sponse factor (area/ppm C) for each gas, as 11.1 Condensate Recovery. See Figure 25–
well as and the relative standard deviation 9. Set the carrier gas flow rate, and heat the
(according to Section 12.8). Then calculate catalyst to its operating temperature to con-
the overall mean of the response factor val- dition the apparatus.
ues. The instrument linearity is acceptable 11.1.1 Daily Performance Checks. Each
if the average response factor of each cali- day before analyzing any samples, perform
bration gas is within 2.5 percent of the over- the following tests:
all mean value and if the relative standard 11.1.1.1 Leak-Check. With the carrier gas
deviation gas is less than 2 percent of the inlets and the sample recovery valve closed,
overall mean value. Record the overall mean install a clean condensate trap in the sys-
of the propane response factor values as the tem, and evacuate the system to 10 mm Hg
NMO calibration response factor (RFNMO). absolute pressure or less. Monitor the sys-
Repeat the linearity check using the CO2 tem pressure for 10 minutes. The system is
standards specified in Section 7.4.3. Make acceptable if the pressure change is less than
triplicate injections of each gas, and then 2 mm Hg.
calculate the average response factor (area/ 11.1.1.2 System Background Test. Adjust
ppm C) for each gas, as well as the overall the carrier gas and auxiliary oxygen flow
mean of the response factor values. Record rate to their normal values of 100 cc/min and
the overall mean of the response factor val- 150 cc/min, respectively, with the sample re-
ues as the CO2 calibration response factor covery valve in vent position. Using a 10-ml
(RFCO2). The RFCO2 must be within 10 percent syringe, withdraw a sample from the system
of the RFNMO. effluent through the syringe port. Inject this
508
sample into the NMO analyzer, and measure 11.1.3.2 Begin auxiliary oxygen flow to the
the CO2 content. The system background is oxidation catalyst at a rate of 150 cc/min,
acceptable if the CO2 concentration is less then switch the four-way valve to the trap
than 10 ppm. recovery position and the sample recovery
11.1.1.3 Oxidation Catalyst Efficiency valve to collect position. The system should
Check. Conduct a catalyst efficiency test as now be set up to operate as indicated in Fig-
specified in Section 10.1.1.2. If the criterion ure 25–10. After the manometer or pressure
of this test cannot be met, make the nec- gauge begins to register a slight positive
essary repairs to the system before pro- pressure, open the flow control valve. Adjust
ceeding. the flow-control valve to maintain atmos-
11.1.2 Condensate Trap CO2 Purge and pheric pressure in the system within 10 per-
Sample Tank Pressurization. cent.
11.1.2.1 After sampling is completed, the 11.1.3.3 Remove the condensate trap from
condensate trap will contain condensed the dry ice, and allow it to warm to ambient
water and organics and a small volume of temperature while monitoring the NDIR re-
sampled gas. This gas from the stack may sponse. If, after 5 minutes, the CO2 con-
contain a significant amount of CO2 which centration of the catalyst effluent is below
must be removed from the condensate trap 10,000 ppm, discontinue the auxiliary oxygen
before the sample is recovered. This is ac- flow to the oxidation catalyst. Begin heating
complished by purging the condensate trap the trap by placing it in a furnace preheated
with zero air and collecting the purged gas in to 200 °C (390 °F). Once heating has begun,
the original sample tank. carefully monitor the NDIR response to en-
sure that the catalyst effluent concentration
11.1.2.2 Begin with the sample tank and
does not exceed 50,000 ppm. Whenever the
condensate trap from the test run to be ana-
CO2 concentration exceeds 50,000 ppm, supply
lyzed. Set the four-port valve of the conden-
auxiliary oxygen to the catalyst at the rate
sate recovery system in the CO2 purge posi-
of 150 cc/min. Begin heating the tubing that
tion as shown in Figure 25–9. With the sam-
connected the heated sample box to the con-
ple tank valve closed, attach the sample
densate trap only after the CO2 concentra-
tank to the sample recovery system. With tion falls below 10,000 ppm. This tubing may
the sample recovery valve in the vent posi- be heated in the same oven as the condensate
tion and the flow control valve fully open, trap or with an auxiliary heat source such as
evacuate the manometer or pressure gauge a heat gun. Heating temperature must not
to the vacuum of the sample tank. Next, exceed 200 °C (390 °F). If a heat gun is used,
close the vacuum pump valve, open the sam- heat the tubing slowly along its entire
ple tank valve, and record the tank pressure. length from the upstream end to the down-
11.1.2.3 Attach the dry ice-cooled conden- stream end, and repeat the pattern for a
sate trap to the recovery system, and ini- total of three times. Continue the recovery
tiate the purge by switching the sample re- until the CO2 concentration drops to less
covery valve from vent to collect position. than 10 ppm as determined by syringe injec-
Adjust the flow control valve to maintain at- tion as described under the condensate trap
mospheric pressure in the recovery system. CO2 purge procedure (Section 11.1.2).
Continue the purge until the CO2 concentra- 11.1.3.4 After the sample recovery is com-
tion of the trap effluent is less than 5 ppm. pleted, use the carrier gas bypass valve to
CO2 concentration in the trap effluent should pressurize the ICV to approximately 1060 mm
be measured by extracting syringe samples Hg absolute pressure with zero air.
from the recovery system and analyzing the 11.2 Analysis. Once the initial perform-
samples with the NMO analyzer. This proce- ance test of the NMO analyzer has been suc-
dure should be used only after the NDIR re- cessfully completed (see Section 10.1.2) and
sponse has reached a minimum level. Using a the daily CO2 and NMO response factors have
10-ml syringe, extract a sample from the sy- been determined (see Section 10.2), proceed
ringe port prior to the NDIR, and inject this with sample analysis as follows:
sample into the NMO analyzer. 11.2.1 Operating Conditions. The carrier
11.1.2.4 After the completion of the CO2 gas flow rate is 29.5 cc/min He and 2.2 cc/min
purge, use the carrier gas bypass valve to O2. The column oven is heated to 85 °C (185
pressurize the sample tank to approximately °F). The order of elution for the sample from
1,060 mm Hg absolute pressure with zero air. the column is CO, CH4, CO2, and NMO.
11.1.3 Recovery of the Condensate Trap 11.2.2 Analysis of Recovered Condensate
Sample (See Figure 25–10). Sample. Purge the sample loop with sample,
11.1.3.1 Attach the ICV to the sample re- and then inject the sample. Under the speci-
covery system. With the sample recovery fied operating conditions, the CO2 in the
valve in a closed position, between vent and sample will elute in approximately 100 sec-
collect, and the flow control and ICV valves onds. As soon as the detector response re-
fully open, evacuate the manometer or turns to baseline following the CO2 peak,
gauge, the connecting tubing, and the ICV to switch the carrier gas flow to backflush, and
10 mm Hg absolute pressure. Close the flow- raise the column oven temperature to 195 °C
control and vacuum pump valves. (380 °F) as rapidly as possible. A rate of 30 °C/
509
min (90 °F) has been shown to be adequate. 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Record the value obtained for the condens-
Carry out the calculations, retaining at
ible organic material (Ccm) measured as CO2
least one extra significant figure beyond
and any measured NMO. Return the column that of the acquired data. Round off figures
oven temperature to 85 °C (185 °F) in prepara- after final calculations. All equations are
tion for the next analysis. Analyze each sam- written using absolute pressure; absolute
ple in triplicate, and report the average Ccm. pressures are determined by adding the
11.2.3 Analysis of Sample Tank. Perform measured barometric pressure to the meas-
the analysis as described in Section 11.2.2, ured gauge or manometer pressure.
but record only the value measured for NMO 12.1 Nomenclature.
(Ctm).
C=TGNMO concentration of the effluent,
11.3 Audit Sample Analysis. ppm C equivalent.
11.3.1 When the method is used to analyze Cc=Calculated condensible organic (conden-
samples to demonstrate compliance with a sate trap) concentration of the effluent,
source emission regulation, an audit sample, ppm C equivalent.
if available, must be analyzed. Ccm=Measured concentration (NMO analyzer)
11.3.2 Concurrently analyze the audit for the condensate trap ICV, ppm CO2.
sample and the compliance samples in the Ct=Calculated noncondensible organic con-
same manner to evaluate the technique of centration (sample tank) of the effluent,
the analyst and the standards preparation. ppm C equivalent.
11.3.3 The same analyst, analytical re- Ctm=Measured concentration (NMO analyzer)
agents, and analytical system must be used for the sample tank, ppm NMO.
for the compliance samples and the audit F=Sampling flow rate, cc/min.
sample. If this condition is met, duplicate L=Volume of liquid injected, μl.
auditing of subsequent compliance analyses M=Molecular weight of the liquid injected, g/
for the same enforcement agency within a 30- g-mole.
day period is waived. An audit sample set Mc=TGNMO mass concentration of the efflu-
may not be used to validate different sets of ent, mg C/dsm3.
compliance samples under the jurisdiction of N=Carbon number of the liquid compound in-
separate enforcement agencies, unless prior jected (N=12 for decane, N=6 for hexane).
arrangements have been made with both en- n=Number of data points.
forcement agencies. Pf=Final pressure of the intermediate collec-
11.4 Audit Sample Results. tion vessel, mm Hg absolute.
11.4.1 Calculate the audit sample con- Pb=Barometric pressure, cm Hg.
centrations and submit results using the in- Pti=Gas sample tank pressure before sam-
structions provided with the audit samples. pling, mm Hg absolute.
11.4.2 Report the results of the audit sam- Pt=Gas sample tank pressure after sampling,
ples and the compliance determination sam- but before pressurizing, mm Hg absolute.
ples along with their identification numbers, Ptf=Final gas sample tank pressure after
and the analyst’s name to the responsible en- pressurizing, mm Hg absolute.
q=Total number of analyzer injections of in-
forcement authority. Include this informa-
termediate collection vessel during anal-
tion with reports of any subsequent compli-
ysis (where k=injection number, 1 * * *
ance analyses for the same enforcement au-
q).
thority during the 30-day period.
r=Total number of analyzer injections of
11.4.3 The concentrations of the audit sample tank during analysis (where
samples obtained by the analyst must agree j=injection number, 1 * * * r).
within 20 percent of the actual concentra- r=Density of liquid injected, g/cc.
tion. If the 20-percent specification is not Tf=Final temperature of intermediate collec-
met, reanalyze the compliance and audit tion vessel, °K.
samples, and include initial and reanalysis Tti=Sample tank temperature before sam-
values in the test report. pling, °K.
11.4.4 Failure to meet the 20-percent spec- Tt=Sample tank temperature at completion
ification may require retests until the audit of sampling, °K.
problems are resolved. However, if the audit Ttf=Sample tank temperature after pressur-
results do not affect the compliance or non- izing, °K.
compliance status of the affected facility, V=Sample tank volume, m3.
the Administrator may waive the reanalysis Vt=Sample train volume, cc.
requirement, further audits, or retests and Vv=Intermediate collection vessel volume,
accept the results of the compliance test. m3.
While steps are being taken to resolve audit Vs=Gas volume sampled, dsm3.
analysis problems, the Administrator may xi=Individual measurements.
also choose to use the data to determine the x̄=Mean value.
compliance or noncompliance status of the DP=Allowable pressure change, cm Hg.
affected facility. Q=Leak-check period, min.
510
12.2 Allowable Pressure Change. For the 12.4 Noncondensible Organics. For each
pretest leak-check, calculate the allowable sample tank, determine the concentration of
pressure change using Equation 25–1: nonmethane organics (ppm C) using Equa-
tion 25–3:
FPb Θ
ΔP = 0.01 Eq. 25-1 ⎛ Ptf ⎞
Vt
⎜ T ⎟ ⎛1 r ⎞
⎜ ∑ C tm j ⎟
12.3 Sample Volume. For each test run,
calculate the gas volume sampled using Ct = ⎜ tf ⎟ Eq. 25-3
Equation 25–2: ⎜ Pt − Pt i ⎟ ⎝ r j=1 ⎠
⎜T T ⎟
⎝ t ti ⎠
⎛ P Pt i ⎞
Vs = 0.3857 V ⎜ t − ⎟ Eq. 25-2 12.5 Condensible Organics. For each con-
⎝ Tt Tt i ⎠ densate trap determine the concentration of
organics (ppm C) using Equation 25–4:
Vv Pf ⎛ 1 q ⎞
C c = 0.3857 ⎜ ∑
Vs Tf ⎝ q k =1
C cm k ⎟
⎠
Eq. 25-4
12.6 TGNMO Mass Concentration. Deter-

mine the TGNMO mass concentration as car-
bon for each test run, using Equation 25–5:
M c = 0.4993 (C t + C c ) Eq. 25-5
ER17OC00.370</MATH>
12.7 Percent Recovery. Calculate the per- condensate recovery and conditioning sys-
cent recovery for the liquid injections to the tem using Equation 25–6:
ER17OC00.369</MATH>
M Vv Pt C cm
Percent Recovery = K Eq. 25-6
L P Tf N
ER17OC00.368</MATH>
where K=1.604 (°K)(g-mole)(%)/(mm be 50 parts per million by volume (ppm). No
Hg)(ml)(m3)(ppm). upper limit has been established.
12.8 Relative Standard Deviation. Use
Equation 25–7 to calculate the relative stand-
ard deviation (RSD) of percent recovery and 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
ER17OC00.367</MATH>
analyzer linearity.
16.0 References
⎡ n
2⎤
1 1. Salo, A.E., S. Witz, and R.D. MacPhee.
⎢ ∑ (x i − x )
Determination of Solvent Vapor Concentra-
⎥2 tions by Total Combustion Analysis: A Com-
100 ⎢ i =1 ⎥ parison of Infrared with Flame Ionization
RSD = Eq. 25-7
ER17OC00.366</MATH>
x ⎢ n −1 ⎥ Detectors. Paper No. 75–33.2. (Presented at

⎢ ⎥ the 68th Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution
⎢⎣ ⎥⎦ Control Association. Boston, MA. June 15–20,
1975.) 14 p.
2. Salo, A.E., W.L. Oaks, and R.D.

MacPhee. Measuring the Organic Carbon
ER17OC00.365</MATH>
13.1 Range. The minimum detectable Content of Source Emissions for Air Pollu-
limit of the method has been determined to tion Control. Paper No. 74–190. (Presented at
the 67th Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution
511
ER17OC00.364</MATH>
Control Association. Denver, CO. June 9–13, 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
1974.) 25 p. Validation Data
512
ER17OC00.371</GPH>
513
ER17OC00.372</GPH>
514
ER17OC00.373</GPH>
515
ER17OC00.374</GPH>
516
ER17OC00.375</GPH>
517
ER17OC00.376</GPH>
518
ER17OC00.377</GPH>
519
ER17OC00.378</GPH>
520
ER17OC00.379</GPH>
METHOD 25A—DETERMINATION OF TOTAL GAS-

EOUS ORGANIC CONCENTRATION USING A
FLAME IONIZATION ANALYZER
1.1 Analytes.
Total Organic Compounds ................................. N/A < 2% of span.
521
ER17OC00.380</GPH>
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- 3.7 Zero drift means the difference in the
ble for the determination of total gaseous or- measurement system response to a zero level
ganic concentration of vapors consisting pri- calibration gas before or after a stated pe-
marily of alkanes, alkenes, and/or arenes (ar- riod of operation during which no unsched-
omatic hydrocarbons). The concentration is uled maintenance, repair, or adjustment
expressed in terms of propane (or other ap- took place.
propriate organic calibration gas) or in
terms of carbon. 4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to 5.0 Safety
hance the quality of the data obtained from 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
air pollutant sampling methods. hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
2.0 Summary of Method of the safety problems associated with its
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from the use. It is the responsibility of the user of this
source through a heated sample line and test method to establish appropriate safety
glass fiber filter to a flame ionization ana- and health practices and determine the ap-
lyzer (FIA). Results are reported as volume plicability of regulatory limitations prior to
performing this test method. The analyzer
concentration equivalents of the calibration
users manual should be consulted for specific
gas or as carbon equivalents.
3.0 Definitions analytical procedure.
5.2 Explosive Atmosphere. This method is
3.1 Calibration drift means the difference often applied in highly explosive areas. Cau-
in the measurement system response to a tion and care should be exercised in choice of
mid-level calibration gas before and after a equipment and installation.
stated period of operation during which no
unscheduled maintenance, repair, or adjust- 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
ment took place. 6.1 Measurement System. Any measure-
3.2 Calibration error means the difference ment system for total organic concentration
between the gas concentration indicated by that meets the specifications of this method.
the measurement system and the know con- A schematic of an acceptable measurement
centration of the calibration gas. system is shown in Figure 25A–1. All sam-
3.3 Calibration gas means a known con- pling components leading to the analyzer
centration of a gas in an appropriate diluent shall be heated ≥ 110 °C (220 °F) throughout
gas. the sampling period, unless safety reasons
3.4 Measurement system means the total are cited (Section 5.2) The essential compo-
equipment required for the determination of nents of the measurement system are de-
the gas concentration. The system consists scribed below:
of the following major subsystems: 6.1.1 Organic Concentration Analyzer. A
3.4.1 Sample interface means that portion flame ionization analyzer (FIA) capable of
of a system used for one or more of the fol- meeting or exceeding the specifications of
lowing: sample acquisition, sample transpor- this method. The flame ionization detector
tation, sample conditioning, or protection of block shall be heated >120 °C (250 °F).
the analyzer(s) from the effects of the stack 6.1.2 Sample Probe. Stainless steel, or
effluent. equivalent, three-hole rake type. Sample
3.4.2 Organic analyzer means that portion holes shall be 4 mm (0.16-in.) in diameter or
of the measurement system that senses the smaller and located at 16.7, 50, and 83.3 per-
gas to be measured and generates an output cent of the equivalent stack diameter. Alter-
proportional to its concentration. natively, a single opening probe may be used
3.5 Response time means the time interval so that a gas sample is collected from the
from a step change in pollutant concentra- centrally located 10 percent area of the stack
tion at the inlet to the emission measure- cross-section.
ment system to the time at which 95 percent 6.1.3 Heated Sample Line. Stainless steel
of the corresponding final value is reached as or Teflon’’ tubing to transport the sample
displayed on the recorder. gas to the analyzer. The sample line should
3.6 Span Value means the upper limit of a be heated (≥110 °C) to prevent any condensa-
gas concentration measurement range that tion.
is specified for affected source categories in 6.1.4 Calibration Valve Assembly. A three-
the applicable part of the regulations. The way valve assembly to direct the zero and
span value is established in the applicable calibration gases to the analyzers is rec-
regulation and is usually 1.5 to 2.5 times the ommended. Other methods, such as quick-
applicable emission limit. If no span value is connect lines, to route calibration gas to the
provided, use a span value equivalent to 1.5 analyzers are applicable.
to 2.5 times the expected concentration. For 6.1.5 Particulate Filter. An in-stack or an
convenience, the span value should cor- out-of-stack glass fiber filter is rec-
respond to 100 percent of the recorder scale. ommended if exhaust gas particulate loading
522
is significant. An out-of-stack filter should measurement system by following the manu-
be heated to prevent any condensation. facturer’s written instructions for preparing
6.1.6 Recorder. A strip-chart recorder, sample interface and the organic analyzer.
analog computer, or digital recorder for re- Make the system operable (Section 10.1).
cording measurement data. The minimum 8.4 Calibration Error Test. Immediately
data recording requirement is one measure- prior to the test series (within 2 hours of the
ment value per minute. start of the test), introduce zero gas and
high-level calibration gas at the calibration
7.0 Reagents and Standards valve assembly. Adjust the analyzer output
7.1 Calibration Gases. The calibration to the appropriate levels, if necessary. Cal-
gases for the gas analyzer shall be propane in culate the predicted response for the low-
air or propane in nitrogen. Alternatively, or- level and mid-level gases based on a linear
ganic compounds other than propane can be response line between the zero and high-level
used; the appropriate corrections for re- response. Then introduce low-level and mid-
sponse factor must be made. Calibration level calibration gases successively to the
gases shall be prepared in accordance with measurement system. Record the analyzer
the procedure listed in Citation 2 of Section responses for low-level and mid-level calibra-
16. Additionally, the manufacturer of the tion gases and determine the differences be-
tween the measurement system responses
cylinder should provide a recommended shelf
and the predicted responses. These dif-
life for each calibration gas cylinder over
ferences must be less than 5 percent of the
which the concentration does not change
respective calibration gas value. If not, the
more than ±2 percent from the certified
measurement system is not acceptable and
value. For calibration gas values not gen-
must be replaced or repaired prior to testing.
erally available (i.e., organics between 1 and
No adjustments to the measurement system
10 percent by volume), alternative methods
shall be conducted after the calibration and
for preparing calibration gas mixtures, such
before the drift check (Section 8.6.2). If ad-
as dilution systems (Test Method 205, 40 CFR
justments are necessary before the comple-
Part 51, Appendix M), may be used with prior tion of the test series, perform the drift
approval of the Administrator. checks prior to the required adjustments and
7.1.1 Fuel. A 40 percent H2/60 percent N2 repeat the calibration following the adjust-
gas mixture is recommended to avoid an oxy- ments. If multiple electronic ranges are to
gen synergism effect that reportedly occurs be used, each additional range must be
when oxygen concentration varies signifi- checked with a mid-level calibration gas to
cantly from a mean value. verify the multiplication factor.
7.1.2 Zero Gas. High purity air with less 8.5 Response Time Test. Introduce zero
than 0.1 part per million by volume (ppmv) of gas into the measurement system at the
organic material (propane or carbon equiva- calibration valve assembly. When the system
lent) or less than 0.1 percent of the span output has stabilized, switch quickly to the
value, whichever is greater. high-level calibration gas. Record the time
7.1.3 Low-level Calibration Gas. An or- from the concentration change to the meas-
ganic calibration gas with a concentration urement system response equivalent to 95
equivalent to 25 to 35 percent of the applica- percent of the step change. Repeat the test
ble span value. three times and average the results.
7.1.4 Mid-level Calibration Gas. An or- 8.6 Emission Measurement Test Proce-
ganic calibration gas with a concentration dure.
equivalent to 45 to 55 percent of the applica- 8.6.1 Organic Measurement. Begin sam-
ble span value. pling at the start of the test period, record-
7.1.5 High-level Calibration Gas. An or- ing time and any required process informa-
ganic calibration gas with a concentration tion as appropriate. In particulate, note on
equivalent to 80 to 90 percent of the applica- the recording chart, periods of process inter-
ble span value. ruption or cyclic operation.
8.6.2 Drift Determination. Immediately
following the completion of the test period
and Transport
and hourly during the test period, reintro-
8.1 Selection of Sampling Site. The loca- duce the zero and mid-level calibration
tion of the sampling site is generally speci- gases, one at a time, to the measurement
fied by the applicable regulation or purpose system at the calibration valve assembly.
of the test (i.e., exhaust stack, inlet line, (Make no adjustments to the measurement
etc.). The sample port shall be located to system until both the zero and calibration
meet the testing requirements of Method 1. drift checks are made.) Record the analyzer
8.2 Location of Sample Probe. Install the response. If the drift values exceed the speci-
sample probe so that the probe is centrally fied limits, invalidate the test results pre-
located in the stack, pipe, or duct and is ceding the check and repeat the test fol-
sealed tightly at the stack port connection. lowing corrections to the measurement sys-
8.3 Measurement System Preparation. tem. Alternatively, recalibrate the test
Prior to the emission test, assemble the measurement system as in Section 8.4 and
523
report the results using both sets of calibra- NOTE: Note on the recording chart periods
tion data (i.e., data determined prior to the of process interruption or cyclic operation.
test period and data determined following
the test period). 9.0 Quality Control
Method section Quality control measure Effect
8.4 ...................................... Zero and calibration drift tests ................. Ensures that bias introduced by drift in the measure-
3 percent of span.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization =4 for butane.

=Appropriate response factor for other or-
10.1 FIA equipment can be calibrated for
ganic calibration gases.
almost any range of total organic concentra-
tions. For high concentrations of organics (> 13.0 Method Performance
1.0 percent by volume as propane), modifica-
tions to most commonly available analyzers 13.1 Measurement System Performance
are necessary. One accepted method of equip- Specifications.
ment modification is to decrease the size of 13.1.1 Zero Drift. Less than ±3 percent of
the sample to the analyzer through the use the span value.
of a smaller diameter sample capillary. Di- 13.1.2 Calibration Drift. Less than ±3 per-
rect and continuous measurement of organic cent of span value.
concentration is a necessary consideration 13.1.3 Calibration Error. Less than ±5 per-
when determining any modification design. cent of the calibration gas value.
11.0 Analytical Procedure 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]

The sample collection and analysis are 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
concurrent for this method (see Section 8.0).
16.0 References
1. Measurement of Volatile Organic Com-
12.1 Determine the average organic con- pounds—Guideline Series. U.S. Environ-
centration in terms of ppmv as propane or mental Protection Agency. Research Tri-
other calibration gas. The average shall be angle Park, NC. Publication No. EPA–450/2–
determined by integration of the output re- 78–041. June 1978. p. 46–54.
cording over the period specified in the ap- 2. EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and
plicable regulation. If results are required in Certification of Gaseous Calibration Stand-
terms of ppmv as carbon, adjust measured ards. U.S. Environmental Protection Agen-
concentrations using Equation 25A–1. cy, Quality Assurance and Technical Support
Division. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Sep-
C c = K C meas Eq. 25A -1 tember 1993.
3. Gasoline Vapor Emission Laboratory
Where:
Evaluation—Part 2. U.S. Environmental Pro-
Cc=Organic concentration as carbon, ppmv. tection Agency, Office of Air Quality Plan-
Cmeas=Organic concentration as measured, ning and Standards. Research Triangle Park,
ppmv. NC. EMB Report No. 75–GAS–6. August 1975.
K=Carbon equivalent correction factor.
=2 for ethane. 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
=3 for propane. Validation Data
524
ER17OC00.381</MATH>
METHOD 25B—DETERMINATION OF TOTAL GAS- in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable re-
EOUS ORGANIC CONCENTRATION USING A NON- sults, persons using this method should have
DISPERSIVE INFRARED ANALYZER a thorough knowledge of at least the fol-
lowing additional test methods: Method 1,
Method 6C, and Method 25A.
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essen- 1.0 Scope and Application
corporated by reference from other methods 1.1 Analytes.
525
ER17OC00.382</GPH>
Total Organic Compounds .............................................................. N/A < 2% of span.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- 9.0 Quality Control

ble for the determination of total gaseous or-
Same as Method 25A, Section 9.0.
ganic concentration of vapors consisting pri-
marily of alkanes. Other organic materials 10.0 Calibration and Standardization
may be measured using the general proce-
dure in this method, the appropriate calibra- Same as Method 25A, Section 10.0.
tion gas, and an analyzer set to the appro- 11.0 Analytical Procedure
priate absorption band.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to The sample collection and analysis are
the requirements of this method will en- concurrent for this method (see Section 8.0).
air pollutant sampling methods. 12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
A gas sample is extracted from the source 13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
through a heated sample line, if necessary, 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
and glass fiber filter to a nondispersive infra-
red analyzer (NDIR). Results are reported as 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
volume concentration equivalents of the
calibration gas or as carbon equivalents. 16.0 References
3.0 Definitions
Same as Method 25A, Section 3.0. 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
Validation Data [Reserved]
METHOD 25C—DETERMINATION OF NON-
5.0 Safety METHANE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (NMOC) IN
LANDFILL GASES
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- NOTE: This method does not include all of
ment. This test method may not address all the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup-
of the safety problems associated with its plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana-
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this lytical) essential to its performance. Some
test method to establish appropriate safety material is incorporated by reference from
and health practices and determine the ap- other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob-
plicability of regulatory limitations prior to tain reliable results, persons using this
performing this test method. The analyzer method should also have a thorough knowl-
users manual should be consulted for specific edge of EPA Method 25.
analytical procedure. 1.0 Scope and Application
5.2 Explosive Atmosphere. This method is 1.1 Analytes.
often applied in highly explosive areas. Cau-
tion and care should be exercised in choice of Analyte CAS No.
equipment and installation.
Nonmethane organic com- No CAS number assigned.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies pounds (NMOC).
Same as Method 25A, Section 6.0, with the 1.2 Applicability. This method is applica-
exception of the following: ble to the sampling and measurement of
6.1 Organic Concentration Analyzer. A NMOC as carbon in landfill gases (LFG).
nondispersive infrared analyzer designed to 1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to
measure alkane organics and capable of the requirements of this method will en-
meeting or exceeding the specifications in hance the quality of the data obtained from
this method. air pollutant sampling methods.
7.0 Reagents and Standards 2.0 Summary of Method
Same as Method 25A, Section 7.1. No fuel 2.1 A sample probe that has been per-
gas is required for an NDIR.
forated at one end is driven or augured to a

depth of 0.9 m (3 ft) below the bottom of the
landfill cover. A sample of the landfill gas is
and Transport
extracted with an evacuated cylinder. The
Same as Method 25A, Section 8.0. NMOC content of the gas is determined by
526
injecting a portion of the gas into a gas 6.5.2 Post Driver and Compressor. Capable
chromatographic column to separate the of driving the pilot probe and the sampling
NMOC from carbon monoxide (CO), carbon probe into the landfill. The Kitty Hawk port-
dioxide (CO2), and methane (CH4); the NMOC able post driver has been found to be accept-
are oxidized to CO2, reduced to CH4, and able.
measured by a flame ionization detector 6.6 Auger Procedure. The following are
(FID). In this manner, the variable response needed only if the tester chooses to use the
of the FID associated with different types of procedure described in Section 8.2.2.
organics is eliminated. 6.6.1 Auger. Capable of drilling through
the landfill cover and to a depth of no less
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] than 0.9 m (3 ft) into the landfill.
6.6.2 Pea Gravel.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved] 6.6.3 Bentonite.
6.7 NMOC Analyzer, Barometer, Ther-
5.0 Safety
mometer, and Syringes. Same as in Sections
5.1 Since this method is complex, only ex- 6.3.1, 6.3.2, 6.33, and 6.2.10, respectively, of
perienced personnel should perform this test. Method 25.
LFG contains methane, therefore explosive
mixtures may exist on or near the landfill. It 7.0 Reagents and Standards
is advisable to take appropriate safety pre- 7.1 NMOC Analysis. Same as in Method 25,
cautions when testing landfills, such as re- Section 7.2.
fraining from smoking and installing explo- 7.2 Calibration. Same as in Method 25, Sec-
sion-proof equipment. tion 7.4, except omit Section 7.4.3.
7.3 Quality Assurance Audit Samples.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies 7.3.1 It is recommended, but not required,
6.1 Sample Probe. Stainless steel, with that a performance audit sample be analyzed
the bottom third perforated. The sample in conjunction with the field samples. The
probe must be capped at the bottom and audit sample should be in a suitable sample
must have a threaded cap with a sampling matrix at a concentration similar to the ac-
attachment at the top. The sample probe tual field samples.
must be long enough to go through and ex- 7.3.2 When making compliance determina-
tend no less than 0.9 m (3 ft) below the land- tions, and upon availability, audit samples
fill cover. If the sample probe is to be driven may be obtained from the appropriate EPA
into the landfill, the bottom cap should be Regional Office or from the responsible en-
designed to facilitate driving the probe into forcement authority and analyzed in con-
the landfill. junction with the field samples.
6.2 Sampling Train. NOTE: The responsible enforcement author-
6.2.1 Rotameter with Flow Control Valve. ity should be notified at least 30 days prior
Capable of measuring a sample flow rate of to the test date to allow sufficient time for
100 ±10 ml/min. The control valve must be sample delivery.
made of stainless steel.
6.2.2 Sampling Valve. Stainless steel. 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
6.2.3 Pressure Gauge. U-tube mercury ma- and Transport
nometer, or equivalent, capable of measuring 8.1 Sample Tank Evacuation and Leak-
pressure to within 1 mm Hg (0.5 in H2O) in Check. Conduct the sample tank evacuation
the range of 0 to 1,100 mm Hg (0 to 590 in and leak-check either in the laboratory or
H2O). the field. Connect the pressure gauge and
6.2.4 Sample Tank. Stainless steel or alu- sampling valve to the sample tank. Evacuate
minum cylinder, equipped with a stainless the sample tank to 10 mm Hg (5.4 in H2O) ab-
steel sample tank valve. solute pressure or less. Close the sampling
6.3 Vacuum Pump. Capable of evacuating valve, and allow the tank to sit for 30 min-
to an absolute pressure of 10 mm Hg (5.4 in utes. The tank is acceptable if no change
H2O). more than ±2 mm is noted. Include the re-
6.4 Purging Pump. Portable, explosion sults of the leak-check in the test report.
proof, and suitable for sampling NMOC. 8.2 Sample Probe Installation. The tester
6.5 Pilot Probe Procedure. The following may use the procedure in Section 8.2.1 or
are needed only if the tester chooses to use 8.2.2.
the procedure described in Section 8.2.1. 8.2.1 Pilot Probe Procedure. Use the post
6.5.1 Pilot Probe. Tubing of sufficient driver to drive the pilot probe at least 0.9 m
strength to withstand being driven into the (3 ft) below the landfill cover. Alternative
landfill by a post driver and an outside di- procedures to drive the probe into the land-
ameter of at least 6 mm (0.25 in.) smaller fill may be used subject to the approval of
than the sample probe. The pilot probe shall the Administrator’s designated representa-
be capped on both ends and long enough to tive.
go through the landfill cover and extend no 8.2.1.1 Remove the pilot probe and drive
less than 0.9 m (3 ft) into the landfill. the sample probe into the hole left by the
527
pilot probe. The sample probe shall extend at connect the sampling tank apparatus and
least 0.9 m (3 ft) below the landfill cover and pressurize the sample cylinder to approxi-
shall protrude about 0.3 m (1 ft) above the mately 1,060 mm Hg (567 in. H2O) absolute
landfill cover. Seal around the sampling pressure with helium, and record the final
probe with bentonite and cap the sampling pressure. Alternatively, the sample tank
probe with the sampling probe cap. may be pressurized in the lab.
8.2.2 Auger Procedure. Use an auger to 8.4.1 The following restrictions apply to
drill a hole to at least 0.9 m (3 ft) below the compositing samples from different probe
landfill cover. Place the sample probe in the sites into a single cylinder: (1) Individual
hole and backfill with pea gravel to a level composite samples per cylinder must be of
0.6 m (2 ft) from the surface. The sample equal volume; this must be verified by re-
probe shall protrude at least 0.3 m (1 ft) cording the flow rate, sampling time, vacu-
above the landfill cover. Seal the remaining um readings, or other appropriate volume
area around the probe with bentonite. Allow measuring data, (2) individual composite
24 hours for the landfill gases to equilibrate samples must have a minimum volume of 1
inside the augured probe before sampling. liter unless data is provided showing smaller
8.3 Sample Train Assembly. Just before volumes can be accurately measured, and (3)
assembling the sample train, measure the composite samples must not be collected
sample tank vacuum using the pressure using the final cylinder vacuum as it dimin-
gauge. Record the vacuum, the ambient tem- ishes to ambient pressure.
perature, and the barometric pressure at this 8.4.2 Use Method 3C to determine the per-
time. Assemble the sampling probe purging cent N2 in each cylinder. The presence of N2
system as shown in Figure 25C–1. indicates either infiltration of ambient air
8.4 Sampling Procedure. Open the sam- into the landfill gas sample or an inappro-
pling valve and use the purge pump and the priate testing site has been chosen where an-
flow control valve to evacuate at least two aerobic decomposition has not begun. The
sample probe volumes from the system at a landfill gas sample is acceptable if the con-
flow rate of 500 ml/min or less. Close the centration of N2 is less than 20 percent. Al-
sampling valve and replace the purge pump ternatively, Method 3C may be used to deter-
with the sample tank apparatus as shown in mine the oxygen content of each cylinder as
Figure 25C–2. Open the sampling valve and an air infiltration test. With this option, the
the sample tank valve and, using the flow oxygen content of each cylinder must be less
control valve, sample at a flow rate of 500 ml/ than 5 percent.
min or less until either a constant flow rate
9.0 Quality Control
can no longer be maintained because of re-
duced sample tank vacuum or the appro- 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
priate composite volume is attained. Dis- ures.
8.4.1 ................................... Verify that landfill gas sample contains Ensures that ambient air was not drawn into the landfill
less than 20 percent N2 or 5 percent gas sample.
O2.
10.1, 10.2 ........................... NMOC analyzer initial and daily perform- Ensures precision of analytical results.
ance checks.
11.1.4 ................................. Audit Sample Analyses ............................ Evaluate analytical technique and instrument calibra-
tion.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization ume of water used to fill them to the nearest
5 ml.
NOTE: Maintain a record of performance of
each item. 11.0 Analytical Procedures
10.1 Initial NMOC Analyzer Performance
11.1 The oxidation, reduction, and meas-
Test. Same as in Method 25, Section 10.1, ex-
urement of NMOC’s is similar to Method 25.
cept omit the linearity checks for CO2 stand- Before putting the NMOC analyzer into rou-
ards. tine operation, conduct an initial perform-
10.2 NMOC Analyzer Daily Calibration. ance test. Start the analyzer, and perform
10.2.1 NMOC Response Factors. Same as all the necessary functions in order to put
in Method 25, Section 10.2.2. the analyzer into proper working order. Con-
10.3 Sample Tank Volume. The volume of duct the performance test according to the
the gas sampling tanks must be determined. procedures established in Section 10.1. Once
Determine the tank volumes by weighing the performance test has been successfully
them empty and then filled with deionized completed and the NMOC calibration re-
water; weigh to the nearest 5 g, and record sponse factor has been determined, proceed
the results. Alternatively, measure the vol- with sample analysis as follows:
528
11.1.1 Daily Operations and Calibration tion. If the 20-percent specification is not
Checks. Before and immediately after the met, reanalyze the compliance and audit
analysis of each set of samples or on a daily samples, and include initial and reanalysis
basis (whichever occurs first), conduct a cali- values in the test report.
bration test according to the procedures es- 11.3.4 Failure to meet the 20-percent spec-
tablished in Section 10.2. If the criteria of ification may require retests until the audit
the daily calibration test cannot be met, re- problems are resolved. However, if the audit
peat the NMOC analyzer performance test results do not affect the compliance or non-
(Section 10.1) before proceeding. compliance status of the affected facility,
11.1.2 Operating Conditions. Same as in the Administrator may waive the reanalysis
Method 25, Section 11.2.1. requirement, further audits, or retests and
11.1.3 Analysis of Sample Tank. Purge the accept the results of the compliance test.
sample loop with sample, and then inject the While steps are being taken to resolve audit
sample. Under the specified operating condi- analysis problems, the Administrator may
tions, the CO2 in the sample will elute in ap- also choose to use the data to determine the
proximately 100 seconds. As soon as the de- compliance or noncompliance status of the
tector response returns to baseline following affected facility.
the CO2 peak, switch the carrier gas flow to
backflush, and raise the column oven tem- 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
perature to 195 °C (383 °F) as rapidly as pos-
sible. A rate of 30 °C/min (54 °F/min) has been NOTE: All equations are written using abso-
shown to be adequate. Record the value ob- lute pressure; absolute pressures are deter-
tained for any measured NMOC. Return the mined by adding the measured barometric
column oven temperature to 85 °C (185 °F) in pressure to the measured gauge or manom-
preparation for the next analysis. Analyze eter pressure.
each sample in triplicate, and report the av- 12.1 Nomenclature.
erage as Ctm. Bw=Moisture content in the sample, fraction.
11.2 Audit Sample Analysis. When the CN2=Measured N2 concentration, fraction.
method is used to analyze samples to dem-
Ct=Calculated NMOC concentration, ppmv C
onstrate compliance with a source emission
equivalent.
regulation, an audit sample, if available,
must be analyzed. Ctm=Measured NMOC concentration, ppmv C
11.2.1 Concurrently analyze the audit equivalent.
sample and the compliance samples in the Pb=Barometric pressure, mm Hg.
same manner to evaluate the technique of Pt=Gas sample tank pressure after sampling,
the analyst and the standards preparation. but before pressurizing, mm Hg absolute.
11.2.2 The same analyst, analytical re- Ptf=Final gas sample tank pressure after
agents, and analytical system must be used pressurizing, mm Hg absolute.
for the compliance samples and the audit Pti=Gas sample tank pressure after evacu-
sample. If this condition is met, duplicate ation, mm Hg absolute.
auditing of subsequent compliance analyses Pw=Vapor pressure of H2O (from Table 25C–1),
for the same enforcement agency within a 30- mm Hg.
day period is waived. An audit sample set r=Total number of analyzer injections of
may not be used to validate different sets of sample tank during analysis (where
compliance samples under the jurisdiction of j=injection number, 1 * * * r).
separate enforcement agencies, unless prior Tt=Sample tank temperature at completion
arrangements have been made with both en- of sampling, °K.
forcement agencies. Tti=Sample tank temperature before sam-
11.3 Audit Sample Results. pling, °K.
11.3.1 Calculate the audit sample con- Ttf=Sample tank temperature after pressur-
centrations and submit results using the in- izing, °K.
structions provided with the audit samples.
12.2 Water Correction. Use Table 25C–1
11.3.2 Report the results of the audit sam-
(Section 17.0), the LFG temperature, and
ples and the compliance determination sam-
barometric pressure at the sampling site to
ples along with their identification numbers,
calculate Bw.
and the analyst’s name to the responsible en-
forcement authority. Include this informa-
Pw
tion with reports of any subsequent compli-
ance analyses for the same enforcement au-
Bw = Eq. 25C-1
thority during the 30-day period.
Pb
11.3.3 The concentrations of the audit 12.3 NMOC Concentration. Use the fol-
samples obtained by the analyst must agree lowing equation to calculate the concentra-
within 20 percent of the actual concentration of NMOC for each sample tank.
529
ER17OC00.383</MATH>
Pt f
Tt f r
1
Ct =
Pt Pt i ⎛1 − 99 C ⎞ − B
∑ C tm ( j) Eq. 25C-2
− j=1
Tt Tt i ⎝ 78 2 ⎠
N w
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] Pollution Control Association. Boston, Mas-

sachusetts. June 15–20, 1975.) 14 p.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] 2. Salo, Albert E., William L. Oaks, and
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] Robert D. MacPhee. Measuring the Organic
Carbon Content of Source Emissions for Air
16.0 References Pollution Control. Paper No. 74–190. (Pre-
1. Salo, Albert E., Samuel Witz, and Robert sented at the 67th Annual Meeting of the Air
D. MacPhee. Determination of Solvent Vapor Pollution Control Association. Denver, Colo-
Concentrations by Total Combustion Anal- rado. June 9–13, 1974.) 25 p.
ysis: A Comparison of Infrared with Flame
Ionization Detectors. Paper No. 75–33.2. (Pre- 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
sented at the 68th Annual Meeting of the Air Validation Data
530
ER17OC00.384</MATH>
TABLE 25C–1—MOISTURE CORRECTION TABLE 25C–1—MOISTURE CORRECTION—

Continued
Vapor Vapor
Pressure Tempera- Pressure
Temperature, °C Vapor Vapor
of H2O, ture, °C of H2O,
Pressure Tempera- Pressure
mm Hg mm Hg Temperature, °C of H2O, ture, °C of H2O,
mm Hg mm Hg
4 ..................................... 6.1 18 15.5
6 ..................................... 7.0 20 17.5 16 ................................... 13.6 30 31.8

8 ..................................... 8.0 22 19.8
10 ................................... 9.2 24 22.4
12 ................................... 10.5 26 25.2
14 ................................... 12.0 28 28.3
531
ER17OC00.385</GPH>
METHOD 25D—DETERMINATION OF THE VOLA- 6.1.3 Cooling Coil. Fabricated from 0.25 in
TILE ORGANIC CONCENTRATION OF WASTE (6.35 mm). ID 304 stainless steel tubing with
SAMPLES a thermocouple at the coil outlet.
6.2 Analysis. The following equipment is
NOTE: Performance of this method should required.
not be attempted by persons unfamiliar with
6.2.1 Purging Apparatus. For separating
the operation of a flame ionization detector
the VO from the waste sample. A schematic
(FID) or an electrolytic conductivity detec-
of the system is shown in Figure 25D–1. The
tor (ELCD) because knowledge beyond the
purging apparatus consists of the following
scope of this presentation is required.
major components.
1.0 Scope and Application 6.2.1.1 Purging Flask. A glass container to
hold the sample while it is heated and purged
1.1 Analyte. Volatile Organic Compounds. with dry nitrogen. The cap of the purging
No CAS No. assigned. flask is equipped with three fittings: one for
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- a purging lance (fitting with the #7 Ace-
ble for determining the volatile organic (VO) thread), one for the Teflon exit tubing (side
concentration of a waste sample. fitting, also a #7 Ace-thread), and a third (a
50-mm Ace-thread) to attach the base of the
2.0 Summary of Method purging flask as shown in Figure 25D–2. The
base of the purging flask is a 50-mm ID (2 in)
2.1 Principle. A sample of waste is ob-
cylindrical glass tube. One end of the tube is
tained at a point which is most representa-
open while the other end is sealed. Exact di-
tive of the unexposed waste (where the waste
mensions are shown in Figure 25D–2.
has had minimum opportunity to volatilize
6.2.1.2 Purging Lance. Glass tube, 6-mm
to the atmosphere). The sample is suspended
OD (0.2 in) by 30 cm (12 in) long. The purging
in an organic/aqueous matrix, then heated
end of the tube is fitted with a four-arm bub-
and purged with nitrogen for 30 min. in order
bler with each tip drawn to an opening 1 mm
to separate certain organic compounds. Part
(0.04 in) in diameter. Details and exact di-
of the sample is analyzed for carbon con-
mensions are shown in Figure 25D–2.
centration, as methane, with an FID, and
part of the sample is analyzed for chlorine 6.2.1.3 Coalescing Filter. Porous fritted
concentration, as chloride, with an ELCD. disc incorporated into a container with the
The VO concentration is the sum of the car- same dimensions as the purging flask. The
bon and chlorine content of the sample. details of the design are shown in Figure
25D–3.
3.0 Definitions 6.2.1.4 Constant Temperature Chamber. A
forced draft oven capable of maintaining a
3.1 Well-mixed in the context of this meth- uniform temperature around the purging
od refers to turbulent flow which results in flask and coalescing filter of 75 ±2 °C (167 ±3.6
multiple-phase waste in effect behaving as °F).
single-phase waste due to good mixing. 6.2.1.5 Three-way Valve. Manually oper-
ated, stainless steel. To introduce calibra-
4.0 Interferences [Reserved] tion gas into system.
6.2.1.6 Flow Controllers. Two, adjustable.
5.0 Safety
One capable of maintaining a purge gas flow
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve rate of 6 ±0.06 L/min (0.2 ±0.002 ft3/min) The
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- other capable of maintaining a calibration
ment. This test method may not address all gas flow rate of 1–100 mL/min (0.00004–0.004
of the safety problems associated with its ft3/min).
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this 6.2.1.7 Rotameter. For monitoring the air
test method to establish appropriate safety flow through the purging system (0–10 L/
and health practices and to determine the min)(0–0.4 ft3/min).
applicability of regulatory limitations prior 6.2.1.8 Sample Splitters. Two heated flow
to performing this test method. restrictors (placed inside oven or heated to
120 ±10 °C (248 ±18 °F) ). At a purge rate of 6
6.0 Equipment and Supplies L/min (0.2 ft3/min), one will supply a con-
stant flow to the first detector (the rest of
NOTE: Mention of trade names or specific
the flow will be directed to the second sam-
products does not constitute endorsement by
ple splitter). The second splitter will split
the Environmental Protection Agency.
the analytical flow between the second de-
6.1 Sampling. The following equipment is tector and the flow restrictor. The approxi-
required: mate flow to the FID will be 40 mL/min
6.1.1 Sampling Tube. Flexible Teflon, 0.25 (0.0014 ft3/min) and to the ELCD will be 15
in. ID (6.35 mm). mL/min (0.0005 ft3/min), but the exact flow
6.1.2 Sample Container. Borosilicate must be adjusted to be compatible with the
glass, 40-mL, and a Teflon-lined screw cap individual detector and to meet its linearity
capable of forming an air tight seal. requirement. The two sample splitters will
532
be connected to each other by 1/8′ OD (3.175 tegrating the area under the curve for each
mm) stainless steel tubing. portion, subtracting the background for each
6.2.1.9 Flow Restrictor. Stainless steel portion, and then adding all of the areas to-
tubing, 1/8′ OD (3.175 mm), connecting the gether for the final area count).
second sample splitter to the ice bath. 6.2.2.2 ELCD. An ELCD meeting the fol-
Length is determined by the resulting pres- lowing specifications is required. 1-propanol
sure in the purging flask (as measured by the must be used as the electrolyte. The electro-
pressure gauge). The resulting pressure from lyte flow through the conductivity cell shall
the use of the flow restrictor shall be 6–7 be 1 to 2 mL/min (0.00004 to 0.00007 ft3/min).
psig. NOTE: A 1⁄4-in. ID (6.35 mm) quartz reactor
6.2.1.10 Filter Flask. With one-hole stop- tube is strongly recommended to reduce car-
per. Used to hold ice bath. Excess purge gas bon buildup and the resulting detector main-
is vented through the flask to prevent con- tenance.
densation in the flowmeter and to trap vola-
tile organic compounds. 6.2.2.2.1 Linearity. A linear response (±10
6.2.1.11 Four-way Valve. Manually oper- percent) over the response range as dem-
ated, stainless steel. Placed inside oven, used onstrated by the procedures in Section 10.1.2.
to bypass purging flask. 6.2.2.2.2 Range. A full scale range of 5.0 pg/
6.2.1.12 On/Off Valves. Two, stainless sec to 500 ng/sec chloride. Signal attenuators
steel. One heat resistant up to 130 °C (266 °F) shall be available to produce a minimum sig-
and placed between oven and ELCD. The nal response of 10 percent of full scale.
other a toggle valve used to control purge 6.2.2.2.3 Data Recording System. A digital
gas flow. integration system compatible with the out-
6.2.1.13 Pressure Gauge. Range 0–40 psi. To put voltage range of the ELCD. The recorder
monitor pressure in purging flask and coa- must have the capability to start and stop
lescing filter. integration at points selected by the oper-
6.2.1.14 Sample Lines. Teflon, 1/4′ OD (6.35 ator or it shall be capable of performing the
mm), used inside the oven to carry purge gas ‘‘integration by slices’’ technique.
to and from purging chamber and to and
from coalescing filter to four-way valve.
Also used to carry sample from four-way 7.1 Sampling.
valve to first sample splitter. 7.1.1 Polyethylene Glycol (PEG). Ninety-
6.2.1.15 Detector Tubing. Stainless steel, eight percent pure with an average molec-
1/8′ OD (3.175 mm), heated to 120 ±10 °C (248 ular weight of 400. Before using the PEG, re-
±18 °F) . Used to carry sample gas from each move any organic compounds that might be
sample splitter to a detector. Each piece of detected as volatile organics by heating it to
tubing must be wrapped with heat tape and 120 °C (248 °F) and purging it with nitrogen at
insulating tape in order to insure that no a flow rate of 1 to 2 L/min (0.04 to 0.07 ft3/
cold spots exist. The tubing leading to the min) for 2 hours. The cleaned PEG must be
ELCD will also contain a heat-resistant on- stored under a 1 to 2 L/min (0.04 to 0.07 ft3/
off valve (Section 6.2.1.12) which shall also be min) nitrogen purge until use. The purge ap-
wrapped with heat-tape and insulation. paratus is shown in Figure 25D–4.
6.2.2 Volatile Organic Measurement Sys- 7.2 Analysis.
tem. Consisting of an FID to measure the 7.2.1 Sample Separation. The following
carbon concentration of the sample and an are required for the sample purging step.
ELCD to measure the chlorine concentra- 7.2.1.1 PEG. Same as Section 7.1.1.
tion. 7.2.1.2 Purge Gas. Zero grade nitrogen
6.2.2.1 FID. A heated FID meeting the fol- (N2), containing less than 1 ppm carbon.
lowing specifications is required. 7.2.2 Volatile Organics Measurement. The
6.2.2.1.1 Linearity. A linear response (±5 following are required for measuring the VO
percent) over the operating range as dem- concentration.
onstrated by the procedures established in 7.2.2.1 Hydrogen (H2). Zero grade H2, 99.999
Section 10.1.1. percent pure.
6.2.2.1.2 Range. A full scale range of 50 pg 7.2.2.2 Combustion Gas. Zero grade air or
carbon/sec to 50 μg carbon/sec. Signal attenu- oxygen as required by the FID.
ators shall be available to produce a min- 7.2.2.3 Calibration Gas. Pressurized gas
imum signal response of 10 percent of full cylinder containing 10 percent propane and 1
scale. percent 1,1-dichloroethylene by volume in ni-
6.2.2.1.3 Data Recording System. A digital trogen.
integration system compatible with the FID 7.2.2.4 Water. Deionized distilled water
for permanently recording the output of the that conforms to American Society for Test-
detector. The recorder shall have the capa- ing and Materials Specification D 1193–74,
bility to start and stop integration at points Type 3, is required for analysis. At the op-
selected by the operator or it shall be capa- tion of the analyst, the KMnO4 test for oxi-
ble of the ‘‘integration by slices’’ technique dizable organic matter may be omitted when
(this technique involves breaking down the high concentrations are not expected to be
chromatogram into smaller increments, in- present.
533
7.2.2.5 1-Propanol. ACS grade or better. analyzed as a separate sample. Calculate the
Electrolyte Solution. For use in the ELCD. weighted average VO concentration of the
7.3 Quality Assurance Audit Samples. waste using Equation 25D–13 (Section 12.14).
7.3.1 It is recommended, but not required, 8.1.4 Solid waste. Add approximately 10 g
that a performance audit sample be analyzed of the solid waste to a container prepared in
in conjunction with the field samples. The the manner described in Section 8.1.2.2, mini-
audit sample should be in a suitable sample mizing headspace. Cap and chill imme-
matrix at a concentration similar to the ac- diately.
tual field samples. 8.1.5 Alternative to Tap Installation. If
7.3.2 When making compliance determina- tap installation is impractical or impossible,
tions, and upon availability, audit samples fill a large, clean, empty container by sub-
may be obtained from the appropriate EPA merging the container into the waste below
regional Office or from the responsible en- the surface of the waste. Immediately fill a
forcement authority and analyzed in con- container prepared in the manner described
junction with the field samples. in Section 8.1.2.2 with approximately 10 g of
NOTE: The responsible enforcement author- the waste collected in the large container.
ity should be notified at least 30 days prior Minimize headspace, cap and chill imme-
to the test date to allow sufficient time for diately.
sample delivery. 8.1.6 Alternative sampling techniques
may be used upon the approval of the Admin-
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, istrator.
and Transport 8.2 Sample Recovery.
8.1 Sampling. 8.2.1 Assemble the purging apparatus as
8.1.1 Sampling Plan Design and Develop- shown in Figures 25D–1 and 25D–2. The oven
ment. Use the procedures in chapter nine of shall be heated to 75 ±2 °C (167 ±3.6 °F). The
Reference 1 in Section 16 as guidance in de- sampling lines leading from the oven to the
veloping a sampling plan. detectors shall be heated to 120 ±10 °C (248 ±18
8.1.2 Single Phase or Well-mixed Waste. °F) with no cold spots. The flame ionization
8.1.2.1 Install a sampling tap to obtain the detector shall be operated with a heated
sample at a point which is most representa- block. Adjust the purging lance so that it
tive of the unexposed waste (where the waste reaches the bottom of the chamber.
has had minimum opportunity to volatilize 8.2.2 Remove the sample container from
to the atmosphere). Assemble the sampling the cooler, and wipe the exterior of the con-
apparatus as shown in Figure 25D–5. tainer to remove any extraneous ice, water,
8.1.2.2 Prepare the sampling containers as or other debris. Reweigh the sample con-
follows: Pour 30 mL of clean PEG into the tainer to the nearest 0.01 g, and record the
container. PEG will reduce but not eliminate weight (msf). Pour the contents of the sample
the loss of organics during sample collection. container into the purging flask, rinse the
Weigh the sample container with the screw sample container three times with a total of
cap, the PEG, and any labels to the nearest 20 mL of PEG (since the sample container
0.01 g and record the weight (mst). Store the originally held 30 mL of PEG, the total vol-
containers in an ice bath until 1 hour before ume of PEG added to the purging flask will
sampling (PEG will solidify at ice bath tem- be 50 mL), transferring the rinsings to the
peratures; allow the containers to reach purging flask after each rinse. Cap purging
room temperature before sampling). flask between rinses. The total volume of
8.1.2.3 Begin sampling by purging the PEG in the purging flask shall be 50 mL. Add
sample lines and cooling coil with at least 50 mL of water to the purging flask.
four volumes of waste. Collect the purged
9.0 Quality Control
material in a separate container and dispose
of it properly. 9.1 Quality Control Samples. If audit sam-
8.1.2.4 After purging, stop the sample flow ples are not available, prepare and analyze
and direct the sampling tube to a preweighed the two types of quality control samples
sample container, prepared as described in (QCS) listed in Sections 9.4.1 and 9.4.2. Before
Section 8.1.2.2. Keep the tip of the tube below placing the system in operation, after a
the surface of the PEG during sampling to shutdown of greater than six months, and
minimize contact with the atmosphere. Sam- after any major modifications, analyze each
ple at a flow rate such that the temperature QCS in triplicate. For each detector, cal-
of the waste is less than 10 °C (50 °F). Fill the culate the percent recovery by dividing
sample container and immediately cap it measured concentration by theoretical con-
(within 5 seconds) so that a minimum centration and multiplying by 100. Deter-
headspace exists in the container. Store im- mine the mean percent recovery for each de-
mediately in a cooler and cover with ice. tector for each QCS triplicate analysis. The
8.1.3 Multiple-phase Waste. Collect a 10 g RSD for any triplicate analysis shall be ≤10
sample of each phase of waste generated percent. For QCS 1 (methylene chloride), the
using the procedures described in Section percent recovery shall be ≥90 percent for car-
8.1.2 or 8.1.5. Each phase of the waste shall be bon as methane, and ≥55 percent for chlorine
534
as chloride. For QCS 2 (1,3-dichloro-2-pro- calibration gas at the three-way calibration
panol), the percent recovery shall be ≤15 per- gas valve. See Figure 25D–1.
cent for carbon as methane, and ≤6 percent 10.1.1 Linearity Check Procedure. Using
for chlorine as chloride. If the analytical sys- the calibration standard described in Section
tem does not meet the above-mentioned cri- 7.2.2.3 and by varying the injection time, it is
teria for both detectors, check the system possible to calibrate at multiple concentra-
parameters (temperature, system pressure, tion levels. Use Equation 25D–3 to calculate
purge rate, etc.), correct the problem, and re- three sets of calibration gas flow rates and
peat the triplicate analysis of each QCS. run times needed to introduce a total mass
9.1.1 QCS 1, Methylene Chloride. Prepare of carbon, as methane, (mc) of 1, 5, and 10 mg
a stock solution by weighing, to the nearest into the system (low, medium and high FID
0.1 mg, 55 μL of HPLC grade methylene chlo- calibration, respectively). Use Equation 25D–
ride in a tared 5 mL volumetric flask. Record 4 to calculate three sets of calibration gas
the weight in milligrams, dilute to 5 mL flow rates and run times needed to introduce
with cleaned PEG, and inject 100 μL of the a total chloride mass (mch) of 1, 5, and 10 mg
stock solution into a sample prepared as a into the system (low, medium and high
water blank (50 mL of cleaned PEG and 60 ELCD calibration, respectively). With the
mL of water in the purging flask). Analyze system operating in standby mode, allow the
the QCS according to the procedures de- FID and the ELCD to establish a stable base-
scribed in Sections 10.2 and 10.3, excluding line. Set the secondary pressure regulator of
Section 10.2.2. To calculate the theoretical the calibration gas cylinder to the same
carbon concentration (in mg) in QCS 1, mul- pressure as the purge gas cylinder and set
tiply mg of methylene chloride in the stock the proper flow rate with the calibration
solution by 3.777 × 10¥3. To calculate the the- flow controller (see Figure 25D–1). The cali-
oretical chlorine concentration (in mg) in bration gas flow rate can be measured with a
QCS 1, multiply mg of methylene chloride in flowmeter attached to the vent position of
the stock solution by 1.670 × 10¥2.
the calibration gas valve. Set the four-way
9.1.2 QCS 2, 1,3-dichloro-2-propanol. Pre-
bypass valve to standby position so that the
pare a stock solution by weighing, to the
calibration gas flows through the coalescing
nearest 0.1 mg, 60 μL of high purity grade 1,3-
filter only. Inject the calibration gas by
dichloro-2-propanol in a tared 5 mL volu-
turning the calibration gas valve from vent
metric flask. Record the weight in milli-
position to inject position. Continue the
grams, dilute to 5 mL with cleaned PEG, and
calibration gas flow for the appropriate pe-
inject 100 μL of the stock solution into a
riod of time before switching the calibration
sample prepared as a water blank (50 mL of
cleaned PEG and 60 mL of water in the purg- valve to vent position. Continue recording
ing flask). Analyze the QCS according to the the response of the FID and the ELCD for 5
procedures described in Sections 10.2 and min after switching off calibration gas flow.
10.3, excluding Section 10.2.2. To calculate Make triplicate injections of all six levels of
the theoretical carbon concentration (in mg) calibration.
in QCS 2, multiply mg of 1,3-dichloro-2-pro- 10.1.2 Linearity Criteria. Calculate the av-
panol in the stock solution by 7.461 × 10¥3. To erage response factor (Equations 25D–5 and
calculate the theoretical chlorine concentra- 25D–6) and the relative standard deviation
tion (in mg) in QCS 2, multiply mg of 1,3- (RSD) (Equation 25D–10) at each level of the
dichloro-2-propanol in the stock solution by calibration curve for both detectors. Cal-
1.099 × 10¥2. culate the overall mean of the three response
9.1.3 Routine QCS Analysis. For each set factor averages for each detector. The FID
of compliance samples (in this context, set is linearity is acceptable if each response fac-
per facility, per compliance test), analyze tor is within 5 percent of the overall mean
one QCS 1 and one QCS 2 sample. The per- and if the RSD for each set of triplicate in-
cent recovery for each sample for each detec- jections is less than 5 percent. The ELCD lin-
tor shall be ±13 percent of the mean recovery earity is acceptable if each response factor is
established for the most recent set of QCS within 10 percent of the overall mean and if
triplicate analysis (Section 9.4). If the sam- the RSD for each set of triplicate injections
ple does not meet this criteria, check the is less than 10 percent. Record the overall
system components and analyze another QCS mean value of the response factors for the
1 and 2 until a single set of QCS meet the ±13 FID and the ELCD. If the calibration for ei-
percent criteria. ther the FID or the ELCD does not meet the
criteria, correct the detector/system problem
10.0 Calibration and Standardization and repeat Sections 10.1.1 and 10.1.2.
10.1 Initial Performance Check of Purging 10.2 Daily Calibrations.
System. Before placing the system in oper- 10.2.1 Daily Linearity Check. Follow the
ation, after a shutdown of greater than six procedures outlined in Section 10.1.1 to ana-
months, after any major modifications, and lyze the medium level calibration for both
at least once per month during continuous the FID and the ELCD in duplicate at the
operation, conduct the linearity checks de- start of the day. Calculate the response fac-
scribed in Sections 10.1.1 and 10.1.2. Install tors and the RSDs for each detector. For the
535
FID, the calibration is acceptable if the av- the problem before resuming. Leaks detected
erage response factor is within 5 percent of during a sampling period invalidate that
the overall mean response factor (Section sample.
10.1.2) and if the RSD for the duplicate injec- 11.1.2 As the purging continues, monitor
tion is less than 5 percent. For the ELCD, the output of the detectors to make certain
the calibration is acceptable if the average that the analysis is proceeding correctly and
response factor is within 10 percent of the that the results are being properly recorded.
overall mean response factor (Section 10.1.2) Every 10 minutes read and record the purge
and if the RSD for the duplicate injection is flow rate, the pressure and the chamber tem-
less than 10 percent. If the calibration for ei- perature. Continue the purging for 30 min-
ther the FID or the ELCD does not meet the utes.
criteria, correct the detector/system problem
11.1.3 For each detector output, integrate
and repeat Sections 10.1.1 and 10.1.2.
over the entire area of the peak starting at
10.2.2 Calibration Range Check.
1 minute and continuing until the end of the
10.2.2.1 If the waste concentration for ei-
ther detector falls below the range of cali- run. Subtract the established baseline area
bration for that detector, use the procedure from the peak area. Record the corrected
outlined in Section 10.1.1 to choose two cali- area of the peak. See Figure 25D–6 for an ex-
bration points that bracket the new target ample integration.
concentration. Analyze each of these points 11.2 Water Blank. A water blank shall be
in triplicate (as outlined in Section 10.1.1) analyzed for each batch of cleaned PEG pre-
and use the criteria in Section 10.1.2 to de- pared. Transfer about 60 mL of water into
termine the linearity of the detector in this the purging flask. Add 50 mL of the cleaned
‘‘mini-calibration’’ range. PEG to the purging flask. Treat the blank as
10.2.2.2 After the initial linearity check of described in Sections 8.2 and 8.3, excluding
the mini-calibration curve, it is only nec- Section 8.2.2. Calculate the concentration of
essary to test one of the points in duplicate carbon and chlorine in the blank sample (as-
for the daily calibration check (in addition sume 10 g of waste as the mass). A VO con-
to the points specified in Section 10.2.1). The centration equivalent to ≤10 percent of the
average daily mini-calibration point should applicable standard may be subtracted from
fit the linearity criteria specified in Section the measured VO concentration of the waste
10.2.1. If the calibration for either the FID or samples. Include all blank results and docu-
the ELCD does not meet the criteria, correct mentation in the test report.
the detector/system problem and repeat the 11.3 Audit Sample Analysis.
calibration procedure mentioned in the first 11.3.1 When the method is used to analyze
paragraph of Section 10.2.2. A mini-calibra- samples to demonstrate compliance with a
tion curve for waste concentrations above source emission regulation, an audit sample,
the calibration curve for either detector is if available, must be analyzed.
optional.
11.3.2 Concurrently analyze the audit
10.3 Analytical Balance. Calibrate against
sample and the compliance samples in the
standard weights.
same manner to evaluate the technique of
11.0 Analysis the analyst and the standards preparation.
11.1 Sample Analysis. agents, and analytical system must be used
11.1.1 Turn on the constant temperature
for the compliance samples and the audit
chamber and allow the temperature to
sample. If this condition is met, duplicate
equilibrate at 75 ±2 °C (167 ±3.6 °F). Turn the
auditing of subsequent compliance analyses
four-way valve so that the purge gas by-
for the same enforcement agency within a 30-
passes the purging flask, the purge gas flow-
day period is waived. An audit sample may
ing through the coalescing filter and to the
not be used to validate different sets of com-
detectors (standby mode). Turn on the purge
pliance samples under the jurisdiction of
gas. Allow both the FID and the ELCD to
separate enforcement agencies, unless prior
warm up until a stable baseline is achieved
arrangements have been made with both en-
on each detector. Pack the filter flask with
ice. Replace ice after each run and dispose of forcement agencies.
the waste water properly. When the tempera- 11.4 Audit Sample Results.
ture of the oven reaches 75 ±2 °C (167 ±3.6 °F), 11.4.1 Calculate the audit sample con-
start both integrators and record baseline. centrations and submit results using the in-
After 1 min, turn the four-way valve so that structions provided with the audit samples.
the purge gas flows through the purging 11.4.2 Report the results of the audit sam-
flask, to the coalescing filter and to the samples and the compliance determination sam-
ple splitters (purge mode). Continue record- ples along with their identification numbers,
ing the response of the FID and the ELCD. and the analyst’s name to the responsible en-
Monitor the readings of the pressure gauge forcement authority. Include this informa-
and the rotameter. If the readings fall below tion with reports of any subsequent compli-
established setpoints, stop the purging, de- ance analyses for the same enforcement au-
termine the source of the leak, and resolve thority during the 30-day period.
536
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations mch=Mass of chloride in a calibration run,
mg.
12.1 Nomenclature.
ms=Mass of the waste sample, g.
Ab=Area under the water blank response msc=Mass of carbon, as methane, in the sam-
curve, counts. ple, mg.
Ac=Area under the calibration response msf=Mass of sample container and waste
curve, counts. sample, g.
As=Area under the sample response curve, msh=Mass of chloride in the sample, mg.
ER17OC00.396</MATH>
counts. mst=Mass of sample container prior to sam-
C=Concentration of volatile organics in the pling, g.
sample, ppmw. mVO=Mass of volatile organics in the sample,
Cc=Concentration of carbon, as methane, in mg.
the calibration gas, mg/L. n=Total number of phases present in the
Cch=Concentration of chloride in the calibra- waste.
ER17OC00.395</MATH>
tion gas, mg/L. Pp=Percent propane in calibration gas (L/L).
Cj=VO concentration of phase j, ppmw. Pvc=Percent 1,1-dichloroethylene in calibra-
DRt=Average daily response factor of the tion gas (L/L).
FID, mg CH4/counts. Qc=Flow rate of calibration gas, L/min.
Drth=Average daily response factor of the tc=Length of time standard gas is delivered
ELCD, mg Cl¥/counts. to the analyzer, min.
ER17OC00.394</MATH>
Fj=Weight fraction of phase j present in the W=Weighted average VO concentration,
waste. ppmw.
mc=Mass of carbon, as methane, in a calibra- 12.2 Concentration of Carbon, as Methane,
tion run, mg. in the Calibration Gas.
ER17OC00.393</MATH>
( )
C c = 19.681 × Pp + (13121
. × Pvc ) Eq. 25D-1
12.3 Concentration of Chloride in the Cali- 12.7 ELCD Response Factor, mg/counts.
ER17OC00.392</MATH>
bration Gas.
m ch
C ch = 28.998 × Pvc Eq. 25D-2 DR th = Eq. 25D-6
Ac
12.4 Mass of Carbon, as Methane, in a
Calibration Run. 12.8 Mass of Carbon in the Sample.
ER17OC00.391</MATH>
Mc = Cc × Qc × t c Eq. 25D-3 m sc = DR t ( A s − A b ) Eq. 25D-7
12.5 Mass of Chloride in a Calibration 12.9 Mass of Chloride in the Sample.
Run.
m ch = C ch × Q c × t c Eq. 25D-4 m sh = DR th ( A s − A b ) Eq. 25D-8
ER17OC00.390</MATH>
12.6 FID Response Factor, mg/counts. 12.10 Mass of Volatile Organics in the
Sample.
mc
DR t = Eq. 25D-5 m vo = m sc + m sh Eq. 25D-9
Ac 12.11 Relative Standard Deviation.
ER17OC00.389</MATH>
n
∑ (x i − x )
2
100 i =1
RSD = Eq. 25D-10
ER17OC00.388</MATH>
x n −1
12.12 Mass of Sample. 12.13 Concentration of Volatile Organics

in Waste.
m s = m sf − m st
ER17OC00.387</MATH>
Eq. 25D-11
537
ER17OC00.386</MATH>
C=
(m vo × 1000) Eq. 25D-12 14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
ms 15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
12.14 Weighted Average VO Concentration
16.0 References
of Multi-phase Waste.
1. ‘‘Test Methods for Evaluating Solid
n Waste, Physical/Chemistry Methods’’, U.S.
W = ∑ Fj xC j Eq. 25D-13 Environmental Protection Agency. Publica-
tion SW–846, 3rd Edition, November 1986 as
j=1
amended by Update I, November 1990.

Validation Data
ER17OC00.398</MATH>
538
ER17OC00.397</MATH>
539
ER17OC00.399</GPH>
540
ER17OC00.400</GPH>
541
ER17OC00.401</GPH>
542
ER17OC00.402</GPH>
543
ER17OC00.403</GPH>
METHOD 25E—DETERMINATION OF VAPOR This method is not inclusive with respect to

PHASE ORGANIC CONCENTRATION IN WASTE specifications (e.g., reagents and standards)
SAMPLES and calibration procedures. Some material is
incorporated by reference from other meth-
NOTE: Performance of this method should ods. Therefore, to obtain reliable results,
not be attempted by persons unfamiliar with
persons using this method should have a

the operation of a flame ionization detector thorough knowledge of at least the following
(FID) nor by those who are unfamiliar with additional test methods: Method 106, part 61,
source sampling because knowledge beyond Appendix B, and Method 18, part 60, Appendix
the scope of this presentation is required. A.
544
ER17OC00.404</GPH>
1.0 Scope and Application produce a minimum signal response of 10 per-
cent of full scale.
6.2.3 Data Recording System. Analog strip
ble for determining the vapor pressure of
chart recorder or digital integration system
waste cited by an applicable regulation.
1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to compatible with the FID for permanently re-
the requirements of this method will en- cording the output of the detector.
hance the quality of the data obtained from 6.2.4 Temperature Sensor. Capable of
air pollutant sampling methods. reading temperatures in the range of 30 to 60
°C (86 to 140 °F) with an accuracy of ±0.1 °C
2.0 Summary of Method (±0.2 °F).
2.1 The headspace vapor of the sample is 7.0 Reagents and Standards
analyzed for carbon content by a headspace
analyzer, which uses an FID. 7.1 Analysis. The following items are re-
quired for analysis.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] 7.1.1 Hydrogen (H2). Zero grade hydrogen,
as required by the FID.
4.0 Interferences 7.1.2 Carrier Gas. Zero grade nitrogen,
4.1 The analyst shall select the operating containing less than 1 ppm carbon (C) and
parameters best suited to the requirements less than 1 ppm carbon dioxide.
for a particular analysis. The analyst shall 7.1.3 Combustion Gas. Zero grade air or
produce confirming data through an ade- oxygen as required by the FID.
quate supplemental analytical technique and 7.2 Calibration and Linearity Check.
have the data available for review by the Ad- 7.2.1 Stock Cylinder Gas Standard. 100
ministrator. percent propane. The manufacturer shall: (a)
Certify the gas composition to be accurate to
5.0 Safety [Reserved] ±3 percent or better (see Section 7.2.1.1); (b)
recommend a maximum shelf life over which
6.0 Equipment and Supplies the gas concentration does not change by
6.1 Sampling. The following equipment is greater than ±5 percent from the certified
required: value; and (c) affix the date of gas cylinder
6.1.1 Sample Containers. Vials, glass, with preparation, certified propane concentration,
butyl rubber septa, Perkin-Elmer Corpora- and recommended maximum shelf life to the
tion Numbers 0105–0129 (glass vials), B001– cylinder before shipment to the buyer.
0728 (gray butyl rubber septum, plug style), 7.2.1.1 Cylinder Standards Certification.
0105–0131 (butyl rubber septa), or equivalent. The manufacturer shall certify the con-
The seal must be made from butyl rubber. centration of the calibration gas in the cyl-
Silicone rubber seals are not acceptable. inder by (a) directly analyzing the cylinder
6.1.2 Vial Sealer. Perkin-Elmer Number and (b) calibrating his analytical procedure
105–0106, or equivalent. on the day of cylinder analysis. To calibrate
6.1.3 Gas-Tight Syringe. Perkin-Elmer his analytical procedure, the manufacturer
Number 00230117, or equivalent. shall use, as a minimum, a three-point cali-
6.1.4 The following equipment is required bration curve.
for sampling. 7.2.1.2 Verification of Manufacturer’s
6.1.4.1 Tap. Calibration Standards. Before using, the
6.1.4.2 Tubing. Teflon, 0.25-in. ID. manufacturer shall verify each calibration
NOTE: Mention of trade names or specific standard by (a) comparing it to gas mixtures
products does not constitute endorsement by prepared in accordance with the procedure
the Environmental Protection Agency. described in Section 7.1 of Method 106 of Part
6.1.4.3 Cooling Coil. Stainless steel (304), 61, Appendix B, or by (b) calibrating it
0.25 in.-ID, equipped with a thermocouple at against Standard Reference Materials
the coil outlet. (SRM’s) prepared by the National Bureau of
6.2 Analysis. The following equipment is Standards, if such SRM’s are available. The
required. agreement between the initially determined
6.2.1 Balanced Pressure Headspace Sam- concentration value and the verification
pler. Perkin-Elmer HS–6, HS–100, or equiva- concentration value must be within ±5 per-
lent, equipped with a glass bead column in- cent. The manufacturer must reverify all
stead of a chromatographic column. calibration standards on a time interval con-
6.2.2 FID. An FID meeting the following sistent with the shelf life of the cylinder
specifications is required. standards sold.
6.2.2.1 Linearity. A linear response (±5
8.0 Sampling Collection, Preservation, Storage,
percent) over the operating range as dem-
and Transport
onstrated by the procedures established in

Section 10.2. 8.1 Install a sampling tap to obtain a sam-
6.2.2.2 Range. A full scale range of 1 to ple at a point which is most representative
10,000 parts per million (ppm) propane (C3H8). of the unexposed waste (where the waste has
Signal attenuators shall be available to had minimum opportunity to volatilize to
545
the atmosphere). Assemble the sampling ap- (<50 °F). Fill the sample container halfway
paratus as shown in Figure 25E–1. (±5 percent) and cap it within 5 seconds.
8.2 Begin sampling by purging the sample Store immediately in a cooler and cover
lines and cooling coil with at least four vol- with ice.
umes of waste. Collect the purged material 8.4 Alternative sampling techniques may
in a separate container and dispose of it be used upon the approval of the Adminis-
properly. trator.
8.3 After purging, stop the sample flow
9.0 Quality Control
and transfer the Teflon sampling tube to a
sample container. Sample at a flow rate such 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
that the temperature of the waste is <10 °C ures.
10.2, 10.3 ........................... FID calibration and response check ........ Ensure precision of analytical results.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization procedures in Section 10.2 to recalibrate the

FID.
NOTE: Maintain a record of performance of
each item. 11.0 Analytical Procedures
10.1 Use the procedures in Sections 10.2 to
calibrate the headspace analyzer and FID 11.1 Allow one hour for the headspace
and check for linearity before the system is vials to equilibrate at the temperature speci-
first placed in operation, after any shutdown fied in the regulation. Allow the FID to
longer than 6 months, and after any modi- warm up until a stable baseline is achieved
fication of the system. on the detector.
10.2 Calibration and Linearity. Use the 11.2 Check the calibration of the FID
procedures in Section 10 of Method 18 of Part daily using the procedures in Section 10.3.
60, Appendix A, to prepare the standards and 11.3 Follow the manufacturer’s rec-
calibrate the flowmeters, using propane as ommended procedures for the normal oper-
the standard gas. Fill the calibration stand- ation of the headspace sampler and FID.
ard vials halfway (±5 percent) with deionized 11.4 Use the procedures in Sections 12.4
water. Purge and fill the airspace with cali- and 12.5 to calculate the vapor phase organic
bration standard. Prepare a minimum of vapor pressure in the samples.
three concentrations of calibration stand- 11.5 Monitor the output of the detector to
ards in triplicate at concentrations that will make certain that the results are being prop-
bracket the applicable cutoff. For a cutoff of erly recorded.
5.2 kPa (0.75 psi), prepare nominal concentra-
tions of 30,000, 50,000, and 70,000 ppm as pro- 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
pane. For a cutoff of 27.6 kPa (4.0 psi), pre-
12.1 Nomenclature.
pare nominal concentrations of 200,000,
300,000, and 400,000 ppm as propane. A=Measurement of the area under the re-
10.2.1 Use the procedures in Section 11.3 to sponse curve, counts.
measure the FID response of each standard. b=y-intercept of the linear regression line.
Use a linear regression analysis to calculate Ca=Measured vapor phase organic concentra-
the values for the slope (k) and the y-inter- tion of sample, ppm as propane.
cept (b). Use the procedures in Sections 12.3 Cma=Average measured vapor phase organic
and 12.2 to test the calibration and the lin- concentration of standard, ppm as propane.
earity. Cm=Measured vapor phase organic concentra-
10.3 Daily FID Calibration Check. Check tion of standard, ppm as propane.
the calibration at the beginning and at the Cs=Calculated standard concentration, ppm
end of the daily runs by using the following as propane.
procedures. Prepare 2 calibration standards
k=Slope of the linear regression line.
at the nominal cutoff concentration using
Pbar=Atmospheric pressure at analysis condi-
the procedures in Section 10.2. Place one at
the beginning and one at the end of the daily tions, mm Hg (in. Hg).
run. Measure the FID response of the daily P*=Organic vapor pressure in the sample,
calibration standard and use the values for k kPa (psi).
and b from the most recent calibration to PD=Percent difference between the average
calculate the concentration of the daily measured vapor phase organic concentra-
standard. Use an equation similar to 25E–2 to tion (Cm) and the calculated standard con-
calculate the percent difference between the centration (Cs).
daily standard and Cs. If the difference is RSD=Relative standard deviation.
within 5 percent, then the previous values b =1.333 × 10¥7 kPa/[(mm Hg)(ppm)], (4.91 ×
for k and b can be used. Otherwise, use the 10¥7 psi/[(in. Hg)(ppm)])
546
12.2 Linearity. Use the following equation The instrument linearity is acceptable if the
to calculate the measured standard con- PD is within five for each standard.
centration for each standard vial.
Cs − C ma
C m = kA + b Eq. 25E-1 PD = ×100 Eq. 25E-2
Cs
12.2.1 Calculate the average measured
standard concentration (Cma) for each set of 12.3. Relative Standard Deviation (RSD).
triplicate standards and use the following Use the following equation to calculate the
equation to calculate PD between Cma and Cs. RSD for each triplicate set of standards.
∑ (C m − C ma )
2
100
RSD = Eq. 25E-3
C ma 2
The calibration is acceptable if the RSD is Vapor Concentrations by Total Combustion

within five for each standard concentration. Analysis: a Comparison of Infared with
12.4 Concentration of organics in the Flame Ionization Detectors. Paper No. 75–
headspace. Use the following equation to cal- 33.2. (Presented at the 68th Annual Meeting
culate the concentration of vapor phase of the Air Pollution Control Association.
organics in each sample. Boston, Massachusetts.
2. Salo, Albert E., William L. Oaks, and
C a = kA + b Eq. 25E-4 Robert D. MacPhee. ‘‘Measuring the Organic
12.5 Vapor Pressure of Organics in the Carbon Content of Source Emissions for Air
Headspace Sample. Use the following equa- Pollution Control. Paper No. 74–190. (Pre-
tion to calculate the vapor pressure of sented at the 67th Annual Meeting of the Air
organics in the sample. Pollution Control Association. Denver, Colo-
rado. June 9–13, 1974.) p. 25.
P * = β Pbar C a Eq. 25E-5
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] Validation Data

16.0 References
1. Salo, Albert E., Samuel Witz, and Robert
D. MacPhee. ‘‘Determination of Solvent
ER17OC00.409</MATH>
ER17OC00.408</MATH>
ER17OC00.407</MATH>
ER17OC00.406</MATH>
547
ER17OC00.405</MATH>
[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971]

APPENDIX A–8 TO PART 60—TEST Method 26A—Determination of hydrogen ha-

METHODS 26 THROUGH 30B lide and halogen emissions from stationary

sources—isokinetic method
Method 26—Determination of Hydrogen Chlo-
ride Emissions From Stationary Sources
548
ER17oc00.412</GPH>
Method 27—Determination of vapor tightness erwise identified all such methods and
of gasoline delivery tank using pressure- changes must have prior approval of the Ad-
vacuum test ministrator. An owner employing such meth-
Method 28—Certification and auditing of ods or deviations from the test methods
wood heaters without obtaining prior approval does so at
Method 28A—Measurement of air to fuel the risk of subsequent disapproval and re-
ratio and minimum achievable burn rates testing with approved methods.
for wood-fired appliances Within the test methods, certain specific
Method 29—Determination of metals emis- equipment or procedures are recognized as
sions from stationary sources being acceptable or potentially acceptable
The test methods in this appendix are re- and are specifically identified in the meth-
ferred to in § 60.8 (Performance Tests) and ods. The items identified as acceptable op-
§ 60.11 (Compliance With Standards and
tions may be used without approval but
Maintenance Requirements) of 40 CFR part
must be identified in the test report. The po-
60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific
tentially approvable options are cited as
uses of these test methods are described in
‘‘subject to the approval of the Adminis-
the standards of performance contained in
trator’’ or as ‘‘or equivalent.’’ Such poten-
the subparts, beginning with Subpart D.
dures in a test method. Similarly, for the techniques or alternatives are in fact ap-
sources subject to emission monitoring replicable and are properly executed; (2) in-
quirements, specific instructions pertaining cluding a written description of the alter-
to any use of a test method as a reference native method in the test report (the written
method are provided in the subpart or in Ap- method must be clear and must be capable of
pendix B. being performed without additional instruc-
Inclusion of methods in this appendix is tion, and the degree of detail should be simi-
not intended as an endorsement or denial of lar to the detail contained in the test meth-
their applicability to sources that are not ods); and (3) providing any rationale or sup-
subject to standards of performance. The porting data necessary to show the validity
methods are potentially applicable to other of the alternative in the particular applica-
sources; however, applicability should be tion. Failure to meet these requirements can
confirmed by careful and appropriate evalua- result in the Administrator’s disapproval of
tion of the conditions prevalent at such the alternative.
sources.
The approach followed in the formulation METHOD 26—DETERMINATION OF HYDROGEN
of the test methods involves specifications HALIDE AND HALOGEN EMISSIONS FROM STA-
for equipment, procedures, and performance. TIONARY SOURCES NON-ISOKINETIC METHOD
proach would be preferable in all methods 1.0 Scope and Application
because this allows the greatest flexibility 1.1 Analytes.
to the user. In practice, however, this ap-
proach is impractical in most cases because Analytes CAS No.
performance specifications cannot be estab-
lished. Most of the methods described herein, Hydrogen Chloride (HCl) ............................... 7647–01–0
therefore, involve specific equipment speci- Hydrogen Bromide (HBr) ............................... 10035–10–6
fications and procedures, and only a few Hydrogen Fluoride (HF) ................................. 7664–39–3
methods in this appendix rely on perform- Chlorine (Cl2) ................................................. 7882–50–5
ance criteria. Bromine (Br2) ................................................. 7726–95–6
Minor changes in the test methods should
not necessarily affect the validity of the re- 1.2 Applicability. This method is applica-
sults and it is recognized that alternative ble for determining emissions of hydrogen
and equivalent methods exist. Section 60.8 halides (HX) (HCl, HBr, and HF) and
provides authority for the Administrator to halogens (X2) (Cl2 and Br2) from stationary
specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2) sources when specified by the applicable sub-
alternative methods, and (3) minor changes part. Sources, such as those controlled by
in the methodology of the test methods. It wet scrubbers, that emit acid particulate
should be clearly understood that unless oth- matter must be sampled using Method 26A.
549
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to 5.0 Safety
the requirements of this method will en- 5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve
hance the quality of the data obtained from hazardous materials, operations, and equip-
air pollutant sampling methods. ment. This test method may not address all
2.0 Summary of Method use. It is the responsibility of the user to es-
2.1 An integrated sample is extracted tablish appropriate safety and health prac-
from the source and passed through a tices and determine the applicability of reg-
prepurged heated probe and filter into dilute ulatory limitations before performing this
sulfuric acid and dilute sodium hydroxide so- test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following re-
lutions which collect the gaseous hydrogen
agents are hazardous. Personal protective
halides and halogens, respectively. The filter
equipment and safe procedures are useful in
collects particulate matter including halide preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc-
salts but is not routinely recovered and ana- curs, immediately flush with copious
lyzed. The hydrogen halides are solubilized amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Re-
in the acidic solution and form chloride move clothing under shower and decontami-
(Cl¥), bromide (Br¥), and fluoride (F¥) ions. nate. Treat residual chemical burns as ther-
The halogens have a very low solubility in mal burns.
the acidic solution and pass through to the 5.2.1 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes
alkaline solution where they are hydrolyzed severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation
to form a proton (H∂), the halide ion, and causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs.
the hypohalous acid (HClO or HBrO). Sodium Reacts exothermically with limited amounts
thiosulfate is added in excess to the alkaline of water.
solution to assure reaction with the 5.2.2 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly de-
hypohalous acid to form a second halide ion structive to body tissue. Will cause third de-
such that 2 halide ions are formed for each gree burns. Eye damage may result in blind-
molecule of halogen gas. The halide ions in
the separate solutions are measured by ion
chromatography (IC). m3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in
higher concentrations, death. Provide ven-
4.0 Interferences with metals and organics.
4.1 Volatile materials, such as chlorine di- 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
oxide (ClO2) and ammonium chloride NOTE: Mention of trade names or specific
(NH4Cl), which produce halide ions upon dis- products does not constitute endorsement by
solution during sampling are potential the Environmental Protection Agency.
interferents. Interferents for the halide 6.1 Sampling. The sampling train is
measurements are the halogen gases which shown in Figure 26–1, and component parts
disproportionate to a hydrogen halide and a are discussed below.
hydrohalous acid upon dissolution in water. 6.1.1 Probe. Borosilicate glass, approxi-
However, the use of acidic rather than neu- mately 3⁄8-in. (9-mm) I.D. with a heating sys-
tral or basic solutions for collection of the tem to prevent moisture condensation. A
hydrogen halides greatly reduces the dissolu- Teflon-glass filter in a mat configuration
tion of any halogens passing through this so- should be installed to remove particulate
lution. matter from the gas stream (see Section
4.2 The simultaneous presence of HBr and 6.1.6).
CL2 may cause a positive bias in the HCL re- 6.1.2 Three-way Stopcock. A borosilicate-
sult with a corresponding negative bias in glass three-way stopcock with a heating sys-
the Cl2 result as well as affecting the HBr/Br2 tem to prevent moisture condensation. The
split. heated stopcock should connect to the outlet
4.3 High concentrations of nitrogen oxides of the heated filter and the inlet of the first
impinger. The heating system should be ca-
(NOX) may produce sufficient nitrate (NO3¥
pable of preventing condensation up to the
to interfere with measurements of very low
inlet of the first impinger. Silicone grease
Br¥ levels.
may be used, if necessary, to prevent leak-
4.4 A glass wool plug should not be used to age.
remove particulate matter since a negative 6.1.3 Impingers. Four 30-ml midget
bias in the data could result. impingers with leak-free glass connectors.
4.5 There is anecdotal evidence that HF Silicone grease may be used, if necessary, to
may be outgassed from new teflon compo- prevent leakage. For sampling at high mois-
nents. If HF is a target analyte, then pre- ture sources or for sampling times greater
conditioning of new teflon components, by than one hour, a midget impinger with a
heating should be considered. shortened stem (such that the gas sample
550
does not bubble through the collected con- 6.3.2 Volumetric Pipets. Class A, assort-
densate) should be used in front of the first ment. To dilute samples to the calibration
impinger. range of the ion chromatograph.
6.1.4 Drying Tube or Impinger. Tube or 6.3.3 Ion Chromatograph (IC). Suppressed
impinger, of Mae West design, filled with 6- or non-suppressed, with a conductivity de-
to 16-mesh indicating type silica gel, or tector and electronic integrator operating in
equivalent, to dry the gas sample and to pro- the peak area mode. Other detectors, strip
tect the dry gas meter and pump. If the sili- chart recorders, and peak height measure-
ca gel has been used previously, dry at 175 °C ments may be used.
(350 °F) for 2 hours. New silica gel may be
used as received. Alternatively, other types 7.0 Reagents and Standards
of desiccants (equivalent or better) may be
used. NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, all re-
agents must conform to the specifications
6.1.5 Heating System. Any heating system
established by the Committee on Analytical
capable of maintaining a temperature
Reagents of the American Chemical Society
around the probe and filter holder greater
(ACS reagent grade). When such specifica-
than 120 °C (248 °F) during sampling, or such
tions are not available, the best available
other temperature as specified by an applica-
grade shall be used.
ble subpart of the standards or approved by
the Administrator for a particular applica- 7.1 Sampling.
tion. 7.1.1 Filter. A 25-mm (1 in) (or other size)
6.1.6 Filter Holder and Support. The filter Teflon glass mat, Pallflex TX40HI75 (Pallflex
holder shall be made of Teflon or quartz. The Inc., 125 Kennedy Drive, Putnam, CT 06260).
filter support shall be made of Teflon. All This filter is in a mat configuration to pre-
Teflon filter holders and supports are avail- vent fine particulate matter from entering
able from Savillex Corp., 5325 Hwy 101, the sampling train. Its composition is 75%
Minnetonka, MN 55345. Teflon/25% borosilicate glass. Other filters
6.1.7 Sample Line. Leak-free, with com- may be used, but they must be in a mat (as
patible fittings to connect the last impinger opposed to a laminate) configuration and
to the needle valve. contain at least 75% Teflon. For practical
6.1.8 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equiva- rather than scientific reasons, when the
lent, capable of measuring flow rate to with- stack gas temperature exceeds 210 °C (410 °F)
in 2 percent of the selected flow rate of 2 li- and the HCl concentration is greater than 20
ters/min (0.07 ft3/min). ppm, a quartz-fiber filter may be used since
6.1.9 Purge Pump, Purge Line, Drying Teflon becomes unstable above this tempera-
Tube, Needle Valve, and Rate Meter. Pump ture.
capable of purging the sampling probe at 2 li- 7.1.2 Water. Deionized, distilled water
ters/min, with drying tube, filled with silica that conforms to American Society of Test-
gel or equivalent, to protect pump, and a ing and Materials (ASTM) Specification D
rate meter capable of measuring 0 to 5 liters/ 1193–77 or 91, Type 3 (incorporated by ref-
min (0.2 ft3/min). erence—see § 60.17).
6.1.10 Stopcock Grease, Valve, Pump, Vol- 7.1.3 Acidic Absorbing Solution, 0.1 N Sul-
ume Meter, Barometer, and Vacuum Gauge. furic Acid (H2SO4). To prepare 100 ml of the
Same as in Method 6, Sections 6.1.1.4, 6.1.1.7, absorbing solution for the front impinger
6.1.1.8, 6.1.1.10, 6.1.2, and 6.1.3. pair, slowly add 0.28 ml of concentrated
6.1.11 Temperature Measuring Devices. H2SO4 to about 90 ml of water while stirring,
Temperature sensors to monitor the tem- and adjust the final volume to 100 ml using
perature of the probe and to monitor the additional water. Shake well to mix the solu-
temperature of the sampling system from tion.
the outlet of the probe to the inlet of the 7.1.4 Silica Gel. Indicating type, 6 to 16
first impinger. mesh. If previously used, dry at 180 °C (350
6.1.12 Ice Water Bath. To minimize loss of °F) for 2 hours. New silica gel may be used as
absorbing solution. received. Alternatively, other types of
6.2 Sample Recovery. desiccants may be used, subject to the ap-
6.2.1 Wash Bottles. Polyethylene or glass, proval of the Administrator.
500-ml or larger, two. 7.1.5 Alkaline Adsorbing Solution, 0.1 N
6.2.2 Storage Bottles. 100- or 250-ml, high- Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). To prepare 100 ml
density polyethylene bottles with Teflon of the scrubber solution for the third and
screw cap liners to store impinger samples. fourth impinger, dissolve 0.40 g of solid NaOH
6.3 Sample Preparation and Analysis. The in about 90 ml of water, and adjust the final
solution volume to 100 ml using additional
materials required for volumetric dilution

and chromatographic analysis of samples are water. Shake well to mix the solution.
described below. 7.1.6 Sodium Thiosulfate (Na2S2O3 5 H2O)
6.3.1 Volumetric Flasks. Class A, 100-ml 7.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
size. 7.2.1 Water. Same as in Section 7.1.2.
551
7.2.2 Absorbing Solution Blanks. A sepa- 8.1.1 Preparation of Collection Train. Pre-
rate blank solution of each absorbing rea- pare the sampling train as follows: Pour 15
gent should be prepared for analysis with the ml of the acidic absorbing solution into each
field samples. Dilute 30 ml of each absorbing one of the first pair of impingers, and 15 ml
solution to approximately the same final of the alkaline absorbing solution into each
volume as the field samples using the blank one of the second pair of impingers. Connect
sample of rinse water. the impingers in series with the knockout
7.2.3 Halide Salt Stock Standard Solu- impinger first, if used, followed by the two
tions. Prepare concentrated stock solutions impingers containing the acidic absorbing
from reagent grade sodium chloride (NaCl), solution and the two impingers containing
sodium bromide (NaBr), and sodium fluoride the alkaline absorbing solution. Place a
(NaF). Each must be dried at 110 °C (230 °F) fresh charge of silica gel, or equivalent, in
for two or more hours and then cooled to the drying tube or impinger at the end of the
room temperature in a desiccator imme- impinger train.
diately before weighing. Accurately weigh 1.6 8.1.2 Adjust the probe temperature and
to 1.7 g of the dried NaCl to within 0.1 mg, the temperature of the filter and the stop-
dissolve in water, and dilute to 1 liter. Cal- cock, i.e., the heated area in Figure 26–1 to a
culate the exact Cl¥ concentration using temperature sufficient to prevent water con-
Equation 26–1 in Section 12.2. In a similar densation. This temperature should be at
manner, accurately weigh and solubilize 1.2 least 20 °C (68 °F) above the source tempera-
to 1.3 g of dried NaBr and 2.2 to 2.3 g of NaF ture, and greater than 120 °C (248 °F). The
to make 1-liter solutions. Use Equations 26– temperature should be monitored through-
2 and 26–3 in Section 12.2, to calculate the out a sampling run to ensure that the desired
Br¥ and F¥ concentrations. Alternately, so- temperature is maintained. It is important
lutions containing a nominal certified con- to maintain a temperature around the probe
centration of 1000 mg/l NaCl are commer- and filter of greater than 120 °C (248 °F) since
cially available as convenient stock solu- it is extremely difficult to purge acid gases
tions from which standards can be made by off these components. (These components are
appropriate volumetric dilution. Refrigerate not quantitatively recovered and hence any
the stock standard solutions and store no collection of acid gases on these components
longer than one month. would result in potential undereporting of
7.2.4 Chromatographic Eluent. Effective these emission. The applicable subparts may
eluents for nonsuppressed IC using a resin-or specify alternative higher temperatures.)
silica-based weak ion exchange column are a 8.1.3 Leak-Check Procedure.
4 mM potassium hydrogen phthalate solu- 8.1.3.1 Sampling Train. A leak-check prior
tion, adjusted to pH 4.0 using a saturated so- to the sampling run is optional; however, a
dium borate solution, and a 4 mM 4-hydroxy leak-check after the sampling run is manda-
benzoate solution, adjusted to pH 8.6 using 1 tory. The leak-check procedure is as follows:
N NaOH. An effective eluent for suppressed Temporarily attach a suitable [e.g., 0–40 cc/
ion chromatography is a solution containing min (0–2.4 in3/min)] rotameter to the outlet
3 mM sodium bicarbonate and 2.4 mM sodium of the dry gas meter and place a vacuum
carbonate. Other dilute solutions buffered to gauge at or near the probe inlet. Plug the
a similar pH and containing no interfering probe inlet, pull a vacuum of at least 250 mm
ions may be used. When using suppressed ion Hg (10 in. Hg), and note the flow rate as indi-
chromatography, if the ‘‘water dip’’ result- cated by the rotameter. A leakage rate not
ing from sample injection interferes with the in excess of 2 percent of the average sam-
chloride peak, use a 2 mM NaOH/2.4 mM so- pling rate is acceptable.
dium bicarbonate eluent. NOTE: Carefully release the probe inlet
7.3 Quality Assurance Audit Samples. plug before turning off the pump.
When making compliance determinations,
and upon availability, audit samples may be 8.1.3.2 Pump. It is suggested (not manda-
obtained from the appropriate EPA regional tory) that the pump be leak-checked sepa-
Office or from the responsible enforcement rately, either prior to or after the sampling
authority. run. If done prior to the sampling run, the
pump leak-check shall precede the leak-
NOTE: The responsible enforcement author- check of the sampling train described imme-
ity should be notified at least 30 days prior diately above; if done after the sampling run,
to the test date to allow sufficient time for the pump leak-check shall follow the train
sample delivery. leak-check. To leak-check the pump, proceed
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, as follows: Disconnect the drying tube from
and Transport the probe-impinger assembly. Place a vacu-
um gauge at the inlet to either the drying
NOTE: Because of the complexity of this
tube or pump, pull a vacuum of 250 mm (10

method, testers and analyst should be in) Hg, plug or pinch off the outlet of the
trained and experienced with the procedure flow meter, and then turn off the pump. The
to ensure reliable results. vacuum should remain stable for at least 30
8.1 Sampling. sec. Other leak-check procedures may be
552
used, subject to the approval of the Adminis- using a separate storage bottle. Add 25 mg of
trator, U.S. Environmental Protection Agen- sodium thiosulfate per the product of ppm of
cy. halogen anticipated to be in the stack gas
8.1.4 Purge Procedure. Immediately be- times the volume (dscm) of stack gas sam-
fore sampling, connect the purge line to the pled (0.7 mg per ppm-dscf).
stopcock, and turn the stopcock to permit
the purge pump to purge the probe (see Fig- NOTE: This amount of sodium thiosulfate
ure 1A of Figure 26–1). Turn on the purge includes a safety factor of approximately 5
pump, and adjust the purge rate to 2 liters/ to assure complete reaction with the
min (0.07 ft3/min). Purge for at least 5 min- hypohalous acid to form a second Cl¥ ion in
utes before sampling. the alkaline solution.
8.1.5 Sample Collection. Turn on the sam- 8.2.3 Save portions of the absorbing re-
pling pump, pull a slight vacuum of approxi- agents (0.1 N H2SO4 and 0.1 N NaOH) equiva-
mately 25 mm Hg (1 in Hg) on the impinger lent to the amount used in the sampling
train, and turn the stopcock to permit stack train (these are the absorbing solution
gas to be pulled through the impinger train blanks described in Section 7.2.2); dilute to
(see Figure 1C of Figure 26–1). Adjust the the approximate volume of the cor-
sampling rate to 2 liters/min, as indicated by responding samples using rinse water di-
the rate meter, and maintain this rate to rectly from the wash bottle being used. Add
within 10 percent during the entire sampling the same amount of sodium thiosulfate solu-
run. Take readings of the dry gas meter vol-
tion to the 0.1 N NaOH absorbing solution
ume and temperature, rate meter, and vacu-
blank. Also, save a portion of the rinse water
um gauge at least once every five minutes
used to rinse the sampling train. Place each
during the run. A sampling time of one hour
is recommended. Shorter sampling times in a separate, prelabeled storage bottle. The
may introduce a significant negative bias in sample storage bottles should be sealed,
the HCl concentration. At the conclusion of shaken to mix, and labeled. Mark the fluid
the sampling run, remove the train from the level.
stack, cool, and perform a leak-check as de- 8.3 Sample Preparation for Analysis. Note
scribed in Section 8.1.3.1. the liquid levels in the storage bottles and
8.2 Sample Recovery. confirm on the analysis sheet whether or not
8.2.1 Disconnect the impingers after sam- leakage occurred during transport. If a no-
pling. Quantitatively transfer the contents ticeable leakage has occurred, either void
of the acid impingers and the knockout im- the sample or use methods, subject to the ap-
pinger, if used, to a leak-free storage bottle. proval of the Administrator, to correct the
Add the water rinses of each of these final results. Quantitatively transfer the
impingers and connecting glassware to the sample solutions to 100-ml volumetric flasks,
storage bottle. and dilute to 100 ml with water.
8.2.2 Repeat this procedure for the alka-
line impingers and connecting glassware 9.0 Quality Control
ards.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization 10.2.2 Using one of the standards in each
series, ensure adequate baseline separation
NOTE: Maintain a laboratory log of all cali- for the peaks of interest.
brations. 10.2.3 Inject the appropriate series of cali-
10.1 Volume Metering System, Tempera- bration standards, starting with the lowest
ture Sensors, Rate Meter, and Barometer. concentration standard first both before and
Same as in Method 6, Sections 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, after injection of the quality control check
and 10.4. sample, reagent blanks, and field samples.
10.2 Ion Chromatograph. This allows compensation for any instru-
10.2.1 To prepare the calibration stand- ment drift occurring during sample analysis.
The values from duplicate injections of these
ards, dilute given amounts (1.0 ml or greater)
calibration samples should agree within 5
of the stock standard solutions to conven-
percent of their mean for the analysis to be
ient volumes, using 0.1 N H2SO4 or 0.1 N valid.
NaOH, as appropriate. Prepare at least four 10.2.4 Determine the peak areas, or
calibration standards for each absorbing rea-
heights, for the standards and plot individual

gent containing the appropriate stock solu- values versus halide ion concentrations in
tions such that they are within the linear μg/ml.
range of the field samples. 10.2.5 Draw a smooth curve through the
points. Use linear regression to calculate a
553
formula describing the resulting linear 11.3 Audit Sample Results.
curve. 11.3.1 Calculate the concentrations in mg/
L of audit sample and submit results fol-
11.0 Analytical Procedures lowing the instructions provided with the
11.1 Sample Analysis. audit samples.
11.1.1 The IC conditions will depend upon 11.3.2 Report the results of the audit sam-
analytical column type and whether sup- ples and the compliance determination sam-
pressed or non-suppressed IC is used. An ex- ples along with their identification numbers,
ample chromatogram from a non-suppressed and the analyst’s name to the responsible en-
system using a 150-mm Hamilton PRP-X100 forcement authority. Include this informa-
anion column, a 2 ml/min flow rate of a 4 mM tion with reports of any subsequent compli-
4-hydroxy benzoate solution adjusted to a pH ance analyses for the same enforcement au-
of 8.6 using 1 N NaOH, a 50 μl sample loop, thority during the 30-day period.
and a conductivity detector set on 1.0 μS full 11.3.3 The concentrations of the audit
scale is shown in Figure 26–2. samples obtained by the analyst shall agree
11.1.2 Before sample analysis, establish a within 10 percent of the actual concentra-
stable baseline. Next, inject a sample of tions. If the 10 percent specification is not
water, and determine if any Cl¥, Br¥, or F¥ met, reanalyze the compliance and audit
appears in the chromatogram. If any of these samples, and include initial and reanalysis
ions are present, repeat the load/injection values in the test report.
procedure until they are no longer present. 11.3.4 Failure to meet the 10 percent spec-
Analysis of the acid and alkaline absorbing ification may require retests until the audit
solution samples requires separate standard problems are resolved. However, if the audit
calibration curves; prepare each according to results do not affect the compliance or non-
Section 10.2. Ensure adequate baseline sepa- compliance status of the affected facility,
ration of the analyses. the Administrator may waive the reanalysis
11.1.3 Between injections of the appro- requirement, further audits, or retests and
priate series of calibration standards, inject
accept the results of the compliance test.
in duplicate the reagent blanks, quality con-
While steps are being taken to resolve audit
trol sample, and the field samples. Measure
analysis problems, the Administrator may
the areas or heights of the Cl¥, Br¥, and F¥
also choose to use the data to determine the
peaks. Use the mean response of the dupli-
compliance or noncompliance status of the
cate injections to determine the concentra-
affected facility.
tions of the field samples and reagent blanks
using the linear calibration curve. The val- 12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
ues from duplicate injections should agree
within 5 percent of their mean for the anal- NOTE: Retain at least one extra decimal
ysis to be valid. If the values of duplicate in- figure beyond those contained in the avail-
jections are not within 5 percent of the able data in intermediate calculations, and
mean, the duplicate injections shall be re- round off only the final answer appro-
peated and all four values used to determine priately.
the average response. Dilute any sample and 12.1 Nomenclature.
the blank with equal volumes of water if the
concentration exceeds that of the highest BX¥=Mass concentration of applicable ab-
standard. sorbing solution blank, μg halide ion (Cl¥,
11.2 Audit Sample Analysis. Br¥, F¥) /ml, not to exceed 1 μg/ml which
11.2.1 When the method is used to analyze is 10 times the published analytical detec-
samples to demonstrate compliance with a tion limit of 0.1 μg/ml.
source emission regulation, a set of two EPA C=Concentration of hydrogen halide (HX) or
audit samples must be analyzed, subject to halogen (X2), dry basis, mg/dscm.
availability. K=10¥3 mg/μg.
11.2.2 Concurrently analyze the audit KHCl=1.028 (μg HCl/μg-mole)/(μg Cl¥/μg-mole).
samples and the compliance samples in the KHBr=1.013 (μg HBr/μg-mole)/(μg Br¥/μg-mole).
same manner to evaluate the technique of KHF=1.053 (μg HF/μg-mole)/(μg F¥/μg-mole).
the analyst and the standards preparation. mHX=Mass of HCl, HBr, or HF in sample, μg.
11.2.3 The same analyst, analytical re- mX2=Mass of Cl2 or Br2 in sample, μg.
agents, and analytical system shall be used
SX¥=Analysis of sample, μg halide ion (Cl¥,
for the compliance samples and the EPA
Br¥, F¥)/ml.
audit samples. If this condition is met, dupli-
cate auditing of subsequent compliance anal- Vm(std)=Dry gas volume measured by the dry
yses for the same enforcement agency within gas meter, corrected to standard condi-
a 30-day period is waived. An audit sample tions, dscm.
Vs=Volume of filtered and diluted sample,
set may not be used to validate different sets

of compliance samples under the jurisdiction ml.
of separate enforcement agencies, unless 12.2 Calculate the exact Cl¥, Br¥, and F¥
prior arrangements have been made with concentration in the halide salt stock stand-
both enforcement agencies. ard solutions using the following equations.
554
μg Cl − / ml = g of NaCl × 10 3 × 35.453/ 58.44 Eq. 26-1

−
μg Br / ml = g of NaBr × 10 × 79.904 /102.90 3
Eq. 26-2
−
μg F / ml = g of NaF × 10 × 18.998 / 41.993
Eq. 26-3
12.3 Sample Volume, Dry Basis, Corrected 12.4 Total μg HCl, HBr, or HF Per Sample.
to Standard Conditions. Calculate the sam-
ple volume using Eq. 6–1 of Method 6.
(
m HX = K HC1, Hbr , HF Vs Sx − − Bx − ) Eq. 26-4
12.5 Total μg Cl2 or Br2 Per Sample.
(
M x 2 = Vs SX − − BX − ) Eq. 26-5
12.6 Concentration of Hydrogen Halide or mental Protection Agency, Office of Re-

Halogen in Flue Gas. search and Development, Report No. 600/3–89/
064, April 1989. Available from the National
C = Km XH, X 2 / Vm (std ) Eq. 26-6 Technical Information Service, Springfield,
VA 22161 as PB89220586/AS.
13.0 Method Performance 2. State of California, Air Resources Board,
Method 421, ‘‘Determination of Hydrochloric
13.1 Precision and Bias. The within-labora- Acid Emissions from Stationary Sources,’’
tory relative standard deviations are 6.2 and March 18, 1987.
3.2 percent at HCl concentrations of 3.9 and 3. Cheney, J.L. and C.R. Fortune. Improve-
15.3 ppm, respectively. The method does not ments in the Methodology for Measuring Hy-
exhibit a bias to Cl2 when sampling at con- drochloric Acid in Combustion Source Emis-
centrations less than 50 ppm.
sions. J. Environ. Sci. Health. A19(3): 337–350.
13.2 Sample Stability. The collected
1984.
Cl¥samples can be stored for up to 4 weeks.
13.3 Detection Limit. A typical IC instru- 4. Stern, D. A., B. M. Myatt, J. F.
mental detection limit for Cl¥ is 0.2 μg/ml. Lachowski, and K. T. McGregor. Speciation
Detection limits for the other analyses of Halogen and Hydrogen Halide Compounds
should be similar. Assuming 50 ml liquid re- in Gaseous Emissions. In: Incineration and
covered from both the acidified impingers, Treatment of Hazardous Waste: Proceedings
and the basic impingers, and 0.06 dscm of of the 9th Annual Research Symposium, Cin-
stack gas sampled, then the analytical detec- cinnati, Ohio, May 2–4, 1983. Publication No.
tion limit in the stack gas would be about 0.1 600/9–84–015. July 1984. Available from Na-
ppm for HCl and Cl2, respectively. tional Technical Information Service,
Springfield, VA 22161 as PB84–234525. ER17oc00.416</MATH>
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] 5. Holm, R. D. and S. A. Barksdale. Anal-
ysis of Anions in Combustion Products. In:
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] Ion Chromatographic Analysis of Environ-
16.0 References mental Pollutants. E. Sawicki, J. D. Mulik,
and E. Wittgenstein (eds.). Ann Arbor, Michi-
1. Steinsberger, S. C. and J. H. Margeson, gan, Ann Arbor Science Publishers. 1978. pp.
ER17oc00.415</MATH>
‘‘Laboratory and Field Evaluation of a Meth- 99–110.

odology for Determination of Hydrogen Chlo-
ride Emissions from Municipal and Haz- 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
ardous Waste Incinerators,’’ U.S. Environ- Validation Data
ER17oc00.414</MATH>
555
ER17oc00.413</MATH>
556
ER17oc00.417</GPH>
METHOD 26A—DETERMINATION OF HYDROGEN pling at sources, such as those controlled by

HALIDE AND HALOGEN EMISSIONS FROM STA- wet scrubbers, emitting acid particulate
TIONARY SOURCES ISOKINETIC METHOD matter (e.g., hydrogen halides dissolved in
water droplets).
other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob- 2.0 Summary of Method
method should have a thorough knowledge of 2.1 Principle. Gaseous and particulate pol-
at least the following additional test meth- lutants are withdrawn isokinetically from
ods: Method 2, Method 5, and Method 26. the source and collected in an optional cy-
clone, on a filter, and in absorbing solutions.
1.0 Scope and Application The cyclone collects any liquid droplets and
is not necessary if the source emissions do
1.1 Analytes. not contain them; however, it is preferable
to include the cyclone in the sampling train
Analytes CAS No.
to protect the filter from any liquid present.
Hydrogen Chloride (HCl) ............................... 7647–01–0 The filter collects particulate matter includ-
Hydrogen Bromide (HBr) ............................... 10035–10–6 ing halide salts but is not routinely recov-
Hydrogen Fluoride (HF) ................................. 7664–39–3 ered or analyzed. Acidic and alkaline absorb-
Chlorine (Cl2) ................................................. 7882–50–5 ing solutions collect the gaseous hydrogen
Bromine (Br2) ................................................. 7726–95–6 halides and halogens, respectively. Fol-
lowing sampling of emissions containing liq-
1.2 This method is applicable for deter- uid droplets, any halides/halogens dissolved
mining emissions of hydrogen halides (HX) in the liquid in the cyclone and on the filter
[HCl, HBr, and HF] and halogens (X2) [Cl2 are vaporized to gas and collected in the
and Br2] from stationary sources when speci- impingers by pulling conditioned ambient
fied by the applicable subpart. This method air through the sampling train. The hydro-
collects the emission sample isokinetically gen halides are solubilized in the acidic solu-
and is therefore particularly suited for sam- tion and form chloride (Cl¥), bromide (Br¥),
557
ER17oc00.418</GPH>
and fluoride (F¥) ions. The halogens have a equipment and safe procedures are useful in
very low solubility in the acidic solution and preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc-
pass through to the alkaline solution where curs, immediately flush with copious
they are hydrolyzed to form a proton (H∂), amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Re-
the halide ion, and the hypohalous acid move clothing under shower and decontami-
(HClO or HBrO). Sodium thiosulfate is added nate. Treat residual chemical burns as ther-
to the alkaline solution to assure reaction mal burns.
with the hypohalous acid to form a second 5.2.1 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes
halide ion such that 2 halide ions are formed severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation
for each molecule of halogen gas. The halide causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs.
ions in the separate solutions are measured Reacts exothermically with limited amounts
by ion chromatography (IC). If desired, the of water.
particulate matter recovered from the filter 5.2.2 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly de-
and the probe is analyzed following the pro- structive to body tissue. Will cause third de-
cedures in Method 5. gree burns. Eye damage may result in blind-
NOTE: If the tester intends to use this sam- ness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of
pling arrangement to sample concurrently the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May
for particulate matter, the alternative Tef- cause lung tissue damage with edema. 1 mg/
lon probe liner, cyclone, and filter holder m3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in
should not be used. The Teflon filter support higher concentrations, death. Provide ven-
must be used. The tester must also meet the tilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently
probe and filter temperature requirements of with metals and organics.
both sampling trains.
6.0. Equipment and Supplies
3.0 Definitions [Reserved] NOTE: Mention of trade names or specific
products does not constitute endorsement by
4.0 Interferences
the Environmental Protection Agency.
4.1 Volatile materials, such as chlorine di- 6.1 Sampling. The sampling train is
oxide (ClO2) and ammonium chloride shown in Figure 26A–1; the apparatus is simi-
(NH4Cl), which produce halide ions upon dis- lar to the Method 5 train where noted as fol-
solution during sampling are potential lows:
interferents. Interferents for the halide 6.1.1 Probe Nozzle. Borosilicate or quartz
measurements are the halogen gases which glass; constructed and calibrated according
disproportionate to a hydrogen halide and a to Method 5, Sections 6.1.1.1 and 10.1, and
hypohalous acid upon dissolution in water. coupled to the probe liner using a Teflon
The use of acidic rather than neutral or union; a stainless steel nut is recommended
basic solutions for collection of the hydrogen for this union. When the stack temperature
halides greatly reduces the dissolution of exceeds 210 °C (410 °F), a one-piece glass noz-
any halogens passing through this solution. zle/liner assembly must be used.
4.2 The simultaneous presence of both 6.1.2 Probe Liner. Same as Method 5, Sec-
HBr and Cl2 may cause a positive bias in the tion 6.1.1.2, except metal liners shall not be
HCl result with a corresponding negative used. Water-cooling of the stainless steel
bias in the Cl2 result as well as affecting the sheath is recommended at temperatures ex-
HBr/Br2 split. ceeding 500 °C (932 °F). Teflon may be used in
4.3 High concentrations of nitrogen oxides limited applications where the minimum
(NOX) may produce sufficient nitrate (NO3¥) stack temperature exceeds 120 °C (250 °F) but
to interfere with measurements of very low never exceeds the temperature where Teflon
Br¥levels. is estimated to become unstable [approxi-
4.4 There is anecdotal evidence that HF mately 210 °C (410 °F)].
may be outgassed from new Teflon compo- 6.1.3 Pitot Tube, Differential Pressure
nents. If HF is a target analyte then pre- Gauge, Filter Heating System, Metering Sys-
conditioning of new Teflon components, by tem, Barometer, Gas Density Determination
heating, should be considered. Equipment. Same as Method 5, Sections
6.1.1.3, 6.1.1.4, 6.1.1.6, 6.1.1.9, 6.1.2, and 6.1.3.
5.0 Safety
6.1.4 Cyclone (Optional). Glass or Teflon.
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve Use of the cyclone is required only when the
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- sample gas stream is saturated with mois-
ment. This test method may not address all ture; however, the cyclone is recommended
of the safety problems associated with its to protect the filter from any liquid droplets
use. It is the responsibility of the user to es- present.
tablish appropriate safety and health prac- 6.1.5 Filter Holder. Borosilicate or quartz
tices and determine the applicability of reg- glass, or Teflon filter holder, with a Teflon
ulatory limitations before performing this filter support and a sealing gasket. The seal-
test method. ing gasket shall be constructed of Teflon or
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following re- equivalent materials. The holder design shall
agents are hazardous. Personal protective provide a positive seal against leakage at
558
any point along the filter circumference. The 6.2.3 Funnels. Glass or high-density poly-
holder shall be attached immediately to the ethylene, to aid in sample recovery.
outlet of the cyclone. 6.3 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
6.1.6 Impinger Train. The following sys- 6.3.1 Volumetric Flasks. Class A, various
tem shall be used to determine the stack gas sizes.
moisture content and to collect the hydro- 6.3.2 Volumetric Pipettes. Class A, assort-
gen halides and halogens: five or six ment. To dilute samples to calibration range
impingers connected in series with leak-free of the ion chromatograph (IC).
ground glass fittings or any similar leak-free 6.3.3 Ion Chromatograph (IC). Suppressed
noncontaminating fittings. The first im- or nonsuppressed, with a conductivity detec-
pinger shown in Figure 26A–1 (knockout or tor and electronic integrator operating in
condensate impinger) is optional and is rec- the peak area mode. Other detectors, a strip
ommended as a water knockout trap for use chart recorder, and peak heights may be
under high moisture conditions. If used, this used.
impinger should be constructed as described
below for the alkaline impingers, but with a 7.0 Reagents and Standards
shortened stem, and should contain 50 ml of NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, all re-
0.1 N H2SO4. The following two impingers agents must conform to the specifications
(acid impingers which each contain 100 ml of established by the Committee on Analytical
0.1 N H2SO4) shall be of the Greenburg-Smith Reagents of the American Chemical Society
design with the standard tip (Method 5, Sec- (ACS reagent grade). When such specifica-
tion 6.1.1.8). The next two impingers (alka- tions are not available, the best available
line impingers which each contain 100 ml of grade shall be used.
0.1 N NaOH) and the last impinger (con- 7.1 Sampling.
taining silica gel) shall be of the modified 7.1.1 Filter. Teflon mat (e.g., Pallflex
Greenburg-Smith design (Method 5, Section TX40HI45) filter. When the stack gas tem-
6.1.1.8). The condensate, acid, and alkaline perature exceeds 210 °C (410 °F) a quartz fiber
impingers shall contain known quantities of filter may be used.
the appropriate absorbing reagents. The last 7.1.2 Water. Deionized, distilled water
impinger shall contain a known weight of that conforms to American Society of Test-
silica gel or equivalent desiccant. Teflon ing and Materials (ASTM) Specification D
impingers are an acceptable alternative. 1193–77 or 91, Type 3 (incorporated by ref-
6.1.7 Heating System. Any heating system erence—see § 60.17).
capable of maintaining a temperature 7.1.3 Acidic Absorbing Solution, 0.1 N Sul-
around the probe and filter holder greater furic Acid (H2SO4). To prepare 1 L, slowly
than 120 °C (248 °F) during sampling, or such add 2.80 ml of concentrated 17.9 M H2SO4 to
other temperature as specified by an applica- about 900 ml of water while stirring, and ad-
ble subpart of the standards or approved by just the final volume to 1 L using additional
the Administrator for a particular applica- water. Shake well to mix the solution.
tion. 7.1.4 Silica Gel, Crushed Ice, and Stopcock
6.1.8 Ambient Air Conditioning Tube (Op- Grease. Same as Method 5, Sections 7.1.2,
tional). Tube tightly packed with approxi- 7.1.4, and 7.1.5, respectively.
mately 150 g of fresh 8 to 20 mesh sodium hy- 7.1.5 Alkaline Absorbing Solution, 0.1 N
droxide-coated silica, or equivalent, Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). To prepare 1 L,
(Ascarite II has been found suitable) to dry dissolve 4.00 g of solid NaOH in about 900 ml
and remove acid gases from the ambient air of water and adjust the final volume to 1 L
used to remove moisture from the filter and using additional water. Shake well to mix
cyclone, when the cyclone is used. The inlet the solution.
and outlet ends of the tube should be packed 7.1.6 Sodium Thiosulfate, (Na2S2O33.5
with at least 1-cm thickness of glass wool or H2O).
filter material suitable to prevent escape of 7.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
fines. Fit one end with flexible tubing, etc. 7.2.1 Water. Same as in Section 7.1.2.
to allow connection to probe nozzle following 7.2.2 Absorbing Solution Blanks. A sepa-
the test run. rate blank solution of each absorbing rea-
6.2 Sample Recovery. gent should be prepared for analysis with the
6.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brush- field samples. Dilute 200 ml of each absorb-
es, Wash Bottles, Glass Sample Storage Con- ing solution (250 ml of the acidic absorbing
tainers, Petri Dishes, Graduated Cylinder solution, if a condensate impinger is used) to
and/or Balance, and Rubber Policeman. Same the same final volume as the field samples
as Method 5, Sections 6.2.1, 6.2.2, 6.2.3, 6.2.4, using the blank sample of rinse water. If a
6.2.5, and 6.2.7. particulate determination is conducted, col-
6.2.2 Plastic Storage Containers. Screw- lect a blank sample of acetone.

cap polypropylene or polyethylene con- 7.2.3 Halide Salt Stock Standard Solu-
tainers to store silica gel. High-density poly- tions. Prepare concentrated stock solutions
ethylene bottles with Teflon screw cap liners from reagent grade sodium chloride (NaCl),
to store impinger reagents, 1-liter. sodium bromide (NaBr), and sodium fluoride
559
(NaF). Each must be dried at 110 °C (230 °F) Sections 8.4.2 (Pretest Leak-Check), 8.4.3
for two or more hours and then cooled to (Leak-Checks During the Sample Run), and
room temperature in a desiccator imme- 8.4.4 (Post-Test Leak-Check).
diately before weighing. Accurately weigh 1.6 8.1.5 Sampling Train Operation. Follow
to 1.7 g of the dried NaCl to within 0.1 mg, the general procedure given in Method 5,
dissolve in water, and dilute to 1 liter. Cal- Section 8.5. It is important to maintain a
culate the exact Cl¥concentration using temperature around the probe, filter (and cy-
Equation 26A–1 in Section 12.2. In a similar clone, if used) of greater than 120 °C (248 °F)
manner, accurately weigh and solubilize 1.2 since it is extremely difficult to purge acid
to 1.3 g of dried NaBr and 2.2 to 2.3 g of NaF gases off these components. (These compo-
to make 1-liter solutions. Use Equations nents are not quantitatively recovered and
26A–2 and 26A–3 in Section 12.2, to calculate hence any collection of acid gases on these
the Br¥and F¥concentrations. Alternately, components would result in potential
solutions containing a nominal certified con- undereporting these emissions. The applica-
centration of 1000 mg/L NaCl are commer- ble subparts may specify alternative higher
cially available as convenient stock solu- temperatures.) For each run, record the data
tions from which standards can be made by required on a data sheet such as the one
appropriate volumetric dilution. Refrigerate shown in Method 5, Figure 5–3. If the conden-
the stock standard solutions and store no sate impinger becomes too full, it may be
longer than one month. emptied, recharged with 50 ml of 0.1 N H2SO4,
7.2.4 Chromatographic Eluent. Same as and replaced during the sample run. The con-
Method 26, Section 7.2.4. densate emptied must be saved and included
7.2.5 Water. Same as Section 7.1.1. in the measurement of the volume of mois-
7.2.6 Acetone. Same as Method 5, Section ture collected and included in the sample for
7.2. analysis. The additional 50 ml of absorbing
7.3 Quality Assurance Audit Samples. reagent must also be considered in calcu-
When making compliance determinations, lating the moisture. Before the sampling
and upon availability, audit samples may be train integrity is compromised by removing
obtained from the appropriate EPA regional the impinger, conduct a leak-check as de-
Office or from the responsible enforcement scribed in Method 5, Section 8.4.2.
authority. 8.1.6 Post-Test Moisture Removal (Op-
NOTE: The responsible enforcement author- tional). When the optional cyclone is in-
ity should be notified at least 30 days prior cluded in the sampling train or when liquid
to the test date to allow sufficient time for is visible on the filter at the end of a sample
sample delivery. run even in the absence of a cyclone, perform
the following procedure. Upon completion of
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, the test run, connect the ambient air condi-
and Transport tioning tube at the probe inlet and operate
NOTE: Because of the complexity of this the train with the filter heating system at
method, testers and analysts should be least 120 °C (248 °F) at a low flow rate (e.g.,
trained and experienced with the procedures DH=1 in. H2O) to vaporize any liquid and hy-
to ensure reliable results. drogen halides in the cyclone or on the filter
and pull them through the train into the
8.1 Sampling.
impingers. After 30 minutes, turn off the
8.1.1 Pretest Preparation. Follow the gen-
flow, remove the conditioning tube, and ex-
eral procedure given in Method 5, Section 8.1,
amine the cyclone and filter for any visible
except the filter need only be desiccated and
liquid. If liquid is visible, repeat this step for
weighed if a particulate determination will
15 minutes and observe again. Keep repeating
be conducted.
until the cyclone is dry.
8.1.2 Preliminary Determinations. Same
as Method 5, Section 8.2. NOTE: It is critical that this is repeated
8.1.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. Fol- until the cyclone is completely dry.
low the general procedure given in Method 5, 8.2 Sample Recovery. Allow the probe to
Section 8.1.3, except for the following vari- cool. When the probe can be handled safely,
ations: Add 50 ml of 0.1 N H2SO4 to the con- wipe off all the external surfaces of the tip of
densate impinger, if used. Place 100 ml of 0.1 the probe nozzle and place a cap loosely over
N H2SO4 in each of the next two impingers. the tip to prevent gaining or losing particu-
Place 100 ml of 0.1 N NaOH in each of the fol- late matter. Do not cap the probe tip tightly
lowing two impingers. Finally, transfer ap- while the sampling train is cooling down be-
proximately 200–300 g of preweighed silica gel cause this will create a vacuum in the filter
from its container to the last impinger. Set holder, drawing water from the impingers
up the train as in Figure 26A–1. When used, into the holder. Before moving the sampling
the optional cyclone is inserted between the train to the cleanup site, remove the probe
probe liner and filter holder and located in from the sample train, wipe off any silicone
the heated filter box. grease, and cap the open outlet of the im-
8.1.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Follow the pinger train, being careful not to lose any
leak-check procedures given in Method 5, condensate that might be present. Wipe off
560
any silicone grease and cap the filter or cy- tion). Measure and record the liquid in the
clone inlet. Remove the umbilical cord from alkaline impingers as described in Section
the last impinger and cap the impinger. If a 8.2.3. Quantitatively transfer this liquid to a
flexible line is used between the first im- leak-free sample storage container. Rinse
pinger and the filter holder, disconnect it at these two impingers and connecting glass-
the filter holder and let any condensed water ware with water and add these rinses to the
drain into the first impinger. Wipe off any container. Add 25 mg of sodium thiosulfate
silicone grease and cap the filter holder out- per ppm halogen anticipated to be in the
let and the impinger inlet. Ground glass stack gas multiplied by the volume (dscm) of
stoppers, plastic caps, serum caps, Teflon stack gas sampled (0.7 mg/ppm-dscf). Seal
tape, Parafilm, or aluminum foil may be the container, shake to mix, and label; mark
used to close these openings. Transfer the the fluid level. Retain alkaline absorbing so-
probe and filter/impinger assembly to the lution blank to be analyzed with the sam-
cleanup area. This area should be clean and ples.
protected from the weather to minimize NOTE: 25 mg per sodium thiosulfate per
sample contamination or loss. Inspect the ppm halogen anticipated to be in the stack
train prior to and during disassembly and includes a safety factor of approximately 5
note any abnormal conditions. Treat samples to assure complete reaction with the
as follows: hypohalous acid to form a second Cl¥ ion in
8.2.1 Container No. 1 (Optional; Filter the alkaline solution.
Catch for Particulate Determination). Same
as Method 5, Section 8.7.6.1, Container No. 1. 8.2.5 Container No. 5 (Silica Gel for Mois-
8.2.2 Container No. 2 (Optional; Front- ture Determination). Same as Method 5, Sec-
Half Rinse for Particulate Determination). tion 8.7.6.3, Container No. 3.
Same as Method 5, Section 8.7.6.2, Container 8.2.6 Container Nos. 6 through 9 (Reagent
No. 2. Blanks). Save portions of the absorbing re-
8.2.3 Container No. 3 (Knockout and Acid agents (0.1 N H2SO4 and 0.1 N NaOH) equiva-
Impinger Catch for Moisture and Hydrogen lent to the amount used in the sampling
Halide Determination). Disconnect the train; dilute to the approximate volume of
impingers. Measure the liquid in the acid and the corresponding samples using rinse water
knockout impingers to ±1 ml by using a directly from the wash bottle being used.
graduated cylinder or by weighing it to ±0.5 Add the same ratio of sodium thiosulfate so-
g by using a balance. Record the volume or lution used in container No. 4 to the 0.1 N
weight of liquid present. This information is NaOH absorbing reagent blank. Also, save a
required to calculate the moisture content of portion of the rinse water alone and a por-
the effluent gas. Quantitatively transfer this tion of the acetone equivalent to the amount
liquid to a leak-free sample storage con- used to rinse the front half of the sampling
tainer. Rinse these impingers and connecting train. Place each in a separate, prelabeled
glassware including the back portion of the sample container.
filter holder (and flexible tubing, if used) 8.2.7 Prior to shipment, recheck all sam-
with water and add these rinses to the stor- ple containers to ensure that the caps are
age container. Seal the container, shake to well-secured. Seal the lids of all containers
mix, and label. The fluid level should be around the circumference with Teflon tape.
marked so that if any sample is lost during Ship all liquid samples upright and all par-
transport, a correction proportional to the ticulate filters with the particulate catch
lost volume can be applied. Retain rinse facing upward.
water and acidic absorbing solution blanks
9.0 Quality Control
to be analyzed with the samples.
8.2.4 Container No. 4 (Alkaline Impinger 9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Meas-
Catch for Halogen and Moisture Determina- ures.
8.1.4, 10.1 .......................... Sampling equipment leak-check and cali- Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate,
11.5 .................................... Audit sample analysis .............................. Evaluate analyst’s technique and standards prepara-
tion.
9.1 Volume Metering System Checks. 10.1 Probe Nozzle, Pitot Tube Assembly,
Same as Method 5, Section 9.2. Dry Gas Metering System, Probe Heater,
Temperature Sensors, Leak-Check of Meter-
10.0 Calibration and Standardization ing System, and Barometer. Same as Method
NOTE: Maintain a laboratory log of all cali- 5, Sections 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 10.4, 10.5, 8.4.1, and
brations. 10.6, respectively.
10.2 Ion Chromatograph.
561
10.2.1 To prepare the calibration stand- the areas or heights of the Cl¥, Br¥, and F¥
ards, dilute given amounts (1.0 ml or greater) peaks. Use the mean response of the dupli-
of the stock standard solutions to conven- cate injections to determine the concentra-
ient volumes, using 0.1 N H2SO4 or 0.1 N tions of the field samples and reagent blanks
NaOH, as appropriate. Prepare at least four using the linear calibration curve. The val-
calibration standards for each absorbing rea- ues from duplicate injections should agree
gent containing the three stock solutions within 5 percent of their mean for the anal-
such that they are within the linear range of ysis to be valid. If the values of duplicate in-
the field samples. jections are not within 5 percent of the
10.2.2 Using one of the standards in each mean, the duplicator injections shall be re-
series, ensure adequate baseline separation peated and all four values used to determine
for the peaks of interest. the average response. Dilute any sample and
10.2.3 Inject the appropriate series of cali- the blank with equal volumes of water if the
bration standards, starting with the lowest concentration exceeds that of the highest
concentration standard first both before and standard.
after injection of the quality control check 11.2 Container Nos. 1 and 2 and Acetone
sample, reagent blanks, and field samples. Blank (Optional; Particulate Determina-
This allows compensation for any instru- tion). Same as Method 5, Sections 11.2.1 and
ment drift occurring during sample analysis. 11.2.2, respectively.
The values from duplicate injections of these 11.3 Container No. 5. Same as Method 5,
calibration samples should agree within 5 Section 11.2.3 for silica gel.
percent of their mean for the analysis to be 11.4 Audit Sample Analysis.
valid. 11.4.1 When the method is used to analyze
10.2.4 Determine the peak areas, or samples to demonstrate compliance with a
height, of the standards and plot individual source emission regulation, a set of two EPA
values versus halide ion concentrations in audit samples must be analyzed, subject to
μg/ml. availability.
10.2.5 Draw a smooth curve through the 11.4.2 Concurrently analyze the audit
points. Use linear regression to calculate a samples and the compliance samples in the
formula describing the resulting linear same manner to evaluate the technique of
curve. the analyst and the standards preparation.
agents, and analytical system shall be used
NOTE: the liquid levels in the sample con- for the compliance samples and the EPA
tainers and confirm on the analysis sheet audit samples. If this condition is met, dupli-
whether or not leakage occurred during cate auditing of subsequent compliance anal-
transport. If a noticeable leakage has oc- yses for the same enforcement agency within
curred, either void the sample or use meth- a 30-day period is waived. An audit sample
ods, subject to the approval of the Adminis- set may not be used to validate different sets
trator, to correct the final results. of compliance samples under the jurisdiction
11.1 Sample Analysis. of separate enforcement agencies, unless
11.1.1 The IC conditions will depend upon prior arrangements have been made with
analytical column type and whether sup- both enforcement agencies.
pressed or non-suppressed IC is used. An ex- 11.5 Audit Sample Results.
ample chromatogram from a non-suppressed 11.5.1 Calculate the concentrations in mg/
system using a 150-mm Hamilton PRP-X100 L of audit sample and submit results fol-
anion column, a 2 ml/min flow rate of a 4 mM lowing the instructions provided with the
4-hydroxy benzoate solution adjusted to a pH audit samples.
of 8.6 using 1 N NaOH, a 50 μl sample loop, 11.5.2 Report the results of the audit sam-
and a conductivity detector set on 1.0 μS full ples and the compliance determination sam-
scale is shown in Figure 26–2. ples along with their identification numbers,
11.1.2 Before sample analysis, establish a and the analyst’s name to the responsible en-
stable baseline. Next, inject a sample of forcement authority. Include this informa-
water, and determine if any Cl¥, Br¥, or F¥ tion with reports of any subsequent compli-
appears in the chromatogram. If any of these ance analyses for the same enforcement au-
ions are present, repeat the load/injection thority during the 30-day period.
procedure until they are no longer present. 11.5.3 The concentrations of the audit
Analysis of the acid and alkaline absorbing samples obtained by the analyst shall agree
solution samples requires separate standard within 10 percent of the actual concentra-
calibration curves; prepare each according to tions. If the 10 percent specification is not
Section 10.2. Ensure adequate baseline sepa- met, reanalyze the compliance and audit
ration of the analyses. samples, and include initial and reanalysis

11.1.3 Between injections of the appro- values in the test report.
priate series of calibration standards, inject 11.5.4 Failure to meet the 10 percent spec-
in duplicate the reagent blanks, quality con- ification may require retests until the audit
trol sample, and the field samples. Measure problems are resolved. However, if the audit
562
results do not affect the compliance or non- Br¥, F¥)/ml, not to exceed 1 μg/ml which is
compliance status of the affected facility, 10 times the published analytical detection
the Administrator may waive the reanalysis limit of 0.1 μg/ml. (It is also approximately
requirement, further audits, or retests and 5 percent of the mass concentration antici-
accept the results of the compliance test. pated to result from a one hour sample at
While steps are being taken to resolve audit 10 ppmv HCl.)
analysis problems, the Administrator may C=Concentration of hydrogen halide (HX) or
also choose to use the data to determine the halogen (X2), dry basis, mg/dscm.
compliance or noncompliance status of the K=10¥3 mg/μg.
affected facility. KHCl=1.028 (μg HCl/μg-mole)/(μg Cl¥/μg-mole).
KHBr=1.013 (μg HBr/μg-mole)/(μg Br¥/μg-mole).
KHF=1.053 (μg HF/μg-mole)/(μg F¥/μg-mole).
NOTE: Retain at least one extra decimal mHX=Mass of HCl, HBr, or HF in sample, ug.
figure beyond those contained in the avail- mX2=Mass of Cl2 or Br2 in sample, ug.
able data in intermediate calculations, and SX¥=Analysis of sample, ug halide ion (Cl¥,
round off only the final answer appro- Br¥, F¥)/ml.
priately. Vs=Volume of filtered and diluted sample,
12.1 Nomenclature. Same as Method 5, ml.
Section 12.1. In addition: 12.2 Calculate the exact Cl¥, Br¥, and F¥
BX¥=Mass concentration of applicable ab- concentration in the halide salt stock stand-
sorbing solution blank, μg halide ion (Cl¥, ard solutions using the following equations.
μg Cl − / ml = g of NaCl × 10 3 × 35.453/ 58.44 Eq. 26A-1

−
μg Br / ml = g of NaBr × 10 × 79.904 /102.90
3
Eq. 26A-2
μg F − / ml = g of NaF × 10 3 × 18.998 / 41.99 Eq. 26A-3
12.3 Average Dry Gas Meter Temperature 3 of Method 5); use Equations 5–2 and 5–3 of
and Average Orifice Pressure Drop. See data Method 5.
sheet (Figure 5–3 of Method 5). 12.6 Isokinetic Variation and Acceptable
12.4 Dry Gas Volume. Calculate Vm(std) and Results. Use Method 5, Section 12.11.
adjust for leakage, if necessary, using the 12.7 Acetone Blank Concentration, Ace-
equation in Section 12.3 of Method 5. tone Wash Blank Residue Weight, Particu-
12.5 Volume of Water Vapor and Moisture
late Weight, and Particulate Concentration.
Content. Calculate the volume of water
For particulate determination.
vapor Vw(std) and moisture content Bws from
the data obtained in this method (Figure 5– 12.8 Total μg HCl, HBr, or HF Per Sample.
ER17oc00.423</MATH>
(
m HX = K HC1, Hbr , HF Vs SX − − BX − ) Eq. 26A-4
12.9 Total μg Cl2 or Br2 Per Sample. 13.0 Method Performance

ER17oc00.422</MATH>
( )
13.1 Precision and Bias. The method has a
m X 2 = Vs SX − − BX − Eq. 26A-5 possible measurable negative bias below 20
ppm HCl perhaps due to reaction with small
12.10 Concentration of Hydrogen Halide or amounts of moisture in the probe and filter.
Halogen in Flue Gas. Similar bias for the other hydrogen halides
ER17oc00.421</MATH>
is possible.
C = K m HX, X 2 / Vm (std ) Eq. 26A-6 13.2 Sample Stability. The collected Cl-
samples can be stored for up to 4 weeks for
12.11 Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric analysis for HCl and Cl2.
Flow Rate. Calculate the average stack gas 13.3 Detection Limit. A typical analytical
velocity and volumetric flow rate, if needed, detection limit for HCl is 0.2 μg/ml. Detec-
ER17oc00.420</MATH>
using data obtained in this method and the tion limits for the other analyses should be
equations in Sections 12.3 and 12.4 of Method similar. Assuming 300 ml of liquid recovered
2. for the acidified impingers and a similar
563
ER17oc00.419</MATH>
amounts recovered from the basic impingers, 3. Cheney, J.L. and C.R. Fortune. Improve-
and 1 dscm of stack gas sampled, the analyt- ments in the Methodology for Measuring Hy-
ical detection limits in the stack gas would drochloric Acid in Combustion Source Emis-
be about 0.04 ppm for HCl and Cl2, respec- sions. J. Environ. Sci. Health. A19(3): 337–350.
tively. 1984.
4. Stern, D.A., B.M. Myatt, J.F. Lachowski,
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] and K.T. McGregor. Speciation of Halogen
and Hydrogen Halide Compounds in Gaseous
Emissions. In: Incineration and Treatment of
16.0 References Hazardous Waste: Proceedings of the 9th An-
nual Research Symposium, Cincinnati, Ohio,
1. Steinsberger, S. C. and J. H. Margeson. May 2–4, 1983. Publication No. 600/9–84–015.
Laboratory and Field Evaluation of a Meth- July 1984. Available from National Technical
odology for Determination of Hydrogen Chlo- Information Service, Springfield, VA 22161 as
ride Emissions from Municipal and Haz- PB84–234525.
ardous Waste Incinerators. U.S. Environ- 5. Holm, R.D. and S.A. Barksdale. Analysis
mental Protection Agency, Office of Re- of Anions in Combustion Products. In: Ion
search and Development. Publication No. 600/ Chromatographic Analysis of Environmental
3–89/064. April 1989. Available from National Pollutants, E. Sawicki, J.D. Mulik, and E.
Technical Information Service, Springfield, Wittgenstein (eds.). Ann Arbor, Michigan,
VA 22161 as PB89220586/AS. Ann Arbor Science Publishers. 1978. pp. 99–
2. State of California Air Resources Board. 110.
Method 421—Determination of Hydrochloric
Acid Emissions from Stationary Sources. 17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
March 18, 1987. Validation Data
564
METHOD 27—DETERMINATION OF VAPOR TIGHT- 2.0 Summary of Method

NESS OF GASOLINE DELIVERY TANK USING
2.1 Pressure and vacuum are applied al-
PRESSURE VACCUUM TEST
ternately to the compartments of a gasoline
1.0 Scope and Application delivery tank and the change in pressure or
vacuum is recorded after a specified period of
1.1 Applicability. This method is applica- time.

ble for the determination of vapor tightness
of a gasoline delivery collection equipment.
565
ER17OC00.424</GPH>
3.0 Definitions 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
3.1 Allowable pressure change (Δp) means The following equipment and supplies are
the allowable amount of decrease in pressure required for testing:
during the static pressure test, within the 6.1 Pressure Source. Pump or compressed
time period t, as specified in the appropriate gas cylinder of air or inert gas sufficient to
regulation, in mm H2O. pressurize the delivery tank to 500 mm (20
3.2 Allowable vacuum change (Δv) means in.) H2O above atmospheric pressure.
the allowable amount of decrease in vacuum 6.2 Regulator. Low pressure regulator for
controlling pressurization of the delivery
during the static vacuum test, within the
tank.
time period t, as specified in the appropriate
6.3 Vacuum Source. Vacuum pump capa-
regulation, in mm H2O.
ble of evacuating the delivery tank to 250
3.3 Compartment means a liquid-tight divi- mm (10 in.) H2O below atmospheric pressure.
sion of a delivery tank. 6.4 Pressure-Vacuum Supply Hose.
3.4 Delivery tank means a container, in- 6.5 Manometer. Liquid manometer, or
cluding associated pipes and fittings, that is equivalent instrument, capable of measuring
attached to or forms a part of any truck, up to 500 mm (20 in.) H2O gauge pressure with
trailer, or railcar used for the transport of ±2.5 mm (0.1 in.) H2O precision.
gasoline. 6.6 Pressure-Vacuum Relief Valves. The
3.5 Delivery tank vapor collection equipment test apparatus shall be equipped with an
means any piping, hoses, and devices on the inline pressure-vacuum relief valve set to ac-
delivery tank used to collect and route gaso- tivate at 675 mm (26.6 in.) H2O above atmos-
line vapors either from the tank to a bulk pheric pressure or 250 mm (10 in.) H2O below
terminal vapor control system or from a atmospheric pressure, with a capacity equal
bulk plant or service station into the tank. to the pressurizing or evacuating pumps.
3.6 Gasoline means a petroleum distillate 6.7 Test Cap for Vapor Recovery Hose.
or petroleum distillate/alcohol blend having This cap shall have a tap for manometer con-
nection and a fitting with shut-off valve for
a Reid vapor pressure of 27.6 kilopascals or
connection to the pressure-vacuum supply
greater which is used as a fuel for internal
hose.
combustion engines.
6.8 Caps for Liquid Delivery Hoses.
3.7 Initial pressure (Pi) means the pressure
applied to the delivery tank at the beginning 7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
of the static pressure test, as specified in the
appropriate regulation, in mm H2O. 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
3.8 Initial vacuum (Vi) means the vacuum and Transport
applied to the delivery tank at the beginning 8.1 Pretest Preparations.
of the static vacuum test, as specified in the 8.1.1 Summary. Testing problems may
appropriate regulation, in mm H3. occur due to the presence of volatile vapors
3.9 Time period of the pressure or vacuum and/or temperature fluctuations inside the
test (t) means the time period of the test, as delivery tank. Under these conditions, it is
specified in the appropriate regulation, dur- often difficult to obtain a stable initial pres-
ing which the change in pressure or vacuum sure at the beginning of a test, and erroneous
is monitored, in minutes. test results may occur. To help prevent this,
it is recommended that prior to testing,
4.0 Interferences [Reserved] volatile vapors be removed from the tank
and the temperature inside the tank be al-
5.0 Safety lowed to stabilize. Because it is not always
possible to completely attain these pretest
5.1 Gasoline contains several volatile or-
conditions, a provision to ensure reproduc-
ganic compounds (e.g., benzene and hexane)
ible results is included. The difference in re-
which presents a potential for fire and/or ex- sults for two consecutive runs must meet the
plosions. It is advisable to take appropriate criteria in Sections 8.2.2.5 and 8.2.3.5.
precautions when testing a gasoline vessel’s 8.1.2 Emptying of Tank. The delivery
vapor tightness, such as refraining from tank shall be emptied of all liquid.
smoking and using explosion-proof equip- 8.1.3 Purging of Vapor. As much as pos-
ment. sible the delivery tank shall be purged of all
5.2 This method may involve hazardous volatile vapors by any safe, acceptable meth-
materials, operations, and equipment. This od. One method is to carry a load of non-
test method may not address all of the safe- volatile liquid fuel, such as diesel or heating
ty problems associated with its use. It is the oil, immediately prior to the test, thus flush-
responsibility of the user of this test method ing out all the volatile gasoline vapors. A
to establish appropriate safety and health second method is to remove the volatile va-
practices and determine the applicability of pors by blowing ambient air into each tank
regulatory limitations prior to performing compartment for at least 20 minutes. This
this test method second method is usually not as effective and
566
often causes stabilization problems, requir- 8.2.2.5 Repeat steps 8.2.2.2 through 8.2.2.4
ing a much longer time for stabilization dur- until the change in pressure for two consecu-
ing the testing. tive runs agrees within 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) H2O.
8.1.4 Temperature Stabilization. As much Calculate the arithmetic average of the two
as possible, the test shall be conducted under results.
isothermal conditions. The temperature of 8.2.2.6 Compare the average measured
the delivery tank should be allowed to change in pressure to the allowable pressure
equilibrate in the test environment. During change, Dp, specified in the regulation. If the
the test, the tank should be protected from delivery tank does not satisfy the vapor
extreme environmental and temperature tightness criterion specified in the regula-
variability, such as direct sunlight. tion, repair the sources of leakage, and re-
8.2 Test Procedure. peat the pressure test until the criterion is
8.2.1 Preparations. met.
8.2.1.1 Open and close each dome cover. 8.2.2.7 Disconnect the pressure source
8.2.1.2 Connect static electrical ground from the pressure-vacuum supply hose, and
connections to the tank. Attach the liquid slowly open the shut-off valve to bring the
delivery and vapor return hoses, remove the tank to atmospheric pressure.
liquid delivery elbows, and plug the liquid 8.2.3 Vacuum Test.
delivery fittings. 8.2.3.1 Connect the vacuum source to the
NOTE: The purpose of testing the liquid de- pressure-vacuum supply hose.
livery hoses is to detect tears or holes that 8.2.3.2 Open the shut-off valve in the
would allow liquid leakage during a delivery. vapor recovery hose cap. Slowly evacuate
Liquid delivery hoses are not considered to the tank to Vi, the initial vacuum specified
be possible sources of vapor leakage, and in the regulation.
thus, do not have to be attached for a vapor 8.2.3.3 Close the shut-off valve and allow
leakage test. Instead, a liquid delivery hose the pressure in the tank to stabilize, adjust-
could be either visually inspected, or filled ing the pressure if necessary to maintain a
with water to detect any liquid leakage. vacuum of Vi. When the pressure stabilizes,
8.2.1.3 Attach the test cap to the end of record the time and initial vacuum.
the vapor recovery hose. 8.2.3.4 At the end of the time period speci-
8.2.1.4 Connect the pressure-vacuum sup- fied in the regulation (t), record the time and
ply hose and the pressure-vacuum relief final vacuum.
valve to the shut-off valve. Attach a manom- 8.2.3.5 Repeat steps 8.2.3.2 through 8.2.3.4
eter to the pressure tap. until the change in vacuum for two consecu-
8.2.1.5 Connect compartments of the tank tive runs agrees within 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) H2O.
internally to each other if possible. If not Calculate the arithmetic average of the two
possible, each compartment must be tested results.
separately, as if it were an individual deliv- 8.2.3.6 Compare the average measured
ery tank. change in vacuum to the allowable vacuum
8.2.2 Pressure Test. change, Dv, as specified in the regulation. If
8.2.2.1 Connect the pressure source to the the delivery tank does not satisfy the vapor
pressure-vacuum supply hose. tightness criterion specified in the regula-
8.2.2.2 Open the shut-off valve in the tion, repair the sources of leakage, and re-
vapor recovery hose cap. Apply air pressure peat the vacuum test until the criterion is
slowly, pressurize the tank to Pi, the initial met.
pressure specified in the regulation. 8.2.3.7 Disconnect the vacuum source from
8.2.2.3 Close the shut-off and allow the the pressure-vacuum supply hose, and slowly
pressure in the tank to stabilize, adjusting open the shut-off valve to bring the tank to
the pressure if necessary to maintain pres- atmospheric pressure.
sure of Pi. When the pressure stabilizes, 8.2.4 Post-Test Clean-up. Disconnect all
record the time and initial pressure. test equipment and return the delivery tank
8.2.2.4 At the end of the time period (t) to its pretest condition.
specified in the regulation, record the time
and final pressure. 9.0 Quality Control
Section(s) Quality control measure Effect
8.2.2.5, 8.3.3.5 ................... Repeat test procedures until change in Ensures data precision.
pressure or vacuum for two consecu-
tive runs agrees within ±12.5 mm (0.5
in.) H2O.
567
10.0 Calibration and Standardization hance the quality of the data obtained from
[Reserved] air pollutant sampling methods.
11.0 Analytical Procedures [Reserved] 2.0 Summary of Method

12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations 2.1 Particulate matter emissions are
[Reserved] measured from a wood heater burning a pre-
pared test fuel crib in a test facility main-
13.0 Method Performance tained at a set of prescribed conditions. Pro-
13.1 Precision. The vapor tightness of a cedures for determining burn rates and par-
gasoline delivery tank under positive or neg- ticulate emission rates and for reducing data
ative pressure, as measured by this method, are provided.
is precise within 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) H2O
3.0 Definitions
13.2 Bias. No bias has been identified.
3.1 2 × 4 or 4 × 4 means two inches by four
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved] inches or four inches by four inches (50 mm
by 100 mm or 100 mm by 100 mm), as nominal
dimensions for lumber.
16.0 Alternative Procedures 3.2 Burn rate means the rate at which test
fuel is consumed in a wood heater. Measured
16.1 The pumping of water into the bot- in kilograms or lbs of wood (dry basis) per
tom of a delivery tank is an acceptable alter- hour (kg/hr or lb/hr).
native to the pressure source described
3.3 Certification or audit test means a series
above. Likewise, the draining of water out of
of at least four test runs conducted for cer-
the bottom of a delivery tank may be sub-
tification or audit purposes that meets the
stituted for the vacuum source. Note that
burn rate specifications in Section 8.4.
some of the specific step-by-step procedures
in the method must be altered slightly to ac- 3.4 Firebox means the chamber in the
commodate these different pressure and vac- wood heater in which the test fuel charge is
uum sources. placed and combusted.
16.2 Techniques other than specified 3.5 Height means the vertical distance ex-
above may be used for purging and pressur- tending above the loading door, if fuel could
izing a delivery tank, if prior approval is ob- reasonably occupy that space, but not more
tained from the Administrator. Such ap- than 2 inches above the top (peak height) of
proval will be based upon demonstrated the loading door, to the floor of the firebox
equivalency with the above method. (i.e., below a permanent grate) if the grate
allows a 1-inch diameter piece of wood to
17.0 References [Reserved] pass through the grate, or, if not, to the top
of the grate. Firebox height is not nec-
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and essarily uniform but must account for vari-
Validation Data [Reserved] ations caused by internal baffles, air chan-
nels, or other permanent obstructions.
METHOD 28—CERTIFICATION AND AUDITING OF
3.6 Length means the longest horizontal
WOOD HEATERS
fire chamber dimension that is parallel to a
NOTE: This method does not include all of wall of the chamber.
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- 3.7 Pellet burning wood heater means a
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana- wood heater which meets the following cri-
lytical) essential to its performance. Some teria: (1) The manufacturer makes no ref-
material is incorporated by reference from erence to burning cord wood in advertising
other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob- or other literature, (2) the unit is safety list-
tain reliable results, persons using this ed for pellet fuel only, (3) the unit operating
method should have a thorough knowledge of and instruction manual must state that the
at least the following additional test meth- use of cordwood is prohibited by law, and (4)
ods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, Method 4, the unit must be manufactured and sold in-
Method 5, Method 5G, Method 5H, Method 6, cluding the hopper and auger combination as
Method 6C, and Method 16A. integral parts.
3.8 Secondary air supply means an air sup-
ply that introduces air to the wood heater
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No such that the burn rate is not altered by
CAS number assigned. more than 25 percent when the secondary air
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- supply is adjusted during the test run. The
ble for the certification and auditing of wood wood heater manufacturer can document
heaters, including pellet burning wood heat- this through design drawings that show the
ers. secondary air is introduced only into a mix-
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to ing chamber or secondary chamber outside
the requirements of this method will en- the firebox.
568
3.9 Test facility means the area in which 6.4 Test Facility Temperature Monitor. A
the wood heater is installed, operated, and thermocouple located centrally in a
sampled for emissions. vertically oriented 150 mm (6 in.) long, 50
3.10 Test fuel charge means the collection mm (2 in.) diameter pipe shield that is open
of test fuel pieces placed in the wood heater at both ends, capable of measuring tempera-
at the start of the emission test run. ture to within 1.5 percent of expected tem-
3.11 Test fuel crib means the arrangement peratures.
of the test fuel charge with the proper spac- 6.5 Balance (optional). Balance capable of
ing requirements between adjacent fuel weighing the test fuel charge to within 0.05
pieces. kg (0.1 lb).
3.12 Test fuel loading density means the 6.6 Moisture Meter. Calibrated electrical
weight of the as-fired test fuel charge per resistance meter for measuring test fuel
unit volume of usable firebox. moisture to within 1 percent moisture con-
3.13 Test fuel piece means the 2 × 4 or 4 × 4 tent.
wood piece cut to the length required for the 6.7 Anemometer. Device capable of de-
test fuel charge and used to construct the tecting air velocities less than 0.10 m/sec (20
test fuel crib. ft/min), for measuring air velocities near the
3.14 Test run means an individual emission test appliance.
test which encompasses the time required to 6.8 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid or other
consume the mass of the test fuel charge. barometer capable of measuring atmospheric
3.15 Usable firebox volume means the vol-
pressure to within 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in. Hg).
ume of the firebox determined using its
6.9 Draft Gauge. Electromanometer or
height, length, and width as defined in this
other device for the determination of flue
section.
draft or static pressure readable to within
3.16 Width means the shortest horizontal
0.50 Pa (0.002 in. H2O).
fire chamber dimension that is parallel to a
wall of the chamber. 6.10 Humidity Gauge. Psychrometer or
3.17 Wood heater means an enclosed, hygrometer for measuring room humidity.
woodburning appliance capable of and in- 6.11 Wood Heater Flue.
tended for space heating or domestic water 6.11.1 Steel flue pipe extending to 2.6 ±0.15
heating, as defined in the applicable regula- m (8.5 ±0.5 ft) above the top of the platform
tion. scale, and above this level, insulated solid
pack type chimney extending to 4.6 ±0.3 m (15
4.0 Interferences [Reserved] ±1 ft) above the platform scale, and of the
size specified by the wood heater manufac-
5.0 Safety turer. This applies to both freestanding and
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve insert type wood heaters.
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- 6.11.2 Other chimney types (e.g., solid
ment. This test method may not address all pack insulated pipe) may be used in place of
of the safety problems associated with its the steel flue pipe if the wood heater manu-
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this facturer’s written appliance specifications
test method to establish appropriate safety require such chimney for home installation
and health practices and to determine the (e.g., zero clearance wood heater inserts).
applicability of regulatory limitations prior Such alternative chimney or flue pipe must
to performing this test method. remain and be sealed with the wood heater
following the certification test.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies 6.12 Test Facility. The test facility shall
Same as Section 6.0 of either Method 5G or meet the following requirements during test-
Method 5H, with the addition of the fol- ing:
lowing: 6.12.1 The test facility temperature shall
6.1 Insulated Solid Pack Chimney. For in- be maintained between 18 and 32 °C (65 and 90
stallation of wood heaters. Solid pack insu- °F) during each test run.
lated chimneys shall have a minimum of 2.5 6.12.2 Air velocities within 0.6 m (2 ft) of
cm (1 in.) solid pack insulating material sur- the test appliance and exhaust system shall
rounding the entire flue and possess a label be less than 0.25 m/sec (50 ft/min) without
demonstrating conformance to U.L. 103 (in- fire in the unit.
corporated by reference—see § 60.17). 6.12.3 The flue shall discharge into the
6.2 Platform Scale and Monitor. For mon- same space or into a space freely commu-
itoring of fuel load weight change. The scale nicating with the test facility. Any hood or
shall be capable of measuring weight to similar device used to vent combustion prod-
within 0.05 kg (0.1 lb) or 1 percent of the ini- ucts shall not induce a draft greater than
tial test fuel charge weight, whichever is 1.25 Pa (0.005 in. H2O) on the wood heater
greater. measured when the wood heater is not oper-

6.3 Wood Heater Temperature Monitors. ating.
Seven, each capable of measuring tempera- 6.12.4 For test facilities with artificially
ture to within 1.5 percent of expected abso- induced barometric pressures (e.g., pressur-
lute temperatures. ized chambers), the barometric pressure in
569
the test facility shall not exceed 775 mm Hg ber. Each piece of test fuel (not including
(30.5 in. Hg) during any test run. spacers) shall be of equal length, except as
necessary to meet requirements in Section
7.0 Reagents and Standards 8.8, and shall closely approximate 5⁄6 the di-
Same as Section 6.0 of either Method 5G or mensions of the length of the usable firebox.
Method 5H, with the addition of the fol- The fuel piece dimensions shall be deter-
lowing: mined in relation to the appliance’s firebox
7.1 Test Fuel. The test fuel shall conform volume according to guidelines listed below:
to the following requirements: 7.1.4.1 If the usable firebox volume is less
7.1.1 Fuel Species. Untreated, air-dried, than or equal to 0.043 m3 (1.5 ft3), use 2×4
Douglas fir lumber. Kiln-dried lumber is not lumber.
permitted. The lumber shall be certified C 7.1.4.2 If the usable firebox volume is
grade (standard) or better Douglas fir by a greater than 0.043 m3 (1.5 ft3) and less than or
lumber grader at the mill of origin as speci- equal to 0.085 m3 (3.0 ft3), use 2×4 and 4×4 lum-
fied in the West Coast Lumber Inspection ber. About half the weight of the test fuel
Bureau Standard No. 16 (incorporated by ref- charge shall be 2×4 lumber, and the remain-
erence—see § 60.17). der shall be 4×4 lumber.
7.1.2 Fuel Moisture. The test fuel shall 7.1.4.3 If the usable firebox volume is
have a moisture content range between 16 to greater than 0.085 m3 (3.0 ft3), use 4×4 lumber.
20 percent on a wet basis (19 to 25 percent dry 7.2 Test Fuel Spacers. Air-dried, Douglas
basis). Addition of moisture to previously fir lumber meeting the requirements out-
dried wood is not allowed. It is recommended lined in Sections 7.1.1 through 7.1.3. The
that the test fuel be stored in a temperature spacers shall be 130×40×20 mm (5×1.5×0.75 in.).
and humidity-controlled room.
7.1.3 Fuel Temperature. The test fuel
and Transport
shall be at the test facility temperature of 18
to 32 °C (65 to 90 °F). 8.1 Test Run Requirements.
7.1.4 Fuel Dimensions. The dimensions of 8.1.1 Burn Rate Categories. One emission
each test fuel piece shall conform to the test run is required in each of the following
nominal measurements of 2×4 and 4×4 lum- burn rate categories:
BURN RATE CATEGORIES
[Average kg/hr (lb/hr), dry basis]
Category 1 Category 2 Category 3 Category 4
<0.80 .............................. 0.80 to 1.25 ...................................... 1.25 to 1.90 ...................................... Maximum.

(<1.76) ........................... (1.76 to 2.76) ................................... (2.76 to 4.19) ................................... burn rate.
8.1.1.1 Maximum Burn Rate. For Category 8.1.1.3.2 Evidence that a wood heater can-
4, the wood heater shall be operated with the not be operated at a burn rate less than 0.80
primary air supply inlet controls fully open kg/hr shall include documentation of two or
(or, if thermostatically controlled, the ther- more attempts to operate the wood heater in
mostat shall be set at maximum heat out- burn rate Category 1 and fuel combustion
put) during the entire test run, or the max- has stopped, or results of two or more test
imum burn rate setting specified by the runs demonstrating that the burn rates were
manufacturer’s written instructions. greater than 0.80 kg/hr when the air supply
8.1.1.2 Other Burn Rate Categories. For controls were adjusted to the lowest possible
burn rates in Categories 1 through 3, the position or settings. Stopped fuel combus-
wood heater shall be operated with the pri- tion is evidenced when an elapsed time of 30
mary air supply inlet control, or other me- minutes or more has occurred without a
chanical control device, set at a predeter- measurable (< 0.05 kg (0.1 lb) or 1.0 percent,
mined position necessary to obtain the aver- whichever is greater) weight change in the
age burn rate required for the category. test fuel charge. See also Section 8.8.3. Re-
8.1.1.3 Alternative Burn Rates for Burn port the evidence and the reasoning used to
Rate Categories 1 and 2. determine that a test in burn rate Category
8.1.1.3.1 If a wood heater cannot be oper- 1 cannot be achieved; for example, two un-
ated at a burn rate below 0.80 kg/hr (1.76 lb/ successful attempts to operate at a burn rate
hr), two test runs shall be conducted with of 0.4 kg/hr are not sufficient evidence that
burn rates within Category 2. If a wood heat- burn rate Category 1 cannot be achieved.
er cannot be operated at a burn rate below NOTE: After July 1, 1990, if a wood heater
1.25 kg/hr (2.76 lb/hr), the flue shall be cannot be operated at a burn rate less than
dampered or the air supply otherwise con- 0.80 kg/hr, at least one test run with an aver-
trolled in order to achieve two test runs age burn rate of 1.00 kg/hr or less shall be
within Category 2. conducted. Additionally, if flue dampering
570
must be used to achieve burn rates below 1.25 (e.g., spherical, etc.) shall be positioned so
kg/hr (or 1.0 kg/hr), results from a test run that there are four surface temperature mon-
conducted at burn rates below 0.90 kg/hr need itors in both the vertical and horizontal
not be reported or included in the test run planes passing at right angles through the
average provided that such results are re- centroid of the firebox, not including the fuel
placed with results from a test run meeting loading door (total of five temperature mon-
the criteria above. itors).
8.2 Catalytic Combustor and Wood Heater 8.6 Test Facility Conditions.
Aging. The catalyst-equipped wood heater or 8.6.1 Locate the test facility temperature
a wood heater of any type shall be aged be- monitor on the horizontal plane that in-
fore the certification test begins. The aging cludes the primary air intake opening for the
procedure shall be conducted and docu- wood heater. Locate the temperature mon-
mented by a testing laboratory accredited itor 1 to 2 m (3 to 6 ft) from the front of the
according to procedures in § 60.535 of 40 CFR wood heater in the 90° sector in front of the
part 60. wood heater.
8.2.1 Catalyst-equipped Wood Heater. Op- 8.6.2 Use an anemometer to measure the
erate the catalyst-equipped wood heater air velocity. Measure and record the room
using fuel meeting the specifications out- air velocity before the pretest ignition pe-
lined in Sections 7.1.1 through 7.1.3, or cord- riod (Section 8.7) and once immediately fol-
wood with a moisture content between 15 lowing the test run completion.
and 25 percent on a wet basis. Operate the 8.6.3 Measure and record the test facili-
wood heater at a medium burn rate (Cat- ty’s ambient relative humidity, barometric
egory 2 or 3) with a new catalytic combustor pressure, and temperature before and after
in place and in operation for at least 50 each test run.
hours. Record and report hourly catalyst 8.6.4 Measure and record the flue draft or
exit temperature data (Section 8.6.2) and the static pressure in the flue at a location no
hours of operation. greater than 0.3 m (1 ft) above the flue con-
8.2.2 Non-Catalyst Wood Heater. Operate nector at the wood heater exhaust during the
the wood heater using the fuel described in test run at the recording intervals (Section
Section 8.4.1 at a medium burn rate for at 8.8.2).
least 10 hours. Record and report the hours 8.7 Wood Heater Firebox Volume.
of operation. 8.7.1 Determine the firebox volume using
8.3 Pretest Recordkeeping. Record the the definitions for height, width, and length
test fuel charge dimensions and weights, and in Section 3. Volume adjustments due to
wood heater and catalyst descriptions as presence of firebrick and other permanent
shown in the example in Figure 28–1. fixtures may be necessary. Adjust width and
8.4 Wood Heater Installation. Assemble length dimensions to extend to the metal
the wood heater appliance and parts in con- wall of the wood heater above the firebrick
formance with the manufacturer’s written or permanent obstruction if the firebrick or
installation instructions. Place the wood obstruction extending the length of the
heater centrally on the platform scale and side(s) or back wall extends less than one-
connect the wood heater to the flue de- third of the usable firebox height. Use the
scribed in Section 6.11. Clean the flue with width or length dimensions inside the
an appropriately sized, wire chimney brush firebrick if the firebrick extends more than
before each certification test. one-third of the usable firebox height. If a
8.5 Wood Heater Temperature Monitors. log retainer or grate is a permanent fixture
8.5.1 For catalyst-equipped wood heaters, and the manufacturer recommends that no
locate a temperature monitor (optional) fuel be placed outside the retainer, the area
about 25 mm (1 in.) upstream of the catalyst outside of the retainer is excluded from the
at the centroid of the catalyst face area, and firebox volume calculations.
locate a temperature monitor (mandatory) 8.7.2 In general, exclude the area above
that will indicate the catalyst exhaust tem- the ash lip if that area is less than 10 percent
perature. This temperature monitor is cen- of the usable firebox volume. Otherwise, take
trally located within 25 mm (1 in.) down- into account consumer loading practices.
stream at the centroid of catalyst face area. For instance, if fuel is to be loaded front-to-
Record these locations. back, an ash lip may be considered usable
8.5.2 Locate wood heater surface tempera- firebox volume.
ture monitors at five locations on the wood 8.7.3 Include areas adjacent to and above
heater firebox exterior surface. Position the a baffle (up to two inches above the fuel
temperature monitors centrally on the top loading opening) if four inches or more hori-
surface, on two sidewall surfaces, and on the zontal space exist between the edge of the
bottom and back surfaces. Position the mon- baffle and a vertical obstruction (e.g., side-
itor sensing tip on the firebox exterior sur- walls or air channels).
face inside of any heat shield, air circulation 8.8 Test Fuel Charge.
walls, or other wall or shield separated from 8.8.1 Prepare the test fuel pieces in ac-
the firebox exterior surface. Surface tem- cordance with the specifications outlined in
perature locations for unusual design shapes Sections 7.1 and 7.2. Determine the test fuel
571
moisture content with a calibrated electrical emission sampling is necessary and burn rate
resistance meter or other equivalent per- data shall be recorded at 5-minute intervals.
formance meter. If necessary, convert fuel 8.10.2 After the start of the test run, oper-
moisture content values from dry basis ate the wood heater with the secondary air
(%Md) to wet basis (%Mw) in Section 12.2 supply set as per the manufacturer’s instruc-
using Equation 28–1. Determine fuel mois- tions, but with no adjustments to this set-
ture for each fuel piece (not including spac- ting. After 25 percent of the test fuel has
ers) by averaging at least three moisture been consumed, adjust the secondary air sup-
meter readings, one from each of three sides, ply controls to another setting, as per the
measured parallel to the wood grain. Aver- manufacturer’s instructions. Record the
age all the readings for all the fuel pieces in burn rate data (5-minute intervals) for 20
the test fuel charge. If an electrical resist- minutes following the air supply adjustment.
ance type meter is used, penetration of insu- 8.10.3 Adjust the air supply control(s) to
lated electrodes shall be one-fourth the the original position(s), operate at this con-
thickness of the test fuel piece or 19 mm (0.75 dition for at least 20 minutes, and repeat the
in.), whichever is greater. Measure the mois- air supply adjustment procedure above. Re-
ture content within a 4-hour period prior to peat the procedure three times at equal in-
the test run. Determine the fuel temperature tervals over the entire burn period as defined
by measuring the temperature of the room in Section 8.8. If the secondary air adjust-
where the wood has been stored for at least ment results in a burn rate change of more
24 hours prior to the moisture determina- than an average of 25 percent between the 20-
tion. minute periods before and after the sec-
8.8.2 Attach the spacers to the test fuel ondary adjustments, the secondary air sup-
pieces with uncoated, ungalvanized nails or ply shall be considered a primary air supply,
staples as illustrated in Figure 28–2. Attach- and no adjustment to this air supply is al-
ment of spacers to the top of the test fuel lowed during the test run.
piece(s) on top of the test fuel charge is op- 8.10.4 The example sequence below de-
tional. scribes a typical secondary air adjustment
8.8.3 To avoid stacking difficulties, or validation check. The first cycle begins after
when a whole number of test fuel pieces does at least 25 percent of the test fuel charge has
not result, all piece lengths shall be adjusted been consumed.
uniformly to remain within the specified
Cycle 1
loading density. The shape of the test fuel
Part 1, sec air adjusted to final position—
crib shall be geometrically similar to the
20 min
shape of the firebox volume without resort-
ing to special angular or round cuts on the
20 min
individual fuel pieces.
8.8.4 The test fuel loading density shall be
20 min
112 ±11.2 kg/m3 (7 ±0.7 lb/ft3) of usable firebox
volume on a wet basis. Cycle 2
8.9 Sampling Equipment. Prepare the Part 1, sec air adjusted to final position—
sampling equipment as defined by the se- 20 min
lected method (i.e., either Method 5G or Part 2, sec air adjusted to final position—
Method 5H). Collect one particulate emission 20 min
sample for each test run. Part 3, sec air adjusted to final position—
8.10 Secondary Air Adjustment Valida- 20 min
tion. Cycle 3
8.10.1 If design drawings do not show the Part 1, sec air adjusted to final position—
introduction of secondary air into a chamber 20 min
outside the firebox (see ‘‘secondary air sup- Part 2, sec air adjusted to final position—
ply’’ under Section 3.0, Definitions), conduct 20 min
a separate test of the wood heater’s sec- Part 3, sec air adjusted to final position—
ondary air supply. Operate the wood heater 20 min
at a burn rate in Category 1 (Section 8.1.1) Note that the cycles may overlap; that is,
with the secondary air supply operated fol- Part 3 of Cycle 1 may coincide in part or in
lowing the manufacturer’s written instruc- total with Part 1 of Cycle 2. The calculation
tions. Start the secondary air validation test of the secondary air percent effect for this
run as described in Section 8.8.1, except no example is as follows:
BR1,3 − BR 2
%BR sec = × 100 Eq. 28-1

BR1,3
572
ER17oc00.425</MATH>
8.11 Pretest Ignition. Build a fire in the wood heater with the remaining pretest fuel
wood heater in accordance with the manu- and the tare weight of the cleaned, dry wood
facturer’s written instructions. heater with or without dry ash or sand added
8.11.1 Pretest Fuel Charge. Crumpled consistent with the manufacturer’s instruc-
newspaper loaded with kindling may be used tions and the owner’s manual. The tare
to help ignite the pretest fuel. The pretest weight of the wood heater must be deter-
fuel, used to sustain the fire, shall meet the mined with the wood heater (and ash, if
same fuel requirements prescribed in Section added) in a dry condition.
7.1. The pretest fuel charge shall consist of 8.12 Test Run. Complete a test run in each
whole 2×4’s that are no less than 1⁄3 the burn rate category, as follows:
length of the test fuel pieces. Pieces of 4×4 8.12.1 Test Run Start.
lumber in approximately the same weight 8.12.1.1 When the kindling and pretest fuel
ratio as for the test fuel charge may be have been consumed to leave a fuel weight
added to the pretest fuel charge. between 20 and 25 percent of the weight of
8.11.2 Wood Heater Operation and Adjust- the test fuel charge, record the weight of the
ments. Set the air inlet supply controls at fuel remaining and start the test run. Record
any position that will maintain combustion and report any other criteria, in addition to
of the pretest fuel load. At least one hour be- those specified in this section, used to deter-
fore the start of the test run, set the air sup- mine the moment of the test run start (e.g.,
ply controls at the approximate positions firebox or catalyst temperature), whether
necessary to achieve the burn rate desired such criteria are specified by the wood heat-
for the test run. Adjustment of the air sup- er manufacturer or the testing laboratory.
ply controls, fuel addition or subtractions, Record all wood heater individual surface
and coalbed raking shall be kept to a min- temperatures, catalyst temperatures, any
imum but are allowed up to 15 minutes prior initial sampling method measurement val-
to the start of the test run. For the purposes ues, and begin the particulate emission sam-
of this method, coalbed raking is the use of pling. Within 1 minute following the start of
a metal tool (poker) to stir coals, break the test run, open the wood heater door, load
burning fuel into smaller pieces, dislodge the test fuel charge, and record the test fuel
fuel pieces from positions of poor combus- charge weight. Recording of average, rather
tion, and check for the condition of uniform than individual, surface temperatures is ac-
charcoalization. Record all adjustments ceptable for tests conducted in accordance
made to the air supply controls, adjustments with § 60.533(o)(3)(i) of 40 CFR part 60.
to and additions or subtractions of fuel, and 8.12.1.2 Position the fuel charge so that
any other changes to wood heater operations the spacers are parallel to the floor of the
that occur during pretest ignition period. firebox, with the spacer edges abutting each
Record fuel weight data and wood heater other. If loading difficulties result, some fuel
temperature measurements at 10-minute in- pieces may be placed on edge. If the usable
firebox volume is between 0.043 and 0.085 m3
tervals during the hour of the pretest igni-
(1.5 and 3.0 ft3), alternate the piece sizes in
tion period preceding the start of the test
vertical stacking layers to the extent pos-
run. During the 15-minute period prior to the
sible. For example, place 2 × 4’s on the bot-
start of the test run, the wood heater loading
tom layer in direct contact with the coal bed
door shall not be open more than a total of
and 4 × 4’s on the next layer, etc. (See Figure
1 minute. Coalbed raking is the only adjust-
28–3). Position the fuel pieces parallel to
ment allowed during this period.
each other and parallel to the longest wall of
NOTE: One purpose of the pretest ignition the firebox to the extent possible within the
period is to achieve uniform charcoalization specifications in Section 8.8.
of the test fuel bed prior to loading the test 8.12.1.3 Load the test fuel in appliances
fuel charge. Uniform charcoalization is a having unusual or unconventional firebox de-
general condition of the test fuel bed evi- sign maintaining air space intervals between
denced by an absence of large pieces of burn- the test fuel pieces and in conformance with
ing wood in the coal bed and the remaining the manufacturer’s written instructions. For
fuel pieces being brittle enough to be broken any appliance that will not accommodate
into smaller charcoal pieces with a metal the loading arrangement specified in the
poker. Manipulations to the fuel bed prior to paragraph above, the test facility personnel
the start of the test run should be done to shall contact the Administrator for an alter-
achieve uniform charcoalization while main- native loading arrangement.
taining the desired burn rate. In addition, 8.12.1.4 The wood heater door may remain
some wood heaters (e.g., high mass units) open and the air supply controls adjusted up
may require extended pretest burn time and to five minutes after the start of the test run
fuel additions to reach an initial average in order to make adjustments to the test fuel
surface temperature sufficient to meet the
charge and to ensure ignition of the test fuel

thermal equilibrium criteria in Section 8.3. charge has occurred. Within the five minutes
8.11.3 The weight of pretest fuel remain- after the start of the test run, close the wood
ing at the start of the test run is determined heater door and adjust the air supply con-
as the difference between the weight of the trols to the position determined to produce
573
the desired burn rate. No other adjustments the blower operating. Additional test runs
to the air supply controls or the test fuel without the blower operating are unneces-
charge are allowed (except as specified in sary.
Sections 8.12.3 and 8.12.4) after the first five 8.13 Test Run Completion. Continue emis-
minutes of the test run. Record the length of
sion sampling and wood heater operation for
time the wood heater door remains open, the
2 hours. The test run is completed when the
adjustments to the air supply controls, and
remaining weight of the test fuel charge is
any other operational adjustments.
0.00 kg (0.0 lb). End the test run when the
8.12.2 Data Recording. Record on a data
scale has indicated a test fuel charge weight
sheet similar to that shown in Figure 28–4, at
intervals no greater than 10 minutes, fuel of 0.00 kg (0.0 lb) or less for 30 seconds. At the
weight data, wood heater individual surface end of the test run, stop the particulate sam-
and catalyst temperature measurements, pling, and record the final fuel weight, the
other wood heater operational data (e.g., run time, and all final measurement values.
draft), test facility temperature and sam- 8.14 Wood Heater Thermal Equilibrium.
pling method data. The average of the wood heater surface tem-
8.12.3 Test Fuel Charge Adjustment. The peratures at the end of the test run shall
test fuel charge may be adjusted (i.e., reposi- agree with the average surface temperature
tioned) once during a test run if more than at the start of the test run to within 70 °C
60 percent of the initial test fuel charge (126 °F).
weight has been consumed and more than 10 8.15 Consecutive Test Runs. Test runs on
minutes have elapsed without a measurable a wood heater may be conducted consecu-
(<0.05 kg (0.1 lb) or 1.0 percent, whichever is tively provided that a minimum one-hour in-
greater) weight change. The time used to terval occurs between test runs.
make this adjustment shall be less than 15 8.16 Additional Test Runs. The testing
seconds. laboratory may conduct more than one test
8.12.4 Air Supply Adjustment. Secondary run in each of the burn rate categories speci-
air supply controls may be adjusted once fied in Section 8.1.1. If more than one test
during the test run following the manufac- run is conducted at a specified burn rate, the
turer’s written instructions (see Section results from at least two-thirds of the test
8.10). No other air supply adjustments are al- runs in that burn rate category shall be used
lowed during the test run. Recording of wood in calculating the weighted average emission
heater flue draft during the test run is op- rate (see Section 12.2). The measurement
tional for tests conducted in accordance with
data and results of all test runs shall be re-
§ 60.533(o)(3)(i) of 40 CFR part 60.
ported regardless of which values are used in
8.12.5 Auxiliary Wood Heater Equipment
calculating the weighted average emission
Operation. Heat exchange blowers sold with
rate (see NOTE in Section 8.1).
the wood heater shall be operated during the
test run following the manufacturer’s writ- 9.0 Quality Control
ten instructions. If no manufacturer’s writ-
ten instructions are available, operate the Same as Section 9.0 of either Method 5G or
heat exchange blower in the ‘‘high’’ position. Method 5H.
(Automatically operated blowers shall be op-
erated as designed.) Shaker grates, by-pass 10.0 Calibration and Standardizations
controls, or other auxiliary equipment may
Same as Section 10.0 of either Method 5G
be adjusted only one time during the test
run following the manufacturer’s written in- or Method 5H, with the addition of the fol-
structions. lowing:
Record all adjustments on a wood heater 10.1 Platform Scale. Perform a multi-
operational written record. point calibration (at least five points span-
ning the operational range) of the platform
NOTE: If the wood heater is sold with a
heat exchange blower as an option, test the scale before its initial use. The scale manu-
wood heater with the heat exchange blower facturer’s calibration results are sufficient
operating as described in Sections 8.1 for this purpose. Before each certification
through 8.12 and report the results. As an al- test, audit the scale with the wood heater in
ternative to repeating all test runs without place by weighing at least one calibration
the heat exchange blower operating, one ad- weight (Class F) that corresponds to between
ditional test run may be without the blower 20 percent and 80 percent of the expected test
operating as described in Section 8.12.5 at a fuel charge weight. If the scale cannot repro-
burn rate in Category 2 (Section 8.1.1). If the duce the value of the calibration weight
emission rate resulting from this test run within 0.05 kg (0.1 lb) or 1 percent of the ex-
without the blower operating is equal to or pected test fuel charge weight, whichever is
less than the emission rate plus 1.0 g/hr greater, recalibrate the scale before use with
(0.0022 lb/hr) for the test run in burn rate at least five calibration weights spanning
Category 2 with the blower operating, the the operational range of the scale.
wood heater may be considered to have the 10.2 Balance (optional). Calibrate as de-
same average emission rate with or without scribed in Section 10.1.
574
10.3 Temperature Monitor. Calibrate as in %Md=Fuel moisture content, dry basis, per-
Method 2, Section 4.3, before the first certifi- cent.
cation test and semiannually thereafter. %Mw=Average moisture in test fuel charge,
10.4 Moisture Meter. Calibrate as per the wet basis, percent.
manufacturer’s instructions before each cer- n=Total number of test runs.
tification test. Pi=Probability for burn rate during test run,
10.5 Anemometer. Calibrate the anemom- i, obtained from Table 28–1. Use linear in-
eter as specified by the manufacturer’s in- terpolation to determine probability val-
structions before the first certification test ues for burn rates between those listed on
and semiannually thereafter. the table.
10.6 Barometer. Calibrate against a mer- Wwd=Total mass of wood burned during the
cury barometer before the first certification test run, kg (lb).
test and semiannually thereafter. 12.2 Wet Basis Fuel Moisture Content.
10.7 Draft Gauge. Calibrate as per the
manufacturer’s instructions; a liquid ma- 100(%M d )
nometer does not require calibration. %M w = Eq. 28-2
10.8 Humidity Gauge. Calibrate as per the 100 + %M d
manufacturer’s instructions before the first
certification test and semiannually there- 12.3 Weighted Average Emission Rate.
after. Calculate the weighted average emission
rate (Ew) using Equation 28–1:
n
Same as Section 11.0 of either Method 5G
or Method 5H. ∑ (K i E i )
i =1
Ew = n Eq. 28-3
Same as Section 12.0 of either Method 5G ∑ Ki
or Method 5H, with the addition of the fol- i =1
lowing: NOTE: Po always equals 0, P(n∂1) always
12.1 Nomenclature. equals 1, P1 corresponds to the probability of
BR=Dry wood burn rate, kg/hr (lb/hr) the lowest recorded burn rate, P2 cor-
Ei=Emission rate for test run, i, from Method responds to the probability of the next low-
5G or 5H, g/hr (lb/hr) est burn rate, etc. An example calculation is
Ew=Weighted average emission rate, g/hr (lb/ in Section 12.3.1.
hr) 12.3.1 Example Calculation of Weighted
ki=Test run weighting factor=Pi∂1 ¥ Pi¥1 Average Emission Rate.
Test Burn rate Emissions

Burn rate category No. (Dry-kg/hr) (g/hr)
1 ..................................................................................................................................... 1 0.65 5.0

21 ................................................................................................................................... 2 0.85 6.7
2 ..................................................................................................................................... 3 0.90 4.7
2 ..................................................................................................................................... 4 1.00 5.3
3 ..................................................................................................................................... 5 1.45 3.8
4 ..................................................................................................................................... 6 2.00 5.1
1 As permitted in Section 6.6, this test run may be omitted from the calculation of the weighted average emission rate because
three runs were conducted for this burn rate category.
Test No. Burn rate Pi Ei Ki
0 ............................................................................................................ .................... 0.000 .................... ....................

1 ............................................................................................................ 0.65 0.121 5.0 0.300
2 ............................................................................................................ 0.90 0.300 4.7 0.259
3 ............................................................................................................ 1.00 0.380 5.3 0.422
4 ............................................................................................................ 1.45 0.722 3.8 0.532
5 ............................................................................................................ 2.00 0.912 5.1 0.278
6 ............................................................................................................ .................... 1.000 .................... ....................
K1=P2 ¥ P0=0.300 ¥ 0=0.300
K2=P3 ¥ P1=0.381 ¥ 0.121=0.259
K3=P4 ¥ P2=0.722 ¥ 0.300=0.422
K4=P5 ¥ P3=0.912 ¥ 0.380=0.532
K5=P6 ¥ P4=1.000 ¥ 0.722=0.278
ER17oc00.427</MATH>
Weighted Average Emission Rate, Ew,

Calculation
575
ER17oc00.426</MATH>
Ew =
∑ (K i E i )
∑ Ki
(0.3)(5.0) + (0.259)(4.7) + (0.422)(5.3) + (0.532)(3.8) + (0.278)(51
.)
=
1.791
= 4.69 g / hr
12.4 Average Wood Heater Surface Tem- not include the test run results in the test
peratures. Calculate the average of the wood average. Replace such test run results with
heater surface temperatures for the start of results from another test run in the same
the test run (Section 8.12.1) and for the test burn rate category.
run completion (Section 8.13). If the two av- 12.5 Burn Rate. Calculate the burn rate
erage temperatures do not agree within 70 °C (BR) using Equation 28–3:
(125 °F), report the test run results, but do
60 Wwd 100 − %M w
BR = × Eq. 28-3
θ 100
12.6 Reporting Criteria. Submit both raw 12.6.1.3.3 Process operation during test-air
and reduced test data for wood heater tests. supply settings and adjustments, fuel bed ad-
12.6.1 Suggested Test Report Format. justments, draft.
12.6.1.1 Introduction. 12.6.1.3.4 Test fuel-test fuel properties
12.6.1.1.1 Purpose of test-certification, (moisture and temperature), test fuel crib
audit, efficiency, research and development. description (include line drawing or photo-
12.6.1.1.2 Wood heater identification-man- graph), test fuel loading density.
ufacturer, model number, catalytic/noncata- 12.6.1.4 Sampling Locations.
lytic, options. 12.6.1.4.1 Describe sampling location rel-
12.6.1.1.3 Laboratory-name, location (alti- ative to wood heater. Include drawing or
tude), participants. photograph.
12.6.1.1.4 Test information-date wood 12.6.1.5 Sampling and Analytical Proce-
heater received, date of tests, sampling dures
methods used, number of test runs. 12.6.1.5.1 Sampling methods-brief ref-
12.6.1.2 Summary and Discussion of Re- erence to operational and sampling proce-
sults dures and optional and alternative proce-
12.6.1.2.1 Table of results (in order of in- dures used.
creasing burn rate)-test run number, burn
12.6.1.5.2 Analytical methods-brief de-
rate, particulate emission rate, efficiency (if
scription of sample recovery and analysis
determined), averages (indicate which test
procedures.
runs are used).
12.6.1.2.2 Summary of other data-test fa- 12.6.1.6 Quality Control and Assurance
cility conditions, surface temperature aver- Procedures and Results
ages, catalyst temperature averages, pretest 12.6.1.6.1 Calibration procedures and re-
fuel weights, test fuel charge weights, run sults-certification procedures, sampling and
times. analysis procedures.
12.6.1.2.3 Discussion-Burn rate categories 12.6.1.6.2 Test method quality control pro-
achieved, test run result selection, specific cedures-leak-checks, volume meter checks,
test run problems and solutions. stratification (velocity) checks, proportion-
12.6.1.3 Process Description. ality results.
12.6.1.3.1 Wood heater dimensions-volume, 12.6.1.7 Appendices
height, width, lengths (or other linear di- 12.6.1.7.1 Results and Example Calcula-
mensions), weight, volume adjustments. tions. Complete summary tables and accom-
12.6.1.3.2 Firebox configuration-air supply panying examples of all calculations.
locations and operation, air supply introduc- 12.6.1.7.2 Raw Data. Copies of all uncor-
tion location, refractory location and dimen- rected data sheets for sampling measure-
ER17OC00.429</MATH>
sions, catalyst location, baffle and by-pass ments, temperature records and sample re-
location and operation (include line draw- covery data. Copies of all pretest burn rate
ings or photographs). and wood heater temperature data.
576
ER17oc00.428</MATH>
12.6.1.7.3 Sampling and Analytical Proce- manufacturer’s written instructions for
dures. Detailed description of procedures fol- maintaining the desired burn rate.
lowed by laboratory personnel in conducting 16.1.3 Wood Heater Firebox Volume. The
the certification test, emphasizing par- firebox volume need not be measured or de-
ticular parts of the procedures differing from termined for establishing the test fuel
the methods (e.g., approved alternatives). charge size. The firebox dimensions and
12.6.1.7.4 Calibration Results. Summary of other heater specifications needed to iden-
all calibrations, checks, and audits pertinent tify the heater for certification purposes
to certification test results with dates. shall be reported.
12.6.1.7.5 Participants. Test personnel, 16.1.4 Heater Installation. Arrange the
manufacturer representatives, and regu- heater with the fuel supply hopper on the
latory observers. platform scale as described in Section 8.6.1.
12.6.1.7.6 Sampling and Operation 16.1.5 Pretest Ignition. Start a fire in the
Records. Copies of uncorrected records of ac- heater as directed by the manufacturer’s
tivities not included on raw data sheets (e.g., written instructions, and adjust the heater
wood heater door open times and durations). controls to achieve the desired burn rate. Op-
12.6.1.7.7 Additional Information. Wood erate the heater at the desired burn rate for
heater manufacturer’s written instructions at least 1 hour before the start of the test
for operation during the certification test. run.
12.6.2.1 Wood Heater Identification. Re-
16.1.6 Test Run. Complete a test run in
port wood heater identification information.
each burn rate category as follows:
An example data form is shown in Figure 28–
4. 16.1.6.1 Test Run Start. When the wood
12.6.2.2 Test Facility Information. Report heater has operated for at least 1 hour at the
test facility temperature, air velocity, and desired burn rate, add fuel to the supply hop-
humidity information. An example data per as necessary to complete the test run,
form is shown on Figure 28–4. record the weight of the fuel in the supply
12.6.2.3 Test Equipment Calibration and hopper (the wood heater weight), and start
Audit Information. Report calibration and the test run. Add no additional fuel to the
audit results for the platform scale, test fuel hopper during the test run.
balance, test fuel moisture meter, and sam- Record all the wood heater surface tem-
pling equipment including volume metering peratures, the initial sampling method meas-
systems and gaseous analyzers. urement values, the time at the start of the
12.6.2.4 Pretest Procedure Description. test, and begin the emission sampling. Make
Report all pretest procedures including pre- no adjustments to the wood heater air sup-
test fuel weight, burn rates, wood heater ply or wood supply rate during the test run.
temperatures, and air supply settings. An ex- 16.1.6.2 Data Recording. Record the fuel
ample data form is shown on Figure 28–4. (wood heater) weight data, wood heater tem-
12.6.2.5 Particulate Emission Data. Report perature and operational data, and emission
a summary of test results for all test runs sampling data as described in Section 8.12.2.
and the weighted average emission rate. Sub- 16.1.6.3 Test Run Completion. Continue
mit copies of all data sheets and other emission sampling and wood heater oper-
records collected during the testing. Submit ation for 2 hours. At the end of the test run,
examples of all calculations. stop the particulate sampling, and record the
final fuel weight, the run time, and all final
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] measurement values, including all wood
heater individual surface temperatures.
16.1.7 Calculations. Determine the burn
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] rate using the difference between the initial
and final fuel (wood heater) weights and the
16.0 Alternative Procedures procedures described in Section 12.4. Com-
plete the other calculations as described in
16.1 Pellet Burning Heaters. Certification
Section 12.0.
testing requirements and procedures for pel-
let burning wood heaters are identical to 17.0 References
those for other wood heaters, with the fol-
lowing exceptions: Same as Method 5G, with the addition of
16.1.1 Test Fuel Properties. The test fuel the following:
shall be all wood pellets with a moisture con- 1. Radian Corporation. OMNI Environ-
tent no greater than 20 percent on a wet mental Services, Inc., Cumulative Prob-
basis (25 percent on a dry basis). Determine ability for a Given Burn Rate Based on Data
the wood moisture content with either Generated in the CONEG and BPA Studies.
ASTM D 2016–74 or 83, (Method A), ASTM D Package of materials submitted to the Fifth
4444–92, or ASTM D 4442–84 or 92 (all noted Session of the Regulatory Negotiation Com-
ASTM standards are incorporated by ref- mittee, July 16–17, 1986.
erence—see § 60.17).
16.1.2 Test Fuel Charge Specifications. 18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and
The test fuel charge size shall be as per the Validation Data
577
TABLE 28–1—BURN RATE WEIGHTED PROBABILITIES FOR CALCULATING WEIGHTED AVERAGE

EMISSION RATES
Burn rate Cumulative Burn rate Cumulative Burn rate Cumulative
(kg/hr-dry) probability (P) (kg/hr-dry) probability (P) (kg/hr-dry) probability (P)
0.00 ........................................................... 0.000 1.70 0.840 3.40 0.989

0.05 ........................................................... 0.002 1.75 0.857 3.45 0.989
0.10 ........................................................... 0.007 1.80 0.875 3.50 0.990
0.15 ........................................................... 0.012 1.85 0.882 3.55 0.991
0.20 ........................................................... 0.016 1.90 0.895 3.60 0.991
0.25 ........................................................... 0.021 1.95 0.906 3.65 0.992
0.30 ........................................................... 0.028 2.00 0.912 3.70 0.992
0.35 ........................................................... 0.033 2.05 0.920 3.75 0.992
0.40 ........................................................... 0.041 2.10 0.925 3.80 0.993
0.45 ........................................................... 0.054 2.15 0.932 3.85 0.994
0.50 ........................................................... 0.065 2.20 0.936 3.90 0.994
0.55 ........................................................... 0.086 2.25 0.940 3.95 0.994
0.60 ........................................................... 0.100 2.30 0.945 4.00 0.994
0.65 ........................................................... 0.121 2.35 0.951 4.05 0.995
0.70 ........................................................... 0.150 2.40 0.956 4.10 0.995
0.75 ........................................................... 0.185 2.45 0.959 4.15 0.995
0.80 ........................................................... 0.220 2.50 0.964 4.20 0.995
0.85 ........................................................... 0.254 2.55 0.968 4.25 0.995
0.90 ........................................................... 0.300 2.60 0.972 4.30 0.996
0.95 ........................................................... 0.328 2.65 0.975 4.35 0.996
1.00 ........................................................... 0.380 2.70 0.977 4.40 0.996
1.05 ........................................................... 0.407 2.75 0.979 4.45 0.996
1.10 ........................................................... 0.460 2.80 0.980 4.50 0.996
1.15 ........................................................... 0.490 2.85 0.981 4.55 0.996
1.20 ........................................................... 0.550 2.90 0.982 4.60 0.996
1.25 ........................................................... 0.572 2.95 0.984 4.65 0.996
1.30 ........................................................... 0.620 3.00 0.984 4.70 0.996
1.35 ........................................................... 0.654 3.05 0.985 4.75 0.997
1.40 ........................................................... 0.695 3.10 0.986 4.80 0.997
1.45 ........................................................... 0.722 3.15 0.987 4.85 0.997
1.50 ........................................................... 0.750 3.20 0.987 4.90 0.997
1.55 ........................................................... 0.779 3.25 0.988 4.95 0.997
1.60 ........................................................... 0.800 3.30 0.988 ≥5.00 1.000
1.65 ........................................................... 0.825 3.35 0.989 ........................ ........................
578
579
ER17OC00.430</GPH>
580
ER17OC00.431</GPH>
METHOD 28A—MEASUREMENT OF AIR- TO-FUEL tain reliable results, persons using this
RATIO AND MIMIMUM ACHIEVABLE BURN method should also have a thorough knowl-
RATES FOR WOOD-FIRED APPLIANCES edge of at least the following additional test
methods: Method 3, Method 3A, Method 5H,
NOTE: This method does not include all or
Method 6C, and Method 28.
material is incorporated by reference from 1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No
other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob- CAS number assigned.
581
ER17OC00.432</GPH>
1.2 Applicability. This method is applica- 6.3.1 Orsat Analyzer. Same as Method 3,
ble for the measurement of air-to-fuel ratios Section 6.1.3
and minimum achievable burn rates, for de- 6.3.2 Instrumental Analyzers. Same as
termining whether a wood-fired appliance is Method 5H, Sections 6.1.3.4 and 6.1.3.5, for
an affected facility, as specified in 40 CFR CO2 and CO analyzers, except use a CO ana-
60.530. lyzer with a range of 0 to 5 percent and use
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to a CO2 analyzer with a range of 0 to 5 percent.
the requirements of this method will en- Use an O2 analyzer capable of providing a
hance the quality of the data obtained from measure of O2 in the range of 0 to 25 percent
air pollutant sampling methods. by volume at least once every 10 minutes.
2.0 Summary of Method 7.0 Reagents and Standards

2.1 A gas sample is extracted from a loca- 7.1 Test Fuel and Test Fuel Spacers.
tion in the stack of a wood-fired appliance Same as Method 28, Sections 7.1 and 7.2, re-
while the appliance is operating at a pre- spectively.
scribed set of conditions. The gas sample is 7.2 Cylinder Gases. For each of the three
analyzed for carbon dioxide (CO2), oxygen analyzers, use the same concentration as
(O2), and carbon monoxide (CO). These stack specified in Sections 7.2.1, 7.2.2, and 7.2.3 of
gas components are measured for deter- Method 6C.
mining the dry molecular weight of the ex-
haust gas. Total moles of exhaust gas are de- 8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage,
termined stoichiometrically. Air-to-fuel and Transport
ratio is determined by relating the mass of
dry combustion air to the mass of dry fuel 8.1 Wood Heater Air Supply Adjustments.
consumed. 8.1.1 This section describes how dampers
are to be set or adjusted and air inlet ports
3.0 Definitions closed or sealed during Method 28A tests.
The specifications in this section are in-
Same as Method 28, Section 3.0, with the
tended to ensure that affected facility deter-
addition of the following:
minations are made on the facility configu-
3.1 Air-to-fuel ratio means the ratio of the rations that could reasonably be expected to
mass of dry combustion air introduced into be employed by the user. They are also in-
the firebox to the mass of dry fuel consumed tended to prevent circumvention of the
(grams of dry air per gram of dry wood standard through the addition of an air port
burned). that would often be blocked off in actual use.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved] These specifications are based on the as-
sumption that consumers will remove such
5.0 Safety items as dampers or other closure mecha-
nism stops if this can be done readily with
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve household tools; that consumers will block
hazardous materials, operations, and equip- air inlet passages not visible during normal
ment. This test method may not address all operation of the appliance using aluminum
of the safety problems associated with its tape or parts generally available at retail
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this stores; and that consumers will cap off any
test method to establish appropriate safety threaded or flanged air inlets. They also as-
and health practices and to determine the sume that air leakage around glass doors,
applicability of regulatory limitations prior sheet metal joints or through inlet grilles
to performing this test method. visible during normal operation of the appli-
ance would not be further blocked or taped
off by a consumer.
6.1 Test Facility. Insulated Solid Pack 8.1.2 It is not the intention of this section
Chimney, Platform Scale and Monitor, Test to cause an appliance that is clearly de-
Facility Temperature Monitor, Balance, signed, intended, and, in most normal instal-
Moisture Meter, Anemometer, Barometer, lations, used as a fireplace to be converted
Draft Gauge, Humidity Gauge, Wood Heater into a wood heater for purposes of applica-
Flue, and Test Facility. Same as Method 28, bility testing. Such a fireplace would be
Sections 6.1, 6.2, and 6.4 to 6.12, respectively. identifiable by such features as large or mul-
6.2 Sampling System. Probe, Condenser, tiple glass doors or panels that are not
Valve, Pump, Rate Meter, Flexible Bag, gasketed, relatively unrestricted air inlets
Pressure Gauge, and Vacuum Gauge. Same intended, in large part, to limit smoking and
as Method 3, Sections 6.2.1 to 6.2.8, respec- fogging of glass surfaces, and other aesthetic
tively. Alternatively, the sampling system features not normally included in wood heat-
described in Method 5H, Section 6.1 may be ers.
used. 8.1.3 Adjustable Air Supply Mechanisms.
6.3 Exhaust Gas Analysis. Use one or both Any commercially available flue damper,
of the following: other adjustment mechanism or other air
582
inlet port that is designed, intended or oth- 8.2.1 Sampling Location. Same as Method
erwise reasonably expected to be adjusted or 5H, Section 8.1.2.
closed by consumers, installers, or dealers 8.2.2 Sampling System Set Up. Set up the
and which could restrict air into the firebox sampling equipment as described in Method
shall be set so as to achieve minimum air 3, Section 8.1.
into the firebox (i.e., closed off or set in the 8.3 Wood Heater Installation, Test Facil-
most closed position). ity Conditions, Wood Heater Firebox Vol-
8.1.3.1 Flue dampers, mechanisms and air ume, and Test Fuel Charge. Same as Method
inlet ports which could reasonably be ex- 28, Sections 8.4 and 8.6 to 8.8, respectively.
pected to be adjusted or closed would in- 8.4 Pretest Ignition. Same as Method 28,
clude: Section 8.11. Set the wood heater air supply
8.1.3.1.1 All internal or externally adjust- settings to achieve a burn rate in Category 1
able mechanisms (including adjustments or the lowest achievable burn rate (see Sec-
that affect the tightness of door fittings) tion 8.1).
that are accessible either before and/or after 8.5 Test Run. Same as Method 28, Section
installation. 8.12. Begin sample collection at the start of
8.1.3.1.2 All mechanisms, other inlet the test run as defined in Method 28, Section
ports, or inlet port stops that are identified 8.12.1.
in the owner’s manual or in any dealer lit- 8.5.1 Gas Analysis.
erature as being adjustable or alterable. For 8.5.1.1 If Method 3 is used, collect a min-
example, an inlet port that could be used to imum of two bag samples simultaneously at
provide access to an outside air duct but a constant sampling rate for the duration of
which is identified as being closable through the test run. A minimum sample volume of
use of additional materials whether or not 30 liters (1.1 ft3) per bag is recommended.
they are supplied with the facility. 8.5.1.2 If instrumental gas concentration
8.1.3.1.3 Any combustion air inlet port or measurement procedures are used, conduct
commercially available flue damper or the gas measurement system performance
mechanism stop, which would readily lend tests, analyzer calibration, and analyzer
itself to closure by consumers who are handy calibration error check outlined in Method
with household tools by the removal of parts 6C, Sections 8.2.3, 8.2.4, 8.5, and 10.0, respec-
or the addition of parts generally available tively. Sample at a constant rate for the du-
at retail stores (e.g., addition of a pipe cap or ration of the test run.
plug, addition of a small metal plate to an 8.5.2 Data Recording. Record wood heater
inlet hole on a nondecorative sheet metal operational data, test facility temperature,
surface, or removal of riveted or screwed sample train flow rate, and fuel weight data
damper stops). at intervals of no greater than 10 minutes.
8.1.3.1.4 Any flue damper, other adjust- 8.5.3 Test Run Completion. Same as Meth-
ment mechanisms or other air inlet ports od 28, Section 8.13.
that are found and documented in several
(e.g., a number sufficient to reasonably con- 9.0 Quality Control
clude that the practice is not unique or un-
9.1 Data Validation. The following quality
common) actual installations as having been
control procedure is suggested to provide a
adjusted to a more closed position, or closed
check on the quality of the data.
by consumers, installers, or dealers.
9.1.1 Calculate a fuel factor, Fo, using
8.1.4 Air Supply Adjustments During Test.
Equation 28A–1 in Section 12.2.
The test shall be performed with all air in-
9.1.2 If CO is present in quantities meas-
lets identified under this section in the
urable by this method, adjust the O2 and CO2
closed or most closed position or in the con-
values before performing the calculation for
figuration which otherwise achieves the low-
Fo as shown in Section 12.3 and 12.4.
est air inlet (i.e., greatest blockage).
9.1.3 Compare the calculated Fo factor
NOTE: For the purposes of this section, air with the expected Fo range for wood (1.000–
flow shall not be minimized beyond the point 1.120). Calculated Fo values beyond this ac-
necessary to maintain combustion or beyond ceptable range should be investigated before
the point that forces smoke into the room. accepting the test results. For example, the
8.1.5 Notwithstanding Section 8.1.1, any strength of the solutions in the gas analyzer
flue damper, adjustment mechanism, or air and the analyzing technique should be
inlet port (whether or not equipped with flue checked by sampling and analyzing a known
dampers or adjusting mechanisms) that is concentration, such as air. If no detectable
visible during normal operation of the appli- or correctable measurement error can be
ance and which could not reasonably be identified, the test should be repeated. Alter-
closed further or blocked except through natively, determine a range of air-to-fuel
means that would significantly degrade the ratio results that could include the correct
aesthetics of the facility (e.g., through use of value by using an Fo value of 1.05 and calcu-
duct tape) will not be closed further or lating a potential range of CO2 and O2 values.
blocked. Acceptance of such results will be based on
8.2 Sampling System. whether the calculated range includes the
583
exemption limit and the judgment of the Ad- NT=Total gram-moles of dry exhaust gas per
ministrator. kg of wood burned (lb-moles/lb).
9.2 Method 3 Analyses. Compare the re- %CO2=Percent CO2 by volume (dry basis).
sults of the analyses of the two bag samples. %CO=Percent CO by volume (dry basis).
If all the gas components (O2, CO, and CO2) %N2=Percent N2 by volume (dry basis).
values for the two analyses agree within 0.5
%O2=Percent O2 by volume (dry basis).
percent (e.g., 6.0 percent O2 for bag 1 and 6.5
percent O2 for bag 2, agree within 0.5 per- YHC=Assumed mole fraction of HC (dry as
cent), the results of the bag analyses may be CH4)=0.0088 for catalytic wood heat-
averaged for the calculations in Section 12. If ers;=0.0132 for noncatalytic wood heat-
the analysis results do not agree within 0.5 ers.=0.0080 for pellet-fired wood heaters.
percent for each component, calculate the YCO=Measured mole fraction of CO (e.g., 1
air-to-fuel ratio using both sets of analyses percent CO=.01 mole fraction), g/g-mole (lb/
and report the results. lb-mole).
YCO2=Measured mole fraction of COCO2 (e.g.,
10.0 Calibration and Standardization 10 percent CO2=.10 mole fraction), g/g-mole
[Reserved] (lb/lb-mole).
0.280=Molecular weight of N2 or CO, divided
by 100.
11.1 Method 3 Integrated Bag Samples. 0.320=Molecular weight of O2 divided by 100.
Within 4 hours after the sample collection, 0.440=Molecular weight of CO2 divided by 100.
analyze each bag sample for percent CO2, O2, 20.9=Percent O2 by volume in ambient air.
and CO using an Orsat analyzer as described 42.5=Gram-moles of carbon in 1 kg of dry
in Method 3, Section 11.0. wood assuming 51 percent carbon by
11.2 Instrumental Analyzers. Average the weight dry basis (.0425 lb/lb-mole).
percent CO2, CO, and O2 values for the test
510=Grams of carbon in exhaust gas per kg of
run.
wood burned.
12.0 Data Analyses and Calculations 1,000=Grams in 1 kg.
Carry out calculations, retaining at least 12.2 Fuel Factor. Use Equation 28A–1 to
one extra significant figure beyond that of calculate the fuel factor.
the acquired data. Round off figure after the
final calculation. Other forms of the equa- 20.9 − %O 2
tions may be used as long as they give equiv- Fo = Eq. 28A-1
alent results. %CO 2
12.1 Nomenclature. 12. 3 Adjusted %CO2. Use Equation 28A–2
Md=Dry molecular weight, g/g-mole (lb/lb- to adjust CO2 values if measurable CO is
mole). present.
%CO 2 (adj) = %CO 2 + %CO Eq. 28A-2
12.4 Adjusted %O2. Use Equation 28A–3 to

adjust O2 value if measurable CO is present.
%O 2 (adj) = %O 2 − 0.5%CO Eq. 28A-3

ER17OC00.436</MATH>
12.5 Dry Molecular Weight. Use Equation

28A–4 to calculate the dry molecular weight
of the stack gas.
ER17OC00.435</MATH>
M d = 0.440(%CO 2 ) + 0.320(%O 2 ) + 0.280(%N 2 + %CO) Eq. 28A-4

ER17OC00.434</MATH>
NOTE: The above equation does not con- ular weight of 39.9). A negative error of
sider argon in air (about 0.9 percent, molec- about 0.4 percent is introduced. Argon may
584
ER17OC00.433</MATH>
be included in the analysis using procedures Analyte CAS No.
subject to approval of the Administrator.
Zinc (Zn) ........................................................ 7440–66–6
12.6 Dry Moles of Exhaust Gas. Use Equa-
tion 28A–5 to calculate the total moles of dry
exhaust gas produced per kilogram of dry
ble to the determination of metals emissions
wood burned.
from stationary sources. This method may
be used to determine particulate emissions
42.5
NT = Eq. 28A-5 in addition to the metals emissions if the
(Y CO2 + YCO + YHC ) prescribed procedures and precautions are
followed.
12.7 Air-to-Fuel Ratio. Use Equation 28A– 1.2.1 Hg emissions can be measured, alter-
natively, using EPA Method 101A of Appen-
6 to calculate the air-to-fuel ratio on a dry
dix B, 40 CFR Part 61. Method 101-A meas-
mass basis.
ures only Hg but it can be of special interest
(N T × M d ) − 510
to sources which need to measure both Hg
and Mn emissions.
A/F = Eq. 28A-6
1,000 2.0 Summary of Method
12.8 Burn Rate. Calculate the fuel burn 2.1 Principle. A stack sample is with-
rate as in Method 28, Section 12.4. drawn isokinetically from the source, partic-
ulate emissions are collected in the probe
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] and on a heated filter, and gaseous emissions
are then collected in an aqueous acidic solu-
tion of hydrogen peroxide (analyzed for all
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved] metals including Hg) and an aqueous acidic
solution of potassium permanganate (ana-
16.0 References lyzed only for Hg). The recovered samples
are digested, and appropriate fractions are
Same as Section 16.0 of Method 3 and Sec- analyzed for Hg by cold vapor atomic absorp-
tion 17 of Method 5G. tion spectroscopy (CVAAS) and for Sb, As,
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Ba, Be, Cd, Cr, Co, Cu, Pb, Mn, Ni, P, Se, Ag,
Validation Data [Reserved] Tl, and Zn by inductively coupled argon plas-
ma emission spectroscopy (ICAP) or atomic
METHOD 29—DETERMINATION OF METALS absorption spectroscopy (AAS). Graphite fur-
EMISSIONS FROM STATIONARY SOURCES nace atomic absorption spectroscopy
(GFAAS) is used for analysis of Sb, As, Cd,
NOTE: This method does not include all of Co, Pb, Se, and Tl if these elements require
the specifications (e.g., equipment and sup- greater analytical sensitivity than can be
plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and ana- obtained by ICAP. If one so chooses, AAS
lytical) essential to its performance. Some may be used for analysis of all listed metals
material is incorporated by reference from if the resulting in-stack method detection
other methods in this part. Therefore, to ob- limits meet the goal of the testing program.
tain reliable results, persons using this Similarly, inductively coupled plasma-mass
method should have a thorough knowledge of spectroscopy (ICP-MS) may be used for anal-
at least the following additional test meth- ysis of Sb, As, Ba, Be, Cd, Cr, Co, Cu, Pb, Mn,
ods: Method 5 and Method 12. Ni, Ag, Tl and Zn.
1.0 Scope and Application 3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
1.1 Analytes. 4.0 Interferences
Analyte CAS No. 4.1 Iron (Fe) can be a spectral interference
during the analysis of As, Cr, and Cd by
Antimony (Sb) ................................................ 7440–36–0 ICAP. Aluminum (Al) can be a spectral inter-
Arsenic (As) ................................................... 7440–38–2
ference during the analysis of As and Pb by
Barium (Ba) ................................................... 7440–39–3
Beryllium (Be) ................................................ 7440–41–7
ICAP. Generally, these interferences can be
Cadmium (Cd) ............................................... 7440–43–9 reduced by diluting the analytical sample,
Chromium (Cr) ............................................... 7440–47–3 but such dilution raises the in-stack detec-
Cobalt (Co) .................................................... 7440–48–4 tion limits. Background and overlap correc-
Copper (Cu) ................................................... 7440–50–8 tions may be used to adjust for spectral
Lead (Pb) ....................................................... 7439–92–1 interferences. Refer to Method 6010 of Ref-
Manganese (Mn) ........................................... 7439–96–5 erence 2 in Section 16.0 or the other analyt-
Mercury (Hg) .................................................. 7439–97–6
ical methods used for details on potential

Nickel (Ni) ...................................................... 7440–02–0
interferences to this method. For all GFAAS
ER17OC00.438</MATH>
Phosphorus (P) .............................................. 7723–14–0

Selenium (Se) ................................................ 7782–49–2 analyses, use matrix modifiers to limit
Silver (Ag) ...................................................... 7440–22–4 interferences, and matrix match all stand-
Thallium (Tl) ................................................... 7440–28–0 ards.
585
ER17OC00.437</MATH>
5.0 Safety storage bottle. Therefore these bottles shall
not be fully filled and shall be vented to re-
lieve excess pressure and prevent explosion
potentials. Venting is required, but not in a
manner that will allow contamination of the
solution. A No. 70–72 hole drilled in the con-
use. It is the responsibility of the user of this tainer cap and Teflon liner has been used.
and health practices and to determine the 6.0 Equipment and Supplies
applicability of regulatory limitations prior
to performing this test method. 6.1 Sampling. A schematic of the sam-
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following re- pling train is shown in Figure 29–1. It has
agents are hazardous. Personal protective general similarities to the Method 5 train.
equipment and safe procedures are useful in 6.1.1 Probe Nozzle (Probe Tip) and
preventing chemical splashes. If contact oc- Borosilicate or Quartz Glass Probe Liner.
curs, immediately flush with copious Same as Method 5, Sections 6.1.1.1 and 6.1.1.2,
except that glass nozzles are required unless
amounts of water at least 15 minutes. Re-
alternate tips are constructed of materials
that are free from contamination and will
nate. Treat residual chemical burn as ther-
not interfere with the sample. If a probe tip
mal burn.
other than glass is used, no correction to the
5.2.1 Nitric Acid (HNO3). Highly corrosive
sample test results to compensate for the
to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs. Vapors cause
nozzle’s effect on the sample is allowed.
bronchitis, pneumonia, or edema of lungs.
Probe fittings of plastic such as Teflon, poly-
Reaction to inhalation may be delayed as
propylene, etc. are recommended instead of
long as 30 hours and still be fatal. Provide
metal fittings to prevent contamination. If
ventilation to limit exposure. Strong oxi-
one chooses to do so, a single glass piece con-
dizer. Hazardous reaction may occur with or-
sisting of a combined probe tip and probe
ganic materials such as solvents. liner may be used.
5.2.2 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly de- 6.1.2 Pitot Tube and Differential Pressure
structive to body tissue. Will cause third de- Gauge. Same as Method 2, Sections 6.1 and
gree burns. Eye damage may result in blind- 6.2, respectively.
ness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of 6.1.3 Filter Holder. Glass, same as Method
the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May 5, Section 6.1.1.5, except use a Teflon filter
cause lung tissue damage with edema. 1 mg/ support or other non-metallic, non-contami-
m3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in nating support in place of the glass frit.
higher concentrations, death. Provide ven- 6.1.4 Filter Heating System. Same as
tilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently Method 5, Section 6.1.1.6.
with metals and organics. 6.1.5 Condenser. Use the following system
5.2.3 Hydrochloric Acid (HC1). Highly cor- for condensing and collecting gaseous metals
rosive liquid with toxic vapors. Vapors are and determining the moisture content of the
highly irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and stack gas. The condensing system shall con-
lungs, causing severe damage. May cause sist of four to seven impingers connected in
bronchitis, pneumonia, or edema of lungs. series with leak-free ground glass fittings or
Exposure to concentrations of 0.13 to 0.2 per- other leak-free, non-contaminating fittings.
cent can be lethal to humans in a few min- Use the first impinger as a moisture trap.
utes. Provide ventilation to limit exposure. The second impinger (which is the first
Reacts with metals, producing hydrogen gas. HNO3/H2O2 impinger) shall be identical to the
5.2.4 Hydrofluoric Acid (HF). Highly cor- first impinger in Method 5. The third im-
rosive to eyes, skin, nose, throat, and lungs. pinger (which is the second HNO3/H2O2 im-
Reaction to exposure may be delayed by 24 pinger) shall be a Greenburg Smith impinger
hours or more. Provide ventilation to limit with the standard tip as described for the
exposure. second impinger in Method 5, Section 6.1.1.8.
5.2.5 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating The fourth (empty) impinger and the fifth
to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs. 30% H2O2 is a and sixth (both acidified KMnO4) impingers
strong oxidizing agent. Avoid contact with are the same as the first impinger in Method
skin, eyes, and combustible material. Wear 5. Place a temperature sensor capable of
gloves when handling. measuring to within 1 °C (2 °F) at the outlet
5.2.6 Potassium Permanganate (KMnO4). of the last impinger. If no Hg analysis is
Caustic, strong oxidizer. Avoid bodily con- planned, then the fourth, fifth, and sixth
tact with. impingers are not used.
5.2.7 Potassium Persulfate. Strong oxi- 6.1.6 Metering System, Barometer, and
dizer. Avoid bodily contact with. Keep con- Gas Density Determination Equipment.
tainers well closed and in a cool place. Same as Method 5, Sections 6.1.1.9, 6.1.2, and
5.3 Reaction Pressure. Due to the poten- 6.1.3, respectively.
tial reaction of the potassium permanganate 6.1.7 Teflon Tape. For capping openings
with the acid, there could be pressure build- and sealing connections, if necessary, on the
up in the acidic KMnO4 absorbing solution sampling train.
586
6.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, paratus, and a heat lamp or desiccator tube.
Sections 6.2.1 through 6.2.8 (Probe-Liner and The heat lamp shall be capable of raising the
Probe-Nozzle Brushes or Swabs, Wash Bot- temperature at the quartz cell by 10 °C above
tles, Sample Storage Containers, Petri ambient, so that no condensation forms on
Dishes, Glass Graduated Cylinder, Plastic the wall of the quartz cell. Same as Method
Storage Containers, Funnel and Rubber Po- 7470 in Reference 2 in Section 16.0. See NOTE
liceman, and Glass Funnel), respectively, 2: Section 11.1.3 for other acceptable ap-
with the following exceptions and additions: proaches for analysis of Hg in which analyt-
6.2.1 Non-metallic Probe-Liner and Probe- ical detection limits of 0.002 ng/ml were ob-
Nozzle Brushes or Swabs. Use non-metallic tained.
probe-liner and probe-nozzle brushes or 6.3.13 Inductively Coupled Argon Plasma
swabs for quantitative recovery of materials Spectrometer. With either a direct or se-
collected in the front-half of the sampling quential reader and an alumina torch. Same
train. as EPA Method 6010 in Reference 2 in Section
6.2.2 Sample Storage Containers. Use 16.0.
glass bottles (see Section 8.1 of this Method) 6.3.14 Inductively Coupled Plasma-Mass
with Teflon-lined caps that are non-reactive Spectrometer.
to the oxidizing solutions, with capacities of Same as EPA Method 6020 in Reference 2 in
1000- and 500-ml, for storage of acidified Section 16.0.
KMnO4—containing samples and blanks.
Glass or polyethylene bottles may be used 7.0 Reagents and Standards
for other sample types. 7.1 Unless otherwise indicated, it is in-
6.2.3 Graduated Cylinder. Glass or equiva- tended that all reagents conform to the spec-
lent. ifications established by the Committee on
6.2.4 Funnel. Glass or equivalent. Analytical Reagents of the American Chem-
6.2.5 Labels. For identifying samples. ical Society, where such specifications are
6.2.6 Polypropylene Tweezers and/or Plas- available. Otherwise, use the best available
tic Gloves. For recovery of the filter from grade.
the sampling train filter holder. 7.2 Sampling Reagents.
6.3 Sample Preparation and Analysis. 7.2.1 Sample Filters. Without organic
6.3.1 Volumetric Flasks, 100-ml, 250-ml, binders. The filters shall contain less than
and 1000-ml. For preparation of standards 1.3 μg/in.2 of each of the metals to be meas-
and sample dilutions. ured. Analytical results provided by filter
6.3.2 Graduated Cylinders. For prepara- manufacturers stating metals content of the
tion of reagents. filters are acceptable. However, if no such re-
6.3.3 Parr Bombs or Microwave Pressure sults are available, analyze filter blanks for
Relief Vessels with Capping Station (CEM each target metal prior to emission testing.
Corporation model or equivalent). For sam- Quartz fiber filters meeting these require-
ple digestion. ments are recommended. However, if glass
6.3.4 Beakers and Watch Glasses. 250-ml fiber filters become available which meet
beakers, with watch glass covers, for sample these requirements, they may be used. Filter
digestion. efficiencies and unreactiveness to sulfur di-
6.3.5 Ring Stands and Clamps. For secur- oxide (SO2) or sulfur trioxide (SO3) shall be
ing equipment such as filtration apparatus. as described in Section 7.1.1 of Method 5.
6.3.6 Filter Funnels. For holding filter 7.2.2 Water. To conform to ASTM Speci-
paper. fication D1193–77 or 91, Type II (incorporated
6.3.7 Disposable Pasteur Pipets and Bulbs. by reference—see § 60.17). If necessary, ana-
6.3.8 Volumetric Pipets. lyze the water for all target metals prior to
6.3.9 Analytical Balance. Accurate to field use. All target metals should be less
within 0.1 mg. than 1 ng/ml.
6.3.10 Microwave or Conventional Oven. 7.2.3 HNO3, Concentrated. Baker Instra-
For heating samples at fixed power levels or analyzed or equivalent.
temperatures, respectively. 7.2.4 HCl, Concentrated. Baker Instra-ana-
6.3.11 Hot Plates. lyzed or equivalent.
6.3.12 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer 7.2.5 H2O2, 30 Percent (V/V).
(AAS). Equipped with a background cor- 7.2.6 KMnO4.
rector. 7.2.7 H2SO4, Concentrated.
6.3.12.1 Graphite Furnace Attachment. 7.2.8 Silica Gel and Crushed Ice. Same as
With Sb, As, Cd, Co, Pb, Se, and Tl hollow Method 5, Sections 7.1.2 and 7.1.4, respec-
cathode lamps (HCLs) or electrodeless dis- tively.
charge lamps (EDLs). Same as Reference 2 in 7.3 Pretest Preparation of Sampling Re-
Section 16.0. Methods 7041 (Sb), 7060 (As), 7131 agents.
(Cd), 7201 (Co), 7421 (Pb), 7740 (Se), and 7841 7.3.1 HNO3/H2O2 Absorbing Solution, 5 Per-
(Tl). cent HNO3/10 Percent H2O2. Add carefully
6.3.12.2 Cold Vapor Mercury Attachment. with stirring 50 ml of concentrated HNO3 to
With a mercury HCL or EDL, an air recir- a 1000-ml volumetric flask containing ap-
culation pump, a quartz cell, an aerator approximately 500 ml of water, and then add
587
carefully with stirring 333 ml of 30 percent 7.5.6 Water. To conform to ASTM Speci-
H2O2. Dilute to volume with water. Mix well. fications D1193, Type II.
This reagent shall contain less than 2 ng/ml 7.5.7 Hydroxylamine Hydrochloride and
of each target metal. Sodium Chloride Solution. See Reference 2
7.3.2 Acidic KMnO4 Absorbing Solution, 4 In Section 16.0 for preparation.
Percent KMnO4 (W/V), 10 Percent H2SO4 (V/ 7.5.8 Stannous Chloride. See Reference 2
V). Prepare fresh daily. Mix carefully, with in Section 16.0 for preparation.
stirring, 100 ml of concentrated H2SO4 into 7.5.9 KMnO4, 5 Percent (W/V). See Ref-
approximately 800 ml of water, and add erence 2 in Section 16.0 for preparation.
water with stirring to make a volume of 1 7.5.10 H2SO4, Concentrated.
liter: this solution is 10 percent H2SO4 (V/V). 7.5.11 Potassium Persulfate, 5 Percent (W/
Dissolve, with stirring, 40 g of KMnO4 into 10 V). See Reference 2 in Section 16.0 for prepa-
percent H2SO4 (V/V) and add 10 percent H2SO4 ration.
(V/V) with stirring to make a volume of 1 7.5.12 Nickel Nitrate, Ni(N03) 2 6H20.
liter. Prepare and store in glass bottles to 7.5.13 Lanthanum Oxide, La203.
prevent degradation. This reagent shall con- 7.5.14 Hg Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
tain less than 2 ng/ml of Hg. ml.
Precaution: To prevent autocatalytic de- 7.5.15 Pb Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
composition of the permanganate solution, ml.
filter the solution through Whatman 541 fil- 7.5.16 As Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
ter paper. ml.
7.3.3 HNO3, 0.1 N. Add with stirring 6.3 ml 7.5.17 Cd Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
of concentrated HNO3 (70 percent) to a flask ml.
containing approximately 900 ml of water. 7.5.18 Cr Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
Dilute to 1000 ml with water. Mix well. This ml.
reagent shall contain less than 2 ng/ml of 7.5.19 Sb Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
each target metal. ml.
7.5.20 Ba Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
7.3.4 HCl, 8 N. Carefully add with stirring
ml.
690 ml of concentrated HCl to a flask con-
7.5.21 Be Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
taining 250 ml of water. Dilute to 1000 ml
ml.
with water. Mix well. This reagent shall con-
7.5.22 Co Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
tain less than 2 ng/ml of Hg.
ml.
7.4 Glassware Cleaning Reagents. 7.5.23 Cu Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
7.4.1 HNO3, Concentrated. Fisher ACS ml.
grade or equivalent. 7.5.24 Mn Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
7.4.2 Water. To conform to ASTM Speci- ml.
fications D1193, Type II. 7.5.25 Ni Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
7.4.3 HNO3, 10 Percent (V/V). Add with ml.
stirring 500 ml of concentrated HNO3 to a 7.5.26 P Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/ml.
flask containing approximately 4000 ml of 7.5.27 Se Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
water. Dilute to 5000 ml with water. Mix ml.
well. This reagent shall contain less than 2 7.5.28 Ag Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
ng/ml of each target metal. ml.
7.5 Sample Digestion and Analysis Re- 7.5.29 Tl Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
agents. The metals standards, except Hg, ml.
may also be made from solid chemicals as 7.5.30 Zn Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
described in Reference 3 in Section 16.0. ml.
Refer to References 1, 2, or 5 in Section 16.0 7.5.31 Al Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
for additional information on Hg standards. ml.
The 1000 μg/ml Hg stock solution standard 7.5.32 Fe Standard (AAS Grade), 1000 μg/
may be made according to Section 7.2.7 of ml.
Method 101A. 7.5.33 Hg Standards and Quality Control
7.5.1 HCl, Concentrated. Samples. Prepare fresh weekly a 10 μg/ml in-
7.5.2 HF, Concentrated. termediate Hg standard by adding 5 ml of
7.5.3 HNO3, Concentrated. Baker Instra- 1000 μg/ml Hg stock solution prepared ac-
analyzed or equivalent. cording to Method 101A to a 500-ml volu-
7.5.4 HNO3, 50 Percent (V/V). Add with metric flask; dilute with stirring to 500 ml
stirring 125 ml of concentrated HNO3 to 100 by first carefully adding 20 ml of 15 percent
ml of water. Dilute to 250 ml with water. Mix HNO3 and then adding water to the 500-ml
well. This reagent shall contain less than 2 volume. Mix well. Prepare a 200 ng/ml work-
ng/ml of each target metal. ing Hg standard solution fresh daily: add 5
7.5.5 HNO3, 5 Percent (V/V). Add with stir- ml of the 10 μg/ml intermediate standard to
ring 50 ml of concentrated HNO3 to 800 ml of a 250-ml volumetric flask, and dilute to 250
water. Dilute to 1000 ml with water. Mix ml with 5 ml of 4 percent KMnO4, 5 ml of 15
well. This reagent shall contain less than 2 percent HNO3, and then water. Mix well. Use
ng/ml of each target metal. at least five separate aliquots of the working
588
Hg standard solution and a blank to prepare of water in a 100-ml volumetric flask. Dilute
the standard curve. These aliquots and blank to 100 ml with water.
shall contain 0.0, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, and 5.0 ml 7.5.36.2 Nickel Nitrate, 0.1 Percent (V/V).
of the working standard solution containing Dilute 10 ml of 1 percent nickel nitrate solu-
0, 200, 400, 600, 800, and 1000 ng Hg, respec- tion to 100 ml with water. Inject an equal
tively. Prepare quality control samples by amount of sample and this modifier into the
making a separate 10 μg/ml standard and di- graphite furnace during GFAAS analysis for
luting until in the calibration range. As.
7.5.34 ICAP Standards and Quality Con- 7.5.36.3 Lanthanum. Carefully dissolve
trol Samples. Calibration standards for ICAP 0.5864 g of La203 in 10 ml of concentrated
analysis can be combined into four different HN03, and dilute the solution by adding it
mixed standard solutions as follows: with stirring to approximately 50 ml of
water. Dilute to 100 ml with water, and mix
MIXED STANDARD SOLUTIONS FOR ICAP well. Inject an equal amount of sample and
ANALYSIS this modifier into the graphite furnace dur-
ing GFAAS analysis for Pb.
Solution Elements 7.5.37 Whatman 40 and 541 Filter Papers
(or equivalent). For filtration of digested
I ................... As, Be, Cd, Mn, Pb, Se, Zn.
II .................. Ba, Co, Cu, Fe.
samples.
III ................. Al, Cr, Ni.
IV ................. Ag, P, Sb, Tl.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport,
and Storage
Prepare these standards by combining and 8.1 Sampling. The complexity of this
diluting the appropriate volumes of the 1000 method is such that, to obtain reliable re-
μg/ml solutions with 5 percent HNO3. A min- sults, both testers and analysts must be
imum of one standard and a blank can be trained and experienced with the test proce-
used to form each calibration curve. How- dures, including source sampling; reagent
ever, prepare a separate quality control sam- preparation and handling; sample handling;
ple spiked with known amounts of the target safety equipment and procedures; analytical
metals in quantities in the mid-range of the calculations; reporting; and the specific pro-
calibration curve. Suggested standard levels cedural descriptions throughout this meth-
are 25 μg/ml for Al, Cr and Pb, 15 μg/ml for od.
Fe, and 10 μg/ml for the remaining elements. 8.1.1 Pretest Preparation. Follow the
Prepare any standards containing less than 1 same general procedure given in Method 5,
μg/ml of metal on a daily basis. Standards Section 8.1, except that, unless particulate
containing greater than 1 μg/ml of metal emissions are to be determined, the filter
should be stable for a minimum of 1 to 2 need not be desiccated or weighed. First,
weeks. For ICP-MS, follow Method 6020 in rinse all sampling train glassware with hot
EPA Publication SW–846 Third Edition (No- tap water and then wash in hot soapy water.
vember 1986) including updates I, II, IIA, IIB Next, rinse glassware three times with tap
and III, as incorporated by reference in water, followed by three additional rinses
§ 60.17(i). with water. Then soak all glassware in a 10
7.5.35 GFAAS Standards. Sb, As, Cd, Co, percent (V/V) nitric acid solution for a min-
Pb, Se, and Tl. Prepare a 10 μg/ml standard imum of 4 hours, rinse three times with
by adding 1 ml of 1000 μg/ml standard to a water, rinse a final time with acetone, and
100-ml volumetric flask. Dilute with stirring allow to air dry. Cover all glassware open-
to 100 ml with 10 percent HNO3. For GFAAS, ings where contamination can occur until
matrix match the standards. Prepare a 100 the sampling train is assembled for sam-
ng/ml standard by adding 1 ml of the 10 μg/ml pling.
standard to a 100-ml volumetric flask, and 8.1.2 Preliminary Determinations. Same
dilute to 100 ml with the appropriate matrix as Method 5, Section 8.1.2.
solution. Prepare other standards by diluting 8.1.3 Preparation of Sampling Train.
the 100 ng/ml standards. Use at least five 8.1.3.1 Set up the sampling train as shown
standards to make up the standard curve. in Figure 29–1. Follow the same general pro-
Suggested levels are 0, 10, 50, 75, and 100 ng/ cedures given in Method 5, Section 8.3, ex-
ml. Prepare quality control samples by mak- cept place 100 ml of the HNO3/H2O2 solution
ing a separate 10 μg/ml standard and diluting (Section 7.3.1 of this method) in each of the
until it is in the range of the samples. Pre- second and third impingers as shown in Fig-
pare any standards containing less than 1 μg/ ure 29–1. Place 100 ml of the acidic KMnO4
ml of metal on a daily basis. Standards con- absorbing solution (Section 7.3.2 of this
taining greater than 1 μg/ml of metal should method) in each of the fifth and sixth
be stable for a minimum of 1 to 2 weeks. impingers as shown in Figure 29–1, and trans-
7.5.36 Matrix Modifiers. fer approximately 200 to 300 g of pre-weighed

7.5.36.1 Nickel Nitrate, 1 Percent (V/V). silica gel from its container to the last im-
Dissolve 4.956 g of Ni(N03)2·6H20 or other pinger. Alternatively, the silica gel may be
nickel compound suitable for preparation of weighed directly in the impinger just prior
this matrix modifier in approximately 50 ml to final train assembly.
589
8.1.3.2 Based on the specific source sam- filter holder outlet/impinger inlet and loose-
pling conditions, the use of an empty first ly cap the open ends. Then disconnect the
impinger can be eliminated if the moisture probe from the filter holder or cyclone inlet
to be collected in the impingers will be less and loosely cap the open ends. Cap the probe
than approximately 100 ml. tip and remove the umbilical cord as pre-
8.1.3.3 If Hg analysis will not be per- viously described.
formed, the fourth, fifth, and sixth impingers 8.2.4 Transfer the probe and filter-im-
as shown in Figure 29–1 are not required. pinger assembly to a cleanup area that is
8.1.3.4 To insure leak-free sampling train clean and protected from the wind and other
connections and to prevent possible sample potential causes of contamination or loss of
contamination problems, use Teflon tape or sample. Inspect the train before and during
other non-contaminating material instead of disassembly and note any abnormal condi-
silicone grease. tions. Take special precautions to assure
Precaution: Exercise extreme care to pre- that all the items necessary for recovery do
vent contamination within the train. Pre- not contaminate the samples. The sample is
vent the acidic KMnO4 from contacting any recovered and treated as follows (see sche-
glassware that contains sample material to matic in Figures 29–2a and 29–2b):
be analyzed for Mn. Prevent acidic H2O2 from 8.2.5 Container No. 1 (Sample Filter).
mixing with the acidic KMnO4. Carefully remove the filter from the filter
8.1.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Follow the holder and place it in its labeled petri dish
leak-check procedures given in Method 5, container. To handle the filter, use either
Section 8.4.2 (Pretest Leak-Check), Section acid-washed polypropylene or Teflon coated
8.4.3 (Leak-Checks During the Sample Run), tweezers or clean, disposable surgical gloves
and Section 8.4.4 (Post-Test Leak-Checks). rinsed with water and dried. If it is necessary
8.1.5 Sampling Train Operation. Follow to fold the filter, make certain the particu-
the procedures given in Method 5, Section late cake is inside the fold. Carefully trans-
8.5. When sampling for Hg, use a procedure fer the filter and any particulate matter or
analogous to that described in Section 8.1 of filter fibers that adhere to the filter holder
Method 101A, 40 CFR Part 61, Appendix B, if gasket to the petri dish by using a dry (acid-
necessary to maintain the desired color in cleaned) nylon bristle brush. Do not use any
the last acidified permanganate impinger. metal-containing materials when recovering
For each run, record the data required on a this train. Seal the labeled petri dish.
data sheet such as the one shown in Figure 8.2.6 Container No. 2 (Acetone Rinse). Per-
5–3 of Method 5. form this procedure only if a determination
8.1.6 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. of particulate emissions is to be made. Quan-
Same as Method 5, Section 12.11. titatively recover particulate matter and
8.2 Sample Recovery. any condensate from the probe nozzle, probe
8.2.1 Begin cleanup procedures as soon as fitting, probe liner, and front half of the fil-
the probe is removed from the stack at the ter holder by washing these components with
end of a sampling period. The probe should a total of 100 ml of acetone, while simulta-
be allowed to cool prior to sample recovery. neously taking great care to see that no dust
When it can be safely handled, wipe off all on the outside of the probe or other surfaces
external particulate matter near the tip of gets in the sample. The use of exactly 100 ml
the probe nozzle and place a rinsed, non-con- is necessary for the subsequent blank correc-
taminating cap over the probe nozzle to pre- tion procedures. Distilled water may be used
vent losing or gaining particulate matter. Do instead of acetone when approved by the Ad-
not cap the probe tip tightly while the sam- ministrator and shall be used when specified
pling train is cooling; a vacuum can form in by the Administrator; in these cases, save a
the filter holder with the undesired result of water blank and follow the Administrator’s
drawing liquid from the impingers onto the directions on analysis.
filter. 8.2.6.1 Carefully remove the probe nozzle,
8.2.2 Before moving the sampling train to and clean the inside surface by rinsing with
the cleanup site, remove the probe from the acetone from a wash bottle while brushing
sampling train and cap the open outlet. Be with a non-metallic brush. Brush until the
careful not to lose any condensate that acetone rinse shows no visible particles, then
might be present. Cap the filter inlet where make a final rinse of the inside surface with
the probe was fastened. Remove the umbil- acetone.
ical cord from the last impinger and cap the 8.2.6.2 Brush and rinse the sample exposed
impinger. Cap the filter holder outlet and inside parts of the probe fitting with acetone
impinger inlet. Use non-contaminating caps, in a similar way until no visible particles re-
whether ground-glass stoppers, plastic caps, main. Rinse the probe liner with acetone by
serum caps, or Teflon ® tape to close these tilting and rotating the probe while squirt-
openings. ing acetone into its upper end so that all in-
8.2.3 Alternatively, the following proce- side surfaces will be wetted with acetone.
dure may be used to disassemble the train Allow the acetone to drain from the lower
before the probe and filter holder/oven are end into the sample container. A funnel may
completely cooled: Initially disconnect the be used to aid in transferring liquid washings
590
to the container. Follow the acetone rinse content of the sampled flue gas. Clean each
with a non-metallic probe brush. Hold the of the first three impingers, the filter sup-
probe in an inclined position, squirt acetone port, the back half of the filter housing, and
into the upper end as the probe brush is connecting glassware by thoroughly rinsing
being pushed with a twisting action three with 100 ml of 0.1 N HNO3 using the proce-
times through the probe. Hold a sample con- dure as applicable in Method 12, Section
tainer underneath the lower end of the 8.7.3.
probe, and catch any acetone and particulate NOTE: The use of exactly 100 ml of 0.1 N
matter which is brushed through the probe HNO3 rinse is necessary for the subsequent
until no visible particulate matter is carried blank correction procedures. Combine the
out with the acetone or until none remains rinses and impinger solutions, measure and
in the probe liner on visual inspection. Rinse record the final total volume. Mark the
the brush with acetone, and quantitatively height of the fluid level, seal the container,
collect these washings in the sample con- and clearly label the contents.
tainer. After the brushing, make a final ace- 8.2.9 Container Nos. 5A (0.1 N HNO3), 5B
tone rinse of the probe as described above. (KMnO4/H2SO4 absorbing solution), and 5C (8
8.2.6.3 It is recommended that two people N HCl rinse and dilution).
clean the probe to minimize sample losses. 8.2.9.1 When sampling for Hg, pour all the
Between sampling runs, keep brushes clean liquid from the impinger (normally impinger
and protected from contamination. Clean the No. 4) that immediately preceded the two
inside of the front-half of the filter holder by permanganate impingers into a graduated
rubbing the surfaces with a non-metallic cylinder and measure the volume to within
brush and rinsing with acetone. Rinse each 0.5 ml. This information is required to cal-
surface three times or more if needed to re- culate the moisture content of the sampled
move visible particulate. Make a final rinse flue gas. Place the liquid in Container No.
of the brush and filter holder. After all ace- 5A. Rinse the impinger with exactly 100 ml of
tone washings and particulate matter have 0.1 N HNO3 and place this rinse in Container
been collected in the sample container, No. 5A.
tighten the lid so that acetone will not leak 8.2.9.2 Pour all the liquid from the two
out when shipped to the laboratory. Mark permanganate impingers into a graduated
the height of the fluid level to determine cylinder and measure the volume to within
whether or not leakage occurred during 0.5 ml. This information is required to cal-
transport. Clearly label the container to culate the moisture content of the sampled
identify its contents. flue gas. Place this acidic KMnO4 solution
8.2.7 Container No. 3 (Probe Rinse). Keep into Container No. 5B. Using a total of ex-
the probe assembly clean and free from con- actly 100 ml of fresh acidified KMnO4 solu-
tamination during the probe rinse. Rinse the tion for all rinses (approximately 33 ml per
probe nozzle and fitting, probe liner, and rinse), rinse the two permanganate
front-half of the filter holder thoroughly impingers and connecting glassware a min-
with a total of 100 ml of 0.1 N HNO3, and imum of three times. Pour the rinses into
place the wash into a sample storage con- Container No. 5B, carefully assuring transfer
tainer. Perform the rinses as applicable and of all loose precipitated materials from the
generally as described in Method 12, Section two impingers. Similarly, using 100 ml total
8.7.1. Record the volume of the rinses. Mark of water, rinse the permanganate impingers
the height of the fluid level on the outside of and connecting glass a minimum of three
the storage container and use this mark to times, and pour the rinses into Container 5B,
determine if leakage occurs during trans- carefully assuring transfer of any loose pre-
port. Seal the container, and clearly label cipitated material. Mark the height of the
the contents. Finally, rinse the nozzle, probe fluid level, and clearly label the contents.
liner, and front-half of the filter holder with Read the Precaution: in Section 7.3.2.
water followed by acetone, and discard these NOTE: Due to the potential reaction of
rinses. KMnO4 with acid, pressure buildup can occur
NOTE: The use of a total of exactly 100 ml in the sample storage bottles. Do not fill
is necessary for the subsequent blank correc- these bottles completely and take pre-
tion procedures. cautions to relieve excess pressure. A No. 70–
8.2.8 Container No. 4 (Impingers 1 through 72 hole drilled in the container cap and Tef-
3, Moisture Knockout Impinger, when used, lon liner has been used successfully.
HNO3/H2O2 Impingers Contents and Rinses). 8.2.9.3 If no visible deposits remain after
Due to the potentially large quantity of liq- the water rinse, no further rinse is nec-
uid involved, the tester may place the im- essary. However, if deposits remain on the
pinger solutions from impingers 1 through 3 impinger surfaces, wash them with 25 ml of
in more than one container, if necessary. 8 N HCl, and place the wash in a separate
Measure the liquid in the first three sample container labeled No. 5C containing
impingers to within 0.5 ml using a graduated 200 ml of water. First, place 200 ml of water
cylinder. Record the volume. This informa- in the container. Then wash the impinger
tion is required to calculate the moisture walls and stem with the HCl by turning the
591
impinger on its side and rotating it so that into a petri dish labeled No. 12 three unused
the HCl contacts all inside surfaces. Use a blank filters from the same lot as the sam-
total of only 25 ml of 8 N HCl for rinsing both pling filters. Seal the petri dish.
permanganate impingers combined. Rinse the 8.3 Sample Preparation. Note the level of
first impinger, then pour the actual rinse the liquid in each of the containers and de-
used for the first impinger into the second termine if any sample was lost during ship-
impinger for its rinse. Finally, pour the 25 ment. If a noticeable amount of leakage has
ml of 8 N HCl rinse carefully into the con- occurred, either void the sample or use
tainer. Mark the height of the fluid level on methods, subject to the approval of the Ad-
the outside of the container to determine if ministrator, to correct the final results. A
leakage occurs during transport. diagram illustrating sample preparation and
8.2.10 Container No. 6 (Silica Gel). Note analysis procedures for each of the sample
the color of the indicating silica gel to deter- train components is shown in Figure 29–3.
mine whether it has been completely spent 8.3.1 Container No. 1 (Sample Filter).
and make a notation of its condition. Trans- 8.3.1.1 If particulate emissions are being
fer the silica gel from its impinger to its determined, first desiccate the filter and fil-
original container and seal it. The tester ter catch without added heat (do not heat
may use a funnel to pour the silica gel and the filters to speed the drying) and weigh to
a rubber policeman to remove the silica gel a constant weight as described in Section
from the impinger. The small amount of par- 11.2.1 of Method 5.
ticles that might adhere to the impinger 8.3.1.2 Following this procedure, or ini-
wall need not be removed. Do not use water tially, if particulate emissions are not being
or other liquids to transfer the silica gel determined in addition to metals analysis,
since weight gained in the silica gel im- divide the filter with its filter catch into
pinger is used for moisture calculations. Al- portions containing approximately 0.5 g
ternatively, if a balance is available in the each. Place the pieces in the analyst’s choice
field, record the weight of the spent silica gel of either individual microwave pressure re-
(or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 lief vessels or Parr Bombs. Add 6 ml of con-
g. centrated HNO3 and 4 ml of concentrated HF
8.2.11 Container No. 7 (Acetone Blank). If to each vessel. For microwave heating,
particulate emissions are to be determined, microwave the samples for approximately 12
at least once during each field test, place a to 15 minutes total heating time as follows:
100-ml portion of the acetone used in the heat for 2 to 3 minutes, then turn off the
sample recovery process into a container la- microwave for 2 to 3 minutes, then heat for
beled No. 7. Seal the container. 2 to 3 minutes, etc., continue this alter-
8.2.12 Container No. 8A (0.1 N HNO3 nation until the 12 to 15 minutes total heat-
Blank). At least once during each field test, ing time are completed (this procedure
place 300 ml of the 0.1 N HNO3 solution used should comprise approximately 24 to 30 min-
in the sample recovery process into a con- utes at 600 watts). Microwave heating times
tainer labeled No. 8A. Seal the container. are approximate and are dependent upon the
8.2.13 Container No. 8B (Water Blank). At number of samples being digested simulta-
least once during each field test, place 100 ml neously. Sufficient heating is evidenced by
of the water used in the sample recovery sorbent reflux within the vessel. For conven-
process into a container labeled No. 8B. Seal tional heating, heat the Parr Bombs at 140 °C
the container. (285 °F) for 6 hours. Then cool the samples to
8.2.14 Container No. 9 (5 Percent HNO3/10 room temperature, and combine with the
Percent H2O2 Blank). At least once during acid digested probe rinse as required in Sec-
each field test, place 200 ml of the 5 Percent tion 8.3.3.
HNO3/10 Percent H2O2 solution used as the ni- 8.3.1.3 If the sampling train includes an
tric acid impinger reagent into a container optional glass cyclone in front of the filter,
labeled No. 9. Seal the container. prepare and digest the cyclone catch by the
8.2.15 Container No. 10 (Acidified KMnO4 procedures described in Section 8.3.1.2 and
Blank). At least once during each field test, then combine the digestate with the digested
place 100 ml of the acidified KMnO4 solution filter sample.
used as the impinger solution and in the 8.3.2 Container No. 2 (Acetone Rinse).
sample recovery process into a container la- Note the level of liquid in the container and
beled No. 10. Prepare the container as de- confirm on the analysis sheet whether or not
scribed in Section 8.2.9.2. Read the Pre- leakage occurred during transport. If a no-
caution: in Section 7.3.2 and read the NOTE ticeable amount of leakage has occurred, ei-
in Section 8.2.9.2. ther void the sample or use methods, subject
8.2.16 Container No. 11 (8 N HCl Blank). At to the approval of the Administrator, to cor-
least once during each field test, place 200 ml rect the final results. Measure the liquid in
of water into a sample container labeled No. this container either volumetrically within 1
11. Then carefully add with stirring 25 ml of ml or gravimetrically within 0.5 g. Transfer
8 N HCl. Mix well and seal the container. the contents to an acid-cleaned, tared 250-ml
8.2.17 Container No. 12 (Sample Filter beaker and evaporate to dryness at ambient
Blank). Once during each field test, place temperature and pressure. If particulate
592
emissions are being determined, desiccate just below boiling. Then follow either of the
for 24 hours without added heat, weigh to a digestion procedures described in Sections
constant weight according to the procedures 8.3.4.1 or 8.3.4.2.
described in Section 11.2.1 of Method 5, and 8.3.4.1 Conventional Digestion Procedure.
report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg. Re- Add 30 ml of 50 percent HNO3, and heat for 30
dissolve the residue with 10 ml of con- minutes on a hot plate to just below boiling.
centrated HNO3. Quantitatively combine the Add 10 ml of 3 percent H2O2 and heat for 10
resultant sample, including all liquid and more minutes. Add 50 ml of hot water, and
any particulate matter, with Container No. 3 heat the sample for an additional 20 minutes.
before beginning Section 8.3.3. Cool, filter the sample, and dilute to 150 ml
8.3.3 Container No. 3 (Probe Rinse). Verify (or the appropriate volume for the expected
that the pH of this sample is 2 or lower. If it metals concentrations) with water. This di-
is not, acidify the sample by careful addition lution produces Analytical Fraction 2A.
with stirring of concentrated HNO3 to pH 2. Measure and record the volume to within 0.1
Use water to rinse the sample into a beaker, ml.
and cover the beaker with a ribbed watch 8.3.4.2 Microwave Digestion Procedure.
glass. Reduce the sample volume to approxi- Add 10 ml of 50 percent HNO3 and heat for 6
mately 20 ml by heating on a hot plate at a minutes total heating time in alternations of
temperature just below boiling. Digest the 1 to 2 minutes at 600 Watts followed by 1 to
sample in microwave vessels or Parr Bombs 2 minutes with no power, etc., similar to the
by quantitatively transferring the sample to procedure described in Section 8.3.1. Allow
the vessel or bomb, carefully adding the 6 ml the sample to cool. Add 10 ml of 3 percent
of concentrated HNO3, 4 ml of concentrated H2O2 and heat for 2 more minutes. Add 50 ml
HF, and then continuing to follow the proce- of hot water, and heat for an additional 5
dures described in Section 8.3.1.2. Then com- minutes. Cool, filter the sample, and dilute
bine the resultant sample directly with the to 150 ml (or the appropriate volume for the
acid digested portions of the filter prepared expected metals concentrations) with water.
previously in Section 8.3.1.2. The resultant This dilution produces Analytical Fraction
combined sample is referred to as ‘‘Sample 2A. Measure and record the volume to within
Fraction 1’’. Filter the combined sample 0.1 ml.
using Whatman 541 filter paper. Dilute to 300
NOTE: All microwave heating times given
ml (or the appropriate volume for the ex-
are approximate and are dependent upon the
pected metals concentration) with water.
This diluted sample is ‘‘Analytical Fraction number of samples being digested at a time.
1’’. Measure and record the volume of Ana- Heating times as given above have been
lytical Fraction 1 to within 0.1 ml. Quan- found acceptable for simultaneous digestion
titatively remove a 50-ml aliquot and label of up to 12 individual samples. Sufficient
as ‘‘Analytical Fraction 1B’’. Label the re- heating is evidenced by solvent reflux within
maining 250-ml portion as ‘‘Analytical Frac- the vessel.
tion 1A’’. Analytical Fraction 1A is used for 8.3.5 Container No. 5A (Impinger 4), Con-
ICAP or AAS analysis for all desired metals tainer Nos. 5B and 5C (Impingers 5 and 6).
except Hg. Analytical Fraction 1B is used for Keep the samples in Containers Nos. 5A, 5B,
the determination of front-half Hg. and 5C separate from each other. Measure
8.3.4 Container No. 4 (Impingers 1–3). and record the volume of 5A to within 0.5 ml.
Measure and record the total volume of this Label the contents of Container No. 5A to be
sample to within 0.5 ml and label it ‘‘Sample Analytical Fraction 3A. To remove any
Fraction 2’’. Remove a 75- to 100-ml aliquot brown MnO2 precipitate from the contents of
for Hg analysis and label the aliquot ‘‘Ana- Container No. 5B, filter its contents through
lytical Fraction 2B’’. Label the remaining por- Whatman 40 filter paper into a 500 ml volu-
tion of Container No. 4 as ‘‘Sample Fraction metric flask and dilute to volume with
2A’’. Sample Fraction 2A defines the volume water. Save the filter for digestion of the
of Analytical Fraction 2A prior to digestion. brown MnO2 precipitate. Label the 500 ml fil-
All of Sample Fraction 2A is digested to trate from Container No. 5B to be Analytical
produce ‘‘Analytical Fraction 2A’’. Analytical Fraction 3B. Analyze Analytical Fraction 3B
Fraction 2A defines the volume of Sample for Hg within 48 hours of the filtration step.
Fraction 2A after its digestion and the vol- Place the saved filter, which was used to re-
ume of Analytical Fraction 2A is normally move the brown MnO2 precipitate, into an
150 ml. Analytical Fraction 2A is analyzed appropriately sized vented container, which
for all metals except Hg. Verify that the pH will allow release of any gases including
of Sample Fraction 2A is 2 or lower. If nec- chlorine formed when the filter is digested.
essary, use concentrated HNO3 by careful ad- In a laboratory hood which will remove any
dition and stirring to lower Sample Fraction gas produced by the digestion of the MnO2,
2A to pH 2. Use water to rinse Sample Frac- add 25 ml of 8 N HCl to the filter and allow
tion 2A into a beaker and then cover the to digest for a minimum of 24 hours at room
beaker with a ribbed watchglass. Reduce temperature. Filter the contents of Con-
Sample Fraction 2A to approximately 20 ml tainer No. 5C through a Whatman 40 filter
by heating on a hot plate at a temperature into a 500-ml volumetric flask. Then filter
593
the result of the digestion of the brown MnO2 metals except for Hg, while separate anal-
from Container No. 5B through a Whatman yses of the blanks for Analytical Fractions
40 filter into the same 500-ml volumetric 2B, 3A, 3B, and 3C produce the back-half rea-
flask, and dilute and mix well to volume gent blank correction value for Hg.
with water. Discard the Whatman 40 filter. 9.2 Quality Control Samples. Analyze the
Mark this combined 500-ml dilute HCl solu- following quality control samples.
tion as Analytical Fraction 3C. 9.2.1 ICAP and ICP-MS Analysis. Follow
8.3.6 Container No. 6 (Silica Gel). Weigh the respective quality control descriptions in
the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus im- Section 8 of Methods 6010 and 6020 in EPA
pinger) to the nearest 0.5 g using a balance. Publication SW–846 Third Edition (November
1986) including updates I, II, IIA, IIB and III,
9.0 Quality Control as incorporated by reference in § 60.17(i). For
9.1 Field Reagent Blanks, if analyzed. the purposes of a source test that consists of
Perform the digestion and analysis of the three sample runs, modify those require-
blanks in Container Nos. 7 through 12 that ments to include the following: two instru-
were produced in Sections 8.2.11 through ment check standard runs, two calibration
8.2.17, respectively. For Hg field reagent blank runs, one interference check sample at
blanks, use a 10 ml aliquot for digestion and the beginning of the analysis (analyze by
analysis. Method of Standard Additions unless within
9.1.1 Digest and analyze one of the filters 25 percent), one quality control sample to
from Container No. 12 per Section 8.3.1, 100 check the accuracy of the calibration stand-
ml from Container No. 7 per Section 8.3.2, ards (required to be within 25 percent of cali-
and 100 ml from Container No. 8A per Sec- bration), and one duplicate analysis (re-
tion 8.3.3. This step produces blanks for Ana- quired to be within 20 percent of average or
lytical Fractions 1A and 1B. repeat all analyses).
9.1.2 Combine 100 ml of Container No. 8A 9.2.2 Direct Aspiration AAS and/or
with 200 ml from Container No. 9, and digest GFAAS Analysis for Sb, As, Ba, Be, Cd, Cu,
and analyze the resultant volume per Sec- Cr, Co, Pb, Ni, Mn, Hg, P, Se, Ag, Tl, and Zn.
tion 8.3.4. This step produces blanks for Ana- Analyze all samples in duplicate. Perform a
lytical Fractions 2A and 2B. matrix spike on at least one front-half sam-
9.1.3 Digest and analyze a 100-ml portion ple and one back-half sample, or one com-
of Container No. 8A to produce a blank for bined sample. If recoveries of less than 75
Analytical Fraction 3A. percent or greater than 125 percent are ob-
9.1.4 Combine 100 ml from Container No. tained for the matrix spike, analyze each
10 with 33 ml from Container No. 8B to sample by the Method of Standard Additions.
produce a blank for Analytical Fraction 3B. Analyze a quality control sample to check
Filter the resultant 133 ml as described for the accuracy of the calibration standards. If
Container No. 5B in Section 8.3.5, except do the results are not within 20 percent, repeat
not dilute the 133 ml. Analyze this blank for the calibration.
Hg within 48 hr of the filtration step, and use 9.2.3 CVAAS Analysis for Hg. Analyze all
400 ml as the blank volume when calculating samples in duplicate. Analyze a quality con-
the blank mass value. Use the actual vol- trol sample to check the accuracy of the
umes of the other analytical blanks when calibration standards (if not within 15 per-
calculating their mass values. cent, repeat calibration). Perform a matrix
9.1.5 Digest the filter that was used to re- spike on one sample (if not within 25 percent,
move any brown MnO2 precipitate from the analyze all samples by the Method of Stand-
blank for Analytical Fraction 3B by the ard Additions). Additional information on
same procedure as described in Section 8.3.5 quality control can be obtained from Method
for the similar sample filter. Filter the 7470 in EPA Publication SW–846 Third Edi-
digestate and the contents of Container No. tion (November 1986) including updates I, II,
11 through Whatman 40 paper into a 500-ml IIA, IIB and III, as incorporated by reference
volumetric flask, and dilute to volume with in § 60.17(i), or in Standard Methods for Water
water. These steps produce a blank for Ana- and Wastewater Method 303F.
lytical Fraction 3C.
9.1.6 Analyze the blanks for Analytical 10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Fraction Blanks 1A and 2A per Section 11.1.1
and/or Section 11.1.2. Analyze the blanks for NOTE: Maintain a laboratory log of all cali-
Analytical Fractions 1B, 2B, 3A, 3B, and 3C brations.
per Section 11.1.3. Analysis of the blank for 10.1 Sampling Train Calibration. Cali-
Analytical Fraction 1A produces the front- brate the sampling train components accord-
half reagent blank correction values for the ing to the indicated sections of Method 5:
desired metals except for Hg; Analysis of the Probe Nozzle (Section 10.1); Pitot Tube (Sec-
blank for Analytical Fraction 1B produces tion 10.2); Metering System (Section 10.3);
the front-half reagent blank correction value Probe Heater (Section 10.4); Temperature
for Hg. Analysis of the blank for Analytical Sensors (Section 10.5); Leak-Check of the
Fraction 2A produces the back-half reagent Metering System (Section 8.4.1); and Barom-
blank correction values for all of the desired eter (Section 10.6).
594
10.2 Inductively Coupled Argon Plasma Fractions 1A and 2A can be combined propor-
Spectrometer Calibration. Prepare standards tionally prior to analysis.
as outlined in Section 7.5. Profile and cali- 11.1.1 ICAP and ICP-MS Analysis. Analyze
brate the instrument according to the manu- Analytical Fractions 1A and 2A by ICAP
facturer’s recommended procedures using using Method 6010 or Method 200.7 (40 CFR
those standards. Check the calibration once 136, Appendix C). Calibrate the ICAP, and set
per hour. If the instrument does not repro- up an analysis program as described in Meth-
duce the standard concentrations within 10 od 6010 or Method 200.7. Follow the quality
percent, perform the complete calibration control procedures described in Section 9.2.1.
procedures. Perform ICP-MS analysis by fol- Recommended wavelengths for analysis are
lowing Method 6020 in EPA Publication SW– as shown in Table 29–2. These wavelengths
846 Third Edition (November 1986) including represent the best combination of specificity
updates I, II, IIA, IIB and III, as incorporated and potential detection limit. Other wave-
by reference in § 60.17(i). lengths may be substituted if they can pro-
10.3 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer— vide the needed specificity and detection
Direct Aspiration AAS, GFAAS, and CVAAS limit, and are treated with the same correc-
analyses. Prepare the standards as outlined tive techniques for spectral interference. Ini-
in Section 7.5 and use them to calibrate the tially, analyze all samples for the target
spectrometer. Calibration procedures are metals (except Hg) plus Fe and Al. If Fe and
also outlined in the EPA methods referred to Al are present, the sample might have to be
in Table 29–2 and in Method 7470 in EPA Pub- diluted so that each of these elements is at
lication SW–846 Third Edition (November a concentration of less than 50 ppm so as to
1986) including updates I, II, IIA, IIB and III, reduce their spectral interferences on As, Cd,
as incorporated by reference in § 60.17(i), or Cr, and Pb. Perform ICP-MS analysis by fol-
in Standard Methods for Water and Wastewater lowing Method 6020 in EPA Publication SW–
Method 303F (for Hg). Run each standard 846 Third Edition (November 1986) including
curve in duplicate and use the mean values updates I, II, IIA, IIB and III, as incorporated
to calculate the calibration line. Recalibrate by reference in § 60.17(i).
the instrument approximately once every 10 NOTE: When analyzing samples in a HF ma-
to 12 samples. trix, an alumina torch should be used; since
all front-half samples will contain HF, use
11.0 Analytical Procedure an alumina torch.
11.1 Sample Analysis. For each sampling 11.1.2 AAS by Direct Aspiration and/or
train sample run, seven individual analytical GFAAS. If analysis of metals in Analytical
samples are generated; two for all desired Fractions 1A and 2A by using GFAAS or di-
metals except Hg, and five for Hg. A sche- rect aspiration AAS is needed, use Table 29–
matic identifying each sample container and 3 to determine which techniques and proce-
the prescribed analytical preparation and dures to apply for each target metal. Use
analysis scheme is shown in Figure 29–3. The Table 29–3, if necessary, to determine tech-
first two analytical samples, labeled Analyt- niques for minimization of interferences.
ical Fractions 1A and 1B, consist of the di- Calibrate the instrument according to Sec-
gested samples from the front-half of the tion 10.3 and follow the quality control pro-
train. Analytical Fraction 1A is for ICAP, cedures specified in Section 9.2.2.
ICP-MS or AAS analysis as described in Sec- 11.1.3 CVAAS Hg analysis. Analyze Ana-
tions 11.1.1 and 11.1.2, respectively. Analyt- lytical Fractions 1B, 2B, 3A, 3B, and 3C sepa-
ical Fraction 1B is for front-half Hg analysis rately for Hg using CVAAS following the
as described in Section 11.1.3. The contents method outlined in Method 7470 in EPA Pub-
of the back-half of the train are used to pre- lication SW–846 Third Edition (November
pare the third through seventh analytical 1986) including updates I, II, IIA, IIB and III,
samples. The third and fourth analytical as incorporated by reference in § 60.17(i), or
samples, labeled Analytical Fractions 2A and in Standard Methods for Water and Wastewater
2B, contain the samples from the moisture Analysis, 15th Edition, Method 303F, or, op-
removal impinger No. 1, if used, and HNO3/ tionally using NOTE NO. 2 at the end of this
H2O2 impingers Nos. 2 and 3. Analytical Frac- section. Set up the calibration curve (zero to
tion 2A is for ICAP, ICP-MS or AAS analysis 1000 ng) as described in Method 7470 or simi-
for target metals, except Hg. Analytical lar to Method 303F using 300-ml BOD bottles
Fraction 2B is for analysis for Hg. The fifth instead of Erlenmeyers. Perform the fol-
through seventh analytical samples, labeled lowing for each Hg analysis. From each
Analytical Fractions 3A, 3B, and 3C, consist original sample, select and record an aliquot
of the impinger contents and rinses from the in the size range from 1 ml to 10 ml. If no
empty impinger No. 4 and the H2SO4/KMnO4 prior knowledge of the expected amount of
Impingers Nos. 5 and 6. These analytical Hg in the sample exists, a 5 ml aliquot is

samples are for analysis for Hg as described suggested for the first dilution to 100 ml (see
in Section 11.1.3. The total back-half Hg NOTE NO. 1 at end of this section). The total
catch is determined from the sum of Analyt- amount of Hg in the aliquot shall be less
ical Fractions 2B, 3A, 3B, and 3C. Analytical than 1 μg and within the range (zero to 1000
595
ng) of the calibration curve. Place the sam- Fa=Aliquot factor, volume of Sample Frac-
ple aliquot into a separate 300-ml BOD bot- tion 2 divided by volume of Sample Frac-
tle, and add enough water to make a total tion 2A (see Section 8.3.4.)
volume of 100 ml. Next add to it sequentially Fd=Dilution factor (Fd=the inverse of the
the sample digestion solutions and perform fractional portion of the concentrated sam-
the sample preparation described in the pro- ple in the solution actually used in the in-
cedures of Method 7470 or Method 303F. (See strument to produce the reading Ca1. For
NOTE NO. 2 at the end of this section). If the example, if a 2 ml aliquot of Analytical
maximum readings are off-scale (because Hg Fraction 1A is diluted to 10 ml to place it
in the aliquot exceeded the calibration in the calibration range, Fd=5).
range; including the situation where only a Hgbh=Total mass of Hg collected in the back-
1-ml aliquot of the original sample was di- half of the sampling train, μg.
gested), then dilute the original sample (or a Hgbh2=Total mass of Hg collected in Sample
portion of it) with 0.15 percent HNO3 (1.5 ml Fraction 2, μg.
concentrated HNO3 per liter aqueous solu- Hgbh3(A,B,C)=Total mass of Hg collected sepa-
tion) so that when a 1- to 10-ml aliquot of the rately in Fraction 3A, 3B, or 3C, μg.
‘‘0.15 HNO3 percent dilution of the original Hgbhb=Blank correction value for mass of Hg
sample’’ is digested and analyzed by the pro- detected in back-half field reagent blanks,
cedures described above, it will yield an μg.
analysis within the range of the calibration Hgfh=Total mass of Hg collected in the front-
curve. half of the sampling train (Sample Frac-
tion 1), μg.
NOTE NO. 1: When Hg levels in the sample
fractions are below the in-stack detection Hgfhb=Blank correction value for mass of Hg
detected in front-half field reagent blank,
limit given in Table 29–1, select a 10 ml ali-
μg.
quot for digestion and analysis as described.
Hgt=Total mass of Hg collected in the sam-
NOTE NO. 2: Optionally, Hg can be analyzed
pling train, μg.
by using the CVAAS analytical procedures
Mbh=Total mass of each metal (except Hg)
given by some instrument manufacturer’s di-
collected in the back-half of the sampling
rections. These include calibration and qual-
train (Sample Fraction 2), μg.
ity control procedures for the Leeman Model
Mbhb=Blank correction value for mass of
PS200, the Perkin Elmer FIAS systems, and
metal detected in back-half field reagent
similar models, if available, of other instru-
blank, μg.
ment manufacturers. For digestion and anal-
Mfh=Total mass of each metal (except Hg)
yses by these instruments, perform the fol-
collected in the front half of the sampling
lowing two steps: (1), Digest the sample ali- train (Sample Fraction 1), μg.
quot through the addition of the aqueous hy-
Mfhb=Blank correction value for mass of
droxylamine hydrochloride/sodium chloride metal detected in front-half field reagent
solution the same as described in this sec- blank, μg.
tion: (The Leeman, Perkin Elmer, and similar Mt=Total mass of each metal (separately
instruments described in this note add automati- stated for each metal) collected in the
cally the necessary stannous chloride solution sampling train, μg.
during the automated analysis of Hg.); (2), Mt=Total mass of that metal collected in the
Upon completion of the digestion described sampling train, μg; (substitute Hgt for Mt
in (1), analyze the sample according to the for the Hg calculation).
instrument manufacturer’s directions. This Qbh2=Quantity of Hg, μg, TOTAL in the ALI-
approach allows multiple (including dupli- QUOT of Analytical Fraction 2B selected
cate) automated analyses of a digested sam- for digestion and analysis . NOTE: For ex-
ple aliquot. ample, if a 10 ml aliquot of Analytical
Fraction 2B is taken and digested and ana-
lyzed (according to Section 11.1.3 and its
12.1 Nomenclature. NOTES Nos. 1 and 2), then calculate and
A=Analytical detection limit, μg/ml. use the total amount of Hg in the 10 ml ali-
quot for Qbh2.
B=Liquid volume of digested sample prior to
Qbh3(A,B,C)=Quantity of Hg, μg, TOTAL, sepa-
aliquotting for analysis, ml.
rately, in the ALIQUOT of Analytical Frac-
C=Stack sample gas volume, dsm3. tion 3A, 3B, or 3C selected for digestion and
Ca1=Concentration of metal in Analytical analysis (see NOTES in Sections 12.7.1 and
Fraction 1A as read from the standard 12.7.2 describing the quantity ‘‘Q’’ and cal-
curve, μg/ml. culate similarly).
Ca2=Concentration of metal in Analytical Qfh=Quantity of Hg, μg, TOTAL in the ALI-
Fraction 2A as read from the standard QUOT of Analytical Fraction 1B selected for
curve, (μg/ml). digestion and analysis. NOTE: For example,
Cs=Concentration of a metal in the stack if a 10 ml aliquot of Analytical Fraction 1B
gas, mg/dscm. is taken and digested and analyzed (accord-
D=In-stack detection limit, μg/m3. ing to Section 11.1.3 and its NOTES Nos. 1
596
and 2), then calculate and use the total 12.3 Volume of Water Vapor and Moisture
amount of Hg in the 10 ml aliquot for Qfh. Content. Using the total volume of conden-
Va=Total volume of digested sample solution sate collected during the source sampling,
(Analytical Fraction 2A), ml (see Section calculate the volume of water vapor Vw(std)
8.3.4.1 or 8.3.4.2, as applicable). and the moisture content Bws of the stack
Vf1B=Volume of aliquot of Analytical Frac- gas. Use Equations 5–2 and 5–3 of Method 5.
tion 1B analyzed, ml. NOTE: For example, 12.4 Stack Gas Velocity. Using the data
if a 1 ml aliquot of Analytical Fraction 1B from this test and Equation 2–9 of Method 2,
was diluted to 50 ml with 0.15 percent HNO3 calculate the average stack gas velocity.
as described in Section 11.1.3 to bring it 12.5 In-Stack Detection Limits. Calculate
into the proper analytical range, and then the in-stack method detection limits shown
1 ml of that 50-ml was digested according in Table 29–4 using the conditions described
to Section 11.1.3 and analyzed, Vf1B would in Section 13.3.1 as follows:
be 0.02 ml.
Vf2B=Volume of Analytical Fraction 2B ana- B
lyzed, ml. NOTE: For example, if 1 ml of A× =D Eq. 29-1
Analytical Fraction 2B was diluted to 10 C
ml with 0.15 percent HNO3 as described in 12.6 Metals (Except Hg) in Source Sample.
Section 11.1.3 to bring it into the proper 12.6.1 Analytical Fraction 1A, Front-Half,
analytical range, and then 5 ml of that 10 Metals (except Hg). Calculate separately the
ml was analyzed, Vf2B would be 0.5 ml. amount of each metal collected in Sample
Vf3(A,B,C)=Volume, separately, of Analytical
Fraction 1 of the sampling train using the
Fraction 3A, 3B, or 3C analyzed, ml (see
following equation:
previous notes in Sections 12.7.1 and 12.7.2,
describing the quantity ‘‘V’’ and calculate
similarly).
M fh = C al Fd Vsoln,1 Eq. 29-2
Vm(std)=Volume of gas sample as measured by NOTE: If Analytical Fractions 1A and 2A
the dry gas meter, corrected to dry stand- are combined, use proportional aliquots.
ard conditions, dscm. Then make appropriate changes in Equations
Vsoln,1=Total volume of digested sample solu- 29–2 through 29–4 to reflect this approach.
tion (Analytical Fraction 1), ml.
Vsoln,1=Total volume of Analytical Fraction 1, 12.6.2 Analytical Fraction 2A, Back-Half,
ml.

Protection of Environment

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Protection of Environment

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Title 40—Protection of

CHAPTER I—Environmental Protection Agency (Continued) 60

EDITORIAL NOTE: Nomenclature changes to chapter I appear at 65 FR 47324, 47325, Aug. 2,

SUBCHAPTER C—AIR PROGRAMS (CONTINUED)

PART 60—STANDARDS OF PER- Method 2D—Measurement of gas volume flow

9 ......................................................... 3×3 30 ....................................................... 6×5

TABLE 1–2—LOCATION OF TRAVERSE POINTS IN CIRCULAR STACKS

Traverse Number of traverse points on a diameter

TABLE 1–2—LOCATION OF TRAVERSE POINTS IN CIRCULAR STACKS—Continued

Traverse Number of traverse points on a diameter

1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to

bends, expansions, or contractions in the scribed in Section 11.2.1 of Method 1. When

of Method 1, Section 11.1. Also, the method

Section Quality control measure Effect

12.5 Molecular Weight of Stack Gas.

12.7 Average Stack Gas Dry Volumetric

13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] tion Agency, Emission Measurement Branch,

16. Vollaro, R.F. Recommended Procedure

N.C. (Presented at 1st Annual Meeting,

PLANT lllllllllllllllllll DATE llllllllllllllllllll

SCHEMATIC OF STACK CROSS SECTION

Figure 2–6. Velocity Traverse Data

PITOT TUBE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER: CALIBRATED BY: lllllllllllll

‘‘A’’ SIDE CALIBRATION—Continued

‘‘B’’ SIDE CALIBRATION

[Cp, avg (side A)—Cp, avg (side B)]*

i =1 Figure 2–9. Pitot Tube Calibration Data

small ducts, either in-line or at exhaust posi-

Section Quality control measure Effect

termine the traverse point locations as spec-

12.4 Gas Flow Rate. 2.0 Summary of Method

Vms 2.1 Organic carbon concentration and vol-

auxiliary fuel is negligible. gas when performing this method.

12.4 Exhaust Gas Volume Flow Rate. Cal-

follows: Eq. 2B-2

Section Quality control measure Effect

METHOD 2D—MEASUREMENT OF GAS VOLUME 2.0 Summary of Method

responsibility of the user of this test method

Section Quality control measure Effect

10.0 Calibration and Standardization 11.0 Analytical Procedure.

17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and

Figure 2D–1. Volume Flow Rate rate of nonmethane organic compounds

1.1 Applicability. This method applies to

Section Quality control measure Effect

12.5 Use the following equation to convert Qf

13.0 Method Performance [Reserved] 4. Mandeville and Associates, Procedure

plies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essen-

sheath is distinguished from probe exten- being calibrated.

shaped probe, the pressure taps are num-

pressure transducers), fluid manometers, or mate-controlled trailer). It shall not be used

ceptable is the pressure differential reading

check that the probe shaft is maintained in 16.1.4.)

pitot tube. from the calibration pitot tube shall be read,

pitch angle calibration curve. probe’s differential pressure reading at the

12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations Ts( i ) = 273 + t s( i ) Eq. 2F- 6

3,600=Conversion factor, sec/hr.

qy(i)=Yaw angle, degrees, at traverse point i.

12.2 Traverse Point Velocity Calculations.

Air Speed Instrumentation, Four Prandtl

[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971]

APPENDIX A–2 TO PART 60—TEST methods in this appendix rely on perform-

vision of this method is optional. traverse point.

probe sheath. peated before using the probe in subsequent

pressure measurements. Static pressure tunnel calibration location (as defined in